Mazda RX-8 Series II Workshop Manual

Workshop Manual - General Information
2011 - RX-8
General Information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) CODE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
UNITS
SERVICE CAUTIONS
INSTALLATION OF RADIO SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
JACKING POSITIONS, VEHICLE LIFT (2 SUPPORTS) AND SAFETY STAND (RIGID RACK) POSITIONS
TOWING
TIEDOWN HOOK
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LOCATIONS
SAE STANDARDS
ABBREVIATIONS
PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - General Information

UNITS
Electric current
A (ampere)
Electric power
W (watt)
Electric resistance ohm

Electric voltage
V (volt)
mm (millimeter)
Length
in (inch)
kPa (kilo pascal)
Negative pressure mmHg (millimeters of mercury)
inHg (inches of mercury)
kPa (kilo pascal)
Positive pressure kgf/cm2 (kilogram force per square centimeter)
psi (pounds per square inch)
Number of
revolutions
rpm (revolutions per minute)
Nm (Newton meter)
kgfm (kilogram force meter)

Torque
kgfcm (kilogram force centimeter)

ftlbf (foot pound force)
inlbf (inch pound force)
L (liter)
US qt (U.S. quart)
Imp qt (Imperial quart)
Volume
ml (milliliter)
cc (cubic centimeter)
cu in (cubic inch)
fl oz (fluid ounce)
g (gram)
Weight
oz (ounce)
Conversion to SI Units (Systme International d'Units)

All numerical values in this manual are based on SI units. Numbers shown in conventional
units are converted from these values.
Rounding Off
Converted values are rounded off to the same number of places as the SI unit value. For
example, if the SI unit value is 17.2 and the value after conversion is 37.84, the converted
value will be rounded off to 37.8.
Upper and Lower Limits

When the data indicates upper and lower limits, the converted values are rounded down if
the SI unit value is an upper limit and rounded up if the SI unit value is a lower limit.
Therefore, converted values for the same SI unit value may differ after conversion. For
example, consider 2.7 kgf/cm2 in the following specifications:
210260 kPa {2.12.7 kgf/cm 2 , 3038 psi}
270310 kPa {2.73.2 kgf/cm 2 , 3945 psi}
The actual converted values for 2.7 kgf/cm2 are 264 kPa and 38.4 psi. In the first
specification, 2.7 is used as an upper limit, so the converted values are rounded down to
260 and 38. In the second specification, 2.7 is used as a lower limit, so the converted
values are rounded up to 270 and 39.
< Previous Next >
2010 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.
Back to Top
Next >

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) CODE
Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
JM1 FE1*2*B# 400001
JM1 FE1*4*B# 400001
JM1 FE1*M*B# 400001
JM1 FE1*P*B# 400001
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SAE STANDARDS
In accordance with new regulations, SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) standard
names and abbreviations are now used in this manual. The table below lists the names
and abbreviations that have been used in Mazda manuals up to now and their SAE
equivalents.
SAE Standard
SAE Standard
Remark
Abbreviation
AP
Name
Remark
Abbreviation
Name
Accelerator Pedal
MIL
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
APP
Accelerator Pedal Position
MAP
Manifold Absolute Pressure
ACL
Air Cleaner
A/C
Air Conditioning
A/F sensor Air Fuel Ratio Sensor

BARO
B+
MAF sensor Mass Air Flow Sensor

MFL
Multiport Fuel Injection
OBD
Onboard Diagnostic System
Barometric Pressure
OL
Open Loop
Battery Positive Voltage
OC
Oxidation Catalytic Converter
O2S
Oxygen sensor
CMP sensor Camshaft Position Sensor

CAC
Charge Air Cooler
PNP
Park/Neutral Position
CLS
Closed Loop System
PSP
Power Steering Pressure
CTP
Closed Throttle Position
PCM
Powertrain Control Module
#3
CPP
CIS
Clutch Pedal Position

Continuous Fuel Injection
System
PAIR
Pulsed Secondary Air

Injection
Pulsed injection
AIR
Secondary Air Injection
Injection with air

pump
CKP sensor Crankshaft Position

Sensor
DLC
Data Link Connector
DTM
Diagnostic Test Mode
DTC
Diagnostic Test Code(s)
DI
DLI
EI
SAPV
Secondary Air Pulse Valve
SFI
Sequential Multiport Fuel

Injection
3GR
Third Gear
TWC
Three Way Catalytic

Converter
Distributor Ignition
Distributorless Ignition
Electronic Ignition
ECT
Engine Coolant
Temperature
EM
Engine Modification
EVAP
Evaporative Emission
EGR
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
FC
#1
#2
TB
Throttle Body
TP sensor Throttle Position Sensor

TCC
Torque Converter Clutch
TCM
Transmission (Transaxle)
Control Module
Fan Control
FF
Flexible Fuel
4GR
Fourth Gear
TR
Transmission (Transaxle)
Range
GEN
Generator
TC
Turbocharger
GND
Ground
VSS
Vehicle Speed Sensor
HO2S
IAC
Heated Oxygen Sensor
Idle Air Control
IAT
Intake Air Temperature
KS
Knock Sensor
With
heater
VR
Voltage Regulator
VAF sensor Volume Air Flow Sensor
Warm Up Three Way

WU-TWC Catalytic Converter
WOT
#4
Wide Open Throttle
#1: Diagnostic trouble codes depend on the diagnostic test mode.

#2: Controlled by the PCM
#3: Device that controls engine and powertrain
#4: Directly connected to exhaust manifold
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Range of Topics
This manual contains procedures for performing all required service operations. The procedures are divided into the following five basic
operations:
Removal/Installation
Disassembly/Assembly
Replacement
Inspection
Adjustment
Simple operations which can be performed easily just by looking at the vehicle (i.e., removal/installation of parts, jacking, vehicle lifting,
cleaning of parts, and visual inspection) have been omitted.
Service Procedure
Inspection, adjustment
Inspection and adjustment procedures are divided into steps. Important points regarding the location and contents of the procedures are
explained in detail and shown in the illustrations.
Repair procedure
1. Most repair operations begin with an overview illustration. It identifies the components, shows how the parts fit together, and describes visual
part inspection. However, only removal/installation procedures that need to be performed methodically have written instructions.
2. Expendable parts, tightening torques, and symbols for oil, grease, and sealant are shown in the overview illustration. In addition, symbols
indicating parts requiring the use of special service tools or equivalent are also shown.
3. Procedure steps are numbered and the part that is the main point of that procedure is shown in the illustration with the corresponding
number. Occasionally, there are important points or additional information concerning a procedure. Refer to this information when servicing the
related part.
Symbols
There are eight symbols indicating oil, grease, fluids, sealant, and the use of SST or equivalent. These symbols show application points or
use of these materials during service.
Symbol
Meaning
Kind
Apply oil
New appropriate engine oil or gear oil
Apply brake fluid
New appropriate brake fluid
Apply automatic
New appropriate automatic
transaxle/transmission fluid transaxle/transmission fluid
Apply grease
Appropriate grease
Apply sealant
Appropriate sealant
Apply petroleum jelly
Replace part
Use SST or
equivalent
Appropriate
petroleum jelly
Oring, gasket, etc.
Appropriate tools
Advisory Messages
You will find several Warnings, Cautions, Notes, Specifications and Upper and Lower Limits in this manual.
Warning
A Warning indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.
Caution
A Caution indicates a situation in which damage to the vehicle or parts could result if the caution is ignored.
Note
A Note provides added information that will help you to complete a particular procedure.
Specification
The values indicate the allowable range when performing inspections or adjustments.
Upper and lower limits
The values indicate the upper and lower limits that must not be exceeded when performing inspections or adjustments.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Basic flow of troubleshooting
DTC troubleshooting flow (onboard diagnostic)
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are important hints for repairing malfunctions that are difficult to simulate. Perform the specific DTC
diagnostic inspection to quickly and accurately diagnose the malfunction.
The onboard diagnostic function is used during inspection. When a DTC is shown specifying the cause of a malfunction, continue the
diagnostic inspection according to the items indicated by the onboard diagnostic function.
Diagnostic index
The diagnostic index lists the symptoms of specific malfunctions. Select the symptoms related or most closely relating to the malfunction.
Quick diagnosis chart (If mentioned)
The quick diagnosis chart lists diagnosis and inspection procedures to be performed specifically relating to the cause of the malfunction.
Symptom troubleshooting
Symptom troubleshooting quickly determines the location of the malfunction according to symptom type.
Procedures for Use
Using the basic inspection (section 05)
Perform the basic inspection procedure before symptom troubleshooting.

Perform each step in the order shown.
The reference column lists the location of the detailed procedure for each basic inspection.
Although inspections and adjustments are performed according to the reference column procedures, if the cause of the malfunction is
discovered during basic inspection, continue the procedures as indicated in the action column.
Using the DTC troubleshooting flow
DTC troubleshooting flow shows diagnostic procedures, inspection methods, and proper action to take for each DTC.
Using the diagnostic index
Malfunction symptoms are listed in the diagnostic index under symptom troubleshooting.
The exact malfunction symptoms can be selected by following the index.
Using the quick diagnosis chart
The chart lists the relation between the symptom and the cause of the malfunction.
The chart is effective in quickly narrowing down the relation between symptom and cause of the malfunction. It also specifies a range of
common causes when multiple malfunction symptoms occur.
The appropriate diagnostic inspection relating to a malfunction cause as specified by the symptoms can be selected by looking down the
diagnostic inspection column of the chart.
Using the symptom troubleshooting
Symptom troubleshooting shows diagnostic procedures, inspection methods, and proper action to be taken for each trouble symptom.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SERVICE CAUTIONS
Injury/damage Prevention Precautions

Depending on the vehicle, the cooling fan may operate suddenly even when
switch is turned off. Therefore, keep hands and tools away from the cooling
cooling fan is not operating to prevent injury to personnel or damage to the
Always disconnect the negative battery cable when servicing the cooling fan
the cooling fan.
the ignition
fan even if the
cooling fan.
or parts near
Protection of the Vehicle

Always be sure to cover fenders, seats and floor areas before starting work.
Preparation of Tools and Measuring Equipment

Be sure that all necessary tools and measuring equipment are available before starting any
work.
Special Service Tools

Use special service tools or the equivalent when they are required.
Malfunction Diagnosis System

Use the Mazda Modular Diagnostic System (M-MDS) or equivalent for malfunction
diagnosis.
Negative Battery Cable Disconnection/Connection

Perform the following system initialization after disconnecting the negative battery cable.
SYSTEM
PAGE
Steering angle sensor (Vehicles with DSC)(See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
Power window system
(See POWER WINDOW INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
Required procedure following negative battery cable disconnection
SAS control module

Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min. or more to allow the back-up
power supply to deplete its stored power.
Clock and audio
The clock and audio memory settings will be erased, therefore record the clock and audio
settings prior to disconnecting, and reset them after reconnecting.
Oil Leakage Inspection

Use either of the following procedures to identify the type of oil that is leaking:
Using UV light (black light)
1. Remove any oil on the engine or transaxle/transmission.

NOTE:
Referring to the fluorescent dye instruction manual, mix the specified amount of
dye into the engine oil or ATF (or transaxle/transmission oil).
2. Pour the fluorescent dye into the engine oil or ATF (or transaxle/transmission oil).
3. Allow the engine to run for 30 min.
4. Inspect for dye leakage by irradiating with UV light (black light), and identify the type of oil
that is leaking.
5. If no dye leakage is found, allow the engine to run for another 30 min. or drive the vehicle
then reinspect.
6. Find where the oil is leaking from, then make necessary repairs.
NOTE:
To determine whether it is necessary to replace the oil after adding the

fluorescent dye, refer to the fluorescent dye instruction manual.
Not using UV light (black light)
1. Gather some of the leaking oil using an absorbent white tissue.

2. Take samples of engine oil and ATF (or transaxle/transmission oil), both from the dipstick,
and place them next to the leaked oil already on the tissue.
3. Compare the appearance and smell, and identify the type of oil that is leaking.
4. Remove any oil on the engine or transaxle/transmission.

5. Allow the engine to run for 30 min.
6. Check the area where the oil is leaking, then make necessary repairs.
Removal of Parts
While correcting a problem, also try to determine its cause. Begin work only after first
learning which parts and sub-components must be removed and disassembled for
replacement or repair. After removing the part, plug all holes and ports to prevent foreign
material from entering.
Disassembly
If the disassembly procedure is complex, requiring many parts to be disassembled, all
parts should be marked in a place that will not affect their performance or external
appearance, and identified so that reassembly can be performed easily and efficiently.
Inspection During Removal, Disassembly

When removed, each part should be carefully inspected for malfunction, deformation,
damage and other problems.
Arrangement of Parts
All disassembled parts should be carefully arranged for reassembly.
Be sure to separate or otherwise identify the parts to be replaced from those that will be
reused.
Cleaning of Parts
All parts to be reused should be carefully and thoroughly cleaned in the appropriate
method.
WARNING:
Using compressed air can cause dirt and other particles to fly out causing injury to the
eyes. Wear protective eye wear whenever using compressed air.
Reassembly
Standard values, such as torques and certain adjustments, must be strictly observed in the
reassembly of all parts.
If removed, the following parts should be replaced with new ones:

Oil seals
Gaskets
Orings
Lock washers
Cotter pins
Nylon nuts
Depending on location:
Sealant and gaskets, or both, should be applied to specified locations.

When sealant is applied, parts should be installed before sealant hardens
to prevent leakage.
Oil should be applied to the moving components of parts.
Specified oil or grease should be applied at the prescribed locations (such
as oil seals) before reassembly.
Adjustment
Use suitable gauges and testers when making adjustments.
Rubber Parts and Tubing

Prevent gasoline or oil from getting on rubber parts or tubing.
Hose Clamps
When reinstalling, position the hose clamp in the original location on the hose and squeeze
the clamp lightly with large pliers to ensure a good fit.
Torque Formulas
When using a torque wrenchSST or equivalent combination, the specified torque must be
recalculated due to the extra length that the SST or equivalent adds to the torque wrench.
Recalculate the torque by using the following formulas. Choose the formula that applies to
you.
Torque Unit
Formula
Nm
Nm [L/(L+A)]
kgfm
kgfm [L/(L+A)]
kgfcm
kgfcm [L/(L+A)]
ftlbf
ftlbf [L/(L+A)]
inlbf
inlbf [L/(L+A)]
A
L
The length of the SST past the torque wrench drive.

The length of the torque wrench.
Vise
When using a vise, put protective plates in the jaws of the vise to prevent damage to
parts.
Dynamometer
When inspecting and servicing the power train on the dynamometer or speedometer
tester, pay attention to the following:
Place a fan, preferably a vehiclespeed proportional type, in front of the
vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is in a facility with an exhaust gas ventilation
system.
Since the rear bumper might deform from the heat, cool the rear with a
fan. (Surface of the bumper must be below 70 C {158 F}.)
Keep the area around the vehicle uncluttered so that heat does not build
up.
Watch the water temperature gauge and do not overheat the engine.
Avoid added load to the engine and maintain normal driving conditions as
much as possible.
NOTE:
When only the front or rear wheels are rotated on a chassis dynamometer or equivalent,
the ABS/DSC HU/CM determines that there is a malfunction in the ABS/DSC and illuminates
the following lights:
Vehicles with ABS
ABS warning light
Brake system warning light
Vehicles with DSC
ABS warning light
DSC indicator light

If the above lights are illuminated, dismount the vehicle from the chassis dynamometer
and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Then, turn the ignition switch back to
the ON position, run the vehicle at 10 km/h or more and verify that the warning lights
go out. In this case, a DTC will be stored in the memory. Clear the DTC from the memory
by following the memory clearing procedure [ABS]/[DSC] in the on-board diagnostic
system. (See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS])(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC
STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)])
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INSTALLATION OF RADIO SYSTEM
The control module and control unit have been designed with sufficient attention to radio wave
disturbances from the outside. However, observe the following precautions when installing the radio set to
the vehicle to prevent adverse effects on the control module and control unit.
Install the radio set and its antenna as far away as possible from the control module and
control unit.
The antenna feeder and power cable generate radio waves, therefore, keep them 100
mm {3.94 in} or more from the control module, control unit, and wiring harness. If the
antenna feeder and power cable cross over the wiring harness, place them perpendicular
to the wiring harness.
Do not install a high output radio set.
Do not use the control module and control unit power source for the radio set. In addition,
do not use the cigar lighter and accessory socket power source.
Do not attach the antenna feeder or wiring harness of the radio set to the wiring harness,
fuel pipe, or brake tube of the vehicle.
Do not install any radio set-related devices in the area where the air bag module deploys
to prevent a secondary accident if the air bag were to deploy.
After installing the radio set, perform a test transmission with the engine idling to verify
that it does not affect engine control.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical Parts
Battery cable
Before disconnecting connectors or removing electrical parts, disconnect the negative

battery cable.
Wiring Harness
To remove the wiring harness from the clip in the engine room, pry up the hook of the clip
using a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Do not remove the harness protective tape. Otherwise, the wires could rub against the
body, which could result in water penetration and electrical shorting.
Connectors
Disconnecting connectors
When disconnecting connector, grasp the connectors, not the wires.
Connectors can be disconnected by pressing or pulling the lock lever as shown.
Locking connector
When locking connectors, listen for a click indicating they are securely locked.
Inspection
When a tester is used to inspect for continuity or measuring voltage, insert the tester
probe from the wiring harness side.
Inspect the terminals of waterproof connectors from the connector side since they cannot
be accessed from the wiring harness side.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the terminal, wrap a thin wire around the tester
probe before inserting into terminal.
Terminals
Inspection
Pull lightly on individual wires to verify that they are secured in the terminal.
Replacement
Use the appropriate tools to remove a terminal as shown. When installing a terminal, be
sure to insert it until it locks securely.
Insert a thin piece of metal from the terminal side of the connector and with the terminal
locking tab pressed down, pull the terminal out from the connector.
Sensors, Switches, and Relays

Handle sensors, switches, and relays carefully. Do not drop them or strike them against
other objects.
Wiring Harness
Wiring color codes
Twocolor wires are indicated by a twocolor code symbol.

The first letter indicates the base color of the wire and the second the color of the stripe.
CODE
COLOR
CODECOLOR
Black
Orange
BR
Brown
Pink
Green
Red
GY
Gray
Violet
Blue
White
LB
Light Blue
Yellow
LG Light Green
Fuse
Replacement
When replacing a fuse, be sure to replace it with one of the same capacity. If a fuse fails
again, the circuit probably has a short and the wiring should be inspected.
Be sure the negative battery terminal is disconnected before replacing a main fuse.
When replacing a pullout fuse, use the fuse puller.
Direction of View for Connector

The viewing direction of connectors is indicated with a symbol.
The figures showing the viewing direction are the same as those used in Wiring Diagrams.
The viewing directions are shown in the following three ways:
Part-side connector
The viewing direction of part-side connectors is from the terminal side.
Part names are shown only when there are multiple connector drawings.
Vehicle harness-side connector
The viewing direction of vehicle harness-side connectors is from the harness side.
Part names are shown only when there are multiple connector drawings.
Other
When it is necessary to show the terminal side of vehicle harness-side connectors, such as the following
connectors, the viewing direction is from the terminal side.
Main fuse block and the main fuse block relays
Data link connector
Check connector
Relay box
Electrical Troubleshooting Tools
Jumper wire
CAUTION:
Do not connect a jumper wire from the power source line to a body ground. This may
cause burning or other damage to wiring harnesses or electronic components.
A jumper wire is used to create a temporary circuit. Connect the jumper wire between the
terminals of a circuit to bypass a switch.
Voltmeter
The DC voltmeter is used to measure circuit voltage. A voltmeter with a range of 15 V or

more is used by connecting the positive (+) probe (red lead wire) to the point where
voltage will be measured and the negative (-) probe (black lead wire) to a body ground.
Ohmmeter
CAUTION:
Do not connect the ohmmeter to any circuit where voltage is applied. This will damage the
ohmmeter.
The ohmmeter is used to measure the resistance between two points in a circuit and to
inspect for continuity and short circuits.
Precautions Before Welding

A vehicle has various electrical parts. To protect the parts from excessive current generated when welding,
be sure to perform the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
2. Disconnect the battery cables.
3. Securely connect the welding machine ground near the welding area.
4. Cover the peripheral parts of the welding area to protect them from weld spatter.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

JACKING POSITIONS, VEHICLE LIFT (2 SUPPORTS) AND SAFETY STAND (RIGID RACK) POSITIONS
Jacking Positions
WARNING:
Improperly jacking a vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and cause serious injury. Use only the correct front
and rear jacking points and block the wheels.
Use safety stands to support the vehicle after it has been lifted.
Front
At the center of the front crossmember.
Rear
At the center of the differential.
Vehicle Lift Positions
Front and rear
WARNING:
Unstably lifting a vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the lift and cause serious injury and/or vehicle damage. Make
sure that the vehicle is on the lift horizontally by adjusting the height of support at the end of the arm of the lift.
CAUTION:
For vehicles with side step molding, be careful not to damage the side step molding by hitting it with auto-lift arms or a safety
stand.
Both sides of the vehicle, on side sills.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TOWING
Towing
Proper lifting and towing are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. Government and
local laws must be followed.
A towed vehicle usually should have its drive wheels (rear wheels) off the ground. If
excessive damage or other conditions prevent this, use wheel dollies.
CAUTION:
Do not tow the vehicle pointed forward with driving wheels on the ground. This may cause
internal damage to the transmission.
CAUTION:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage your vehicle. Use wheel-lift or
flatbed equipment.
Tiedown
CAUTION:
Do not use the front and rear tiedown eyelets for towing the vehicle. The have been
designed only for securing the vehicle to a transport vessel during shipping. Using the
eyelets for any other purpose could result in the vehicle being damaged.
1. Wrap the wheel brace with a soft cloth to prevent damage to a painted bumper, and open
the cap located on the front or rear bumper.
Front
Rear
CAUTION:
The cap cannot be completely removed. Do not use excessive force as it may
damage the cap or scratch the painted bumper surface.
2. Securely install the tiedown eyelet using the wheel brace.
Front
Rear
3. Hook the tying rope to the tiedown eyelet.

Front
Rear
CAUTION:
If the tiedown eyelet is not securely tightened, it may loosen or disengage from
the bumper when tying down the vehicle. Make sure that the tiedown eyelet is
securely tightened to the bumper.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TIEDOWN HOOK
CAUTION:
Do not use the tiedown hook for towing the vehicle. Use it only for securing the vehicle.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LOCATIONS
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Engine Identification Number
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ABBREVIATIONS
AAS
Active Adaptive Shift
ABS
Antilock Brake System
ACC
Accessories
ALC
Auto Level Control
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor
APV
Auxiliary Port Valve
AT
Automatic Transmission
ATF
Automatic Transmission Fluid
BTDC Before Top Dead Center

CAN
Controller Area Network
CCM
Comprehensive Component Monitor
CM
Control Module
CPU
Central Processing Unit
DC
Drive Cycle
DSC
Dynamic Stability Control
EBD
Electronic Brakeforce Distribution
ELR
Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS
Electric Power Steering
FFD
Freeze Frame Data
F/P
Fuel Pump
FP
Front Primary
FS
Front Secondary
GPS
Global Positioning System
HF/TELHands-Free Telephone
HI
High
HS
High Speed
HU
Hydraulic Unit
IDS
Integrated Diagnostic Software
IG
Ignition
INT
Intermittent
KOEO Key ON Engine Off

KOER Key ON Engine Running
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LF
Left Front
LH
Left Hand
LO
Low
L/R
Leading Rear
LR
Left Rear
Motor
MAX
Maximum
MS
Middle Speed
MT
Manual Transmission
OCV
Oil Control Valve
PDS
Portable Diagnostic Software
PID
Parameter Identification
RAM
Random Access Memory
RF
Right Front
RH
Right Hand
ROM
Read Only Memory
RR
Right Rear
SAS
Sophisticated Air Bag Sensor
SAE
Society of Automotive Engineers
SST
Special Service Tool
SW
Switch
TCS
Traction Control System
TFT
Transmission Fluid Temperature
TNS
Tail Number Side Lights
TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring System

VDI
Variable Dynamic Effect Intake
VFAD Variable Fresh Air Duct

1GR
First Gear
2GR
Second Gear
3GR
Third Gear
4GR
Fourth Gear
5GR
Fifth Gear
6GR
Sixth Gear
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION
PreDelivery Inspection Table
Exterior
INSPECT and ADJUST, if necessary, the following items to specification:

Glass, exterior bright metal and paint for damage
Wheel lug nuts
All weatherstrips for damage or detachment
Tire pressures
Headlight cleaner and fluid level (if equipped)
Operation of hood release and lock
Operation of trunk lid and fuel-filler lid opener
Door operation and alignment including side door and back door
Headlight aiming
INSTALL the following parts:
Flap (front)
Wheel caps or rings (if equipped)
Under hoodengine off
INSPECT and ADJUST, if necessary, the following items to specification:

Fuel, engine coolant, and hydraulic lines, fittings, connections, and components for leaks
Engine oil level
Brake and clutch fluid level
Windshield washer reservoir fluid level
Manual transmission oil level
Radiator coolant level and specific gravity
Tightness of water hose clamps
Tightness of battery terminals, electrolyte level and specific gravity
Differential oil level
Interior
INSTALL the following items:

Fuse for accessories
INSPECT the operations of the following items:
Seat controls (slide and recline) and headrests

Folding rear seat
Door locks, including childproof door locks
Seat belts and warning system
Ignition switch and steering lock
Transmission range switch
Warning buzzers
Ignition key reminder alarm
Air bag system using warning light
Cruise control system (if equipped)
Power door lock
Shiftlock system (if equipped)
Starter interlock
All lights including warning, and indicator lights
Horn, wipers, and washers
Wiper blades performance
Clean wiper blades and windshield, if necessary
Antenna
Audio system
Cigarette lighter and clock
Power windows (if equipped)
Heater, defroster, and air conditioner at various mode selections (if equipped)
INSPECT the following items:
Presence of spare fuse
Upholstery and interior finish
INSPECT and ADJUST, if necessary, the following items:
Operation and fit of windows
Pedal height and free play of clutch pedal
Parking brake
Under hoodengine running at operating temperature

Automatic transmission fluid level
Operation of idleup system for electrical load, air conditioner or power steering (if equipped)
Ignition timing
Idle speed
Operation of throttle position sensor
On hoist

Manual transmission oil level
Underside fuel, coolant and hydraulic lines, fittings, connections, and components for leaks
Tires for cuts or bruises
Steering linkage, suspension, exhaust system, and all underside hardware for looseness or damage
Road test

Brake operation
Clutch operation
Steering control
Operation of gauges
Squeaks, rattles, and unusual noises
Engine general performance
Emergency locking retractors and automatic locking retractors
Cruise control system (if equipped)
Operation of meters and gauges, squeaks, rattles, and abnormal noises
After road test
INSPECT for necessary owner information materials, tools, and spare tire in vehicle
The following items must be completed just before delivery to your customer.
Load test battery and charge if necessary (Load test result: Volts)
Adjust tire pressure to specification (Specified tire pressure is indicated on the door label.)
Clean outside of vehicle
Install fuses for accessories
Remove seat and cabin carpet protective covers
Vacuum inside of vehicle
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Scheduled Maintenance Table for U.S.A., CANADA, and Puerto Rico
Schedule 1 (Normal Driving Conditions) for USA
The vehicle is mainly operated where none of the "unique driving conditions" apply.
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first

Months
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
1000 km
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
1000 miles
7.5
15
22.5
30
37.5
45
52.5
60
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Maintenance Interval
ENGINE
Drive belts
COOLING SYSTEM
FL22 type *1
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or

10 years;
after that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5
years
Engine coolant
Others
Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4

years;
after that, every 2 years
FUEL SYSTEM
Air cleaner element
R
I
Fuel lines and hoses *2
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission *2

IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
CHASSIS and BODY

Brake lines, hoses and connections
Disc brakes
Tire (Rotation)
Flat tire repair kit *3
I
I
I
I
Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles)

Inspect annually
Steering operation and linkages
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel bearing

axial play
Manual transmission oil
Rear differential oil
Drive shaft dust boots
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5

years
All locks and hinges
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2
years
Cabin air filter
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the
recommended intervals.
Refer below for a description of items marked* in the maintenance chart.
*1: Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription "FL22" on the
radiator cap itself or the surrounding area. Use FL22 when replacing the
coolant.
*2: According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be
performed at the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to
ensure long-term reliability.
*3: Check the tire repair fluid expiration date every year when performing
the periodic maintenance. Replace the tire repair fluid bottle with new one
before the expiration date.
Schedule 2 CANADA, Puerto Rico, and (Unique Driving Conditions) for USA
Repeated short-distance driving
Driving in dusty conditions

Driving with extended use of brakes
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
Driving on rough or muddy roads
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
Driving in extremely hot conditions
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first

Months
4 8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
Maintenance Interval
1000 km
8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
1000 miles
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Puerto Rico
Engine oil
Others
Engine oil filter
Drive belts

months
R R
R R
COOLING SYSTEM
FL22 type *1
Engine coolant
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or

10 years;
after that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5
years
Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4
years;
Others
after that, every 2 years

Engine coolant level
FUEL SYSTEM
Air cleaner element
R
I
Fuel lines and hoses *2
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission *2

IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
CHASSIS and BODY

Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch fluid level
I
I
Brake fluid
I
Tire (Rotation)
Flat tire repair kit *3

Steering operation and linkages
Disc brakes
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear
I
I
R
Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles)

I
Inspect annually
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel bearing

axial play
Manual transmission oil
Rear differential oil
Drive shaft dust boots
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5

years
Exhaust system and heat shields

All locks and hinges
L L
Washer fluid level
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

years
Cabin air filter
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the
recommended intervals.
Refer below for a description of items marked* in the maintenance chart.
*1: Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription "FL22" on the
radiator cap itself or the surrounding area. Use FL22 when replacing the
coolant.
*2: According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to

perform maintenance on these items will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be
performed at the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to
ensure long-term reliability.
*3: Check the tire repair fluid expiration date every year when performing
the periodic maintenance. Replace the tire repair fluid bottle with new one
before the expiration date.
< Previous
Back to Top
Workshop Manual - Engine

2011 - RX-8
On-Board Diagnostics
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
MONITORING SYSTEM AND CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICE RELATIONSHIP CHART [13B-MSP]
OBD-II PENDING TROUBLE CODE [13B-MSP]
OBD-II FREEZE FRAME DATA [13B-MSP]
OBD-II ON-BOARD SYSTEM READINESS TEST [13B-MSP]
OBD-II DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS [13B-MSP]
OBD-II READ/CLEAR DIAGNOSTIC TEST RESULTS [13B-MSP]
OBD-II PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION (PID) ACCESS [13B-MSP]
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [13B-MSP]
AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE [13B-MSP]
KOEO/KOER SELF TEST [13B-MSP]
OBD-II DRIVE MODE [13B-MSP]
DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS [13B-MSP]
DTC TABLE [13B-MSP]
DTC B1342 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0030 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0031 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0032 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0037 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0038 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0053 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0054 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0076 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0077 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0101 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0102 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0103 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0107 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0108 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0111 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0112 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0113 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0116 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0117 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0118 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0122 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0123 [13B-MSP]
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
P0125 [13B-MSP]
P0126 [13B-MSP]
P0130 [13B-MSP]
P0131 [13B-MSP]
P0132 [13B-MSP]
P0133 [13B-MSP]
P0134 [13B-MSP]
P0137 [13B-MSP]
P0138 [13B-MSP]
P0139 [13B-MSP]
P0171 [13B-MSP]
P0172 [13B-MSP]
P0222 [13B-MSP]
P0223 [13B-MSP]
P0300 [13B-MSP]
P0301, P0302 [13B-MSP]
P0327 [13B-MSP]
P0328 [13B-MSP]
P0332 [13B-MSP]
P0333 [13B-MSP]
P0335 [13B-MSP]
P0336 [13B-MSP]
P0410, P0411 [13B-MSP]
P0420 [13B-MSP]
P0441 [13B-MSP]
P0442, P0455, P0456 [13B-MSP]
P0443 [13B-MSP]
P0446 [13B-MSP]
P0461 [13B-MSP]
P0462 [13B-MSP]
P0463 [13B-MSP]
P0480 [13B-MSP]
P0481 [13B-MSP]
P0482 [13B-MSP]
P0500 [13B-MSP]
P0505 [13B-MSP]
P0506 [13B-MSP]
P0507 [13B-MSP]
P050A [13B-MSP]
P0522 [13B-MSP]
P0523 [13B-MSP]
P0562 [13B-MSP]
P0564 [13B-MSP]
P0571 [13B-MSP]
P0601 [13B-MSP]
P0602 [13B-MSP]
P0604 [13B-MSP]
P0606 [13B-MSP]
P0610 [13B-MSP]
P0638 [13B-MSP]
P0661 [13B-MSP]
P0662 [13B-MSP]
P0703 [13B-MSP]
P0704 [13B-MSP]
P0850 [13B-MSP]
P1260 [13B-MSP]
P1680 [13B-MSP]
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
P1681
P1682
P1683
P1684
P1685
P1686
P1687
P2004
P2005
P2006
P2007
P2009
P2010
P2067
P2068
P2070
P2071
P2096
P2097
P2101
P2107
P2108
P2109
P2112
P2119
P2122
P2123
P2127
P2128
P2135
P2138
P2195
P2196
P2299
P2257
P2258
P2259
P2260
P2270
P2271
P2401
P2402
P2404
P2405
P2407
P2502
P2503
P2504
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP]
Symptom Troubleshooting
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
FOREWORD [13B-MSP]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSTIC INDEX [13B-MSP]
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [13B-MSP]
NO.1 MELTING OF MAIN OR OTHER FUSES [13B-MSP]
NO.2 MIL ILLUMINATES [13B-MSP]

NO.3 WILL NOT CRANK [13B-MSP]
NO.4 HARD TO START/LONG CRANK/ERRATIC START/ERRATIC CRANK [13B-MSP]
NO.5 ENGINE STALLS-AFTER START/AT IDLE [13B-MSP]
NO.6 CRANKS NORMALLY BUT WILL NOT START [13B-MSP]
NO.7 SLOW RETURN TO IDLE [13B-MSP]
NO.8 ENGINE RUNS ROUGH/ROLLING IDLE [13B-MSP]
NO.9 FAST IDLE/RUNS ON [13B-MSP]
NO.10 LOW IDLE/STALLS DURING DECELERATION [13B-MSP]
NO.11 ENGINE STALLS/QUITS, ENGINE RUNS ROUGH, MISSES, BUCK/JERK, HESITATION/STUMBLE,
SURGES [13B-MSP]
NO.12 LACK/LOSS OF POWER-ACCELERATION/CRUISE [13B-MSP]
NO.13 KNOCKING/PINGING/DETONATION-ACCELERATION/CRUISE [13B-MSP]
NO.14 POOR FUEL ECONOMY [13B-MSP]
NO.15 EMISSION COMPLIANCE [13B-MSP]
NO.16 HIGH OIL CONSUMPTION/LEAKAGE [13B-MSP]
NO.17 COOLING SYSTEM CONCERNS-OVERHEATING [13B-MSP]
NO.18 COOLING SYSTEM CONCERNS-RUNS COLD [13B-MSP]
NO.19 EXHAUST SMOKE [13B-MSP]
NO.20 FUEL ODOR (IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT) [13B-MSP]
NO.21 ENGINE NOISE [13B-MSP]
NO.22 VIBRATION CONCERNS (ENGINE) [13B-MSP]
NO.23 A/C DOES NOT WORK SUFFICIENTLY [13B-MSP]
NO.24 A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C COMPRESSOR RUNS CONTINUOUSLY [13B-MSP]
NO.25 A/C IS NOT CUT OFF UNDER WIDE OPEN THROTTLE CONDITIONS [13B-MSP]
NO.26 EXHAUST SULPHUR SMELL [13B-MSP]
NO.27 FUEL REFILL CONCERNS [13B-MSP]
NO.28 FUEL FILLING SHUT OFF CONCERNS [13B-MSP]
NO.29 SPARK PLUG CONDITION [13B-MSP]
INTERMITTENT CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING [13B-MSP]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Mechanical
ENGINE LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
ENGINE TUNE-UP [13B-MSP]
ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
DRIVE BELT DEFLECTION/TENSION INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
COMPRESSION INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
REAR OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP]
Lubrication
LUBRICATION SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
OIL COOLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
OIL PAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
OIL PAN UPPER BLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
METERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
OIL NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]

METERING OIL PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
Cooling System
COOLING SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [13B-MSP]
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
ENGINE COOLANT PROTECTION INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
COOLING SYSTEM CAP INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
COOLANT RESERVE TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
THERMOSTAT INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
WATER PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
COOLING FAN COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
FAN MOTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
In-Take Air System

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM VACUUM HOSE ROUTING DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
INTAKE MANIFOLD VACUUM INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
THROTTLE BODY INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
INTAKE MANIFOLD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
VARIABLE FRESH AIR DUCT (VFAD) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
VARIABLE FRESH AIR DUCT (VFAD) ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR (VDI) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR (VDI) VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR (VDI) ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) MOTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
CHECK VALVE (ONE-WAY) INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
VACUUM CHAMBER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Fuel System
FUEL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
FUEL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION [13B-MSP]
AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION [13B-MSP]
FUEL LINE PRESSURE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
FUEL TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
FUEL TANK INSPECTION [13B-MSP]

NONRETURN VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
FUEL PUMP UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP]
FUEL PUMP UNIT INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
FUEL PUMP RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
FUEL PUMP RESISTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
FUEL INJECTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
PULSATION DAMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
PULSATION DAMPER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Exhaust System
EXHAUST SYSTEM INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
EXHAUST MANIFOLD INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Emissions System
EMISSION SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
FUEL-FILLER CAP INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
AIR FILTER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
CHARCOAL CANISTER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
PURGE SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
CATCH TANK INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
THREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC) INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
FUEL SHUT-OFF/ROLLOVER VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR (EMISSION SYSTEM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
EVAPORATIVE CHAMBER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Charging System
CHARGING SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
BATTERY INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
BATTERY RECHARGING [13B-MSP]
GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
GENERATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP]
Ignition System
IGNITION SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
IGNITION COIL INSPECTION [13B-MSP]

SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
SPARK PLUG INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
HIGH-TENSION LEAD INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Starting System
STARTING SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
STARTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
STARTER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
STARTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP]
STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Cruise Control System

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Control System
CONTROL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
PCM INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
PCM CONFIGURATION [13B-MSP]
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)/INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE (BARO) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
KNOCK SENSOR (KS) INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION PLATE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
PCM TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Technical Data
ENGINE TECHNICAL DATA [13B-MSP]
Maintenance/Service Tools
ENGINE SST [13B-MSP]
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - Engine

DTC P0441 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0441 EVAP system incorrect purge flow

The PCM monitors the purge line vacuum, when the following conditions are
met. If the vacuum between the charcoal canister and the intake manifold
does not reach the specification, the PCM determines that the EVAP system
purge flow is incorrect.
MONITORING CONDITIONS
Vehicle speed: 70.1130 km/h {43.580.8 mph}
Engine speed: 1,2004,000 rpm
DETECTION
CONDITION
Throttle valve opening angle: 10.227.7 % (changes by

engine speed)
Diagnostic support note
This is an intermittent monitor (EVAP system).
The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition in
two consecutive drive cycles or in one drive cycle while the DTC for the same
malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
PENDING CODE is available if the PCM detects the above malfunction
condition during the first drive cycle.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 2/Mode 12) is available.
The DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
Blockage in EVAP system
EVAP hose damaged or loose
EVAP pipe damaged
Catch tank malfunction
POSSIBLE
Charcoal canister malfunction
CAUSE
Purge solenoid valve malfunction

Leakage in EVAP system
Evaporative emission system leak detection pump malfunction
Fuel pump unit poor seal
PCM malfunction
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA (MODE 12) AND

1 DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS HAVE
BEEN RECORDED
Have the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 12)
and DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST
RESULTS (EVAP system related) been
recorded?
VERIFY RELATED REPAIR INFORMATION
2 AVAILABILITY
Verify related Service Bulletins and/or online repair information availability.
Is any related repair information
available?
ACTION
YesGo to the next step.
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA
(Mode 12) and DIAGNOSTIC
MONITORING TEST RESULTS on the
repair order, then go to the next step.
YesPerform repair or diagnosis according
to the available repair information.
If the vehicle is not
repaired, go to the
next step.
No Go to the next step.
VERIFY RELATED PENDING CODE OR STORED DTC

Turn the ignition switch off, then to the
ON position (engine off).
Verify the related PENDING CODE or
stored DTCs.
YesGo to the DTC P0443 inspection.

(See DTC P0443 [13B-MSP].)
Is the DTC P0443 present?

4
DETERMINE IF THERE IS BLOCKAGE

Clear the DTC from the PCM memory
using the M-MDS.
(See AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE [13BMSP].)
Perform the KOER self test.
(See KOEO/KOER SELF TEST [13B-MSP].)
YesGo to Step 6.

INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS BLOCKAGE OR
5 LEAKAGE IN PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
NOTE:
Carefully handle the evaporative system
when disconnecting and connecting
hoses. Do not use any lubricant around
the system. Foreign material can cause a
system malfunction.
YesReplace the purge solenoid valve, then

go to Step 12.
No Go to Step 7.
Remove the purge solenoid valve and cool

it down in a refrigerator for 1 hour.
Install the purge solenoid valve and
perform the KOER self test using the MMDS.
6
INSPECT FOR LOCATION OF BLOCKAGE

Apply vacuum to the following parts using
a vacuum pump.
Verify that the system does not hold
vacuum at the following locations:
Hoses and pipes between
intake manifold and
charcoal canister
YesRepair or replace the malfunctioning

part according to the inspection results,
then go to Step 12.
No Replace the purge solenoid valve, then
go to Step 12.
Catch tank
Charcoal canister
Is there any blockage?
7
DETERMINE LEAKAGE EXISTENCE

Perform the Evaporative Emission (EVAP)
System Leak Inspection.
(See ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
OPERATION INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)

No Go to Step 12.
Is the DTC P0442 recorded?

INSPECT IF PURGE SOLENOID VALVE IS STUCK
8 OPEN
Inspect whether the purge solenoid valve
is stuck open.

No Replace the purge solenoid valve, then
(See PURGE SOLENOID VALVE

INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
go to Step 12.
Is the purge solenoid valve normal?

9
INSPECT FOR LOCATION OF LEAKAGE

Inspect the following for leakage using
the evaporative leak detector.
Between purge solenoid
valve and check valve
YesRepair or replace the malfunctioning

part according to the inspection results,
then go to Step 12.
Between check valve and

charcoal canister
Is there any leakage?
10
INSPECT EVAP SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP

NOTE:
Be careful to not apply a shock to the
evaporative system leak detection pump,
otherwise the results of the leak
inspection could be incorrect.

No Replace the evaporative system leak
detection pump, then go to Step 13.
Connect all disconnected connectors and

hoses.
Place a clamp on the evaporative system
leak detection pump hose between the
evaporative system leak detection pump
and the air filter.
Is the DTC P2404 recorded?
11
INSPECT FUEL PUMP UNIT INSTALLATION

Remove the fuel tank.
YesRepair or replace the fuel tank or

sealing, then go to the next step.
Visually inspect for damage, insufficient

sealing or a poorly installed pump unit.
Is there any malfunction?

PERFORM KOER SELF TEST TO DETERMINE OTHER
12 RELATED MALFUNCTION OTHER THAN BLOCKAGE YesBlockage still exists.
LOCATION
Locate blockage position and repair,
then go to the next step.
NOTE:
Carefully handle the evaporative system

when disconnecting and connecting
hoses. Do not use any lubricant around
the system. Foreign material can cause a
system malfunction.

hoses.
Is the DTC P0441 still recorded?
13
PERFORM LEAK INSPECTION

hoses.
YesLeakage still exists.

Locate leak the point and repair, then
go to the next step.
Does the test result fail (red light turns

on)?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0441
14 COMPLETED
Start the engine and let it idle.
using the M-MDS.
YesReplace the PCM, then go to the next

step.
(See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
Turn the ignition switch off.

Is the PENDING CODE for this DTC
present?
15
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE

Perform the AFTER REPAIR
PROCEDURE.
YesGo to the applicable DTC inspection.

(See DTC TABLE [13B-MSP].)
No DTC troubleshooting completed.
Are any DTCs present?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2005 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2005 APV stuck open (No.2)

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the APV position sensor No.2 when the APV is
closed. If the input voltage is more than 1.0 V, the PCM determines that the APV is
stuck open.
This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two
consecutive drive cycles or in one drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction
has been stored in the PCM.
PENDING CODE is available if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition during
the first drive cycle.
APV control malfunction
APV motor malfunction
APV position sensor No.2 connector or terminals malfunction
APV position sensor No.2 malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
PCM connector or terminals malfunction

Open circuit in wiring harness between APV position sensor No.2 terminal C and PCM
terminal 2AR
Open circuit in wiring harness between APV position sensor No.2 terminal A and PCM
terminal 2AF
Open circuit in wiring harness between APV position sensor No.2 terminal B and PCM
terminal 2N
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA (MODE 12) HAS BEEN

1 RECORDED
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 12) been
recorded?
VERIFY RELATED REPAIR INFORMATION AVAILABILITY

Verify related Service Bulletins and/or on-line
repair information availability.
Is any related repair information available?
ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode
12) on the repair order, then go to the
next step.
YesPerform repair or diagnosis according to
the available repair information.
repaired, go to the next
step.
INSPECT APV CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION

Perform the Auxiliary Port Valve (APV) Control
YesRepair or replace the malfunctioning part

according to the inspection results, then go
Inspection.
(See ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION
to Step 9.

4
INSPECT APV MOTOR

Inspect the APV motor.
(See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) MOTOR
YesReplace the APV motor, then go to Step 9.

(See INTAKE MANIFOLD
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP].)

INSPECT APV POSITION SENSOR NO.2 CONNECTOR FOR
YesRepair or replace the connector and/or
5 POOR CONNECTION
terminals, then go to Step 9.
Disconnect the APV position sensor No.2
connector.
Inspect for poor connection (such as

damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion).
6
INSPECT APV POSITION SENSOR NO.2

Inspect the APV position sensor No.2.
(See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION
SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the APV position sensor No.2, then

go to Step 9.
(See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV)
POSITION SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the PCM connector.


INSPECT APV POSITION SENSOR NO.2 CIRCUIT FOR
8 OPEN CIRCUIT
APV position sensor No.2 and PCM connectors
are disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between the following
circuits:

No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a
possible open circuit, then go to the next
step.
APV position sensor No.2

terminal C (wiring harnessside) and PCM terminal 2AR
(wiring harness-side)
terminal A (wiring harnessside) and PCM terminal 2AF
terminal B (wiring harnessside) and PCM terminal 2N
Is there continuity?
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2005 COMPLETED

Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
Clear the DTC from the PCM memory using the
M-MDS.
(See AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE [13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the PCM, then go to the next step.

(See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
Perform the KOEO or KOER self test.

Is the PENDING CODE same as DTC present?
10

Perform the AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2299 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2299
Accelerator pedal: spring back malfunction

Brake override system operates.
This is a continuous monitor (other).
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL does not illuminate.

FREEZE FRAME DATA is not available.
Snapshot data is available.
NOTE:
If the brake override system operates, the PCM detects DTC P2299.
Driver depresses accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously (during
braking operation using left foot)
Accelerator pedal is pressed in due to object such as floor mat
Accelerator pedal sticking
APP sensor signal malfunction
APP sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Related connector or terminals malfunction

Related wiring harness malfunction
Brake switch signal malfunction
Brake switch malfunction
Related connector or terminals malfunction
Related wiring harness malfunction

Brake pedal malfunction (increase in play due to joint
pin wear)
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY SNAPSHOT DATA HAS BEEN

1 RECORDED
Has the snapshot data been
recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
Verify related Service Bulletins
and/or on-line repair information
availability.
available?
3
VERIFY VEHICLE USE CONDITION

Verify the vehicle use condition.
The floor mat is
doubled over
The floor mat is
spread against
the accelerator
pedal
The accelerator
and brake
pedals are being
depressed
simultaneously
Are any of the conditions above
applicable to vehicle use
condition?
INSPECT APP SENSOR

Is the condition of the accelerator
pedal one of the following?
ACTION
No Record the snapshot data on the repair order,
YesPerform repair or diagnosis according to the
available repair information.
If the vehicle is not repaired,
Yes
There is a malfunction in a
related floor mat
Explain to the customer that
the floor mat may prevent the
accelerator pedal from
springing back after release,
then go to Step 11.
There is a malfunction in
the pedal operation
Give the customer advice on
how to depress the accelerator
and brake pedals while driving
the vehicle, then go to Step
11.

YesReplace the accelerator pedal, then go to Step
11.
(See ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Accelerator
pedal sticking
has occurred
when operated
There is
evidence of
accelerator pedal
disassembly
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
5 OF APP SENSOR
Access the following PIDs using
the M-MDS:

No Go to Step 7.
(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC

TEST [13B-MSP].)
IVS
APP1
APP2
Is the value for PID IVS Idle
when the accelerator pedal is not
depressed?
Do the values for PIDs APP1 and
APP2 change when the
accelerator pedal is continually
depressed?
INSPECT APP SENSOR RELATED WIRING
6 HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
Inspect the wiring harness
related to the APP sensor for
connector disconnection, short
circuit, and poor contact.

according to the inspection results, then go to
Step 11.
No APP sensor malfunction.
Replace the accelerator pedal,
then go to Step 11.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)

7 OF BRAKE SWITCH
the M-MDS:
TEST [13B-MSP].)
YesGo to Step 10.

BOO
Are all PIDs normal?
8
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH

Inspect the brake switch.
(See BRAKE SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
INSPECT BRAKE PEDAL PLAY AMOUNT

Inspect the brake pedal play
amount.
(See BRAKE PEDAL
INSPECTION.)
YesReplace the brake switch, then go to Step 11.

(See BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
YesInspect the wiring harness related to the brake

switch for connector disconnection, short circuit,
and poor contact.
If there is any malfunction:
Repair or
replace the
malfunctioning
part according
to the
inspection
results, then
go to Step 11.
Is the amount of brake pedal

play normal?
No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part

Step 11.
VERIFY IF A DTC RELATED TO DRIVE-BY10 WIRE CONTROL IS DETECTED
(See KOEO/KOER SELF TEST
[13B-MSP].)

Is a DTC related to the drive-bywire control present?

VERIFY DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
11 COMPLETED
Make sure to reconnect all
disconnected connectors.
Clear the DTC from the PCM
memory using the M-MDS.
(See AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
YesRepeat the inspection from Step 1.

If the malfunction recurs, replace the PCM.
Go to the next step.
While performing this step,

always operate the vehicle in a
safe and lawful manner.
When the M-MDS is used to
observe monitor system status
while driving, be sure to have
another technician with you, or
record the data in the M-MDS
using the PID/DATA MONITOR
AND RECORD capturing function
and inspect later.
Drive the vehicle under the
snapshot data condition.
[13B-MSP].)
Is the same DTC present?
12

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0332 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0332 KS No.2 circuit low input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the KS No.2 when the engine is running.
If the input voltage is less than 1.2 V, the PCM determines that the KS No.2
circuit input voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition in the first
drive cycle.
KS No.2 connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between KS No.2 terminal A and PCM terminal
2AC
Short to ground in wiring harness between KS No.2 terminal B and PCM terminal 2Y
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
KS No.2 malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between KS No.2 terminal A and PCM terminal 2AC
Open circuit in wiring harness between KS No.2 terminal B and PCM terminal 2Y
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 RECORDED
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 12)
been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY

12) on the repair order, then go to the next
step.
step.
INSPECT KS NO.2 CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION

Disconnect the KS No.2 connector.


damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).
4
INSPECT KS NO.2 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

KS No.2 connector is disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between the
following circuits:
KS No.2 terminal A (wiring
harness-side) and body
ground
KS No.2 terminal B (wiring
ground
YesIf the short to ground circuit could be

detected:
Repair or replace the
wiring harness for a
possible short to ground.
If the short to ground circuit could not be
detected:
Replace the PCM (short to
ground in the PCM internal
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 8.
INSPECT KS NO.2
Inspect the KS No.2.
(See KNOCK SENSOR (KS) INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)

YesReplace the KS No.2, then go to Step 8.

(See KNOCK SENSOR (KS)

7
INSPECT KS NO.2 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

KS No.2 and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

step.

following circuits:
harness-side) and PCM
terminal 2AC (wiring
harness-side)
terminal 2Y (wiring
harness-side)
8 COMPLETED
connectors.
Clear the DTC from the PCM memory using
the M-MDS.


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0333 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0333 KS No.2 circuit high input

If the input voltage is more than 4.0 V, the PCM determines that the KS No.2
circuit input voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

drive cycle.
KS No.2 malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between KS No.2 terminal A and PCM
terminal 2AC
Short to power supply in wiring harness between KS No.2 terminal B and PCM
terminal 2Y
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA (MODE 12)

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA
(Mode 12) been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3 CONNECTION
ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 12) on the
YesPerform repair or diagnosis according to the available
repair information.
If the vehicle is not repaired, go to
the next step.
YesRepair or replace the connector and/or terminals,
then go to Step 7.
Disconnect the KS No.2

connector.
Inspect for poor connection (such

as damaged/pulled-out pins,
corrosion).
4
INSPECT KS NO.2
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR

5 CONNECTION

(See KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
then go to Step 7.

corrosion).
INSPECT KS NO.2 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
6 POWER SUPPLY
disconnected.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position (engine off).
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for a possible

short to power supply, then go to the next step.
Measure the voltage between the

following circuits:
KS No.2 terminal
A (wiring
harness-side)
and body ground
KS No.2 terminal
B (wiring
harness-side)
and body ground
Is the voltage B+?
7 COMPLETED
(See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)


[13B-MSP].)
Perform the KOEO or KOER self
test.
[13B-MSP].)
8

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0522 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0522
Oil pressure sensor circuit low input

The voltage of oil pressure sensor input terminal is less than 0.2 V for
0.5 s or more.
DETECTION
CONDITION

FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 2/Mode 12) is not available.
Oil pressure sensor connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between oil pressure sensor terminal C
and PCM terminal 2AA
Short to ground in wiring harness between oil pressure sensor terminal B
and PCM terminal 2R
POSSIBLE CAUSE

Open circuit in wiring harness between oil pressure sensor terminal C and
PCM terminal 2AA
Open circuit in wiring harness between oil pressure sensor terminal B and
PCM terminal 2R
Oil pressure sensor malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
step.
INSPECT OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR

2 POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the oil pressure sensor connector.


INSPECT OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR
3 SHORT TO GROUND
Oil pressure sensor connector is
disconnected.
circuits:

detected:
detected:
Oil pressure sensor terminal

C (wiring harness-side) and
body ground
Replace the PCM (short

to ground in the PCM
internal circuit).

B (wiring harness-side) and
body ground
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 7.



INSPECT OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
5 CIRCUIT
Oil pressure sensor and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
circuits:
C (wiring harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2AA (wiring
harness-side)
B (wiring harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2R (wiring
harness-side)
INSPECT OIL PRESSURE SENSOR

possible open circuit, then go to Step 7.
Inspect the oil pressure sensor.

(See OIL PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION
[13B-MSP])

7 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.
YesReplace the oil pressure sensor, then go

to the next step.
(See OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
step.

8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0523 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0523
Oil pressure sensor circuit high input

The voltage of oil pressure sensor input terminal is more than 4.8 V for
0.5 s or more.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Oil pressure sensor connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between oil pressure sensor

terminal B and PCM terminal 2R
Open circuit in wiring harness between oil pressure sensor terminal A and
PCM terminal 2M
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
repaired, go to the
next step.
INSPECT OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR

2 POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the oil pressure sensor connector.


3



INSPECT OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
4 SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for
a possible short to power supply, then
go to Step 7.
disconnected.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
(engine off).
Measure the voltage between oil pressure

sensor terminal B (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
Is the voltage B+?
INSPECT OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
5 OPEN CIRCUIT
disconnected.
No Repair or replace the wiring harness for

a possible open circuit, then go to Step
7.
Inspect for continuity between oil pressure

sensor terminal A (wiring harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2M (wiring harness-side).
6
INSPECT OIL PRESSURE SENSOR

Inspect the oil pressure sensor.
(See OIL PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)

connectors.
M-MDS.
YesReplace the oil pressure sensor, then

step.
[13B-MSP].)

8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P1680 [13B-MSP]
DTC P1680 OCV circuit low input

The PCM monitors input voltage from the OCV. If the voltage of the OCV input terminal is less
than the specification for 1 s when the battery voltage is more than 10 V, the PCM determines
the OCV circuit voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

OCV connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in OCV power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and OCV
terminal B
OCV related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and OCV terminal
B
Short to ground in wiring harness between OCV terminal A and PCM terminal 2E
Open circuit in wiring harness between OCV terminal A and PCM terminal 2E
OCV malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
If the vehicle is not repaired, go
to the next step.
INSPECT OCV CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the OCV connector.

then go to Step 8.

INSPECT OCV POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
3 GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT
OCV connector is disconnected.
(engine off).
Measure the voltage between OCV terminal B
(wiring harness-side) and body ground.

No Inspect the OCV related fuse.
If the fuse is melt:
Repair or replace
the wiring
harness for a
possible short to
ground.
Is the voltage B+?
Replace the
fuse.
If the fuse is deterioration:
Replace the
fuse.
If the fuse is normal:
Repair or replace
the wiring
harness for a
possible open
circuit.
Go to Step 8.
4
INSPECT OCV CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

OCV connector is disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between OCV terminal A
YesIf the short to ground circuit could be detected:

Repair or replace the wiring
harness for a possible short to
ground.
detected:
Replace the PCM (short to ground
in the PCM internal circuit).
(See PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
Go to Step 8.


then go to Step 8.

6
INSPECT OCV CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

OCV and PCM connectors are disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between OCV terminal A
(wiring harness-side) and PCM terminal 2E (wiring
harness-side).
INSPECT OCV

No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
open circuit, then go to Step 8.
YesReplace the OCV, then go to the next step.
Inspect the OCV.

(See OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)

connectors.
Clear the DTC from the PCM memory using the MMDS.
(See OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV)


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P1681 [13B-MSP]
DTC P1681 OCV circuit high input

The PCM monitors input voltage from the OCV. If the OCV current is more than 3.5 A for 2 s
when the battery voltage is more than 10 V, the PCM determines the OCV circuit has a
malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION

OCV connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between OCV terminal A and PCM terminal 2E
OCV malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
repair information.
the next step.
INSPECT OCV CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the OCV connector.
YesRepair or replace the connector and/or terminals, then

go to Step 6.

3


go to Step 6.
INSPECT OCV CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

4 POWER SUPPLY
OCV and PCM connectors are disconnected.
(engine off).

short to power supply, then go to Step 6.
Measure the voltage between OCV terminal A

Is the voltage B+?
5
INSPECT OCV
YesReplace the OCV, then go to the next step.
Inspect the OCV.


6 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.


7


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P1682 [13B-MSP]
DTC P1682 Metering oil pump No.1 circuit low input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the metering oil pump No.1 when the battery
voltage is more than 8 V and the metering oil pump No.1 control signal turned from ON
to OFF. If the input voltage is less than the specification, the PCM determines that the
metering oil pump No.1 circuit has a malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Metering oil pump No.1 connector or terminals malfunction
Metering oil pump driver connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in metering oil pump No.1 power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and
metering oil pump No.1 terminal B
Metering oil pump No.1 related fuse malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and metering
oil pump No.1 terminal B
Short to ground or open circuit in metering oil pump driver power supply circuit
metering oil pump driver terminal C
Metering oil pump driver related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
oil pump driver terminal C
Short to power supply in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal B and
PCM terminal 1S
Short to ground in wiring harness between metering oil pump No.1 terminal A and PCM
terminal 1E
Short to ground in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal A and PCM
terminal 1E
Metering oil pump No.1 malfunction
Metering oil pump driver malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between metering oil pump No.1 terminal A and PCM
terminal 1E
Open circuit in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal A and PCM
terminal 1E
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Verify related Service Bulletins and/or on-line repair
information availability.
ACTION
step.
INSPECT METERING OIL PUMP NO.1 CONNECTOR FOR POOR

2 CONNECTION
Disconnect the metering oil pump No.1 connector.

INSPECT METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER CONNECTOR FOR
3 POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the metering oil pump driver connector.


INSPECT METERING OIL PUMP NO.1 AND METERING OIL
4 PUMP DRIVER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT
Metering oil pump No.1 and metering oil pump driver
connectors are disconnected.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (engine
off).
Measure the voltage between the following circuits:
Metering oil pump No.1 terminal B
(wiring harness-side) and body
ground
Metering oil pump driver terminal C
ground
Is the voltage B+?

No Inspect the metering oil pump No.1 and
metering oil pump driver related fuse.
Repair
or
replace
the
wiring
harness
for a
possible
short to
ground.
Replace
the
fuse.
If the fuse is
deterioration:
Replace
the
fuse.
Repair
or
replace
the
wiring
harness
for a
possible
open
circuit.
Go to Step 11.
5



INSPECT METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
6 TO POWER SUPPLY
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for a
possible short to power supply, then go
to Step 11.
Metering oil pump No.1, metering oil pump driver and
PCM connectors are disconnected.
off).
Measure the voltage between metering oil pump

driver terminal B (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
Is there any voltage?
7 PUMP DRIVER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

possible short to ground following:
Between metering oil

pump No.1 terminal A
and PCM terminal 1E
Inspect the continuity between metering oil pump

driver terminal A (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.

pump driver terminal A
and PCM terminal 1E
Go to Step 11.
INSPECT METERING OIL PUMP NO.1
YesReplace the metering oil pump No.1, then
Inspect the metering oil pump No.1.
go to Step 11.
(See METERING OIL PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
(See METERING OIL PUMP


9
INSPECT METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER

Inspect the metering oil pump driver.
(See METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)

10 PUMP DRIVER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
YesReplace the metering oil pump driver,

then go to Step 11.
(See METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER
step.
Inspect for continuity between the following circuits:

Metering oil pump No.1 terminal A
(wiring harness-side) and PCM
terminal 1E (wiring harness-side)
Metering oil pump driver terminal A
terminal 1E (wiring harness-side)
11

Make sure to reconnect all disconnected connectors.

step.
[13B-MSP].)

12

< Previous Next >

Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P1683 [13B-MSP]
DTC P1683 Metering oil pump No.1 circuit high input

to OFF. If the input voltage is more than the specification, the PCM determines that the
DETECTION
CONDITION

Short to ground in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal B and PCM
terminal 1S
Short to power supply in wiring harness between metering oil pump No.1 terminal A and
PCM terminal 1E
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal A and
PCM terminal 1E
Open circuit in wiring harness between metering oil pump No.1 terminal A and metering oil
Open circuit in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal B and PCM
terminal 1S
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
repaired, go to the
next step.

2 CONNECTION

Inspect for poor connection (such as damaged/pulledout pins, corrosion).

3 POOR CONNECTION


4



5 TO GROUND

a possible short to ground, then go to
Step 10.
Inspect for continuity between metering oil pump

driver terminal B (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
6 PUMP DRIVER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
SUPPLY
off).
Measure the voltage between metering oil pump driver
terminal A (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
a possible short to power supply

following:
and PCM terminal 1E
and PCM terminal 1E
Go to Step 10.

YesReplace the metering oil pump No.1,

then go to Step 10.

(See METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

9 PUMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

then go to Step 10.
a possible open circuit, then go to the
next step.
Inspect the continuity between the following circuits:

(wiring harness-side) and metering oil
pump driver terminal A (wiring
harness-side)
Metering oil pump driver terminal B
terminal 1S (wiring harness-side)
10

Clear the DTC from the PCM memory using the M-MDS.

step.
[13B-MSP].)

11


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P1684 [13B-MSP]
DTC P1684 Metering oil pump oil pressure sensoroil pressure is low
It is that the oil pressure at the metering oil pump system is less than 40
kPa {0.41 kgf/cm2 , 5.8 psi} continues for 10 s, after specified period
passes after the engine starts.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Low engine oil level
Engine oil leakage (oil hose and/or drain hose looseness)
Oil pressure sensor malfunction (abnormal characteristic)
Oil pump malfunction (oil pressure regulator stuck open)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Engine oil leakage between OCV and metering oil pump drain line (quick
connector poor connection or comes off)
Looseness of oil pressure sensor
Looseness of OCV
OCV malfunction (stuck close)
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

YesPerform repair or diagnosis

according to the available repair
information.
If the vehicle is
not repaired, go
to the next step.

Turn the ignition switch off, then to the ON
Verify the related PENDING CODE or stored
DTCs.
Are other DTCs present?
VERIFY THAT METERING OIL PUMP SYSTEM RELATED

3 DTC
DTCs.
Is the DTC P0522, P0523, P1680, P1681,
P1682, P1683, P1686 or P1687 present?
YesGo to the appropriate DTC

inspection.

inspection.
VERIFY ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Verify that the engine oil level.
(See ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
Is the engine oil level normal?
VERIFY THAT ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE FROM ENGINE

5 COMPONENT

No Refill the engine oil to specified
level, then go to the next step.
(See ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT
[13B-MSP].)
YesRepair or replace the
malfunctioning part according to
Verify that leakage the engine oil from

following:
Oil filter component
Oil pan
the inspection results, then go to

Step 12.
Housing
Oil cooler hose joint
Drain plug (looseness)
Does the engine oil leakage detected?
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN OIL PRESSURE
YesReplace the oil pressure sensor,
6 SENSOR ABNORMAL CHARACTER OR ELSEWHERE
then go to Step 12.
Access the MOP_P_ACT PID using the M-MDS
while the ignition switch is ON position (engine
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13Boff).
MSP].)
(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [13BMSP].)
Is the MOP_P_ACT PID value less than 0
kPa?
7
INSPECT OIL PRESSURE

Perform the OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION.
(See OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Is the oil pressure within the specification?
VERIFY THAT METERING OIL PUMP SYSTEM RELATED

8 PART
Verify that the joint point condition for the
metering oil pump system (between engine and
metering oil pump system drain through the
metering oil pump).
Are there poor connection, loose and/or the
engine oil leakage detected?
9
VERIFY OIL PRESSURE SENSOR INSTALLATION

Verify that the installation oil pressure sensor.
Is the oil pressure sensor installed properly?

No Inspect the oil pump.
If the oil pump is
normal, replace
the oil pressure
regulator, then
go to Step 12.
Step 12.

No Install the oil pressure sensor
properly, then go to Step 12.

10
VERIFY OCV INSTALLATION

Verify that the OCV installation.
Is the OCV installed properly?

No Install the OCV properly, then go
to Step 12.
11
INSPECT OCV
Inspect the OCV.
(See OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the OCV, then go to the

next step.
12

connectors.
M-MDS.
Start the engine and warm it up completely.
YesReplace the PCM, then go to the

next step.
(See PCM

13

< Previous Next >
YesGo to the applicable DTC

inspection.
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P1685 [13B-MSP]
DTC P1685 Metering oil pump oil pressure sensoroil pressure is high
It is that the oil pressure at the metering oil pump system is more than
180 kPa {1.84 kgf/cm2 , 26.1 psi} continues for 10 s, after specified
period passes after the engine starts.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Oil pressure sensor malfunction (abnormal characteristic)
Oil pump malfunction (oil pressure regulator stuck close)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Metering oil pump drain passage clogged

OCV malfunction (stuck open)
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 AVAILABILITY
Verify related Service Bulletins and/or
on-line repair information availability.
available?
ACTION
step.

VERIFY RELATED PENDING CODE OR STORED
2 DTC
Turn the ignition switch off, then to
the ON position (engine off).
stored DTCs.
YesGo to the appropriate DTC inspection.


VERIFY THAT METERING OIL PUMP SYSTEM
3 RELATED DTC
stored DTCs.
Is the DTC P0522, P0523, P1680,
P1681, P1682, P1683, P1686 or P1687
present?

VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN OIL

4 PRESSURE SENSOR ABNORMAL CHARACTER OR YesReplace the oil pressure sensor, then go
to Step 8.
ELSEWHERE
Access the MOP_P_ACT PID using the
M-MDS while the ignition switch is ON
(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST
[13B-MSP].)

Is the MOP_P_ACT PID value more

than 0 kPa?
5

Perform the OIL PRESSURE
INSPECTION.
(See OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
Is the oil pressure within the

No Replace the oil pressure regulator, then go
to Step 8.
specification?
VERIFY THAT METERING OIL PUMP DRAIN
6 PASSAGE
Verify that the metering oil pump drain
passage for clogged.
Is there a clog in the oil drain
passage?
7
INSPECT OCV
Inspect the OCV.

8 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.
[13B-MSP].)

according to the inspection results, then
go to Step 8.
YesReplace the OCV, then go to the next

step.
step.
Start the engine and warm it up

completely.
(See KOEO/KOER SELF TEST [13BMSP].)
9

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P050A [13B-MSP]
DTC P050A Cold start IAC system performance

The PCM monitors actual idle speed while fast idle up correction operating. If
the idle speed is out of specified range, the PCM determines that the idle air
control has performance problem.
This is a continuous monitor (CSERS).
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunctioning condition in two
consecutive drive cycles or in one drive cycle while the DTC for the same
conditions during the first drive cycle.
VSS malfunction
Air suction in intake-air system
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Electronic throttle control system malfunction

Throttle valve stuck or blockage
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE

1 FRAME DATA (MODE 2)
Is the DTC P050A on FREEZE
ACTION
FRAME DATA (Mode 2)?
No Go to the troubleshooting procedure for DTC on

FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 2).

2 AND DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST
RESULTS HAVE BEEN RECORDED
Have the FREEZE FRAME DATA
MONITORING TEST RESULTS
(CSERS related) been recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
4 OF VSS
Start the engine.
Access the VSS PID using the MMDS.

No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 12)
and DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS
on the repair order, then go to the next step.

Step 8.

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Inspect the VSS PID.
Is the PID normal?
(See PCM INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
CHECK AIR SUCTION IN INTAKE-AIR
5 SYSTEM
Start the engine.

Step 8.
Check air suction between MAF

sensor and intake manifold.
Is there any air suction in the

intake-air system?
VERIFY ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
6 SYSTEM OPERATION
Perform the Drive-by-wire Control
System Inspection.


OPERATION INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

Step 8.
Does the electronic throttle

control system operate properly?
7
VERIFY THROTTLE VALVE

Remove the throttle valve with
connector connected.
Access the ETC_DSD PID using
the M-MDS.
TEST [13B-MSP].)

No Clean the throttle valve and retest.
If the problem does not resolve:
Replace the throttle body, then
(See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
[13B-MSP].)
Move the throttle valve using the

ETC_DSD PID simulation function.
Dose the throttle valve move
smoothly?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P050A
8 COMPLETED


[13B-MSP].)
Cool down the engine.
normal operating temperature.
Retrieve the DTC using the MMDS.
Is the PENDING CODE for this
DTC present?
9

PROCEDURE.


[13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
Next >

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MONITORING SYSTEM AND CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICE RELATIONSHIP CHART
[13B-MSP]
: Applicable
Component
Input
Battery
Ignition switch
A/C switch, refrigerant pressure switch (high, low pressure)
TP sensor
ECT sensor
IAT sensor
MAF sensor
A/F sensor
HO2S
BARO sensor
Eccentric shaft position sensor
Fuel gauge sender unit
ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
Output
Fuel injector
A/F sensor heater
HO2S heater
Purge solenoid valve
AIR solenoid valve
EVAP system leak detection pump

AIR pump relay
Cooling fan relay (No.1, No.2, No.3, No.4 and No.5)

MIL
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OBD-II PENDING TROUBLE CODE [13B-MSP]
These appear when a problem is detected in a monitored system. The code for a failed
system is stored in the PCM memory in the first drive cycle. This code is called the pending
code. If the problem is not found in a second drive cycle, the PCM judges that the system
returned to normal or the problem was mistakenly detected, and deletes the pending code.
If the problem is found in a second drive cycle too, the PCM judges that the system has
failed, and the DTC is stored.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OBD-II FREEZE FRAME DATA [13B-MSP]
This is the technical data which indicates the engine condition at the time of the first
malfunction. This data will remain in the memory even if another emission-related DTC is
stored, with the exception of Fuel system or Misfire DTCs. Once freeze frame data for Fuel
system or Misfire DTC is stored, it will overwrite any previous data and the freeze frame
will not be overwritten again.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OBD-II ON-BOARD SYSTEM READINESS TEST [13B-MSP]
This shows the OBD-II systems operating status. If any monitor function is incomplete, MMDS will identify which monitor function has not been completed. The Fuel system, Misfire
and CCM are continuous monitoring-type functions. The A/F sensor, HO2S, Thermostat,
AIR system, Catalyst and EVAP system will be monitored under drive cycles. The OBD-II
diagnostic system is initialized by performing the DTC cancellation procedure or
disconnecting the negative battery cable.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OBD-II DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS [13B-MSP]
The results from the technical data of the intermittent monitor system are used to
determine whether the system is normal or not. They also display the system thresholds
and diagnostic results. The intermittent monitor system monitors the A/F sensor, HO2S,
Thermostat, AIR system, Catalyst and EVAP system.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OBD-II READ/CLEAR DIAGNOSTIC TEST RESULTS [13B-MSP]
This retrieves all stored DTCs in the PCM and clears the on-board readiness test results,
freeze frame data, DTC, diagnostic monitoring test results and pending trouble code.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OBD-II PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION (PID) ACCESS [13B-MSP]
The PID mode allows access to certain data values, analog and digital inputs and outputs,
calculated values and system status information. Since the PID values for output devices
are the PCM internal data values, inspect each device to identify which output devices are
malfunctioning.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [13B-MSP]
DTC Reading Procedure

1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC2.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initialization screen of the MMDS.
When using the IDS (laptop PC)
Select Self Test.
Select Modules.
Select PCM.
When using the PDS (Pocket PC)
Select Module Tests.
Select PCM.
Select Self Test.
3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.
If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the
corresponding DTC inspection.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the PCM, while referring to AFTER
REPAIR PROCEDURE.
Pending Trouble Code Access Procedure

Select Self Test.
Select Modules.
Select PCM.
Select PCM.
Select Self Test.
3. Retrieve the pending trouble codes according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.
Freeze Frame PID Data Access Procedure

Select Self Test.
Select Modules.
Select PCM.
Select PCM.
Select Self Test.
3. Then, select the Retrieve CMDTCs and perform procedures according to directions on the
M-MDS screen.
4. Retrieve the freeze frame PID data according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.
NOTE:
Freeze frame data appears at the top of the help screen when the displayed
DTC is selected.
The freeze frame data consists of data for vehicle and engine control system
operation conditions when malfunctions in the engine control system are
detected and stored in the PCM.
There are modes 2 and 12 in the freeze frame data.
Freeze frame data (mode 2)
Freeze frame data is stored at the instant the malfunction indicator lamp
illuminates, and only a part of the DTC data is stored.
For the freeze frame data, if there are several malfunctions in the engine
control system, the data for the malfunction which occurred initially is stored.
Thereafter, if a misfire or fuel injection control malfunction occurs, data from

the misfire or fuel injection control malfunction is written over the initially
stored data. However, if the initially stored freeze frame data is a misfire or fuel
injection control malfunction, it is not overwritten.
The data for DTCs currently detected is stored.
The DTC recording timing differs depending on the number of DTC drive cycles.
For a DTC with a drive cycle number 1, only the malfunction
determination data is recorded.
For a DTC with a drive cycle number 2, both the malfunction
determination and undetermined data is recorded.
Freeze frame data table (mode2, mode12) table
NOTE:
Refer to PID monitor table for confirm the engine control system operation status while the
PCM does not store the DTC. (See PCM INSPECTION [13B-MSP])
Freeze frame data items are not displayed, according to detected DTC.
Freeze frame
data item
Unit
FUELSYS1
Open Loop/Closed Loop/OLDrive/OL-Fault/CL-Fault
LOAD
Engine load
ECT
Engine coolant temperature
SFT1
Short term fuel trim
SHRTFT1
LFT1
Long term fuel trim
LONGFT1
RPM
RPM
Engine speed
RPM
VS
KPH
Vehicle speed
VSS
Description
Fuel system status
Corresponding PID data

monitor item
FUELSYS
ECT
SPARKADV
IAT
MAF
g/sec
TP
Ignition timing
SPARK-L
Intake air temperature
IAT
Mass airflow
MAF
Throttle valve position No.1
TP1
SAIR_COM
UPS/DNS/Off
Secondary air control status
O2S12
RUNTM
hh:mm:ss
EVAPPCT

controlled value
FLI
Remaining fuel amount
FLI
WARMUPS
Number of warm-up cycles

after DTC cleared
CLRDIST
Km
Mileage after DTC cleared
BARO
kPa
Barometric pressure
CATTEMP11
Estimated catalytic converter

temperature
VPWR
Module supply voltage
VPWR
ALV
Engine load
LOAD
TP_REL
Relative throttle position
TP REL
AAT
Ambient air temperature
TP_B
Throttle valve position No.2
HO2S voltage
Time from engine start
Accelerator pedal position
O2S12
EVAPCP
BARO
CATT11_DSD
TP2
APP_D
APP_E
Accelerator pedal position

No.2
TAC_PCT
Target throttle valve position
No.1
APP1
APP2
ETC_DSD
On-Board System Readiness Tests Access Procedure

Select Powertrain.
Select OBD Test Modes.
Select Mode 1 Powertrain Data.
Select PCM.
Select OBDII Modes.
Select Mode 1 Powertrain Data.
Select PCM.
3. Then, select the ***SUP and ***EVAL PIDs in the PID selection screen.
4. Monitor those PIDs and check it system monitor is completed.
NOTE:
If the on-board system readiness tests are not completed the PCM stores DTC P1000.
PID/DATA Monitor and Record Procedure

NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output
signals in the module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within
the specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts
corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does
not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is
necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
Select DataLogger.
Select Modules.
Select PCM.
Select PCM.
Select DataLogger.
3. Select the applicable PID from the PID table.
4. Verify the PID data according to the directions on the screen.
Diagnostic Monitoring Test Results Access Procedure

Select Powertrain.
Select OBD Test Modes.
Select Mode 6 On-Board Test Results.
Select OBDII Modes.
Select Mode 6 On-Board Test Results.
3. Verify the diagnostic monitoring test result according to the directions on the screen.
Active Command Modes Procedure

Select DataLogger.
Select Modules.
Select PCM.
Select PCM.
Select DataLogger.
3. Select the simulation items from the PID table.
4. Perform the simulation function, inspect the operations for each parts.
If the operation of output parts cannot be verified after the active command
mode inspection is performed, this could indicate the possibility of an open or
short circuit, sticking, or operation malfunction in the output parts.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE [13B-MSP]
Select Self Test.
Select Modules.
Select PCM.
Select Retrieve CMDTCs.
Select PCM.
Select Self Test.
Select Retrieve CMDTCs.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear the DTC.
5. Verify that no DTCs are displayed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KOEO/KOER SELF TEST [13B-MSP]
KOEO self test

Select Self Test.
Select Modules.
Select PCM.
Select PCM.
Select Self Test.
3. Then, select the KOEO On Demand Self Test and perform procedures according to
directions on the M-MDS screen.

REPAIR PROCEDURE.
KOER self test

NOTE:
Warm up until the engine coolant temperature (ECT PID) is 80 C {176 F} or more
before performing KOER self test.
2. Idle the engine.

Select Self Test.
Select Modules.
Select PCM.
Select PCM.
Select Self Test.
4. Then, select the KOER On Demand Self Test and perform procedures according to

REPAIR PROCEDURE.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OBD-II DRIVE MODE [13B-MSP]
Using the OBD-II drive mode, the monitoring item requested by OBD-II regulations can be easily diagnosed.
Performing the Drive Mode inspects the OBD-II system for proper operation and must be performed to ensure that no
additional DTCs are present.
The OBD-II drive mode is divided into the specific drive mode and single drive mode.
For the specific drive mode, specified drive modes have been set for each individual monitoring item requested by OBD-II
regulations, and they can be diagnosed individually. For the single drive mode, the entire monitoring item requested by
OBD-II regulations can be diagnosed.
The following modes are in the specific drive mode. The applicable system is diagnosed by driving in the following drive
modes.
Mode 3 (A/F sensor heater, HO2S heater, A/F sensor, HO2S, and TWC Repair Verification Drive Mode)
Mode 5 (AIR System Repair Verification Drive Mode)
Mode 6 (EVAP System Repair Verification Drive Mode)
The following systems are diagnosed with the single drive mode.
A/F sensor heater, HO2S heater
A/F sensor, HO2S
TWC
AIR System
EVAP System
CAUTION:
While performing the Drive Mode, always operate the vehicle in a safe and lawful manner.
When the M-MDS is used to observe monitor system status while driving, be sure to have another technician with you, or
record the data in the M-MDS using the PID/DATA MONITOR AND RECORD function and inspect later.
NOTE:
Vehicle speed and engine speed detected by the PCM may differ from that indicated by the speedometer and tachometer.
Use the M-MDS to monitor vehicle speed and engine speed.
If the OBD-II system inspection is not completed during the Drive Mode, the following causes are considered:
The OBD-II system detected a malfunction.
The Drive Mode procedure was not completed correctly.
Disconnecting the battery will reset the memory. Do not disconnect the battery during and after the Drive Mode.
The M-MDS can be used at anytime through the course of the Drive Mode to monitor the completion status. Monitoring can
be done by viewing the ON BOARD SYSTEM READINESS menu.
The RFC diagnostic status can be confirmed with the ignition switch operation. During KOEO, the MIL illuminates for a faillight inspection for approx. 17 s. The RFC diagnostic status is confirmed after the fail-light inspection.
If all of the RFC diagnostic is completed even one time, the MIL will continue to illuminate.
If all of the RFC diagnostic is not completed, the MIL flashes for approx. 7 s, and then it illuminates until
the engine is started.
Mode 3 (A/F sensor heater, HO2S heater, A/F sensor, HO2S, and TWC Repair Verification Drive Mode)
1. Verify that all accessory loads (A/C, headlights, blower fan, rear window defroster) are off.
2. Drive the vehicle as shown in the graph. The driving condition before driving at constant speed is not specified.
3. Stop the vehicle and access the ON BOARD SYSTEM READINESS to inspect the Drive Mode completion status.
If completed, RFC changes from No to Yes.
If not completed, turn the ignition switch off, then go back to Step 2.
4. Access the DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS to inspect the monitor results.
If detect values are not within specification, repair has not been completed.
5. Verify that no DTCs are available.
Mode 5 (AIR System Repair Verification Drive Mode)

Mode 6 (EVAP System Repair Verification Drive Mode)

NOTE:
If the Mode 6 cannot be performed (you cannot drive the vehicle under the Mode 6 condition), perform the Evaporative
System Test as an alternative. (See ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
NOTE:
If the Mode 6 cannot be performed (you cannot drive the vehicle under the Mode 6 condition), perform the Evaporative
System Test as an alternative. (See ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Single Drive Mode

2. Clear the DTC and from the PCM memory using the M-MDS.
If completed, all of RFC changes from No to Yes.
If not completed, turn the ignition switch off, then for the monitoring item that was not in the detection
condition, perform the applicable specific drive mode.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS [13B-MSP]
The purpose of this test mode is to confirm the result of OBD-II monitor diagnostic test
results. The result values stored when a particular monitor is completed are displayed. If
the monitor is not completed, the initial value is displayed.
OBD
Test
monitor ID ID
Description
Related
system
Scaling Unit
ID
01
80 Response lean to rich
20
Ratio
01
81 Response rich to lean
20
Ratio
A/F sensor
01
82 Response lean to rich delayed
10
Time
01
83 Response rich to lean delayed
10
Time
02
03 Low sensor voltage for switch time calculation
0A
Voltage
02
04 High sensor voltage for switch time calculation
0A
Voltage
HO2S
02
05 Rich to lean sensor switching time
10
Time
02
80 Response timeout
10
Time
21
80 Rear to front switching ratio
20
Ratio
3A
80 Large leak check
0D
Current
3B
80 Small leak check
0D
Current
05
Raw
value
3C* 1
80
Very small leak check
Catalyst
EVAP
system
3D
80 Purge flow monitor
41
80
42
80
71
80 Secondary air functional check
0D
Current
Oxygen sensor heater monitor bank 1 sensor 1
A/F sensor
heater
13
Mohm
Oxygen sensor heater monitor bank 1 sensor 2
HO2S
heater
14
Ohm
10
Time
86
Raw
value
Secondary air flow rate check
AIR system
71
81
A2
Exponentially weighted moving average misfire counts for last

0B 10 driving cycles (front rotor)
24
Counts
A2
0C Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles (front rotor)
24
Counts
Misfire
*1
A3
Exponentially weighted moving average misfire counts for last

0B 10 driving cycles (rear rotor)
24
Counts
A3
0C Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles (rear rotor)
24
Counts
California emission regulation applicable model
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC TABLE [13B-MSP]
: Applicable: Not applicable
DTC No.
Condition
B1342 PCM malfunction
P0030 A/F sensor heater control

circuit problem

circuit low input

circuit high input
P0037 HO2S heater control circuit low

input
P0038 HO2S heater control circuit

high input
P0053 A/F sensor heater performance

fail
MIL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Self
Generator
Monitor
test Memory
warning DC
*1
function
item
light
type*2
Page
OFF
C, O
(See DTC B1342

[13B-MSP].)
OFF
A/F sensor
C, O,
2 heater,
R
HO2S
heater
(See DTC P0030

[13B-MSP].)
OFF
A/F sensor
C, O,
2 heater,
R
HO2S
heater
(See DTC P0031

[13B-MSP].)
OFF
A/F sensor
C, O,
2 heater,
R
HO2S
heater
(See DTC P0032

[13B-MSP].)
OFF
A/F sensor
C, O,
2 heater,
R
HO2S
heater
(See DTC P0037

[13B-MSP].)
OFF
A/F sensor
C, O,
2 heater,
R
HO2S
heater
(See DTC P0038

[13B-MSP].)
OFF
A/F sensor
2 heater,
C, R
HO2S
(See DTC P0053

[13B-MSP].)
heater
ON
OFF
A/F sensor
C, R
2 heater,
HO2S
heater
VDI solenoid valve control

P0076*6 circuit low input
OFF
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0076

[13B-MSP].)
VDI solenoid valve control

P0077*6 circuit high input
OFF
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0077

[13B-MSP].)
P0101 MAF sensor circuit

range/performance problem
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0101

[13B-MSP].)
P0102 MAF sensor circuit low input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0102

[13B-MSP].)
P0103 MAF sensor circuit high input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0103

[13B-MSP].)
P0107 BARO sensor circuit low input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0107

[13B-MSP].)
P0108 BARO sensor circuit high input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0108

[13B-MSP].)
P0111 IAT sensor circuit

ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0111

[13B-MSP].)
P0112 IAT sensor circuit low input
ON
ON
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0112

[13B-MSP].)
P0113 IAT sensor circuit high input
ON
ON
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0113

[13B-MSP].)
ECT sensor circuit

P0116 range/performance problem
ON
OFF
Engine
cooling
system
(See DTC P0116

[13B-MSP].)
P0117 ECT sensor circuit low input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0117

[13B-MSP].)
P0054 HO2S heater performance fail
(See DTC P0054

[13B-MSP].)
P0118 ECT sensor circuit high input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0118

[13B-MSP].)
P0122 TP sensor No.1 circuit low

input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0122

[13B-MSP].)
P0123 TP sensor No.1 circuit high

input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0123

[13B-MSP].)
Engine
cooling
system
(See DTC P0125

[13B-MSP].)
(See DTC P0126

[13B-MSP].)
Insufficient coolant
P0125 temperature for closed loop
fuel control
ON
OFF
Insufficient coolant
P0126 temperature for stable
operation
ON
OFF
2 Thermostat
P0130 A/F sensor circuit problem
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor, C, O,
HO2S
R
(See DTC P0130

[13B-MSP].)
P0131 A/F sensor circuit low input
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor, C, O,
HO2S
R
(See DTC P0131

[13B-MSP].)
P0132 A/F sensor circuit high input
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor, C, O,
HO2S
R
(See DTC P0132

[13B-MSP].)
P0133 A/F sensor circuit slow

response
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor,
HO2S
(See DTC P0133

[13B-MSP].)
P0134 A/F sensor no activity detected
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor, C, R
HO2S
(See DTC P0134

[13B-MSP].)
P0137 HO2S circuit low input
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor,
HO2S
(See DTC P0137

[13B-MSP].)
P0138 HO2S circuit high input
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor, C, R
HO2S
(See DTC P0138

[13B-MSP].)
P0139 HO2S circuit slow response
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor, C, R
HO2S
(See DTC P0139

[13B-MSP].)
P0171 System too lean
ON
OFF
(See DTC P0171

[13B-MSP].)
Fuel
system
C, R
P0172 System too rich
ON
OFF
Fuel
system
C, R
(See DTC P0172

[13B-MSP].)
P0222 TP sensor No.2 circuit low

input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0222

[13B-MSP].)
P0223 TP sensor No.2 circuit high

input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0223

[13B-MSP].)
Flash/ON
OFF
1
or
2
Misfire
(See DTC P0300

[13B-MSP].)
OFF
1
or
2
Misfire
P0300 Random misfire detected
P0301 Front rotor misfire detected
Flash/ON
(See DTC P0301,

P0302 [13B-MSP].)
Flash/ON
OFF
1
or
2
Misfire
P0327 KS No.1 circuit low input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0327

[13B-MSP].)
P0328 KS No.1 circuit high input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0328

[13B-MSP].)
P0332 KS No.2 circuit low input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0332

[13B-MSP].)
P0333 KS No.2 circuit high input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0333

[13B-MSP].)
P0335 Eccentric shaft position sensor

circuit problem
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0335

[13B-MSP].)

P0336 circuit range/performance
problem
ON
OFF
CCM
C, R
(See DTC P0336

[13B-MSP].)
P0410 Secondary air injection system

problem
ON
OFF
2 AIR system C, R
P0411 Secondary air injection system
ON
P0302 Rear rotor misfire detected
(See DTC P0410,

P0411 [13B-MSP].)
OFF
2 AIR system
incorrect upstream flow

P0420 Catalyst system efficiency
below threshold
ON
OFF
Catalyst
(See DTC P0420

[13B-MSP].)
P0441 EVAP system incorrect purge

flow
ON
OFF
EVAP
system
C, R
(See DTC P0441

[13B-MSP].)
C, R
(See DTC P0442,

P0455, P0456
[13B-MSP].)
EVAP system leak detected

P0442 (small leak)
ON
OFF
EVAP
system
P0443 Purge solenoid valve circuit

problem
ON
OFF
CCM
C, R
(See DTC P0443

[13B-MSP].)
P0446 EVAP system vent control

circuit problem
ON
OFF
EVAP
system
C, R
(See DTC P0446

[13B-MSP].)
EVAP system leak detected

P0455 (large leak)
ON
OFF
EVAP
system
C, R
(See DTC P0442,

P0455, P0456
[13B-MSP].)
ON
OFF
EVAP
system
C, R
(See DTC P0442,

P0455, P0456
[13B-MSP].)
Fuel gauge sender unit (main)

P0461 circuit range/performance
problem
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0461

[13B-MSP].)
P0462 Fuel gauge sender unit (main)

circuit low input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0462

[13B-MSP].)
P0463 Fuel gauge sender unit (main)

circuit high input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0463

[13B-MSP].)
P0480 Cooling fan relay No.1 control

circuit problem
OFF
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0480

[13B-MSP].)
P0481 Cooling fan relay No.2 and

No.3 control circuit problem
OFF
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0481

[13B-MSP].)
P0482 Cooling fan relay No.4 and

No.5 control circuit problem
OFF
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0482

[13B-MSP].)
EVAP
P0456*3
system leak detected

(very small leak)
P0500 VSS circuit problem
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0500

[13B-MSP].)
P0505*8 IAC system problem
OFF
OFF
(See DTC P0505

[13B-MSP].)
P0506 IAC system RPM lower than

expected
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0506

[13B-MSP].)
P0507 IAC system RPM higher than

expected
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0507

[13B-MSP].)
P050A Cold start IAC system

performance
ON
OFF
CSERS
(See DTC P050A

[13B-MSP].)
P0522 Oil pressure sensor circuit low

input
OFF
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P0522

[13B-MSP].)
P0523 Oil pressure sensor circuit high

input
OFF
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P0523

[13B-MSP].)
P0562 System voltage low (KAM)
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0562

[13B-MSP].)
P0564 Cruise control switch input

circuit problem
OFF
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0564

[13B-MSP].)
P0571 Brake switch input circuit

problem
OFF
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0571

[13B-MSP].)
P0601 PCM memory check sum error
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0601

[13B-MSP].)
P0602 PCM programming error
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0602

[13B-MSP].)
P0604 PCM RAM error
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0604

[13B-MSP].)
P0606 PCM processor error
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0606

[13B-MSP].)
C, O,
(See DTC P0610
P0610 PCM vehicle options error
ON
OFF
CCM
P0638 Throttle actuator control circuit

ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0638

[13B-MSP].)
P0661 SSV solenoid valve control

circuit low
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0661

[13B-MSP].)
P0662 SSV solenoid valve control

circuit high
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P0662

[13B-MSP].)
P0703 Brake switch input circuit

problem
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0703

[13B-MSP].)
CPP switch input circuit

P0704*4 problem
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0704

[13B-MSP].)
Neutral switch input circuit

P0850*4 problem
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P0850

[13B-MSP].)
OFF
OFF
Other
C, O
(See DTC P1260

[13B-MSP].)
P1680 OCV circuit low input
OFF *7
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P1680

[13B-MSP].)
P1681 OCV circuit high input
OFF *7
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P1681

[13B-MSP].)
P1682 Metering oil pump No.1 circuit

low input
OFF *7
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P1682

[13B-MSP].)

high input
OFF *7
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P1683

[13B-MSP].)
P1684 Metering oil pump oil pressure

sensoroil pressure is low
OFF *7
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P1684

[13B-MSP].)
P1685 Metering oil pump oil pressure

sensoroil pressure is high
OFF *7
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P1685

[13B-MSP].)

low input
OFF *7
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P1686

[13B-MSP].)
P1260 Immobilizer system problem
[13B-MSP].)

high input
OFF *7
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P1687

[13B-MSP].)
P2004 APV stuck open (No.1)
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2004

[13B-MSP].)
P2005 APV stuck open (No.2)
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2005

[13B-MSP].)
P2006 APV stuck closed (No.1)
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2006

[13B-MSP].)
P2007 APV stuck closed (No.2)
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2007

[13B-MSP].)
P2009 APV motor control circuit low

input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2009

[13B-MSP].)
P2010 APV motor control circuit high

input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2010

[13B-MSP].)
P2067 Fuel gauge sender unit (sub)

circuit low input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2067

[13B-MSP].)
P2068 Fuel gauge sender unit (sub)

circuit high input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2068

[13B-MSP].)
P2070 SSV stuck open
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2070

[13B-MSP].)
P2071 SSV stuck closed
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2071

[13B-MSP].)
P2096 Target A/F feedback system

too lean
ON
OFF
Fuel
system
C, R
(See DTC P2096

[13B-MSP].)
P2097 Target A/F feedback system

too rich
ON
OFF
Fuel
system
C, R
(See DTC P2097

[13B-MSP].)
P2101 Throttle actuator circuit

range/performance
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2101

[13B-MSP].)
P2107 Throttle actuator control

module processor error
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2107

[13B-MSP].)
P2108 Throttle actuator control

module performance error
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P2108

[13B-MSP].)
P2109 TP sensor minimum stop

ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P2109

[13B-MSP].)
Throttle actuator control

P2112 system range/performance
problem
ON
OFF
CCM
(See DTC P2112

[13B-MSP].)
Throttle actuator control

P2119 throttle body
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2119

[13B-MSP].)
P2122 APP sensor No.1 circuit low

input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2122

[13B-MSP].)
P2123 APP sensor No.1 circuit high

input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2123

[13B-MSP].)
P2127 APP sensor No.2 circuit low

input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2127

[13B-MSP].)
P2128 APP sensor No.2 circuit high

input
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2128

[13B-MSP].)
P2135 TP sensor No.1/No.2 voltage

correlation problem
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2135

[13B-MSP].)
P2138 APP sensor No.1/No.2 voltage

correlation problem
ON
OFF
CCM
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2138

[13B-MSP].)
P2195 A/F sensor signal stuck lean
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor, C, R
HO2S
(See DTC P2195

[13B-MSP].)
P2196 A/F sensor signal stuck rich
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor, C, R
HO2S
(See DTC P2196

[13B-MSP].)
P2257 AIR pump relay control circuit

low
ON
OFF
2 AIR system C, O,
R
(See DTC P2257

[13B-MSP].)
P2258 AIR pump relay control circuit

high
ON
OFF
2 AIR system
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2258

[13B-MSP].)
P2259 AIR solenoid valve control

circuit low
ON
OFF
2 AIR system C, O,
R
(See DTC P2259

[13B-MSP].)
P2260 AIR solenoid valve control

circuit high
ON
OFF
2 AIR system C, O,
R
(See DTC P2260

[13B-MSP].)
P2270 HO2S signal stuck lean
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor, C, R
HO2S
(See DTC P2270

[13B-MSP].)
P2271 HO2S signal stuck rich
ON
OFF
2 A/F sensor, C, R
HO2S
(See DTC P2271

[13B-MSP].)
P2299 Accelerator pedal: spring back

malfunction
OFF
OFF
Other
C, R
(See DTC P2299

[13B-MSP].)
P2401 EVAP system leak detection

pump control circuit low
ON
OFF
EVAP
system
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2401

[13B-MSP].)

pump control circuit high
ON
OFF
EVAP
system
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2402

[13B-MSP].)
EVAP system leak detection

P2404 pump sense circuit
ON
OFF
EVAP
system
(See DTC P2404

[13B-MSP].)

pump sense circuit low
ON
OFF
EVAP
system
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2405

[13B-MSP].)
EVAP system leak detection

P2407 pump sense circuit
intermittent/erratic problem
ON
OFF
EVAP
system
C, O,
R
(See DTC P2407

[13B-MSP].)
P2502 Charging system voltage

problem
OFF
ON
Other
C, R
(See DTC P2502

[13B-MSP].)
P2503 Charging system voltage low
OFF
ON
Other
C, R
(See DTC P2503

[13B-MSP].)
P2504 Charging system voltage high
OFF
ON
Other
C, R
(See DTC P2504

[13B-MSP].)
U0073 CAN system communication

error
OFF
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
U0101 *5 Communication error to TCM
ON
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
U0121 Communication error to ABS

HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
ON
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
U0155 Communication error to

instrument cluster
ON
OFF
Other
C, O,
R

keyless control module
ON
OFF
Other
C, O,
R
(See FOREWORD
[MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM].)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
Indicates the applicable item in the On Board System Readiness Test as defined by CARB
C: CMDTC self test, O: KOEO self test, R: KOER self test
MT
AT
13B-MSP (high power)
Oil level warning light flashes
KOER self test only
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0030 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0030 A/F sensor heater control circuit problem

The PCM monitors the A/F sensor impedance when under the A/F sensor
heater control for 190 s. If the impedance is more than 44 ohms while
PCM turns A/F sensor heater on, the PCM determines that there is a A/F
sensor heater control circuit problem.
This is a continuous monitor (A/F sensor heater, HO2S heater).
DETECTION
CONDITION
A/F sensor connector or terminals malfunction
A/F sensor heater malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS
HAVE BEEN RECORDED
ACTION

MONITORING TEST RESULTS (A/F
sensor heater, HO2S heater related)
been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
available?
12) and DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST

RESULTS on the repair order, then go to
the next step.

step.

3 DTC
stored DTCs.


INSPECT A/F SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR POOR
4 CONNECTION
Disconnect the A/F sensor connector.


damaged/pulled-out pins, and
corrosion).
5
INSPECT A/F SENSOR HEATER

Inspect the A/F sensor heater.
(See AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR

6 CONNECTION
YesReplace the A/F sensor, then go to Step 7.

terminals, then go to the next step.
corrosion).
7 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.


[13B-MSP].)
Perform the DRIVE MODE 3.
(See OBD-II DRIVE MODE [13BMSP].)
Is the PENDING CODE same as the
DTC present?
8

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0031 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0031 A/F sensor heater control circuit low input

The input voltage to the A/F sensor heater drive terminal in the PCM is at the set value or less
for 1 s or more even though the A/F sensor heater is duty-controlled at under 90% by the
PCM.
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive
drive cycles or in one drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in
the PCM.
PENDING CODE is available if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition during the first
drive cycle.
Short to ground or open circuit in A/F sensor heater power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and A/F
sensor terminal C
A/F sensor heater related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and A/F sensor
terminal C
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal D and PCM terminal 2BG
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal D and PCM terminal 2BG
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS HAVE BEEN
RECORDED
Have the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 12) and
DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS
(A/F sensor heater, HO2S heater related) been
recorded?
2

ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 12) and
DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS on the

the next step.

3 CONNECTION

then go to Step 9.
INSPECT A/F SENSOR HEATER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4 FOR SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT
A/F sensor connector is disconnected.
(engine off).
No Inspect the A/F sensor heater related fuse.

Repair or replace
the wiring
harness for a
possible short to
ground.
Measure the voltage between A/F sensor

terminal C (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
Is the voltage B+?
Replace the fuse.

Replace the fuse.
Repair or replace
the wiring
harness for a
possible open
circuit.
Go to Step 9.
5


INSPECT A/F SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR

6 SHORT TO GROUND
Inspect for continuity between A/F sensor
terminal D (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.

ground.
If the short to ground circuit could not be detected:
(See PCM
Go to Step 9.


then go to Step 9.

8 OPEN CIRCUIT
A/F sensor and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

open circuit, then go to the next step.

terminal D (wiring harness-side) and PCM
terminal 2BG (wiring harness-side).
9

connectors.
M-MDS.


Is the PENDING CODE same as the DTC
present?
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0032 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0032 A/F sensor heater control circuit high input

The input voltage to the A/F sensor heater drive terminal in the PCM is at the set value or
more for 1 s or more even though the A/F sensor heater is duty-controlled at 10% or more
by the PCM.
If the current flowing to the A/F sensor heater circuit in the PCM is high when the A/F sensor
heater is off, the PCM detects DTC P0032.
DETECTION
CONDITION

the PCM.
drive cycle.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to power supply in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal D and PCM terminal 2BG
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

RECORDED
recorded?
2

ACTION

the next step.

3 CONNECTION

then go to Step 7.



then go to Step 7.

disconnected.
(engine off).
ground.
Is the voltage B+?
7

connectors.
M-MDS.


present?
8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0037 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0037 HO2S heater control circuit low input

The input voltage to the HO2S heater drive terminal in the PCM is at the set value or less for
0.5 s or more even though the HO2S heater is duty-controlled at under 90 % by the PCM.
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive
cycles or in one drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the
PCM.
drive cycle.
HO2S connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in HO2S heater power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and HO2S
terminal C
HO2S heater related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and HO2S
terminal C
HO2S heater malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 2BE
Open circuit in wiring harness between HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 2BE
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

RECORDED
DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS (A/F
sensor heater, HO2S heater related) been
recorded?
2

ACTION

the next step.
INSPECT HO2S CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the HO2S connector.
INSPECT HO2S HEATER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR

then go to Step 9.
4 SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT

HO2S connector is disconnected.
(engine off).

No Inspect the HO2S heater related fuse.
Repair or replace
the wiring harness
for a possible
short to ground.
Measure the voltage between HO2S terminal C

Is the voltage B+?
Replace the fuse.

Replace the fuse.
Repair or replace
the wiring harness
for a possible
open circuit.
Go to Step 9.
5
INSPECT HO2S HEATER

Inspect the HO2S heater.
(See HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
YesReplace the HO2S, then go to Step 9.

INSPECT HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT

6 TO GROUND
Inspect for continuity between HO2S terminal D

ground.
(See PCM
Go to Step 9.


then go to Step 9.
INSPECT HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

8 CIRCUIT
HO2S and PCM connectors are disconnected.


(wiring harness-side) and PCM terminal 2BE
(wiring harness-side).
9

connectors.
M-MDS.


present?
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0038 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0038 HO2S heater control circuit high input

The input voltage to the HO2S heater drive terminal in the PCM is at the set value or more for
0.5 s or more even though the HO2S heater is duty-controlled at 10 % or more by the PCM.
If the current flowing to the HO2S heater circuit in the PCM is high when the HO2S heater is
off, the PCM detects DTC P0038.
DETECTION
CONDITION

PCM.
drive cycle.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to power supply in wiring harness between HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 2BE
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

RECORDED
recorded?
2

ACTION

the next step.

INSPECT HO2S HEATER

then go to Step 7.



then go to Step 7.

6 TO POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).
Measure the voltage between HO2S terminal D

Is the voltage B+?
7

connectors.
M-MDS.


present?
8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0101 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0101 MAF sensor circuit range/performance problem

The PCM compares the actual MAF amount with the expected MAF amount
when the engine is running.
If the throttle opening angle is more than 50% and the
MAF amount is less than 9 g/s {1.2 lb/min} (less than
1.4 V), the PCM determines that there is a MAF sensor
circuit range/performance problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION
If the ECT is more than 70 C {158 F}, the engine

speed is less than 2,000 rpm and the MAF amount is
more than 65 g/s {8.6 lb/min} (more than 2.8 V),
the PCM determines that there is a MAF sensor circuit
range/performance problem.
MAF sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Eccentric shaft position sensor malfunction

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
Has the FREEZE FRAME
DATA (Mode 12) been
recorded?


2 AVAILABILITY
Verify related Service
Bulletins and/or on-line repair
the next step.
Is any related repair
information available?
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL
3 STATUS
Start the engine.
Access the TP REL and MAF
PIDs using the M-MDS.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC TEST [13BMSP].)
Read the MAF PID when the
TP REL PID is more than 50
%.
Is the MAF PID less than 9
g/s {1.2 lb/min}?
4 STATUS
Start the engine.
Access the ECT, RPM and
MAF PIDs using the M-MDS.
(See ON-BOARD
Warm-up the engine until the
ECT PID is more than 70 C
{158 F}.
Read the MAF PID when the
RPM PID is less than 2,000
rpm.

YesVerify that the TP REL PID changes smoothly while
gradually opening throttle valve.
If it changes smoothly, go to Step
5.
If it does not change smoothly,
replace the throttle body and go to
Step 5.
YesGo to Step 6.
No Intermittent concern exists.
Perform the INTERMITTENT CONCERNS
TROUBLESHOOTING.
(See INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING [13B-MSP].)
Is the MAF PID more than

65 g/s {8.6 lb/min}?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC
5 P0101 COMPLETED
YesReplace the PCM, then go to Step 9.

No Go to Step 9.
(See AFTER REPAIR

PROCEDURE [13B-MSP].)
Start the engine.
Access the TP REL PID using
the M-MDS.
(See ON-BOARD
Drive the vehicle for 5 s or
more when the TP REL PID
is more than 50 %.
Perform the Pending Trouble
Code Access Procedure.
(See ON-BOARD
Is the PENDING CODE same
as the DTC present?
6
INSPECT MAF SENSOR

Inspect the MAF sensor.
(See MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)
SENSOR INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
INSPECT ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION

7 SENSOR
Inspect the eccentric shaft
position sensor.
(See ECCENTRIC SHAFT
POSITION SENSOR
YesReplace the MAF/IAT sensor, then go to Step 8.

(See MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)/INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
YesReplace the eccentric shaft position sensor, then go
to the next step.
(See ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR

8 P0101 COMPLETED

(See AFTER REPAIR

Start the engine.
Access the ECT and RPM
(See ON-BOARD
Warm-up the engine until the
ECT PID is more than 70 C
{158 F}.
Drive the vehicle for 5 s or
more when the RPM PID is
less than 2,000 rpm.
(See ON-BOARD
as the DTC present?
9

PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0102 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0102 MAF sensor circuit low input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the MAF sensor when the engine is running. If the
input voltage is less than 0.64 V, the PCM determines that the MAF sensor circuit input
voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition in the first drive cycle.
MAF/IAT sensor connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in MAF sensor power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and MAF/IAT
sensor terminal A
MAF/IAT sensor related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and MAF/IAT
sensor terminal A
Short to ground in wiring harness between MAF/IAT sensor terminal C and PCM terminal 1AK
Open circuit in wiring harness between MAF/IAT sensor terminal C and PCM terminal 1AK
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 12) on
the repair order, then go to the next step.
to the next step.
INSPECT MAF/IAT SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
Disconnect the MAF/IAT sensor connector.

then go to Step 9.

INSPECT MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
MAF/IAT sensor connector is disconnected.
(engine off).

No Inspect the MAF/IAT sensor related fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring harness
for a possible
short to ground.
Measure the voltage between MAF/IAT sensor

terminal A (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
Is the voltage B+?
Replace the
fuse.
Replace the
fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring harness
for a possible
open circuit.
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT MAF SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
5 GROUND
MAF/IAT sensor connector is disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between MAF/IAT sensor
ground.

ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
Go to Step 9.


then go to Step 9.
INSPECT MAF SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

7 CIRCUIT
MAF/IAT sensor and PCM connectors are
disconnected.


terminal C (wiring harness-side) and PCM
terminal 1AK (wiring harness-side).
8
INSPECT MAF SENSOR

(See MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
YesReplace the MAF/IAT sensor, then go to the next

step.

connectors.
M-MDS.


10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0103 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0103 MAF sensor circuit high input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the MAF sensor when the engine is running. If the
input voltage is more than 5.0 V, the PCM determines that the MAF sensor circuit input
voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between MAF/IAT sensor terminal C and PCM terminal
1AK
Open circuit in wiring harness between MAF/IAT sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 1L
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
to the next step.
INSPECT MAF/IAT SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
Disconnect the MAF/IAT sensor connector.

then go to Step 8.

4


then go to Step 8.

INSPECT MAF SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
5 POWER SUPPLY
disconnected.
(engine off).

Measure the voltage between MAF/IAT sensor

ground.
Is the voltage B+?
INSPECT MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
disconnected.


terminal B (wiring harness-side) and PCM
terminal 1L (wiring harness-side).
7
INSPECT MAF SENSOR

YesReplace the MAF/IAT sensor, then go to the next

step.

connectors.
M-MDS.


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0107 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0107 BARO sensor circuit low input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the BARO sensor when the engine
is running. If the input voltage is less than 2.09 V, the PCM determines
that the BARO sensor circuit input voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

BARO sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
ACTION

available?
3
INSPECT BARO SENSOR MALFUNCTION

Start the engine.
Access the BARO PID using the
M-MDS.
TEST [13B-MSP].)

Inspect that the BARO PID within

the specification.
4 COMPLETED


[13B-MSP].)
test.
[13B-MSP].)
5

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0108 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0108 BARO sensor circuit high input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the BARO sensor when the engine
is running. If the input voltage is more than 4.02 V, the PCM determines
that the BARO sensor circuit input voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

BARO sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
ACTION

available?
3
INSPECT BARO SENSOR MALFUNCTION

Start the engine.
Access the BARO PID using the
M-MDS.
TEST [13B-MSP].)

Inspect that the BARO PID within

the specification.
4 COMPLETED


[13B-MSP].)
test.
[13B-MSP].)
5

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0111 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0111 IAT sensor circuit range/performance problem

The PCM compares the IAT with the ECT when the engine is running. If the
IAT is higher than the ECT by 40 C {72 F}, the PCM determines that
there is an IAT sensor circuit range/performance problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION
IAT sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA (MODE

1 12) HAS BEEN RECORDED
Has the FREEZE FRAME
DATA (Mode 12) been
recorded?
ACTION
VERIFY RELATED REPAIR

2 INFORMATION AVAILABILITY
Verify related Service
Bulletins and/or on-line
repair information
availability.
VERIFY RELATED PENDING CODE OR
3 STORED DTC
Turn the ignition switch off,
then to the ON position
(engine off).
Verify the related PENDING
CODE or stored DTCs.

repair information.
the next step.


INSPECT MAF/IAT SENSOR
4 CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the MAF/IAT
sensor connector.

then go to Step 7.
Inspect for poor connection

(such as damaged/pulledout pins, corrosion).
5
INSPECT IAT SENSOR

Inspect the IAT sensor.
(See INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE (IAT)


6 CONNECTION
Disconnect the PCM
connector.
Inspect for poor connection
(such as damaged/pulledout pins, corrosion).

7 P0111 COMPLETED

(See AFTER REPAIR

Start the engine and warm
it up completely.
(See ON-BOARD
as the DTC present?
8

PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0112 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0112 IAT sensor circuit low input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the IAT sensor when the engine is
running. If the input voltage is less than 0.16 V, the PCM determines that the IAT
sensor circuit input voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

drive cycle.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between MAF/IAT sensor terminal D and PCM
terminal 1AT
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA (MODE 12) HAS

1 BEEN RECORDED
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode
12) been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
INSPECT MAF/IAT SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR
3 POOR CONNECTION
ACTION
to the next step.
then go to Step 7.

Disconnect the MAF/IAT sensor
connector.

INSPECT IAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
4 SHORT TO GROUND
MAF/IAT sensor connector is
disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between
MAF/IAT sensor terminal D (wiring
harness-side) and body ground.

ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
Go to Step 7.
INSPECT IAT SENSOR

(See INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
(IAT) SENSOR INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

6 CONNECTION


7 COMPLETED


using the M-MDS.

[13B-MSP].)
8

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0113 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0113 IAT sensor circuit high input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the IAT sensor when the engine is
running. If the input voltage is more than 4.8 V, the PCM determines that the IAT
sensor circuit input voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

drive cycle.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between MAF/IAT sensor terminal D and
PCM terminal 1AT
Open circuit in wiring harness between MAF/IAT sensor terminal D and PCM
terminal 1AT
Open circuit in wiring harness between MAF/IAT sensor terminal E and PCM
terminal 1AR
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 BEEN RECORDED
12) been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
available?
INSPECT MAF/IAT SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR
3 POOR CONNECTION
ACTION

Disconnect the MAF/IAT sensor
connector.


4
INSPECT IAT SENSOR

(See INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT)
YesReplace the MAF/IAT sensor, then go to Step

8.

5 CONNECTION


INSPECT IAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
MAF/IAT sensor and PCM connectors
are disconnected.

possible short to power supply, then go to Step
8.
Measure the voltage between MAF/IAT

sensor terminal D (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.
Is the voltage more than 4.8 V?
INSPECT IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
7 CIRCUIT
MAF/IAT sensor and PCM connectors
are disconnected.
following circuits:
MAF/IAT sensor

possible open circuit, then go to the next step.
terminal D (wiring
terminal 1AT (wiring
harness-side)
MAF/IAT sensor
terminal E (wiring
terminal 1AR (wiring
harness-side)
8 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.


9

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0116 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0116 ECT sensor circuit range/performance problem

The PCM monitors the maximum value and minimum value of engine coolant
temperature when the engine is started and 5 min have been passed after
leaving the vehicle 6 h or more. If difference between maximum and
minimum values of engine coolant temperature is below 5.6 C {42.1 F}
the PCM determines that there is an ECT circuit range/performance problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION
This is a continuous monitor. (engine cooling system)

ECT connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
ECT sensor malfunction

Coolant thermostat malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE FRAME

1 DATA (MODE 2)
ACTION
Is the DTC P0116 on FREEZE

No Go to the troubleshooting procedure for DTC

on FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 2).

HAVE BEEN RECORDED
(engine cooling system related)
been recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

RESULTS on the repair order, then go to the
next step.

step.
INSPECT ECT SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR POOR

4 CONNECTION
Disconnect ECT sensor connector.

damaged/ pulled-out pins,
corrosion).
5 CONNECTION


damaged/ pulled-out pins,
corrosion.)
6
INSPECT ECT SENSOR

Inspect the ECT sensor.
YesReplace the ECT sensor, then go to Step 8.

(See ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(See ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
7
COMPARE ECT PID VALUE

Prepare a new ECT sensor.
[13B-MSP].)
(ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

[13B-MSP].)
No Inspect the thermostat.
If the thermostat is normal,
Connect the ECT sensor connector

to the new ECT sensor without
installing to the engine.
If the thermostat is not

normal, replace the
thermostat, then go to the
next step.

position and record the ECT PID
value.
(See THERMOSTAT
[13B-MSP].)
Replace the malfunction ECT sensor

with new one.
Start the engine and wait for 5
min.
Record the ECT PID value.
Is the difference between ECT PID
values more than 5.6 C {42.1
F}?
8 COMPLETED
[13B-MSP].)
completely.
Perform the Pending Trouble Code
Access Procedure.
[13B-MSP].)

present?
9

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0117 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0117 ECT sensor circuit low input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the ECT sensor when the engine is
running. If the input voltage is less than 0.2 V, the PCM determines that the ECT
sensor circuit input voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

drive cycle.
Engine overheating
ECT sensor connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between ECT sensor terminal A and PCM terminal
2AH
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 BEEN RECORDED
12) been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
available?
3 CONNECTION
ACTION
Disconnect the ECT sensor connector.

INSPECT ECT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
4 SHORT TO GROUND
ECT sensor connector is disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between ECT
sensor terminal A (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.

detected:
ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 7.

5 CONNECTION


6
INSPECT ECT SENSOR

(ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

7 COMPLETED
connectors.
YesReplace the ECT sensor, then go to the next

step.
(See ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)

using the M-MDS.

8

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0118 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0118 ECT sensor circuit high input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the ECT sensor when the engine is
running. If the input voltage is more than 4.8 V, the PCM determines that the
ECT sensor circuit input voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

drive cycle.
ECT sensor connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between ECT sensor terminal A and PCM
terminal 2AH
Open circuit in wiring harness between ECT sensor terminal A and PCM terminal
2AH
Open circuit in wiring harness between ECT sensor terminal B and PCM terminal
2AY
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY

on the repair order, then go to the next
step.
step.

3 CONNECTION

Disconnect the ECT sensor connector.


CLASSIFY ECT SENSOR MALFUNCTION OR WIRING
4 HARNESS MALFUNCTION
Access the ECT PID using the M-MDS.
Connect a jumper wire between ECT
sensor terminal A and B (wiring harnessside).

[13B-MSP].)
Verify the ECT PID value.

Is the voltage 4.58 V or below?
5



INSPECT ECT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
6 TO POWER SUPPLY
possible power supply, then go to Step 8.
ECT sensor and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
(engine off).
Measure the voltage between ECT sensor
ground.
Is the voltage B+?
7
INSPECT ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

ECT sensor and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
following circuits:

step.
ECT sensor terminal A

(wiring harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2AH (wiring
harness-side)
ECT sensor terminal B
PCM terminal 2AY (wiring
harness-side)
8 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0122 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0122 TP sensor No.1 circuit low input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the TP sensor No.1 when the engine is
running. If the input voltage is less than 0.3 V, the PCM determines that the TP
sensor No.1 circuit input voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition in the first drive
cycle.
Throttle body connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between throttle body terminal E and PCM terminal
2AO
Short to ground in wiring harness between throttle body terminal F and PCM terminal
2AK
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit in wiring harness between throttle body terminal E and PCM terminal 2AO
Open circuit in wiring harness between throttle body terminal F and PCM terminal 2AK
TP sensor No.1 malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
step.
step.
INSPECT THROTTLE BODY CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION

Disconnect the throttle body connector.


INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.1 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
4 GROUND
Throttle body connector is disconnected.
circuits:
Throttle body terminal E
body ground
Throttle body terminal F
body ground

detected:
harness for a possible short
to ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 8.



INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
Throttle body and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
circuits:
PCM terminal 2AO (wiring
harness-side)
Throttle body terminal F

PCM terminal 2AK (wiring

harness-side)
7
INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.1

Inspect the TP sensor No.1.
(See THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR

8 COMPLETED
connectors.
M-MDS.
YesReplace the throttle body, then go to the

next step.

9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0123 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0123 TP sensor No.1 circuit high input

running. If the input voltage is more than 4.8 V, the PCM determines that the TP
sensor No.1 circuit input voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

cycle.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between throttle body terminal F and PCM
terminal 2AK
Open circuit in wiring harness between throttle body terminal C and PCM terminal 2P
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
next step.
step.

3 CONNECTION



4



INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
5 TO POWER SUPPLY
possible short to power supply, then go to
Step 8.
disconnected.
(engine off).
Measure the voltage between throttle body

terminal F (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
Is the voltage B+?
INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between throttle body

terminal 2P (wiring harness-side).
7



next step.
step.
connectors.
M-MDS.


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0125 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0125 Insufficient coolant temperature for closed loop fuel control
The PCM monitors the ECT after cold engine start. If the ECT does not reach
the specification in a certain period, the PCM determines that the coolant
temperature for closed loop fuel control is insufficient.
This is a continuous monitor (engine cooling system).
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

HAVE BEEN RECORDED
(engine cooling system related)

next step.
been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

completely.
Access the ECT PID using the MMDS.
[13B-MSP].)
Is the ECT PID more than 70 C
{158 F}?
INSPECT MAF SENSOR

(See MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)

step.
YesIntermittent concern exists.
Perform the INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.
YesReplace the MAF/IAT sensor, then go to Step

6.
INSPECT ECT SENSOR

(See ENGINE COOLANT

6 COMPLETED

step.
[13B-MSP].)

[13B-MSP].)
Access the ECT PID using the MMDS.
[13B-MSP].)
Wait until the ECT PID less than
20 C {68 F}.
completely.
Access Procedure.
[13B-MSP].)
DTC present?
7

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0131 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0131 A/F sensor circuit low input

Detect any of the following condition:
The input voltage to the A/F sensor positive terminal is 1.128 V
or less.
The input voltage to the A/F sensor negative terminal is 0.044 V
or less.
The electric potential difference between the A/F sensor positive
and negative terminals is 0 V or less.
DETECTION
CONDITION

This is an intermittent monitor (A/F sensor, HO2S).
PENDING CODE is available if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition
during the first drive cycle.
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal A and PCM terminal
2AD
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal B and PCM terminal
2Z
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal A and PCM terminal
2AD
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 2Z
A/F sensor malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS HAVE YesGo to the next step.
BEEN RECORDED
Have the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode
12) and DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING
TEST RESULTS (A/F sensor, HO2S
related) been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY

DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS on

to the next step.
available?

3 CONNECTION


INSPECT A/F SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
4 GROUND
following circuits:

ground.
detected:
A/F sensor terminal A

and body ground

circuit).
A/F sensor terminal B

and body ground
(See PCM
Go to Step 8.

5 CONNECTION


INSPECT A/F SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
disconnected.
following circuits:


and PCM terminal
2AD (wiring harnessside)
and PCM terminal 2Z
7
INSPECT A/F SENSOR

Inspect the A/F sensor.

8 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.
YesReplace the A/F sensor, then go to the next

step.

[13B-MSP].)
DTC present?
9

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0132 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0132 A/F sensor circuit high input

The input voltage to the A/F sensor positive terminal is 3.589 V
or more.
The input voltage to the A/F sensor negative terminal is 3.541 V
or more.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal A and PCM
terminal 2AD
Short to power supply in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal B and PCM
terminal 2Z
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
available?


to the next step.
3 CONNECTION


4 CONNECTION


INSPECT A/F SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
5 POWER SUPPLY
7.
disconnected.

following circuits:
and body ground
and body ground
Is the voltage B+?
6
INSPECT A/F SENSOR


7 COMPLETED

step.

using the M-MDS.

[13B-MSP].)
DTC present?
8

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0133 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0133 A/F sensor circuit slow response

The A/F sensor output signal reacts at a slower timing than expected from
the fuel feedback amount.
A/F sensor heater monitor: completed
Fuel system loop status: closed loop fuel control
LOAD: 21.764.7 %
DETECTION
CONDITION

Looseness of A/F sensor
Leakage exhaust gas
Fuel line pressure malfunction
Leakage fuel
Fuel pump unit malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Pressure regulator (built-in fuel pump unit) malfunction

AIR system malfunction
TP sensor malfunction
Leakage engine coolant
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)


HAVE BEEN RECORDED
sensor, HO2S related) been
recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

next step.


4 DTC
Verify the related PENDING CODE
or stored DTCs.

Is the DTC P0443 also present?

5
INSPECT INSTALLATION OF A/F SENSOR

Inspect if the A/F sensor is loosely
installed.
Is the A/F sensor installed
securely?
INSPECT GAS LEAKAGE FROM EXHAUST

6 SYSTEM
Visually inspect if there is any gas
leakage between the exhaust
manifold and A/F sensor.

No Retighten the A/F sensor, then go to Step 15.
YesRepair or replace any malfunctioning exhaust
part, then go to Step 15.
Is there gas leakage?

7
INSPECT A/F SENSOR

(See AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F)
INSPECT FUEL LINE PRESSURE

Inspect the fuel line pressure while
the engine running.

YesGo to Step 10.
(See FUEL LINE PRESSURE

Is the fuel line pressure normal?
9
INSPECT FUEL SYSTEM FOR FUEL LEAKAGE

Visually inspect fuel leakage in the
fuel system.
Is there fuel leakage?

Step 15.
No Replace the fuel pump unit, then go to Step
15.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
10
INSPECT AIR SYSTEM OPERATION

Perform the Secondary Air Injection
(AIR) System Inspection.

Step 15.


11
INSPECT TP SENSOR
Inspect the TP sensor.
(See THROTTLE POSITION (TP)

12 SENSOR
Inspect the eccentric shaft position
sensor.
(See ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION
INSPECT SEALING OF ENGINE COOLANT
13 PASSAGE
Perform the ENGINE COOLANT
LEAKAGE INSPECTION.
(See ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE
YesReplace the throttle body, then go to Step

15.
YesReplace the eccentric shaft position sensor,
then go to Step 15.

Step 15.

14
INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE

Inspect the purge solenoid valve.
YesReplace the purge solenoid valve, then go to

the next step.


15 COMPLETED

[13B-MSP].)
Perform the DRIVE MODE 3 (A/F
sensor heater, HO2S heater, A/F
sensor, HO2S, and TWC Repair
Verification Drive Mode).
present?
16

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0134 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0134 A/F sensor no activity detected

The PCM monitors the A/F sensor element impedance when the following
conditions are met. If the A/F sensor element impedance is 50 ohms or
more, the PCM determines that A/F sensor is not activated.
A/F sensor heater, HO2S heater, A/F sensor, HO2S, and
TWC Repair Verification Drive Mode
Following conditions are met:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Time from engine start is above 40 s

(ECT when engine start is 20 C {68
F}).
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)


HAVE BEEN RECORDED
recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

next step.


4 DTC
NOTE:
If fuel monitor DTC, DTC P0132 is
retrieved, ignore it until P0134 is
fixed.

or stored DTCs.
5

Inspect if the A/F sensor is loosely
installed.


securely?


7 CONNECTION


as damaged/pulled-out pins, and
corrosion).
8
INSPECT A/F SENSOR


9 COMPLETED

step.

[13B-MSP].)
present?
10

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0137 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0137 HO2S circuit low input

The PCM monitors input voltage from the HO2S. If the input voltage from the HO2S
is below 0.95 V for 5 s while the HO2S is active or HO2S bias voltage below
1.3 V for 5 s, the PCM determines that circuit input is low.
This is a continuous monitor (A/F sensor, HO2S).
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunctioning condition in two
PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions during
Short to ground in wiring harness between HO2S terminal A and PCM terminal 2Q
Short to ground in wiring harness between HO2S terminal B and PCM terminal 2BH
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit in wiring harness between HO2S terminal A and PCM terminal 2Q
Open circuit in wiring harness between HO2S terminal B and PCM terminal 2BH
HO2S malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)
Is the DTC P0137 on FREEZE FRAME
DATA (Mode 2)?
ACTION

BEEN RECORDED
3 AVAILABILITY



available?
4 DTC
Turn the ignition switch off, then ON
stored DTCs using M-MDS.
to the next step.

YesGo to appropriate DTC troubleshooting
procedure.
Is other DTC present?

INSPECT HO2S CONNECTOR FOR POOR
5 CONNECTION

then go to Step 10.

INSPECT HO2S SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
6 GROUND
following circuits:

ground.
detected:
HO2S terminal A
and body ground

circuit).
HO2S terminal B
and body ground
(See PCM
Go to Step 10.

7 CONNECTION

then go to Step 10.

8
INSPECT HO2S CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

HO2S and PCM connectors are
disconnected.


following circuits:
HO2S terminal A
and PCM terminal 2Q
HO2S terminal B
and PCM terminal 2BH
9
INSPECT HO2S
Inspect the HO2S.
(See HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(HO2S) INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)

10 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.
YesReplace the HO2S, then go to the next step.


(See OBD-II DRIVE MODE [13B-MSP].)
present?
11

PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE [13B-

MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0138 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0138 HO2S circuit high input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the HO2S. If the input voltage from the
HO2S is above 1.2 V or HO2S bias voltage is above 1.7 V for 5 s, the PCM
determines that the circuit input is high.
This is a continuous monitor (A/F sensor, HO2S).
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between HO2S terminal A and PCM terminal
2Q
Short to power supply in wiring harness between HO2S terminal B and PCM terminal
2BH
HO2S malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
available?
INSPECT HO2S CONNECTOR FOR POOR
3 CONNECTION


to the next step.
then go to Step 7.

4 CONNECTION

then go to Step 7.

INSPECT HO2S CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
5 SUPPLY
7.
HO2S and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

following circuits:
HO2S terminal A
and body ground
HO2S terminal B
and body ground
6
INSPECT HO2S
Inspect the HO2S.

7 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.
YesReplace the HO2S, then go to the next step.


DTC present?
8

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0139 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0139 HO2S circuit slow response

The PCM monitors the HO2S inversion cycle period and rich-to-lean response
time while under the open loop fuel control (fuel cut off control). If the
average response time is more than the specification, the PCM determines
that the HO2S circuit response is slow.
DETECTION
CONDITION
Looseness of HO2S
Leakage exhaust gas
HO2S malfunction
Leakage fuel
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

TP sensor malfunction

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)


HAVE BEEN RECORDED
recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

next step.


4 DTC
or stored DTCs.


5
INSPECT INSTALLATION OF HO2S

Inspect if the HO2S is loosely
installed.

No Retighten the HO2S, then go to Step 15.
Is the HO2S installed securely?
INSPECT GAS LEAKAGE FROM EXHAUST

6 SYSTEM
Visually inspect if there is any gas
leakage between the exhaust
manifold and HO2S.

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].).
YesRepair or replace any malfunctioning exhaust

7
INSPECT HO2S
Inspect the HO2S.

Inspect the fuel line pressure while
the engine running.

YesGo to Step 10.

Is the fuel line pressure normal?
9

fuel system.

Step 15.
15.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
10

INSPECT TP SENSOR

Step 15.
11


12 SENSOR
sensor.
INSPECT SEALING OF ENGINE COOLANT
13 PASSAGE
LEAKAGE INSPECTION.
YesReplace the throttle body, then go to Step

15.
then go to Step 15.

Step 15.

14


the next step.


15 COMPLETED
memory using the M-MDS or
equivalent.
[13B-MSP].)


present?
16

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0222 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0222 TP sensor No.2 circuit low input

running. If the input voltage is less than 0.7 V, the PCM determines that the TP
DETECTION
CONDITION

cycle.
Short to ground in wiring harness between throttle body terminal E and PCM terminal
2AO
Short to ground in wiring harness between throttle body terminal D and PCM terminal
2AL
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit in wiring harness between throttle body terminal E and PCM terminal 2AO
Open circuit in wiring harness between throttle body terminal D and PCM terminal 2AL
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
step.
step.

3 CONNECTION



INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.2 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
4 GROUND
Throttle body connector is disconnected.
circuits:
body ground
Throttle body terminal D
body ground

detected:
to ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 8.



INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.2 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
disconnected.
circuits:
PCM terminal 2AO (wiring
harness-side)
Throttle body terminal D

PCM terminal 2AL (wiring

harness-side)
7


8 COMPLETED
connectors.
M-MDS.

next step.

9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0223 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0223 TP sensor No.2 circuit high input

running. If the input voltage is more than 4.8 V, the PCM determines that the TP
DETECTION
CONDITION

cycle.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between throttle body terminal D and PCM
terminal 2AL
Open circuit in wiring harness between throttle body terminal C and PCM terminal 2P
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
next step.
step.

3 CONNECTION



4



INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
5 TO POWER SUPPLY
Step 8.
disconnected.
(engine off).
Measure the voltage between throttle body

ground.
Is the voltage B+?
INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between throttle body

terminal 2P (wiring harness-side).
7



next step.
step.
connectors.
M-MDS.


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0300 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0300 Random misfire detected

The PCM monitors the eccentric shaft position sensor input signal interval
time. The PCM calculates the change of the interval time for each rotor. If
the change of interval time exceeds the preprogrammed criteria, the PCM
detects a misfire in the corresponding rotor. While the engine is running, the
PCM counts the number of misfires that occurred at 200 eccentric shaft
revolutions and 1,000 eccentric shaft revolutions and calculates the
misfire ratio for each eccentric shaft revolution. If the ratio exceeds the
preprogrammed criteria, the PCM determines that a misfire, which can
damage the catalytic converter or affect emission performance, has
occurred.
DETECTION
CONDITION
This is a continuous monitor (misfire).

The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the misfire which affects emission
performance in two consecutive drive cycles or in one drive cycle while the
DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
The MIL flashes if the PCM detects the misfire which can damage the
catalytic converter during the first drive cycle. Therefore, PENDING CODE is
not available while the MIL flashes.
PENDING CODE is available if the PCM detects the misfire which affects
emission performance during the first drive cycle.
Erratic signal to PCM
ECT sensor signal malfunction
MAF sensor signal malfunction
TP sensor signal malfunction
VSS signal malfunction

Ignition system malfunction
High-tension lead malfunction
Incorrect power supply to ignition coil
Ignition coil malfunction
Spark plug malfunction
Excess air suction in intake-air system
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Leakage fuel
Insufficient compression
Metering oil pump malfunction
Engine oil condition malfunction
Increased oil pressure
Oil passage malfunction
Engine malfunction
Purge control system malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

BEEN RECORDED
TEST RESULTS (misfire related) been

the next step.
recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
available?

step.

3 DTC
stored DTCs.


4

Access the following PIDs using the MMDS:
[13B-MSP].)

go to Step 23.
APP
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
Are the PIDs normal?
(See PCM INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS UNDER
5 FREEZE FRAME DATA (MODE 2) CONDITION
CAUTION:
While performing this step with vehicle
driving, always operate the vehicle in a
When the M-MDS is used to observe
monitor system status while driving, be
sure to have another technician with

go to Step 23.
you, or record the data in the M-MDS

using the PID/DATA MONITOR AND
RECORD function and inspect later.
Access the following PIDs using the MMDS under the FREEZE FRAME DATA
(Mode 2) condition:
[13B-MSP].)
APP
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
6
INSPECT ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR

sensor.
INSPECT IGNITION COIL OPERATION AND

7 HIGH-TENSION LEAD WITH TIMING LIGHT
Inspect the blinking condition on each
high-tension leads using timing light at
idle.
YesReplace the eccentric shaft position

sensor, then go to Step 23.
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
YesGo to Step 11.
Do all high-tension leads show blinking

condition?
INSPECT HIGH-TENSION LEAD OF NO BLINKING
8 HIGH-TENSION LEAD
YesReplace the malfunctioning high-tension
lead, then go to Step 23.
Inspect the high-tension leads.
(See HIGH-TENSION LEAD
INSPECT IGNITION COIL POWER CIRCUIT FOR
9 OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO GROUND


Measure the voltage between ignition
coil terminal C (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.

possible open circuit or short to ground,
then go to Step 23.
Is the voltage B+?

10
INSPECT IGNITION COIL

Inspect the ignition coil.
(See IGNITION COIL INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the ignition coil, then go to Step

23.
(See IGNITION COIL
No Inspect for open circuit in wiring harness
between ignition coil terminal B and
ground.
Repair or replace the wiring harness for a
11
INSPECT SPARK PLUG

Inspect the spark plug.
(See SPARK PLUG INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS OF

12 MAF SENSOR
Start the engine.
Access the MAF PID using the M-MDS.
YesReplace the spark plug, then go to Step

23.
(See SPARK PLUG
YesGo to Step 14.

[13B-MSP].)
Verify that the MAF PID changes
quickly according to the RPM when the
engine is raced.
Is the PID normal?
INSPECT INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM FOR EXCESSIVE
13 AIR SUCTION
Visually inspect for looseness, cracks or
damaged hoses in intake-air system.

go to Step 23.
No Replace the MAF/IAT sensor, then go to

Step 23.
14

Perform the FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION.
Yes
If the fuel line pressure is

too low, go to the next
step.
too high, replace the fuel
pump unit, then go to
Step 23.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
No Go to Step 16.
15

Visually inspect fuel leakage in the fuel
system.

go to Step 23.
No Replace the fuel pump unit, then go to
Step 23.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
16
INSPECT ENGINE COMPRESSION

Inspect the engine compression.
(See COMPRESSION INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)

No Go to Step 21.

17
INSPECT METERING OIL PUMP

Inspect the metering oil pump.
18
INSPECT ENGINE OIL CONDITION

according to the inspection results.
Overhaul or replace the engine, then go
to Step 23.
Inspect the engine oil condition.

Is the engine oil condition normal?
No Replace the engine oil.

to Step 23.
19

Inspect the oil pressure.
[13B-MSP].)
20
INSPECT OIL PASSAGE

Inspect the oil pipe between metering
oil pump and metering oil nozzle.

to Step 23.
YesInspect for leakage or clogging in the
engine oil passage.
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part
to Step 23.
No Overhaul or replace the engine, then go
to Step 23.
21
INSPECT PURGE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION

Perform the Purge Control System
Inspection.

go to Step 23.


INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT PASSAGE FOR
22 ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE
LEAKAGE INSPECTION.


23 COMPLETED

step.

using the M-MDS.

completely.
Access Procedure.
[13B-MSP].)
DTC present?
24

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0327 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0327 KS No.1 circuit low input

If the input voltage is less than 1.2 V, the PCM determines that the KS No.1
circuit input voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

drive cycle.
Short to ground in wiring harness between KS No.1 terminal A and PCM terminal
2U
Short to ground in wiring harness between KS No.1 terminal B and PCM terminal 2V
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
KS No.1 malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between KS No.1 terminal A and PCM terminal 2U
Open circuit in wiring harness between KS No.1 terminal B and PCM terminal 2V
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY

step.
step.

3 CONNECTION

Disconnect the KS No.1 connector.


4
INSPECT KS NO.1 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

KS No.1 connector is disconnected.
following circuits:
ground
ground

detected:
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 8.
INSPECT KS NO.1
(See KNOCK SENSOR (KS) INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)



7
INSPECT KS NO.1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

disconnected.

step.

following circuits:
terminal 2U (wiring
harness-side)
terminal 2V (wiring
harness-side)
8 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0328 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0328 KS No.1 circuit high input

If the input voltage is more than 4.0 V, the PCM determines that the KS No.1
circuit input voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

drive cycle.
KS No.1 malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between KS No.1 terminal A and PCM
terminal 2U
Short to power supply in wiring harness between KS No.1 terminal B and PCM
terminal 2V
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3 CONNECTION
ACTION
repair information.
the next step.
then go to Step 7.
Disconnect the KS No.1

connector.

corrosion).
4
INSPECT KS NO.1

5 CONNECTION

(See KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
then go to Step 7.

corrosion).
INSPECT KS NO.1 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
6 POWER SUPPLY
disconnected.


following circuits:
KS No.1 terminal
A (wiring
harness-side)
and body ground
KS No.1 terminal
B (wiring
harness-side)
and body ground
7 COMPLETED


[13B-MSP].)
test.
[13B-MSP].)
8

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0335 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0335 Eccentric shaft position sensor circuit problem

The PCM monitors the input signal from the eccentric shaft position sensor when the mass
intake airflow amount is more than 2 g/s {0.26 lb/min}. If the input signal is not input,
the PCM determines that there is an eccentric shaft position sensor circuit malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Eccentric shaft position sensor connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between eccentric shaft position sensor terminal A and PCM
terminal 2AG
Short to ground in wiring harness between eccentric shaft position sensor terminal B and PCM
terminal 2AP
Eccentric shaft position sensor is dirty
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to power supply in wiring harness between eccentric shaft position sensor terminal A
and PCM terminal 2AG
Short to power supply in wiring harness between eccentric shaft position sensor terminal B
and PCM terminal 2AP
Open circuit in wiring harness between eccentric shaft position sensor terminal A and PCM
terminal 2AG
Open circuit in wiring harness between eccentric shaft position sensor terminal B and PCM
terminal 2AP
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
step.
step.
INSPECT ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR

3 FOR POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the eccentric shaft position sensor
connector.

INSPECT ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR
4 SHORT TO GROUND
detected:
Eccentric shaft position sensor connector is
disconnected.
to ground.
terminal A (wiring harness-side) and
body ground
terminal B (wiring harness-side) and
body ground

detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.

Inspect the eccentric shaft position sensor.


then go to Step 9.

Step 9.
Eccentric shaft position sensor and PCM connectors
are disconnected.
off).
body ground

body ground
Is the voltage B+?
8 OPEN CIRCUIT
Eccentric shaft position sensor and PCM connectors
are disconnected.

step.

PCM terminal 2AG (wiring harnessside)
PCM terminal 2AP (wiring harnessside)
9


Start the engine and run the engine for 5 s or

more.
Perform the DTC Reading Procedure.
(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [13B-MSP].)
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0480 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0480 Cooling fan relay No.1 control circuit problem

The PCM monitors the cooling fan relay No.1 control voltage when the PCM turns the cooling fan
relay No.1 off. If the control voltage is low, the PCM determines that the cooling fan No.1 control
circuit voltage is low.
The PCM monitors the cooling fan relay No.1 control voltage when the PCM turns the cooling fan
relay No.1 on. If the control voltage is high, the PCM determines that the cooling fan No.1 control
circuit voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

drive cycle.
Cooling fan relay No.1 terminal malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in cooling fan relay No.1 power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and cooling fan
relay No.1 terminal A
Cooling fan relay No.1 related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and cooling fan
relay No.1 terminal A
Short to ground in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.1 terminal E and PCM terminal 1M
Cooling fan relay No.1 malfunction
Short to power supply in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.1 terminal E and PCM
terminal 1M
Open circuit in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.1 terminal E and PCM terminal 1M
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.1 CONNECTOR FOR POOR

2 CONNECTION
Remove the cooling fan relay No.1.
YesRepair or replace the terminal, then go to Step

9.

INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Cooling fan relay No.1 is removed.
off).
Measure the voltage between cooling fan relay No.1
No Inspect the cooling fan relay No.1 related fuse.

Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness for a
possible short
to ground.
Is the voltage B+?
Replace the
fuse.
Replace the
fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness for a
possible open
circuit.
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.1 CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR
4 SHORT TO GROUND
Cooling fan relay No.1 is removed.
Inspect for continuity between cooling fan relay No.1
terminal E (wiring harness-side) and body ground.

detected:
ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.1

Inspect the cooling fan relay No.1.
(See RELAY INSPECTION.)

YesReplace the cooling fan relay No.1, then go to

Step 9.
(See RELAY LOCATION.)

Cooling fan relay No.1 is removed and PCM connector
is disconnected.
off).

9.
Measure the voltage between cooling fan relay No.1

Is the voltage B+?
8 OPEN CIRCUIT
Cooling fan relay No.1 is removed and PCM connector
is disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between cooling fan relay No.1

terminal E (wiring harness-side) and PCM terminal 1M
9



10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0443 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0443 Purge solenoid valve circuit problem

The control voltage of the purge solenoid valve is less than specification even
though the purge solenoid valve is off.
The current in the output driver IC over-current detection circuit above 3.5 A
even though the purge solenoid valve is ON.
DETECTION
CONDITION

PCM.
drive cycle.
Purge solenoid valve connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in purge solenoid valve power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and purge
solenoid valve terminal A
Purge solenoid valve related fuse malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and purge
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between purge solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal
2C
Short to power supply in wiring harness between purge solenoid valve terminal B and PCM
terminal 2C
Open circuit in wiring harness between purge solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2C
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
Disconnect the purge solenoid valve connector.


4
INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT

Purge solenoid valve connector is disconnected.
off).
No Inspect the purge solenoid valve related fuse.

Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness for a
possible
short to
ground.
Measure the voltage between purge solenoid valve

Is the voltage B+?
Replace the
fuse.
Replace the
fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness for a
possible open
circuit.
Go to Step 10.
INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR
5 SHORT TO GROUND
Purge solenoid valve connector is disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between purge solenoid valve
terminal B (wiring harness-side) and body ground.

detected:
ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 10.


Step 10.
(See PURGE SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13BMSP].)




Purge solenoid valve and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
off).

Step 10.
Measure the voltage between purge solenoid valve

Is the voltage B+?
9 OPEN CIRCUIT
Purge solenoid valve and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between purge solenoid valve

terminal B (wiring harness-side) and PCM terminal 2C
10



11


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0446 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0446 EVAP system vent control circuit problem

The PCM monitors pump load current (EVAP line pressure) when the evaporative leak monitor is operating.
If the decrease in pump load current is less than the specification after the reference current value has
been obtained, the PCM determines that the change over valve in the EVAP system leak detection pump
has a malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION

The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or
in one drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
PENDING CODE is available if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition during the first drive cycle.
EVAP system leak detection pump connector or terminals malfunction
Change over valve malfunction (in EVAP system leak detection pump)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to power supply in wiring harness between EVAP system leak detection pump terminal C and PCM
terminal 1V
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

RECORDED
(EVAP system related) been recorded?
2

ACTION
DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS on the repair
order, then go to the next step.
YesPerform repair or diagnosis according to the available repair
information.
If the vehicle is not repaired, go to the next
step.

Disconnect the EVAP system leak detection pump
connector.
YesRepair or replace the connector and/or terminals, then go to

Step 7.

INSPECT CHANGE OVER VALVE (IN EVAP SYSTEM LEAK
4 DETECTION PUMP)
Inspect change over valve (in EVAP system leak
detection pump).
(See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM
LEAK DETECTION PUMP INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
YesReplace the EVAP system leak detection pump, then go to

Step 7.
(See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM

5


Step 7.

INSPECT EVAP SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP CIRCUIT
6 FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to
power supply, then go to the next step.
EVAP system leak detection pump and PCM
(engine off).
Measure the voltage between EVAP system leak
detection pump terminal C (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.
Is the voltage B+?
7

connectors.
M-MDS.
Perform the evaporative emission test using the
M-MDS.
NOTE:
If the evaporative system test
function is not available, perform
the following procedure:
Perform the DRIVE MODE 6 (EVAP System Repair
(See OBD-II DRIVE MODE [13B-MSP])
Is the PENDING CODE the same as the DTC
present?



< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0482 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0482 Cooling fan relay No.4 and No.5 control circuit problem
The PCM monitors the cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 control voltage when the PCM turns the
cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 off. If the control voltage is low, the PCM determines that the
cooling fan No.4/No.5 control circuit voltage is low.
The PCM monitors the cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 control voltage when the PCM turns the
cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 on. If the control voltage is high, the PCM determines that the
cooling fan No.4/No.5 control circuit voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

PENDING CODE is available if the PCM detects the above malfunction condition during the
first drive cycle.
Cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 terminal malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 power supply circuit
cooling fan relay No.4 terminal A
Cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 related fuse malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and cooling
fan relay No.4 terminal A
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and cooling
fan relay No.5 terminal A
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.4 terminal E and PCM
terminal 1R
Short to ground in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.5 terminal E and PCM
terminal 1R
Cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 malfunction

terminal 1R
terminal 1R
Open circuit in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.4 terminal E and PCM terminal
1R
Open circuit in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.5 terminal E and PCM terminal
1R
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION

INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY No.4/No.5 CONNECTOR
2 FOR POOR CONNECTION
Remove the cooling fan relay No.4/No.5.

9.

INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.4/NO.5 POWER
3 SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN
CIRCUIT
Cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 relay are removed.
(engine off).

No Inspect the cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 related
fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring harness
for a possible
short to
ground.
Measure the voltage between the following

circuits:
Cooling fan relay No.4 terminal
A (wiring harness-side) and
body ground
A (wiring harness-side) and
body ground
Is the voltage B+?
Replace the
fuse.
Replace the
fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring harness
for a possible
open circuit.
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY No.4/No.5 CONTROL

4 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 relay are removed.
circuits:

ground.
detected:

E (wiring harness-side) and
body ground

circuit).

(See PCM
body ground
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY No.4/No.5

Inspect the cooling fan relay No.4/No.5.

YesReplace the cooling fan relay No.4/No.5, then

go to Step 9.

7 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
Cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 relay are removed
and PCM connector is disconnected.
(engine off).

9.

circuits:
body ground
body ground
Is the voltage B+?
8 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Cooling fan relay No.4/No.5 relay are removed
and PCM connector is disconnected.
circuits:
harness-side)


harness-side)
9

connectors.
M-MDS.


10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0461 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0461 Fuel gauge sender unit (main) circuit range/performance problem
The PCM monitors the fuel tank level difference before and after the PCMcalculated fuel consumption has reached more than 21 L {22.2 US qt,
18.5 Imp qt}. If the difference is less than 5%, the PCM determines that
there is a fuel gauge sender unit (main) circuit range/performance problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION
Instrument cluster malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Fuel gauge sender unit (main) malfunction

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
and/or on-line repair
available?
3
INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Perform the INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER INPUT/OUTPUT
CHECK MODE.
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE.)

to the next step.
Step 5.

INSPECT FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT
4 (MAIN)
Inspect the fuel gauge sender
unit (main).
(See FUEL GAUGE SENDER
UNIT INSPECTION.)
5 P0461 COMPLETED
(See AFTER REPAIR
Start the engine.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 2)
condition.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Is the PENDING CODE same as
DTC present?
YesReplace the fuel gauge sender unit (main), then

(See FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)


PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0462 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0462 Fuel gauge sender unit (main) circuit low input
The PCM monitors the fuel tank level and input voltage from the fuel gauge
sender unit (main) when the engine is running. If the input voltage is less
than 0.78 V and fuel tank level is full, the PCM determines that the fuel
gauge sender unit (main) circuit input voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
available?
3

CHECK MODE.

to the next step.
Step 5.

4 (MAIN)
unit (main).
UNIT INSPECTION.)
5 P0462 COMPLETED
(See AFTER REPAIR
Start the engine.
condition.
test.
[13B-MSP].)
DTC present?



PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0463 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0463 Fuel gauge sender unit (main) circuit high input
sender unit (main) when the engine is running. If the input voltage is more
than 4.9 V and fuel tank level is empty, the PCM determines that the fuel
gauge sender unit (main) circuit input voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
available?
3

CHECK MODE.

to the next step.
Step 5.

4 (MAIN)
unit (main).
UNIT INSPECTION.)
5 P0463 COMPLETED
(See AFTER REPAIR
Start the engine.
condition.
test.
[13B-MSP].)
DTC present?



PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0500 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0500 VSS circuit problem

The PCM monitors the input signal from the vehicle speed sensor when the
following conditions are met. If the input signal is less than 3.7 km/h
{2.3 mph}, the PCM determines that there is a VSS circuit malfunction.
Shift lever position: gear is not in neutral position
Engine speed: more than 2,500 rpm
LOAD: more than 40.0%
DETECTION
CONDITION

ABS HU/CM malfunction (with ABS HU/CM)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
DSC HU/CM malfunction (with DSC HU/CM)

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED


2 AVAILABILITY
to the next step.
3

Start the engine.
Access the VSS PID using the
M-MDS.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Read the VSS PID when the
vehicle is driving.

YesIntermittent concern exists.
Perform the INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.
Is the VSS PID normal?

4
INSPECT ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM

Inspect the ABS HU/CM (with
ABS HU/CM).
(See ABS HU/CM
INSPECTION.)
YesRepair or replace the malfunctioning part according

to the inspection results, then go to the next step.
Inspect the DSC HU/CM (with

DSC HU/CM).
(See DSC HU/CM
INSPECTION.)
5 P0500 COMPLETED


(See AFTER REPAIR
FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode
2) condition.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
as the DTC present?
6

PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0505 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0505
IAC system problem

The PCM cannot control idle speed at the target idle speed during
the KOER self test.
DETECTION
CONDITION

PENDING CODE is not available.
The DTC is not stored in the PCM memory.
Drive-by-wire control system malfunction
A/C cut-off control malfunction
Generator control system malfunction
Intake-air line clogged
Air cleaner clogged
Throttle body clogged
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Engine oil malfunction

Oil pressure decrease
Engine malfunction

Pressure regulator (built-in fuel pump unit)
malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 AVAILABILITY
2 STORED DTC
then to the ON position (engine
off).
ACTION
to the next step.

INSPECT DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL
3 SYSTEM OPERATION
Perform the Drive-by-wire
Control System Inspection.
(See ENGINE CONTROL
SYSTEM OPERATION

Step 14.

INSPECT A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH
4 OPERATION
Turn the blower motor switch
off.
Is the magnetic clutch still on?
YesGo to the NO.24 A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C

COMPRESSOR RUNS CONTINUOUSLY.
(See NO.24 A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C
COMPRESSOR RUNS CONTINUOUSLY [13BMSP].)
INSPECT GENERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

5 OPERATION
Apply the electrical load at idle.
Is the engine speed increased?
INSPECT AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Remove the air cleaner element
with the engine running.
Is the engine speed increased?
INSPECT THROTTLE BODY PASSAGE

Remove the throttle body.
Is the throttle body clogged?

Inspect the engine
compression.
(See COMPRESSION

14.
YesClean or replace the air cleaner element, then go
to Step 14.
YesClean the throttle body passage or replace the

throttle body, then go to Step 14.
No Go to Step 13.

9

10

Is the engine oil condition
normal?

Overhaul or replace the engine, then go to Step
14.
14.
11

(See OIL PRESSURE
12
INSPECT OIL PASSAGE

Inspect the oil pipe between
metering oil pump and metering
oil nozzle.

14.
YesInspect for leakage or clogging in the engine oil
passage.
14.
No Overhaul or replace the engine, then go to Step
14.
13

Perform the FUEL LINE
PRESSURE INSPECTION.

14 P0505 COMPLETED
YesReplace the fuel pump unit, then go to the next

step.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
(See AFTER REPAIR

[13B-MSP].)
15

PROCEDURE.

(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0506 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0506 IAC system RPM lower than expected

The PCM compares the actual idle speed with the target idle speed when the
engine is running. If the actual idle speed is lower than targeted by 100
rpm, the PCM determines that the IAC system RPM is lower than expected.
DETECTION
CONDITION
VSS malfunction
A/C cut-off control malfunction
Generator control system malfunction
Intake-air line clogged
Air cleaner clogged
Throttle body clogged
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Engine oil malfunction
Oil pressure decrease
Engine malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED


2 AVAILABILITY
the next step.
3 STORED DTC
(engine off).


4 STATUS OF VSS
Start the engine.
M-MDS.

No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part according
to the inspection results, then go to Step 21.

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Is the PID normal?
5 SYSTEM OPERATION
(See ENGINE CONTROL
SYSTEM OPERATION


INSPECT A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH
6 OPERATION
Turn the blower motor switch
off.
Is the magnetic clutch still
on?
YesGo to the NO.24 A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C

COMPRESSOR RUNS CONTINUOUSLY.
(See NO.24 A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C
COMPRESSOR RUNS CONTINUOUSLY [13B-MSP].)
INSPECT GENERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

7 OPERATION
Apply the electrical load at
idle.
Is the engine speed
increased?
8
INSPECT AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Remove the air cleaner
element with the engine
running.
Is the engine speed
increased?

YesClean or replace the air cleaner element, then go to

Step 21.

9
INSPECT THROTTLE BODY PASSAGE

Remove the throttle body.
[13B-MSP].)
Is the throttle body clogged?
10

Inspect the purge solenoid
valve.
(See PURGE SOLENOID
VALVE INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
YesClean the throttle body passage or replace the

throttle body, then go to Step 21.
YesReplace the purge solenoid valve, then go to Step
21.

11
INSPECT IAT SENSOR

(See INTAKE AIR
12
INSPECT ECT SENSOR

(See ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)

SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)

13
INSPECT APP SENSOR

Inspect the APP sensor.
POSITION (APP) SENSOR

14 SENSOR
YesReplace the accelerator pedal, then go to Step 21.


to Step 21.
position sensor.
POSITION SENSOR


15

Inspect the engine
compression.
(See COMPRESSION

No Go to Step 20.

16

Inspect the metering oil
pump.
17

Inspect the engine oil
condition.
Is the engine oil condition
normal?
18

(See OIL PRESSURE
19
INSPECT OIL PASSAGE

metering oil pump and
metering oil nozzle.

to the inspection results.
21.
21.
21.
YesInspect for leakage or clogging in the engine oil
passage.
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part according
21.
No Overhaul or replace the engine, then go to Step

21.
20

Perform the FUEL LINE
PRESSURE INSPECTION.

21 P0506 COMPLETED
YesReplace the fuel pump unit, then go to the next

step.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
(See AFTER REPAIR

Start the engine.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
as DTC present?
22

PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0507 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0507 IAC system RPM higher than expected

The PCM compares the actual idle speed with the target idle speed when the
engine is running. If the actual idle speed is higher than targeted by 200
rpm, the PCM determines that the IAC system RPM is higher than expected.
DETECTION
CONDITION
VSS malfunction
Improper connection of vacuum hoses
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED


2 AVAILABILITY
the next step.
3 STORED DTC
(engine off).


4 STATUS OF VSS
Start the engine.
M-MDS.

No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part according

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Is the PID normal?
INSPECT VACUUM HOSE FOR POOR
5 CONNECTION
Are the vacuum hoses
connecting correctly?
VACUUM HOSE ROUTING
DIAGRAM [13B-MSP].)

No Connect the vacuum hose correctly, then go to
Step 11.
(See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM VACUUM HOSE
ROUTING DIAGRAM [13B-MSP].)

6 SYSTEM OPERATION
(See ENGINE CONTROL
SYSTEM OPERATION


7
INSPECT IAT SENSOR

(See INTAKE AIR
INSPECT APP SENSOR


9 SENSOR
position sensor.
POSITION SENSOR

YesReplace the accelerator pedal, then go to Step 11.

to Step 11.

10
INSPECT ECT SENSOR

(See ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
YesReplace the ECT sensor, then go to the next step.


11 P0507 COMPLETED


(See AFTER REPAIR

Start the engine.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
as DTC present?
12

PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0564 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0564 Cruise control switch input circuit problem

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the cruise control switch when the engine is running. If the input
voltage is less than 3.0 V for more than 2 min, the PCM determines that there is a cruise control switch
input circuit problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Clock spring connector or terminals malfunction
Clock spring malfunction
Cruise control switch malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between clock spring terminal 2B and PCM terminal 1AQ
TCM connector or terminals malfunction (AT)
Short to power supply in wiring harness between the following terminals:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Clock spring terminal 2BPCM terminal 1AQ

Clock spring terminal 2CPCM terminal 1BG (MT)
Clock spring terminal 2CTCM terminal 2AB (AT)
Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Verify related Service Bulletins and/or on-line repair information
availability.
ACTION
step.
INSPECT CLOCK SPRING CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

WARNING:
Handling the air bag system components improperly can accidentally
deploy the air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belts, which may
seriously injure you. Read the air bag system service warnings and
cautions before handling the air bag system components.

(See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)

(See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS.)
Disconnect the clock spring connector.
Inspect for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,
corrosion).
3
INSPECT CLOCK SPRING

Inspect the clock spring.
(See CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION.)
YesReplace the clock spring, then go to Step

9.
(See CLOCK SPRING
INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH

Inspect the cruise control switch.
(See CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the cruise control switch, then go

to Step 9.
(See AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Clock spring connector is disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between clock spring terminal 2B (wiring

detected:
detected:
to ground in PCM internal
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT PCM AND/OR TCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the PCM and TCM (AT) connector.


corrosion).

INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
7 SUPPLY
Clock spring, PCM and TCM connectors are disconnected.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (engine off).
Measure the voltage between the following terminals (wiring harnessside) and body ground:

Step 9.
Clock spring terminal 2B

Clock spring terminal 2C
8
INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Clock spring, PCM and TCM connectors are disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between the following terminals (wiring harnessside):

step.

9


step.
Start the engine.

10



< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0571 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0571 Brake switch input circuit problem

The PCM monitors switching in conjunction with brake switches No.1 and No.2. If either No.1 or No.2 do not
switch for a continuous five times even though either No.1 or No.2 is switched from off to on or from on to off,
P0571 is detected.
DETECTION
CONDITION

With ABS HU/CM
ABS HU/CM malfunction
Brake switch connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in brake switch No.1 power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and brake switch terminal B
Brake switch No.1 related fuse malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and brake switch terminal B
Short to ground in wiring harness between brake switch terminal D and ABS HU/CM terminal Y
ABS HU/CM connector or terminals malfunction
Short to power supply in wiring harness between brake switch terminal D and ABS HU/CM terminal Y
Open circuit in wiring harness between brake switch terminal D and ABS HU/CM terminal Y
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
PCM malfunction
With DSC HU/CM
DSC HU/CM malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in brake switch No.1 power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and brake switch terminal B
Brake switch No.1 related fuse malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and brake switch terminal B
Short to ground in wiring harness between brake switch terminal D and DSC HU/CM terminal N
DSC HU/CM connector or terminals malfunction

Short to power supply in wiring harness between brake switch terminal D and DSC HU/CM terminal N
Open circuit in wiring harness between brake switch terminal D and DSC HU/CM terminal N
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
availability.
ACTION
step.

Turn the ignition switch off, then to the ON position (engine off).
Verify the related PENDING CODE or stored DTCs.
VERIFY STORED DTC FOR ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM

Verify stored DTC for the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM.

(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)

(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
Are DTCs stored?
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the brake switch connector.
Inspect for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).
(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC

STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)

INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
Brake switch connector is disconnected.
Measure the voltage between brake switch terminal B (wiring harnessside) and body ground.

No Inspect the brake switch No.1 related
fuse.
Repair
or
replace
the
wiring
harness
for a
possible
short to
ground.
Is the voltage B+?
Replace
the fuse.
If the fuse is
deterioration:
Replace
the fuse.
Repair
or
replace
the
wiring
harness
for a
possible
open
circuit.
Go to Step 11.
6
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Inspect for continuity between brake switch terminal D (wiring harnessside) and body ground.

detected:
detected:
internal circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 11.
7
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH NO.1

CAUTION:
If the brake switch is removed from the brake pedal or the interlock unit,
its proper functioning cannot be guaranteed when reinstalled. Therefore,
inspect the brake switch with it still installed, or replace the brake switch if
it is removed.
Inspect the brake switch No.1.
YesReplace the brake switch, then go to Step

11.
(See BRAKE PEDAL
(See BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION.)

8
INSPECT ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector.
Inspect for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).


INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
9 SUPPLY
Brake switch and PCM connectors are disconnected.
Measure the voltage between brake switch terminal D (wiring harnessside) and body ground.

Step 11.
Is the voltage B+?

10
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Brake switch and PCM connectors are disconnected.

step.
Brake switch terminal D (wiring harness-side) and ABS

HU/CM terminal Y (wiring harness-side) (with ABS
HU/CM)
Brake switch terminal D (wiring harness-side) and DSC
HU/CM terminal N (wiring harness-side) (with DSC
HU/CM)
11

Depress the brake pedal more than 5 times.

step.

12


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0601 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0601
PCM memory check sum error

PCM internal memory check sum error.
DETECTION
CONDITION

The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the above malfunction
condition in the first drive cycle.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
PCM internal memory malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF P0601
ACTION
3 COMPLETED

[13B-MSP].)


test.
[13B-MSP].)
4

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0602 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0602
PCM programming error

No configuration data in the PCM.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Configuration has not been completed

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
ACTION
PERFORM PCM CONFIGURATION

Perform the PCM configuration.
(See PCM CONFIGURATION [13BMSP].)
YesPerform the PCM configuration again, then go

to the next step.
(See PCM CONFIGURATION [13B-MSP].)
No Go to Step 5.

[13B-MSP].)
test.
[13B-MSP].)
4 COMPLETED
[13B-MSP].)


test.
[13B-MSP].)
5

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0604 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0604
PCM RAM error

PCM internal RAM error.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE
PCM internal RAM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
ACTION
3 COMPLETED

[13B-MSP].)


test.
[13B-MSP].)
4

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0606 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0606
PCM processor error

PCM internal CPU malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE
PCM internal CPU malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
ACTION
3 COMPLETED

[13B-MSP].)


test.
[13B-MSP].)
4

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0610 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0610
PCM vehicle options error

PCM data configuration error.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Configuration procedure has not been completed

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
ACTION
PERFORM PCM CONFIGURATION

Perform the PCM configuration.
(See PCM CONFIGURATION [13BMSP].)
YesPerform the PCM configuration again, then go

to the next step.
No Go to Step 5.

[13B-MSP].)
test.
[13B-MSP].)
4 COMPLETED
[13B-MSP].)


test.
[13B-MSP].)
5

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0638 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0638 Throttle actuator control circuit range/performance problem

The PCM compares the actual TP with the target TP when the engine is
running. If the difference is more than the specification, the PCM determines
that there is a throttle actuator control circuit range/performance problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Throttle actuator malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Throttle valve malfunction

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION

available?
3 STORED DTC
then to the ON position (engine
off).

to the next step.

4 SYSTEM OPERATION

Step 7.

5
INSPECT THROTTLE ACTUATOR

Inspect the throttle actuator.
(See THROTTLE BODY
INSPECT THROTTLE VALVE

Inspect the throttle valve.
(See THROTTLE BODY

7 COMPLETED
YesReplace the throttle body, then go to Step 7.

YesReplace the throttle body, then go to the next
step.
(See AFTER REPAIR

Start the engine.
Perform the DTC Reading
Procedure.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
8

PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0703 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0703 Brake switch input circuit problem

The PCM monitors the input signal from the brake switch when the following
conditions are met. If the input signal does not change while alternately
accelerating and decelerating 8 times, the PCM determines that there is a brake
switch input circuit malfunction.
Vehicle speed: decelerating more than 30 km/h {19 mph} to
0 km/h {0 mph}
Deceleration: more than 4 km/h {2 mph} pers
DETECTION
CONDITION

Open circuit in wiring harness between brake switch terminal C and body ground
Short to ground in wiring harness between brake switch terminal A and PCM
terminal 1AB
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit in wiring harness between brake switch terminal A and PCM terminal
1AB
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
next step.
step.
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION


Disconnect the brake switch connector.

INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
4 OPEN CIRCUIT

Inspect for continuity between brake switch

ground.
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
5 SHORT TO GROUND
ground.

detected:
detected:
internal circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.

CAUTION:
If the brake switch is removed from the
brake pedal or the interlock unit, its proper
functioning cannot be guaranteed when
reinstalled. Therefore, inspect the brake
switch with it still installed, or replace the
brake switch if it is removed.
YesReplace the brake switch, then go to Step

9.
(See BRAKE PEDAL

7



INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
8 OPEN CIRCUIT
Brake switch and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

step.

terminal A (wiring harness-side) and PCM
terminal 1AB (wiring harness-side).
9 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.

step.
Perform the following procedures 8 times

alternately.
Drive the vehicle more
than 30 km/h {19
mph}.
Decelerate to 0 km/h {0
mph}within 7 s.
Perform the Pending Trouble Code Access
Procedure.
Is the PENDING CODE same as DTC
present?
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0704 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0704 CPP switch input circuit problem

The PCM monitors the input signal from the CPP switch when the vehicle speed is
more than 30 km/h {19 mph}. If the input signal does not change while
alternately accelerating and decelerating 10 times, the PCM determines that there
is a CPP switch input circuit malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION
CPP switch connector or terminals malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between CPP switch terminal D and body ground
Short to ground in wiring harness between CPP switch terminal B and PCM
terminal 1D
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
CPP switch malfunction

Open circuit in wiring harness between CPP switch terminal B and PCM terminal
1D
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
next step.
step.
INSPECT CPP SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
Disconnect the CPP switch connector.


INSPECT CPP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
4 CIRCUIT
CPP switch connector is disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between CPP switch

ground.
INSPECT CPP SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
5 TO GROUND
detected:
CPP switch connector is disconnected.
terminal B (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
detected:

internal circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT CPP SWITCH

Inspect the CPP switch.
(See CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP)
SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)

YesReplace the CPP switch, then go to Step

9.
(See CLUTCH PEDAL

INSPECT CPP SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
8 CIRCUIT
CPP switch and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

step.

terminal 1D (wiring harness-side).
9 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.

step.
Operate the clutch pedal when drive the

vehicle more than 30 km/h {19 mph}
10 times alternately.
Procedure.
present?
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0850 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0850 Neutral switch input circuit problem

The PCM monitors the input signal from the neutral switch when the vehicle is
running. If the input signal does not change while alternately running more than
30 km/h {19 mph} 8 times, the PCM determines that there is a neutral
switch input circuit malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION
Neutral switch connector or terminals malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between neutral switch terminal B and body
ground
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between neutral switch terminal A and PCM
terminal 2AS
Neutral switch malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between neutral switch terminal A and PCM
terminal 2AS
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY

next step.
step.
INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
Disconnect the neutral switch connector.

INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
4 OPEN CIRCUIT
Neutral switch connector is disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between neutral

switch terminal B (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.
INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
5 SHORT TO GROUND
Neutral switch connector is disconnected.
switch terminal A (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.

detected:
detected:
internal circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH

Inspect the neutral switch.
(See NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)

7 CONNECTION
YesReplace the neutral switch, then go to

Step 9.
(See NEUTRAL SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)

INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
8 OPEN CIRCUIT
Neutral switch and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

step.

and PCM terminal 2AS (wiring harnessside).
9 COMPLETED
connectors.
using the M-MDS.

step.
Operate the shift lever when drive the

vehicle more than 30 km/h {19 mph}
8 times alternately.
Procedure.
present?
10

PROCEDURE.
< Previous Next >

Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2004 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2004 APV stuck open (No.1)

closed. If the input voltage is more than 1.0 V, the PCM determines that the APV is
stuck open.
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit in wiring harness between APV position sensor No.1 terminal C and PCM
terminal 2AU
Open circuit in wiring harness between APV position sensor No.1 terminal A and PCM
terminal 2AN
Open circuit in wiring harness between APV position sensor No.1 terminal B and PCM
terminal 2AV
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
next step.
step.

Perform the Auxiliary Port Valve (APV) Control

according to the inspection results, then go
Inspection.
to Step 9.

4
INSPECT APV MOTOR

(See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) MOTOR


INSPECT APV POSITION SENSOR NO.1 CONNECTOR FOR
5 POOR CONNECTION
connector.

6

YesReplace the APV position sensor No.1, then

go to Step 9.
POSITION SENSOR



INSPECT APV POSITION SENSOR NO.1 CIRCUIT FOR
8 OPEN CIRCUIT
APV position sensor No.1 and PCM connectors
are disconnected.
circuits:

step.

terminal C (wiring harnessside) and PCM terminal 2AU
terminal A (wiring harnessside) and PCM terminal 2AN
terminal B (wiring harnessside) and PCM terminal 2AV
9

connectors.
M-MDS.


10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2006 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2006 APV stuck closed (No.1)

opened. If the input voltage is less than 1.0 V, the PCM determines that the APV is
stuck closed.
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between APV position sensor No.1 terminal C and
PCM terminal 2AU
Short to ground in wiring harness between APV position sensor No.1 terminal A and
PCM terminal 2AN
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 BEEN RECORDED
been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
available?

Perform the Auxiliary Port Valve (APV)
Control Inspection.
ACTION
to the next step.
Step 9.


4
INSPECT APV MOTOR

MOTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)


connector.

then go to Step 9.

6

POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
INSPECT APV POSITION SENSOR NO.1 CIRCUIT

7 FOR SHORT TO GROUND
APV position sensor No.1 connector is
disconnected.
following circuits:
APV position sensor
No.1 terminal C (wiring
ground
APV position sensor
No.1 terminal A (wiring
ground
YesReplace the APV position sensor No.1, then go to

Step 9.
ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
Go to Step 9.
8 CONNECTION


9 COMPLETED
connectors.
using the M-MDS.


present?
10

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2009 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2009 APV motor control circuit low input

Detect any of the following conditions:
The PCM terminal 2D voltage is not within 3.6 to 4.39 V when
the APV motor is operating (open).
The PCM terminal 2F voltage is not within 3.6 to 4.39 V when
the APV motor is operating (closed).
The PCM terminal 2D, 2F voltage is 4.39 V or more respectively
when the APV motor is not operating.
DETECTION
CONDITION

APV motor connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between APV motor terminal B and PCM terminal
2D
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between APV motor terminal A and PCM terminal
2F
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 BEEN RECORDED
12) been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
ACTION
to the next step.
INSPECT APV MOTOR CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
then go to Step 7.
Disconnect the APV motor connector.

INSPECT APV MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
4 GROUND
APV motor connector is
disconnected.
following circuits:
APV motor terminal
B (wiring harnessside) and body
ground
APV motor terminal
A (wiring harnessside) and body
ground
5
INSPECT APV MOTOR


6 CONNECTION

ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
Go to Step 7.

7 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.

[13B-MSP].)
present?
8

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2010 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2010 APV motor control circuit high input

The PCM monitors the APV motor control current when the engine is running. If the
driver IC current is more than 10 A for 5 s, the PCM determines that there is an
APV motor control circuit malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION
APV motor connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between APV motor terminal B and PCM
terminal 2D
Short to power supply in wiring harness between APV motor terminal A and PCM
terminal 2F
Open circuit in wiring harness between APV motor terminal B and PCM terminal 2D
Open circuit in wiring harness between APV motor terminal A and PCM terminal 2F
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY

step.
step.
INSPECT APV MOTOR CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION

Disconnect the APV motor connector.


4
INSPECT APV MOTOR




INSPECT APV MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
6 POWER SUPPLY
APV motor and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
(engine off).

Step 8.

circuits:
APV motor terminal B
body ground
APV motor terminal A
body ground
Is the voltage B+?
7
INSPECT APV MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

APV motor and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
following circuits:

step.
APV motor terminal B

PCM terminal 2D (wiring
harness-side)
APV motor terminal A
PCM terminal 2F (wiring
harness-side)
8 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.


present?
9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2096 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2096 Target A/F feedback system too lean

The PCM monitors the target A/F fuel trim when under the target A/F
feedback control. If the fuel trim is less than the specification, the PCM
determines that the target A/F feedback system is too lean.
This is a continuous monitor (fuel system).
DETECTION
CONDITION
Leakage exhaust gas
HO2S malfunction
Loose installation of A/F sensor

Leakage exhaust gas
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Leakage fuel
Engine malfunction
Fuel injector malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)
DATA (Mode 2)?
ACTION
No Go to the troubleshooting procedure for
DTC on FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 2).

BEEN RECORDED
TEST RESULTS (fuel system related)
been recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY
available?

the next step.
step.

4 DTC
stored DTCs.
INSPECT HO2S
Inspect the HO2S.

No If misfire DTC is present or drivability
concern exists, go to Step 10.
If misfire DTC is not present and
drivability concern does not exist, go to
the next step.
YesVisually inspect for the gas leakage
between TWC and HO2S.
If there is no leakage,
replace the HO2S, then
go to Step 24.
(See HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (HO2S)
[13B-MSP].)

[13B-MSP].)
APP

go to Step 24.
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
CAUTION:

go to Step 24.

(Mode 2) condition:
[13B-MSP].)
APP
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
8

Does the AIR system operate properly?

go to Step 24.
INSPECT A/F SENSOR

YesInspect the following:

Air suction at following
due to cracks, damages
and loosing parts:

From air
cleaner
to
throttle
body
From
throttle
body to
intake
manifold
Vacuum
hoses
NOTE:
Engine speed may
change when rust
penetrating agent is
sprayed on the air
suction area.
Loose installation of A/F
sensor
Exhaust gas leakage
between exhaust
manifold and A/F sensor
If there is no malfunction detected,
replace the A/F sensor.
If there is a malfunction detected, repair
or replace the malfunctioning part
Go to Step 24.

10 MAF SENSOR
Start the engine.
YesGo to Step 12.


[13B-MSP].)
quickly according to engine speed.
Is the PID normal?
11 AIR SUCTION
NOTE:
Engine speed may change when rust
penetrating agent (cab cleaner etc.) is
sprayed on the air suction area.

go to Step 24.
Step 24.

12

INSPECTION.
Yes

step.
Step 24.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
No Go to Step 14.
13

Visually inspect fuel leakage in the fuel
system.

go to Step 24.
Step 24.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

YesGo to Step 18.

high-tension lead using timing light at
idle.

condition?
INSPECT HIGH-TENSION LEAD OF NON
15 BLINKING HIGH-TENSION LEAD
16 OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO GROUND
and body ground.

then go to Step 24.
Is the voltage B+?

17

[13B-MSP].)

24.
(See IGNITION COIL
ground.
18

[13B-MSP].)

No Go to Step 23.

19


20

to Step 24.
to Step 24.
21

[13B-MSP].)
22
INSPECT OIL PASSAGE


to Step 24.
engine oil passage.
to Step 24.
to Step 24.
23
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR

Inspect the fuel injector.
(See FUEL INJECTOR INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)

24 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.
(See AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE [13B-
YesReplace the fuel injector, then go to the

next step.
(See FUEL INJECTOR
step.
MSP].)
Maintain the engine speed at 2,500
3,500 rpm for 15 s or more, then
increase it to 4,5005,000 rpm and
maintain it for 15 s or more.
Idle the engine until the cooling fan
stops, then maintain the engine idling
for 60 s or more.
present?
25

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2097 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2097 Target A/F feedback system too rich

The PCM monitors the target A/F fuel trim when under the target A/F
feedback control. If the fuel trim is more than the specification, the PCM
determines that the target A/F feedback system is too rich.
DETECTION
CONDITION
Leakage exhaust gas
HO2S malfunction
Leakage exhaust gas

POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Fuel pump speed control malfunction

Engine malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)
DATA (Mode 2)?
ACTION

BEEN RECORDED
been recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY
available?

the next step.
step.

4 DTC
stored DTCs.
INSPECT HO2S
Inspect the HO2S.

No If misfire DTC is present or drivability
concern exists, go to Step 11.
If misfire DTC is not present and
drivability concern does not exist, go to
the next step.
YesVisually inspect for the gas leakage
between TWC and HO2S.
If there is no leakage,
replace the HO2S, then
go to Step 17.
(See HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (HO2S)
[13B-MSP].)

[13B-MSP].)

go to Step 17.
APP
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
CAUTION:


go to Step 17.

(Mode 2) condition:
[13B-MSP].)
APP
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
8
INSPECT A/F SENSOR


sensor
Exhaust gas leakage
between exhaust
manifold and A/F sensor
replace the A/F sensor.
If there is a malfunction detected, repair
or replace the malfunctioning part
Go to Step 17.
INSPECT FUEL PUMP SPEED CONTROL

9 OPERATION
Perform the Fuel Pump Speed Control
Operation Inspection.

go to Step 17.

10

INSPECTION.
Yes

step.
Step 17.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
No Go to Step 13.
11
INSPECT LONG TERM FUEL TRIM

Access the LONGFT1 PID using the MMDS.
[13B-MSP].)
Compare the LONGFT1 PID with
recorded FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode
12) at Step 2.
Is the LONGFT1 PID above FREEZE
12

[13B-MSP].)
YesInspect the purge solenoid valve.

If there is any
malfunction, replace the
purge solenoid valve,
then go to Step 17.

No Go to Step 17.

13


to Step 17.
14


to Step 17.
15

[13B-MSP].)
16
INSPECT OIL PASSAGE


to Step 17.
engine oil passage.
to the next step.
to the next step.

17 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.
Maintain the engine speed at 2,500
3,500 rpm for 15 s or more, then
increase it to 4,5005,000 rpm and
maintain it for 15 s or more.
Idle the engine until the cooling fan
stops, then maintain the engine idling
for 60 s or more.

step.

present?
18

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2101 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2101
Throttle actuator circuit range/performance

The voltage is not supplied to throttle body even though the drive-by-wire power
supply is ON.
The voltage is supplied to throttle body even though the drive-by-wire power
supply is off.
DETECTION
CONDITION

This is a continuous monitor. (CCM)
The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the above malfunction conditions during the first drive
cycle.
Main relay and related circuit malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Drive-by-wire relay and related circuit malfunction

TP sensor No.1 and related circuit malfunction
TP sensor No.2 and related circuit malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE FRAME DATA (MODE 2)
Is the DTC P2101 on FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 2)?
ACTION
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA (MODE 12) HAS BEEN RECORDED
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 12) been recorded?

3

availability.

to the next step.

Turn the ignition switch off, then to the ON position (engine
off).
Verify the related PENDING CODE or stored DTCs.

corrosion).



6
INSPECT MAIN RELAY OUTPUT VOLTAGE

PCM connector is disconnected.
YesGo to Step 12.

Measure the voltage between PCM terminal 1BE (wiring

Is the voltage B+?
7
INSPECT MAIN RELAY CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Remove the main relay.
corrosion).

21.

8
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY FOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OF MAIN RELAY

Main relay is removed.
Main relay terminal D (wiring harness-side)
and body ground
Main relay terminal A (wiring harness-side)
and body ground
Is the voltage B+?

INSPECT MAIN RELAY

Inspect the main relay.
10
INSPECT POWER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

YesReplace the main relay, then go to Step 21.

Inspect for continuity between main relay terminal C (wiring

harness-side) and PCM terminal 1BE (wiring harness-side).
11
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT


Inspect for continuity between main relay terminal E (wiring

harness-side) and PCM terminal 1Q (wiring harness-side).
12
INSPECT DRIVE-BY-WIRE RELAY OUTPUT VOLTAGE

YesGo to Step 19.

Measure the voltage between PCM terminal 1BF (wiring

Is the voltage B+?
INSPECT DRIVE-BY-WIRE RELAY CONNECTOR FOR POOR
13 CONNECTION
Remove the drive-by-wire relay.


corrosion).
14
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY OF DRIVE-BY-WIRE RELAY

Drive-by-wire relay is removed.

Measure the voltage between drive-by-wire relay terminal D

Is the voltage B+?
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY FOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OF DRIVE-BY-WIRE
15 RELAY


Install the drive-by-wire relay.
Measure the voltage between drive-by-wire relay terminal E
Is the voltage B+?
16
INSPECT DRIVE-BY-WIRE RELAY

Inspect the drive-by-wire relay.
17
INSPECT POWER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Remove the drive-by-wire relay.
YesReplace the drive-by-wire relay, then go to Step

21.
Inspect for continuity between drive-by-wire relay terminal C

(wiring harness-side) and PCM terminal 1BF (wiring harnessside).
18
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT


Inspect for continuity between drive-by-wire relay A (wiring

harness-side) and PCM terminal 1BE (wiring harness-side).
19
INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.1 OUTPUT VOLTAGE

Reconnect the PCM connector.

No Inspect the TP sensor No.1 and the related
circuits and terminals.

Inspect the voltage between PCM terminal 2AK (wiring harnessside) and body ground.
Repair or replace if necessary, then go to Step

21.
Is the voltage 0.400.60 V?

20
INSPECT TP SENSOR NO.2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE

Inspect the voltage between PCM terminal 2AL (wiring harnessside) and body ground.

No Inspect the TP sensor No.2 and the related
circuits and terminals.
Repair or replace if necessary, then go to the

next step.
21


Start the engine and idle it.

off).
22


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2107 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2107
Throttle actuator control module processor error

Throttle actuator control module internal processor error.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
ACTION
3 COMPLETED

[13B-MSP].)


test.
[13B-MSP].)
4

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2108 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2108
Throttle actuator control module performance error

Throttle actuator control module internal communication error.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
ACTION
3 COMPLETED

[13B-MSP].)

Start the engine.

Procedure.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
4

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2119 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2119 Throttle actuator control throttle body range/performance problem

The PCM compares the TP with default TP when the ignition switch is turned
off. If the TP is higher than the default TP, the PCM determines that there is
a throttle valve return spring malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
available?
3 SYSTEM OPERATION

to the next step.
Step 6.

4

(See THROTTLE BODY

(See THROTTLE BODY

6 P2119 COMPLETED
(See AFTER REPAIR
Turn the ignition switch to the
ON position (engine off), then
off.

step.

test.
[13B-MSP].)
7

PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2122 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2122 APP sensor No.1 circuit low input

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the APP sensor No.1 when the engine is
running. If the input voltage is less than 0.3 V, the PCM determines that the APP
DETECTION
CONDITION

cycle.
APP sensor connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal D and PCM terminal
1AL
Short to ground in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal F and PCM terminal
1AO
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal D and PCM terminal 1AL
Open circuit in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal F and PCM terminal 1AO
APP sensor No.1 malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
step.
step.
INSPECT APP SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION

Disconnect the APP sensor connector.


INSPECT APP SENSOR NO.1 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
4 GROUND
APP sensor connector is disconnected.
circuits:
APP sensor terminal D
body ground
APP sensor terminal F (wiring
ground

detected:
to ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 8.



INSPECT APP SENSOR NO.1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
APP sensor and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
circuits:
APP sensor terminal D
PCM terminal 1AL (wiring
harness-side)
APP sensor terminal F (wiring

terminal 1AO (wiring

harness-side)
7
INSPECT APP SENSOR NO.1

Inspect the APP sensor No.1.
(See ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP)

8 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.
YesReplace the accelerator pedal, then go to

the next step.

9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2123 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2123 APP sensor No.1 circuit high input

running. If the input voltage is more than 4.8 V, the PCM determines that the APP
DETECTION
CONDITION

cycle.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal F and PCM
terminal 1AO
Open circuit in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal E and PCM terminal 1AS
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
next step.
step.

3 CONNECTION



4



INSPECT APP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
disconnected.
(engine off).

Step 8.
Measure the voltage between APP sensor

terminal F (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
Is the voltage B+?
INSPECT APP SENSOR NO.1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between APP sensor

terminal E (wiring harness-side) and PCM
terminal 1AS (wiring harness-side).
7



the next step.
step.
connectors.
M-MDS.


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2127 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2127 APP sensor No.2 circuit low input

running. If the input voltage is less than 0.3 V, the PCM determines that the APP
DETECTION
CONDITION

cycle.
Short to ground in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 1AJ
Short to ground in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal C and PCM terminal
1AP
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 1AJ
Open circuit in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal C and PCM terminal 1AP
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
step.
step.

3 CONNECTION



INSPECT APP SENSOR NO.2 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
4 GROUND
APP sensor connector is disconnected.
circuits:
APP sensor terminal A (wiring
ground
APP sensor terminal C (wiring
ground

detected:
to ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 8.



INSPECT APP SENSOR NO.2 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
disconnected.
circuits:
APP sensor terminal A (wiring
terminal 1AJ (wiring harnessside)
APP sensor terminal C (wiring
terminal 1AP (wiring harness-

side)
7


8 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.

the next step.

9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2128 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2128 APP sensor No.2 circuit high input

running. If the input voltage is more than 4.8 V, the PCM determines that the APP
DETECTION
CONDITION

cycle.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal C and PCM
terminal 1AP
Open circuit in wiring harness between APP sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 1AV
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
next step.
step.

3 CONNECTION



4



INSPECT APP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
disconnected.
(engine off).

Step 8.
Measure the voltage between APP sensor

ground.
Is the voltage B+?
INSPECT APP SENSOR NO.2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between APP sensor

terminal 1AV (wiring harness-side).
7


connectors.

the next step.
step.

M-MDS.


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2135 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2135 TP sensor No.1/No.2 voltage correlation problem

The PCM compares the input voltage from TP sensor No.1 with the input
voltage from TP sensor No.2 when the engine is running. If the difference is
more than the specification, the PCM determines that there is a TP sensor
No.1/No.2 voltage correlation problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

INSPECT THROTTLE BODY CONNECTOR FOR

3 POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the throttle body
connector.

corrosion).
4 CONNECTION


corrosion).
5
INSPECT TP SENSOR
Inspect the TP sensor No.1 and
No.2.

step.

6 COMPLETED

[13B-MSP].)
test.
[13B-MSP].)
7

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2138 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2138 APP sensor No.1/No.2 voltage correlation problem

The PCM compares the input voltage from APP sensor No.1 with the input
voltage from APP sensor No.2 when the engine is running. If the difference
is more than the specification, the PCM determines that there is a APP
sensor No.1/No.2 voltage correlation problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 BEEN RECORDED


2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
INSPECT APP SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR
3 POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the APP sensor
connector.


corrosion).
4 CONNECTION


corrosion).
5
INSPECT APP SENSOR

Inspect the APP sensor No.1 and
No.2.

6 COMPLETED
YesReplace the accelerator pedal, then go to the

next step.

[13B-MSP].)
test.
[13B-MSP].)
7

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2195 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2195 A/F sensor signal stuck lean

The PCM monitors the A/F sensor output current when the following
conditions are met. If the average output current is more than 1.15 A for
25 s, the PCM determines that the A/F sensor signal remains lean.
ECT: more than 70 C {158 F}
MAF amount: 680 g/s {0.8010.58 lb/min}
Target A/F feedback system status: feedback control
DETECTION
CONDITION
Input voltage from the HO2S: more than 0.7 V


POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Leakage exhaust gas

Fuel leakage from fuel system
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE FRAME DATA

1 (MODE 2)
Is the DTC P2195 on FREEZE FRAME DATA
(Mode 2)?
ACTION
No Go to the troubleshooting
procedure for DTC on FREEZE
FRAME DATA (Mode 2).

RECORDED
(A/F sensor, HO2S related) been recorded?


MONITORING TEST RESULTS on
the repair order, then go to the
next step.
information.
If the vehicle is
not repaired, go
to the next step.

4

DTCs.

Access the following PIDs using the M-MDS:
APP

inspection.

No Repair or replace the
Step 10.
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
CAUTION:
While performing this step with vehicle driving,
always operate the vehicle in a safe and lawful
manner.
When the M-MDS is used to observe monitor
system status while driving, be sure to have
another technician with you, or record the data
in the M-MDS using the PID/DATA MONITOR
AND RECORD function and inspect later.
Access the following PIDs using the M-MDS
under the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 2)
condition:
APP
ECT

Step 10.
MAF
TP REL
VSS
7
INSPECT A/F SENSOR


Loose installation
of A/F sensor
Exhaust gas
leakage between
exhaust manifold
and A/F sensor
If there is no malfunction
detected, replace the A/F sensor.
SENSOR
If there is a malfunction detected,
repair or replace the
the inspection results.
Go to Step 10.

(See FUEL INJECTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the fuel injector, then go

to Step 10.
(See FUEL INJECTOR

INSPECTION.
(See FUEL LINE PRESSURE INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

the next step.

10

connectors.
M-MDS.
Perform the DRIVE MODE 3 (A/F sensor
heater, HO2S heater, A/F sensor, HO2S, and
TWC Repair Verification Drive Mode).

next step.
(See PCM

11


inspection.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2196 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2196 A/F sensor signal stuck rich

The PCM monitors the A/F sensor output current when the following
conditions are met. If the average output current is less than 0.85 A for
25 s, the PCM determines that the A/F sensor signal remains rich.
MAF amount: 680 g/s {0.8010.58 lb/min}
DETECTION
CONDITION
Input voltage from the HO2S: less than 0.2 V


POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Leakage exhaust gas

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE FRAME DATA

1 (MODE 2)
Is the DTC P2196 on FREEZE FRAME DATA
(Mode 2)?
ACTION
No Go to the troubleshooting
procedure for DTC on FREEZE
FRAME DATA (Mode 2).

RECORDED
(A/F sensor, HO2S related) been recorded?


next step.
information.
If the vehicle is
not repaired, go
to the next step.

DTCs.

APP

inspection.

Step 10.
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
CAUTION:
manner.
condition:
APP
ECT
MAF

Step 10.
TP REL
VSS
7
INSPECT A/F SENSOR


Loose installation
of A/F sensor
Exhaust gas
leakage between
exhaust manifold
and A/F sensor
If there is no malfunction
detected, replace the A/F sensor.
SENSOR
If there is a malfunction detected,
Go to Step 10.


to Step 10.
(See FUEL INJECTOR

INSPECTION.

the next step.
10

connectors.
M-MDS.
Perform the DRIVE MODE 3 (A/F sensor
heater, HO2S heater, A/F sensor, HO2S, and
TWC Repair Verification Drive Mode).

next step.
(See PCM

11


inspection.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2401 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2401 EVAP system leak detection pump control circuit low
The PCM monitors the pump load current (EVAP line pressure) when the evaporative leak monitor is
operating. If the pump load current is less than the specification, the PCM determines that the EVAP
system leak detection pump control circuit voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Short to ground or open circuit in EVAP system leak detection pump power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and EVAP system leak
detection pump terminal A
EVAP system leak detection pump related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and EVAP system leak
detection pump terminal A
Short to ground in wiring harness between EVAP system leak detection pump terminal D and PCM terminal
1U
EVAP system leak detection pump malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between EVAP system leak detection pump terminal D and PCM terminal 1U
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA (MODE 12) AND DIAGNOSTIC

1 MONITORING TEST RESULTS HAVE BEEN RECORDED
DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS (EVAP
system related) been recorded?


repair information.
If the vehicle is not repaired, go to the
next step.

connector.
YesRepair or replace the connector and/or terminals, then go

to Step 9.

INSPECT EVAP SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP POWER
4 SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN
CIRCUIT
EVAP system leak detection pump connector is
disconnected.
off).

No Inspect the EVAP system leak detection pump related
fuse.

detection pump terminal A (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.
Is the voltage B+?
Replace the fuse.

Replace the fuse.
possible open circuit.
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT EVAP SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP CONTROL

5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
EVAP system leak detection pump connector is
disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between EVAP system leak
detection pump terminal D (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.

Replace the PCM (short to ground in the
PCM internal circuit).
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.

Inspect the EVAP system leak detection pump.
LEAK DETECTION PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)


Step 9.
YesRepair or replace the connector and/or terminals, then go
to Step 9.


No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open

circuit, then go to the next step.
Inspect for continuity between EVAP system leak

and PCM terminal 1U (wiring harness-side).
9


Perform the evaporative system test using the MMDS.

INSPECTION [13B-MSP])
NOTE:
the following procedure.
present?
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2402 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2402 EVAP system leak detection pump control circuit high
The PCM monitors the pump load current (EVAP line pressure) when the evaporative leak monitor is
operating. If the pump load current is more than the specification, the PCM determines that the EVAP
system leak detection pump control circuit voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to power supply in wiring harness between EVAP system leak detection pump terminal D and PCM
terminal 1U
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

RECORDED
(EVAP system related) been recorded?
2

ACTION
information.
step.

connector.

Step 7.

4

Inspect the EVAP system leak detection pump.
LEAK DETECTION PUMP INSPECTION [13BMSP].)


Step 7.
Step 7.

YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to
power supply, then go to the next step.
(engine off).
and body ground.
Is the voltage B+?
7

connectors.
M-MDS.


Perform the evaporative system test using the MMDS.
NOTE:
present?
8



< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2404 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2404 EVAP system leak detection pump sense circuit range/performance problem
The PCM monitors the pump load current (EVAP line pressure) when the
evaporative leak monitor is operating. If the time in which the pump load
current reaches the reference current value is not within the specification
after the PCM obtains the reference current value, the PCM determines that
there is an EVAP system leak detection pump sense circuit
range/performance problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION
EVAP hose bending
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Air filter clogging

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

ACTION

(EVAP system related) been
recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT EVAP HOSE FOR BENDING

Inspect the EVAP hose for
bending.
INSPECT AIR FILTER FOR CLOGGING

Inspect the air filter for clogging.
(See AIR FILTER INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)

5 COMPLETED
[13B-MSP].)
Perform the evaporative system
test using the M-MDS.
NOTE:
If the evaporative
system test
function is not

next step.

YesRepair or replace the malfunctioning EVAP
hose, then go to Step 5.
YesReplace the air filter, then go to the next step.
(See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CONTROL SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
available, perform
the following
procedure.
Perform the DRIVE MODE 6 (EVAP
System Repair Verification Drive
Mode).
(See OBD-II DRIVE MODE [13BMSP])
Is the PENDING CODE the same
as the DTC present?
6

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2405 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2405 EVAP system leak detection pump sense circuit low
evaporative leak monitor is operating. If the pump load current is less than
the specification while the PCM obtains the reference current value, the PCM
determines that the EVAP system leak detection pump sense circuit voltage
is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Orifice fallen off

Pump malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

ACTION

recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
INSPECT EVAP SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION
3 PUMP
Inspect the EVAP system leak
detection pump.
(See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION
PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
4 COMPLETED
[13B-MSP].)
NOTE:
If the evaporative
system test
function is not
available, perform
the following
procedure.

next step.

YesReplace the EVAP system leak detection
pump, then go to the next step.
[13B-MSP].)


Mode).
as the DTC present?
5

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2407 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2407 EVAP system leak detection pump sense circuit intermittent/erratic problem
evaporative leak monitor is operating. If the change in pump load current is
more than the specification while the PCM obtains the reference current
value 6 times, the PCM determines that there is an EVAP system leak
detection pump sense circuit intermittent/erratic problem.
evaporative leak monitor is operating. If the pump load current is kept less
than the maximum pump load current after the PCM obtains the reference
current value 6 times, the PCM determines that there is an EVAP system
leak detection pump sense circuit intermittent/erratic problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Heater malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
INSPECT EVAP SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION
3 PUMP
Inspect the EVAP system leak
detection pump.
(See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION
PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
4 COMPLETED
[13B-MSP].)
NOTE:
If the evaporative
system test
function is not

next step.

YesReplace the EVAP system leak detection
pump, then go to the next step.
[13B-MSP].)

available, perform
the following
procedure.
Mode).
as the DTC present?
5

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2502 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2502 Charging system voltage problem

The PCM monitors the generator output voltage and the battery voltage
when the engine is running. If the generator output voltage is more than
16.9 V and the battery voltage is less than 10.9 V, the PCM determines
that there is a charging system voltage malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Generator connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in generator power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between battery positive
terminal and generator terminal 2A
MAIN 120 A fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive

terminal and generator terminal 2A
Generator malfunction
Battery positive terminal poor installation
Battery malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
INSPECT GENERATOR CONNECTOR FOR
2 POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the generator
connector.
as damaged/pulled-out pins, and
corrosion).
ACTION

INSPECT BATTERY CHARGING CIRCUIT FOR
Generator connector is
disconnected.
Measure the voltage between
generator terminal 2A (wiring
No Inspect the MAIN 120 A fuse.

Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness for
a possible
short to
ground.
Is the voltage B+?
Replace the
fuse.
Replace the
fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness for
a possible
open circuit.
Go to Step 7.
4
INSPECT GENERATOR
Inspect the generator.
(See GENERATOR INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the generator, then go to Step 7.

(See GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
INSPECT BATTERY POSITIVE TERMINAL FOR

5 POOR INSTALLATION
YesConnect the battery positive terminal
correctly, then go to Step 7.
Inspect for looseness of the
battery positive terminal.

6
INSPECT BATTERY
YesReplace the battery, then go to the next step.
Inspect the battery.

(See BATTERY INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
7 COMPLETED
(See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

[13B-MSP].)

[13B-MSP].)
8

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2503 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2503 Charging system voltage low

The PCM monitors the generator output voltage when the engine is running.
If the generator output voltage is less than 8.5 V while the PCM needs
more than 19.5 A from the generator, the PCM determines that the
charging system voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Short to ground in wiring harness between generator terminal 1A and PCM
terminal 2AJ
Short to ground in wiring harness between generator terminal 1B and PCM
terminal 2AI
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between generator terminal 1A and PCM
terminal 2AJ
Open circuit in wiring harness between generator terminal 1B and PCM
terminal 2AI
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 AVAILABILITY
available?
ACTION
step.
INSPECT GENERATOR CONNECTOR FOR POOR

2 CONNECTION
Disconnect the generator connector.
corrosion).


INSPECT GENERATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
3 GROUND
Generator connector is disconnected.
following circuits:
Generator terminal 1A
and body ground
Generator terminal 1B
and body ground

detected:
detected:
internal circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 7.
INSPECT GENERATOR
(See GENERATOR INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

5 CONNECTION
YesReplace the generator, then go to Step 7.

(See GENERATOR

INSPECT GENERATOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
6 CIRCUIT
Generator and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
following circuits:

step.
Generator terminal 1A
and PCM terminal 2AJ
Generator terminal 1B
and PCM terminal 2AI
7 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.

step.

8

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2504 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2504 Charging system voltage high

The PCM monitors the generator output voltage and the battery voltage
when the engine is running. If the generator output voltage is more than
18.4 V or the battery voltage is more than 15.9 V, the PCM determines
that the charging system voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between generator terminal 1B and

PCM terminal 2AI
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 AVAILABILITY
available?
ACTION
step.
INSPECT GENERATOR CONNECTOR FOR POOR

2 CONNECTION
Disconnect the generator connector.
corrosion).

3 CONNECTION


INSPECT GENERATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR
Step 6.
Generator and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

generator terminal 1B (wiring
Is the voltage B+?
5
INSPECT GENERATOR
(See GENERATOR INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

6 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.
[13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the generator, then go to the next

step.
(See GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P1260 [13B-MSP]
DTC P1260
Immobilizer system problem

Vehicle with advanced keyless and start system:
The keyless control module detects an immobilizer system
malfunction.
Vehicle with keyless entry system:
DETECTION
CONDITION
The instrument cluster detects an immobilizer system

malfunction.
The DTC is not stored in the PCM memory.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Immobilizer system malfunction

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 AVAILABILITY
available?
ACTION
step.

2
VERIFY STORED DTC FOR IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

Verify stored DTCs.
(See DTC INSPECTION (IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM) [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM].)
Are any DTCs stored?

3 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.
[13B-MSP].)
Perform the KOEO self test.

(See DTC TABLE (IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM)
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM].)
step.

4

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1342 [13B-MSP]
DTC B1342
DETECTION CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
PCM malfunction
Malfunction in the PCM internal circuit.
PCM internal malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 AVAILABILITY
available?
ACTION
step.
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF B1342

2 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.
[13B-MSP].)
Perform the KOEO self test.
present?

step.

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0053 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0053 A/F sensor heater performance fail

If the A/F sensor heater resistance is the specified value or more, or less when the duty value
of the A/F sensor heater control is between 0% and 90%, the PCM detects the DTC P0053.
This is an intermittent monitor (A/F sensor heater, HO2S heater).
DETECTION
CONDITION
the PCM.
drive cycle.
Short to ground or open circuit in A/F sensor heater power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and A/F
sensor terminal C
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
A/F sensor heater related fuse malfunction

Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and A/F sensor
terminal C
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal D and PCM terminal 2BG
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/F sensor terminal D and PCM terminal 2BG
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

RECORDED
recorded?
2

ACTION

the next step.

3 CONNECTION

then go to Step 9.


INSPECT A/F SENSOR HEATER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

(engine off).
No Inspect the A/F sensor heater related fuse.

Repair or replace
the wiring
harness for a
possible short to
ground.

ground.
Is the voltage B+?
Replace the fuse.

Replace the fuse.
Repair or replace
the wiring
harness for a
possible open
circuit.
Go to Step 9.
6 SHORT TO GROUND
ground.

ground.
(See PCM
Go to Step 9.


then go to Step 9.

8 OPEN CIRCUIT
disconnected.


terminal D (wiring harness-side) and PCM
terminal 2BG (wiring harness-side).
9

connectors.
M-MDS.


present?
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0054 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0054 HO2S heater performance fail

If the HO2S heater resistance is the specified value or more, or less when the duty value of the
HO2S heater control is between 10% and 90%, the PCM detects DTC P0054.
This is an intermittent monitor (A/F sensor heater, HO2S heater).
DETECTION
CONDITION
PCM.
drive cycle.
Short to ground or open circuit in HO2S heater power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and HO2S
terminal C
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
HO2S heater related fuse malfunction

Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and HO2S
terminal C
Short to ground in wiring harness between HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 2BE
Open circuit in wiring harness between HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 2BE
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

RECORDED
recorded?
2

ACTION

the next step.

INSPECT HO2S HEATER

then go to Step 9.

INSPECT HO2S HEATER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR

(engine off).

No Inspect the HO2S heater related fuse.
Repair or replace
the wiring harness
for a possible
short to ground.
Measure the voltage between HO2S terminal C

Is the voltage B+?
Replace the fuse.

Replace the fuse.
Repair or replace
the wiring harness
for a possible
open circuit.
Go to Step 9.
6 TO GROUND

ground.
(See PCM
Go to Step 9.


then go to Step 9.
INSPECT HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

8 CIRCUIT


(wiring harness-side) and PCM terminal 2BE
9

connectors.
M-MDS.


present?
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0171 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0171 System too lean

The PCM monitors the short term fuel trim (SHRTFT) and long term fuel trim
(LONGFT) when under closed loop fuel control. If the fuel trim is more than
the specification, the PCM determines that the system is too lean.
DETECTION
CONDITION
Leakage exhaust gas

Leakage fuel
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Engine malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)
DATA (Mode 2)?
ACTION

BEEN RECORDED
been recorded?

the next step.

3 AVAILABILITY

step.

available?

4 DTC
Yes

If misfire DTC is present,

go to Step 9.
If other DTC is present,
go to the appropriate
DTC inspection.

stored DTCs.
(See DTC TABLE [13BMSP].)

No
If drive ability concern is

present, go to Step 9.
If other, go to the next
step.

[13B-MSP].)

go to Step 24.
APP
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
CAUTION:

go to Step 24.

(Mode 2) condition:
[13B-MSP].)
APP
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
7
INSPECT A/F SENSOR

YesInspect for following:

and loosing parts:
From air
cleaner
to
throttle
body
From
throttle
body to
dynamic
chamber
From
dynamic
chamber
and
intake
manifold
Vacuum
hoses
NOTE:
Engine speed may
change when rust
sprayed on the air
suction area.
sensor.
If there is no malfunction detected, go to
the next step.
If there are malfunctions detected, repair
or replace the malfunctioning part, then
go to Step 24.
No Go to Step 9.
INSPECT EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR EXHAUST GAS
8 LEAKAGE
Visually inspect exhaust gas leakage in
the exhaust system.
Is there exhaust gas leakage?

go to Step 24.
No Replace the A/F sensor, then go to Step
24.

9 MAF SENSOR
Start the engine.
YesGo to Step 11.


[13B-MSP].)
quickly according to RPM when the
engine is raced.
Is the PID normal?
10 AIR SUCTION
damaged hoses in the intake-air
system.

go to Step 24.

Step 24.
11

INSPECTION.
Yes

step.
Step 24.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
No Go to Step 13.
12

Visually inspect for fuel leakage in the
fuel system.

go to Step 24.
Step 24.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

high-tension lead using timing light at
idle.
YesGo to Step 17.


condition?
INSPECT HIGH-TENSION LEAD OF NON
15

OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO GROUND

and body ground.

then go to Step 24.
Is the voltage B+?

16

[13B-MSP].)

24.
(See IGNITION COIL
ground.
17


go to Step 24.
Does the AIR system operate properly?

18

[13B-MSP].)

No Go to Step 23.

19

20


to Step 24.

Inspect the ECT sensor and related
harnesses.
(ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
to Step 24.
21

[13B-MSP].)
22
INSPECT OIL PASSAGE


to Step 24.
engine oil passage.
to Step 24.
to Step 24.
23

[13B-MSP].)

24 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.
YesReplace the fuel injector, then go to the

next step.
(See FUEL INJECTOR
step.

DTC present?
25

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0172 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0172 System too rich

The PCM monitors the short term fuel trim (SHRTFT) and long term fuel trim
(LONGFT) when under closed loop fuel control. If the fuel trim is less than
the specification, the PCM determines that the system is too rich.
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Leakage exhaust gas

A/F sensor looseness

Fuel pump speed control malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)
DATA (Mode 2)?
ACTION

BEEN RECORDED
been recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY

the next step.
step.

available?

4 DTC
stored DTCs.
Yes
If misfire DTC is present,

go to Step 8.
If other DTC is present,
go to the appropriate
DTC inspection.
No
If drive ability concern is

present, go to Step 8.
If other, go to the next
step.

[13B-MSP].)

go to Step 11.
APP
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
CAUTION:
(Mode 2) condition:
[13B-MSP].)
APP
ECT
MAF

go to Step 11.
TP REL
VSS
7
INSPECT A/F SENSOR

YesInspect for following:

and loosing parts:

From air
cleaner
to
throttle
body
From
throttle
body to
dynamic
chamber
From
dynamic
chamber
and
intake
manifold
Vacuum
hoses
NOTE:
Engine speed may
change when rust
sprayed on the air
suction area.
Exhaust gas leakage
between exhaust
manifold and A/F sensor.
sensor.
replace the A/F sensor, then go to Step
11.
If there are malfunctions detected, repair

or replace the malfunctioning part, then
go to Step 11.
8

INSPECTION.
INSPECT LONG TERM FUEL TRIM

Access the LONGFT1 PID using the MMDS.
[13B-MSP].)
Compare the LONGFT1 PID with
recorded FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode
12) at Step 2.
Is the LONGFT1 PID above FREEZE
INSPECT FUEL PUMP SPEED CONTROL

10 OPERATION
Perform the Fuel Pump Speed Control
YesReplace the fuel pump unit, then go to

Step 11.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
YesInspect the purge solenoid valve.
If there is any
malfunction, replace the
purge solenoid valve,
then go to Step 11.


11 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.

step.

DTC present?
12

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0420 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0420 Catalyst system efficiency below threshold

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the HO2S and the A/F sensor
output current when the following conditions are met. If the input voltage
change is extremely large compared to the output current change, the PCM
determines that the catalyst system has deteriorated.
Catalyst converter temperature: more than 400 C {752
F}
Engine speed: less than 5,000 rpm
DETECTION
CONDITION
LOAD: 20 50 % (maximum calculated load value varies

depending on engine speed)
Time with purge control system does not operate: more
than 20 s
This is an intermittent monitor (catalyst).
Leakage exhaust gas
Purge control system malfunction

VSS malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

TWC malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

(catalyst related) been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3 STORED DTC
Turn the ignition switch off, then
to the ON position (engine off).
or stored DTCs.
ACTION
and DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS


4

Inspect if the A/F sensor is
loosely installed.
securely?

INSPECT EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR EXHAUST

5 GAS LEAKAGE
Visually inspect exhaust gas
leakage in the exhaust system.
Is there exhaust gas leakage?
INSPECT PURGE CONTROL SYSTEM
6 OPERATION

Step 11.
Step 11.
Does the purge control system

operate properly?
7 OF VSS
Start the engine.
Access the VSS PID using the MMDS.

Step 11.

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Is the PID normal?
8 SENSOR
position sensor.
POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)

then go to Step 11.

9
INSPECT TWC
Inspect the TWC.
(See THREE-WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER (TWC) INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the TWC, then go to Step 11.

(See EXHAUST SYSTEM

10
INSPECT ECT SENSOR

(See ENGINE COOLANT

step.

11 COMPLETED


[13B-MSP].)
the DTC present?
12

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0481 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0481 Cooling fan relay No.2 and No.3 control circuit problem
The PCM monitors the cooling fan relay No.2/No.3 control voltage when the PCM
turns the cooling fan relay No.2/No.3 off. If the control voltage is low, the PCM
determines that the cooling fan No.2/No.3 control circuit voltage is low.
The PCM monitors the cooling fan relay No.2/No.3 control voltage when the PCM
turns the cooling fan relay No.2/No.3 on. If the control voltage is high, the PCM
determines that the cooling fan No.2/No.3 control circuit voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Cooling fan relay No.2/No.3 terminal malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in cooling fan relay No.2/No.3 power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C
and cooling fan relay No.2 terminal A
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C
and cooling fan relay No.3 terminal A
Cooling fan relay No.2/No.3 related fuse malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and
POSSIBLE
Short to ground in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.2 terminal E and
PCM terminal 1N
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.3 terminal E and
PCM terminal 1N
Cooling fan relay No.2/No.3 malfunction
Short to power supply in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.2 terminal E
and PCM terminal 1N
Short to power supply in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.3 terminal E
and PCM terminal 1N
Open circuit in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.2 terminal E and PCM
terminal 1N
Open circuit in wiring harness between cooling fan relay No.3 terminal E and PCM
terminal 1N
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 AVAILABILITY
available?

step.
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.2/NO.3

Remove the cooling fan relay No.2/No.3.
YesRepair or replace the terminal, then go to

Step 9.

INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.2/NO.3 POWER
3 SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND OR
OPEN CIRCUIT
Cooling fan relay No.2/No.3 relay are
removed.
(engine off).
following circuits:
Cooling fan relay No.2
terminal A (wiring
ground
terminal A (wiring
ground
Is the voltage B+?
No Inspect the cooling fan relay No.2/No.3

related fuse.
Repair or
replace
the wiring
harness
for a
possible
short to
ground.
Replace
the fuse.
If the fuse is
deterioration:
Replace
the fuse.
Repair or
replace
the wiring
harness
for a
possible
open
circuit.
Go to Step 9.
4 CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
removed.
following circuits:
terminal E (wiring
ground
terminal E (wiring
ground

Inspect the cooling fan relay No.2/No.3.

6 CONNECTION

detected:
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.
YesReplace the cooling fan relay No.2/No.3,
then go to Step 9.

7 CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for a
Step 9.
removed and PCM connector is
disconnected.
(engine off).
following circuits:

terminal E (wiring
ground
terminal E (wiring
ground
Is the voltage B+?
8 CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
removed and PCM connector is
disconnected.

step.

following circuits:
terminal E (wiring
terminal 1N (wiring
harness-side)
terminal E (wiring
terminal 1N (wiring
harness-side)
9 COMPLETED
connectors.
using the M-MDS.


present?
10

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0661 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0661 SSV solenoid valve control circuit low

The PCM monitors the SSV solenoid valve control voltage when the PCM turns the SSV solenoid
valve off. If the control voltage is less than 5.8 V, the PCM determines that the SSV solenoid
valve control circuit voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION
cycles or in one drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
drive cycle.
SSV solenoid valve connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in SSV solenoid valve power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and SSV
SSV solenoid valve related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and SSV solenoid
valve terminal A
Short to ground in wiring harness between SSV solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2I
SSV solenoid valve malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between SSV solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2I
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
INSPECT SSV SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
Disconnect the SSV solenoid valve connector.


INSPECT SSV SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SSV solenoid valve connector is disconnected.

off).
No Inspect the SSV solenoid valve related fuse.

Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness for a
possible short
to ground.
Measure the voltage between SSV solenoid valve

Is the voltage B+?
Replace the
fuse.
Replace the
fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness for a
possible open
circuit.
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT SSV SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR
5 SHORT TO GROUND
SSV solenoid valve connector is disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between SSV solenoid valve

detected:
ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT SSV SOLENOID VALVE

Inspect the SSV solenoid valve.
(See SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) SOLENOID
VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the SSV solenoid valve, then go to

Step 9.



8 OPEN CIRCUIT
SSV solenoid valve and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between SSV solenoid valve

terminal B (wiring harness-side) and PCM terminal 2I
9



10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0662 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0662 SSV solenoid valve control circuit high

The current in the output driver IC over-current detection circuit above 1.5 A even though the
SSV solenoid valve is ON.
DETECTION
CONDITION
PCM.
drive cycle.
SSV solenoid valve connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to power supply in wiring harness between SSV solenoid valve terminal B and PCM
terminal 2I
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
recorded?

ACTION
the next step.
INSPECT SSV SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
then go to Step 7.
Disconnect the SSV solenoid valve connector.

4
YesReplace the SSV solenoid valve, then go to Step 7.

(See SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV)
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
5

(See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

[13B-MSP].)
then go to Step 7.

SSV solenoid valve and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
(engine off).
Measure the voltage between SSV solenoid
valve terminal B (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
Is the voltage B+?
7

connectors.
M-MDS.


8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2270 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2270 HO2S signal stuck lean

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the HO2S when the following
conditions are met. If the input voltage is less than 0.4 V for 40 s, the
PCM determines that the HO2S signal remains lean.
MAF amount: more than 10 g/s {1.32 lb/min}
Short term fuel trim: 2020%
DETECTION
CONDITION
Long term fuel trim: 5050%

Loose installation of HO2S
Leakage exhaust gas
HO2S malfunction

Leakage fuel
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Engine malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)


HAVE BEEN RECORDED

recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

next step.


4 DTC
or stored DTCs.


5
INSPECT HO2S
Inspect the HO2S.

Exhaust gas leakage
between TWC and HO2S
If there is no malfunction detected, replace
the HO2S.
If there is a malfunction detected, repair or
replace the malfunctioning part according to
Go to Step 21.


Step 21.



Step 21.
Does the AIR system operate

properly?
8

INSPECTION.

No Go to Step 10.

9

fuel system.

Step 21.
21.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

Inspect the blinking condition on
each high-tension lead using timing
light at idle.
YesGo to Step 14.

Do all high-tension leads show

blinking condition?
INSPECT HIGH-TENSION LEAD OF NO
INSPECT IGNITION COIL POWER CIRCUIT
12 FOR OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO GROUND
YesReplace the malfunctioning high-tension lead,

then go to Step 21.

ignition coil terminal C (wiring

possible open circuit or short to ground, then
go to Step 21.
Is the voltage B+?

13

[13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the ignition coil, then go to Step 21.

(See IGNITION COIL
between ignition coil terminal B and ground.
14

[13B-MSP].)

No Go to Step 19.

15

16


Overhaul or replace the engine, then go to
Step 21.
Step 21.
17

[13B-MSP].)

Step 21.
18
INSPECT OIL PASSAGE

metering oil pump and metering oil
nozzle.
YesInspect for leakage and/or clogged in oil

passage at the engine.
Step 21.
No Overhaul or replace the engine, then go to
Step 21.
19

[13B-MSP].)

LEAKAGE INSPECTION.
YesReplace the fuel injector, then go to Step 21.

(See FUEL INJECTOR
the next step.

21 COMPLETED
[13B-MSP].)
DTC present?

22

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2271 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2271 HO2S signal stuck rich

The PCM monitors the input voltage from the HO2S when the following
conditions are met. If the input voltage is more than 0.85 V for 40 s, the
PCM determines that the HO2S signal remains rich.
MAF amount: more than 10 g/s {1.32 lb/min}
Short term fuel trim: 2020%
DETECTION
CONDITION
Long term fuel trim: 5050%

Leakage exhaust gas
HO2S malfunction

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)


HAVE BEEN RECORDED
recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

next step.


4 DTC
or stored DTCs.


5
INSPECT HO2S
Inspect the HO2S.

Exhaust gas leakage
between TWC and HO2S
If there is no malfunction detected, replace
the HO2S.
If there is a malfunction detected, repair or
replace the malfunctioning part according to
Go to Step 10.

INSPECTION.

7 OPERATION
Inspection.
YesReplace the fuel pump unit, then go to Step

10.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
Step 10.
Does the purge solenoid valve work

properly?
8

[13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the fuel injector, then go to Step 10.

(See FUEL INJECTOR

LEAKAGE INSPECTION.

the next step.

10 COMPLETED


[13B-MSP].)
DTC present?
11

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0130 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0130 A/F sensor circuit problem

The PCM monitors the A/F sensor impedance when under the A/F sensor
heater control. If the impedance is more than 500 ohms, the PCM
determines that there is a A/F sensor circuit problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

HAVE BEEN RECORDED


recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

next step.


3 CONNECTION
Disconnect the A/F sensor
connector.

corrosion).
4 CONNECTION


corrosion).
5
INSPECT A/F SENSOR


6 COMPLETED

step.

[13B-MSP].)
test.
DTC present?
7

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0336 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0336 Eccentric shaft position sensor circuit range/performance problem

The PCM monitors the input signal from the eccentric shaft position sensor
when the engine is running. If the input signal is not the proper pulse
pattern, the PCM determines that there is an eccentric shaft position sensor
circuit range/performance problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Eccentric shaft position plate malfunction
Eccentric shaft position sensor connector or terminals malfunction
Eccentric shaft position sensor is dirty
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 BEEN RECORDED

2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION PLATE

plate.
PLATE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)

4 SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
Disconnect the eccentric shaft
position sensor connector.

YesReplace the eccentric shaft position plate,
then go to Step 7.
(See ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION PLATE

corrosion).
5 SENSOR
sensor.
6 CONNECTION
corrosion).

then go to Step 7.


7 COMPLETED


[13B-MSP].)
8

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0562 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0562 System voltage low (KAM)

The PCM monitors the battery voltage when the engine is running. If the
voltage is less than 2.5 V, the PCM determines that the system voltage is
low.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Fuse malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and
PCM terminal 1BA
Looseness of battery positive terminal
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Battery malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and PCM
terminal 1BA
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 BEEN RECORDED
12) been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY
available?
ACTION
12) on the repair order, then go to the next
step.
step.
INSPECT FUSE
Inspect the fuse.
YesIf the fuse is melting:

Replace the suspected
fuse, then go to Step 9.
No Go to Step 5.
INSPECT BATTERY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

4 GROUND
Disconnect the battery positive and
negative posts.
battery positive terminal (wiring
INSPECT BATTERY POSITIVE TERMINAL FOR
5 POOR INSTALLATION
Inspect for looseness of the battery
positive terminal.

possible short to ground or replace the
suspected fuse, then go to Step 9.
No Inspect for continuity between battery
positive terminal and other wiring harness.
Repair or replace the suspected wiring
harness or replace the suspected fuse, then
go to Step 9.
YesConnect the battery positive terminal

correctly, then go to Step 9.

6
INSPECT BATTERY
YesRecharge or replace the battery, then go to

Step 9.
(See BATTERY RECHARGING [13B-MSP].)
[13B-MSP].)

7 CONNECTION

INSPECT BATTERY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Battery positive terminal and PCM
connector are disconnected.
battery positive terminal (wiring
harness-side) and PCM terminal 1BA

step.
9 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.


[13B-MSP].)
10

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2109 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2109 TP sensor minimum stop range/performance problem

The PCM monitors the minimum TP when the closed TP learning is
completed. If the TP is less than 11.5 % or more than 24.3 %, the PCM
determines that there is a TP sensor minimum stop range/performance
problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION

available?
3 SYSTEM OPERATION

to the next step.
Step 6.

4

(See THROTTLE BODY

(See THROTTLE BODY

6 P2109 COMPLETED
(See AFTER REPAIR
Start the engine.
Procedure.
TEST [13B-MSP].)

step.

7

PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2112 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2112 Throttle actuator control system range/performance problem

The PCM monitors the throttle actuator control duty ratio when the engine is
running. If the duty ratio is more than 95 %, the PCM determines that
there is a throttle actuator control system range/performance problem.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
ACTION
available?
3 COMPLETED
[13B-MSP].)

Start the engine.

Procedure.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
4

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0442, P0455, P0456 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0442 EVAP system leak detected (small leak)

DTC P0455 EVAP system leak detected (large leak)
DTC P0456 EVAP system leak detected (very small leak)
DTC P0455, DTC P0442, DTC P0456
The PCM measures the pump load current (EVAP line pressure) after a specified
period has elapsed since the EVAP system is sealed when monitoring conditions
are met. If the load does not reach the reference load value, or the rate of the
load increase is lower than the specification within a specified period, the PCM
determines that the EVAP system has a very small leak.
The ignition switch is turned off.
IAT: 540 C {41104 F}
Battery voltage: 11.020.0 V
Atmospheric pressure: 72 kPa {542 mmHg, 21.33 inHg} or
above
DETECTION
CONDITION
Fuel tank level: 1585%

Time from engine off: more than 6 h.
The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects above malfunction condition in two

DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULT is available.
DTC P0442, P0456
After-market EVAP hardware (such as fuel-filler cap) not conforming to required
specifications.
Small holes or cuts in fuel vapor hoses/tubes (P0442, P0456).
Change over valve stays partially open on closed command.
Damaged, cross-threaded or loosely installed fuel-filler cap.
EVAP system component seals leaking.
Purge solenoid leaking
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
DTC P0455
After-market EVAP hardware (such as fuel-filler cap) not conforming to required
specifications.
Disconnected or cracked change over valve, purge solenoid valve outlet tube, or
EVAP return tube.
Loose, malfunctioning, damaged or missing fuel-filler cap.
Loose fuel vapor hose/tube connections to EVAP system components.
Change over valve stuck open.
Damaged charcoal canister.
STEP
INSPECTION

Have the FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 12) and DIAGNOSTIC
MONITORING TEST RESULTS (EVAP system related) been
recorded?

ACTION
No Record the FREEZE
FRAME DATA (Mode 12)
and DIAGNOSTIC
MONITORING TEST
RESULTS on the repair
order, then go to the
next step.
YesPerform repair or
diagnosis according to
the available repair
information.
If the
vehicle
is not
repaired,
go to
the next
step.
3
VERIFY RELATED PENDING CODE OR STORED DTCs

off).
Verify related pending code or stored DTCs.
Are any other DTCs present?
PRELIMINARY EVAP SYSTEM TEST

Perform the EVAP system leak inspection using the M-MDS.
(See ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
Verify that all PIDs are within the following specifications:
NOTE:
To successfully perform this procedure, all
PIDs must be within specification before
proceeding to the next step.
Select the following items
from the initialization
screen of the M-MDS.
Select Powertrain.
Select Fuel.
Select EVAP Test.
Verify that ECT and IAT
are within the specification
on the confirmation screen.
To successfully perform
this procedure, ECT and
IAT must be within the
specification before
proceeding to the next
step.
The fuel level must be
maintained within 15%
85%. The PCM will cancel
YesGo to the appropriate

DTC troubleshooting.
YesGo to the appropriate
DTC troubleshooting.
the EVAP test If the fuel

level is lower than 15%
or higher than 85%.
Allow the M-MDS to run
the EVAP test.
Are DTCs besides P0455, P0442 or P0456 present?
5
VERIFY EVAP DTCs

Did the M-MDS EVAP test produce DTCs P0455, P0442 or
P0456?
SECONDARY EVAP SYSTEM TEST
Tighten the fuel-filler cap then perform the EVAP system
leak inspection using the M-MDS again.
[13B-MSP].)
Verify that all PIDs are within the following specifications:
NOTE:
To successfully perform this procedure, all
PIDs must be within the specification before
proceeding to the next step.
from the initialization
screen of the M-MDS.
Select Powertrain.
Select Fuel.
Select EVAP Test.
Verify that ECT and IAT
are within the specification
on the confirmation screen.
To successfully perform
this procedure, ECT and
IAT must be within the
specification before
proceeding to the next
step.
The fuel level must be
maintained within 15%
85%. The PCM will cancel
the EVAP test If the fuel
level is lower than 15%
or higher than 85%.
Allow the M-MDS to run
the EVAP test.

No Go to Step 8.
No Fuel-filler cap was not
properly tightened. Go to
Step 11.
Does the M-MDS still indicate that an EVAP system leak

exists?
7
VISUALLY INSPECT COMPONENTS FOR LEAKS
Charcoal canister to EVAP leak detection

pump.
YesRepair or install a new

component if necessary.
Afterwards, verify that
the leak is repaired by
performing diagnostic
Step 8.
Charcoal canister to evaporative emission

valve component.
Visually inspect for cut or loose connections to the fuel vapor

hoses/tubes in the following locations:
Evaporative emission valve component to

the fuel tank (if applicable).
Check for fuel-filler pipe damage.
Is a concern with a hose, tube, connection or valve visually
evident?
8
CALIBRATE THE LEAK TESTER FOR DIAGNOSIS

Verify that the control valve on the panel is in the HOLD
position then open the nitrogen bottle valve.
Connect the vehicle interface hose (part of the SST) to the
SELF-TEST port located on the control panel. Hand tighten
the fitting. (Do not overtighten.)

No Refer to the tester
operators manual for
tester repair instructions.
Turn the control valve to the TEST position; the gauge

should read 331381 mm {1315 in} of water.
NOTE:
If the gauge is not reading in this range,
adjust the pressure by turning the black
knob on the low pressure regulator at the
nitrogen bottle.
After verifying the regulator is properly calibrated, turn the
control valve to the HOLD position.
Verify that the gauge holds pressure and that the flow meter
reads no flow.
Does the gauge hold pressure and the flow meter read no
flow?
9
PRESSURIZE THE EVAP SYSTEM WITH NITROGEN

position.
Remove the fuel-filler cap from the vehicle.
If the fuel-filler cap is not a MAZDA part or
equivalent, replace it.
YesDisconnect the purge

solenoid valve hose (to
intake manifold side),
No Go to Step 11.
NOTE:
INSPECT FUEL-FILLER CAP
AND FILLER NECK
Visually
inspect for
damage,
insufficient
sealing,
rust,
cracks or
warps for
fuel-filler
cap and
fuel-filler
neck
Repair or
replace if
necessary
Connect the receiver assembly (SST: 134-01059) to the
vehicle cap test hose assembly (part of the SST) and the
fuel-filler cap from the vehicle.
Connect the cap adaptor (SST: 134-01058) to the vehicle
cap test hose assembly (part of the SST) and to the fuelfiller neck.
Connect the vehicle interface hose (part of the SST) to the
center fitting of the vehicle cap test hose assembly (part of
the SST).
Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2.
Request PCM on-board device control (Mode 08) using MMDS to close the change over valve.
NOTE:
The change over valve is closed for 10 min
unless either of the following is done:
The engine is started.
The ignition switch is
turned to the off position.
Verify the valve on the nitrogen bottle is still open.
Turn the control valve to the open position and let the
system fill. You should note a drop in the gauge pressure
along with the flow meter being pegged at maximum flow
for several minutes depending on how full or empty the fuel
tank is, and how long it takes to completely fill and
pressurize the evaporative emissions system hoses.
Does the test indicate that a leak exists?

10
LOCATE LEAKAGE POINT

position and the valve on the nitrogen bottle is open.
Connect the 12 volt power connector leads on the smoke
generation unit to the vehicles battery. Make sure to
connect the red lead to the positive (+) terminal or power,
and black lead to vehicles chassis ground.
Request PCM on-board device control (Mode 08) using the
M-MDS to close the change over valve.
YesRepair or install a new

component if necessary.
No Check all EVAP
connections.
Conduct diagnosis of
intermittent concerns,
NOTE:
The change over valve is closed for 10 min
unless either of the following occur:
The ignition switch is
turned to the off position.
Turn the control valve to the open position.
NOTE:
NEVER depress the remote smoke trigger
before opening the nitrogen tank valve and
setting the tester control valve to TEST
Press the remote smoke trigger on the smoke generation
unit and let the system fill with smoke.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to lift the vehicle to
provide sufficient clearance underneath to
conduct a proper visual inspection of the
fuel and EVAP system.
Use a 12-volt, 400,000 candle power spotlight (part #
4410000-100) or equivalent to help locate the smoke.
Is a leak detected?
11


inspection.
No DTC troubleshooting
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2007 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2007 APV stuck closed (No.2)

opened. If the input voltage is less than 1.0 V, the PCM determines that the APV is
stuck closed.
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between APV position sensor No.2 terminal C and
PCM terminal 2AR
Short to ground in wiring harness between APV position sensor No.2 terminal A and
PCM terminal 2AF
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 BEEN RECORDED
been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
available?

Perform the Auxiliary Port Valve (APV)
Control Inspection.
ACTION
to the next step.
Step 9.


4
INSPECT APV MOTOR



connector.

then go to Step 9.

6

POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
INSPECT APV POSITION SENSOR NO.2 CIRCUIT

APV position sensor No.2 connector is
disconnected.
following circuits:
APV position sensor
No.2 terminal C (wiring
ground
APV position sensor
No.2 terminal A (wiring
ground
YesReplace the APV position sensor No.2, then go to

Step 9.
ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
Go to Step 9.
8 CONNECTION


9 COMPLETED
connectors.
using the M-MDS.


present?
10

PROCEDURE.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2071 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2071 SSV stuck closed

The PCM monitors the input signal from the SSV switch when the PCM turns the
SSV solenoid valve on. If the input signal is off, the PCM determines that the SSV
is stuck closed.
DETECTION
CONDITION
SSV control system malfunction
SSV actuator malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
SSV switch connector or terminals malfunction

Short to ground in wiring harness between SSV switch terminal A and PCM
terminal 2AE
SSV switch malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 BEEN RECORDED
12) been recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
available?
INSPECT SSV CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION
ACTION
Perform the Secondary Shutter Valve

(SSV) Operation Inspection.

Step 10.


4
INSPECT SSV ACTUATOR

Inspect the SSV actuator.
(See SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE
(SSV) ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
YesReplace the intake manifold, then go to Step

10.

5

(SSV) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
INSPECT SSV SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR POOR

6 CONNECTION
Disconnect the SSV switch connector.
YesReplace the SSV solenoid valve, then go to

Step 10.

corrosion).
INSPECT SSV SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
detected:
SSV switch connector is disconnected.
ground.
Inspect for continuity between SSV
and body ground.
detected:

circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 10.
INSPECT SSV SWITCH

Inspect the SSV switch.
(SSV) SWITCH INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

9 CONNECTION
YesReplace the SSV switch, then go to Step 10.

SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)

corrosion).
10 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.


[13B-MSP].)
Start the engine and warm up it
completely.
Run the engine at high engine speed
and high load.
present?
11

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0076 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0076 VDI solenoid valve control circuit low input

The PCM monitors the VDI solenoid valve control voltage when the PCM turns the VDI solenoid
valve off. If the control voltage is low, the PCM determines that the VDI solenoid valve control
DETECTION
CONDITION

drive cycle.
VDI solenoid valve connector or terminals malfunction
VDI solenoid valve malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in VDI solenoid valve power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and VDI
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
VDI solenoid valve related fuse malfunction

Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and VDI solenoid
valve terminal A
Short to ground in wiring harness between VDI solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2L
Open circuit in wiring harness between VDI solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2L
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT VDI SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR FOR POOR

2 CONNECTION
Disconnect the VDI solenoid valve connector.


3
INSPECT VDI SOLENOID VALVE

Inspect the VDI solenoid valve.
(See VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR (VDI)
YesReplace the VDI solenoid valve, then go to

Step 8.
INSPECT VDI SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

VDI solenoid valve connector is disconnected.
off).

No Inspect the VDI solenoid valve related fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness for a
possible short
to ground.
Measure the voltage between VDI solenoid valve

Is the voltage B+?
Replace the
fuse.
Replace the
fuse.
Repair or
replace the
wiring
harness for a
possible open
circuit.
Go to Step 8.
INSPECT VDI SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR
5 SHORT TO GROUND
VDI solenoid valve connector is disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between VDI solenoid valve

detected:
ground.
detected:
circuit).
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 8.



7 OPEN CIRCUIT
VDI solenoid valve and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between VDI solenoid valve

terminal B (wiring harness-side) and PCM terminal 2L
8



Is the PENDING CODE same as the DTC present?
9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0077 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0077 VDI solenoid valve control circuit high input

The PCM monitors the VDI solenoid valve control voltage when the PCM turns the VDI solenoid
valve on. If the control voltage is high, the PCM determines that the VDI solenoid valve control
circuit voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION

drive cycle.
VDI solenoid valve connector or terminals malfunction
VDI solenoid valve malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to power supply in wiring harness between VDI solenoid valve terminal B and PCM
terminal 2L
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
repair information.
the next step.
INSPECT VDI SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR FOR POOR

2 CONNECTION
then go to Step 6.
Disconnect the VDI solenoid valve connector.

3
INSPECT VDI SOLENOID VALVE

Inspect the VDI solenoid valve.
(See VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR
(VDI) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
YesReplace the VDI solenoid valve, then go to Step 6.

[13B-MSP].)


then go to Step 6.

VDI solenoid valve and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
(engine off).
Measure the voltage between VDI solenoid
body ground.
Is the voltage B+?
6

connectors.
M-MDS.


Race the engine above 7,650 rpm or more.
present?
7


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0126 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0126 Insufficient coolant temperature for stable operation

The PCM monitors the ECT after the engine start for a certain period. If the
ECT never exceeds 71 C {160 F} when the following conditions are
met, the PCM determines that the coolant thermostat is stuck open.
ECT at engine start: less than 51C {123 F}
Estimated ambient temperature: more than 10 C {14
F}
DETECTION
CONDITION

This is a continuous monitor (thermostat).
VSS malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Coolant thermostat malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

(thermostat related) been recorded?

No Record the FREEZE FRAME

DATA (Mode 12) and
DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING
TEST RESULTS on the repair
order, then go to the next
step.
according to the available
repair information.
If the vehicle
is not
repaired, go
to the next
step.
VERIFY FOR OTHER STORED DTC

Verify for the other stored DTCs.
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS OF VSS

Start the engine.
Access the VSS PID using the M-MDS.

inspection.
malfunctioning part according
to the inspection results, then
go to Step 9.
Is the PID normal?

5
INSPECT IAT SENSOR

(See INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
YesReplace the MAF/IAT sensor,

then go to Step 9.
(See MASS AIR FLOW
(MAF)/INTAKE AIR
[13B-MSP].)
INSPECT ECT SENSOR

YesReplace the ECT sensor, then

go to Step 9.
(See ENGINE COOLANT
[13B-MSP].)
INSPECT COOLANT THERMOSTAT

Inspect the coolant thermostat.
(See THERMOSTAT INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the coolant

thermostat, then go to Step 9.
(See THERMOSTAT
[13B-MSP].)
VERIFY MONITORING CONDITION FOR REPAIR

8 VERIFICATION
Leave the vehicle in a place that is at a
temperature of approx. 25 C {77 F} for
more than 6 hours.
connectors.

malfunctioning part according
to the inspection results, then
repeat this step.
Access the ECT and IAT PIDs using the M-MDS.
Verify that each PID is within following
specifications.
IAT: more than 10 C {14
F}
ECT: less than 51C {123 F}
Are the ECT and IAT PIDs normal?
9
Start the engine and turn off E/L and A/C.

Access and monitor PIDs TH_M (temp unit) and
TH_M_MIN (temp unit) using the M-MDS.
NOTE:
This test requires actual driving.
Chassis roller cannot be used for
this test.
No Replace the PCM, then go to

the next step.
(See PCM
[13B-MSP].)
During the test drive, constant

speed should be maintained,
although 2 or 3 stops during
every 5 min of driving time (e.g.
for traffic signals) is acceptable.
Stopandgo (e.g. in case of
traffic congestion) is not
acceptable during the test period.
Test period depends on ECT at
the engine start. (e.g. if ECT is
10 C {14 F}, monitoring
period is 38 min and ECT is 30
C {86 F}, monitoring period is
8 min)
Verify the PIDs TH_M and TH_M_MIN values.
Is the TH_M value above TH_M_MIN value?
10


inspection.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0301, P0302 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0301 Front rotor misfire detected

DTC P0302 Rear rotor misfire detected
The PCM monitors the eccentric shaft position sensor input signal interval
time. The PCM calculates the change of the interval time for each rotor. If
the change of interval time exceeds the preprogrammed criteria, the PCM
detects a misfire in the corresponding rotor. While the engine is running, the
PCM counts the number of misfires that occurred at 200 eccentric shaft
revolutions and 1,000 eccentric shaft revolutions and calculates the
misfire ratio for each eccentric shaft revolution. If the ratio exceeds the
preprogrammed criteria, the PCM determines that a misfire, which can
damage the catalytic converter or affect emission performance, has
occurred.
DETECTION
CONDITION
This is a continuous monitor (misfire).

The MIL illuminates if the PCM detects the misfire which affects emission
performance in two consecutive drive cycles or in one drive cycle while the
DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
The MIL flashes if the PCM detects the misfire which can damage the
catalytic converter during the first drive cycle. Therefore, PENDING CODE is
not available while the MIL flashes.
PENDING CODE is available if the PCM detects the misfire which affects
emission performance during the first drive cycle.

Fuel injector related wiring harness malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Engine malfunction
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

RECORDED
(misfire related) been recorded?
ACTION
next step.


information.
If the vehicle is
not repaired, go
to the next step.

DTCs.

APP

inspection.

Step 19.
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
CAUTION:
manner.

Step 19.
condition:
APP
ECT
MAF
TP REL
VSS
6

Inspect the eccentric shaft position sensor.
YesReplace the eccentric shaft

position sensor, then go to Step
19.
POSITION SENSOR
INSPECT SPARK PLUG

Inspect the spark plug.
(See SPARK PLUG INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the spark plug, then go

to Step 19.
(See SPARK PLUG
INSPECT HIGH-TENSION LEAD

(See HIGH-TENSION LEAD INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
YesReplace the malfunctioning hightension lead, then go to Step 19.

INSPECT INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM FOR EXCESSIVE AIR

9 SUCTION


10
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR RELATED WIRING HARNESS

Disconnect the fuel injector connector.
Connect the noid light to the fuel injector
connector terminals.
Remove the fuel pump relay.
Inspect the light dim during cranking.
Does the noid light illuminate?
INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT PASSAGE FOR ENGINE

11 COOLANT LEAKAGE
Step 19.
No Inspect for fuel injector related
wiring harness.
If there is any
malfunction,
replace the
suspected wiring
harness, then go
to Step 19.
Perform the ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE

INSPECTION.

Step 19.
(See ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION

[13B-MSP].)

12

(See COMPRESSION INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)

No Go to Step 17.

13

(See METERING OIL PUMP INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

Overhaul or replace the engine,
then go to Step 19.
14


then go to Step 19.
15

(See OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)

then go to Step 19.
16
INSPECT OIL PASSAGE

Inspect the oil pipe between metering oil pump
and metering oil nozzle.
YesInspect for leakage and/or

clogged in oil passage at the
engine.
then go to Step 19.
No Overhaul or replace the engine,
then go to Step 19.
17

INSPECTION.
18

YesReplace the fuel pump unit, then

go to Step 19.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
to the next step.
(See FUEL INJECTOR
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0301 OR DTC

19 P0302 COMPLETED
connectors.
M-MDS.

next step.
(See PCM

Procedure.
present?
20


inspection.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0410, P0411 [13B-MSP]
DTC P0410 Secondary air injection system problem

DTC P0411 Secondary air injection system incorrect upstream flow
The PCM monitors the A/F sensor output current when the secondary air
injection system is operating. If the output current is less than the
specification, the PCM determines that there is a secondary air injection
system problem.
This is an intermittent monitor (AIR system).
DETECTION
CONDITION
Secondary air injection system malfunction
Secondary air injection control valve malfunction
Secondary air injection solenoid valve malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Secondary air injection pump malfunction

Restrict or damaged in exhaust system
Restrict in TWC
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 DATA (MODE 2)
Is the DTC P0410 or P0411 on
FREEZE FRAME DATA (Mode 2)?


MONITORING TEST RESULTS (AIR
system related) been recorded?
3 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
4 STORED DTC
Turn the ignition switch off, then
or stored DTCs using M-MDS.

next step.
YesGo to appropriate DTC troubleshooting
procedure.
Is other DTC present?

INSPECT SECONDARY AIR INJECTION
5 SYSTEM OPERATION
Perform the Secondary Air
Injection (AIR) System Inspection.
Perform the SECONDARY AIR
INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL
VALVE INSPECTION.

Step 8.
(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION

(AIR) CONTROL VALVE
INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID
VALVE INSPECTION.
(AIR) SOLENOID VALVE
INJECTION (AIR) PUMP
INSPECTION.
(AIR) PUMP INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
VISUALLY INSPECT THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
6 PARTS
Is there any deformed exhaust
system part?
7
INSPECT FOR RESTRICTION AT THE TWC

Visually inspect for restriction at
the TWC.
(See THREE-WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER (TWC) INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the suspected part, then go to Step 8.

YesReplace the TWC, then go to the next step.
(See EXHAUST SYSTEM
Is there any restriction at the

TWC?
8 OR P0411 COMPLETED
[13B-MSP].)
If P0410 diagnosis is completed:
Perform the KOER
self test.
(See KOEO/KOER

SELF TEST [13BMSP].)

If P0411 diagnosis is completed:
Perform the
DRIVE MODE 5
(AIR System
Repair
Verification Drive
Mode).
(See OBD-II
DRIVE MODE
[13B-MSP].)
the DTC present?
9

PROCEDURE.
[13B-MSP].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P1686 [13B-MSP]
DTC P1686 Metering oil pump No.2 circuit low input

to OFF. If the input voltage is less than the specification, the PCM determines that the
DETECTION
CONDITION

Short to ground or open circuit in metering oil pump No.2 power supply circuit
metering oil pump No.2 terminal B
Metering oil pump No.2 related fuse malfunction
oil pump No.2 terminal B
Short to ground or open circuit in metering oil pump driver power supply circuit
metering oil pump driver terminal C
Metering oil pump driver related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
oil pump driver terminal C
Short to power supply in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal F and
PCM terminal 1AA
Short to ground in wiring harness between metering oil pump No.2 terminal A and PCM
terminal 1F
Short to ground in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal E and PCM
terminal 1F
Open circuit in wiring harness between metering oil pump No.2 terminal A and PCM
terminal 1F
Open circuit in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal E and PCM
terminal 1F
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
step.

2 CONNECTION

3 POOR CONNECTION


4 PUMP DRIVER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT
Metering oil pump No.2 and metering oil pump driver
off).
Metering oil pump No.2 terminal B
ground
Metering oil pump driver terminal C
ground
Is the voltage B+?

No Inspect the metering oil pump No.2 and
metering oil pump driver related fuse.
Repair
or
replace
the
wiring
harness
for a
possible
short to
ground.
Replace
the
fuse.
If the fuse is
deterioration:
Replace
the
fuse.
Repair
or
replace
the
wiring
harness
for a
possible
open
circuit.
Go to Step 11.
5



6 TO POWER SUPPLY
possible short to power supply, then go
to Step 11.
off).
Measure the voltage between metering oil pump

driver terminal F (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
7 PUMP DRIVER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

possible short to ground following:

and PCM terminal 1F
Inspect the continuity between metering oil pump

driver terminal E (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.

pump driver terminal E
and PCM terminal 1F
Go to Step 11.
YesReplace the metering oil pump No.2, then
go to Step 11.


9

(See METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)

10 PUMP DRIVER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

then go to Step 11.
step.

terminal 1F (wiring harness-side)
Metering oil pump driver terminal E
terminal 1F (wiring harness-side)
11


step.
[13B-MSP].)

12

< Previous Next >

Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P1687 [13B-MSP]
DTC P1687 Metering oil pump No.2 circuit high input

voltage is more than 8 V and the metering oil pump No.2 control signal turned from OFF
to ON. If the input voltage is more than the specification, the PCM determines that the
DETECTION
CONDITION

Short to ground in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal F and PCM
terminal 1AA
Short to power supply in wiring harness between metering oil pump No.2 terminal A and
PCM terminal 1F
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power supply in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal E and
PCM terminal 1F
Open circuit in wiring harness between metering oil pump No.2 terminal A and metering oil
Open circuit in wiring harness between metering oil pump driver terminal F and PCM
terminal 1AA
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
repaired, go to the
next step.

2 CONNECTION


3 POOR CONNECTION


4



5 TO GROUND

a possible short to ground, then go to
Step 10.
Inspect for continuity between metering oil pump

driver terminal F (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
6 PUMP DRIVER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
SUPPLY
off).
Measure the voltage between metering oil pump driver
a possible short to power supply

following:
and PCM terminal 1F
and PCM terminal 1F
Go to Step 10.

YesReplace the metering oil pump No.2,

then go to Step 10.

(See METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

9 PUMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

then go to Step 10.
a possible open circuit, then go to the
next step.
Inspect the continuity between the following circuits:

(wiring harness-side) and metering oil
pump driver terminal E (wiring
harness-side)
Metering oil pump driver terminal F
terminal 1AA (wiring harness-side)
10


step.
[13B-MSP].)

11


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2067 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2067 Fuel gauge sender unit (sub) circuit low input
sender unit (sub) when the engine is running. If the input voltage is less
than 0.78 V and fuel tank level is full, the PCM determines that the fuel
gauge sender unit (sub) circuit input voltage is low.
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Fuel gauge sender unit (sub) malfunction

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
available?
3

CHECK MODE.

to the next step.
Step 5.

4
INSPECT FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT (SUB)

unit (sub).
UNIT INSPECTION.)

5 P2067 COMPLETED
(See AFTER REPAIR
Start the engine.
condition.
test.
[13B-MSP].)
DTC present?
YesReplace the fuel gauge sender unit (sub), then


PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2068 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2068 Fuel gauge sender unit (sub) circuit high input
sender unit (sub) when the engine is running. If the input voltage is more
than 4.9 V and fuel tank level is empty, the PCM determines that the fuel
gauge sender unit (sub) circuit input voltage is high.
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Fuel gauge sender unit (sub) malfunction

PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 HAS BEEN RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
available?
3

CHECK MODE.

to the next step.
Step 5.

4
INSPECT FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT (SUB)

unit (sub).
UNIT INSPECTION.)

5 P2068 COMPLETED
YesReplace the fuel gauge sender unit (sub), then

(See AFTER REPAIR

condition.
test.
[13B-MSP].)
DTC present?
6

PROCEDURE.
(See AFTER REPAIR

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2070 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2070 SSV stuck open

The PCM monitors the input signal from the SSV switch when the PCM turns the
SSV solenoid valve off. If the input signal is on, the PCM determines that the SSV
is stuck open.
DETECTION
CONDITION
SSV control system malfunction
SSV actuator malfunction
SSV switch connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between SSV switch terminal B and body ground
SSV switch malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between SSV switch terminal A and PCM terminal
2AE
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded?

2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
next step.
step.
INSPECT SSV CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION

Perform the Secondary Shutter Valve (SSV)

go to Step 11.

4
INSPECT SSV ACTUATOR

Inspect the SSV actuator.
ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)

INSPECT SSV SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR POOR

6 CONNECTION
Disconnect the SSV switch connector.
YesReplace the intake manifold, then go to

Step 11.
YesReplace the SSV solenoid valve, then go

to Step 11.

INSPECT SSV SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
7 CIRCUIT
SSV switch connector is disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between SSV switch

terminal B (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
8
INSPECT SSV SWITCH

Inspect the SSV switch.
SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
YesReplace the SSV switch, then go to Step

11.
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)



INSPECT SSV SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
10 OPEN CIRCUIT
SSV switch and PCM connectors are
disconnected.

step.
Inspect for continuity between SSV switch

terminal A (wiring harness-side) and PCM
terminal 2AE (wiring harness-side).
11 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.

step.
[13B-MSP].)
Start the engine and warm up it completely.

Run the engine at high engine speed and
high load.
present?
12


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2257 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2257 AIR pump relay control circuit low

The PCM monitors the AIR pump relay control voltage when the AIR pump is not operating. If
the control voltage is less than the specification, the PCM determines that the AIR pump relay
control circuit voltage is low.
This is a continuous monitor (AIR system).
DETECTION
CONDITION
drive cycle.
AIR pump relay terminal malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in AIR pump relay power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and AIR pump
relay terminal D
AIR pump relay related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and AIR pump
relay terminal D
Short to ground in wiring harness between AIR pump relay terminal A and PCM terminal 1G
AIR pump relay malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between AIR pump relay terminal A and PCM terminal 1G
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

BEEN RECORDED
RESULTS (AIR system related) been
recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION

repair information.
next step.
INSPECT AIR PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
Remove the AIR pump relay.
YesRepair or replace the terminal, then go to Step 9.

INSPECT AIR PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

AIR pump relay is removed.
(engine off).
No Inspect the AIR pump relay related fuse.

possible short to
ground.
Measure the voltage between AIR pump

relay terminal D (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
Is the voltage B+?
Replace the fuse.

Replace the fuse.
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT AIR PUMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR

5 SHORT TO GROUND
AIR pump relay is removed.
Inspect for continuity between AIR pump
relay terminal A (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.

Repair or replace the wiring harness for
a possible short to ground.
Replace the PCM (short to ground in
the PCM internal circuit).
[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT AIR PUMP RELAY

Inspect the AIR pump relay.
YesReplace the AIR pump relay, then go to Step 9.


go to Step 9.


8 OPEN CIRCUIT
AIR pump relay is removed and PCM
connector is disconnected.

Inspect for continuity between AIR pump

PCM terminal 1G (wiring harness-side).
9 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.


present?
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2258 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2258 AIR pump relay control circuit high

Detect the 1.5 A or more in the output driver IC over-current detection circuit even though
the AIR pump is not operating.
DETECTION
CONDITION
PCM.
drive cycle.
AIR pump relay terminal malfunction
AIR pump relay malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to power supply in wiring harness between AIR pump relay terminal A and PCM terminal
1G
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

BEEN RECORDED
recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION

repair information.
next step.
INSPECT AIR PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
Remove the AIR pump relay.
YesRepair or replace the terminal, then go to Step 7.

INSPECT AIR PUMP RELAY

Inspect the AIR pump relay.
YesReplace the AIR pump relay, then go to Step 7.


go to Step 7.


AIR pump relay is removed and PCM
connector is disconnected.
(engine off).
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short

to power supply, then go to the next step.
Measure the voltage between AIR pump

body ground.
Is the voltage B+?
7 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.


present?
8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2259 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2259 AIR solenoid valve control circuit low

The PCM monitors the AIR solenoid valve control voltage when the AIR pump is not operating. If
the control voltage is less than 3.5 V, the PCM determines that the AIR solenoid valve control
DETECTION
CONDITION
drive cycle.
AIR solenoid valve connector or terminals malfunction
Short to ground or open circuit in AIR solenoid valve power supply circuit
Short to ground in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and AIR
AIR solenoid valve related fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between main relay terminal C and AIR solenoid
valve terminal A
Short to ground in wiring harness between AIR solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2G
AIR solenoid valve malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between AIR solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2G
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

BEEN RECORDED
recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION

repair information.
next step.
INSPECT AIR SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR FOR

3 POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the AIR solenoid valve
connector.

go to Step 9.
INSPECT AIR SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY

4 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT YesGo to the next step.
AIR solenoid valve connector is
disconnected.
(engine off).
No Inspect the AIR solenoid valve related fuse.

Measure the voltage between AIR solenoid

valve terminal A (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.

possible short to
ground.
Is the voltage B+?
Replace the fuse.

Replace the fuse.
Go to Step 9.
INSPECT AIR SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT

AIR solenoid valve connector is
disconnected.

to ground, then go to Step 9.
Inspect for continuity between AIR solenoid

body ground.
6
INSPECT AIR SOLENOID VALVE

Inspect the AIR solenoid valve.
(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR)
YesReplace the AIR solenoid valve, then go to Step 9.

(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID
VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)

go to Step 9.


8 FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
AIR solenoid valve and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
Inspect for continuity between AIR solenoid

PCM terminal 2G (wiring harness-side).

9 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.


present?
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2260 [13B-MSP]
DTC P2260 AIR solenoid valve control circuit high

Detect the 3 A or more in the output driver IC over-current detection circuit even though the
AIR pump is operating.
DETECTION
CONDITION
PCM.
drive cycle.
AIR solenoid valve connector or terminals malfunction
AIR solenoid valve malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to power supply in wiring harness between AIR solenoid valve terminal B and PCM
terminal 2G
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

BEEN RECORDED
recorded?
2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION

repair information.
next step.
INSPECT AIR SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR FOR

3 POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the AIR solenoid valve
connector.

go to Step 7.
INSPECT AIR SOLENOID VALVE

Inspect the AIR solenoid valve.
(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR)
YesReplace the AIR solenoid valve, then go to Step 7.

(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID

go to Step 7.


6 FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
AIR solenoid valve and PCM connectors are
disconnected.
(engine off).

to power supply, then go to the next step.
Measure the voltage between AIR solenoid

body ground.
Is the voltage B+?
7 COMPLETED
connectors.
the M-MDS.


present?
8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [13B-MSP]
When the customer reports a vehicle malfunction, check the malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) indication and diagnostic trouble code (DTC), then diagnose the malfunction
according to the following flowchart:
If a DTC exists, diagnose the applicable DTC inspection. (See DTC TABLE
[13B-MSP].)
If no DTC exists and the MIL does not illuminate or flash, diagnose the
applicable symptom troubleshooting. (See QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART
[13B-MSP].)
*:
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL), Generator Warning Light, Security Light
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTERMITTENT CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING [13B-MSP]
Vibration Method
If a malfunction occurs or becomes worse while driving on a rough road or when the
engine is vibrating, perform the steps below.
NOTE:
There are several reasons why vehicle or engine vibration could cause an
electrical malfunction. Some of the things to check for are:
Connectors not fully seated.
Wiring harnesses not having full play.
Wires laying across brackets or moving parts
Wires routed too close to hot parts.
An improperly routed, improperly clamped, or loose wiring harness can
cause wiring to become pinched between parts.
The connector joints, points of vibration, and places where wiring
harnesses pass such as through the firewall and body panels are the
major areas to be checked.
Inspection Method for Switch Connectors or Wires
1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (engine off).
NOTE:
If the engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
3. Access the PIDs for the switch you are inspecting.
4. Turn the switch on manually.
5. Shake each connector or wiring harness a bit vertically and horizontally while monitoring the
PID.
If the PID value is unstable, check for poor connection.
Inspection Method for Sensor Connectors or Wires

NOTE:
4. Shake each connector or wiring harness a bit vertically and horizontally while monitoring the
PID.
If the PID value is unstable, check for poor connection.
Inspection Method for Sensors

NOTE:
4. Vibrate the sensor slightly with your finger.
If the PID value is unstable or malfunction occurs, check for poor connection or
poorly mounted sensor or both.
Inspection Method for Actuators or Relays

NOTE:
3. Prepare the output state control function for actuators or relays that you are inspecting.
4. Vibrate the actuator or relay with your finger for 3 s after output state control function is
activated.
If a variable click sound is heard, check for poor connection or poorly mounted
actuator or both, or the relay.
NOTE:
Moving the relays too strongly may result in open relays.
Water Sprinkling Method

CAUTION:
Indirectly change the temperature and humidity by spraying water onto the front of the
radiator.
If a vehicle is subject to water leakage, the leakage may damage the control module.
When testing a vehicle with a water leakage problem, special caution must be used.
If the malfunction occurs only during high humidity or rainy/snowy weather, perform the following steps:
1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2 if you are inspecting sensors or switches.
NOTE:
3. Access the PIDs for sensors or switches if you are inspecting sensors or switches.
4. If you are inspecting the switch, turn it on manually.
5. Spray water onto the vehicle or run it through a car wash.
If the PID value is unstable or malfunction occurs, repair or replace the part if
necessary.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSTIC INDEX [13B-MSP]
Confirm trouble symptom using the following diagnostic index, then go to the applicable troubleshooting chart.
Diagnostic Index
No.
TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
1 Melting of main or other fuses
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
(See NO.1 MELTING OF MAIN OR
OTHER FUSES [13B-MSP].)
2 MIL illuminates
The MIL is illuminated

incorrectly.
(See NO.2 MIL ILLUMINATES [13BMSP].)
3 Will not crank
The starter does not

work.
(See NO.3 WILL NOT CRANK [13BMSP].)
The starter cranks

engine at the normal
speed but the engine
requires excessive
cranking time before
starting.
(See NO.4 HARD TO START/LONG

CRANK/ERRATIC START/ERRATIC
CRANK [13B-MSP].)
4 Hard to start/long crank/erratic start/erratic crank
The battery is in the

normal condition.
5 Engine stalls
After start/at idle
Engine stops
unexpectedly.
(See NO.5 ENGINE STALLS-AFTER

START/AT IDLE [13B-MSP].)
The starter cranks the

engine at normal speed
but the engine will not
run.
6 Cranks normally but will not start
Refer to the symptom

troubleshooting "No.5
Engine stalls" if this
symptom appears after
engine stall.
(See NO.6 CRANKS NORMALLY BUT

WILL NOT START [13B-MSP].)
The fuel is in the tank.

The battery is in
normal condition.
7 Slow return to idle
8 Engine runs rough/rolling idle
The engine takes more

time than normal to
return to idle speed.
The engine speed
fluctuates between the
specified idle speed
and a lower speed,
and the engine shakes
(See NO.7 SLOW RETURN TO IDLE

[13B-MSP].)
(See NO.8 ENGINE RUNS
excessively.
ROUGH/ROLLING IDLE [13B-MSP].)
The idle speed is too

slow and the engine
shakes excessively.
The engine speed
continues at fast idle
after warm-up.
9 Fast idle/runs on
The engine runs after

the ignition switch is
turned off.
10 Low idle/stalls during deceleration
Engine stalls/quits
Acceleration/cruise
The engine stops

unexpectedly at the
beginning of
deceleration or
recovery from
deceleration.
(See NO.9 FAST IDLE/RUNS ON

[13B-MSP].)
(See NO.10 LOW IDLE/STALLS

DURING DECELERATION [13BMSP].)
The engine stops

unexpectedly at the
beginning of
acceleration or during
acceleration.
The engine stops
unexpectedly while
cruising.
Acceleration/cruise
The engine speed

fluctuates during
acceleration or
cruising.
Acceleration/cruise
The engine misses

during acceleration or
cruising.
Acceleration/cruise/deceleration
The vehicle bucks/jerks

during acceleration,
cruising, or
deceleration.
Hesitation/stumble
Acceleration
The momentary pause

at the beginning of
acceleration or during
acceleration.
Surges
Acceleration/cruise
The momentary minor

irregularity in the
engine output.
Acceleration/cruise
The performance is
poor under load (e.g.
power down when
climbing hills).
(See NO.12 LACK/LOSS OF POWERACCELERATION/CRUISE [13BMSP].)
A sound is produced
when the air/fuel
mixture is ignited by
something other than
the spark plug (e.g.
(See NO.13
KNOCKING/PINGING/DETONATIONACCELERATION/CRUISE [13B-
Engine runs rough
11 Misses
Buck/jerk
12 Lack/loss of power
13 Knocking/pinging/detonationAcceleration/cruise
(See NO.11 ENGINE STALLS/QUITS,

ENGINE RUNS ROUGH, MISSES,
BUCK/JERK,
HESITATION/STUMBLE, SURGES
[13B-MSP].)
hot spot in combustion

chamber).
MSP].)
14 Poor fuel economy
The fuel economy is

unsatisfactory.
(See NO.14 POOR FUEL ECONOMY

[13B-MSP].)
15 Emission compliance
Fails emissions test.
(See NO.15 EMISSION

COMPLIANCE [13B-MSP].)
16 High oil consumption/leakage
The oil consumption is

excessive.
(See NO.16 HIGH OIL

CONSUMPTION/LEAKAGE [13BMSP].)
17 Cooling system concerns
Overheating
The engine runs at

higher than normal
temperature/overheats.
(See NO.17 COOLING SYSTEM

CONCERNS-OVERHEATING [13BMSP].)
Runs cold
The engine takes

excessive time to reach
the normal operating
temperature.

CONCERNS-RUNS COLD [13BMSP].)
19 Exhaust smoke
Blue, black, or white

smoke from the
exhaust system.
(See NO.19 EXHAUST SMOKE [13BMSP].)
20 Fuel odor (in engine compartment)
Gasoline fuel odor or

visible leakage.
(See NO.20 FUEL ODOR (IN

ENGINE COMPARTMENT) [13BMSP].)
21 Engine noise
Engine noise from

under the hood.
(See NO.21 ENGINE NOISE [13BMSP].)
22 Vibration concerns (engine)
Vibration from under

hood or driveline.
(See NO.22 VIBRATION CONCERNS

(ENGINE) [13B-MSP].)
23 A/C does not work sufficiently
The A/C compressor

magnetic clutch does
not engage when the
A/C switch is turned
on.
(See NO.23 A/C DOES NOT WORK

SUFFICIENTLY [13B-MSP].)
24 A/C is always on or A/C compressor runs continuously
The A/C compressor

not disengage.
(See NO.24 A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR

A/C COMPRESSOR RUNS
CONTINUOUSLY [13B-MSP].)
25 A/C is not cut off under wide open throttle conditions
The A/C compressor

not disengage under
wide open throttle.
(See NO.25 A/C IS NOT CUT OFF

UNDER WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
CONDITIONS [13B-MSP].)
26 Exhaust sulphur smell
Rotten egg smell

(sulphur) from exhaust.
(See NO.26 EXHAUST SULPHUR

SMELL [13B-MSP].)
27 Fuel refill concerns
The fuel tank does not

fill smoothly.
(See NO.27 FUEL REFILL

CONCERNS [13B-MSP].)
The fuel does not shut
(See NO.28 FUEL FILLING SHUT
18 Cooling system concerns
28 Fuel filling shut off concerns
29 Spark plug condition
30 AT concerns
Upshift/downshift engagement
off properly.
OFF CONCERNS [13B-MSP].)
Incorrect spark plug

condition.
(See NO.29 SPARK PLUG

CONDITION [13B-MSP].)
AT concerns not
related to engine
performance.
(See SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM TABLE
[SJ6A-EL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [13B-MSP]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 MELTING OF MAIN OR OTHER FUSES [13B-MSP]
1 MELTING OF MAIN OR OTHER FUSES

[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
Inspect condition of fuse.
Damaged fuse
MAIN
Related wiring harness

MAIN fuse
FAN1 fuse
FAN2 fuse
Generator
ACC fuse
AIR PUMP fuse
BTN fuse
FAN1
FAN1 fuse

FAN2
FAN2 fuse
ACC
ACC fuse
Starter relay
ST fuse
ST
ST fuse
PCM
AIR PUMP
AIR PUMP fuse

Secondary air injection pump relay
BTN
BTN fuse
ROOM fuse
ROOM
ROOM fuse
PCM
DLC-2
FUEL PUMP FUEL PUMP fuse

Fuel pump relay (low pressure)
IG
IG fuse
Ignition relay
ENGINE fuse
TCM fuse
WIPER fuse
ENGINE
ENGINE fuse
Steering angle sensor (with DSC)
Combined sensor (with DSC)
Coil (immobilizer system)
Seat weight sensor control module
EPS control module

SAS control module
ABS HU/CM (with ABS)
DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
Condenser
PCM
Ignition coil (L/F)
Ignition coil (T/F)
Ignition coil (L/R)
Ignition coil (T/R)
TCM
TCM fuse
TCM
WIPER
WIPER fuse
Windshield wiper and washer switch
Auto light/wiper control module
Windshield wiper motor
IG KEY
IG KEY fuse
Ignition switch
ETV
ETV fuse
Main relay
Drive-by-wire relay
EGI COMP1 EGI COMP1 fuse

SSV solenoid valve
Air solenoid valve
VDI solenoid valve
HO2S heater
Metering oil pump No.1
A/F sensor heater
OCV
EGI COMP2 EGI COMP2 fuse
PCM
Air pump relay
Fuel pump speed control relay
MAF sensor
Metering oil pump driver
EVAP system leak detection pump
VFAD solenoid valve (with VFAD)
EGI INJ
EGI INJ fuse

Fuel pump relay (low pressure)
Drive-by-wire relay
Fuel injector (FP)
Fuel injector (FS)
Fuel injector (RP)
Fuel injector (RS)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

3
DESCRIPTION
WILL NOT CRANK

The starter does not work.
Open starter circuit between ignition switch and starter
TR switch malfunction (AT)
TR switch misadjustment (AT)
Low or dead battery
Charging system malfunction
Starter interlock switch malfunction (MT)
Starter malfunction
Seized or hydrolock engine, flywheel or drive plate (excessive mechanical
loss)
Air mixed in oil passage
Abnormal engine oil condition (viscosity, amount, deterioration)
Immobilizer system and/or circuit malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Immobilizer system operating properly (Key is not registered)

Advanced keyless entry and start system malfunction (if equipped)
WARNING:
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read the following warnings before servicing the fuel system:
Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and
damage. Always keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause
serious injuries or death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes.
To prevent this, always complete BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION and

AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION described in this manual. (See BEFORE
SERVICE PRECAUTION [13B-MSP].) (See AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may
possibly cause damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always
clean quick release connector joint area before disconnecting/connecting,
and make sure that it is free of foreign material.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
NOTE:
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Inspect the advanced keyless entry and

start system and repair or replace according
to inspection result.
The following test should be

performed on the advanced
keyless entry and start
system. If not equipped, go
to the next step.
Start the engine using the mechanical ignition
key.
(See SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX

[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
No
Yes
Both conditions appear:
Does the engine start?

2
Do the following conditions appear?

The engine is not completely
started.
DTC P1260 is displayed.
Go to Step 5.
No
Either or other condition appears:

Are the ignition coil connectors securely

connected to the coil?
Yes
No
Connect the coil connectors securely.

Return to Step 1.
Does the security light flash?
Yes
No
Inspect the instrument cluster and the

related wiring harness.
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION.)
Retrieve any DTCs using the M-MDS.
Yes
Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
(See DTC TABLE (IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM)

Are any of the following DTCs displayed?
(See DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
DTC
Keyless control module:
B1213, B1342, B1600,
B1601, B1602, B1681,
B2103, B2139, B2431,
U1147, U2510
No
Yes

harnesses and connectors.
No
Yes

harnesses and connectors.
No
Yes
No

harness.
Instrument cluster:
B1342, B2477, U1900,
U2516
6
Inspect the following wiring harnesses and

connectors for an open or short circuit:
Between coil terminal A and
terminal 3V *1 , 3F *2
Between coil terminal B and
terminal 3W *1 , 3E*2
Are there any malfunctions?
Inspect the following wiring harnesses and

connectors for an open or short circuit:
Between keyless control
module terminal 3X *1 , 3A *2
and PCM terminal 1AM
Between keyless control
module terminal 3W *1 , 3B *2
and PCM terminal 1AI
Is there continuity between PCM terminal 1B

and the starter relay with the clutch pedal
depressed (MT), P or N position (AT)?
Inspect the following:

Battery connection
Battery condition
Yes
No
Service if necessary.
Repeat Step 9.
Transmission is in P or N
position. (AT)
Clutch is fully depressed. (MT)
Fuses
Are all items normal?
10 Is clicking sound heard from starter relay
when the ignition switch is turned to START?
Yes
Go to Step 15.
No
AT: Go to the next step.

MT: Go to Step 12.
11 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position

(engine off).
Access the TR PID.
Yes
Go to Step 13.
No
Inspect the TR switch is adjusted properly,

inspect for open or short circuit between TR
switch and TCM.
Repair or replace components as required.
Is the TR PID indicated P/N when selecting P

or N position?
12 Inspect the starter interlock switch.
(See STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH
Repeat Step 10.

Yes
No
Inspect the related wiring harnesses.
Is the starter interlock switch normal?

Repeat Step 10.
13 Inspect the starter relay and following

harnesses.
Between starter relay and
PCM
ignition switch
Are they normal?
Yes
No

Repeat Step 10.
14 Inspect the ignition switch and related

harnesses.
(See IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION
[WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM].)
Yes
No
Repair or replace components required.

Repeat Step 10.
Are they normal?

15 Inspect the following harnesses.
battery
Yes
No
Repair or replace as required.

starter
Are they normal?

16 Inspect the starting system.
Yes
No
Yes
Is the engine seized or hydrolock?
No
18 Retrieve any continuous memory DTCs.
Yes
DTC is displayed:
(See STARTER INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)

Is the starting system normal?
17 Inspect for seized or hydrolock engine or
flywheel.
Go to the appropriate DTC

inspection.
Are there any continuous memory DTCs

displayed?

Communication error message is
displayed:
Open
circuit in
wiring
harness
between
main relay
and PCM
terminal
1AW or
1BE
Open
circuit in
wiring
harness
between
main relay
terminal E
and PCM
terminal
1Q
Main relay
is stuck
open
Open or
short
circuit in
wiring
harness
between
the DLC-2
and PCM
terminals
1AM or
1AI
Open or
poor GND
circuit
(PCM
terminal
1A, 1BB,
1AZ, 1BH
or 1BD)
Poor
connection
of vehicle
body GND
19 Retrieve any KOEO DTCs using the M-MDS.
No
Yes
Go to the appropriate DTC inspection.
Are there DTCs displayed during KOEO

inspection?

No
20 Verify test results.
If normal, return to the diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.

If the malfunction remains, inspect the related Service Bulletins and/or On-line
Repair Information and perform repair or diagnosis.
If the vehicle is repaired, troubleshooting is completed.
If the vehicle is not repaired or additional diagnostic information is
not available, reprogram the PCM if a later calibration is available.
Retest.
*1
*2
With advanced keyless entry and start system equipped model.

Without advanced keyless entry and start system equipped model.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.4 HARD TO START/LONG CRANK/ERRATIC START/ERRATIC CRANK [13BMSP]
DESCRIPTION
HARD TO START/LONG CRANK/ERRATIC START/ERRATIC CRANK

The starter cranks engine at the normal speed but the engine requires
excessive cranking time before starting.
The battery is in the normal condition.
Vacuum leakage
Air leakage from intake-air system
Air suction at intake-air system (between MAF sensor and intake ports)
Air cleaner restriction
Improper operation of drive-by-wire control system
Drive-by-wire control system operates in fail-safe mode
Throttle body malfunction (stuck open)
SSV stuck open
SSV solenoid valve malfunction (stuck open)
APV stuck open
APV position sensor No.1, No.2 malfunction
Poor fuel quality
Jet air mixing system malfunction (restriction or leakage in air passage)
Inadequate fuel pressure
Pressure regulator malfunction (integrated in fuel pump)
Fuel injector (FP) (RP) is clogged
Open or short in fuel injector (FP) (RP) control signal circuit

Restriction in exhaust system
Purge solenoid valve malfunction (stuck open)
Improper air/fuel ratio control (abnormal ECT signal to PCM)
Erratic signal from eccentric shaft position sensor
MAF sensor contamination (abnormal signal to PCM)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
MAF sensor improper installation

Low engine compression
Engine internal malfunction
Abnormal engine oil condition (viscosity, deterioration)
Low oil pressure
Excessive fuel pressure
Air mixed in oil line
Leakage or clogging in oil pipe
Leakage or clogging in oil nozzle
Starting system malfunction
Spark leakage from high-tension leads
WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:

STEP
INSPECTION
1 Does the engine

knock/ping/detonate?
RESULTS
Yes
ACTION
Go to the symptom troubleshooting NO.13
KNOCKING/PINGING/DETONATIONACCELERATION/CRUISE.
(See NO.13 KNOCKING/PINGING/DETONATIONACCELERATION/CRUISE [13B-MSP].)
2 Inspect for the following:

Vacuum leak
Proper fuel
quality (e.g.
proper octane,
contamination,
winter/summer
blend)
Blockage at
intake-air system
(between MAF
sensor and
intake ports)
Loose bands on
intake-air system
hoses
Cracks in intakeair system
Air cleaner
restriction
Jet air mixing
system air
passage
(clogging or
leakage)
MAF sensor
installation
No
Yes
No
Repeat Step 2.

3 Turn the ignition switch to the
Retrieve any DTCs using the MMDS.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes

No
Yes
No
If the water temperature gauge is in the normal range but

the ECT PID is not same as the water temperature gauge
reading, inspect the ECT sensor.
Are there any DTCs displayed?

4 Access the ECT PID.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Inspect the readings on both the
ECT PID and the water
temperature gauge on the
instrument cluster readings.
(See ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR

Does the ECT PID indicate the

same temperature as the gauge
readings?
If the water temperature gauge on instrument cluster

indicates the cold range but the ECT PID is normal, inspect
the water temperature gauge.
5 Is the engine overheating?
Yes
Go to the symptom troubleshooting NO.17 COOLING

SYSTEM CONCERNS-OVERHEATING.
(See NO.17 COOLING SYSTEM CONCERNS-OVERHEATING
[13B-MSP].)
No
6 Inspect for cracks on the hightension leads.
Yes
Repair the suspected high-tension leads.

No
Yes
Spark plug is wet or covered with carbon:
Are there any cracks on the hightension leads?

7 Inspect the spark plug
conditions.
(See SPARK PLUG INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
Inspect for fuel leakage from fuel injector.

Spark plug is grayish white:
Inspect for clogging fuel injector (FP) (RP).
Is the spark plug wet, covered

with carbon or grayish white?
No
Install spark plugs in the original positions.

8 Visually inspect the eccentric

shaft position sensor and the
teeth of the pulse wheel.
Are the eccentric shaft position
sensor and the teeth of the pulse
wheel normal?
9 Attempt to start the engine at
part throttle.
Yes
No
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part according to the

inspection results.
Yes
Inspect the Drive-by-wire Control System Inspection.

[13B-MSP].)
Does the engine run smoothly at

part throttle?
No
10 Inspect the fuel line pressure.
Yes

No
Zero or low:
Inspect the fuel pump relay and the fuel
pump circuit.
Is the fuel line pressure correct?
Inspect for clogged fuel line.

If normal, replace the
fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
High:
Replace the fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
11 Is the fuel line pressure held
after the ignition switch is turned
off?
Yes
No

If the fuel injector is normal, replace the

fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
12 Disconnect the vacuum hose
from the purge solenoid valve
and plug the opening end of the
vacuum hose. Attempt to start
the engine.
Yes
Inspect if the purge solenoid valve sticks open.
No
Yes
Replace the MAF/IAT sensor.
Is the starting condition

improved?
13 Inspect the MAF sensor for
contamination.
(See MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)/INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

(IAT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
Is there any contamination?

No
Yes
Replace the suspected part.
No
15 Inspect the starting system.
Yes
(See STARTER INSPECTION

[13B-MSP].)
No
Repair or replace components if required.
Yes
Go to Step 22.
No
Yes
No

inspection results.
14 Visually inspect the exhaust

system part.
system part?
Is the starting system normal?

16 Inspect the engine compression.
[13B-MSP].)
Is it normal?
17 Perform the Metering Oil Pump
Control Inspection.
Does the metering oil pump
control operate properly?
After that overhaul or replace the engine.
18 Check the engine oil condition.
Yes
Is the engine oil low viscosity

and/or is there a gasoline odor?
19 Turn the ignition switch off.

Disconnect the fuel line quick
release connector and install the
fuel gauge to the fuel line.
Replace the engine oil.

No
Yes
No

(See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
NOTE:
If the engine
wont start,
inspect the fuel
line pressure
with the ignition
switch ON while
cranking.
Start the engine and run it at

idle.
Measure the fuel line pressure at
idle.
Is the fuel line pressure correct
at idle?
20 Check the oil pipe between the
metering oil pump and the
Is there air and/or clogging in oil
pipe?

pipe?
22 Perform the Fuel Injector
Yes
Inspect and repair for leakage and/or clogging in the oil

No
Overhaul or replace the engine.
Yes

No
Yes

No

inspection results.
Yes
Inspect the engine oil condition (viscosity, amount

deterioration).
No
Repair or replace the suspected fuel injector.
Does the fuel injector operate

properly?
23 Inspect the fuel injectors.
(See FUEL INJECTOR
Are the fuel injectors normal?
(See FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)

If the malfunction remains, inspect the related Service Bulletins and/or On-line Repair
Information and perform repair or diagnosis.
Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.5 ENGINE STALLS-AFTER START/AT IDLE [13B-MSP]
5
DESCRIPTION
ENGINE STALLSAFTER START/AT IDLE

Engine stops unexpectedly.
No battery power supply to PCM or poor GND
Vacuum leakage
Air leakage from intake-air system parts
Throttle body malfunction (stuck closed)
Poor fuel pressure
Pressure regulator malfunction (integrated in fuel pump unit)
Fuel pump body mechanical malfunction
Fuel pump resister malfunction (open)
Fuel leakage from fuel injector
Fuel injector (FP) (RP) clogging
Jet air mixing system malfunction (restriction or leakage at air passage)
Open or short circuit in fuel pump body and related wiring harness
Improper air/fuel ratio control (abnormal signal from ECT sensor to PCM)

No signal from eccentric shaft position sensor due to sensor, related wire
or wrong installation
Electrical connector disconnected
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Low oil pressure
A/C system operation is improper
Engine overheating
Abnormal engine oil condition (viscosity, amount, deterioration)
Immobilizer system operates properly (Key is not registered)
WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:

STEP
INSPECTION
1 Do the following conditions

appear?
The engine is
not completely
started.
RESULTS
Yes

Go to Step 3.
No

DTC P1260 is
displayed.
2 Does the engine stall after
approx. 2 s after the engine is
started?
ACTION
Yes
No
The immobilizer system is normal.

Go to Step 9.
3 Is the coil connector securely

connected to the coil?
Yes
No
Connect the coil connector securely.

Return to Step 2.
4 Does the security light flash?
Yes
No
Inspect the instrument cluster and the related wiring

harness.
5 Retrieve any DTCs using the MMDS.
Yes
(See DTC TABLE (IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM) [IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM].)

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Are any of the following DTCs
displayed?
DTC
Keyless

No
control
module:
B1213, B1342,
B1600, B1601,
B1602, B1681,
B2103, B2139,
B2431, U1147,
U2510
Instrument
cluster:
B1342, B2477,
U1900, U2516
6 Inspect the following wiring
harnesses and connectors for an
open or short circuit:
Between coil
terminal A and
keyless control
module terminal
3V *1 , 3F *2
Yes
Repair or replace the suspected wiring harnesses and

connectors.
No
Yes

connectors.
No
Yes

Between coil
terminal B and
keyless control
module terminal
3W *1 , 3E*2
Between keyless
control module
terminal 3X *1 ,
3A *2 and PCM
terminal 1AM
Between keyless
control module
terminal 3W *1 ,
3B *2 and PCM
terminal 1AI
8 Does the engine
9 Verify the following:

Vacuum
connection
Air cleaner
element
No air leakage
from intake-air
system
Blockage at
intake-air system
(between MAF
sensor and
intake ports)
No restriction of
intake-air system
Jet air mixing
system passage
(clogging or
leakage)
Proper sealing of
intake manifold
Ignition wiring
MAF sensor
installation
Fuel quality:
proper octane,
contamination,
winter/summer
blend
Electrical
connections
Smooth
operation of
throttle valve
No
Yes
No
Repeat Step 9.

Yes
DTC is displayed:

Communication error message is displayed:

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Inspect for the following:
Open circuit between

main relay and PCM
terminal 1AW and 1BE
Open main relay GND
circuit
The main relay is stuck
open
Open or poor GND circuit
(PCM terminal 1A, 1BB,
1AZ, 1BH or 1BD)
Poor connection of
vehicle body GND
11 Access the APP1 and APP2 PIDs.

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Crank the engine with the
accelerator pedal released.
Are the APP1 and APP2 PIDs
indicating that the accelerator
pedal is in the released position?
No
Yes
No

APP sensor
(See ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
(APP) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Wiring harnesses and connectors between
PCM and APP sensor
PCM terminal 1ALAPP
sensor terminal D
PCM terminal 1AOAPP
sensor terminal F
PCM terminal 1ASAPP
sensor terminal E
PCM terminal 1AJAPP
sensor terminal A
PCM terminal 1APAPP
sensor terminal C
PCM terminal 1AVAPP

sensor terminal B
12 Access the TP REL PID.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes
No

TP sensor


Does the TP REL PID indicate the

closed throttle position?

PCM and throttle body
PCM terminal 2AO
throttle body terminal E
PCM terminal 2AK
throttle body terminal F
PCM terminal 2Pthrottle
body terminal C
PCM terminal 2AL
throttle body terminal D

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes
No

ECT sensor

proper engine coolant
temperature?

14 Attempt to start the engine at

part throttle.
Open or short circuit between ECT sensor

and PCM terminal 2AH or 2AY
Yes

[13B-MSP].)
Does the engine run smoothly at

part throttle?
15 Access the RPM PID.

TEST [13B-MSP].)
No
Yes
No
Does the RPM PID indicate the

engine speed during engine
cranking?
Open or short circuit in eccentric shaft

position sensor
Open or short circuit between eccentric
shaft position sensor and PCM terminal
2AG or 2AP
position sensor harnesses
If the eccentric shaft
position sensor and the
wiring harness are
normal, go to the next
step.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes

No
Yes
If the symptom occurs with the A/C on, go to Step 23.

wheel normal?

18 Is a strong blue spark visible at
each disconnected high-tension
lead while cranking the engine?
If not, go to the next step.

No

Open or short circuit in ignition coil
Open circuit in high-tension leads
Open circuit between ignition coil
connector GND terminal and body GND
Open circuit between ignition switch and
ignition coil
Open circuit between ignition coil terminal
A and PCM terminal 2AT, 2AX, 2AW or
2BA

conditions.
Yes


[13B-MSP].)


No

Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes

No
Zero or low:
20 Perform the Fuel Pump Speed

Control Operation Inspection.
Does the fuel pump speed

pump circuit.

Inspect the fuel pump resister.
fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
High:
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
22 Visually inspect for fuel leakage
at the fuel injector, O-ring and
fuel line.
Yes
No

Is the fuel line pressure held

off?
If the fuel injector is normal, replace the fuel pump unit.


23 NOTE:
The following
test is for stall
concerns with
the A/C on. If
other symptoms
exist, go to the
next step.
Yes
No
If the A/C is always on, go to the symptom troubleshooting

NO.24 A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C COMPRESSOR RUNS
CONTINUOUSLY.
(See NO.24 A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C COMPRESSOR
RUNS CONTINUOUSLY [13B-MSP].)
For other symptoms, inspect the following:
Connect pressure gauges to the

A/C low and high pressure side
lines.
Refrigerant charging amount

Condenser fan operation
Turn the A/C on and measure the

low side and high side pressures.
Are pressures within the
specifications?
(See REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
CHECK.)
between the purge solenoid valve
and intake manifold at the quick
release connector.
Plug the opening end of the
vacuum hose.
Yes
Inspect if purge solenoid valve is stuck open.

Inspect the evaporative emission control system.
No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Start the engine.

Is the engine stall now
eliminated?
25 Perform the Secondary Shutter
Valve (SSV) Operation Inspection.
Does the SSV operate properly?
26 Perform the Auxiliary Port Valve
(APV) Control Inspection.

No

inspection results.
27 Is air leakage felt or heard at

intake-air system components
while racing the engine to a
higher speed?
Yes
Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
No

Yes

No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Visually inspect the exhaust system part.
No
If the engine keeps running:
Does the APV control operate

properly?

pipe?
29 NOTE:
If the engine
stalls in this
step, perform
the FUEL
INJECTOR
INSPECTION.
(See FUEL
INJECTOR
INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
Perform the Fuel Injector
properly?
[13B-MSP].)
Is it normal?

If the engine stalls:
Go to Step 32.

Control Inspection.
Yes
Go to Step 34.
No

inspection results.

32 Inspect the metering oil pump
driver.
DRIVER INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
Yes
No
Replace the metering oil pump driver.

Is the metering oil pump driver

normal?
33 Inspect the metering oil pumps.
Yes

No
Replace the suspected metering oil pump.

(See METERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
Are both metering oil pumps

normal?

Yes

35 Inspect the oil pressure.

[13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No

inspection results.

specification?

Yes
No

(See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-

idle.
MSP].)

idle.
at idle?
37 Check the oil pipe between
oil nozzle.
pipe?
Yes

No

Retest.
*1
*2
With advanced keyless entry and start system equipped module.

Without advanced keyless entry and start system equipped module.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.6 CRANKS NORMALLY BUT WILL NOT START [13B-MSP]
CRANKS NORMALLY BUT WILL NOT START

The starter cranks the engine at normal speed but the engine will not run.
DESCRIPTION
Refer to the symptom troubleshooting "No.5 Engine stalls" if this symptom

appears after engine stall.
The fuel is in the tank.
The battery is in normal condition.
No battery power supply to PCM
Open PCM GND or vehicle body GND
Vacuum leakage
Drive-by-wire control system operates in fail-safe mode (abnormal
accelerator position and TP signal to PCM)
Poor fuel quality
Open or short circuit in fuel pump body and related wiring harness
Fuel pump relay malfunction (stuck open)
Fuel pump mechanical malfunction
Pressure regulator (integrated in fuel pump unit) malfunction
Fuel injector malfunction (leakage, clogging, improper injection amount)
Open or short in fuel injector control signal circuit

Disconnected electrical connector
No signal from eccentric shaft position sensor, related wiring harness or
incorrect installation
Improper air/fuel ratio control at starting (abnormal ECT signal to PCM)
APP sensor malfunction (de-chock control operating due to abnormal
accelerator position signal to PCM)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Low oil pressure
Engine overheating
Immobilizer system operates properly (Key is not registered)
WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Do any of the following

conditions appear?
The engine does
not completely
start.
RESULTS
Yes

Go to Step 3.
No

DTC P1260 is
displayed.
2 Does the engine stall after
approx. 2 s from when it is
started?
ACTION
Yes
No
The immobilizer system is normal.

Go to Step 8.
3 Are the ignition coil connectors

securely connected to the coils?
Yes
No
Connect the coil connectors securely.

Return to Step 2.
4 Does the security light flash?
Yes
No
Inspect the instrument cluster and the related wiring

harness.
5 Retrieve any DTCs using the MMDS.

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes

(See DTC TABLE (IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM) [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM].)
displayed?
DTC
No
Yes

connectors.
No
Yes

connectors.
No
Keyless
control
module:
B1213, B1342,
B1600, B1601,
B1602, B1681,
B2103, B2139,
B2431, U1147,
U2510
Instrument
cluster:
B1342, B2477,
U1900, U2516
Between coil
terminal A and
keyless control
module terminal
3V *1 , 3F *2
Between coil
terminal B and
keyless control
module terminal
3W *1 , 3E*2
Between keyless
control module
terminal 3X *1 ,
3A *2 and PCM
terminal 1AM
Between keyless
control module
terminal 3W *1 ,
3B *2 and PCM
terminal 1AI

Vacuum
connection
Yes
No
Repeat Step 8.
External fuel
shut off or
accessory (such
as kill switch,
alarm.)
Fuel quality:
proper octane,
contamination,
winter/summer
blend
No air leakage
from intake-air
system
Proper sealing of
intake manifold
Ignition wiring
Electrical
connections
Fuses
Smooth
operation of
throttle valve
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Inspect for the following:
Open circuit between
main relay and PCM
terminal 1AW or 1BE
Open main relay GND
circuit
Main relay is stuck open

1AZ, 1BH or 1BD)
Poor connection of
vehicle body GND
10 Access the APP1 and APP2 PIDs.

TEST [13B-MSP].)
No
Yes
No

APP sensor


Are the APP1 and APP2 PIDs

indicating that the accelerator
pedal is in the released position?

PCM and APP sensor
PCM terminal 1ALAPP
sensor terminal D
PCM terminal 1AOAPP
sensor terminal F
PCM terminal 1ASAPP
sensor terminal E
PCM terminal 1AJAPP
sensor terminal A
PCM terminal 1APAPP
sensor terminal C
PCM terminal 1AVAPP
sensor terminal B
11 Access the TP REL PID.

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Does the TP REL PID indicate the
closed throttle position?
Yes
No

TP sensor
PCM and throttle body
PCM terminal 2AO
throttle body terminal E
PCM terminal 2AK

throttle body terminal F
PCM terminal 2Pthrottle
body terminal C
PCM terminal 2AL
throttle body terminal D
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes
No

ECT sensor

temperature?

13 Will the engine start and run

smoothly at part throttle?
14 Access the RPM PID.

TEST [13B-MSP].)

Yes

[13B-MSP].)
No
Yes
No

position sensor
Does the RPM PID indicate the

engine speed during engine
cranking?

2AG or 2AP
position sensor harnesses
If the eccentric shaft
position sensor and the
wiring harness are
normal, go to the next
step.

Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes

No
Yes
No

wheel normal?


connector GND terminal and GND
ignition coil
Open circuit between ignition coils
terminal C and PCM terminal 2AT, 2AX,
2AW or 2BA
conditions.
Yes


[13B-MSP].)


No


Yes
No

inspection results.

Yes

No
Zero or low:
pump circuit.

fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
High:
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
fuel line.
Yes
No


off?


and the intake manifold at the
quick release connector.
Plug the opening end of vacuum
hose.
Yes
Inspect if the purge solenoid valve sticks open

mechanically.
No
Yes
Attempt to start the engine.

Is the starting condition
improved?
23 Inspect the fuel injectors.
(See FUEL INJECTOR

No
(See FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
Are the fuel injectors normal?

[13B-MSP].)
Repair or replace the suspected fuel injector.
Yes
Go to Step 31.
No
Yes
No
Go to Step 27.
Yes
Remove the carbon or foreign material inside the engine

using the carburetor cleaner.
No
Yes
No
Replace the metering oil pump driver.
Is it normal?
25 Apply the engine oil to front and
rear rotors from plug hole
approx. 35 ml {35 cc,
0.110.16 fl-oz}.
[13B-MSP].)
Is it normal?
26 Clean the spark plugs.
Crank the engine.
Does the engine start?
27 Inspect the metering oil pump
driver.
DRIVER INSPECTION [13BMSP].)

Is the metering oil pump driver

normal?
28 Inspect the metering oil pumps.
Yes

No
Replace the suspected metering oil pump.
Are both metering oil pumps

normal?
(See METERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

[13B-MSP].)
Yes


oil nozzle.
pipe?
31 Retrieve any continuous memory

DTCs.

No
Yes

No
Yes
DTC is displayed:

TEST [13B-MSP].)

Are there any continuous memory

DTCs displayed?

Open circuit in wiring
harness between main
relay and PCM terminal
1AW or 1BE
Open circuit in wiring
harness between main
relay terminal E and PCM
terminal 1Q
Main relay is stuck open
Open or short circuit in
wiring harness between
the DLC-2 and PCM
terminals 1AM or 1AI
1AZ, 1BH or 1BD)
Poor connection of
vehicle body GND
No

Retest.
*1
*2
With advanced keyless entry and start system equipped model.

Without advanced keyless entry and start system equipped model.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.7 SLOW RETURN TO IDLE [13B-MSP]
SLOW RETURN TO IDLE
DESCRIPTION
The engine takes more time than normal to return to idle speed.
The thermostat is stuck open
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Throttle body malfunction

Eccentric shaft bypass valve stuck open
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON

[13B-MSP].)
RESULTS
Yes
ACTION
No
Yes
No
Clean or replace the throttle body.

2 Is the throttle body free of
contamination?

[13B-MSP].)
3 Remove the thermostat and inspect

operation.
(See THERMOSTAT
Yes
The ECT and the thermostat are normal.

No
Access the ECT PID using the M-MDS.

(See THERMOSTAT INSPECTION

[13B-MSP].)
Inspect the readings on both ECT PID and the water

temperature gauge on the instrument cluster.
Is the thermostat normal?
If the water temperature gauge on the instrument

cluster indicates the normal range but the ECT PID is
not the same as the water temperature gauge reading,
inspect the ECT sensor.
cluster indicates the cold range but the ECT PID is
normal, inspect the water temperature gauge.
4 Inspect for air leakage from the
intake-air system components while
racing the engine to a higher speed.
NOTE:
Yes
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part according to

No
Inspect the eccentric shaft bypass valve.
Engine speed may

change when rust
penetrating agent
is sprayed on the
air suction area.
Is there air leakage from intake-air
system?
Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.8 ENGINE RUNS ROUGH/ROLLING IDLE [13B-MSP]
DESCRIPTION
ENGINE RUNS ROUGH/ROLLING IDLE

The engine speed fluctuates between the specified idle speed and a lower
speed, and the engine shakes excessively.
The idle speed is too slow and the engine shakes excessively.
Vacuum leakage
Air leakage from intake-air system parts
Air cleaner improper installation
Improper operation of drive-by-wire control system (abnormal signals from
APP sensor, TP sensor and load signal to PCM)
SSV stuck open
SSV solenoid valve malfunction (stuck open)
APV stuck open
Carbon or foreign materials on primary intake port
APV position sensor malfunction
Poor fuel quality
Fuel pump body mechanical malfunction
Fuel line restriction or clogging

Fuel injector (FP) (RP) malfunction (leakage, clogging, improper injector
amount)
Jet air mixing system malfunction (restriction or leakage in air passage)
Improper operation of AIR system
Improper fuel injection control operation (abnormal signals from MAF, ECT
and IAT sensors to PCM)
Damaged or improper installed eccentric shaft position sensor pulse wheel
Disconnected electrical connectors
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Improper load signal input

Engine overheating
Low oil pressure
Excessive engine mechanical loss
Metering oil pump improper operation (in fail-safe mode)
Improper spark plug heat range
Improper ignition timing

WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Does the engine

RESULTS
Yes
ACTION

External fuel
shut off or
accessory (such
as kill switch,
alarm.)
Fuel quality (e.g.
proper octane,
contamination,
winter/summer
blend)
No air leakage
No
Yes
No
Repeat Step 2.
from intake-air
system
Air cleaner
element
(restriction,
improper
installation)
Blockage at
intake-air system
(between MAF
sensor and
intake ports)
MAF sensor
installation
Ignition wiring
Electrical
connections
Fuses
Smooth
operation of
throttle valve
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes

No
Yes



[13B-MSP].)
5 NOTE:
The following
test is for an
No
Yes
No
engine running
at rough idle
with the A/C on.
If other
symptoms exist,
go to the next
step.

CONTINUOUSLY.
Connect the pressure gauge to

the A/C low and high pressure
side lines.
Cooling fans operation

idle.
Turn the A/C switch on.
Measure the low side and high
side pressures.
Are the pressures within the
specifications?
CHECK.)
6 NOTE:
Yes
The following
test is for an
engine running
rough with the
P/S on. If other
symptoms exist,
go to the next
step.

(See ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS.)
No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Go to Step 13.

Retrieve any DTCs for EPS CM.
wheel normal?
8 WARNING:
High-voltage in
ignition system
can cause strong
electrical shock
which can result
in serious injury.
Avoid direct
contact to the
vehicle body
during the rotor
balance test.
No
Yes
Repair the suspected high-tension lead.
No
Yes
No
High-voltage
spark will
negatively effect
the engine
control. To
prevent this, the
high-tension
leads keep away
from sensors
and wiring
harnesses.
CAUTION:
Rotor balance
test can
overheat and
damage the
three-way
catalytic
converter.
Perform the Rotor Balance Test.
Is the engine speed drop value
the same for each rotor?
9 Inspect the high-tension lead for
the rotor where the engine speed
did not drop in Step 8 for cracks.
Are there any cracks on hightension lead?
10 Is a strong blue spark visible
while cranking at each
disconnected high-tension lead
for the rotor where the engine
speed does not drop in Step 8?

ignition coil
terminal A and PCM terminal 2AT, 2AX,
2AW or 2BA
11 Inspect the spark plug for the
rotor where the engine speed did
not drop in Step 8.
Yes

Inspect for fuel leakage from the injector.

Inspect for clogged fuel injector (FP) (RP).

No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes

No
Yes
No
12 Perform the Drive-by-wire Control

System Inspection.
Does the drive-by-wire control
system work properly?



ignition coil
terminal A and PCM terminal 2AT, 2AX,
2AW or 2BA
conditions.
Yes


[13B-MSP].)


No


Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No
Zero or low:

properly?
18 Disconnect the fuel line quick
idle.

idle.

fuel pump unit.

at idle?
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

[13B-MSP].)

High:

(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
fuel line.
Yes
No

Does the fuel line pressure hold

off?


TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes
No

ECT sensor

temperature?


21 Start the engine and run it at

idle.
Yes
Access the LONGFT1 PID.
No
The LONGFT1 PID is out of the specification.

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Measure the LONGFT1 PID at
idle.
Is the PID value between 14%
and +14%?
LONGFT1 PID less than 14% (too

rich):
Inspect the EVAP control
system.
If the
system
is
normal,
go to
Step 27.
LONGFT1 PID more than +14% (too
lean):
Inspect for air leakage at
intake-air system
components.
If the
system
is
normal,
go to
the next
step.
system part.
Yes
Repair or replace the suspected part.

system part?
No

Control Inspection.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Go to Step 32.
No

24 Perform the fuel injector (FP)
(RP) operation inspection.
Are the fuel injectors (FP) (RP)
operating properly?
25 Perform the Secondary Air
Injection (AIR) System
Inspection.
Does the AIR system operate
properly?
[13B-MSP].)
Is it normal?

Control Inspection.
Yes
No

inspection results.

Yes


[13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No

inspection results.

specification?

Yes
No


idle.

idle.
at idle?
oil nozzle.
pipe?
Yes

No

Plug the opening end of vacuum
hose.
Start the engine.
Does the engine condition
improve?
Yes
Check if the purge solenoid valve sticks open mechanically.

Inspect the EVAP control system.
No

Jet air mixing system (clogged or leakage)
Primary intake port (deposited carbon or
foreign materials)
Eccentric shaft position sensor pulse
wheel (damaged, improper installation)

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.9 FAST IDLE/RUNS ON [13B-MSP]
FAST IDLE/RUNS ON
The engine speed continues at fast idle after warm-up.
DESCRIPTION
The engine runs after the ignition switch is turned off.

Throttle body malfunction (stuck open)
POSSIBLE CAUSE

Cruise control system operation improperly
Improper load signal input
STEP
INSPECTION

[13B-MSP].)
Start and warm up the engine to normal
operating temperature.
Is the ECT PID reading between 82
112 C {180234 F}?
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
No
ECT PID is higher than 112 C {234 F}:

Go to the symptom
troubleshooting NO.17 COOLING
SYSTEM CONCERNSOVERHEATING.
CONCERNS-OVERHEATING [13BMSP].)
ECT PID is less than 82 C {180 F}:

Go to the symptom
troubleshooting NO.18 COOLING
SYSTEM CONCERNS-RUNS COLD.
CONCERNS-RUNS COLD [13BMSP].)
Retrieve any DTCs for the PCM, TCM,
ABS HU/CM, DSC HU/CM and the EPS
CM.
Yes

No
3 Access the following PIDs using the MMDS.
Yes

[13B-MSP].)
No
If the ACCS, ACSW PID is not normal:
Inspect the A/C switch, refrigerant

pressure switch, and fan switch,
and related wiring harness for
vibration or intermittent open/short
circuit.
(See PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION

[SJ6A-EL].)
PCM PIDs:
ACCS
If the CPP PID is not normal:
AC_REQ
Inspect the clutch position switch

circuit.
CPP (MT)
CPP/PNP (MT)
If the CPP/PNP PID is not normal:
TCM PID:
Inspect the neutral position switch

circuit.
PNP_TCM (AT)
Are the PID values normal?
If the PNP_TCM PID is not normal:
(See PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION

[SJ6A-EL].)
4 Is there air leakage felt or heard at the

intake-air system components while the
racing engine to a higher speed?
Inspect the TR switch and related

wiring harness for vibration or
intermittent open/short circuit.
Yes
Repair or replace parts if necessary.
No
Drive-by-wire control system

operation
APP sensor
Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.10 LOW IDLE/STALLS DURING DECELERATION [13B-MSP]
10
DESCRIPTION
LOW IDLE/STALLS DURING DECELERATION

The engine stops unexpectedly at the beginning of deceleration or
recovery from deceleration.
Vacuum leakage
Air suction at intake-air system (between MAF sensor and intake part)
Improper operation of drive-by-wire control system (abnormal accelerator
position and TP signals to PCM)
Drive-by-wire control system operates in fail-safe mode (abnormal
accelerator position and TP signal to PCM)
Throttle body malfunction (restriction, stuck closed)
Evaporative emission control system malfunction
Improper operation of fuel cut control
Fuel injector improper operation
Fuel injector malfunction (leakage, clogging, improper injection amount)
Pressure regulator (integrated in fuel pump unit)
Fuel pump mechanical malfunction
Fuel line restriction or clogging
MAF sensor or related circuit malfunction (abnormal signal to PCM)
Brake switch or related circuit malfunction (abnormal signal to PCM)
Neutral/CPP switch or related circuit malfunction (abnormal signal to PCM)

(MT)
TR switch or related circuit malfunction (abnormal signal to PCM from
TCM) (AT)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Low oil pressure
Improper A/C magnetic clutch malfunction
Misfire
Improper operation of torque converter clutch control (AT)
Loose installation of engine mounts
WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Does the engine idle roughly?
RESULTS
Yes
ACTION
Go to the symptom troubleshooting NO.8 ENGINE RUNS
ROUGH/ROLLING IDLE.
(See NO.8 ENGINE RUNS ROUGH/ROLLING IDLE [13BMSP].)
2 Turn off the A/C switch and the

fan switch.
No
Yes
Go to the symptom troubleshooting NO.24 A/C IS

ALWAYS ON OR A/C COMPRESSOR RUNS
CONTINUOUSLY.
Does the A/C magnetic clutch

engage?
3 Does the engine


No
Yes


Proper routing of
and no damage
to vacuum lines
No
Yes
No
Repeat Step 4.
No air leakage
from intake-air
system
Engine mount
installation
condition (loose)
Yes

No

TEST [13B-MSP].)
System Inspection.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No
Yes
No
If the APP1, APP2 PIDs are not normal:

and the intake manifold at quick
release connector.
vacuum hose.
Drive the vehicle.
improve?
8 Access the following PIDs using
the M-MDS.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
APP1
APP2
TP REL

If the TP REL PID is not normal:
MAF
VSS


If the MAF PID is not normal:

If the VSS PID is not normal:
Inspect the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM.
(See ABS HU/CM INSPECTION.)

(See DSC HU/CM INSPECTION.)
the M-MDS.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes
No
If the BOO PID is not normal:

Inspect the brake switch, and related
wiring harness for vibration or intermittent
open/short circuit.
(See PID/DATA MONITOR

INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
If the CPP PID is not normal:
PCM PIDs:
BOO
Inspect the clutch position switch and

related wiring harness for vibration or
CPP (MT)
CPP/PNP (MT)
If the CPP/PNP PID is not normal:
TCM PID:
Inspect the neutral position switch and

related wiring harness for vibration or
PNP_TCM (AT)
If the PNP_TCM PID is not normal:
Inspect the TR switch and related wiring

harness for vibration or intermittent
open/short circuit.

Yes

No
Zero or low:

fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
High:
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Go to step 18.
No
Yes
No

inspection results.

properly?
[13B-MSP].)
Is it normal?
Control Inspection.

Yes


[13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No

inspection results.

specification?
idle.
idle.

Yes
No


at idle?
oil nozzle.
pipe?
18 Inspect the torque converter

clutch control.
Yes

No
Yes

Blockage at intake-air system (between
MAF sensor and intake ports)
(See ROAD TEST [SJ6A-EL].)
MAF sensor installation
Does the torque converter clutch

No

inspection results.

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.11 ENGINE STALLS/QUITS, ENGINE RUNS ROUGH, MISSES, BUCK/JERK,
HESITATION/STUMBLE, SURGES [13B-MSP]
ENGINE STALLS/QUITSACCELERATION/CRUISE
ENGINE RUNS ROUGHACCELERATION/CRUISE
11
MISSESACCELERATION/CRUISE
BUCK/JERKACCELERATION/CRUISE/DECELERATION
HESITATION/STUMBLEACCELERATION
SURGESACCELERATION/CRUISE
The engine stops unexpectedly at the beginning of acceleration or during
acceleration.
The engine stops unexpectedly while cruising.
The engine speed fluctuates during acceleration or cruising.
DESCRIPTION
The engine misses during acceleration or cruising.

The vehicle bucks/jerks during acceleration, cruising, or deceleration.
The momentary pause at the beginning of acceleration or during
acceleration.
The momentary minor irregularity in the engine output.
Drive-by-wire
control system
operates in
brake override
system
Vacuum
leakage
Air leakage
from intake-air
Improper ignition timing control

(abnormal ECT, IAT, MAF and knock
signals to PCM)
Improper fuel injection control (abnormal
MAF, ECT, A/F sensor and HO2S signals
to PCM)
Improper load signal (neutral/CPP switch
(MT), TR switch (AT)) to PCM
Main relay intermittent malfunction
system
Air cleaner
restriction
Air suction at
intake-air
system
(between MAF
sensor and
intake ports)
Improper
operation of
drive-by-wire
control system
(abnormal
accelerator
position and TP
signals to PCM)

Engine internal
malfunction
Abnormal engine oil
condition (viscosity,
deterioration)
Low oil pressure
Excessive fuel injector
Metering oil pump
malfunction
Leakage
or
clogging
in oil
pipe
Throttle body
malfunction
(stuck close)
Improper SSV
operation
Leakage
or
clogging
in oil
nozzle
Improper APV
operation
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Poor fuel
quality
Inadequate fuel
pressure
Improper metering oil pump control

operation
Fuel pump
mechanical
malfunction
Engine overheating
Fuel leakage
from fuel
injector
Fuel injector
clogging
Improper torque converter clutch control

operation (AT)
Fuel line
restriction or
clogging
Improper shift point (AT)
Pressure
regulator
(integrated in
fuel pump unit)
malfunction
Clutch slippage (MT)
Improper A/C system operation
AT malfunction (AT)
Intermittent
open or short in
fuel pump body
circuit
Fuel pump
relay
malfunction
(stuck open)
Restriction in
exhaust system
Purge solenoid
valve
malfunction
Improper
air/fuel ratio
control
MAF sensor
improper
installation
Intermittent
open or short of
MAF sensor, TP
sensor, APP
sensor and VSS
Erratic signal
from eccentric
shaft position
sensor
WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Retrieve any PCM DTC using the

M-MDS.
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to the P2299 troubleshooting procedure. (Drive-by-wire

system operates with brake override system.)

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Is the DTC P2299 presented?
2 Does the engine

No
Yes


Vacuum
connection
Air cleaner
element
No air leakage
from intake-air
system
No restriction of
intake-air system
Blockage of
intake-air system
(between MAF
sensor and
intake ports)
Ignition wiring
Fuel quality (e.g.
proper octane,
contamination,
winter/summer
blend)
MAF sensor
No
Yes
No
Repeat Step 3.
installation
Electrical
connections
Smooth
operation of
throttle valve
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes

No
Yes



[13B-MSP].)
6 CAUTION:
While
performing this
step, always
operate the
vehicle in a safe
and lawful
manner.
When observe
monitor system
status while
driving, be sure
to have another
technician with
you, or record
the data in the
M-MDS using
the PID/DATA
MONITOR AND
RECORD
capturing
No
Yes
No

Inspect if the output signal from the APP
sensor changes smoothly.
If the RPM PID is not normal:
Inspect the eccentric shaft position sensor
and the related wiring harness for
vibration or an intermittent open/short
circuit.
If normal, go to Step 8.
If the VPWR PID is not normal:
Inspect for an intermittent open circuit.
Inspect for an intermittent open circuit of
function and
inspect later.
the MAF sensor and the related wiring

harness.

the M-MDS.

Inspect if the output signal from the TP

TEST [13B-MSP].)
If the O2S11 PID is not normal:
APP1
Inspect the A/F sensor and the related

wiring harness for vibration or an
intermittent open or short circuit or both.
APP2
RPM
VPWR
MAF
Inspect the HO2S and the related wiring

harness for vibration or an intermittent
open or short circuit or both.
TP REL
O2S11
O2S12
VSS
Drive the vehicle while monitoring

PIDs.

7 Inspect the KS.
Yes
No
Replace the KS.

(See KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
Is the KS normal?

wheel normal?
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes

Spark plugs malfunction
Spark plugs heat range

Pulse wheel damaged on eccentric shaft
Open or short circuit on eccentric shaft
position sensor
Open or short between eccentric shaft
position sensor and PCM terminal 2AG
and 2AP
If they are normal, go to
the next step.
No

High-tension leads
Ignition coils or connectors

conditions.
Yes


[13B-MSP].)

Inspect for clogged fuel injector.

No
Install the spark plugs on original positions.


System Inspection.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No
Yes
No

system part.
system part?
inspection results.

Yes

No
Zero or low:
pump circuit.

fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
High:
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
fuel line.
Yes
No


off?


Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes

properly?
17 NOTE:
The following
test is for an
engine stalling
with the A/C on.
If other
symptom exists,
go to the next
step.
No

CONTINUOUSLY.
Connect a pressure gauge to the

A/C low and high pressure side
lines.


low side and high side pressure.
specifications?
CHECK.)
18 NOTE:
The following
test should be
performed for a
symptom with
the cruise
control on. If
other symptoms
exist, go to the
next step.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Inspect the cruise control system.

Is the cruise control system
normal?

properly?
vacuum hose.
Yes
Inspect if the purge solenoid valve sticks open

mechanically.
No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Drive the vehicle.

improve?
22 Inspect the ignition timing.
(See ENGINE TUNE-UP [13BMSP].)
Does the ignition timing operate
properly?
Control Inspection.
[13B-MSP].)
Internal transmission components (AT)

Torque converter clutch control (AT)
Is it normal?
Shift point (AT)

Clutch (MT)
Brake system for dragging
Engine mounts
KS
No

Control Inspection.
Yes
No

inspection results.

Yes


[13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No

inspection results.

specification?
release connector and the release

Yes
No


idle.

idle.
at idle?
oil nozzle.
pipe?
Yes

No

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.14 POOR FUEL ECONOMY [13B-MSP]
14
DESCRIPTION
POOR FUEL ECONOMY

The fuel economy is unsatisfactory.
Contaminated air cleaner element
Poor fuel quality
Fuel pump relay stuck closed
Improper MAF sensor installation
Improper fuel injector control operation (abnormal signals from MAF, ECT,
A/F sensor, HO2S and IAT sensors to PCM)
KS malfunction (abnormal signal to PCM)
Contaminated MAF sensor
Improper engine compression
Low oil pressure

Eccentric shaft bypass valve malfunction (stuck open)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Improper cooling fan control system operation

Thermostat malfunction (stuck open)
Improper engine coolant level
Improper ignition timing
Weak spark
Brake dragging
Insufficient tire pressure
Low tire pressure
Clutch slippage (MT)
Improper ATF level (AT)
Improper A/C operation (A/C cut-off control does not operate)
WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Does the engine

RESULTS
Yes
ACTION
2 Inspect the following:

Air cleaner
element for
contamination
No
Yes
No
Repeat Step 2.
Air suction at
intake-air system
(between MAF
sensor and
intake ports)
ATF level (AT)
Fuel quality
Coolant level
Brake dragging
Tire pressure
Clutch slippage
(MT)
MAF sensor
installation
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes

No
Yes


TEST [13B-MSP].)
No
Inspect for coolant leakage, cooling fan operation or

thermostat operation.
Yes

the PID.
Is the PID within the
specification?
each disconnected hightension

Eccentric shaft position sensor is
improperly installed.
position sensor
2AG and 2AP
inspection results.
If normal, go to the next step.
No

Hightension leads
Ignition coils and connectors

Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Replace the MAF sensor.

7 Inspect the MAF sensor for
contamination.
Is there any contamination?
(See MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)/INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

(IAT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)

the M-MDS.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
No
Yes
No

MAF

O2S11
O2S12
IAT



Inspect the HO2S.
If the IAT PID is not normal:
9 Inspect the KS.

Yes
No
Replace the KS.

Is the KS normal?

system part.
system part?
idle.
Yes
No
Yes
No
Zero or low:
pump circuit.

idle.

at idle?

fuel pump unit.

(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

[13B-MSP].)
High:
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No
Yes
No

inspection results.

properly?
13 Perform the A/C Cut-off Control
System Inspection.
Does the A/C cut-off control
operate properly?
[13B-MSP].)
Is it normal?
Control Inspection.
Yes


[13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No

inspection results.

specification?

Yes
No


idle.

idle.
at idle?
oil nozzle.
Is there air and/or clogging in the
oil pipe?
Yes

No

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.15 EMISSION COMPLIANCE [13B-MSP]
15
DESCRIPTION
EMISSION COMPLIANCE
Fails emissions test.
Vacuum lines leakage or blockage
Cooling system malfunction
Leakage from intake manifold
Exhaust system clogging
Fuel tank ventilation system malfunction
Charcoal canister damage
Air cleaner element clogging or restriction
Throttle body malfunction
Jet air mixing system line blockage
Improper air/fuel mixture ratio control operation
Catalyst converter malfunction
Engine internal parts malfunction
Excessive carbon is built up in combustion chamber
Improper engine compression
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Low oil pressure
WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION

Vacuum lines for
leakage or
blockage
Jet air mixing
system line
blockage
Electrical
connections
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
No
Repeat Step 1.
Proper
maintenance
schedule
followed
Intakeair
system and air
cleaner element
concerns:
obstructions,
leakage or
dirtiness
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes

No
Yes
Go to the applicable symptom troubleshooting.

3 Is any other drivability concern
present?

TEST [13B-MSP].)
(See SYMPTOM DIAGNOSTIC INDEX [13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No
Inspect for coolant leakage, cooling fan operation or

thermostat operation.
Yes
Warm up the engine and run it at

idle.
Verify the ECT PID is correct.
Is the ECT PID correct?
each disconnected hightension

Improperly installed eccentric shaft
position sensor
Damaged trigger wheel on eccentric shaft

position sensor
2AG and 2AP
inspection results.
If normal, go to the next step.
No

Hightension leads
Ignition coil and connector

idle.
Yes
No
Zero or low:

idle.

fuel pump unit.

at idle?
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

[13B-MSP].)

High:
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
7 Inspect for fuel saturation inside

the charcoal canister.
Is there an excess amount of
liquid fuel present in the charcoal
canister?
Yes
Replace the charcoal canister.

No
Inspect the fuel tank vent system.

8 Inspect for restriction and

leakage at the catalytic converter.
Yes
Is there any restriction or

leakage at the catalytic
converter?
[13B-MSP].)
No
Replace the catalytic converter.
Yes
Visually inspect the exhaust system part.
No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Is it normal?
Control Inspection.

Yes


[13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No

inspection results.

specification?
oil nozzle.
Is there air and/or clogging in the
oil pipe?

Yes

No


Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.16 HIGH OIL CONSUMPTION/LEAKAGE [13B-MSP]
16
HIGH OIL CONSUMPTION/LEAKAGE
DESCRIPTION
The oil consumption is excessive.

Air cleaner element malfunction (damage, poor installation)
Improper dipstick
Improper engine oil viscosity
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Engine internal parts malfunction

Improper operation of metering oil pump control system
Oil leakage from lubrication system parts and them joints (oil pump, oil
filter, oil cooler, housing oil nozzle, manifold oil nozzle etc.)
STEP
INSPECTION

External leakage (lubrication
system parts and their joints.)
Proper dipstick
Proper engine oil viscosity
Damaged and/or poor
installation of air cleaner
element
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
No
Repeat Step 1.
2 Perform the Metering Oil Pump Control

Inspection.
Does the metering oil pump control operate
properly?
Yes
Overhaul the engine and repair or replace

the malfunctioning part.
No


Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.17 COOLING SYSTEM CONCERNS-OVERHEATING [13B-MSP]
17
COOLING SYSTEM CONCERNSOVERHEATING
DESCRIPTION
The engine runs at higher than normal temperature/overheats.

Improper coolant level
Blown fuses
Coolant leakage
Excessive A/C system pressure
Improper water/antifreeze mixture
Fans reverse rotation
Cooling air passage to radiator blockage
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Poor radiator condition

Thermostat malfunction
Radiator hose damage
Improper or damaged radiator cap
Cooling fans are inoperative
Coolant overflow system malfunction
Improper tension of drive belt
Drive belt damage
Eccentric shaft bypass valve malfunction (stuck closed)
STEP
INSPECTION

Engine coolant level
Coolant leakage
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
No
Repeat Step 1.
Water and antifreeze

mixture
Radiator condition
Collapsed or restricted
radiator hoses
Radiator pressure cap
Overflow system
Fan rotational
direction
Cooling air passage to
radiator
Fuses
Yes

[13B-MSP].)
No
Yes
Go to Step 5.
No

3 Start the engine and run it at idle
speed.
Turn the A/C switch on and the set
blower fan to any speed.
Does the A/C compressor engage?

Open circuit between A/C relay and
PCM terminal 1I
Seized A/C magnetic clutch
A/C magnetic clutch malfunction
Repair or replace if necessary.
If all items are normal, go to the next step.

4 Start the engine and run it at idle
speed.
Turn the A/C switch on and the set
Yes
No

Refrigerant pressure switch
operation
Measure the voltage at the PCM

terminal 1AU.
A/C switch is stuck open
Is the voltage normal?
Open or short circuit between

refrigerant pressure switch and PCM
terminal 1AU
Open circuit of blower motor fan

switch and resistor (if blower motor
does not operate)
Evaporator temperature sensor and
A/C amplifier
5 Inspect the cooling fan control system
operation.
Yes

No

Yes
No
Replace the drive belt.
Does the cooling fan control system

work properly?
6 Is the drive belt normal?
(See DRIVE BELT
DEFLECTION/TENSION INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
7 Is there any leakage around the heater

unit in the passenger compartment?
8 Is there any leakage from coolant

hoses and/or radiator?
9 Cool down the engine.
(See DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)

Yes
Inspect and service the heater for leakage.
No
Yes

No
Yes
Install the thermostat.
Remove the thermostat and inspect

operation.
(See THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
(See THERMOSTAT
(See THERMOSTAT INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
No

[13B-MSP].)
Inspect the readings on both the ECT
PID and the water temperature gauge
on the instrument cluster.
Is the ECT PID indication the same as
the water temperature gauge readings?
Replace the thermostat.
Yes
No
If the water temperature gauge is in the normal

range but the ECT PID is not the same as the water
temperature gauge reading, inspect the ECT sensor.

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.18 COOLING SYSTEM CONCERNS-RUNS COLD [13B-MSP]
18
COOLING SYSTEM CONCERNSRUNS COLD

The engine takes excessive time to reach the normal operating
temperature.
DESCRIPTION
Thermostat malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Eccentric shaft bypass malfunction (stuck open)

Cooling fan system malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Is the customer complaint "Lack of

passenger compartment heat" only?
2 Does the engine speed continue at fast

idle?
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Inspect the A/C and heater system.
No
Yes
Go to the symptom troubleshooting NO.9 FAST

IDLE/RUNS ON.
(See NO.9 FAST IDLE/RUNS ON [13B-MSP].)
No
3 Inspect the cooling fan control system

operation.
Yes

No

Does the cooling fan control system

work properly?
4 Cool down the engine.
Yes
Install the thermostat.
Remove the thermostat and inspect

operation.
(See THERMOSTAT
(See THERMOSTAT INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
No

[13B-MSP].)
Inspect the readings on both the ECT
PID and the water temperature gauge
on the instrument cluster.
Is the ECT PID indication the same as
the water temperature gauge readings?
Replace the thermostat.
Yes
No
If the water temperature gauge is in the normal

range but the ECT PID is not the same as the water
temperature gauge reading, inspect the ECT sensor.

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.20 FUEL ODOR (IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT) [13B-MSP]
20
FUEL ODOR (IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT)
DESCRIPTION
Gasoline fuel odor or visible leakage.

Fuel tank vent system blockage/restriction or opening
Charcoal canister improper installation
Fuel leakage from fuel system
WARNING:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
1 Inspect for blockage/restriction or opening between

engine vacuum port and charcoal canister.
Yes
Replace the vacuum hose.
Inspect for blockage/restriction or opening in the

fuel tank vent system.
No
Yes
No
Replace the purge solenoid valve.
Yes
No
Is fault indicated?
2 Inspect the purge solenoid valve.
(See PURGE SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
Is the solenoid operating properly?
3 Visually inspect for fuel leakage at the fuel injector,
O-ring and the fuel line.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

Install the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel

pipe and the fuel distributor.
Start the engine and run it at idle.
Measure the fuel line pressure at idle.
Is the fuel line pressure correct at idle?
4 Verify that the charcoal canister is installed properly.
Yes
No
Install the charcoal canister properly.
5 Inspect for air leakage from the charcoal canister.
Yes
(See CHARCOAL CANISTER INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
No
Yes
Is the charcoal canister installed properly?
Is there air leakage from the charcoal canister?

6 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (engine
off).

No
Inspect the charcoal canister for fuel

saturation.
If there is an excess amount of liquid
fuel present, replace the charcoal
canister.

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.21 ENGINE NOISE [13B-MSP]
21
ENGINE NOISE
DESCRIPTION
Engine noise from under the hood.

Squeal, click or chirp noise:
Improper engine oil level
Improper drive belt tension
Rattle sound noise:
Loose parts
Hissing noise:
Vacuum leakage
Loose spark plug
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Air leakage from intakeair system

Improper VFAD control system operation (with VFAD)
Rumble or grind noise:
Improper drive belt tension
Rap or roar noise:
Exhaust system looseness
Other noise:
Oil pump drive gear noise
Oil pump drive chain noise
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Is a squeal, click or chirp

sound present?
2 Is a rumble or grinding
noise present?
3 Is a rattle noise present?
4 Is a hissing noise present?
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Inspect the engine oil level or drive belts.
No
Yes
Inspect the drive belts.
No
Yes
Inspect the location of rattle for loose parts.
No
Yes

Vacuum leakage
Spark plug looseness
Intakeair system leakage
VFAD control system operation (with VFAD)
5 Is a rap or roar noise

present?
6 Is a knocking noise
present?
No
Yes
Inspect the exhaust system for loose parts.
No
Yes

KNOCKING/PINGING/DETONATION-ACCELERATION/CRUISE.
No
If the noise comes from the engine internally, inspect for oil pump
drive gear or chain noise.

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.22 VIBRATION CONCERNS (ENGINE) [13B-MSP]
22
VIBRATION CONCERNS (ENGINE)
DESCRIPTION
Vibration from under hood or driveline.

Loose installation bolts or worn parts
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Components malfunction such as worn parts
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Inspect the following components for loose

installation bolts or worn parts:
RESULTS
Yes
ACTION
Inspect the following systems:
Wheels
Cooling fan No.1
MT
Cooling fan No.2
AT
Drive belt and pulleys
Driveline
Engine mounts
Suspension

No
Readjust or retighten the engine mount

installation position.
Service if necessary for other parts.


Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.23 A/C DOES NOT WORK SUFFICIENTLY [13B-MSP]
23
A/C DOES NOT WORK SUFFICIENTLY

The A/C compressor magnetic clutch does not engage when the A/C
switch is turned on.
DESCRIPTION
Improper refrigerant charging amount

Open A/C magnetic clutch
Open circuit between A/C relay and A/C magnetic clutch
Poor GND of A/C magnetic clutch
Refrigerant pressure switch is stuck open
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
A/C relay is stuck open

Seized A/C compressor
Open circuit between PCM through both refrigerant pressure switch and
A/C amplifier
Open or short circuit between climate control unit and A/C amplifier
Climate control unit malfunction (A/C switch is stuck OFF)
STEP
INSPECTION

RESULTS
Yes


[13B-MSP].)
ACTION
No

2 Disconnect the A/C compressor
connector.
Start the engine and turn the A/C
switch on.
Yes
No
Inspect for GND condition of magnetic clutch on the

A/C compressor.
Is there correct voltage at the

terminal of the A/C compressor
magnetic clutch connector?
If the GND condition is normal, inspect for an open

circuit in the magnetic clutch coil.
Specification
10.5 V or more
3 Disconnect the refrigerant pressure
switch connector.
Connect the jumper wire between the
terminals of the A/C high pressure
switch connector.
Yes
Inspect the refrigerant pressure switch operation.

If the switch is normal, go to the next step.
No
Connect the jumper wires between

the terminals of the refrigerant
pressure switch connector.
Open circuit between refrigerant

pressure switch and PCM terminal
1AU

position.
Open circuit between blower motor

fan switch and A/C amplifier (if
blower motor does not operate)
(Manual air conditioner)
Turn the A/C switch on and set the

Open or short circuit between climate

control unit and A/C amplifier (if
blower motor does not operate) (Fullauto air conditioner)
Does the A/C work?
Evaporator temperature sensor and

A/C amplifier
If there are normal, replace the climate control unit
(A/C switch is stuck OFF).
(See CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].)
4 Remove the jumper wire from the
switch connector.
Reconnect the connector to the
Yes
Inspect whether the A/C relay is stuck open.

Replace if necessary.
refrigerant pressure switch.

Start the engine and turn the A/C
switch on.
Does the fan operate?
No

A/C compressor for seizure

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.24 A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C COMPRESSOR RUNS CONTINUOUSLY [13BMSP]
24
A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C COMPRESSOR RUNS CONTINUOUSLY
DESCRIPTION
The A/C compressor magnetic clutch does not disengage.

A/C compressor magnetic clutch engagement is stuck
A/C relay is stuck closed
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Short to GND between A/C switch and PCM

Short to GND circuit between A/C relay and PCM
A/C relay to magnetic clutch circuit shorted to battery power
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (engine off).
RESULTS
Yes
ACTION
Go to the applicable DTC
inspection.

No
2 Start the engine and run it at idle.
Yes
Turn the A/C switch on.

Remove the A/C relay.
Does the A/C magnetic clutch disengage?
The A/C relay is

stuck closed
Short to GND
circuit between
A/C relay and
PCM terminal 1I
If both items normal, go to the

next step.
No
Inspect if the circuit between A/C

relay and magnetic clutch shorts
to the battery power circuit.
If the circuit is normal, inspect
the magnetic clutch for stuck
engagement or clearance.
3 Disconnect the refrigerant pressure switch connector.
Yes
Inspect for short to GND circuit

between refrigerant pressure
switch and PCM terminal 1AU.
No
Yes
Inspect for short to GND circuit

between A/C amplifier and
refrigerant pressure switch.
No
Inspect for open or short circuit

between climate control unit and
A/C amplifier.
Start the engine and turn the A/C switch on.

NOTE:
The A/C should not work when
disconnecting the connector. If the A/C
remains working, a short to GND circuit
may be present.
Does the A/C remain working?
4 Reconnect the refrigerant pressure switch connector.
Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector.
NOTE:
The A/C should not work when
disconnecting the connector. If the A/C
remains working, a short to GND circuit
may be present.
Does the A/C remain working?
If the wiring harnesses are

normal, replace the climate
control unit (A/C switch is stuck
ON).
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULLAUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)


Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.26 EXHAUST SULPHUR SMELL [13B-MSP]
26
EXHAUST SULPHUR SMELL
DESCRIPTION
Rotten egg smell (sulphur) from exhaust.

Electrical connectors are disconnected or connected poorly
Vacuum lines are disconnected or connected improperly
Improper fuel pressure
Poor fuel quality
WARNING:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
1 Are any drivability or exhaust

smoke concerns present?

Electrical
connections
Yes
Go to the applicable flow chart.

No
Yes
No
Vacuum lines
Repeat Step 2.
Fuel quality
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes

No
Yes
No
Zero or low:

idle.

pump circuit.

at idle?

fuel pump unit.

(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

[13B-MSP].)
High:
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
5 Inspect the charcoal canister for

fuel saturation.
Yes
Is there an excess amount of

liquid fuel present in the
canister?
No
Inspect the fuel tank vent system.

If the fuel tank vent system is normal, suggest trying a
different brand since the sulfur content can vary in
different fuels.
If the fuel tank vent system is not normal, repair or replace
the malfunctioning part according to the inspection results.

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.27 FUEL REFILL CONCERNS [13B-MSP]
27
FUEL REFILL CONCERNS
DESCRIPTION
The fuel tank does not fill smoothly.

Clogged EVAP pipes
Nonreturn valve malfunction
Improper use of fuel nozzle
Inadequate fuel filling speed
WARNING:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION

(engine off).
Yes

No
Yes

2 Remove the fuel-filler pipe.
Make sure the nonreturn valve is installed

properly.
Inadequate fuel filling

speed
Inspect the nonreturn valve operation.

Is the nonreturn valve normal?
No
Nonreturn valve is installed

improperly:
Reinstall the nonreturn valve to the proper
position.
Nonreturn valve does not operate
properly:
Replace the nonreturn valve.

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.28 FUEL FILLING SHUT OFF CONCERNS [13B-MSP]
28
FUEL FILLING SHUT OFF CONCERNS
DESCRIPTION
The fuel does not shut off properly.

Clogged EVAP pipes
Nonreturn valve malfunction
Fuel shut-off valve malfunction
Fuel nozzle malfunction
Fuel nozzle is not inserted correctly
WARNING:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION

(engine off).
Yes

No
Yes

2 Remove the fuel-filler pipe.
Make sure the nonreturn valve is installed

properly.
Inspect the nonreturn valve operation.
Fuel is not inserted

correctly.
Is the nonreturn valve normal?
Inspect fuel shut-off valve.

No
Nonreturn valve is installed

improperly:
Reinstall the nonreturn valve to the proper
position.
Nonreturn valve does not operate
properly:
Replace the nonreturn valve.

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.29 SPARK PLUG CONDITION [13B-MSP]
29
SPARK PLUG CONDITION
DESCRIPTION
Incorrect spark plug condition.

NOTE:
Inspecting the spark plugs condition can determine whether the problem
is related to a specific spark plug or possibly all spark plugs.
Wet/carbon stuck on specific plug:
SparkWeak, not visible
Air/fuel mixtureExcessive fuel injection volume
CompressionNo compression, low compression
Faulty spark plug
Grayish white with specific plug:
Air/fuel mixtureInsufficient fuel injection volume
Faulty spark plug
Wet/carbon is stuck on all plugs:
SparkSpark weak
Air/fuel mixtureToo rich
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
CompressionLow compression
Clogging in intake/exhaust system
Grayish white with all plugs:
Air/fuel mixtureToo lean
WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Remove all spark plugs.

(See SPARK PLUG
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Troubleshooting completed.
No
Specific plug is wet or covered with carbon:

Inspect the spark plug condition.
Specific plug looks grayish white:

[13B-MSP].)
Go to Step 13.
All plugs are wet or covered with carbon:
Is the spark plug condition

normal?
Go to Step 15.
All plugs look grayish white:
Go to Step 26.
2 Is the spark plug wet/covered

with carbon by the engine oil?

following:
Cracked
insulator
Yes
Working up and down inspect all areas related to the oil.
No
Yes
No
Replace the spark plug.
(See SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
Heat range
Air gap
Worn electrode
Is the spark plug normal?
[13B-MSP].)
Yes
Go to Step 10.
No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Is it normal?
Control Inspection.

Yes


[13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No

inspection results.

specification?
release connector and install fuel
gauge to fuel line.
idle.
idle.

Yes
No


at idle?
oil nozzle.
Is there any air and/or clogging
in the oil pipe?
10 Install all spark plugs.

(See SPARK PLUG
Yes

No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Inspect the fuel injector for the following:
Perform the Spark Test at the

suspected faulty rotor.
Is a strong blue spark visible?
(compare with normal rotor.)
11 Perform the Fuel Pump Control
System Inspection.
Does the fuel pump control
system operate properly?

Open or short in injector
Leakage
No
Zero or low:
pump circuit.

fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
High:
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
following:
Heat range
Yes
No
Replace the spark plug.
Air gap
Is the spark plug normal?

Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No
Replace the air cleaner element.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

properly?
15 Is the air cleaner element free of
restrictions?
16 Perform the Spark Test.

Inspect for restrict suspect rotor side fuel injectors.
Is a strong blue spark visible at

each spark plug?
System Inspection.
inspection results.

Yes

No
Zero or low:
pump circuit.

fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
High:
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
19 Perform the Purge Control
System Inspection when the
engine can be started.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Inspect the following PIDs:
Is the purge control correct?

[13B-MSP].)
Is it normal?

ECT
O2S11 (When the engine can be started.)
O2S12 (When the engine can be started.)
MAF
inspection results.

Control Inspection.
No
Yes
No

inspection results.

Yes


[13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No

inspection results.

specification?

Yes
No


idle.

idle.
at idle?
oil nozzle.
in the oil pipe?
Yes

No
26 When the engine cannot be

started, inspect the intake-air
system for air leakage.
When the engine can be started,
perform the Intake Manifold
Vacuum Inspection.
Yes

inspection results.
No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Inspect the following PIDs:

Is air sucked in from the intakeair system?
System Inspection.

ECT
O2S11
O2S12
MAF
Inspect the PCM GND condition.
No
Zero or low:
pump circuit.
fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
High:

(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Input Signal System Investigation Procedure

1. Find an unusual signal. (See Finding unusual signals.)
2. Locate its source. (See Locating the source of unusual signals.)
3. Repair or replace the defective part.
4. Confirm that the unusual signal has been erased.
Finding unusual signals
While referring to ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST, use the PID/DATA monitor and record function to inspect
the input signal system relating to the problem.
1. Start the engine and idle the vehicle. You can assume that any signals that are out of the
specifications by a wide margin are unusual.
2. When recreating the problem, any sudden change in monitor input signals that is not
consciously created by the driver can be judged as unusual.
Locating the source of unusual signals
CAUTION:
Compare the M-MDS monitor voltage with the measurement voltage using the digital
measurement system function. If you use another tester, misreading may occur.
When measuring voltage, attach the tester GND to the GND of the PCM that is being
tested, or to the engine itself. If this is not done, the measured voltage and actual voltage
may differ.
After connecting the pin to a waterproof coupler, confirming continuity and measuring the
voltage, inspect the waterproof connector for cracks. If there are any, use sealant to fix
them. Failure to do this may result in deterioration of the wiring harness or terminal from
water damage, leading to problems with the vehicle.
Hall or piezo-electric type (TP sensor, APP sensor and BARO sensor)
Investigate the input signal system for hall or piezo-electric type
1. When you get an unusual signal, measure the #1 PCM terminal voltage.
If the #1 terminal voltage and the M-MDS monitor voltage are the same,
proceed to the next step.
If there is a difference of 0.5 V or more, inspect for the following points
concerning the PCM connector:
Female terminal opening is loose.
Coupler (pin holder) damage
Pin discoloration (blackness)
Wiring harness/pin crimp is loose or disconnected.
2. Measure the #2 sensor terminal voltage.
If there is a 0.5 V or more difference between the sensor and the M-MDS
voltages, inspect the wiring harness for an open or short circuits.
If the sensor and the M-MDS voltages are the same, inspect for the following
points concerning the sensor connector:
If there are no problems, proceed to next investigation.
Investigate the standard power supply system for hall or piezo-electric type
Confirm that the #3 terminal is at 5 V.
If the measured voltage on the #3 terminal is 5 V, inspect the following

points on the sensor connector.
If there is no problem, inspect for the following:
Female terminal opening loose
If the #3 terminal measures other than 5 V, inspect for the following:
Open or short circuit in wiring harness
Investigate the GND system for hall or piezo-electric type
Confirm that terminal sensor #5 is at 0 V.

If it is at 0 V, inspect the sensor.
If necessary, replace the sensor.
If not, inspect for the following:
Female terminal opening is loose causing an open or
short circuit in wiring harness
Hot wire type (fuel tank level sensor and mass air flow (MAF) sensor)
Investigate the GND system for hot wire type

If it is at 0 V, inspect the sensor.
If necessary, replace the sensor.
If not at 0 V, inspect for the following:
Open circuit in wiring harness
Investigate the input signal system for hot wire type
If there is a difference of 0.5 V or more, inspect for the following points

If the sensor and the M-MDS voltages are the same, inspect the following
Investigate the electrical supply system for hot wire type
Confirm that the sensor #3 terminal is B+.

If the measured voltage on the #3 terminal is B+, inspect the following
points on the sensor connector.
If there is no problem, inspect for the following:
If the #3 terminal measures other than B+, inspect the following:
Thermistor type (IAT sensor and ECT sensor)
Investigate the input signal system for thermistor type
If there is a difference of 0.5 V or more, inspect the following points
Female terminal opening loose
If the sensor and the M-MDS voltages are the same, inspect the following
Investigate the GND system for thermistor type

If it is at 0 V, inspect the sensor. If necessary, replace the sensor.
If not, inspect for the following:
Open circuit in wiring harness
Main Relay Operation Inspection

1. Verify that the main relay clicks when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and off.
If there is no operation sound, inspect the following:
Main relay (See RELAY INSPECTION.)
Wiring harness and connector between battery and main relay
terminal A.
Wiring harness and connector between PCM terminal 1AW,
1BE and main relay terminal C.
Wiring harness and connector between PCM terminal 1Q and
main relay terminal E.
Wiring harness and connector between PCM terminal 1AY and
engine fuse.
Intake Manifold Vacuum Inspection

1. Verify air intake hoses are installed properly.
2. Start the engine and run it at idle.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose between the intake manifold and purge solenoid valve from the
intake manifold side.
4. Connect a vacuum gauge to the intake manifold and measure the intake manifold vacuum.
If not as specified, inspect the following:
Air suction at throttle body and intake manifold installation
points
Fuel injector insulator

Engine compression
Specification
MT: 66.756.0 kPa {500421 mmHg, 19.616.6 inHg}
AT: 66.953.1 kPa {501399 mmHg, 19.715.7 inHg}
NOTE:
Air suction can be located by engine speed change when lubricant is sprayed on
the area where suction is occurring.
Drive-by-wire Control System Inspection
Engine coolant temperature compensation inspection

2. Select the following PIDs:
ECT
IAT
RPM
3. Verify that the engine is cold, then start the engine.
4. Verify that the engine speed decreases as the engine warms up.
If the engine speed does not decrease or decreases slowly, inspect the
following:
ECT sensor and related wiring harness
Throttle body and related wiring harness
(See THROTTLE BODY INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Load compensation inspection
1. Start the engine and run it at idle.

3. Verify that P0506 or P0507 is not displayed.
If P0506 or P0507 are displayed, perform DTC inspection.
4. Select the RPM PID.
NOTE:
Excludes temporary idle speed drop just after the loads are turned on.
5. Verify that the engine speed is within the specification under each load condition.
If load condition is not as specified, inspect the following:
TR switch (AT)
(See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Neutral switch/CPP switch (MT)
(See NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
(See CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
Climate control unit (A/C switch and blower fan switch)
(See CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
(See CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].)
A/C amplifier
(See A/C AMPLIFIER INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
(See A/C AMPLIFIER INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].)
CAN signal and related wiring harness (P/S operation signal)
Charging system (battery and generator)
(See BATTERY INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
(See GENERATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Standard
Idling speed (rpm)
N, D, R position (AT), Neutral position (MT)

Load status
AT
MT
N position D position R position
No load
760860 760860 760860 770870
Electrical loads on*1 780880 760860 740840 760860

A/C on
780880 760860 750850 760860
(standard)
A/C on (standard)+
electrical loads
A/C on
(heavy load)
on*1
780880 760860 750850 790890
800900 780880 780880 790890
*1
The headlight, rear window defroster, blower fan (2-step or more) are on.
Throttle position (TP) sweep inspection

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Verify that none of the following DTC are displayed:
P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P2101, P2107, P2108, P2109, P2112, P2119,
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138
If any one DTC is displayed, perform DTC inspection.
4. Access the TP REL PID.
5. Verify that the PID reading is within the CTP value. (See PCM INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
If the PID reading is out of range, perform the following:
Remove the air duct from throttle valve body.
Verify that the throttle valve opens when accelerator pedal is

depressed.
If the throttle valve opens, inspect the throttle
position sensor and the related wiring
harness.
If the throttle valve does not open, inspect
the throttle actuator control motor and the
6. Gradually depress the throttle pedal and verify that the PID reading increases lineally.
If the PID reading drops momentarily, inspect the following:
TP sensor
7. Fully depress the throttle pedal and verify that the PID reading is within the WOT value. (See
PCM INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
If the PID reading is out of range, perform the following:
Remove the air duct from throttle valve body.
Verify that the throttle valve opens when throttle pedal is
depressed.
If the throttle valve opens, inspect the throttle
position sensor and the related wiring
harness.
If the throttle valve does not open, inspect
the throttle actuator control motor and the
Brake override system operation inspection
NOTE:
If the brake override system operates normally after performing the following inspection,
the PCM detects DTC P2299.
1. Start the engine and idle it.
2. Verify that the engine speed is approx.1,200 rpm (MT)/ idle speed (AT) while the all of the
following conditions are met.
Neutral or CPP switch ON (MT)
P, or N position (AT)
Engine speed is above 1,200 rpm while not idling.
Brake pedal is depressed.
If the engine speed is approx.1,200 rpm (MT)/ idle speed

(AT), clear the PCM DTC using the M-MDS. (System operation
is normal.)
If the engine speed is not approx.1,200 rpm (MT)/ idle speed
(AT), inspect the following:
APP sensor
(See ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Neutral switch (MT)
Clutch switch (MT)
(See CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
TR switch (AT)
(See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
Brake switch (No.1 signal)
Brake switch (No.2 signal)
Communication between PCM and TCM (AT)
(See FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.13 KNOCKING/PINGING/DETONATION-ACCELERATION/CRUISE [13B-MSP]
13
DESCRIPTION
KNOCKING/PINGING/DETONATIONACCELERATION/CRUISE
A sound is produced when the air/fuel mixture is ignited by something
other than the spark plug (e.g. hot spot in combustion chamber).
Air suction at intake-air system
Poor fuel quality
Fuel pump relay stuck closed
Fuel injector malfunction (clogging, lack of injection amount)
Improper ignition timing control (ECT, IAT, MAF and knock signals to PCM)
Incorrect spark plug heat range
Improper operation of eccentric shaft bypass valve
Engine overheating due to cooling system malfunction
Excessive carbon is built up in combustion chamber
Inadequate engine compression
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Low oil pressure

Air mixed in oil malfunction

WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Inspect air suction between MAF

sensor and intake-port.
Is there any air suction?
TEST [13B-MSP].)
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Repair or replace the air suction at the intake-air system.
No
Yes
No
Inspect the cooling system for the cause of overheating.
Yes
Verify that the ECT PID is less

than 116 C {241 F} during
driving.
Is the ECT PID less than the
specification?
3 Access the IAT and the MAF
PIDs.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
No
If the IAT PID is not normal:

Monitor each PID.

Are PIDs normal?


TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes

No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes

6 Is the strong blue spark visible at

position sensor
2AG and 2AP
If they are normal, go to the next step.
No

High-tension leads
7 Inspect the KS.

Yes
No
Replace the KS.

Is the KS normal?

[13B-MSP].)
Yes
Go to Step 14.
No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Is it normal?
Control Inspection.

Yes


[13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No

inspection results.

specification?

Yes
No

(See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-

idle.
MSP].)

idle.
at idle?
oil nozzle.
in the oil pipe?

idle.
Yes

No
Yes
No
Zero or low:
pump circuit.

idle.

at idle?

fuel pump unit.

(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

[13B-MSP].)
High:
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT

properly?
Yes
No

inspection results.
16 Inspect the ignition timing.

(See ENGINE TUNE-UP [13BMSP].)
Does the ignition timing operate
properly?
Yes
Inspect the eccentric bypass valve operation and carbon

build-up in the combustion chamber.
No

inspection results.

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.19 EXHAUST SMOKE [13B-MSP]
19
DESCRIPTION
EXHAUST SMOKE
Blue, black, or white smoke from the exhaust system.
Pale smoke from tailpipe (Engine oil is being burned)
Oil leakage from oil seal into combustion chamber
Oil seal
Engine oil entering combustion chamber through intake port
Oil reaching intake-air system
Increase in oil pan internal pressure
Excessive engine oil
Excessive engine oil supply to combustion chamber through oil discharge
hole (metering oil pump malfunction)
Metering oil tube internal pressure is high (exceeds oil
nozzle valve opening pressure)
Metering oil pump malfunction (stuck
plunger, internal circuit disabled)
Metering oil pump circuit malfunction
(open/short circuits)
(improper characteristics, internal circuit
disabled)
Oil pressure sensor circuit malfunction
(open/short circuits)
OCV malfunction (stuck open, not
operating smoothly)
OCV circuit malfunction (short circuit)
Metering oil pump drive voltage is low

OCV drive voltage is low
Oil nozzle valve opening pressure is low
Oil nozzle malfunction (spring force low,
foreign material trapped)
White smoke from tailpipe (engine coolant leakage into
combustion chamber)
Cooling system malfunction
Engine coolant leakage inside engine
Black smoke from tailpipe (concentrated fuel)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Air cleaner clogging

Intake-air system clogging or perforation
Fuel pressure is high
Engine compression pressure is low
Engine oil (soiling or improper amount/viscosity/type)
Oil pressure is low
Fuel pressure is high
Pressure regulator malfunction
Air penetrating into oil passages
Oil pipe clogging or perforation
Oil nozzle clogging
Fuel injector (leakage)
WARNING:
The following diagnostic procedure includes fuel system related servicing.
Always make sure to follow the warnings for each procedure when
inspecting or repairing the fuel system.
Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can very easily ignite and
cause serious injury or death, and damage to equipment.
Always keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
Fuel line spills and leakage from the pressurized fuel
system are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious
injury or death, and damage to equipment. Fuel can also

irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always execute the
Fuel Line Inspection. (See BEFORE SERVICE
PRECAUTION [13B-MSP].)
Fuel is highly flammable and dangerous. Fuel line spills
and leakage can cause serious injury or death, and
damage to equipment. Always refer to the Quick Release
Connector Removal/Installation before performing the
fuel pump unit installation, and execute the Fuel
Leakage Inspection After Fuel Pump Unit Installation
after installation. (See QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].) (See AFTER
SERVICE PRECAUTION [13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
Foreign material on the connecting area of the quick release connector
might cause damage to the connector or fuel pipe. To prevent this, clean
the connecting area before disconnecting/connecting the connector.
Step
Inspection
1 Verify the color of the exhaust gas.
Results
Action
Pale Go to the next step.

White Go to Step 9.
Black Go to Step 10.
2 Verify DTCs using the M-MDS.
Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.


displayed?
P0552,
P1680,
P1682,
P1684,
P1686,
No
P0523,
P1681,
P1683,
P1685,
P1687
3 Verify if oil is reaching the following

intake-air system related parts.
Between the air
intake hose and the
ventilation hose.
Yes Verify the oil level.

If the dipstick indicates H or more,
adjust the oil level to H or less.
If the dipstick indicates H or less, the
vehicle may have been repeatedly

cornered or operated in a similar
manner which exposed it to high Gforces (0.9 G or more).
Between the oil filler

pipe and the intake
manifold.
Is the oil present?
4 Verify the battery positive voltage.

Is the battery positive voltage 10 V
or more?
No
Yes Go to the next step.

No

5 Verify the monitor item MOP_P_ACT

using the M-MDS.
Verify the value of the monitored item
MOP_P_ACT when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position.

No
(See OIL PRESSURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

[13B-MSP].)
Is the monitor value between 35

kPa {0.36 kgf/cm2 , 5.1 psi}
and 35 kPa {0.36 kgf/cm2 ,
5.1psi}?
6 Start the engine and warm it up.
Replace the oil pressure sensor.
Yes Inspect the OCV.
Verify the monitor item MOP_P_ACT

using the M-MDS.
(See OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
Verify the value of the monitor item

MOP_P_ACT when racing the engine
at 2,000 rpm.

Is the monitor value 180 kPa {1.84

kgf/cm2 , 26.1 psi} or more?
No
Control Inspection.

No

Does the metering oil pump control

operate properly?
8 Inspect the oil nozzle.
Yes Verify that there is no oil leakage from the oil seal into

Is the oil nozzle normal?
9 Does the cooling system hold the

coolant pressure?
the combustion chamber.

No
Replace the oil nozzle.

(See OIL NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
Yes Inspect the following:

Engine coolant leakage from gasket.
Engine coolant leakage from intake
manifold gasket.
Engine coolant leakage due to damaged
or improper rotor housing
If there is other driveability-related malfunction, perform
the applicable diagnostic procedure.
No
10 Inspect the intake-air system for the

following:
Air cleaner clogging


No
Intake-air system
part clogging or
perforation

After repair, go to the next step.
Is the intake-air system normal?

11 Perform the KOER self test using the
M-MDS.
Are any DTCs output?
12 Measure the fuel pressure.
Is the fuel pressure normal?
Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.

No

No

13 Inspect the compression pressure.

[13B-MSP].)
Yes Go to Step 18.

No
Is the compression pressure normal?

Control Inspection.

No

Does the metering oil pump control

operate properly?
15 Inspect the engine oil condition
(viscosity, odor).
Is the engine oil thinned, or is there
an abnormal fuel odor?

[13B-MSP].)
Yes Replace the engine oil.

No

No
Is the oil pressure normal?
17 Inspect the oil pump between

metering oil pump and oil nozzle.
Yes Inspect the oil passage for leakage and clogging.

If any, repair or replace the malfunctioning part
Repair the engine.
No
Repair the engine.
Yes Inspect the spark plug and eccentric shaft position

sensor.

Blue sparks can be
seen from each hightension lead

Repair the engine.
Is there air suction or clogging inside

the oil pump?
18 Does the following occur when

cranking the engine?
(See ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION

[13B-MSP].)
No
disconnected from
the spark plug.
High-tension lead
(See HIGH-TENSION LEAD INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
Ignition coil
(See IGNITION COIL INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
Ignition coil connector

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 MIL ILLUMINATES [13B-MSP]
MIL ILLUMINATES
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is illuminated incorrectly.

MIL illuminates for emission-related concern (DTC is stored in the PCM)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

NOTE:
If the MIL blinks at steady rate, misfire condition could exist.
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (engine

off).
RESULTS
Yes


ACTION
No
Yes
Inspect the instrument cluster

operation.

2 Inspect the wiring harness between the following
terminals (wiring harness-side):
PCM terminal 1AMInstrument
cluster terminal 1J
PCM terminal 1AIInstrument cluster
terminal 1L
Are they normal?

No

harness.

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.25 A/C IS NOT CUT OFF UNDER WIDE OPEN THROTTLE CONDITIONS [13BMSP]
25
A/C IS NOT CUT OFF UNDER WIDE OPEN THROTTLE CONDITIONS

The A/C compressor magnetic clutch does not disengage under wide
open throttle.
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Does the A/C compressor disengage

when the A/C switch is turned off?
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
No
Go to the symptom troubleshooting NO.24 A/C IS

ALWAYS ON OR A/C COMPRESSOR RUNS
CONTINUOUSLY.

Yes

[13B-MSP].)
No

(See ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.12 LACK/LOSS OF POWER-ACCELERATION/CRUISE [13B-MSP]
12
DESCRIPTION
LACK/LOSS OF POWERACCELERATION/CRUISE
The performance is poor under load (e.g. power down when climbing
hills).
Drive-by-wire
control system
operates in
brake override
system
Vacuum
leakage
Air leakage
from intake-air
system
Air cleaner
restriction
Air suction at
intake-air
system
(between MAF
sensor and
intake ports)
Improper ignition timing control

(abnormal ECT, IAT, MAF and knock
sensor signals to PCM)
Improper fuel injection control (abnormal
MAF, ECT, A/F sensor, HO2S and knock
sensor signals to PCM)
Incorrect spark plug heat range
Engine overheating
Engine internal
malfunction
Throttle body
malfunction
Abnormal engine oil

condition (viscosity,
deterioration)
Improper SSV
operation
Low oil pressure
Improper APV
operation
Improper VDI
operation (13BMSP (highpower))

Metering oil pump
malfunction
Leakage
or
clogging
in oil
pipe
Improper
operation of
drive-by-wire
control system
(abnormal
accelerator
position and TP
signals to PCM)
Drive-by-wire
control system
operates in failsafe mode
(abnormal
accelerator
position and TP
signal to PCM)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Leakage
or
clogging
in oil
nozzle
Improper metering oil pump control
operation
Improper A/C system operation
Poor fuel
quality
Brake dragging
Inadequate fuel
pressure
AT malfunction (AT)
Pressure
regulator
(integrated in
fuel pump unit)
Fuel pump
mechanical
malfunction
Fuel line
restriction or
clogging
Fuel injector
improper
operation
Fuel injector
malfunction
(leakage,
clogging,
improper
injection
amount)
Intermittent
open or short in
fuel pump
related circuit
Restriction in
exhaust system
Low tire pressure
Improper operation of torque converter

clutch control (AT)
Clutch malfunction (MT)
Leakage or
damaged
exhaust
manifold
Purge solenoid
valve
malfunction
(stuck open)
Erratic signal
from eccentric
shaft position
sensor
WARNING:
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Retrieve any PCM DTC using the

M-MDS.
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to the P2299 troubleshooting procedure. (Drive-by-wire

system operates with brake override system.)

TEST [13B-MSP].)
Is the DTC P2299 presented?
2 Does the engine

No
Yes


Vacuum
connection
No
Yes
No
Air cleaner
element
Repeat Step 3.
Fresh air duct

Air cleaner
No air leakage
from intake-air
system
No restriction of
intake-air system
Blockage of
intake-air system
(between MAF
sensor and
intake ports)
MAF sensor
installation
Exhaust manifold
(leakage,
damaged)
Fuel quality (e.g.
proper octane,
contamination,
winter/summer
blend)
Tire pressure
Yes

No
TEST [13B-MSP].)
Yes

[13B-MSP].)

the M-MDS.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
APP1
APP2
RPM
MAF
TP REL
O2S11
O2S12
VSS
PIDs.
Are the PIDs within the
specifications?
No
Yes
No

Inspect if the output signal from the APP
If the RPM PID is not normal:
Inspect the eccentric shaft position sensor
and the related wiring harness for
vibration or an intermittent open/short
circuit or both.
Inspect for an intermittent open circuit of
the MAF sensor and the related wiring
harness.
Inspect if the output signal from the TP
Inspect the A/F sensor and the related
wiring harness for vibration or an
intermittent open or short circuit or both.
Inspect the HO2S and the related wiring
harness for vibration or an intermittent
open or short circuit or both.

7 Inspect the KS.
Yes
No
Replace the KS.

Is the KS normal?

wheel normal?
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes

position sensor
Open or short between eccentric shaft
position sensor and PCM terminal 2AG
and 2AP
If they are normal, go to the next step.
No

High-tension leads

conditions.
[13B-MSP].)
Yes

Inspect for fuel leakage from the fuel injector.
Inspect the spark plug and the high-tension lead.

Inspect for clogged fuel injector.

No
Install the spark plugs on original rotors.

Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes

No
Zero or low:

System Inspection.
system part.
system part?

pump circuit.

fuel pump unit.
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
[13B-MSP].)
High:

(See FUEL PUMP UNIT
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Go to the next step. (13B-MSP (high-power))

properly?
Go to Step 18. (13B-MSP (standard-power))

No

inspection results.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
No

CONTINUOUSLY.

17 Perform the Variable Dynamic
Effect Intake-air (VDI) Operation
Inspection (13B-MSP (highpower)).
Does the VDI operate properly?
properly?
19 NOTE:
The following
test is for engine
stalling with A/C
on concern. If
other symptoms
exist, go to the
next step.
Connect the pressure gauge to

the A/C low and high side
pressure lines.


low side and high side pressures.
specifications?
CHECK.)
20 Inspect for A/C cut off
operation.
Yes
No
Inspect the A/C cut off system components.
Yes
Inspect if the purge solenoid valve is stuck open

mechanically.
Does the A/C cut-off work

properly?
vacuum hose.

No
Yes
No

inspection results.
Yes
Drive the vehicle.

improve?
Control Inspection.
[13B-MSP].)
Is it normal?
Ignition timing
Internal transmission components (AT)
Torque converter clutch control (AT)

Clutch (MT)
Brake system for dragging
KS

Control Inspection.
No
Yes
No

inspection results.

Yes


[13B-MSP].)

No
Yes
No

inspection results.

specification?
idle.
idle.
at idle?

Yes
No


oil nozzle.
in the oil pipe?
Yes

No

Retest.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COMPRESSION INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
COMPRESSION
TESTER INSTRUCTIONS
COMPRESSION
TESTER
INSTRUCTIONS
COMPRESSION CALCULATOR
COMPRESSION
CALCULATOR
WARNING:
Hot engines can cause severe burns. Be careful not to burn yourself during
removal/installation of each component.
Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can very easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage.
Always keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
1. Remove the engine cover. (See ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Verify that the battery is fully charged. (See BATTERY INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
3. Warm up the engine.
4. Remove the trailing or leading side spark plug of the front and rear rotors. (See SPARK PLUG
5. Disconnect the eccentric shaft position sensor connector. (See ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION
CAUTION:
To cut the fuel injection and ignition, make sure the eccentric shaft position
sensor connector is disconnected.
6. Measure the compression pressure using one of the following procedures:
a. Install the SST (49 F018 9A0C) to the trailing or leading side plug hole of the
rotor housing.
b. Depress the accelerator pedal fully and crank for 7 s or more.

c. Read the compression and engine speed.
Compression pressure
Standard: 830 kPa {8.5 kgfcm 2 , 120 psi} [250
rpm]
Minimum: 680 kPa {6.9 kgfcm 2 , 98.6 psi} [250
rpm]
Standard difference in chambers: Within 150 kPa
{1.5 kgfcm 2 , 21.8psi}
Standard difference in rotors: Within 100 kPa {1.0
kgfcm 2 , 14.5 psi}
d. Perform the same procedure for the other rotor housing.
e. If the compression is at the minimum or less, or the difference in the chambers
and difference in the rotors exceed the specifications, replace or overhaul.
CAUTION:
If the engine speed when measuring compression differs from the
standard, adjust according to the graph.
A
B
Standard compression pressure

Minimum compression pressure
7. Install the spark plugs. (See SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)

8. Connect the eccentric shaft position sensor connector. (See ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION
9. Install the engine cover. (See ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can very easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
Fuel line spills and leakage from the pressurized fuel system are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injury or death and
damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line Safety Procedure when servicing the
fuel system. (See BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION [13B-MSP].)
After disconnecting the steering shaft joint, always set the EPS system to the neutral position to prevent system malfunction. (See
EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING.)
NOTE:
Remove the engine, transmission, and crossmember component as a single unit from under the vehicle.
1. Remove the following parts:
a. Front wheel and tires (See GENERAL PROCEDURES (SUSPENSION)
b. Engine cover (See ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
c. Front suspension tower bar (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].) (See FRONT
SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AT].)
d. Battery cover, battery, battery box and battery tray (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
e. Air cleaner, air hose and air cleaner insulator (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
f. PCM (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
g. AIR pump. (See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Drain the engine coolant. (See ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
3. Disconnect the brake vacuum hose.
4. Disconnect the quick release connector going to the charcoal canister from the engine room side. (See QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR
5. Disconnect the fuel hose from the fuel distributor (housing side). (See FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
6. Remove the ignition coil and ignition coil bracket as a single unit.
Ignition coil bracket tightening torque
1. 7.810.8 Nm {80110 kgfcm, 69.195.5 inlbf}
7. Remove the A/C belt. (See DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
8. Remove the A/C compressor with the pipes connected and secure the A/C compressor using wire or rope so that it is out of the
way.(See A/C COMPRESSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. Disconnect the engine wiring harness from the main fuse block side.
10. Remove the aerodynamic under cover. (See AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11. Disconnect front ABS wheel speed sensor connector. (See FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
12. Disconnect the radiator hose, the heater hose and coolant reserve tank hose.
13. Disconnect the selector link. (AT) (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
14. Remove the clutch release cylinder with the pipes connected and secure the clutch release cylinder using wire or rope so that it is out
of the way. (MT) (See CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
15. Remove the shift lever component. (MT) (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
16. Remove the engine, transmission, and crossmember component using an engine lifter in the order indicated in the table.
WARNING:
Remove the engine, transmission and crossmember carefully, holding it steady. If the transmission falls it could be
damaged or cause injury.
1 Universal joint
(See STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING.)
2 Oil hose
(See Oil Hose Removal Note.)
(See Oil Hose Installation Note.)
3 Oil pipe, oil hose (AT)
(See OIL COOLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
4 Caliper and mounting support
5 Shock absorber bolt (lower)
6 Front tunnel member
7 Rear tunnel member
8 Catalytic converter, middle pipe, main silencer
(See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
9 Heat insulator
10Power plant frame
(See Power Plant Frame, Crossmember Bolt Removal/Installation Note.)
(See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
(See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
11Propeller shaft
(See PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
12Under cover
13Transverse member
14Engine, transmission, crossmember component
(See Power Plant Frame, Crossmember Bolt Removal/Installation Note)
17. Remove the engine and transmission from the crossmember component lifter in the order indicated in the table by suspending them
with a crane.
1Engine mount rubber (RH)
2Engine mount bracket (RH)

3Engine mount rubber (LH)
4Engine mount bracket (LH)
5Engine, transmission
6Oil pipe, oil hose (AT)
7Oil hose
18. Install in the reverse order of removal.

19. Start the engine and inspect and adjust the following:
Pulley and belt for runout, tension, and contact
Leakage of engine oil, engine coolant, ATF, MT oil, and fuel
Ignition timing, idle speed, and idle mixture (CO and HC) (See ENGINE TUNE-UP [13B-MSP].)
Front wheel alignment (See FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)
Engine-driven accessories operation
20. Perform the on-road test and verify that there is no vibration or noise.
Oil Hose Removal Note

1. Remove the clip as shown in the figure and disconnect the oil hose.
CAUTION:
Catch the remaining engine oil in the oil cooler using a plate pipe to prevent spillage.
Power Plant Frame, Crossmember Bolt Removal/Installation Note

CAUTION:
The oil pan could be damaged or dented if the engines own weight is subjected to an impact against a level surface. Always set two
pieces of wood in the positions shown in the figure to prevent the oil pan from being dented. If the oil pan is dented, the amount of
intake oil and the fluid pressure will decrease.
1. Secure the engine, transmission, and crossmember component using an engine lifter.
NOTE:
When installing the power plant frame, tighten the bolts and nuts temporarily at this time, and after installing all parts,
adjust the transmission installation positions referring to "Power Plant Frame Installation Note" and then tighten them
completely. (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].) (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
Oil Hose Installation Note

1. Connect the oil hose as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Always install the oil hose with the three holes on the oil hose grooves and the three clip projections aligned.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
The oil pan could be damaged or dented if the engines own weight is subjected to an impact against a level surface.
Always set two pieces of wood in the positions shown in the figure to prevent the oil pan from being dented. If the oil
pan is dented, the amount of intake oil and the fluid pressure will decrease.
1. Remove the engine from the transmission. (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].) (See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
a. Clutch unit (MT) (See CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Drive plate (AT) (See DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
c. Exhaust manifold (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
d. Extension manifold (upper and lower) (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
e. Oil filler pipe (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
f. Metering oil pump (No.1 and No.2) (See METERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
g. Oil nozzle (See OIL NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
h. Fuel distributor (intake manifold side and housing side) (See FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
i. Intake manifold (See INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
j. Generator (See GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
k. Wiring harness
l. Oil filter (See OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1 Metering oil pump bracket No.1

2 Metering oil pump bracket No.2
(See Metering Oil Pump Bracket Installation Note.)
3 Eccentric shaft position sensor
(See ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
4 A/C drive belt tensioner
5 Water pump pulley
6 Generator strap
7 Spark plug
8 Knock sensor
(See KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
9 Oil pipe
10Dipstick
11Dipstick pipe
(See Dipstick Pipe Installation Note.)
Dipstick Pipe Installation Note

CAUTION:
Lubricate the new O-ring with the grease included in the O-ring packaging.
Metering Oil Pump Bracket Installation Note

1. Tighten the metering oil pump bracket No.2 installation bolts in the order shown.
Tightening torque
1. 18.625.5 Nm {1.92.6 kgfm, 13.818.8 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE TUNE-UP [13B-MSP]
Engine Tune-up Preparation

1. Verify the following:
AT: Selector lever is in P or N position.
MT: Shift lever is in neutral position.
2. Turn off all electrical loads.
a. Increase the engine speed to 2,5003,000 rpm until cooling fans start running.
b. When the cooling fans start running, release the accelerator pedal and wait until
the cooling fans stop running.
5. Verify that the idling speed (M-MDS: RPM PID) is within the specification using the M-MDS
function.
Standard (no load)
AT: 760860 rpm
MT: 770870 rpm
Ignition Timing Inspection

NOTE:
The ignition timing cannot be adjusted.
The M-MDS is required to verify the ignition timing.
1. Complete the engine tune-up preparation. (See Engine Tune-up Preparation.)
2. Connect the timing light to the front rotor housing on the leading side.
3. Turn the test mode on using the test simulation function.
4. Verify that the eccentric shaft position plate alignment mark (yellow) and the front cover mark
is aligned.
NOTE:
When using the M-MDS, verify that the ignition timing (M-MDS: SPARK-T or
SPARK-L PID) is as follows:
Ignition timing
Trailing side: BTDC 10
Leading side: BTDC 5
If there is malfunction, refer to ENGINE SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING. (See
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSTIC INDEX [13B-MSP].)
5. Turn the test mode off using the test simulation function.
Idle Speed Inspection

NOTE:
The idling speed cannot be adjusted.

The M-MDS is required to verify the idling speed.
1. Complete the engine tune-up preparation. (See Engine Tune-up Preparation.)
2. Turn the test mode on using the test simulation function.
3. Verify that the engine speed using the RPM DATA MONITOR function is as follows.
Standard
Idling speed (rpm)
Load status
AT
MT
No load
760860 760860 760860 770870

A/C on
780880 760860 750850 760860
(standard)
A/C on (standard)+
electrical loads
A/C on
(heavy load)
on*1
780880 760860 750850 790890
800900 780880 780880 790890
*1
Idle Mixture Inspection
1. Verify that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specification. (See Idle Speed
Inspection.) (See Ignition Timing Inspection.)
2. Insert an exhaust gas analyzer into the tailpipe.
3. Verify that the CO and HC concentration are within the regulation.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
Do not allow the pulley lockbolt to get hit or jolted as it could cause the balance weight
and oil pump drive gear to deviate resulting in the thrust plate and needle bearing falling
in between the balance weight and spacer.
If the thrust plate and needle bearing fall off, perform disassembly.
2. Remove the front suspension tower bar. (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].) (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AT].)
3. Remove the battery cover, battery, battery box and battery tray. (See BATTERY
4. Remove the air cleaner component, air hose and air cleaner insulator. (See INTAKE-AIR
SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
5. Remove the A/C drive belt and generator drive belt. (See DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT [13BMSP].)
6. Rotate the eccentric shaft clockwise and align the eccentric shaft position plate alignment
mark to the 9 o'clock position.
7. Remove the starter. (See STARTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)

8. Install the SST to the starter installation area according to the following procedure and lock
the eccentric shaft again rotation.
CAUTION:
To prevent faulty bolt installation, install the bolts with appropriate washers of 3
mm {0.11 in} or more.
AT
Install the SST using the starter installation bolts and appropriate washers.
MT
Install the SST using the starter installation bolt, nut and appropriate washer.
9. Remove in the order shown in the figure.

1Pulley lockbolt
(See Pulley Lockbolt Installation Note.)
2Eccentric shaft bypass valve
3Spring
4Pulley component
(See Pulley Component Removal Note.)
5Front oil seal
(See Front Oil Seal Removal Note.)
(See Front Oil Seal Installation Note.)
Pulley Component Removal Note

1. Remove the pulley component using a flathead screwdriver to hold the key in place.
CAUTION:
The key must be held in place while removing the pulley. Failure to secure key
in place will cause severe engine damage.
NOTE:
If the key has deviated, return it to its original position. If it has not been
returned to its original position, perform disassembly and install the key.
Front Oil Seal Removal Note

1. Remove the front oil seal using a flathead screwdriver with the tip wrapped in a clean rag.
Front Oil Seal Installation Note

1. Apply engine oil to the lip of a new front oil seal.
2. Tap the front oil seal in using the SST and a hammer.
Pressing distance for the front oil seal (from edge of front cover)
1.52.5 mm {0.060.09 in}
Pulley Lockbolt Installation Note

1. Temporarily tighten the pulley lockbolt.
NOTE:
Press in the pulley component by temporarily tightening the pulley lock bolt,
and press the part on the eccentric shaft to the normal position.
2. Remove the pulley lockbolt.
3. Measure the position shown in the figure.
If not within the specification, perform overhaul servicing.
Standard
10.3411.14 mm {0.40710.4385 in}
4. Apply engine oil to the pulley lockbolt threads.
5. Assemble a new O-ring.

6. Apply silicone sealant to the seating face.
7. Tighten the pulley lockbolt.
Tightening torque
254294 Nm {25.929.9 kgfm, 188216 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the transmission. (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].) (See
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
2. Remove the flywheel. (MT) (See CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the drive plate. (AT) (See DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
1Counterweight (AT)
(See Counterweight Removal Note.)
(See Counterweight Installation Note.)
2Rear oil seal
(See Rear Oil Seal Removal Note.)
(See Rear Oil Seal Installation Note.)
Counterweight Removal Note

1. Remove the locknut by locking the counterweight against rotation using the SST.
2. Remove the counterweight using the SST.
3. Remove the SST.
Rear Oil Seal Removal Note

1. Protect the eccentric shaft with cloth and remove the oil seal using the SST.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the contact area of the rear oil seal at the stationary gear and
eccentric shaft.
Rear Oil Seal Installation Note

1. Apply engine oil to the lip of a new rear oil seal.
2. Tap the rear oil seal evenly in the stationary gear using the SST.
CAUTION:
Insert until it is attached to the seating face.
Do not damage the oil seal lip by catching it on the eccentric shaft and the key.
Counterweight Installation Note

1. Verify that the key is installed securely.
2. Install the counterweight to the eccentric shaft.
3. Install the locknut to the eccentric shaft and temporarily tighten.
4. Lock the counterweight against rotation using the SST, and tighten it to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
392490 Nm {4049 kgfm, 290361 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
1Drive belt
(See DRIVE BELT DEFLECTION/TENSION INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)

2Engine cover
(See ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3Rear oil seal
(See REAR OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
4Engine
(See ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See ENGINE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP].)
(See ENGINE TUNE-UP [13B-MSP].)
5Front oil seal
(See FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
Generator Drive Belt

2. Remove the A/C drive belt. (See A/C Drive Belt.)
3. Loosen generator installation bolt A and locknut B.
4. Loosen adjusting bolt C and remove the drive belt.

5. Install the drive belt and adjust the drive belt deflection/tension by tightening adjusting bolt C
to the specification.
CAUTION:
After replacing with a the new drive belt, assemble with the deflection/tension
for new drive belt and operate the drive belt for 1 min or more while idling the
engine. Then adjust it to the deflection/tension used when adjusting.
Drive belt deflection (with pressure of 98 N {10 kgf, 22 lbf})
New (mm {in})
When adjusting (mm {in})
4.04.5 {0.160.17}
4.55.0 {0.180.19}
Drive belt tension (when using the SST)
New (N {kgf, lbf})
620767
When adjusting
(N {kgf, lbf})
519666
{63.378.2, 140172} {53.067.9, 117149}
6. Tighten generator installation bolt A and locknut B to the specified torque. Tightening torque
A: 3851 Nm {3.95.2 kgfm, 2937 ftlbf} B: 18.625.5 Nm {1.902.60 kgfm, 13.8
18.8 ftlbf}
7. Crank the engine and measure the deflection/tension again. If not within the specification,
repeat from Step 3 again.
8. Install the A/C drive belt. (See A/C Drive Belt.)
A/C Drive Belt

2. Loosen A/C drive belt tensioner pulley locknut A.
3. Loosen adjusting bolt B and remove the belt.

4. Install the drive belt and adjust the drive belt deflection/tension by tightening adjusting bolt B
to the specification.
CAUTION:
After replacing with a the new drive belt, assemble with the deflection/tension
for new drive belt and operate the drive belt for 5 min or more while idling the
engine. Then adjust it to the deflection/tension used when adjusting.
Drive belt deflection (with pressure of 98 N {10 kgf, 22 lbf})
New (mm {in})
When adjusting (mm {in})
3.03.8 {0.110.14}
3.34.0 {0.130.15}
New (N {kgf, lbf})
559706
When adjusting
(N {kgf, lbf})
519617
{57.171.9, 126158} {53.062.9, 117138}
5. Tighten A/C drive belt tensioner pulley locknut A to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
37.251.9 Nm {3.805.29 kgfm, 27.538.2 ftlbf}
6. Crank the engine and measure the deflection/tension again. If not within the specification,
repeat from Step 2 again.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DRIVE BELT DEFLECTION/TENSION INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
The drive belt deflection can be inspected only between specified pulleys.
Perform the drive belt deflection/tension inspection when the engine is cold, or at least 30
min after the engine has stopped.
If the drive belt that is being used exceeds the deflection/tension limit, adjust it to the
deflection/tension used when adjusting.
2. Apply a pressure of 98 N {10 kgf, 22 lbf} to the back of the drive belt in the middle of the
pulleys shown in the figure and inspect the deflection. Otherwise, inspect the tension using the
SST.
NOTE:
The drive belt tension can be inspected anywhere between the pulleys. The
drive belt deflection can be inspected only between specified pulleys.
If the drive belt deflection is at the deflection limit or more, or the drive belt
tension is at the tension limit or less, adjust the drive belt deflection/tension.
Drive belt deflection (with pressure of 98 N {10 kgf, 22lbf})
Item
New
When adjusting
(mm {in})
(mm {in})
Deflection
limit
(mm {in})
Generator 4.04.5 {0.160.17} 4.55.0 {0.180.19}
A/C
3.03.8 {0.110.14} 3.34.0 {0.130.15}
6.0 {0.23}
or more
5.5 {0.21}
or more
Item
New
When adjusting
(N {kgf, lbf})
(N {kgf, lbf})
Tension
limit
(N {kgf, lbf})
344
Generator 620767 {63.378.2, 140172} 519666 {53.067.9, 117149} {35.1, 77.3}
or less
265
A/C
559706 {57.171.9, 126158} 519617 {53.062.9, 117138} {27.1, 59.6}

or less
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Coil Resistance Inspection

2. Remove the battery cover. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
4. Remove the OCV. (See OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
5. Measure the coil resistance between terminals A and B using a tester.
If not within the specification, replace the OCV.

OCV standard resistance
6.97.9 ohms [20C {68F}]
6. Install the OCV. (See OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
7. Connect the negative battery cable. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
8. Install the battery cover. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
Spool Valve Operation Inspection


4. Remove the OCV. (See OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
5. Verify that the spool valve inside the OCV is at the position shown in the figure (position
where it is pulled).
If it cannot be verified, replace the OCV.

6. Verify that the battery is fully charged.
NOTE:
When applying battery positive voltage between the oil control valve terminals, the
connection of the negative and positive cable can be either the A or B terminal.
7. Verify that the spool valve moves to the position shown in the figure (position where it
projects) when battery positive voltage is applied between terminals A and B.

8. Stop applying battery positive voltage and verify that the spool valve returns to the original
position.
9. Install the OCV. (See OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
11. Install the battery cover. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Hot engines and engine oil can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until it
and the engine oil have cooled.
Continuous exposure to USED engine oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory mice. Protect
your skin by washing with soap and water immediately after working with engine oil.
4. Remove the air hose and air cleaner component. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
5. Remove the throttle body with the water hoses still connected. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
6. Remove the ignition coil and ignition coil bracket as a single unit.
Ignition coil bracket tightening torque
1. 7.810.8 Nm {80110 kgfcm, 69.195.5 inlbf}
1Connector
2OCV
3O-ring
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LUBRICATION SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
1 Oil nozzle
(See OIL NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2 Oil cooler
(See OIL COOLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3 Metering oil pump No.1
(See METERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
4 Metering oil pump No.2
(See METERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
5 Oil pan upper block component
(See OIL PAN UPPER BLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
6 Oil strainer
(See OIL PAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
7 Oil pan
8 Oil filter
(See OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
9 Dipstick
(See ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION [13B-MSP] .)
(See ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
10OCV
(See OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL PAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Hot engines and engine oil can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until it and the engine oil have
cooled.
A vehicle that is lifted but not securely supported on safety stands is dangerous. It can slip or fall, causing death
or serious injury. Never work around or under a lifted vehicle if it is not securely supported on safety stands.
Continuous exposure to USED engine oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your skin by washing
with soap and water immediately after working with engine oil.
2. Drain the engine oil. (See ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
3. Remove the under cover. (See OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
6. Refill with the specified type and amount of the engine oil. (See ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
7. Start the engine and confirm that there is no oil leakage.
If there is oil leakage, repair or replace the applicable part.
8. Inspect the oil level. (See ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
1Oil pan
(See Oil Pan Removal Note.)
(See Oil Pan Installation Note.)
2Oil strainer
3O-ring
Oil Pan Removal Note

1. Remove the oil pan using a separator tool.
Oil Pan Installation Note

CAUTION:
1. Apply the silicon sealant in a single, unbroken line around the whole perimeter.
2. Install the oil pan before the applied sealant starts to harden.
3. Using bolts with the old seal adhering could cause cracks in the housing.
1. Completely clean and remove any oil, dirt, sealant or other foreign material that may be adhering to the oil pan
upper block and oil pan.
2. When reusing the oil pan installation bolts, clean any old sealant from the bolts.
3. Apply silicone sealant to the areas as shown in the figure.
Thickness
1. 2.56.5 mm {0.100.26 in}
4. Install the oil pan to the oil pan upper block.
5. Tighten the oil pan installation bolts.
Tightening torque
1. 7.810.8 Nm {79.6110.1 kgfcm, 69.195.5 inlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
NOTE:
When measuring the oil pressure, remove the blind plug from the oil pressure
measurement hole on the rear left surface of the engine.

2. Remove the front suspension tower bar. (MT) (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].)
3. Perform the following procedure to secure a sufficient space for removing/installing the blind
plug.
a. Remove the water hose from the clip and set it out of the way.
b. Remove the wiring harness clip from the bracket and set the wiring harness out of
the way.
4. Remove the blind plug using a hexagonal wrench.
NOTE:
This inspection can be performed using a combination of SSTs 49 0187 280A (oil
pressure gauge) and 49 H019 002 (adapter), or using the following combination of the
SSTs.
49 D019 908 (gauge), 49 D019 909 (hose), 49 D019 910 (adapter), 49 D019 911
(adapter), and 49 D019 913 (adapter)
5. Install the SSTs to the oil pressure measurement hole using the following procedure.
Using SSTs 49 0187 280A and 49 H019 002
Assemble SSTs 49 0187 280A and 49 H019 002 outside of the engine
compartment beforehand.
Install SST 49 H019 002 to the oil pressure measurement hole.
Using SSTs 49 D019 908, 49 D019 909, 49 D019 910, 49 D019 911,
and 49 D019 913
First install only SST 49 D019 910 to the oil pressure measurement hole.
Install the remaining SSTs.
6. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.
7. Run the engine at the specified speed, and note the gauge readings.
If not as specified, inspect for the cause and repair or replace if necessary.
NOTE:
The oil pressure can vary with oil viscosity and temperature.
Oil pressure (reference value) [oil temperature: 100 C {212 F}]
500 kPa {5.10 kgf/cm2 , 72.5 psi} [3,000 rpm]
8. Stop the engine and wait until it is cool.
9. Remove the SSTs.
10. Apply silicone sealant to the blind plug threads.
CAUTION:
Install the blind plug before the applied sealant starts to harden.
11. Install the blind plug.
Tightening torque
11.817.6 Nm {121179 kgfcm, 105155 inlbf}
12. Install the wiring harness clip to the bracket.
13. Install the water hose to the clip.
15. Install the front suspension tower bar. (MT) (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Hot engines and engine oil can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until it and
the engine oil have cooled.
A vehicle that is lifted but not securely supported on safety stands is dangerous. It can slip or
fall, causing death or serious injury. Never work around or under a lifted vehicle if it is not
securely supported on safety stands.
CAUTION:
If engine oil is spilled on the exhaust system, wipe it off completely. If you fail to wipe the
spilled engine oil, it will produce fumes because of the heat.
Because engine starting performance could worsen, do not use either synthetic or semisynthetic motor oil.
1. Position the vehicle on level ground.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
4. Remove the oil pan drain plug.
5. Drain the engine oil into a container.
6. Install the oil pan drain plug with a new gasket.
Oil pan drain plug tightening torque
29.441.2 Nm {3.004.20 kgfm, 21.730.3 ftlbf}
NOTE:
The amount of residual oil in the engine can vary according to factors such as the
replacement method and oil temperature. Verify the oil level after engine oil
replacement.
7. Refill with the following type and amount of the engine oil. Engine oil specification
Item
U.S.A. and CANADA
Except U.S.A. and CANADA
Engine
oil
grade
API SL, SM or ILSAC

Engine
oil
viscosity
5W-20
Engine oil capacity (approx. quantity)

Oil replacement: 4.2 L {4.4 US qt, 3.7 Imp qt}
Oil and oil filter replacement: 4.4 L {4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt}
Engine overhaul: 5.6 L {5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt}
Total (dry engine): 7.1 L {7.5 US qt, 6.2 Imp qt} (MT), 6.4 L {6.8 US qt, 5.6 Imp
qt} (AT)
8. Install the oil filler cap.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
3. Stop the engine and allow at least 5 min before continuing.
4. Remove the service hole cover attached to the engine cover using the following procedure.
a. Press the tab of the service hole cover toward the vehicle front.
b. Lift up the service hole cover.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it cleanly, and reinstall it fully.
6. Remove the dipstick and verify that the oil level is between the F and L marks on the dipstick.
If the oil level is below the L mark, add engine oil.

NOTE:
The dipstick is graduated in 0.5 L {0.5 US qt, 0.4 lmp qt} intervals as a
reference for oil replenishment.
7. Install the dipstick.
8. Install the service hole cover.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
A vehicle that is lifted but not securely supported on safety stands is dangerous. It can slip
or fall, causing death or serious injury. Never work around or under a lifted vehicle if it is
not securely supported on safety stands.
CAUTION:
1. When removing the oil filter, cover up the surrounding area with cloth to prevent oil in the
filter from spilling on other parts.
2. If engine oil is spilled on the exhaust system, wipe it off completely. If you fail to wipe the
spilled engine oil, it will produce fumes because of the heat.
1. Remove the under cover.
2. Remove the oil filter using the SST.
3. Clean the installation surface of the oil filter.

4. Apply clean engine oil to the O-ring of a new oil filter.
5. Tighten the oil filter using the SST and according to the instructions on the package or side of
the oil filter.
Tightening torque (reference value)
1. 1215 Nm {123152 kgfcm, 107132 inlbf}
6. Wipe off the spilled engine oil from the surrounding area.
9. Install the under cover.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL COOLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Hot engines and engine oil can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until it and the engine oil have cooled.
A vehicle that is lifted but not securely supported on safety stands is dangerous. It can slip or fall, causing death or serious
injury. Never work around or under a lifted vehicle if it is not securely supported on safety stands.
Continuous exposure to USED engine oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your skin by washing with soap
and water immediately after working with engine oil.
2. Remove the following.
a. Front tire (LH)
b. Front tire (RH) (MT)
c. Splash shield
d. Aerodynamic under cover (See AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Oil cooler hose

(See Oil Cooler Hose Removal Note .)
2Oil cooler bracket
3Oil cooler
4Oil cooler duct
Oil Cooler Hose Removal Note

1. Use a drain pan to catch the oil when the oil hoses are disconnected.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

METERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
A vehicle that is lifted but not securely supported on safety stands is dangerous. It can slip or fall, causing death or serious
injury. Never work around or under a lifted vehicle if it is not securely supported on safety stands.
Continuous exposure to USED engine oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your skin by washing with soap
and water immediately after working with engine oil.
5. Remove the front suspension tower bar. (MT) (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].)
6. Remove the extension manifold (upper, lower) and oil filler pipe. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
7. Remove the oil pressure sensor. (See OIL PRESSURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
10. Refill the engine coolant. (See ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
13. Inspect for engine coolant leakage. (See ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
1Connector
2Oil hose
(See Oil Hose Removal Note.)
(See Oil Hose Installation Note.)
3Oil tube (metering oil pump side)
4Washer
5Metering oil pump No.1
6Metering oil pump No.2
Oil Hose Removal Note

1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the notch of the oil hose retainer, and pull up the retainer in the direction of the arrow shown
in the figure to unlock.
CAUTION:
Cover the areas around the oil hoses and metering oil pumps before disconnecting the oil hoses so that the oil
remaining in the oil hoses and the metering oil pumps does not get on surrounding parts.
2. Disconnect the oil hose.
Oil Hose Installation Note

1. Verify that the oil hose retainer is in the unlocked position.
2. Insert the oil hose into the pipe completely.

3. Press down the retainer to lock the oil hose.
4. Move the oil hose back and forth in the axial direction a few times and verify that it is securely locked.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
A vehicle that is lifted but not securely supported on safety stands is dangerous. It can slip
or fall, causing death or serious injury. Never work around or under a lifted vehicle if it is
not securely supported on safety stands.
1. Complete the BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION. (See BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION [13BMSP].)
7. Remove the extension manifold (upper, lower) and oil filler pipe. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
8. Remove the metering oil pump No.1 and No.2. (See METERING OIL PUMP
9. Remove the fuel injector and fuel distributor component (intake manifold side). (See FUEL
INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
15. Inspect for engine coolant leakage. (See ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
1Oil tube
(See Oil Tube Removal Note.)
2Gasket
3Oil nozzle
4Washer
Oil Tube Removal Note

1. Record the routing of the oil tubes when removing so that they can be re-installed in the
same routing condition.
2. Remove the oil tubes.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

METERING OIL PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Metering Oil Pump Voltage Inspection

1. Disconnect the metering oil pump No.1 and No.2 connectors (2 terminals). (See METERING
OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Measure the voltage at terminal B using a tester.
1. If not as specified, repair or replace the related wiring harnesses.

Metering oil pump No.1, No.2 standard voltage
1. B+ [IG-ON, 20C {68 F}]
Metering Oil Pump Resistance Inspection

1. Disconnect the metering oil pump No.1 and No.2 connectors (2 terminals). (See METERING
OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Measure the resistance between terminals AB using a tester.
1. If not within the specification, replace the metering oil pump.

Metering oil pump No.1, No.2 standard resistance
1. 3.64.1 ohms [20C {68 F}]
Oil Nozzle Inspection

1. Remove the oil nozzle. (See OIL NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Blow compressed air into area A while applying water to area B and verify that bubbles form
on area B.
1. If not as specified, replace the oil nozzle.

Specification
Compressed air (kPa {kgf/cm 2 , psi})
Condition
Below 200 {2.04, 29.0}
Bubbles not exist
350 {3.57, 50.8} or more
Bubbles exist
Oil Leakage Inspection

1. Verify that there is no oil leakage from the following metering oil pump system parts.
1. If there is oil leakage, repair or replace the applicable part.
Metering oil pumps (junction with oil tube/hose)
Oil nozzles (junction with oil tube/rotor housing)
OCV (installation position)
Oil pressure sensor (installation position)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL PAN UPPER BLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
A vehicle that is lifted but not securely supported on safety stands is dangerous. It can slip or fall, causing death or
serious injury. Never work around or under a lifted vehicle if it is not securely supported on safety stands.
Continuous exposure to USED engine oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your skin by washing with
soap and water immediately after working with engine oil.
4. Drain the engine oil. (See ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
5. Remove the under cover. (See OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
6. Remove the oil pan. (See OIL PAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
9. Refill with the specified type and amount of the engine oil. (See ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
1Connector
2Oil pan upper block component
(See Oil Pan Upper Block Component Removal Note.)
(See Oil Pan Upper Block Component Installation Note.)
3Baffle plate
4Clip
5Oil level switch
6Baffle plate
7Oil pan upper block
Oil Pan Upper Block Component Removal Note

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the installation surface of the housing and oil pan upper block.
1. Remove the oil pan upper block component using a separator tool.
Oil Pan Upper Block Component Installation Note

CAUTION:
1. Apply the silicon sealant in a single, unbroken line around the whole perimeter.
2. Install the oil pan upper block before the applied sealant starts to harden.
3. Using bolts with the old seal adhering could cause cracks in the housing.
1. Completely clean and remove any oil, dirt, sealant or other foreign material that may be adhering to the oil pan upper block
and housing.
2. When reusing the oil pan upper block installation bolts, clean any old sealant from the bolts.
3. Apply silicone sealant to the areas as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Apply silicone sealant to the outer circumference of the bolt hole at locations A shown in the figure.
Thickness
1. 2.56.5 mm {0.100.26 in}

4. Install the oil pan upper block component to the housing.
5. Tighten the oil pan upper block installation bolts.
Tightening torque
1. 18.625.5 Nm {1.92.6 kgfm, 13.818.8 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COOLING SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
1Cooling system cap

(See COOLING SYSTEM CAP INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
2Thermostat
(See THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See THERMOSTAT INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
3Water pump
(See WATER PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
4Cooling fan motor No.1

(See COOLING FAN COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See FAN MOTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
5Radiator
(See ENGINE COOLANT PROTECTION INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
(See ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
(See ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
(See RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See COOLING FAN COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See FAN MOTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
7Coolant reserve tank
(See ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
(See COOLANT RESERVE TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Never remove the cooling system cap or loosen the radiator drain plug while the engine is
running, or when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding engine coolant and steam may
shoot out and cause serious injury. It may also damage the engine and cooling system.
Turn off the engine and wait until it is cool. Even then, be very careful when removing the
cap. Wrap a thick cloth around it and slowly turn it counterclockwise to the first stop. Step
back while the pressure escapes.
When you are sure all the pressure is gone, press down on the cap using the cloth, turn it,
and remove it.
Depending on the vehicle, the cooling fan may operate suddenly even when
switch is turned off. Therefore, keep hands and tools away from the cooling
cooling fan is not operating to prevent injury to personnel or damage to the
Always disconnect the negative battery cable when servicing the cooling fan
the cooling fan.
< Previous Next >
the ignition
fan even if the
cooling fan.
or parts near
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
and remove it.
NOTE:
If the FL22 mark is shown on or near the cooling system cap, use Mazda Genuine FL22
engine coolant.
FL22 type engine coolant is shipped as a diluted solution. Use the solution as is when
replacing coolant.
1. Verify that the engine coolant level in the coolant reserve tank is between the F and L marks.
If the engine coolant level is below the L mark, add engine coolant.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE COOLANT PROTECTION INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Measure the coolant temperature and specific gravity using a thermometer and a hydrometer.
CAUTION:
1. Use engine coolant at a concentration that meets the environmental conditions
in which the vehicle is driven, otherwise engine damage could occur.
2. The engine has aluminum parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycolbased coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
3. Do not use coolants containing Alcohol, Methanol, Borate or Silicate. These
coolants could damage the cooling system.
4. Use only soft (demineralized) water in the coolant mixture. Water that contains
minerals will cut down on the coolants effectiveness.
5. Engine coolant damages paint. If engine coolant does get on a painted surface,
rinse it off quickly.
NOTE:
If the FL22 mark is shown on or near the cooling system cap, use Mazda
Genuine FL22 engine coolant.
FL22 type engine coolant is shipped as a diluted solution. Use the solution as is
when replacing coolant.
2. Determine the engine coolant protection level by referring to the graph shown in the figure.
If the engine coolant protection level is not correct, add water or engine
coolant.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
and remove it.
1. Inspect the engine coolant level. (See ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
2. Remove the cooling system cap.
3. Install the SST and a radiator cap tester to the coolant reserve tank filler port.
4. Apply pressure using the radiator cap tester.

CAUTION:
Applying more than 103 kPa {1.05 kgf/cm2 , 14.9 psi} can damage the hoses,
fittings, and other components, and cause leakage.
Engine coolant leakage inspection pressure
103 kPa {1.05 kgf/cm2 , 14.9 psi} [1 min]
5. When pressurizing the cooling system, verify that the pressure is maintained.
If the gauge needle drops, it may indicate water leakage. Repair or replace the
applicable part.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
and remove it.
CAUTION:
1. Use engine coolant at a concentration that meets the environmental conditions in which
the vehicle is driven, otherwise engine damage could occur.
2. The engine has aluminum parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
3. Do not use coolants containing Alcohol, Methanol, Borate or Silicate. These coolants could
damage the cooling system.
4. Use only soft (demineralized) water in the coolant mixture. Water that contains minerals
will cut down on the coolants effectiveness.
5. Engine coolant damages paint. If engine coolant does get on a painted surface, rinse it off
quickly.
NOTE:
If the FL22 mark is shown on or near the cooling system cap, use Mazda Genuine FL22
engine coolant.
FL22 type engine coolant is shipped as a diluted solution. Use the solution as is when
replacing coolant.
Engine coolant capacity (approx. quantity)

MT: 10.0 L {10.6 US qt, 8.80 Imp qt}
AT: 9.8 L {10 US qt, 8.6 Imp qt}
1. Remove the cooling system cap.
2. Loosen the radiator drain plug and drain the engine coolant into a container.
3. Flush the cooling system with water until all traces of color are gone.
4. Let the system drain completely.
5. Tighten the radiator drain plug.
6. Referring to the following chart, select the correct volume percentage of the water and engine
coolant. Antifreeze solution mixture percentage (Except FL22 type engine coolant)
Volume percentage (%)
Engine coolant protection
Gravity at 20 C {68 F}
Water
Coolant
Above -16 C {3.2 F}
65
35
1.057
Above -26 C {-15 F}
55
45
1.072
Above -40 C {-40 F}
45
55
1.086
7. Refill the engine coolant into the coolant reserve tank up to the F mark.
8. Install the cooling system cap.
CAUTION:
If the water temperature gauge rises too high, stop the engine and decrease
the engine coolant temperature to prevent overheating. Then, verify the
malfunctioning part and repair or replace it.
9. Start the engine and warm up the engine by idling.
10. After the engine warms up, perform the following steps. At this time, be careful of the
engine coolant temperature to prevent overheating.
a. Run the engine at approx. 2,500 rpm for 5 min.
b. Run the engine at approx. 3,000 rpm for5 s, then return to idling.
c. Repeat step (2) several times.
11. Stop the engine, and inspect the engine coolant level after the engine coolant temperature
decreases. If it is low, repeat steps 710.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WATER PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
and remove it.
5. Remove the battery, battery box, battery tray. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
6. Loosen the water pump pulley installation bolt.
7. Position the drive belt out of the way. (See DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
1Water pump pulley

2Engine hanger (engine front side)
3Generator strap
4Water pump
5O-ring
(See O-ring Installation Note.)
O-ring Installation Note

1. Apply engine coolant to a new O-ring.
2. Install the O-ring.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FAN MOTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Part Inspection
1. Verify that the battery is fully charged. (See BATTERY INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
2. Disconnect the cooling fan motor connector (4 terminals).
3. Install a tester and battery to the cooling fan motor connector (4 terminals) as shown in the
figure.
4. Verify that each fan motors operate smoothly at the standard current.
If there is any malfunction, replace the applicable part.
Cooling fan motor No.1, No.2 standard current
7.710.7 A [12V]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COOLANT RESERVE TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
and remove it.
4. Remove the battery, battery box. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
5. Remove the air cleaner component, air cleaner insulator. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
6. Drain the engine coolant until the coolant reserve tank becomes empty. (See ENGINE
COOLANT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
1Hose
2Connector
3Coolant reserve tank
4Hose
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
and remove it.
5. Remove the battery, battery box. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
6. Remove the secondary air control valve. (See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL
9. Remove the water pump pulley. (See WATER PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
1Upper radiator hose

2Coolant reserve tank hose
3Generator strap
4Thermostat cover
5Thermostat
(See Thermostat Installation Note.)
Thermostat Installation Note

1. Install the thermostat by fitting the projection on the thermostat to the recess of the
thermostat case.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

THERMOSTAT INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the thermostat. (See THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Visually check that the thermostat valve is closed.
3. Place the thermostat in water.
WARNING:
During inspection, the thermostat and water are extremely hot and can cause
severe burns. Do not touch the thermostat and water.
4. Heat the water and check the following.
Opening temperature and valve lift
If there is a malfunction, replace the thermostat. (See
THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
Thermostat initial-opening temperature
8084 C {176183 F}
Thermostat full-open temperature
95 C {203 F}
Thermostat full-open lift
More than 8.5 mm {0.33 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Never remove the cooling system cap or loosen the radiator drain plug while the engine is running, or when
the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding engine coolant and steam may shoot out and cause serious injury. It
may also damage the engine and cooling system.
Turn off the engine and wait until it is cool. Even then, be very careful when removing the cap. Wrap a thick
cloth around it and slowly turn it counterclockwise to the first stop. Step back while the pressure escapes.
When you are sure all the pressure is gone, press down on the cap using the cloth, turn it, and remove it.
a. Splash shield
b. Aerodynamic under cover (See AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Battery, battery box, battery tray, battery duct (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
d. Air cleaner component, air cleaner insulator (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
6. Position the coolant reserve tank out of the way. (See COOLANT RESERVE TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
7. Disconnect the ATF oil cooler hose from the radiator. (AT)
12. Inspect the ATF level. (AT) (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
1Cooling fan motor connector

2Upper radiator hose
3Lower radiator hose
4Condenser fitting bolt
(See Condenser Fitting Bolt Removal Note.)
5Bracket
6Radiator bracket
7Radiator and cooling fan component
8Cooling fan component
9Radiator
Condenser Fitting Bolt Removal Note

1. Remove the condenser fitting bolt, and position the condenser out of the way with the cooler pipes still
connected.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COOLING SYSTEM CAP INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
and remove it.
1. Clean the cooling system cap and the sealed part.
2. Inspect the cooling system cap for cracks or everted seal.
If there is any malfunction, replace the cooling system cap.
3. Attach the cooling system cap to the SST and a radiator cap tester.
4. Hold the cooling system cap downward and apply pressure gradually. Verify that the pressure
is held stable for 10 s.
If the pressure is not held stable, replace the cooling system cap.
Cooling system cap valve opening pressure
73.6103 kPa {0.751.05 kgf/cm2 , 10.714.9 psi}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COOLING FAN COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
and remove it.
a. Splash shield
b. Aerodynamic under cover (See AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER
c. Battery, battery box, battery tray, battery duct (See BATTERY
d. Air cleaner component, air cleaner insulator (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
6. Position the coolant reserve tank out of the way. (See COOLANT RESERVE TANK
7. Disconnect the ATF oil cooler hose from the radiator. (AT)
8. Remove the radiator and cooling fan component. (See RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
13. Inspect the ATF level. (AT) (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
1Cooling fan No.1

2Cooling fan No.2
5Radiator cowling
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM VACUUM HOSE ROUTING DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
A hot engine and intake-air system can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait
until they are cool before removing the intake-air system.
Fuel line spills and leakage from the pressurized fuel system are dangerous. Fuel can ignite
and cause serious injury or death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To
prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line Safety Procedure, while referring to the
BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION.
1. Turn the steering wheel to the left to secure an operation space.
2. Complete the "BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION". (See BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION [13BMSP].)
3. Remove the engine cover. (See. ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
4. Remove the battery cover, battery and battery box. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
6. Remove the aerodynamic under cover. (See AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER
7. Remove the front splash shield (RH).
8. Remove the secondary air injection (AIR) pipe installation nuts.
9. Disconnect the vacuum hose.
10. Disconnect the air hose and vacuum hose.
11. Remove the AIR pipe installation bolt.
12. Pull up the AIR pipe and set it aside.

14. Position the generator drive belt out of the way.
15. Remove the water pump pulley. (See WATER PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
16. Remove the generator strap. (See THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
17. Disconnect the hoses from the thermostat cover and thermostat case.
18. Remove the vacuum pipe installation bolt and nut, and set the vacuum pipe aside.
19. Remove the thermostat component.
20. Set aside the main wiring harness to the battery side.
23. Complete the AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION. (See AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION [13BMSP].)
1SSV (See SSV Installation Note.)
SSV Installation Note

1. Remove the carbon adhering to the internal SSV port of the intake manifold.
a. Wrap a clean cloth around the driver shaft (120 mm or more).
b. Spread a clean cloth underneath the internal SSV port of the intake manifold and
cover the secondary port.
c. Set the engine cleaner perpendicularly and spray it to the bottom surface of the
internal SSV port.
d. Wait 5 min after spraying.
e. Clean the bottom surface of the internal SSV port using (1).
NOTE:
Be careful that carbon does not fall into the secondary port.
2. Install a new gasket and the SSV.
Tightening torque
7.810.8 Nm {79.6110.1 kgfcm, 69.195.5 inlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR (VDI) VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
A hot engine and intake-air system can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait
until they are cool before removing the intake-air system.
BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION.
1. Complete the "BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION". (See BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION [13BMSP].)
2. Remove the engine cover. (See. ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
6. Remove the air hose and throttle body. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
7. Remove the dipstick pipe installation bolt. (See ENGINE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13BMSP].)
8. Remove the extension manifold and oil filler pipe. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
9. Remove the metering oil pump No.1 (See METERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
10. Remove the clip securing wiring harness from the metering oil pump bracket and set the
wiring harness aside.
13. Complete the "AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION". (See AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION [13BMSP].)
1VDI valve
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VACUUM CHAMBER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Vacuum Hold Inspection

1. Remove the extension manifold and oil filler pipe. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
2. Remove the vacuum hose.
3. Install the vacuum pump as shown in the figure.
4. Inspect using the following procedure:

a. Apply vacuum until it reaches 60 kPa {450 mmHg, 18 inHg}.
b. If it reaches 60 kPa {450 mmHg, 18 inHg}, stop applying vacuum.
c. Verify the displayed vacuum after 10 s.

Standard
60 50 kPa {450 375 mmHg, 18 15 inHg}
If it is not within the specification, inspect the check valve. (See
Check valve.)
Check valve
1. Remove the check valve.

Standard
60 50 kPa {450 375 mmHg, 18 15 inHg}
If not within the specification, replace the check valve.
If it is within the specification, inspect the solenoid valve. (See
Solenoid valve.)
Solenoid valve
1. Remove the filter caps from two of the solenoid valves and install blind caps (1010-13104) to
the removed positions.

Standard
60 50 kPa {450 375 mmHg, 18 5 inHg}
4. Perform the same inspection for the remaining two solenoid valves.
Replace the solenoid valve which is not within the specification.
If all of the solenoid valves are not within the specification, replace the oil filler
pipe as a single component.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Hold up the air cleaner as shown in the figure to remove the rubber from the air cleaner case.
2. Remove the air cleaner element from the air cleaner.
3. Inspect the following items:

If there is any abnormality, clean or replace the air cleaner element.
Has the replacement interval come?
Is the air cleaner element soiled, damaged, or bent?
Are the air cleaner case and the air cleaner element correctly
sealed?
Is the correct air cleaner element installed?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
1Connector
2Accelerator pedal
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
1 VFAD solenoid valve (Vehicles with VFAD)

(See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See VARIABLE FRESH AIR DUCT (VFAD) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
2 APV motor
(See INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)

(See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) MOTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
3 Intake manifold
(See INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See INTAKE MANIFOLD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP].)
4 SSV actuator
(See SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
5 VDI actuator (Vehicles with VDI)
(See VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR (VDI) VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR (VDI) ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
6 SSV solenoid valve
(See SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
7 VDI solenoid valve (Vehicles with VDI)
(See VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR (VDI) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
8 Check valve (one-way)
(See CHECK VALVE (ONE-WAY) INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
9 Accelerator pedal
(See ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
10Throttle body
(See THROTTLE BODY INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
11Air cleaner
(See AIR CLEANER ELEMENT INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
12VFAD actuator (Vehicles with VFAD)
(See VARIABLE FRESH AIR DUCT (VFAD) ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
13Vacuum chamber
(See VACUUM CHAMBER INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTAKE MANIFOLD VACUUM INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Verify that the intake-air system related parts and hoses are securely installed.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose shown in the figure.
3. Install the vacuum gauge.

5. Measure intake manifold vacuum while no load and Idling.
If not within the specification, perform the following inspection:
Compression pressure (See COMPRESSION INSPECTION [13B-
MSP].)
Air intake
Each hose installation part
Throttle body installation part
Fuel injector installation parts
Extension manifold (upper, lower) installation
part
Purge solenoid valve installation part
Intake manifold installation part
Intake manifold vacuum
MT: 66.756.0 kPa {500421 mmHg, 19.616.6 inHg}
AT: 66.953.1 kPa {501399 mmHg, 19.715.7 inHg}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
A hot engine and intake-air system can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until they are cool
before removing the intake-air system.
Fuel line spills and leakage from the pressurized fuel system are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious
injury or death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line
Safety Procedure, while referring to the BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION.
1. Complete the BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION. (See BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION [13B-MSP].)
6. Add the engine coolant to the cooling system filler neck and the coolant reserve tank to replace that during
servicing.
9. Complete the AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION. (See AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION [13B-MSP].)
1 Air cleaner cover

2 VFAD solenoid valve (Vehicles with VFAD)
3 Vacuum chamber
4 Air cleaner element
5 Air cleaner case
6 Air hose
(See Air Hose Installation Note.)
7 Throttle body
(See Throttle Body Removal Note.)
(See Throttle Body Installation Note.)
8 Extension manifold (upper)
(See Extension Manifold (Upper) Removal Note.)
9 Extension manifold (lower)
10Oil filler pipe
11SSV solenoid valve
12VDI solenoid valve (Vehicles with VDI)
13Air cleaner insulator
(See Air Cleaner Insulator Installation Note.)
14Fresh-air duct
(See Fresh-air Duct Removal Note.)
(See Fresh-air Duct Installation Note.)
Throttle Body Removal Note

WARNING:
Turn off the engine and wait until it is cool. Even then, be very careful when removing the cap. Wrap a thick
cloth around it and slowly turn it counterclockwise to the first stop. Step back while the pressure escapes.
When you are sure all the pressure is gone, press down on the cap using the cloth, turn it, and remove it.
CAUTION:
Do not plug the water hose with a sharp-edged object. Otherwise, the hose could be damaged.
1. Wrap a clean cloth around the cooling system cap and release the pressure by loosening the cap slowly.
2. Remove the water hose from the throttle body and plug the water hose quickly.
Extension Manifold (Upper) Removal Note

1. Remove the front suspension tower bar. (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].)
2. Remove the bracket as shown in the figure.
3. Remove the extension manifold (upper).
Fresh-air Duct Removal Note

1. Remove the front bumper. (See FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the fresh-air duct.
Fresh-air Duct Installation Note

1. Install the fasteners.
2. Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
7.810.8 Nm {80110 kgfcm, 7095 inlbf}
Air Cleaner Insulator Installation Note
1. Temporarily tighten nuts.

2. Temporarily tighten bolts.
3. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque.
4. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
7.810.8 Nm {80110 kgfcm, 7095 inlbf}
Throttle Body Installation Note

1. Temporarily tighten the throttle body to the intake manifold.
2. Remove the plug from the engine coolant hose and install the water hose to the throttle body quickly.
Air Hose Installation Note

1. Align the alignment marks with the air hose notches.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can very easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always keep sparks and
flames away from fuel.
Fuel line spills and leakage from the pressurized fuel system are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious
injury or death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the Fuel
Line Safety Procedure while referring to the BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION.
Remove the engine, transmission and crossmember carefully, holding it steady. If the transmission falls it could
be damaged or cause injury.
After disconnecting the steering shaft joint, always set the EPS system to the neutral position to prevent system
malfunction. (See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING.)
CAUTION:
Do not bend the jet air fuel mixing nozzle. Otherwise malfunction of the engine may occur. Exercise extreme
caution when handling the intake manifold.
NOTE:
The engine must be removed to remove the intake manifold.
Remove the engine, transmission, and crossmember component as a single unit downward of the vehicle.
a. Front wheel and tires (SeeGENERAL PROCEDURES (SUSPENSION).)
b. Engine cover (SeeENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
c. Front suspension tower bar (SeeFRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].)
d. Battery cover, battery, battery box and battery tray (SeeBATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
e. Air cleaner, intake-air duct and air cleaner insulator (SeeINTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
f. PCM (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
g. AIR pump (See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Drain the engine coolant. (SeeENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
4. Disconnect the brake vacuum hose.
5. Disconnect the quick release connector going to the charcoal canister from the engine room side. (See QUICK
RELEASE CONNECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
6. Disconnect the fuel hose from the fuel distributor (housing side). (See FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
7. Remove the ignition coil. (See IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
8. Remove the A/C belt. (See DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)

9. Remove the A/C compressor with the pipes connected and secure the A/C compressor using wire or rope so that
it is out of the way.
10. Disconnect the engine wiring harness from the main fuse block side.
12. Remove the under cover. (See ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
13. Disconnect front ABS wheel speed sensor connector. (See FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
14. Disconnect the radiator hose, the heater hose and coolant reserve tank hose.
15. Disconnect the selector link. (AT) (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
16. Remove the clutch release cylinder with the pipes connected and secure the clutch release cylinder using wire or
rope so that it is out of the way. (MT) (See CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
17. Remove the shift lever component. (MT) (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
18. Remove the engine, transmission, and crossmember component. (See ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
19. Remove the extension manifold (upper and lower). (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
20. Remove the AIR control valve. (See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE
1Fuel hose
(See QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2Fuel distributor (intake manifold side)
(See FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3Intake manifold
(See Intake Manifold Installation Note.)
Intake Manifold Installation Note

1. Apply oil thoroughly to the APV as shown in the figure.
2. Tighten the bolts in the order shown in the figure
3. Retighten the No.1 bolt after tighten the all bolts.

Tightening torque
18.625.5 Nm {1.92.6 kgfm, 1418 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

THROTTLE BODY INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Resistance Inspection
1. Remove the throttle body. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Verify that there is no continuity between the throttle body and throttle body each terminal.
If not as specified, replace the throttle body. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Measure the resistance between the throttle actuator terminals.

If not as specified, replace the throttle body. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
If as specified, carry out the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
Throttle valve actuator resistance
Ambient temperature (C {F}) Resistance (ohm)
Approx. 20 {68}
0.3100
Circuit Open/Short Inspection

1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or short (continuity check).
Open circuit
If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair or replace the wiring harness.
Throttle body terminal A and PCM terminal 2A
Throttle body terminal B and PCM terminal 2B
Short circuit
If there is no continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair or replace the wiring harness.
Throttle body terminal A and power supply
Throttle body terminal A and body GND
Throttle body terminal B and power supply
Throttle body terminal B and body GND
Throttle Valve Inspection

1. Remove the throttle body. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Open the throttle valve from the closed position to open the fully position by hand.
3. Verify that the throttle valve moves smoothly.
If cannot be verified, replace the throttle body. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
4. Release hand from the throttle valve when at the fully open position.
5. Verify that the throttle valve returns to the closed position smoothly by spring force.
6. Press the throttle valve from the closed position to the fully closed position by hand.
7. Verify that the throttle valve move approx. 5.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Perform the following intake-air system part inspections.
NOTE:
If there is improper installation or a malfunction of an intake-air system part, it
could cause poor emission, low engine output, or rough idling.
Air Hose Inspection

1. Visually inspect the following items:
If there is any abnormality, reinstall or replace the air hose.
Is there any looseness or disconnection of air hose and air
cleaner cover connecting parts?
Is there any looseness or disconnection of air hose and throttle
body connecting parts?
Is the hose correctly installed?
Are there any cracks or splits in the air hose?
Hose Inspection
1. Refer to the intake-air system hose routing diagram and verify that the hoses are installed in
the correct positions. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM VACUUM HOSE ROUTING DIAGRAM [13BMSP].)
If there is any abnormality, install in the correct position.
2. Verify that there is no crushing, cracks, or splits on the hose.
If there is any abnormality, repair or replace the hose.
Fresh-air Duct Inspection

1. Remove the fresh air duct. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Verify that there is no damage or peeling on the heat shield gasket for the fresh air duct.
If there is any abnormality, repair or replace the fresh air duct. (See INTAKEAIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
Air Cleaner Insulator Inspection

1. Verify that the air cleaner insulator has been installed.
If it has not been installed, install an air cleaner insulator.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTAKE MANIFOLD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the intake manifold. (See INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Remove the APV position sensor No.1. (See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
3. Remove the APV position sensor No.2. (See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
1Bracket
2APV motor
(See APV Removal Note.)

3SSV switch
4VDI valve (Vehicles with VDI)
5SSV
6Gasket
7APV
(See APV Removal Note.)
(See APV Installation Note.)
8Intake manifold
APV Removal Note

1. Rotate the APV gear by hand to a position which allows removal of the APV installation bolt.
2. Remove the APV installation bolt and the APV.
APV Installation Note

CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the APV installation bolt, be careful not to perform the following:
Do not tighten the APV installation bolt to a torque which exceeds the specification.
Do not apply part cleaner to the threads of the APV installation bolt.
1. Install the APV using a new APV installation bolt.
Tightening torque
0.91.2 Nm {9.212 kgfcm, 8.010 inlbf}

2. Rotate the APV gear manually with the APV pointed perpendicular to the ground and verify that the APV can be rotated
smoothly.
APV Motor Installation Note

1. Install the intake manifold. (See INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Rotate the APV gear manually and verify that it can be rotated smoothly (approx. three-quarter rotation).
If the gear cannot be rotated smoothly, clean the internal ports of the housing and the areas around the APV.
3. Install a new gasket, APV motor and bracket.
Tightening torque
6.99.8 Nm {7199 kgfcm, 6286 inlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Airflow Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the SSV solenoid valve. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Inspect for airflow using the steps in the table below.
If there is any malfunction, replace the SSV solenoid valve. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)

Open circuit
SSV solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2I
SSV solenoid valve terminal A and main relay terminal C
Short circuit
SSV solenoid valve terminal B and body GND
SSV solenoid valve terminal A and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Disconnect the vacuum hose of the SSV actuator.
2. Install the vacuum pump to the SSV actuator.
3. Verify that the rod moves as indicated in the table below when gradually applying a vacuum
to the SSV actuator. Rod movement
Vacuum
(kPa {mmHg, inHg})
Rod movement
4.0 {30, 1.2}
Starts to move
25.3 {190, 7.47}
Fully pulled
1.3 {9.8, 0.38} Fully returned
If there is any malfunction, replace the SSV. (See INTAKE MANIFOLD

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR (VDI) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Vehicles With VDI
Airflow inspection

2. Remove the VDI solenoid valve. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Inspect for airflow with the steps in the table below.
If there is any malfunction, replace the VDI solenoid valve. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
Circuit open/short inspection

Open circuit
VDI solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2L
VDI solenoid valve terminal A and main relay terminal C
Short circuit
VDI solenoid valve terminal B and body GND
VDI solenoid valve terminal A and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR (VDI) ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13BMSP]
Vehicles With VDI

1. Disconnect the VDI actuator vacuum hose.
2. Install the vacuum pump to the VDI actuator.
to the VDI actuator. Rod movement
Vacuum
(kPa {mmHg, inHg})
Rod movement
4.0 {30, 1.2}
Starts to move
25.3 {190, 7.47}
Fully pulled
1.3 {9.8, 0.38} Fully returned
If it fails, replace the VDI valve. (See INTAKE MANIFOLD

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CHECK VALVE (ONE-WAY) INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the check valve.
2. Verify that there is airflow at port B when blowing air by mouth from port A.
3. Verify that there is no airflow at port A when blowing air by mouth from port B.
If it cannot be verified, replace the check valve.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VARIABLE FRESH AIR DUCT (VFAD) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Vehicles With VFAD
Airflow insoection

2. Remove the VFAD solenoid valve. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Inspect for airflow with the steps in the table below.
If there is any malfunction, replace the VFAD solenoid valve. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
Circuit open/short inspection

Open circuit
VFAD solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 1AE
VFAD solenoid valve terminal A and main relay terminal C
Short circuit
VFAD solenoid valve terminal B and body GND
VFAD solenoid valve terminal A and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VARIABLE FRESH AIR DUCT (VFAD) ACTUATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Vehicles With VFAD

2. Disconnect the vacuum hose of the VFAD actuator.
3. Install the vacuum pump to the VFAD actuator.
to the VFAD actuator.
Rod movement
Vacuum
Rod movement
(kPa {mmHg, inHg})

13 {97.5, 3.8} or more Starts to move
40 {300.0, 11.8} or less Fully pulled
8.7 {65.3, 2.6} or more Fully returned
If it cannot be verified, replace the fresh-air duct. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) MOTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the APV motor. (See INTAKE MANIFOLD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP].)
2. Measure the resistance between the APV motor terminals.
APV motor resistance

850 ohms [20 C {68 F}]
If not as specified, replace the APV motor. (See INTAKE MANIFOLD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP].)
Operation Inspection
CAUTION:
Applying voltage to the APV motor terminals for more than 3 s may damage the APV motor.
2. Remove the APV motor. (See INTAKE MANIFOLD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP].)
3. Apply 12 V with a current of 0.91.9 A to terminal B or D and verify that the gear moves.
Terminal
Gear rotation direction
B
B+ GND
Clockwise
GND B+
Counterclockwise
If there is any malfunction, replace the APV motor. (See INTAKE MANIFOLD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13BMSP].)

Open circuit
APV motor terminal B and PCM terminal 2F
APV motor terminal D and PCM terminal 2D
Short circuit
APV motor terminal B and power supply
APV motor terminal B and body GND
APV motor terminal D and power supply
APV motor terminal D and body GND
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
Engine Compartment Side
1Pulsation damper
(See PULSATION DAMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See PULSATION DAMPER INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
2Quick release connector
3Fuel injector (FS, RS)

4Fuel injector (FP, RP)
5Fuel pump resistor
(See FUEL PUMP RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See FUEL PUMP RESISTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Fuel Tank Side
1Fuel tank
(See FUEL TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See FUEL TANK INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
2Fuel-filler pipe
3Nonreturn valve
(See NONRETURN VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
4Fuel pump unit

(See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP].)
(See FUEL PUMP UNIT INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Fuel is extremely flammable. Always keep sparks and flame away from fuel. Ignition may
cause death or serious injury, or damage to equipment.
prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line Safety Procedure.
CAUTION:
If there is foreign material on the connecting area of the quick release connector, it might
damage the connector or fuel pipe. To prevent this, when the quick release connector has
been disconnected, clean the connecting area before reconnecting it.
Fuel Line Safety Procedure

1. Remove the fuel-filler cap to release the pressure inside the fuel tank.
2. Remove the fuel pump relay.
3. Start the engine.

4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine several times.
6. Install the fuel pump relay.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION [13B-MSP]
Fuel Leakage Inspection

WARNING:
Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can very easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Fuel
can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line Inspection.
Using M-MDS
1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2
2. Using the simulation function FP, start the fuel pump. (See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST
[13B-MSP].)
3. Verify that there is no fuel leakage from the pressurized parts.
If there is leakage, replace the fuel hoses.
If there is damage to the seal on the fuel pipe side, replace the fuel pipe.
Fuel Leakage
There shall be no leakage after 5 min.
4. After reinstallation, repeat Step 13 of the fuel leakage inspection.
Without using M-MDS
CAUTION:
Shorting the wrong terminal of the check connector may cause malfunctions. Make sure to
short only the specified terminal.
1. Ground the check connector terminal F/P to the body using a jumper wire.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and operate the fuel pump.
3. Verify that there is no fuel leakage from the pressurized parts.
If there is leakage, replace the fuel hoses.
If there is damage to the seal on the fuel pipe side, replace the fuel pipe.
Fuel Leakage
4. After reinstallation, repeat Step 13 of the fuel leakage inspection.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL LINE PRESSURE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
and cause serious injury or death and damage.To prevent this, complete the following
inspection with the engine stopped.
3. Disconnect the engine compartment side quick release connector. (See QUICK RELEASE
CONNECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
4. Turn the lever of the SST parallel to the hose as shown in the figure.
5. Insert the SST quick release connector into the fuel pipe until a click heard.
6. Verify that the quick release connector is firmly connected by pulling it by hand.
7. Start the fuel pump using the following procedure.
Using M-MDS
Connect the negative battery cable. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
Using the simulation function FP, start the fuel pump. (See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC TEST [13B-MSP].)

Without using M-MDS
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
Shorting the wrong terminal of the check connector may cause
malfunctions. Make sure to short only the specified terminal.
Ground the check connector terminal F/P using the jumper wire.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and operate the fuel pump.
8. Measure the fuel line pressure.
If not within the specification, inspect or replace the following parts:
If it is less than the specification
Fuel pump unit
Fuel line leakage
If it is more than the specification
Fuel pump unit
Fuel line clogging
Fuel line pressure
375450 kPa {3.834.58 kgf/cm 2 , 54.465.2 psi}
9. Stop the fuel pump using the following procedure.
Using M-MDS
Using the simulation function FP, stop the fuel pump. (See ON-BOARD
Without using M-MDS
Disconnect the jumper wire and stop the fuel pump.

10. Wait 5 min and measure the fuel hold pressure.
If it is within the specification, inspect the following.
Fuel line for clogging or leakage
Fuel hold pressure
200 kPa {2.0 kgf/cm2 , 29 psi}
12. Disconnect the SST.
13. Connect the quick release connector. (See QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
5. Remove the extension manifold (upper and lower). (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
6. Remove the oil filler pipe. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
7. Remove the metering oil pump (No.1, No.2). (See METERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
8. Remove the metering oil pump bracket (No.1, No.2). (See Metering Oil Pump Bracket Installation Note.)

11. Perform the VDI operation inspection. (13B-MSP (high power)) (See VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE-AIR
(VDI) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
1Harness connector
(See Harness Connector Installation Note.)
2Fuel hose
(See Fuel Hose Installation Note.)
3Fuel injector (FS, RS)
(See Fuel Injector (FS, RS) Removal Note.)
4Fuel distributor (intake manifold side)
5Fuel distributor (housing side)
(See Fuel Distributor (Housing Side) Installation Note.)
6Fuel injector (FP, RP)
Fuel Injector (FS, RS) Removal Note

1. Lift up the fuel distributor (intake manifold side) slightly and remove the fuel injector (intake manifold side).
Fuel Distributor (Housing Side) Installation Note
CAUTION:
If the fuel distributor and fuel distributor insulator are installed with foreign material adhering to the installation
surfaces, cracking or splitting could occur, causing a malfunction such as whistling noise or abnormal
acceleration. Always verify that there is no foreign material adhering to the installation surfaces and clean these
areas if necessary before installing the fuel distributor and fuel distributor insulator.
Fuel Hose Installation Note

1. Pass the fuel hose under the oil hose and install it as shown in the figure.
Harness Connector Installation Note

CAUTION:
Improper connection of the wiring harness connectors for primary injectors may occur because the connectors
on the front and rear rotor sides have the same shape. When connecting the wiring harnesses and injectors,
verify the colored identification tape affixed on the wiring harness side and the injector positions, and then
connect the wiring harness connectors to the proper injectors. If the colored tape has peeled off or was never
affixed, verify injector connection according to the colors of the wires.
1. Verify the colors of the identification tape on the wiring harness connectors and the injector connections according
to the following table.
If there is no colored tape, identify injector connection according to the colors of the wires and
connect the wiring harness connectors.
Identification tape color: Not applicable
Harness ConnectorIdentification tape color
FP
White
RP
Green
FS
RS
Metering Oil Pump Bracket Installation Note

1. Tighten the metering oil pump bracket No.2 installation bolts in the order shown.
Tightening torque
18.625.5 Nm {1.92.6 kgfm, 1418 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL INJECTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
2. Remove the extension manifold. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Disconnect the fuel injector connector.
4. Measure the resistance between terminals A and B of the fuel injector.
Fuel injector resistance

Approx. 13.8 ohms [20 C {68 F}]
If not within the specification, replace the fuel injector. (See FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)

Open circuit
Fuel injector (FP) terminal B and PCM terminal 2BB
Fuel injector (RP) terminal B and PCM terminal 2BD
Fuel injector (FS) terminal B and PCM terminal 2BC
Fuel injector (RS) terminal B and PCM terminal 2AZ
Fuel injector (FP) terminal A and main relay terminal C
Fuel injector (RP) terminal A and main relay terminal C
Fuel injector (FS) terminal A and main relay terminal C
Fuel injector (RS) terminal A and main relay terminal C
Short circuit
Fuel injector (FP) terminal B and body GND
Fuel injector (RP) terminal B and body GND
Fuel injector (FS) terminal B and body GND
Fuel injector (RS) terminal B and body GND
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Fuel is extremely flammable. Always keep sparks and flame away from fuel. Ignition may
cause death or serious injury, or damage to equipment.
prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line Safety Procedure.
A person charged with static electricity could cause a fire or explosion, resulting in death or
serious injury. Before draining fuel, make sure to discharge static electricity by touching a
vehicle.
CAUTION:
When the fuel gauge indicates 3/4 or more, the fuel level is higher than the installation
surface of the fuel pump and the fuel suction pipe bracket. Due to this condition, fuel may
spill or leak out when performing this procedure. Before performing this procedure, always
drain out fuel so that the fuel tank is half full or less (according to the fuel gauge needle).
3. Remove the rear seat. (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the service hole cover.
5. Disconnect the quick release connector from the fuel pump unit. (See QUICK RELEASE
6. Connect the hose to the fuel pump unit and drain the fuel into a container used for collecting
gasoline.
7. Drain fuel from the fuel tank using the following procedure.
Using M-MDS
[13B-MSP].)
Without using M-MDS
[13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
Shorting the wrong terminal of the check connector may cause
malfunctions. Make sure to short only the specified terminal.
Ground check connector terminal F/P to the body using a jumper wire.
CAUTION:
The fuel pump may malfunction if it is operated without any
fuel in the fuel tank (fuel pump idling). Constantly monitor the
amount of fuel being discharged and immediately stop
operation of the pump when essentially no fuel is being
discharged.
NOTE:
When operating the fuel pump with a full fuel tank, fuel
discharge will become erratic after approx. 10 min but will

continue for approx. 10 min more and then essentially no
fuel will be discharged. At this time the fuel gauge needle will
be at the halfway position.
Using M-MDS
Without using M-MDS
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and stop the fuel pump.
Disconnect the jumper wire.
1Connector
2Fuel pump cap
(See Fuel Pump Cap Removal Note.)

(See Fuel Pump Cap Installation Note.)
3Fuel suction pipe
4Fuel pump unit
(See Fuel Pump Unit Removal Note.)

Fuel Pump Cap Removal Note

CAUTION:
The cap could be damaged if the SST is used with any play between the cap and the SST.
Securely attach the SST so that there is no gap between the SST tabs and the side of the
cap.
1. Remove the fuel pump cap using the SST.
Fuel Pump Unit Removal Note

CAUTION:
The fuel suction pipe might be damaged, if the fuel pump unit is lifted too much. Make
sure to lift the pump only a small amount.
Fuel Pump Cap Installation Note

1. Align the convex of the fuel pump unit with the notch of the retainer as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Remove the residue of gasoline on gasket or cap completely. Any residue of gasoline can
make the fuel pump unit turn round and prevent it from fixing.
2. Adjust the start mark of the fuel tank with the center one out of three rib lines of the cap,
then turn it around 360 degrees by hand as shown in the figure.
If the retainer and cap cannot be tighten by hand, remove the cap, verify that
there is no damage or misalignment on the retainer and cap, and then tighten
again.
CAUTION:
The cap could be damaged if the SST is used with any play between the cap
and the SST. Securely attach the SST so that there is no gap between the SST
tabs and the side of the cap.
3. While keeping the alignment mark and the retainer notch aligned, tighten the cap to the
rotation angle and specified torque using the SST.
If the specified torque cannot be obtained even when the cap is rotated to the
specified rotation angle, replace with a new cap and retainer and repeat Step 3.
Rotation angle (Total angle for Step 2 and Step 3)
580620
Cap tightening torque (approx.)
80180 N m {8.218 kgfm, 60132 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL PUMP UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, do not damage
the sealing surface of the fuel pump unit when removing or installing.
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
1Fuel filter body
2Pressure regulator
3Fuel pump
4Transfer
5Fuel filter (low-pressure side)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL PUMP UNIT INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Continuity Inspection
2. Disconnect the fuel pump unit connector.
3. Inspect for continuity between fuel pump unit connector terminals B and D.
If there is no continuity, replace the fuel pump unit. (See FUEL PUMP UNIT

Open circuit
Fuel pump unit terminal D and body GND
Fuel pump unit terminal B and main relay terminal C
Short circuit
Fuel pump unit terminal D and power supply
Fuel pump unit terminal B and body GND
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL PUMP RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
2. Remove the secondary air injection (AIR) pump. (See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR)
PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
1Connector
2Bracket
3Fuel pump resistor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL PUMP RESISTOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
If a tester lead is inserted forcefully into a terminal during resistance measurement, the
terminal may deform and cause a decrease in the contact pressure between terminals
while the connector is connected. When measuring resistance, attach a tapered lead or
wire to the tester lead and lightly touch the terminal with the tip.

2. Remove the fuel pump resister. (See FUEL PUMP RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
3. Verify that the continuity between the fuel pump resister terminal A and B is within the
specification.
Fuel pump resistor continuity

0.3040.336 ohms [20 C {68 F}]
If not within the specification, replace the fuel pump resistor. (See FUEL PUMP
RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
A person charged with static electricity could cause a fire or explosion, resulting in death or serious injury. Before draining fuel,
make sure to discharge static electricity by touching a vehicle.
Fuel line spills and leakage from the pressurized fuel system are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injury or death
and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the "Fuel Line Safety Procedure".
CAUTION:
When the fuel gauge indicates 3/4 or more, the fuel level is higher than the installation surface of the fuel pump and the fuel
suction pipe bracket. Due to this condition, fuel may spill or leak out when performing this procedure. Before performing this
procedure, always drain out fuel so that the fuel tank is half full or less (according to the fuel gauge needle).
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
4. Disconnect the quick release connector from the fuel pump unit. (See QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
5. Connect the hose to the fuel pump unit and drain the fuel into a container used for collecting gasoline.
6. Drain the fuel from the fuel tank using the following procedure.
Using M-MDS
Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2
Using the simulation function FP, start the fuel pump. (See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [13B-MSP].)
CAUTION:
Shorting the wrong terminal of the check connector may cause malfunctions. Make sure to short only the specified
terminal.
Without using M-MDS
CAUTION:
The fuel pump may malfunction if it is operated without any fuel in the fuel tank (fuel pump idling).
Constantly monitor the amount of fuel being discharged and immediately stop operation of the
pump when essentially no fuel is being discharged.
NOTE:
When operating the fuel pump with a full fuel tank, fuel discharge will become erratic after
approx. 10 min but will continue for approx. 10 min more and then essentially no fuel will be
discharged. At this time the fuel gauge needle will be at the halfway position.
Using M-MDS
Using the simulation function FP, stop the fuel pump. (See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [13B-MSP].)
Without using M-MDS
a. Fuel pump unit. (See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
b. Main silencer and middle pipe. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
c. Power plant frame. (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].) (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
d. Propeller shaft. (See PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
10. Position the parking brake cable out of the way. (See PARKING BRAKE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Connector
2 Evaporative hose
3 Breather hose
(See Breather Hose Installation Note.)
4 Joint hose
(See Joint Hose Installation Note.)
5 Fuel tank strap
(See Fuel Tank Strap Removal Note.)
6 Fuel tank
7 Cap
(See Cap Removal Note.)
(See Cap Installation Note.)
8 Fuel suction pipe bracket
9 Fuel suction pipe
10Fuel gauge sender unit (main)
(See FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11Fuel gauge sender unit (sub)
(See FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
12Retainer
13Protector
14Joint pipe
15Fuel-filler cap
16Dust cover
17Fuel-filler pipe
(See Fuel-Filler Pipe Removal Note.)
Fuel Tank Strap Removal Note

NOTE:
The tool cannot reach the fitting bolt (rear) of the fuel tank strap in ways other than shown in the figure. Remove the fuel tank
strap according to the following procedure.
1. Insert the extension into the service hole on the rear crossmember.
2. Attach the socket to the extension in the service hole.
3. Remove the fuel tank strap.
Cap Removal Note

CAUTION:
The cap could be damaged if the SST is used with any play between the cap and the SST. Securely attach the SST so that
there is no gap between the SST tabs and the side of the cap.
1. Remove the cap using the SST.
Fuel-Filler Pipe Removal Note

1. Remove the rear ABS wheel-speed sensor. (See REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the rear shock absorber lower bolt. (See REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Loosen the rear crossmember installation nut (6 locations), and lower the rear crossmember. (See REAR CROSSMEMBER
4. Remove the fuel-filler pipe.
Cap Installation Note

1. Align the convex of the set plate with the notch of the retainer as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Remove the residue of gasoline on gasket or cap completely. Any residue of gasoline can make the set plate turn round and
prevent it from fixing.
2. Adjust the start mark of the fuel tank with the center one out of three rib lines of the cap, then turn it around 360 degrees by
hand as shown in the figure.
If the retainer and cap cannot be tighten by hand, remove the cap, verify that there is no damage or misalignment
on the retainer and cap, and then tighten again.
CAUTION:
The cap could be damaged if the SST is used with any play between the cap and the SST. Securely attach the SST
so that there is no gap between the SST tabs and the side of the cap.
3. While keeping the alignment mark and the retainer notch aligned, tighten the cap to the rotation angle and specified torque using
the SST.
If the specified torque cannot be obtained even when the cap is rotated to the specified rotation angle, replace with
a new cap and retainer and repeat Step 3.
580620
80180 Nm {8.218 kgfm, 60132 ftlbf}
Joint Hose Installation Note

1. Install the joint hose and clamps as shown in the figure.
Breather Hose Installation Note

1. Install the breather hose and clamps as shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Fuel is very flammable liquid. If fuel spills or leaks from the pressurized fuel system, it will
cause serious injury or death and facility breakage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To
prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line Safety Procedure, while referring to the BEFORE
SERVICE PRECAUTION.
CAUTION:
Disconnecting/connecting the quick release connector without cleaning it may cause damage to
the fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean the quick release connector joint area
before disconnecting/connecting using a cloth or soft brush, and make sure that it is free of
foreign material.
Quick Release Connector Type

CAUTION:
There are two types of quick release connectors. Verify the type and location, and
install/remove properly.
Type A Removal
CAUTION:
The quick release connector may be damaged if the release tab is bent excessively. Do not
expand the release tab over the stopper.
NOTE:
The fuel hose can be removed by pushing it to the fuel pipe side to release the lock.
2. Rotate the release tab on the quick release connector to the stopper position.
3. Pull out the quick release connector straight from the fuel pipe and disconnect it.
4. Cover the disconnected quick release connector and fuel pipe with vinyl sheeting or a similar
material to prevent it from scratches or dirt.
Type B Removal
2. Move the retainer upward using a small flathead screwdriver or a similar tool.
3. Pull out the fuel hose straight from the fuel pipe and disconnect it.
4. Cover the disconnected quick release connector and fuel pipe with vinyl sheeting or a similar
material to prevent it from scratches or dirt.
Type A Installation
NOTE:
If the quick release connector O-ring is damaged or has slipped, replace the quick release
connector.
A checker tab is integrated with the quick release connector for new fuel hoses. Remove the
checker tab from the quick release connector after the connector is completely engaged with
the fuel pipe.
1. Inspect the fuel hose and fuel pipe sealing surface for damage and deformation.
If there is any malfunction, replace it with a new one.
2. Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to the sealing surface of the fuel pipe.
3. Reconnect the fuel hose straight to the fuel pipe until a click is heard.
NOTE:
If the quick release connector dose not move at all, disconnect it, verify that the Oring is not damaged or has not slipped, and then reconnect the quick release
connector.
4. Lightly pull and push the quick release connector a few times by hand, and then verify that it can
move 2.03.0 mm {0.080.12 in} and is connected securely.
Type B Installation
NOTE:
If the quick release connector O-ring is damaged or has slipped, replace the fuel hose.
1. Inspect the fuel hose and fuel pipe sealing surface for damage and deformation.
2. Install the quick release connector.
Insert the fuel pipe straight to the end of the quick release connector.
Push down the retainer using a finger.
If the retainer cannot be pushed down, push the fuel pipe further
to the quick release connector.
3. Lightly pull and push the quick release connector a few times by hand, and then verify that it is
connected securely.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PULSATION DAMPER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the pulsation damper. (See PULSATION DAMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
2. Visually inspect the pulsation damper for damage, cracking, or excess deterioration that would
cause fuel leakage.
If there is any malfunction, replace the pulsation damper. (See PULSATION
DAMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PULSATION DAMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
2. Remove the fuel distributor (intake manifold side). (See FUEL INJECTOR
1Clip
2Pulsation damper
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL TANK INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
This inspection is for two rollover valves and fuel shut-off valve integrated in the fuel tank.
1. Remove the connector and the fuel hose from the fuel pump unit. (See QUICK RELEASE
2. Remove the fuel tank with the fuel pump unit and fuel suction pipe bracket still installed. (See
FUEL TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Perform the following procedure to verify the fuel tank airtightness.
a. Plug the fuel pump unit pipe, ports B and C.
b. Apply a pressure to port A and wait for a while.

c. Verify that there is no air flow leakage from the fuel tank.
If there is air flow, replace the fuel tank. (See FUEL TANK
4. Plug the fuel pump unit pipe and port B.
5. Level the fuel tank.

6. Apply a pressure to port A and wait for a while.
7. With the pressure still applied, verify that there is air flow port C and the pressure.
If there is no air flow, replace the fuel tank. (See FUEL TANK
If there is air flow, place the fuel tank upside down.
8. Apply a pressure to port A and wait for a while.
9. With the pressure still applied, verify that there is no air flow from port C.
If there is air flow, replace the fuel tank. (See FUEL TANK
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NONRETURN VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the fuel pump. (See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
NOTE:
The nonreturn valve cannot be removed as it is built into the fuel tank.
The nonreturn valve is normally closed due to spring force.
2. Verify that the nonreturn valve opens/closes through the fuel pump installation hole.
If it does not open/close or return to the normal position, replace the fuel tank.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EXHAUST SYSTEM INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Start the engine and inspect each exhaust system component for exhaust gas leakage.
If there is leakage, repair or replace the appropriate component.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
A hot engine and exhaust system can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until they are cool before
servicing the exhaust system.
3. Remove the exhaust system insulator. (See Exhaust System Insulator Removal/Installation Note.)
1 Tunnel member
2 Main silencer
(See Main Silencer Installation Note.)
3 Middle pipe
(See Middle Pipe, Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Installation Note.)
4 Seal ring
(See Seal Ring Removal Note.)
(See Seal Ring Installation Note.)
5 Protector
6 HO2S
(See HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
7 TWC
(See Middle Pipe, Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Installation Note.)
8 Bracket
9 A/F sensor
(See AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
10AIR pipe

(See Engine Mount Bracket (RH) Removal Note.)
12Exhaust manifold
(See Exhaust Manifold Removal Note.)
(See Exhaust Manifold Installation Note.)
Exhaust System Insulator Removal/Installation Note

1Insulator (front)
2Insulator (middle)
Insulator (rear)
(See Insulator (rear) removal note.)
Insulator (rear) removal note
1. Push out the mandrel using a hammer and punch (22.8 mm {0.080.11 in} diameter).
2. Remove the flange using a drill (5 mm {0.20 in} drill bit).
Seal Ring Removal Note

1. Remove the seal ring using a flathead screwdriver being careful not to damage the pipe.
Engine Mount Bracket (RH) Removal Note

1. Attach the SST and support the engine.
2. Remove the engine mount rubber (LH) installation nut.

1Engine mount rubber (RH)

(See Engine mount rubber (RH) removal note.)
Engine mount rubber (RH) removal note
1. Tighten the A part indicated in the figure, and then pull up the engine to remove the engine mount rubber (RH).
Exhaust Manifold Removal Note

2. Loosen the bolts in the order shown in the figure.
Exhaust Manifold Installation Note
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the gasket and self-lock nuts on the joint area between the engine and exhaust manifold.
If a gasket with detached crimps is used on the joint area between the engine and exhaust manifold, exhaust gas will
leak. Be careful not to allow the crimps to detach from the gasket. Do not use a gasket if any crimps are detached.
1. Tighten the bolts in the order shown in the figure.
Middle Pipe, Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Installation Note

1. Spray carbon remover (TB6601 or equivalent) on the flared section of the exhaust pipe.
2. Remove the carbon adhering to the flared section shown in the figure using a nylon brush or sandpaper (No.400 or
equivalent).
Seal Ring Installation Note

CAUTION:
If installation is performed without using the SST, the seal ring will be damaged and deformed, resulting in an incorrect
installation. Always use the SST to install the seal ring.
1. Temporarily install the seal ring to the pipe so that the seal ring is even with the flange.
2. Install the SST to the seal ring so that the SST is even with the flange.
3. Press in the seal ring by tapping the SST using a plastic hammer until the seal ring contacts the flange.
Main Silencer Installation Note

CAUTION:
If the main silencer and middle pipe are reused after being separated once, exhaust gas leakage will occur. When
replacing the main silencer or middle pipe, always replace the main silencer and middle pipe at the same time.
1. Install the main silencer so that the stopper is at the position shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EXHAUST MANIFOLD INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the gasket and self-lock nuts on the joint area between the engine and
exhaust manifold.
If a gasket with detached crimps is used on the joint area between the engine and
exhaust manifold, exhaust gas will leak. Be careful not to allow the crimps to detach from
the gasket. Do not use a gasket if any crimps are detached.
1. Remove the exhaust manifold. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)

2. Verify that there is no deformation, damage, cracks, or breakage.
If there is any malfunction, replace the exhaust manifold. (See EXHAUST
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EMISSION SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
Engine Compartment Side
1AIR pump
(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
2AIR control valve
(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
3Purge solenoid valve

(See PURGE SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
4Catch tank
(See CATCH TANK INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
5AIR solenoid valve
(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Exhaust System
1Catalytic converter
(See THREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC) INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Fuel Tank Side
1Rollover valve
(See FUEL SHUT-OFF/ROLLOVER VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
2Fuel shut-off valve
(See FUEL SHUT-OFF/ROLLOVER VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
3Charcoal canister
(See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See CHARCOAL CANISTER INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
4Air filter
(See AIR FILTER INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
5Evaporative emission (EVAP) system leak detection pump
(See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
6Fuel-filler cap
(See FUEL-FILLER CAP INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
7Evaporative chamber
(See EVAPORATIVE CHAMBER INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CHARCOAL CANISTER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the charcoal canister. (See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM
2. Plug ports A and C, then blow air into port B.
CAUTION:
Do not apply the pressure more than 20 kPa {0.2 kgf/cm2 , 2.8 psi} to the
charcoal canister. Doing so will damage the charcoal canister.
3. Verify that there is no air leakage from the case.
If not as specified, replace the charcoal canister. (See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AIR FILTER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the air filter. (See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM
2. Blow from port A and verify that there is airflow from port B.
If not as specified, replace the air filter. (See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CONTROL SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Blow from port B and verify that there is airflow from port A.
If not as specified, replace the air filter. (See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
2. Inspect resistance of the EVAP system leak detection pump.
TerminalsResistance (ohm)
AB
2050
AC
26.632.4
AD
118 or less
If not as specified, replace the EVAP system leak detection pump. (See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM
Airflow Inspection
2. Remove the EVAP system leak detection pump. (See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM
3. Blow air into port A and verify that there is airflow from port B.
If not as specified, replace the EVAP system leak detection pump. (See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
4. Blow air into port B and verify that there is airflow from port A.
If not as specified, replace the EVAP system leak detection pump. (See EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)

Open circuit
EVAP system leak detection pump terminal C and PCM terminal 1V
EVAP system leak detection pump terminal D and PCM terminal 1U

EVAP system leak detection pump terminal A and main relay terminal C
EVAP system leak detection pump terminal B and the body GND
Short circuit
EVAP system leak detection pump terminal C and power supply
EVAP system leak detection pump terminal D and power supply
EVAP system leak detection pump terminal A and the body GND
EVAP system leak detection pump terminal B and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PURGE SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Air flow Inspection

2. Remove the purge solenoid valve.
3. Inspect air flow between the ports under the following conditions:

If there is no air flow, replace the purge solenoid valve.

Open circuit
Purge solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2C
Purge solenoid valve terminal A and main relay terminal C
Short circuit
Throttle body terminal A and body GND
Throttle body terminal B and power supply
Throttle body terminal B and body GND
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL-FILLER CAP INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Leakage Inspection
1. Perform the following SST (Evaporative Emission System Tester 134-01049A) self-test:
NOTE:
If the tester does not work correctly during selftest, refer to the tester
operators manual for more detailed procedures.
a. Verify that the gas cylinder valve is closed and the control valve located on the
tester is in the TEST position. All tester displays should be off at this time.
b. Connect the long hose (part of SST) to the tester.
c. Connect the manifold assembly (part of SST) to the long hose as shown.
d. Open the gas cylinder valve and verify the gas cylinder regulator left gauge reads
6982 kPa {0.710.83 kgf/cm 2 , 1012 psi} (preset at factory).
If not, refer to the tester operators manual to contact tester
manufacturer.
e. Press the ON/OFF switch to turn on the SST and make sure the left display reads
0.0.
f. Turn the control valve on the tester to the FILL position.
g. Verify the left display reading is within 13.9 to 14.0 in of water.
If not, adjust the pressure using the regulator knob located on the
right side of the tester.
h. Turn the control valve to TEST position and press the START switch.
i. After the 2-min countdown (left display) is completed, the right display shows the
total pressure loss for that period. A 0.5 in of water loss is acceptable on the selftest.
If the loss is more than 0.5 in of water, do one or more self-test.
If the failed test repeats, check for leak using the ultrasonic leak
detector (part of SST).
2. Press the RESET switch to set the left display reading to 0.0.
3. Connect the fuel cap receiver assembly (part of SST) to the manifold assembly and fuel-filler
cap from the vehicle.
If the fuelfiller cap is not a genuine part, replace it.
4. Turn the control valve to the FILL position.

5. Wait (maximum 20 s) until the left display reads 13.9 to 14.0 in of water.
If the reading is slightly below the specification, adjust it using the regulator
knob.
If the reading is far below, the fuelfiller cap has leak. Replace it.
6. Turn the control valve to the TEST position and press the START switch.
7. After the 2-min countdown (left display) is completed, check the test result (the
failed/passed light on the tester).
If the green light turns on, the fuelfiller cap is normal.
If the red light turns on, the fuelfiller cap has leakage. Replace it.
8. Close the gas cylinder valve.
9. Turn the control valve to the FILL position.
10. Press the ON/OFF switch to turn off the tester.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CATCH TANK INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the extension manifold (upper). (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
2. Seal the catch tank on the purge solenoid valve side.
3. Inspect for air leakage when blowing air from the charcoal canister side.
If air leaks, replace the extension manifold (upper). (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EVAPORATIVE CHAMBER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the rear differential. (See REAR DIFFERENTIAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the evaporative chamber installed on outside air side of the charcoal canister hose.
3. Blow air from port A and verify that there is air flow.
If there is no air flow, replace the evaporative chamber.

4. Verify that there is no deformation or cracking of the evaporative chamber.
If the exterior is not normal, replace the evaporative chamber.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR (EMISSION SYSTEM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
Disconnecting/connecting the quick release connector without cleaning it may cause damage to
the fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean the quick release connector joint area
before disconnecting/connecting using a cloth or soft brush, and make sure that it is free of
foreign material.
Quick Release Connector Type

CAUTION:
There are four types of quick release connectors. Verify the type and location, and
install/remove properly.
Type A Removal
CAUTION:
The quick release connector may be damaged if the release tab is bent excessively. Do not
expand the release tab over the stopper.
NOTE:
The evaporative hose can be removed by pushing it to the evaporative pipe side to release the
lock.
1. Rotate the release tab on the quick release connector to the stopper position.
2. Pull out the quick release connector straight from the evaporative pipe and disconnect it.
3. Cover the disconnected quick release connector and evaporative pipe with vinyl sheeting or a
similar material to prevent it from scratches or dirt.
Type B Removal
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the evaporative pipe when unlocking the retainer.
NOTE:
When removing the quick release connector, either SST 49 E042 001 or 49 N013 103A (Part of
49 N013 1A0D) can be used.
When using SST 49 E042 001
NOTE:
If the quick release connector is removed, replace the retainer with a new one.
1. Set the SST parallel to the quick release connector.
NOTE:
The quick release connector can be removed by pushing the center of the retainer tabs.
The retainer is attached to the evaporative pipe even after the connector is disconnected.
2. Hold the center of the retainer tabs with the SST ends and press the retainer.
3. Pull the connector side and disconnect the quick release connector.
4. Raise a retainer tab using the SST and remove the retainer.
When using SST 49 N013 103A (Part of 49 N013 1A0D)
1. Insert the SST into the quick release connector.
2. Pull out the evaporative hose straight from the evaporative pipe and disconnect it.
3. Cover the disconnected quick release connector and pipe with vinyl sheeting or a similar material
to prevent it from scratches or dirt.
Type C Removal
1. Move the retainer upward using a small flathead screwdriver or a similar tool.
2. Pull out the evaporative hose straight from the evaporative pipe and disconnect it.
Type D Removal
NOTE:
If the quick release connector is removed, replace the retainer with a new one.
1. Push the retainer.
NOTE:
The quick release connector can be removed by pushing the center of the retainer tabs.
The retainer is attached to the evaporative pipe even after the connector is disconnected.
2. Pull the connector side and disconnect the quick release connector.
Type A Installation
NOTE:
If the quick release connector O-ring is damaged or has slipped, replace the quick release
connector.
A checker tab is integrated with the quick release connector for new evaporative hoses.
Remove the checker tab from the quick release connector after the connector is completely
engaged with the evaporative pipe.
1. Inspect the evaporative hose and evaporative pipe sealing surface for damage and deformation.
2. Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to the sealing surface of the evaporative pipe.
3. Reconnect the evaporative hose straight to the evaporative pipe until a click is heard.
NOTE:
If the quick release connector dose not move at all, disconnect it, verify that the Oring is not damaged or has not slipped, and then reconnect the quick release
connector.
4. Lightly pull and push the quick release connector a few times by hand, and then verify that it can
move 2.03.0 mm {0.080.12 in} and is connected securely.
Type B Installation
CAUTION:
Always replace the retainer with a new one when using SST 49 E042 001, otherwise,
evaporative leakage could result.
NOTE:
If the quick release connector O-ring is damaged or has slipped, replace the piping component.
A checker tab is integrated with the quick release connector for new evaporative hoses.
Remove the checker tab from the quick release connector after the connector is completely
engaged with the pipe.
3. Install a new retainer to the quick release connector.
4. Reconnect the evaporative hose straight to the pipe until a click is heard.
connected securely.
Type C Installation
NOTE:
If the quick release connector O-ring is damaged or has slipped, replace the evaporative hose.
Insert the evaporative pipe straight to the end of the quick release connector.
If the retainer cannot be pushed down, push the fuel pipe further
to the quick release connector.
connected securely.
Type D Installation
Insert the evaporative pipe straight to the end of the quick release connector.
If the retainer cannot be pushed down, push the evaporative pipe
further to the quick release connector.
connected securely.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
1Evaporative hose (to EVAP system leak detection pump)

2Evaporative hose (to purge solenoid valve)
(See QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR (EMISSION SYSTEM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3Evaporative hose (to fuel shut-off/rollover valve)
(See QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR (EMISSION SYSTEM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
4Charcoal canister
5Air filter
6EVAP system leak detection pump
(See EVAP System Leak Detection Pump Installation Note.)
7Evaporative chamber
(See Evaporative Chamber Installation Note.)
Evaporative Chamber Installation Note

1. Install the evaporative chamber to the hose.
2. Insert the evaporative chamber into crossmember No.5.
EVAP System Leak Detection Pump Installation Note

1. Install the bracket on the EVAP system leak detection pump.
2. Install the connector A.
3. Install the connector B.
4. Install the clip.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP]
1Air hose
2Vacuum hose
3AIR control valve
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the secondary air injection control valve. (See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR)
CONTROL VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2. Verify that there is no air flow between A and B of the AIR control valve port.
If there is air flow, replace the AIR control valve. (See SECONDARY AIR
INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Install the vacuum pump to the AIR control valve.
4. Pressurize the actuator valve of the AIR control with a negative pressure of approx. 60 kPa
{450 mmHg, 18 inHg}.
CAUTION:
Since the valve actuator of the AIR control could be damaged, do not
pressurize positive pressure or negative pressure more than 100 kPa {1.02
kgf/cm2 , 14.5 psi}.
5. Blow air through port A, then verify that there is air flow.
If there is no air flow, replace the AIR control valve.
6. Blow air from through port B, then verify that there is no air flow.
If there is air flow, replace the AIR control valve. (See SECONDARY AIR
INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP]
[13B-MSP].)
2. Disconnect the air solenoid valve connector.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the air solenoid valve.
4. Remove the air solenoid valve.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
1Connector
2Air hose
3AIR pump bracket
4AIR pump
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Air flow Inspection

2. Remove the AIR solenoid valve. (See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
3. Inspect air flow between the ports under the following conditions:
If there is any malfunction, replace the AIR solenoid valve. (See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SOLENOID

Open circuit
AIR solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 2G
AIR solenoid valve terminal A and main relay terminal C
Short circuit
AIR solenoid valve terminal B and body GND
AIR solenoid valve terminal B and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) PUMP INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Discharging Pressure Inspection
Using M-MDS
1. Remove the air hose between the AIR pump and AIR control valve at the AIR control valve
side.
2. Install the SST on the AIR control side using tape to prevent air leakage.
3. Start the engine, turn all electrical loads off, and idle the engine after completely warming it
up.
5. Turn the PID AIP RLY from off to on position using the simulation function. (See ON-BOARD
CAUTION:
When connecting the secondary air injection pump relay to the body ground,
short the specified terminal, because shorting the wrong terminal may cause
malfunctions.
Do not operate the secondary air injection pump for more than 1 min. to avoid
damaging the pump.
Stop the engine and wait for 1 h or more after energization of the secondary air
injection pump to allow it to cool down before operating it again.
6. Verify that the discharging pressure of the AIR pump is within the specification.
If not within the specification, inspect the following:
PCM terminal 1G and AIR pump relay terminal A
AIR pump relay
If it is within the specification, inspect the
continuity for the AIR pump.
Discharging pressure
612 kPa {0.070.12 kgf/cm 2 , 0.91.7 psi} [1535 C {5995 F}]
Without using M-MDS
1. Remove the air hose between the AIR pump and AIR control valve at the AIR control valve
side.
2. Install the SST on the AIR control side using tape to prevent air leakage.
3. Position the PCM out of the way with the connects still connected. (See PCM
4. Start the engine, turn all electrical loads off, and idle the engine after completey warming it
up.
5. Connect the AIR pump relay terminal A to the ground, and operate the AIR pump.
CAUTION:
When connecting the secondary air injection pump relay to the body ground,
short the specified terminal, because shorting the wrong terminal may cause
malfunctions.
Do not operate the secondary air injection pump for more than 1 min. to avoid
damaging the pump.
Stop the engine and wait for 1 h or more after energization of the secondary air
injection pump to allow it to cool down before operating it again.
6. Verify that the discharging pressure of the AIR pump is within the specification.
If not within the specification, inspect the following:

AIR pump relay
If it is within the specification, inspect the

continuity for the AIR pump.
Discharging pressure
612 kPa {0.070.12 kgf/cm 2 , 0.91.7 psi} [1535 C {5995 F}]
2. Disconnect the AIR pump connector.
3. Inspect for continuity between the AIR pump terminals A and B.
If there is no continuity, replace the AIR pump. (See SECONDARY AIR

INJECTION (AIR) PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL SHUT-OFF/ROLLOVER VALVE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
The fuel shut-off valve and rollover valve cannot be disassembled and inspected because it
is built into the fuel tank.
1. Perform the fuel tank inspection. (See FUEL TANK INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
If malfunction, replace the fuel tank. (See FUEL TANK
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

THREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC) INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
Perform the following procedures if only DTC P0420 is detected.
NOTE:
Make sure that no HO2S DTCs have been detected. If detected, this inspection is not
applicable for TWC inspection.

2. Verify that the HO2S DTCs are not detected using the M-MDS.
If an HO2S DTC is detected, perform the appropriate DTC inspection procedure.
3. Clear the DTC form the PCM memory using the M-MDS.
4. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
5. Verify that the engine compression is within the specification. (See COMPRESSION
If the compression pressure is not within the specification, repair or replace any
malfunctioning part.
6. Drive the vehicle at Drive Mode 3. (See OBD-II DRIVE MODE [13B-MSP].)
7. Access Test ID 10:21:80 using the Diagnostic Monitoring Test Result function.
8. Verify that the test result is within the specification as indicated on the M-MDS.
If not as specified, replace the TWC. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CHARGING SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
1Battery
(See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
2Generator
(See GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Remove and install all parts when the engine is cold, otherwise they can cause severe
burns or serious injury.
When the battery cables are connected, touching the vehicle body with generator terminal
B will generate sparks. This can cause personal injury, fire, and damage to the electrical
components. Always disconnect the negative battery cable before performing the following
operation.
5. Remove the air hose (air cleaner to throttle body). (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
1Terminal B cable
2Generator connector
3Generator
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GENERATOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
1. Do not apply direct battery positive voltage to the generator terminal D, otherwise it could cause
damage to the internal parts (power transistor) of the generator.
Generator Warning Light

2. Verify that the drive belt deflection/tension is within the specification. (See DRIVE BELT
DEFLECTION/TENSION INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
3. With the ignition switch turn to the ON position, verify that the generator warning light illuminates.
If it does not illuminate, inspect the generator warning light and the wiring harness.
1. If the generator warning light and the wiring harness are normal, inspect
the PCM.
4. Verify that the generator warning light goes out after the engine is started.
If the generator warning light does not go out, perform the DTC inspection, then perform
troubleshooting according to the corresponding diagnostic procedure. (See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC TEST [13B-MSP].) (See DTC TABLE [13B-MSP].)
Generator
Voltage

5. Verify that the generator rotates smoothly without any noise while the engine is running.
If there is any noise, find the cause and repair or replace the generator.
6. Measure the voltage at each terminal using a tester.
If it is not as specified, find the cause and repair or replace the applicable part.
Generator standard voltage [IG-ON]
Terminal B: B+
Terminal P: Approx. 1 V or less
Terminal D: Approx. 0 V
Generator standard voltage [Idle, 20 C {68 F}]
Terminal B: 1315 V
Terminal P: Approx. 38 V
Terminal D: Turn the electrical loads (headlights, blower motor, rear window defroster,
brake lights, etc.) on and verify that the voltage reading increases.
Current
NOTE:
1. Since the charging current decreases rapidly after starting the engine, carry out the following
procedure quickly, and read the maximum current value.
6. Connect a tester, which can read 120 A or more, between generator terminal B and the wiring harness.
7. Connect the negative battery cable.
NOTE:
1. When the electrical load on the vehicle is low, the specified current cannot be verified
although the generator is normal. In this case, increase the electrical load (Leave the
headlights turned on for a while, then discharge the battery, or use a similar method.) and
recheck.
2. When the generator itself or the ambient temperature are too high, the specified current
also cannot be verified. In this case, cool down the generator and recheck.
10. Turn the electrical loads (headlights, blower motor, rear window defroster, brake lights, etc.) on and
verify that the current reading increases more than the minimum value indicated below.
1. If it is not as specified, go to the PCM and generator shearing inspection. (See PCM and
generator shearing inspection.)
NOTE:
Current required for generating power varies with the electrical loads applied.
Generator generated current (reference value) [Conditions] Ambient temperature: 20 C {68 F},
Voltage: 1315 V, Engine hot
Engine speed (rpm) Terminal B current (Lower limit of current must be more than 0 A.)
1,000
080 A
2,000
0112 A
PCM and generator shearing inspection
2. Inspect as follows:
Step
Inspection
1 Measure the generator terminal B voltage when the electrical loads*1 are
on and off.
Action
15 V Go to Step 2.
or
more
13 Normal*2
15 V
13 V Go to Step 3.
or
less
2 Monitor the ALTT V PID using the M-MDS, (See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
TEST [13B-MSP].) or measure the PCM 2AJ terminal waveform using an
oscilloscope. (See PCM INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Is the value normal?
Yes Go to Step 4.
No
Inspect followings, then

repair or replace as
necessary.
If there is
no
malfunction,
replace the
PCM.
1. Wiring
harness
between
PCM
terminal
2AJgenerator
terminal P.
2. Wiring
harness
between
PCM
terminal
2AIgenerator
terminal D.
3. Generator
inner parts.
3 Monitor the ALTT V PID using the M-MDS, (See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
TEST [13B-MSP].) or measure the PCM 2AJ terminal waveform using an
oscilloscope. (See PCM INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
Is the value normal?
Yes Go to Step 5.
No

necessary.
If there is
no
malfunction,
replace the
PCM.
1. Wiring
harness
between
PCM
terminal
2AJgenerator
terminal P.
2. Wiring
harness
between
PCM
terminal
2AIgenerator
terminal D.
3. Generator
inner parts.
4 Monitor the
ALTF PID
using the
M-MDS, or
calculate
the duty
value of the
PCM
terminal 2AI
using an
oscilloscope.
Is the duty
value
100%?
Yes Replace PCM.

No

necessary.
If there is
no
malfunction,
replace the
PCM.
1. Wiring
harness
between
PCM
terminal
2AIgenerator
terminal D.
2. Generator
inner parts.
5 Monitor the
ALTF PID
using the
M-MDS, or
calculate
the duty
value of the
PCM
terminal 2AI
using an
oscilloscope.
Is the duty
value 0%?
Yes Replace PCM.

No

necessary.
If there is
no
malfunction,
replace the
PCM.
1. Wiring
harness
between
PCM
terminal
2AIgenerator
terminal D.
2. Generator
inner parts.
*1
*2
Headlights, blower motor, rear window defroster, brake lights, etc.

If the generator field coil duty value does not change when electrical loads (such as
headlights, blower motor, rear window defroster, brake lights) are on or off, inspection
with discharged battery is needed.
Generator Inner Parts
Rotor
1. Measure the resistance between the slip rings using a tester.
If not within the specification, replace the rotor.

Generator rotor resistance (between slip rings) [20 C {68 F}]
1.72.0 ohms
2. Verify that there is no continuity between the slip ring and core using a tester.
If there is continuity, replace the rotor.

3. Inspect the slip ring surface condition.
If the slip ring surface is rough, use a lathe or fine sandpaper to smooth it.
Stator coil
1. Inspect for continuity between the stator coil leads using a tester.
If there is no continuity, replace the stator coil.

2. Verify that there is no continuity between the stator coil leads and the core using a tester.
If there is continuity, replace the stator coil.
Brush
1. Inspect brushes for wear.
If any brush is worn almost to or beyond the limit, replace all of the brushes.
Generator brush length

Standard: 18.5 mm {0.73 in}
Minimum: 5.0 mm {0.2 in}
Brush spring
1. Measure the force of the brush spring using a spring pressure gauge.
2. Read the spring pressure gauge at the brush tip projection of 2 mm {0.079 in}.
Replace the brush spring if necessary.

Generator brush spring force
Standard: 4.86.0 N {0.490.61 kgf, 1.081.34 lbf}
Minimum: 2.16 N {0.22 kgf, 0.49 lbf}
Rectifier
1. Inspect for continuity of the diodes using a tester.
If not as specified, replace the rectifier.

Specification
Tester
Continuity
Negative
Positive
Yes
P1, P2, P3, P4
No
E
No
Yes
P1, P2, P3, P4
Bearing
1. Inspect for abnormal noise, looseness, and sticking.
Replace the bearing if necessary.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
Melt the solder quickly, otherwise the diodes (rectifier) and regulator will be damaged by excessive heat.
1 Rotor component
2 Stator coil component
3 Pulley
4 Rotor
5 Front bearing
6 Rear bearing
7 Front cover
8 Stator coil
9 Rectifier
10Regulator component
11Rear cover
12Terminal B component
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
1. For vehicles with DSC, if the negative battery cable is disconnected, the stored initial
position of the steering angle sensor will be cleared and the DSC will not operate properly,
making the vehicle unsafe to drive. Perform the steering angle sensor initialization
procedure after connecting the negative battery cable.
4. Perform the steering angle sensor initialization procedure. (See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL
POSITION SETTING.)
1Battery cover
(See Battery Cover Removal Note.)
2Negative battery cable
(See Negative Battery Cable Installation Note.)
3Positive battery cable
4Battery clamp
5Battery
6Battery box
(See Battery Box Removal Note.)
7Battery tray
8Battery duct
(See Battery Duct Removal Note.)
Battery Cover Removal Note

CAUTION:
When pulling the clips on the rear, do not apply excessive force to a clip using the
screwdriver or pair of pliers.
If excessive force is applied to the clips on the rear, they could be damaged. When
removing the battery cover, use the following procedure to prevent damaging the clips.
1. Remove the battery cover using the following procedure.
a. Pull up the clips on the rear and disengage the battery box tabs.
b. Slightly move the battery cover to the vehicle front side and disengage the battery
box tabs on the front.
c. Remove the battery cover.
Battery Box Removal Note

1. Lightly press the battery box from inside to outside to detach it from the battery tray tabs.
2. Remove the battery box.
Battery Duct Removal Note

1. Remove the aerodynamic under cover (See AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER
2. Remove the two clips which secure the battery duct to the radiator cowling.
3. Remove the battery duct.
Negative Battery Cable Installation Note
1. When connecting the negative battery cable to the battery, connect the negative battery cable
as shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BATTERY INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
1. Since battery acid is toxic, be careful when handling the battery.
2. Since battery acid is highly corrosive, be careful not to allow it to contact clothing or the
vehicle.
3. In case battery acid contacts skin, eyes, or clothing, flush it immediately with running
water. If the acid gets in the eyes, flush with water for more than 15 min and get prompt
medical attention.
Using GR8-1291:
GR8-1291 INSTANT TRAINING MODULE (VIDEO)
1. Remove the battery filler caps and check the water level. If necessary, add water to the
appropriate level. Reinstall the caps.
2. Attach the small red clamp to the positive battery terminal and the small black clamp to the
negative terminal.
3. Select the Battery Test icon in the Main Menu, then press the NEXT key.
4. Test the battery by following the on-screen instructions to enter the appropriate information.
Refer to the Mazda GR8-1291 Instruction Manual for more information.
5. After the test, the Control Module displays a battery decision with an analysis in a series of
screens. The analysis includes the battery state of health (SOH) and state of charge (SOC).
Before the Battery Test results are displayed, use the keypad on the Control Module to enter the
last 5 digits of the vehicle's VIN and press NEXT to continue.
6. The Mazda GR8-1291 will print out the test results and display one of the eight possible
results listed below. Review the results and follow the Action Step for the displayed result.
Battery
Tester
Display
GOOD Return the battery to service.
BATTERY
Action Step
GOOD - Fully charge the battery and return it to service.

RECHARGE
CHARGE & Fully charge the battery and retest. Failure to fully charge the battery before
RETEST retesting may cause false readings. If CHARGE & RETEST appears again after you
fully charge the battery, replace the battery.
REPLACE A REPLACE BATTERY result may also mean a poor connection between the battery
BATTERY and the vehicle. If you tested the battery using the System test, disconnect the
battery cables and retest using the Battery Test before replacing it.
BAD CELL Replace the battery.
- REPLACE
WARNING: Do not charge the battery. Charging a battery with one or more bad cells
could cause an explosion and serious harm to the user.
SIDE POST Test data was inconclusive using the side post. Retest using side post adapters.
TEST
JUMP
START
POST
Data was inconclusive using the jump start post. Retest at the battery terminals.
24 VOLT 24-volt battery detected. You are attempting to test in-vehicle both batteries in a 24BATTERY volt system. Disconnect the batteries and test them individually.
Using Electrolyte Specific Gravity

1. Measure the electrolyte specific gravity using a hydrometer.
If it is less than the specification, recharge the battery. (See BATTERY
RECHARGING [13B-MSP].)
Battery electrolyte specific gravity [20 C {68 F}]
1.221.29
Using Battery Voltage

1. Inspect the battery as follows:
Step
Inspection
Action
1 Measure the battery positive voltage.
12.4 V Go to
or Step 3.
more
Less Go to the
than next
12.4 V step.
2 Quick charge for 30 min and recheck voltage.
12.4 V Go to the
or next
more step.
Less Replace
than the
12.4 V battery.
3 Using the battery load tester, apply load current (see battery load test
current) and record battery voltage after 15 s. Is voltage more than the
specification?
Battery load test current

80D26L (55): 195 A
Standard specification
Battery temp. (C {F}) Minimum voltage (V)
4 {39}
9.3
10 {50}
9.4
16 {61}
9.5
21 {70}
9.6
PARASITIC DRAW INSPECTION

Using GR8-1291:
Yes
Normal
No
Replace
the
battery.
GR8-1291 PARASITIC DRAWTESTINGINSTANT TRAINING (VIDEO)
1. Verify that the ignition is off (key has been removed) and that all doors, the hood and the trunk are closed.
2. Remove the battery cover.
3. Select the DMM icon from the main menu.
4. Then select DC Ammeter.
5. Since you are measuring milliamps, select the 70 AMP MAX range.
6. Connect the amp clamp to the negative battery cable.
7. Monitor the current draw.
NOTE:
If the battery is not left undisturbed for 10 min or more, but less than 2.5 hours, the tester will indicate a
high value (approx. 200 mA).
If the ignition or any electrical accessory is operated after the tester is connected, the battery must be left
undisturbed for 10 min or more, but less than 2.5 hours from that point.
For vehicles with the immobilizer system, the system periodically shifts synchronization of the security
light flashing. Therefore, 65 mA (0.1 s) current draw is supplied when the security light is illuminated, and
40 mA (2 s) current draw is supplied when the security light is not illuminated. In addition, the measuring
instrument, which shows the average value, indicates around 55 mA.
8. Leave the vehicle electrical system undisturbed for 10 min or more, but less than 2.5 hours, and then
measure the parasitic draw.
If not within specification, measure the parasitic draw while removing the fuses one by one from
the inside of the main fuse block and the inside of the fuse block.
Inspect and repair wiring harnesses and connectors of the fuse where the current draw has decreased.
Parasitic draw (When the ignition is off (key is removed) and all doors, hood and
trunk are closed.)
40-65 mA
NOTE:
If the battery is left for 2.5 hours or more, a battery parasitic draw value of 25-45
mA is indicated.
Without Using GR8-1291:
1. Verify that the ignition is off (key has been removed) and that all doors are closed.
CAUTION:
Operating electrical loads while the parasitic draw is being measured can
damage the tester.
NOTE:
If the battery is not left undisturbed for 30 min, the tester will indicate a high
value (approx. 300 mA).
If the key or any electrical accessory is operated within approx. 30 min after
the tester is connected, the battery must be left undisturbed for approx. 30
min from that point.
For vehicles with the immobilizer system, the system periodically shifts
synchronization of the security light flashing. Therefore, 45 mA (0.1 s) current
is supplied when the security light is illuminated, and 25 mA (2 s) current is
supplied when the security light is not illuminated. In addition, the measuring
instrument, which shows the average value, indicates around 30 mA.
5. Connect the tester between the negative battery terminal and negative battery cable, leave
the battery undisturbed for 30 min, and then measure the parasitic draw.
If not within the specification, measure the parasitic draw while removing the
fuses one by one from the inside of the main fuse block and the inside of the
fuse block.
Inspect and repair wiring harnesses and connectors of the fuse where the
current has decreased.
Battery parasitic draw (When the ignition is off (key is removed), all
doors and the hood are closed.)
2545 mA
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BATTERY RECHARGING [13B-MSP]
Using GR8-1291:
WARNING:
Keep all flames away from the battery, otherwise evaporated gas from the battery fluid
may catch fire, and cause serious injury.
GR8-1291 INSTANT TRAINING MODULE (VIDEO)
1. Remove the battery filler caps and check the water level. If necessary, add water to the
appropriate level. Reinstall the caps.
2. Attach the large red clamp to the positive battery terminal and the large black clamp to the
negative terminal.
3. Select the Diagnostic icon in the Main Menu, then press the NEXT key.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the appropriate information. Refer to the Mazda
GR8-1291 Instruction Manual for more information.
5. The GR8-1291 will test and charge the battery. Before the Diagnostic Charging results are
displayed, use the keypad on the Control Module to enter the last 5 digits of the vehicle's VIN
and press NEXT to continue.
6. After the charge session is complete, the Mazda GR8-1291 will print out the Diagnostic
Charging results and display one of the following results listed below. Review the results and
follow the Action Step for the displayed result.
Battery
Tester
Display
Action Step
GOOD
Return the battery to service.
BATTERY
REPLACE Replace the battery.
BATTERY
BAD CELL - Replace the battery.
REPLACE
WARNING: Do not charge the battery. Charging a battery with one or more bad
cells could cause an explosion and serious harm to the user.

SIDE POST Test data was inconclusive using the side post. Retest using side post adapters.
TEST
JUMP START Data was inconclusive using the jump start post. Retest at the battery terminals.
POST
Without Using GR8-1291:
WARNING:
Keep all flames away from the battery, otherwise evaporated gas from the battery fluid
may catch fire, and cause serious injury.
Remove the battery filler caps when recharging to prevent battery deformation or damage.
CAUTION:
Do not quick charge for more than 30 min. It will damage the battery.
1. Remove the battery and then place it in a pan of water. (See BATTERY
2. Remove the battery filler caps.

3. Connect a battery charger to the battery and adjust the charging current as follows.
Battery slow charge current
80D26L (55): 5.56.5 A
Battery quick charge current [30 min]
80D26L (55): 35 A
4. After the battery is recharged, verify that the voltage is within the specification and remains
at the same value for 1 h or more after the recharging has been completed.
If not within the specification, replace the battery.

Standard voltage
12.4 V or more
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

IGNITION SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
1Ignition coil
(See IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See IGNITION COIL INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
2High-tension lead
(See HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See HIGH-TENSION LEAD INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
3Spark plug
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
3. Remove the negative battery cable. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
1Connector
2High-tension lead
(See HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3Ignition coil
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

IGNITION COIL INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Ignition Coil Inspection (Spark Test)

1. Perform the spark test and identify the malfunctioning cylinder.(See ENGINE CONTROL
SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
2. Replace the ignition coil of the malfunctioning cylinder with that of a normal cylinder, and
reperform the spark test.(See ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
If the spark is not normal due to a malfunctioning ignition coil, replace that
ignition coil.
It is unlikely that all four ignition coils fail to operate properly. To prevent
replacing a normal component, perform the above procedure, identify the
malfunctioning ignition coil, and replace it.
Ignition Coil Inspection

2. Connect the timing light to the high-tension lead.
3. Verify that the timing light flashes at a certain interval on all high-tension leads while idling
and racing the engine.
If the timing light does not flash at a certain interval, inspect the following:
a. Replace the high-tension lead and spark plug for which the timing light flashes at
a certain interval.
b. Verify that the timing light flashes at a certain interval while idling and racing the
engine.
If the timing light does not flash at a certain interval even if the
high-tension lead and spark plug are replaced, replace the ignition
coil. (See IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
If the high-tension lead and spark plug are replaced and the timing
light flashes at a certain interval, a high-tension lead or spark plug
malfunction can be considered possible causes. (See HIGH-TENSION
LEAD INSPECTION [13B-MSP].) (See SPARK PLUG INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
If a spark plug that is not as specified is installed, engine performance will be deteriorated.
Install only the specified spark plug when replacing.
4. Disconnect the high-tension leads from the spark plugs. (See HIGH-TENSION LEAD
5. Remove the spark plugs using a plug-wrench.
CAUTION:
1. Install spark plugs marked with white (standard type plug) or orange (hot type
plug) paint on the leading side and spark plugs with blue paint on the trailing
side.
NOTE:
1. It is easier to remove some spark plugs from beneath the vehicle.
Tightening torque
12.817.7 Nm {131180 kgfcm, 114156 inlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SPARK PLUG INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Specification
Spark plug type
Leading side: N3H5 18 110A (RE7C-L) *1 , N3Y8 18 110A (RE7C-L) *1 , N3Y9 18 110A (RE6CL) *2
Trailing side: N3H1 18 110D (RE9B-T) *1 , N3Y1 18 110A (RE9B-T) *1
*1
*2
Standard equipment
Hot type plug: Available only for customers who often drive their car at very low speed
which causes the plugs to foul easily.
Plug Gap Inspection

CAUTION:
1. To avoid possible damage to the tip, do not adjust the plug gap.
1. To prevent damaging the tip, use a wire type plug gap gauge when inspecting the plug
gap.
1. Measure the spark plug gap using a wire type plug gap gauge.
1. If it is more than the maximum specification, replace the spark plug.
Standard spark plug gap
1.151.25 mm {0.0460.049 in}
Maximum spark plug gap
Leading side: 1.5 mm {0.059 in}
Trailing side: 1.4 mm {0.055 in}
Cleaning
CAUTION:
1. To avoid possible damage to the spark plug tip, do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
NOTE:
1. To avoid possible damage to the tip, use gasoline to clean the spark plugs after removing
dirt.
Visual Inspection
If any of the following malfunctions are indicated, replace the spark plug.
Insulator breakage
Worn electrode
Damaged gasket
Badly burned insulator (sparking side)
1. Measure the resistance of the spark plug using a tester as shown in the figure.
If not within the specification, replace the spark plug.

Spark plug resistance [25C {77 F}]
3.07.5 kilohms
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
Improper installation of the high-tension lead could result in a harmful electrical influence
of other electrical parts, or in a ground fault due to damage to the lead. Be sure to install
the lead in the same position and routing as when it is removed.
5. Remove the high-tension lead from the ignition coil and the spark plug.
CAUTION:
1. Install the high-tension lead with blue and green tape on the trailing side.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HIGH-TENSION LEAD INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Remove the high-tension lead. (See HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
2. Measure the resistance using a tester.
1. If not within the specification, replace the high-tension lead.
High-tension lead resistance [20 C {68 F}]
1.04.0 kilohms
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STARTING SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
1Starter
(See STARTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See STARTER INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
(See STARTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP].)
2Starter interlock switch (MT)
(See STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STARTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
WARNING:
Remove and install all parts when the engine is cold, otherwise they can cause severe
burns or serious injury.
When the battery cables are connected, touching the vehicle body with starter terminal B
will generate sparks. This can cause personal injury, fire, and damage to the electrical
components. Always disconnect the negative battery cable before performing the following
operation.
AT
MT
1Terminal B cable
2Terminal S connector
3Starter
(See Starter Installation Note (AT).)
Starter Installation Note (AT)

NOTE:
If the insulator is peeling or damaged, attach a new insulator using the following
procedure:
1. Peel off the insulator from the starter completely using a scraper.
2. Degrease the insulator attachment area.
3. Attach a new insulator to the starter.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STARTER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
On-vehicle Inspection
2. The starter is normal if it rotates smoothly and without any noise when the engine is cranked.
If the starter does not operate, inspect the following:
Remove the starter, and inspect the starter unit.
Inspect the related wiring harnesses, the ignition switch, and
the transmission range switch (AT).
No-load Test
2. Connect the starter, battery, and a tester as shown in the figure.
3. Operate the starter and verify that it rotates smoothly.

If the starter does not rotate smoothly, inspect the starter unit.
4. Measure the voltage and current while the starter is operating.
If not within the specification, replace the starter.
Starter no-load test voltage
11 V
Starter no-load test current
120 A or less
Magnetic Switch Operation Inspection
Pullout test
NOTE:
Depending on the battery charge condition, the starter motor pinion may rotate while in an
extended state. This is due to current flowing to the starter motor through the pull-in coil
to turn the starter motor, and does not indicate an abnormality.
1. Verify that the starter motor pinion is extended while battery positive voltage is connected to
terminal S and the starter body is grounded.
If the starter motor pinion is not extended, repair or replace the starter.
Return test
1. Disconnect the motor wire from terminal M.

2. Connect battery positive voltage to terminal M and ground the starter body.
3. Pull out the drive pinion with a screwdriver. Verify that it returns to its original position when
released.
If it does not return, repair or replace the starter.
Pinion Gap Inspection

1. Pull out the drive pinion with the battery positive voltage connected to terminal S and the
starter body grounded.
CAUTION:
Applying power for more than 10 s can damage the starter. Do not apply power
for more than 10 s.
2. Measure the pinion gap while the drive pinion is extended.
If not as specified, adjust with an adjustment washer (between drive housing

front cover and magnetic switch).
Starter pinion gap
AT: 0 mm {0 in}
MT: 0.52.0 mm {0.020.07 in}
Starter Inner Parts Inspection
Armature
1. Verify that there is no continuity between the commutator and the core at each segment
using a tester.
If there is continuity, replace the armature.

2. Verify that there is no continuity between the commutator and the shaft using a tester.
If there is continuity, replace the armature.

3. Place the armature on Vblocks, and measure the runout using a dial indicator.
If not within the specification, replace the armature.

Starter armature runout
0.1 mm {0.004 in} max.
4. Measure the commutator diameter.
If not within the minimum specification, replace the armature.

Starter commutator diameter
5. Measure the segment groove depth of the commutator.
If not within the minimum specification, undercut the grooves to the standard
depth.
Segment groove depth of starter commutator
Magnetic switch
1. Inspect for continuity between terminals S and M using a tester.
If there is no continuity, replace the magnetic switch.
2. Inspect for continuity between terminal S and the body using a tester.
If there is no continuity, replace the magnetic switch.

3. Verify that there is no continuity between terminals M and B using a tester.
If there is continuity, replace the magnetic switch.
Brush and brush holder
1. Verify that there is no continuity between each insulated brush and plate using a tester.
If there is continuity, replace the brush holder.

2. Measure the brush length.
If any brush is worn almost to or beyond the minimum specification, replace all
of the brushes.
Starter brush length
3. Measure the brush spring force using a spring balance.
If not within the minimum specification, replace the brush and brush holder
component.
Starter brush spring force

Standard: 23.431.6 N {2.39 3.22 kgf, 5.267.10 lbf}
Minimum: 10.0 N {1.02 kgf, 2.25 lbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STARTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [13B-MSP]
AT
MT
1 Magnetic switch
2 Adjustment washer
3 Rear housing
4 Brush and brush holder
5 Armature
6 Yoke
7 Planetary gear
8 Front cover
9 Lever
10Drive pinion
11Internal gear
12Gear shaft
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
1. Do not reuse the starter interlock switch if it is removed from the vehicle even once.
Replace with a new starter interlock switch when installing.
4. Disconnect the starter interlock switch connector.
5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table using a tester.
If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, replace the starter interlock switch. (See
CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min or more.
2. Remove the driverside air bag module. (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
3. Disconnect the cruise control switch connector. (See AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
4. Inspect for resistance and continuity between cruise control switch terminals GF using a
tester.
If not as specified, replace the audio control switch. (See AUDIO CONTROL
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Switch condition
Resistance (ohm)
ON/OFF button pressed
Continuity
CANCEL button pressed
117123
SET/COAST button pressed
666694
RES/ACCEL button pressed
2,1562,244
No button pressed
No continuity
5. Apply battery positive voltage to cruise control switch terminal E, and connect terminal D to
ground.
6. Verify that the LED illuminates.

If the LED does not illuminate, replace the audio control switch. (See AUDIO
CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP]
APV Position Sensor No.1

1. Remove the battery cover. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
3. Remove the battery. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
4. Remove the battery tray. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
5. Remove the air control valve. (See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
6. Remove the generator. (See GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
7. Disconnect the SSV switch connector.
8. Disconnect the APV position sensor No.1 connector.
9. Remove the APV position sensor No.1.
APV Position Sensor No.2

3. Remove the exhaust manifold. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
4. Disconnect the APV position sensor No.2 connector.
5. Remove the APV position sensor No.2.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PCM TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
Before performing the following inspection, make sure to follow the troubleshooting
flowchart. (See FOREWORD [13B-MSP].)

3. Select PCM_T on the M-MDS.
4. Verify that the PCM_T PID voltage is within the specification.
If not as verified, replace the PCM. (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
PCM Temperature Sensor Output Voltage
1.22.6 V
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL PRESSURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
3. Remove the extension manifold (upper). (See INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP])
4. Remove the extension manifold (lower). (See INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP])
5. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor connector.
6. Remove the oil pressure sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
3. Disconnect the metering oil pump driver connector.
4. Remove the metering oil pump driver.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
2. Verify that the voltage at PCM terminals 2R is within the specification.
If not as verified, replace the oil pressure sensor. (See OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
Oil Pressure Sensor Output Voltage
0.551.03 V [Oil Pressure: 50150 kPa {0.511.52 kgf/cm 2 , 7.3
21.7 psi}]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
3. Disconnect the metering oil pump driver connector.
4. Verify that the resistance is as indicated in the table .
If not within the specification, replace the metering oil pump driver. (See
METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
Metering Oil Pump Driver Resistance
Terminal
Resistance
BD
CB
CF
50100 kilohm
DF
DA
DE
1 Megohm
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [13B-MSP]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
Visual Inspection
1. Visually inspect the MAF/IAT sensor for the following:
Damage, cracks
Rusted sensor terminal
Bent sensor terminal
If there is any malfunction, replace the MAF/IAT sensor. (See
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)/INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT)
If the monitor item condition (reference) is not within the
specification even though there is no malfunction, perform the
Circuit Open/Short Inspection. (See Circuit Open/Short
Inspection.)
Voltage Inspection
1. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor without disconnect the MAF/IAT sensor connector.
3. As the air gradually approaches the MAF detection part of the MAF/IAT sensor, verify that the
voltage at PCM terminal 1AK (M-MDS PID: MAF) varies.
If it cannot be verified even though the related harnesses have no malfunction,
replace the MAF/IAT sensor. (See MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)/INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
1. Disconnect the PCM connector.

2. Disconnect the MAF/IAT sensor connector.
3. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or short circuit. (Continuity inspection)
Open circuit
If there is no continuity in the following wiring harnesses, there is an open circuit. Repair
or replace the wiring harness.
MAF/IAT sensor terminal A and main relay terminal C
MAF/IAT sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 1L
MAF/IAT sensor terminal C and PCM terminal 1AK
Short circuit
If there is continuity in the following wiring harnesses, there is a short circuit. Repair or
replace the wiring harness.
MAF/IAT sensor terminal A and body ground

MAF/IAT sensor terminal C and power supply
MAF/IAT sensor terminal C and body ground
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
3. Remove the neutral switch. (See NEUTRAL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
4. Verify that the continuity between neutral switch terminals A and B is as indicated in the
table.
If there is no malfunction, perform the Circuit Open/Short Inspection. (See

Circuit Open/Short Inspection.)
If there is any malfunction, replace the neutral switch. (See NEUTRAL SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
Measurement condition
Continuity
Push the rod
No continuity
Except above
Continuity detected

2. Disconnect the neutral switch connector.
Open circuit
Neutral switch terminal A and PCM terminal 2AS
Neutral switch terminal B and body ground
Short circuit

Neutral switch terminal A and body ground
Neutral switch terminal A and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE (BARO) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
3. Select BARO on the M-MDS.
4. Verify that the BARO PID voltage is within the specification.
If not as verified, replace the PCM. (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
BARO Sensor Output Voltage
2.443.80 V
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
3. Disconnect the CPP switch connector.
4. Verify that the continuity between CPP switch terminals B and D is as indicated in the table.
If there is no malfunction, perform the Circuit Open/Short Inspection. (See

Circuit Open/Short Inspection.)
If there is any malfunction, replace the CPP switch. (See CLUTCH PEDAL
Measurement condition Clutch pedal position
Continuity
Push the rod
Clutch pedal released No continuity
Except above
Clutch pedal depressedContinuity detected

2. Disconnect the CPP switch connector.
Open circuit
CPP switch terminal B and PCM terminal 1D
CPP switch terminal D and body ground
Short circuit
CPP switch terminal B and body ground
CPP switch terminal B and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP]
3. Remove the generator. (See GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
5. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector.
6. Remove the ECT sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
1. Remove the battery cover. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].))
3. Remove the generator. (See GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
4. Drain the engine coolant. (See ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP])
6. Remove the ECT sensor. (See ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
7. Place the detection part of the ECT sensor in water and verify that the resistance between
ECT sensor terminals A and B is as indicated in the table while gradually increasing water
temperature.
If the monitor item condition/specification (reference) is not within the
specification, even though the resistance is within the specification, perform the
Circuit Open/Short Inspection. (See Circuit Open/Short Inspection.)
If not within the specification, replace the ECT sensor. (See ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
ECT sensor resistance
Water temperature (C {F}) Resistance (ohm)
20 {68}
2,2052,695
80 {176}
287349
91 {196}
227240

Open circuit
ECT sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 2AH
ECT sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 2AY
Short circuit
If there is continuity at the following wiring harnesses, there is a short circuit. Repair or
ECT sensor terminal A and body ground
ECT sensor terminal A and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
4. Verify that the resistance between MAF sensor terminals D and E is as indicated in the table
while blowing hot air gradually into the IAT sensor part built into the MAF sensor.

specification, even though the resistance is within the specification, perform the
Circuit Open/Short Inspection. (See Circuit Open/Short Inspection.)
If not within the specification, replace the MAF/IAT sensor. (See MASS AIR
FLOW (MAF)/INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
IAT sensor resistance
Air temperature (C {F}) Resistance (kilohm)
-20 {-4}
13.618.4
20 {68}
2.212.69
60 {140}
0.4930.667
IAT sensor characteristics graph (reference)

1. Disconnect the PCM connectors.
Open circuit
MAF/IAT sensor terminal D and PCM terminal 1AT
MAF/IAT sensor terminal E and PCM terminal 1AR
Short circuit
MAF/IAT sensor terminal D and body ground
MAF/IAT sensor terminal D and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
HO2S voltage inspection

2. Using the M-MDS, monitor the following:
Vehicle speed (PID: VSS)
Engine speed (PID: RPM)
HO2S voltage (PID: O2S12)
3. Drive the vehicle and decelerate the engine speed by releasing the accelerator pedal fully
when the engine speed is 3,000 rpm or more.
4. Verify that the HO2S outputs a voltage of 0.6 V or more, one time or more, then verify that
the HO2S voltage (PID: O2S12) is 0.3 V or less while decelerating as shown in the figure.
If not within the specification, inspect the HO2S for an open or short circuit.
(See HO2S circuit open/short inspection.) Then if there is no malfunction in the
wiring harness, replace the HO2S. (See HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
HO2S circuit open/short inspection

2. Disconnect the HO2S connector.
3. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for an open or short circuit. (Continuity inspection)
Open circuit
If there is no continuity, there is an open circuit. Repair or replace the wiring harness.
HO2S terminal A and PCM terminal 2Q
HO2S terminal B and PCM terminal 2BH
Short circuit
If there is continuity, there is a short circuit. Repair or replace the wiring harness.
HO2S terminal A and body ground
HO2S terminal A and power supply
HO2S terminal B and power supply
HO2S heater resistance inspection

2. Measure the HO2S resistance between terminals C and D.
If not within the specification, replace the HO2S. (See HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (HO2S) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
HO2S heater resistance
250 ohms
HO2S circuit open/short inspection (heater)

Open circuit
HO2S terminal C and main relay terminal C
HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 2BE
Short circuit
If there is no continuity, there is a short circuit. Repair or replace the wiring harness.
HO2S terminal C and body ground
HO2S terminal D and power supply
HO2S terminal D and body ground
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
5. When replacing the PCM on the vehicles, perform the following:
PCM configuration (See PCM CONFIGURATION [13B-MSP].)
Immobilizer system component replacement/key addition and clearing (See
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].) (See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
1PCM cover
2PCM
3PCM bracket No.1
4PCM bracket No.2
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PCM INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
Without Using the SST

CAUTION:
The PCM terminal voltages vary with change in measuring conditions and vehicle conditions. Always carry out a total
inspection of the input systems, output systems, and PCM to determine the cause of trouble. Otherwise, a wrong
diagnosis will be made.
1. Measure the voltage at each terminal.
If any incorrect voltage is detected, inspect the related system(s), wiring harnesses and connector(s)
referring to the Action column in the terminal voltage table.
Terminal voltage table (Reference)
Terminal
1A
1B
1C
Signal
GND
Connected to
GND
Starter cut-off
control
Test condition
Voltage
(V)
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
Ignition switch is turned to START using key

registered in immobilizer system
Below
1.0
Starter
relay
Starter relay
inspection item
Ignition switch is turned to START using key not

registered in immobilizer system
B+
Below
Related
wiring
harnesses
CPP switch
Clutch pedal depressed

1D* 1
1E
Clutch operation CPP switch
Metering oil
pump No.1
monitor
Metering oil pump No.1,

1G
Metering oil
pump No.2
monitor
Metering oil pump No.2,

B+
IG SW ON
B+
Metering
oil pump
No.1
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
B+
Metering
oil pump
No.2
Cranking
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
During the specified period after cold start
Below
1.0
AIR pump
relay
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
Below
1.0
Fuel pump
relay
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
Cranking
AIR pump controlAIR pump relay

Idling after warm-up
Engine runs.
1H
Fuel pump
control
Fuel pump relay

Approx. 1 s after engine stop, or thereafter
1I
A/C cut-off
control
A/C switch on and fan switch at 1st or higher

A/C relay
Except above
Refrigerant pressure is 1.11 MPa {11.3
kgf/cm2 , 161 psi} or less.
1J
A/C load
Refrigerant pressure
switch (middle)
B+
B+
Refrigerant pressure is 1.60 MPa {16.3 Below

1.0
kgf/cm2 , 232 psi} or more.
Sensor GND
MAF sensor
Under any condition
A/C relay
Related
wiring
harnesses
Refrigerant
pressure
switch
(middle)
Related
wiring
harnesses
Below
1.0
Fuel pump
speed
control
relay
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
Fuel pump speed Fuel pump speed

control
control relay
Idling
1L
Below
1.0
Idling
High engine speed and high load

1K
Related
wiring
harness
Clutch pedal released
IG SW ON
1F
1.0
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
The cooling fan is operating

1M
Electrical fan
control

Except above
B+
The cooling fan is operating at middle speed or

high speed
1N
Electrical fan
control
Below
1.0
Below
1.0
Cooling fan relay No.2,

No.3
Except above
B+
Cooling
fan relay
No.1
Related
wiring
harnesses
Cooling
fan relay
No.2, No.3
Related
wiring
harnesses
1O
1P
1Q
Main relay
control
No malfunction
Main relay
IG SW ON
Malfunctioning
The cooling fan is operating at high speed
1R
Electrical fan
control
1T
1U
1V
Coolant level
switch
Below
1.0
B+
Below
1.0
IG SW ON
Metering oil
pump No.1
control
B+
Cooling fan relay No.4,

No.5
Except above
1S
Below
1.0

Cranking
Coolant level switch
EVAP leak
detection pump EVAP leak detection
pump
(pump)
EVAP leak
detection pump EVAP leak detection
pump
(solenoid)
B+
Main relay
Related
wiring
harnesses
Cooling
fan relay
No.4, No.5
Related
wiring
harnesses
Metering
oil pump
driver
Related
wiring
harness
Engine coolant level in the coolant

reserve tank is more than the L mark.
B+
Engine coolant level in the coolant

reserve tank is at the L mark or less.
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
IG SW ON
B+
EVAP leak
detection
pump
Idling
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
IG SW ON
B+
EVAP leak
detection
pump
Idling
B+
Related
wiring
IG SW ON
Coolant
level
switch
harnesses
1W
1X
1Y
Below
1.0
IG SW ON
1Z
1AA
1AB
Starter signal
Metering oil
pump No.2
control
Brake switch
Cranking
Starter
B+
Idling
Below
1.0
IG SW ON
Below
1.0

Cranking
B+
When the brake pedal is depressed.
B+
Brake switch
Below
1.0
Except above
Starter
Related
wiring
harnesses
Metering
oil pump
driver
Related
wiring
harness
Brake
switch
Related
wiring
harnesses
1AC
1AD
Below
1.0
High engine speed

1AE
VFAD control
(with VFAD)
VFAD solenoid valve

Idling
B+
VFAD
solenoid
valve
Related
wiring
harnesses
1AF
1AG
1AH
1AI
CAN_L
1AJ
Constant voltage
APP sensor
(Vref)
Because this terminal is for communication,

good/no good judgment by terminal voltage is
not possible.
Under any condition
Approx.
5.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
Related
wiring
harness
1AK
MAF sensor
Constant voltage
APP sensor
(Vref)
1AM
CAN_H
1AO
1AP
1AQ
ECT (A/C unit)
APP sensor 1
APP sensor 2
Cruise control
switch
Approx.
1.2
MAF
sensor
Engine speed 2,500 rpm
Approx.
1.5
Related
wiring
harnesses
Under any condition
Approx.
5.0
MAF sensor
1AL
1AN
A/C unit
APP sensor No.1
APP sensor No.2
Cruise control switch

good/no good judgment by terminal voltage is
not possible.
ECT 0 C {32 F}
Approx.
4.0
ECT 20 C {68 F}
Approx.
3.1
ECT 40 C {104 F}
Approx.
2.1
IG SW ON
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harnesses
A/C unit
Related
wiring
harnesses
ECT 60 C {140 F}
Approx.
1.4
ECT 80 C {176 F}
Approx.
0.9
ECT 100 C {212 F}
Approx.
0.5
When the accelerator pedal is

depressed.
3.78
3.93
APP
sensor
No.1

released.
1.555
1.655
Related
wiring
harnesses

depressed.
3.23
3.38
APP
sensor
No.2

released.
1.005
1.105
Related
wiring
harnesses
ON/OFF switch pressed in
Approx.
0
CANCEL switch pressed in
Approx.
1.1
IG SW ON
IG SW ON
IG SW ON SET(-) switch pressed in
Approx.
3.1
Cruise
control
switch
Related
wiring
harnesses
RES(+) switch pressed in
Approx.
4.2
Except above
Approx.
5.0
1AR
Sensor GND
IAT sensor
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
1AS
Sensor GND
APP sensor
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
1AT
IAT sensor
IAT sensor
IAT 0 C {32 F}
Approx.
3.4
IAT 20 C {68 F}
Approx.
2.4
IAT 40 C {104 F}
Approx.
1.5
IG SW ON
IAT 60 C {140 F}
Approx.
0.9
IAT 80 C {176 F}
Approx.
0.5
IAT 100 C {212 F}
Approx.
0.3
A/C switch off
1AU
1AV
A/C control
Sensor GND
switch (high, low), A/C Idling
switch
APP sensor
A/C switch and fan switch on
Under any condition
IAT sensor
Related
wiring
harnesses
B+
Refrigerant
pressure
switch
(high, low)
Below
1.0
A/C switch
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harnesses
Main relay
1AW
1AX
Power supply
Drive-by-wire
relay control
Main relay
Drive-by-wire relay
Under any condition
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
No malfunction
Below
1.0
Drive-bywire relay
Malfunctioning
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
IG SW ON
IG SW ON
1AY
1AZ
IG1
B+
Ignition relay
GND
GND
Ignition
relay
Except above
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
Battery
1BA
Backup power
supply
Battery
Under any condition
B+
1BB
GND
GND
Under any condition
Below
1.0
1BC
1BD
GND
GND
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
Main relay
1BE
Power supply
Main relay
Under any condition
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
B+
Drive-bywire relay
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
Malfunction
1BF
Drive-by-wire
relay control
1BG*1 GND
1BH
2A
2B
GND
Throttle control
(+)
Throttle control
()
Drive-by-wire relay
IG SW ON
No malfunction
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
GND
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
Throttle body (Throttle (See

Inspection Using An Oscilloscope (Reference).)
valve actuator)
Throttle body (Throttle (See

Inspection Using An Oscilloscope (Reference).)
valve actuator)
Throttle
valve
actuator
Related
wiring
harnesses
Throttle
valve
actuator
Related
wiring
harnesses
2C
Purge solenoid
valve control
2D
APV motor
control (+)
Purge
solenoid
valve
(See Inspection Using An Oscilloscope (Reference).)
Related
wiring
harnesses
APV motor
APV motor
Related
wiring
harnesses
OCV
2E
OCV control
OCV
Related
wiring
harnesses
APV motor
2F
APV motor
control (-)
APV motor
During the specified period after cold start

2G
AIR control
B+
High engine speed after warm-up
2I
SSV control
Below
1.0
AIR solenoid valve

2H
Related
wiring
harnesses
SSV solenoid valve
B+
Below
1.0
Except above
AIR
solenoid
valve
Related
wiring
harnesses
SSV
solenoid
valve
Related
wiring
harnesses
2J
2K

2L*2
2M
VDI control
Sensor GND
VDI solenoid valve
Oil pressure sensor
B+
VDI
solenoid
valve
Except above
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
2N
Sensor GND
2O
2P
APV position sensor

No.2
Sensor GND
TP sensor
Below
1.0
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Under any condition
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
HO2S
2Q
2R
HO2S
HO2S
Oil pressure
sensor
2S
01.0
IG SW ON
Oil pressure sensor
(Oil pressure: -0.050.75 MPa {-0.57.6

kgf/cm2 , -7108 psi})
The engine oil amount is more than

the L mark on the dipstick.
2T
Oil-level switch
Oil-level switch
0.228
4.998
Below
1.0
IG SW ON
The engine oil amount is low.
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
Oil
pressure
sensor
Related
wiring
harness
Oil-level
switch
Related
wiring
harnesses
KS No.1
2U
KS No.1 (+)
KS No.1
Approx.
2.5
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
KS No.1
2V
KS No.1 (-)
2W
2X
KS No.1
Shield
A/F sensor, eccentric

shaft position sensor
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
Related
wiring
harness
KS No.2
2Y
KS No.2 (-)
KS No.2
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
A/F sensor
2Z
A/F sensor
A/F sensor
Approx.
Related
2.4
wiring
harnesses
2AA
Constant voltage
Oil pressure sensor
(Vref)
Under any condition
Approx.
5.0
Related
wiring
harness
2AB
Shield
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
KS No.1, KS No.2
KS No.2
2AC
KS No.2 (+)
Approx.
2.5
A/F sensor
Approx.
2.2
SSV switch
The SSV actuator rod is completely

Idling
pulled out.
after
warm-up
The SSV actuator rod is pulled in.
KS No.2
Related
wiring
harnesses
A/F sensor
2AD
2AE
2AF
2AG
2AH
A/F sensor
SSV switch
APV opening
angle No.2
Eccentric shaft
position sensor
(+)
ECT sensor
Below
1.0
B+
SSV switch
Related
wiring
harnesses
Approx.
5.0
APV
position
sensor
No.2
Except above
Approx.
0.35
Related
wiring
harnesses
APV position sensor

No.2
Eccentric shaft position

sensor
ECT sensor
Related
wiring
harnesses
Eccentric
shaft
position
sensor
Related
wiring
harnesses
ECT 0 C {32 F}
Approx.
4.0
ECT 20 C {68 F}
Approx.
3.1
ECT 40 C {104 F}
Approx.
2.1
ECT
sensor
ECT 60 C {140 F}
Approx.
1.4
Related
wiring
harnesses
IG SW ON
ECT 80 C {176 F}
Approx.
0.9
ECT 100 C {212 F}
Approx.
0.5
Generator
2AI
Field coil control Generator (D terminal) (See Inspection Using An Oscilloscope (Reference).)
Related
wiring
harnesses
Generator
2AJ
2AK
2AL
2AM
2AN
2AO
2AP
2AQ
2AR
Generator output
Generator (Terminal P) (See Inspection Using An Oscilloscope (Reference).)
voltage
Throttle valve
opening angle
No. 1
Throttle valve
opening angle
No. 2
TP sensor No.1
TP sensor No.2
APV opening
angle No.1
WOT
3.825
4.095
TP sensor
No.1
CTP
0.4
0.8
Related
wiring
harnesses
WOT
4.033
4.303
TP sensor
No.2
CTP
1.18
1.78
Related
wiring
harnesses
IG SW ON
IG SW ON
APV
position
sensor
No.1
Except above
Approx.
0.35
Related
wiring
harnesses
Under any condition
Approx.
5.0
Related
wiring
harness
Constant voltage APV position sensor

(Vref)
No.2
Approx.
5.0
Eccentric shaft Eccentric shaft position

Under any condition
position sensor (- sensor
)

APV position sensor
No.1
Constant voltage
TP sensor
(Vref)
Related
wiring
harnesses
Below
1.0
Under any condition
Approx.
5.0
Eccentric
shaft
position
sensor
Related
wiring
harnesses
Related
wiring
harness
Neutral
2AS *1 Neutral switch
Neutral switch
Below
1.0
Idling
Except above
B+
Neutral
switch
Related
wiring
harnesses
Ignition
coil (L/R)
2AT
Ignition coil (L/R)

Ignition coil (L/R)
control
2AU
Constant voltage APV position sensor

(Vref)
No.1
Under any condition
Approx.
5.0
Related
wiring
harness
2AV
Sensor GND
APV position sensor

No.1
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harness
2AW
Ignition coil
(T/R) control
Ignition
coil (T/R)
Ignition coil (T/R)
Ignition coil (L/F)

Ignition coil (L/F)
control
2AY
Sensor GND
Under any condition
2BA
2BB
ECT sensor
Fuel injector (RS) Fuel injector (RS)

control
Ignition coil (T/F)

Ignition coil (T/F))
control
Fuel injector (FP) Fuel injector (FP)

control
Related
wiring
harnesses
Ignition
coil (L/F)
2AX
2AZ
Related
wiring
harnesses
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
Related
wiring
harness
Fuel
injector
(RS)
Related
wiring
harnesses
Ignition
coil (T/F)
Related
wiring
harnesses
Fuel
injector
(FP)
Related
wiring
harnesses
2BC
2BD
2BE
Fuel injector (FS)

Fuel injector (FS)
control
Fuel injector (RP)

Fuel injector (RP)
control
HO2S heater
control
2BF
*1
*2
Fuel
injector
(FS)
Related
wiring
harnesses
Fuel
injector
(RP)
Related
wiring
harnesses
HO2S
heater
HO2S heater
Related
wiring
harnesses
A/F sensor
heater
2BG
A/F sensor
heater control
A/F sensor heater
2BH
Sensor GND
HO2S
Under any condition
Below
1.0
Related
wiring
harnesses
Related
wiring
harness
MT
13B-MSP(high power)
Inspection Using An Oscilloscope (Reference)

NOTE:
The duty ratio for the wave pattern can vary with the control conditions. Therefore determine comprehensively where
the malfunction occurs among the input systems, output systems, and the PCM.
Throttle control (+)
Terminal connected: 2A (+)Negative battery terminal

Oscilloscope setting: 5 V/DIV (Y): 0.4 ms/DIV (X), DC range
Measurement condition: IG SW ON
Throttle control ()
Terminal connected: 2B (+)Negative battery terminal

Oscilloscope setting: 5 V/DIV (Y): 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range
Measurement condition: As soon as the accelerator pedal is fully released from the fully depressed position while the
ignition switch is at ON (engine off).
Purge control
Terminal connected: 2C (+)Negative battery terminal

Measurement condition: Idling after warm-up (no load)
NOTE:
Purge control might not be activated depending on the engine conditions.
APV motor control (+)
Terminal connected: 2D (+)Negative battery terminal

Measurement condition: High engine speed after warm-up
OCV control
Terminal connected: 2E (+)Negative battery terminal

APV motor control ()
Terminal connected: 2F (+)Negative battery terminal

Measurement condition: High engine speed after warm-up
Terminal connected: 2AG (+)Negative battery terminal

Field coil control (Generator)
Terminal connected: 2AI (+)Negative battery terminal

Oscilloscope setting: 0.5 V/DIV (Y): 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range
Generator output voltage
Terminal connected: 2AJ (+)Negative battery terminal

Ignition coil (L/F, L/R, T/F, T/R)
Terminal connected:
L/F: 2AX (+)Negative battery terminal
L/R: 2AT (+)Negative battery terminal
T/F: 2BA (+)Negative battery terminal
T/R: 2AW (+)Negative battery terminal
Fuel injector (FS, RS) control
Terminal connected:
FS: 2BC (+)Negative battery terminal
RS: 2AZ (+)Negative battery terminal
Measurement condition: Racing after warm-up (no load)
Fuel injector (FP, RP) control
Terminal connected:
FP: 2BB (+)Negative battery terminal
RP: 2BD (+)Negative battery terminal
Terminal connected:
FP: 2BB (+)Negative battery terminal
RP: 2BD (+)Negative battery terminal
Measurement condition: Cranking while the engine is cold. (ECT: Approx. 20 C {68 F})
HO2S heater control
Terminal connected: 2BE (+)Negative battery terminal

A/F sensor heater control
Terminal connected: 2BG (+)Negative battery terminal

Using the M-MDS

NOTE:
PIDs for the following parts are not available on this model. Go to the appropriate part inspection page.
Main relay (See RELAY INSPECTION.)

3. Measure the PID value.
If PID value is not within the specification, follow the instructions in Action column.
NOTE:
The PID/DATA MONITOR function monitors the calculated value of the input/output signals in the PCM.
Therefore, an output device malfunction is not directly indicated as a malfunction of the monitored value for
the output device. If a monitored value of an output device is out of specification, inspect the monitored
value of the input device related to the output control.
For input/output signals except those of the monitoring items, use a voltmeter to measure the PCM terminal
voltage.
The simulation items that are used in the ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION are as
follows.
CAUTION:
To prevent engine damage, use MOP_FL_C and MOP_FL_S only during idling (after engine
warm-up) up to 30 s.
ACCS, AIP RLY, ALTF, APV, ARPMDES, DEI, ETC_DSD, EVAPCP, FAN1, FAN2, FAN3, FP,
FPRR, FUELPW1, GENVDSD, HTR12, IASV, MOP_FL_C, MOP_FL_S, OCV_CLOSE, PACNTV,
SSV, test
PID/DATA monitor table (reference)
Monitor item (Definition) Unit/Condition
Condition/Specification (Reference)
Inspection item(s)
PCM
terminal
The following PIDs

Idling
ACCS (A/C relay)
Off/On
AC_REQ,
ECT, IVS,
PCM_T, RPM,
TP, VSS
A/C operating: On
A/C not operating: Off
1I
A/C relay
AC_REQ
(A/C switch)
AIP RLY (AIR pump

relay)
Off/On
Off/On

(high, low)
A/C switch OFF: Off

A/C switch ON: On
1AU
A/C switch
The following PIDs
During the specified

period after cold: On
CATT11_DSD,
ECT, IAT
Idling after warm-up:

Off
1G
AIR pump relay

The following PIDs
IG SW ON: 0%
ALTF (Generator field
coil control duty value)
ALTT V, ECT,
IAT, IVS,
PCM_T, RPM,
VPWR, VSS
Just after A/C switch ON

and fan switch ON at
idling: Duty value rises
2AI
Generator
ALTT V (Generator
output voltage)
APP (APP)
IG SW ON: 0 V
V
Idling: Approx. 14.9 V*1

(E/L not operating)
Accelerator pedal
released: 0%
Accelerator pedal
depressed: 100%
Generator
2AJ
The following PIDs

APP1, APP2
APP sensor No.1, No.2
1AP
Accelerator pedal
released: 31.133.1%
Accelerator pedal
depressed: 75.678.6%
APP sensor No.1
APP1 (APP 1)
V
1AO
Accelerator pedal
released: 1.5551.655 V
1AO
Accelerator pedal
depressed: 3.783.93 V
Accelerator pedal
released: 20.122.1%
Accelerator pedal
depressed: 64.667.6%
APP sensor No.2
APP2 (APP 2)
V
1AP
Accelerator pedal
released: 1.0051.105 V
Accelerator pedal
depressed: 3.233.38 V
The following PIDs
APV (APV motor)
Open/Closed
High engine speed after

warm-up: Open
APV_POS,
BARO, ECT,
IAT, MAF,
RPM, TP
Except above: Closed
2D
2F
APV motor
The following PIDs
APV_2 (APV motor)
Open/Closed

warm-up: Open
APV_POS,
BARO, ECT,
IAT, MAF,
RPM, TP
Except above: Closed
2D
2F
APV motor
APV_POS (APV position

sensor)
APV_POS_2 (APV
position sensor)

warm-up: Approx. 5.0 V
Except above: Approx.
0.35 V
warm-up: Approx. 5.0 V
Except above: Approx.
0.35 V
2AN
2AF
The following PIDs

ARPMDES (Target
engine speed)
BARO (Barometric
pressure)
RPM
kPa, Bar, psi

V
BOO
(Brake switch)
Off/On
Indicate the target

engine speed
IG SW ON: Indicate the

atmospheric pressure
ACCS, ALTT
V, COLP,
ECT, IAT,
MAF, RPM,
TP, VPWR
BARO sensor
Brake switch
IG SW ON: 2.443.80 V
Brake pedal depressed:
On
Brake pedal released:
Off
CATT11_DSD
(Estimated catalytic
converter temperature)
CHRGLP (Generator
warning light)
COLP (Refrigerant
pressure switch
(middle))
CPP *4
(Clutch pedal position)
CPP/PNP*4 (Shift lever

position)
DEI*6
valve)
(VDI solenoid
Off/On
OFF/ON
Off/On
Drive/Neutral
Off/On
EQ_RAT11_DSD
(Target lambda)
ETC_ACT (Electronic
throttle control actual)
Generator warning light

not illuminate: Off
switch (middle) ON *2 :
ON
switch (middle) OFF *3 :
OFF
Clutch pedal depressed:
On
Clutch pedal released:
Off
Neutral position: Neutral
Except above: Drive

warm-up: On
The following PIDs

ECT, IAT,
LOAD, RPM

(middle)
1J
CPP switch
1D
Neutral switch
2AS
The following PID

RPM
2L
VDI solenoid valve
ECT (Engine coolant

temperature)
(A/F sensor)

illuminate: On
Idling: Off
DTCCNT (Number of
DTC detected)
EQ_RAT11
Indicate the estimated

catalytic converter
temperature

ECT
ECT 20 C {68 F}:
approx. 3.1 V
ECT sensor
2AH
ECT 80 C {176 F}:

approx. 0.9 V

Approx. 1
A/F sensor
Indicate the target

lambda
A/F sensor
CTP: 6.3 or less

WOT: Approx. 83
Throttle valve actuator
2A
2B

ETC_DSD (Electronic
throttle control desired)
%
CTP: 6.3 or less

WOT: Approx. 83
CTP: 7% or less
The following PIDs

APP, TP1,
TP2
WOT: Approx. 100%

The following PIDs
EVAPCP (Purge solenoid

valve duty value)
IG SW ON: 0%
%
Increase the engine

speed: Duty value rises
BARO, ECT,
FUELSYS,
IAT, LOAD,
MAF, RPM
2C
FAN1
(Cooling fan control)
FAN2
FAN3
FLI
(Fuel level)
Off/On
The cooling fan is

operating at low speed:
On
Except above: Off
Off/On
The cooling fan is

operating at middle
speed: On
Except above: Off
Off/On
The cooling fan is

operating at high speed:
On
Except above: Off
Fuel gauge level F:

Approx. 100%
Fuel gauge level E:
Approx. 0%
IG SW ON: Off
FP (Fuel pump relay)
Off/On
Cranking: On
Idling: On
The following PIDs

AC_REQ,
COLP, ECT,
IAT, PCM_T
1M

The following PIDs
AC_REQ,
COLP, ECT,
IAT, PCM_T
1N
Cooling fan relay No.2, No.3

The following PIDs
AC_REQ,
COLP, ECT,
IAT, PCM_T
1R
Cooling fan relay No.4, No.5
Fuel tank gauge unit
The following PID

RPM
1H
Fuel pump relay

The following PIDs
IG SW ON: Off
FPRR (Fuel pump speed
control relay)
Off/On
Cranking: On
Idling: Off
BARO, ECT,
IAT, MAF,
O2S11,
O2S12, RPM,
TP, VPWR
The following PIDs
1K
FUELPW (Fuel injector

duration)

Approx. 2.7 ms
sec
AC_REQ,
APP, BARO,
ECT, IAT,
KNOCKR,
MAF, O2S11,
O2S12, RPM,
TP, VPWR,
VSS
2AZ
2BB
2BC
2BD
Fuel injector (FP, RP, FS, RS)

The following PIDs
OL/CL/
FUELSYS
OL-Drive/
(Fuel system status)
OL-Fault/
Idling after warm-up: CL
CL-Fault
AC_REQ,
APP, BARO,
ECT, IAT,
KNOCKR,
MAF, O2S11,
O2S12, RPM,
TP, VPWR,
VSS
The following PIDs

GENVDSD
Idling: Approx. 14.9 V*1

(E/L not operating)
(Generator voltage
desired)
AC_REQ,
ALTT V, BOO,
ECT, IAT,
PCM_T, RPM,
VPWR, VSS
The following PIDs

HTR11
(A/F sensor heater)
Off/On
IG SW ON: Off
Idling after warm-up: On
ECT, IAT,
LOAD, MAF,
VPWR
2BG
A/F sensor heater

The following PIDs
HTR12
(HO2S heater)
Off/On
IG SW ON: Off
Idling after warm-up: On
ECT, IAT,
LOAD, MAF,
VPWR
2BE
HO2S heater
The following PIDs
IG SW ON: Approx. 26%
IAC (Idle air control)

Approx. 21%
AC_REQ,
ALTT V, APP,
ARPMDES,
COLP, ECT,
EVAPCP,
RPM, VSS
2A
2B
Throttle valve actuator
IASV *7
(VFAD solenoid valve)
Off/On
Idling: Off
High engine speed: On

IAT
The following PID

RPM
VFAD solenoid valve
1AE
IAT
(Intake air temperature)
IAT 20 C {68 F}:

Approx. 2.4 V
IAT sensor
1AT
IAT 40 C {104 F}:

Approx. 1.5 V
MT
When the following
conditions are satisfied:
On
IG SW
ON
Not
neutral
INGEAR (In gear)
Off/On
Clutch
pedal
released
Except above: Off
AT
The following PIDs

CPP,
CPP/PNP,
RPM
When the following

conditions are satisfied:
On
Engine
runs
Driving
range
Except above: Off
IVS (CTP condition)
Idle/
Off Idle
Idling: Idle
Except above: Off idle
The following PID

APP
2U
KNOCKR (Knocking
retard)
IG SW ON: 0
Idling: 0
KS No.1, No.2
2V
2Y
2AC
LDP_EVAPCP (EVAP
Control system incorrect
purge flow detection
value)
Indicates EVAP Control

system incorrect purge
flow detection value
EVAP leak detection pump
LDF_IDL (EVAP System

leak detection pump idle
current)
Indicates EVAP System

leak detection pump idle
current
LDP_MON (EVAP System

leak detection pump
monitoring current)

leak detection pump
monitoring current
LDP_REF(EVAP System
leak detection pump

leak detection pump
1U
1V
1U
1V
1U
1V
1U
reference current)
1V
reference current
LDP_SLDV (EVAP
Control system small
leak detection value)

system small leak
detection value
LDP_VSLDV *5 (EVAP
Control system very
small leak detection
value)
mA/sec

system very small leak
detection value
1U
1V
1U
1V
MT
Idling: 28.239.2%
LOAD (Engine load)

(no load): 16.223.4%
AT
The following PIDs

BARO, IAT,
MAF, RPM
Idling: 26.639.2%
(no load): 17.124.3%
The following PIDs
LONGFT1 (long term
fuel trim)
g/sec
MAF (Mass airflow)
V
MIL (Malfunction
indicator lamp)
MIL_DIS (Travelled
distance since the MIL
illuminated)
MOP_DRV_C
(Electromagnetic
metering oil pump
center driving signal)
MOP_DRV_S
(Electromagnetic
metering oil pump side
driving signal)
MOP_FL_C
Off/On
Km

approx.12.512.5%
ECT, LOAD,
MAF, RPM,
SHRTFT1
Indicate the MAF

Approx. 1.2 V
MAF sensor
1AK

(no load): Approx. 1.5 V
Malfunction indicator
lamp illuminate : On
Malfunction indicator
lamp not illuminate: Off
Indicates travelled
distance since the MIL
illuminated
Instrument cluster
IG SW ON: Off
Off/On
Cranking: On
1E
1F
Idling: Off
IG SW ON: Off
Off/On
Cranking: On
Idling: Off
IG SW ON: 0 cc/h
(Electromagnetic
metering oil pump
center request flow
volume)
cc/h
Cranking: Approx. 5 cc/h
1S
1AA
Idling: Approx. 1 cc/h

IG SW ON: 0 cc/h
MOP_FL_S
(Electromagnetic
metering oil pump side
request flow volume)
cc/h
MOP_P_ACT
(Electromagnetic
metering oil pump
system pressure actual)
Pa
Idling: 70 KPa
Oil pressure sensor
2R
MOP_P_DSD
(Electromagnetic
metering oil pump
system pressure
desired)
Pa
Indicate the target oil

pressure
Oil pressure sensor
NUM_OCV(Number of
OCV open)
Indicate the number of

OCV open
OCV
NUM_SD(Number of
short drive)

short drive
PCM
NUM_ST(Number of
engine start)

engine start
PCM

Approx. 0 mA
A/F sensor
2AD
Idling after warm-up: 0

1.0 V
HO2S
2Q
OCV
2E
OCV
2E
O2S11
(A/F sensor)
O2S12
(HO2S)
OCV_ACT (OCV current

actual)
OCV_CLEAN (OCV
cleaning mode)
OCV_DSD (OCV current

desired)
PACNTV (AIR solenoid

valve control)
Cranking: Approx. 3 cc/h

Idling: Approx. 0 cc/h
IG SW ON: Approx. 300

mA
2E
PCM
Idling: Approx. 450 mA
Off/On
OCV cleaning mode

operating: On
Except above: Off
Indicate the target OCV

current
AIR pump operating: On

Off/On
AIR pump not operating:

Off
The following PID

MOP_P_DSD
The following PIDs

CATT11_DSD,
ECT, IAT
AIR solenoid valve
2G
PCM_T (PCM
temperature sensor)
RO2FT1
(HO2S fuel trim)
RPM (Engine speed)
SC_SET (Cruise main

indicator light/ cruise set
indicator light)
IG SW ON: 1.22.6 V

approx. 0
RPM
Off/On
Engine runs: Indicate the

engine speed
Cruise main indicator
light/ cruise set indicator
light illuminate: On
Cruise main indicator
light/ cruise set indicator
light not illuminate: Off
PCM temperature sensor

The following PID
O2S12
Instrument cluster
2AG
ON/OFF switch pressed

in: approx. 0 V
CANCEL switch pressed
in: approx. 1.1 V
SCCS (Cruise control
switch)
SET(-) switch pressed

in: approx. 3.1 V
1AQ
RES(+) switch pressed

in: approx. 4.2 V
Except above: approx.
5.0 V
The following PIDs
SHRTFT1
(Short term fuel trim
(front))

approx.44%
AC_REQ,
APP, BARO,
ECT, IAT,
KNOCKR,
LOAD, MAF,
O2S11,
O2S12, RPM,
TP, VPWR,
VSS
The following PIDs

SHRTFT12
(Short term fuel trim
(rear))

approx. 0%
AC_REQ,
APP, BARO,
ECT, IAT,
KNOCKR,
LOAD, MAF,
O2S11,
O2S12, RPM,
TP, VPWR,
VSS
The following PIDs
SPARK-L (Ignition
timing)
(BTDC)

BTDC approx. 5
AC_REQ,
APP, ECT,
IAT, IVS,
KNOCKR,
LOAD, MAF,
RPM, TP, VSS
2AT
2AX
Ignition coil (L/F, L/R)

The following PIDs
SPARK-T (Ignition
timing)
(BTDC)

BTDC approx. 10
AC_REQ,
APP, ECT,
IAT, IVS,
KNOCKR,
LOAD, MAF,
RPM, TP, VSS
2AW
2BA
Ignition coil (T/F, T/R)

The following PIDs
SSV (SSV solenoid
valve)
Off/On

warm-up: On
Idling: Off
BARO, ECT,
IAT, MAF,
RPM, TP
2I
SSV solenoid valve
test
TH_M (Thermostat
monitor engine coolant
temperature)
TH_M_MAX (Thermostat
temperature max limit)
TH_M_MIN (Thermostat
temperature min limit)
TIRESIZE (Tire
revolution per mile)
Off/On
TP_REL (Relative TP)
Except above: Off
Thermostat
Indicates upper limit of

engine coolant
temperature for
thermostat monitoring
execution
Thermostat
Indicates lower limit of

engine coolant
temperature for
thermostat monitoring
execution
Thermostat
Indicates tire revolution per a mile

CTP: Approx. 0.8 V
WOT: Approx. 3.92 V
CTP: Approx. 7%
WOT: Approx. 100%
The following PIDs

TP1, TP2
The following PIDs
TP, TP1, TP2
2AK
2AL
CTP: 8.016.0%
WOT: 76.581.9%
TP sensor No.1
TP1 (TP 1)
V
Indicates engine coolant

temperature when
thermostat monitoring is
finished
rev/mile
TP (TP)
Test mode: On
CTP: 0.40.8 V
WOT: 3.8254.095 V
2AK
CTP: 23.635.6%
WOT: 80.6686.06%
TP2 (TP 2)
TP sensor No.2
CTP: 1.181.78 V
WOT: 4.0334.303 V
TPCT
(TP sensor voltage at
CTP)
VPWR (Battery voltage)
VSS (Vehicle speed)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
KPH
2AL
IG SW ON (CTP):
Approx. 0.6 V
TP sensor
Indicate the battery

voltage
Battery
MPH
Vehicle running: Indicate

the vehicle speed
ABS HU/CM
DSC HU/CM
1BA
Calculated value; differs from terminal voltage

Refrigerant pressure switch (middle) turns off when the refrigerant pressure is 1.11 MPa {11.3 kgf/cm2 , 161 psi}
or less
Refrigerant pressure switch (middle) turns on when the refrigerant pressure is 1.60 MPa {16.3 kgf/cm2 , 232 psi}
or more
MT
13B-MSP(high power)
With VFAD
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PCM CONFIGURATION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
If the wheel and tire sizes are changed, the set value for the tire rotation diameter will be
different, causing a discrepancy whereby the speedometer needle exceeds the allowable
range. If the wheel and tire sizes are changed, perform a PCM configuration to change the
tire size setting.
Newly Replacing PCM
After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initial screen of the MMDS.
1. Select the Module Programming.
1. Select the Programming.
2. Select the Module Programming.
Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
Select Programmable Module installation.
Select PCM.
Perform the configuration according to the directions on the screen.

Retrieve DTCs by the M-MDS, then verify that there is no DTC present.
If a DTC(s) is detected, perform the applicable DTC inspection. (See DTC
TABLE [13B-MSP].)
Wheel And Tire Size Change
After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initial screen of the MMDS.
Select the Module Programming.
Select the Programming.
Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
Select Programmable Parameters.
Select Tire Size / Axle Ratio.
Select an item name, and then select option.
Items
Tire Size (225/40R19/225/45R18/225/50R17)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
This inspection procedure cannot be completed correctly if the accelerator pedal position
sensor has a malfunction. Before performing this procedure, verify that any one of the DTC
related to the accelerator pedal position sensor is not detected.
NOTE:
Voltage Inspection
2. Verify that the voltage at PCM terminals 2AK (M-MDS PID: TP1) and 2AL (M-MDS PID: TP2)
increases while gradually increasing the accelerator pedal opening angle according to the
accelerator pedal opening angle.
If it can be verified, go to the next step.
If it cannot be verified even though the related wiring harnesses have no
malfunction, replace the throttle body. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
3. Verify that the voltage at PCM terminals 2AK (M-MDS PID: TP1) and 2AL (M-MDS PID: TP2)
is as indicated in the table.
If it cannot be verified, replace the throttle body. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
TP sensor output voltage
PCM terminal (M-MDS PID)
2AK (TP1)
2AL (TP2)
When the accelerator pedal is depressed.3.8254.095 V4.0334.303 V
When the accelerator pedal is released.
0.40.8 V
1.181.78 V

2. Disconnect the throttle body connector.
Open circuit
Throttle body terminal C and PCM terminal 2P
Throttle body terminal D and PCM terminal 2AL
Throttle body terminal E and PCM terminal 2AO

Throttle body terminal F and PCM terminal 2AK
Short circuit
Throttle body terminal E and body ground
Throttle body terminal E and power supply
Throttle body terminal F and body ground
Throttle body terminal F and power supply
Throttle body terminal D and body ground
Throttle body terminal D and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KNOCK SENSOR (KS) INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
3. Disconnect the KS connector.
4. Measure the resistance between KS terminals A and B.
If not within the specification, replace the KS. (See KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
specification, even though the KS resistance is within the specification, perform
the Circuit Open/Short Inspection. (See Circuit Open/Short Inspection.)
KS No.1, No.2 resistance
120280 kilohms

3. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or short. (Continuity inspection)
Open circuit
KS No.1 terminal A and PCM terminal 2U
KS No.1 terminal B and PCM terminal 2V
KS No.2 terminal A and PCM terminal 2AC
KS No.2 terminal B and PCM terminal 2Y
Short circuit
KS No.1 terminal A and body ground
KS No.1 terminal A and power supply
KS No.1 terminal B and body ground

KS No.1 terminal B and power supply
KS No.2 terminal A and body ground
KS No.2 terminal A and power supply
KS No.2 terminal B and body ground
KS No.2 terminal B and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
4. Remove the KS.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
Voltage Inspection
2. Verify that the voltage at PCM terminals 1AO (M-MDS PID: APP1) and 1AP (M-MDS PID:
APP2) increases while gradually increasing the accelerator pedal opening angle according to the
accelerator pedal opening angle.
If it can be verified, go to the next step.
If it cannot be verified even though the related wiring harnesses have no
malfunction, replace the accelerator pedal. (See ACCELERATOR PEDAL
3. Verify that the voltage at PCM terminals 1AO (M-MDS PID: APP1) and 1AP (M-MDS PID:
APP2) is as indicated in the table.
If it cannot be verified, replace the accelerator pedal. (See ACCELERATOR
PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
APP sensor output voltage
PCM terminal (M-MDS PID)
1AO (APP1)
1AP (APP2)
When the accelerator pedal is depressed. 3.783.93 V
3.233.38 V
When the accelerator pedal is released. 1.5551.655 V1.0051.105 V

1. Disconnect the PCM connectors.
2. Disconnect the APP sensor connector.
Open circuit
APP sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 1AJ
APP sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 1AV
APP sensor terminal C and PCM terminal 1AP
APP sensor terminal D and PCM terminal 1AL
APP sensor terminal E and PCM terminal 1AS
APP sensor terminal F and PCM terminal 1AO
Short circuit
APP sensor terminal D and body ground
APP sensor terminal D and power supply
APP sensor terminal A and body ground
APP sensor terminal A and power supply
APP sensor terminal F and body ground
APP sensor terminal F and power supply
APP sensor terminal C and body ground
APP sensor terminal C and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
3. Remove the HO2S connector.
1Protector
2HO2S
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONTROL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [13B-MSP]
1 PCM

2 APP sensor
(See ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
3 TP sensor
(See THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
4 MAF/ IAT sensor
(See MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)/INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
(See INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
5 ECT sensor
(See ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
6 KS No.1
(See KNOCK SENSOR (KS) INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
7 KS No.2
(See KNOCK SENSOR (KS) INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
8 Eccentric shaft position sensor
(See ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
9 A/F sensor
(See AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
10HO2S
(See HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
11APV position sensor No.1
(See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
12APV position sensor No.2
(See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)

(See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
13Oil pressure sensor
(See OIL PRESSURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See OIL PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
14Metering oil pump driver
(See METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See METERING OIL PUMP DRIVER INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
15SSV switch
(See SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
16CPP switch (MT)
(See CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
17Neutral switch (MT)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)/INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor connector.
1Screw
(See Screw Installation Note.)
2MAF/IAT sensor
(See MAF/IAT Sensor Installation Note.)
MAF/IAT Sensor Installation Note

1. Before installation of the MAF/IAT sensor, replace the O-ring.
Screw Installation Note

1. After installation of the screws, verify that the MAF/IAT sensor is installed securely.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) SWITCH INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
1. Verify that the continuity between SSV switch terminals A and B is as indicated in the table.
If there is no malfunction, perform the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.

If there is any malfunction, replace the SSV switch. (See SECONDARY SHUTTER
VALVE (SSV) SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
Continuity
Push the rod
No continuity
Except above
Continuity detected

Open circuit
SSV switch terminal A and PCM terminal 2AE
SSV switch terminal B and body ground
Short circuit

SSV switch terminal A and body ground
SSV switch terminal A and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECONDARY SHUTTER VALVE (SSV) SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP]
3. Remove the battery. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
4. Remove the air control valve. (See SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) CONTROL VALVE
5. Remove the generator. (See GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
7. Remove the SSV installation screws and remove the SSV switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
Visual Inspection
1. Remove the APV position sensor. (See AUXILIARY PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR
2. Verify that there are no metal shavings on the sensor.
3. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part according to the inspection results.
1. Disconnect the APV position sensor connector.
2. Measure the coil resistance between APV position sensor terminals A and B or B and C.
If not within the specification, replace the APV position sensor. (See AUXILIARY
PORT VALVE (APV) POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
APV position sensor No.1, No.2 resistance
Except for or 0 ohms [at room temperature]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
NOTE:
Visual Inspection
1. Remove the eccentric shaft position sensor.
2. Verify that there are no metal shavings on the sensor.
If the monitor item condition (reference) is not within the specification even
though there is no malfunction, perform the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
(See Circuit Open/Short Inspection.)
1. Disconnect the eccentric shaft position sensor connector.
2. Measure the coil resistance between eccentric shaft position sensor terminals A and B.
If not within the specification, replace the eccentric shaft position sensor. (See
ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
specification, even though the eccentric shaft position sensor resistance is
within the specification, perform the Circuit Open/Short Inspection and repair
or replace the malfunctioning part. (See Circuit Open/Short Inspection.)
Eccentric shaft position sensor resistance
9501,250 ohms [at room temperature]

Open circuit
Eccentric shaft position sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 2AG
Eccentric shaft position sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 2AP
Short circuit
Eccentric shaft position sensor terminal A and body ground
Eccentric shaft position sensor terminal A and power supply
Eccentric shaft position sensor terminal B and body ground
Eccentric shaft position sensor terminal B and power supply
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
CAUTION:
When replacing the eccentric shaft position sensor, make sure there is no foreign material
on it such as metal shavings. If it is installed with foreign material, the sensor output
signal will malfunction resulting from fluctuation in magnetic flux and cause a deterioration
in engine control.
NOTE:
Remove/install the eccentric shaft position sensor from above the vehicle.
3. Remove the air cleaner component and air cleaner insulator. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
5. Remove the eccentric shaft position sensor installation bolt and remove the eccentric shaft
position sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION PLATE INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
1. Verify that there are no cracks, damage, or corrosion on the projecting parts of the eccentric
shaft position plate.
If there are cracks, damage, or corrosion on the projecting parts, replace the
eccentric shaft position plate. (See ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION PLATE
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ECCENTRIC SHAFT POSITION PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
3. Remove the drive belt referring to the drive belt replacement. (See DRIVE BELT
REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
1Drive belt pulley

2Eccentric shaft position plate
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR INSPECTION [13B-MSP]
A/F Sensor Current Inspection

2. Using the M-MDS, monitor the following:
Vehicle speed (PID: VSS)
Engine speed (PID: RPM)
A/F sensor current (PID: O2S11)
3. Drive the vehicle and decelerate the engine speed by releasing the accelerator pedal fully
when the engine speed is 3,000 rpm or more.
4. Verify that the A/F sensor current (PID: O2S11) is 0.25 mA or more while decelerating as
shown in the figure.
If not within the specification, inspect the A/F sensor for an open or short
circuit. (See A/F Sensor Circuit Open/short Inspection.) Then if there is no
malfunction in the wiring harness, replace the A/F sensor. (See AIR FUEL RATIO
(A/F) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
A/F Sensor Circuit Open/short Inspection

2. Disconnect the A/F sensor connector.
Open circuit
A/F sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 2AD
A/F sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 2Z
Short circuit
If there is continuity, there is a short circuit. Repair or replace the wiring harness.
A/F sensor terminal A and body ground
A/F sensor terminal A and power supply
A/F sensor terminal B and body ground
A/F sensor terminal B and power supply
A/F Sensor Heater Resistance Inspection

2. Measure the resistance between A/F sensor terminals C and D.
If not within the specification, replace the A/F sensor. (See AIR FUEL RATIO
(A/F) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
A/F sensor heater resistance
110 ohms
A/F Sensor Heater Circuit Open/short Inspection

Open circuit
A/F sensor terminal C and main relay terminal C
A/F sensor terminal D and PCM terminal 2BG
Short circuit
If there is no continuity, there is a short circuit. Repair or replace the wiring harness.
A/F sensor terminal C and body ground
A/F sensor terminal D and power supply
A/F sensor terminal D and body ground
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP]
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT])
4. Remove the bracket as shown in the figure.

[13B-MSP])
7. Remove the catalytic converter installation nuts, then move the catalytic converter out of the
way. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
8. Remove the A/F sensor using the SST.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENGINE TECHNICAL DATA [13B-MSP]
Item
Ignition timing
Specification
Trailing side: BTDC 10
Leading side: BTDC 5
Standard: 830 kPa {8.5 kgf.cm2, 120 psi} [250 rpm]
Minimum: 680 kPa {6.9 kgf.cm2, 98.6 psi} [250 rpm]
Compression pressure
Standard difference in chambers: Within 150 kPa {1.5 kgf.cm2,

21.8psi}
Standard difference in rotors: Within 100 kPa {1.0 kgf.cm2, 14.5
psi}
Pressing distance for the front oil seal

(from edge of front cover)
1.52.5 mm {0.060.09 in}

Oil replacement: 4.2 L {4.4 US qt, 3.7 Imp qt}
Oil and oil filter replacement: 4.4 L {4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt}
Engine oil capacity (approx. quantity)
Engine overhaul: 5.6 L {5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt}

Total (dry engine): 7.1 L {7.5 US qt, 6.2 Imp qt} (MT), 6.4 L
{6.8 US qt, 5.6 Imp qt} (AT)
Oil pressure (reference value) [oil

temperature: 100 C {212 F}]
500 kPa {5.10 kgf/cm2 , 72.5 psi}[3,000 rpm]
Metering oil pump No.1, No.2 standard

voltage
B+ [IG-ON, 20C {68 F}]
Metering oil pump No.1, No.2 standard

resistance
3.64.1 ohms [20C {68 F}]
OCV standard resistance
Engine coolant capacity (approx. quantity)
Cooling system cap valve opening

pressure
Thermostat initial-opening temperature
Thermostat full-open temperature
Thermostat full-open lift
Cooling fan motor No.1, No.2 standard
current
6.97.9 ohms [20C {68F}]

MT: 10.0 L {10.6 US qt, 8.80 Imp qt}
AT: 9.8 L {10 US qt, 8.6 Imp qt}
73.6103 kPa {0.751.05 kgf/cm2 , 10.714.9 psi}
8084 C {176183 F}
95 C {203 F}
More than 8.5 mm {0.33 in}
7.710.7 A [12V]
Fuel Leakage
Fuel Leakage
Fuel line pressure

Fuel injector resistance
Battery electrolyte specific gravity [20 C
{68 F}]
Battery load test current
Battery parasitic draw (When the ignition
is off (key is removed), all doors and the
hood are closed.)
Battery slow charge current
Battery quick charge current [30 min]
375450 kPa {3.834.58 kgf/cm 2 , 54.465.2 psi}

Approx. 13.8 ohms [20 C {68 F}]
1.221.29
80D26L (55): 195 A
2545 mA
80D26L (55): 5.56.5 A

80D26L (55): 35 A
Terminal B: B+
Generator standard voltage [IG-ON]
Terminal P: Approx. 1 V or less

Terminal D: Approx. 0 V
Terminal B: 1315 V
Generator standard voltage [Idle, 20 C

{68 F}]
Generator rotor resistance (between slip

rings) [20 C {68 F}]
Generator brush length
Generator brush spring force
Spark plug type
Standard spark plug gap
Maximum spark plug gap
Terminal P: Approx. 38 V
Terminal D: Turn the electrical loads (headlights, blower motor,
rear window defroster, brake lights, etc.) on and verify that the
voltage reading increases.
1.72.0 ohms
Standard: 4.86.0 N {0.490.61 kgf, 1.081.34 lbf}
Minimum: 2.16 N {0.22 kgf, 0.49 lbf}
Leading side: N3H5 18 110A (RE7C-L) *1 , N3Y8 18 110A (RE7CL) *1 , N3Y9 18 110A (RE6C-L) *2
Trailing side: N3H1 18 110D (RE9B-T) *1 , N3Y1 18 110A (RE9BT) *1
1.151.25 mm {0.0460.049 in}
Leading side: 1.5 mm {0.059 in}
Trailing side: 1.4 mm {0.055 in}
Spark plug resistance [25C {77 F}]
3.07.5 kilohms
High-tension lead resistance [20 C {68

F}]
1.04.0 kilohms
Starter no-load test voltage
11 V
Starter no-load test current
120 A or less
AT: 0 mm {0 in}
Starter pinion gap
MT: 0.52.0 mm {0.020.07 in}
Starter armature runout
0.1 mm {0.004 in} max.

Starter commutator diameter

Segment groove depth of starter

commutator

Starter brush length

Standard: 23.431.6 N {2.39 3.22 kgf, 5.267.10 lbf}
Starter brush spring force
Minimum: 10.0 N {1.02 kgf, 2.25 lbf}
*1
*2
Standard equipment
Hot type plug: Available only for customers who often drive their car at very low speed
which causes the plugs to foul easily.
Idle speed
Idling speed (rpm)
Load status
AT
MT
No load
760860 760860 760860 770870

A/C on
780880 760860 750850 760860
(standard)
A/C on (standard)+
electrical loads on*3
A/C on
(heavy load)
780880 760860 750850 790890
800900 780880 780880 790890
*3
Generator generated current (reference value) [Conditions] Ambient temperature: 20 C {68
F}, Voltage: 1315 V, Engine hot
Engine speed (rpm) Terminal B current (Lower limit of current must be more than 0 A.)
1,000
080 A
2,000
0112 A
Engine oil specification

Item
U.S.A. and CANADA
Except U.S.A. and CANADA
Engine oil
grade
API SL, SM or ILSAC
Engine oil
viscosity
5W-20
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous

ENGINE SST [13B-MSP]
134-01049A
49 0187 280A
Evaporative
emission
system tester
Oil pressure
gauge
49 0820 035
49 0839 305A
Flywheel box
wrench
Counterweight
puller
49 1881 055A
49 9200 020A
Stopper
counterweight
Belt tension
gauge
49 0813
225A
Oil seal
remover
49 1011
130B
Air
pump
gauge
set
49 9200
146
Adapter
hose
(Part of
49 9200
145)
49 9200 147
49 D019 908
Adapter
Gauge
(Part of 49
9200 145)
(Part of 49
D019 9A2)
49 D019
909
Hose
(Part of
49 D019
9A2)
49 D019 910
49 D019 911
Adapter
Adapter
(Part of 49
D019 9A2)
(Part of 49
D019 9A2)
49 E017 5A0
49 F018 9A0C
Engine
support set
Compression
tester
49 G014 001
49 G030 029
Oil filter
wrench
Chain
49 H019 002
49 J027 001
Adapter
Bearing
installer
49 T018 001
49 F010 401A
O2 sensor
wrench
Installer
49 D019
913
Adapter
(Part of
49 D019
9A2)
49 F042
001
Wrench
49 G040
002
Installer
49 N013
1A0D
Fuel
pressure
gauge
set
49 F011
106
Holder
< Previous
Back to Top
Workshop Manual - Suspension

2011 - RX-8
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) WIRING DIAGRAM
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
MALFUNCTIONING WHEEL UNIT IDENTIFICATION
DTC B2143
DTC B2868, B2869, B2870, B2871
DTC U0127
DTC U2616, U2617, U2618, U2619
FOREWORD
PRECAUTION
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.1 TPMS WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES CONTINUOUSLY
NO.2 TPMS WARNING LIGHT (LOW PRESSURE WARNING) ILLUMINATES AFTER ENGINE START AND
TURNS OFF AFTER DRIVING FOR PERIOD OF TIME
NO.3 WHEEL UNIT ID REGISTRATION CANNOT BE PERFORMED (TPMS WARNING LIGHT FLASHES)
General Procedures
GENERAL PROCEDURES (SUSPENSION)
Wheel Alignment
WHEEL ALIGNMENT PRE-INSPECTION
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Wheels and Tires

WHEEL AND TIRE SPECIFICATION
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
TIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT (WITH TPMS)
REPAIR AGENT REMOVAL
WHEEL UNIT ID REGISTRATION
WHEEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Front Suspension
FRONT SUSPENSION LOCATION INDEX
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL
FRONT UPPER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT UPPER ARM INSPECTION
FRONT LOWER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT LOWER ARM INSPECTION
FRONT STABILIZER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT STABILIZER CONTROL LINK INSPECTION
FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRANSVERSE MEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT]
FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AT]
Rear Suspension
REAR SUSPENSION LOCATION INDEX
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL
REAR TRAILING LINK (UPPER) INSPECTION
REAR TRAILING LINK (UPPER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR TRAILING LINK (LOWER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR LATERAL LINK (UPPER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR LATERAL LINK (UPPER) INSPECTION
REAR LATERAL LINK (LOWER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR LATERAL LINK (LOWER) INSPECTION
TOE CONTROL LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TOE CONTROL LINK INSPECTION
REAR STABILIZER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR STABILIZER CONTROL LINK INSPECTION
REAR CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Technical Data
SUSPENSION TECHNICAL DATA
SUSPENSION
Next >
2011 - RX-8 - Suspension

With Advanced Keyless System
With Keyless Entry System
Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) Test Description

The OBD test inspects the integrity and function of the TPMS and outputs the results when
requested by the specific tests.
On-board diagnostic test also:
Provides a quick inspection of the TPMS usually performed at the start of
each diagnostic procedure.
Provides verification after repairs to ensure that no other faults occurred
during service.
The OBD test is divided into 3 tests:
Read/clear diagnostic results, PID monitor and active command mode.
Read/clear diagnostic results
This function allows you to read or clear DTCs in the instrument cluster memory.
PID/Data monitor and record
This function allows you to access certain data values, input signals, calculated values, and
system status information.
Active command modes
This function allows you to control devices through the M-MDS.
Reading DTCs Procedure

1. Select Self Test.
2. Select Modules.
3. Select TPM.
1. Select Module Tests.
2. Select TPM.
3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the screen.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the TPMS. (See Clearing DTCs Procedure.)
Clearing DTCs Procedure

2. Select Modules.
3. Select TPM.
2. Select TPM.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 5 s or more.
7. Perform DTC inspection (See Reading DTCs Procedure.)
PID/Data Monitor and Record Procedure

1. Select DataLogger.
2. Select Modules.
3. Select TPM.
2. Select TPM.
NOTE:

2. Select Modules.
3. Select TPM.
2. Select TPM.
3. Select the active command modes from the PID table.
4. Perform the active command modes, inspect the operations for each parts.
Freeze Frame PID Data Access Procedure

2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initial screen of the M-MDS.
This function is available for only the IDS (laptop PC)
1. Select the Body.
2. Select the TPMS Functions.
3. Select the following item from the screen menu.
Freeze Frame Data
DTC Table
DTC
MMDS
Description
Page
B1342 Instrument cluster internal malfunction
(See DTC B1342 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
B2143 ID registration failure
(See DTC B2143.)
B2477 Instrument cluster configuration not performed
B2868 Wheel unit No.1 internal malfunction
(See DTC B2868, B2869, B2870, B2871.)
(See DTC B2868, B2869, B2870, B2871.)
(See DTC B2868, B2869, B2870, B2871.)
(See DTC B2868, B2869, B2870, B2871.)
U0073CAN system communication error (HS-CAN)
(See FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM].)
U0100Communication error to PCM

U0127Communication failure between instrument cluster and (See DTC U0127.)
keyless receiver
U2023Abnormal massage from PCM

U2616Wheel unit No.1 (No response)
(See DTC U2616, U2617, U2618, U2619.)
(See DTC U2616, U2617, U2618, U2619.)
(See DTC U2616, U2617, U2618, U2619.)
(See DTC U2616, U2617, U2618, U2619.)
PID/DATA Monitor Table
PID Name
Unit/
(Definition)
Condition
Condition/Specification
Action
AI_WU1_ID
AI_WU2_ID
AI_WU3_ID
AI_WU4_ID
(Wheel unit ID code (during ID
registration))
AI_WU1_P
Indicates the wheel unit ID code.

(During wheel unit ID
registration.)
Replace the
wheel unit.
Perform the
wheel unit ID
registration.
Adjust tire
pressure.
AI_WU2_P
AI_WU3_P
AI_WU4_P
Pa, psi Indicates the tire pressure.

(During ID registration.)
Replace the
wheel unit.
Perform the
wheel unit ID
registration.
(Tire pressure value (during ID

registration))
FFD1_WU1_P
FFD1_WU2_P
FFD1_WU3_P
FFD1_WU4_P

(Freeze frame PID data 1)
Adjust tire pressure.

(Freeze frame PID data 2)
Indicates the internal tire air

C, F temperature. (Freeze frame PID
data 1)
Indicates the internal tire air

C, F temperature. (Freeze frame PID
data 2)
(Tire pressure value (freeze

frame PID data 1))
FFD2_WU1_P
FFD2_WU2_P
FFD2_WU3_P
FFD2_WU4_P
(Tire pressure value (freeze
frame PID data 2))
FFD1_WU1_T
FFD1_WU2_T
FFD1_WU3_T
FFD1_WU4_T
(Internal tire air temperature
value (freeze frame PID data 1))
FFD2_WU1_T
FFD2_WU2_T
FFD2_WU3_T
FFD2_WU4_T
value (freeze frame PID data 2))
FFD1_MLG
(Wheel unit mileage value
(freeze frame PID data 1))
FFD2_MLG
(Wheel unit mileage value
(freeze frame PID data 2))
FFD1_SPD
(Wheel unit speed value (freeze
frame PID data 1))
FFD2_SPD
(Wheel unit speed value (freeze
frame PID data 2))
CCNT_TPMS
(Number of continuous DTCs)
m, mi Indicates the mileage. (Freeze

(ft) frame PID data 1)
m, mi Indicates the mileage. (Freeze

(ft) frame PID data 2)
KPH,
MPH
Indicates the speed. (Freeze frame

PID data 1)
KPH,
MPH
Indicates the speed. (Freeze frame

PID data 2)
ID_LAST*
(Last received tire transmitter ID
code value)
Indicates number of DTC
Indicates the last ID that is

transmitted from the wheel unit.
Perform the DTC inspection.
Replace the
wheel unit.
Perform the
configuration.
ID_WU1*
ID_WU2*
ID_WU3*
Indicates the registered ID that is

transmitted from the wheel unit.
ID_WU4*
Replace the
wheel unit.
Perform the
wheel unit ID
registration.
(Registered wheel unit ID code)
SPDOMETER
(Vehicle speed)
KPH,
MPH
Vehicle is
stopped: 0 KPH
{0 MPH}
Vehicle is
running: Indicates
vehicle speed
Ignition switch
Inspect the PCM.
Inspect the
battery.
VBATT
(Battery positive voltage)
ON: B+
Inspect the
related wiring
harness.
Ignition switch
OFF: 0 V
WU1_P*
Adjust tire
pressure.
WU2_P*
Indicates the tire pressure. (See
Pa, psi SUSPENSION TECHNICAL DATA.)
WU3_P*
Replace the
wheel unit.
WU4_P*
(Tire pressure value)
WU1_T*
WU2_T*
WU3_T*
C, F Indicates the internal tire air

temperature.
WU4_T*
Replace the wheel unit.

value)
Data transmission from the wheel unit occurs when the vehicle speed is 25 km/h {15.5
mph} or more. Due to this, the current air pressure and temperature data can only be
displayed after the vehicle is driven at 25 km/h {15.5 mph} or more. Also, the ID_LAST,
and tire pressure and internal tire air temperature data are erased when the instrument
cluster connector and the battery terminal are disconnected. If the instrument cluster is
replaced or the battery terminals are disconnected, drive the vehicle at 25 km/h {15.5
mph} or more and display the tire pressure PID after the data transmission.
Active Command Modes Table
Command Name
IDR_MODE
Definition
Operation
Note
Wheel unit ID registration mode On/Off Ignition switch at ON
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MALFUNCTIONING WHEEL UNIT IDENTIFICATION
NOTE:
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) does not identify the location of the
malfunctioning wheel unit on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). The TPMS identifies each wheel
unit as No.1, No.2, No.3 and No.4. In order to identify the location of the wheel unit,
perform the following procedure.
1. Adjust the air pressure as follows:
RF: 220 kPa {2.2 kgf/cm2 , 32 psi}
LF: 240 kPa {2.4 kgf/cm2 , 35 psi}
LR: 260 kPa {2.6 kgf/cm2 , 38 psi}
RR: 280 kPa {2.8 kgf/cm2 , 40 psi}
2. Turn the ignition switch off.
5. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 25 km/h {15.5 mph} or more for 2 min or more.
6. Select the following PIDs using the M-MDS, and monitor them.
WU1_P
WU2_P
WU3_P
WU4_P
7. Determine which wheel unit identification code matches which wheel and tire by comparing
the PID monitor values with the air pressure values set in Step 1.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2143
DTC B2143
ID registration failure
DETECTION CONDITION
Two or more codes are overlapping.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
ID registration procedure has not been performed properly.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY THE PROGRAMMED ID
Select the following PIDs using the MMDS:
ID_WU1
ACTION
YesConfigure the instrument cluster, then go
to the next step.
CONFIGURATION.)
ID_WU2
ID_WU3
ID_WU4
position.
Is the same code in the output ID?
2
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED

Clear the DTC from the memory.
(See TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS.)

If the malfunction recurs, replace the
instrument cluster and/or wheel unit.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 25

km/h {15.5 mph} or more for 10
min or more.

Are there any other DTCs present?
(See WHEEL UNIT
DIAGNOSIS.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2868, B2869, B2870, B2871
DTC
B2868
Wheel unit No.1 (internal malfunction)
B2869
B2870
B2871
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The instrument cluster receives error signals from the wheel

unit.
Internal malfunction of wheel unit
STEP
1
INSPECTION
IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING WHEEL UNIT
(See MALFUNCTIONING WHEEL UNIT
IDENTIFICATION.)
ACTION
Identify the
malfunctioning wheel
unit.
Replace and register the
wheel unit.
(See WHEEL UNIT ID
REGISTRATION.)

DIAGNOSIS.)
YesGo to Step 1.

min or more.
3


DIAGNOSIS.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U0127
DTC U0127
DETECTION
CONDITION
Communication failure between instrument cluster and keyless receiver

The instrument cluster cannot receive signal from the keyless CM or keyless receiver.
With advanced keyless system
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the keyless CM terminal 3Q and the instrument
cluster terminal 1I.
Keyless control module malfunction.
Instrument cluster malfunction.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Poor connection at connectors (female terminal)

With keyless entry system
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the keyless receiver terminal D and the
instrument cluster terminal 1I.
Keyless receiver malfunction.
Instrument cluster malfunction.
With Advanced Keyless System

STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT WHEEL UNIT SIGNAL FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect keyless CM and instrument
cluster connectors.
Inspect for continuity between keyless CM
terminal 3Q (harness-side) and instrument
cluster terminal 1I (harness-side).
ACTION
No Repair or replace the wiring harness for an open circuit between
keyless CM terminal 3Q and instrument cluster terminal 1I, then go
to Step 5.
INSPECT WHEEL UNIT SIGNAL FOR SHORT TO
2 POWER
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for a short to power between

to Step 5.

cluster connectors.
Measure the voltage between keyless CM

terminal 3Q (harness-side) and ground.
Is there B+?
3 GROUND
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for a short to ground between

to the next step.
cluster connectors.
Inspect for continuity between keyless CM

terminal 3Q (harness-side) and ground.
4
INSPECT FOR KEYLESS CM MALFUNCTION


(See DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM].)
Using the M-MDS, perform the DTC

inspection for the keyless CM.
Is any DTCs present?
5

and drive the vehicle at a speed of 25 km/h
{15.5 mph} or more.
(See TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS.)

Yes
If the malfunction recurs, replace the instrument

cluster.
Configure the instrument cluster.
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.)
Register the wheel unit ID.
(See WHEEL UNIT ID REGISTRATION.)

6

Drive the vehicle at a speed of 25 km/h
{15.5 mph} or more for 10 min or
more.

(See TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS.)
With Keyless Entry System

STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT WHEEL UNIT SIGNAL FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect keyless receiver and instrument
cluster connectors.
Inspect for continuity between keyless
receiver terminal D (harness-side) and
instrument cluster terminal 1I (harness-side).
ACTION
No Repair or replace the wiring harness for an open circuit between
keyless receiver terminal D and instrument cluster terminal 1I,
then go to Step 4.
2 POWER
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for a short to power between

then go to Step 4.

cluster connectors.
Measure the voltage between keyless

ground.
Is there B+?
3 GROUND
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for a short to ground between


cluster connectors.
No Replace keyless receiver, then go to the next step.

(See KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
Inspect for continuity between keyless

ground.
4

Yes
If the malfunction recurs, replace the instrument

cluster.
(See TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

(TPMS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS.)


and wait for 30 s.
Configure the instrument cluster.
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.)

(See WHEEL UNIT ID REGISTRATION.)

Drive the vehicle at a speed of 25 km/h
{15.5 mph} or more for 10 min or
more.

(See TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U2616, U2617, U2618, U2619
DTC
U2616
Wheel unit No.1 (No response)
U2617
U2618
U2619
DETECTION
CONDITION
The keyless receiver or keyless CM has continuously not received a

signal from the wheel unit for a certain period.
Wheel unit is not installed.
Wheel unit identification code is not registered in the instrument cluster.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
No signal is received from the wheel unit.

Keyless receiver or keyless CM malfunction
Poor connection at connectors (female terminal).
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY WHEEL UNIT IS INSTALLED TO EACH

1 WHEEL
Are all four wheels equipped with a
wheel unit?
ACTION
YesGo to the Step 3.
No
Install the wheel unit.

(See WHEEL UNIT
(See WHEEL UNIT ID
REGISTRATION.)

2
INSPECT FOR DTCs

min or more.

No Go to the Step 5.

3
IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING WHEEL UNIT
Identify the malfunctioning

wheel unit.
(See MALFUNCTIONING WHEEL UNIT

IDENTIFICATION.)
Replace the wheel unit.

(See WHEEL UNIT
(See WHEEL UNIT ID
REGISTRATION.)
Go to the Step 5.
INSPECT FOR KEYLESS RECEIVER OR KEYLESS

4 CM MALFUNCTION
YesReplace the malfunctioning part.
Inspect the keyless receiver or
keyless CM.

5

DIAGNOSIS.)
min or more.
Yes
If the malfunction recurs,

replace the instrument
cluster.
(See INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
Configure the instrument
cluster.
(See INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
CONFIGURATION.)
(See WHEEL UNIT ID
REGISTRATION.)

6


SYSTEM (TPMS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS.)
NOTE:
If the installed wheel unit ID number is known, verification of whether the instrument
cluster is receiving data from the wheel unit can be easily confirmed using the following
procedure:
1. Drive the vehicle at 25 km/h {15.5 mph} or more, and send data
from the wheel unit.
2. Select [ID_LAST] from the PID items, and monitor the data.
3. Verification that the instrument cluster is receiving data is possible if the
monitored ID number matches the installed wheel unit ID number.
If the wheel unit has been newly replaced, the TPMS warning light may flashes before the
ID registration is complete, and DTC U2616, U2617, U2618 and U2619 may be stored in
the memory. In this case, re-implement the wheel unit ID registration, and after
confirming that the TPMS warning light is no longer flashing, erase the DTC. If the TPMS
warning light does not go out, a malfunction on any one of the wheel units may have
occurred and the ID registration will not have been correctly performed. Repeat the
diagnostic procedure from Step 1 and perform and inspection.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD
Before performing the steps in Symptom Troubleshooting, perform the On-board
Diagnostic Inspection. To check the DTC, follow the DTC Inspection steps. (See TIRE
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PRECAUTION
Intermittent Concern Troubleshooting
Vibration method
engine is vibrating, perform the following steps.
NOTE:
There are several reasons why vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical
malfunction. Inspect the following:
Wiring harnesses laying across brackets or moving parts.
Wiring harnesses routed too close to hot parts.
An improperly routed, improperly clamped, or loose wiring harness can cause wiring to
become pinched between parts.
The connector joints, points of vibration, and places where wiring harnesses pass through
the firewall, body panels and other panels are the major areas to be inspected.
Inspection method for switch and/or sensor connectors or wiring harnesses

NOTE:
3. Access PIDs for the switch you are inspecting.

5. Slightly shake each connector or wiring harness vertically and horizontally while monitoring
the PID.
If the PID value is unstable, inspect for poor connection.
Inspection method for sensors

NOTE:
If the PID value is unstable or a malfunction occurs, inspect for poor connection
and/or poorly mounted sensor.
Connector terminal inspection method
1. Inspect the connection of each female terminal.

2. Insert the male terminal to the female terminal and inspect the female terminal for looseness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.
Symptom
1 TPMS warning light illuminates continuously.

2 TPMS warning light (low pressure warning) illuminates after engine start and turns off after driving for
a period of time.
3 Wheel unit ID registration cannot be performed (TPMS warning light flashes).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 TPMS WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES CONTINUOUSLY
CAUTION:
The tire pressure cannot be measured accurately after driving for a long period due to the
internal temperature and pressure. Stop the vehicle for approx. 1 hour and then perform
the tire pressure measurement and adjustment.
Use a high accuracy digital gauge for measurement of the tire pressure.
NOTE:
If the DTC clearing procedure is implemented, the TPMS warning light turns off.
TPMS warning light illuminates continuously

Tire pressure is lower than the specification. (Such as loss of air pressure
due to puncture.)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
TPMS warning light circuit malfunction in the instrument cluster.
Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT TIRE
Inspect the tires.
Is there any foreign object
adhering to the tire?
ACTION
YesRemove the any foreign object.
Replace the tire if necessary, then go to the
next step.
MEASURE TIRE PRESSURE

Measure the tire pressure when
the tires are cold.
Is the tire pressure lower than the
specification?
YesAdjust the tire pressure to the specification

when the tires are cold, then go to the next
step.
(See TIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT (WITH
TPMS).)

3
VERIFY TPMS WARNING LIGHT

Verify the TPMS warning light.
Does the TPMS warning light turn
off?
YesSymptom troubleshooting completed.

Explain to the customer what has been
repaired.
VERIFY TPMS WARNING LIGHT AFTER

4 DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Drive the vehicle at speed of 25
km/h {16 mph} or more for 10
min or more.
Verify the TPMS warning light.
YesSymptom troubleshooting completed.

Explain to the customer what has been
repaired.
Does the TPMS warning light turn

off?
5
INSPECT FOR DTCS IN INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
Connect the M-MDS to DLC-2.
Retrieve the instrument cluster
DTC.
Is the DTC displayed?
YesGo to applicable DTC troubleshooting

procedure.
No Malfunction is in the TPMS warning light
illumination control circuit in the instrument
cluster.
Replace the instrument cluster.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 TPMS WARNING LIGHT (LOW PRESSURE WARNING) ILLUMINATES AFTER
ENGINE START AND TURNS OFF AFTER DRIVING FOR PERIOD OF TIME
CAUTION:
The tire pressure cannot be measured accurately after driving for a long period due to
increased internal temperature and pressure. Stop the vehicle for approx. 1 hour and then
perform the tire pressure measurement and adjustment.
Use a high accuracy digital gauge for measurement of the tire pressure.
NOTE:
The tire pressure normally decreases by approx. 7 kPa {0.07 kgf/cm2 , 1.02 psi} per
month even if the tire is normal.
The FFD (temperature and pressure) stored when the TPMS warning light is turned on or
off can be verified by operating the M-MDS.
TPMS warning light (low pressure warning)

2 illuminates after engine start and turns off after
driving for a period of time.
The tire pressure decreases (approaches value to
illuminate TPMS warning light) when the internal
temperature of the tire is low.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT THE TIRE
Is there any foreign object adhering to the
tire?
ACTION
YesRemove any foreign object. Replace
the tire if necessary, and then go to
the next step.
MEASURE THE TIRE PRESSURE WHEN THE TIRES ARE

2 COLD
YesAdjust the tire pressure to the
specification, and then go to the
Has the tire pressure decreased (approaches

value to illuminate TPMS warning light)?
next step.
3 IS THE MALFUNCTION CORRECTED?
YesTroubleshooting completed.
No Verify troubleshooting again and
return to Step 1 if the malfunction
recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 WHEEL UNIT ID REGISTRATION CANNOT BE PERFORMED (TPMS
WARNING LIGHT FLASHES)
CAUTION:
Activate the wheel unit ID registration mode using the M-MDS, and perform the following
steps if the TPMS warning light does not turn off after driving at 25 km/h {15.5 mph} or
more for 10 min or more.
3 Wheel unit ID registration cannot be performed

(TPMS warning light flashes).
New wheel unit malfunction (caused when
installing to wheel)
Any malfunction on an old wheel unit which
has not been replaced.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
CAN THE WHEEL UNIT ID BE REGISTERED?
Connect the M-MDS.
Display the wheel unit ID registration
condition (ID and tire pressure table)
using the M-MDS.
Temporarily remove the battery and
reinstall it immediately.
NOTE:
If the battery is
removed, the tire
pressure data for WU_1
to WU_4 stored in the
instrument cluster is
reset.
ACTION
YesTrouble shooting completed. (Adjust the
tire pressure on four wheels, and then
return the vehicle to the customer.)
Pressure is 0 kPa {0
kgf/cm2 , 0 psi} when
it is displayed again
using the M-MDS.
Set tire pressure for the four wheels
separately.
Perform the wheel unit ID registration
again.
Can the ID be registered?
VERIFY THE WHEEL UNIT ID REGISTRATION
2 CONDITIONS (ID AND TIRE PRESSURE TABLE)
USING THE M-MDS
Refer to [Display Of M-MDS (Example)]
to specify wheel unit for which the ID
could not be registered. (See Display Of
M-MDS (Example).)
YesReplace with a new wheel unit, and

then go to Step 4.
Is the wheel unit for which the ID could

not be registered a new wheel unit?
CAUTION:
ID numbers of WU_1 to
WU_4 are updated
when wheel on all of
four wheels are
registered.
3 Replace the old wheel unit, and then go tot the next step (any malfunction on an old wheel unit
which has not been replaced).
4
CAN THE WHEEL UNIT ID BE REGISTERED?

Perform the wheel unit ID registration
using the M-MDS.
No Verify troubleshooting again and return
to Step 1 if the malfunction recurs.
Display Of M-MDS (Example)

Registered ID: 0xAAAAAAAA, 0xBBBBBBBB, 0xCCCCCCCC, and 0xDDDDDDDD (AAAAAAAA,
BBBBBBBB, CCCCCCCC, and DDDDDDDD mean arbitrary numbers.)
Unregistered ID: 0x00000000
Tire pressure: aaa kPa, bbb kPa, ccc kPa, ddd kPa (aaa, bbb, ccc, and ddd mean
measurement value.)
* The battery is removed, the stored tire pressure is reset to 0 kPa.
Three registered wheel units and a replaced wheel unit
When a replaced wheel unit malfunctions

WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)
0xAAAAAAAA0xBBBBBBBB 0xCCCCCCCC0xDDDDDDDD
ID Number (Candidate)
0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
Tire Pressure (Stored)

Tire Pressure (Candidate)
aaa kPa
bbb kPa
ccc kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
WU_3
WU_4
When a registered wheel unit malfunctions

WU_1
WU_2
ID Number (Stored)
0xEEEEEEEE 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
aaa kPa
bbb kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
WU_3
WU_4
When two registered wheel unit malfunction

WU_1
WU_2
ID Number (Stored)
0xEEEEEEEE 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
aaa kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
When a replaced wheel unit and a registered wheel unit malfunction

WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)
0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000

aaa kPa
bbb kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
When a replaced wheel unit and two registered wheel units malfunctions
WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)
0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000

aaa kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
WU_3
WU_4
When three registered wheel units malfunction

WU_1
WU_2
ID Number (Stored)
0xEEEEEEEE 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000

0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
Two registered wheel units and two replaced wheel units

WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)
0xEEEEEEEE 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
aaa kPa
bbb kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
WU_3
WU_4

WU_1
WU_2
ID Number (Stored)
0xEEEEEEEE 0xFFFFFFFF 0x00000000 0x00000000
aaa kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
fff kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
WU_3
WU_4
When two replaced wheel units malfunction

WU_1
WU_2
ID Number (Stored)
0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000

aaa kPa
bbb kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
When two registered wheel units malfunction

WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)

0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
fff kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa

WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)
0xEEEEEEEE 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
aaa kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
When two replaced wheel units and a registered wheel unit malfunction
WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)
0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000

aaa kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
When a replaced wheel unit and two registered wheel units malfunction
WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)
0xEEEEEEEE 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000

0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
A registered wheel unit and three replaced wheel units

WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)
0xAAAAAAAA0xBBBBBBBB 0xCCCCCCCC 0xDDDDDDDD
0xEEEEEEEE 0xFFFFFFFF 0xGGGGGGGG 0x00000000

0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
fff kPa
ggg kPa
0 kPa

WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)
aaa kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
fff kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)

0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
fff kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
WU_3
WU_4
When two replaced wheel units malfunction

WU_1
WU_2
ID Number (Stored)
0xEEEEEEEE 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000
aaa kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
When two replaced wheel units and a registered wheel unit malfunction
WU_1
WU_2
WU_3
WU_4
ID Number (Stored)
0xEEEEEEEE 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000

0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
eee kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
WU_3
WU_4
When three replaced wheel units malfunction

WU_1
WU_2
ID Number (Stored)
0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000

aaa kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
0 kPa
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GENERAL PROCEDURES (SUSPENSION)
Wheel And Tire Installation

1. When installing the wheels and tires, tighten the wheel nuts in a criss-cross pattern to the
following tightening torque.
Tightening torque
88118 Nm {9.012.0 kgfm, 65.087.0 ftlbf}
Suspension Links Removal/Installation

1. For the joint sections with rubber bushings, raise the vehicle using a lift, and then temporarily
tighten the installation bolts and nuts. Lower the vehicle to the ground and tighten them
completely with the specified torque.
Connector Disconnection
1. Perform the following works, before the connectors are disconnected.
a. Remove the engine cover. (See ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
b. Remove the battery cover. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
c. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

[13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WHEEL ALIGNMENT PRE-INSPECTION
1. Park the vehicle on a level ground, in an unloaded condition*, and with the wheels straight
forward.
Unloaded vehicle.....Fuel tank is full. Engine coolant and engine oil are at specified level. Jack
and tools are in designated position.
2. Inspect the tire pressure.
Adjust to the recommended pressure if necessary. (See SUSPENSION
TECHNICAL DATA.)
3. Inspect the wheel bearing play.
Correct if necessary. (See WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE INSPECTION.)
(See WHEEL HUB, REAR KNUCKLE INSPECTION.)
4. Inspect the wheel runout.
Correct if necessary. (See SUSPENSION TECHNICAL DATA.)
5. Rock the vehicle, and verify that there is no looseness in the steering wheel joint and
suspension ball joint.
6. Rock the vehicle, and verify that the shock absorber operates properly.
7. Measure height H from the center of the wheel to the fender brim.
8. Verify that the difference between the left and right dimension H is within the specification.
If it exceeds the specification, repeat the Step 27.
Standard
10 mm {0.39 in} or less
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Specification (Unloaded Condition)

Front wheel alignment [Standard suspension]
Item
Specification
Tire [Tolerance 4 {0.15 }]
2 {0.08}
(mm {in})
Total toe-in Rim inner [Tolerance 3 {0.12}]
1 {0.04}
degree 01121
Inner
3836
Outer
3318
Steering angle [Tolerance 3]
Steering axis inclination (Reference value)
1059
363372 {14.3
14.6}
-041
373382 {14.7
15.0}
-021
Vehicle height: From the end of the front fender to the center of 383392 {15.1
[Tolerance the wheel (mm {in})
15.4}
1]
-003
393402 {15.5
15.8}
014
403412 {15.9
028
Camber
16.2}
366375 {14.5
14.7}
645
376385 {14.9
15.1}
633
Vehicle height: From the end of the rear fender to the center of 386395 {15.2
15.5}
1]
620
396405 {15.6
15.9}
607
406415 {16.0
16.3}
555
Caster
Front wheel alignment [Sport suspension]

Item
Specification
Tire [Tolerance 4 {0.15}]
2 {0.08}
(mm {in})
1 {0.04}
degree 01121
Inner
3836
Outer
3318
1112
356365 {14.1
14.3}
-057
366375 {14.5
14.7}
-035
15.1}
1]
-015
Camber
386395 {15.2
15.5}
002
396405 {15.6
15.9}
018
364373 {14.4
14.6}
647
374383 {14.8
15.0}
635
Caster
15.4}
1]
622
394403 {15.6
15.8}
609
404413 {16.0
16.2}
557
NOTE:
Unloaded vehicle: Fuel tank is full. Engine coolant and engine oil are at specified level.
Jack and tools are in designated position.
Difference between the left and right dimension for camber and caster is within 1.
Steering Angle Adjustment

1. Loosen the locknut of the tie-rod end.
2. Remove the rack boot clamp.
3. Rotate the tie rod and adjust the steering angle.
Standard steering angle
Inner: 38363
Outer: 33183
NOTE:
Rotate and adjust the tie rod. The difference between right and left dimension
L shown in the figure should be within the specification.
Standard
3 mm {0.12 in} or less
4. Tighten the locknut of the tie-rod end.
Tightening torque
68.698.0 Nm {7.009.99 kgfm, 50.672.2 ftlbf}
5. Correct the rack boot deformation.
6. Install and fix the rack boot clamp.
7. After adjusting the steering angle, always inspect and adjust the toe angle. (See Total Toe-in
Adjustment.)
Camber Adjustment
CAUTION:
Adjust the camber before adjusting the caster.
NOTE:
The camber and caster change largely if the front cam is adjusted due to the suspension
construction. If the rear cam is adjusted, the caster largely, however, the camber barely
changes. Therefore, adjust the camber (front cam) and then the caster (rear cam) to
adjust the alignment efficiently.
1. Loosen the fixing nut of the adjusting cam bolt (front lower arm front side).
2. Rotate the adjusting cam bolt in either direction to adjust the camber.
Standard suspension
Vehicle height *
Camber
363372 {14.314.6} -041
373382 {14.715.0} -021

383392 {15.115.4} -003
393402 {15.515.8} 014
403412 {15.916.2} 028
Sport suspension
Vehicle height *
Camber
356365 {14.114.3} -057

366375 {14.514.7} -035
376385 {14.915.1} -015
386395 {15.215.5} 002
396405 {15.615.9} 018
From the end of the front fender to the center of the wheel (mm {in})
Positive direction
Left wheel
Right wheel
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Negative directionCounterclockwise
Clockwise
NOTE:
Refer to the figure for the adjusting angle per one graduation.
3. Tighten the nut.

Tightening torque
117.7137.3 Nm {12.114.0 kgfm, 86.9101.2 ftlbf}
4. Adjust the toe-in.
Caster Adjustment
CAUTION:
Adjust the caster after adjusting the camber.
NOTE:
The camber and caster change largely if the front cam is adjusted due to the suspension
construction. If the rear cam is adjusted, the caster largely, however, the camber barely
changes. Therefore, adjust the camber (front cam) and then the caster (rear cam) to
adjust the alignment efficiently.
1. Loosen the installation nut of the adjusting cam bolt (front lower arm rear side).
2. Rotate the adjusting cam bolt in either direction to adjust the caster.
Standard suspension
Vehicle height *
Caster
366375 {14.514.7} 645

376385 {14.915.1} 633
386395 {15.215.5} 620
396405 {15.615.9} 607
406415 {16.016.3} 555
Sport suspension
Vehicle height *
Caster
364373 {14.414.6} 647

374383 {14.815.0} 635
384393 {15.215.4} 622
394403 {15.615.8} 609
404413 {16.016.2} 557
From the end of the rear fender to the center of the wheel (mm {in})
Left wheel
Increase Counterclockwise
Decrease
Clockwise
Right wheel
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
NOTE:
Refer to the following figure for the adjusting amount per one graduation.
3. Tighten the nut.
Tightening torque
117.7137.3 Nm {12.114.0 kgfm, 86.9101.2 ftlbf}
4. Adjust the camber and total toe-in.
Total Toe-in Adjustment

1. Loosen the locknut of the tie-rod end.
2. Remove the rack boot clamp.
3. Adjust the total toe-in by rotating each tie rod (left and right) in the opposite directions by the
same amount respectively.
Total Toe-in Standard
24 mm {0.080.15 in} (01121)
NOTE:
Toe angle changes by approx. 5 mm {0.2 in} per one rotation of the tie rod
for one wheel.
Each tie rod has a left-hand thread. When increasing the toe-in angle, rotate
the right tie rod toward the rear of the vehicle, and rotate the left tie rod
toward the front of the vehicle by the same amount.
4. Tighten the locknut of the tie-rod end.
Tightening torque
68.698.0 Nm {7.009.99 kgfm, 50.672.2 ftlbf}
5. Verify that the rack boot does not have any twisting, and install the rack boot clamp.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Specification (Unloaded Condition)

Rear wheel alignment [Standard suspension]
Item
Specification
3.6 {0.14}
(mm {in})
2 {0.08}
degree 01920
366375 {14.5
14.7}
-122
376385 {14.9
15.1}
-102
15.5}
1]
-045
396405 {15.6
15.9}
-031
406415 {16.0
16.3}
-018
Camber
Rear wheel alignment [Sport suspension]

Item
Specification
3.6 {0.14}
(mm {in})
2 {0.08}
degree 01920
364373 {14.4
14.6}
-126
374383 {14.8
15.0}
-106
15.4}
1]
-048
394403 {15.6
15.8}
-033
404413 {16.0
16.2}
-021
Camber
NOTE:
Difference between the left and right camber angle is within 1.
Camber Adjustment
1. Loosen the fixing nut of the adjusting cam bolt (rear lateral link (lower)).
2. Rotate the adjusting cam bolt in either direction to adjust the camber.
Standard suspension
Vehicle height *
Camber
366375 {14.514.7} -122

376385 {14.915.1} -102
386395 {15.215.5} -045
396405 {15.615.9} -031
406415 {16.016.3} -018
Sport suspension
*
Camber
Vehicle height
364373 {14.414.6} -126
374383 {14.815.0} -106
384393 {15.215.4} -048
394403 {15.615.8} -033
404413 {16.016.2} -021
*:
From the end of the rear fender to the center of the wheel (mm {in})
Left wheel
Positive direction Counterclockwise
Negative direction
Clockwise
Right wheel
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
NOTE:
Refer to the figure for the adjusting angle per one graduation.
3. Tighten the nut.

Tightening torque
117.7137.3 Nm {12.114.0 kgfm, 86.9101.2 ftlbf}
Total Toe-in Adjustment

1. Loosen the installation nut of the adjusting cam bolt.
2. Rotate the adjusting cam bolt in either direction to adjust the toe-in.
Standard
3.64 mm {0.140.15 in} (01920)
NOTE:
Refer to the following figure for the adjusting angle per one graduation of the
toe-in gauge.
3. Tighten the nut.

Tightening torque
7095 Nm {7.29.6 kgfm, 5270 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WHEEL AND TIRE SPECIFICATION
Wheel and tires
Item
Specification
Size
Offset
(mm {in})
Pitch circle diameter
(mm {in})
18 x 8J
19 x 8J
50 {2.0}
47 {1.9}
Wheel
Material
Aluminum alloy
Size
Tire
225/45R18 91W
Air pressure
Remaining tread
Lug nut tightening
torque
Wheel and tire
runout
Wheel and
tire
114.3 {4.50}
(kPa {psi})
220 {32}
(mm {in})
1.6 {0.063} min.
(Nm {kgfm,
ftlbf})
Radial direction
(mm {in}) Lateral direction
Wheel imbalance
225/40R19 89W
(g {oz})
88118 {9.012.0, 65.087.0}
1.5 {0.059} max.

2.0 {0.078} max.
Adhesive-type*1 : 12 {0.42} Adhesive-type*1 : 12 {0.42}
max.
max.
Knock-type*2 : 8 {0.28}
max.
Knock-type*2 : 7 {0.2} max.
*1
*2
Total weight 160 g {5.64 oz} max.

One balance weight: 60 g {2.1 oz} max. If the total weight exceeds 100 g {3.53 oz} on
one side, rebalance after moving the tire around on the rim. Do not use three or more
balance weights on one side.
CAUTION:
If the wheel and tire sizes are changed, the set value for the tire rotation diameter will be
different, causing a discrepancy whereby the speedometer needle exceeds the allowable
range. If the wheel and tire sizes are changed, perform a PCM configuration to change the
tire size setting. (See PCM CONFIGURATION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION:
Adjust the outer wheel balance first, then the inner wheel balance.
Be careful not to scratch the wheels.
Adhesive-type Balance Weight (Outer)

1. Remove the old balance weight from the wheel.
2. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape remaining on the wheel, then clean and degrease the
bonding area.
3. Set the wheel on a wheel balancer, measure the amount of unbalance and the position with
the mode set for knock-type balance weight.
4. Multiply the amount of unbalance by 1.6 to obtain the balance weight value.
5. Select a balance weight closest to the weight value and attach the balance weight on the
position (outer) indicated by the wheel balancer.
Example calculation of balance weight value

Indicated amount of unbalance: 23 g {0.81 oz}
23 g {0.81 oz}1.6 = 36.8 g {1.30 oz}
Selected balance weight value: 35 g {1.2 oz}
NOTE:
When selecting a balance weight, select one closest to the calculated value.
Example: 32.4 g {1.14 oz} = 30 g {1.1 oz}
CAUTION:
Use a genuine balance weight or equivalent (steel).
When attaching the weight, press the weight with a force of 25 N {2.5 kgf, 5.5
lbf} per 5 g for 2 s or more.
6. If attaching tow balance weights, position them so that each is on either side of the position
indicated by the wheel balancer.
CAUTION:
Do not attach weight balances in a row.
Do not overlap the balance weights.
Total weight must not exceed 160g {5.64 oz}.
Knock-type Balance Weight (Inner)

1. Measure the amount of unbalance with a wheel balancer.
2. Attach a weight corresponding to the measured weight value on the position (inner) indicated
by the wheel balancer.
CAUTION:
Do not attach three or more balance weights.
One balance weight must not exceed 60g {2.12 oz}, and a total of tow balance weights
must not exceed 100g {3.53 oz}.
Remaining Amount of Unbalance Confirmation

1. After installing the outer and inner balance weights, operate the wheel balancer again.
2. Confirm that the remaining unbalance does not exceed the following on either side.
If the remaining unbalance exceeds the specifications, adjust the wheel balance
again.
Specifications
Outer
Inner
(Adhesive-type) (Knock-type)
18 inch wheel
8 g {0.28 oz}
12 g {0.42 oz}
19 inch wheel
7 g {0.2 oz}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TIRE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT (WITH TPMS)
1. Use of a digital gauge is recommended for accurate measurement of the air pressure.
2. Tire pressure lowers gradually as time passes. Due to this, monthly air pressure inspection is
recommended.
3. Perform tire pressure adjustment before driving. (When tires are cold.)
Tire pressure will increase after driving because the internal temperature of the
tire is high. If tire pressure is adjusted to specifications when the internal
temperature of the tire is high, tire pressure will decrease when the internal
temperature of the tire decreases to the same level as ambient temperature. If
the tire pressure is lower than the lower-limit pressure, the TPMS warning light
may illuminate.
Even though the air pressure is adjusted to specifications, the indicated air
pressure may be higher than the specified value when the internal temperature
of the tire is higher than ambient temperature. (Example: Air pressure changes
approx.10 kPa {0.1 kgf/cm2 , 1.5 psi} when the temperature changes 10
degrees)
CAUTION:
In an area or a season with varying temperatures, tire pressure will change due to ambient
temperature change. If the tire pressure is lower than the lower-limit pressure due to low
ambient temperature, the TPMS warning light may illuminate. Adjust the pressure when
the TPMS warning light illuminates.
The wheel unit air pressure stem is made from aluminum and can be damaged. Do not tilt
or use excessive side force when checking air pressure or filling tire with air. Some tire
pressure gauges and air filling nozzles have extended tips, which can provide enough
leverage to easily bend or break the wheel unit.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WHEEL UNIT ID REGISTRATION
NOTE:
After the wheel unit replacement, registration of the wheel unit identification codes must
be performed.
ID registration can be done using the M-MDS, or not using the M-MDS.
Using M-MDS
NOTE:
Use the IDS (laptop PC) because the PDS (Pocket PC) does not support the wheel unit ID
registration.
When using the IDS (notebook PC).
Select the Body.
Select the TPMS Functions.
3. Then, select the Wheel Unit ID Registration.
4. Perform the procedure according to the directions on the screen.

5. Leave the vehicle with the engine off for 15 min or more.
6. Verify that the TPMS warning light turns on and off in 0.5 s cycles repeatedly.
7. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 25 km/h {15.5 mph} or more for 10 min to implement
the wheel unit ID registration.
NOTE:
If the ID registration is not completed even after driving the vehicle for 10 min
or more at a speed of 25 km/h {15.5 mph} or more, the TPMS warning
light flashes.
8. Verify that the TPMS warning light turns off.
NOTE:
If the wheel unit ID registration cannot be performed after driving 10 min or
more, refer to the symptom troubleshooting procedure.
Without Using M-MDS

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then turn it off.
2. Leave the vehicle with the engine off for 15 min or more.
3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 25 km/h {15.5 mph} or more for 10 min or more.
4. After driving for 10 min, verify that the TPMS warning light does not flash and is not
illuminated.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REPAIR AGENT REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill the repair agent from inside of the tire.
1. Remove the flat tire from the vehicle, and let the air out of the tire.
2. Remove the wheel unit nut and push the remaining part of the wheel valve into the tire.
3. Insert the hose through the valve and into the tire. Stand the tire up so that the hose end
sinks into the repair agent.
4. Pump out the repair agent.

NOTE:
Place the tire on a higher stand than the pumping bottle. This will make the
operation easier.
5. Repeat the pumping procedure, changing the position of the hose end, until there is no repair
agent left in the tire.
6. Remove the tire from the wheel and pick the wheel unit pushed in at Step 2 out.
7. Wipe off the repair agent remaining on the wheel, wheel unit and tire.
NOTE:
Dispose of waste repair agent according to local disposal law.
The repair agent is composed of the following:
Deproteinized natural rubber latex
Emulsified adhesive resin
Propylene glycol
The tire must be replaced with a new one and clean all tire repair agent off to
the wheel.
Use compressed air to clean out TPMS style valve.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WHEEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Install the valve core and valve cap, put air into the tire.
CAUTION:
A TPMS wheel unit has an exclusive valve cap and valve core. If a valve core other than
the exclusive one is installed, the wheel unit could be damaged due to the generation of
rust. Always install the exclusive valve cap and valve core for TPMS.
The wheel unit air pressure stem is made from aluminum and can be damaged. Do not
tilt or use excessive side force when checking air pressure or filling tire with air. Some
tire pressure gauges and air filling nozzles have extended tips, which can provide
enough leverage to easily bend or break the wheel unit.
4. When replacing wheel unit (s), register the new wheel unit ID (s). (See WHEEL UNIT ID
REGISTRATION.)
NOTE:
If the wheel unit is replaced with a new one, the ID registration must be performed.
When the ID registration is finished, the data for the new wheel unit is displayed on the
M-MDS.
1Valve cap
2Valve core
(See Valve Core Removal Note.)
3Tire
(See Tire Removal Note.)
(See Tire Installation Note.)
4Valve nut
5Wheel unit component

(See Wheel Unit Component Installation Note.)
6Seal
7Wheel unit
Valve Core Removal Note

1. Remove the valve core of the wheel unit, and bleed the air from the tire.
Tire Removal Note

1. Set the bead breaker at the position laterally opposed to the valve.
2. Break the bead loose.

CAUTION:
Do not break the bead loose within the range of 300 mm {11.8 in} on each side of the
valve. Otherwise, the wheel unit could be damaged.
3. Break the bead loose on the other side of the wheel.
CAUTION:
Set the bead breaker at the position laterally opposed to the valve.
Do not break the bead loose within the range of 300 mm {11.8 in} on each side of the
valve. Otherwise, the wheel unit could be damaged.
4. Insert the tire lever at the point 40 mm {1.6 in} from the wheel unit in the direction that the tire
changer turntable rotates.
5. Remove the bead from the wheel.

NOTE:
Using the tire lever as a support will aid in preventing the tire changer arm from
deviating from the point at which the bead is first broken.
6. For the other side, insert the tire lever at the point of 40 mm {1.6 in} from the wheel unit in the
direction that the tire changer turntable rotates, and remove the bead from the wheel.
Tire Installation Note

1. Set the tire at the point A (200 mm {7.87 in} away from the valve hole), and install the tire.
2. Set the tire at the point A (200 mm {7.87 in} away from the valve hole).
NOTE:
Using the tire lever as a support will aid in preventing the tire from deviating from the
point A.
3. Install the tire.
Wheel Unit Component Installation Note

1. Insert the valve into the wheel unit in the order shown in the figure.
2. Verify that the valve is installed into the wheel unit completely as shown in the figure.
3. Insert the wheel unit valve into the valve hole so that the polyurethane foam side faces the wheel.
4. Temporarily tighten the valve nut by hand.
5. Completely tighten the valve nut using a torque wrench.
Tightening torque
7.58.5 Nm {7786 kgfcm, 6775 inlbf}
CAUTION:
Do not retighten the valve nut after the initial operation.
NOTE:
Hold the end of the wheel unit (POINTs A and B) with your thumb and middle fingers so
that the wheel unit does not rotate, and then hold the valve (POINT C) with your index
finger so that the valve does not detach from the wheel unit.
6. Verify that the wheel unit component is correctly installed.

Both ends or one end of the wheel unit contacts the wheel as shown in the figure.
The wheel unit does not exceed the rim height as shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SUSPENSION LOCATION INDEX
1Front suspension tower bar

(See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].)
(See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AT].)
2Transverse member
(See TRANSVERSE MEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3Front shock absorber and coil spring

(See FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
4Front upper arm
(See FRONT UPPER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See FRONT UPPER ARM INSPECTION.)
5Stabilizer control link
(See FRONT STABILIZER CONTROL LINK INSPECTION.)
6Front lower arm
(See FRONT LOWER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See FRONT LOWER ARM INSPECTION.)
7Front stabilizer
(See FRONT STABILIZER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8Front crossmember
(See FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9Front shock absorber
(See FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION.)
(See FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT STABILIZER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may
possibly cause an open circuit in the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the
following procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate
place where the sensor will not be pulled while servicing the vehicle.
1. Remove the splash shield. (See SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Slightly bend back the front mudguard, and remove the aerodynamic under cover. (See
AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Radiator mount bracket

3Tie-rod end
4Stabilizer bracket
(See Stabilizer Bracket Installation Note.)
5Stabilizer bushing
6Front stabilizer
Stabilizer Bracket Installation Note

1. Apply rubber grease to the inner side of the stabilizer bushing.
2. Align the outer side of the stabilizer slide stopper with the stabilizer bushing.
3. Install the stabilizer bracket.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT STABILIZER CONTROL LINK INSPECTION
1. Remove the stabilizer control link from the vehicle.
2. Inspect the stabilizer control link for bending or damage. If there is any malfunction, replace
it.
3. Rotate the ball joint stud 10 times, and then rock it side to side 10 times.
4. Measure the ball-joint rotational torque using an Allen wrench and a torque wrench.
Front stabilizer control link ball joint rotational torque

0.20.8 Nm {2.08.1 kgfcm, 1.87.1 inlbf}
If not within the specification, replace the stabilizer control link.
Even when within the specification, if there is excessive play in the ball joint,
replace the stabilizer control link.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT LOWER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may possibly cause
an open circuit in the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the following procedures,
remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate place where the sensor will not be
pulled while servicing the vehicle.
1. Remove the front auto leveling sensor. (See FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See Caliper and Mounting Support Removal Note.)
2 Front lower arm ball joint
(See Front Lower Arm Ball Joint Removal Note.)
3 Tie-rod end
4 Front upper arm ball joint

(See Upper Arm Ball Joint Removal Note.)
5 Front hub and steering knuckle component
6 Stabilizer control link nut (front lower arm side)
7 Front lower arm
(See Front Lower Arm Installation Note)
8 Clip
(See Clip Installation Note.)
9 Dust boot
10Bushing (rear side)
(See Bushing (Rear Side) Removal Note.)
(See Bushing (Rear Side) Installation Note.)
11Bushing (front side)
(See Bushing (Front Side) Removal Note.)
(See Bushing (Front Side) Installation Note.)
12Bushing (shock absorber lower side connecting part)
(See Bushing (Shock Absorber Lower Side Connecting Part) Removal Note.)
(See Bushing (Shock Absorber Lower Side Connecting Part) Installation Note.)
Caliper and Mounting Support Removal Note

1. Remove the caliper and mounting support from the steering knuckle and suspend it with a cable in a location out
of the way.
Front Lower Arm Ball Joint Removal Note

1. Disconnect the front lower arm ball joint from the steering knuckle using the SST.
NOTE:
When removing the front lower arm ball joint, the steering knuckle bushing may also come off. If it
comes off, replace the steering knuckle.
Upper Arm Ball Joint Removal Note

1. Loosen the bolts on the vehicle side.
2. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint using the SST.
Bushing (Rear Side) Removal Note

1. Mark the front upper arm as shown in the figure.
2. Remove the bushing using the SSTs.
Bushing (Front Side) Removal Note

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the front lower arm. If it is damaged, replace it.
1. Cut off the stopper plate rubber using a razor.
2. Cut off 56 mm {0.200.23 in} from each side of the knob end of the bushing using a hacksaw.
Bushing (Shock Absorber Lower Side Connecting Part) Removal Note

Bushing (Shock Absorber Lower Side Connecting Part) Installation Note

1. Compress the bushing using the SSTs so that the clearance distance A-B is 11.212.8 mm {0.4410.503
in}.
Bushing (Front Side) Installation Note

1. Press the bushing in using the SSTs.
2. Verify that there is no clearance between the bushing and the front lower arm.
3. Insert the stopper plate rubber into the inner pipe of the bushing (front side).
Bushing (Rear Side) Installation Note

1. Align the marks placed during removal and install the bushing.
2. Press the bushing in using the SSTs so that the clearance distance A-B is 15.517.5 mm{0.6110.688 in} .
Clip Installation Note

1. Wipe the grease off the ball joint stud.
2. Fill the inside of the new dust boot with grease.
3. Install the dust boot to the ball joint.
4. Install the clip using the SST.
5. Verify that the clip is installed securely to the groove.

6. Wipe off any excess grease.
Front Lower Arm Installation Note

1. Install the front lower arm rear side bushing part horizontally.
2. Install the front lower arm front side bushing part.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT LOWER ARM INSPECTION
1. Remove the front lower arm from the vehicle.
2. Inspect the front lower arm for bending or damage. If there is any malfunction, replace it.
3. Inspect the ball joint for excessive play. If there is any malfunction, replace the front lower
arm.
4. Rotate the ball joint 5 times.
Front lower arm ball joint rotational torque

2.3 Nm {23 kgfcm, 20 inlbf} max.
If not within the specification, replace the front lower arm.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION
1. Remove the front shock absorber.
2. Inspect for damage and oil leakage.
3. Compress and extend the shock absorber piston rod at least three times at a steady speed.
From the fourth compression stroke, verify that the operational force does not change and that
there is no unusual noise.
If there is any malfunction, replace the shock absorber.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL
WARNING:
Whenever drilling into a shock absorber, wear protective eye wear. The gas in the shock
absorber is pressurized, and could spray metal chips into the eyes and face when drilling.
1. Clamp the shock absorber on a flat surface.
2. Drill a 23 mm {0.080.12 in} hole at a point 25 mm {0.98 in} from the bottom of
the tube, so that the gas can escape.
3. Turn the hole downwards.

4. The oil can be collected by moving the piston rod several times up and down and cutting the
tube at the end.
5. Dispose of waste oil according to local waste disposal law.
NOTE:
Shock absorber gas contains nitrogen gas.
Shock absorber oil contains mineral oil.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may possibly cause an open circuit
in the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the following procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed
sensor (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate place where the sensor will not be pulled while servicing the vehicle.
Secure the steering wheel using tape or a cable to prevent the steering shaft from rotating after disconnecting the steering
shaft. If the steering wheel rotates after the steering shaft and the steering gear and linkage are disconnected, the internal
parts of the clock spring could be damaged.
2. Remove the front suspension tower bar. (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].) (See FRONT
SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AT].)
3. Remove the splash shield. (See SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Slightly bend back the front mudguard, and remove the aerodynamic under cover. (See AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER
5. Remove the front auto leveling sensor. (See FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Remove the transverse member. (See TRANSVERSE MEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

10. Inspect the front wheel alignment. (See FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)
11. Set the EPS system to the neutral position. (See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING.)
CAUTION:
After disconnecting the steering shaft joint, always set the EPS system to the neutral position to prevent system
malfunction.
1 Brake hose
3 Disc plate
4 Tie-rod end

6 Front lower arm bolt joint
8 Axle and hub component
(See Axle and Hub Component Removal Note.)
9 Radiator mounting bracket
10Mounting rubber
(See Mounting Rubber Removal Note.)
11Front crossmember component
12Steering gear and linkage
13Front upper arm
14Front lower arm
16Front stabilizer
17Front crossmember
Axle and Hub Component Removal Note

1. Loosen the front upper arm inner bolts.
2. Remove the axle and hub component.
Mounting Rubber Removal Note

1. Suspend the engine using the SSTs.
2. Support the front crossmember using a jack.
WARNING:
Verify that the crossmember component is securely supported by a jack. If the crossmember component falls, it
could cause serious injury or death, or damage to the vehicle.
3. Remove the transverse member.
4. Remove the mounting rubber while gradually lowering the front crossmember.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSVERSE MEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the transverse member.
3. Install the transverse member.

4. Install the under cover.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Removing/installing the shock absorber and coil spring is dangerous. The shock absorber
and coil spring could fly off under tremendous pressure and cause serious injury or death,
and damage the vehicle.
3. Remove the front shock absorber and coil spring. (See FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL
SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Assemble in the reverse order of removal.
1 Piston rod nut

(See Piston Rod Nut Removal Note.)
2 Retainer
3 Bushing
4 Upper spring seat
(See Upper Spring Seat Installation Note.)
5 Dust boot
6 Spacer
7 Bushing
8 Retainer
9 Stopper casing and bound stopper
10Bound stopper
11Stopper casing
12Coil spring
(See Coil Spring Installation Note.)
13Front shock absorber
Piston Rod Nut Removal Note

WARNING:
Before removing the piston rod nut, secure the shock absorber and spring in the SSTs.
Otherwise, the shock absorber and spring could fly off under tremendous pressure and
cause serious injury or death, or damage to vehicle parts.
1. Install the coil spring to the SST using the following procedure.
NOTE:
Install the SST using a piece of clean rag to prevent the coil spring from being
scratched.
a. Set the SST attachments (tabs) to the positions shown in the figure.
b. Install the front shock absorber and coil spring to the SST so that the coil spring
is set to the position shown in the figure.
2. Compress the coil spring using the SST.

3. Remove the piston rod nut.
Coil Spring Installation Note

1. Protect the coil spring from scratches using a piece of cloth and install the SSTs.
2. Compress the coil spring using the SSTs.
3. Install the shock absorber so that the lower end of the coil spring is seated on the step of the
lower spring seat.
Upper Spring Seat Installation Note

1. Align the mark on the upper spring seat with the dust boot projection.
2. Install the upper spring seat so that the upper spring seat stud is at a 2733 angle to the
shock absorber installation shaft (lower side).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may possibly
cause an open circuit in the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the following
procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate place where the
sensor will not be pulled while servicing the vehicle.
2. Remove the front suspension tower bar. (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[MT].) (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AT].)
1Brake hose bracket

2Front stabilizer control link
3Front upper arm ball joint
4Front shock absorber and coil spring, front upper arm
5Front shock absorber and coil spring
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT UPPER ARM INSPECTION
1. Remove the front upper arm from the vehicle.
2. Inspect the front upper arm for bending or damage. If there is any malfunction, replace it.
3. Inspect the ball joint for excessive play, and if there is any malfunction, replace the front
upper arm.
Front upper arm ball joint rotational torque

1.76 Nm {17.6 kgfcm, 15.6 inlbf} max.
If not within the specification, replace the front upper arm.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT UPPER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may possibly
cause an open circuit in the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the following
procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate place where
the sensor will not be pulled while servicing the vehicle.
1Caliper and mounting support

(See Caliper and Mounting Support Removal Note.)
2Disc plate
3Brake hose bracket

4Stabilizer control link nut
5Shock absorber lower bolt and nut
(See Shock Absorber Lower Bolt and Nut Removal Note.)
6Front upper arm ball joint
(See Front Upper Arm Ball Joint Removal Note.)
7Front upper arm
(See Front Upper Arm Removal Note.)
8Clip
(See Clip Installation Note.)
9Dust boot
Caliper and Mounting Support Removal Note

1. Remove the caliper and mounting support from the steering knuckle and suspend it with a cable in a
location out of the way.
Shock Absorber Lower Bolt and Nut Removal Note

1. Loosen the shock absorber upper nuts.
2. Remove the front shock absorber lower bolt and nut.
Front Upper Arm Ball Joint Removal Note

1. Remove the front upper arm ball joint from the steering knuckle using the SST.
Front Upper Arm Removal Note

1. Remove the front upper arm bolts.
2. Push down the front lower arm, and then remove the front upper arm from the gap between the shock
absorber lower end and the front lower arm.
Clip Installation Note

3. Install the dust boot on the ball joint.
4. Install the clip using the SST.
5. Verify that the clip is installed securely to the groove.

6. Wipe off any excess grease.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT]

2Plate
(See Plate Installation Note.)
Plate Installation Note

1. Install the plates with the identification marks facing upward.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AT]

2Plate
(See Plate Installation Note.)
Plate Installation Note

1. Install the plates with the identification marks facing upward.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR STABILIZER CONTROL LINK INSPECTION
1. Remove the stabilizer control link from the vehicle.
2. Inspect the link for bending or damage. If there is any malfunction, replace the link.
3. Rotate the ball joint 10 times, and rock the ball joint 10 times.
Rear stabilizer control link ball joint rotational torque

0.22.0 Nm {320 kgfcm, 217 inlbf}
If not within the specification, replace the stabilizer control link ball joint.
Even when within the specification, if there is excessive play in the ball joint,
replace the stabilizer control link.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SUSPENSION LOCATION INDEX
1Rear shock absorber and coil spring

(See REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
2Rear shock absorber

(See REAR SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION.)
(See REAR SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL.)
3Rear trailing link
(See REAR TRAILING LINK (UPPER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR TRAILING LINK (UPPER) INSPECTION.)
(See REAR TRAILING LINK (LOWER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4Rear lateral link
(See REAR LATERAL LINK (UPPER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR LATERAL LINK (UPPER) INSPECTION.)
(See REAR LATERAL LINK (LOWER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR LATERAL LINK (LOWER) INSPECTION.)
5Toe control link
(See TOE CONTROL LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See TOE CONTROL LINK INSPECTION.)
6Rear stabilizer
(See REAR STABILIZER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR STABILIZER CONTROL LINK INSPECTION.)
8Rear crossmember
(See REAR CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR STABILIZER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(See Stabilizer Control Link Installation Note.)
2Stabilizer bracket
3Bushing
4Rear stabilizer
(See Rear Stabilizer Installation Note.)
Rear Stabilizer Installation Note

1. Install the rear stabilizer so that the identification mark is on the right side of the vehicle.
Stabilizer Control Link Installation Note

1. Install the stabilizer control link in the proper angle as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the stabilizer control link in the proper position. If it is not installed properly, the
stabilizer control link may interfere with peripheral components when driving, causing damage to
each other.
2. Place the vehicle on the ground and verify that the stabilizer control link is installed in the angle shown in the
figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may possibly cause an open circuit in
the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before operations, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor (axle side) and move the
sensor away from the harnesses.
1. Remove the rear auto leveling sensor. (See REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the exhaust pipe. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Remove the propeller shaft. (See PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the power plant frame. (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].) (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
5. Remove the rear drive shaft. (See REAR DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. Inspect the rear wheel alignment. (See REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)
1 Rear stabilizer
2 Rear axle component
(See Rear Axle Component Removal Note.)
3 Stopper plate
4 Parking brake cable
5 Rear crossmember component
(See Rear Crossmember Component Removal Note.)

6 Rear trailing link (upper)
7 Rear trailing link (lower)
8 Rear lateral link (upper)
9 Rear lateral link (lower)
10Toe control link
11Rear crossmember
Rear Axle Component Removal Note

1. Support the knuckle using a jack.
2. Using the SST, disconnect the rear trailing link (upper) ball joint.
3. Remove the rear trailing link (lower) outer bolt.

4. Using the SST, disconnect the rear lateral link (upper) ball joint.
5. Using the SST, disconnect the rear lateral link (lower) ball joint.
6. Remove the toe control link outer bolt.

7. Remove the shock absorber lower bolt.
8. Remove the rear axle component.
Rear Crossmember Component Removal Note

WARNING:
1. Be sure that the crossmember component is securely supported by the jack.If not securely supported, the crossmember
component could fall, resulting in serious injury or death, and damage to the vehicle.
1. Support the rear crossmember with the jack, and remove the bolt.
2. Remove the rear crossmember component.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION
1. Inspect the rear shock absorber in the same way as the front shock absorber.
(See FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL
1. Dispose of the rear shock absorber in the same way as the front shock absorber.
(See FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may possibly cause
an open circuit in the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before operations, remove the ABS wheelspeed sensor (axle side), and move the sensor away from the harnesses.
1Parking brake cable

2Caliper
(See Caliper Removal Note.)
3Rear lateral link (upper) inner bolt
4Stabilizer control link upper nut
5Rear shock absorber lower bolt
6Rear shock absorber bracket

(See Rear Shock Absorber Bracket Removal Note.)
7Rear shock absorber and coil spring
Caliper Removal Note

1. Remove the caliper, and hang the cable out of the way.
Rear Shock Absorber Bracket Removal Note

1. Remove the trunk end trim. (See TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the trunk side trim. (See TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the rear shock absorber bracket.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Removing /installing the shock absorber and coil spring is dangerous. The shock absorber
and coil spring could fly off under tremendous pressure and cause serious injury or death,
and damage the vehicle.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of removal.
1 Piston rod nut

2 Retainer
3 Bushing
4 Upper spring seat
5 Spring seat rubber

6 Bushing
7 Spacer
8 Bound stopper and stopper casing
9 Bound stopper
10Collar
11Stopper casing
12Coil spring
13Rear shock absorber
Piston Rod Nut Removal Note

WARNING:
Before removing the piston rod nut, secure the shock absorber and spring in the SSTs.
Otherwise, the shock absorber and spring could fly off under tremendous pressure and
cause serious injury or death, or damage to the vehicle.
1. Install the coil spring to the SST using the following procedure.
NOTE:
Install the SST using a piece of clean rag to prevent the coil spring from being
scratched.
a. Set the SST attachments (tabs) to the positions shown in the figure.
b. Install the front shock absorber and coil spring to the SST so that the coil spring
is set to the position shown in the figure.
2. Compress the coil spring using the SST.

3. Remove the piston rod nut.
Coil Spring Installation Note

1. Set the coil spring to the SSTs using cloth.
2. Using the SSTs, compress the coil spring.
3. Install the shock absorber so that the lower end of the coil spring is seated on the step of the
lower spring seat.
Collar Installation Note

1. Install the collar so that the tapered side is facing downward as shown in the figure.
Spring Seat Rubber Installation Note

1. Install the spring seat rubber to the upper spring seat as shown in the figure.
Rear Shock Absorber and Coil Spring Installation Note

1. Install the coil spring with the lead lower end of the lower spring seat facing the direction
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR TRAILING LINK (UPPER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Inspect the rear wheel alignment.(See REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)

2Caliper component
(See Caliper Component Removal Note.)

3Disc plate
4Rear trailing link (upper) ball joint
(See Rear Trailing Link (Upper) Ball Joint Removal Note.)
5Rear trailing link (upper)
6Dust boot
(See Dust Boot Installation Note.)
Caliper Component Removal Note

1. Hang the caliper component by the cable and move aside.
Rear Trailing Link (Upper) Ball Joint Removal Note

1. Using the SST, disconnect the ball joint.
NOTE:
When removing the rear trailing link (upper) ball joint, the rear knuckle bushing may also
come off. If it comes off, replace the rear knuckle.
Dust Boot Installation Note

3. Using the SST, install the dust boot to the ball joint.
4. Wipe off the excess grease.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR TRAILING LINK (LOWER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Toe control link outer bolt

2Rear trailing link (lower) outer bolt
3Rear trailing link (lower) inner bolt
4Rear trailing link (lower)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR TRAILING LINK (UPPER) INSPECTION
1. Remove the rear trailing link (upper) from the vehicle.
2. Inspect the link or bending or damage. If there is any malfunction, replace the rear trailing
link (upper).
3. Inspect the ball joint for looseness. If there is any malfunction, replace the ball joint.
Rear trailing link (upper) ball joint rotational torque

2.55 Nm {26.0 kgfcm, 22.6 inlbf}
If not within the specification, replace the rear trailing link (upper).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR LATERAL LINK (UPPER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor
may possibly cause an open circuit in the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before
operations, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor (axle side) and move the sensor away
from the harnesses.
1Rear lateral link (upper) ball joint
(See Rear Lateral Link (Upper) Ball Joint Removal Note.)

2Rear lateral link (upper)
3Dust boot
Rear Lateral Link (Upper) Ball Joint Removal Note

1. Using the SST, disconnect the rear lateral link (upper) ball joint.
NOTE:
When removing the rear lateral link (upper) ball joint, the rear knuckle bushing
may also come off. If it comes off, replace the rear knuckle.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR LATERAL LINK (LOWER) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the rear auto leveling sensor. (See REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
1Stabilizer control link lower nut
2Rear lateral link (lower) ball joint

(See Rear Lateral Link (Lower) Ball Joint Removal Note.)
3Rear lateral link (lower)
4Dust boot
Rear Lateral Link (Lower) Ball Joint Removal Note

1. Using the SST, disconnect the ball joint.
NOTE:
When removing the rear lateral link (lower) ball joint, the rear knuckle bushing
may also come off. If it comes off, replace the rear knuckle.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR LATERAL LINK (UPPER) INSPECTION
1. Remove the rear lateral link (upper) from the vehicle.
Rear lateral link (upper) ball joint rotational torque

If not within the specification, replace the rear lateral link (upper).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR LATERAL LINK (LOWER) INSPECTION
1. Remove the rear lateral link (lower) from the vehicle.
Rear lateral link (lower) ball joint rotational torque

If not within the specification, replace the rear lateral link (lower).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TOE CONTROL LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Toe control link ball joint

(See Toe Control Link Ball Joint Installation Note.)
2Toe control link
3Dust boot

Toe Control Link Ball Joint Installation Note

1. Install the toe control link ball joint so that the ball joint stud projection is within -24 mm
{-0.080.15 in}.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TOE CONTROL LINK INSPECTION
1. Remove the toe control link from the vehicle.
2. Inspect the lateral link for bending or damage. If there is any malfunction, replace the lateral
link.
5. Install the SST to the ball stud, and measure the ball joint rotational torque using a pull
scale.
Toe control link ball joint rotational torque

1.76 Nm {17.9 kgfcm, 15.6 inlbf}
Pull scale reading: 17.6 N {1.76 kgf, 3.96 lbf}
If not within the specification, replace the toe control link.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUSPENSION TECHNICAL DATA
Front Wheel Alignment

Standard suspension
Item
Specification
2 {0.08}
(mm {in})
1 {0.04}
degree 01121
Inner
3836
Outer
3318
1059
363372 {14.3
14.6}
-041
373382 {14.7
15.0}
-021
15.4}
1]
-003
393402 {15.5
15.8}
014
403412 {15.9
028
Camber
16.2}
366375 {14.5
14.7}
645
376385 {14.9
15.1}
633
15.5}
1]
620
396405 {15.6
15.9}
607
406415 {16.0
16.3}
555
Caster
Sport suspension
Item
Specification
2 {0.08}
(mm {in})
1 {0.04}
degree 01121
Inner
3836
Outer
3318
1112
356365 {14.1
14.3}
-057
366375 {14.5
14.7}
-035
15.1}
1]
-015
Camber
386395 {15.2
15.5}
002
396405 {15.6
15.9}
018
364373 {14.4
14.6}
647
374383 {14.8
15.0}
635
Caster
15.4}
1]
622
394403 {15.6
15.8}
609
404413 {16.0
16.2}
557
NOTE:
Difference between the left and right dimension for camber and caster is within 1.
Rear Wheel Alignment

Standard suspension
Item
Specification
3.6 {0.14}
(mm {in})
2 {0.08}
degree 01920
366375 {14.5
-122
14.7}
376385 {14.9
15.1}
-102
Camber
15.5}
1]
-045
396405 {15.6
15.9}
-031
406415 {16.0
16.3}
-018
Sport suspension
Item
Specification
3.6 {0.14}
(mm {in})
2 {0.08}
degree 01920
364373 {14.4
14.6}
-126
374383 {14.8
15.0}
-106
15.4}
1]
-048
394403 {15.6
15.8}
-033
404413 {16.0
16.2}
-021
Camber
NOTE:
Difference between the left and right camber angle is within 1.
Suspension
Item
Specification
Front upper arm ball joint rotational torque
Front lower arm ball joint rotational torque
2.3 Nm {23 kgfcm, 20 inlbf} max.
Front stabilizer control link ball joint rotational torque0.20.8 Nm {2.08.1 kgfcm, 1.87.1 inlbf}
Rear lateral link (upper) ball joint rotational torque
Rear lateral link (lower) ball joint rotational torque

1.76 Nm {17.9 kgfcm, 15.6 inlbf}
Toe control link ball joint rotational torque
Pull scale reading: 17.6 N {1.76 kgf, 3.96 lbf}
Rear stabilizer control link ball joint rotational torque
0.22.0 Nm {320 kgfcm, 217 inlbf}
Rear trailing link (upper) ball joint rotational torque
2.55 Nm {26.0 kgfcm, 22.6 inlbf}
Wheel and Tire
Item
Specification
Size
Offset
Wheel
(mm {in})
18 x 8J
19 x 8J
50 {2.0}
47 {1.9}
Pitch circle diameter
(mm {in})
Material
Aluminum alloy
Size
Tire
114.3 {4.50}
225/45R18 91W 225/40R19 89W
Air pressure
Remaining tread
(kPa {psi})
220 {32}
(mm {in})
1.6 {0.063} min.
Lug nut tightening torque(Nm {kgfm, ftlbf})88118 {9.012.0, 65.087.0}

Wheel and tire runout
Wheel and tire
Radial direction
(mm {in}) Lateral direction
Wheel imbalance
*1
*2
(g {oz})
1.5 {0.059} max.

2.0 {0.078} max.
Adhesive-type*1 : 13 {0.46} max.
Knock-type*2 : 8 {0.28} max.
Total weight exceeds 160 g {5.65 oz}.

One balance weight: 60 g {2.12 oz} max. If the total weight exceeds 100 g {3.53 oz} on
one side, rebalance after moving the tire around on the rim. Do not use three or more
balance weights.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous

SUSPENSION
49 T034
1A0
49 T028
3A0
49 T034
202A
Coil spring
compressor
set
Ball joint
puller set
Clip
guide
49 D034
202
49 U034
204
49 S010
301
Support
block
Dust boot
installer
Oil seal
installer
49 S032
333
49 W027
003
49 E017
5A0
Bearing
installer
Bearing
installer
Engine
support
set
49 G030
029
49 D034
201
Chain
Dust boot
installer
49
H028
301
49 T028
49 0180
Dust
boot
installer
49
302
510B
Dust boot
installer
Preload
measuring
attachment
W017
101
Clutch
hub
remover
< Previous
Back to Top
Workshop Manual - DriveLine/Axle

2011 - RX-8
General Procedures
GENERAL PROCEDURES (FRONT AND REAR AXLES)
Front Axle
FRONT AXLE LOCATION INDEX
WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE INSPECTION
WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT WHEEL HUB BOLT REPLACEMENT
Rear Axle
REAR AXLE LOCATION INDEX
WHEEL HUB, REAR KNUCKLE INSPECTION
WHEEL HUB, REAR KNUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drive Shaft
REAR
REAR
REAR
REAR
DRIVE
DRIVE
DRIVE
DRIVE
SHAFT
SHAFT
SHAFT
SHAFT
LOCATION INDEX
INSPECTION
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Differential
REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCATION INDEX
DIFFERENTIAL OIL INSPECTION
DIFFERENTIAL OIL REPLACEMENT
OIL SEAL (SIDE GEAR) REPLACEMENT
OIL SEAL (COMPANION FLANGE) REPLACEMENT
REAR DIFFERENTIAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY
REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
Propeller Shaft
PROPELLER SHAFT LOCATION INDEX

PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
PROPELLER SHAFT INSPECTION
Technical Data
DRIVELINE/AXLE TECHNICAL DATA
DRIVELINE/AXLE SST
Next >
2011 - RX-8 - DriveLine/Axle

GENERAL PROCEDURES (FRONT AND REAR AXLES)

Tightening torque
88118 Nm {9.012.0 kgfm, 65.087.0 ftlbf}
[13B-MSP].)
Suspension Links Removal/Installation

1. For the joint sections with rubber bushings, raise the vehicle using a lift, and then temporarily
tighten the installation bolts and nuts. Lower the vehicle to the ground and tighten them
completely with the specified torque.
Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT AXLE LOCATION INDEX
1Wheel hub, steering knuckle

(See WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE INSPECTION.)
(See WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2Front wheel hub bolt
(See FRONT WHEEL HUB BOLT REPLACEMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT WHEEL HUB BOLT REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the brake caliper component and disc plate.
2. Remove the wheel hub bolt using the SST as shown in the figure.
3. Place a new wheel hub bolt in the wheel hub.

4. Install the wheel hub bolt by placing a proper sized washer on the hub, and tightening the
nut as shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE INSPECTION
Wheel Bearing Looseness Inspection

1. Install the magnetic vase and dial gauge as shown in the figure, and inspect the wheel
bearing for axial looseness.
If it exceeds the maximum specification, replace the wheel hub component.

Maximum front wheel bearing play
0.05 mm {0.002 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
in the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the following procedures, disconnect the ABS wheel-speed
sensor or ABS wheel-speed sensor harness connector (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate place where the sensor will not
be pulled by mistake while servicing the vehicle.
3. After installation, inspect the front wheel alignment. (See FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)
1 ABS wheel-speed sensor harness connector (With ABS)

ABS wheel-speed sensor (With DSC)
2 Brake caliper component
(See Brake Caliper Component Removal Note.)
3 Disc plate
4 Tie-rod end
5 Stabilizer control link nut (lower)
7 Front upper arm bolt
8 Front lower arm ball joint
9 Wheel hub, steering knuckle component
10Steering knuckle
11Dust cover
12Wheel hub bolt
13Wheel hub component
Brake Caliper Component Removal Note

1. Suspend the brake calliper component using a cable or equivalent.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR AXLE LOCATION INDEX
1Wheel hub, rear knuckle

(See WHEEL HUB, REAR KNUCKLE INSPECTION.)
(See WHEEL HUB, REAR KNUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WHEEL HUB, REAR KNUCKLE INSPECTION
Wheel Bearing Looseness Inspection

1. Install the magnetic vase and dial gauge as shown in the figure, and inspect the wheel
bearing for axial looseness.
If it exceeds the maximum specification, replace the wheel hub component.

Maximum rear wheel bearing play
0.05 mm {0.002 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WHEEL HUB, REAR KNUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the following procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor
(axle side) and fix it to an appropriate place where the sensor will not be pulled by mistake while servicing the vehicle.
4. After installation, inspect the rear wheel alignment. (See REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)
1 ABS wheel-speed sensor
2 Locknut
(See Locknut Removal Note.)
(See Locknut Installation Note.)
5 Disc plate
(See REAR BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6 Rear lateral link (upper) ball joint
8 Rear lateral link (lower) ball joint
10Rear trailing link (lower) outside bolt
11Rear trailing link (upper) ball joint
12Toe control link ball joint
13Rear drive shaft
(See Rear Drive shaft Removal Note.)
14Rear knuckle component
(See Rear Knuckle Component Installation Note.)
15Wheel hub component
(See Wheel Hub Component Removal Note.)
(See Wheel Hub Component Installation Note.)
16Retaining ring
17Wheel bearing
(See Wheel Bearing Removal Note.)
(See Wheel Bearing Installation Note.)
18Dust cover
(See Dust Cover Removal Note.)
(See Dust Cover Installation Note.)
19Bushing
(See Bushing Removal Note.)
(See Bushing Installation Note.)
20Rear knuckle
21Wheel hub bolt
(See Wheel Hub Bolt Removal Note.)
(See Wheel Hub Bolt Installation Note.)
Locknut Removal Note

1. Lock the disc plate by applying the brakes.
2. Knock the crimped portion of the locknut outward using a chisel and a hammer.
3. Remove the locknut.

Rear Drive shaft Removal Note
1. Temporarily install a spare nut onto the end of the rear drive shaft.
2. Tap the nut with a copper hammer to loosen the drive shaft from the wheel hub.
3. Separate the rear drive shaft from the wheel hub.
Wheel Hub Component Removal Note

1. Remove the wheel hub component using the SSTs.
2. If the bearing inner race remains on the wheel hub component, use a chisel to secure a sufficient space for installing the SST
between wheel hub component and bearing inner race.
3. Remove the bearing inner race using the SST.
Wheel Bearing Removal Note

1. Remove the wheel bearing from the rear knuckle using the SSTs.
Dust Cover Removal Note

NOTE:
Remove the dust cover only if there is an abnormality.
1. Place an alignment mark on the dust cover and rear knuckle for proper installation.
2. Remove the dust cover using a chisel.
Bushing Removal Note

1. Remove the bushing from the rear knuckle using the SSTs.
Wheel Hub Bolt Removal Note

NOTE:
Remove the dust cover only if there is an abnormality.
1. Remove the wheel hub bolts from the wheel hub using a press.
Wheel Hub Bolt Installation Note

1. Press in new wheel hub bolts into the wheel hub using a press.
Bushing Installation Note

1. Press the new bushing into the rear knuckle using the SSTs.
Dust Cover Installation Note

1. Align the new and old dust covers and place alignment marks on the new dust cover.
2. Align the marks on the new dust cover and rear knuckle.
3. Press the new dust cover onto the rear knuckle using the SSTs.
Wheel Bearing Installation Note

1. Install a new wheel bearing using the SSTs.
Wheel Hub Component Installation Note

1. Install the wheel hub component using the SSTs.
Rear Knuckle Component Installation Note

1. Apply grease (L2Y1 33247) to the wheel bearing inner race and drive shaft contact surface (Area A in figure).
2. Install the rear knuckle component.
Locknut Installation Note

1. Tighten a new locknut.
2. Install a new locknut and indent as shown to crimp the locknut, using a chisel and hammer.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
in the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the following procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed
sensor (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate place where the sensor will not be pulled by mistake while servicing the
vehicle.
1. Drain the rear differential oil. (See DIFFERENTIAL OIL REPLACEMENT.)
5. Add rear differential oil. (See DIFFERENTIAL OIL REPLACEMENT.)
6. After installation, inspect the rear wheel alignment. (See REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)

2 Locknut
(See Locknut Removal Note.)
(See Locknut Installation Note.)

9 Rear trailing link (upper) ball joint
10Toe control link (outer)
11Rear drive shaft
(See Rear Drive Shaft Removal Note.)
(See Rear Drive Shaft Installation Note.)
12Rear drive shaft clip
(See Rear Drive Shaft Clip Installation Note.)
Locknut Removal Note

1. Lock the disc plate by applying the brakes.
2. Knock the crimped portion of the locknut outward using a chisel and a hammer.
3. Remove the locknut.

2. Temporarily tighten the wheel nut to prevent the disc plate from falling off.
Rear Drive Shaft Removal Note

1. Temporarily install a spare nut to the end of the rear drive shaft.
2. Knock the nut with copper hammer lightly and remove the rear drive shaft from the wheel hub.
3. Separate the rear drive shaft from the wheel hub.

4. Insert a tire lever or equivalent between the rear differential and differential side outer ring, and then remove the rear drive
shaft.
CAUTION:
The sharp edges of the drive shaft can slice or puncture the oil seal. Be careful not to damage the oil seal when
removing the drive shaft from the differential.
5. Pull the rear drive shaft to the outer side of the vehicle and disconnect it from the rear differential.
6. To hold the rear knuckle component, install the rear lateral link (upper) to the rear knuckle temporarily after disconnecting the
rear drive shaft.
Rear Drive Shaft Clip Installation Note

1. Point the opening of the new drive shaft clip upward, install it to the clip groove at the end of the rear drive shaft with the
installation width within the specification.
Standard
32 mm {1.3 in}
2. After installing the clip, measure the outer diameter. If it exceeds the specification, reinstall the new clip.
Rear Drive Shaft Installation Note

1. Apply differential oil to the differential oil seal lip.
CAUTION:
The sharp edges of the rear drive shaft can slice or puncture the oil seal. Be careful not to damage the oil seal
when installing the rear drive shaft from the rear differential.
2. Apply grease (L2Y1 33247) to the wheel bearing inner race and rear drive shaft contact surface (Area A in figure).
3. Insert the rear drive shaft into the rear differential with the clip opening facing upward.
4. Insert the rear drive shaft to the wheel hub.
5. After installation, verify that the rear drive shaft is securely held by the clip by pulling the outer ring on the differential side
towards the axle.
Locknut Installation Note

1. Tighten a new locknut.
2. Crimp the locknut, using a chisel and hammer.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DRIVE SHAFT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1Boot band (axle side)

(See Boot Band (Axle Side) Disassembly Note.)
(See Boot Band (Axle Side) Assembly Note.)
2Boot band (differential side)
(See Boot Band (Differential Side) Disassembly Note.)
(See Boot Band (Differential Side) Assembly Note.)
3Outer ring
(See Outer Ring Disassembly Note.)
(See Outer Ring Assembly Note.)
4Snap ring
(See Snap Ring, Tripod Joint Disassembly Note.)
(See Tripod Joint, Snap Ring Assembly Note.)
5Tripod joint
(See Snap Ring, Tripod Joint Disassembly Note.)
(See Tripod Joint, Snap Ring Assembly Note.)
6Boot
(See Boot Disassembly Note.)
(See Boot Assembly Note.)
7Shaft and ball joint component
Boot Band (Axle Side) Disassembly Note

NOTE:
Remove the boot band only if there is an abnormality.
1. Remove the boot band using end clamp pliers.
Boot Band (Differential Side) Disassembly Note

1. Remove the crimp of the clip using a flathead screwdriver.
Outer Ring Disassembly Note

1. Place an alignment mark on the drive shaft and the outer ring.
2. Remove the outer ring.
Snap Ring, Tripod Joint Disassembly Note

1. Place an alignment mark on the shaft and tripod joint.
2. Remove the snap ring using a snap ring plier.
3. Remove the tripod joint from the shaft.

CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the component, do not use a hammer when removing it.
Boot Disassembly Note

NOTE:
Remove the axle side boot only if there is an abnormality.
1. Wrap the shaft spline with vinyl tape.
2. Remove the boot.
Boot Assembly Note

NOTE:
The boot shapes on the axle side and the differential side are different so do not misinstall them.
1. Fill the inside of the new dust boot (wheel side) with grease.
NOTE:
Do not touch the grease with your hand. Apply it from the tube to prevent foreign matter from
entering the boot.
Grease amount
MT: 110130 g {3.894.59 oz}
AT: 85105 g {3.003.70 oz}
2. Install the boot with the drive shaft spline still wrapped with vinyl tape.
3. Remove the vinyl tape.
Tripod Joint, Snap Ring Assembly Note

1. Align the tripod joint with the shaft mark and insert it using a brass bar.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the component, do not tap the roller part when installing.
2. Install the new snap ring to the shaft installation slot securely using a snap ring pliers.
Outer Ring Assembly Note

1. Fill the outer ring and boot (differential side) with the repair kit grease.
NOTE:
Do not touch the grease with your hand. Apply it from the tube to prevent foreign matter from
entering the boot.
Grease amount
MT: 170190 g {6.006.70 oz}
AT: 135155 g {4.775.46 oz}
2. Assemble the outer ring.
3. Release any trapped air from the boots by carefully lifting up the small end of each boot with a cloth wrapped
screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Do not let the grease leak.
Do not damage the boot.
4. Set the drive shaft length to the specification when the inside of the boots is at ambient pressure. Rear drive
shaft standard length
Left side 792.6802.6 mm {31.2131.59 in}
MT
Right side 832.6842.6 mm {32.7833.17 in}
Left side 791.1801.1 mm {31.1531.53 in}

AT
Right side 831.1841.1 mm {32.7133.11 in}
5. After installation, verify that there is no boot damage or grease leakage.
Boot Band (Differential Side) Assembly Note

1. Using pliers, pull the boot band around the boot slot in opposite direction of drive shaft forward rotation
direction and tighten.
2. Insert the end of the boot band between the boot band clip and fold back the clip tabs using a flathead
screwdriver to secure the boot band.
3. Verify that the boot band is installed to the boot slot securely.
Boot Band (Axle Side) Assembly Note
Boot band (small diameter side)
1. Adjust clearance A by turning the adjusting bolt of the SST.
Clearance A
2.9 mm {0.11 in}
2. Crimp the wheel side small boot band using the SST. Verify that clearance B is within the specification.
If clearance B is more than the specification, reduce clearance A of the SST and crimp the boot
again.
If clearance B is less than the specification, replace the boot band, increase clearance A of the
SST, and crimp the new boot.
Clearance B
2.42.8 mm {0.0950.110 in}
3. Verify that the boot band does not protrude from the boot band installation area.
If it does, replace the boot band and repeat Steps 2 and 3.
Boot band (Large diameter side)
1. Adjust clearance C by turning the adjusting bolt of the SST.
Clearance C
3.2 mm {0.13 in}
2. Crimp the wheel side large boot band using the SST. Verify that clearance D is within the specification.
If clearance D is more than the specification, reduce clearance C of the SST and crimp the boot
again.
If clearance D is less than the specification, replace the boot band, increase clearance C of the
SST, and crimp the new boot.
Clearance D
2.42.8 mm {0.0950.110 in}
3. Verify that the boot band does not protrude from the boot band installation area.
If it does, replace the boot band and repeat Steps 2 and 3.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DRIVE SHAFT INSPECTION
1. Verify that the drive shaft is not twisted or damaged.
2. Inspect the dust boot for damage and cracks.
3. Move the spline and joint up and down, left and right by hand and verify that there is no
roughness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DRIVE SHAFT LOCATION INDEX
1Rear drive shaft

(See REAR DRIVE SHAFT INSPECTION.)
(See REAR DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR DRIVE SHAFT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DIFFERENTIAL OIL INSPECTION
2. Remove the oil-fill plug and the washer.
3. Inspect if the oil level is close to the rim of the oil-fill plug hole.
4. If the oil is not close to the rim of the oil-fill plug hole, add oil.
5. Install the oil-fill plug with a new washer and tighten.
Tightening torque
39.253.9 Nm {4.005.49 kgfm, 29.039.7 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DIFFERENTIAL OIL REPLACEMENT
2. Remove the oil-fill plug.
3. Remove the drain plug and drain the oil.
4. Install the drain plug with a new washer and tighten.

Tightening torque
39.253.9 Nm {4.005.49 kgfm, 29.039.7 ftlbf}
5. Add the specified oil through the oil-fill plug hole.
Differential oil grade/viscosity:
API service GL-5 (SAE 90)
API service GL-5 (SAE 80W-90)
API service GL-5 (SAE 75W-90) (Not available from Mazda)
Differential oil capacity (approx. quantity):
1.21.4 L {1.3 1.4 US qt, 1.11.2 Imp qt}
6. After adding the oil, perform the oil level inspection.
Tightening torque
39.253.9 Nm {4.005.49 kgfm, 29.039.7 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCATION INDEX
1Differential oil
(See DIFFERENTIAL OIL INSPECTION.)
(See DIFFERENTIAL OIL REPLACEMENT.)
2Oil seal (side gear)
(See OIL SEAL (SIDE GEAR) REPLACEMENT.)
3Oil seal (companion flange)

(See OIL SEAL (COMPANION FLANGE) REPLACEMENT.)
4Rear differential
(See REAR DIFFERENTIAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY.)
(See REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DIFFERENTIAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the following procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor
(axle side) and fix it to an appropriate place where the sensor will not be pulled by mistake while servicing the vehicle.
1. Drain the rear differential oil. (See DIFFERENTIAL OIL REPLACEMENT.)
3. Remove the tunnel member. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
4. Remove the middle pipe and main silencer. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
5. Remove the TWC. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
6. Remove the heat insulator. (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].) (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
10. Add rear differential oil. (See DIFFERENTIAL OIL REPLACEMENT.)


8 Rear trailing link (upper) ball joint
9 Toe control link ball joint
10Rear drive shaft, rear knuckle component
(See Rear Drive Shaft, Rear Knuckle Component Removal Note.)
(See Rear Drive Shaft, Rear Knuckle Component Installation Note.)
11Power plant frame
(See Power Plant Frame Removal Note.)
(See Rear Differential, Power Plant Frame Installation Note.)
12Rear differential
(See Rear Differential Removal Note.)
(See Rear Differential, Power Plant Frame Installation Note.)
13Differential mount

2. Temporarily tighten the wheel nut to prevent the disc plate from falling off.
Rear Drive Shaft, Rear Knuckle Component Removal Note

1. Insert a tire lever or equivalent between the rear differential and differential side outer ring, and remove the rear drive shaft.
CAUTION:
The sharp edges of the drive shaft can slice or puncture the oil seal. Be careful not to damage the oil seal when
removing the drive shaft from the differential.
2. Pull the rear drive shaft and rear knuckle component to the outer side, and detach the rear drive shaft from the rear differential.
3. To hold the rear drive shaft and rear knuckle component, install the rear lateral link (upper) to the rear knuckle temporarily after
disconnecting the rear drive shaft.
Power Plant Frame Removal Note

1. Support the transmission using a jack.
2. Support the rear differential using a jack.
3. Remove the power plant frame.
Rear Differential Removal Note

WARNING:
If the rear differential falls off, it can cause serious injuries or death, and damage to the vehicle. When removing the rear
differential, verify that it is supported securely with a jack.

2. Remove the differential mounting installation bolts.

3. Lower the jack slowly and remove the rear differential.
Rear Differential, Power Plant Frame Installation Note

WARNING:
If the rear differential falls off, it can cause serious injuries or death, and damage to the vehicle. When installing the rear
differential, verify that it is supported securely with a jack.
CAUTION:
Tighten the differential mounting installation bolts completely only after performing the power plant frame installation and
adjustment. If the differential mounting bracket is installed at an incorrect angle, the differential mounting bracket bushings
will twist and cause an abnormal noise while the vehicle is moving.
2. Temporarily tighten the differential mounting installation bolts.

3. Install the power plant frame.
4. Install the plate.
5. Temporarily tighten the bolts and nuts as shown in the figure.
6. Tighten the nut B until the power plant frame is seated in the rear differential.
7. Install the heat insulator, TWC, middle pipe, main silencer and front tunnel member. (See TRANSMISSION
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].) (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].) (See EXHAUST
8. Raise the power plant frame front end (transmission side) or transmission using a jack so that dimension A (between power plant
frame lower surface and front tunnel member lower surface) shown in the figure is within the adjustment value.
Adjustment dimension A
5557 mm {2.172.24 in}
NOTE:
When raising the power plant frame without a transmission jack, use bolts (M12x1.25) with a thread length of 55
mm {2.17 in} or more. Tighten the bolts from the underside of the front tunnel member as shown in the figure
and raise the power plant frame.
When using bolts, the underside of the power plant frame could be damaged. Affix tape to the underside of the
frame to prevent damage.
If there is the possibility of age-related bending/deterioration of the mount, adjust dimension A to approx. 15 mm
{0.59 in} higher than the adjustment value to facilitate obtaining the specification.
9. Tighten the bolts and nuts on the rear differential side in the order shown in the figure.
StepBolt, nut
Tightening torque
(Nm {kgfm, ftlbf}
126.0154.0 {12.915.7, 93.0113.5}
126.0154.0 {12.915.7, 93.0113.5}
126.0154.0 {12.915.7, 93.0113.5}
74.593.2 {7.609.50, 55.068.7}
10. Tighten the bolts and nuts on the transmission side as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque
126.0154.0 Nm {12.915.7 kgfm, 93.0113.5 ftlbf}
11. Verify that dimension A is within the specification with the transmission jack and the adjustment bolt removed.
If not within the specification, adjust dimension A again.
Standard dimension A
48.456.4 mm {1.912.22 in}
12. Temporarily loosen the differential mount installation bolts, straighten the differential mounting bracket bushings, and then
tighten the differential mounting installation bolts again to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never support the rear differential using a jack when tightening the differential mounting installation bolts.
Otherwise, the differential mounting bracket bushings will twist and cause an abnormal noise while the vehicle is
moving.
Tightening torque
74.5105.0 Nm {7.6010.70 kgfm, 55.077.44 ftlbf}
Rear Drive Shaft, Rear Knuckle Component Installation Note

1. Install a new drive shaft clip to the clip groove at the top of the rear drive shaft with the clip opening facing upward and the clip
width within the specification.
Standard
32 mm {1.3 in}
2. After installing the clip, measure the outer diametric if it exceeds the specification, reinstall a new clip.
3. Apply differential oil to the differential oil seal lip.
CAUTION:
The sharp edges of the rear drive shaft can slice or puncture the oil seal Be careful not to damage the oil seal when
installing the rear drive shaft from the rear differential.
4. Insert the rear drive shaft into the rear differential with the clip opening facing upward.
5. After installation, verify that the rear drive shaft is securely held by the clip by pulling the outer ring on the differential side
towards the axle.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY
WARNING:
The engine stand is equipped with a self-lock mechanism, however, if the rear differential is tilted, the self-lock mechanism
could become inoperative. If the rear differential unexpectedly rotates, it could cause injury, therefore do not maintain the rear
differential tilted. When turning the rear differential, grasp the rotation handle firmly.
1 Rear cover
2 Baffle plate
3 Differential component
(See Differential Component Disassembly Note.)
4 Bearing cap
(See Bearing Cap Disassembly Note.)
5 Adjustment shim
(See Adjustment Shim, Side Bearing Outer Race Disassembly Note.)
6 Differential gear case component
7 Side bearing outer race
(See Adjustment Shim, Side Bearing Outer Race Disassembly Note.)
8 Side bearing
(See Side Bearing Disassembly Note.)
9 Ring gear
10Gear case
11Roll pin
(See Roll Pin Disassembly Note.)
12Pinion shaft
13Pinion gear
14Thrust washer
15Side gear
16Washer
17Locknut
(See Locknut Disassembly Note.)
18Washer
19Companion flange
(See Companion Flange Disassembly Note.)
21Spacer
22Front bearing
23Drive pinion component
(See Drive Pinion Component Disassembly Note.)
24Collapsible spacer
25Rear bearing
(See Rear Bearing Disassembly Note.)
26Spacer
27Drive pinion
28Front bearing outer race
(See Front Bearing Outer Race, Rear Bearing Outer Race Disassembly Note.)
29Rear bearing outer race
(See Front Bearing Outer Race, Rear Bearing Outer Race Disassembly Note.)
31Differential carrier
32Breather plug
33Oil-fill plug
34Drain plug
Differential Component Disassembly Note

1. Install the differential component to the SSTs.
Bearing Cap Disassembly Note

1. Mark the bearing cap and differential carrier for proper installation.
Adjustment Shim, Side Bearing Outer Race Disassembly Note

1. Remove the adjustment shim using a flathead screwdriver.
2. Put left and right identification marks on the removed adjustment shims and side bearing outer races.
Side Bearing Disassembly Note

1. Remove the side bearing using the SST.
2. Put left and right identification marks on the removed side bearings.
Roll Pin Disassembly Note

1. Tap the roll pin out from the direction shown in the figure using a pin punch.
Locknut Disassembly Note

1. Remove the locknut while fixing the companion flange using the SST.
Companion Flange Disassembly Note

1. Remove the companion flange using the SST.
Drive Pinion Component Disassembly Note

1. Install the removed locknut to the drive pinion top to prevent damage to the thread.
2. Remove the drive pinion component by tapping the locknut lightly using a plastic hammer.
3. Remove the locknut installed in Step 1.
Rear Bearing Disassembly Note

CAUTION:
The drive pinion could be damaged if it falls off. Support the drive pinion with your hand when removing the rear bearing.
1. Remove the rear bearing using the SST and a press.
Front Bearing Outer Race, Rear Bearing Outer Race Disassembly Note
1. Remove the bearing outer race by lightly tapping the edge of the bearing outer race using a flathead screwdriver.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
WARNING:
The engine stand is equipped with a self-lock mechanism, however, if the rear differential is tilted, the self-lock mechanism could
become inoperative. If the rear differential unexpectedly rotates, it could cause injury, therefore do not maintain the rear differential
tilted. When turning the rear differential, grasp the rotation handle firmly.
NOTE:
Clean away the old silicone sealant before applying the new silicone sealant.
Install the rear cover before the applied sealant starts to harden.
Allow the sealant to set at least 30 min or more after installation before filling the differential with differential oil.
1. Assemble in the order indicated in the table.
1 Gear case
2 Side gear
3 Thrust washer
4 Pinion gear
5 Pinion shaft
6 Washer
(See Washer Assembly Note.)
7 Roll pin
(See Roll Pin Assembly Note.)
8 Ring gear
(See Ring Gear Assembly Note.)
9 Side bearing
(See Side Bearing Assembly Note.)
10Differential gear case component
11Differential carrier
(See Oil Seal (Side Gear) Assembly Note.)
13Rear bearing outer race
(See Rear Bearing Outer Race Assembly Note.)
14Front bearing outer race
(See Front Bearing Outer Race Assembly Note.)
15Spacer
(See Spacer Assembly Note.)
16Drive pinion
17Rear bearing
(See Rear Bearing Assembly Note.)
18Drive pinion component
(See Drive Pinion Component Assembly Note.)
19Collapsible spacer
20Front bearing
21Spacer
(See Oil Seal (Companion Flange) Assembly Note.)
23Companion flange
24Washer
25Locknut
(See Locknut Assembly Note.)

26Adjustment shim
(See Adjustment Shim Assembly Note.)
27Side bearing race
28Bearing cap
(See Bearing Cap Assembly Note.)
29Baffle plate
30Rear cover
31Breather plug
32Oil-fill plug
33Drain plug
Washer Assembly Note

1. Assemble the side gear, thrust washer, pinion gear, and the pinion shaft to the gear case.
2. Install the dial gauge with the measuring probe of the dial gauge attached perpendicularly to the end of one of the pinion gear teeth.
3. Fix either one of the side gears.

4. Move the pinion gear and measure the backlash at the pinion gear top.
If it is not within the specification, adjust by choosing the proper washer.
Backlash of pinion gear and side gear
0.1 mm {0.004 in} or less
Washer table
Identification mark Part name Thickness (mm {in})
0
0578 27 252
2.00 {0.0787}
05
P016 27 252
2.05 {0.0807}
0578 27 253
2.10 {0.0827}
15
P016 27 253
2.15 {0.0846}
0578 27 254
2.20 {0.0866}
Roll Pin Assembly Note

1. Align the differential gear case and pinion shaft pin holes.
2. Tap the roll pin in using a pin punch.
Ring Gear Assembly Note

CAUTION:
The gear case and ring gear could be damaged if the ring gear is installed with old thread-locking compound remaining on the bolt
threads. Before installing the ring gear, completely remove the old thread-locking compound from the bolt threads.
1. Apply a small amount of thread-locking compound to each of points A on the back of the ring gear, and bolt thread areas B (around
the entire ring).
Application thickness
Back of ring gear points A:
Approx. 0.4 cm3 {0.4 cc, 0.024 cu in}
(1 location approx. 0.04 cm3
{0.04 cc, 0.0024 cu in})
Ring gear bolt thread points B:
Approx. 0.4 cm3 {0.4 cc, 0.024 cu in}
(1 location approx. 0.04 cm3
{0.04 cc, 0.0024 cu in})
2. Install the ring gear to the differential gear case and tighten the bolts in a criss-cross pattern.
Tightening torque
68.683.3 Nm {7.008.49 kgfm, 50.661.4 ftlbf}
Side Bearing Assembly Note

NOTE:
When assembling the side bearings, do not mix the left and right side bearings that were identified during disassembly.
1. Press the side bearing in using the SST and a press.
Oil Seal (Side Gear) Assembly Note

1. Apply differential oil to the lip of a new oil seal.
2. Assemble the oil seal using the SSTs.
Rear Bearing Outer Race Assembly Note

1. Press the rear bearing outer race into the differential carrier using the SST and a press.
Front Bearing Outer Race Assembly Note

1. Press the front bearing outer race into the differential carrier using the SST and a press.
Spacer Assembly Note
Pinion height adjustment
NOTE:
Use the installed spacer when adjusting.
Install the spacer with the chamfer on the SST side.
1. Assemble the spacer, bearing inner race (rear side), and the SST (O-ring) to the SST (49 8531 565) as shown in the figure.
2. Insert the set assembled in Step 1 from the rear side of the differential carrier.
3. Assemble the SST (49 8531 567), front bearing, companion flange, and a washer from the front side of the differential carrier.
4. Tighten the locknut to the extent that the SST (49 8531 565) can be turned by hand.
5. Place the SST (49 8531 565) on top of the SST (49 0660 555).
6. Place the SST on the surface plate and set the dial gauge to zero.
7. Set the SSTs as shown in the figure.
8. Place the measuring probe of the dial gauge at the point where the side bearing is installed in the differential carrier and measure at
the lowest position. Measure the left and right sides.
9. Add the two (left and right) values obtained by the measurements taken in Step 8 and then divide the total by 2. From this sum,
subtract the sum of the number inscribed on the end of the drive pinion divided by 100. (If there is no figure inscribed, use 0.) This is the
pinion height adjustment value.
Differential pinion height

0.038 mm {0.0015 in} or less
NOTE:
When the values obtained by the measurements taken in Step 8, 9 are 0.06 mm {0.0024 in}, 0.04 mm {0.0016 in} and
the tip surface of the drive pinion value is 2, the formula is ((0.06+0.04)/2)-(2/100)=0.03. Therefore, assemble a spacer
0.03 mm {0.0012} thicker than the currently assembled one. The thickness settings are in increments of 0.015 mm
{0.0006}, so choose one closest in thickness and install.
Spacer table
Identification markThickness (mm {in}) Identification markThickness (mm {in})
08
3.080 {0.1213}
29
3.290 {0.1295}
09
3.095 {0.1219}
30
3.305 {0.1301}
11
3.110 {0.1224}
32
3.320 {0.1307}
12
3.125 {0.1230}
33
3.335 {0.1313}
14
3.140 {0.1236}
35
3.350 {0.1319}
15
3.155 {0.1242}
36
3.365 {0.1325}
17
3.170 {0.1248}
38
3.380 {0.1331}
18
3.185 {0.1254}
39
3.395 {0.1337}
20
3.200 {0.1260}
41
3.410 {0.1343}
21
3.215 {0.1266}
42
3.425 {0.1348}
23
3.230 {0.1272}
44
3.440 {0.1354}
24
3.245 {0.1278}
45
3.455 {0.1360}
26
3.260 {0.1283}
47
3.470 {0.1366}
27
3.275 {0.1289}
Rear Bearing Assembly Note

NOTE:
Install the spacer with the chamfer on the gear side.
1. Assemble the spacer selected in the pinion height adjustment to the drive pinion.
2. Press the drive pinion into the rear bearing using the SSTs and a press.
Drive Pinion Component Assembly Note
Drive pinion preload adjustment
NOTE:
Perform preload adjustment with the oil seal uninstalled.
1. Assemble the following parts to the drive pinion.
New collapsible spacer
Front bearing
New spacer
Companion flange
New washer
New locknut
2. Turn the serrated part of the drive pinion by hand to seat the bearing.
3. Tighten the locknut temporarily tightened in Step 1 from the lower limit of the specified tightening torque using the SST, and obtain the
specified preload. Record the tightening torque at this time.
Tightening torque
128284 Nm {1329 kgfm, 95209 ftlbf}
Differential drive pinion preload
1.31.7 Nm {1417 kgfcm, 1215 inlbf}
If the specified preload cannot be obtained within the specified tightening torque, replace with a new collapsible spacer
and adjust again.
4. Remove the locknut, washer, and companion flange.
Oil Seal (Companion Flange) Assembly Note

2. Assemble the oil seal using the SST.
Locknut Assembly Note

1. Apply differential oil to the thread of a new locknut.
2. Tighten a new locknut with the torque recorded at the drive pinion preload adjustment using the SST.
3. Verify that the drive pinion preload is within the specification.
If not within the specification, perform the preload adjustment again.

1.31.7 Nm {1417 kgfcm, 1215 inlbf}
Adjustment Shim Assembly Note
Ring gear backlash adjustment
1. Stack the side bearing race and differential gear case component on the surface plate as shown in the figure, and measure the height
using a caliper and a ruler. This is value A.
Standard Height A
158.1159.5 mm {6.2246.280 in}
2. Measure the width of the section of the differential gear case component installed in the differential carrier. This is value B.
Standard width B
170.9171.1 mm {6.7296.736 in}
3. The combined thickness of the left and right adjustment shims is obtained by the following formula.
Shim thickness (mm {in}) =B-A+ (0.010.03 {0.00040.0118 in})
4. If the combined thickness of the previously assembled adjustment shims is equal to the calculated thickness, use the shims as they are.
5. If the combined thickness of the previously assembled adjustment shims is not equal to the calculated thickness, or if the adjustment
shims have to be replaced, select two appropriate adjustment shims from the table below. Adjustment shim table
Identification markThickness (mm {in}) Identification markThickness (mm {in})
550
5.50 {0.217}
605
6.05 {0.238}
560
5.60 {0.220}
610
6.10 {0.240}
565
5.65 {0.222}
615
6.15 {0.242}
570
5.70 {0.224}
620
6.20 {0.244}
575
5.75 {0.226}
625
6.25 {0.246}
580
5.80 {0.228}
630
6.30 {0.248}
585
5.85 {0.230}
635
6.35 {0.250}
590
5.90 {0.232}
640
6.40 {0.252}
595
5.95 {0.234}
650
6.50 {0.256}
600
6.00 {0.236}
NOTE:
If the adjustment shims are to be reused, assemble the left and right shims that were identified during disassembly.
When assembling the side bearing races, do not mix the left and right side bearings that were identified during
disassembly.
6. Assemble the differential gear case component and the side bearing race to the differential carrier.
7. Tap the selected adjustment shim between the differential carrier and the side bearing race with a plastic hammer as shown in the
figure.
8. Align the bearing cap alignment marks, assemble the bearing cap, and then temporarily tighten the bolts.
9. Install the dial gauge with the measuring probe of the dial gauge attached perpendicularly to the end of one of the ring gear teeth.
10. Secure the drive pinion and measure the backlash of the ring gear.
Backlash of drive gear and ring gear
Standard: 0.090.11 mm {0.00350.0043 in}
Minimum value: 0.05 mm {0.0020 in} or more
Variance: 0.07 mm {0.0028 in} or less
NOTE:
Measure the backlash at 4 locations around the ring gear. Make sure all of the 4 locations are within specification, and
the minimum value for the 4 locations is 0.05 mm {0.0020in} or more and the variance is 0.07 mm {0.0028 in} or
less
11. If the backlash is not within the specification, adjust the gear case component by moving it in the axial direction.
12. Measure the ring gear preload between the backlash.

Ring gear preload
0.492.45 Nm {5.024.9 kgfcm, 4.421.6 inlbf}
NOTE:
When moving the gear case component in the axial direction, replace the adjustment shims. If the adjustment shim on the right side
is replaced with one that is 0.05 mm {0.0020 in} thicker, replace the one on the left with one that is 0.05 mm {0.0020 in}
thinner.
Bearing Cap Assembly Note

1. Align the bearing cap alignment marks and assemble the bearing cap with the arrow facing outward.
Tightening torque
72.6106.9 Nm {7.4110.91 kgfm, 53.578.84 ftlbf}
2. Perform the drive pinion and ring gear tooth contact inspection.
Drive Pinion, Ring Gear Tooth Contact Inspection
1. Apply tooth marking compound evenly to both surfaces of the ring gear.
2. Rotate the ring gear back and forth for several times.
3. Inspect the tooth contact pattern in 4 locations around the ring gear, and verify that the tooth contact points exhibit the pattern shown
in the figure.
If the tooth contact points are normal, wipe off the marking compound.
If the tooth contact points are not normal, adjust the pinion height, then adjust the backlash.
4. If the toe and flank contact points appear as shown in the figure after the drive pinion and ring gear teeth contact inspection, replace
the spacer with a thinner one, and move the drive pinion outward.
5. If the heel and face contact points appear as shown in the figure after the drive pinion and ring gear teeth contact inspection, replace
the spacer with a thicker one, and move the drive pinion inward.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL SEAL (SIDE GEAR) REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the drain plug and drain the oil.
2. Install the drain plug with a new washer and tighten.
Tightening torque
39.253.9 Nm {4.005.49 kgfm, 29.039.7 ftlbf}
3. Disconnect the rear drive shaft on the differential side. (See REAR DIFFERENTIAL
4. Remove the clip from the rear drive shaft.
CAUTION:
To prevent damaging the inside of the differential casing, wrap cloth on the end
of the flathead screwdriver.
5. Remove the oil seal from the differential carrier using a flathead screwdriver.

7. Tap in the new oil seal until it reaches the differential carrier using the SSTs.
NOTE:
Install the oil seal at a straight angle.
8. After installing a new clip to the rear drive shaft, insert it into the rear differential. (See REAR
DIFFERENTIAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. Verify that the rear drive shaft is held securely by the clip by pulling the outer ring on the
differential side towards the axle.
10. Add differential oil.
11. After adding the oil, perform the oil level inspection. (See DIFFERENTIAL OIL INSPECTION.)
Tightening torque
39.253.9 Nm {4.005.49 kgfm, 29.039.7 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL SEAL (COMPANION FLANGE) REPLACEMENT
2. Replace the oil seal (companion flange) referring to the rear differential disassembly/assembly
procedure. (See REAR DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY.) (See REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY.)
3. Install the rear differential. (See REAR DIFFERENTIAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PROPELLER SHAFT LOCATION INDEX
1Propeller shaft
(See PROPELLER SHAFT INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
For Carbon-Fiber Propeller Shaft

CAUTION:
The carbon-fiber-reinforced propeller shaft could be chipped or cracked if dropped. To
prevent any damage, handle the shaft with careful attention when removing/installing.
Replace the propeller shaft if it is dropped.

2. Remove the insulator (front). (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Remove the insulator (middle). (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
4. Protect the propeller shaft with rubber padding or similar protective cover to prevent damage.
CAUTION:
Remove the rubber padding or similar protective cover after propeller shaft
installation is complete.
7. Remove the rubber padding or similar protective cover from the propeller shaft.
1Bolt, nut
2Propeller shaft
(See Propeller Shaft Removal Note.)
(See Propeller Shaft Installation Note.)
For Steel Propeller Shaft

2. Remove the insulator (front). (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Remove the insulator (middle). (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
1Bolt, nut
2Propeller shaft
(See Propeller Shaft Installation Note.)
Propeller Shaft Removal Note

CAUTION:
When replacing with a new propeller shaft, mark the companion flange to match the
position of the tag on the propeller shaft.
1. Before removing the propeller shaft, make alignment marks on the yoke and differential
companion flange.
2. Insert a slab of wood behind the rear differential, and remove the propeller shaft.
3. Install the SST to the extension housing.
Propeller Shaft Installation Note

1. Align the marks and install the propeller shaft.
CAUTION:
When installing a new carbon-fiber propeller shaft, install the shaft with the
protective cover still on and then remove after completion.
Handle the propeller shaft with careful attention.
2. When installing a new propeller shaft, align the differential companion flange mark with the
tag on the propeller shaft and assemble.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PROPELLER SHAFT INSPECTION
For Carbon-Fiber Propeller Shaft

CAUTION:
Replace the propeller shaft if it is dropped.
Handle the propeller shaft with care so that the pipe is not damaged from striking
surrounding objects or other impacts.
Replace the propeller shaft if there is any chipping or warping of the pipe.
Protect the propeller shaft from damage and handle with careful attention when working.
1. Use a dial gauge to measure the runout of the propeller shaft at each position.
If it exceeds the maximum specification, replace the propeller shaft.

Propeller shaft maximum runout
0.6 mm {0.024 in}
2. Inspect the play and rotation of the joint by turning the universal joint in the directions shown
by the arrows.
Propeller shaft initial torque (Reference value)

0.290.98 Nm {3.010 kgfcm, 2.78.6 inlbf}
If there is any play or excessive initial torque, replace the propeller shaft.
3. Verify that the propeller shaft has no bends or damage.
If there is any malfunction, replace the propeller shaft.
4. Verify that there is a gap between the pipe and yoke flange.

5. Verify that there is no cracking, peeling or similar damage to the seal (where the pipe and
yoke connect).
For Steel Propeller Shaft

1. Use a dial gauge to measure the runout of the propeller shaft at each position.
If it exceeds the maximum specification, replace the propeller shaft.

0.6 mm {0.024 in}
2. Inspect the play and rotation of the joint by turning the universal joint in the direction shown
by the arrow.

0.290.98 Nm {3.010 kgfcm, 2.78.6 inlbf}
If there is excessive play or initial torque, replace the propeller shaft.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DRIVELINE/AXLE TECHNICAL DATA
Item
Specification
Maximum front wheel bearing play
0.05 mm {0.002 in}
Maximum rear wheel bearing play
0.05 mm {0.002 in}

API service GL-5 (SAE 90)
Differential oil grade/viscosity
API service GL-5 (SAE 80W-90)

API service GL-5 (SAE 75W-90) (Not available from Mazda)
Differential oil capacity (approx. quantity)

Differential pinion height
1.21.4 L {1.3 1.4 US qt, 1.11.2 Imp qt}

0.038 mm {0.0015 in} or less
1.31.7 Nm {1417 kgfcm, 1215 inlbf}
Standard: 0.090.11 mm {0.00350.0043 in}
Backlash of drive gear and ring gear
Minimum value: 0.05 mm {0.0020 in} or more

Variance: 0.07 mm {0.0028 in} or less

Rear drive shaft standard length
Left side 792.6802.6 mm {31.2131.59 in}
0.6 mm {0.024 in}

0.290.98 Nm {3.010 kgfcm, 2.78.6 inlbf}
MT
Right side 832.6842.6 mm {32.7833.17 in}
Left side 791.1801.1 mm {31.1531.53 in}
AT
Right side 831.1841.1 mm {32.7133.11 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous

DRIVELINE/AXLE SST
49 T028
3A0
49 G030
338
49 G033
102
Ball joint
puller set
Attachment
E
Handle
49 G033
105
49 H027
002
49 F026
105
Attachment
Bearing
remover
Support
block
49 F027
007
49 F027
003
49 F401
331
Attachment
for 72
bearing
Handle
Body
49 8531
565
49 F027
004
49 H034
201
Drive
pinion
model
Attachment
for 80
bearing
Support
block
49 F027
009
49 T025
001
49 G030
797
Attachment
for
68&77
Boot clamp
crimper
Handle
bearing
49 U027
003
49 S120
710
49 0839
425C
Oil seal
installer
Coupling
flange
holder
Bearing
puller set
49 V001
795
49 0107
680A
49 M005
561
Oil seal
installer
Engine
stand
Differential
carrier
hanger
49 0636
145
49 UB71
525
49 J027
001
Water
pump
pulley boss
puller
Bearing
installer
Bearing
installer
49 J027
002
49 8038
785A
49 0660
555
Collar
Dust boot
installer
Gauge
block
49 0727
570A
49 S120
440
49 F026
103
Pinion
height
gauge
Mainshaft
holder
Wheel hub
puller
body
49 W010
107A
49 8531
567
49 B001
795
Oil seal
installer
Collar A
Oil seal
installer
(Part of
49 8531
565)
< Previous
Back to Top
Workshop Manual - Brakes

2011 - RX-8
ABS SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ABS]
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS]
DTC B1318 [ABS]
DTC B1342 [ABS]
DTC C1095, C1096 [ABS]
DTC C1140 [ABS]
DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175 [ABS]
DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1234, C1233, C1235, C1236 [ABS]
DTC C1186, C1266 [ABS]
DTC C1210, C1214, C1194, C1198, C1246, C1254, C1242, C1250 [ABS]
DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 [ABS]
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC B1317, B1318 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC B1342 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC B1484, C1954 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC B2741, C2768, U2516 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC C1093 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC C1095, C1096 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC C1141, C1142, C1143, C1144 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410, C1957, C1958
[DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC C1279, C1280, C1281, C1952, C1959 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC U0073, U0100, U0101, U0155, U1900, U2023 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC U0074, U0123, U1901 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ABS]
FOREWORD [ABS]
PRECAUTION [ABS]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ABS]
NO.1 NEITHER ABS WARNING LIGHT NOR BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATE WHEN THE
IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED TO THE ON POSITION [ABS]
NO.2 ABS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN IGNITION SWITCH TURNED TO ON
POSITION [ABS]
NO.3 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN THE IGNITION SWITCH IS
TURNED TO THE ON POSITION [ABS]
NO.4 BOTH ABS WARNING LIGHT AND BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT STAY ON 4 S OR MORE WHEN
THE IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED TO THE ON POSITION [ABS]
NO.5 ABS WARNING LIGHT STAYS ON 4 S OR MORE WHEN IGNITION SWITCH TURNED TO ON
POSITION [ABS]
NO.6 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT STAYS ON 4 S OR MORE WHEN IGNITION SWITCH TURNED TO
ON POSITION [ABS]
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
FOREWORD [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
PRECAUTION [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
NO.1 ANY OF THE FOLLOWING LIGHTS DO NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN IGNITION SWITCH TURNED TO ON
POSITION: (ABS WARNING LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND/OR DSC
OFF LIGHT) [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
NO.2 ANY OF THE FOLLOWING LIGHTS REMAIN ON: (ABS WARNING LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING
LIGHT, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND/OR DSC OFF LIGHT) [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
NO.3 THERE IS A MALFUNCTION IN THE SYSTEM EVEN THOUGH ABS WARNING LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND DSC OFF LIGHT DO NOT ILLUMINATE [DYNAMIC
STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
NO.4 ABS OR TCS*1 OPERATES FREQUENTLY/TCS DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY *1: DSC SYSTEM
FUNCTION CONTAINS TRACTION CONTROL FUNCTION, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT GOES ON AND OFF
WHILE DSC IS OPERATING [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
NO.5 DSC*2 OPERATES FREQUENTLY/DSC DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY *2: DSC INDICATOR LIGHT
GOES ON AND OFF WHILE DSC IS OPERATING [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
General Procedures
GENERAL PROCEDURES (BRAKE)
Conventional Brake System

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
AIR BLEEDING
VACUUM LINE INSPECTION
BRAKE PEDAL INSPECTION
BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION
MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION
POWER BRAKE UNIT INSPECTION

POWER BRAKE UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION
FRONT BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DISC PAD (FRONT) REPLACEMENT
CALIPER (FRONT) DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
BRAKE HOSE (FRONT) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION
REAR BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DISC PAD (REAR) REPLACEMENT
CALIPER (REAR) DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
BRAKE HOSE (REAR) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Parking Brake System

PARKING
PARKING
PARKING
PARKING
PARKING
BRAKE
BRAKE
BRAKE
BRAKE
BRAKE
SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX

LEVER INSPECTION
LEVER ADJUSTMENT
LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SWITCH INSPECTION
Antilock Brake System (ABS)

ABS SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
ABS LOCATION INDEX
ABS SYSTEM INSPECTION
ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ABS HU/CM INSPECTION
FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION
REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION
Dynamic Stability Control

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL LOCATION INDEX
DSC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
DSC SYSTEM INSPECTION
DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DSC CONFIGURATION
DSC HU/CM INSPECTION
COMBINED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
COMBINED SENSOR INSPECTION
COMBINED SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
DSC OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DSC OFF SWITCH INSPECTION
Technical Data
BRAKES TECHNICAL DATA
BRAKES SST
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - Brakes

DTC C1095, C1096 [ABS]
DTC
C1095,
C1096
Pump motor, motor relay
C1095
ABS motor monitor signal does not correspond to ABS
HU/CM OFF signal.
DETECTION
CONDITION
C1096
ABS motor monitor signal does not correspond to ABS
HU/CM ON signal.
ABS motor monitor OFF signal is input within specified time
limit when the motor signal is switched from ON to OFF by
ABS HU/CM.
ABS/DSC 40 A fuse malfunction
Open or short to ground circuit in the wiring harness between the battery
and the ABS HU/CM terminal AB
Open circuit in the wiring harness between the ABS HU/CM terminal AD and
the body ground
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Motor relay malfunction

Open or short circuit in the ABS HU/CM internal motor relay, or stuck motor
relay
Open or short circuit in the ABS HU/CM internal motor, or frozen motor
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY OTHER DTC HAS BEEN

1 RECORDED
Have DTC C1186 and/or
C1266 also been stored?
ACTION
INSPECT ABS FUSE CONDITION

Is the ABS/DSC 40A fuse
normal?
INSPECT MOTOR RELAY POWER

3 SUPPLY FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition switch
off.
Disconnect the ABS

No Replace the fuse, then go to Step 6.
No Repair or replace the wiring harness for open circuit
between battery positive terminal and ABS HU/CM
terminal AB, then go to Step 6.
HU/CM connector.
to the ON position
(engine off).
Measure the voltage
between ABS HU/CM
terminal AB (harnessside) and ground.
Is the voltage B+?
INSPECT PUMP MOTOR GROUND
4 FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
off.
Inspect for continuity
between ABS HU/CM
terminal AD (harnessside) and ground.

between ABS HU/CM terminal AD and ground, then go
to Step 6.
5
VERIFY PUMP MOTOR OPERATION

off.
Connect the M-MDS to
the DLC-2.

No Replace the ABS HU/CM, then go to the next step.
(See ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

to the ON position
(engine off).
Access ABS_POWER and
PMP_MOTOR active
command modes using
the M-MDS.
Does the pump motor
operate?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING
6 COMPLETED
Make sure to reconnect
all disconnected
connectors.
Clear the DTC from the
memory.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
YesReplace the ABS HU/CM, then go to the next step.

Start the engine and

drive the vehicle at 10
km/h {6.2 mph} or
more.
Gradually slow down and
stop the vehicle.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
7

Are any other DTCs
present?
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175 [ABS]
DTC
C1145
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor
C1155
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor
C1165
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor
C1175
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor
DETECTION
CONDITION
Open circuit or short to ground has been detected in the ABS wheel-speed sensor
wiring harness on any of the four vehicle wheels.
Open circuit or short to ground in the wiring harness between the following ABS
HU/CM terminal and the ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal:
ABS HU/CM terminal GRF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
ABS HU/CM terminal DRF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
ABS HU/CM terminal ILF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
ABS HU/CM terminal ELF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
ABS HU/CM terminal ARR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B

ABS HU/CM terminal BRR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
ABS HU/CM terminal CLR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
ABS HU/CM terminal FLR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
ABS wheel-speed sensor malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT PID FOR ABNORMAL OUTPUT FROM ABS WHEEL-SPEED

1 SENSOR USING M-MDS
Select the following PIDs using the M-MDS:
LF_WSPD
LR_WSPD
RF_WSPD
RR_WSPD
Start the engine and drive the vehicle.
Verify that the PIDs of the four ABS wheel-speed sensors
ACTION
YesGo to Step 4.
No If there is a difference in
speeds of the four wheels, go
to the next step.
correspond approximately.
Do the vehicle speeds correspond?
INSPECT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT
YesRepair or replace the wiring
2 TO GROUND
harness, then go to Step 4.
Disconnect the ABS HU/CM connector and ABS wheel-speed
sensor connectors.
Inspect for continuity between the following ABS HU/CM
connector terminals (vehicle harness-side) and body ground:
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor(+): G
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor(-): D
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor(+): I
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor(-): E
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor(+): A
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor(-): B
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor(+): C
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor(-): F
INSPECT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT IN ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
3 WIRING HARNESS
Inspect for continuity between the ABS HU/CM connectors
(vehicle harness-side) and the following vehicle harness-side
connector terminals of the ABS wheel-speed sensors:
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor(+): GA
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor(-): DB
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor(+): IA
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor(-): EB
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor(+): AB
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor(-): BA
YesReplace the ABS wheel-speed

sensor, then go to the next
step.
(See FRONT ABS WHEELSPEED SENSOR
(See REAR ABS WHEELSPEED SENSOR
No Repair or replace the wiring
harness, then go to the next
step.
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor(+): CB

LR ABS wheel-speed sensor(-): FA
4

Reconnect all disconnected connectors.
YesRepeat the inspection from

Step 1.
replace the ABS HU/CM, then

(See ABS HU/CM



inspection.
(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
[ABS].)
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1186, C1266 [ABS]
DTC
C1186,
C1266
Valve relay
C1186
DETECTION
CONDITION
ABS HU/CM internal fail-safe relay remains OFF (stuck)

when valve relay ON is commanded.
C1266
ABS HU/CM internal fail-safe relay remains ON (stuck)
when valve relay OFF is commanded.
Open circuit or short to ground in the wiring harness between the
battery and the ABS HU/CM terminal AA
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the ABS HU/CM internal valve relay, or stuck
valve relay
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT ABS FUSE CONDITION
Is ABS/DSC 40A fuse
normal?
INSPECT VALVE RELAY POWER

off.
Disconnect ABS HU/CM
connector.
to the ON position
(engine off).
Measure the voltage
between ABS HU/CM
ACTION
No Replace fuse, then go to Step 4.
between battery positive terminal and ABS HU/CM
terminal AA, then go to Step 4.
terminal AA (harness
side) and ground.
Is the voltage B+?
3
VERIFY VALVE RELAY OPERATION

off.
Connect all disconnected
connectors.

No Replace the ABS HU/CM, then go to next step.
Connect the M-MDS to

the DLC-2.
to the ON position
(engine off).
Access ABS_POWER
active command modes
using M-MDS.
Does the valve relay
operate?
4 COMPLETED
memory.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
YesReplace the ABS HU/CM, then go to next step.

Is the same DTC

present?
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
5

Are any other DTCs
present?
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
Next >

ABS SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ABS]
Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1342 [ABS]
DTC
B1342
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
ABS HU/CM
The ABS HU/CM on-board diagnostic function detects control
module malfunction.
ABS HU/CM internal malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY CURRENT STATUS OF MALFUNCTION
Start the engine and drive the vehicle at 10
km/h {6.2 mph} or more.
Is same DTC present?
ACTION
YesReplace the ABS HU/CM, then go
to the next step.
(See ABS HU/CM

2


inspection.
[ABS].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1318 [ABS]
CAUTION:
If the battery voltage drops during the inspection, B1318 will be output as a current
malfunction and the proper diagnosis cannot be made. Be careful not to let the battery
voltage drop.
DTC
DETECTION
CONDITION
B1318 Power supply

The voltage at ABS HU/CM terminal Z is approx. 10 V or less.
Battery deterioration
ENGINE 15 A fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit or short to ground in the wiring harness between the ABS
HU/CM terminal Z and the battery
Open circuit or faulty ground in the wiring harness between the ABS
HU/CM terminal AC and the body ground
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE
Is the battery terminal
voltage normal?
ACTION
YesMake sure that battery terminal connection is normal.
No Charge or replace the battery, then go to Step 6.
INSPECT BATTERY GRAVITY

Is battery specific
gravity as specified?

No Replace the battery, then go to Step 6.
INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM
Are the generator and

drive belt tensions
normal?

No Adjust drive belt tension if necessary.
(See DRIVE BELT DEFLECTION/TENSION INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
Replace generator and/or drive belt as necessary.
INSPECT ABS HU/CM POWER

Start the engine.
Measure the voltage
between ABS HU/CM
terminal Z and
ground.

between the ABS HU/CM and ground, then go to Step 6.
Is the voltage above

10 V?
INSPECT ABS HU/CM GROUND
5 FOR POOR GROUND OR OPEN
CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition
switch off.
Measure the
resistance between
ground and ABS
HU/CM terminal AC.
Is the resistance
within 01 ohm ?
6 COMPLETED
Make sure to
reconnect all
disconnected
connectors.
Clear the DTC from
the memory.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
Is the same DTC
present?

No If there is no continuity:
Repair or replace the wiring harness for
open circuit between the ABS HU/CM and
ground, then go to the next step.
If the resistance is not within 01 ohm :
Repair or replace harness for poor
ground, then go to the next step.
YesReplace the ABS HU/CM, then go to the next step.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR
7 PROCEDURE
Are any other DTCs
present?
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS]

The OBD test inspects the integrity and function of the ABS and outputs the results when
Provides a quick inspection of the ABS usually performed at the start of
during service.
Read/clear diagnostic results, PID monitor and record and active
command modes.
This function allows you to read or clear DTCs in the ABS HU/CM memory.
2. Select Modules.
3. Select ABS.
2. Select ABS.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the DSC. (See Clearing DTCs Procedures.)
Clearing DTCs Procedures

2. Select Modules.
3. Select ABS.
2. Select ABS.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See Reading DTCs Procedure.)

2. Select Modules.
3. Select ABS.
2. Select ABS.
NOTE:
signals in the module.Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within the
specification, it is necessary to inspect the monitored value of input parts corresponding to
the applicable output part control. In addition, because the system does not display an
output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is necessary to
inspect the output parts individually.

2. Select Modules.
3. Select ABS.
2. Select ABS.
DTC Table
DTC
MMDS
System malfunction location
Page
B1318 Power supply system
(See DTC B1318 [ABS].)
B1342 ABS HU/CM system
(See DTC B1342 [ABS].)
C1095 Pump motor, motor relay system
(See DTC C1095, C1096 [ABS].)
C1096 Pump motor, motor relay system
(See DTC C1095, C1096 [ABS].)
C1140 ABS HU/CM (pump) system
(See DTC C1140 [ABS].)
C1145 RF ABS wheel-speed sensor system
(See DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175 [ABS].)
C1148 RF ABS wheel-speed sensor system
(See DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1234, C1233,

C1235, C1236 [ABS].)
C1155 LF ABS wheel-speed sensor system
(See DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175 [ABS].)
C1158 LF ABS wheel-speed sensor system
(See DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1234, C1233,

C1235, C1236 [ABS].)
C1165 RR ABS wheel-speed sensor system
(See DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175 [ABS].)
C1168 RR ABS wheel-speed sensor system
(See DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1234, C1233,

C1235, C1236 [ABS].)
C1175 LR ABS wheel-speed sensor system
(See DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175 [ABS].)
C1178 LR ABS wheel-speed sensor system
(See DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1234, C1233,

C1235, C1236 [ABS].)
C1186 Valve relay system
(See DTC C1186, C1266 [ABS].)
C1194 LF outlet solenoid valve system
(See DTC C1210, C1214, C1194, C1198, C1246, C1254,

C1242, C1250 [ABS].)
C1198 LF inlet solenoid valve system
(See DTC C1210, C1214, C1194, C1198, C1246, C1254,

C1242, C1250 [ABS].)
C1210 RF outlet solenoid valve system
(See DTC C1210, C1214, C1194, C1198, C1246, C1254,

C1242, C1250 [ABS].)
C1214 RF inlet solenoid valve system
(See DTC C1210, C1214, C1194, C1198, C1246, C1254,

C1242, C1250 [ABS].)
C1233 LF ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor rotor (See DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1234, C1233,
system
C1235, C1236 [ABS].)
C1234 RF ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor
rotor system
(See DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1234, C1233,

C1235, C1236 [ABS].)
C1235 RR ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor

rotor system
(See DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1234, C1233,

C1235, C1236 [ABS].)
C1236 LR ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor rotor (See DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1234, C1233,
system
C1235, C1236 [ABS].)
C1242 LR outlet solenoid valve system
(See DTC C1210, C1214, C1194, C1198, C1246, C1254,

C1242, C1250 [ABS].)
C1246 RR outlet solenoid valve system
(See DTC C1210, C1214, C1194, C1198, C1246, C1254,

C1242, C1250 [ABS].)
C1250 LR inlet solenoid valve system
(See DTC C1210, C1214, C1194, C1198, C1246, C1254,

C1242, C1250 [ABS].)
C1254 RR inlet solenoid valve system
(See DTC C1210, C1214, C1194, C1198, C1246, C1254,

C1242, C1250 [ABS].)
(See DTC C1186, C1266 [ABS].)
C1510 RF solenoid valve, pump motor, or RF ABS

wheel-speed sensor
(See DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 [ABS].)
C1511 LF solenoid valve, pump motor, or LF ABS

wheel-speed sensor
(See DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 [ABS].)
C1512 RR solenoid valve, pump motor, or RR ABS

wheel-speed sensor
(See DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 [ABS].)
C1513 LR solenoid valve, pump motor, or LR ABS

wheel-speed sensor
(See DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 [ABS].)
U1900CAN communication system
(See FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION

SYSTEM].)
U2516CAN communication system
PID name
(definition)
Unit/Condition Operation condition (reference)
ABS_LAMP
(ABS warning light driver
output state)
Off/On
ABS_VOLT
(System battery voltage
value)
Off/On
ABSLF_O
(Left front outlet solenoid
valve output state)
Off/On
ABSLR_I
(Left rear inlet solenoid
valve output state)
ABS warning
light not
illuminated: Off
Ignition switch
at ON: Approx.
12 V
Idling: Approx.
14 V
ABSLF_I
(Left front inlet solenoid
valve output state)
ABS warning
light illuminated:
On
Off/On
Action
Inspect the ABS

warning light.
Inspect the power

supply circuit.
(See ABS HU/CM
INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve
not activated:
Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve
not activated:
Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve
not activated:
Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
ABS
HU/CM
terminal
ABSLR_O
(Left rear outlet solenoid
valve output state)
ABSPMPRLY
(Motor relay output state)
Off/On
Off/On
ABSRF_I
(Right front inlet solenoid
valve output state)
Off/On
ABSRF_O
(Right front outlet solenoid
valve output state)
Off/On
ABSRR_I
(Right rear inlet solenoid
valve output state)
Off/On
ABSRR_O
(Right rear outlet solenoid
valve output state)
ABSVLVRLY
(Valve relay output state)
BOO_ABS
(Brake pedal switch input)
Off/On
Off/On
Off/On
activated: On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve
not activated:
Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Relay activated:
On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Relay not
activated: Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve
not activated:
Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve
not activated:
Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve
not activated:
Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve
not activated:
Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Valve relay not

activated: Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Brake pedal
depressed: On
Brake pedal
Inspect the brake

switch.
released: Off
BRAKE_LMP
(BRAKE system warning
light output state)
Off/On
KPH, MPH
LR_WSPD
(Left rear ABS wheelspeed sensor input)
PMPSTAT
(Pump motor output state)
KPH, MPH
Off/On
RF_WSPD
(Right front ABS wheelspeed sensor input)
KPH, MPH
RR_WSPD
(Right rear ABS wheelspeed sensor input)
1255
No DTCs
detected: 0
LF_WSPD
(Left front ABS wheelspeed sensor input)
Brake system
warning light not
illuminated: Off
Inspect the brake

system warning
light.
Perform the DTC

inspection.
DTCs detected:
CCNTABS
(Number of continuous
codes)
Brake system
warning light
illuminated: On
KPH, MPH
Vehicle stopped:
0 KPH, 0 MPH
Vehicle running:
Vehicle speed
Vehicle stopped:
0 KPH, 0 MPH
Vehicle running:
Vehicle speed
Inspect the ABS

wheel-speed sensor.
E, I
Inspect the ABS

wheel-speed sensor.
C, F
Pump motor
activated: On
Inspect the ABS

HU/CM.
Pump motor not

activated: Off
(See ABS SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Vehicle stopped:
0 KPH, 0 MPH
Vehicle running:
Vehicle speed
Vehicle stopped:
0 KPH, 0 MPH
Vehicle running:
Vehicle speed
Inspect the ABS

wheel-speed sensor.
D, G
Inspect the ABS

wheel-speed sensor.
A, B
Command name
Output part
ABS_POWER
Valve relay
LF_INLET
LF inlet solenoid valve
LF_OUTLET
LF outlet solenoid valve
LR_INLET
LR inlet solenoid valve
LR_OUTLET
LR outlet solenoid valve
Operation Operating condition
Off/On Ignition switch at ON

PMP_MOTOR
Pump motor
RF_INLET
RF inlet solenoid valve
RF_OUTLET
RF outlet solenoid valve
RR_INLET
RR inlet solenoid valve
RR_OUTLET
RR outlet solenoid valve
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1140 [ABS]
DTC
C1140
DETECTION
CONDITION
ABS HU/CM (pump)

Lock-up of right front and left rear wheels, or left front and right rear
wheel is detected during ABS operation.
ABS HU/CM internal pump motor frozen
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION OCCURRED DUE TO ABS HU/CM

1 INTERNAL MALFUNCTION (PIPE CLOGGING)
Perform the ABS system inspection.
(See ABS SYSTEM INSPECTION.)
Is the system normal?
INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION OCCURRED IN CONVENTIONAL
2 BRAKE SYSTEM
Inspect the brake fluid level.
Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle and inspect the brake operation.
Is the result normal?
INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS DUE TO PARKING BRAKE
3 DRAGGING
ACTION
No Replace the ABS HU/CM,
then go to Step 4.
(See ABS HU/CM
No Inspect the conventional
brake lines.
Repair the malfunctioning

No Repair the parking brake,
Jack up the vehicle and support it with safety stand.
Release the parking brake.

Does the rear wheel drag when turned by hand?
4
VERIFY DTC TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED


Step 1.

replace the ABS HU/CM.
Start the engine and drive the vehicle at 10 km/h

{6.2 mph} or more.
(See ABS HU/CM


5


inspection.

[ABS].)
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 [ABS]
C1510
DTC
C1511
C1512
C1513
RF solenoid valve, pump motor or RF ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor

rotor.
LF solenoid valve, pump motor or LF ABS wheelspeed sensor/ABS sensor
rotor.
RR solenoid valve, pump motor or RR ABS wheelspeed sensor/ABS
sensor rotor.
LR solenoid valve, pump motor or LR ABS wheelspeed sensor/ABS
sensor rotor.
Wheel lock-up continues during ABS operation (pressure reduction
inoperative) for 4 s or more.
DETECTION
CONDITION
Pressure reduction on a single wheel continues for 20 s or more.

Malfunction of ABS wheel-speed sensor and/or sensor rotor (abnormal
output of vehicle wheel speed signal)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Malfunction of ABS HU/CM internal solenoid valves

Malfunction of ABS HU/CM internal pump motor
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR FOR MALFUNCTION
Are any of the ABS wheel-speed sensor related DTCs
ACTION
inspection.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
output at the same time?

2
INSPECT FOR SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION

Are any of the solenoid valve related DTCs output at
the same time?

inspection.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
INSPECT PUMP MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY FOR

3 MALFUNCTION
Is either the pump motor or motor relay related DTC
output at the same time?

inspection.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION OCCURRED DUE TO ABS HU/CM

4 INTERNAL MALFUNCTION (PIPE CLOGGING)
Perform the ABS system inspection.

Clear the DTCs from the memory.
{6.2 mph} or more.
Gradually slow down and stop vehicle.
Are the same DTCs present?

No Replace the ABS HU/CM,
(See ABS HU/CM
Step 1.
replace the ABS HU/CM.
(See ABS HU/CM

6


inspection.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1234, C1233, C1235, C1236 [ABS]
C1148,
C1234
DTC
C1158,
C1233
C1168,
C1235
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor rotor

LF ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor rotor
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor rotor
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor rotor
C1178,
C1236
C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178
Sudden change in vehicle wheel speed signal or no signal for a certain
period from any of the four vehicle wheels when driving at the
specified vehicle speed or more
DETECTION
CONDITION
Abnormal output is detected from any of the four vehicle wheel speed
sensors when the vehicle goes from standstill to a speed of 10 km/h
{6.2 mph}.
More than the specified number of ABS control commands from the
front wheel sensors when the vehicle starts from a standstill.
C1234, C1233, C1235, C1236
Abnormal sensor output due to chipping of the sensor rotor teeth or
similar malfunction is detected.
ABS control operates for 36 s or more.
ABS wheel-speed sensor malfunction (low output, metal shavings on sensor)
Short to ground in wiring harness between the following ABS HU/CM terminals and ABS
wheel-speed sensor terminals:
ABS HU/CM terminal GRF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
ABS HU/CM terminal DRF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
ABS HU/CM terminal ILF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
ABS HU/CM terminal ELF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
POSSIBLE
ABS HU/CM terminal ARR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
CAUSE
ABS HU/CM terminal BRR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A

ABS HU/CM terminal CLR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
ABS HU/CM terminal FLR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
Excessive clearance between the ABS wheel-speed sensor and sensor rotor
ABS sensor rotor malfunction (chipping of sensor rotor teeth)
Poor installation of ABS wheel speed sensor and/or sensor rotor (If the sensor rotor is
installed at an angle, it may cause output of abnormal wave pattern at high speeds.)
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT PID FOR ABNORMAL OUTPUT FROM ABS

1 WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR USING M-MDS
ACTION
YesGo to Step 5.
No
If the vehicle speed is 0 km/h,

If there is any malfunction in
the front ABS wheel-speed
sensor, replace the front ABS
wheel-speed sensor, then go to
Step 5.
LF_WSPD
LR_WSPD

the rear ABS wheel-speed
sensor, go to Step 3.
RF_WSPD
RR_WSPD
Verify that the PIDs of the four ABS wheel
speed sensors correspond approximately.
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS HU/CM

2 AND ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR FOR SHORT TO
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness, then go to
Step 5.
GROUND
Disconnect the ABS HU/CM and ABS
wheel-speed sensor connectors.
following ABS HU/CM connector and body
ground.
ABS HU/CM (RF ABS
wheel-speed sensor): G
Body ground
ABS HU/CM (RF ABS
wheel-speed sensor): D
Body ground
ABS HU/CM (LF ABS
wheel-speed sensor): I
Body ground
ABS HU/CM (LF ABS
wheel-speed sensor): E
Body ground
ABS HU/CM (RR ABS
wheel-speed sensor): A
Body ground
ABS HU/CM (RR ABS
wheel-speed sensor): B
Body ground
ABS HU/CM (LR ABS
wheel-speed sensor): C
Body ground
ABS HU/CM (LR ABS
No

the front ABS wheel-speed
sensor, replace the front ABS
wheel-speed sensor, then go to
Step 5.
the rear ABS wheel-speed
sensor, go to the next step.
wheel-speed sensor): F
Body ground
INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION OCCURRED DUE TO
3 IMPROPER SENSOR CLEARANCE
Inspect the clearance between the rear
ABS wheel-speed sensor and the rear ABS
sensor rotor.
Is the clearance normal?
Clearance

No Replace the rear ABS wheel-speed sensor, then
go to Step 5.
(See REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
0.31.1 mm {0.012
0.043 in}
VISUALLY INSPECT REAR ABS SENSOR ROTOR FOR
4 ABNORMAL OR MISSING TEETH, DEFORMATION,
OBSTRUCTION, AND ANGLED INSTALLATION
No Replace the rear drive shaft, then go to the next

step.
(See REAR DRIVE SHAFT

connectors.
Start the engine and drive the vehicle at
10 km/h {6.2 mph} or more.

If the malfunction recurs, replace the ABS
HU/CM.
Gradually slow down and stop the vehicle.

6


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1210, C1214, C1194, C1198, C1246, C1254, C1242, C1250 [ABS]
DTC
C 1210
C 1214
C 1194
C 1198
C 1246
C 1254
C 1242
C 1250
DETECTION
CONDITION
Solenoid valve operation does not correspond to solenoid ON/OFF

commands from the ABS HU/CM.
Open or short circuit in the ABS HU/CM internal solenoid valves
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Solenoid valve malfunction

STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
(engine off).
ACTION
No Replace the ABS HU/CM, then go
to the next step.
(See ABS HU/CM
Access the active command mode for the

solenoid valve using the M-MDS.
Does the solenoid valve operate?

2

Start the engine and drive the vehicle at 10
km/h {6.2 mph} or more.
YesRepeat the inspection from Step

1.
If the malfunction recurs, replace
the ABS HU/CM.
(See ABS HU/CM


inspection.
[ABS].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
(DSC)]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]

The OBD test inspects the integrity and function of the DSC and outputs the results when
Provides a quick inspection of the DSC usually performed at the start of
during service.
command modes.
This function allows you to read or clear DTCs in the DSC HU/CM memory.
2. Select Modules.
3. Select ABS.
2. Select ABS.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the DSC. (See Clearing DTCs Procedures.)

2. Select Modules.
3. Select ABS.
2. Select ABS.

2. Select Modules.
3. Select ABS.
2. Select ABS.
NOTE:

2. Select Modules.
3. Select ABS.
2. Select ABS.
DTC Table
DTC
MMDS
System malfunction
location
Page
(See DTC B1317, B1318 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
(See DTC B1317, B1318 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
B1342 DSC HU/CM system
(See DTC B1342 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
B1484 Brake switch system
(See DTC B1484, C1954 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
B2477 DSC HU/CM configuration (See DTC B2477 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
B2741 Combined sensor system
(See DTC B2741, C2768, U2516 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL

(DSC)].)
C1093 DSC OFF switch system
(See DTC C1093 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
C1095 Pump motor, motor relay

system
(See DTC C1095, C1096 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
C1096 Pump motor, motor relay

system
C1141 LF ABS sensor rotor

system
(See DTC C1141, C1142, C1143, C1144 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL

(DSC)].)
C1142 RF ABS sensor rotor

system

(DSC)].)
C1143 LR ABS sensor rotor

system

(DSC)].)
C1144 RR ABS sensor rotor

system

(DSC)].)
C1145 RF ABS wheel-speed

sensor system

(DSC)].)
RF ABS wheel-speed
C1148 sensor/ABS sensor rotor
system

(DSC)].)
C1155 LF ABS wheel-speed

sensor system

(DSC)].)
LF ABS wheel-speed
system

(DSC)].)
C1165 RR ABS wheel-speed

sensor system

(DSC)].)
RR ABS wheel-speed
system

(DSC)].)
C1175 LR ABS wheel-speed

sensor system

(DSC)].)
LR ABS wheel-speed
system

(DSC)].)
C1194 LF outlet solenoid valve

system
(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
C1400, C1410, C1957, C1958 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
C1198 LF inlet solenoid valve

system
(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
C1210 RF outlet solenoid valve

system
(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
C1214 RF inlet solenoid valve

system
(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
C1222 ABS wheel-speed sensor

(slip monitor) system
C1233 LF ABS wheel-speed

sensor system

(DSC)].)
C1234 RF ABS wheel-speed

sensor system

(DSC)].)
C1235 RR ABS wheel-speed

sensor system

(DSC)].)
C1236 LR ABS wheel-speed

sensor system

(DSC)].)
C1242 LR outlet solenoid valve

system
(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
C1246 RR outlet solenoid valve

system
(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
C1250 LR inlet solenoid valve

system
(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
C1254 RR inlet solenoid valve

system
(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
C1279 Combined sensor system
(See DTC C1279, C1280, C1281, C1952, C1959 [DYNAMIC STABILITY

CONTROL (DSC)].)

CONTROL (DSC)].)

CONTROL (DSC)].)
C1290 Brake fluid pressure sensor (See DTC C1290, C1953 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
system
C1295 Steering angle sensor
system

CONTROL (DSC)].)
Steering angle sensor

C1306 (abnormal initialization)
system

system

CONTROL (DSC)].)
C1400 RH traction control

solenoid valve system
(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
LH traction control solenoid (See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
C1410
valve system

system

CONTROL (DSC)].)

system

CONTROL (DSC)].)

CONTROL (DSC)].)
C1953 Brake fluid pressure sensor (See DTC C1290, C1953 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
system
C1954 Brake switch system
(See DTC B1484, C1954 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)

system

CONTROL (DSC)].)
C1957 RH stability control

(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,
C1958 LH stability control

(See DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254,

CONTROL (DSC)].)
C1994 DSC control system

(DSC)].)
U0073 CAN system

communication error
(See DTC U0073, U0100, U0101, U0155, U1900, U2023 [DYNAMIC

U0074 Combined sensor system

(CAN2 line malfunction)
(See DTC U0074, U0123, U1901 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL

(DSC)].)

PCM


TCM



(DSC)].)

instrument cluster


other module



(DSC)].)
U2023 Abnormal message from

PCM

U2516Combined sensor system

(DSC)].)
PID name (definition) Unit/Condition
ABS_VOLT
(System battery voltage
value)
ABSLF_I
(Left front inlet solenoid
valve output state)
Off/On
ABSLF_O
(Left front outlet
Off/On
Operation condition (reference)
Action
Ignition switch at ON:

Approx. 12 V
Inspect power
supply circuit.
Idling: Approx. 14 V
(See DSC HU/CM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
DSC
HU/CM
terminal
solenoid valve output

state)
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
ABSLR_I
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Relay activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
(Left rear inlet solenoid

valve output state)
Off/On
ABSLR_O
(Left rear outlet
state)
Off/On
ABSPMPRLY
(Motor relay output
state)
Off/On
ABSRF_I
(Right front inlet
state)
Off/On
ABSRF_O
(Right front outlet
state)
Off/On
ABSRR_I
(Right rear inlet
state)
Off/On
ABSRR_O
(Right rear outlet
state)
Off/On
ABSVLVRLY
(Fail-safe relay output
state)
Off/On
Relay not activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Fail-safe relay is
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
activated: On
Fail-safe relay is
(See DSC SYSTEM
deactivated: Off
BOO_ABS
(Brake pedal switch
input)
Off/On
CCNTABS
(Number of continuous
codes)

On
Brake pedal released:
Off
DTCs detected: 1
255
No DTCs detected: 0
INSPECTION.)
Inspect the brake

switch.
Perform the DTC

inspection.
Inspect the
combined sensor.
Vehicle stopped or
driving at constant
speed: 0 G
LAT_ACCL
Cornering to right:
Changes 0 G
positive
Cornering to left:
Changes 0 G
negative
LF_WSPD
(Left front ABS wheelspeed sensor input)
KPH, MPH
LR_WSPD
(Left rear ABS wheelspeed sensor input)
MCYLI P
KPH, MPH
Pa, psi
PMP_MOTOR
(Pump motor output
state)
RF_WSPD
Off/On
Vehicle stopped: 0
KPH, 0 MPH
Vehicle running:
vehicle speed
Vehicle stopped: 0
KPH, 0 MPH
Vehicle running:
Vehicle speed
Inspect the ABS

wheel-speed
sensor.
F, E
Inspect the ABS

wheel-speed
sensor.
G, H

Changes according to
the brake fluid
pressure
Inspect the brake

fluid pressure
sensor.
Pump motor activated:

On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Pump motor not

activated: Off
(See DSC HU/CM

INSPECTION.)
Vehicle stopped: 0
(Right front ABS wheelspeed sensor input)
KPH, MPH
RPM
(Engine speed signal
input)
RPM
RR_WSPD
(Right rear ABS wheelspeed sensor input)
KPH, MPH
KPH, 0 MPH
Vehicle running:
vehicle speed
Engine stopped: 0
RPM
Engine speed at 3,000
rpm: 3,000 RPM
Vehicle stopped: 0
KPH, 0 MPH
Vehicle running:
Vehicle speed
Inspect the ABS

wheel-speed
sensor.
M, O
Inspect the PCM.

Inspect the
instrument
cluster.
Inspect the ABS

wheel-speed
sensor.
I, L
Steering wheel in
neutral position (not
turned): 0
SWA_POS
Steering wheel turned

to left: Changes 0
negative
Inspect the
steering angle
sensor.
Inspect the
throttle position
sensor.
Steering wheel turned

to right: Changes 0
positive
Closed throttle
position: 0%
TPI
V_STB_L
(LH stability control
state)
Off/On
V_STB_R
(RH stability control
state)
V_TRC_L
Off/On
Wide open throttle:

Changes according to
throttle valve opening
angle
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
(LH traction control

state)
Off/On
V_TRC_R
(RH traction control
state)
Off/On
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Solenoid valve
activated: On
Inspect the DSC

HU/CM.
Solenoid valve not

activated: Off
(See DSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION.)
Vehicle stopped or
driving straight: 0 /s
YAW_RATE
Cornering to left:
Changes 0 /s
negative
/s
Inspect the
combined sensor.
Cornering to right:
Changes 0 /s
positive
Command name
Output part
Operation
LATACCEL
Combined sensor (lateral acceleration) initialization FALSE/TRUE
LF_INLET
LF_OUTLET
LR_INLET
LR_OUTLET
PMP_MOTOR
Pump motor
RF_INLET
RF_OUTLET
Off/On
Operating condition
RR_INLET

Ignition switch at ON
RR_OUTLET
SAS_CAL
Steering angle sensor initialization
STAB_IND
DSC indicator light
TRAC OFF
DSC OFF light
V_STB_L
LH stability control solenoid valve
V_STB_R
RH stability control solenoid valve
V_TRC_L
LH traction control solenoid valve
V_TRC_R
RH traction control solenoid valve
YAWRATE
Combined sensor (yaw rate) initialization
FALSE/TRUE
Off/On
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1484, C1954 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC
B1484,
C1954
Brake switch system
B1484
Open circuit is detected in wiring harness between DSC HU/CMbrake switch
(Voltage at the DSC HU/CM terminal N is more than 40% and less than 67% of
the voltage at the DSC HU/CM terminal J for 0.5 s continuously.).
DETECTION
CONDITION
C1954
Brake switch ON signal is input even though signal from brake fluid pressure
sensor is lower than specified value (While vehicle is driven at a speed of 10.8
km/h or more, brake switch is continuously ON for 60 s with accelerator pedal
ON and brake fluid pressure 500 kPa or lower, not operated).
Brake fluid pressure sensor signal value is continuously more than 1,000 kPa for
1 s with brake switch signal OFF.
Inhibits ABS, TCS, and DSC controls, and illuminates ABS warning light and DSC indicator light.
FAIL-SAFE
(If error is detected during ABS/TCS control, inhibits ABS/TCS control after finishing the control and
illuminates ABS warning light.)
STOP 10 A fuse malfunction
Brake light noise filter malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit or short to ground in the wiring harness between the DSC HU/CM terminal N and the
brake switch terminal D
Brake light malfunction
High-mount brake light malfunction
Brake fluid pressure sensor malfunction in DSC HU/CM
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT BRAKE PEDAL POSITION

1 SIGNAL INPUT TO DSC HU/CM USING M- YesGo to Step 6.
MDS
Connect the M-MDS to the
DLC-2.
Select the BOO_ABS PID
and verify that the display is
switched as follows according
to the brake pedal condition:
Brake pedal
depressed:
On
Brake pedal
released: Off
Does the BOO_ABS PID
change normally?
2
INSPECT STOP LIGHT FUSE CONDITION

Inspect the STOP 10 A fuse.

Is the STOP 10 A fuse

normal?
3

(See BRAKE SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Is the brake switch normal?
INSPECT BRAKE LIGHT NOISE FILTER

Inspect the brake light noise
filter.
(See NOISE FILTER
INSPECTION.)
Is the brake light noise filter
normal?

No Replace the brake switch, then go to Step 7.

No Replace the wiring harness (including the brake light noise filter), then
go to Step 7.
NOTE:
The brake light noise filter is integrated with the wiring
harness and cannot be replaced individually. Therefore,
if there is a malfunction of the brake light noise filter,
INSPECT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT IN WIRING

5 HARNESS BETWEEN DSC HU/CM AND
STOP LIGHT FUSE
Disconnect the DSC HU/CM,
brake switch, and brake light
noise filter connectors.
Inspect the vehicle wiring
harness-side connectors for
continuity between the
following terminals:
STOP 10 A
fusebrake
light noise
filter terminal
A
Brake light
noise filter
terminal C
brake switch
terminal D
Brake switch
terminal D
brake light
noise filter
terminal B
No Repair or replace the wiring harness for open circuit between brake
switch, brake light noise filter and DSC HU/CM, then go to Step 7.
Brake light
noise filter
terminal B
DSC HU/CM
terminal N
INSPECT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
6 SENSOR
Inspect the brake fluid
pressure sensor.

No Replace the DSC HU/CM, then go to the next step.
(See BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE

SENSOR INSPECTION.)
(See DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is the brake fluid pressure

sensor normal?
VERIFY DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
7 COMPLETED
memory.
YesRepeat the inspection from Step 1.Replace the DSC HU/CM, then go to
the next step.
If the malfunction recurs, replace the DSC HU/CM, then go to the next
step.

[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
Start the engine and drive the

vehicle at 20 km/h {13
mph} or more for 60 s or
more.
[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
8

[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
C1093
DETECTION
CONDITION
FAIL-SAFE
DSC OFF switch system

Continuous ON signal from the DSC OFF switch for 5 s or more is detected.
Inhibits TCS control and DSC control, and illuminates DSC indicator light and DSC OFF
indicator light.
Short to ground in the wiring harness between the DSC HU/CM terminal P and the DSC
OFF switch terminal C
POSSIBLE CAUSE
DSC OFF switch malfunction

The driver pressed and held the DSC OFF switch for 5 s or more.
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT DSC HU/CM TO DSC OFF

1 SWITCH FOR SHORT TO GROUND
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for short to ground between DSC
HU/CM terminal P and DSC OFF switch terminal A, then go to the next
step.
Disconnect DSC HU/CM and

DSC OFF switch connector.

between the DSC HU/CM
terminal P and ground.
2
INSPECT DSC OFF SWITCH

Inspect the DSC OFF switch.

No Replace the DSC OFF switch, then go to the next step.
(See DSC OFF SWITCH

INSPECTION.)
(See DSC OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is the DSC OFF switch

normal?
3 COMPLETED
YesReplace the DSC HU/CM, then go to the next step.



memory.
[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
4

[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
C1141
LF ABS sensor rotor system
C1142
RF ABS sensor rotor system
C1143
LR ABS sensor rotor system
C1144
RR ABS sensor rotor system

While the vehicle is driven at a speed of 1060 km/h and the system is
not operated, error is detected periodically in wheel speed signals from the
ABS wheel-speed sensor.
DETECTION
CONDITION
Inhibits ABS, TCS, and DSC controls, and illuminates ABS warning light and
DSC indicator light.
FAIL-SAFE
(If error is detected during ABS control, inhibits ABS control after finishing
the control.)
ABS sensor rotor malfunction (foreign material adhering)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Improper installation of ABS wheel-speed sensor and/or sensor rotor

STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT PID FOR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR

1 OUTPUT ERROR USING M-MDS
ACTION
YesGo to Step 4.

LF_WSPD
LR_WSPD
RF_WSPD
RR_WSPD
Drive the vehicle.
Verify that the vehicle speeds detected by
the four ABS wheel-speed sensors are
approximately the same.
Are the vehicle speeds approximately the
same?
INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION OCCURRED DUE TO
2 IMPROPER SENSOR CLEARANCE.
Inspect the clearance between the ABS
wheel-speed sensor and the ABS sensor
rotor.

No Replace the ABS wheel-speed sensor,
then go to Step 4.
(See FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR

INSPECTION.)
(See FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED

SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

INSPECTION.)
(See REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED

SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is the clearance normal?

Clearance
Front: 0.31.0 mm
{0.0120.057 in}
Rear: 0.81.6 mm
{0.0320.062 in}
VISUALLY INSPECT ABS SENSOR ROTOR FOR
3 FOREIGN MATERIAL ADHERING OR IMPROPER
INSTALLATION

No Replace the front wheel hub
component or rear drive shaft, then go
to the next step.
(See WHEEL HUB, STEERING
KNUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
VERIFY THAT THE SAME DTC IS NOT PRESENT

Start the engine and drive the vehicle at
10 km/h {6.2 mph} or more.

DSC HU/CM, then go to the next step.
(See DSC HU/CM

5
VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCS ARE PRESENT

Are any other DTCs output?

[DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
(DSC)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
C1145
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor system
C1155
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor system
C1165
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor system
C1175
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor system
DETECTION
CONDITION
FAIL-SAFE
Open circuit, or short to ground or power supply has been detected in the ABS wheel-speed
sensor or ABS wheel-speed sensor wiring harness on any of the four vehicle wheels.
(If error is detected during ABS control, inhibits ABS control after finishing the control.)
Open circuit, or short to ground or power supply in the wiring harness between the following
terminals of the DSC HU/CM and ABS wheel-speed sensor:
DSC HU/CM terminal MRF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
DSC HU/CM terminal ORF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
DSC HU/CM terminal FLF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
DSC HU/CM terminal ELF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
DSC HU/CM terminal IRR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B

DSC HU/CM terminal LRR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
DSC HU/CM terminal GLR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
DSC HU/CM terminal HLR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT PID TO VERIFY THAT WHEEL SPEED-SIGNALS ARE TRANSMITTED

1 FROM ABS WHEEL- SPEED SENSOR USING M-MDS
YesGo to Step 5.
LF_WSPD
LR_WSPD
RF_WSPD
RR_WSPD
Drive the vehicle.

Verify that the wheel speed-signals are transmitted from each ABS
wheel-speed sensor.
Are the wheel-speed signals transmitted?
INSPECT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT IN WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN DSC HU/CM
2 AND ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
Disconnect the DSC HU/CM connector and ABS wheel-speed sensor.

Inspect for continuity in the wiring harness between the following

ABS wheel-speed sensor connectors on the vehicle wiring harnessside and DSC HU/CM connectors.
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): MA
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor (): OB
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): FA
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor (): EB
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): IA
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor (): LB
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): GA
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor (): HB
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN DSC HU/CM AND ABS WHEEL-SPEED
3 SENSOR FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
Inspect the voltage between the following terminals of the DSC
HU/CM connector and body ground:
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): M-body ground

RF ABS wheel-speed sensor (): O-body ground

LF ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): F-body ground
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor (): E-body ground
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): I-body ground
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor (): L-body ground
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): G-body ground
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor (): H-body ground
Is the voltage approx. 0 V?
INSPECT FOR SHORT TO GROUND IN WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN DSC
4 HU/CM AND ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
Inspect for continuity in the wiring harness between the following
DSC HU/CM connector terminals on the vehicle wiring harness-side
and body ground.
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): M

harness, then go to the next step.
No Replace the ABS wheel-speed
sensor, then go to the next step.
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor (): O

LF ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): F
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor (): E
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): I
SENSOR
SENSOR
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor (): L

LR ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): G
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor (): H
5

(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
(DSC)].)
Start the engine and drive the vehicle at 45 km/h {28 mph} or
more.

1.
the DSC HU/CM, then go to the
next step.
(See DSC HU/CM

(DSC)].)
6

(DSC)].)

inspection.
(DSC)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
C1148
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor rotor system
C1158
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor rotor system
C1168
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor rotor system
C1178
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor/ABS sensor rotor system
DETECTION
CONDITION
FAIL-SAFE
Noise is continuously detected in wheel-speed signal for 10 s.

Inhibits ABS, TCS, and DSC controls, and illuminates ABS warning light and DSC
indicator light.
(If error is detected during a ABS control, inhibits ABS control after finishing the
control.)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Poor installation of ABS wheel-speed sensor and/or sensor rotor

STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT PID FOR ABNORMAL OUTPUT FROM ABS WHEEL1 SPEED SENSOR USING M-MDS
LF_WSPD
LR_WSPD
RF_WSPD
RR_WSPD
ACTION
YesGo to Step 4.

Verify that the PIDs of the four ABS wheel-speed
sensors correspond approximately.
INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION OCCURRED DUE TO IMPROPER
2 SENSOR CLEARANCE
Inspect the clearance between the ABS wheel-speed
sensor and the ABS sensor rotor.
Clearance
Front: 0.31.0 mm {0.012
0.057 in}
Rear: 0.81.6 mm {0.0320.062
in}
VISUALLY INSPECT ABS SENSOR ROTOR FOR FOREIGN
3 MATERIAL ADHERING OR IMPROPER INSTALLATION

go to Step 4.

No Replace the front wheel hub component or rear
drive shaft, then go to the next step.
(See WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE

(See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)

If the malfunction recurs, replace the DSC
HU/CM, then go to the next step.

CONTROL (DSC)].)
5

CONTROL (DSC)].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400,
C1410, C1957, C1958 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC
C 1194
LF outlet solenoid valve system
C 1198
LF inlet solenoid valve system
C 1210
RF outlet solenoid valve system
C 1214
RF inlet solenoid valve system
C 1242
LR outlet solenoid valve system
C 1246
RR outlet solenoid valve system
C 1250
LR inlet solenoid valve system
C 1254
RR inlet solenoid valve system
C 1400
RH traction control solenoid valve system
C 1410
LH traction control solenoid valve system
C 1957
RH stability control solenoid valve system
C 1958
LH stability control solenoid valve system
DETECTION
CONDITION
FAIL-SAFE
Solenoid valve operation does not correspond to solenoid ON/OFF

commands from the DSC HU/CM.
Inhibits EBD, ABS, TCS, and DSC controls, and illuminates brake system
warning light, ABS warning light, and DSC indicator light.
Solenoid valve malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the DSC HU/CM internal solenoid valves

STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Access the active command mode for
the solenoid valve using the M-MDS.
ACTION
No Replace the DSC HU/CM, then go to the
next step.
(See DSC HU/CM
Does the solenoid valve operate?

2

(DSC)].)
Start the engine and drive the vehicle
at 10 km/h {6.2 mph} or more.
Gradually slow down and stop
vehicle.

(See DSC HU/CM

(DSC)].)
3

(DSC)].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NOTE:
DTC C1222 will be detected when a malfunctioning ABS wheel-speed sensor cannot be specified.
DTC
C1222
ABS wheel-speed sensor (slip monitor) system

Condition 1
ABS control for two wheels or more is continued for 60 s (If accelerator pedal is
ON and brake switch is OFF and vehicle speed is more than 50 km/h, it is
detected when 10 s has elapsed).
DETECTION
CONDITION
Condition 2
While the vehicle is driven at a speed of 20 km/h or more, difference in each
wheel speed is continuously not within the specification.
Condition 3
There is difference between yaw rate value calculated based on the ABS wheelspeed sensor and yaw rate value calculated based on the steering angle sensor
(abnormal cornering direction is detected).
Conditions 1 and 2
Inhibits EBD, ABS, TCS, and DSC controls, and illuminates brake system warning
light, ABS warning lights, and DSC indicator lights.
FAIL-SAFE
Condition 3
indicator light. (If error is detected during an ABS control, inhibits ABS control after
finishing the control.)
Tire type or size is different between the front and rear wheels.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Poor installation of ABS wheel-speed sensor and/or sensor rotor (If the sensor rotor is installed at
an angle, it may cause output of abnormal wave pattern at high speeds.)
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT PID FOR ABNORMAL OUTPUT FROM ABS WHEEL1 SPEED SENSOR USING M-MDS
LF_WSPD
LR_WSPD
RF_WSPD
RR_WSPD
ACTION
YesGo to Step 5.
No If there is a difference in speeds of the four
wheels, go to the next step.
Drive the vehicle.

Verify that the PIDs of the four ABS wheel-speed
sensors correspond approximately.
2
INSPECT TIRE SIZE AND PRESSURE

Inspect the tire size and tire pressure of each wheel.
(See WHEEL AND TIRE SPECIFICATION.)
Is the tire size and tire pressure as specified?
INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION OCCURRED DUE TO IMPROPER

3 SENSOR CLEARANCE
Inspect the clearance between the ABS wheel-speed
sensor and the ABS sensor rotor.
Clearance
Front: 0.31.0 mm {0.012
0.057 in}
Rear: 0.81.6 mm {0.0320.062
in}
VISUALLY INSPECT ABS SENSOR ROTOR FOR FOREIGN
4 MATERIAL ADHERING OR IMPROPER INSTALLATION

No Install the specified tire or adjust the tire
pressure, then go to Step 5.

go to Step 5.

No Replace the front wheel hub component or rear
drive shaft, then go to the next step.
(See WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE

CONTROL (DSC)].)
{13 mph} or more.


CONTROL (DSC)].)
6

CONTROL (DSC)].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1295, C1307, C1937, C1938, C1956 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
(DSC)]
C1295, C1307,
DTC C1937, C1938,
C1956
Steering angle sensor system
C1295
Steering angle sensor malfunction is detected by CAN signal
from the steering angle sensor.
C1307
Steering angle signal error from the steering angle sensor is
continuously detected for 100 ms.
C1937
The difference between the steering angle calculated by
each sensor and the steering angle from the steering angle
sensor exceeds the specification.
DETECTION
CONDITION
C1938
Condition 1
Variation of the steering angle sensor
signal exceeds the specified value, or does
not vary at all.
Condition 2
When comparing the yaw rate value
calculated from the ABS wheel-speed
sensor signal and steering angle sensor
signal with the yaw rate sensor signal, one
is + and the other is - while the vehicle is
moving forward.
C1956
There is no signal received from the steering angle sensor.
C1295, C1307, C1937, C1956

Inhibits TCS control and DSC control, and illuminates DSC
indicator light.
(If error is detected during a TCS control, inhibits TCS
control after finishing the control.)
C1938
Condition 1
Inhibits TCS control and DSC control, and
illuminates DSC indicator light.
FAIL-SAFE
(If error is detected during a TCS control,

inhibits TCS control after finishing the
control.)
Condition 2
Inhibits TCS control and DSC control, and
illuminates DSC indicator light.
(If error is not detected when system is
activated next time, enables (restores)
each control and turns each light off.)
Deviation of the steering wheel center position due to improper front wheel
alignment
Improper installation or positioning of the steering angle sensor
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Steering angle sensor malfunction

STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT STEERING WHEEL FOR OFF-CENTER
Drive the vehicle and inspect the
steering wheel position while driving
in a straight line.
Is the steering wheel off-center?
ACTION
No Inspect and adjust the front wheel
alignment to correct the steering wheel
alignment.
(See FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)
Go to Step 3.
INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

Inspect the steering angle sensor.
(See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
Is the steering angle sensor normal?

(DSC)].)

No Replace the steering angle sensor, then go
to the next step.
HU/CM.
(See DSC HU/CM

(DSC)].)
4

(DSC)].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NOTE:
The initialization value of the steering angle sensor is stored using the battery power
supply. Therefore, the battery power supply of the steering angle sensor is cut and the
stored initialization value is cleared when any of the following items are performed. DTC
C1306 is stored in the memory.
Negative battery cable disconnection
Steering angle sensor connector disconnection
Fuse (BTN 30A, DSC 7.5A) removal
Wiring harness disconnection between battery and steering angle sensor
connector
DTC
C1306
Steering angle sensor (abnormal initialization) system
DETECTION
CONDITION
FAIL-SAFE
Signal which indicates that the initialization has not been performed is
continuously received from the steering angle sensor for 100 ms.
Inhibits TCS and DSC controls, illuminates DSC indicator light, and flashes
DSC OFF indicator light.
The initialization procedure for the steering angle sensor has not been
performed.
The negative battery cable connector was disconnected previously.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
The steering angle sensor connector was disconnected previously.

The fuse (BTN 30A, DSC 7.5A) was removed previously.
The wiring harness between batterysteering angle sensor connector is
disconnected.
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY INITIALIZATION
1 PROCEDURE.
Has the steering
angle sensor
initialization
procedure been
performed?
VERIFY DTC
2 TROUBLESHOOTING
COMPLETED
ACTION
No Perform the steering angle sensor initialization procedure,
then go to the next step. (See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
Clear the DTC from

the memory.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS
[DYNAMIC
STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
If the malfunction occurs again, replace the steering angle

(See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is the same DTC

present?
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS
[DYNAMIC
STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR
3 PROCEDURE
Are any other DTCs
present?
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS
[DYNAMIC
STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)

CONTROL (DSC)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
C1994 DSC control system

During ABS control, there are two ore more wheels which the wheel speed is
10 km/h or less when pressure reduction or maintain is continuously
requested for 0.3 s3 s (depending on vehicle driving conditions).
DETECTION
CONDITION
DSC control is performed continuously for 10 s (5 s if the vehicle speed is

more than 100 km/h).
FAIL-SAFE
This does not indicate a malfunction since constant control over extended
period of time is inhibited to protect the DSC solenoid valve inside the DSC
HU.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

STEP
1
INSPECTION
(DSC)].)
ACTION
YesReplace the DSC HU/CM, then go to the
next step.
(See DSC HU/CM

(DSC)].)
2

(DSC)].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
B2477
DSC HU/CM configuration

Condition 1
Configuration data is not within the specification.
Condition 2
DETECTION
CONDITION
Configuration data cannot be read.

Condition 3
Configuration data is at an unused value.
Condition 1
Inhibits ABS, TCS, and DSC controls, and flashes ABS
warning light and DSC indicator light.
FAIL-SAFE
Conditions 2 and 3
Inhibits ABS, TCS, and DSC controls, and illuminates
ABS warning light and DSC indicator light.
Module configuration procedure was not completed properly.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY CONFIGURATION
Has the DSC HU/CM configuration
been performed?
ACTION
No Perform configuration using the M-MDS.
(See DSC CONFIGURATION.)

2

(DSC)].)
(DSC)].)

(DSC)].)


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
C1233
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor system
C1234
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor system
C1235
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor system
C1236
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor system
DETECTION
CONDITION
FAIL-SAFE
Excessively slow wheel speed is detected when the vehicle speed is 12 km/h or more first
time after the system is activated or the vehicle is started.
While the vehicle is driven at a speed of 20 km/h or more, difference in each wheel speed is
continuously not within the specification.
(If error is detected during ABS control, inhibits ABS control after finishing the control.)
Short to ground in the wiring harness between the following DSC HU/CM terminal and the ABS
wheel-speed sensor terminal:
DSC HU/CM terminal MRF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
DSC HU/CM terminal ORF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
DSC HU/CM terminal FLF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
DSC HU/CM terminal ELF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
DSC HU/CM terminal IRR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B

DSC HU/CM terminal LRR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
DSC HU/CM terminal GLR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
DSC HU/CM terminal HLR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT PID TO VERIFY THAT WHEEL SPEED-SIGNALS ARE TRANSMITTED

1 FROM ABS WHEEL- SPEED SENSOR USING M-MDS
YesGo to Step 3.
LF_WSPD
LR_WSPD
RF_WSPD
RR_WSPD
Drive the vehicle.

Verify that the wheel speed-signals are transmitted from each ABS
wheel-speed sensor.
Are the wheel-speed signals transmitted?
INSPECT A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN THE
2 DSC HU/CM AND THE ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
Disconnect the DSC HU/CM connector and the ABS wheel-speed
sensor connector.
Inspect for a short to ground in the wiring harness between the
following ABS wheel-speed sensor connectors on the vehicle wiring
harness-side and DSC HU/CM connectors.
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): MA
RF ABS wheel-speed sensor (): OB
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): FA

step.
No Replace the ABS wheel-speed
SENSOR
SENSOR
LF ABS wheel-speed sensor (): EB

RR ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): IB
RR ABS wheel-speed sensor (): LA
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor (+): GB
LR ABS wheel-speed sensor (): HA
3

Start the engine and drive the vehicle at 10 km/h {6.2 mph} or
more.


1.
replace the DSC HU/CM, then go
to the next step.
(See DSC HU/CM
inspection.
(DSC)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
C1095,
C1096
Pump motor, motor relay system
C1095
When the motor relay is switched from ON to OFF, the pump motor voltage is
turned off within the specified time (Pump motor rotation malfunction (sticking)).
Malfunction is detected in pump motor drive circuit during motor relay test.
Motor relay supply voltage is 40% of the ignition voltage or lower.
DETECTION
CONDITION
While the pump motor is stopped, pump motor monitor voltage is continuously 2
V or more for 1 s.
C1096
While the pump motor is operated, difference in voltage between ignition and
pump motor is continuously more than 4.0 V for 100 ms.
FAIL-SAFE
Inhibits ABS, TCS, and DSC controls, and illuminates brake system warning light, ABS warning
light and DSC indicator light.
Open or short to ground circuit in the wiring harness between the battery and the DSC HU/CM
terminal B
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in the wiring harness between the DSC HU/CM terminal A and the body ground
Open or short circuit in the DSC HU/CM internal motor relay, or stuck motor relay
Open or short circuit in the DSC HU/CM internal motor, or frozen motor
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT ABS/DSC FUSE CONDITION
Is the ABS/DSC 40A fuse normal?
ACTION
INSPECT MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY FOR

2 OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect DSC HU/CM connector.
No Repair or replace the wiring harness for open circuit between

battery positive terminal and DSC HU/CM terminal B, then go to
Step 5.
Measure voltage between DSC

HU/CM terminal B (harness-side)
and ground.
Is the voltage B+?
INSPECT PUMP MOTOR GROUND FOR OPEN
3 CIRCUIT
DSC HU/CM terminal A (harnessside) and ground.
No Repair or replace the wiring harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM terminal A and ground, then go to Step 5.
4
VERIFY PUMP MOTOR OPERATION


No Replace the DSC HU/CM, then go to the next step.

Access PMP_MOTOR active

command modes using M-MDS.
Does the pump motor operate?
5

(DSC)].)


vehicle at 10 km/h {6.2 mph}
or more.
Gradually slow down and stop the
vehicle.
(DSC)].)
6

(DSC)].)

(DSC)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
C1186,
C1266
Valve relay system
C1186
Five or more solenoid valve malfunctions are detected (solenoid valve is
determined when the solenoid valve operation does not correspond to the solenoid
ON/OFF signals from the DSC HU/CM).
Valve relay voltage is continuously less than 80% of the ignition voltage for 0.5 s.
DETECTION
CONDITION
Short circuit to ground is detected in the valve relay power supply circuit and valve
relay.
Open circuit is detected in the valve relay power supply circuit, or open circuit or
sticking (OFF side) is detected in the valve relay.
C1266
DSC HU internal valve relay remains ON (stuck) when valve relay OFF is
commanded.
C1186
FAIL-SAFE
light, ABS warning light, and DSC indicator light.
C1266
indicator light.
DSC 30 A fuse malfunction
Open circuit or short to ground in the wiring harness between the battery and the DSC HU/CM
terminal C
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the DSC HU/CM internal valve relay, or stuck valve relay (DSC HU/CM
malfunction)
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT DSC FUSE CONDITION
Is the DSC 30 A fuse normal?
ACTION
INSPECT VALVE RELAY POWER SUPPLY

2 FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect DSC HU/CM
connector.

No Repair or replace the wiring harness for open circuit between battery
positive terminal and DSC HU/CM terminal C, then go to the next step.

Measure voltage between DSC
HU/CM terminal C (harnessside) and ground.
Is voltage B+?
3

memory.
[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
YesReplace the DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.

vehicle.
[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
4

[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
B1342
DSC HU/CM system
DETECTION
CONDITION
The DSC HU/CM on-board diagnostic function detects control module

malfunction.
FAIL-SAFE
Inhibits EBD, ABS, TCS, and DSC controls, and illuminates brake system
warning light, ABS warning light and DSC indicator light.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
DSC HU/CM internal malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY CURRENT STATUS OF MALFUNCTION
(DSC)].)
ACTION
next step.
(See DSC HU/CM

(DSC)].)
2


(DSC)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2741, C2768, U2516 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC B2741, C2768,

U2516
Combined sensor system
B2741
Sensor malfunction signal from combined sensor is
detected continuously for 100 ms.
Type of combined sensor is different from specification,
or not within set range.
DETECTION
CONDITION
C2768
Signal which indicates combined sensor is under
initialization is transmitted from combined sensor.
U2516
Number of signal transmission from combined sensor is
wrong.
Check sum error is detected in CAN communication
signal between combined sensor.
Inhibits TCS control and DSC control, and illuminates DSC indicator light.
FAIL-SAFE
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
(If error is detected during a TCS control, inhibits TCS control after
Combined sensor malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
PERFORM COMBINED SENSOR

1 INITIALIZATION
ACTION
After the initialization procedure for the combined
Perform the combined sensor

initialization using the M-MDS.
sensor has been completed, go to the next step.
(See COMBINED SENSOR

2
VERIFY THAT SAME DTC IS NOT PRESENT

Clear the DTCs from the
memory.
[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCS ARE

3 PRESENT
[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)

If the malfunction recurs, replace the combined
sensor.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1317, B1318 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC
B1317,
B1318
Power supply system
B1317
DETECTION
CONDITION
Voltage at DSC HU/CM terminal J is more than 16.8 V.

B1318
While the vehicle is driven at a speed of 15 km/h or higher, voltage at DSC
HU/CM terminal J is less than 9.6 V (less than 9.3 V during control).
B1317
light, ABS warning light and DSC indicator light.
FAIL-SAFE
(If ignition voltage is continuously less than 16.6 V for 1 s, enables (restores)
each control and turns each light off.)
B1318
indicator light.
(If ignition voltage is more than 9.8 V, enables (restores) each control and
turns each light off.)
Battery deterioration
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit or short to ground in the wiring harness between the DSC HU/CM terminal J and the
battery
Open circuit or faulty ground in the wiring harness between the DSC HU/CM terminal D and the
body ground
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE
Is the battery terminal voltage
normal?
ACTION
YesMake sure that battery terminal connection is normal.
No Charge or replace the battery, then go to Step 6.
INSPECT BATTERY GRAVITY

Is battery specific gravity as
specified?

No Replace the battery, then go to Step 6.

Are the generator and drive belt
tensions normal?

No Replace generator and/or drive belt as necessary, then go to Step 6.
INSPECT ABS HU/CM POWER SUPPLY FOR

4 OPEN CIRCUIT
Start the engine.
DSC HU/CM terminal J and
No Repair or replace the wiring harness for open circuit between the DSC
HU/CM and ground, then go to Step 6.
ground.
INSPECT DSC HU/CM GROUND FOR POOR
Measure the resistance between
ground and DSC HU/CM
terminal D.
Is the resistance within 01
ohm?
No If there is no continuity:
Repair or replace the wiring harness for open circuit
between the DSC HU/CM and ground, then go to the
next step.
If the resistance is not within 01 ohm :
Repair or replace the wiring harness for poor ground,

(DSC)].)


vehicle at 15 km/h {9.3
mph} or more.
(DSC)].)
7

(DSC)].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

C1279,
C1280,
DTC C1281,
C1952,
C1959
Combined sensor system
C1279
Variation of the yaw rate value from the combined sensor while the vehicle is
stopped or started is not within the specification.
C1280
Condition 1
The difference between the yaw rate value calculated by each
sensor and the yaw rate value from the combined sensor exceeds
the specification.
Condition 2
While the vehicle is moving forward, one of the yaw rate values is
+ and the other is - (yaw rate value calculated from steering
angle sensor signal and one from the combined sensor).
DETECTION
CONDITION
C1281
Difference between the two lateral-G values exceeds the specification (one from
the combined sensor and one calculated from yaw rate signal from the combined
sensor, steering angle sensor signal, and ABS wheel-speed sensor signal).
C1952
Signal, which indicates low voltage or over voltage, from the combined sensor is
continued for 100 ms.
C1959
Variation of the lateral-G value from the combined sensor is not within the
specification.
C1279, C1281, C1959
(If error is detected during a TCS control, inhibits TCS control after finishing the
control.)
C1280
Condition 1

indicator light.
(If error is detected during a TCS control, inhibits TCS control
after finishing the control.)
Condition 2
indicator light.
FAIL-SAFE
(If error is detected during a TCS control, inhibits TCS control

after finishing the control. If the following conditions are all met
at next system activation, enables (restores) each control and
turns each light off.)
a. Yaw rate sensor signal exceeds 3 /s
b. Vehicle speed is 70.2 km/h or more
c. Difference between yaw rate sensor signal and the yaw rate
value calculated by each sensor is within acceptable range
C1952
(If error is detected during a TCS control, inhibits TCS control after finishing the
control. If the signal, which indicate low voltage or over voltage, is eliminated,
enables (restores) each control and turns each light off. However, if error is
detected again within 180 s after permission (restoring), inhibits each control and
illuminates each light until ignition switch is turned off.)
Poor installation of combined sensor
Open circuit or short to ground in wiring harness between ignition switchcombined sensor
terminal A
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between combined sensor terminal Dground

STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT COMBINED SENSOR INSTALLATION CONDITION
Inspect the installation condition of the combined
sensor.
Is the combined sensor installed correctly?
ACTION
No Install the combined sensor correctly, then go to
the next step.
INSPECT COMBINED SENSOR POWER SUPPLY FOR OPEN OR

2 SHORT CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
Measure the voltage between combined sensor
terminal A and body ground.
No Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to

Step 5.

3
INSPECT COMBINED SENSOR GROUND FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Inspect for continuity between combined sensor

terminal D and body ground.
Step 5.
4
INSPECT COMBINED SENSOR

Inspect the combined sensor.
(See COMBINED SENSOR INSPECTION.)
Is the combined sensor normal?
VERIFY DTC TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED.

CONTROL (DSC)].)
{6.0 mph} or more.

No Replace the combined sensor, then go to the next
step.

CONTROL (DSC)].)
6
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.

CONTROL (DSC)].)

CONTROL (DSC)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1290,
C1953
Brake fluid pressure sensor system
C1290
The basic brake fluid pressure value, which is calculated in
the DSC HU/CM while the system is not operated and the
brake is not applied, exceeds the specified value.
DETECTION
CONDITION
C1953
The brake fluid pressure sensor signal is continuously more
than 13.95 MPa or less than the specified value for 100
ms or more.
FAIL-SAFE
(If error is detected during a ABS/TCS control, inhibits ABS/TCS control after
Brake fluid pressure sensor malfunction in DSC HU/CM
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the brake fluid pressure sensor circuit in DSC HU/CM
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY NO ABNORMALITY ON BRAKE FLUID

1 PRESSURE SENSOR
(DSC)].)
ACTION
next step.
(See DSC HU/CM

(DSC)].)
2

(DSC)].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U0073, U0100, U0101, U0155, U1900, U2023 [DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC U0073, U0100, U0101,

U0155, U1900, U2023
CAN line system
U0073
Communication error with other modules is detected in
CAN communication.
U0100
Error is detected in received data from PCM in CAN
communication.
U0101
Error is detected in received data from TCM in CAN
communication.
U0155
Error is detected in received data from instrument cluster in
CAN communication.
U1900
DETECTION
CONDITION
Error is detected in transmitted data in CAN

communication.
CAN initialization is failure.
Data written to CAN main memory and those read from are
not consistent.
U2023
PCM malfunction data is continuously received for 0.5 s in
CAN communication.
Invalid accelerator opening angle signal is continuously
received for 0.5 s in CAN communication.
Invalid engine speed signal is continuously received for 0.5

s in CAN communication.
Invalid reference engine torque signal is continuously
received for 0.5 s in CAN communication.
Invalid engine torque signal is continuously received for
0.5 s in CAN communication.
FAIL-SAFE
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Malfunction in communication line between PCM, TCM, instrument cluster,
and steering angle sensor
Malfunction in PCM, TCM, instrument cluster, or steering angle sensor
Inspect according to diagnostic procedure in BODY & ACCESSORIES. (See FOREWORD
[MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U0074, U0123, U1901 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DTC U0074, U0123, U1901Combined sensor system (CAN2 line malfunction)

U0074
Communication error with combined sensor is detected in CAN
communication.
DETECTION
CONDITION
U0123
Error is detected in received data from combined sensor in CAN
communication.
U1901
Error is detected in transmitted data to combined sensor in CAN
communication.
U0074, U1901
Inhibits TCS control and DSC control, and illuminates indicator light.
FAIL-SAFE
U0123
Inhibits TCS control and DSC control, and illuminates indicator light.
(If error is detected during a TCS control, inhibits TCS control after finishing
the control.)
Open or short circuit in the CAN2_L wiring harness between combined sensor terminal B and
DSC HU/CM terminal AS
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the CAN2_H wiring harness between combined sensor terminal C and
DSC HU/CM terminal AR
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT COMBINED SENSOR SIGNAL (CAN2 LINE) FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect the DSC HU/CM connectors.
Disconnect the combined sensor connectors.
Inspect for continuity between the DSC HU/CM connectors (vehicle
harness-side) and the following combined sensor connector terminals
(vehicle harness-side):
ACTION
Combined sensor (CAN2_L): BAS

Combined sensor (CAN2_H): CAR
2
INSPECT COMBINED SENSOR SIGNAL (CAN2 LINE) FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

Inspect for continuity between the following DSC HU/CM connector
terminals (vehicle harness-side) and body ground:
Combined sensor (CAN2_L): B

Combined sensor (CAN2_H): C

3
INSPECT THE COMBINED SENSOR

Inspect the combined sensor.
Is the combined sensor normal?

(DSC)].)
(DSC)].)

(DSC)].)

No Replace the combined sensor,
1.
the DSC CM, then go to the next
step.
(See DSC HU/CM
inspection.
(DSC)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ABS]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [ABS]
Diagnostic Inspection. To check the DTC, follow the DTC Inspection steps. (See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PRECAUTION [ABS]
1. Any one or a combination of the ABS warning and BRAKE system warning lights illuminate even
when the system is normal.
Conditions
under
Warning lights that may Condition under which
which the ABS, EBD control
illuminate and/or flash the light may illuminate
light will
go out
Any or all the following Under any of the
lights illuminate:
following conditions:
ABS
warning
light
BRAKE
system
warning
light
( *1 )
When
the front
wheels
are
jacked
up,
stuck, or
placed
on a
chassis
roller,
and only
the front
wheel
ABS
wheel
speed
sensors
are spun
for 20 s
or
more.
Parking brake is not fully
released while driving.
Brake drag.
Sudden
acceleration/deceleration.
After
turning
ignition
switch off,
vehicle is
driven at
speed
greater
than 10
km/h
{6.2
mph}
and
normal
operation
is
confirmed.
ABS: Disables control.

EBD:
1. Disable
control, in
cases where
the light may
illuminate, only
when ABS
HU/CM detects
that wheel
speed sensors
determine that
two or more
rear wheels
are
malfunctioning.
2. Enables
control, if
wheel speed
sensors
determine that
three or more
wheels are
functioning
correctly.
Left/right or front/rear
tires are different. (Size,
radius, tire pressure, or
wear is other than that
listed on tire label.)
All the following lights
illuminate:
ABS
warning
light
Battery voltage at ABS

HU/CM ignition terminal
Z drops below approx.
9 to 10 V. ( *2 )
BRAKE
system
warning
light
*1
*2
ABS: Enables control.

Battery
voltage
EBD: Enables control.
rises
above
approx.
10 V.
(Only
BRAKE
system
warning
light goes
out.)
The light will illuminate only when ABS HU/CM detects that a rear wheelspeed
sensor is malfunctioning.
If battery voltage drops below 9 V while vehicle speed is greater than 6 km/h {3.7
mph}, the ABS HU/CM stores DTC B1318.
2. Precautions during servicing of ABS

The ABS is composed of electrical and mechanical parts. It is necessary to categorize malfunctions as
being either electrical or hydraulic when performing troubleshooting.
a. Malfunctions in electrical system
The ABS HU/CM has an on-board diagnostic function. With this function,
any one or a combination of the ABS warning light and BRAKE system
warning light will illuminate when there is a problem in the electrical
system. Also, past and present malfunctions are stored in the ABS HU/CM.
This function can find malfunctions that do not occur during periodic
inspections. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC2. Stored malfunctions will be
displayed in the order of occurrence. To find out the causes of ABS
malfunctions, use these on-board diagnostic results.
If a malfunction occurred in the past but is now normal, the cause is likely
a temporary poor connection of the wiring harness. The ABS HU/CM usually
operates normally. Be careful when searching for the cause of malfunction.
After repair, it is necessary to clear the
DTC from the ABS HU/CM memory. Also, if the ABS related parts have been
replaced, verify that no DTC is displayed after repairs.
After repairing the ABS wheel-speed sensor or ABS sensor rotor, or after
replacing the ABS HU/CM, the ABS warning light may not go out ( * ) even
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. In this case, drive
the vehicle at a speed of 10 km/h {6.2 mph} or more, make sure that
ABS warning light goes out, and then clear the DTC.
* The BRAKE system warning light also illuminates when there is any rear
wheel deformation.
When repairing, if the ABS related connectors are disconnected and the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the ABS HU/CM will mistakenly
detect a fault and record it as a malfunction.
To protect the ABS HU/CM, make sure the ignition is off before connecting
or disconnecting the ABS HU/CM connector.
b. Malfunctions in hydraulic system
Symptoms in a hydraulic system malfunction are similar to those in a
conventional brake malfunction. However, it is necessary to determine if
the malfunction is in an ABS component or the conventional brake system.
The ABS hydraulic unit contains delicate mechanical parts. If foreign
material gets into the component, the ABS may fail to operate. Also, it will
likely become extremely difficult to find the location of the malfunction in
the event that the brakes operate but the ABS does not. Make sure foreign
material does not enter when servicing the ABS (e.g. brake fluid
replacement, pipe removal).
Vibration method
If a malfunction occurs or becomes worse while driving on a rough road or when the engine is
vibrating, perform the following steps.
NOTE:
There are several reasons why vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical malfunction.
Wire harnesses not having full play.
Wires laying across brackets or moving parts.
An improperly routed, improperly clamped, or loose harness can cause wiring to become pinched
between parts.
The connector joints, points of vibration, and places where wiring harnesses pass through the
firewall, body and other panels are the major areas to be inspected.
Inspection method for switch connectors or wires

NOTE:
5. Slightly shake each connector or wiring harness vertically and horizontally while monitoring the PID.
Inspection method for sensor connectors or wires

NOTE:

NOTE:
If engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
Malfunction data monitor method
1. Perform the malfunction reappearance test according to malfunction reappearance mode and
malfunction data monitor. The malfunction cause is found in the malfunction data.
Inspection method for connector terminal
1. Inspect the connection condition of each female terminal.

2. Insert the male terminal, and fit the female terminal side to female terminal. Inspect if the
malfunction is in the female terminal.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ABS]
Verify the symptoms, and perform troubleshooting according to the appropriate number.
No.
Symptom
1 Neither ABS warning light nor BRAKE system warning light illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
2 ABS warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
3 BRAKE system warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
4 Both ABS warning light and BRAKE system warning light stay on 4 s or more when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
5 ABS warning light stays on 4 s or more when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
6 BRAKE system warning light stays on 4 s or more when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. (Parking brake is
released.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 NEITHER ABS WARNING LIGHT NOR BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
ILLUMINATE WHEN THE IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED TO THE ON POSITION
[ABS]
1 ABS warning light and BRAKE system warning light do not

illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to ON position.
Malfunction of instrument cluster or ABS HU/CM
Improper configuration (instrument cluster)
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN COMMON POWER

1 SUPPLY OF WARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS, OR
IN OTHER WARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Do other warning and indicator lights illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position?
2
INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER SUPPLY FUSE

Is the instrument cluster ignition power supply fuse
normal?
ACTION
YesGo to step 4.

No Inspect for a short to
ground on circuit of blown
fuse.
Repair or replace if
necessary.
Install appropriate
amperage fuse.
*3
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING HARNESS

(INSPECT FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN INSTRUMENT CLUSTER YesReplace the instrument
cluster (open circuit in
POWER SUPPLY AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER) OR
instrument cluster).
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(See INSTRUMENT
Measure voltage at instrument cluster connector (12pin) terminal 1G.

CLUSTER
No Inspect for open circuit
between instrument cluster
and ground.
necessary.
CONFIRM DTC U1900 USING M-MDS

Retrieve DTCs from the PCM, ABS and instrument
cluster.
Is DTC U1900 retrieved?
CONFIRM THE FOLLOWING PIDs USING M-MDS:

ABS_MSG
PCM_MSG
EPS_MSG
TPM_MSG
Is not present message displayed on M-MDS?

No Inspect the instrument
cluster. If normal, go to
Step 6.
YesReplace the instrument
cluster (open circuit in
(See INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
No Inspect network
communication for related
system malfunction.
necessary.
CONFIRM DTC B2477 FOR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER USING M6 MDS

Is DTC B2477 retrieved?
YesPerform instrument cluster

configuration.
(See INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
CONFIGURATION.)
No Replace the ABS HU/CM.
(See ABS HU/CM
When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, slightly shake the wiring
harness and connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact
points are the cause of any intermittent malfunctions. If there is a problem, Verify that the
connectors, terminals and wiring harness are connected correctly and undamaged.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN THE
IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED TO THE ON POSITION [ABS]
3 BRAKE system warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Retrieve DTCs from the PCM, ABS
and instrument cluster.
CONFIRM THE FOLLOWING PIDs USING M2 MDS:

ABS_MSG
PCM_MSG
EPS_MSG
TPM_MSG
Is not present message displayed
on M-MDS?
ACTION
No Inspect the instrument cluster. If normal, go
to the next step.
YesReplace the instrument cluster (open circuit in
No Inspect network communication for related
system malfunction.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.4 BOTH ABS WARNING LIGHT AND BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT STAY
ON 4 S OR MORE WHEN THE IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED TO THE ON
POSITION [ABS]
4 Both ABS warning light and BRAKE system warning light stay on 4 s or more when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
ABS HU/CM detects ABS proportioning system malfunction.
ABS HU/CM detects low voltage in power supply (ABS CM ingestion terminal Z
voltage is below about 9 to 10 V).
ABS HU/CM does not operate.
Malfunction of communication network.
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT ABS HU/CM POWER SUPPLY

1 FUSE
Is the ABS HU/CM ignition
power supply fuse normal?
ACTION
No Inspect for a short to ground on circuit of blown
fuse.
Install appropriate amperage fuse.
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN

2 ABS HU/CM AND DLC2 FOR
CONTINUITY AND SHORTS
Perform DTC inspection.
Is error message displayed
regarding communication
YesIf a communication error message is displayed

even after inspecting according to procedure
displayed on M-MDS, go to step 10.
between ABS HU/CM and MMDS?

3
INSPECT FOR DTCS IN ABS HU/CM

Have DTCs been stored in
memory?
YesPerform the applicable DTC inspection.

INSPECT PID/DATA IN ABS HU/CM

Inspect the following items
using M-MDS datalogger
function.

No Inspect the instrument cluster.
ABS_LAMP
(ABS warning
light)
BRAKE_LMP
(BRAKE
system
warning light)
ABS_VOLT
(power supply
voltage)
Is ABS_LAMP and BRAKE_LMP
ON 4 s or more after the
ignition switch is turned to the
ON position?
INSPECT ABS HU/CM IGNITION POWER
5 SUPPLY SYSTEM (TERMINAL Z)
Inspect the voltage for
datalogger ABS_VOLT item.
Specification: approx. 10 V
Is the voltage within
specification?
6
INSPECT BATTERY
Is the battery voltage normal?
YesReplace the ABS HU/CM (open or short in ground

circuit in ABS HU/CM).

No Inspect the battery and charging system.
Is the battery voltage normal

with electrical load (A/C,
headlight, etc.) on and engine
idling?
No Inspect the charging system (drive belt tension,

generator, etc.).
*8

ABS HU/CM POWER SUPPLY AND ABS
HU/CM FOR CONTINUITY
Disconnect the ABS HU/CM
connector.

No Inspect the ABS HU/CM connector for secure
connection.
Is the voltage approx. 12 V

at connector terminal Z?
*9

ABS HU/CM GROUND FOR CONTINUITY
Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK position.
Is there continuity between
connector terminal AC and
ground?
* 10

ABS HU/CM AND DLC2 FOR
CONTINUITY
connector terminal X and DLC
2?
* 11

ABS HU/CM AND DLC2 FOR SHORT TO
BATTERY
Is the voltage approx. 12 V
at connector terminal X?
* 12

ABS HU/CM AND DLC2 FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
connector terminal X and DLC
2?
YesIf a malfunction error message is displayed on the

M-MDS in Step 1 inspection, go to the next step.
If a malfunction error message is not displayed on
the M-MDS in Step 1 inspection, troubleshooting
is completed.
No Repair the wiring harness between ABS HU/CM
and ground.
No Repair the wiring harness between ABS HU/CM
and DLC2.
YesRepair the wiring harness between ABS HU/CM

and DLC2.
YesRepair the wiring harness between ABS HU/CM
and DLC2.
No Replace the ABS HU/CM (communication circuit
malfunction in ABS HU/CM).
points are the cause of any intermittent malfunctions. If there is a problem, verify that the
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 ABS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN IGNITION SWITCH
TURNED TO ON POSITION [ABS]
2 ABS warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Retrieve DTCs from the PCM, ABS
and instrument cluster.
CONFIRM THE FOLLOWING PIDs USING M2 MDS:

ABS_MSG
PCM_MSG
EPS_MSG
TPM_MSG
Is not present message displayed
on M-MDS?
ACTION
No Inspect the instrument cluster. If normal, go
to the next step.
YesReplace the instrument cluster (open circuit in
No Inspect network communication for related
system malfunction.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.5 ABS WARNING LIGHT STAYS ON 4 S OR MORE WHEN IGNITION SWITCH
TURNED TO ON POSITION [ABS]
5 ABS warning light stays on 4 s or more when the ignition switch to the ON position.
ABS HU/CM detects ABS system malfunction.
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

YesIf the communication error message is displayed
1 ABS HU/CM AND DLC2 FOR
even after inspecting according to procedures
CONTINUITY AND SHORTS
displayed in the M-MDS, go to Step 4.
Perform DTC inspection.
between ABS HU/CM and
M-MDS?
2
INSPECT FOR DTCs IN ABS HU/CM

memory?


Inspect the following items
using M-MDS datalogger
function.
ABS_LAMP
(ABS
warning
YesReplace the ABS HU/CM (open circuit or short to

ground in ABS HU/CM).
light)
Is ABS_LAMP ON 4 s or
more after turning the
ignition switch to the ON
position?
*4

ABS HU/CM AND DLC2 FOR
CONTINUITY
Disconnect the ABS HU/CM connector.
connector terminal X and
DLC-2?
*5

YesRepair the wiring harness between the ABS HU/CM
ABS HU/CM AND DLC2 FOR SHORT
and DLC-2.
TO B+
Is the voltage approx. 12V
at connector terminal X?
*6
No Repair the wiring harness between the ABS HU/CM

and DLC-2.

YesRepair the wiring harness between the ABS HU/CM
ABS HU/CM AND DLC2 FOR SHORT
and DLC-2.
TO GROUND
ground?

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.6 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT STAYS ON 4 S OR MORE WHEN
IGNITION SWITCH TURNED TO ON POSITION [ABS]
6 BRAKE system warning light stays on 4 s or more when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position. (Parking brake is released.)
Short to ground in circuit in parking brake switch and/or brake fluid level
sensor
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
Is brake fluid level normal?
ACTION
No Add brake fluid.
*2
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS

HU/CM AND DLC-2 FOR CONTINUITY AND YesIf a communication error message is displayed
even after inspecting according to procedures
SHORTS
displayed on M-MDS.
Inspect the following items using
Go to next Step 6.
the M-MDS datalogger function.
BRAKE_LMP
(BRAKE system
warning light)

between ABS HU/CM and MMDS?
3
INSPECT FOR DTCs IN ABS HU/CM

memory?


Inspect (BRAKE system warning
light) using the M-MDS
datalogger function.
Is BRAKE_LMP on 4 s or more
to the ON position?
YesReplace the ABS HU/CM.

VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN

5 PARKING BRAKE SWITCH OR BRAKE FLUID YesReplace the parking brake switch and/or brake
fluid level sensor (Short with some internal
LEVEL SENSOR, OR IN SOME OTHER PART
part).
Disconnect in the following
(See MASTER CYLINDER
order:
1. Parking brake
(See PARKING BRAKE LEVER
switch
connector
2. Brake fluid level
sensor
connector
Does BRAKE system warning
light go out with ignition switch
to ON position?
No Perform the following inspections. Repair if

necessary.
Short to ground in the wiring
harness between the
instrument cluster (BRAKE
system warning light) and
parking brake switch.
Short to ground in the wiring
harness between the
instrument cluster (BRAKE
system warning light) and
brake fluid level sensor.
Inspect the instrument cluster.
*6

HU/CM AND DLC-2 FOR CONTINUITY
Disconnect the ABS HU/CM
connector.
connector terminal X and DLC-2?
*7
No Repair the wiring harness between the ABS

HU/CM and DLC-2.

YesRepair the wiring harness between the ABS
HU/CM AND DLC-2 FOR SHORT TO B+
HU/CM and DLC-2.
Is the voltage approx. 12 V at
connector terminal X?
*8

YesRepair the wiring harness between the ABS
HU/CM AND DLC-2 FOR SHORT TO
HU/CM and DLC-2.
GROUND
ground?

When performing an asterisked ( * ) troubleshooting inspection, slightly shake the wiring

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
Diagnostic Inspection. To check the DTC, follow the DTC Inspection steps. (See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PRECAUTION [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
1. The ABS warning light and/or BRAKE system warning light and/or DSC indicator light and/or DSC OFF
light illuminate even when the system is normal.
Conditions
under which ABS, EBD, TCS and DSC control
Warning lights that may Condition under which
illuminate and/or flash the light may illuminate the light will
go out
ABS
warning
light
Under any of the

following conditions:
When
the front
wheels
are
jacked
up,
struck,
or
placed
on a
chassis
roller,
and only
the front
wheel
ABS
wheel
speed
sensors
are spun
for 20 s
or
more.
BRAKE
system
warning
light
DSC
indicator
light
Parking brake is not fully

released while driving.
Brake drag.
Sudden
acceleration/deceleration.
Left/right or front/rear
After turning
ignition
switch off,
vehicle is
driven at
speed
greater
than 10
km/h {6.2
mph} and
normal
operation is
confirmed.

EBD:
1. Disable
control, in
cases where
the light may
illuminate, only
when DSC
HU/CM detects
that wheel
speed sensors
determine that
two or more
wheels are
malfunctioning.
2. Enables
control, if
wheel speed
sensors
determine
three or more
wheels are
functioning
correctly.
TCS: Disables control.
DSC: Disables control.
tires are different. (Size,

radius, tire pressure, or
wear is other than that
listed on tire label.)
Battery voltage at DSC
HU/CM ignition terminal
drops below approx.
10 V.

Battery
voltage rises
above
approx. 10
TCS: Disables control.
V.
DSC: Disables control.
Brake
system
warning
light
Brake fluid amount is

low.
ABS: Enables control.

Brake fluid
level lower
than
recommended
TCS: Enables control.
amount.
DSC: Enables control.
2. Precautions during servicing of DSC

The DSC is composed of electrical and mechanical parts. It is necessary to categorize malfunctions as being
either electrical or hydraulic when performing troubleshooting.
a. Malfunction in electrical system
The control module has an on-board diagnostic function. With this function, the
ABS warning light and/or BRAKE system warning light and/or DSC indicator
light and/or DSC OFF light will illuminate when there is a problem in the
electrical system.
Also, past and present malfunctions are in the control module. This function
can find malfunctions that do not occur during periodic inspections. Connect
the M-MDS to the DLC-2, the stored malfunctions will be displayed in the order
of occurrence. To find out the causes of DSC malfunctions, use these on-board
diagnostic results.
If a malfunction occurred in the past but is now normal, the cause is likely a
temporary poor connection of the wiring harness.
The control module usually operates normally. Be careful when searching for
the cause of malfunction.
After repair, it is necessary to clear the DTC from the control module memory.
Also, if the DSC related parts have been replaced, verify that no DTC is
displayed after repairs.
After repairing the ABS wheel-speed sensor or ABS sensor rotor, or after
replacing the control module, the ABS warning light may not go out even when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. In this case, drive the vehicle
at a speed of more than 10 km/h {6.2 mph}, make sure the ABS warning
light goes out, and then clear the DTC.
When repairing, if the DSC related connectors are disconnected and the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, the control module will mistakenly detect a
fault and record it as a malfunction.
CAUTION:
In DSC vehicles, when the DSC HU/CM, steering angle sensor,
or combined sensor is replaced, perform the initialization
procedure for each sensor. (See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.) (See COMBINED SENSOR
To protect the control module, make sure the ignition is off before connecting
or disconnecting the control module connector.
b. Malfunctions in hydraulic system
Symptoms in a hydraulic system malfunction are similar to those in a
conventional brake malfunction. However, it is necessary to determine if the
malfunction is in a DSC component or the conventional brake system.
The hydraulic unit contains delicate mechanical parts. If foreign material gets
into the component, the DSC may fail to operate. Also, it will likely become
extremely difficult to find the location of the malfunction in the event that the
brakes operate but the DSC does not. Make sure foreign material does not
enter when servicing the DSC (e.g.brake fluid replacement, pipe removal).
Vibration method
If a malfunction occurs or becomes worse while driving on a rough road or when the engine is
vibrating, perform the following steps.
NOTE:
There are several reasons why vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical malfunction.
Wire harnesses not having full play.
An improperly routed, improperly clamped, or loose harness can cause wiring to become pinched
between parts.
The connector joints, points of vibration, and places where wiring harnesses pass through the
firewall, body and other panels are the major areas to be inspected.
Inspection method for switch connectors or wires

NOTE:
Inspection method for sensor connectors or wires

NOTE:

NOTE:
If engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
If the PID value is unstable or a malfunction occurs, inspect for poor connection and/or
poorly mounted sensor.
Malfunction data monitor method
1. Perform the malfunction reappearance test according to malfunction reappearance mode and
malfunction data monitor. The malfunction cause is found in the malfunction data.
Inspection method for connector terminal

2. Insert the male terminal, and fit the female terminal side to female terminal. Inspect if the malfunction
is in the female terminal.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
Verify the symptoms, and perform troubleshooting according to the appropriate number.
No.
Symptom
1 Any of the following lights do not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
ABS warning light
BRAKE system warning light
DSC indicator light
DSC OFF light
2 Any of the following lights remain on:
ABS warning light.
BRAKE system warning light
DSC indicator light
DSC OFF light
3 There is a malfunction in the system even though ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light, DSC indicator light
and DSC OFF light do not illuminate.
4 ABS or TCS*1 operates frequently.
TCS does not work correctly.
5 DSC *2 operates frequently.
DSC does not work correctly.
*1
*2
DSC system contains traction control function; DSC indicator light illuminates and goes out while DSC is
operating.
DSC indicator light illuminates and goes out while DSC is operating.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.4 ABS OR TCS*1 OPERATES FREQUENTLY/TCS DOES NOT WORK
CORRECTLY *1: DSC SYSTEM FUNCTION CONTAINS TRACTION CONTROL
FUNCTION, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT GOES ON AND OFF WHILE DSC IS
OPERATING [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
ABS or TCS (*1) operates frequently./TCS does not work correctly.

4
(*1): DSC system function contains traction control function; DSC indicator light goes on and
off while DSC is operating.
There is a difference in size or air pressure between the front and rear tires
Incorrect ABS wheel-speed signal is input to DSC HU/CM
There is a malfunction in the engine control system (TCS malfunction)
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT DTCS IN DSC HU/CM
Inspect the DTC for the
DSC ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
(See ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC
STABILITY CONTROL
(DSC)].)
ACTION
CONTROL (DSC)].)

memory?
INSPECT TIRE SIZE AND AIR
2 PRESSURE
Inspect the tire size and
the air pressure.

(See WHEEL AND TIRE
SPECIFICATION.)
No Replace with specified tires and adjust tire air

pressure.
Are size and air pressure

as specified?
INSPECT PID FOR ABNORMAL
3 OUTPUT FROM ABS WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR USING M-MDS
off.
Connect the M-MDS to the
DLC-2.
Select the following PIDs
using the M-MDS:
LF_WSPD
(LF ABS
wheelspeed
sensor)
LR_WSPD
(LR ABS
wheelspeed
sensor)
RF_WSPD
(RF ABS
wheelspeed
sensor)
RR_WSPD
(RR ABS
wheelspeed
sensor)
Start the engine and drive
the vehicle.
Verify that the PIDs of the
four ABS wheel-speed
sensors correspond
approximately.
Do the vehicle speeds
correspond?
YesFind that malfunctioning part according to

INTERMITTENT CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING.
No
ABS wheel-speed sensor installation

inspection:
Inspect the sensor for looseness and
verify that it is securely installed.
Sensor rotor installation inspection:
Inspect the sensor rotor for poor
installation and chipping of sensor
rotor teeth. (If sensor rotor is
installed poorly, it may cause output
of abnormal wave form at high
speed.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.5 DSC*2 OPERATES FREQUENTLY/DSC DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY *2:
DSC INDICATOR LIGHT GOES ON AND OFF WHILE DSC IS OPERATING
[DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
DSC (*2) operates frequently. /DSC does not work correctly.

(*2): DSC indicator light goes on and off while DSC is operating.
DSC HU/CM detected malfunction (input and output device malfunction)
Poor installation of yaw rate sensor, lateral-G sensor and/or steering angle
sensor
(If any of the above sensors are poorly installed, DSC may operate
intermittently)
When replacing the DSC HU/CM, yaw rate sensor, lateral-G sensor or steering
angle sensor, initialization is not performed.
(If initialization is not performed correctly, DSC may not work correctly)
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT DSC HU/CM FOR DTCs
Inspect the DTC for the DSC ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
VERIFY THAT EACH SENSOR IS INSTALLED

Are the combined sensor and steering
angle sensor securely installed?
ACTION
No Install sensor securely.

3
VERIFY THAT EACH SENSOR IS INITIALIZED

Was initialization performed after
replacement of DSC HU/CM, combined
sensor or steering angle sensor?
YesFind malfunctioning part according to

INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.
No Perform initialization procedure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 ANY OF THE FOLLOWING LIGHTS REMAIN ON: (ABS WARNING LIGHT,
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND/OR DSC OFF
LIGHT) [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
2 Any of the following lights remain on: (ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light, DSC
indicator light and/or DSC OFF light)
Brake fluid amount is low
Parking brake does not release
No connection at DSC HU/CM connector
(When DSC HU/CM connector is disconnected, ABS warning light and BRAKE
system warning light illuminate)
DSC HU/CM detected malfunction (Input and output device malfunction)
DSC HU/CM detects low voltage in power supply
DSC HU/CM ground malfunction
(When DSC HU/CM ground is not securely connected, ABS warning light and
BRAKE system warning light illuminate but diagnostic trouble code does not
displayed)
DSC HU/CM does not operate (DSC HU/CM malfunction)
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT AND VERIFY THAT

1 PARKING BRAKE RELEASES
Is the brake fluid amount normal?
Is the parking brake lever released?
ACTION
No Add brake fluid or release parking
brake lever.
INSPECT DTCS IN DSC HU/CM

DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
Have DTCs been stored in memory?
INSPECT WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN CONTROL

3 MODULE CONNECTOR, TERMINAL OR OTHER
Do ABS warning light and BRAKE system
warning light go off after 4 s when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position?
YesPerform inspection using

appropriate DTC.
(DSC)].)
YesTemporary poor connection in
control module connector.
Inspect DSC HU/CM connector,
then go to Step 6.
Inspect DSC HU/CM connector
terminal, then go to Step 7.
INSPECT BATTERY
Is the battery voltage normal?

No Inspect the battery and charging
system.
[13B-MSP].)

Is the battery voltage normal with electrical
load (A/C, headlight, etc.) on and engine
idling?

No Inspect the charging system (drive
belt tension, generator, etc.).
[13B-MSP].)
VERIFY THAT DSC HU/CM CONNECTOR IS CONNECTED

Is the DSC HU/CM securely connected?

No Connect the DSC HU/CM connector
securely, then go to the next step.
VERIFY THAT DSC HU/CM CONNECTOR TERMINAL OR

7 RELATED CONNECTOR TERMINALS ARE CONNECTED
Are DSC HU/CM connector terminal or
YesReplace the DSC HU/CM.

(See DSC HU/CM
instrument cluster connector terminal etc.

related connector terminals securely
connected?
No Securely connect the DSC HU/CM
connector terminal and related
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 THERE IS A MALFUNCTION IN THE SYSTEM EVEN THOUGH ABS WARNING
LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND DSC OFF
LIGHT DO NOT ILLUMINATE [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
3 There is a malfunction in the system even though the ABS warning light, BRAKE system
warning light, DSC indicator light and DSC OFF light do not illuminate.
There is a mechanical malfunction in system
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT DSC HU/CM FOR DTCs
Inspect the DTC for the DSC ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
(DSC)].)
ACTION

2
INSPECT DSC SYSTEM

Perform DSC system inspection.
(See DSC SYSTEM INSPECTION.)
YesInspect the conventional brake system.

No Repair or replace any malfunctioning part.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 ANY OF THE FOLLOWING LIGHTS DO NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN IGNITION
SWITCH TURNED TO ON POSITION: (ABS WARNING LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND/OR DSC OFF LIGHT) [DYNAMIC
STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
Any of the following lights do not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the on
1 position: (ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light, DSC indicator light and/or DSC
OFF light).
Inspect each light in the instrument cluster for malfunction
Poor connection at DSC HU/CM connector
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT FOR DTCS IN DSC HU/CM
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
ACTION
YesPerform the applicable DTC
inspection.
(DSC)].)
INSPECT WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN INSTRUMENT

2 CLUSTER SYSTEM OR OTHER SYSTEM
Do other warning and indicator lights
illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position?
VERIFY THAT DSC HU/CM CONNECTOR IS CONNECTED
No Inspect or repair the instrument

cluster (power supply system,
ground system).
Is the DSC HU/CM securely connected?

No Connect the DSC HU/CM
connector securely, then go to the
next step.
VERIFY THAT DSC HU/CM CONNECTOR TERMINAL OR
4 RELATED CONNECTOR TERMINALS ARE CONNECTED
Are DSC HU/CM connector terminal, instrument
cluster connector terminal, or related
connector terminals securely connected?
YesReplace the DSC HU/CM.

(See DSC HU/CM
No Securely connect DSC HU/CM
connector terminal and related
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GENERAL PROCEDURES (BRAKE)
Wheel and Tire Installation

Tightening torque
88118 Nm {9.012.0 Kgfm, 65.087.0 ftlbf}
Brake Lines Disconnection

1. If any brake line has been disconnected anytime during the procedures, add brake fluid,
bleed the brakes, and inspect for leakage after the procedure has been completed.
CAUTION:
Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces. Be careful not to spill any on painted surfaces. If
it is spilled, wipe it off immediately.
Brake Pipe Flare Nut Tightening

1. Tighten the brake pipe flare nut using the commercially available flare nut wrench.
[13B-MSP].)
ABS/DSC Related Parts

1. Make sure that there are no DTCs in the ABS/DSC memory after working on ABS/DSC related
parts. If there are any codes in the memory, clear them.
DSC Related Part Sensor Initialization Procedure

WARNING:
If the initialization procedure is not completed, the DSC will not operate properly and it
might cause an unexpected accident. Therefore, when replacing or removing the following
parts, make sure to perform the initialization procedure to insure proper DSC operation.
1. When replacing or removing the following parts, perform the initialization procedure. (See
COMBINED SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.) (See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DSC HU/CM
Combined sensor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BRAKE HOSE (FRONT) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Add brake fluid, bleed the brakes, and inspect for leakage after the installation has been
completed. (See AIR BLEEDING.)
1Brake pipe flare nut

2Clamp
3Bolt
4Bolt
5Brake hose
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BRAKE HOSE (REAR) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Add brake fluid, bleed the brakes, and inspect for leakage after the installation has been
completed. (See AIR BLEEDING.)
1Brake pipe flare nut

2Clamp
3Bolt
4Brake hose
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
1Brake fluid
(See AIR BLEEDING.)
2Vacuum line
(See VACUUM LINE INSPECTION.)
3Brake pedal
(See BRAKE PEDAL INSPECTION.)

4Brake switch
5Master cylinder
(See MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6Power brake unit
(See POWER BRAKE UNIT INSPECTION.)
(See POWER BRAKE UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7Front brake (disc)
(See FRONT BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION.)
(See FRONT BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See DISC PAD (FRONT) REPLACEMENT.)
(See CALIPER (FRONT) DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
(See BRAKE HOSE (FRONT) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8Rear brake (disc)
(See REAR BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION.)
(See DISC PAD (REAR) REPLACEMENT.)
(See CALIPER (REAR) DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
(See BRAKE HOSE (REAR) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AIR BLEEDING
CAUTION:
Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces. Be careful not to spill any on painted surfaces. If
it is spilled, wipe it off immediately.
NOTE:
Keep the fluid level in the reserve tank at 3/4 full or more during the air bleeding.
Begin air bleeding with the brake caliper that is furthest from the master cylinder.
Brake fluid type
SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT-3
1. Remove the bleeder cap from the brake caliper, and connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder
screw.
2. Place the other end of the vinyl tube in a clear container, and fill the container with fluid
during air bleeding.
3. Working with two people, one should depress the brake pedal a few times and then depress
and hold the pedal down.
4. While the brake pedal is being held down, the other person should loosen the bleeder screw
using a commercially available flare nut wrench, and bleed any fluid containing air bubbles.
Once completed, tighten the bleeder screw.
Tightening torque
6.99.8 Nm {7199 Kgfcm, 6286 inlbf}
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until no air bubbles are seen.

6. Perform air bleeding as described in the above procedures for all brake calipers.
7. After air bleeding, inspect the following:
Brake operation
Fluid leakage
Fluid level
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DISC PAD (REAR) REPLACEMENT
3. After installation, depress the brake pedal a few times, and inspect the following.
The disc pad projection is securely installed to the piston groove
Parking brake lever stroke
Brake drag

2Bolt
3Caliper
(See Caliper Installation Note.)
4Disc pad
5Shim
6Guide plate
Caliper Installation Note

1. Clean the exposed area of the piston.
2. Rotate the piston clockwise slowly using the SST and push in the piston completely until the piston
grooves are in the position shown in the figure.
3. Install the caliper.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION
Description
Steering wheel vibrates in the rotation direction. This characteristic is most noticeable when applying brakes at a vehicle
speed of 100140 km/h {62.286.9 mph} .
When applying the brakes, the vehicle body shakes back and forth. The seriousness of the shaking is not influenced by
vehicle speed.
When applying brakes, a pulsating force tries to push the brake pad back. The pulsation is transmitted to the brake
pedal.
Brake Judder Repair Hints
Due to an excessive runout (side-to-side wobble) of the disc plate, the thickness of the disc plate is uneven.
If the runout is more than 0.05 mm {0.002 in} at the position 10 mm {0.39 in} from the disc plate edge, uneven
wear occurs on the disc plate because the pad contacts the plate unevenly.
If the runout is less than 0.05 mm {0.002 in}, uneven wear does not occur.
The disc plate is deformed by heat.
Repeated panic braking may raise the temperature in some portions of disc plate by approximately 1,000 C
{1,832 F}. This results in a deformed disc plate.
Due to corrosion, the thickness and friction coefficient of disc plate change.
If a vehicle is parked in damp conditions for a long time, corrosion occurs on the friction surface of disc plate.
The thickness of corrosion is uneven and sometimes appears like a wave pattern, which changes the friction coefficient
and causes a reaction force.
Inspection and repair procedure
Lateral runout inspection
1. To secure the disc plate and the hub, insert the washer (thickness 10 mm {0.39 in}, inner diameter more than 12
mm {0.47 in}) between each hub bolt and the hub nut, then tighten all the hub nuts.
NOTE:
The component parts of the SST (49 B017 001 or 49 G019 003) can be used as a suitable washer.
2. After tightening all the hub nuts to the same torque, put the dial gauge on the friction surface of disc plate 10 mm {0.39
in} from the disc plate edge.
3. Rotate the disc plate one time and measure the runout.
Rear disc plate runout limit
0.05 mm {0.002 in}
Thickness variation inspection
1. Clean the disc plate-to-pad friction surface using a brake cleaner.

2. Measure the points indicated in the illustration using a caliper (micrometer).
3. Subtract the minimum value from the maximum, and if the result is not within specification, machine the disc plate using a
lathe.
Thickness variation limit
0.015 mm {0.00059 in}
WARNING:
Do not exceed minimum disc plate thickness.
Disc Plate Thickness Inspection

CAUTION:
Excessive runout may result if the disc plate is removed from the vehicle then machined. Machine the disc plate while
installed on the vehicle.
1. Measure the thickness of the disc plate.
If the thickness is not within the specification, replace the disc plate.
Minimum rear disc plate thickness
16 mm {0.63 in}
Minimum rear disc plate thickness after machining using a brake lathe on-vehicle
16.8 mm {0.66 in}
Disc Pad Thickness Inspection

1. Jack up the front of the vehicle and support it with safety stands.
2. Remove the wheel and tires.
3. Verify the remaining thickness of the pads.
Minimum rear disc pad thickness
2.0 mm {0.079 in} min.
4. Replace the pads as a set (right and left wheels) if either one is at or less than the minimum thickness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. After installation, depress the brake pedal a few times, and inspect the following.
The disc pad projection is securely installed to the piston groove
Parking brake lever stroke
Brake drag

(See Parking Brake Cable Installation Note.)
2 Brake hose
3 Bolt
4 Caliper

5 Disc pad
6 Shim
7 Guide plate
8 Bolt
9 Mounting support
10Disc plate

2. Rotate the piston clockwise slowly using the SST and push the piston completely until the piston grooves are in the
position shown in the figure.
Parking Brake Cable Installation Note

1. After installing the parking brake cable, verify that the operating lever returns to the stopper nut with the parking
brake lever released.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CALIPER (REAR) DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1Bleeder cap
2Bleeder screw
3Bolt
4Sleeve
5Piston
(See Piston Disassembly Note.)
(See Dust Seal, Piston Assembly Note.)
6Dust seal
(See Dust Seal, Piston Assembly Note.)
7Piston seal
8Caliper body
Piston Disassembly Note

1. Rotate the piston counter-clockwise using the SST, remove the piston from the caliper body.
Dust Seal, Piston Assembly Note

1. Assemble the dust seal to the piston.
2. Assemble the lip of the dust seal to the groove of the caliper body with the dust seal is
assembled to the piston as shown in the figure.
3. Rotate the piston clockwise using the SST slowly and push the piston inwards completely.
4. Verify that the dust seal is installed into the groove of the piston securely.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DISC PAD (FRONT) REPLACEMENT
3. After installation, depress the brake pedal a few times, then verify that the brakes do not drag.
1Bolt
2Caliper
(See FRONT BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

3Disc pad
4Shim
5Guide plate
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION
Description
Steering wheel vibrates in the rotation direction. This characteristic is most noticeable when applying brakes at a vehicle
speed of 100140 km/h {62.286.9 mph} .
When applying the brakes, the vehicle body shakes back and forth. The seriousness of the shaking is not influenced by
vehicle speed.
When applying brakes, a pulsating force tries to push the brake pad back. The pulsation is transmitted to the brake
pedal.
Brake Judder Repair Hints
Due to an excessive runout (side-to-side wobble) of the disc plate, the thickness of the disc plate is uneven.
If the runout is more than 0.05 mm {0.002 in} at the position 10 mm {0.39 in} from the disc plate edge, uneven
wear occurs on the disc plate because the pad contacts the plate unevenly.
If the runout is less than 0.05 mm {0.002 in}, uneven wear does not occur.
The disc plate is deformed by heat.
Repeated panic braking may raise the temperature in some portions of disc plate by approximately 1,000 C {1,832
F}. This results in a deformed disc plate.
Due to corrosion, the thickness and friction coefficient of disc plate change.
If a vehicle is parked in damp conditions for a long time, corrosion occurs on the friction surface of disc plate.
The thickness of corrosion is uneven and sometimes appears like a wave pattern, which changes the friction coefficient
and causes a reaction force.
Inspection and repair procedure
Lateral runout inspection
1. To secure the disc plate and the hub, insert the washer (thickness 10 mm {0.39 in}, inner diameter more than 12 mm
{0.47 in}) between each hub bolt and the hub nut, then tighten all the hub nuts.
NOTE:
The component parts of the SST (49 B017 001 or 49 G019 003) can be used as a suitable washer.
2. After tightening all the hub nuts to the same torque, put the dial gauge on the friction surface of disc plate 10 mm {0.12
0.28 in} from the disc plate edge.
3. Rotate the disc plate one time and measure the runout.
Front disc plate runout limit
0.05 mm {0.002 in}
Thickness variation inspection
1. Clean the disc plate-to-pad friction surface using a brake cleaner.

2. Measure the points indicated in the illustration using a caliper (micrometer).
3. Subtract the minimum value from the maximum, and if the result is not within specification, machine the disc plate using a
lathe.
Thickness variation limit
0.015 mm {0.00059 in}
WARNING:
Do not exceed minimum disc plate thickness.
Disc Plate Thickness Inspection

CAUTION:
Excessive runout may result if the disc plate is removed from the vehicle then machined. Machine the disc plate while
installed on the vehicle.
1. Measure the thickness of the disc plate.
If the thickness is not within the specification, replace the disc plate.
Minimum front disc plate thickness
22 mm {0.87 in}
Minimum front disc plate thickness after machining using a brake lathe on-vehicle
22.8 mm {0.90 in}
Disc Pad Thickness Inspection

1. Jack up the front of the vehicle and support it with safety stands.
2. Remove the wheel and tires.
3. Verify the remaining thickness of the pads.
Minimum front disc pad thickness
2.0 mm {0.079 in} min.
4. Replace the pads as a set (right and left wheels) if either one is at or less than the minimum thickness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. After installation, depress the brake pedal a few times, then verify that the brakes do not drag.
1 Brake hose
2 Bolt
3 Caliper
4 Disc pad
5 Shim
6 Guide plate
7 Bolt
8 Mounting support
9 Screw
10Disc plate

2. Install the piston using the SST.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CALIPER (FRONT) DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1Bleeder cap
2Bleeder screw
3Bolt
4Sleeve
5Piston
(See Piston Disassembly Note.)
6Dust seal
7Piston seal
8Caliper body
Piston Disassembly Note

CAUTION:
The piston could be damaged if blown out with great force. Blow the compressed air slowly
to prevent the piston from suddenly popping out.
1. Insert a piece of wood in the caliper as shown in the figure, and then blow compressed air
through the bleeder screw hole to remove the piston from the caliper body.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BRAKE PEDAL INSPECTION
Brake Pedal Height Inspection

1. Measure the distance from the center of the upper surface of the pedal pad to the insulator
and verify that it is as specified.
If not within the specification, adjust the pedal height.

Brake pedal height (reference value)
175 mm {6.89 in}
Brake Pedal Height Adjustment

CAUTION:
The brake switch may not operate normally after adjusting the pedal height. Whenever
adjusting the pedal height, replace the brake switch with a new one.
The interlock cable may not operate normally after adjusting the pedal height. Whenever
adjusting the pedal height, refer to the interlock cable installation note. (See SELECTOR
LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Loosen the locknut and turn the push rod to adjust the pedal height.
2. Tighten the locknut.

Tightening torque
15.721.6 Nm {1.612.20 Kgfm, 11.615.9 ftlbf}
3. After adjustment, inspect the pedal play.
Brake Pedal Play Inspection

1. Depress the pedal several times to release the vacuum in the power brake unit.
2. Gently depress the pedal by hand, and measure the pedal play.
If not within the specification, inspect the wear of the clevis pin and replace it if
there is any malfunction.
Brake pedal play
25 mm {0.080.19 in}
NOTE:
If there is no malfunction in the clevis pin, there is a possibility that the power
brake unit has some malfunction. Verify that there are no malfunctions, and
replace it if necessary.
Pedal-to-floor Clearance Inspection

1. Start the engine and depress the pedal with a pedal force of 147 N {15.0 Kgf, 33.0 lbf}.
2. Measure the distance between the pedal pad center and the insulator, and verify that it is as
specified.
If the pedal-to-floor clearance is less than the specification, check for air in the
brake system.
Brake pedal-to-floor clearance (Brake pedal when depressed at 147 N {15.0
Kgf, 33.0 lbf})
98.6 mm {3.88 in} or more
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
The clearance between the brake switch and the brake pedal is automatically adjusted to the correct amount when
the brake switch connector is connected after the brake switch has been properly installed. If the brake switch is
not properly installed or the connector is connected before installation, the clearance may be incorrect, causing a
brake light malfunction. Therefore, always verify that the brake switch is properly installed before connecting the
connector.
Once the brake switch clearance has automatically been adjusted, it cannot be adjusted again. Therefore, replace
the switch with a new one when replacing the power brake unit or the pedal, or performing any procedure that
changes the pedal stroke.
When replacing the brake pedal (AT), it is possible that the installation of the interlock cable could become
defective. Always refer to the interlock cable installation note when replacing the brake pedal. (See SELECTOR
LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NOTE:
When the brake switch connector is connected to the brake switch, the clearance between the pedal and the brake
switch is adjusted automatically. However, this mechanism will only function one time.
1Brake switch connector

(See Brake Switch Connector Installation Note.)
2Snap pin
3Clevis pin
4Brake switch
(See Brake Switch Installation Note.)
5Interlock cable (AT)
(See SELECTOR LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6Brake pedal
7Pedal pad
Brake Switch Installation Note

1. Install the new brake switch to the brake pedal (MT) or the interlock cable (AT), and secure it by turning it clockwise
45 (AT) or counterclockwise 45 (MT).
Brake Switch Connector Installation Note

1. Inspect the brake pedal. (See BRAKE PEDAL INSPECTION.)
2. With the brake pedal in its original position, install the brake switch to the brake switch connector.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Brake fluid level sensor connector

2Hose (MT)
3Brake pipe
4Nut
5Master cylinder
(See Master Cylinder Installation Note.)
6Reserve tank
7Front seal
Master Cylinder Installation Note

CAUTION:
If the master cylinder is installed at an angle, the master cylinder piston may push against
the push rod retainer of the power brake unit causing poor air bleeding, brake drag, or
other malfunctions. Be sure to install the master cylinder at a perpendicular angle to the
power brake unit.
1. Install the SST to the power brake unit and tighten to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
11.814.6 Nm {121148 kgfcm, 105129 inlbf}
2. Apply a vacuum of 66.7 kPa {500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg} to the power brake unit using a
vacuum gauge.
NOTE:
Use any commercially available vacuum gauge.
3. Using calipers, measure dimension L as shown in the figure.
Standard L dimension
22.923.2 mm {0.9020.913 in}
4. If dimension L is not within the standard, remove the SST (49 G043 001) and, while stopping
the push rod rotation with the SST (49 E043 003A), adjust the push rod length with the SST
(49 B043 004).
5. Switch the SSTs and remeasure dimension L.
6. Install the front seal to the power brake unit.

7. Install the master cylinder to the power brake unit.
CAUTION:
After installing the master cylinder, if air still exists in the brake lines even after
performing brake bleeding, brake drag occurs, or other malfunctions are
present, it is possible that the master cylinder piston is jammed against the
push rod retainer of the power brake unit. If air cannot be bled completely,
brake drag exists, or other malfunctions occur, remove the master cylinder and
reinstall it properly.
Do not install the master cylinder with the front seal lip protruding. Doing so will
create a vacuum leak and loss of braking force.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level sensor connector from the master cylinder.
2. Inspect for continuity according to fluid level between the brake fluid level sensor terminals.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the reserve tank.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VACUUM LINE INSPECTION
1. Remove the vacuum hose between the power brake unit and the intake manifold using pliers.
2. Verify that air can be blown from the power brake unit side of the vacuum hose towards the
intake manifold side, and that air cannot be blown in the opposite direction.
If there is any malfunction of the inner check valve, replace it together with the
vacuum hose as a single unit.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER BRAKE UNIT INSPECTION
NOTE:
The following inspection methods are simple inspection methods to judge the function of
the power brake unit.
If there is any malfunction in the power brake unit, replace the power brake unit as a
single component.
Without Using SST
Operation inspection
1. Depress the pedal several times with the engine stopped.

2. With the pedal depressed, start the engine.
3. If the pedal moves down slightly immediately after engine start, the unit is normal.
Vacuum function inspection

2. Stop the engine after driving the vehicle for 12 min .
3. Depress the pedal with normal force.
4. If the first pedal stroke is long and becomes shorter with subsequent strokes, the unit is
normal.
If a malfunction is found, inspect for damage to or improper installation of the
check valve and vacuum hose. After repairing, inspect again.
Vacuum loss function inspection
2. Depress the pedal with normal force.

3. Stop the engine under this condition.
4. Hold the pedal depressed for approx. 30 s.
5. If the pedal height does not change during this time, the unit is normal.
When using SST

NOTE:
When performing the inspection using the SST, inspect the brake pipe on the left or right
front wheel.
The following procedure and figures show the inspection for the brake pipe on the left
front wheel.
Preparation before inspection
1. Loosen the brake pipe flare nut using the commercially available flare nut wrench.
2. Disconnect the brake pipe.

3. Remove the clamp and disconnect the brake hose.
4. Install the SSTs to the brake pipe as shown in the figure.
5. Perform air bleeding of the SST and brake line from bleeder screw A.
6. Install the pedal force gauge to the brake pedal.
7. Connect the vacuum piping to the vacuum gauge.
Checking for vacuum loss (loaded condition)

2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 200 N {20.4 kgf, 44.9 lbf}.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, turn off the engine when the vacuum gauge reaches 68 kPa
{510 mmHg, 20.1 inHg}.
4. Within 15 s right after stopping the engine, measure the lowest amount of vacuum.
5. If the lowest amount is 3.3 kPa {25 mmHg, 1.0 inHg} or less, the system is normal.
Lack of hydraulic pressure inspection
1. With the engine stopped and the vacuum amount at 0 kPa {0 mmHg, 0 inHg} if the pedal
force and fluid pressure correlation is within the specification, the system is normal. Master
cylinder fluid pressure
Vacuum amount at 0 kPa {0 mmHg, 0 inHg}
Pedal force (N {kgf, lbf}) Fluid pressure (kPa {kgf/cm 2 , psi})

200 {20.4, 44.9}
606 {6.18, 87.9} or more
Hydraulic pressure inspection
1. Start the engine and when the vacuum amount reaches 66.7 kPa {500 mmHg, 19.7
inHg}, depress the brake pedal.
2. At this time, apply the indicated pedal force and if the fluid pressure is within the
specification, the unit is normal.
Master cylinder fluid pressure
Vacuum amount at 66.7 kPa {500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg}
200 {20.4, 44.9}
7,310 {74.54, 1,060} or more
Procedure after inspection
1. Remove the SSTs after the inspection and install the brake hose, clamp and brake pipe to
their original positions.
2. Perform air bleeding of the brake line. (See AIR BLEEDING.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER BRAKE UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Once the brake switch clearance has automatically been adjusted, it cannot be adjusted again. Therefore,
replace the switch with a new one when replacing the power brake unit or performing any procedure that
changes the pedal stroke.
2. Remove the front suspension tower bar. (MT) (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[MT].)
3. Remove the master cylinder. (See MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the brake switch. (See BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. After installation, perform brake pedal inspection. (See BRAKE PEDAL INSPECTION.)
1Brake pipe
2Vacuum hose
3Snap pin
4Clevis pin
5Nut
6Power brake unit
7Gasket
8Fork
9Locknut
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION
CAUTION:
If the brake switch is removed from the brake pedal or the interlock unit, its proper
functioning cannot be guaranteed when reinstalled. Therefore, inspect the brake switch
with it still installed, or replace the brake switch if it is removed.
1. Verify continuity as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the brake switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
1Parking brake lever

(See PARKING BRAKE LEVER INSPECTION.)
(See PARKING BRAKE LEVER ADJUSTMENT.)
(See PARKING BRAKE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2Parking brake switch
(See PARKING BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector.
2. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the parking brake switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PARKING BRAKE LEVER INSPECTION
Stroke Inspection
1. Depress the brake pedal several times.
2. Pull the parking brake lever 23 times .
3. Inspect the parking brake stroke by slowly pulling at point A 50 mm {1.97 in} from the end
of the parking brake lever with a force of 98 N {10 kgf, 22 lbf} and counting the number of
notches (clicking sound).
If not within the specification, adjust the parking brake lever.

Parking brake lever stroke when pulled at 98 N {10 kgf, 22 lbf}
13 notches
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PARKING BRAKE LEVER ADJUSTMENT
1. Depress the brake pedal several times.
2. Remove the service hole cover of the rear console.
3. Turn the adjusting nut and adjust the parking brake lever.
4. After adjustment, pull the parking brake lever one notch and verify that the parking brake
warning light illuminates.
5. Verify that the rear brakes do not drag.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PARKING BRAKE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the front console.
5. After installation, inspect the parking brake stroke and adjust if necessary.
1Parking brake switch connector

2Adjusting nut
3Parking brake lever

4Parking brake switch
5Clip
6Rear parking brake cable
7Front parking brake cable
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ABS SYSTEM INSPECTION
ABS HYDRAULIC UNIT ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
Preparation
1. Verify that battery is fully charged.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and verify that the ABS warning light goes out
after approx. 3 s.
4. Jack up the vehicle and support it evenly on safety stands.
5. Shift to neutral.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Verify that all four wheels rotate.
8. Rotate the wheels by hand, and verify there is no brake drag.
If there is any brake drag, perform regular brake inspection.
If there is no brake drag, perform ABS HU/CM operation inspection.
Operation inspection
1. Perform Preparation.
3. Set up an active command mode inspection according to the combination of commands

below.
Command name
Operation condition
PMP_MOTORRF_OUTLETRF_INLETABS_POWER
Brake pressure
retention
OFF
OFF
ON
Command transmission
type
ON
Manual
Brake pressure
reduction
ON
ON
ON
ON
The chart above shows an example of a right front wheel inspection.

CAUTION:
To protect the ABS HU/CM, the solenoid valve and the pump motor used during
active command mode stay on for only 10 s or less each time they are switched
on.
NOTE:
When working with two people, one should press on the brake pedal, and the
other should attempt to rotate the wheel being inspected.
4. Send the command while depressing the brake pedal and attempting to rotate the wheel
being inspected.
5. Performing the inspection above determines the following:
The ABS HU/CM brake lines are normal.
The ABS HU/CM hydraulic system is not significantly abnormal (including inside
ABS HU/CM).
The ABS HU/CM internal electrical parts (solenoid, motor and other parts) are
normal.
The ABS HU/CM output system wiring harnesses (solenoid valve, relay system)
are normal.
However, the following items cannot be verified.
Malfunction of ABS HU/CM input system wiring
harnesses and parts
Extremely small leaks in the ABS HU/CM
internal hydraulic system
Malfunction with intermittent occurrence of
the above items
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

1Connector
2Bolt
3Rear ABS wheel-speed sensor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NOTE:
If there is any malfunction in the front ABS wheel-speed sensor unit, replace the wheel hub
component. (See WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1. Slightly bend back the front mudguard. (See FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Connector
2Bolt
3Front ABS wheel-speed sensor wiring harness
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ABS HU/CM INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the ABS HU/CM connector. (See ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Attach the tester lead to the ABS HU/CM harness side connector, then inspect voltage,
continuity or resistance according to the standard (reference value) on the table.
Standard (Reference Value)
Connected Measured Measured terminal

Terminal Signal name
(measured
Standard
to
item
condition)
Inspection item(s)
ARR ABS wheel- Continuity

RR wheel- RR ABS
speed sensor wheel-speed Continuity speed sensor
detected
sensor
connector terminal B
(signal)
Wiring
harness (A
RR ABS
wheel-speed
sensor
connector
terminal B)
Wiring
BRR ABS wheel- Continuity

RR wheel- RR ABS
detected
sensor
connector terminal A
(ground)
harness (B
RR ABS
wheel-speed
sensor
connector
terminal A)
LR ABS
CLR ABS wheel- Continuity
LR wheelspeed sensor wheel-speed Continuity speed sensor
detected
sensor
(signal)
Wiring
harness (C
LR ABS
wheel-speed
sensor
connector
terminal B)
RF ABS
DRF ABS wheel- Continuity
RF wheelspeed sensor wheel-speed Continuity speed sensor
detected
sensor
(ground)
Wiring
harness (D
RF ABS
wheel-speed
sensor
connector
terminal B)
LF ABS
ELF ABS wheelLF wheelContinuity
detected
sensor
(ground)
Wiring
harness (E
LF ABS
wheel-speed
sensor
connector
terminal B)
LR ABS
FLR ABS wheelLR wheelContinuity
detected
sensor
(ground)
Wiring
harness (F
LR ABS
wheel-speed
sensor
connector
terminal A)
RF ABS
GRF ABS wheel- Continuity
RF wheelspeed sensor wheel-speed Continuity speed sensor
detected
sensor
(signal)
Wiring
harness (G
RF ABS
wheel-speed
sensor
connector
terminal A)
Wiring
LF ABS
ILF ABS wheelLF wheelContinuity
detected
sensor
(single)
harness (I
LF ABS
wheel-speed
sensor
connector
terminal A)
CAN_H
DLC-2
(CAN_H)
ODLC-2 terminal
Continuity CAN_H
Continuity
detected
Wiring
harness (O
DLC-2
terminal
CAN_H)
CAN_L
DLC-2
(CAN_L)
RDLC-2 terminal
Continuity CAN_L
Continuity
detected
Wiring
harness (R
DLC-2
terminal CAN
L)
Audio unit
Vaudio unit
Wiring
harness (V
audio unit)
Wiring
Carnavigation
unit
Position
memory
control
module
V
Vehicle
speed output
KLN
Wiring
harness (V
position
memory
control
module)
Vposition memory
control module
Continuity
detected
Continuity
Auto
light/wiper
control
module
Vauto light/wiper
control module
Wiring
harness (V
auto
light/wiper
control
module)
Climate
control unit
Vclimate control
unit
Wiring
harness (V
climate
control unit)
Vauto leveling
control module
Wiring
harness (V
auto leveling
control
module)
Auto leveling
control
module
harness (V
car-navigation
unit)
Vcar-navigation
unit
DLC-2 (KLN) Continuity XDLC-2 terminal

KLN
Continuity
detected
Wiring
harness (X
DLC-2
terminal KLN)
YAC
(Brake pedal
depressed with
ignition switch at
ON)
Y
B+
Wiring
harness (Y
brake switch)
Brake switch Brake switch Voltage

YAC
(Brake pedal not
depressed with
ignition switch at
ON)
Brake switch
1 V or
less
Power supply
(system)
Ignition
switch
Ignition switch at
ON
B+
Voltage
Ignition switch is off. 1 V or
less
AA
Power supply
Voltage Under any condition
B+
Wiring
harness
(AAbattery)
(ABS motor Battery

operation)
B+
Wiring
harness (AB
battery)
Ground pointContinuity ACground point
Continuity
detected
Wiring
harness (AC
ground point)
Ground pointContinuity ADground point
Continuity
detected
Wiring
harness (AD
ground
point)
(solenoid)
Ground
AC
AD
Battery
Power supply
AB
Wiring
harness (Z
ignition
switch)
(ABS
system)
Ground
(ABS motor)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ABS LOCATION INDEX
1ABS HU/CM
2Front ABS wheel-speed sensor

(See FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION.)
(See REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

Installation Visual Inspection

a. Excessive looseness or play of the rear ABS wheel-speed sensor
b. Deformation of the rear ABS wheel-speed sensor
c. Deformation or damage of the rear ABS sensor rotor
Clearance Inspection
1. Verify the clearance between the rear ABS sensor rotor and the rear ABS wheel-speed sensor.
If there is any malfunction, check for improper installation, and replace if
necessary.
Clearance
0.31.1 mm {0.0120.043 in}
Sensor Output Value Inspection
CAUTION:
Resistance inspection using other testers may cause damage to the ABS wheel-speed
sensor internal circuit. Be sure to use the M-MDS to inspect the ABS wheel-speed sensor.
3. Select the following PIDs using the M-MDS:

LR_WSPD
(LR wheel-speed sensor)
RR_WSPD
(RR wheel-speed sensor)
4. Start the engine and drive the vehicle.
5. Verify that the display of the M-MDS shows the same value as the speedometer.
If there is any malfunction, replace the rear ABS wheel-speed sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >


a. Excessive play of the front ABS wheel-speed sensor
b. Deformation of the front ABS wheel-speed sensor

CAUTION:

LF_WSPD
(LF wheel-speed sensor)

RF_WSPD
(RF wheel-speed sensor)
If there is any malfunction, replace the front ABS wheel-speed sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
The internal parts of the ABS HU/CM could be damaged if dropped. Be careful not to drop the ABS HU/CM.
Replace the ABS HU/CM if it is subjected to an impact.
2. Remove the front suspension tower bar. (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].)
(See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AT].)
1Connector
(See Connector Removal Note.)
(See Connector Installation Note.)
2Brake pipe
3Nut
4ABS HU/CM
(See ABS HU/CM Removal/Installation Note.)
5Stud
Connector Removal Note

1. Pull the lock lever up, and then remove the connector.
ABS HU/CM Removal/Installation Note

1. When removing/installing the ABS HU/CM from/to the vehicle, attach a strip of protective tape on the ABS HU/CM
connector to prevent brake fluid from entering.
Connector Installation Note

1. After connecting the connector, verify that the lock lever is completely pushed in.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ABS SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

1Connector
2Bolt
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >


a. Excessive looseness or play of the rear ABS wheel-speed sensor
b. Deformation of the rear ABS wheel-speed sensor
c. Deformation or damage of the rear ABS sensor rotor
Clearance Inspection
1. Verify the clearance between the rear ABS sensor rotor and the rear ABS wheel-speed sensor.
If there is any malfunction, check for improper installation, and replace if
necessary.
Clearance
0.81.6 mm {0.040.06 in}

CAUTION:

LR_WSPD
(LR wheel-speed sensor)
RR_WSPD
(RR wheel-speed sensor)
If there is any malfunction, replace the rear ABS wheel-speed sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

1Connector
2Bolt
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >


a. Excessive play of the front ABS wheel-speed sensor
b. Deformation of the front ABS wheel-speed sensor
Clearance inspection
1. Remove the front ABS wheel-speed sensor.
2. Measure the distance between the front ABS wheel-speed sensor installation surface and the
front ABS sensor rotor. This is dimension A.
3. Calculate the clearance between the front ABS wheel-speed sensor and the front ABS sensor
rotor using the following formula:

Clearance (mm {in}) = A-15 mm {0.59 in}
4. Verify that the clearance between the front ABS sensor rotor and the front ABS wheel-speed
sensor is as indicated below.
If there is any malfunction, verify the installation condition and replace if
necessary.
Clearance
0.31.0 mm {0.020.03 in}

CAUTION:

LF_WSPD
(LF wheel-speed sensor)
RF_WSPD
(RF wheel-speed sensor)
If there is any malfunction, replace the front ABS wheel-speed sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL LOCATION INDEX
1DSC HU/CM
(See DSC SYSTEM INSPECTION.)
(See DSC CONFIGURATION.)
(See FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION.)
(See REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION.)

4Combined sensor
(See COMBINED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See COMBINED SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
5Brake fluid pressure sensor (built-into DSC HU/CM)
(See BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION.)
6Steering angle sensor
(See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION.)
(See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
7DSC OFF switch
(See DSC OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See DSC OFF SWITCH INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DSC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DSC SYSTEM INSPECTION
Preparation
1. Verify that battery is fully charged.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and verify that the ABS warning light goes out
after approx. 3 s.
4. Jack up the vehicle and support it evenly on safety stands.
5. Shift to the N position.
6. Verify that all four wheels rotate.
7. Rotate the inspected wheels by hand, and verify there is no brake drag.
If there is any brake drag, perform regular brake inspection.
If there is no brake drag, perform DSC HU/CM operation inspection.
ABS Control Inspection


below. Brake pressure retention
Inspected wheels
Command name
LF RF LR RR
V_TRC_L
V_TRC_R
OFF
V_STB_L
V_STB_R
LF_INLET
ON
OFF
LF_OUTLET
OFF
LR_INLET
ON
OFF
LR_OUTLET
RF_INLET
ON
OFF
RF_OUTLET
OFF
RR_INLET
ON
OFF
RR_OUTLET
OFF
PMP_MOTOR
Brake pressure reduction
Inspected wheels
Command name
LF RF LR RR
V_TRC_L
V_TRC_R
OFF
V_STB_L
V_STB_R
LF_INLET
OFF
ON
LF_OUTLET
OFF
LR_INLET
ON OFF
LR_OUTLET
RF_INLET
OFF ON
RF_OUTLET
OFF
RR_INLET
OFF
RR_OUTLET
PMP_MOTOR
CAUTION:
ON
ON
To protect the DSC HU/CM, the solenoid valve and the pump motor used during
on.
NOTE:
When working with two people, one should press on the brake pedal, and the
other should attempt to rotate the wheel being inspected.
4. Send the command while depressing on the brake pedal and attempting to rotate the wheel
being inspected.
5. While brake pressure is maintained and a DSC HU/CM operation click sound is heard, confirm
that the wheel does not rotate. While brake pressure is being reduced and an DSC HU/CM
operation click sound is heard, confirm that the wheel rotates.
Performing the inspection above determines the following:
The DSC HU/CM brake lines are normal.
The DSC HU/CM hydraulic system is not significantly abnormal
(including DSC HU/CM).
The DSC HU/CM internal electrical parts (solenoid, motor and
other parts) are normal.
The DSC unit and DSC HU/CM output system wiring harnesses
(solenoid valve, relay system) are normal.
Malfunction with intermittent occurrence of the above items
Malfunction of DSC HU/CM input system wiring harnesses and
parts
Extremely small leaks in the DSC HU/CM internal hydraulic
system
DSC Control Inspection


below.
CAUTION:
To protect the DSC HU/CM, the solenoid valve and the pump motor used during
on.
Inspected wheels
Command name Understeer control inhibited Oversteer control inhibited
LF
RF
LR
RR
V_TRC_L
ON
OFF
ON
V_TRC_R
OFF
ON
OFF
V_STB_L
OFF
V_STB_R
LF_INLET
ON
OFF
LF_OUTLET
OFF
LR_INLET
ON
OFF
LR_OUTLET
RF_INLET
ON
RF_OUTLET
OFF
RR_INLET
ON
RR_OUTLET
OFF
PMP_MOTOR
OFF
OFF
ON
4. Send the command while rotating the wheel being inspected by hand in a forward direction.
5. Confirm that the wheel does not rotate easily while a DSC HU/CM operation click sound is
heard.
Performing the inspection above determines the following:
The DSC HU/CM brake lines are normal.
The DSC HU/CM hydraulic system is not significantly abnormal
(including DSC HU/CM).
The DSC HU/CM internal electrical parts (solenoid, motor and
other parts) are normal.
The DSC unit and DSC HU/CM output system wiring harnesses
(solenoid valve, relay system) are normal.
Malfunction with intermittent occurrence of the above items
Malfunction of DSC HU/CM input system wiring harnesses and
parts
Extremely small leaks in the DSC HU/CM internal hydraulic
system
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DSC CONFIGURATION
1. Select Module Programming.
1. Select Programming.
3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
1. Select Programmable Module Installation.
2. Select ABS.
4. Perform the configuration according to the directions on the screen.
5. Retrieve DTCs by the M-MDS, then verify that there is no DTC present.
If a DTC (s) is detected, perform the applicable DTC inspection. (See ONBOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When replacing the DSC HU/CM, the configuration procedure must be done before removing the DSC HU/CM. If the
configuration is not completed before removing the DSC HU/CM, DSC will not work properly after installation of the
DSC HU/CM.
The DSC may not function normally when the DSC HU/CM is replaced. After installation, always perform the
initialization procedures for the combined sensor and the steering angle sensor.
The internal parts of the DSC HU/CM could be damaged if dropped. Be careful not to drop the DSC HU/CM. Replace
the DSC HU/CM if it is subjected to an impact.
2. Remove the front suspension tower bar. (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].) (See
FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [AT].)
5. Configurate the DSC HU/CM. (See DSC CONFIGURATION.)
6. After installation, perform the combined sensor initialization procedure. (See COMBINED SENSOR INITIALIZATION
PROCEDURE.)
7. After installation, perform the steering angle sensor initialization procedure. (See STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
1DSC HU/CM connector

(See DSC HU/CM Connector Removal Note.)
(See DSC HU/CM Connector Installation Note.)
2Brake pipe
(See Brake Pipe Removal Note.)
(See Brake Pipe Installation Note.)
3Nut
4DSC HU/CM
DSC HU/CM Connector Removal Note

1. Pull the lock lever up in the direction of the arrow.
2. Pull the connector toward the vehicle rear and remove it.
Brake Pipe Removal Note

1. Place an alignment mark on the brake pipe and DSC HU/CM.
2. Apply protective tape to the connector to prevent brake fluid from entering.
3. Remove the brake pipe.
Brake Pipe Installation Note

1. Align the marks made before removal and install the brake pipe to the DSC HU/CM and brake pipe joint referring to the
figure.
2. Tighten the brake pipe to the specified torque using the commercially available flare nut wrench.
DSC HU/CM Connector Installation Note

1. After connecting the connector, verify that the lock lever is completely pushed in.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DSC HU/CM INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the DSC HU/CM connector. (See DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Attach the tester lead to the DSC HU/CM harness side connector, then inspect voltage, continuity or resistance
according to the standard (reference value) on the table.
Standard (Reference Value)
Ground
(ABS motor)
Connected to Measured
item
Ground point
Measured terminal
(measured condition)
Continuity Aground point
Standard
Inspection item(s)
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (A
ground point)
Power supply
B
(ABS motor
operation)
Battery
B+
Wiring harness (B
battery)
Battery
B+
Wiring harness (C
battery)
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (D
ground point)
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (ELF

ABS wheel-speed sensor
Power supply
C
(solenoid
operation)
Ground
(DSC system)
Ground point
Continuity Dground point
ELF ABS wheel-speed

LF wheel-speed LF ABS wheelContinuity
sensor connector
sensor (ground) speed sensor
terminal B
connector terminal B)
FLF ABS wheel-speed

LF wheel-speed LF ABS wheelContinuity
sensor connector
sensor (single) speed sensor
terminal A
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (FLF

connector terminal A)
GLR ABS wheel-speed Continuity

LR wheel-speed LR ABS wheelContinuity
sensor connector
detected
sensor (signal) speed sensor
terminal B
Wiring harness (GLR

HLR ABS wheel-speed Continuity

LR wheel-speed LR ABS wheelContinuity
sensor connector
detected
terminal A
Wiring harness (HLR

IRR ABS wheel-speed

RR wheel-speed RR ABS wheelContinuity
sensor connector
(signal)
speed sensor
terminal B
Wiring harness (IRR

Power supply
(system)
Ignition switch
Continuity
detected
B+
Wiring harness (J
ignition switch)
Ignition switch is off.
1 V or
less
Voltage
LRR ABS wheel-speed Continuity

RR wheel-speed RR ABS wheelContinuity sensor connector
detected
terminal A
Wiring harness (LRR

MRF ABS wheel-speed Continuity

RF wheel-speed RF ABS wheelContinuity
sensor connector
detected
sensor (signal) speed sensor
terminal A
Wiring harness (MRF

Nground point
(Brake pedal
N
Brake switch
Brake switch
Voltage
B+
Brake switch
depressed)
Nground point
(Brake pedal not
depressed)
1 V or
less
ORF ABS wheel-speed Continuity

RF wheel-speed RF ABS wheelContinuity sensor connector
detected
terminal B
DSC OFF switch DSC OFF switch Continuity
KLN
DLC-2 (KLN)
PDSC OFF switch

connector terminal C
Continuity QDLC-2 terminal KLN
Wiring harness (N
brake switch)
Wiring harness (ORF

Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (PDSC

OFF switch connector
terminal C)
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (Q
DLC-2 terminal KLN)
Vehicle speed
output
Audio unit
Taudio unit
Wiring harness (T
audio unit)
Car-navigation
unit
Tcar-navigation unit
Wiring harness (Tcarnavigation unit)
Position
memory control
module
Tposition memory
control module
Wiring harness (T
position memory control
module)
Continuity
detected
Continuity
Auto light/wiper
control module
Tauto light/wiper
control module
Wiring harness (Tauto

light/wiper control
module)
Climate control
unit
Tclimate control unit
Wiring harness (T
climate control unit)
Auto leveling
control module
Tauto leveling control

module
Wiring harness (Tauto

leveling control module)
CAN_L
DLC-2 (CAN_L) Continuity WDLC-2 terminal

CAN_L
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (W
DLC-2 terminal CAN_L)
CAN_H
DLC-2 (CAN_H) Continuity XDLC-2 terminal

CAN_H
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (XDLC2 terminal CAN_H)
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
AM
AN
AO
AP
AQ
AR
CAN2_H
Combined
sensor
ARcombined sensor
Continuity connector terminal C
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (AR

combined sensor
connector terminal C)
AS
CAN2_L
Combined
sensor
AScombined sensor
Continuity connector terminal B
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (AS

combined sensor
AT
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COMBINED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
The internal parts of the combined sensor could be damaged if dropped. Be careful not to
drop the combined sensor. Replace the combined sensor if it is subjected to an impact.
Also, do not use an impact wrench or other similar air tools when removing/installing the
sensor.
1. Remove the rear console. (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Combined sensor connector

2Nut
3Combined sensor

4. After installation, perform the combined sensor initialization procedure. (See COMBINED
SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COMBINED SENSOR INSPECTION
3. Select the following PIDs, then inspect the lateral acceleration speed and the yaw rate.
LAT_ACCL: (lateral acceleration speed)
YAW_RATE: (yaw rate)
a. Lateral acceleration speed inspection
i. Verify the LAT_ACCL change when the combined sensor is tilted to the
left and right.
If there is any malfunction, replace the combined sensor.

Standard
When the sensor is tilted to the right:
LAT_ACCL changes negatively.
When the sensor is tilted to the left:
LAT_ACCL changes positively.
b. Yaw rate inspection
i. Verify the YAW_RATE change when the combined sensor is rotated to
the left and right.
If there is any malfunction, replace the combined sensor.

Standard
When the sensor is rotated to the right:
YAW_RATE changes negatively.
When the sensor is rotated to the left:
YAW_RATE changes positively.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COMBINED SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
WARNING:
Unless the initialization procedure of the combined sensor is completed, the DSC will not
operate, causing an unexpected accident. Therefore, always perform the initialization
procedure to ensure DSC operation if the combined sensor and DSC HU/CM have been
removed or replaced.
1. Inspect the wheel alignment and inflation pressure.
If there is any malfunction, adjust the applicable part.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Select Chassis.
Select ABS/DSC.
Select Sensor Initialization
1. Select All Tests and Calibrations.

2. Select Sensor Initialization.
7. Drive the vehicle.
8. After 5 min or more of driving, verify that the DSC system is normal.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION
NOTE:
The brake fluid pressure sensor is integrated into the DSC HU/CM and installed to the
brake line of LFRR brake system. Therefore, perform the brake fluid pressure sensor
inspection with the SST installed to the brake pipe on the left front wheel.
2. Loosen the brake pipe flare nut using the commercially available flare nut wrench.
3. Disconnect the brake pipe.

4. Remove the clamp and disconnect the brake hose.
5. Install the SSTs to the brake pipe as shown in the figure.
6. Perform air bleeding of the SST and brake line from bleeder screw A.
8. Select the MCYLI P PID. (See ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
(DSC)].)
10. Depress the brake pedal, and verify that the fluid pressure value of the SST (gauge) and
the value shown on the M-MDS are equal.
If the fluid pressure values are different, replace the DSC HU/CM. (See DSC
HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11. Remove the SSTs after the inspection and install the brake hose, clamp and brake pipe to
their original positions.
12. Perform air bleeding of the brake line. (See AIR BLEEDING.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The steering angle sensor is integrated into the combination switch to ensure sensor
performance. Replace the steering angle sensor and combination switch as a single unit.
(See COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Remove the column cover.
2. Measure the voltage between steering angle sensor terminal B and ground.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the wiring harness between steering angle
sensor terminal B and battery, then repair or replace if necessary.
Standard voltage
B+
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then measure the voltage between steering angle
sensor terminal A and ground.
sensor terminal A and ignition switch, then repair or replace if necessary.
Standard voltage
B+
4. Measure the voltage between steering angle sensor terminal H and the ground.
sensor terminal H and ground point, then repair or replace if necessary.
Standard voltage
0V
7. Select the SWA_POS PID.

8. Verify the SWA_POS changes when the steering wheel is turned to the left and right.
If there is any malfunction, replace the steering angle sensor.
Standard
When the steering wheel is turned to the right:
SWA_POS changes positively.
When the steering wheel is turned to the left:
SWA_POS changes negatively.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
WARNING:
Unless the initialization procedure of the steering angle sensor is completed, the DSC will
not operate, causing an unexpected accident. Therefore, always perform the initialization
procedure to ensure DSC operation if the power supply to the steering angle sensor has
been cut off due to disconnection of the steering angle sensor connector or negative
battery cable, or any other cause.
NOTE:
The steering angle sensor requires battery power to store the steering angle initial
position. Therefore when the battery power supply is cut off, a stored steering angle initial
position is cleared.
1. Inspect the wheel alignment, inflation pressure, and the installation condition of the steering
wheel.
If there is any malfunction, adjust the applicable part.
4. Confirm that the DSC indicator light illuminates and that the DSC OFF light flashes.
5. Turn the steering wheel to full right lock, then turn it to full left lock.
6. Confirm that the DSC OFF light goes out.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position again, and confirm that the DSC indicator light
goes out.
If the DSC indicator light does not go out, disconnect the negative battery
cable, and perform the procedure again starting from Step 2 shown above.
9. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 20 km/h {13 mph} or more for 60 s or more, then verify
that the ABS warning light and DSC indicator light do not illuminate.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DSC OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1DSC OFF switch

(See DSC OFF Switch Removal Note.)
2Connector
DSC OFF Switch Removal Note

1. Access the DSC OFF switch from behind of the dashboard, and squeeze the tabs of the
switch.
2. Pull the DSC OFF switch towards the driver"s side to remove it.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DSC OFF SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the DSC OFF switch.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the DSC OFF switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BRAKES TECHNICAL DATA
Item
Brake fluid type
Brake pedal height (reference value)
Brake pedal play
Brake pedal-to-floor clearance (Brake pedal when depressed at 147 N {15.0
Kgf, 33.0 lbf})
Front disc plate runout limit
Minimum front disc plate thickness
Minimum front disc plate thickness after machining using a brake lathe onvehicle
Minimum front disc pad thickness
Rear disc plate runout limit
Minimum rear disc plate thickness
Minimum rear disc plate thickness after machining using a brake lathe onvehicle
Minimum rear disc pad thickness
Specification
SAE J1703, FMVSS 116
DOT-3
175 mm {6.89 in}
25 mm {0.080.19 in}
98.6 mm {3.88 in} or
more
0.05 mm {0.002 in}
22 mm {0.87 in}
22.8 mm {0.90 in}
2.0 mm {0.079 in} min.
0.05 mm {0.002 in}
16 mm {0.63 in}
16.8 mm {0.66 in}
2.0 mm {0.079 in} min.
Parking brake lever stroke when pulled at 98 N {10 kgf, 22 lbf}
13 notches

Vacuum amount at 0 kPa {0 mmHg, 0 inHg}
200 {20.4, 44.9}
606 {6.18, 87.9} or more

Vacuum amount at 66.7 kPa {500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg}
200 {20.4, 44.9}
7,310 {74.54, 1,060} or more
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous

BRAKES SST
49 G043 001
Adjust gauge
49 U043 004A
Oil pressure
gauge
49 0221 600C
Disc brake
expand tool
49 B043
004
49 E043
003A
Socket
wrench
Turning
lock tool
49 U043
005
49 U043
006
Joint
Hose
49 F043
002
Wrench
< Previous
Back to Top
Workshop Manual - Transmission/Transaxle

2011 - RX-8
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [SJ6A-EL]
FOREWORD [SJ6A-EL]
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION [SJ6A-EL]
AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE [SJ6A-EL]
DTC TABLE [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0601 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0603 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0604 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0707 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0708 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0711 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0712 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0713 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0717 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0722 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0751 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0752 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0756 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0757 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0761 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0762 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0766 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0781 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0813 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0819 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0826 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0882 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0961 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0962 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0963 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0969 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0970 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0971 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0973 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0974 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0976 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0977 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0979 [SJ6A-EL]

DTC P0980 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0982 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0983 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0985 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0986 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2719 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2720 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2721 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2757 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2758 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2762 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2763 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2764 [SJ6A-EL]
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
FOREWORD [SJ6A-EL]
BASIC INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM TABLE [SJ6A-EL]
QUICK DIAGNOSIS CHART [SJ6A-EL]
NO.1 VEHICLE DOES NOT MOVE IN D RANGE, OR IN R POSITION [SJ6A-EL]
NO.2 VEHICLE MOVES IN N POSITION [SJ6A-EL]
NO.3 VEHICLE MOVES IN P POSITION, OR PARKING GEAR DOES NOT DISENGAGE WHEN P IS
DISENGAGED [SJ6A-EL]
NO.4 EXCESSIVE CREEP [SJ6A-EL]
NO.5 NO CREEP AT ALL [SJ6A-EL]
NO.6 LOW MAXIMUM SPEED AND POOR ACCELERATION [SJ6A-EL]
NO.7 NO SHIFTING [SJ6A-EL]
NO.8 DOES NOT SHIFT TO 6GR [SJ6A-EL]
NO.9 ABNORMAL SHIFTING [SJ6A-EL]
NO.10 FREQUENT SHIFTING [SJ6A-EL]
NO.11 SHIFT POINT IS HIGH OR LOW [SJ6A-EL]
NO.12 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) NON-OPERATION [SJ6A-EL]
NO.13 NO KICKDOWN [SJ6A-EL]
NO.14 ENGINE FLARES UP OR SLIPS WHEN UPSHIFTING OR DOWNSHIFTING [SJ6A-EL]
NO.15 ENGINE FLARES UP OR SLIPS WHEN ACCELERATING VEHICLE [SJ6A-EL]
NO.16 JUDDER UPON TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) OPERATION [SJ6A-EL]
NO.17 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK FROM N TO D OR N TO R POSITION/RANGE [SJ6A-EL]
NO.18 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK IS GIVEN WHEN UPSHIFTING AND DOWNSHIFTING [SJ6A-EL]
NO.19 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK ON TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) [SJ6A-EL]
NO.20 NOISE OCCURS AT IDLE WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN ALL POSITIONS/RANGES [SJ6A-EL]
NO.21 NOISE OCCURS AT IDLE WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN D RANGE, OR IN R POSITION [SJ6A-EL]
NO.22 NO ENGINE BRAKING [SJ6A-EL]
NO.23 TRANSMISSION OVERHEATS [SJ6A-EL]
NO.24 ENGINE STALLS WHEN SHIFTED TO D RANGE, OR IN R POSITION [SJ6A-EL]
NO.25 ENGINE STALLS WHEN DRIVING AT SLOW SPEED OR STOPPING [SJ6A-EL]
NO.26 STARTER DOES NOT WORK [SJ6A-EL]
NO.27 GEAR POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE IN M RANGE [SJ6A-EL]
NO.28 GEAR POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES IN D RANGE OR P, N, R POSITIONS [SJ6A-EL]
NO.29 DOES NOT UPSHIFT IN M RANGE [SJ6A-EL]
NO.30 DOES NOT DOWNSHIFT IN M RANGE [SJ6A-EL]
NO.31 M RANGE POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE IN M RANGE AND/OR IN D
RANGE WITH DIRECT MODE/M RANGE POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES IN D RANGE WHILE
NOT IN DIRECT MODE [SJ6A-EL]
Clutch
CLUTCH LOCATION INDEX
GENERAL PROCEDURES (CLUTCH)
CLUTCH FLUID INSPECTION
CLUTCH FLUID REPLACEMENT
CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT
CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CLUTCH COVER INSPECTION
CLUTCH DISC INSPECTION
CLUTCH RELEASE COLLAR INSPECTION
PILOT BEARING INSPECTION
FLYWHEEL INSPECTION
Manual Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION LOCATION INDEX [P66M-D]
TRANSMISSION OIL INSPECTION [P66M-D]
TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT [P66M-D]
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D]
INSPECTION AFTER TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION [P66M-D]
OIL SEAL (EXTENSION HOUSING) REPLACEMENT [P66M-D]
NEUTRAL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D]
Automatic Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION LOCATION INDEX [SJ6A-EL]
MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST [SJ6A-EL]
ROAD TEST [SJ6A-EL]
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL]
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) LEVEL ADJUSTMENT [SJ6A-EL]
TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH ADJUSTMENT [SJ6A-EL]
TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
TURBINE SENSOR INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
TURBINE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
TCM INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
TORQUE CONVERTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL [SJ6A-EL]
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
OIL SEAL (OIL PUMP) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL]

OIL SEAL (EXTENSION HOUSING) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL]
OIL COOLER FLUSHING [SJ6A-EL]
OIL COOLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
OIL COOLER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [SJ6A-EL]
DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
Automatic Transmission Shift Mechanism

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SHIFT MECHANISM LOCATION INDEX
SHIFT LOCK INSPECTION
KEY INTERLOCK INSPECTION
INTERLOCK CABLE INSPECTION
INTERLOCK CABLE ADJUSTMENT
SELECTOR LEVER INSPECTION
SELECTOR LEVER COMPONENT INSPECTION
SELECTOR LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
STEERING SHIFT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
STEERING SHIFT SWITCH INSPECTION
Technical Data
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE TECHNICAL DATA
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE SST
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - Transmission/Transaxle

FOREWORD [SJ6A-EL]
When the customer reports vehicle malfunction, check the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
indication, AT warning indication, and diagnostic trouble code (DTC), then diagnose the
malfunction according to following flowchart.
If a DTC exists, diagnose the applicable DTC inspection. (See DTC TABLE [SJ6AEL].)
If a DTC does not exist and the MIL and AT warning lights do not illuminate,
diagnose the applicable symptom troubleshooting. (See SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)
*: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL), AT warning light
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE [SJ6A-EL]
CAUTION:
After repairing a malfunction, perform this procedure to verify that the malfunction has
been corrected.
When this procedure is carried out, be sure to drive the vehicle at lawful speed and pay
attention to the other vehicles.
1. Connect the M-MDS to the vehicle DLC-2.
Select Self Test.
Select Modules.
Select TCM.
Select TCM.
Select Self Test.
5. Perform the following trouble code inspections to ensure that the DTC has been resolved:
DTC No.
inspection
Start the engine.
Warm up the engine
and AT.
P0601,
P0882,
P0973,
P0983,
P2763,
P0603,
P0961,
P0974,
P0985,
P2764
P0604,
P0962,
P0976,
P0986,
P0712,
P0963,
P0977,
P2719,
P0713,
P0969,
P0979,
P2720,
P0717,
P0970,
P0980,
P2721,
P0722,
P0971,
P0982,
P2762,
Drive the vehicle in D

range and make sure
that the gears shift
smoothly from 1GR to
6GR.
Gradually slow down
and stop the vehicle.
Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK
position.
Go to Step 6.
Start the engine.
Warm up the engine
to normal operating
temperature.
P0707
Depress the brake

pedal, and shift the
selector lever from P
to D for 2 s or more.
Gradually slow down
Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK
position.
Go to Step 6.
Start the engine.
Warm up the engine
to normal operating
temperature.
Depress the brake

Gradually slow down
P0708
Turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK
position.
Start the engine.
Depress the brake
Gradually slow down
Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK
position.
Go to Step 6.
Start the engine.
Warm up the engine
to normal operating
temperature.
P0711

range for 10 min or
more.
Gradually slow down
Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK
position.
Go to Step 6.
Start the engine.
Warm up the engine
and AT.
range and make sure
6GR.
Gradually slow down

P0751, P0752, P0756, P0757, P0761, P0762, P0766,

P0781, P0813
Turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK
position.
Start the engine.
range and make sure
6GR.
Gradually slow down
Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK
position.
Go to Step 6.
Start the engine.
Warm up the engine
to normal operating
temperature.
P0819
Drive the vehicle in M

range, and shift the
selector lever (operate
up and down
switches) between
1GR to 6GR for 10 s
or more.
Gradually slow down
Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK
position.
Go to Step 6.
Start the engine.
Warm up the engine
to normal operating
temperature.
Drive the vehicle in M
range, and shift the
steering shift switch
(operate up and down

switches) between
1GR to 6GR for 10 s
or more.
P0826
Gradually slow down

Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK
position.
Go to Step 6.
Start the engine.
Warm up the engine
to normal operating
temperature.
range and make sure
6GR and TCC is
operated.
P2757, P2758
Gradually slow down

Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK
position.
Go to Step 6.
6. Gradually slow down and stop the vehicle.

7. Make sure that no DTCs occur.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC TABLE [SJ6A-EL]
X: Available: N/A
DTC
No.
Condition
AT
Memory
MIL warning DC function
light
Page
P0601 Flash ROM malfunction
(See DTC P0601 [SJ6A-EL])
P0603 EEPROM malfunction
P0604 RAM malfunction
P0707 Transmission range (TR) switch circuit low input X

(short to ground)
P0708 Transmission range (TR) switch circuit high

input (open circuit)
P0711 Transmission fluid temperature (TFT) sensor

malfunction (stuck)

circuit malfunction (short to ground)

X
circuit malfunction (short to power/open circuit)
P0717 Turbine sensor circuit malfunction (open

circuit/short circuit)
P0722 Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) circuit malfunction

(open circuit/short circuit)
P0751 Shift solenoid A malfunction (stuck off)
P0752 Shift solenoid A malfunction (stuck on)
P0756 Shift solenoid B malfunction (stuck off)
P0757 Shift solenoid B malfunction (stuck on)
P0761 Shift solenoid C malfunction (stuck off)
P0762 Shift solenoid C malfunction (stuck on)
Shift solenoid D malfunction (stuck off)
Shift solenoid G malfunction (stuck on)
P0781 1-2 shift valve malfunction
P0813 Reverse sequence valve malfunction
P0819 Manual switch/up switch/down switch circuit

malfunction (open circuit/short circuit)
P0826 Steering shift switch circuit malfunction (open

circuit/short to ground)
P0882 TCM B+ low (less than 9 V)
P0961 Line pressure control solenoid

range/performance (stuck)
P0962 Line pressure control solenoid circuit

malfunction (short to ground/open circuit)
P0963 Line pressure control solenoid circuit

malfunction (short to power)
P0969 Shift solenoid F range/performance (stuck)
P0970 Shift solenoid F circuit malfunction (short to

ground/open circuit)
P0766
P0971 Shift solenoid F circuit malfunction (short to

power)
P0973 Shift solenoid A circuit malfunction (short to

ground)
P0974 Shift solenoid A circuit malfunction (short to

power/open circuit)
P0976 Shift solenoid B circuit malfunction (short to

ground)
P0977 Shift solenoid B circuit malfunction (short to

power/open circuit)
P0979 Shift solenoid C circuit malfunction (short to

ground)
P0980 Shift solenoid C circuit malfunction (short to

power/open circuit)
P0982 Shift solenoid D circuit malfunction (short to

ground)
P0983 Shift solenoid D circuit malfunction (short to

power/open circuit)
P0985 Shift solenoid E circuit malfunction (short to

ground)
P0986 Shift solenoid E circuit malfunction (short to

power/open circuit)
P2719 Shift solenoid G range/performance (stuck)
P2720 Shift solenoid G circuit malfunction (short to

ground/open circuit)
P2721 Shift solenoid G circuit malfunction (short to

power)
P2757 Torque converter clutch (TCC) stuck off
P2758 Torque converter clutch (TCC) stuck on
P2762 TCC control solenoid range/performance (stuck) X
P2763 TCC control solenoid circuit malfunction (short

to power)
P2764 TCC control solenoid circuit malfunction (short

to ground/open circuit)
U0073CAN BUS OFF
U0100TCM cannot receive any signals from PCM
U0121 TCM cannot receive any signals from ABS

HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
MIL
DC
(See FOREWORD
[MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM])
Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Drive Cycle
N/A
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0601 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0601
Flash ROM malfunction

Flash ROM (in TCM) internal circuit malfunction is detected.
Diagnostic support note:
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL illuminates if the TCM detects the above malfunction

A PENDING CODE is not available.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
The AT warning light illuminates.
The DTC is stored in the TCM memory.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN

1 RECORDED
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA been
recorded on the repair order?
2 AVAILABILITY
available?
ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA on the
step.
No Replace the TCM, then go to the next

step.
(See TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[SJ6A-EL].)
3 COMPLETED
Make sure to reconnect all the
Clear the DTC from the memory using
the M-MDS.
Drive the vehicle in D range and make
sure that gears shift smoothly from 1GR
to 6GR.
YesReplace the TCM, then go to the next

step.
[SJ6A-EL].)

4

Perform the After Repair Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

(See DTC TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)
No Troubleshooting completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0603 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0603
EEPROM malfunction
Different numeric values for EEPRROM and RAM (in TCM) are
detected.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE
TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
available?
ACTION
step.

step.
[SJ6A-EL].)
3 COMPLETED
the M-MDS.
to 6GR.

step.
[SJ6A-EL].)

4

[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0604 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0604
RAM malfunction
RAM (in TCM) read/write error is detected.
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE
TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
available?
ACTION
step.

step.
[SJ6A-EL].)
3 COMPLETED
the M-MDS.
to 6GR.

step.
[SJ6A-EL].)

4

[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0707 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0707
Transmission range (TR) switch circuit low input (short to ground)

A signal input from the TR switch to the TCM corresponds to two contact points or
more.
DETECTION
CONDITION
The AT warning light illuminates if the TCM detects the above malfunction condition
MIL does not illuminate.
TR switch connector or terminal malfunction
Short to power in wiring harness between TR switch terminal B and TCM terminal 2O
Short to power in wiring harness between TR switch terminal C and TCM terminal 2M
Short to power in wiring harness between TR switch terminal H and TCM terminal 2N
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Short to power in wiring harness between TR switch terminal D and TCM terminal 2K
TR switch misadjustment
TR switch malfunction
TCM connector or terminal malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN RECORDED
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded on the repair
order?

ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA on
the repair order, then go to the next
step.
repaired, go to the
next step.
step.
[SJ6A-EL].)
3 INSPECT TR SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION
Disconnect the TR switch connector.

Inspect for poor connection at TR switch terminals B, C, D
and H (part-side) (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,
corrosion)
No Repair terminals, then go to Step 8.
Are TR switch terminals normal?

4
INSPECT TR SWITCH CIRCUIT

Connect the TCM connector.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (engine off)
YesGo to Step 8.
Inspect the voltage between TCM terminal (wiring

TCM terminal 2O
P position: B+
Other positions and all
ranges: 0V
TCM terminal 2M
R position: B+
Other position and all
ranges: 0V
TCM terminal 2N
N position: B+
range: 0V
TCM terminal 2K
D range: B+
Other ranges and all
positions: 0V
Are any of following terminal voltage turned on for even a
moment while shifting selector lever slowly from P position
to D range?
5

Are there two or more terminals where the voltage is
abnormal in Step 3?
YesAdjust the TR switch, then go to Step

8.
(See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR)
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT [SJ6A-EL].)
INSPECT TR SWITCH
Inspect the TR switch.
[SJ6A-EL].)

No Replace the TR switch, then go to Step
8.
Is the TR switch normal?
7 INSPECT TCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
Disconnect the TCM connector.

SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[SJ6A-EL].)
terminal, then go to the next step.
Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 2O, 2K, 2M

and 2N (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).
8

Make sure to reconnect all the disconnected connectors.
Clear the DTC from the memory using the M-MDS.
Drive the vehicle in each range (PD).

(See AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE [SJ6A-EL].)

step.
[SJ6A-EL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0708 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0708
Transmission range (TR) switch circuit high input (open circuit)

Vehicle speed is 30 km/h {18.6 mph} or more, and no range signal is input from
the TR switch.
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL illuminates if the TCM detects the above malfunction condition in two
consecutive drive cycles.
PENDING CODE is available.
Short to ground in wiring harness between TR switch terminal B and TCM terminal
2O
Short to ground in wiring harness between TR switch terminal C and TCM terminal
2M
Short to ground in wiring harness between TR switch terminal H and TCM terminal
2N
Short to ground in wiring harness between TR switch terminal D and TCM terminal
2K
Open circuit in wiring harness between TR switch terminal B and TCM terminal 2O
Open circuit in wiring harness between TR switch terminal C and TCM terminal 2M
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between TR switch terminal H and TCM terminal 2N
Open circuit in wiring harness between TR switch terminal D and TCM terminal 2K
TR switch misadjustment
TR switch connector or terminal malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between TR switch terminal E and ignition switch
(IG1)
Open circuit in wiring harness between TR switch terminal E and ignition switch (IG1)
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded on the
repair order?

ACTION
step.
step.
[SJ6A-EL].)

Connect the TCM connector.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (engine off)
YesGo to Step 13.

Inspect the voltage between TCM terminal (wiring

TCM terminal 2O
P position: B+
Other positions and all
ranges: 0V
TCM terminal 2M
R position: B+
ranges: 0V
TCM terminal 2N
N position: B+
range: 0V
TCM terminal 2K
D range: B+
Other ranges and all
positions: 0V
Are any of following terminal voltage turned on for even
a moment while shifting selector lever slowly from P
position to D range?
4

Are all terminal voltage 0 V in Step 3?
YesGo to Step 10.


Are there two or more terminals where the voltage is
abnormal in Step 3?
YesAdjust the TR switch, then go to Step

13.
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT [SJ6A-EL].)
6 INSPECT TCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 2O, 2K, 2M
and 2N (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).


7 INSPECT TR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for
short to ground, go to Step 12.
Inspect for continuity between TR switch terminals
P position: B and body ground
R position: C and body ground
N position: H and body ground
D range: D and body ground
Inspect for poor connection at TR switch terminals B, C,
D and H (part-side) (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,
corrosion)
9
INSPECT TR SWITCH
[SJ6A-EL].)
10
INSPECT TR SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Inspect the voltage at TR switch (wiring harness-side)
terminal E.

No Repair terminals or replace the TR
switch, then go to Step 13.
[SJ6A-EL].)
No Replace the TR switch, then go to Step
13.
[SJ6A-EL].)
No Inspect the METER 15 A fuse.
If normal, repair or
replace the wiring
harness, then go to
Step 13.
Is there B+ at TR switch (wiring harness-side) terminal

E?
Inspect for poor connection at TR switch terminal E (partside) (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion)
INSPECT TR SWITCH

No Repair terminals or replace the TR
switch, then go to Step 13.
[SJ6A-EL].)
12

[SJ6A-EL].)
13

Drive the vehicle in each range (PD).
Drive the vehicle with vehicle speed of 30 km/h {18.6
mph} or more for 2 s or more.

No Replace the TR switch, then go to the
next step.
[SJ6A-EL].)
step.
[SJ6A-EL].)

14


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0711 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0711
Transmission fluid temperature (TFT) sensor malfunction (stuck)

Change in ATF temperature cannot be detected for 10 min or more when driving in D
range or R position.
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL illuminates if the TCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive
drive cycles.
TFT sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
repair order?

ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA on the repair order,
repair information.
the next step.
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF TFT SENSOR CIRCUIT

Inspect for resistance between TCM terminals 1J
and 1M (wiring harness-side).
Is resistance as shown below?
ATF temperature 10C {50F}:

No Replace the TFT sensor, then go to Step 5.
(See TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT)
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
approx. 6.445 kilohms

approx. 3.5 kilohms
(See TRANSMISSION FLUID
TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR
4
INSPECT TCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 1J and
1M (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).

No Repair or replace the connector and/or terminal, then
Are terminals normal?

5

Make sure to reconnect all the disconnected
connectors.
Drive the vehicle in D range and make sure that
gears shift smoothly from 1GR to 6GR.
YesReplace the TCM, then go to the next step.

(See TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)

6


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0712 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0712
Transmission fluid temperature (TFT) sensor circuit malfunction (short to ground)

If the TCM detects the following condition for 10 s or more, the TCM determines that the TFT
sensor circuit has a malfunction.
ATF temperature 200 C {392 F} or more
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL illuminates if the TCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between TFT sensor and TCM terminal 1J
Short to ground in wiring harness between TFT sensor and TCM terminal 1M
Couple component connector or terminal malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
repair order?

ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA on the repair
the next step.

Inspect for resistance between couple component
terminals 1J and 1M (wiring harness-side).

No Replace the TFT sensor, then go to Step 5.

approx. 3.5 kilohms
4

YesGo to Step 7.
No Repair or replace the connector and/or terminal,
then go to Step 7.

5 INSPECT TFT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
Inspect for continuity between couple component
terminals (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for short to

ground, go to Step 7.
Terminal A and body ground

Terminal B and body ground
INSPECT COUPLE COMPONENT CONNECTOR FOR POOR
6 CONNECTION
Disconnect the couple component connector.
Inspect for poor connection at couple component
terminals A and B (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,
corrosion).
YesReplace the TFT sensor, then go to the next step.


7

connectors.
Drive the vehicle in D range and make sure that gears
shift smoothly from 1GR to 6GR.


8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0713 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0713
Transmission fluid temperature (TFT) sensor circuit malfunction (short to power/open circuit)
If the TCM detects the following condition for 1 s or more, the TCM determines that the TFT
sensor circuit has a malfunction.
Engine warmed-up
ATF temperature less than 43 C {45.4 F}
DETECTION
CONDITION

Open circuit in wiring harness between TFT sensor and TCM terminal 1J
Open circuit in wiring harness between TFT sensor and TCM terminal 1M
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
repair order?

ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA on the repair order,
repair information.
the next step.

Inspect for resistance between couple component
terminals 1J and 1M (wiring harness-side).

No Go to Step 5.

approx. 3.5 kilohms
4

YesGo to Step 7.
go to Step 7.

5 CONNECTION
Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals A and
B (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).

go to Step 7.

6
INSPECT TFT SENSOR

Inspect the TFT sensor.
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for open circuit,


SENSOR INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
No Replace the TFT sensor, then go to the next step.
Is the TFT sensor normal?

connectors.
Drive the vehicle in D range and make sure that
gears shift smoothly from 1GR to 6GR.


8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0717 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0717
Turbine sensor circuit malfunction (open circuit/short circuit)

When all conditions below are satisfied.
D range of TR switch input
Vehicle speed signal 12 pulse input
Turbine sensor signal not input
DETECTION
CONDITION

The MIL illuminates if the TCM detects the above malfunction condition during the
first drive cycle.
Short to ground in wiring harness between turbine sensor terminal B and TCM
terminal 2A
Short to ground in wiring harness between turbine sensor terminal A and TCM
terminal 2B
Short to power in wiring harness between turbine sensor terminal B and TCM terminal
2A
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Short to power in wiring harness between turbine sensor terminal A and TCM terminal
2B
Turbine sensor connector or terminal malfunction
Turbine sensor malfunction
Open circuit between turbine sensor terminal B and TCM terminal 2A
Open circuit between turbine sensor terminal A and TCM terminal 2B
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
repair order?

ACTION
step.


No Repair or replace the connector and/or
Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 2A and 2B

(such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).

4
INSPECT CONTINUITY OF TURBINE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Inspect for continuity between the TCM terminals 2A
and 2B (wiring harness-side).
INSPECT TURBINE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

5 GROUND
Inspect for continuity between the TCM terminals (wiring
Terminal 2A and body ground

No Go to Step 7.

short to ground, then go to Step 10.
Terminal 2B and body ground

INSPECT TURBINE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
6 SUPPLY
Measure the voltage at TCM (wiring harness-side)
terminals 2A and 2B.

Is there 0 V at the TCM wiring harness-side connector

terminals?
7
INSPECT TERMINAL TURBINE SENSOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the turbine sensor connector.
Inspect for poor connection at turbine sensor terminals A
and B (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).


8
INSPECT TURBINE SENSOR

Inspect the turbine sensor.
(See TURBINE SENSOR INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
Is the turbine sensor normal?
9 INSPECT TURBINE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Inspect for continuity between turbine sensor terminals
(wiring harness-side) and TCM terminals (wiring
harness-side).
Terminal B and terminal 2A
Terminal A and terminal 2B

No Replace the turbine sensor, then go to Step
10.
(See TURBINE SENSOR
10


(See TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6AEL].)

11


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0722 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0722
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) circuit malfunction (open circuit/short circuit)

When all conditions below are satisfied.
D range of TR switch input
Turbine speed signal 12 pulse input
VSS signal not input
DETECTION
CONDITION

The MIL illuminates if the TCM detects the above malfunction condition during the
first drive cycle.
Short to ground in wiring harness between VSS terminal B and TCM terminal 2D
Short to ground in wiring harness between VSS terminal A and TCM terminal 2C
Short to power in wiring harness between VSS terminal B and TCM terminal 2D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Short to power in wiring harness between VSS terminal A and TCM terminal 2C
VSS connector or terminal malfunction
VSS malfunction
Open circuit between VSS terminal B and TCM terminal 2D
Open circuit between VSS terminal A and TCM terminal 2C
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
repair order?

ACTION


Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 2D and

2C (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).
4
INSPECT CONTINUITY OF VSS CIRCUIT

Inspect for continuity between the couple component
terminals 2D and 2C (wiring harness-side).
INSPECT VSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Inspect for continuity between the TCM terminals
Terminal 2D and body ground

No Go to Step 7.

No Repair or replace the wiring harness for short
Terminal 2C and body ground

6
INSPECT VSS CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY

off).
terminals 2D and 2C.

to power supply, then go to Step 10.
Is there 0 V at the TCM wiring harness-side connector

terminals?
7
INSPECT TERMINAL VSS FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the VSS connector.
Inspect for poor connection at VSS terminals A and B


8
INSPECT VSS
Inspect the VSS.
(See VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Is the VSS normal?
9 INSPECT VSS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Inspect for continuity between VSS terminals (wiring
harness-side) and TCM terminals (wiring harnessside).
Terminal B and terminal 2D
Terminal A and terminal 2C

No Replace the VSS, then go to Step 10.
(See VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
No Repair or replace the wiring harness for open
10

connectors.


11


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0819 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0819
Manual switch/up switch/down switch circuit malfunction (open circuit/short circuit)

M range switch circuit malfunction
M range switch remains on for 2 s or more except in D range.
Up switch or down switch circuit malfunction
When all of the following conditions are met:
M range switch off.
Except D range
DETECTION
CONDITION
Up or down switch remains on for 10 s or more.

The MIL does not illuminate if the TCM detects the above malfunction condition during the first
drive cycle.
Selector lever component connector or terminal malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal Band TCM
terminal 2G
Short to ground in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal D and TCM
terminal 2J
Short to ground in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal F and TCM
terminal 2F
M range switch malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Up switch malfunction
Down switch malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal A and ground
Open circuit in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal B and TCM terminal
2G
Open circuit in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal D and TCM terminal
2J
Open circuit in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal F and TCM terminal
2F
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded on the repair order?
ACTION

availability.

step.

Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 2F, 2G and 2J (such
as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).


INSPECT SELECTOR LEVER COMPONENT CONNECTOR FOR POOR
4 CONNECTION
Disconnect the selector lever component connector.
Inspect for poor connection at selector lever component terminals
A, B, D and F (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).


INSPECT M RANGE SWITCH, UP SWITCH, AND DOWN SWITCH CIRCUIT
YesRepair or replace the harness, then go to
Step 9.
Inspect for continuity between selector lever component terminals
Terminal B and body ground (M range switch)
Terminal D and body ground (up switch)
Terminal F and body ground (down switch)
6 INSPECT M RANGE SWITCH, UP SWITCH, AND DOWN SWITCH
Inspect the M range switch, up switch, and down switch.
(See SELECTOR LEVER INSPECTION)
Are the switches normal?

No Replace the selector lever, then go to Step
9.
(See SELECTOR LEVER

7 FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Inspect for continuity between selector lever component terminal
A (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
No Repair or replace the harness, then go to

Step 9.

8 FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Inspect for continuity between TCM terminals (wiring harnessside) and selector lever component terminals (wiring harnessside).
No Repair or replace the harness, then go to

the next step.
Terminal 2G and terminal B (M range switch)

Terminal 2J and terminal D (up switch)
Terminal 2F and terminal F (down switch)
9

Drive the vehicle in M range, and change gears by shifting the

selector lever (operating the up and down switches).

10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0882 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0882
TCM B+ low (less than 9 V)

Voltage of less than 9 V detected at TCM terminal 1AD when engine is running.
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL does not illuminate if the TCM detects the above malfunction condition
The AT warning light not illuminates.
Melted ROOM 15 A fuse
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between ROOM 15 A fuse and TCM terminal 1AD
Open circuit in wiring harness between ROOM 15 A fuse and TCM terminal 1AD
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded on
the repair order?

ACTION
to the next step.

3
INSPECT FUSE
Inspect ROOM 15 A fuse for malfunction.
Is it normal?

No
If fuse has been melted, go to

the next step.
If fuse is not installed correctly,
install it correctly, then go to
Step 8.
INSPECT VOLTAGE OF POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Inspect for voltage TCM terminal 1AD (wiring
harness-side).
Is the voltage B+?

Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals
1AD (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,
corrosion).

No Go to Step 6.
YesGo to Step 8.
then go to Step 8.
Is terminal normal?
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
6 GROUND
Disconnect the positive battery cable.
Inspect for continuity between the fuse terminals
and body ground.
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness and install

new fuse, then go to Step 8.
ROOM 15 A fuse terminal and

body ground
7
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Inspect for continuity between TCM terminal and
fuse terminals (wiring harness-side).
Terminal 1AD and ROOM IG 15
A fuse

No Repair or replace the harness, then go to the
next step.
8

connectors.
Clear the DTC from the memory using the MMDS.


9

< Previous Next >

Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0961 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0961
Line pressure control solenoid range/performance (stuck)

Feedback current corresponding to solenoid current command value is
irregular when engine is running.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Oil pump malfunction

Control valve body malfunction
Transmission malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded on the repair order?
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3 INSPECT ATF CONDITION
LOCK position.
Inspect the ATF condition.

No If the ATF color is light red or reddish brown,
replace ATF, then go to Step 6.
(See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
(ATF) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL].)
Clear red: Normal

Light red (pink):
Water mixed in
fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
(See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6AEL].)
4 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.

No Add ATF to the specified level, then go to Step
6.
Is the ATF level within the

specification?

(ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)

5 INSPECT LINE PRESSURE
Start the engine.
Measure the line pressure.
(See MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST
[SJ6A-EL].)

No
All ranges: Replace the oil

pump or control valve body,
Any ranges: Replace the AT,
Are the line pressures within the

specifications?

6 COMPLETED
Clear the DTC from the memory
using the M-MDS.
then go the next step.

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Drive the vehicle in D range and

make sure that gears shift
smoothly from 1GR to 6GR.
7

Perform the After Repair
Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0962 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0962
Line pressure control solenoid circuit malfunction (short to ground/open circuit)

Open or short circuit in line pressure control solenoid signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output
voltage, the voltage that differs from the signal output by CPU in TCM is detected).
DETECTION
CONDITION
The MIL illuminates if the TCM detects the above malfunction condition during the first drive cycle.
Short to ground in wiring harness between line pressure control solenoid terminal B and TCM terminal
1R
Short to ground in wiring harness between line pressure control solenoid terminal A and TCM terminal 1E
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit between line pressure control solenoid terminal B and TCM terminal 1R
Open circuit between line pressure control solenoid terminal A and TCM terminal 1E
Line pressure control solenoid connector or terminal malfunction
Line pressure control solenoid malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded on the repair order?
ACTION

availability.

step.

Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 1R and 1E (such as


4
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT

Inspect for resistance between TCM terminals 1R and 1E (wiring
harness-side).
Is the resistance within 5.05.6 ohms?

No Go to go to Step 7.
(See SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)

INSPECT LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
5 GROUND
Inspect for continuity between TCM terminals (wiring harnessside) and body ground.

short to ground, then go to Step 13.
Terminal 1R and body ground

Terminal 1E and body ground
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
6 GROUND
YesGo to go to Step 13.
Inspect for continuity between couple component terminals
Terminal J and body ground
No Repair or replace the couple component,

Terminal I and body ground

7
INSPECT COUPLE COMPONENT CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Inspect for poor connection at couple component terminals J and I


8
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT

Inspect the resistance between couple component (transmission
case side) terminals J and I.

No Go to Step 10.

INSPECT LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
9 CIRCUIT
Inspect for continuity between TCM terminals and couple
component terminals (wiring harness-side).
Terminal 1R and terminal J
Terminal 1E and terminal I
YesGo to Step 13.

open circuit, go to Step 13.
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CONNECTOR FOR POOR
10 CONNECTION
Disconnect the line pressure control solenoid connector.
Inspect for poor connection at line pressure control solenoid
terminals A and B (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).


11
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID

Inspect the line pressure control solenoid.
Is the line pressure control solenoid normal?

No Replace the control valve body, then go to
Step 13.
(See CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL
[SJ6A-EL].)
(See CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION
[SJ6A-EL].)
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

12 CIRCUIT
Inspect for continuity between couple component terminals and
line pressure control solenoid terminals (wiring harness-side).
Terminal J and terminal B

No Repair or replace the couple component,
Terminal I and terminal A

13

Drive the vehicle in D range and make sure that gears shift


14


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0963 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0963
Line pressure control solenoid circuit malfunction (short to power)

Short circuit in line pressure control solenoid signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output
DETECTION
CONDITION
Short to power in wiring harness between line pressure control solenoid terminal B and TCM terminal 1R
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power in wiring harness between line pressure control solenoid terminal A and TCM terminal 1E
TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA on the repair order, then go to the
next step.
information.
If the vehicle is not repaired, go to the next step.

available?
INSPECT TCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR

3 CONNECTION
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
No Repair or replace the connector and/or terminal, then go to Step 7.

Inspect for poor connection at TCM
terminals 1R and 1E (such as
Measure the voltage at TCM (wiring

harness-side) terminals 1R and 1E.
Is there 0 V at the TCM wiring harnessside connector terminals?
position.
Disconnect the couple component
connector.

No Repair or replace the wiring harness (TCMcouple component
connector) for short to power supply, then go to Step 7.

harness-side) terminals 1R and 1E.
6

Inspect the line pressure control
solenoid.
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness (couple component connector

line pressure control solenoid) for short to power supply, then go to
the next step.
(See SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION

[SJ6A-EL].)
No Replace the control valve body, then go to the next step.
Is the line pressure control solenoid

normal?
7 COMPLETED
the M-MDS.
(See CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL [SJ6A-EL].)

(See CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)

to 6GR.
8

(See AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE [SJ6AEL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0973 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0973
Shift solenoid A circuit malfunction (short to ground)

Short to ground in shift solenoid A signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
voltage that differs from the signal output by CPU in TCM is detected).
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Shift solenoid A connector or terminal malfunction

Shift solenoid A malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Has the FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded
on the repair order?

2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA on the repair order, then go to
the next step.
information.
step.

Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminal

No Repair or replace the connector and/or terminal, then go to Step
9.
1AF (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
4
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF SHIFT SOLENOID A CIRCUIT

Inspect for resistance between TCM terminal
1AF (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
Is the resistance within 1016 ohms?
YesGo to Step 9.
(See SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [SJ6AEL].)

5 CONNECTION

9.
Inspect for poor connection at couple

component terminal O (such as
Is terminal normal?
6

Inspect the resistance between couple
component (transmission case side) terminal
O and body ground.

No Go to Step 9.

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID A CONNECTOR FOR POOR
7 CONNECTION
Disconnect the shift solenoid A connector.

9.
Inspect for poor connection at shift solenoid

A terminal A (such as damaged/pulled-out
pins, corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
8
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID A

Inspect the shift solenoid A.
Is the shift solenoid A normal?
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness (couple component

connectorshift solenoid A) for short to ground, then go to the
next step.

9 COMPLETED
connectors.

Drive the vehicle in D range and make sure

that gears shift smoothly from 1GR to 6GR.
10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0974 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0974
Shift solenoid A circuit malfunction (short to power/open circuit)

Open or short circuit in shift solenoid A signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Shift solenoid A connector or terminal malfunction

Short to power in wiring harness between shift solenoid A terminal A and TCM terminal 1AF
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA on the repair order, then go
to the next step.
information.
step.


No Repair or replace the connector and/or terminal, then go to
Step 11.
1AF (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
4

1AF (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
YesGo to Step 9.

5 CONNECTION

Step 11.

component terminal O (such as
Is terminal normal?
6

component (transmission case side) terminal O
and body ground.
YesGo to Step 11.


INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID A CONNECTOR FOR POOR
7 CONNECTION
Disconnect the shift solenoid A connector.

Step 11.
Inspect for poor connection at shift solenoid A

terminal A (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,
corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
8
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID A

YesRepair or replace the wiring harness (couple componentshift

solenoid A) for short to ground, then go to Step 11.
No Replace the control valve body, then go to Step 11.
Is the shift solenoid A normal?

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID A CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

9 POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).
Measure the voltage at TCM (wiring harnessside) terminal 1AF.
Is there 0 V at the TCM wiring harness-side
YesGo to Step 11.

connector terminals?
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID A CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
10 POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness (TCMcouple component)

for short to power supply, then go to the next step.
No Repair or replace the wiring harness (couple componentshift
solenoid A) for short to power supply, then go to the next step.
Measure the voltage at couple component

(wiring harness-side) terminal O.
11

connectors.


12


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0976 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0976
Shift solenoid B circuit malfunction (short to ground)

Short to ground in shift solenoid B signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Shift solenoid B connector or terminal malfunction

Shift solenoid B malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
the next step.
information.
step.


9.
1AB (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
4
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF SHIFT SOLENOID B CIRCUIT

1AB (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
YesGo to Step 9.

5 CONNECTION

9.

component terminal N (such as
Is terminal normal?
6

N and body ground.

No Go to Step 9.

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID B CONNECTOR FOR POOR
7 CONNECTION
Disconnect the shift solenoid B connector.

9.

B terminal A (such as damaged/pulled-out
pins, corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
8
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID B

Inspect the shift solenoid B.
Is the shift solenoid B normal?

connectorshift solenoid B) for short to ground, then go to the
next step.

9 COMPLETED
connectors.


10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0977 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0977
Shift solenoid B circuit malfunction (short to power/open circuit)

Open or short circuit in shift solenoid B signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Shift solenoid B connector or terminal malfunction

Short to power in wiring harness between shift solenoid B terminal A and TCM terminal 1AB
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

ACTION
to the next step.
information.
step.


Step 11.
1AB (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
4

1AB (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
YesGo to Step 9.

5 CONNECTION

Step 11.

component terminal N (such as
Is terminal normal?
6

component (transmission case side) terminal N
and body ground.
YesGo to Step 11.


INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID B CONNECTOR FOR POOR
7 CONNECTION
Disconnect the shift solenoid B connector.

Step 11.
Inspect for poor connection at shift solenoid B

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
8
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID B


solenoid B) for short to ground, then go to Step 11.
Is the shift solenoid B normal?

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID B CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

9 POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).
Measure the voltage at TCM (wiring harnessside) terminal 1AB.
YesGo to Step 11.

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID B CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
10 POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).

solenoid B) for short to power supply, then go to the next step.

(wiring harness-side) terminal N.
11

connectors.


12


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0979 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0979
Shift solenoid C circuit malfunction (short to ground)

Short to ground in shift solenoid C signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Shift solenoid C connector or terminal malfunction

Shift solenoid C malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
the next step.
information.
step.


9.
1AA(such as damaged/pulled-out pins,

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
4
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF SHIFT SOLENOID C CIRCUIT

1AA (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
YesGo to Step 9.

5 CONNECTION

9.

component terminal M (such as
Is terminal normal?
6

M and body ground.

No Go to Step 9.

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID C CONNECTOR FOR POOR
7 CONNECTION
Disconnect the shift solenoid C connector.

9.

C terminal A (such as damaged/pulled-out
pins, corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
8
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID C

Inspect the shift solenoid C.
Is the shift solenoid C normal?

connectorshift solenoid C) for short to ground, then go to the
next step.

9 COMPLETED
connectors.


10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0980 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0980
Shift solenoid C circuit malfunction (short to power/open circuit)

Open or short circuit in shift solenoid C signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Shift solenoid C connector or terminal malfunction

Short to power in wiring harness between shift solenoid C terminal A and TCM terminal 1AA
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

ACTION
to the next step.
information.
step.


Step 11.
1AA (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
4

1AA (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
YesGo to Step 9.

5 CONNECTION

Step 11.

component terminal M (such as
Is terminal normal?
6

component (transmission case side) terminal M
and body ground.
YesGo to Step 11.


INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID C CONNECTOR FOR POOR
7 CONNECTION
Disconnect the shift solenoid C connector.

Step 11.
Inspect for poor connection at shift solenoid C

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
8
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID C


solenoid C) for short to ground, then go to Step 11.
Is the shift solenoid C normal?

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID C CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

9 POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).
Measure the voltage at TCM (wiring harnessside) terminal 1AA.
YesGo to Step 11.

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID C CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
10 POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).

solenoid C) for short to power supply, then go to the next step.

(wiring harness-side) terminal M.
11

connectors.


12


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0982 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0982
Shift solenoid D circuit malfunction (short to ground)

Short to ground in shift solenoid D signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Shift solenoid D connector or terminal malfunction

Shift solenoid D malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
the next step.
information.
step.


9.
1S (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
4
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF SHIFT SOLENOID D CIRCUIT

1S (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
YesGo to Step 9.

INSPECT COUPLE COMPONENT CONNECTOR FOR
5 POOR CONNECTION

9.

component terminal L (such as
Is terminal normal?
6

L and body ground.

No Go to Step 9.

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID D CONNECTOR FOR POOR
7 CONNECTION
Disconnect the shift solenoid D connector.

9.

D terminal A (such as damaged/pulled-out
pins, corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
8
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID D

Inspect the shift solenoid D.
Is the shift solenoid D normal?

connectorshift solenoid D) for short to ground, then go to the
next step.

9 COMPLETED
connectors.


10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0983 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0983
Shift solenoid D circuit malfunction (short to power/open circuit)

Open or short circuit in shift solenoid D signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Shift solenoid D connector or terminal malfunction

Short to power in wiring harness between shift solenoid D terminal A and TCM terminal 1S
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

ACTION
to the next step.
information.
step.


Step 11.
1S (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
4

1S (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
YesGo to Step 9.

5 CONNECTION

Step 11.

component terminal L (such as
Is terminal normal?
6

component (transmission case side) terminal L
and body ground.
YesGo to Step 11.


INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID D CONNECTOR FOR POOR
7 CONNECTION
Disconnect the shift solenoid D connector.

Step 11.
Inspect for poor connection at shift solenoid D

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
8
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID D


solenoid D) for short to ground, then go to Step 11.
Is the shift solenoid D normal?

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID D CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

9 POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).
Measure the voltage at TCM (wiring harnessside) terminal 1S.
YesGo to Step 11.

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID D CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
10 POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).

solenoid D) for short to power supply, then go to the next step.

(wiring harness-side) terminal L.
11 COMPLETED
connectors.


12


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0985 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0985
Shift solenoid E circuit malfunction (short to ground)

Short to ground in shift solenoid E signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
voltage that differs from the signal output by CPU in TCM is detected)
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Shift solenoid E connector or terminal malfunction

Shift solenoid E malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

2 AVAILABILITY
ACTION
the next step.
information.
step.


9.
1V (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
4
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF SHIFT SOLENOID E CIRCUIT

1V (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
YesGo to Step 9.

5 CONNECTION

9.

component terminal K (such as
Is terminal normal?
6

K and body ground.

No Go to Step 9.

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID E CONNECTOR FOR POOR
7 CONNECTION
Disconnect the shift solenoid E connector.

9.
Inspect for poor connection at shift solenoid E

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
8
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID E

Inspect the shift solenoid E.
Is the shift solenoid E normal?

connectorshift solenoid E) for short to ground, then go to the
next step.

9 COMPLETED
connectors.


10


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0986 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0986
Shift solenoid E circuit malfunction (short to power/open circuit)

Open or short circuit in shift solenoid E signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Shift solenoid E connector or terminal malfunction

Short to power in wiring harness between shift solenoid E terminal A and TCM terminal 1V
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

ACTION
to the next step.
information.
step.


Step 11.
1V (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
4

1V (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
YesGo to Step 9.

5 CONNECTION

Step 11.

component terminal K (such as
Is terminal normal?
6

component (transmission case side) terminal K
and body ground.
YesGo to Step 11.


INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID E CONNECTOR FOR POOR
7 CONNECTION
Disconnect the shift solenoid E connector.

Step 11.
Inspect for poor connection at shift solenoid E

corrosion).
Is terminal normal?
8
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID E


solenoid E) for short to ground, then go to Step 11.
Is the shift solenoid E normal?

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID E CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

9 POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).
Measure the voltage at TCM (wiring harnessside) terminal 1V.
YesGo to Step 11.

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID E CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
10 POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).

solenoid E) for short to power supply, then go to the next step.

(wiring harness-side) terminal K.
11

connectors.


12


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2757 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2757
Torque converter clutch (TCC) stuck off

TCM detects that TCC control solenoid does not change from off when
engine is running
DETECTION
CONDITION

condition in two consecutive drive cycles.
Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCC control solenoid, and line pressure control solenoid stuck
TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

position.
Clear red: Normal

step.
No If the ATF color is milky or reddish brown,
Light red (pink):

Water mixed in fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
4 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

No Add ATF to the specified level, then go to
Step 7.

Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)

No All ranges: Replace the oil pump, then go to
Step 7.
Any ranges: Replace the control valve body,
then go to Step 6.

specifications?

[SJ6A-EL].)
[SJ6A-EL].)
INSPECT SOLENOID VALVE

Inspect the solenoid valve.
[SJ6A-EL].)
Is it normal?

the next step.
[SJ6A-EL].)
[SJ6A-EL].)
7 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2757

COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.

Start the engine.

Warm up engine and AT.
Drive the vehicle under the following
conditions for 2 s or more.
ATF temperature
(TFT PID): 20 C
{68 F} or more
Drive in the D
range, 4GR6GR
(TCC no operation)
DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2758 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2758
Torque converter clutch (TCC) stuck on

TCM detects that TCC control solenoid does not change from on when
engine is running
DETECTION
CONDITION

FREEZE FRAME DATA is not available.
Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCC control solenoid, and line pressure control solenoid stuck
TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?

position.
Clear red: Normal

step.
No If the ATF color is milky or reddish brown,
Light red (pink):

Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
4 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

Step 7.

Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)

No All ranges: Replace the oil pump, then go to
Step 7.
Any ranges: Replace the control valve body,
then go to Step 6.

specifications?

[SJ6A-EL].)
[SJ6A-EL].)
INSPECT SOLENOID VALVE

Inspect the solenoid valve.
[SJ6A-EL].)
Is it normal?

the next step.
[SJ6A-EL].)
[SJ6A-EL].)
7 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2758

COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.

Start the engine.

Warm up engine and AT.
Drive the vehicle under the following
conditions for 2 s or more.
ATF temperature
(TFT PID): 20 C
{68 F} or more
Engine speed: less
than 3,000 rpm
Drive in the D
range, 4GR6GR
(TCC operation)
DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2762 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2762
TCC control solenoid range/performance (stuck)

DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY

step.

available?

position.

No If the ATF color is light red or reddish
brown, replace ATF, then go to Step 6.
Clear red: Normal

Light red (pink):
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
4 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.

Step 6.

specification?


FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)

No

pump or control valve
body, then go to the next
step.
Any ranges: Replace the
AT, then go the next step.
specifications?

6 COMPLETED
the M-MDS.
sure that gears shift smoothly from
1GR to 6GR (TCC operation).
(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)
step.
[SJ6A-EL].)

7

[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2763 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2763
TCC control solenoid circuit malfunction (short to power)

Short circuit in TCC control solenoid signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
Short to power in wiring harness between TCC control solenoid terminal B and TCM terminal 1Q
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power in wiring harness between TCC control solenoid terminal A and TCM terminal 1D
TCC control solenoid malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

2 AVAILABILITY

position.
ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA on the repair order, then go to the
next step.
information.

terminals 1Q and 1D (such as
INSPECT TCC CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR
(engine off).

harness-side) terminals 1Q and 1D.
INSPECT TCC CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR
position.
connector.


(engine off).
harness-side) terminals 1Q and 1D.
6
INSPECT TCC CONTROL SOLENOID

Inspect the TCC control solenoid.
[SJ6A-EL].)
Is the TCC control solenoid normal?

TCC control solenoid) for short to power supply, then go to the next
step.

7 COMPLETED
Clear the DTC from the memory using the
M-MDS.


sure that gears shift smoothly from 1GR to
6GR.
8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2764 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2764
TCC control solenoid circuit malfunction (short to ground/open circuit)

Open or short circuit in TCC control solenoid signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output
DETECTION
CONDITION
Short to ground in wiring harness between TCC control solenoid terminal B and TCM terminal 1Q
Short to ground in wiring harness between TCC control solenoid terminal A and TCM terminal 1D
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit between TCC control solenoid terminal B and TCM terminal 1Q
Open circuit between TCC control solenoid terminal A and TCM terminal 1D
TCC control solenoid connector or terminal malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
order?

availability.
ACTION


Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 1Q and 1D (such

4
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF TCC CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT

Inspect for resistance between TCM terminals 1Q and 1D


5
INSPECT TCC CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND


Terminal 1Q and body ground

Terminal 1D and body ground
6
INSPECT TCC CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Terminal H and body ground

No Repair or replace the couple component, then
Terminal G and body ground

7

Inspect for poor connection at couple component terminals H
and G (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).


8
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF TCC CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT

Inspect the resistance between couple component (transmission
case side) terminals H and G.

No Go to Step 10.

9
INSPECT TCC CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Terminal 1Q and terminal H
YesGo to Step 13.

circuit, go to Step 13.
Terminal 1D and terminal G

INSPECT TCC CONTROL SOLENOID CONNECTOR FOR POOR
10 CONNECTION
Disconnect the TCC control solenoid connector.
Inspect for poor connection at TCC control solenoid terminals A

and B (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).


11
INSPECT TCC CONTROL SOLENOID

Is the TCC control solenoid normal?

Step 13.
(See CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL [SJ6AEL].)
[SJ6A-EL].)
12
INSPECT TCC CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Inspect for continuity between couple component terminals and
TCC control solenoid terminals (wiring harness-side).
Terminal H and terminal B

Terminal G and terminal A

13



14


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
Select DataLogger.
Select Modules.
Select TCM.
Select TCM.
Select DataLogger.
3. Select the PID from the PID table
4. Verify the PID data according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.
NOTE:
Perform part inspection for the output device after TCM inspection.
The PID/DATA MONITOR function monitors the calculated value of the input/output signals
in the TCM. Therefore, if a monitored value of an output device is out of specification, it is
necessary to inspect the monitored value of the input device related to the output device
control. Since an output device malfunction is not directly indicated as a malfunction of the
monitored value for the output device, it is necessary to inspect the output device
individually using the simulation function.
PID/DATA MONITOR AND RECORD function table
Monitor item Unit/Condition
(Definition)
BOO TCM
(Brake switch)
DTCCNT
DWN SW
(Down switch)
On/Off
Brake pedal
depressed:
On
Action
TCM
terminal

N/A
Other: Off
N/A
On/Off
Indicates number of DTC
Down shift
at M range:
On
Other: Off
Check DTC.
N/A
Inspect the selector lever component.

(See SELECTOR LEVER COMPONENT
INSPECTION.)
2F
ECT TCM
(ECT)
C, F
Indicates ECT
(See ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
N/A
Inspect the PCM.

(See PCM INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
FDPDTC
(FREEZE
FRAME DATA)
N/A
Indicates code of FREEZE

FRAME DATA
1GR: 3.538
2GR: 2.060
N/A
N/A
Inspect following PIDs: OSS, SSA, SSB,

SSC, SSD, SSE SSF, SSG, THOP, TSS,
VSS
3GR: 1.404
GEAR_RA
N/A
4GR: 1.000
N/A
(Gear ratio)
5GR: 0.713
6GR: 0.582
R position:
3.168
1GR: 1
2GR: 2
GEAR_SEL
(Calculated
gear range in
TCM)
1/2/3/4/5/6
Inspect following PIDs: SSA, SSB, SSC,

SSD, SSE, SSF, SSG, THOP, TSS, VSS
3GR: 3
N/A
4GR: 4
5GR: 5
6GR: 6
LPS
D range,
1GR (idle):
996 mA
(Line pressure
control
solenoid)
D range,
3GR: 656
mA

solenoid.
[SJ6A-EL].)
1E, 1R
R position:
719 mA
MNL SW
(M range
switch)
On/Off
Other: Off
OSS
(Output shaft
speed)
PNP_TCM
(Park/Neutral)
M range:
On
RPM
Vehicle
speed 40
km/h {25
mph}:
3,800 RPM

INSPECTION.)
2G
Inspect the VSS.

2C, 2D
Indicates
output shaft
speed
P, N
position:
Neutral
Drive/Neutral
D, M range
or R
position:

SWITCH INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
2K, 2M,
2N, 2O
Drive
RPM TCM
(Engine speed)
Ignition
switch ON:
0 rpm
RPM
Idle: 700
800 rpm
M range
SS SW(Steering shift
switch (down
switch))
(See PCM INSPECTION

[13B-MSP].)
N/A
Inspect the steering shift switch.

Steering
shift down
switch on:
On
On/Off
Inspect the PCM.
(See STEERING SHIFT SWITCH

INSPECTION.)
2AB,
2AF
Other: Off
M range
SS SW+
(Steering shift
switch (up
switch))
On/Off

Steering
shift up
switch on:
On

INSPECTION.)
2AB,
2AF
Other: Off
SSA
(Shift solenoid
A)
On/Off
1GR: Off
SSB
(Shift solenoid
B)
On/Off
SSC
(Shift solenoid
C)
On/Off
1GR, 2GR,
6GR: On
3GR, 4GR,
5GR: Off
1GR, 2GR,
3GR: On
4GR, 5GR,
6GR: Off
5GR, 6GR:
On
SSD
(Shift solenoid
D)
2GR, 3GR,
4GR, 5GR,
6GR: On
On/Off
1GR, 2GR,
3GR, 4GR:
Off

[SJ6A-EL].)
1AF

[SJ6A-EL].)
1AB

[SJ6A-EL].)
1AA

[SJ6A-EL].)
1S
SSE
(Shift solenoid
E)
On/Off
5GR, 6GR:
Off
5GR, 6GR:
996 mA
SSF
(Shift solenoid
F)
SSG
(Shift solenoid
G)
1GR, 2GR,
3GR, 4GR:
199 mA
1GR, 2GR,
3GR, 4GR:
996 mA
5GR, 6GR:
199 mA
TCCC
(TCC solenoid
valve)
1GR, 2GR,
3GR, 4GR:
On
TCC on:
996 mA
Other: 199
mA
ATF
temperature
20 C {68
F}: 20 C
{68 F}
TFT
(ATF
temperature)
C, F

[SJ6A-EL].)
Inspect the shift solenoid F.

[SJ6A-EL].)

[SJ6A-EL].)
ATF
1L, 1Y

[SJ6A-EL].)
1D, 1Q

1J, 1M
ATF
temperature
60 C {140
F}: 60 C
{140 F}
TFTV
1O, 1Z
Inspect the shift solenoid G.
ATF
temperature
40 C {104
F}: 40 C
{104 F}
ATF
temperature
20 C {68
F}: 3 V
1V

(ATF
temperature
signal voltage)
temperature
40 C {104
F}: 2.14 V
1J, 1M
ATF
temperature
60 C {140
F}: 1.38 V
CTP: 20%
THOP
(Throttle
position)
WOT:
89.8%
(See TRANSMISSION
RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION [SJ6AEL].)
N/A
Inspect the PCM.

(See PCM INSPECTION
[13B-MSP].)
R position:
R
TR
(TR switch)
R/N/D/P
N position:
N

D range: D
2K, 2M,
2N, 2O
P position:
P
D range:
On
TRD
(TR switch [D
range])
On/Off
R position:
On
TRR
(TR switch [R
position])
TSS
Other
ranges and
all
positions:
Off
On/Off
Other
positions
and all
ranges: Off
Idle: 700
800 RPM
Vehicle

2K

Inspect the turbine sensor.

(See TURBINE SENSOR INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
2M
(Turbine shaft
speed)
UP SW
(Up switch)
RPM
2A, 2B
speed 40
km/h {25
mph}:
3,800 RPM
Up shift at
M range:
On
On/Off
Other: Off

INSPECTION.)
2J
Inspect the ignition

switch.
VPWR_TCM
(Battery
voltage)
position: B+
(See IGNITION SWITCH

INSPECTION
[WITHOUT ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM].)
1AD

(See BATTERY
INSPECTION [13BMSP].)
VSS
(Vehicle
speed)
KPH, MPH
Vehicle
speed 40
km/h {25
mph}: 40
KPH {25
MPH}
Simulation Function Procedure

Inspect the VSS.

2C, 2D
Select DataLogger.
Select Modules.
Select TCM.
Select TCM.
Select DataLogger.
3. Select the simulation items from the PID table.
4. Perform the simulation function, inspect the operations for each parts.
If there is no operation sound from the solenoid after the simulation function
inspection is performed, it is possible that there is an open or short circuit in
the wiring harness, or solenoid, or sticking and operation malfunction.
Simulation item tableX: Available
Operation
Simulation item
Applicable component
Unit/Condition
TCM terminal
IG ONIdle
LPS
Pressure control solenoid control signal in TCM
N/A
1E, 1R
SSA
Shift solenoid A
On/Off
N/A
1AF
SSB
Shift solenoid B
On/Off
N/A
1AB
SSC
Shift solenoid C
On/Off
N/A
1AA
SSD
Shift solenoid D
On/Off
N/A
1S
SSE
Shift solenoid E
On/Off
N/A
1V
SSF
Shift solenoid F
N/A
1O, 1Z
SSG
Shift solenoid G
N/A
1L, 1Y
TCCC
TCC solenoid valve
N/A
1D, 1Q
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0751 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0751
Shift solenoid A malfunction (stuck off)

TCM detects that shift solenoid A does not change from off when
engine is running
DETECTION
CONDITION
MIL illuminates if TCM detects the above malfunction conditions in

two consecutive drive cycles.
DTC is stored in TCM memory.
Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
been recorded on the repair
ACTION
order?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT FOR DTC

Inspect for DTCs.
INSPECT ATF CONDITION

LOCK position.
Inspect ATF condition.

YesFollow the applicable DTC inspection
procedure, then go to the next step. (See DTC
TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)

No If the ATF color milky or reddish brown, repair
or replace AT, then go to Step 7.
Transparent red:
Normal
Milky: Water
mixed in fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

7.
(See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF)

Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)
specifications?

7 COMPLETED
Clear the DTC from the TCM

No

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Start the engine.

Warm up AT.
make sure that the gears shift
the DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0752 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0752
Shift solenoid A malfunction (stuck on)

TCM detects that shift solenoid A does not change from on when
engine is running
DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
ACTION
order?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT FOR DTC

Inspect for DTCs.

LOCK position.

TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)

Transparent red:
Normal
Milky: Water
mixed in fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

7.

Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)
specifications?

7 COMPLETED

No

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Start the engine.

Warm up AT.
the DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0756 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0756
Shift solenoid B malfunction (stuck off)

TCM detects that shift solenoid B does not change from off when
engine is running
DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
ACTION
order?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT FOR DTC

Inspect for DTCs.

LOCK position.

TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)

Transparent red:
Normal
Milky: Water
mixed in fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

7.

Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)
specifications?

7 COMPLETED

No

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Start the engine.

Warm up AT.
the DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0757 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0757
Shift solenoid B malfunction (stuck on)

TCM detects that shift solenoid B does not change from on when
engine is running
DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
ACTION
order?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT FOR DTC

Inspect for DTCs.

LOCK position.

TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)

Transparent red:
Normal
Milky: Water
mixed in fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

7.

Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)
specifications?

7 COMPLETED

No

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Start the engine.

Warm up AT.
the DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0761 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0761
Shift solenoid C malfunction (stuck off)

TMC detects that shift solenoid C does not change from off when
engine is running
DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
ACTION
order?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT FOR DTC

Inspect for DTCs.

LOCK position.

TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)

Transparent red:
Normal
Milky: Water
mixed in fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

7.

Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)
specifications?

7 COMPLETED

No

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Start the engine.

Warm up AT.
the DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0762 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0762
Shift solenoid C malfunction (stuck on)

TMC detects that shift solenoid C doe not change from on when
engine is running
DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
ACTION
order?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT FOR DTC

Inspect for DTCs.

LOCK position.

TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)

Transparent red:
Normal
Milky: Water
mixed in fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

7.

Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)
specifications?

7 COMPLETED

No

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Start the engine.

Warm up AT.
the DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0766 [SJ6A-EL]
Shift solenoid D malfunction (stuck off)

DTC P0766
Shift solenoid G malfunction (stuck on)
TCM detects that shift solenoid D does not change from off when
engine is running
TCM detects that shift solenoid G does not change from on when
engine is running
DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

1 RECORDED
order?
2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT FOR DTC

Inspect for DTCs.

LOCK position.

TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)

Transparent red:
Normal
Milky: Water
mixed in fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

7.

Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)
specifications?

7 COMPLETED

No

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Start the engine.

Warm up AT.
the DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
Next >

Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION [SJ6A-EL]
DTC Reading Procedure

1. Perform necessary vehicle preparation and visual inspection.
Select "Self Test".
Select "Modules".
Select "TCM".
Select "Module Tests".
Select "TCM".
Select "Self Test".
NOTE:
Freeze frame data appears at the top of the help screen when the displayed
DTC is selected.
The freeze frame data consists of data for vehicle and transmission control
system operation conditions when malfunctions in the transmission control
system are detected and stored in the TCM.
There are modes 2 and 12 in the freeze frame data.
Freeze frame data is stored at the instant the malfunction
indicator lamp illuminates, and only a part of the DTC data is
stored.
For the freeze frame data, if there are several malfunctions in
the engine control system, the data for the malfunction which
occurred initially is stored. Thereafter, if a misfire or fuel
injection control malfunction occurs, data from the misfire or
fuel injection control malfunction is written over the initially
stored data. However, if the initially stored freeze frame data is
a misfire or fuel injection control malfunction, it is not
overwritten.
The data for DTCs currently detected is stored.
The DTC recording timing differs depending on the number of
DTC drive cycles.
For a DTC with a drive cycle number 1, only
the malfunction determination data is
recorded.
For a DTC with a drive cycle number 2, both
the malfunction determination and
undetermined data is recorded.
Freeze frame data table (mode2, mode12) table
NOTE:
Refer to PID monitor table for confirm the engine control system operation status while the
PCM does not store the DTC.
Freeze frame data items are not displayed, according to detected DTC.
Freeze frame data

item
LOAD
Definition
Engine load
Unit
Corresponding PID data monitor

item
ECT
Engine coolant
temperature
C {F}
ECT TCM
RPM
Engine speed
RPM
RPM TCM
VS
Vehicle speed
KPH
{MPH}
VSS
TP
Throttle valve position

No.1
THOP
RUNTM
Time from engine start
hh:mm:ss
VPWR
Module supply voltage
VPWR_TCM

5. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the TCM. (See AFTER REPAIR
PROCEDURE [SJ6A-EL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0781 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0781
1-2 shift valve malfunction

TCM detects 12 shift valve malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
order?
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT FOR DTC

Inspect for DTCs.

LOCK position.

TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)

Transparent red:
Normal
Milky: Water
mixed in fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

7.

Start the engine.

[SJ6A-EL].)
specifications?

7 COMPLETED
No

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Start the engine.

Warm up AT.
the DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0813 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0813
Reverse sequence valve malfunction

TCM detects reverse sequence valve malfunction.
DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
order?
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
3
INSPECT FOR DTC

Inspect for DTCs.

LOCK position.

TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)

Transparent red:
Normal
Milky: Water
mixed in fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.
specification?

7.

Start the engine.

[SJ6A-EL].)
specifications?

7 COMPLETED
No

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Start the engine.

Warm up AT.
the DTC present?
8

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0826 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0826
Steering shift switch circuit malfunction (open circuit/short to ground)

TCM detects open or short circuit in steering shift switch circuit when engine is
running.
DETECTION
CONDITION
MIL illuminates if TCM detects the above malfunction condition during the first drive
cycle.
PENDING CODE is not available.
AT warning light illuminate.
DTC is stored in the TCM memory.
Audio control switch connector or terminal malfunction
Short to ground in wiring harness between audio control switch terminal F and TCM
terminal 2AF
Steering shift switch malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Short to power in wiring harness between audio control switch terminal F and TCM
terminal 2AF
Open circuit in wiring harness between audio control switch terminal F and TCM
terminal 2AF
Open circuit in wiring harness between audio control switch terminal C and TCM
terminal 2AB
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
repair order?

ACTION
No Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA on
the repair order, then go to the next
step.
repaired, go to the
next step.
INSPECT AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR POOR
3 CONNECTION
Disconnect the audio control switch connector.

Inspect for poor connection at audio control switch

terminals F and C (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,
corrosion).
Are the connector and terminals normal?
INSPECT SHIFT CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
4 GROUND
Inspect for continuity between the audio control switch
(wiring harness-side) terminal F and body ground.
5 INSPECT STEERING SHIFT SWITCH
(See STEERING SHIFT SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Is the steering shift switch normal?

Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 2AB and
2AF (such as damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness,

then go to Step 10.

No Replace the steering shift switch, then
go to Step 10.
Are the connector and terminals normal?

INSPECT SHIFT CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
7 POWER SUPPLY

short to power supply, then go to Step
10.

terminal 2AF.
Is the voltage 5.0 V or more?

8
INSPECT SHIFT CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

(wiring harness-side) terminal F and TCM (wiring harnessside) terminal 2AF.
INSPECT SHIFT CONTROL SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

9 CIRCUIT
(wiring harness-side) terminal C and TCM (wiring harnessside) terminal 2AB.

No Repair or replace the wiring harness,
then go to Step 10.

No Repair or replace the wiring harness,
then go to Step 10.
10 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0826 COMPLETED

Clear the DTC from the TCM memory using the M-MDS.
Drive the vehicle in M range, and change gears by
operating the steering shift switch.

step.
[SJ6A-EL].)

11 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0969 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0969
Shift solenoid F range/performance (stuck)

DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
LOCK position.

Clear red: Normal

Light red (pink):
Water mixed in
fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
4 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.

6.

specification?


Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)

No


specifications?

6 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

7

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0970 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0970
Shift solenoid F circuit malfunction (short to ground/open circuit)

Open or short circuit in shift solenoid F signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
Short to ground in wiring harness between shift solenoid F terminal B and TCM terminal 1Z
Short to ground in wiring harness between shift solenoid F terminal A and TCM terminal 1O
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit between shift solenoid F terminal B and TCM terminal 1Z

Open circuit between shift solenoid F terminal A and TCM terminal 1O
Shift solenoid F connector or terminal malfunction
Shift solenoid F malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
order?

availability.
ACTION


Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 1Z and 1O (such

4
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF SHIFT SOLENOID F CIRCUIT

Inspect for resistance between TCM terminals 1Z and 1O


5
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID F CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND


Terminal 1Z and body ground

Terminal 1O and body ground
6
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID F CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Terminal F and body ground

Terminal E and body ground

7



8
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF SHIFT SOLENOID F CIRCUIT

Inspect the resistance between couple component
(transmission case side) terminals H and G.

No Go to Step 10.

9
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID F CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Terminal 1Z and terminal F
YesGo to Step 13.

Terminal 1O and terminal E

10
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID F CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the shift solenoid F connector.
Inspect for poor connection at shift solenoid F terminals A and



11
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID F

Is the shift solenoid F normal?

Step 13.
[SJ6A-EL].)
12
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID F CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

and shift solenoid F terminals (wiring harness-side).
Terminal F and terminal B

Terminal E and terminal A

13



14


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P0971 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P0971
Shift solenoid F circuit malfunction (short to power)

Short circuit in shift solenoid F signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the voltage
that differs from the signal output by CPU in TCM is detected).
DETECTION
CONDITION
Short to power in wiring harness between shift solenoid F terminal B and TCM terminal 1Z
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power in wiring harness between shift solenoid F terminal A and TCM terminal 1O
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

2 AVAILABILITY

position.
ACTION
the next step.
information.

terminals 1Z and 1O (such as
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID F CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
4 TO POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).

harness-side) terminals 1Z and 1O.
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID F CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
5 TO POWER SUPPLY
position.
connector.


(engine off).
harness-side) terminals 1Z and 1O.
6
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID F

Is the shift solenoid F normal?

shift solenoid F) for short to power supply, then go to the next
step.

7 COMPLETED
connectors.
M-MDS.


8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2719 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2719
Shift solenoid G range/performance (stuck)

DETECTION
CONDITION

Deteriorated ATF
ATF level low
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

1 RECORDED
ACTION

2 AVAILABILITY
availability.
available?
LOCK position.

Clear red: Normal

Light red (pink):
Water mixed in
fluid
Reddish brown:
Deteriorated ATF
Is it normal?
4 INSPECT ATF LEVEL
Start the engine.
Warm up the AT.

6.

specification?


Start the engine.
[SJ6A-EL].)

No


specifications?

6 COMPLETED
using the M-MDS.

(See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
[SJ6A-EL].)

7

Procedure.
[SJ6A-EL].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2720 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2720
Shift solenoid G circuit malfunction (short to ground/open circuit)

Open or short circuit in shift solenoid G signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the
DETECTION
CONDITION
Short to ground in wiring harness between shift solenoid G terminal B and TCM terminal 1Y
Short to ground in wiring harness between shift solenoid G terminal A and TCM terminal 1L
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit between shift solenoid G terminal B and TCM terminal 1Y
Open circuit between shift solenoid G terminal A and TCM terminal 1L
Shift solenoid G malfunction
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
order?

availability.
ACTION


Inspect for poor connection at TCM terminals 1Y and 1L (such

4
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF SHIFT SOLENOID G CIRCUIT

Inspect for resistance between TCM terminals 1Y and 1L


5
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID G CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND


Terminal 1Y and body ground

Terminal 1L and body ground
6
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID G CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND

Terminal D and body ground

Terminal C and body ground

7



8
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF SHIFT SOLENOID G CIRCUIT

Inspect the resistance between couple component
(transmission case side) terminals H and G.

No Go to Step 10.

9
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID G CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Terminal 1Y and terminal D
YesGo to Step 13.

Terminal 1L and terminal C

10
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID G CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION

Disconnect the shift solenoid G connector.
Inspect for poor connection at shift solenoid G terminals A and



11
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID G

Is the shift solenoid G normal?

Step 13.
[SJ6A-EL].)
12
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID G CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

and shift solenoid G terminals (wiring harness-side).
Terminal D and terminal B

Terminal C and terminal A

13



14


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC P2721 [SJ6A-EL]
DTC P2721
Shift solenoid G circuit malfunction (short to power)

Short circuit in shift solenoid G signal system (while TCM monitors solenoid output voltage, the voltage
that differs from the signal output by CPU in TCM is detected).
DETECTION
CONDITION
Short to power in wiring harness between shift solenoid G terminal B and TCM terminal 1Y
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to power in wiring harness between shift solenoid G terminal A and TCM terminal 1L
TCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION

2 AVAILABILITY

position.
ACTION
the next step.
information.

terminals 1Y and 1L (such as
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID G CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
4 TO POWER SUPPLY
(engine off).

harness-side) terminals 1Y and 1L.
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID G CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
5 TO POWER SUPPLY
position.
connector.


(engine off).
harness-side) terminals 1Y and 1L.
6
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID G

Is the shift solenoid G normal?

shift solenoid G) for short to power supply, then go to the next
step.

7 COMPLETED
connectors.
M-MDS.


8


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [SJ6A-EL]
When the customer reports a vehicle malfunction, inspect the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
indication, AT warning indicator light flash, and diagnostic trouble code (DTC), then diagnose the
malfunction according to following flowchart.
If a DTC exists, diagnose the applicable DTC inspection. (See DTC TABLE [SJ6AEL].)
If a DTC does not exist, the MIL does not illuminate and the AT warning indicator
light illuminate, diagnose the applicable symptom troubleshooting. (See SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)
NOTE:
If a tire of a different diameter from the standard tire is installed, the TCM determines that the
driving mode is the AAS mode, and may change to a different shift timing from the normal timing.
*: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL), AT warning light.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BASIC INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
Measure the battery voltage.
Is the battery voltage 10.014.0

V?
No Replace or recharge the battery.

Inspect the TCM related harnesses,

connectors and fuses.
Are they normal?
No Repair or replace any malfunctioning parts

according to the inspection result.
Warm up the engine to normal

operating temperature.
YesRecord Freeze Frame Data and perform

appropriate DTC troubleshooting procedures.
Retrieve DTC using the M-MDS.

Is there any DTC present?
4
Inspect ATF color and condition.


Are ATF color and odor normal?

5
Perform the road test.

Is the AT operating normally?
Perform the time lag test.
Flush AT and cooler line if necessary.

Is the AT operating normally?
Perform the stall test.

Is the stall speed within the
specified?
Perform the line pressure test.

Is the line pressure within the
specified?
Inspect following PCM and TCM

part or signal related PIDs using
the M-MDS.
PCM:
APP sensor (APP)
Brake switch
(BOO)
Engine speed
(RPM)
ECT (ECT)
TCM:
Turbine shaft
speed (TSS)
Vehicle speed
(VSS)
TFT sensor (TFT)
TR switch (TR)
M range switch
(MNL SW)
Up switch (UP SW)
Down switch
(DWN SW)
Throttle position

YesPerform the symptom troubleshooting and
follow the procedures.
YesPerform the symptom troubleshooting and
follow the procedures.
signal (THOP)
Are they normal?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM TABLE [SJ6A-EL]
Use the chart below to verify the symptoms of the trouble in order to diagnose the
appropriate area.
No.
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
Vehicle does
not move in D
range, or in R
position
Vehicle does
not move
when
accelerator
pedal is
depressed.
(See NO.1 VEHICLE DOES NOT MOVE

IN D RANGE, OR IN R POSITION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Vehicle moves
in N position
Vehicle creeps
in N position.
(See NO.2 VEHICLE MOVES IN N

POSITION [SJ6A-EL].)
Vehicle creeps
if brake pedal
is not
depressed in
N position.
3
Vehicle moves
in P position, or
parking gear
does not
disengage when
P position is
disengaged
Vehicle rolls
when on a
downward
slope and
tires do not
lock in P
position.
Tires locked
when P
position is
disengaged,
vehicle does
not move in D
range, and R
position when
accelerator
pedal is
(See NO.3 VEHICLE MOVES IN P

POSITION, OR PARKING GEAR DOES
NOT DISENGAGE WHEN P IS
DISENGAGED [SJ6A-EL].)
depressed,
and engine
remains in
stalled
condition.
4
Excessive creep
Vehicle
accelerates in
D range, and
R position
when
accelerator
pedal is not
depressed.
(See NO.4 EXCESSIVE CREEP [SJ6AEL].)
No creep at all
Vehicle does
not move in D
range, or R
position when
idling on flat
paved road.
(See NO.5 NO CREEP AT ALL [SJ6AEL].)
Low maximum
speed and poor
acceleration
Vehicle
acceleration is
poor at start.
(See NO.6 LOW MAXIMUM SPEED AND

POOR ACCELERATION [SJ6A-EL].)
Delayed
acceleration
when
accelerator
pedal is
depressed
while driving.
7
No shifting
Single shift
range only.
(See NO.7 NO SHIFTING [SJ6A-EL].)
Sometimes
shifts
correctly.
8
Does not shift

to 6GR
Vehicle does
not upshift
from 5GR to
6GR even
though
vehicle speed
increased.
Vehicle does
not shift to
6GR even
(See NO.8 DOES NOT SHIFT TO 6GR

[SJ6A-EL].)
though
accelerator
pedal is
released in D
range at 80
km/h {50
mph}.
9
Abnormal
shifting
Shifts
incorrectly
(incorrect
shift pattern).
(See NO.9 ABNORMAL SHIFTING

[SJ6A-EL].)
10
Frequent
shifting
Downshifting
occurs
suddenly even
when
accelerator
pedal is
depressed
slightly in D
range.
(See NO.10 FREQUENT SHIFTING

[SJ6A-EL].)
11
Shift point is
high or low
Shift point
considerably
different from
automatic
shift diagram.
(See NO.11 SHIFT POINT IS HIGH OR

LOW [SJ6A-EL].)
Shift delays
when
accelerating.
Shift occurs
suddenly
when
accelerating
and engine
speed does
not increase.
12
Torque
converter clutch
(TCC) nonoperation
TCC does not

operate when
vehicle
reaches TCC
operation
range.
(See NO.12 TORQUE CONVERTER

CLUTCH (TCC) NON-OPERATION
[SJ6A-EL].)
13
No kickdown
Does not
downshift
when
accelerator
(See NO.13 NO KICKDOWN [SJ6A-EL].)
pedal is fully
depressed
within
kickdown
range.
14
Engine flares up
or slips when
upshifting or
downshifting
When
accelerator
pedal is
depressed,
engine speed
increases
normally but
vehicle speed
increases
slowly.
(See NO.14 ENGINE FLARES UP OR

SLIPS WHEN UPSHIFTING OR
DOWNSHIFTING [SJ6A-EL].)
When
accelerator
pedal is
depressed
while driving,
engine speed
increases but
vehicle speed
does not
increase.
15
Engine flares up
or slips when
accelerating
vehicle
Engine flares
up when
accelerator
pedal is
depressed for
upshifting.
(See NO.15 ENGINE FLARES UP OR

SLIPS WHEN ACCELERATING VEHICLE
[SJ6A-EL].)
Engine flares
up suddenly
when
accelerator
pedal is
depressed for
downshifting.
16
Judder upon
torque
converter clutch
(TCC) operation
Vehicle jolts
when TCC is
engaged.
(See NO.16 JUDDER UPON TORQUE

CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
OPERATION [SJ6A-EL].)
17
Excessive shift
shock from N to
D or N to R
position/range
Strong shock
is felt when
shifting from
N to D or N to
R
(See NO.17 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK

FROM N TO D OR N TO R
POSITION/RANGE [SJ6A-EL].)
position/range
at idle.
18
Excessive shift
shock is given
when upshifting
and
downshifting
Excessive
shift shock is
felt when
depressing
accelerator
pedal to
accelerate at
upshifting.

IS GIVEN WHEN UPSHIFTING AND
DOWNSHIFTING [SJ6A-EL].)
During
cruising,
excessive shift
shock is felt
when
depressing
accelerator
pedal at
downshifting.
19
Excessive shift
shock on torque
converter clutch
(TCC)
Strong shock
is felt when
TCC is
engaged.

ON TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
(TCC) [SJ6A-EL].)
20
Noise occurs at
idle when
vehicle is
stopped in all
positions/ranges
Transmission
is noisy in all
positions and
ranges when
vehicle is
idling.
(See NO.20 NOISE OCCURS AT IDLE

WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN ALL
POSITIONS/RANGES [SJ6A-EL].)
21
Noise occurs at
idle when
vehicle is
stopped in D
range, or in R
position
Transmission
is noisy in
driving ranges
when vehicle
is idling.
(See NO.21 NOISE OCCURS AT IDLE

WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN D
RANGE, OR IN R POSITION [SJ6A-EL].)
22
No engine
braking
Engine speed
drops to idle
but vehicle
coasts when
accelerator
pedal is
released
during
cruising at
medium to
high speeds.
(See NO.22 NO ENGINE BRAKING

[SJ6A-EL].)
Engine speed
drops to idle
but vehicle
coasts when
accelerator
pedal is
released
when in M
range (1GR)
at low vehicle
speed.
23
Transmission
overheats
Burnt smell
emitted from
the
transmission.
(See NO.23 TRANSMISSION

OVERHEATS [SJ6A-EL].)
Smoke is
emitted from
the
transmission.
24
Engine stalls
when shifted to
D range, or in R
position
Engine stalls
when shifting
from N or P
position to D
range or R
position at
idle.
(See NO.24 ENGINE STALLS WHEN

SHIFTED TO D RANGE, OR IN R
POSITION [SJ6A-EL].)
25
Engine stalls
when driving at
slow speeds or
stopping
Engine stalls
when brake
pedal is
depressed
while driving
at low speed
or stopping.
(See NO.25 ENGINE STALLS WHEN

DRIVING AT SLOW SPEED OR
STOPPING [SJ6A-EL].)
26
Starter does not

work
Starter does
not work even
when P or N
position is
selected.
(See NO.26 STARTER DOES NOT

WORK [SJ6A-EL].)
27
Gear position
indicator light
does not
illuminate in M
range
Gear position
indicator light
in instrument
cluster does
not illuminate
in M range
with ignition
switch at ON.
(See NO.27 GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
ILLUMINATE IN M RANGE [SJ6A-EL].)
28
Gear position
indicator light
illuminates in D
range or P, N, R
positions
Gear position
indicator light
in instrument
cluster
illuminates in
D range or P,
N R positions
with ignition
switch at ON.
(See NO.28 GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES IN D
RANGE OR P, N, R POSITIONS [SJ6AEL].)
29
Does not
upshift in M
range
Gear position
indicator light
in instrument
cluster
illuminates
but vehicle
does not
upshift when
selector lever
is pushed to
+ side or
steering shift
switch UP is
pulled.
(See NO.29 DOES NOT UPSHIFT IN M

RANGE [SJ6A-EL].)
30
Does not
downshift in M
range
Gear position
indicator light
in instrument
cluster
illuminates
but vehicle
does not
downshift
when selector
lever is
pushed to
side or
steering shift
switch
DOWN is
pushed.
(See NO.30 DOES NOT DOWNSHIFT IN

M RANGE [SJ6A-EL].)
31
M range
position
indicator light
does not
illuminate in M
range and/or in
D range with
direct mode/M
range position
indicator light
M range
position
indicator light
in instrument
cluster does
not illuminate
in M range
and/or in D
range in
direct mode
(See NO.31 M RANGE POSITION

INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
ILLUMINATE IN M RANGE AND/OR IN
D RANGE WITH DIRECT MODE/M
RANGE POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT
ILLUMINATES IN D RANGE WHILE NOT
IN DIRECT MODE [SJ6A-EL].)
illuminates in D
range while not
in direct mode.
when ignition
switch is in
ON position.
M range
position
indicator light
illuminates in
D range while
not in direct
mode when
ignition switch
is in ON
position.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

QUICK DIAGNOSIS CHART [SJ6A-EL]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 VEHICLE DOES NOT MOVE IN D RANGE, OR IN R POSITION [SJ6A-EL]
1
DESCRIPTION
Vehicle does not move in D range, or in R position

Vehicle does not move when accelerator pedal is depressed.
If the vehicle does not move in D range or R position, basically, the
malfunction is in the AT. (Vehicle will move even with a malfunction in the
TCM.) Since a malfunction is in the sensor circuit or output circuit is the
cause of the malfunction in the AT, inspect the sensors, output circuit, and
the related wiring harnesses.
Clutch slippage, worn (D range-C1 clutch, One-way
clutch, R position-C3 clutch, B4 brake, One-way clutch)
Line pressure low
Line pressure control solenoid
malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Sensor GND malfunction
Body GND malfunction
Selector lever malfunction
Parking mechanism not operating properly
Torque converter malfunction
TCM malfunction
Foreign materials or water mixed in ATF

Improper ATF amount
NOTE:
Before following the troubleshooting steps, make sure that the Automatic
Transmission On-Board Diagnostic and Automatic Transmission Basic
Inspection are conducted. (See BASIC INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
STEP
INSPECTION
When the vehicle is stopped on a flat, level road

and the engine off, does the vehicle move when
pushed? (in D range or N, R positions with the
brake pedal released)
Start the engine.
YesInspect or adjust selector lever.
Does vehicle move when selector lever in

between N position and D range?
ACTION
No Inspect for parking mechanism.
(See SELECTOR LEVER

INSPECTION.)
Stop the engine.

Inspect following solenoid.
Shift solenoid A
Shift solenoid B
Shift solenoid C
Shift solenoid E
Shift solenoid G
YesOverhaul the transmission and

repair or replace any
malfunctioning parts. (clutch
slippage, worn)
(See Automatic Transmission
Workshop Manual SJ6A-EL.)
No Inspect the coupler component.
malfunctioning parts.
Are these normal?

4
Verify test results.

If normal, return to the diagnostic index to service any additional
symptoms.
If malfunction remains, inspect the related Service Bulletins and/or

On-line Repair Information and perform repair or diagnosis.
If the vehicle is repaired, troubleshooting
completed.
If the vehicle is not repaired or additional diagnostic
information is not available, replace the TCM.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 VEHICLE MOVES IN N POSITION [SJ6A-EL]
Vehicle moves in N position

Vehicle creeps in N position.
DESCRIPTION
Vehicle creeps if brake pedal is not depressed in N position.

If the vehicle moves in N position, basically, the malfunction is in the AT.
Since a malfunction in the sensor circuit or output circuit is the cause of
the malfunction in the AT, inspect the sensors, output circuit, and the
related wiring harnesses.
Clutch burnt (C1 clutch, C4 clutch, One-way clutch)
Line pressure low
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Selector lever position disparity (Although the selector
indicator shows N position, the hydraulic circuit shows D
range or R position)
TR switch mis-adjustment
NOTE:
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
Does the vehicle creep when

selector lever is moved slightly
in N position?

No Inspect and adjust the selector lever and TR
switch.
(See SELECTOR LEVER INSPECTION.)
(See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT [SJ6A-EL].)

(See SOLENOID VALVE
Shift solenoid
B
Shift solenoid
C
Shift solenoid
E
YesOverhaul the transmission and repair or replace

any malfunctioning parts. (clutch slippage, worn)
(See Automatic Transmission Workshop Manual
SJ6A-EL.)
If normal, replace the malfunctioning parts.
SJ6A-EL.)
Shift solenoid
G
Are these solenoids normal?
3

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 VEHICLE MOVES IN P POSITION, OR PARKING GEAR DOES NOT
DISENGAGE WHEN P IS DISENGAGED [SJ6A-EL]
Vehicle moves in P position, or parking gear does not disengage when P is

disengaged
Vehicle rolls on a downward slope in P position.
DESCRIPTION
Tires are locked when P is disengaged. Vehicle does not move in D range,
and R position when the accelerator pedal is depressed, and the engine
remains in a stalled condition.
Parking mechanism malfunction (May have effect on noise or shock from
transmission)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Improper adjustment of selector lever

If the vehicle moves in N position, perform No.2 VEHICLE MOVES IN N
POSITION
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.4 EXCESSIVE CREEP [SJ6A-EL]
Excessive creep
DESCRIPTION
Vehicle accelerates in D range, and R position when accelerator pedal is

not depressed.
Engine idle speed is high (transmission system is not cause of problem)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Go to No.9 FAST IDLE/RUNS ON

(See NO.9 FAST IDLE/RUNS ON [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.5 NO CREEP AT ALL [SJ6A-EL]
5
DESCRIPTION
No creep at all
Vehicle does not move in D range and R position when idling on a flat
paved road.
Either engine output low or there is clutch slippage.
Clutch burnt (C1 clutch, C4 clutch)
Line pressure low
malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Transmission fixed in 4GR or 5GR (Operation of fail-safe

function)
Short or open circuit in wiring harness
Poor connection of connector
Malfunction of electronic parts of output
and input system
There is no engine torque
Foreign material or water mixed in ATF
Excessive or low amount of ATF
TCM malfunction
NOTE:
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Does the vehicle creep in
P and/or N position?
ACTION
YesInspect or adjust the selector lever.
Stop the engine.
Inspect following
solenoid.
(See SOLENOID VALVE

If normal, replace suspected solenoid.

(See Automatic Transmission Workshop Manual SJ6AEL.)
Shift
solenoid
B
Shift
solenoid
C
Shift
solenoid
E
Shift
solenoid
G
Line
pressure
control
solenoid
Are these solenoids
normal?
3
Inspect the ATF
Yes
If large amount of metal specks are
condition.
Are there any metal
specks found in ATF?
found, overhaul the transmission and

repair or replace any malfunctioning
parts.
(See Automatic Transmission Workshop
Manual SJ6A-EL.)
If a large amount of metal specks are
not found, replace the control valve
body.
[SJ6A-EL].)
(See CONTROL VALVE BODY
INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
No Replace the torque converter.
(See TORQUE CONVERTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[SJ6A-EL].)

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.6 LOW MAXIMUM SPEED AND POOR ACCELERATION [SJ6A-EL]
Low maximum speed and poor acceleration

Vehicle acceleration is poor at start.
DESCRIPTION
Delayed acceleration when accelerator pedal is depressed while driving.

If the clutch is stuck or does not stay in 4GR, malfunction is in engine
circuit.
Clutch slippage, burnt (C1 clutch, C2 clutch, C3 clutch, B1
brake, B2 brake, B3 brake, B4 brake)
Line pressure low
malfunction
Transmission fixed in 4GR or 5GR (Operation of fail-safe
function)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

and input system
Insufficient starting torque (Suspected when in-gear, shift
control and engine circuit are normal)
Torque converter malfunction (Poor
operation, stuck)
Engine output low
NOTE:

STEP
INSPECTION
With the ignition switch at

the ON position, does the
gear position indicator light
indication correspond to
the selector lever position?
Go to No.12 LACK/LOSS
OF POWERACCELERATION/CRUISE.
(See NO.12 LACK/LOSS OF

POWERACCELERATION/CRUISE
[13B-MSP].)
ACTION
No Go to No.27 GEAR POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT

DOES NOT ILLUMINATE IN M RANGE, or No.28
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES
IN D RANGE OR P, N, R POSITIONS.
No Repair or replace any malfunctioning parts according

Does engine control system

normal?
3
Stop the engine.
Inspect line pressure

control solenoid.
(See SOLENOID VALVE


Is the line pressure control

solenoid normal?
4

Are there any metal specks
found in ATF?
Yes

parts.
If a large amount of metal specks
are not found, replace the control
valve body.
REMOVAL [SJ6A-EL].)

[SJ6A-EL].)
5

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.7 NO SHIFTING [SJ6A-EL]
DESCRIPTION
No shifting
Single shift range only.
Sometimes it shifts correctly.
When the gear position is fixed in 4GR or 5GR due to the fail-safe
operation, malfunction is in the AT.
Clutch burnt (C1 clutch, C2 clutch, C3 clutch, B1 brake,
B2 brake, B3 brake, B4 brake)
Line pressure low
Incorrect accelerator pedal position
signal
Incorrect engine speed signal
Incorrect engine coolant temperature
signal
Incorrect engine torque signal
VSS malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

malfunction
4GR or 5GR is fixed (Operation in fail-safe function)
Poor ground of shift solenoid
and input system
TCM malfunction
NOTE:
If a tire of a different diameter from the standard tire is installed, the TCM
determines that the driving mode is the AAS mode, and may change to a
different shift timing from the normal timing.
STEP
INSPECTION
With the ignition switch at

the ON position, does the
gear position indicator light
indication corresponded to
the selector lever position?
Access the following PCM

RPM
APP
ECT
Are PIDs value normal?
ACTION
No Go to No.27 GEAR POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT

DOES NOT ILLUMINATE IN M RANGE, or No.28
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES
IN D RANGE OR P, N, R POSITIONS.
No Inspect and repair suspected PID related part.

TEMPERATURE (TFT)
SENSOR INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)

No Replace the TFT sensor.

4
Stop the engine.
YesInspect the ATF condition.

(See SOLENOID VALVE

found, overhaul the transmission
and repair or replace any
Shift
solenoid A

Shift
solenoid B

valve body.
Shift
solenoid C
Shift
solenoid D
Shift
solenoid E
Line
pressure
control
solenoid
Shift
solenoid F

REMOVAL [SJ6A-EL].)
Shift
solenoid G
Are they normal?
5

symptoms.
completed.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.8 DOES NOT SHIFT TO 6GR [SJ6A-EL]
DESCRIPTION
Does not shift to 6GR

Vehicle does not upshift from 5GR to 6GR even though vehicle speed is
increased.
Vehicle does not shift to 6GR even though accelerator pedal is released in
D range at 80 km/h {50 mph}.
Basically, TCC does not operate when the fail-safe is operating. Verify the
DTC at first. If the TCC operates when driving at high speeds only, the
malfunction (improper adjustment) is in the M range switch circuit or TR
switch circuit.
CAUTION:
If the TCC is stuck, inspect it. In addition, inspect the oil
cooler for foreign particles which may have mixed in with
the ATF.
C2 clutch, C3 clutch, B2 brake slippage, burnt
Line pressure low
signal
signal
VSS malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Sensor malfunction
Selector lever adjustment incorrect
TR switch adjustment incorrect
Shift solenoid A, shift solenoid B, shift solenoid C, shift
solenoid D, shift solenoid G, line pressure control solenoid
malfunction
Solenoid valve stuck
Selector lever adjustment incorrect
NOTE:
STEP
INSPECTION
With the ignition switch

at the ON position.
Does the gear position

indicator light indication
correspond to selector
lever position?
No Go to No.27 GEAR POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES

NOT ILLUMINATE IN M RANGE, or No.28 GEAR
POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES IN D
RANGE OR P, N, R POSITIONS.

RPM
ACTION
APP
ECT
3

(See TRANSMISSION
FLUID TEMPERATURE
(TFT) SENSOR

Is the TFT sensor

normal?
4

range and inspect
following:
12
shift up
and
down
23
shift up
and
down

No No shift at all:
Go to No.7 NO SHIFTING.
Abnormal shift:
Go to No.9 ABNORMAL SHIFTING.
34
shift up
and
down
45
shift up
and
down
56
shift up
and
down
Are all shift-up and shiftdown possible?
5
Stop the engine.
Inspect following
solenoid.
No Inspect for shift solenoid stuck.
(See SOLENOID VALVE
Replace for malfunctioning parts according to inspection

result.
Shift
solenoid
A
Shift
solenoid
B
Shift
solenoid
C
Shift
solenoid
D
Shift
solenoid
F
Line
pressure
control
solenoid
Are they normal?
6
Inspect the ATF

condition.
Are there any metal
Yes

parts.
Manual SJ6A-EL.)
If a large amount of metal specks are
not found, replace the control valve
body.
[SJ6A-EL].)

[SJ6A-EL].)
7

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.9 ABNORMAL SHIFTING [SJ6A-EL]
9
DESCRIPTION
Abnormal shifting
Shift incorrectly (incorrect shift pattern).
There is a malfunction in the signal circuit which controls shifting
(Accelerator pedal position signal, turbine sensor, VSS), the control valve is
stuck, or the clutch circuit is stuck.
brake, B2 brake, B3 brake)
Line pressure low
signal
signal
VSS malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

malfunction
TCM malfunction
Wheel speed signal malfunction
Tire of a different diameter from the

standard tire is installed
NOTE:
STEP
INSPECTION
1 Verify tire condition.

Inspect the tire size and air
pressure.
Is the tire of specified size and
air pressure?
2 Inspect the vehicle wheel-speed signal.
Display the following ABS CM
DSC CM PIDs using the M-MDS.
WSPD_LF
WSPD_LR
WSPD_RF
WSPD_RR
Are the monitoring values
displayed uniformly while
driving?
ACTION
No Replace with a specified tire size or adjust the
air pressure of each specified tire to the
specified value.

No Perform the following inspections:
installation inspection
Is the ABS wheel-speed sensor
installation normal?
ABS sensor rotor
installation inspection
Is the ABS sensor rotor
installed twisted?
(may cause output of abnormal
wave pattern at high speeds.)
Are there missing teeth on the
sensor rotor?
If there is any malfunction, repair or replace the
malfunctioning location.

the TCM terminal 1P, 1X and
battery negative terminal.
Access the following PCM PIDs

using the M-MDS.

No Repair or replace ground circuit.

RPM
APP
ECT
5


6

solenoid.
YesInspect the TCM terminal for bend, damage,

corrosion or poor contact.
(See SOLENOID VALVE

Is the line pressure control

solenoid normal?

SJ6A-EL.)

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.10 FREQUENT SHIFTING [SJ6A-EL]
10
Frequent shifting
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Downshifting occurs suddenly even when accelerator pedal is depressed

slightly in D range.
The malfunctioning circuit is basically the same as No.9 ABNORMAL
SHIFTING. However, a malfunction of the input signal to the accelerator
pedal position sensor, turbine sensor, VSS (including the sensor GND,
sensor wiring harness and connector), or clutch slippage (clutch stuck, low
pressure in line) may also be the cause.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.11 SHIFT POINT IS HIGH OR LOW [SJ6A-EL]
11
Shift point is high or low

Shift point considerably different from automatic shift diagram.
Shift delays when accelerating.
DESCRIPTION
Shift occurs quickly when accelerating and engine speed does not
increase.
If the transmission does not shift abnormally, there is a malfunction of the
input signal to the APP sensor, turbine sensor, or VSS.
If the engine speed is high or low, regardless of normal shifting, inspect
the tachometer.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Verify that the output signals of the accelerator pedal position sensor
changes linearly.
NOTE:
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.12 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) NON-OPERATION [SJ6A-EL]
12
DESCRIPTION
Torque converter clutch (TCC) non-operation

TCC does not operate when vehicle reaches TCC operation range.
Basically, TCC does not operate when the fail-safe is operating. Verify the
DTC at first. If the TCC operates when driving at high speeds only, the
malfunction (improper adjustment) is in the M range switch circuit or TR
switch circuit.
CAUTION:
the ATF.
TCC slippage, burnt
Line pressure low
signal
signal
Incorrect brake switch signal
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

VSS malfunction
Output solenoid valve system
malfunction (Sticking)
Control valve body system malfunction
(Poor operation, sticking)

TCC hydraulic pressure system
malfunction
Accelerator pedal position sensor malfunction (Not operating linearly)
Turbine sensor or VSS malfunction
Operation of fail-safe function.
Short to power or GND at TCC control solenoid related
circuit.
NOTE:
STEP
1
INSPECTION
With the ignition
switch at the ON
position.
Does the gear
position indicator light
indication correspond
to the selector lever
position?
Disconnect the TCM.

Is the resistance
between the TCM
ground terminal 1P,
1X and the body GND
less than 5.0
ohms?
Access the following

PCM PIDs using the
M-MDS.
RPM
APP
BOO
ACTION
No Go to No.27 GEAR POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES
NOT ILLUMINATE IN M RANGE, or No.28 GEAR
POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES IN D RANGE
OR P, N, R POSITIONS.

No Repair open ground circuit.

ECT
Are PIDs value
normal?
4
Inspect the TFT

sensor.
(See TRANSMISSION
FLUID TEMPERATURE
(TFT) SENSOR
INSPECTION [SJ6AEL].)
Is the TFT sensor

normal?
5
Inspect the TCC

control solenoid.
(See SOLENOID
VALVE INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
No Replace suspected solenoid.

(See Automatic Transmission Workshop Manual SJ6A-EL.)
Is the line pressure

control solenoid
normal?
6
Inspect the ATF

condition.
Are there any metal
Yes
If large amount of metal specks are found,

overhaul the transmission and repair or
replace any malfunctioning parts.
Manual SJ6A-EL.)
If a large amount of metal specks are not
found, replace the control valve body.
[SJ6A-EL].)

[SJ6A-EL].)
7

symptoms.

completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.13 NO KICKDOWN [SJ6A-EL]
13
No kickdown
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Does not downshift when accelerator pedal is fully depressed within

kickdown range.
If transmission does not downshift though shifting is normal, the
malfunction is in the accelerator pedal position, engine speed, engine
coolant temperature sensor, engine torque signals or TCM (including
sensor GND, sensor wiring harness and connector, CAN communication).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.14 ENGINE FLARES UP OR SLIPS WHEN UPSHIFTING OR DOWNSHIFTING
[SJ6A-EL]
14
DESCRIPTION
Engine flares up or slips when upshifting or downshifting

When the accelerator pedal is depressed for acceleration from standstill,
engine speed increases but the vehicle speed increases slowly.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed while driving, engine speed
increases but the vehicle speed does not.
There is clutch slippage because the clutch is stuck or the line pressure is
low.
Clutch stuck, slippage (C1 clutch, C2 clutch, C3 clutch, B1
brake, B2 brake, B3 brake)
Line pressure low
signal
signal
VSS malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE


malfunction
NOTE:
STEP
INSPECTION
Is the line pressure normal?

(See MECHANICAL SYSTEM
TEST [SJ6A-EL].)
ACTION
Is shift point normal?
(See ROAD TEST [SJ6AEL].)
No Go to No.9 ABNORMAL SHIFTING.

RPM

APP
ECT
4
Stop the engine.

Inspect following solenoids.
(See SOLENOID VALVE

No Replace suspected solenoid.
Shift
solenoid A

SJ6A-EL.)
Shift
solenoid B
Shift
solenoid C
Shift
solenoid D
Shift
solenoid E
Line
pressure
control
solenoid
TCC control
solenoid
Shift
solenoid F
Shift
solenoid G
Are they normal?
5
Inspect the coupler

component for open or
short.
Are coupler component
normal?

Are a large amount of
specks found?

No Replace the coupler component.
YesOverhaul the transmission and repair or replace any

SJ6A-EL.)
No Replace the control valve body.
(See CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION [SJ6AEL].)

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.15 ENGINE FLARES UP OR SLIPS WHEN ACCELERATING VEHICLE [SJ6A-EL]
15
Engine flares up or slips when accelerating the vehicle

Engine flares up when the accelerator pedal is depressed for upshifting.
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Engine flares up suddenly when the accelerator pedal is depressed for

downshifting.
The malfunction is basically the same as for No.14 ENGINE FLARES UP
OR SLIPS WHEN UPSHIFTING OR DOWNSHIFTING.
If conditions for No.14 worsen, the malfunction will
develop to No.15.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.16 JUDDER UPON TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) OPERATION [SJ6AEL]
16
DESCRIPTION
Judder upon torque converter clutch (TCC) operation

Vehicle jolts when TCC is engaged.
Poor TCC engagement due to either slippage because the TCC piston is
stuck or the line pressure is low.
CAUTION:
the ATF.
TCC slippage, burnt
Line pressure low
signal
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

signal
VSS malfunction
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.17 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK FROM N TO D OR N TO R POSITION/RANGE
[SJ6A-EL]
17
DESCRIPTION
Excessive shift shock from N to D or N to R position/range

Strong shock felt when shifting from N to D or N to R position/range at
idle.
Shift shock may worsen when the fail-safe is operating. If no DTC is
output, the shift shock may worsen due to poor operation of the control
valve body or sticking of the clutch.
Clutch burnt (ND: C1 clutch, NR: C3 clutch or B4
brake)
ATF level low
Line pressure low
signal
signal
Incorrect turbine sensor signal (ND)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

malfunction
TCC control solenoid malfunction (NR)
Poor hydraulic operation (Malfunction in range change)
Idle speed high
Poor tightening torque of engine mount, exhaust mount,
suspension, propeller shaft
Line pressure high
Insufficient battery voltage
Harness or connector malfunction
AT malfunction
NOTE:
STEP
INSPECTION
Does the shift shock occur

only when the engine is
cold?
Inspect the TFT sensor and

related wiring harness:
vibration, intermittent
open/short circuit.
ACTION
No Go to Step 3.
No Repair or replace part if necessary.

TEMPERATURE (TFT)
SENSOR INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Is it normal?
3
Perform the initial learning

procedure.
YesTroubleshooting is completed.
(See Initial Learning.)
Does symptom eliminate?

4

TEST [SJ6A-EL].)
Is stall speed normal?

TEST [SJ6A-EL].)

RPM

APP
BOO
ECT
7
Stop the engine.

Inspect following solenoids.
(See SOLENOID VALVE
Line
pressure
control
solenoid
Shift
solenoid A
Shift
solenoid F
TCC control
solenoid
Are they normal?

valve body.
REMOVAL [SJ6A-EL].)
SJ6A-EL.)

symptoms.
completed.
Initial Learning
WARNING:
When performing a initial learning, be aware of other vehicles, people, and other
impediments to order to avoid an accident.
NOTE:
While self-learning control gradually reduces shock during normal driving, initial learning is
performed to initially learn a certain amount of driving conditions.
1. Warm-up
Increase the ATF temperature by leaving the vehicle idling or performing city
driving. Verify that the ATF temperature is between 50120 C {122248
F}. If the ATF temperature is outside this range, work to bring it inside the
range.
CAUTION:
Do not raise the ATF temperature by stalling the engine.
NOTE:
If the ATF temperature is not between 50120 C {122248 F} , initial
learning cannot be performed.
Before learning, inspect for variable shift shock.
2. Gear shift control learning
In D range, with the throttle opening between 2530 % , drive until you reach
6th gear and a vehicle speed of 80 km/h {50 mph} or higher. Then, release
the accelerator pedal and coast, and bring the vehicle to a stop in at least 60
s. Repeat this procedure 10 times.
3. Inspect learning results
Verify that variable speed shock and shift shock have decreased compared to
the conditions before learning.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.18 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK IS GIVEN WHEN UPSHIFTING AND
DOWNSHIFTING [SJ6A-EL]
18
DESCRIPTION
Excessive shift shock is given when upshifting and downshifting

Excessive shift shock is felt when depressing the accelerator pedal at
upshifting.
During cruising, excessive shift shock is felt when depressing accelerator
pedal at downshifting.
Shift shock may worsen when the fail-safe is operating. The shift shock
may worsen if the APP sensor or turbine sensor malfunctions.
brake, B2 brake, B3 brake, B4 brake)
ATF level low
Line pressure low, high
signal
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

malfunction

Body GND and sensor GND malfunction
TCM malfunction
AT internal malfunction
Harness and/or connector malfunction
Insufficient battery voltage
Loose parts installation (engine or
transmission mounts, suspension,
propeller shaft)
Poor hydraulic operation (Malfunction in range change)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.19 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK ON TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
[SJ6A-EL]
19
Excessive shift shock on torque converter clutch (TCC)
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Strong shock is felt when the TCC is engaged.

The troubleshooting flow is the same as No.16 JUDDER UPON TORQUE
CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) OPERATION.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.20 NOISE OCCURS AT IDLE WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN ALL
POSITIONS/RANGES [SJ6A-EL]
20
Noise occurs at idle when vehicle is stopped in all positions/ranges
DESCRIPTION
Transmission is noisy in all positions and ranges when the vehicle is idling.
The malfunction is in the pressure solenoid or oil pump which causes a
high-pitched noise to be emitted from the transmission at idle.
NOTE:
If a noise is emitted during shifting only, the malfunction
is in the C1 clutch, C2 clutch, C3 clutch, B1 brake, B2
brake, B3 brake, or B4 brake.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
If a noise is emitted during shifting at certain gears only

or during deceleration only, it is gear noise.
Before following the troubleshooting steps, make sure
that the Automatic Transmission On-Board Diagnostic and
Automatic Transmission Basic Inspection are conducted.
(See BASIC INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Inspect engine
condition.
Is there any engine
concern (e.g. Rough
idle, vibration)?
ACTION
YesGo to appropriate symptom troubleshooting.
No Replace basic inspection and repair or replace any
malfunctioning parts according to the inspection result

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.21 NOISE OCCURS AT IDLE WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN D RANGE, OR
IN R POSITION [SJ6A-EL]
21
Noise occurs at idle when vehicle is stopped in D range, or in R position
DESCRIPTION
Transmission is noisy in driving ranges when vehicle idling.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Although the malfunction is basically the same as No.20 NOISE OCCURS

AT IDLE WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN ALL POSITIONS/RANGES, other
causes may include selector lever position disparity or TR switch position
disparity.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.24 ENGINE STALLS WHEN SHIFTED TO D RANGE, OR IN R POSITION [SJ6AEL]
24
Engine stalls when shifted to D range, or in R position

Engine stalls when shifting from N or P position to D range or R position at
idle.
DESCRIPTION
The malfunction is on the engine control side (e.g. electronic controlled

throttle system). Otherwise, the malfunction is in the turbine sensor
(engine sometimes starts) or the TCC circuit (engine always stalls).
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
NOTE:
STEP
INSPECTION
Go to symptom troubleshooting No.5

ENGINE STALLS-AFTER START/AT
IDLE.
(See NO.5 ENGINE STALLS-AFTER
START/AT IDLE [13B-MSP].)
ACTION
Is the engine control system normal?

2
Inspect for bending, damage,

corrosion or kinks of the oil cooler
pipes.
Are the oil cooler pipes normal?
YesReplace the control valve body.

[SJ6A-EL].)
Then go to the next step.
No Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
3
Verify that the symptom is solved.

Is the problem remained?
YesOverhaul the transmission and repair or

replace any malfunctioning parts.
Manual SJ6A-EL.)

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.25 ENGINE STALLS WHEN DRIVING AT SLOW SPEED OR STOPPING [SJ6AEL]
25
Engine stalls when driving at slow speeds or stopping

Engine stalls when the brake pedal is depressed while driving at low speed
or stopping.
DESCRIPTION
The malfunction is in the engine control system (e.g. Fuel injection

control, electronic controlled throttle system). Otherwise the TCC circuit.
Line pressure low
signal
signal
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Oil cooler malfunction (Foreign material mixed in ATF)
ATF amount is Low
NOTE:
STEP
INSPECTION
Go to symptom troubleshooting No.10

LOW IDLE/STALLS DURING
ACTION
DECELERATION.
(See NO.10 LOW IDLE/STALLS DURING
DECELERATION [13B-MSP].)
No Repair or replace any malfunctioning

parts according to the inspection results.
Is the engine control system normal?

2
Access TCM PID TCCC using the MMDS.
Operate the TCC solenoid valve by MMDS simulation function.
No Replace the control valve body.
Does the TCC solenoid valve operate

properly?
Access the following PCM and TCM

PCM:
APP

[SJ6A-EL].)
No Inspect and repair suspected PID related
part and wiring harness.
ECT
BOO
TCM:
TSS
OSS
VSS
4
Perform the oil cooler flushing by air

blow.
(See OIL COOLER FLUSHING [SJ6AEL].)
Are there any foreign material from oil
cooler?
YesClean the oil cooler and cooler line.

(See OIL COOLER FLUSHING [SJ6A-EL].)
(See TORQUE CONVERTER

symptoms.

completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.26 STARTER DOES NOT WORK [SJ6A-EL]
26
Starter does not work
DESCRIPTION
Starter does not work even when in P or N position.

Selector lever mis-adjustment
Manual shaft malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
TR switch mis-adjustment
Transmission operates in fail-safe function (Starter lock system related
circuit open or short)
Immobilizer system operating or system malfunction.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Inspect selector lever, TR
switch and manual shaft
positions.
Are these position normal?

(See TRANSMISSION RANGE
(TR) SWITCH INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
ACTION
No Adjust the suspect part position.
YesGo to engine system troubleshooting No.3 WILL

NOT CRANK troubleshooting procedure.
No Replace the TR switch.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.27 GEAR POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE IN M RANGE
[SJ6A-EL]
27
Gear position indicator light does not illuminate in M range

Gear position indicator light in instrument cluster does not illuminate in M
range with the ignition switch at ON.
DESCRIPTION
M range switch, gear position indicator light or related wiring harness

malfunction
NOTE:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

STEP
INSPECTION
Do other indicator
lights illuminate with
the ignition switch at
ON?
Access TCM PID

MNL_SW using the MMDS.
YesInspect the instrument cluster.
Monitor the PID at all

selector lever positions.
(See TCM INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Are PID values normal?
ACTION
No Inspect the meter fuse.
No Inspect the M range switch.

(See SELECTOR LEVER COMPONENT INSPECTION.)
If the M range switch is normal, inspect
for followings;.
Between the selector
lever component
terminal B (M range
switch) and TCM
terminal 2G.
Between the selector
lever component
terminal A and GND.
3

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.28 GEAR POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES IN D RANGE OR P, N,
R POSITIONS [SJ6A-EL]
28
Gear position indicator light illuminates when in D range or P, N, R positions

Gear position indicator light in instrument cluster illuminates in D range or
P, N, R position with the ignition switch at ON.
DESCRIPTION
M range switch or related wiring harness malfunction

NOTE:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

STEP
1
INSPECTION
Access TCM
PID
MNL_SW
using the MMDS.
Monitor the
PID at all
selector
lever
positions.
(See TCM
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Are PID
values
ACTION
If the M range switch is normal, inspect for short to
GND between the selector lever component terminal
B (M range switch) and TCM terminal 2G.
normal?
2

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.29 DOES NOT UPSHIFT IN M RANGE [SJ6A-EL]
29
Does not upshift in M range

Gear position indicator light in instrument cluster illuminates, but the
vehicle does not upshift when the selector lever is pushed to + side or
steering shift switch UP is pulled.
DESCRIPTION
Up switch or related wiring harness malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Steering shift switch or related circuit malfunction.
STEP
INSPECTION
Access TCM PID

UP_SW using the
M-MDS.
Monitor the PID at
selector lever is
pushed to +
side.
(See TCM
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Are PID values
normal?
Access TCM PID

SS SS+ using the
M-MDS.
Monitor the PID
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No Inspect the up switch.
If the up switch is normal, inspect for
followings;.
Between the selector lever
component terminal D (up
switch) and TCM terminal 2J.
component terminal A and
GND.
No Inspect the steering shift switch.
steering shift
switch UP is
pulled.
(See TCM
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Are PID values
normal?

If the steering shift switch is normal, inspect
for followings;.
Between the audio control
switch terminal F (steering
shift switch) and TCM
terminal 2AF.
switch terminal C (steering
shift switch GND) and TCM
terminal 2AB.

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.30 DOES NOT DOWNSHIFT IN M RANGE [SJ6A-EL]
30
Does not downshift in M range

Gear position indicator light in instrument cluster illuminates, but the
vehicle does not downshift when the selector lever is pushed to side
or steering shift switch DOWN is pushed.
DESCRIPTION
Down switch or related wiring harness malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Steering shift switch or related circuit malfunction.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Access TCM PID
DWN_SW using the
M-MDS.
Monitor the PID at
selector lever is
pushed to - side.
(See TCM
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Are PID values
normal?
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No Inspect the down switch.
If the down switch is normal, inspect for
followings;.
component terminal F (down
switch) and TCM terminal
2F.
component terminal A and
GND.
Access TCM PID SS

SS- using the MMDS.

Monitor the PID

steering shift
switch DOWN is
pushed.
(See TCM
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
Are PID values
normal?

for followings;.
switch terminal F (steering
shift switch) and TCM
terminal 2AF.
switch terminal C (steering
shift switch GND) and TCM
terminal 2AB.

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.22 NO ENGINE BRAKING [SJ6A-EL]
22
No engine braking
Engine speed drops to idle but the vehicle coasts when the accelerator
pedal is released during cruising at medium to high speeds.
DESCRIPTION
Engine speed drops to idle but the vehicle coasts when accelerator pedal
is released when in M range (1GR) at low vehicle speed.
Clutch slippage, burnt (C4 clutch/B1 brake/B2 brake/B4 brake)
Line pressure low
VSS malfunction
Improper signal from PCM (engine
speed, accelerator pedal position, engine
coolant temperature, engine torque
signals)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

malfunction
NOTE:
STEP
INSPECTION
Do the following symptoms

occur concurrently?
Engine
ACTION
YesGo to No.14 ENGINE FLARES UP OR SLIPS WHEN
UPSHIFTING OR DOWNSHIFTING, or No.15
ENGINE FLARES UP OR SLIPS WHEN
ACCELERATING VEHICLE.
flares up or
slips during
acceleration
Engine
flares up or
slips when
shifting
2

RPM

APP
ECT
3
Stop the engine.

Inspect line pressure control
solenoid.
(See SOLENOID VALVE
Is the normal?

valve body.
REMOVAL [SJ6A-EL].)
SJ6A-EL.)

symptoms.

completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.23 TRANSMISSION OVERHEATS [SJ6A-EL]
23
Transmission overheats
Burnt smell emitted from transmission.
DESCRIPTION
Smoke emitted from transmission.

The malfunction is restricted to the hindrance of coolant at the oil cooler.
In addition, overheating of the transmission may be caused by a
malfunction of the TFT sensor.
Line pressure low
ATF level low
Incorrect accelerator position signal
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Oil cooler malfunction (Foreign material mixed in with

ATF)
Excessive amount of ATF
NOTE:
STEP
1
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)
ACTION
Is stall speed normal?

[SJ6A-EL].)
Inspect the TFT sensor and related

wiring harness: vibration,
intermittent open/short circuit

No Repair or replace part if necessary.
Is it normal?
4

solenoid.
(See SOLENOID VALVE

No Overhaul the transmission and repair or

replace any malfunctioning parts. (clutch
slippage, worn)
Is it normal?

Manual SJ6A-EL.)
Inspect for bending, damage,

corrosion or kinks of the oil cooler
pipes.
Are oil cooler pipes normal?
YesInspect the coupler component.

Manual SJ6A-EL.)
No Replace any malfunctioning parts.

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.31 M RANGE POSITION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE IN M
RANGE AND/OR IN D RANGE WITH DIRECT MODE/M RANGE POSITION
INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES IN D RANGE WHILE NOT IN DIRECT MODE
[SJ6A-EL]
31
M range position indicator light does not illuminate in M range and/or in D

range with direct mode/M range position indicator light illuminates in D range
while not in direct mode
M range position indicator light in instrument cluster does not illuminate in
M range and/or in D range in direct mode when ignition switch is in ON
position.
DESCRIPTION
M range position indicator light illuminates in D range while not in direct

mode when ignition switch is in ON position.
Steering shift switch malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between manual switch (built-in

selector lever) and TCM
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between steering shift switch and
TCM
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
Access TCM PID MNL SW using the

M-MDS.

Monitor the MLN SW PID with

move the selector lever to all

INSPECTION.)
position and range.

Does the MNL SW PID indicate
properly?
If the M range is normal,

inspect for followings;.
Between the
selector
lever
component
terminal B
(M range
switch) and
TCM
terminal 2G.
Between the
selector
lever
component
terminal A
and GND.
Access TCM PIDs UP SW and DWN

SW using the M-MDS.
Monitor the UP SW and DWN SW
PIDs by pressing the steering shift
switch while the selector lever is in
the D range.
Are the UP SW and DWN SW PIDs
indicated correctly?
YesInspect the instrument cluster using the

input/output test mode.
INSPECTION.)
and repair the following wiring harnesses:
Between steering shift switch
terminal F (steering shift
switch) and TCM terminal
2AF
Between steering shift switch
terminal C (steering shift
switch GND) and TCM
terminal 2AB

symptoms.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FLYWHEEL INSPECTION
1. Remove the flywheel. (See CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the surface that contacts the clutch disc for scratches, nicks, and discoloration.
NOTE:
1. Correct slight scratches and discoloration using sandpaper.
2. Inspect the runout of the surface that contacts the clutch disc with the flywheel
installed to the eccentric shaft.
3. Inspect the ring gear teeth for damage and wear.
4. Install the flywheel.
5. Measure the runout of the surface that contacts the clutch disc using a dial gauge.
If it exceeds the maximum specification, replace the flywheel.

Flywheel maximum runout
0.2 mm {0.008 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PILOT BEARING INSPECTION
NOTE:
Inspect the pilot bearing when it is installed to the eccentric shaft.
1. Remove the clutch unit so that the pilot bearing can be inspected. (See CLUTCH UNIT
2. Inspect the pilot bearing for damage, wear, and proper rotation.
If there is any malfunction, replace the pilot bearing.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1 Clutch release cylinder
(See CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

2 Manual transmission
3 Boot
4 Clutch release collar
5 Clutch release fork
6 Clutch cover
(See Clutch Cover, Clutch Disc Removal Note.)
(See Clutch Cover Installation Note.)
7 Clutch disc
(See Clutch Cover, Clutch Disc Removal Note.)
(See Clutch Disc Installation Note.)
8 Oil seal
(See Oil Seal, Pilot Bearing Removal Note.)
(See Pilot Bearing, Oil Seal Installation Note.)
9 Pilot bearing
(See Oil Seal, Pilot Bearing Removal Note.)
(See Pilot Bearing, Oil Seal Installation Note.)
10Locknut
11Flywheel
(See Flywheel Removal Note.)
(See Flywheel Installation Note.)
Clutch Cover, Clutch Disc Removal Note

1. Install the SSTs.
2. In criss-cross pattern, loosen the bolts one rotation at a time until there is no remaining spring pressure.
3. Remove the clutch cover and the clutch disc.
Oil Seal, Pilot Bearing Removal Note

NOTE:
Remove the pilot bearing only if there is a malfunction.
1. Remove the pilot bearing and the oil seal together using the SST.
Flywheel Removal Note

1. Install the SST to the flywheel.
2. Remove the locknut using the SST.
NOTE:
Inspect the eccentric shaft for oil leakage after removing the flywheel. If necessary, replace the oil seal. (See
REAR OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)

3. Remove the flywheel using the SST.
4. Remove the key from the eccentric shaft.
Flywheel Installation Note

1. Install the key to the eccentric shaft.
2. Align the flywheel key groove with the eccentric shaft key and install.
3. Install the SST to the flywheel.

4. Tighten the locknut using the SST.
Tightening torque
392490 Nm {40.049.9 kgfm, 289361 ftlbf}
CAUTION:
Remove the seal protruding from the threads without it becoming caught in the pilot bearing.
Pilot Bearing, Oil Seal Installation Note

1. Install the pilot bearing using the SSTs.
NOTE:
Bearing outer diameter: 20 mm {0.787 in}
Press-in depth: 11.512.25 mm {0.4530.482 in}
2. Install a new oil seal using the SSTs.
Clutch Disc Installation Note

1. Clean the splines of the clutch disc and the main drive gear with a brush.
2. Spread a thin layer of clutch grease on the splines.
3. Secure the clutch disc to the flywheel using the SSTs.
Clutch Cover Installation Note

1. Align the clutch cover with the flywheel knock pin and install.
2. Tighten the bolts evenly and gradually in the order shown in the figure.
Tightening torque
22.133.1 Nm {2.263.37 kgfm, 16.324.4 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH LOCATION INDEX
1 Clutch pipe
(See GENERAL PROCEDURES (CLUTCH).)
2 Clutch fluid
(See CLUTCH FLUID INSPECTION.)
(See CLUTCH FLUID REPLACEMENT.)
3 Clutch pedal
(See CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT.)
(See CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4 Clutch master cylinder
(See CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
5 Clutch release cylinder
(See CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
6 Clutch unit
(See CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7 Clutch cover
(See CLUTCH COVER INSPECTION.)
8 Clutch disc
(See CLUTCH DISC INSPECTION.)
9 Clutch release collar
(See CLUTCH RELEASE COLLAR INSPECTION.)
10Pilot bearing
(See PILOT BEARING INSPECTION.)
11Flywheel
(See FLYWHEEL INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GENERAL PROCEDURES (CLUTCH)
CAUTION:
Clutch fluid will damage painted surfaces. Be careful not to spill any on painted surfaces. If
fluid does get on painted surfaces, wipe it off immediately.
NOTE:
If any hydraulic related parts of the clutch sytem are removed during the procedure, add
clutch fluid, bleed the system and inspect for leakage after the procedure has been
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH FLUID INSPECTION
1. Inspect whether the fluid level in the reserve tank is between MIN and MAX.
If the fluid is not at the specified level, adjust the fluid level (MIN-MAX on
reserve tank) by adding/draining the fluid.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH COVER INSPECTION
1. Remove the clutch cover. (See CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Measure the wear of the diaphragm spring fingers using a vernier caliper.
If it exceeds the maximum specification, replace the clutch cover.

Clutch cover diaphragm spring fingers maximum depth
0.6 mm {0.024 in}
3. Measure the pressure plate flatness using a straight edge and a feeler gauge.
NOTE:
Measure the pressure plate flatness across the center.

Clutch cover maximum clearance
0.5 mm {0.020 in}
4. Attach a dial gauge to the rear housing, rotate the flywheel, then inspect for height difference
between the diaphragm spring fingers.

Clutch cover maximum height difference
1.0 mm {0.039 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH DISC INSPECTION
1. Remove the clutch disc. (See CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the lining surface for discoloration and grease adhesion.
3. Inspect the torsion spring for weakness and the rivet for looseness.
4. Using a vernier caliper, measure the depth between the lining surface and the rivet head.
If it is less than the minimum specification, replace the clutch disc.

Clutch disc minimum depth
0.3 mm {0.012 in}
5. Measure the clutch disc runout using a dial gauge.
If it exceeds the maximum specification, replace the clutch disc.

Clutch disc maximum runout
0.7 mm {0.028 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH RELEASE COLLAR INSPECTION
CAUTION:
Do not clean the clutch release collar with cleaning fluids or a steam cleaner because it is
filled with grease.
1. Remove the clutch release collar. (See CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Turn the collar while applying force in the axial direction, and inspect for sticking, excessive
resistance, and an abnormal noise.
If there is any malfunction, replace the clutch release collar.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4. Fully depress the clutch pedal, and verify that the engine starts.
1 CPP switch connector

2 CPP switch
3 Starter interlock switch connector

4 Starter interlock switch
(See Starter Interlock Switch Installation Note.)
5 Nut cap / Clip
(See Nut Cap Removal Note.)
6 Nut
7 Clutch pedal component
(See Clutch Pedal Component Installation Note)
8 Retaining ring
9 Joint pin
10Bush
11Nut
12Push rod
13Fork
14Pedal pad
15Clutch pedal
Nut Cap Removal Note

1. Dispose of the nut cap after removal.
NOTE:
When installing the clutch pedal, install the clip instead of the nut cap.
Clutch Pedal Component Installation Note

CAUTION:
Always verify the tightening order for the clutch pedal installation nuts before performing the procedure. If there is a
malfunction in the tightening order, it could result in bracket deformation.
1. Install the clutch pedal component, and then temporarily tighten the nut A.
2. Insert the clip completely so that the clutch pedal adheres to the installation surface and there are no gaps between them.
3. Tighten the nuts B(2).
Tightening torque
18.625.5 Nm {1.902.60 kgfm, 13.718.8 ftlbf}
4. Tighten the nut A.
Tightening torque
18.625.5 Nm {1.902.60 kgfm, 13.718.8 ftlbf}
5. After installing the clutch pedal component, adjust/inspect the clutch pedal. (See CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT.)
Starter Interlock Switch Installation Note

CAUTION:
If the rod is pushed in, it may not operate properly. Be careful not to push the rod in when installing the starter interlock
switch.
1. Insert a new starter interlock switch into the pedal bracket hole in direction A.
2. While pushing the starter interlock switch in direction A, slide it in direction B until it locks securely.
3. Fully depress the clutch pedal in the direction of arrow C, and verify that a click sound from the starter interlock switch is heard.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Fluid will damage painted surfaces. Be careful not to spill any on painted surfaces. If fluid does get
on painted surfaces, wipe it off immediately.
3. Bleed the air from the system. (See CLUTCH FLUID REPLACEMENT.)
4. Inspect and adjust the clutch pedal. (See CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT.)
1Clip
2Clutch pipe, clutch hose
3Clutch pipe
4Bolt
5Clutch release cylinder
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Fluid will damage painted surfaces. Be careful not to spill any on painted surfaces. If it is spilled, wipe it off immediately.
3. Bleed the air from the system. (See CLUTCH FLUID REPLACEMENT.)
4. Inspect and adjust the clutch pedal. (See CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT.)
1Hose clip
2Clutch pipe
3Nut
4Clutch master cylinder
5Packing
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT
Clutch Pedal Stroke Inspection/Adjustment

1. Measure the clutch pedal stroke.
If there is any malfunction, loosen locknut A and adjust the pedal stroke with
adjusting bolt B. Tighten locknut A after adjustment.
Clutch pedal stroke
130 mm {5.12 in}
Clutch Pedal Play Inspection/Adjustment

1. Lightly depress the clutch pedal by hand until clutch resistance is felt and then measure the
pedal play.
If it is not within the specification, loosen locknut C and turn push rod D to
adjust the pedal play.
Clutch pedal play
515 mm {0.200.59 in}
Clutch pedal push rod play
At push rod setting line : 0.10.5 mm {0.0040.020 in} (Reference value)
At pedal pad : 0.52.9 mm {0.0200.110 in}
2. Remeasure the pedal play and, if it is within the specification, tighten locknut C.
Clutch Disengagement Point Inspection

2. With the clutch pedal depressed, move the shift lever to the position just before engaging the
reverse gear. (Do not shift completely to reverse position)
3. Gradually release the clutch pedal and then hold it at the point where the sound of geargrinding begins (clutch disengagement point).
4. Measure distance A from the clutch disengagement point to the position where the pedal has
returned completely (not depressed), and verify that the measurement is within the
specification.
If the measurement is not within the specification, inspect the clutch fluid level
and the fluid lines for air infiltration.
Distance A (From clutch disengagement point to fully-returned pedal

position)
111.8 mm {4.402 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1Boot
2Push rod
3Piston, piston cup component
4Return spring
5Bleeder cap
6Bleeder screw
7Clutch release cylinder body
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1 Hose clip
2 Reserve tank hose
3 Joint
4 Bushing
5 Bolt
6 Packing
7 Connector
8 Packing
9 Snap ring
(See Snap Ring Disassembly/Assembly Note.)
10Piston, secondary cup component
11Spacer
12Primary cup
13Return spring
14Clutch master cylinder body
Snap Ring Disassembly/Assembly Note

1. While pressing the piston in with a cloth-wrapped pin punch to protect the push rod contacting surface, remove/install the snap
ring.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLUTCH FLUID REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
Fluid will damage painted surfaces. Be careful not to spill any on painted surfaces. If fluid
does get on painted surfaces, wipe it off immediately.
Keep the fluid level in the reserve tank at 3/4 full or more during air bleeding.
NOTE:
When replacing the fluid, drain the old fluid, fill the reserve tank with new fluid and then
perform Steps 16 below.
Specified clutch fluid
SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3
1. Remove the bleeder cap from the clutch release cylinder, and connect a vinyl hose to the
bleeder plug.
2. Place the other end of the vinyl tube in a clear container, and fill fluid in the container during
air bleeding.
3. Working with two people, one should depress the clutch pedal a few times and then depress
and hold the pedal down.
4. While the clutch pedal is being held down, the other person should loosen the bleeder screw,
and bleed any fluid containing air bubbles. Once completed, tighten the bleeder screw.
5. Continue to perform Steps 3 and 4 until no air comes from the vinyl hose.
6. Tighten the bleeder screw.
Tightening torque
5.98.8 Nm {6189 kgfcm, 5377 inlbf}
7. Fill the reserve tank to MAX with the recommended fluid.
8. Perform the following inspections:
Clutch operation
Fluid leakage
Fluid level
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D]
4. Drain the transmission oil. (See TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT [P66M-D].)
7. Add transmission oil. (See TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT [P66M-D].)
8. Perform the "INSPECTION AFTER TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION", and verify that there is no malfunction. (See INSPECTION
AFTER TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
1 Shift lever knob

2 Upper panel
3 Ashtray panel
4 Shift insulator component (outer)
5 Shift insulator component (inner)
6 Shift lever component
(See Shift Lever Component Installation Note.)
9 HO2S connector
10HO2S connector bracket
11Clip
12Catalytic converter, middle pipe, main silencer
13Exhaust manifold stay
14Heat insulator
15Starter
16Clutch release cylinder clip
17Clutch release cylinder
18Plate
19Power plant frame
(See Power Plant Frame Installation Note.)
20Propeller shaft
21Back-up light switch connector
22Neutral switch connector
23Wiring Harness
(See Wiring Harness Removal Note.)
24Transmission installation bolt
25Transmission
(See Transmission Removal Note.)
(See Transmission Installation Note.)
26Stopper
27Bolt
28Dynamic damper

1. Support the transmission using a transmission jack.
Propeller Shaft Removal Note

1. Install the SST to the main shaft.
2. Insert a slab of wood behind the rear differential, and remove the propeller shaft.
Wiring Harness Removal Note

1. Remove the wiring harness clip from the transmission as shown in the figure.
Transmission Removal Note

WARNING:
Remove the transmission carefully, holding it steady. If the transmission falls it could be damaged or cause injury.
CAUTION:
To prevent part interference in the engine compartment, position the installation part of the exhaust manifold stay of the
front pipe on the transverse member to control the inclination of the transmission under its own weight.
1. Support the transmission securely using a transmission jack.
2. Remove the transmission installation bolt.

3. Remove the transmission.
Transmission Installation Note
1. Shift to any gear position.

2. Install the SST to the main shaft.
WARNING:
Remove the transmission carefully, holding it steady. If the transmission falls it could be damaged or cause
injury.
3. Place the transmission on the transmission jack and raise it.
NOTE:
Slowly rotate the SST to engage the clutch with the main drive gear spline, and install the transmission.
4. Install the transmission.
5. Tighten the transmission installation bolt.
Bolt length
A: 55 mm {2.1 in}
B: 90 mm {3.5 in}
Tightening torque
3752 Nm {3.85.3 kgfm, 2838 ftlbf}
Power Plant Frame Installation Note


4. Temporarily tighten the nuts in the order shown in the figure.
5. Tighten nut 1 until the power plant frame is seated in the rear differential.
6. Install the heat insulator, exhaust manifold stay, catalytic converter, middle pipe, main silencer and front tunnel member.
7. Raise the power plant frame front end (transmission side) or transmission using a transmission jack so that dimension A
(between power plant frame lower surface and front tunnel member lower surface) shown in the figure is within the adjustment
value.
NOTE:
When raising the power plant frame without a transmission jack, use bolts (M12x1.25) with a thread length of
55 mm {2.17 in} or more. Tighten the bolts from the underside of the front tunnel member as shown in the
figure and raise the power plant frame.
If there is the possibility of age-related bending/deterioration of the mount, adjust dimension A to approx. 15
mm {0.59 in} higher than the adjustment value to facilitate obtaining the specification.
5557 mm {2.172.24 in}
8. Tighten the nuts and bolts on the rear differential side in the order shown in the figure.
Bolt, nut number
1, 2
Tightening torque
Nm {kgfm, ftlbf}
126154
{1315, 93113}
7593
{7.69.5, 5568}
9. Tighten the nuts on the rear differential side in the order shown in the figure.
Tightening torque
126154 Nm {1315 kgfm, 93113 ftlbf}
If it is not within the specification, adjust dimension A again.
48.456.4 mm {1.912.22 in}
Shift Lever Component Installation Note

NOTE:
If the extension housing has been removed or the transmission has been disassembled and inspected, always add the
specified type and amount of transmission oil.
1. Add the specified type and amount of oil to the shift control case.
Shift control case specified oil grade

API Service GL-4
Shift control case specified oil viscosity
SAE 75W-90
Shift control case capacity (approx. quantity)
80230 ml {80230 cc, 4.914.0 in 3 }
2. Apply grease to the areas of the shift lever component as shown in the figure.
3. Align the shift lever component notch with the shift control case pin and install the shift lever component.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INSPECTION AFTER TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION [P66M-D]
1. After warming up the engine, perform a road test and inspect the following items:
a. No abnormal noise in each shift position.
b. Smooth shift operation when shifting gears.
c. No gear slipout after shifting gears.
d. Back-up light switch operates correctly.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NEUTRAL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D]
1. Remove the transmission. (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
2. Remove the neutral switch with the packing.
3. Install the neutral switch and a new packing to the transmission case.
Tightening torque
23.635.3 Nm {2.53.5 kgfm, 1826 ftlbf}
4. Install the transmission. (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MANUAL TRANSMISSION LOCATION INDEX [P66M-D]
1Transmission oil
(See TRANSMISSION OIL INSPECTION [P66M-D].)
(See TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT [P66M-D].)
2Oil seal (extension housing)
(See OIL SEAL (EXTENSION HOUSING) REPLACEMENT [P66M-D].)
3Neutral switch
(See NEUTRAL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
4Transmission
(See INSPECTION AFTER TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL SEAL (EXTENSION HOUSING) REPLACEMENT [P66M-D]
2. Drain the transmission oil. (See TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT [P66M-D].)
a. Member bracket (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
b. Tunnel member (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
c. Catalytic converter, middle pipe (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[13B-MSP].)
d. Propeller shaft (See PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the oil seal using a flathead screwdriver.
5. Tap a new oil seal into the case using the SSTs.
6. Apply the specified oil to the oil seal lip.

8. Add transmission oil. (See TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT [P66M-D].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMISSION OIL INSPECTION [P66M-D]
2. Remove the oil filler plug with washer.
3. Verify that the transmission oil is near the brim of the plug port.
If the oil is not near the brim of the plug port, add the specified amount and
type of oil.
Specified manual transmission oil grade
API Service GL-4
Specified manual transmission oil viscosity
SAE 75W-90
4. Install the oil filler plug and a new washer.
Tightening torque
4059 Nm {4.16.0 kgfm, 3043 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT [P66M-D]
2. Remove the oil filler plug with the washer and drain plug with the washer, and then drain the
oil.
3. Clean drain plug.

4. Install drain plug and a new washer.
Tightening torque
4059 Nm {4.16.0 kgfm, 3043 ftlbf}
5. Add the specified amount and type of oil through the plug port for oil filler plug to near the
brim of the port.
Specified manual transmission oil grade

API Service GL-4
Specified manual transmission oil viscosity
SAE 75W-90
Manual transmission oil capacity (approx. quantity)
1.95 L {2.06 US qt, 1.72 lmp qt}
6. Install the oil filler plug and a new washer.
Tightening torque
4059 Nm {4.16.0 kgfm, 3043 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL COOLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
4. Drain the ATF. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL].)
5. Remove the following parts.
a. Splash shield
b. Under cover
c. Battery tray, battery duct (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
d. Air cleaner duct, air cleaner, air cleaner bracket
e. PCM duct
f. Front tunnel member
g. Rear tunnel member
h. Catalytic converter (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
i. Insulator
j. Manual shaft lever component (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
k. TR switch connector
l. Solenoid valve connector
m. VSS connector
n. Turbine sensor connector
o. Heat insulator
p. Power plant frame (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
q. Propeller shaft (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].) (See PROPELLER SHAFT
r. Breather hose
8. Add ATF to the specified level. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL].)
9. Inspect for oil leakage from the oil pipes and oil hoses.
10. Inspect for coolant from the hoses.
11. Inspect the ATF level and condition. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
12. Perform the line pressure test. (See MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST [SJ6A-EL].)
13. Perform the road test. (See ROAD TEST [SJ6A-EL].)
1Connector bolt
2Washer
3Oil hose
(See Oil Pipe, Hose clamp, Oil hose Installation Note.)
4Hose clamp
5Oil pipe, oil hose
6Radiator (in tank oil cooler)
(See RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
(See Radiator (In Tank Oil Cooler) Installation Note.)
Radiator (In Tank Oil Cooler) Installation Note

1. The automatic transmission oil cooler flushing must be performed whenever a transmission is removed for service because the
existing fluid may be contaminated, and to prevent contamination of new fluid.
NOTE:
Flushing must be performed after installation of the overhauled or replaced transmission.
2. Follow the instructions in the manufacturers publication for flushing operation.
Oil Pipe, Hose clamp, Oil hose Installation Note

1. Apply compressed air to coolerside opening, and blow any remaining grime and foreign material from the cooler pipes.
Compressed air should be applied for more than 1 min.
2. Align the marks, and slide the oil hose onto the oil pipe until it is fully seated as shown.
3. Install the hose clamp onto the hose.

NOTE:
If reusing the hose, install the new hose clamp exactly on the mark left by the previous hose clamp. Then apply
force to the hose clamp in the direction of the arrow in order to fit the clamp in place.
4. Verify that the hose clamp does not interfere with any other components.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ROAD TEST [SJ6A-EL]
WARNING:
When performing a road test, be aware of other vehicles, people, impediments to avoid an accident.
NOTE:
When the legal speed limit must be exceeded, use a chassis dynamometer instead of performing a road test.
Road Test Preparation

2. Inspect the engine oil level. (See ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
3. Inspect the ATF level. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
4. Inspect the idle speed. (See ENGINE TUNE-UP [13B-MSP].)
5. Inspect the ignition timing. (See ENGINE TUNE-UP [13B-MSP].)
6. Verify that no DTCs are stored. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION [SJ6A-EL].)
Shift Diagram
D range (normal mode)
D Range Test
1. Perform road test preparation. (See Road Test Preparation.)
2. Shift the selector lever to the D range.
3. Accelerate with the throttle half and then wide open.
4. Verify that 12, 23, 34, 45, and 56 upshifts can be obtained. The shift points must be as shown in the table below.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the TCM and AT. (See SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)
5. Drive the vehicle in 6GR, 5GR, 4GR, 3GR, 2GR and verify that kickdown occurs for 65, 54, 43, 32, and 21 downshifts,
and that the shift points are as shown in the table below.
6. Decelerate the vehicle and verify that engine braking effect is felt in 4GR, 5GR, and 6GR.
7. Drive the vehicle and verify that TCC operation is obtained. The operation points must be as shown in the table below.
Shift point table
Range Mode
Throttle condition
Shift
Vehicle speed
Turbine speed
(km/h {mph})
(rpm)
Wide open throttle
D1 D2
4651 {2931}
5,8006,550
D2 D3
8693 {5457}
6,3506,900
D3 D4
129139 {8086}
6,5006,950
D4 D5
182192 {113119} 6,5506,850
TCC ON (D5 ) 182192 {113119} 4,7004,900

D5 D6
217227 {135140} 5,5505,800
TCC ON (D6 ) 217227 {135140} 4,5504,700
Half throttle
D1 D2
2635 {1721}
3,3004,450
D2 D3
5267 {3341}
3,8005,000
D3 D4
76102 {4863}
3,8505,100
D4 D5
119149 {7492}
4,3005,350
TCC ON (D5 ) 119149 {7492}
3,0503,800
NORMAL
D5 D6
163187 {102115} 4,1504,800
TCC ON (D6 ) 163187 {102115} 3,4003,900
Closed throttle position
Kickdown
D6 D5
5763 {3639}
1,2001,300
D5 D4
3743 {2326}
9501,050
D4 D3
2329 {1517}
8501,000
D3 D2
1521 {1013}
8001,050
D2 D1
39 {25}
250650
D6 D5
205215 {128133} 4,3004,450
D5 D4
170180 {106111} 4,3504,600
D4 D3
117127 {7378}
4,2004,550
D3 D2
7381 {4650}
3,7004,050
D2 D1
3238 {2023}
2,4002,800
Wide open throttle
D1 D2
4651 {2931}
5,8006,550
D2 D3
8693 {5457}
6,3506,900
D3 D4
129139 {8086}
6,5006,950
D4 D5
182192 {113119} 6,5506,850
TCC ON (D5 ) 182192 {113119} 4,7004,900

D5 D6
216226 {134140} 5,5505,750
TCC ON (D6 ) 216226 {134140} 4,5504,700
Half throttle
D1 D2
2634 {1721}
3,2504,350
D2 D3
5267 {3341}
3,8005,000
D3 D4
76102 {4863}
3,8505,100
D4 D5
118148 {7491}
4,2505,300
TCC ON (D5 ) 118148 {7491}
3,0003,800
AAS
D5 D6
210228 {131141} 5,4005,800
TCC ON (D6 ) 210228 {131141} 4,4004,750
Closed throttle position
Kickdown
D6 D5
5763 {3639}
1,2001,300
D5 D4
3743 {2326}
9501,050
D4 D3
2531 {1619}
9001,100
D3 D2
1521 {1013}
8001,050
D2 D1
39 {25}
250650
D6 D5
204214 {127132} 4,3004,450
D5 D4
170180 {106111} 4,3504,600
D4 D3
117127 {7378}
4,2004,550
D3 D2
7381 {4650}
3,7004,050
D2 D1
3238 {2023}
2,4002,800
Direct Mode Test

NOTE:
Direct mode inspection is performed representatively between 3rd and 4th gears.
2. Shift the selector lever to D range.
3. Perform the following tests.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the steering shift switch. (See STEERING SHIFT SWITCH INSPECTION.)
a. When the vehicle is driven according to the following table, inspect the point at which the system switches from
automatic shift mode to direct mode.
Driving conditions
Range
Mode
Vehicle
Accelerator speed
Gear
opening
position angle (%) (km/h
{mph})
Inspection item
Automatic
shift
3GR
mode
1015
3545
{22
27}
While driving under condition indicated on left with upswitch of steering shift switch operated, verify shift-up to
4GR with system switched to direct mode.
Automatic
shift
4GR
mode
1015
3545
{22
27}
While driving under condition indicated on left with downswitch of steering shift switch operated, verify shift-down
to 3GR with system switched to direct mode.
b. When the vehicle is driven according to the following table, inspect the point at which the system switches from direct
mode to automatic shift mode.
Driving conditions
Accelerator
opening
Range Mode Gear
position angle (%)
Direct
mode 4GR
1015
Vehicle
speed
Inspection item
(km/h
{mph})
3545
{22
27}
While driving under condition indicated on left and at constant

speed for several seconds * , verify that system switches to
automatic shift mode automatically.
Depending on the driving conditions, the time required to switch to automatic shift mode may vary.
M Range Test
2. Shift the selector lever to M range.
3. Verify that 12, 23, 34, 45, and 56 upshifts and 65, 54, 43, 32, and 21 downshifts are obtained by manual
shifting.
4. Decelerate the vehicle and verify that 65, 54, 43, 32, and 21 downshifts are obtained. The shift points must be as
shown in the table below.
5. Decelerate the vehicle and verify that engine braking effect is felt in all gears.
6. Drive the vehicle and verify that TCC operation is obtained in 5GR and 6GR. The operation points must be as shown in the table
below.
7. Drive the vehicle in 6GR and 5GR and verify that kickdown occurs for 65 and 54 downshifts, and that the shift points are as
shown in the table below.
Vehicle speed at shift point table
Range Mode
Throttle condition
Shift
Vehicle speed Turbine speed

km/h {mph}
(rpm)
M 6 M 5 5763 {3639} 1,2001,300

M 5 M 4 3743 {2326} 9501,050
M
NormalClosed throttle position M 4 M 3 2329 {1517} 8501,000

M 3 M 2 1521 {1013} 8001,050
M 2 M 1 1218 {811}
9001,300
P Position Test
1. Shift into the P position on a gentle slope. Release the brake, and verify that the vehicle does not roll.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the AT. (See SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM TABLE [SJ6A-EL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION LOCATION INDEX [SJ6A-EL]
1 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)

(See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
(See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL].)
2 Transmission range (TR) switch
(See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
(See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
(See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH ADJUSTMENT [SJ6A-EL].)
3 Transmission fluid temperature (TFT) sensor
(See TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
(See TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
4 Turbine sensor
(See TURBINE SENSOR INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)

(See TURBINE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
5 Vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
(See VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
(See VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
6 Solenoid valve
7 TCM
(See TCM INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
8 Automatic transmission
(See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
9 Torque converter
(See TORQUE CONVERTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
10Oil seal (oil pump)
(See OIL SEAL (OIL PUMP) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL].)
11Oil seal (extension housing)
(See OIL SEAL (EXTENSION HOUSING) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL].)
12Control valve body
13Oil cooler
(See OIL COOLER FLUSHING [SJ6A-EL].)
(See OIL COOLER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [SJ6A-EL].)
14Drive plate
(See DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST [SJ6A-EL]
Mechanical System Test Preparation

1. Engage the parking brake and use wheel chocks at the front and rear of the wheels.
3. Inspect the engine oil level. (See ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
4. Inspect the ATF level. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
5. Inspect the idle speed. (See ENGINE TUNE-UP [13B-MSP].)
6. Inspect the ignition timing. (See ENGINE TUNE-UP [13B-MSP].)
7. Verify that no DTCs are stored. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION [SJ6A-EL].)
Line Pressure Test

1. Perform mechanical system test preparation. (See Mechanical System Test Preparation.)
WARNING:
Removing the square head plug when the ATF is hot can be dangerous. Hot ATF can come out of the opening and
badly burn you. Before removing the square head plug, allow the ATF to cool.
NOTE:
Use a suitable oil pressure gauge that corresponds to the line pressure because the maximum scale value differs
depending on the oil pressure gauge.
2. Remove the test plug and O-ring from the line pressure inspection port.
3. Connect the SSTs as following:

When using the oil pressure gauge set (49 0378 400C), connect the SSTs (49 HD64 406A, 49 0378 400C, 49 B019
901B) to the line pressure inspection port as shown in the figure.
When using the oil pressure gauge set (49 D019 9A2), connect the SSTs (49 D019 910, 49 D019 911, 49 D019 912,
49 D019 909, 49 D019 908) to the line pressure inspection port as shown in the figure.
4. Start the engine and warm it up until the ATF reaches 6070 C {140158 F} .
6. Read the line pressure while the engine is idling for the D range.
7. Read the line pressure while the engine is idling for the R position and M range in the same manner.
8. Stop the engine.
9. Replace the oil pressure gauge as following:
When using the oil pressure gauge set (49 0378 400C), replace the SST (49 B019 901B) with SST (49 B019 902A).
When using the oil pressure gauge set (49 D019 9A2), replace the SST (49 D019 908) with SST (49 D019 907).

11. Firmly depress the brake pedal with the left foot.
CAUTION:
If the accelerator pedal is pressed for more than 5 s while the brake pedal is pressed, the transmission could be
damaged. Therefore, perform Steps 13 and 14 within 5 s.
13. Gradually depress the accelerator pedal with the right foot.
14. When the engine speed no longer increases, quickly read the line pressure and release the accelerator pedal.
15. Shift the selector lever to the N position and idle the engine for 1 min or more to cool the ATF.
16. Read the line pressure at the engine stall speed for the M range and R position in the same manner as in Steps 1115. Line
pressure
Position/Range
Idle
Specification (kPa {kgf/cm 2 , psi})

355425 {3.74.3, 5261}
D, M range
Stall1,3951,505 {14.315.3, 203218}
Idle
485585 {5.05.9, 7184}
R position
Stall1,6391,847 {16.818.8, 238267}
WARNING:
Removing the square head plug when the ATF is hot can be dangerous. Hot ATF can come out of the opening and
badly burn you. Before removing the square head plug, allow the ATF to cool.
17. Remove the SSTs.
18. Install the test plug and O-ring in the inspection port.
Tightening torque
5.98.8 Nm {6189 kgfcm, 5377 inlbf}
Evaluation of line pressure test
Condition
High pressure in all ranges
Possible cause
Primary regulator valve malfunction
Low pressure in all ranges
Primary regulator valve malfunction

Low pressure in D range only
Hydraulic circuit of D malfunction

C1 clutch malfunction
Hydraulic circuit of R malfunction
Low pressure in R position only
C3 clutch malfunction
B4 brake malfunction
Stall Speed Test

3. Firmly depress the brake pedal with the left foot.
CAUTION:
If the accelerator pedal is pressed for more than 5 s while the brake pedal is pressed, the transmission could be
damaged. Therefore, perform Steps 5 and 6 within 5 s.
5. Gently depress the accelerator pedal with the right foot.
6. When the engine speed no longer increases, quickly read the engine speed and release the accelerator pedal.
7. Shift the selector lever to the N position and idle the engine for 1 min or more to cool the ATF.
8. Perform a stall test of the M range and R position in the same manner as in Steps 37.
9. Turn off the engine. Engine stall speed
Position/RangeSpecification (rpm)
D, M range
2,1502,800
R position
1,7502,250
Evaluation of stall test

Condition
Low pressure in all ranges
Possible cause
Engine lack of power
Torque converter one-way clutch malfunction
Insufficient line pressure
High pressure in D range only
C1 clutch malfunction (slippage)

F3 one-way clutch malfunction
High pressure in R range only
B4 brake malfunction (slippage)

High pressure in all ranges
Time Lag Test

Oil leakage from each range circuit
3. Warm up the engine until the ATF temperature reaches 6070C {140158F} .
4. Shift the selector lever from the N position to D range.
5. Use a stopwatch to measure the time it takes from shifting until shock is felt. Take three measurements for each test and average
from the results using the following formula.
Formula
Average time lag = (Time 1 + Time 2 + Time 3) / 3
6. Perform the test for the following shifts in the same manner Step 5.
N position R position
Time lag
N position D range: 1.0 s or less
N position R position: 1.2 s or less
Evaluation of time lag test
Condition
Possible Cause
N position D range

N position R position

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
7. Add ATF and, with the engine idling, inspect the ATF level and inspect for leakage. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
(ATF) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL].) (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
8. Inspect selector lever operation. (See SELECTOR LEVER INSPECTION.)
9. Inspect for leakage of ATF from all connecting points.
10. Perform the mechanical system test. (See MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST [SJ6A-EL].)
Test item
Service item
Line pressure test Stall speed test Time lag test
Automatic transmission replacement
Control valve body replacement
Torque converter replacement

3 Heated oxygen sensor connector
4 TWC, middle pipe, main silencer
5 Exhaust manifold stay
6 Manual shaft lever component
(See Manual Shaft Lever Component Removal Note.)
(See Manual Shaft Lever Component Installation Note.)

7 Heat insulator
8 Transverse member
9 Starter
10Under cover
11Torque converter installation nuts
(See Torque Converter Installation Nuts Removal Note.)
(See Torque Converter Installation Nuts Installation Note.)
12Insulator
13TR switch connector
14Solenoid valve connector
15VSS connector
16Turbine sensor connector
17Wiring harness
18Power plant frame
(See Power Plant Frame Installation Note.)
19Plate
20Propeller shaft
21Connector bolt
22Washer
23Oil pipe, oil hose
24Transmission installation bolt
25Transmission
(See Transmission Removal Note.)
(See Transmission Installation Note.)
26Stopper
27Bolt
28Hose clamp
29Breather hose
30Breather tube
31Bracket
32Coupler bracket
33Driven plate
Manual Shaft Lever Component Removal Note

1. Mark the manual shaft lever component as shown in the figure.
2. Remove the manual shaft lever component installation nut.
Torque Converter Installation Nuts Removal Note

1. Lock the drive plate using a flathead screwdriver as shown in the figure.
2. Remove the torque converter installation nuts using a SST.
NOTE:
After separate the transmission from engine, remove the driven plate.
3. Loosen the driven plate installation bolts.

Transmission Removal Note

WARNING:
Verify that the transmission is securely supported by the jack. If the transmission falls, serious injury or death and damage
to the vehicle could result. Before removing the transmission make sure that the jack is securely supporting the transmission.
CAUTION:
To prevent the torque converter and transmission from separating, remove the transmission without tilting it toward the
torque converter.
2. Remove the transmission installation bolt.
Transmission Installation Note

WARNING:
Verify that the transmission is securely supported by the jack. If the transmission falls, serious injury or death and damage
to the vehicle could result. Before removing the transmission make sure that the jack is securely supporting the transmission.
CAUTION:
To prevent the torque converter and transmission from separating, remove the transmission without tilting it toward the
torque converter
CAUTION:
When install the new transmission, remove the holder with a bolt as shown in the figure.
2. Install the driven plate to the transmission (torque converter), and temporarily tighten.
3. Tighten the transmission mounting bolts.
Bolt length
A: 55 mm {2.2 in}
B: 70 mm {2.8 in}
Tightening torque
3752 Nm {3.85.3 kgfm, 2838 ftlbf}
Power Plant Frame Installation Note

1. Support the transmission and differential so that they are level using a transmission jack.

4. Temporarily tighten the bolts and nuts as shown in the figure.
5. Tighten the nut B until the power plant frame is seated in the differential.
6. Install the heat insulator, exhaust manifold stay, catalytic converter, middle pipe, main silencer and front tunnel member.
7. Raise the power plant frame front end (transmission side) or transmission using a transmission jack so that dimension A
(between power plant frame lower surface and front tunnel member lower surface) shown in the figure is within the adjustment
value.
NOTE:
When raising the power plant frame without a transmission jack, use bolts (M12x1.25) with a thread length of 55
mm {2.17 in} or more. Tighten the bolts from the underside of the front tunnel member as shown in the
figure and raise the power plant frame.
If there is the possibility of age-related bending/deterioration of the mount, adjust dimension A to approx. 15 mm
{0.59 in} higher than the adjustment value to facilitate obtaining the specification.
5557 mm {2.172.24 in}
8. Tighten the bolts and nuts on the differential side in the order shown in the figure.
StepBolt, nut
Tightening torque
(Nm {kgfm, ftlbf})
126.0154.0
{12.915.7, 93.0113.5}
126.0154.0
{12.915.7, 93.0113.5}
126.0154.0
{12.915.7, 93.0113.5}
74.593.2
{7.69.5, 55.068.7}
9. Tighten the bolts and nuts on the transmission side as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque
126.0154.0 Nm {12.915.7 kgfm, 93.0113.5 ftlbf}
If not within the specification, adjust dimension A again.
48.456.4 mm {1.912.22 in}
Torque Converter Installation Nuts Installation Note

1. Align the holes by turning the torque converter.
2. Lock the drive plate using a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Loosely and equally tighten the torque converter nuts, then further tighten them to the specified tightening
torque.
3. Tighten the torque converter installation nuts.
Tightening torque
3449 Nm {3.54.9 kgfm, 2636 ftlbf}
4. Tighten the driven plate installation bolts.
Tightening torque
3449 Nm {3.54.9 kgfm, 2636 ftlbf}
Manual Shaft Lever Component Installation Note

1. Align the mark of the manual shaft lever component as shown in the figure.
2. Install the manual shaft lever component installation nut.

Tightening torque
10.814.7 Nm {1.11.4 kgfm, 8.010.8 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
1. Remove the transmission (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6AEL].)
1Bolt
2Backing plate
3Drive plate
(See Drive Plate Removal Note.)
(See Drive Plate Installation Note.)
4Adapter
Drive Plate Removal Note

1. Set the SST against the engine.
2. Remove the bolts and the drive plate.
Drive Plate Installation Note

1. Set the SST against the engine.
2. Tighten the drive plate mounting bolts in two or three steps in the order as shown in the
figure.
Tightening torque
41.256.8 Nm
{4.25.7 kgfm, 30.441.8 ftlbf}
3. Install the transmission. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6AEL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TCM INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference)

NOTE:
Use the ground of terminal 1P and 1X of the TCM when measuring terminal voltage, as an error may occur
when connecting the negative circuit tester to ground.
Terminal
Signal
Connected
to
Test Condition
Voltage
(V)
Action
1A
1B
1C
CAN_L
PCM
Because this terminal is for serial

communication, good/no good judgment by
terminal voltage is not possible. Carry out
inspection according to DTCs.
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
TCC control
solenoid
1D
TCC control
TCC control
solenoid
solenoid
GND
Inspect using the wave profile.

(See Inspection Using An Oscilloscope
(Reference).)
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the line
pressure
control solenoid
1E
Line pressure Line

pressure
control
control
solenoid
solenoid
GND
Idle and selector lever is at P position or N

position
Below 1.0
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1F
1G
CAN_H
PCM
Idle
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1H
1I
ATF temperature 20C {68F}
Approx.
3.0
Inspect the
TFT sensor
Approx.
2.14
Approx.
1.38
1J
1K
ATF
temperature TFT sensor
(+)
(See
TRANSMISSION
FLUID
TEMPERATURE
(TFT) SENSOR
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
shift solenoid G
1L
Shift
solenoid G
GND
Shift
solenoid G

(Reference).)
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1M
TFT sensor
GND
TFT sensor Under any condition
Continuity
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1N
Inspect the
shift solenoid F
1O
Shift
solenoid F
GND
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Shift
solenoid F

(Reference).)
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1P
System GND GND
Under any condition
Continuity
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
TCC control
solenoid
1Q
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
TCC control
TCC control
solenoid
solenoid
control

(Reference).)
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the line
pressure
control solenoid
1R
Line pressure Line

pressure
control
control
solenoid
solenoid
control
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])

(Reference).)
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
5GR, 6GR
1S
Shift
solenoid D
control
Shift
solenoid D
B+
1GR, 2GR, 3GR, 4GR
Below 1.0
Inspect the
shift solenoid D
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1T
1U
1GR, 2GR, 3GR, 4GR
1V
Shift
solenoid E
control
Shift
solenoid E
B+
5GR, 6GR
Below 1.0
Inspect the
shift solenoid E
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1W
1X
System GND GND
Under any condition
Continuity
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
shift solenoid G
1Y
Shift
solenoid G
control
Shift
solenoid G
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])

(Reference).)
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
shift solenoid F
1Z
Shift
solenoid F
control
Shift
solenoid F
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])

(Reference).)
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1GR, 2GR, 3GR
1AA
Shift
solenoid C
control
Shift
solenoid C
4GR, 5GR, 6GR
B+
Below 1.0
Inspect the
shift solenoid C
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1GR, 2GR, 6GR
B+
Inspect the
shift solenoid B
1AB
Shift
solenoid B
control
Shift
solenoid B
3GR, 4GR, 5GR
Below 1.0
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1AC
1AD
1AE
Power supplyBattery
Ignition
switch
IG
Constant
B+
Ignition switch ON
B+
Ignition switch OFF
Below 1.0
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
Ignition switch
(See IGNITION
SWITCH
INSPECTION
[WITHOUT
ADVANCED
KEYLESS
ENTRY AND
START
SYSTEM])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR
1AF
Shift
solenoid A
control
Shift
solenoid A
1GR
B+
Below 1.0
Inspect the
shift solenoid A
(See SOLENOID
VALVE
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
1AG
1AH
Ignition switch ON
1AI
IG
Ignition
switch
Ignition switch OFF
B+
Below 1.0
Inspect the
Ignition switch
(See IGNITION
SWITCH
INSPECTION
[WITHOUT
ADVANCED
KEYLESS
ENTRY AND
START
SYSTEM])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
turbine sensor
2A
Turbine
speed (+)
Turbine
sensor

(Reference).)
(See TURBINE
SENSOR
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
turbine sensor
2B
Turbine
speed (-)
Turbine
sensor
Ignition switch ON
Approx.
2.54
(See TURBINE
SENSOR
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
VSS
2C
Vehicle
speed (-)
VSS
Ignition switch ON
Approx.
2.5
(See VEHICLE
SPEED SENSOR
(VSS)
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
VSS
2D
Vehicle
speed (+)

VSS

(Reference).)
(See VEHICLE
SPEED SENSOR
(VSS)
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
2E
Turbine
sensor wiring GND
harness
shield GND
Under any condition
Continuity
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Shift down
Down
Down switch switch
2F
Below 1.0
(M range)
(Selector
(Selector
lever
lever
component) component) Other ranges, all positions
M range
2G
M range
switch
M range
switch
B+
Below 1.0
Other positions, all ranges
B+
Inspect the
selector lever
component
(See SELECTOR
LEVER
COMPONENT
INSPECTION)
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
selector lever
component
(See SELECTOR
LEVER
COMPONENT
INSPECTION)
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
2H
2I
VSS wiring
harness
shield GND
GND
Under any condition
Continuity
Shift up
(M range)
Up switch
2J
2K
(D range)
Below 1.0
Up switch
(Selector
(Selector
lever
lever
component) component)
TR switch
Other ranges, all positions
B+
D range
B+
TR switch
Below 1.0
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the
selector lever
component
(See SELECTOR
LEVER
COMPONENT
INSPECTION)
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
Inspect the TR
switch
(See
TRANSMISSION
RANGE (TR)
SWITCH
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
2L
R position
2M
TR switch
(R position)
B+
TR switch
Below 1.0
Inspect the TR
switch
(See
TRANSMISSION
RANGE (TR)
SWITCH
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
N position
2N
TR switch
(N position)
B+
TR switch
Below 1.0
Inspect the TR
switch
(See
TRANSMISSION
RANGE (TR)
SWITCH
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
P position
2O
TR switch
(P position)
B+
TR switch
Below 1.0
Inspect the TR
switch
(See
TRANSMISSION
RANGE (TR)
SWITCH
INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL])
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
2P
2Q
ATF
temperature TFT check Under any condition
connector
monitor
mode control
B+
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
2R
2S
2T
2U
2V
2W
2X
2Y
2Z
2AA
2AB
Steering shift Steering

switch GND shift switch Under any condition
Below 1.0
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
2AC
2AD
2AE
Up switch operated
Approx.
2.0
(Steering shift switch)

2AF
Shift up/Shift
down signal Steering
(Steering
shift switch)
shift switch
Down switch operated

(Steering shift switch)
Others
Inspect the
steering shift
switch
Approx.
2.53
(See STEERING
SHIFT SWITCH
INSPECTION)
Approx.
4.0
Inspect the
related wiring
harness
2AG
2AH
2AI
Inspection Using An Oscilloscope (Reference)
Turbine sensor (+)
TCM terminal: 2A
Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y) 2 ms/DIV (X)

Measuring condition: Vehicle speed at 30 km/h {19 mph} (D range 1GR)
Vehicle speed (+)
TCM terminal: 2D
Oscilloscope setting: 2.5 V/DIV (Y) 1 ms/DIV (X)

Measuring condition: Vehicle speed at 30 km/h {19 mph} (D range 1GR)
Shift solenoid F control (+)
TCM terminal: 1Z

Measuring condition: M range 5GR
Shift solenoid F control (-)
TCM terminal: 1O
Oscilloscope setting: 100 mV/DIV (Y) 1 ms/DIV (X)

Shift solenoid G control (+)
TCM terminal: 1Y

Shift solenoid G control (-)
TCM terminal: 1L
Oscilloscope setting: 50 mV/DIV (Y) 1ms/DIV (X)

TCC control solenoid control (+)
TCM terminal: 1Q

Measuring condition: P, N position, Idle
TCC control solenoid control (-)
TCM terminal: 1D
Oscilloscope setting: 50 mV/DIV (Y) 1 ms/DIV (X)

Line pressure control solenoid control (+)
TCM terminal: 1R

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
1TCM connector
2Nut
3Nut
4Bracket
5TCM
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Condition Inspection

1. Inspect the ATF for the following to determine whether the transmission should be
disassembled.
The ATF is muddy.
The ATF smells strange or unusual.
ATF Condition
Condition
Clear dark red
Possible cause
Normal
Damaged oil cooler inside of the radiator
Light red (pink)
Problem could occur to parts inside the transmission by water

Contaminated
contamination. It is necessary to overhaul the transmission and
with water
detect defected parts.
If necessary, replace the transmission.
Defective the powertrain components inside the transmission:
Particles cause wide range of problems by plugging up in oil
pipe, control valve body and oil cooler in radiator.
Has burnt smell and

metal particles are Deteriorated
ATF
Reddish found
brown
When large amount of metal particles are

found, overhaul the transmission and inspect for
defective parts.
If necessary, replace the transmission.
Implement flushing operation as there is a
possibility to have particles plugging up the oil
pipe or oil cooler inside the radiator.
Has no burnt smell Normal
Discoloration by oxidation
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL]
WARNING:
A hot transmission and ATF can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until
they are cool before replacing ATF.
NOTE:
Do not mistake the overflow plug for the drain plug.
1. Remove the drain plug and the drain plug gasket from the oil pan.
2. Drain the ATF into a container.

3. Clean the drain plug.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the drain plug gasket in the correct direction as shown in the figure.
4. Install a new drain plug gasket and the drain plug to the oil pan.
Tightening torque
17.522.5 Nm {1.82.2 kgfm, 13.016.5 ftlbf}
NOTE:
5. Remove the overflow plug and the overflow plug gasket.
6. Remove the filler plug and the O-ring.
7. Add the specified type of ATF through the filler plug hole.
ATF
Type: Mazda Genuine JWS3309

Capacity (approx. quantity): 8.0 L {8.5 US qt, 7.0 lmp qt}
8. Verify the ATF is dripping from the overflow orifice.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the overflow plug gasket in the correct direction as shown in
the figure.
9. Install a new overflow plug gasket and the overflow plug.

Tightening torque
17.522.5 Nm {1.82.2 kgfm, 13.016.5 ftlbf}
NOTE:
Replace the O-ring if it has malfunction.
10. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the filler plug.
Tightening torque
23.554.9 Nm {2.45.5 kgfm, 17.440.4 ftlbf}
CAUTION:
Always adjust the ATF level when replacing the ATF so that the appropriate level is
maintained.
11. Adjust the ATF level. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
[SJ6A-EL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
Operating inspection
1. Verify that the starter operates only when the ignition switch is turned to the START position
with the selector lever in the P or N position.
If there is any malfunction, adjust the TR switch. (See TRANSMISSION RANGE
(TR) SWITCH ADJUSTMENT [SJ6A-EL].)
2. Verify that the back-up lights illuminate when shifted to the R position with the ignition switch
at the ON position.
3. Verify that the positions of the selector lever and the indicator are aligned.

CAUTION:
Water or foreign material entering the connector can cause poor connections or corrosion.
Be sure that water or foreign material do not enter the connector when disconnecting it.

4. Remove the front tunnel member.
5. Remove the rear tunnel member.
6. Remove the catalytic converter. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
7. Remove the insulator.
8. Disconnect the TR switch connector.

10. Reinspect for continuity at TR switch.

If there is any malfunction, replace the TR switch. (See TRANSMISSION RANGE
(TR) SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
11. Connect the TR switch connector.
12. Install the insulator.
Tightening torque
811 Nm {82112 kgfcm, 7297 inlbf}
13. Install the catalytic converter. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
14. Install the rear tunnel member.
15. Install the front tunnel member.
17. Install the battery cover.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH ADJUSTMENT [SJ6A-EL]
CAUTION:
9. Separate the manual shaft lever component from selector lever.

11. Rotate the manual shaft to the N position.

CAUTION:
Do not use an impact wrench. Hold the manual shaft lever when removing the
manual shaft nut, otherwise the transmission may be damaged.
12. Set the adjustable wrench as shown in the figure to hold the manual shaft lever.
13. Remove the manual shaft nut.

14. Remove the washer and manual shaft lever component.
15. Loosen the TR switch mounting bolts.

16. Temporarily install the TR switch mounting bolt.
CAUTION:
Improper adjustment of the TR switch will cause abnormal operation of the
automatic transmission. Be sure to adjust the TR switch correctly.
17. Verify the TR switch reference line and the notch of the manual shaft are aligned.
18. Tighten the TR switch mounting bolts.

Tightening torque
9.815.7 Nm {100160 kgfcm, 87138 inlbf}
19. Inspect for continuity between TR switch terminals E and H.
20. Install the manual shaft lever component and washer.

CAUTION:
Do not use an impact wrench. Hold the manual shaft lever when tightening the
22. Tighten the manual shaft nut using a torque wrench.

Tightening torque
13.717.6 Nm {1.41.8 kgfm, 1113 ftlbf}
23. Shift the selector lever to P position.
24. Turn the manual shaft lever to P position.
25. Inspect TR switch continuity. (See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Tightening torque
10.814.7 Nm {1.11.4 kgfm, 8.010.8 ftlbf}
Tightening torque
811 Nm {82112 kgfcm, 7297 inlbf}
36. Inspect TR switch operation. (See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION [SJ6AEL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TURBINE SENSOR INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
CAUTION:
4. Disconnect the turbine sensor connector.
CAUTION:
Do not apply a shock in the turbine sensor.
Do not damage the terminals.
5. Measure the resistance between the turbine sensor terminals.
If there is any malfunction, replace the turbine sensor. (See TURBINE SENSOR
Turbine sensor resistance
560680 ohm
6. Connect the turbine sensor connector.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TURBINE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
CAUTION:
Do not damage the turbine sensor.
4. Disconnect the turbine sensor connector.
5. Remove the turbine sensor.
6. Install the turbine sensor.

Tightening torque
3.96.9 Nm {4070 kgfcm, 3560 inlbf}
7. Connect the turbine sensor connector.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
CAUTION:

10. Disconnect the VSS connector.
CAUTION:
Do not apply a shock in the VSS.
11. Measure the resistance between the VSS terminals.
If there is any malfunction, replace the VSS. (See VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
(VSS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
VSS resistance
560680 ohm
12. Connect the VSS connector.

Tightening torque
10.814.7 Nm {111149 kgfcm, 96.4129.3 inlbf}
Tightening torque
811 Nm {82112 kgfcm, 7297 inlbf}
16. Install the catalytic converter. (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-
MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
CAUTION:
Do not damage the VSS.
9. Separate the manual shaft lever component from the selector lever.
10. Disconnect the VSS connector.
12. Remove the power plant frame. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[SJ6A-EL].)
13. Remove the VSS.
14. Install the VSS.

Tightening torque
3.96.9 Nm {4070 kgfcm, 3560 inlbf}
15. Install the power plant frame. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[SJ6A-EL].)
16. Connect the VSS connector.

Tightening torque
10.814.7 Nm {1.11.4 kgfm, 8.010.8 ftlbf}
Tightening torque
811 Nm {82112 kgfcm, 7297 inlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
CAUTION:
Resistance inspection (On-vehicle)

4. Disconnect the solenoid valve connector.
5. Measure the resistance between the following terminals.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the coupler component.

If the coupler component is normal, replace the control valve body. (See
CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL [SJ6A-EL].) (See CONTROL VALVE BODY
Solenoid valve resistance (ATF temperature: 20 C {68 F})
Terminals
Solenoid valve
Resistance (ohm)
OGND
Shift solenoid A
1115
NGND
Shift solenoid B
1115
MGND
Shift solenoid C
1115
LGND
Shift solenoid D
1115
KGND
Shift solenoid E
1115
EF
Shift solenoid F
5.05.6
CD
Shift solenoid G
5.05.6
IJ
5.05.6
GH
TCC control solenoid
5.05.6
6. Connect the solenoid valve connector.

Continuity Inspection (On-Vehicle Inspection)

CAUTION:
Water or foreign material entering the connector can cause a poor connection or corrosion.
Be sure not to allow water or foreign material on the connector when disconnecting.
5. Verify that there is no continuity between coupler component terminals C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

and GND.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the coupler component.
If the coupler component is normal, replace the control valve body. (See
CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL [SJ6A-EL].) (See CONTROL VALVE BODY
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) LEVEL ADJUSTMENT [SJ6A-EL]
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Level Inspection

CAUTION:
The ATF level cannot be adjusted correctly if the ATF temperature is not within a normal
range (3954 C {103129 F}). Always perform the servicing according to the
adjustment procedure.
Remaining ATF may drip from the overflow tube even when the ATF level is less than the
specified value, therefore careful determination is required.
NOTE:
An overflow-type SJ6A-EL automatic transmission has been adopted with an overflow tube
installed to the oil pan for inspection of the ATF level. Therefore, no dipstick has been
equipped.
1. Lift up the vehicle.

2. Remove the filler plug and O-ring.
NOTE:
3. Remove the overflow plug and the overflow plug gasket.
4. Fill with ATF from the filler plug hole until it starts flowing off from the overflow orifice.
ATF type
Mazda Genuine JWS3309
Supplemental ATF amount (approx. quantity)
Service
Supplemental ATF amount
Procedure including ATF draining

Transmission
replacement
Torque converter
replacement
Oil cooler replacement
Fill ATF to the specified amount (approx. quantity: 8.0 L

{8.5 US qt, 7.0 lmp qt})
Control valve body

replacement
TFT sensor
replacement
Procedure without ATF draining
Oil seal (extension
housing) replacement
Fixing oil leakage or
stains
Add small amount of ATF
NOTE:
Replace the O-ring if it has malfunction.
5. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the filler plug.
Tightening torque
23.554.9 Nm {2.45.5 kgfm, 17.440.4 ftlbf}
6. Temporarily tighten the overflow plug.
7. Start the engine and warm it up by idling to increase the ATF temperature.
NOTE:
Perform the following precedure quickly, otherwise, the ATF temperature will exceed the
proper range.
8. Shift to all ranges, from the P position to the D range, taking 2 s or more for each position
or range, then after repeating the procedure two times, shift to the P position again.
CAUTION:
Do not shift from the N position when the AT warning light is illuminated.
9. Verify that the ATF temperature is in the proper range (3954 C {103129 F}) . (See
Using the M-MDS.)(See Using the AT warning light.)
10. Remove the overflow plug and inspect whether the ATF is flowing off from the overflow
orifice with the transmission in park and engine idling.
If there is no ATF flowing, install the overflow plug after the engine is stopped,
refill with ATF from the filler plug hole, and repeat the procedure from Step 7.
11. Wait until the ATF starts dripping from the overflow plug.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the overflow plug gasket in the correct direction as shown in the figure
12. If ATF dripping is verified, install a new overflow plug gasket and overflow plug.
Tightening torque
17.522.5 Nm {1.82.2 kgfm, 13.016.5 ftlbf}
13. Wipe off any ATF drips after tightening the overflow plug.
14. Lower the vehicle.
ATF Temperature Verification
Using the M-MDS
1. Connect the M-MDS to the vehicle DLC-2.
2. Verify the ATF temperature using the PID/data monitor TFT.

3. Warm up the automatic transmission until the ATF temperature is 3954 C {103129
F}.
Using the AT warning light
1. Short the TFT check connector terminal A and B of the TCM.
2. Perform the following operations to activate the control for the oil level adjustment.
Continue the shifting operation from N to D, D to N within 1.5 s until the AT
warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
When adjusting the ATF level, refer to the following chart and verify the
specified ATF temperature (3954 C {103129 F}) .
AT warning light illumination chart for ATF level adjustment
ATF condition
Time chart
ATF Temperature below 39

C {103 F}
ATF
temperature
is lower than
a ATF level
adjustable
temperature.
ATF Temperature 3954 C

{103129 F}
ATF
temperature
is same a
ATF level
adjustable
temperature.
ATF Temperature above 54

C {129 F}
ATF
temperature
is higher
than a ATF
level
adjustable
temperature.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL SEAL (EXTENSION HOUSING) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL]
4. Clean the transmission exterior thoroughly using a steam cleaner or cleaning solvent.
a. Front tunnel member
b. Rear tunnel member
c. Catalytic converter (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
d. Power plant frame
e. Propeller shaft (See PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
Do not to damage the extension dust deflector.
Do not to damage the extension housing.
6. Using a plastic hammer and slab of wood, tap the extension dust deflector to remove it.
7. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, remove the extension housing shroud.
8. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
9. Using the SST and a hammer, install the new oil seal to the extension housing.
10. Coat the oil seal lip with grease.

11. Using the SST and a hammer, install the new extension housing shroud to the extension
housing.
12. Using a hammer and slab of wood, install the extension dust deflector to the extension
housing.
13. Install the following parts.

a. Propeller shaft (See PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Power plant frame
c. Catalytic converter (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
d. Rear tunnel member
e. Front tunnel member
14. Inspect the ATF level. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6AEL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TORQUE CONVERTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
1. Remove the transmission. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6AEL].)
CAUTION:
The oil seal is easily damaged by the sharp edges of the torque converter
splines. Do not let the splines contact the oil seal.
Do not drop the torque converter.
Do not pinch fingers.
2. Remove the torque converter, and immediately turn it so that the hole faces upward. This will
help to keep any remaining ATF from spilling.
3. Drain any ATF remaining in the torque converter.

4. Using a flathead screwdriver, position the drive gear on the oil pump component in the
center.
5. Install the torque converter to the transmission.
6. To ensure that the torque converter is installed accurately, measure distance A between the
end of the torque converter and the end of the converter housing.
Distance A between end of torque converter and face of converter

housing
38.6 mm {1.52 in}
7. Install the automatic transmission. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
CAUTION:

11. Rotate the manual shaft to the N position.

CAUTION:
Do not use an impact wrench. Hold the manual shaft lever when removing the
13. Remove the manual shaft nut.

14. Remove the washer and manual shaft lever component.
15. Pry off the lock washer using a flathead screwdriver.
16. Remove the nut, lock washer and the washer.
17. Remove the TR switch.
18. Rotate the manual shaft to the extension housing side fully and return two notches to set
the N position.
19. Install the TR switch and hand-tighten the new mounting bolts.
CAUTION:
Improper adjustment of the TR switch will cause abnormal operation of the
automatic transmission. Be sure to adjust the TR switch correctly.
20. Verify the TR switch reference line and the notch of the manual shaft are aligned.
21. Install the washer and the lock washer with the nut.
Tightening torque
5.97.8 Nm {6179 kgfcm, 5368 inlbf}
22. Stake the lock washer using a flathead screwdriver.
23. Tighten the TR switch mounting bolts.

Tightening torque
9.815.7 Nm {100160 kgfcm, 87138 inlbf}
24. Inspect for continuity between TR switch terminals E and H.
25. Install the manual shaft lever component and washer.

CAUTION:
Do not use an impact wrench. Hold the manual shaft lever when tightening the
27. Tighten the manual shaft nut using a torque wrench.

Tightening torque
13.717.6 Nm {1.41.8 kgfm, 1113 ftlbf}
28. Shift the selector lever to the P position.
29. Turn the manual shaft lever to the P position.
30. Inspect TR switch continuity. (See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION
[SJ6A-EL].)

Tightening torque
10.814.7 Nm {1.11.4 kgfm, 8.010.8 ftlbf}
Tightening torque
811 Nm {82112 kgfcm, 7297 inlbf}
41. Inspect TR switch operation. (See TRANSMISSION RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION [SJ6AEL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL]
CAUTION:
On-Vehicle Inspection
5. Measure resistance between the terminals A and B.
If there is any malfunction, perform the off-vehicle inspection for TFT sensor.
(See Off-Vehicle Inspection.)
Transmission fluid temperature (TFT) sensor
ATF temperature (C {F}) Resistance (kilohm)
10 {50}
Approx. 6.445
25 {77}
Approx. 3.500
110 {230}
Approx. 0.247

Off-Vehicle Inspection
WARNING:
A hot the transmission and ATF can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until
1. Remove the TFT sensor. (See TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR
2. Place the TFT sensor and a thermometer in ATF as shown in the figure, and heat the ATF
gradually.
3. Measure the resistance between the TFT sensor terminals.
If there is any malfunction, replace the TFT sensor. (See TRANSMISSION FLUID
TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
Transmission fluid temperature (TFT) sensor
ATF temperature (C {F}) Resistance (kilohm)
10 {50}
Approx. 6.445
25 {77}
Approx. 3.500
110 {230}
Approx. 0.247
4. Install the TFT sensor. (See TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[SJ6A-EL]
WARNING:
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not damage the fitting surface of the transmission case and the oil pan.
Do not deform the oil pan.
5. Remove the oil pan and gasket.
6. Remove the oil strainer from the control valve body component.
7. Remove the O-ring from the oil strainer.

8. Disconnect the solenoid connectors from the solenoids.
9. Disconnect the coupler component from the clamps.

10. Remove the lock plate from the control valve body component.
11. Pull the TFT sensor from the control valve body component.
12. Remove the coupler component mounting bolt from the transmission case.
13. Remove the coupler component from the transmission case.
14. Remove the O-ring from the coupler component.
15. Install a new O-ring to the coupler component.
16. Tighten the coupler component mounting bolt to the transmission case.
Tightening torque
3.96.9 Nm {4049 kgfcm, 3542 inlbf}
17. Install the TFT sensor and the lock plate with the bolt to the control valve body component.
Tightening torque
8.012.0 Nm {82122 kgfcm, 2642 inlbf}
18. Connect the coupler component to the clamps.
19. Connect the solenoid connectors to the solenoids.

20. Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the oil strainer.
21. Install the oil strainer with the bolts to the control valve body component.
CAUTION:
Pay attention to the fabric so that foreign materials from it cannot comes out in
the transmission.
22. Clean the contact surface of oil pan and transmission case.
CAUTION:
Do not deform the oil pan.
23. Install a new oil pan gasket and the oil pan to the transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be reminded that bolts might be damaged if tightened too much since the
gasket is cork-made and there is little tightening sense.
24. Tighten the oil pan installation bolt.
Tightening torque
6.07.9 Nm {6280 kgfcm, 5469 inlbf}
28. Add ATF and, with the engine idling, inspect the ATF level and inspect for leakage. (See
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL].) (See AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL SEAL (OIL PUMP) REPLACEMENT [SJ6A-EL]
1. Remove the automatic transmission. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION:
The oil seal is easily damaged by the sharp edges of the torque converter
splines. Do not let the splines contact the oil seal.
Do not drop the torque converter.
Do not pinch fingers.
2. Remove the torque converter. (See TORQUE CONVERTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6AEL].)
CAUTION:
Do not to damage the bushing on the oil pump body.
3. Remove the oil seal from the oil pump body using the SST.
4. Using the SST and a hammer, install the new oil seal to the oil pump body.
5. Coat the lip of the oil seal with grease.

6. Install the torque converter. (See TORQUE CONVERTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
7. Install the automatic transmission. (See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL [SJ6A-EL]
On-Vehicle Removal
WARNING:
Using compressed air can cause dirt and other particles to fly out, causing injury to the
eyes. Wear protective eye wear whenever using compressed air.
CAUTION:
Clean the transmission exterior thoroughly with a stream cleaner or cleaning solvents
before removal.
If any old sealant gets into the transmission during installation of the oil pan, trouble may
occur in the transmission case and oil pan. Clean with cleaning fluids.
CAUTION:
Do not to deform the oil pan.
5. Remove the oil pan and the oil pan gasket.
6. Remove the magnets from the oil pan.
NOTE:
Examine the chips and particles in the oil pan to determine what type of wear
has occurred in the transmission. Steel (magnetic)= bearing, gear and plate
wear. Brass (non-magnetic)= busing wear.
7. Remove the oil strainer from the control valve body component.
8. Remove the O-ring from the oil strainer.

9. Disconnect the solenoid connectors from the solenoids.
10. Disconnect the coupler component from the clamps.

11. Remove the lock plate from the control valve body component.
12. Pull the TFT sensor from the control valve body component.
NOTE:
Be sure that the coupler component does not interface with the control valve
body component when installing.
13. Fix the coupler component with tape to the transmission case as shown in the figure.
14. Remove the detent spring cover and detent spring from the control valve body component.
15. Remove the bolts from the transmission case as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not to drop the control valve body component.
16. Disconnect the manual valve link and remove the control valve body component.
17. Remove the check valve sub-component and the compression spring from the transmission
case.
18. Remove the transmission case gaskets and the brake drum gaskets from the transmission
case.
CAUTION:
Take care as the C-2 and B-3 accumulator piston may eject.
19. Apply compressed air into the oil passage as shown in the figure and remove the
accumulator pistons (C-2, B-3) and the compression springs from the transmission case.
CAUTION:
Do not to damage the accumulator pistons.
20. Remove the snap rings from the accumulator pistons (C-2, B-3) using a flathead screwdriver.
21. Remove the compression springs from the accumulator pistons (C-2, B-3).
22. Remove the O-rings from the accumulator pistons (C-2, B-3) using a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Take care as the C-3 accumulator piston may eject.
23. Apply compressed air into the oil passage as shown in the figure and remove the
accumulator piston (C-3) and compression springs from the transmission case.
24. Remove the O-rings from the accumulator piston (C-3) using a flathead screwdriver.
25. Remove the accumulator valve and compression springs from the transmission case.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL]
On-Vehicle Installation
CAUTION:
When installing the control valve body component, do not put the coupler component in
the open space of the separate plate in the control valve body component.
Do not pinch the coupler component between the separate plate and the control valve
body component.
1. Install the accumulator valve and compression springs to the transmission case.
CAUTION:
Do not to damage the O-ring and accumulator piston.
2. Coat the new O-rings with ATF, and install it to the accumulator piston (C-3).
3. Install the accumulator piston (C-3) and the compression spring to the transmission case.
4. Coat the new O-rings with ATF, and install it to the accumulator pistons (C-2, B-3).
5. Install the compression springs and the snap rings to the accumulator pistons (C-2, B-3)
using a flathead screwdriver.
6. Install the accumulator pistons (C-2, B-3) and the compression springs to the transmission
case.
7. Coat the new transmission gaskets and the new brake drum gaskets with ATF, and install it
to the transmission case.
CAUTION:
Do not to damage the gasket.
8. Install the check valve sub-component and the compression spring to the transmission case.
9. Connect the manual valve link and install the control valve body component.
CAUTION:
When installing, be sure to put the wiring harness in the concave portion of the
separator plate in the control valve body component as shown in the figure.
10. Temporarily install the control valve body component with the bolts.
Bolt length (measured from below the head)

A: 25 mm {0.984 in}
B: 36mm {1.42 in}
C: 45mm {1.77 in}
D: 50mm {1.97 in}
NOTE:
Aligning the bolt holes, temporarily tighten the bolts by hand.
Tighten the bolts starting from the inner ones and moving in a criss-cross
pattern.
11. Tighten the bolts.
Tightening torque
10.012.0 Nm {102122 kgfcm, 89105 inlbf}
12. Install the detent spring cover and detent spring with the bolt to the control valve body
component.
Tightening torque
8.012.0 Nm {82122 kgfcm, 72105 inlbf}
13. Install the TFT sensor and the lock plate with the bolt to the control valve body component.
Tightening torque
8.012.0 Nm {82122 kgfcm, 72105 inlbf}
14. Connect the coupler component to the clamps.
15. Connect the solenoid connectors to the solenoids.

16. Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the oil strainer.
17. Install the oil strainer with the bolts to the control valve body component.
Tightening torque
8.012.0 Nm {82122 kgfcm, 72105 inlbf}
CAUTION:
Pay attention to the fabric so that foreign materials from it cannot comes out in
the transmission.
18. Clean the contact surface of oil pan and transmission case.
NOTE:
Clean the oil cleaner magnets before install it.
19. Install the magnets to the oil pan.
CAUTION:
Do not to damage the contact surface of the transmission case and the oil pan.
Do not to deform the oil pan.
20. Install a new oil pan gasket and the oil pan to the transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful that bolts might be damaged if tightened too much since the gasket
is cork-made.
21. Install the bolts to the transmission case.
Tightening torque
6.07.9 Nm {6280 kgfcm, 5469 inlbf}
25. Add ATF and, with the engine idling, inspect the ATF level and for leakage. (See
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION [SJ6A-EL].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL COOLER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [SJ6A-EL]
1Mount rubber
2Radiator outer tank (in-tank oil cooler)
(See Radiator Outer Tank (In-Tank Oil Cooler) Disassembly Note.)
(See Radiator Outer Tank (In Tank Oil Cooler) Assembly Note.)
3Oring
4Drain cock
5ATF cooler
6Radiator
Radiator Outer Tank (In-Tank Oil Cooler) Disassembly Note

1. Inspect the height of the header tabs.
2. Insert the end of a medium tip screwdriver between the end of the header tab and the outer
tank.
NOTE:
Do not open more tabs than necessary for tank removal.
3. Pivot the screwdriver to pry the tab away from the tank and repeat the procedure for each
tab.
NOTE:
If any header tabs are missing from the core, replace the radiator.
4. Remove the radiator outer tank and Oring (gasket) from the core header when all of the
tabs are opened.
5. Inspect the gasket surface of the radiator core header to ensure it is clean and free of foreign
material or damage.
6. Inspect the radiator outer tank for warping. If it is warped, replace the radiator tank.
Radiator Outer Tank (In Tank Oil Cooler) Assembly Note

1. Install a new Oring and ensure it is not twisted.
NOTE:
The old Oring must be replaced.
2. Position the radiator tank in the original direction to the core using care not to scratch the
tank sealing surface with the header tabs.
NOTE:
Step 3 will set jaw opening to the correct specification.
3. With the jaws of lockingtype pliers (vise grips) closed and locked, turn the adjusting screw to
position the jaws against the drill bit with the diameter measured (height) in removal procedure
1. Tighten the lock nut on the adjusting screw against the handle to lock the adjustment in
place.
4. Squeeze the header tabs down in the order as shown in the figure against the lip of the
radiator outer tank base with the lockingtype pliers while rotating the pliers toward the tank.
5. Verify that the height of the header tabs is same as the height before removal.
6. Inspect for leakage from radiator. (See ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL COOLER FLUSHING [SJ6A-EL]
NOTE:
The contaminated cooler line (oil pipes and hoses) and auxiliary cooler must be flushed
completely when AT is overhauled or replaced.
1. Remove the two oil cooler line hoses and apply air pressure of 196 kPa {2.0 kgf/cm2 , 28
psi} from the return hose (pipe) side.
CAUTION:
Power flushing should be performed very carefully when removing the
accumulated debris from the fluid baffle, otherwise the debris cannot be
removed or the problem becomes even worse.
NOTE:
Performing back and reverse power flushing two times each does not work
because debris or particles flow out from the feed pipe side of AT.
2. If there is no air blown out the feed side, flush the oil cooler lines using the power-flushing
tool. (See Power Flushing.) Recommended powerflushing manufacturer
Manufacturer Part number
Description
Kent Moore J35944-AMAZFlushing kit or equivalent

OTC
60081
Portable torque converter, oil cooler cleaner or equivalent
Power Flushing
Repair procedure
1. Before power flushing, inspect the hoses/lines and clamps. Power flushing must begin with
back flushing followed by forward flushing to quickly dislodge the restriction. If back flushing is
not performed before forward flushing, the restriction could further reduce the ATF flow through
the internal mesh type baffle of the cooler and flushing will not be effective or possible.
Inspecting oil lines and clamps
1. Be sure to inspect the lines (hoses/pipes) for cuts, crimps (pinched), cracks or any other
damage before reusing them.
If there is any malfunction, replace lines and clamps.
CAUTION:
Always use new clamps when replacing hoses.
Back flushing
1. Using the power flushing equipment manufacturer"s instructions, connect equipment so the
flushing fluid flows in the opposite direction of normal fluid flow.
2. Flush oil cooler/lines until discharge fluid is clean.

CAUTION:
If the cooler can not be properly flushed using recommended equipment, send
the radiator out for sublet cleaning or replace.
Forward flushing
1. Connect power flushing equipment so the flushing fluid flows in the direction of normal fluid
flow.
2. Flush oil cooler/lines until discharged fluid is clean.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SHIFT MECHANISM LOCATION INDEX
1Shift lock
(See SHIFT LOCK INSPECTION.)
2Key interlock
(See KEY INTERLOCK INSPECTION.)
3Interlock cable
(See INTERLOCK CABLE INSPECTION.)
(See INTERLOCK CABLE ADJUSTMENT.)
4Selector lever
(See SELECTOR LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5Steering shift switch (up switch)
(See STEERING SHIFT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6Steering shift switch (down switch)
(See STEERING SHIFT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEY INTERLOCK INSPECTION
1. Verify that the key cannot be pulled out except in the P position.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the interlock cable. (See INTERLOCK CABLE
INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTERLOCK CABLE INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position. (engine OFF)
2. Remove the clip of the selector lever base plate, then remove the interlock cable from the Ugroove.
3. Remove the interlock cable from the selector lever.
4. Verify that the interlock cable moves freely with the brake pedal depressed.
If there is any malfunction, replace the interlock cable.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTERLOCK CABLE ADJUSTMENT
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position. (engine OFF)
2. Pull up the lock piece of the interlock cable to release the lock.
3. Remove the clip of the selector lever base plate, then remove the interlock cable from the Ugroove.
4. Remove the interlock cable from the selector lever.

5. Fully pull the end of the interlock cable to the selector lever.
6. Remove the lock unit from the bracket.

7. Verify that the markings on the slider pin and the lock unit are aligned.
8. Push a 1.5 mm {0.06 in} round bar or similar into hole A by fully pushing the slider pin in.
9. Push a 1.5 mm {0.06 in} round bar or similar into hole B and hole C of the lock unit until it
passes through.
10. Disconnect the brake switch connector.

12. Install the new brake switch. (See BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
Do not connect the brake switch connector until the interlock cable adjustment
is completed.
13. Install the lock unit to the bracket. (See SELECTOR LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
14. Rotate the slider pin to release the lock, and verify that it slides freely.
15. Verify that the slider pin contacts the brake pedal stopper rubber and rotate the slider pin to
lock.
16. Install the interlock cable end to the interlock link on the selector lever.
17. Fit the interlock cable in the U-groove in the selector lever base plate and install the clip.
18. Press the interlock cable lock piece in until it is locked.
CAUTION:
Applying a load to the interlock cable while pressing the lock piece in can affect
the lock unit operation.
19. Remove a 1.5 mm {0.06 in} round bar or similar from the lock unit hole A, B and C.
20. Connect the brake switch connector with the brake pedal released.
CAUTION:
The clearance between the brake switch and the brake pedal is automatically
adjusted to the correct amount when the brake switch connector is connected
after the brake switch has been properly installed. If the brake switch is not
properly installed or the connector is connected before installation, the
clearance may be incorrect, causing a brake light malfunction. Therefore,
always verify that the brake switch is properly installed before connecting the
connector.
Once the brake switch clearance has automatically been adjusted, it cannot be
adjusted again. Therefore, replace the switch with a new one when replacing
the power brake unit or the pedal, or performing any procedure that changes
the pedal stroke.
21. Inspect shift lock operation. (See SHIFT LOCK INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SHIFT LOCK INSPECTION
2. Verify that the selector lever is in the P position.
3. Depress the brake pedal and verify that the selector lever can be shifted from the P position.
If there is any malfunction, adjust the interlock cable.
(See INTERLOCK CABLE ADJUSTMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SELECTOR LEVER INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (engine OFF).
2. With the brake pedal depressed, verify that there is a click at each range when shifted.
3. Verify that the selector lever can be shifted.

4. Verify that there is a click at each position when shifted from the P position to the M range.
5. Verify that the positions of the selector lever and the indicator are aligned.

6. Verify that the vehicle operates in each selected range.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SELECTOR LEVER COMPONENT INSPECTION
4. Remove the ashtray. (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the shift knob. (See SELECTOR LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the console panel and indicator assembly. (See SELECTOR LEVER
7. Disconnect the selector lever component connector.
If there is any malfunction, replace the selector lever. (See SELECTOR LEVER
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SELECTOR LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
a. Ashtray (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Console (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Glove compartment (See GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Side panel (See SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Lower panel (See LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Column cover (See COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Driver-side air bag module (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Steering shaft (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Instrument cluster (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. A-pillar trim (See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Dashboard (See DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
l. SAS control module (See SAS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
m. Exhaust pipe (See EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
5. Shift the selector lever to the P position.
8. After installation, carry out the shift lock inspection and key interlock inspection.
(See SHIFT LOCK INSPECTION.)
(See KEY INTERLOCK INSPECTION.)
1Manual shaft lever component

(See Manual Shaft Lever Component Removal Note.)
(See Manual Shaft Lever Component Installation Note.)
2Clip
3Shift knob
4Console panel
5Indicator component
6Clip
7Brake switch
8Interlock cable
(See Interlock Cable Installation Note.)
9Selector lever
Manual Shaft Lever Component Removal Note

2. Remove the manual shaft lever component installation nut.
Interlock Cable Installation Note

1. Push a 1.5 mm {0.06 in} round bar or similar into hole A by fully pushing the slider pin in.
2. Push a 1.5 mm {0.06 in} round bar or similar into hole B and hole C of the lock unit until it passes through.
3. Disconnect the brake switch connector.
5. Install the new brake switch. (See BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
Do not connect the brake switch connector until the interlock cable is installed.
6. With the slider pin pressed, slide the lock unit to fix the lock unit hook into the bracket hole securely as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Allowing the interlock cable to be bent or twisted during installation can affect the lock unit operation.
7. Rotate the slider pin to release the lock, and verify that it slides freely.
8. Pull the slider pin outward until it contacts the brake pedal stopper rubber and rotate the slider pin to lock.
9. Verify that the shift the selector lever in P position.

10. Install the interlock cable end to the cam pin on the selector lever.
11. Fit the interlock cable in the Ugroove in the selector lever base plate, and install the clip.
12. Press the interlock cable lock piece in unitl it is locked.
CAUTION:
Applying a load to the interlock cable while pressing the lock piece in can affect the lock unit operation.
13. Remove a 1.5 mm {0.06 in} round bar or similar from the lock unit hole A, B and C.
14. Connect the brake switch connector with the brake pedal released.
CAUTION:
The clearance between the brake switch and the brake pedal is automatically adjusted to the correct amount
when the brake switch connector is connected after the brake switch has been properly installed. If the brake
switch is not properly installed or the connector is connected before installation, the clearance may be incorrect,
causing a brake light malfunction. Therefore, always verify that the brake switch is properly installed before
connecting the connector.
Once the brake switch clearance has automatically been adjusted, it cannot be adjusted again. Therefore,
replace the switch with a new one when replacing the power brake unit or the pedal, or performing any
procedure that changes the pedal stroke.
16. Install the interlock cable to the key cylinder.
17. Slide the outer casing to the key cylinder, and insert the clip over the convex part of the outer casing.
Manual Shaft Lever Component Installation Note


Tightening torque
10.814.7 Nm
{1.11.4 kgfm, 8.010.8 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING SHIFT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The down switch is built into the audio control switch.
1. Remove the steering shift switch. (See AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING SHIFT SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the engine cover.
4. Disconnect the audio control switch connector. (See AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
5. Measure resistance between the terminals F and C.
Test condition
Resistance
(ohm)
Action
Replace the audio control switch.
Steering shift
switch off
1,7641,836
LH up-switch on
352.8367.2

If not within the specification, replace the
audio control switch.
RH up-switch on
352.8367.2
If there is no continuity, replace the up switch.

LH down-switch
on
RH down-switch
on
607.6632.4
607.6632.4
Replace the audio control switch.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE TECHNICAL DATA
Clutch
Item
Clutch fluid
Clutch pedal stroke
Clutch pedal play
Clutch pedal push rod play
Specification
SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3
130 mm {5.12 in}
515 mm {0.200.59 in}
At push rod setting line : 0.10.5 mm {0.0040.020 in}
(Reference value)
At pedal pad : 0.52.9 mm {0.0200.110 in}
Clutch disengagement stroke
111.8 mm {4.402 in}
Clutch cover diaphragm spring fingers

maximum depth
0.6 mm {0.024 in}
Clutch cover maximum clearance
0.5 mm {0.020 in}
Clutch cover maximum height difference
1.0 mm {0.039 in}
Clutch disc minimum depth
0.3 mm {0.012 in}
Clutch disc maximum runout
0.7 mm {0.028 in}
Flywheel maximum runout
0.2 mm {0.008 in}
Manual Transmission [P66M-D]
Item
Specification
Manual transmission oil grade
API Service GL-4
Manual transmission oil viscosity
SAE 75W-90
Manual transmission oil capacity (approx. quantity)
1.95 L {2.06 US qt, 1.72 lmp qt}
Shift control case oil grade
API Service GL-4
Shift control case oil viscosity
SAE 75W-90
Shift control case oil capacity (approx. quantity)
80230 ml {80230 cc, 4.914.0 in 3 }
Automatic Transmission [SJ6A-EL]
Item
ATF type
Specification
Mazda Genuine JWS3309
ATF capacity (approx. quantity)8.0 L {8.5 US qt, 7.0 lmp qt}

Line pressure
Position/Range
Idle
Specification (kPa {kgf/cm2, psi})

355425 {3.74.3, 5261}
D, M range
Stall1,3951,505 {14.315.3, 203218}
Idle
485585 {5.05.9, 7184}
R position
Stall1,6391,847 {16.818.8, 238267}
Engine stall speed
Position/RangeSpecification (rpm)
D, M range
2,1502,800
R position
1,7502,250
Time lag
Position/Range
Specification (s)
From N position to D range
1.0 or less
From N position to R position
1.2 or less
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous

TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE SST
Clutch
49 SE01
310A
Clutch disc
centering
tool
49 0820
035
Flywheel
box
wrench
49 F011
105
Collar
49 F011 101
49 1285
071
Ring gear
brake
Needle
bearing
puller
49 0839 305A
49 F011
104
Counterweight
puller
Installer
49 G030 797
Handle
Manual Transmission [P66M-D]
49 S120 440
49 B025 004
49 G030 797
Mainshaft holder
Dust seal installer
Handle
Automatic Transmission [SJ6A-EL]
49 HD64
406A
49 0378
400C
49 B019
901B
Adapter
Oil
pressure
gauge set
Oil
pressure
gauge
49 B019
902A
49 D019
910
49 D019
911
Oil pressure
gauge
Adapter
Adapter
(Part of
49 D019
9A2)
(Part of
49 D019
9A2)
49 D019
912
49 D019
909
49 D019
908
Adapter
Hose
(Part of 49
D019 9A2)
(Part of
49 D019
9A2)
Oil
pressure
gauge
49 D019
907
49 0877
435
49 S019
005
Oil pressure
gauge
Wrench
Oil seal
remover
(Part of
49 D019
9A2)
(Part of 49
D019 9A2)
49 0813
215A
49 W027
003
49 S019
006
Dowel
puller and
oil pump
puller
Bearing
installer
Oil seal
installer
49 G030
797
49 B025
001
49 1881
055A
Handle
Body
Stopper,
counter
weight
< Previous
Back to Top
Workshop Manual - Steering

2011 - RX-8
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
DTC B1318
DTC B1342
DTC B2141
DTC B2278
DTC C1099
FOREWORD
PRECAUTION
NO.1 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION
SWITCH AT ON
NO.2 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT GO OUT EVEN THOUGH ENGINE
HAS STARTED
NO.3 POWER ASSIST DIFFERS BETWEEN RIGHT AND LEFT TURNS
General Procedures
GENERAL PROCEDURES (STEERING)
Engine Speed Sensing - Power Steering

STEERING LOCATION INDEX
STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN INSPECTION
STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
STEERING SHAFT INSPECTION
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE INSPECTION
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
TORQUE SENSOR INSPECTION
EPS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
EPS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION

EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING
Technical Data
STEERING TECHNICAL DATA
STEERING SST
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - Steering

DTC B1342
DTC
B1342
DETECTION
CONDITION
EPS control module

The on-board diagnostic function detects control module malfunction.
EPS 60 A fuse malfunction
Poor connection of EPS control module connector
EPS control module connector or terminal malfunction
Open or short to ground circuit in wiring harness between EPS control module terminal
1A and battery positive terminal.
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between the following EPS control module
terminals and EPS motor terminals:
POSSIBLE CAUSE
EPS control module terminal 4AEPS motor terminal A

EPS control module terminal 4BEPS motor terminal B
Noise filter malfunction
EPS motor malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between EPS control module terminal 1B and battery
negative terminal
EPS control module malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT FUSE
Inspect EPS 60 A fuse.
Is EPS 60 A fuse normal?
INSPECT WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS CAUSED BY

2 POOR CONNECTION OF EPS CONTROL MODULE OR
ACTION
No Replace EPS 60 A fuse, then go to Step 10.
PIN DEFORMATION
Inspect connection of the EPS control module
and wiring harness.
No Repair or replace faulty connector harness, then go

to Step 6.
Disconnect the EPS control module

connector.
Inspect whether malfunction is caused by
bent or poorly connected EPS control module
connector pin.
Are connection and pin of connector and
wiring harness normal?
INSPECT EPS MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
3 OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect the battery positive terminal.
Inspect for continuity between EPS control
module terminal 1A and battery positive
terminal.

between the EPS control module and battery, then go
to Step 10.
4 SHORT TO GROUND
module terminal 1A and ground.
5
INSPECT EPS MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Disconnect the noise filter connector.
Inspect for continuity between the EPS
control module terminals and noise filter
terminals.

ground between the EPS control module and battery,
then go to Step 10.
No Replace the noise filter, then go to Step 10.
EPS control module terminal

4Anoise filter terminal a.
4Bnoise filter terminal b.
6

Disconnect the EPS motor connector.
Inspect for continuity between the EPS motor
terminals and noise filter terminals.
EPS motor terminal Anoise
filter terminal a.
EPS motor terminal Bnoise
filter terminal b.

between the EPS motor and noise filter, then go to
Step 10.
INSPECT EPS MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER

Measure the voltage between the EPS motor
terminals and ground.
EPS motor terminal A
ground

power between the EPS motor and noise filter, then
go to Step 10.
EPS motor terminal B

ground
Is there any B+?
INSPECT EPS MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
8 GROUND
ground

ground between the EPS motor and noise filter, then
go to Step 10.

ground
INSPECT EPS MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
9 CIRCUIT
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Measure continuity between EPS control
module terminal 1B and battery negative
terminal.

to the next step.
10

connectors.
YesReplace the EPS control module and/or steering gear

and linkage, then go to the next step.
(See EPS CONTROL MODULE

(See ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) ONBOARD DIAGNOSIS.)
(See STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE


Start the engine.

11


DIAGNOSIS.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1099
DTC
C1099 EPS motor
DETECTION
CONDITION
Abnormality detected in control current from EPS control module to EPS motor.
EPS 60 A fuse malfunction
Open or short to ground circuit in wiring harness between EPS control module terminal
1A and battery positive terminal
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between the following EPS control module
terminals and EPS motor terminals:
POSSIBLE CAUSE
EPS control module terminal 4AEPS motor terminal A

EPS control module terminal 4BEPS motor terminal B
Noise filter malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between EPS control module terminal 1B and battery
negative terminal
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT FUSE
Inspect EPS 60 A fuse.
Is EPS 60 A fuse normal?
ACTION
No Replace EPS 60 A fuse, then go to Step 10.
POOR CONNECTION OF EPS CONTROL MODULE OR

PIN DEFORMATION
Inspect connection of the EPS control module
and wiring harness.
No Repair or replace the faulty connector wiring harness,

then go to Step 6.
Disconnect the EPS control module connector.

Inspect whether malfunction is caused by
bent or poorly connected EPS control module
connector pin.
Are the connector connection, connector pins,
and wiring harness normal?
3 OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect the battery positive terminal.
module terminal 1A and battery positive
terminal.

to Step 10.
4 SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the voltage between EPS control
module terminal 1A and ground.
5

Disconnect the noise filter connector.
control module terminals and noise filter
terminals.

ground between the EPS control module and battery,
then go to Step 10.
No Replace the noise filter, then go to Step 10.

4Anoise filter terminal a.
4Bnoise filter terminal b.
6

Disconnect the EPS motor connector.
terminals and noise filter terminals.
EPS motor terminal Anoise
filter terminal a.
EPS motor terminal Bnoise
filter terminal b.
YesGo to next step.

between the EPS motor and noise filter, then go to
Step 10.
INSPECT EPS MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER

Measure the voltage between the EPS motor
ground

power between the EPS motor and noise filter, then
go to Step 10.

ground
Is there any B+?
INSPECT EPS MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
8 GROUND
ground

ground between the EPS motor and noise filter, then
go to Step 10.

ground
INSPECT EPS MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
9 CIRCUIT
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Measure continuity between EPS control
module terminal 1B and battery negative
terminal.

to the next step.
10

connectors.
YesReplace the EPS control module, then go to the next

step.

Start the engine.
11


DIAGNOSIS.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
Next >

Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS

The OBD test inspects the integrity and function of the EPS and outputs the results when
Provides a quick inspection of the EPS usually performed at the start of
during service.
command modes.
This function allows reading or clearing of DTCs in the EPS control module memory.
This function allows access of certain data values, input signals, calculated values, and
This function allows control of devices through the M-MDS.
2. Select Modules.
3. Select EPS.
2. Select EPS.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the EPS. (See Clearing DTCs Procedures)

2. Select Modules.
3. Select EPS.
2. Select EPS.

2. Select Modules.
3. Select EPS.
2. Select EPS.
NOTE:

2. Select Modules.
3. Select EPS.
2. Select EPS.
DTC Table
DTC
MMDS
Diagnosis system component
Page
B1318 Battery power supply
(See DTC B1318.)
B1342 EPS control module
(See DTC B1342.)
B2141 EPS system (neutral position setting not

performed)
(See DTC B2141.)
B2278 Torque sensor
(See DTC B2278.)
C1099 EPS motor
(See DTC C1099.)
U0073CAN bus communication error

SYSTEM].)
U1900CAN communication error

U2023CAN communication error
PID Name Unit/Condition

(Definition)
B+
(System
battery
voltage
value)
CCNT
(Number of
continuous
codes)
IG switch ON: B+
DTCs are
detected: 1255
No DTCs are
detected: 0
Steering wheel is
not turned: Near
0A
Action
Inspect battery. (See BATTERY

Inspect power supply circuit
(such as IG switch, fuse).
Perform inspection using

appropriate DTC.
Inspect EPS control module. (See

EPS CONTROL MODULE
INSPECTION.)
EPS
control
module
terminal
2P
EPS_MTR
(EPS motor
drive signal)
Steering wheel is
turned right: 0
127 A
Steering wheel is
turned left: 0 128 A
EPS warning light
is illuminated: On
EPSLAMP
(EPS warning
light output
state)
On/Off
RPM
(Engine
speed signal)
RPM
Nm
Nm
Steering wheel is
turned right: 0
31.75 Nm
Inspect power supply circuit

(such as IG switch, fuse).
Inspect EPS control module. (See

EPS CONTROL MODULE
INSPECTION.)
4A, 4B
Inspect instrument cluster.
Inspect PCM. (See PCM

Perform EPS system neutral

position setting. (See EPS
SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION
SETTING.)
Inspect torque sensor. (See

TORQUE SENSOR INSPECTION.)
Inspect torque sensor circuit.
3A, 3B,
3C
Steering wheel is
turned left: 0 32 Nm
VSS
(Vehicle
speed signal)
(If system neutral

position setting
has not been
performed, 31.75
Nm is output.)
Steering wheel is
not turned: Near
0 Nm
TRQ_SENS
(Torque
sensor
signal)
Engine speed
1,000 rpm: 1000
RPM
Steering wheel is
not turned: Near
0 Nm
TRQ_S_CORR
(System
neutral
position
setting)
EPS warning light

is not illuminated:
Off
Inspect EPS motor circuit.
KPH, MPH
Vehicle is
stopped:
Inspect PCM. (See PCM

0 KPH/0 MPH
Inspect instrument cluster. (See

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INSPECTION.)
Vehicle speed 20
km/h {12 mph}:
20 KPH/12
MPH
Inspect DSC HU/CM. (See DSC

HU/CM INSPECTION.)
Active Command Mode Table
Command Name
TRQ_S_CAL
Definition
Operation
Note
EPS system neutral position setting On/Off Ignition switch at ON
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1318
DTC
B1318
DETECTION
CONDITION
Battery power supply

Voltage of 10 V or less or 16 V or more detected by EPS control
module internal ignition voltage observation.
Battery malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to ground in wiring harness between EPS control module terminal
2P and battery
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE USING MYesMalfunction may be temporary. Go to Step 6.

1 MDS

Access B+ PID.
2
INSPECT BATTERY

Is it normal?
INSPECT GENERATOR
[13B-MSP].)
Is it normal?
INSPECT WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS

4 CAUSED BY POOR CONNECTION OF EPS
CONTROL MODULE OR PIN DEFORMATION
Inspect connection of the EPS
control module and wiring harness.
No Repair or replace the battery, then go to Step

6.
[13B-MSP].)
No Repair or replace the generator, then go to
Step 6.
[13B-MSP].)
No Repair or replace the malfunction connector
wiring harness, then go to Step 6.

connector.
Inspect whether malfunction is
caused by bent or poorly
connected EPS control module
connector pin.
Are the connector connection,
connector pins, and wiring harness
normal?
INSPECT EPS CONTROL MODULE POWER
5 SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the battery positive
terminal.
Inspect for continuity between EPS
control module terminal 2P and
ground.
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness for short

to ground between EPS control module
terminal 2P and ground, then go to Step 6.
6

(See ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS.)
YesReplace the EPS control module, then go to

the next step.

Start the engine.
7


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2141
DTC
B2141
EPS system (neutral position setting not performed)
DETECTION
CONDITION
Failure to perform EPS control module neutral position setting

detected.
EPS system neutral position setting not performed
POSSIBLE CAUSE
STEP
INSPECTION
PERFORM EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION

1 SETTING
Perform the EPS system neutral
position setting.
ACTION
After completing the EPS system neutral
position setting, go to the next step.
(See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL

POSITION SETTING.)
2
VERIFY CURRENT MALFUNCTION STATUS

(See ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS.)
Start the engine.
YesReplace the EPS control module, then go to

the next step.

3


(See ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) ON-
BOARD DIAGNOSIS.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2278
DTC
B2278
DETECTION
CONDITION
Torque sensor
Abnormal input signal detected from torque sensor.
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between EPS control module terminals and
torque sensor terminals:
POSSIBLE CAUSE
EPS control module terminal 3Atorque sensor terminal A

EPS control module terminal 3Btorque sensor terminal B
EPS control module terminal 3Ctorque sensor terminal C
Torque sensor malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT TORQUE SENSOR USING M-MDS
position (engine OFF).
ACTION
YesMalfunction may be temporary. Go to step 7.
Access TRQ_SENS PID.

Verify that the data monitor value
changes when the steering wheel is
turned.
Left: 0 -32 NM
Right: 031.75 NM
Do the torque sensor signal values
change in the same way?
2 POOR CONNECTION OF EPS CONTROL MODULE OR YesGo to the next step.
PIN DEFORMATION
Inspect connection of the EPS control
module and wiring harness.
No Repair or replace the faulty connector wiring harness,

then go to Step 7.

connector.
Inspect whether malfunction is caused
by bent or poorly connected EPS control
module connector pin.
Are the connector connection, connector
pins, and wiring harness normal?
INSPECT TORQUE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
3 CIRCUIT
control module terminals and torque
sensor terminals.
EPS control module
terminal 3Atorque
sensor terminal A

between the EPS control module and torque sensor,
then go to Step 7.
EPS control module

terminal 3Btorque
sensor terminal B
EPS control module
terminal 3Ctorque
sensor terminal C
INSPECT TORQUE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
4 TO POWER
Measure the voltage between the torque
sensor terminals and ground.
Torque sensor terminal
Aground
Bground

power between the EPS control module and torque
sensor, then go to Step 7.

Cground
Is there any B+?
INSPECT TORQUE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
5 TO GROUND
torque sensor terminals and ground.
Aground

ground between the EPS control module and torque

Bground
Cground
6
INSPECT TORQUE SENSOR

Disconnect the torque sensor connector.
Measure the resistance between the
torque sensor terminals.
Terminals AB

No Replace the steering gear and linkage, then go to
Step 7.
Terminals BC
Resistance: 1215
ohms
Is the torque sensor normal?
7

connectors.
(See ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS.)
YesReplace the EPS control module, then go to the next

step.

Start the engine.
8


DIAGNOSIS.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD
Diagnostic Inspection. To inspect the DTC, follow the DTC Inspection steps. (See ELECTRIC
POWER STEERING (EPS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PRECAUTION
Vibration method
engine is vibrating, perform the following steps.
NOTE:
There are several reasons why vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical
malfunction. Inspect the following:
An improperly routed, improperly clamped, or loose harness can cause wiring to become
pinched between parts.
The connector joints, points of vibration, and places where wiring harnesses pass through
the firewall, body panels and other panels are the major areas to be inspected.
Inspection method for switch and/or sensor connectors or wires

NOTE:

5. Slightly shake each connector or wiring harness vertically and horizontally while monitoring
the PID.

NOTE:
Connector terminal check method
1. Inspect the connection of each female terminal.

2. Insert the male terminal and then fit the female terminal side to female terminal. Inspect
whether the malfunction is in the female terminal.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

Verify the symptom, and perform troubleshooting according to the appropriate number.
No.
Symptom
1 EPS warning light does not illuminate with ignition switch at ON.
2 EPS warning light does not go out even though engine has started.
3 Power assist differs between right and left turns.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT
ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION SWITCH AT ON
1 EPS warning light does not illuminate with ignition switch at ON.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
EPS warning light circuit malfunction in the instrument cluster
An error originates from the EPS control module, and the off signal is generated.
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT PID/DATA IN EPS CONTROL

1 MODULE
Select the following items using
the M-MDS Datalogger function.
EPSLAMP (EPS
warning light)
Is the EPSLAMP ON while the
ignition switch is turned to the
ON position?
ACTION
YesEPS warning light circuit malfunction in the
instrument cluster. Inspect the instrument
cluster.
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/OUTPUT
CHECK MODE.)
No EPS control module malfunction. Replace the EPS
control module.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT GO OUT
EVEN THOUGH ENGINE HAS STARTED
2 EPS warning light does not go out even though engine has started.
EPS system malfunction
Wiring harness malfunction
Connector condition malfunction
Fuse malfunction
EPS control module detects an EPS system malfunction even though the EPS system is
normal.
CAN communication line malfunction
Vehicle speed signal malfunction
Engine speed signal malfunction
CAN wiring harness malfunction
EPS warning light circuit malfunction in the instrument cluster
CAN wiring harness malfunction
Malfunction in wiring harness between EPS control module and instrument
cluster
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT EPS CONTROL MODULE AND

YesIf a communication error message is displayed even
1 DLC-2 FOR CONTINUITY OR SHORT
after inspecting according to the procedures displayed
on the M-MDS, go to Step 5.
Perform the DTC
inspection.
Is an error message
regarding the
communication between
the EPS control module
and the M-MDS displayed?
INSPECT FOR DTCS IN EPS CONTROL

2 MODULE
YesPerform inspection using the appropriate DTC.
Have DTCs been recorded
in the memory?
INSPECT PID/DATA IN EPS CONTROL

YesRepeat the DTC inspection. If no DTCs have been
3 MODULE
recorded in the memory, replace the EPS control
module.
using the M-MDS
Datalogger function.
EPSLAMP
(EPS
No The EPS system is normal. Go to the next step.
warning
light)
Is the EPSLAMP ON after
the engine is already
running?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS FOR
4 CONTINUITY BETWEEN EPS CONTROL YesInspect the instrument cluster. (EPS warning light
circuit malfunction in the instrument cluster)
MODULE AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Disconnect the EPS control
module connector and the
instrument cluster
connector.
between the EPS control
module and the instrument
cluster at the following
terminals.
Terminal
2M (13pin) and
terminal
1J (12pin)
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK

MODE.)
No Repair the wiring harness between the EPS control
module and the instrument cluster, then reinspect the
malfunction symptoms.
Terminal
2K (13pin) and
terminal
1L (12pin)
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS FOR
5 CONTINUITY BETWEEN EPS CONTROL YesGo to the next step.
MODULE AND DLC-2
Disconnect the EPS control
module connector.
between the EPS control
module and the DLC-2 at
the following terminals.
No Repair the wiring harness between the EPS control

module and the DLC-2, then repeat from Step 1 if the
malfunction.
Terminal
2M (13pin) and
CAN_H
terminal
(16-pin)
Terminal
2K (13pin) and
CAN_L
terminal
(16-pin)
INSPECT VOLTAGE AT EPS CONTROL
6 MODULE
Measure the voltage at EPS
control module connector
terminal 2P (13-pin, IG1
signal).
Is the voltage within the
following range?
IG ON: 10
16 V
< Previous Next >
YesInspect the EPS control module connectors, then

repeat from Step 1 if the malfunction recurs. If the
same symptoms recur, replace the EPS control
module.
No Inspect the battery. If the battery condition is normal,
inspect and repair the EPS control module wiring
harness (IG1 signal). Reinspect the malfunction
symptoms.
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 POWER ASSIST DIFFERS BETWEEN RIGHT AND LEFT TURNS
3 Power assist differs between right and left turns.

Steering gear and linkage malfunction
EPS system neutral position setting not performed.
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT FOR DTC IN EPS CONTROL

1 MODULE
Have DTCs been recorded in
the memory?
INSPECT STEERING WHEEL POWER
2 ASSIST
Disconnect the EPS motor
connector.
Inspect the steering wheel
power assist.
Is there a difference in the
steering wheel power assist
between right and left turns?
INSPECT TORQUE SENSOR AND EPS
3 MOTOR
ACTION
YesPerform inspection using the appropriate DTC, then
go to Step 3.
YesInspect the steering gear and linkage. If it is
abnormal, replace it.
YesInspect the torque sensor wiring harness and the
Inspect the following items:

Measure the
resistance of
the torque
sensor.
Resistance:
1215
ohms
EPS motor wiring harness. If they are normal,

replace the EPS control module.
No Replace the steering gear and linkage.
Inspect the
operating
condition of
the EPS
motor.
Are they normal?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GENERAL PROCEDURES (STEERING)

Tightening torque
88118 Nm
{9.012.0 kgfm, 65.087.0 ftlbf}
[13B-MSP].)
EPS Related Parts
1. Make sure that there are no DTCs in the EPS memory after working on EPS related parts. If
there are any codes in the memory, clear them.
EPS System Neutral Setting

CAUTION:
After working on the steering system, always set the EPS system to the neutral position to
prevent system malfunction.
1. After performing the following, set the EPS system to the neutral position. (See EPS SYSTEM
NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING.)
Steering gear and linkage replacement
EPS control unit replacement
Disconnecting the steering shaft joint (gear side)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING LOCATION INDEX
1Steering wheel and column

(See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN INSPECTION.)
(See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2Steering shaft
(See STEERING SHAFT INSPECTION.)
(See STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE INSPECTION.)
(See STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
(See STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT.)
4EPS control module
(See EPS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See EPS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.)
(See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN INSPECTION
Play Inspection
1. With the wheels in the straight-ahead position, start the engine.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the left and right gently, and verify that the steering wheel play is
within the specification.
Steering wheel play
030 mm {01.2 in}
Looseness, Play Inspection

1. Move the steering wheel toward the shaft and in four right angle directions to inspect for
looseness and play.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the following, and repair or replace the
applicable part.
Column bearing wear
Looseness of the steering wheel installation part
Looseness of the column installed part
Excessive play of the steering shaft joint
Excessive play of the steering gear
Steering Wheel Effort Inspection

1. Verify that the equipped tire size and tire air pressure is as specified.
2. With the vehicle on a hard, level surface, put the wheels in the straight-ahead position.
WARNING:
Handling the air bag module improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag
module, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before
handling the air bag module. (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)
3. Remove the air bag module.
4. Start the engine and idle it.
5. Verify that the EPS warning light does not illuminate.
6. Inspect the steering wheel effort using a torque wrench.
If it exceeds the reference value, adjust the steering gear and linkage. (See
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT.)
Steering wheel effort
5.0 Nm {50 kgfcm, 44 inlbf} or less
NOTE:
To determine whether the steering effort is satisfactory or not, perform the
inspection on another vehicle of the same model and under the same
conditions, and compare the results.
The steering wheel effort varies with conditions indicated below.
Road conditions: such as dry or wet, asphalt or concrete
Tire conditions: such as brand, wear, and tire air pressure
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Handling the air bag module improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag module, which may
seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before handling the air bag module. (See AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)
CAUTION:
The EPS system may not operate correctly if it is detached from the steering gear (pinion) when
doing procedures such as steering shaft and column removal/installation or intermediate shaft
disconnection. After doing these procedures, always set the EPS system to the neutral position so
that the EPS operates normally. (See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING.)
1. Remove the air cleaner and air cleaner insulator. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
4. If the steering lock component is replaced, perform programming for the immobilizer system related
parts. (See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
(See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM].)
5. After installation, set the EPS system to the neutral position. (See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION
SETTING.)
1 Air bag module

(See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2 Locknut
3 Steering wheel
(See Steering Wheel Removal Note.)
(See Steering Wheel Installation Note.)
4 Column cover
5 Under cover
6 Clock spring, combination switch
(See COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7 Bolt (intermediate shaft)
(See Bolt (Intermediate Shaft) Removal Note.)
(See Bolt (Intermediate Shaft) Installation Note.)
8 Steering shaft
(See Steering Shaft Installation Note.)
9 Dust cover
10Steering lock mounting bolt
(See Steering Lock Mounting Bolt Removal Note.)
(See Steering Lock Mounting Bolt Installation Note.)
11Steering lock
Steering Wheel Removal Note

CAUTION:
Do not try to remove the steering wheel by hitting the shaft with a hammer. The column will be
damaged.
1. Set the wheels in the straight-ahead position.
2. Remove the steering wheel using any commercially available puller.
Bolt (Intermediate Shaft) Removal Note

1. Place alignment marks on the intermediate shaft joint, and the steering gear and linkage for proper
installation.
2. Loosen the joint upper bolt.

3. Remove the joint lower bolt and detach the intermediate shaft from the steering gear.
Steering Lock Mounting Bolt Removal Note

1. Make a groove in the heads of the steering lock mounting bolts using a chisel and hammer.
2. Remove the bolts using a flathead screwdriver.

3. Remove the steering lock.
Steering Lock Mounting Bolt Installation Note

1. Assemble the steering lock to the steering shaft.
2. Verify the operation condition of the steering lock system.
3. Install new steering lock mounting bolts.
4. Tighten the bolts until the heads break off.
Steering Shaft Installation Note

1. Verify that the tilt lever is in the LOCK position.
2. Temporarily tighten nuts A and B as shown in the figure.
3. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque in the order of A, B.

Tightening torque
15.722.5 Nm
{1.602.29 kgfm, 11.616.5 ftlbf}
Bolt (Intermediate Shaft) Installation Note

1. Align the marks made during removal and install the steering shaft to the steering gear.
2. Tighten the joint bolts (lower and upper).

Tightening torque
17.626.5 Nm
{1.802.70 kgfm, 13.019.5 ftlbf}
3. After tightening the bolts, move the intermediate shaft joint up and down and verify that it is
securely installed.
Steering Wheel Installation Note

1. Set the wheels in the straight-ahead position, and install the steering wheel.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING SHAFT INSPECTION
1. Inspect the column bearing for excessive play and damage.
2. Verify that the measurement of the steering shaft is as specified in the figure.
If not within the specification, replace the steering shaft component.

Steering shaft length
513.5 mm {20.22 in}
3. Inspect the tilt function operation for the following.
a. Verify that the tilt lever moves smoothly from the lock to the unlock position.
b. Verify that the steering shaft is fixed firmly when the tilt lever is locked.
If there is any malfunction, replace the steering shaft.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may possibly cause an open
circuit in the wiring harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the following procedures, remove the ABS
wheel-speed sensor harness (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate place where the harness will not be pulled by
mistake while servicing the vehicle.
After replacing the steering gear and linkage, always set the EPS system to the neutral position to prevent system
malfunction. (See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING.)
3. Remove the under cover. (See FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. After installation, inspect the front wheel alignment and adjust it if necessary. (See FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)
7. Set the EPS system to the neutral position. (See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING.)
1Bolt (intermediate shaft)

2Radiator bracket
3Cotter pin
4Locknut (tie-rod end)
5Tie-rod end
(See Tie-rod End Removal Note.)
6Torque sensor connector
7EPS motor connector
(See Steering Gear and Linkage Installation Note.)
Tie-rod End Removal Note

1. Remove the outer ball joint locknut.
2. Detach the outer ball joint from the steering knuckle using the SST.
Steering Gear and Linkage Installation Note

1. Temporarily tighten the bolts.
2. Tighten the steering gear and linkage installation bolts to the specified torque in the order shown in the figure.
Tightening torque
74.4104.8 Nm
{7.5910.68 kgfm, 54.8877.29 ftlbf}
3. After connecting the connector, fix the wiring harness with the bands as shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE INSPECTION
Tie-rod End Inspection

1. Inspect the tie-rod end for damage and excessive play.
If there are any cracks, replace the tie-rod end.
2. Inspect the boot for cracks.
If there is any malfunction, replace the tie-rod end boot.
4. Measure the rotational torque of the tie-rod end using the SST and a pull scale.
If not within the specification, replace the tie-rod end.

Tie-rod end rotation torque
0.62.0 Nm {620 kgfcm, 517 inlbf}
Pull scale reading: 5.919.6 N {0.611.99 kgf, 1.334.40 lbf}
Tie rod Inspection

1. Inspect for damage, bending and excessive play.
If there is any malfunction, replace the tie rod.

2. Swing the ball joint 5 times.
3. Measure the swing torque using a pull scale.
If it exceeds the specification, replace the tie rod.

Tie-rod end swing torque
0.682.45 Nm {7.024.9 kgfcm, 6.121.6 inlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1Tie-rod end
(See Tie-rod End Disassembly Note.)

2Locknut
3Boot clamp
4Boot band
(See Boot Band Assembly Note.)
5Boot
6Tie rod
(See Tie Rod Disassembly Note.)
(See Tie Rod Assembly Note.)
7Lock washer
8Mounting rubber
(See Mounting Rubber Disassembly Note.)
(See Mounting Rubber Assembly Note.)
Tie-rod End Disassembly Note

1. Place alignment marks as shown in the figure for proper installation.
2. Remove the tie-rod end.
Tie Rod Disassembly Note

1. Lock the steering rack end (pinion gear side) against rotation with a wrench.
2. Using the SST, remove the tie rod.
Mounting Rubber Disassembly Note

1. Press the mounting rubber out from the gear housing using the SSTs and a press.
Mounting Rubber Assembly Note

1. Apply soapy water to the rubber part of the mounting rubber.
2. Press the mounting rubber until the mounting rubber end comes out completely from the gear housing using the SSTs and
a press.
3. Reverse the gear housing, then press the mounting rubber until the mounting rubber end comes out completely from the
other side. At this time, verify that the mounting rubber and steel pipe are aligned.
Tie Rod Assembly Note

1. Lock the steering rack end (pinion gear side) against rotation with a wrench.
2. Using the SST, tighten the tie rod.

Tightening torque
68.678.4 Nm {7.07.9 kgfm, 50.757.1 ftlbf}
Boot Band Assembly Note

1. Crimp the boot band using the SST.
2. Verify that the crimping clearance A is within the specification.

If crimping clearance A exceeds the specification, reduce SST clearance, and crimp the boot band again.
If crimping clearance A is less than the specification, increase SST clearance, and crimp a new boot band.
Standard clearance A
23 mm {0.080.11 in}
3. Rotate the boot by hand and verify that it is securely installed to the boot band.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove the locknut using the SST.
2. Apply sealant to the threads of the adjustment cover.

3. Tighten the adjustment cover to 2029 Nm {2.12.9 kgfm, 1521 ftlbf} .
4. After swinging the steering rack left and right 10 times, tighten the adjustment cover again
to 5.8 Nm {59 kgfcm, 51 inlbf}.
5. Loosen the adjustment cover 1020.
6. Lock the adjustment cover against rotation and tighten the locknut using the SST.
Tightening torque
2029 Nm {2.12.9 kgfm, 1521 ftlbf}
7. Measure the pinion shaft rotational torque using the SST and a pull scale.
If not within the specification, repeat from Steps 16.

Pinion shaft rotation torque
1.22.0 Nm {1320 kgfcm, 1117 inlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TORQUE SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Measure the resistance between torque sensor connector terminals A and B, and B and C.
If there is any malfunction, replace the steering gear and linkage.

Standard
AB: 1215 ohms
BC: 1215 ohms
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL POSITION SETTING
NOTE:
Use the IDS (laptop PC) because the PDS (Pocket PC) does not support the EPS system
neutral position setting.
1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. (Steering wheel is within 45 to the left or
right of center position.)
2. Jack up both front tires so that there is no weight on them.
3. Lower the jack until the front tires touch the ground completely before removing the jack
from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
After lowering the jack and placing the vehicle completely on the ground, do
not touch the steering wheel and front tires until the EPS system neutral
position setting is completed. Otherwise, the EPS system may not operate
normally.
1. Select Chassis.
2. Select EPS.
3. Select Neutral Position Setting.

7. After setting to neutral, start the engine, rotate the steering wheel slowly in both directions
within a range of 90, and verify that the steering force does not differ in either directions.
If the steering force is different in either direction, inspect the power steering
system following a separate troubleshooting procedure. (See NO.3 POWER
ASSIST DIFFERS BETWEEN RIGHT AND LEFT TURNS.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EPS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
If the EPS control module is replaced, set the EPS system to the neutral position. If not set
to the neutral position, the system may not operate correctly. (See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL
POSITION SETTING.)
Do not drop the EPS control module. Replace the EPS control module if it subjected to an
impact.
a. Engine cover. (See ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
b. Battery cover. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
c. PCM cover (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
d. PCM (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
e. PCM bracket No.1 (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
f. PCM bracket No.2 (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
g. PCM bracket No.3 (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
4. After installation, set the EPS system to the neutral position. (See EPS SYSTEM NEUTRAL
POSITION SETTING.)
1Cover
2Connector
3Noise filter
4Connector
5EPS control module
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EPS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION
a. Engine cover. (See ENGINE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
b. Battery cover. (See BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
c. PCM cover (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
d. PCM (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
e. PCM bracket No.1 (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
f. PCM bracket No.2 (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
g. PCM bracket No.3 (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
h. EPS control module (See EPS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Connect the PCM and EPS control module connectors.
3. Attach the tester lead to the underside of the control module connector and inspect the voltage and continuity according
to the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) indicated in the table.
NOTE:
When inspecting the torque sensor and EPS motor for continuity, turn the ignition switch off and inspect with the
connectors for the EPS control module, torque sensor, and EPS motor disconnected.
1A
Connected Measured
to
item
Battery power
Battery
supply
Measured terminal
(measured condition)
Standard
B+
Inspection item(s)
Wiring harness (1A
battery)
Fuse (60 A)
1B
Ground
Ground
point
1 V or less
Wiring harness (1Bground

point)
2A
Ground
Ground
point
1 V or less
Wiring harness (2Aground

point)
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
2H
2J
2K
2L
2M
2N
CAN_L
CAN_H
Ground
point
2O
Ground
2P
Ignition power Ignition

supply
switch
3A
3B
3C
Torque sensor
(Signal 2)
Torque sensor
(Drive signal)
Torque sensor
(Signal 1)
Inspect under DTC inspection.
Inspect under DTC inspection.
1 V or less
Wiring harness (2Oground

point)
Ignition switch is ON
B+
Wiring harness (2Pignition

switchbattery)
Ignition switch is OFF
1 or less
Voltage
Fuse (15 A)
Torque
sensor
Continuity Terminal 3Atorque sensor

terminal A
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (3Atorque

sensor A)
Torque
sensor
Continuity Terminal 3Btorque sensor

terminal B
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (3Btorque

sensor B)
Torque
sensor
Continuity
Terminal 3Ctorque sensor

terminal C
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (3Ctorque

sensor C)
4A
EPS motor
EPS motor Continuity Terminal 4AEPS motor

terminal A
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (4AEPS

motor A)
4B
EPS motor
EPS motor Continuity Terminal 4BEPS motor

terminal B
Continuity
detected
Wiring harness (4BEPS

motor B)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING TECHNICAL DATA
Item
Specification
Steering wheel play
030 mm {01.2 in}
Steering wheel effort
5.0 Nm {50 kgfcm, 44 inlbf} or less
Steering shaft length
513.5 mm {20.22 in}
Tie-rod end rotation torque
Tie-rod end swing torque
Pinion shaft rotation torque
0.62.0 Nm {620 kgfcm, 517 inlbf}

0.682.45 Nm {7.024.9 kgfcm, 6.121.6 inlbf}
1.22.0 Nm {1320 kgfcm, 1117 inlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous

STEERING SST
49 T028
3A0
Ball joint
puller set
49 T025
001
Boot
clamp
crisper
49 F017
1A0
Universal
wrench
49 B032 317
Bearing & oil
seal remover
49 G032 321
Wrench
49 U034
204
Dust boot
installer
49 D032
316
Protractor
49 0180 510B
Preload
measuring
attachment
< Previous
Back to Top
Workshop Manual - HVAC

2011 - RX-8
HVAC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE NUMBER INSPECTION
DTC 02
DTC 02, 18, 21
DTC 06
DTC 06, 10, 12, 18, 21
DTC 07
DTC 07, 11, 13, 19, 22
DTC 10
DTC 11
DTC 12
DTC 13
DTC 14
DTC 15
DTC 18
DTC 19
DTC 19, 22
DTC 21
DTC 22
DTC 58
DTC 59
HVAC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
FOREWORD [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.1 INSUFFICIENT AIR (OR NO AIR) BLOWN FROM VENTS [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.2 AMOUNT OF AIR BLOWN FROM VENTS DOES NOT CHANGE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.3 AIR INTAKE MODE DOES NOT CHANGE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.4 NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH A/C AMPLIFIER [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.5 WINDSHIELD FOGGED [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.6 AIR FROM VENTS NOT COLD ENOUGH [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.7 NO COOL AIR [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.8 NOISE WHILE OPERATING A/C SYSTEM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
HVAC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]

FOREWORD [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.1 INSUFFICIENT AIR (OR NO AIR) BLOWN FROM VENTS [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.2 AMOUNT OF AIR BLOWN FROM VENTS DOES NOT CHANGE [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.3 AIR INTAKE MODE DOES NOT CHANGE [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.4 NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH A/C AMPLIFIER [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.5 WINDSHIELD FOGGED [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.6 AIR FROM VENTS NOT COLD ENOUGH [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.7 NO COOL AIR [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
NO.8 NOISE WHILE OPERATING A/C SYSTEM [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
Refrigerant System
REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS

SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS
SYSTEM GENERAL PROCEDURES
CHARGING
RECOVERY
PRESSURE CHECK
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST
Basic System
HVAC BASIC SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
BLOWER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BLOWER UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
A/C UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A/C UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
AIR FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
AIR FILTER INSPECTION
EVAPORATOR INSPECTION
HEATER CORE INSPECTION
AIRFLOW MODE MAIN LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR HEAT DUCT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A/C COMPRESSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CONDENSER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CONDENSER INSPECTION
REFRIGERANT LINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Control System
HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
AIR MIX ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
BLOWER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
BLOWER MOTOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
POWER TRANSISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
POWER TRANSISTOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
MAGNETIC CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]

MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
A/C AMPLIFIER INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
Control System
HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
AIR MIX ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
BLOWER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
BLOWER MOTOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
RESISTOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
MAGNETIC CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
A/C AMPLIFIER INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
FAN SWITCH INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
Technical Data
HVAC TECHNICAL DATA
HVAC SST
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 06, 10, 12, 18, 21
DTC 06, 10, A/C amplifier (sensor ground) system inspection

12, 18, 21
Connector or terminal malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2N
and evaporator temperature sensor connector terminal A
and ambient temperature sensor connector terminal A
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

and passenger compartment temperature sensor connector terminal B
and air mix actuator connector terminal A
and airflow mode actuator connector terminal C
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector (16-pin) and
the evaporator temperature sensor connector.
Is there continuity between A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin) terminal 2N and evaporator temperature
sensor connector terminal A?
ACTION
YesInspect the connection at
the A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin).
No Repair the wiring harness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 07, 11, 13, 19, 22
DTC 07, 11, A/C amplifier (sensor ground) system inspection

13, 19, 22
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

and passenger compartment temperature sensor connector terminal B
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR

OPEN CIRCUIT
YesRepair the wiring harness.

No The system is normal at

present. (Clear the past
malfunction from memory.)
Is there an open circuit in the wiring harness

between A/C amplifier connector (16-pin) terminal
2N and evaporator temperature sensor connector
terminal A?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

HVAC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE NUMBER INSPECTION
1. Expose the solar radiation sensor to natural sunlight
NOTE:
If natural sunlight is not shone on the solar radiation sensor, the climate control unit determines
a malfunction and indicates DTC 02.
2. With the REC/FRESH switch and the A/C switch pressed at the same time, turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position, and wait for 3 s, then turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 3 s or more while
continuing to press both switches.
3. Perform the DTC inspection (present and past malfunction indication modes). Read the DTCs on the
information display. If the system is normal, 00 will be indicated on the display.
If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC
inspection.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs from memory. (See After Repair Procedure.)
Present Malfunction Indication Mode

The on-board diagnostic function displays the present malfunction indication mode directly after start up. In
the present malfunction indication mode, present malfunctions in the control system circuits (open/short
circuits) are detected, and the DTCs are indicated on the information display.
Past Malfunction Indication Mode

While in the present malfunction indication mode, press the A/C switch to change to the past malfunction
indication mode. In the past malfunction indication mode, past malfunctions (intermittent problems) in the
input sensor circuits (open/short circuits) are stored and indicated on the information display. If the A/C
switch is pressed again while in the past malfunction indication mode, the on-board diagnostic function will
return to the present malfunction indication mode.
After Repair Procedure

When DTCs are displayed in the past malfunction indication mode, they remain in the memory after the
failed systems are corrected. Consequently, the next time the past malfunction indication mode is used, the
same past malfunction DTCs will be indicated on the information display. Therefore, clear the past
malfunction memory after correcting all failed systems. To clear the past malfunction memory, press the
AUTO switch and the REC/FRESH switch at the same time while in the past malfunction indication mode. If
cleared, 00 will be indicated on the information display.
DTC Table
No. Indicator pattern
Diagnosed circuit
02
Solar radiation sensor (present malfunction)
06
Passenger compartment temperature sensor (present malfunction)
07
Passenger compartment temperature sensor (past malfunction)
10
Evaporator temperature sensor (present malfunction)
11
Evaporator temperature sensor (past malfunction)
12
Ambient temperature sensor (present malfunction)
13
Ambient temperature sensor (past malfunction)
14
ECT sensor (present malfunction)
15
ECT sensor (past malfunction)
18
Air mix actuator [potentiometer] (present malfunction)
19
Air mix actuator [potentiometer] (past malfunction)
21
Airflow mode actuator [potentiometer] (present malfunction)
22
Airflow mode actuator [potentiometer] (past malfunction)
58
Air mix actuator [motor lock] (past malfunction)
59
Airflow mode actuator [motor lock] (past malfunction)
A/C Operation Check Mode
Inspection procedure
1. Warm up the engine and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
2. Start the present malfunction indication mode referring to the DTC inspection.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and press the AUTO switch.
4. Verify that all the indicator lights of the climate control unit and the information display illuminate for 4 s.
5. Verify the operation of each output device when changing steps by pressing the REC/FRESH switch, and
referring to the output device operation check table.
If any abnormality is found, inspect the malfunctioning system.
NOTE:
If the AUTO switch is pressed during the A/C operation check mode, the on-board diagnostic
function will return to the present malfunction indication mode.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position to end the A/C operation check mode.
Operation check table
Step Device and

operation
Operation condition
Monitor
display*
Other output condition
Air mix door opening

angle
50 %
Airflow mode
VENT
Blower
1 motor
speed
A/C compressor
1
ON
(OFF
when
the
blower
is
OFF)
Air intake mode
FRESH
20.5
20.5
Air mix
door
21.0
Blower fan
2nd
Airflow mode
VENT
opening
angle
A/C compressor
ON
20.5
Air intake mode

FRESH
Blower fan
2nd
angle
Airflow
3 mode door
switching
50 %
A/C compressor
ON
Air intake mode
FRESH
Blower fan
2nd
Air intake
door
switching

angle
0%
Airflow mode
VENT
A/C
compressor
ON/OFF
NOTE:
A/C compressor
ON/OFF can be verified
A/C display on the
information display.
Shown on the information display (at the set temperature display) according to the step.
A/C Cut-off Control Inspection
Without using M-MDS
1. Apply the parking brake securely and position wheel blocks against the front and rear tires.
3. Turn the A/C switch and the fan switch on.
4. Verify that the magnetic clutch is engaged.
If the magnetic clutch engagement is not verified, inspect the following, and repair or replace
the malfunctioning part:
A/C switch
Fan switch
Refrigerant pressure switch (high/low pressure)
Wiring harnesses (open circuit) between the fan switch, A/C switch, refrigerant
pressure switch (high/low pressure), and PCM terminal 1AU
Refrigerant pressure switch (medium pressure)
Wiring harness (open circuit) between the refrigerant pressure switch (medium
pressure) and PCM terminal 1J
Magnetic clutch
A/C relay
Wiring harnesses (open circuit) between the battery, A/C relay, magnetic
clutch, and ground
Wiring harness (open circuit) between the A/C relay and PCM terminal 1I
5. Fully depress the accelerator pedal (wide open throttle) and verify that the magnetic clutch is disengaged.
If the magnetic clutch is not disengaged, inspect the following, and repair or replace the
malfunctioning part:
PCM terminals 1AO (No.1), 1AP (No.2) (accelerator position sensor input signal)
PCM terminals 2AK (No.1), 2AL (No.2) (throttle position sensor input signal)
A/C relay
Wiring harnesses (open circuit) between the ignition switch, A/C relay, and PCM
terminal 1I
Using M-MDS

3. Monitor the ACCS referring to the PCM monitor inspection. (See PCM INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
4. Turn the A/C switch and the fan switch on.
5. Verify that the ACCS monitor displays ON.
If the ACCS monitor does not display ON, inspect the following items:
A/C switch
Fan switch
Refrigerant pressure switch (high/low pressure)
Wiring harnesses (open circuit) between the fan switch, A/C switch, refrigerant
pressure switch (high/low pressure), and PCM terminal 1AU
6. Monitor the COLP.
7. Verify that the magnetic clutch engages when the COLP monitor displays ON.
If the magnetic clutch engagement is not verified, inspect the following items:
Magnetic clutch
A/C relay
Wiring harnesses (open/short circuit) between the battery, A/C relay, magnetic
clutch, and ground
Wiring harness (open circuit) between the A/C relay and PCM terminal 1I
If the COLP monitor does not display ON, inspect the following items:
Refrigerant pressure switch (medium pressure)
Wiring harness (open circuit) between the refrigerant pressure switch (medium
pressure) and PCM terminal 1J
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 02
DTC 02
Solar radiation sensor system inspection

Solar radiation sensor malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between solar radiation sensor connector
terminal 2I and A/C amplifier connector terminal B
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between solar radiation sensor connector

terminal 2P and A/C amplifier connector terminal A
Short to ground in wiring harness between solar radiation sensor connector
terminal 2I and A/C amplifier connector terminal B
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR
Inspect the solar radiation sensor.
(See SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR INSPECTION
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
ACTION
No Replace the solar radiation
sensor.
(See SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR

CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector (16-pin)

and the solar radiation sensor connector.
Is there continuity between the following

terminals of the A/C amplifier connector (16-pin)
and the solar radiation sensor connector?
2IB
2PA
3

CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Is there a short circuit to ground in the wiring

harness between A/C amplifier connector (16pin) terminal 2I and solar radiation sensor
connector terminal B?
No Inspect the connection at the

A/C amplifier connector (16-pin).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 06
DTC 06
Passenger compartment temperature sensor system inspection

Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminals
2J and 2N
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector

terminals 2J and 2N
Passenger compartment temperature sensor malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT
Is the resistance between
terminals 2J and 2N of the A/C
amplifier connector (16-pin) as
indicated below?
ACTION
YesInspect the connection at the A/C amplifier
connector (16-pin).
0.35120
kilohms
2
INSPECT PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Inspect the passenger
compartment temperature sensor.
(See PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

No Replace the passenger compartment
temperature sensor.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].)

CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 07
DTC 07
Passenger compartment temperature sensor system inspection

Passenger compartment temperature sensor malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2J and
passenger compartment temperature sensor connector terminal D
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2N and
passenger compartment temperature sensor connector terminal B
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2J
and passenger compartment temperature sensor connector terminal D
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Inspect the passenger compartment temperature

sensor.
No Replace the passenger compartment

temperature sensor.

TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULLAUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
2
ACTION

TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
and the passenger compartment temperature
sensor connector.

TEMPERATURE SENSOR


between the following terminals of the A/C
amplifier connector (16-pin) and the passenger
compartment temperature sensor connector?
2JD
2NB
3

TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO GROUND
harness between A/C amplifier connector (16pin) terminal 2J and passenger compartment
temperature sensor connector terminal D?

TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Inspect the voltage at the following A/C amplifier
terminal (wiring harness side).

No Connect the A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin) and go to the next step.
YesThe system is normal at present.

(Clear the past malfunction from
memory.)
No Inspect the connection at the A/C
amplifier connector (16-pin).
Terminal 2J (16-pin, passenger

compartment temperature
sensor input signal)
Is the voltage normal? (Approx. 5 V)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 10
DTC 10
Evaporator temperature sensor system inspection

2F and 2N
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

terminals 2F and 2N
Evaporator temperature sensor malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT
Is the resistance between terminals 2F and 2N of
the A/C amplifier connector (16-pin) as indicated
below?
ACTION
YesInspect the connection at the
A/C amplifier connector (16pin).
0.34120 kilohms
2
INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR
Inspect the evaporator temperature sensor.
No Replace the evaporator

temperature sensor.
(See EVAPORATOR INSPECTION.)

Is it normal?
(See A/C UNIT

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 11
DTC 11
Evaporator temperature sensor system inspection

Evaporator temperature sensor malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2F
and evaporator temperature sensor connector terminal B
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2F
and evaporator temperature sensor connector terminal B
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Inspect the evaporator temperature sensor.
(See EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
ACTION
No Replace the evaporator
temperature sensor.
(See A/C UNIT


Is there an open circuit in the wiring harness between

the following terminals of the A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin) and the evaporator temperature sensor
connector?
2FB
2NA
3

Is there a short circuit to ground in the wiring harness

between A/C amplifier connector (16-pin) terminal 2F
and evaporator temperature sensor connector terminal
B?
No Connect the A/C amplifier

connector (16-pin), then

CIRCUIT
YesThe system is normal at

malfunction from
memory.)

Inspect the voltage at the following A/C amplifier
terminal (wiring harness side).
Terminal 2F (16-pin, evaporator
temperature sensor input signal)
No Inspect the connection at

the A/C amplifier
connector (16-pin).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 12
DTC 12
Ambient temperature sensor system inspection

2M and 2N
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

terminals 2M and 2N
Ambient temperature sensor malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Is the resistance between terminals
2M and 2N of the A/C amplifier
connector (16-pin) as indicated
below?
ACTION
YesInspect the connection at the A/C amplifier
connector (16-pin).
0.35120 kilohms
2
INSPECT AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Inspect the ambient temperature

sensor.
No Replace the ambient temperature sensor.
(See AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
(See AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

CONDITIONER].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 13
DTC 13
Ambient temperature sensor system inspection

Ambient temperature sensor malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2M
and ambient temperature sensor connector terminal B
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier terminal 2M and
ambient temperature sensor connector terminal B
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
Inspect the ambient temperature sensor.
No Replace the ambient temperature

sensor.
(See AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
ACTION
(See AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

SENSOR

SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

and the ambient temperature sensor connector.

amplifier connector (16-pin) and the ambient

temperature sensor connector?
2MB
2NA
3

SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
harness between A/C amplifier connector (16pin) terminal 2M and ambient temperature
sensor connector terminal B?

SENSOR CIRCUIT
Inspect the voltage at the following A/C
amplifier terminal (wiring harness side).

No Connect the A/C amplifier
connector (16-pin), then go to
the next step.
YesThe system is normal at present.

memory.)
No Inspect the connection at the
A/C amplifier connector (16-pin).
Terminal 2M (16-pin, ambient

temperature sensor input
signal)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 14
DTC 14
ECT sensor system inspection

PCM malfunction
Open or short circuit in wiring harnesses between ECT sensor connector and
PCM connector
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
A/C amplifier malfunction

Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2O
and PCM connector terminal 1AN
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal
2O and PCM connector terminal 1AN
STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY THAT THE DTC OF THE PCM
Verify that the DTC of the PCM.
ACTION
YesPerform troubleshooting according to the

[13B-MSP].)
Is displayed P0117 or P0118?
2
INSPECT ECT SENSOR SIGNAL

CIRCUIT
YesReplace the A/C amplifier.
Inspect the voltage at the following A/C

amplifier terminal (wiring harness side).
Terminal 2O (16-pin,
ECT sensor input
signal)
(See A/C AMPLIFIER INSPECTION
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 15
DTC 15
ECT sensor system inspection

PCM malfunction
Open or short circuit in wiring harnesses between ECT sensor connector and PCM connector
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2O and PCM connector terminal
1AN
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2O and PCM connector
terminal 1AN
STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY THAT THE DTC OF THE PCM
Verify that the DTC of the PCM.
ACTION

Is displayed P0117 or P0118?
2
INSPECT ECT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector (16-pin) and the PCM connector
(60-pin).
Is there an open circuit in the wiring harness between A/C amplifier

connector (16-pin) terminal 2O and PCM connector terminal 1AN?
3
INSPECT ECT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

GROUND
Is there a short circuit to ground in the wiring harness between A/C

amplifier connector (16-pin) terminal 2O and PCM connector terminal
1AN?
No The system is normal at present. (Clear

the past malfunction from memory.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 18
DTC 18
Air mix actuator (potentiometer) system inspection

Air mix actuator malfunction
terminals 2D and 2N
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

2P and 2N
2D and 2P
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT AIR MIX ACTUATOR
Inspect the air mix actuator.
(See AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Is it normal?

(POTENTIOMETER) CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the airflow mode actuator
connector.
Is the resistance between terminals 2D
and 2N of the A/C amplifier connector (16pin) 698 ohms or more?
ACTION
No Replace the air mix actuator.
(See AIR MIX ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER].)
No Repair the wiring harness. (Short
circuit)

OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin).

No Repair the wiring harness. (Open
circuit)
Is the resistance between terminals 2P

and 2N of the A/C amplifier connector (16pin) 6.0 kilohms or less?
4

OPEN CIRCUIT
YesInspect the connection at the A/C

Is the resistance between terminals 2D

and 2P of the A/C amplifier connector (16pin) 5.2 kilohms or less?
No Repair the wiring harness. (Open

circuit)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 19
DTC 19
Air mix actuator (potentiometer) system inspection

Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2P
and air mix actuator connector terminal C
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2D
and air mix actuator connector terminal E
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

2D and air mix actuator connector terminal E
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Inspect the air mix actuator.
(See AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULLAUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?

(POTENTIOMETER) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
and the air mix actuator connector.
ACTION
No Replace the air mix actuator.
[FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].)

amplifier connector (16-pin) and the air mix
actuator connector?
2PC
2DE
2NA
3

(POTENTIOMETER) CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
TO GROUND
harness between A/C amplifier connector (16-pin)
terminal 2D and air mix actuator connector
terminal E?

No The system is normal at
malfunction from memory.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 21
DTC 21
Airflow mode actuator (potentiometer) system inspection

Airflow mode actuator malfunction
terminals 2G and 2N
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

2P and 2N
2P and 2G
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT AIRFLOW MODE

ACTUATOR
Inspect the airflow mode actuator.
No Replace the airflow mode actuator.
(See AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR

CONDITIONER].)

AIR CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
2

ACTUATOR (POTENTIOMETER)
Disconnect the air mix actuator
connector.
Is the resistance between terminals 2G

No Repair the wiring harness. (Short circuit)
and 2N of the A/C amplifier connector

(16-pin) 698 ohms or more?
3

Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin).

No Repair the wiring harness. (Open circuit)

and 2N of the A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin) 6.0 kilohms or less?
4



and 2G of the A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin) 5.2 kilohms or less?
No Repair the wiring harness. (Open circuit)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 22
DTC 22
Airflow mode actuator (potentiometer) system inspection

Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2P
and airflow mode actuator connector terminal A
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2G
and airflow mode actuator connector terminal E
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

2G and airflow mode actuator connector terminal E
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR
Inspect the airflow mode actuator.
(See AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Is it normal?

(POTENTIOMETER) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
and the airflow mode actuator connector.
ACTION
No Replace the airflow mode
actuator.
(See AIRFLOW MODE
ACTUATOR

amplifier connector (16-pin) and the airflow
mode actuator connector?
2PA
2GE
2NC
3

(POTENTIOMETER) CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
TO GROUND
harness between A/C amplifier connector (16pin) terminal 2G and airflow mode actuator
connector terminal E?

No The system is normal at present.
memory.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 58
DTC 58
Air mix actuator (motor lock) system inspection

A/C unit (air mix link and air mix crank) malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

1U and 1V
terminals 1U and 1V
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT AIR MIX ACTUATOR OPERATION

Disconnect the air mix actuator connector.
Connect battery positive voltage to air mix
actuator terminal F (or terminal G) and ground to
terminal G (or terminal F).
ACTION
YesConnect the connector, then go to
Step 3.
Does the air mix actuator operate?

2
INSPECT AIR MIX LINK OPERATION

Remove the air mix actuator.
Operate the air mix link manually.
Does the air mix link operate smoothly?
YesReplace the air mix actuator.

No Replace the air mix link and the
air mix crank.
INSPECT AIR MIX ACTUATOR CIRCUIT FOR

OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector (24-pin).
Connect battery positive voltage to A/C amplifier
connector (24-pin) terminal 1V (or terminal 1U)
and ground to terminal 1U (or terminal 1V).

Does the air mix actuator operate?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 59
DTC 59
Airflow mode actuator (motor lock) system inspection

A/C unit (airflow mode link and airflow mode crank) malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminals 1W

and 1X
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminals
1W and 1X
STEP
INSPECTION
Disconnect the airflow mode actuator connector.

Connect battery positive voltage to airflow mode
actuator terminal F (or terminal G) and ground to
terminal G (or terminal F).
ACTION
YesConnect the connector, then go to
Step 3.
Does the airflow mode actuator operate?

2
Remove the airflow mode actuator.

Operate the airflow mode main link manually.
Does the airflow mode main link operate
smoothly?
YesReplace the airflow mode actuator.

No Replace the airflow mode main link,
airflow mode sub link, and the airflow
mode crank.
Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector (24-pin).

Connect battery positive voltage to A/C amplifier

connector (24-pin) terminal 1W (or terminal 1X)

and ground to terminal 1X (or terminal 1W).
Does the airflow mode actuator operate?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 02, 18, 21
DTC 02, 18, 21 A/C amplifier (+5 V power supply) system inspection
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2P and airflow mode actuator
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2P and airflow mode actuator
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2P and air mix actuator
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2P and solar radiation sensor
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT +5 V POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector (16-pin) and the airflow mode actuator
connector.
Is there continuity between A/C amplifier connector (16-pin) terminal 2P and

airflow mode actuator connector terminal A?
2
INSPECT +5 V POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Is there a short circuit to ground in the wiring harness between A/C amplifier
connector (16-pin) terminal 2P and airflow mode actuator connector terminal A?
connector (16-pin) terminal 2P and air mix actuator connector terminal C?
connector (16-pin) terminal 2P and solar radiation sensor connector terminal A?
No Inspect the connection at the A/C

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

DTC 19, 22
DTC 19, 22 Air mix actuator, airflow mode actuator (+5 V power supply) system inspection
Open circuit in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2P and airflow
mode actuator connector terminal A
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2P and airflow
mode actuator connector terminal A
Short to ground in wiring harness between A/C amplifier connector terminal 2P and air mix
actuator connector terminal C
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT +5 V POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

CIRCUIT
Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector (16-pin) and the airflow

mode actuator connector.
Is there continuity between A/C amplifier connector (16-pin)

terminal 2P and airflow mode actuator connector terminal A?
2
INSPECT +5 V POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

GROUND
Is there a short circuit to ground in the wiring harness between

A/C amplifier connector (16-pin) terminal 2P and airflow mode
actuator connector terminal A?
INSPECT +5 V POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO

GROUND
Is there a short circuit to ground in the wiring harness between

A/C amplifier connector (16-pin) terminal 2P and air mix
actuator connector terminal C?
No The system is normal at present.

memory.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.7 NO COOL AIR [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
No cool air
DESCRIPTION
Magnetic clutch does not operate.

Malfunction in PCM A/C cut control system (Step 3)
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between evaporator temperature
sensor and A/C amplifier (Step 3)
Malfunction in evaporator temperature sensor (internal circuit malfunction)
(Step 3)
Malfunction in A/C amplifier (Step 4)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Malfunction in refrigerant pressure switch (Steps 5, 79)

Malfunction in PCM (A/C signal) (Step 6)
Malfunction in PCM (IG1 signal) (Steps 10, 11)
Malfunction in A/C compressor (Step 12)
Malfunction in A/C relay (Steps 1416)
When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, shake the wiring harness
and connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points
are the cause of any intermittent malfunctions. If there is a problem, inspect to make sure
connectors, terminals and wiring harnesses are connected correctly and undamaged.
STEP
INSPECTION
1 AIR FLOW INSPECTION

Does air blow form vents?
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting indexes No.1
and 2.
2 INSPECT A/C COMPRESSOR OPERATION
Start engine.
Turn A/C switch and fan switch
on.
YesGo to Step 1 of troubleshooting index No.6.

No Go to next step.
Does A/C compressor operate?

3 INSPECT FOR DTC IN PCM AND HVAC
SYSTEM
Inspect for DTCs related to the
PCM and HVAC system on-board
diagnostic system.
YesGo to appropriate inspection procedure.

No Go to next step.
Are any DTCs displayed?

4 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN A/C AMPLIFIER OR ELSEWHERE
Does cool air blow out when
terminal 1M of A/C amplifier
connector (24-pin, A/C signal) is
grounded by a jumper wire?
5* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN A/C SIGNAL CIRCUIT (BETWEEN
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH AND
PCM) OR ELSEWHERE
YesReplace A/C amplifier, then go to Step 17.

No Remove the jumper wire, then go to next step.
YesGo to Step 7.
No Go to next step.
Test voltage at the following

terminal of refrigerant pressure
switch:
Terminal B (A/C
signal)
Is voltage approx. 12 V?
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN WIRING
HARNESS (BETWEEN REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE SWITCH AND PCM) OR PCM
Test voltage at A/C signal terminal
of PCM.
YesRepair wiring harness between PCM and

refrigerant pressure switch, then go to Step
17.
No Inspect PCM, then go to Step 17. (See PCM

IS IN REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH,
REFRIGERANT AMOUNT, OR ELSEWHERE
terminals A and B of refrigerant
pressure switch connector are
shorted?
YesGo to Step 9.
No Go to next step.
8* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesGo to Step 10.

IS IN WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH AND A/C
No Repair wiring harness between refrigerant
AMPLIFIER) OR ELSEWHERE
pressure switch and A/C amplifier, then go to
Step 17.
terminal of A/C amplifier.
Terminal 1M (24pin, A/C signal)
9 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesIf there is no refrigerant, replace condenser,
IS IN REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH OR
bleed the refrigerant line for 30 min or more
REFRIGERANT AMOUNT
using a vacuum pump, and add refrigerant to
specified level, then go to Step 17.
Inspect refrigerant pressure
switch.
No Replace refrigerant pressure switch, then go to
Is it normal?
Step 17. (See REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULLAUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
10 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesRemove the jumper wire, then go to next step.
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN A/C CONTROL
SIGNAL CIRCUIT (BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND
No Go to Step 12.
PCM) OR ELSEWHERE
terminal A of A/C relay connector
(A/C control signal) is grounded by
a jumper wire?
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN PCM OR
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN A/C RELAY
AND PCM)
Test voltage at the A/C relay
control signal terminal of PCM.
YesInspect PCM, then go to Step 17.

No Repair wiring harness between A/C relay and
PCM, then go to Step 17.

IS IN MAGNETIC CLUTCH OR ELSEWHERE
terminal of magnetic clutch
thermal protector:

No Go to Step 14.
Terminal B
(magnetic clutch
operation signal)
13 INSPECT MAGNETIC CLUTCH CLEARANCE
Inspect the magnetic clutch
clearance.
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH
ADJUSTMENT [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].)
Is the magnetic clutch clearance
normal?
14 INSPECT FUSE
YesInspect and repair the magnetic clutch, then

go to Step 17.
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION [FULLAUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
No Adjust the magnetic clutch clearance, then go
to Step 17.
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT [FULLAUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
YesGo to next step.
Are A/C relay power supply fuses

normal?
No Replace fuse, then go to Step 17. If fuse

blows immediately, go to next step.
15 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE YesGo to next step.

BLOCK AND A/C RELAY FOR LACK OF
CONTINUITY
No Repair wiring harness between fuse block and
A/C relay, then go to Step 17.
position.
Test voltages at the following
terminals of A/C relay.
Terminal E (A/C
relay control
signal)
Terminal D (A/C
control signal)
Are voltages approx. 12 V?
IS IN A/C RELAY OR WIRING HARNESS
(BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND MAGNETIC
YesInspect wiring harness between A/C relay and

magnetic clutch.
CLUTCH)
terminal of A/C relay:
Terminal C
(magnetic clutch
operation signal)
17 CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS
DO NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
Does cool air blow out? (Are the
results of refrigerant system
performance test normal?)
If above wiring harness is

normal, go to next step.
If above wiring harness
malfunctions, repair wiring
step.
No Replace A/C relay, then go to the next step.
YesTroubleshooting completed. Explain repairs to
customer.
No Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat
from Step 1 if malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.7 NO COOL AIR [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
No cool air
DESCRIPTION

Malfunction in PCM A/C cut control system (Step 3)
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between evaporator temperature
sensor and A/C amplifier (Step 5)
Malfunction in A/C amplifier (Step 6)
Malfunction in evaporator temperature sensor (internal circuit malfunction)
(Step 6)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Malfunction in refrigerant pressure switch (Steps 7, 911)

Malfunction in PCM (A/C signal) (Step 8)
Malfunction in PCM (IG1 signal) (Steps 12, 13)
Malfunction in A/C compressor (Step 14)
Malfunction in A/C relay (Steps 1618)
are the cause of any intermittent malfunctions. If there is a problem, inspect to make sure
STEP
INSPECTION
1 AIR FLOW INSPECTION

Does air blow form vents?
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting indexes No.1
and 2.
2 INSPECT A/C COMPRESSOR OPERATION
Start engine.
Turn A/C switch and fan switch
on.
YesGo to Step 1 of troubleshooting index No.6.

No Go to next step.
Does A/C compressor operate?

3 INSPECT FOR DTC IN PCM
Inspect for DTCs related to the
PCM on-board diagnostic system.
YesGo to appropriate inspection procedure.

No Go to next step.
Are any DTCs displayed?

4 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesGo to the next step.
IS IN A/C REQUEST SIGNAL OR ELSEWHERE
terminal 1M of A/C amplifier
connector (24-pin, A/C signal) is
grounded by a jumper wire?
5* INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR RELATED HARNESS
inspect following evaporator
temperature sensor wiring harness
(open or short circuit) and
connectors (corrosion, pulled out
pins).
No Remove the jumper wire, then go to Step 7.
YesRepair or replace malfunctioning part

according to inspection result, then go to Step
19.
A/C amplifier
terminal 2N and
evaporator
temperature
sensor terminal A
A/C amplifier
terminal 2F and
evaporator
temperature
sensor terminal B
6 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesReplace A/C amplifier, then go to Step 19.
IS IN EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
OR A/C AMPLIFIER
Inspect evaporator temperature

sensor.
(See EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR INSPECTION [MANUAL
AIR CONDITIONER].)
Is it okay?
IS IN A/C SIGNAL CIRCUIT (BETWEEN
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH AND
PCM) OR ELSEWHERE
No Replace evaporator temperature sensor, then

go to Step 19.
(See EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CONDITIONER].)
YesGo to Step 9.
No Go to next step.

terminal of refrigerant pressure
switch:
Terminal B (A/C
signal)
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN WIRING
HARNESS (BETWEEN REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE SWITCH AND PCM) OR PCM
Test voltage at A/C signal terminal
of PCM.
YesRepair wiring harness between PCM and

refrigerant pressure switch, then go to Step
19.
No Inspect PCM, then go to Step 19. (See PCM
IS IN REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH,
REFRIGERANT AMOUNT, OR ELSEWHERE
terminals A and B of refrigerant
pressure switch connector are
shorted?
YesGo to Step 11.

No Go to next step.
10* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesGo to Step 12.

IS IN WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH AND A/C
No Repair wiring harness between refrigerant
AMPLIFIER) OR ELSEWHERE
pressure switch and A/C amplifier, then go to
Step 19.
terminal of A/C amplifier.
Terminal 1M (24pin, A/C signal)
11 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesIf there is no refrigerant, replace condenser,

IS IN REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH OR
bleed the refrigerant line for 30 min or more
REFRIGERANT AMOUNT
using a vacuum pump, and add refrigerant to
specified level, then go to Step 19.
Inspect refrigerant pressure
switch.
No Replace refrigerant pressure switch, then go to
Is it normal?
Step 19. (See REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL
AIR CONDITIONER].)
12 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesRemove the jumper wire, then go to next step.
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN A/C CONTROL
SIGNAL CIRCUIT (BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND
No Go to Step 14.
PCM) OR ELSEWHERE
terminal A of A/C relay connector
(A/C control signal) is grounded by
a jumper wire?
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN PCM OR
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN A/C RELAY
AND PCM)
Test voltage at the A/C relay
control signal terminal of PCM.
YesInspect PCM, then go to Step 19.

No Repair wiring harness between A/C relay and
PCM, then go to Step 19.
IS IN MAGNETIC CLUTCH OR ELSEWHERE
terminal of magnetic clutch
thermal protector:

No Go to Step 17.
Terminal B
(magnetic clutch
operation signal)
15 INSPECT MAGNETIC CLUTCH CLEARANCE
Inspect the magnetic clutch
clearance.
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH
ADJUSTMENT [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
YesInspect and repair the magnetic clutch, then

go to Step 19.
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION
No Adjust the magnetic clutch clearance, then go
Is the magnetic clutch clearance

normal?
16 INSPECT FUSE
to Step 19.
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT
YesGo to next step.
Are A/C relay power supply fuses

normal?
No Replace fuse, then go to Step 19. If fuse

blows immediately, go to next step.
17 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE YesGo to next step.

BLOCK AND A/C RELAY FOR LACK OF
CONTINUITY
A/C relay, then go to Step 19.
position.
Test voltages at the following
terminals of A/C relay.
Terminal E (A/C
relay control
signal)
Terminal D (A/C
control signal)
IS IN A/C RELAY OR WIRING HARNESS
(BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND MAGNETIC
CLUTCH)
terminal of A/C relay:
Terminal C
(magnetic clutch
operation signal)
19 CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS
DO NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
Does cool air blow out? (Are the
results of refrigerant system
performance test normal?)
YesInspect wiring harness between A/C relay and

magnetic clutch.
If above wiring harness is
normal, go to next step.
If above wiring harness
malfunctions, repair wiring
step.
No Replace A/C relay, then go to the next step.
customer.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

HVAC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

FOREWORD [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
The areas for inspection (steps) are given according to various circuit malfunctions. Use
the following chart to verify the symptoms of the trouble in order to diagnose the
appropriate area.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
No. TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
DESCRIPTION
1 Insufficient air (or no air)

blown from vents.
Problem with each vent or duct or both.
2 Amount of air blown from

vents does not change.
Malfunction in blower system.
3 Air intake mode does not

change.
Air intake mode does not change when switching

REC/FRESH mode.
4 No temperature control with

A/C amplifier.
Temperature does not change when operating

temperature control dial.
5 Windshield fogged.
A/C compressor does not operate while airflow mode is

in DEFROSTER or HEAT/DEF modes.
Airflow mode does not change.
Air intake mode does not change to FRESH while airflow

mode is in DEFROSTER or HEAT/DEF modes.
6 Air from vents not cold
enough.
Magnetic clutch operates but A/C system malfunctions.
7 No cool air.
8 Noise while operating A/C

system.
Noise from magnetic clutch, A/C compressor, hose or

refrigerant line.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.1 INSUFFICIENT AIR (OR NO AIR) BLOWN FROM VENTS [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
Insufficient air (or no air) blown from vents.

DESCRIPTION

Malfunction in airflow mode actuator (Step 1)
Malfunction in VENT mode system (Steps 25)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Malfunction in HEAT mode system (Step 6)

Malfunction in DEFROSTER mode system (Steps 79)
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1 INSPECT AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR YesGo to next step

Inspect airflow mode
actuator. (See AIRFLOW
MODE ACTUATOR
INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER].)
No Repair or replace malfunctioning part in accordance

with further inspection result. (See AIRFLOW MODE
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
2 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER
YesGo to Step 5.
MALFUNCTION IS IN VENT MODE OR
OTHER MODES
No Go to next step.
Does air blow out when
in VENT mode?
3 INSPECT VENT
YesRemove obstruction, then go to Step 9.
Is vent clogged?
No Go to next step.
4 VERIFY THAT DUCT IN DASHBOARD YesInspect duct for clogging, deformity and air leakage,
IS INSTALLED
then go to Step 9.
Is duct in dashboard
properly installed?
No Install duct securely in the proper position, then go to

Step 9.

YesGo to next step.
MALFUNCTION IS IN HEAT MODE OR
DEFROSTER MODE
No Inspect vent for clogging, then go to Step 9.
in HEAT mode?
6 INSPECT DEFROSTER MODE
in DEFROSTER mode?
7 INSPECT VENT
YesOperation is normal. Recheck malfunction symptoms.

No Go to next step.
Is vent clogged?
8 VERIFY THAT DEFROSTER DUCT IS

INSTALLED
Is defroster duct properly
installed?
9 CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION

SYMPTOMS DO NOT RECUR AFTER
REPAIR
Does air blow out?
No Go to next step.
YesInspect duct for clogging, deformity, and air leakage,
then go to next step.
No Install duct securely in proper position, then go to next
step.
Explain repairs to customer.
No Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step
1 if malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.2 AMOUNT OF AIR BLOWN FROM VENTS DOES NOT CHANGE [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER]
Amount of air blown from vents does not change.
DESCRIPTION

Blower motor malfunction (Steps 3, 4, 12)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Blower unit malfunction (Steps 59)

Power transistor system malfunction (Steps 10, 11, 13, 14)
Climate control unit malfunction (Step 15)
are the cause of any intermittent malfunctions. If there is a problem, check to make sure
STEP
INSPECTION
1 INSPECT A/C 7.5 A FUSE

Inspect A/C 7.5 A fuse.
Is it normal?
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No Replace fuse, then go to Step 15.
If fuse burns out immediately, go
to next step.
2 CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN BLOWER YesGo to Step 4.

UNIT OR ELSEWHERE
Recirculate air inside vehicle.
No Go to next step.
Does fan in blower unit rotate smoothly?

3 INSPECT BLOWER UNIT INTAKE VENT
Is intake vent of blower unit clogged?
YesRemove obstruction, then go to

Step 15.
No Inspect if there are any
obstruction in passage between
blower unit to A/C unit, then go
to Step 15.
4* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN BLOWER YesGo to Step 8.

RELAY SYSTEM OR POWER TRANSISTOR SYSTEM
No Go to next step.
Test voltage at the following terminal of blower

motor.
Terminal B (blower motor
operation signal)
5* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING YesGo to next step.
HARNESS (LACK OF CONTINUITY BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK
AND BLOWER RELAY) OR ELSEWHERE
No Repair wiring harness between
blower relay and HEATER 40 A
fuse, then go to Step 15.
relay.
Terminal A (IG2 signal)
Terminal D (B+ signal)
HARNESS (LACK OF CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER
RELAY AND GROUND) OR ELSEWHERE
blower relay and ground, then go
to Step 15.
relay.
Terminal E (GND signal)
7* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING YesRepair wiring harness between
blower relay and blower motor,
RELAY AND BLOWER MOTOR) OR BLOWER RELAY
then go to Step 15.
relay.
Terminal C (blower motor
operation signal)
No Replace blower relay, then go to

Step 15.
8* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN BLOWER YesGo to next step.
MOTOR OR ELSEWHERE
motor.
Terminal A (blower motor
operation signal)
No Inspect blower motor, then go to

Step 15. (See BLOWER MOTOR
CONDITIONER].)
MOTOR AND POWER TRANSISTOR) OR ELSEWHERE
blower motor and power
Test voltage at the following terminal of power
transistor, then go to Step 15.
transistor.
operation signal)
HARNESS (LACK OF CONTINUITY BETWEEN POWER
TRANSISTOR AND GROUND) OR ELSEWHERE
power transistor and ground,
then go to Step 15.
transistor.
Terminal A (blower motor
operation signal)
11 INSPECT BLOWER UNIT
Inspect fan in blower unit.
Is fan free of interference with
blower unit case?
Is fan free of foreign material
and obstruction?
YesGo to next step.

No Remove obstruction, repair or
replace fan and blower unit case,
then go to Step 15.
12* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN POWER

TRANSISTOR OR ELSEWHERE
Disconnect power transistor connector.
transistor.
YesReplace power transistor, then go

to Step 15.
No Go to next step.

control signal)
HARNESS (LACK OF CONTINUITY BETWEEN POWER
TRANSISTOR AND A/C AMPLIFIER) OR ELSEWHERE
Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
power transistor and A/C
amplifier, then go to Step 15.
Disconnect A/C amplifier connector.
Inspect for continuity at the following terminals
between power transistor and A/C amplifier.
Terminal D1A (24-pin,
blower motor feedback signal)
Terminal C1B (24-pin,
blower motor control signal)
14* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN A/C
YesRepair wiring harness between
AMPLIFIER OR WIRING HARNESS (SHORT TO GROUND
power transistor and ground,
BETWEEN POWER TRANSISTOR AND A/C AMPLIFIER)
OR ELSEWHERE
Inspect for continuity at the following terminal
between power transistor and ground.
No Replace A/C amplifier, then go to

next step.
Terminal A (24-pin, blower

motor control signal)ground
15 VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM OCCURS AFTER YesTroubleshooting completed.
REPAIR
Is air discharged from vent?
No Recheck malfunction symptoms,
then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.5 WINDSHIELD FOGGED [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
Windshield fogged.
A/C compressor does not operate while airflow mode is in DEFROSTER or
HEAT/DEF modes.
DESCRIPTION
Air intake mode does not change to FRESH while airflow mode is in
DEFROSTER or HEAT/DEF modes.
A/C amplifier (B+ signal) system malfunction (Steps 2, 4, 5)
Air intake actuator malfunction (Steps 3, 7)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
A/C amplifier (RECIRCULATE, FRESH signal) system malfunction (Steps 9

11)
Malfunction in blower unit air intake doors (Steps 12, 13)
and connectors while doing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the
cause of any intermittent malfunctions. If there is a problem, check to make sure
STEP
INSPECTION
1 COOL AIR BLOW OUT INSPECTION

When both A/C and fan switch in
A/C amplifier are on, does cool air
blow out from front vent?
2 INSPECT A/C AMPLIFIER POWER SUPPLY
FUSE FOR B+ SIGNAL
Is A/C amplifier power supply fuse
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting index No.7.
YesGo to next step.

No Inspect for a short to ground on blown fuse
for B+ signal normal?
circuit.
Repair or replace as
necessary. Install appropriate
amperage fuse.
3 INSPECT AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR

Inspect air intake actuator.
Is there grease on
link?
YesGo to next step.

No Apply grease or install link properly and
securely, remove obstruction, then go to Step
14.
Is link securely
and properly
positioned?
Is link free of
obstructions?
Are above items normal?
4* INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE
BLOCK AND A/C AMPLIFIER FOR
CONTINUITY
Disconnect A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin).
YesGo to next step.

A/C amplifier, then go to Step 14.

Test voltage at A/C amplifier
connector terminal 2A (B+ signal).
5* INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN A/C
AMPLIFIER AND GROUND FOR VOLTAGE
connector terminal 2L (Ground).
YesGo to next step.

No Repair wiring harness between A/C amplifier
and ground, then go to Step 14.
Is voltage approx. 0V?

6 VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
BLOWER UNIT AIR INTAKE DOOR OR
ELSEWHERE
Turn ignition switch to LOCK
position.
Connect A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin).
YesGo to next step.

No Go to Step 12.
Remove air intake actuator.

Set fan switch to 4th position.
Does air intake mode
(RECIRCULATE, FRESH) change
smoothly when air intake link is
operated by hand?
(See AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR
CONDITIONER])
YesGo to next step.

No Replace air intake actuator, go to Step 14.
CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
8 INSPECT AIR INTAKE SELECTOR SWITCH
YesGo to next step.
AND DEFROSTER SWITCH IN A/C AMPLIFIER
connector (24-pin) terminals 1I and
1J.
No Replace A/C amplifier, then go to Step 14.
Is it normal?
YesGo to next step.
AMPLIFIER AND AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR FOR
CONTINUITY
and air intake actuator, then go to Step 14.
position.
Is there continuity between the
following A/C amplifier connector
(24-pin) terminals and air intake
actuator connector terminals?
Terminal 1I
Terminal A (FRESH
signal)
Terminal 1J
Terminal C
(RECIRCULATE
signal)
YesRepair wiring harness between A/C amplifier
SHORT TO GROUND

(24-pin) terminals and ground?
No Go to next step.
Terminal 1I
(FRESH signal)
Terminal 1J
(RECIRCULATE
signal)
SHORT TO B+
Turn ignition switch to ON position
Test voltage at the following A/C

amplifier connector (24-pin)
terminal:
Terminal 1I
(FRESH signal)
Terminal 1J
(RECIRCULATE
signal)
12 INSPECT BLOWER UNIT AIR INTAKE DOOR
Is there any foreign material or
obstruction in blower unit air intake
door?
13 VERIFY THAT BLOWER UNIT AIR INTAKE
DOOR IS POSITIONED SECURELY AND
PROPERLY
Is blower unit air intake door
securely and properly positioned?
14 VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
Does malfunction disappear?

No Go to next step.
YesInspect air intake door for cracks or damage,

No Install air intake door securely in proper
position, then go to next step.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.3 AIR INTAKE MODE DOES NOT CHANGE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
Air intake mode does not change.
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Air intake mode does not change when switching REC/FRESH mode.
Malfunction in air intake actuator (Steps 16)
Malfunction in air intake door (Step 7)
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION (LACK OF YesGo to next step.

CONTINUITY) IS IN AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR, WIRING
HARNESS (BETWEEN A/C AMPLIFIER AND AIR
No Go to Step 3.
INTAKE ACTUATOR) OR ELSEWHERE
Test voltages at the following terminals of
A/C amplifier:
Terminal 1I (24-pin, FRESH
motor drive signal)
Terminal 1J (24-pin,
RECIRCULATE motor drive
signal)
(See A/C AMPLIFIER
AIR CONDITIONER].)
Are voltages normal?

2* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION (LACK OF YesReplace air intake actuator, then go
to Step 8. (See AIR INTAKE
CONTINUITY) IS IN AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR OR
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN A/C AMPLIFIER AND
ACTUATOR
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR)
Test voltages at the following terminals of air
intake actuator:
No Repair wiring harness between A/C
Terminal A (FRESH motor
amplifier and air intake actuator,
drive signal)
then go to Step 8.
Terminal C (RECIRCULATE
motor drive signal)
Are voltages as shown below?
Terminal A: approx. 0.5 V
switched to RECIRCULATE
and approx. 10 V switched
to FRESH
Terminal C: approx. 10 V
and approx. 0.5 V
switched to FRESH
3 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN AIR YesInspect air intake actuator, then go
INTAKE ACTUATOR OR ELSEWHERE
ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULLDisconnect air intake actuator connector.
AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
A/C amplifier:
No Go to next step.

motor drive signal)
signal)
(See A/C AMPLIFIER
AIR CONDITIONER])
4 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WIRING HARNESS (SHORT TO B+ BETWEEN A/C
AMPLIFIER AND AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR) OR
ELSEWHERE
YesGo to next step.

then go to Step 8.

A/C amplifier:
motor drive signal)
signal)
WIRING HARNESS (SHORT TO GROUND BETWEEN
A/C AMPLIFIER AND AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR) OR
ELSEWHERE
YesRepair wiring harness between A/C

then go to Step 8.
No Go to next step.
Inspect for continuity at the following

terminals between A/C amplifier and ground:
motor drive signal)
signal)
6 INSPECT AIR INTAKE LINK
Inspect air intake links.
Is there grease on link?
Are links securely and
properly installed?
YesGo to next step.

No Apply grease to links. If any links
are damaged, replace air intake
actuator, then go to Step 8.
Are links free of obstructions

and hindrances?
7 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN A/C YesReplace A/C amplifier, then go to
AMPLIFIER OR AIR INTAKE DOOR
next step.
Inspect blower unit air intake door.
Is door free of obstructions,
cracks, and damage?
No Remove obstruction, or install doors

in proper position. If any doors are
cracked or damaged, replace them,
Are doors securely and

properly installed?
8 CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS DO NOT
RECUR AFTER REPAIR
Does air intake mode change smoothly?
YesTroubleshooting completed. Explain

repairs to customer.
malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.6 AIR FROM VENTS NOT COLD ENOUGH [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
Air from vents not cold enough.
DESCRIPTION

NOTE:
If the engine coolant temperature increases due to a cooling system
malfunction, the fail-safe function disables the A/C operation.
Drive belt malfunction (Step 3)
Refrigerant pressure switch malfunction (Step 4)
Cooling fan system malfunction (Step 5)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Condenser or related part malfunction (Step 6, 16)

Expansion valve or related part malfunction (Step 8, 17)
A/C unit air mix door system malfunction (Step 9, 19)
Blower unit malfunction (Step 10)
Refrigerant lines malfunction (Step 1215)
Evaporative temperature sensor malfunction (Step 18)
STEP
INSPECTION
1 INSPECT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT FOR

DTC
Retrieve the climate control
unit DTC using the A/C
Operation Check Mode.
ACTION
YesGo to the applicable DTC troubleshooting procedures.
(See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE NUMBER
INSPECTION.)
Are there DTC displayed?

2 INSPECT REFRIGERANT PRESSURE TO
LOCATE MALFUNCTION
Perform refrigerant
pressure check.
(See REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE CHECK.)
Is the refrigerant pressure
normal?

No Record the inspection result.
If the refrigerant high-pressure and
low-pressure values are both high,
go to Step 6.
low-pressure values are
approximately the same, go to Step
9.
low-pressure values are both low, go
to Step 11.
If there is a vacuum on the low
pressure side and extremely low
pressure on the high pressure side,
go to Step 17.
If there is low pressure on the high
pressure side and high pressure on
the low pressure side, replace the
A/C compressor, then go to Step 21.
(See A/C COMPRESSOR
If the refrigerant pressure is other
than above condition, go to Step 19.
3 INSPECT REFRIGERANT SYSTEM

PERFORMANCE
Perform refrigerant system
performance test.
YesOperation is normal. (Recheck malfunction

symptoms.)
(See REFRIGERANT
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
TEST.)
Is the operation normal?
4 INSPECT DRIVE BELT
Inspect the drive belt.
(See DRIVE BELT
DEFLECTION/TENSION

No Adjust or replace the drive belt, then the next step.
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH YesGo to the next step.
Inspect the refrigerant
pressure switch.
(See REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE SWITCH
AIR CONDITIONER].)
No Repair or replace malfunctioning part according to

inspection result, then go to Step 21.
Is it normal?
6 INSPECT COOLING FAN OPERATION
Verify the cooling fan
operation.
(See FAN MOTOR

No Repair or replace the malfunctioning location
Then go to Step 21.
Is the cooling fan operation

normal?
7 VISUALLY INSPECT CONDENSER
Is the condenser fin
clogged or obstructed by
foreign material?
YesRemove the foreign material.

Repair the condenser fin.
Then go to Step 21.
8 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM FOR

OVERCHARGE OR AIR CONTAMINATION
Is the low side line hot to
the touch?
9 CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION

IS IN EXPANSION VALVE OR ELSEWHERE
Compare the refrigerant
pressure of the low
pressure side with the high
pressure side at Step 2.
Is there little difference
between the high pressure
YesRecover refrigerant. Evacuate system for one hour.

Refill with correct amount of refrigerant, and go to
step 21.
No Recover refrigerant, evacuate for 15 minutes, refill
with correct amount and go to step 21.
YesReplace the expansion valve.
After performing the following servicing, go to Step
21.
Adjust the compressor oil to the
specified level.
After discharging, charge with new
refrigerant to the specified level.
side and low pressure side

readings (refer to graph in
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
CHECK procedure)?
(See REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE CHECK.)
10 INSPECT AIR MIX DOOR RELATED PART
INSTALLATION
Measure the A/C amplifier
terminal 2D voltage when
the temperature control
dials are set to MAX COLD
and MAX HOT by control
panel.
YesAdjust the compressor oil to the specified amount,

then go to Step 21.
(See A/C COMPRESSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No
Inspect the air mix link, air mix

crank, and air mix rod of the A/C unit
correctly and securely installed to
their positions.
(See A/C UNIT
Repair or install correctly for suspect
part according to inspection result,
then go to Step 21.
11 INSPECT BLOWER UNIT FOR BLOCKAGE

Is the blower unit intake
and air filter clogged?
YesRemove the cause of the clogging. Replace the air

filter if it is clogged.
(See AIR FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Then go to Step 21.

IS REFRIGERANT LINE LEAKAGE OR
ELSEWHERE
Verify if there is gas
leakage from the system
hoses using the gas leak
tester.
YesIf there is leakage from a system hose connection

area, go to Step 14. If there is leakage other than
from a system hose connection area, go to Step 16.

13 VISUALLY INSPECT REFRIGERANT LINE
Is a system hose crushed?
YesReplace the crushed system hose.

(See REFRIGERANT LINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
21.

specified level.
No Go to Step 21.
14 CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesGo to the next step.
IS IN REFRIGERANT LINE JOINT LOOSE OR
O-RING
No Go to Step 16.
Tighten the system hose
connection area to the
specified torque.
(See REFRIGERANT LINE
Has the leakage stopped?

21.
specified level.
No Adjust the compressor oil to the specified amount,
then go to Step 21.

YesReplace the O-ring of the leaking area.

Replace the crushed system hose.
21.
specified level.
No Replace the O-ring of the leaking area.

21.
specified level.
IS WATER IN REFRIGERANT SYSTEM OR
ELSEWHERE
Is there is no refrigerant
pressure on the low
pressure side, or is it
normal?
YesReplace the condenser.

(Water in refrigerant system)
(See CONDENSER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Then go to Step 21.

IS IN RECEIVER/DRYER FILTER OR
EXPANSION VALVE
Remove the expansion
valve and verify its
condition.
Is there refrigerant leakage
or valve clogging?
YesIf there is foreign matter clogging the valve, remove

the foreign matter. If there is refrigerant leakage or
clogging, replace the expansion valve. Perform
discharge, charge with new refrigerant, and then go
to Step 21.
No Replace the condenser.
(Receiver/Dryer filter is clogged.)
Then go to Step 21.
19 INSPECT EVAPORATIVE TEMPERATURE

SENSOR
Inspect the evaporator
temperature sensor.
(See EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
AIR CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
INSTALLATION
YesVerify the evaporator temperature sensor position.

(See A/C UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
Then go to Step 21.
No Replace the evaporator temperature sensor, then go
to Step 21.

panel.
Are voltages are normal?

DOES NOT OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
If the refrigerant
discharged during
inspection has not been
recharged, discharge and
charge with new
refrigerant to the specified
level.
No

their positions.
(See A/C UNIT

customer.
No Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from
Step 1 if malfunction recurs.
Does cool air blow out?

(Are results of refrigerant
system performance test
normal?)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.8 NOISE WHILE OPERATING A/C SYSTEM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
Noise while operating A/C system.
DESCRIPTION
Noise from magnetic clutch, A/C compressor, hose or refrigerant line.

Magnetic clutch operation noise (Step 3)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
A/C compressor slippage noise (Steps 46)

Hose or refrigerant line interference noise (Step 7)
STEP
INSPECTION
1 INSPECT A/C COMPRESSOR

SLIPPAGE NOISE
Is there a squeaking
or whirling sound (A/C
compressor slippage
noise)?
INTERFERENCE NOISE
Is there a rattling or
vibrating sound
(interference noise)?
3 INSPECT MAGNETIC CLUTCH
OPERATION NOISE
Is larger than other
this type vehicle
clicking sound
(magnetic clutch
ACTION
YesGo to Step 4.
No Go to next step.
YesGo to Step 7.
No Go to next step.
YesAdjust clearance between pressure plate of magnetic

clutch and A/C compressor pulley, then go to Step 8.
No Condition is normal. (Recheck malfunction symptoms.)
operation noise)?
Inspect drive belt.
(See DRIVE BELT
DEFLECTION/TENSION
Is it normal?
YesGo to next step.

No Adjust the drive belt tension.
[13B-MSP].)
If the symptom does not improve after drive belt
adjustment, replace the drive belt.
5 INSPECT DRIVE BELT CONDITION YesRemove obstruction, remove oil, or replace drive belt, then
go to Step 8.
Is drive belt worn?
Does it have foreign
material imbedded in
it, or have oil on it?
Inspect magnetic
clutch.
Is it normal?
7 CHECK TO SEE WHETHER
MALFUNCTION IS IN A/C
COMPRESSOR OR REFRIGERANT
LINES
Is noise emitted from
A/C compressor?
No Go to next step.
YesReplace A/C compressor (excluding pressure plate, A/C

compressor pulley, and stator), then go to Step 8. (See
A/C COMPRESSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Replace magnetic clutch, then go to Step 8.
YesVisually inspect A/C compressor, replace appropriate parts
if necessary, then go to next step.
No If noise is due to refrigerant lines, repair detached or
missing clips, tighten loose bolts, then go to next step.
8 VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION

SYMPTOM OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
Has A/C compressor
noise stopped?
No Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.4 NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH A/C AMPLIFIER [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
No temperature control with A/C amplifier.
DESCRIPTION
Temperature does not change with operating temperature control dial.

Air mix actuator (+5 V signal) system malfunction (Steps 37, 10)
A/C amplifier (potentiometer GND signal) system malfunction (Steps 8, 9)
Air mix actuator (potentiometer input signal) system malfunction (Steps 11
13)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Air mix actuator (potentiometer GND signal, motor drive signal) system
malfunction (Step 14)
Air mix actuator system malfunction (Steps 15, 16)
A/C unit air mix door malfunction (Steps 17, 18)
STEP
INSPECTION
1 INSPECT COOLANT TEMPERATURE

Is coolant sufficiently warmed up?
2 CHECK CIRCUITS COMMON TO BOTH AIR MIX

ACTUATOR AND AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No Warm engine up, then go to Step 19.
YesGo to Step 10.
Does airflow mode change when

operating airflow mode selector switch?
No Go to next step.
3 CHECK TO SEE WHETHER PROBLEM IS IN AIR MIX YesGo to next step.

ACTUATOR +5 V SIGNAL OR POTENTIOMETER GND
SIGNAL
No Go to Step 8. (Set actuator at MAX
COLD and DEFROSTER.)
Is air mix actuator set at MAX HOT and
airflow mode actuator at VENT?
(Verify position of air mix actuator link
and airflow mode actuator link.)
4* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION (LACK OF YesGo to Step 10.
CONTINUITY) IS IN WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN
A/C AMPLIFIER AND AIR MIX ACTUATOR) OR
No Go to next step.
ELSEWHERE
Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
Is there voltage of approx. 5 V at A/C
amplifier connector (16-pin) terminal 2P
(+5 V signal)?
5* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN AIR YesInspect air mix actuator, then go to
Step 19. (See AIR MIX ACTUATOR
MIX ACTUATOR (SHORT TO GROUND) OR
ELSEWHERE
CONDITIONER].)
Disconnect air mix actuator connector.
(+5 V signal)?
6* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR (SHORT TO GROUND)
OR ELSEWHERE
Disconnect airflow actuator connector.
(+5 V signal)?
No Go to next step.
YesInspect airflow mode actuator, then go

to Step 19. (See AIRFLOW MODE
ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER].)
No Go to next step.
7* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION (SHORT YesRepair wiring harness between A/C
TO GROUND) IS IN A/C AMPLIFIER OR WIRING
amplifier and air mix actuator, then go
HARNESS (BETWEEN A/C AMPLIFIER AND AIR MIX
to Step 19.
ACTUATOR)
Disconnect A/C amplifier connector (16pin).
No Replace A/C amplifier, then go to Step

19.
Is there continuity between A/C amplifier

connector (16-pin) terminal 2P (+5 V
signal) and body ground?
8* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION (LACK OF YesGo to next step.
CONTINUITY) IS IN A/C AMPLIFIER OR WIRING
ACTUATOR)
to Step 19.
Disconnect A/C amplifier connector (16pin) and air mix actuator connector.
connector (16-pin) terminal 2N
(potentiometer GND signal) and air mix
9* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION (SHORT YesRepair wiring harness between A/C
TO B+) IS IN A/C AMPLIFIER OR WIRING
to Step 19.
ACTUATOR)
Test voltage at A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin) and terminal 2N (potentiometer
GND signal).

19.
ELSEWHERE
to Step 19.
Test voltage at air mix actuator connector
terminal C (+5 V signal).
ELSEWHERE
to Step 19.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
connector (16-pin) terminal 2D
(potentiometer input signal) and air mix

actuator connector terminal E?
12* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION (SHORT
TO GROUND) IS IN WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN
ELSEWHERE
(potentiometer input signal) and ground?
TO B+) IS IN WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN A/C
AMPLIFIER AND AIR MIX ACTUATOR) OR
ELSEWHERE

to Step 19.
No Go to next step.

to Step 19.
No Go to next step.

(16-pin) terminal 2D (potentiometer input
signal).
ELSEWHERE
to Step 19.
Is there continuity between following A/C
amplifier connector (16-PIN, 24-pin)
terminals and air mix actuator connector
terminals?
Terminal 1V and terminal
G (motor drive signal)
Terminal 1U and terminal
F (motor drive signal)
15 INSPECT A/C UNIT AIR MIX ACTUATOR LINK AND YesGo to next step.
CRANK
Is there grease on the link and crank?
16 INSPECT AIR MIX ACTUATOR
Inspect air mix actuator.
Is it normal?
No Apply grease, then go to Step 19.

YesGo to next step.
No Replace air mix actuator, then go to
AIR CONDITIONER].)
17 VERIFY THAT A/C UNIT AIR MIX DOORS DO NOT YesRemove material/obstruction, then go
HAVE ANY FOREIGN MATERIAL OR OBSTRUCTION
to Step 19.
obstructions on any A/C unit door?
18 INSPECT A/C UNIT AIR MIX DOORS
Are all doors within A/C unit securely and
properly positioned?
Inspect A/C unit doors.
Are doors cranked or
damaged?
No Go to next step.
YesReplace A/C amplifier, then go to next
step.
(Malfunction in A/C amplifier
temperature control lever circuit)
No Replace or install door(s) in proper

properly installed?
Are they normal?
19 CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS DO NOT YesTroubleshooting completed.
RECUR AFTER REPAIR
Does temperature change when operating
temperature control dial?
No Recheck malfunction symptoms, then
repeat from Step 1 if malfunction
recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

HVAC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

FOREWORD [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
The areas for inspection (steps) are given according to various circuit malfunctions. Use
the following chart to verify the symptoms of the trouble in order to diagnose the
appropriate area.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
DESCRIPTION
1 Insufficient air (or no air)

blown from vents.
2 Amount of air blown from

vents does not change.
3 Air intake mode does not

change.
Air intake mode does not change when switching

REC/FRESH mode.
4 No temperature control with

A/C amplifier.
Temperature does not change when operating

temperature control dial.
5 Windshield fogged.
A/C compressor does not operate while airflow mode is

in DEFROSTER or HEAT/DEF modes.
Air intake mode does not change to FRESH while airflow

mode is in DEFROSTER or HEAT/DEF modes.
6 Air from vents not cold
enough.
7 No cool air.
8 Noise while operating A/C

system.
Noise from magnetic clutch, A/C compressor, hose or

refrigerant line.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.1 INSUFFICIENT AIR (OR NO AIR) BLOWN FROM VENTS [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER]
Insufficient air (or no air) blown from vents.

DESCRIPTION

Malfunction in airflow mode actuator (Step 1)
Malfunction in VENT mode system (Steps 25)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Malfunction in HEAT mode system (Step 6)

Malfunction in DEFROSTER mode system (Steps 79)
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1 INSPECT AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR YesGo to next step

Inspect airflow mode
actuator. (See AIRFLOW
MODE ACTUATOR
INSPECTION [MANUAL
AIR CONDITIONER].)
No Repair or replace malfunctioning part in accordance

with further inspection result. (See AIRFLOW MODE
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
YesGo to Step 5.
MALFUNCTION IS IN VENT MODE OR
OTHER MODES
No Go to next step.
in VENT mode?
3 INSPECT VENT
Is vent clogged?
No Go to next step.
4 VERIFY THAT DUCT IN DASHBOARD YesInspect duct for clogging, deformity and air leakage,
IS INSTALLED
then go to Step 9.
Is duct in dashboard
properly installed?
No Install duct securely in the proper position, then go to

Step 9.

YesGo to next step.
MALFUNCTION IS IN HEAT MODE OR
DEFROSTER MODE
No Inspect vent for clogging, then go to Step 9.
in HEAT mode?
6 INSPECT DEFROSTER MODE
in DEFROSTER mode?
7 INSPECT VENT
YesOperation is normal. Recheck malfunction symptoms.

No Go to next step.
Is vent clogged?
8 VERIFY THAT DEFROSTER DUCT IS

INSTALLED
Is defroster duct properly
installed?
9 CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION

SYMPTOMS DO NOT RECUR AFTER
REPAIR
Does air blow out?
No Go to next step.
YesInspect duct for clogging, deformity, and air leakage,
No Install duct securely in proper position, then go to next
step.
No Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step
1 if malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.2 AMOUNT OF AIR BLOWN FROM VENTS DOES NOT CHANGE [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER]
Amount of air blown from vents does not change.
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE CAUSE

Blower relay, blower motor, resistor, fan switch malfunction (Step 1)
Blower unit malfunction (Steps 24)
STEP
INSPECTION
1 INSPECT BLOWER SYSTEM

Inspect the following systems
and electrical parts:
Blower relay
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No Repair or replace malfunctioning part, then go to
Step 5.
Blower
motor
Resistor
Fan switch
Related
wiring
harnesses
Are they normal?
2 CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesGo to Step 4.
IS IN BLOWER UNIT OR ELSEWHERE
Turn ignition switch to ON

position.
No Go to next step.
Turn fan switch on.

Recirculate air inside vehicle.
Does fan in blower unit rotate
smoothly?
3 INSPECT BLOWER UNIT
Inspect fan in blower unit.
Is fan free of
interference
from blower
unit case?
YesGo to next step.

No Remove obstruction, repair or replace fan and
blower unit case, then go to Step 5.
Is fan free of
foreign
material and
obstructions?
Is fan normal?
4 INSPECT BLOWER UNIT INTAKE VENT
Is blower unit intake vent
clogged?
YesRemove obstruction, then go to next step.

No Inspect if there are any obstructions in passage
between blower unit and A/C unit, then go to next
step.
5 VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM YesTroubleshooting completed.

OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
Does air blow out?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.5 WINDSHIELD FOGGED [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
Windshield fogged.
A/C compressor does not operate while airflow mode is in DEFROSTER or
HEAT/DEF modes.
DESCRIPTION
Air intake mode does not change to FRESH while airflow mode is in
DEFROSTER or HEAT/DEF modes.
A/C amplifier (B+ signal) system malfunction (Steps 2, 4, 5)
Air intake actuator malfunction (Steps 3, 7)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
A/C amplifier (RECIRCULATE, FRESH signal) system malfunction (Steps 9

11)
Malfunction in blower unit air intake doors (Steps 12, 13)
and connectors while doing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the
cause of any intermittent malfunctions. If there is a problem, check to make sure
STEP
INSPECTION
1 COOL AIR BLOW OUT INSPECTION

When both A/C and fan switch in
A/C amplifier are on, does cool air
blow out from front vent?
2 INSPECT A/C AMPLIFIER POWER SUPPLY
FUSE FOR B+ SIGNAL
Is A/C amplifier power supply fuse
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting index No.7.
YesGo to next step.

No Inspect for a short to ground on blown fuse
for B+ signal normal?
circuit.
Repair or replace as
necessary. Install
appropriate amperage fuse.

Is there grease on
link?
YesGo to next step.

No Apply grease or install link properly and
securely, remove obstruction, then go to
Step 14.
Is link securely and

properly
positioned?
Is link free of
obstructions?
4* INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE YesGo to next step.
BLOCK AND A/C AMPLIFIER FOR CONTINUITY
Disconnect A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin).
No Repair wiring harness between fuse block

and A/C amplifier, then go to Step 14.

connector terminal 2A (B+ signal).
AMPLIFIER AND GROUND FOR VOLTAGE
connector terminal 2L (Ground).
YesGo to next step.

and ground, then go to Step 14.
Is voltage approx. 0V?

6 VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
BLOWER UNIT AIR INTAKE DOOR OR
ELSEWHERE
position.
Connect A/C amplifier connector
(16-pin).
Remove air intake actuator.
YesGo to next step.

No Go to Step 12.

Set fan switch to 4th position.
Does air intake mode
(RECIRCULATE, FRESH) change
smoothly when air intake link is
operated by hand?
INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
YesGo to next step.

No Replace air intake actuator, go to Step 14.
CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
8 INSPECT AIR INTAKE SELECTOR SWITCH AND YesGo to next step.
DEFROSTER SWITCH IN A/C AMPLIFIER
connector (24-pin) terminals 1I and
1J.
Is it normal?
YesGo to next step.
CONTINUITY
position.
(24-pin) terminals and air intake
actuator connector terminals?
Terminal 1I
Terminal A (FRESH
signal)
Terminal 1J
Terminal C
(RECIRCULATE
signal)
SHORT TO GROUND

(24-pin) terminals and ground?
No Go to next step.
Terminal 1I
(FRESH signal)
Terminal 1J
(RECIRCULATE
signal)
SHORT TO B+
Turn ignition switch to ON position
Test voltage at the following A/C

amplifier connector (24-pin)
terminal:
Terminal 1I
(FRESH signal)
Terminal 1J
(RECIRCULATE
signal)
12 INSPECT BLOWER UNIT AIR INTAKE DOOR
obstruction in blower unit air intake
door?
13 VERIFY THAT BLOWER UNIT AIR INTAKE
DOOR IS POSITIONED SECURELY AND
PROPERLY
Is blower unit air intake door
securely and properly positioned?
OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
Does malfunction disappear?

No Go to next step.
YesInspect air intake door for cracks or damage,

No Install air intake door securely in proper
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.3 AIR INTAKE MODE DOES NOT CHANGE [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
Air intake mode does not change.
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Air intake mode does not change when switching REC/FRESH mode.
Malfunction in air intake actuator (Steps 16)
Malfunction in air intake door (Step 7)
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION (LACK OF YesGo to next step.

CONTINUITY) IS IN AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR, WIRING
HARNESS (BETWEEN A/C AMPLIFIER AND AIR INTAKE
No Go to Step 3.
ACTUATOR) OR ELSEWHERE
A/C amplifier:
motor drive signal)
signal)
(See A/C AMPLIFIER
CONDITIONER].)

2* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION (LACK OF
CONTINUITY) IS IN AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR OR
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN A/C AMPLIFIER AND
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR)
Test voltages at the following terminals of air
intake actuator:
Terminal A (FRESH motor
drive signal)
YesReplace air intake actuator, then go

ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL
AIR CONDITIONER].)
then go to Step 8.
Terminal C (RECIRCULATE
motor drive signal)
Are voltages as shown below?
Terminal A: approx. 0.5 V
and approx. 10 V switched
to FRESH
Terminal C: approx. 10 V
and approx. 0.5 V
switched to FRESH
3 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN AIR YesInspect air intake actuator, then go
INTAKE ACTUATOR OR ELSEWHERE
ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL
Disconnect air intake actuator connector.
AIR CONDITIONER].)
A/C amplifier:
No Go to next step.

motor drive signal)
signal)
(See A/C AMPLIFIER
CONDITIONER].)
WIRING HARNESS (SHORT TO B+ BETWEEN A/C
ELSEWHERE
YesGo to next step.

then go to Step 8.

A/C amplifier:
motor drive signal)
signal)
WIRING HARNESS (SHORT TO GROUND BETWEEN A/C
then go to Step 8.
ELSEWHERE
No Go to next step.
Inspect for continuity at the following

terminals between A/C amplifier and ground:
motor drive signal)
signal)
6 INSPECT AIR INTAKE LINK
Inspect air intake links.
Is there grease on link?
Are links securely and
properly installed?
YesGo to next step.

No Apply grease to links. If any links
are damaged, replace air intake
actuator, then go to Step 8.
Are links free of obstructions

and hindrances?
7 INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN A/C YesReplace A/C amplifier, then go to
AMPLIFIER OR AIR INTAKE DOOR
next step.
Inspect blower unit air intake door.
Is door free of obstructions,
cracks, and damage?
No Remove obstruction, or install doors

in proper position. If any doors are
cracked or damaged, replace them,

properly installed?
8 CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS DO NOT
RECUR AFTER REPAIR
Does air intake mode change smoothly?
YesTroubleshooting completed. Explain

repairs to customer.
malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.6 AIR FROM VENTS NOT COLD ENOUGH [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
Air from vents not cold enough.
DESCRIPTION

NOTE:
If the engine coolant temperature increases due to a cooling system
malfunction, the fail-safe function disables the A/C operation.
Drive belt malfunction (Step 3)
Refrigerant pressure switch malfunction (Step 4)
Cooling fan system malfunction (Step 5)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Condenser or related part malfunction (Step 6, 16)

Expansion valve or related part malfunction (Step 8, 17)
A/C unit air mix door system malfunction (Step 9, 19)
Blower unit malfunction (Step 10)
Refrigerant lines malfunction (Step 1215)
Evaporative temperature sensor malfunction (Step 18)
STEP
INSPECTION
1 INSPECT REFRIGERANT PRESSURE TO

LOCATE MALFUNCTION
Perform refrigerant
pressure check.
(See REFRIGERANT
ACTION
No Record the inspection result.
low-pressure values are both high,
PRESSURE CHECK.)
go to Step 5.
Is the refrigerant pressure

normal?

low-pressure values are
approximately the same, go to Step
8.
low-pressure values are both low, go
to Step 10.
If there is a vacuum on the low
pressure side and extremely low
pressure on the high pressure side,
go to Step 16.
If there is low pressure on the high
pressure side and high pressure on
the low pressure side, replace the
A/C compressor, then go to Step 20.
(See A/C COMPRESSOR
If the refrigerant pressure is other
than above condition, go to Step 18.
2 INSPECT REFRIGERANT SYSTEM

PERFORMANCE
Perform refrigerant system
performance test.
YesOperation is normal. (Recheck malfunction

symptoms.)
(See REFRIGERANT
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
TEST.)
Is the operation normal?
Inspect the drive belt.
(See DRIVE BELT
DEFLECTION/TENSION

No Adjust or replace the drive belt, then the next step.
Is it normal?
4 INSPECT REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH YesGo to the next step.
Inspect the refrigerant
pressure switch.
(See REFRIGERANT
No Repair or replace malfunctioning part according to

inspection result, then go to Step 20.
PRESSURE SWITCH
CONDITIONER].)
(See REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH

CONDITIONER].)
Is it normal?
5 INSPECT COOLING FAN OPERATION
Verify the cooling fan
operation.
(See FAN MOTOR

No Repair or replace the malfunctioning location
Then go to Step 20.
Is the cooling fan operation

normal?
6 VISUALLY INSPECT CONDENSER
Is the condenser fin
clogged or obstructed by
foreign material?
YesRemove the foreign material.

Repair the condenser fin.
Then go to Step 20.
7 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM FOR

OVERCHARGE OR AIR CONTAMINATION
Is the low side line hot to
the touch?

IS IN EXPANSION VALVE OR ELSEWHERE
Compare the refrigerant
pressure of the low
pressure side with the high
pressure side at Step 1.
Is there little difference
between the high pressure
side and low pressure side
readings (refer to graph in
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
CHECK procedure)?
YesRecover refrigerant. Evacuate system for one

hour.Refill with correct amount of refrigerant, and go
to step 20.
No Recover refrigerant, evacuate for 15 minutes, refill
with correct amount and go to step 20.
YesReplace the expansion valve.
20.
specified level.
(See REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE CHECK.)
YesAdjust the compressor oil to the specified amount,
INSTALLATION
panel.
then go to Step 20.

No Inspect the air mix link, air mix crank, and air mix rod
of the A/C unit correctly and securely installed to their
positions.
(See A/C UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
then go to Step 20.
10 INSPECT BLOWER UNIT FOR BLOCKAGE

Is the blower unit intake
and air filter clogged?
YesRemove the cause of the clogging. Replace the air

filter if it is clogged.
Then go to Step 20.

IS REFRIGERANT LINE LEAKAGE OR
ELSEWHERE
Verify if there is gas
leakage from the system
hoses using the gas leak
tester.
YesIf there is leakage from a system hose connection

area, go to Step 13. If there is leakage other than
from a system hose connection area, go to Step 15.


20.
specified level.
No Go to Step 19.
13 CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION YesGo to the next step.

IS IN REFRIGERANT LINE JOINT LOOSE OR
O-RING
Tighten the system hose
connection area to the
specified torque.
No Go to Step 15.
(See REFRIGERANT LINE

Has the leakage stopped?

20.
specified level.
No Adjust the compressor oil to the specified amount,
then go to Step 20.

YesReplace the O-ring of the leaking area.

Replace the crushed system hose.
20.
specified level.
No Replace the O-ring of the leaking area.
20.
specified level.

IS WATER IN REFRIGERANT SYSTEM OR
ELSEWHERE
YesReplace the condenser.

(Water in refrigerant system)
Is there is no refrigerant
pressure on the low
pressure side, or is it
normal?
Then go to Step 20.


IS IN RECEIVER/DRYER FILTER OR
EXPANSION VALVE
Remove the expansion
valve and verify its
condition.
Is there refrigerant leakage
or valve clogging?
YesIf there is foreign matter clogging the valve, remove

the foreign matter. If there is refrigerant leakage or
clogging, replace the expansion valve. Perform
discharge, charge with new refrigerant, and then go
to Step 20.
No Replace the condenser.
(Receiver/Dryer filter is clogged.)
Then go to Step 20.
18 INSPECT EVAPORATIVE TEMPERATURE

SENSOR
YesVerify the evaporator temperature sensor position.

Inspect the evaporator

temperature sensor.
(See EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CONDITIONER].)
Then go to Step 20.

No Replace the evaporator temperature sensor, then go
to Step 20.
Is it normal?
INSTALLATION
panel.

No

their positions.
(See A/C UNIT
part according to inspection result.

DOES NOT OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
If the refrigerant
discharged during
inspection has not been
recharged, discharge and
charge with new
refrigerant to the specified
level.

customer.
Does cool air blow out?

(Are results of refrigerant
system performance test
normal?)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.8 NOISE WHILE OPERATING A/C SYSTEM [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
Noise while operating A/C system.
DESCRIPTION
Noise from magnetic clutch, A/C compressor, hose or refrigerant line.

Magnetic clutch operation noise (Step 3)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
A/C compressor slippage noise (Steps 46)

Hose or refrigerant line interference noise (Step 7)
STEP
INSPECTION

SLIPPAGE NOISE
Is there a squeaking
or whirling sound (A/C
compressor slippage
noise)?
INTERFERENCE NOISE
Is there a rattling or
vibrating sound
(interference noise)?
OPERATION NOISE
Is larger than other
this type vehicle
clicking sound
(magnetic clutch
ACTION
YesGo to Step 4.
No Go to next step.
YesGo to Step 7.
No Go to next step.
YesAdjust clearance between pressure plate of magnetic

clutch and A/C compressor pulley, then go to Step 8.
No Condition is normal. (Recheck malfunction symptoms.)
operation noise)?
Inspect drive belt.
(See DRIVE BELT
DEFLECTION/TENSION
Is it normal?
YesGo to next step.

No Adjust the drive belt tension.
[13B-MSP].)
If the symptom does not improve after drive belt
adjustment, replace the drive belt.
5 INSPECT DRIVE BELT CONDITION YesRemove obstruction, remove oil, or replace drive belt, then
go to Step 8.
Is drive belt worn?
Does it have foreign
material imbedded in
it, or have oil on it?
Inspect magnetic
clutch.
Is it normal?
7 CHECK TO SEE WHETHER
MALFUNCTION IS IN A/C
COMPRESSOR OR REFRIGERANT
LINES
Is noise emitted from
A/C compressor?
No Go to next step.
YesReplace A/C compressor (excluding pressure plate, A/C

compressor pulley, and stator), then go to Step 8. (See
A/C COMPRESSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Replace magnetic clutch, then go to Step 8.
YesVisually inspect A/C compressor, replace appropriate parts
if necessary, then go to next step.
No If noise is due to refrigerant lines, repair detached or
missing clips, tighten loose bolts, then go to next step.
8 VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION

SYMPTOM OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
Has A/C compressor
noise stopped?
No Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

NO.4 NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH A/C AMPLIFIER [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER]
No temperature control with A/C amplifier.
DESCRIPTION
Temperature does not change with operating temperature control dial.

Air mix actuator (+5 V signal) system malfunction (Steps 37, 10)
A/C amplifier (potentiometer GND signal) system malfunction (Steps 8, 9)
Air mix actuator (potentiometer input signal) system malfunction (Steps 11
13)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Air mix actuator (potentiometer GND signal, motor drive signal) system
malfunction (Step 14)
Air mix actuator system malfunction (Steps 15, 16)
A/C unit air mix door malfunction (Steps 17, 18)
STEP
INSPECTION
1 INSPECT COOLANT TEMPERATURE

Is coolant sufficiently warmed up?
2 CHECK CIRCUITS COMMON TO BOTH AIR MIX

ACTUATOR AND AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No Warm engine up, then go to Step 19.
YesGo to Step 10.
Does airflow mode change when operating

airflow mode selector switch?
No Go to next step.
3 CHECK TO SEE WHETHER PROBLEM IS IN AIR MIX YesGo to next step.

ACTUATOR +5 V SIGNAL OR POTENTIOMETER GND
SIGNAL
No Go to Step 8. (Set actuator at MAX
COLD and DEFROSTER.)
Is air mix actuator set at MAX HOT and
airflow mode actuator at VENT?
(Verify position of air mix actuator link and
airflow mode actuator link.)
4* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION (LACK OF YesGo to Step 10.
No Go to next step.
ELSEWHERE
(+5 V signal)?
5* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN AIR YesInspect air mix actuator, then go to
MIX ACTUATOR (SHORT TO GROUND) OR
ELSEWHERE
CONDITIONER].)
Disconnect air mix actuator connector.
(+5 V signal)?
6* CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR (SHORT TO GROUND)
OR ELSEWHERE
Disconnect airflow actuator connector.
(+5 V signal)?
No Go to next step.
YesInspect airflow mode actuator, then go

to Step 19. (See AIRFLOW MODE
ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
No Go to next step.

TO GROUND) IS IN A/C AMPLIFIER OR WIRING
to Step 19.
ACTUATOR)
Disconnect A/C amplifier connector (16pin).

19.

connector (16-pin) terminal 2P (+5 V
signal) and ground?
CONTINUITY) IS IN A/C AMPLIFIER OR WIRING
ACTUATOR)
to Step 19.
connector (16-pin) terminal 2N
(potentiometer GND signal) and air mix
TO B+) IS IN A/C AMPLIFIER OR WIRING
to Step 19.
ACTUATOR)
(16-pin) and terminal 2N (potentiometer
GND signal).

19.
ELSEWHERE
to Step 19.
Test voltage at air mix actuator connector
terminal C (+5 V signal).
ELSEWHERE
to Step 19.
(potentiometer input signal) and air mix

actuator connector terminal E?
TO GROUND) IS IN WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN
ELSEWHERE
(potentiometer input signal) and ground?
TO B+) IS IN WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN A/C
AMPLIFIER AND AIR MIX ACTUATOR) OR
ELSEWHERE

to Step 19.
No Go to next step.

to Step 19.
No Go to next step.

(16-pin) terminal 2D (potentiometer input
signal).
ELSEWHERE
to Step 19.
Is there continuity between following A/C
amplifier connector (16-PIN, 24-pin)
terminals and air mix actuator connector
terminals?
Terminal 1V and terminal
G (motor drive signal)
Terminal 1U and terminal
F (motor drive signal)
15 INSPECT A/C UNIT AIR MIX ACTUATOR LINK AND
CRANK
Is there grease on the link and crank?
16 INSPECT AIR MIX ACTUATOR
Inspect air mix actuator.
Is it normal?
YesGo to next step.

No Apply grease, then go to Step 19.
YesGo to next step.
No Replace air mix actuator, then go to
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL
AIR CONDITIONER].)
17 VERIFY THAT A/C UNIT AIR MIX DOORS DO NOT
HAVE ANY FOREIGN MATERIAL OR OBSTRUCTION
obstructions on any A/C unit door?
18 INSPECT A/C UNIT AIR MIX DOORS
Are all doors within A/C unit securely and
properly positioned?
Inspect A/C unit doors.
Are doors cranked or
damaged?
YesRemove material/obstruction, then go

to Step 19.
No Go to next step.
YesReplace A/C amplifier, then go to next
step.
(Malfunction in A/C amplifier
temperature control lever circuit)
No Replace or install door(s) in proper

properly installed?
Are they normal?
19 CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS DO NOT YesTroubleshooting completed.
RECUR AFTER REPAIR
Does temperature change when operating
temperature control dial?
repeat from Step 1 if malfunction
recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS
Using/Handling Unapproved Refrigerant

Using a flammable refrigerant, such as OZ-12, in this vehicle is dangerous. In
an accident, the refrigerant may catch fire, resulting in serious injury or death.
When servicing this vehicle, use only R-134a.
Checking for system leakage on a vehicle that has been serviced with
flammable refrigerant, such as OZ-12, is dangerous. Conventional leak
detectors use an electronically generated arc which can ignite the refrigerant,
causing serious injury or death. If a flammable refrigerant may have been used
to service the system, or if you suspect a flammable refrigerant has been used,
contact the local fire marshal or EPA office for information on handling the
refrigerant.
Handling Refrigerant
Avoid breathing air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor. Exposure may
irritate eyes, nose and throat. Also, due to environmental concerns, use service
equipment certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling
equipment) when draining R-134a from the air conditioning system. If
accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming
service.
Do not pressure test or leak test R-134a service equipment and/or vehicle air
conditioning system with compressed air. Some mixtures of air and R-134a
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if
ignited, may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety
information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.
Do not allow the refrigerant to leak near fire or any kind of heat. A poisonous
gas may be generated if the refrigerant gas contacts fire or heat such as from
cigarettes and heaters. When carrying out any operation that can cause
refrigerant leakage, extinguish or remove the abovementioned heat sources
and maintain adequate ventilation.
Handling liquid refrigerant is dangerous. A drop of it on the skin can result in
localized frostbite. When handling the refrigerant, wear gloves and safety
goggles. If refrigerant splashes into the eyes, immediately wash them with
clean water and consult a doctor.
Storing Refrigerant
The refrigerant container is highly pressurized. If it is subjected to high heat, it
could explode, scattering metal fragments and liquid refrigerant that can
seriously injure you. Store the refrigerant at temperatures below 40 C {104
F}.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS
Handling Compressor Oil

Use only DENSO OIL8 compressor oil for this vehicle. Using PAG oil other than
DENSO OIL8 compressor oil can damage the A/C compressor.
Do not spill DENSO OIL8 compressor oil on the vehicle. A drop of compressor oil
on the vehicle surface can eat away at the paint. If oil gets on the vehicle, wipe
it off immediately.
DENSO OIL8 compressor oil (PAG oil) has a higher moisture absorption
efficiency than the previously used mineral oil. If moisture mixes with the
compressor oil, the refrigerant system could be damaged. Therefore, install
caps immediately after using the compressor oil or removing refrigerant system
parts to prevent moisture absorption.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM GENERAL PROCEDURES
Manifold Gauge Set Installation

1. Fully close the valves of the manifold gauge.
2. Connect the charging hoses to the high/low pressure side joints of the manifold gauge.
3. Connect the quick couplers to the ends of the charging hoses.

4. Connect the quick couplers to the charging valves.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT CHARGING
WARNING:
Avoid breathing air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor. Exposure may irritate eyes,
nose and throat. Also, due to environmental concerns, use service equipment certified to
meet the requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment) when draining R-134a
from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work
area before resuming service.
CAUTION:
Do not exceed the specification when charging the system with refrigerant. Doing so will
decrease the efficiency of the air conditioner or damage the refrigeration cycle parts.
Charging Recycled R-134a Refrigerant

1. Connect an R-134a recovery/recycling/recharging device to the vehicle and follow the device
manufacturer"s instructions.
Charging New R-134a Refrigerant

1. Install the manifold gauge set.
2. Connect the tap pin side of the charging hose to the air purge valve of the manifold gauge.
3. Connect the vacuum pump hose to the center joint of the manifold gauge.
4. Connect the vacuum pump hose to the vacuum pump.
5. Connect the charging hose to the refrigerant tank.
6. Place the refrigerant tank on the scale.
7. Open all the valves of the manifold gauge.
CAUTION:
Close the manifold gauge valve immediately after stopping the vacuum pump.
If the valve is left open, the vacuum pump oil will back flow into the
refrigeration cycle and cause a decrease in the efficiency of the air conditioner.
8. Start the vacuum pump and let it operate for 15 min.
9. Verify that high and lowpressure side readings of the manifold gauge are at 101 kPa {
760 mmHg, 29.9 inHg}. Close each valve of the manifold gauge.
10. Stop the vacuum pump and wait for 5 min.

11. Inspect the high and lowpressure side readings of the manifold gauge.
If the reading has changed, inspect for leakage and then repeat from Step 7.
If the reading has not changed, go to next step.

12. Open the valve of the refrigerant tank.
13. Weigh the refrigerant tank to charge the suitable amount of refrigerant.
Refrigerant type
R-134a
Regular amount of refrigerant (approx. quantity)
430 g {15.2 oz}
WARNING:
If the refrigerant system is charged with a large amount of refrigerant when
checking for gas leakage, and if any leakage should occur, the refrigerant will
be released into the atmosphere. In order to prevent the accidental release of
refrigerant which can destroy the ozone layer in the stratosphere, follow the
proper procedures and charge with only a small amount of refrigerant when
checking for gas leakage.
If charging the system with refrigerant by service cans or refrigerant tank,
running the engine with the highpressure side valve open is dangerous.
Pressure within the service cans or refrigerant tank will increase and they could
explode, scattering metal fragments and liquid refrigerant that can seriously
injure you. Therefore, do not open the highpressure side valve while the
engine is running.
14. Open the lowpressure side valve of the manifold gauge.
15. When the highpressure side reading increases to 98 kPa {1.0 kgf/cm2 , 14 psi}, close
the lowpressure side valve of the manifold gauge.
16. Inspect for leakage from the cooler pipe/hose connections using a gas leak tester.
If there is no leakage, go to Step 18.
If leakage is found at a loose joint, tighten the joint, go to next step.
17. Inspect for leakage again.
If there is no leakage after tightening the joint, go to next step.
If there is still a leakage at the same joint, discharge the refrigerant and then
repair the joint. Repeat the charging procedure from Step 7.
WARNING:
engine is running.
18. Open the lowpressure side valve of the manifold gauge and charge with refrigerant until
the weight of refrigerant tank has decreased 200 g {7.06 oz} from the amount in Step 13.
19. Close the lowpressure side valve of the manifold gauge.
WARNING:
engine is running.
20. Start the engine and actuate the A/C compressor.
21. Open the lowpressure side valve of the manifold gauge and charge with refrigerant until
the weight of the refrigerant tank has decreased 430 g {15.2 oz} from the amount in Step 13.
22. Close the lowpressure side valve of the manifold gauge and the valve of the refrigerant
tank.
23. Stop the engine and A/C compressor.
24. Inspect for leakage using a gas leak tester.
If there is no leakage, go to Step 26.
If leakage is found at a loose joint, tighten the joint, then go to next step.
25. Inspect for leakage again.
If there is still leakage after tightening the joint, go to next step.

If there is still leakage at the same joint, discharge the refrigerant and then
repair the joint. Repeat the charging procedure from Step 7.
26. Remove the manifold gauge set.
27. Install the caps to the charging valves.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT RECOVERY
WARNING:
Avoid breathing air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor. Exposure may irritate eyes,
nose and throat. Also, due to environmental concerns, use service equipment certified to
meet the requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment) when draining R-134a
from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work
area before resuming service.
1. Connect an R-134a recovery/recycling/recharging device to the vehicle and follow the device
manufacturer"s instructions.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE CHECK
1. Connect the manifold gauge.
2. Start the engine and after it is warmed up, run it at a constant 1,500 rpm.
3. Set the fan switch to 4th speed.
4. Turn the A/C switch on.
5. Set to RECIRCULATE mode.
6. Set the temperature control to MAX COLD.
7. Set to VENT mode.
8. Close all the doors and all the windows.
9. Measure the manifold gauge reading and ambient temperature.
10. Verify that the high and low pressure readings are within each shaded zone.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the refrigerant system according to the
troubleshooting chart.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST
1. Inspect the refrigerant pressure. (See REFRIGERANT PRESSURE CHECK.)
2. Place a dry-bulb thermometer in the driver-side center ventilator outlet.
3. Start the engine and after it is warmed up, run it at a constant 1,500 rpm.
5. Turn the A/C switch on.
6. Set to RECIRCULATE mode.
8. Set to VENT mode.
9. Close all the doors and windows.
10. Wait until the air conditioner output temperature stabilizes.
Stabilized condition
The A/C compressor repeatedly turns on and off at regular intervals.
11. After the blower air is stabilized, read the dry-bulb thermometer.
12. Verify the ambient temperature.
13. Verify that the temperature reading is in the shaded zone.
If the there is any malfunction, inspect the refrigerant system according to the
troubleshooting chart.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

A/C UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Discharge the refrigerant from the system. (See REFRIGERANT CHARGING.)
a. Console (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Ashtray
g. Center panel unit (See CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Steering shaft installation nuts (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
i. A-pillar trim (See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. A/C amplifier (See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].) (See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
k. TCM (AT) (See TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
l. Auto light/wiper control module (See AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE
m. Door lock control module (See DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
n. Dashboard (See DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
If moisture or foreign material enters the refrigeration cycle, cooling ability will be lowered
and abnormal noise or other malfunction could occur. Always plug open fittings
immediately after removing any refrigeration cycle parts.
5. Remove the A/C unit as shown in the figure.

8. Perform the refrigerant system performance test. (See REFRIGERANT SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
TEST.)
A/C Unit Installation Note

1. When installing a new A/C unit or evaporator, add compressor oil to the refrigerant cycle.
Supplemental amount (approx. quantity)
20 ml {20 cc, 0.7 fl oz}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

A/C UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
If a non-specified grease is used, it may result in abnormal noise or improper operation of the links. Apply
only the specified grease to each link.
1 Drain hose
2 Polyurethane foam (1)
3 Power transistor (Full-auto air conditioner)
4 Resistor (Manual air conditioner)
5 Air duct
6 Evaporator temperature sensor
(See Evaporator Temperature Sensor Disassembly Note.)

(See Evaporator Temperature Sensor Assembly Note.)
7 Polyurethane foam (2)
8 Bracket (1)
9 Bracket (2)
10Heater core
11Evaporator pipe
12A/C amplifier
13Airflow mode actuator
14Airflow mode link set
15Airflow mode main link
16Air mix actuator
17Air mix link set
18A/C case (1)
19A/C case (2)
20Adhesive polyurethane
21Expansion valve
22Evaporator
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Disassembly Note

1. Mark the installation positions (2 locations) for the sensor clamps used to install the evaporator temperature sensor to the
evaporator, and the position for the tip of the evaporator temperature sensor.
2. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor.
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Assembly Note
When evaporator is replaced
1. Assemble the evaporator temperature sensor as shown in the figure.
When evaporator is not replaced
1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor by aligning it with the positions marked prior to removal.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

BLOWER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
b. Ashtray
h. Steering shaft installation nuts (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
i. A-pillar trim (See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. A/C amplifier (See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].) (See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
k. TCM (AT) (See TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
l. Auto light/wiper control module (See AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE
m. Door lock control module (See DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
n. Dashboard (See DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the blower unit as shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

BLOWER UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
If a non-specified grease is used, it may result in abnormal noise or improper
operation of the links. Apply only the specified grease to each link.
1 Air filter cover

2 Air filter
3 Blower motor
4 Air intake actuator
5 Air intake link
6 Harness
7 Bracket
8 Adhesive polyurethane
9 Blower case (1)
10Plate
11Air intake door
12Blower case (2)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIR FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the glove compartment. (See GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Air filter cover

2Air filter
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIR FILTER INSPECTION
1. Verify that there is no damage, excessive dirt or abnormal odor on the air filter.
If there is any malfunction, replace the air filter.
NOTE:
The air filter cannot be reused by cleaning it with water or compressed air.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REAR HEAT DUCT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
a. Front seat (See FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Rear seat (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Inner scuff plate (See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Ashtray illumination bulb (See ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION BULB
e. Console (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Front side trim (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Tire house trim (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Seat belt rail (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Floor covering (See FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Rear heat duct (LH)

2Rear heat duct (RH)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

A/C COMPRESSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the fresh-air duct and air cleaner. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
4. Remove the drive belt. (See DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT [13B-MSP].)
5. Do not allow remaining compressor oil in the A/C compressor and pipes to spill, and remove
in the order indicated in the table.
CAUTION:
If moisture or foreign material enters the refrigeration cycle, cooling ability will
be lowered and abnormal noise or other malfunction could occur.Always plug
open fittings immediately after removing any refrigeration cycle parts.
1Cooler hose (HI)

2Cooler hose (LO)
3A/C compressor connector
4A/C compressor
(See A/C Compressor Installation Note.)

TEST.)
A/C Compressor Installation Note

CAUTION:
Due to the high moisture-absorption characteristics of the compressor oil, it may absorb
moisture if left over a long period of time thereby negatively affecting A/C operation. Drain
the compressor oil and refill within 10 min. of each other.
1. Rotate new A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting refrigerant oil in a
clean measuring device. Use this refrigerant oil to refill new compressor. Do not allow refrigerant
oil to become contaminated.
2. Rotate old A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting refrigerant oil in a
separate, clean measuring device.
3. Compare those oil amounts. The amount of the oil drained from the new A/C compressor
should be greater than the old one.
4. Pour the same amount oil of drained from the old A/C compressor back into the new A/C
compressor.
A/C compressor oil type
DENSO OIL8
A/C compressor oil sealed volume (approx. quantity)
60 ml {60 cc, 2.03 fl oz}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

4. Do not allow remaining compressor oil in the condenser and pipes to spill, and remove in the
order indicated in the table.
CAUTION:
If moisture or foreign material enters the refrigeration cycle, cooling ability will
be lowered and abnormal noise or other malfunction could occur. Always plug
open fittings immediately after removing any refrigeration cycle parts.
1Cooler hose (HI)

2Cooler pipe No.1
3Condenser protector
4Condenser
(See Condenser Installation Note.)

TEST.)
Condenser Installation Note

1. When replacing the new condenser, add compressor oil to the refrigeration cycle.
Supplemental amount (approx. quantity)
20 ml {20 cc, 0.7 fl oz}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

CONDENSER INSPECTION
1. Inspect the condenser for cracks, damage, and oil leakage.
If there is any malfunction, replace the condenser.
2. Visually inspect the fins for clogging of foreign material.
If any fins are clogged, remove the foreign material.
3. Visually inspect the fins for bending.
If there is any bending, use the end of a flathead screwdriver to straighten fins.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

EVAPORATOR INSPECTION
1. Inspect the evaporator for damage, cracks and oil leakage.
If there is any malfunction, replace the evaporator.
If there is any bending, use the end of a flathead screwdriver to straighten the
fins.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

HEATER CORE INSPECTION
1. Inspect the heater core for damage, cracks and water leakage.
If there is any malfunction, replace the heater core.
If there is any bending, use the end of a flathead screwdriver to straighten the
fins.
3. Visually inspect the heater hose for deformation.
Repair with pliers if there is deformation. If there is any malfunction, replace
the heater core.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

HVAC BASIC SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
1Air filter
(See AIR FILTER INSPECTION.)
2Blower unit
(See BLOWER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See BLOWER UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)

3A/C unit
(See A/C UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See EVAPORATOR INSPECTION.)
(See HEATER CORE INSPECTION.)
4Rear heat duct
(See REAR HEAT DUCT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5Airflow mode main link
(See AIRFLOW MODE MAIN LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6A/C compressor
7Heater hose
8Condenser
(See CONDENSER INSPECTION.)
9Refrigerant line
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIRFLOW MODE MAIN LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the A/C amplifier. (See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].) (See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
3. Remove the airflow mode link set.
4. Remove the airflow mode main link as shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT LINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the battery.
2. Remove the fresh-air duct and air cleaner. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
3. Remove the windshield washer tank. (See WINDSHIELD WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the PCM. (See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
5. Remove the EPS control module. (See EPS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the front suspension tower bar. (MT) (See FRONT SUSPENSION TOWER BAR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MT].)
7. Remove the bracket.

10. Do not allow remaining compressor oil in the piping and connecting parts to spill, and remove in the order indicated in
the table.
CAUTION:
If moisture or foreign material enters the refrigeration cycle, cooling ability will be lowered and abnormal
noise or other malfunction could occur. Always plug open fittings immediately after removing any
refrigeration cycle parts.
1Cooler pipe No.2

(See Refrigerant Line Removal Note.)
(See Refrigerant Line Installation Note.)
2Cooler pipe No.1
3Cooler hose (LO)
4Cooler hose (HI)

12. Perform the refrigerant system performance test. (See REFRIGERANT SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST.)
Refrigerant Line Removal Note
Block joint type
1. Disconnect the block joint type pipes by grasping the female side of the block with pliers or similar tool and holding
firmly, and then remove the connection bolt or nut.
Quick joint type
1. Install the SST (49 N061 001) to the arrow side of the clamp.
2. Push the SST (49 N061 001) with your thumb until it snaps into the clamp.
CAUTION:
Excessive force to the SST (49 N061 001) may damage the clamp. Be careful not to press hard when
inserting the SST (49 N061 001) into the clamp.
3. Raise the stopper, and pull the SST (49 N061 001) from the piping.
4. Remove the SST (49 N061 001) from the clamp.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend the SST (49 N061 001) needle when removing the clamp. If the SST (49 N061
001) needle is bent, the clamp can not be opened.
Refrigerant Line Installation Note

1. Apply compressor oil to the O-ring joints.
2. Tighten the piping joints.
Block joint type
1. Temporarily tighten the joint bolt by hand.

2. Connect the block joint type pipes by grasping the female side of the block with pliers or similar tool and holding firmly,
and then tighten the connection bolt or nut with a torque wrench.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

POWER TRANSISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
1Power transistor connector

2Power transistor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
2. Remove the TCM. (AT) (See TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
1A/C amplifier connector

2A/C amplifier
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

A/C AMPLIFIER INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
2. Connect the negative (-) lead of the tester to body ground.
3. By inserting the positive (+) lead of the tester into each A/C amplifier terminal, measure the voltage
according to the terminal voltage table.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the parts under Inspection item(s).
If the parts under Inspection item(s) are found to be normal (except for
terminal 1A), replace the A/C amplifier.
For terminal 1A, first try replacing the power transistor. If there is still any
malfunction, replace the A/C amplifier.
1A
Blower motor
feedback
Connected to
Blower
motor
Power
Voltage
(V)
Fan stopped
B+
Fan: manual LO
9.0
Inspection item(s)
1. Related
wiring
harness
2. Power
transistor
3. Blower
motor
4. Blower relay
transistor
Fan: manual HI
0.7
5. A/C 7.5 A
fuse
6. HEATER 40
A fuse
7. Power
transistor
replacement
1.0 or
less
Fan stopped
1B
Blower fan
Power transistor
speed control
Fan: manual LO
2.1
Fan: manual HI
2.9
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (1A)
1C
Version signal Body ground
Under any condition
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
1D
Version signal Body ground
Under any condition
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
1E
1F
1G
1H
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
Switched to RECIRCULATE
1I
1J
Motor
operation
Motor
operation
Air intake actuator

Switched to FRESH
12
12
Air intake actuator

Switched to FRESH
Rear window defroster

switch OFF
1.0 or
less
B+
Air intake
actuator
Related
wiring
harness
Air intake
actuator
Related
wiring
harness
Rear window
1K
defroster
relay
Rear window
defroster
Rear window defroster relay
operation
Rear window defroster
switch ON
1L
1.0 or
less
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
Related
wiring
harness
Fan stopped
1M
A/C
B+
Refrigerant
pressure
switch
PCM:
terminal
voltage
(1AU)
Fan switch: ON and A/C

switch: ON
1.0 or
less
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
1N
1O
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
1P
1Q
1R
Serial signal
Serial signal
Climate control unit
Terminal used for

communication therefore
determination based on
terminal voltage inspection
not possible. Only inspect
for an open or short circuit
in wiring harness between
A/C amplifier terminal 1P
and climate control unit
terminal K.
Terminal used for

not possible. Only inspect
for an open or short circuit
in wiring harness between
A/C amplifier terminal 1R

and climate control unit
terminal I.
1S
1T
Moving towards COLD
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
Moving towards HOT
12
Air mix
actuator
Moving towards COLD
12
Related
wiring
harness
Moving towards HOT
1.0 or
less
1U
1V
Motor
operation
Motor
operation
Air mix actuator
Air mix actuator
Switched to DEFROSTER
1W
1X
Motor
operation
Motor
operation
Airflow mode actuator

Switched to VENT
1.0 or
less
1.0 or
less

Switched to VENT
2A
B+
12
ROOM 15 A fuse
Under any condition
12
B+
Air mix
actuator
Related
wiring
harness
Airflow mode
actuator
Related
wiring
harness
Airflow mode
actuator
Related
wiring
harness
ROOM 15 A
fuse
2B
IG SW ON
2C
IG2
B+
Related
wiring
harness
A/C 7.5 A
fuse
A/C 7.5 A fuse

1.0 or
Related
2D
2E
Potentiometer
Air mix actuator
input
IG SW LOCK
less
Set temperature at MAX

COLD
3.9
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
Air mix
actuator

HOT
1.1
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2P)
Related
wiring
harness
2F
2G
2H
Evaporator
Evaporator temperature
temperature sensor
sensor input
Potentiometer
input
Refer
Compared with temperature to
detected by evaporator
graph
temperature sensor
1
Evaporator
temperature
sensor
VENT
4.0
BILEVEL
3.3
Related
wiring
harness
HEAT
2.6
HEAT/DEF
1.8
DEFROSTER
1.0
Natural sunlight shined

directly on the solar
radiation sensor
2I
Solar
radiation
Solar radiation sensor
sensor input
Blocking light to solar

radiation sensor
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
Airflow mode
actuator
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2P)
4.0
Related
wiring
harness
1.0 or
less
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2P)
Solar
radiation
sensor
Related
wiring
harness
2J
Passenger
compartment Passenger compartment
temperature temperature sensor
sensor input
2K
2L
GND
Body ground
Compared with temperature Refer

to
detected by Passenger
compartment temperature graph
3
sensor
Under any condition
Passenger
compartment
temperature
sensor
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
2M
Refer
Ambient
temperature Ambient temperature sensor detected by ambient
graph
sensor input
temperature sensor
2
Ambient
temperature
sensor
Sensor GND
Evaporator
temperature
sensor
Air mix
actuator
Airflow mode
actuator
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2L)
Passenger
compartment
temperature
sensor
2N
Ambient
temperature
sensor
Under any condition
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
2O
ECT sensor
input
Refer
graph
detected by ECT sensor
4
PCM
ECT sensor
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
Related
wiring
harness
Air mix
actuator
Air mix
actuator
2P
+5 V
Airflow mode
actuator
IG SW ON
5.0
Solar
radiation
sensor
Airflow mode
actuator
Solar
radiation
sensor
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
IG SW LOCK
1.0 or
less
A/C amplifier
replacement
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

POWER TRANSISTOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Verify that the continuity between the power transistor terminals is as indicated in the table.
If there is any malfunction, replace the power transistor.
If the blower motor operation is not normal even though no malfunction can be
verified, inspect the A/C amplifier. (See A/C AMPLIFIER INSPECTION [FULLAUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
Tester lead
Resistance (kilohm)
+
11.0
A Continuity detected
C Continuity detected
1.5
11.0
A Continuity detected
C Continuity detected
1.5
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

MAGNETIC CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1Bolt
(See Bolt Removal/Installation Note.)
2Pressure plate
3Shim
(See Shim Installation Note.)
4Snap ring
(See Snap Ring Removal/Installation Note.)
5A/C compressor pulley
6Snap ring
7Stator
8A/C compressor body

3. Adjust the magnetic clutch clearance. (See MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER].)
Bolt Removal/Installation Note

1. When removing or installing the bolt, lock the A/C compressor pulley against rotation using
CAUTION:
When connecting the positive battery cable to the magnetic clutch connector,
use a cable with a female terminal of the correct size. Otherwise, load will be
applied to the terminal, resulting in deformation or damage, and poor contact.
In addition, the positive battery cable could disconnect from the connector
resulting in a short circuit.
a. Apply battery positive voltage to the magnetic clutch terminal B and connect the
magnetic clutch terminal A to the ground.
b. Wrap the drive belt, which is no longer of use, tightly around the A/C compressor
pulley.
c. Hold the drive belt in place with pliers.

d. Remove/installation the bolt.
Tightening torque
1314 Nm {133 142 kgfcm, 116123 inlbf}
2. When installing a new A/C compressor body, replace the recommended bolt.
Snap Ring Removal/Installation Note

1. Remove/installation the snap ring using a snap ring pliers.
Shim Installation Note

1. First, insert the 1 mm {0.039 in} thick shim into the shaft.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Measure the clearance around the entire circumference between the pressure plate and A/C
compressor pulley using a feeler gauge.
2. Inspect the clearance.

If not within the specification, adjust the clearance by changing the shim (0.2
mm {0.008 in}, 0.5 mm {0.02 in}) or the number of shims.
Magnetic clutch clearance
0.200.45 mm {0.0080.017 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Connect battery positive voltage to magnetic clutch terminal B and ground to terminal A.
2. Verify that the magnetic clutch turns on.

If the magnetic clutch does not turn on, replace the magnetic clutch. (See
MAGNETIC CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

BLOWER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1Blower motor connector

2Blower motor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

BLOWER MOTOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Connect battery positive voltage to blower motor terminal A, ground to terminal B, and then
verify that the blower motor operates smoothly.
If the operation condition is not normal, replace the blower motor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the A/C unit. (See A/C UNIT
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
NOTE:
Inspect the evaporator temperature sensor when it is installed to the A/C unit.
3. Set the air intake mode to RECIRCULATE.
4. Turn the A/C switch off.
5. Close all of the doors and roll up all the windows.
6. Wait for 5 min.
7. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor connector.
8. Measure the temperature at the air intake.
9. Measure the resistance between evaporator temperature sensor terminals.
If the characteristics of the evaporator temperature sensor are not as shown in
the graph, replace the evaporator temperature sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
3. Remove the keyless control module. (See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
1Air intake actuator connector

2Air intake actuator
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Connect battery positive voltage to air intake actuator terminal G, and ground to terminal C
(or A), and then verify that the air intake actuator operates as shown in the table.
If the operation condition is not normal, replace the air intake actuator.
Terminal
Air intake actuator operation
G
B+ Ground
B+
C
-
RECIRCULATEFRESH
Ground
FRESHRECIRCULATE
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
CONDITIONER].)
1Airflow mode actuator connector

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Connect battery positive voltage to airflow mode actuator terminal F (or G), and ground to
terminal G (or F), and then verify that the airflow mode actuator operates as shown in the table.
Apply the external power supply.
If the operation condition is not normal, replace the airflow mode actuator.
Terminal
Airflow mode actuator operation
B+
Ground
DEFROSTERVENT
Ground
B+
VENTDEFROSTER
2. Verify that the resistance between terminals A and E, and C and E matches the airflow mode
actuator operation as shown in the graph.
If the operation condition and resistance are not normal, replace the airflow
mode actuator.
3. Install the airflow mode actuator with the lever the position shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
3. By inserting the positive (+) lead of the tester into each climate control unit terminal, measure the voltage according to the
terminal voltage table.
If the parts under Inspection item(s) are found to be normal, replace the climate control
unit.
Terminal voltage table (reference)
Terminal Signal
name
B+
Connected to
ROOM 15 A fuse
Voltage
(V)
Under any condition
B+
Ignition switch ACC
B+
ACC
7.5 A
fuse
B
ACC
ACC
relay
Inspection item(s)
ROOM
15 A
fuse
Related
wiring
harness
ACC 7.5
A fuse
ACC
relay
Ignition switch LOCK
Ignition
switch
1.0 or
less
Ignition
switch
Related
wiring
harness
When light switch TNS
B+
light
switch
C
TNS
Panel
light
control
TNS relay
When light switch OFF
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
Light switch ON and panel light control switch at max
1.0 or
less
Panel
light
control
switch
Light switch ON and panel light control switch at min
11.5
Related
wiring
harness
B+
ACC 7.5
A fuse
Panel light control

switch
Ignition switch ON
IG2
ACC
7.5 A
fuse
Ignition
switch
Vehicle
speed
ABS
HU/CM
DSC
HU/CM
Ignition switch LOCK or ACC
1.0 or
less
Ignition
switch
Related
wiring
harness
ABS
HU/CM
When vehicle driving
1.0 or
less
DSC
HU/CM
Related
wiring
harness
A/C
amplifier
Shield
GND
A/C amplifier
Under any condition
1.0 or
less
GND
Body ground
Under any condition
1.0 or
less
Serial
signal 1
A/C amplifier
Inspect the continuity in the wiring harness between

climate control unit terminal I and A/C amplifier terminal
1R.
Continuity
MSCAN_H
CAN related module
Because this terminal is for communication, good/no good judgment

by terminal voltage is not possible.
Related
wiring
harness
A/C
amplifier
A/C amplifier

climate control unit terminal K and A/C amplifier terminal
1P.
Continuity
Serial
signal 2
Because this terminal is for communication, good/no good

judgment by terminal voltage is not possible.

Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
A/C
amplifier
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
MSCAN_L
CAN related module

< Previous Next >
Related
wiring
harness
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIR MIX ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
CONDITIONER].)
1Air mix actuator connector

2Air mix actuator
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Connect battery positive voltage to air mix actuator terminal F (or G), and ground to terminal
G (or F), and then verify that the air mix actuator operates as shown in the table.

If the operation condition is not normal, replace the air mix actuator.
Terminal
Air mix actuator operation
F
B+
Ground
COLDHOT
Ground
B+
HOTCOLD
2. Verify that the resistance between terminals A and E, and C and E matches the air mix
If the operation condition and resistance are not normal, replace the air mix
actuator.
3. Install the air mix actuator with the lever the position shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
3. Hold the piping block with pliers or a similar tool and loosen the refrigerant pressure switch
using a wrench.
1Refrigerant pressure switch connector

2Refrigerant pressure switch
(See Refrigerant Pressure Switch Installation Note.)
Refrigerant Pressure Switch Installation Note
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
2. Verify the high-pressure side reading.
3. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure switch connector.
4. Verify continuity between the terminals of the refrigerant pressure switch.
If the continuity is not normal, replace the refrigerant pressure switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
2. Pry the solar radiation sensor from the dashboard using a flathead screwdriver wrapped with
protective tape.
CAUTION:
After the solar radiation sensor removal, the sensor connector could fall in the
dashboard making the installation difficult. Therefore, hold the rooted end of
the sensor connector using a clip or similar tool to prevent it from falling.
1Solar radiation sensor connector

2Solar radiation sensor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Shine a fluorescent light or expose the solar radiation sensor to natural sunlight.
2. Connect the positive (+) lead to terminal A and the negative (-) lead to terminal B of the
solar radiation sensor, and verify that the voltage value is output.
If the voltage is 0 V, replace the solar radiation sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
2. Remove the drivers side lower panel. (See LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the order indicated in the table.
1Passenger compartment temperature sensor connector

2Passenger compartment temperature sensor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Measure the temperature around the passenger compartment temperature sensor and
measure the resistance between passenger compartment temperature sensor terminal.
If the characteristics of the passenger compartment temperature sensor are not
as shown in the graph, replace the passenger compartment temperature sensor.
2. Connect battery positive voltage to passenger compartment temperature sensor terminal A,

ground to terminal C, and then verify that the fan operation.
If there is any malfunction, replace the passenger compartment temperature
sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
1Ambient temperature sensor connector

2Ambient temperature sensor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
1. Measure the temperature around the ambient temperature sensor, then measure the
resistance between the terminals of the ambient temperature sensor.
If the characteristics of the ambient temperature sensor are not as shown in
the graph, replace the ambient temperature sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
1 A/C relay
2 Rear window defroster relay
3 Blower relay
4 Ambient temperature sensor
(See AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
5 Magnetic clutch
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
6 Refrigerant pressure switch

(See REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
7 PCM
8 Solar radiation sensor
(See SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
10Blower motor
(See BLOWER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See BLOWER MOTOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
11Climate control unit
(See CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
12Power transistor
(See POWER TRANSISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See POWER TRANSISTOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
13Evaporator temperature sensor
(See EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
14Passenger compartment temperature sensor
(See PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
16Air mix actuator
(See AIR MIX ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)

17A/C amplifier
(See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See A/C AMPLIFIER INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]
2. Remove the lower panel. (See LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the console. (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the center panel unit. (See CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Climate control unit connector

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1A/C amplifier connector

2A/C amplifier
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

A/C AMPLIFIER INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
3. By inserting the positive (+) lead of the tester into each A/C amplifier terminal, measure the voltage
according to the terminal voltage table.
If the parts under Inspection item(s) are found to be normal, replace the
A/C amplifier.
Connected to
Measured condition
Voltage
(V)
Inspection item(s)
1A
1B
1C
1D
Fan stopped
B+
1. Related
wiring
harness
1E
Blower motor
feedback
Fan switch: 1st
0.3
Fan switch: 2nd
1.5
3. Fan switch
1.3
4. Blower
motor
Resistor
Fan switch
Fan switch: 3rd
2. Resistor
5. Blower relay
Fan switch: 4th
0.7
6. A/C 7.5 A
fuse
7. HEATER 40
A fuse
1F
1G
1H
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
1I
1J
Motor
operation
Motor
operation
Air intake actuator

Switched to FRESH
12
Air intake
actuator
12
Related
wiring
harness
Air intake actuator

Switched to FRESH
Rear window defroster switch

OFF
1K
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
B+
Rear window
defroster
operation
Rear window defroster switch 1.0 or
ON
less
1L
Air intake
actuator
Rear
window
defroster
relay
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
Related
wiring
harness
B+
Fan stopped
1M
A/C
Refrigerant
pressure
switch
PCM:
terminal
voltage
(1AU)
Fan switch: ON and A/C

switch: ON
1.0 or
less
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
1N
1O
Terminal used for

not possible. Only inspect for
an open or short circuit in
wiring harness between A/C
amplifier terminal 1P and
climate control unit terminal
K.
Related
wiring
harness
Terminal used for

not possible. Only inspect for
an open or short circuit in
wiring harness between A/C
amplifier terminal 1R and
climate control unit terminal I.
Related
wiring
harness
1P
1Q
1R
Serial signal
Serial signal
1S
1T
Moving towards COLD
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
Moving towards HOT
12
Air mix
actuator
1U
Motor
operation
Air mix actuator
1V
Motor
operation
Moving towards COLD
12
Moving towards HOT
1.0 or
less
Air mix actuator
1W
1X
Motor
operation
Motor
operation
B+
Related
wiring
harness
Switched to VENT
1.0 or
less
Airflow
mode
actuator
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
ROOM 15 A fuse
Air mix
actuator
12
Switched to VENT
2A
Related
wiring
harness
Under any condition
12
B+
Airflow
mode
actuator
Related
wiring
harness
ROOM 15 A
fuse
2B
IG SW ON
2C
IG2
B+
Related
wiring
harness
A/C 7.5 A
fuse
A/C 7.5 A fuse
IG SW LOCK

COLD
2D
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
3.9
Related
wiring
harness
Air mix
actuator
Potentiometer
Air mix actuator
input
Set temperature at MAX HOT
1.1
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2P)
2E
Related
wiring
harness
2F
2G
Evaporator
Evaporator temperature
temperature
sensor
sensor input
Potentiometer
input
Compared with temperature

detected by evaporator
temperature sensor
Refer
to
graph
1
VENT
4.0
BI-LEVEL
3.3
HEAT
2.6
HEAT/DEF
1.8
DEFROSTER
1.0
Evaporator
temperature
sensor
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
Related
wiring
harness
Airflow
mode
actuator
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2P)
2H
2I
2J
2K
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
2L
GND
Body ground
Under any condition
Related
wiring
harness
2M
Ambient
temperature Ambient temperature sensor detected by ambient
sensor input
temperature sensor
Refer
to
graph
2
Ambient
temperature
sensor
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
Ambient
temperature
sensor
2N
Evaporator
temperature
sensor
Sensor GND
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2L)
Under any condition
Air mix
actuator
1.0 or
less
Airflow
mode
actuator
Related
wiring
harness
2O
ECT sensor
input

detected by ECT sensor
PCM
Refer
to
graph
3
ECT sensor
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
Related
wiring
harness
Air mix
actuator
Air mix
actuator
2P
+5 V
IG SW ON
5.0
Airflow
mode
actuator
Airflow
mode
actuator
A/C
amplifier:
terminal
voltage (2C,
2L)
IG SW LOCK
1.0 or
less
A/C
amplifier
replacement
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

MAGNETIC CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1Bolt
(See Bolt Removal/Installation Note.)
2Pressure plate
3Shim
(See Shim Installation Note.)
4Snap ring
5A/C compressor pulley
6Snap ring
7Stator
8A/C compressor body

3. Adjust the magnetic clutch clearance. (See MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
Bolt Removal/Installation Note

1. When removing or installing the bolt, lock the A/C compressor pulley against rotation using
CAUTION:
When connecting the positive battery cable to the magnetic clutch connector,
use a cable with a female terminal of the correct size. Otherwise, load will be
applied to the terminal, resulting in deformation or damage, and poor contact.
In addition, the positive battery cable could disconnect from the connector
resulting in a short circuit.
a. Apply battery positive voltage to the magnetic clutch terminal B and connect the
magnetic clutch terminal A to the ground.
b. Wrap the drive belt, which is no longer of use, tightly around the A/C compressor
pulley.
c. Hold the drive belt in place with pliers.

d. Remove/installation the bolt.
Tightening torque
1314 Nm {133 142 kgfcm, 116123 inlbf}
2. When installing a new A/C compressor body, replace the recommended bolt.
Snap Ring Removal/Installation Note

1. Remove/installation the snap ring using a snap ring pliers.
Shim Installation Note

1. First, insert the 1 mm {0.039 in} thick shim into the shaft.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Measure the clearance around the entire circumference between the pressure plate and A/C
compressor pulley using a feeler gauge.
2. Inspect the clearance.

If not within the specification, adjust the clearance by changing the shim (0.2
mm {0.008 in}, 0.5 mm {0.02 in}) or the number of shims.
0.200.45 mm {0.0080.017 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Connect battery positive voltage to magnetic clutch terminal B and ground to terminal A.
2. Verify that the magnetic clutch turns on.

If the magnetic clutch does not turn on, replace the magnetic clutch. (See
MAGNETIC CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1Resistor connector
2Resistor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

RESISTOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Verify that the resistance between the resistor terminals is as indicated in the table.
If there is any malfunction, replace the resistor.
TerminalResistance (ohm)
AB
0.39
AC
1.14
AD
3.14
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

BLOWER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1Blower motor connector

2Blower motor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

BLOWER MOTOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Connect battery positive voltage to blower motor terminal A, ground to terminal B, and then
verify that the blower motor operates smoothly.
If the operation condition is not normal, replace the blower motor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER]
1. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the A/C unit. (See A/C UNIT
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER]
NOTE:
Inspect the evaporator temperature sensor when it is installed to the A/C unit.
3. Set the air intake mode to RECIRCULATE.
4. Turn the A/C switch off.
5. Close all of the doors and roll up all the windows.
6. Wait for 5 min.
7. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor connector.
8. Measure the temperature at the air intake.
9. Measure the resistance between evaporator temperature sensor terminals.
If the characteristics of the evaporator temperature sensor are not as shown in
the graph, replace the evaporator temperature sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

FAN SWITCH INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Inspect for continuity between the fan switch terminals using a tester.
If there is any malfunction, replace the fan switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER]
3. Remove the keyless control module. (See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
1Air intake actuator connector

2Air intake actuator
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Connect battery positive voltage to air intake actuator terminal G, and ground to terminal C
(or A), and then verify that the air intake actuator operates as shown in the table.
If the operation condition is not normal, replace the air intake actuator.
Terminal
Air intake actuator operation
G
B+ Ground
B+
C
-
RECIRCULATEFRESH
Ground
FRESHRECIRCULATE
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER]
3. Remove the A/C amplifier. (See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
1Airflow mode actuator connector

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Connect battery positive voltage to airflow mode actuator terminal F (or G), and ground to
terminal G (or F), and then verify that the airflow mode actuator operates as shown in the table.
If the operation condition is not normal, replace the airflow mode actuator.
Terminal
Airflow mode actuator operation
B+
Ground
DEFROSTERVENT
Ground
B+
VENTDEFROSTER
2. Verify that the resistance between terminals A and E, and C and E matches the airflow mode
If the operation condition and resistance are not normal, replace the airflow
mode actuator.
3. Install the airflow mode actuator with the lever the position shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
3. By inserting the positive (+) lead of the tester into each climate control unit terminal, measure the voltage according to the
terminal voltage table.
If the parts under Inspection item(s) are found to be normal, replace the climate control
unit.
Terminal voltage table (reference)
Terminal Signal
name
B+
Connected to
ROOM 15 A fuse
Voltage
(V)
Under any condition
B+
Ignition switch ACC
B+
ACC
7.5 A
fuse
B
ACC
ACC
relay
Inspection item(s)
ROOM
15 A
fuse
Related
wiring
harness
ACC 7.5
A fuse
ACC
relay
Ignition switch LOCK
Ignition
switch
1.0 or
less
Ignition
switch
Related
wiring
harness
When light switch TNS
B+
light
switch
C
TNS
Panel
light
control
TNS relay
When light switch OFF
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harness
Light switch ON and panel light control switch at max
1.0 or
less
Panel
light
control
switch
Light switch ON and panel light control switch at min
11.5
Related
wiring
harness
B+
A/C 7.5
A fuse
Panel light control

switch
Ignition switch ON
IG2
Vehicle
speed
A/C 7.5
A fuse
Ignition
switch
ABS
HU/CM
DSC
HU/CM
Ignition switch LOCK or ACC
1.0 or
less
Ignition
switch
Related
wiring
harness
ABS
HU/CM
When vehicle driving
1.0 or
less
DSC
HU/CM
Related
wiring
harness
A/C
amplifier
Shield
GND
A/C amplifier
Under any condition
1.0 or
less
GND
Body ground
Under any condition
1.0 or
less
Serial
signal 1
A/C amplifier

climate control unit terminal I and A/C amplifier terminal
1R.
Continuity
MSCAN_H
CAN related module

Related
wiring
harness
A/C
amplifier
A/C amplifier

climate control unit terminal K and A/C amplifier terminal
1P.
Continuity
Serial
signal 2


Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
A/C
amplifier
Related
wiring
harness
Related
wiring
harness
MSCAN_L
CAN related module

< Previous Next >
Related
wiring
harness
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIR MIX ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
3. Remove the A/C amplifier. (See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
1Air mix actuator connector

2Air mix actuator
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Connect battery positive voltage to air mix actuator terminal F (or G), and ground to terminal
G (or F), and then verify that the air mix actuator operates as shown in the table.

If the operation condition is not normal, replace the air mix actuator.
Terminal
Air mix actuator operation
F
B+
Ground
COLDHOT
Ground
B+
HOTCOLD
2. Verify that the resistance between terminals A and E, and C and E matches the air mix
If the operation condition and resistance are not normal, replace the air mix
actuator.
3. Install the air mix actuator with the lever the position shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER]
3. Hold the piping block with pliers or a similar tool and loosen the refrigerant pressure switch
using a wrench.
1Refrigerant pressure switch connector

2Refrigerant pressure switch
(See Refrigerant Pressure Switch Installation Note.)
Refrigerant Pressure Switch Installation Note
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
2. Verify the high-pressure side reading.
3. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure switch connector.
4. Verify continuity between the terminals of the refrigerant pressure switch.
If the continuity is not normal, replace the refrigerant pressure switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER]
1Ambient temperature sensor connector

2Ambient temperature sensor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1. Measure the temperature around the ambient temperature sensor, then measure the
resistance between the terminals of the ambient temperature sensor.
If the characteristics of the ambient temperature sensor are not as shown in
the graph, replace the ambient temperature sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
1 A/C relay
2 Rear window defroster relay
3 Blower relay
4 Ambient temperature sensor
(See AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER])
(See AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
5 Refrigerant pressure switch

(See REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
6 PCM
(See AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
8 Blower motor
(See BLOWER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See BLOWER MOTOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
9 Resistor
(See RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See RESISTOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
10Evaporator temperature sensor
(See EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
13Air mix actuator
(See AIR MIX ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
14A/C amplifier
(See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See A/C AMPLIFIER INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)

15Magnetic clutch
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER]
4. Remove the center panel unit. (See CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Climate control unit connector

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

HVAC TECHNICAL DATA
Item
Specification
Refrigerant type
R-134a
Regular amount of refrigerant (approx. quantity)

A/C compressor oil type
DENSO OIL8
A/C compressor oil sealed volume (approx. quantity)

430 g {15.2 oz}
60 ml {60 cc, 2.03 fl oz}

0.200.45 mm {0.0080.017 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous
2011 - RX-8 - HVAC

HVAC SST
49 N061 001
Remover A
(Part of 49 N061 0A0)
< Previous
Back to Top
Workshop Manual - Restraints

2011 - RX-8
AIR BAG SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
FOREWORD
FLOWCHART
DTC DISPLAY
CLEARING DTC
DTC TABLE
DTC B1013
DTC B1017
DTC B1231
DTC B1342
DTC B1869, B1870
DTC B1877, B1878, B1879, B1885
DTC B1881, B1882, B1883, B1886
DTC B1884, B1890
DTC B1913, B1916, B1932, B1934
DTC B1913, B1925, B1933, B1935
DTC B1992, B1993, B1994, B1995
DTC B1996, B1997, B1998, B1999
DTC B2228, B2230, B2232, B2234
DTC B2229, B2231, B2233, B2235
DTC B2290
DTC B2296
DTC B2434, B2435, B2691
DTC B2438, B2439, B2692
DTC B2444, U2017
DTC B2445, U2018
DTC B2477
DTC B2773, B2774, B2775, B2776
DTC B2777, B2778, B2779, B2780
DTC B2867
DTC C1947, C1948, C1981
PID/DATA MONITOR DISPLAY
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
AIR BAG SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM (SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING)
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX
NO.1 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
NO.2 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED CONSTANTLY
NO.3 PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES INCORRECTLY
Air Bag System

LOCATION INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS
AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CRASH ZONE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SAS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SAS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION
SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CLOCK SPRING ADJUSTMENT
CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION
AIR BAG MODULE AND PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES
AIR BAG MODULE AND PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
INSPECTION OF SST (DEPLOYMENT TOOL)
Seat Belt
LOCATION INDEX
FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
LOCK RELEASE SOLENOID INSPECTION
REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SEAT BELT INSPECTION
FRONT BUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT BUCKLE SWITCH INSPECTION
REAR BUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
RESTRAINTS SST
< Previous Next >
2011 - RX-8 - Restraints

FOREWORD
Outline
The OBD (on-board diagnostic) system has the following functions:
Malfunction detection function: Detects malfunctions in the air bag system
and outputs DTCs.
Data monitor function: Reads out specific input/output signals and the
system status.
Diagnostic DTCs can be read/cleared using the M-MDS.
NOTE:
When the air bag system is malfunctioning, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position to display the current DTC using the air bag system warning
light on the instrument cluster. However this light is strictly for reference.
Make sure to inspect the system using the M-MDS.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FLOWCHART
Use the following flowchart to verify the cause of the trouble.
NOTE:
While performing the inspection of the past malfunction code, the applicable DTCs may be added to memory
by removing or disconnecting the related parts. Inspect only the DTCs that were indicated before inspecting.
When DTCs of the present malfunction are no longer output after present or past malfunctions or both have
been repaired, be sure to perform past malfunction display cancellation to prevent repair of malfunctions that
have already been repaired.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
Next >

AIR BAG SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC DISPLAY
2. Select Modules.
3. Select RCM.
2. Select RCM.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the SAS control module. (See CLEARING
DTC.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLEARING DTC
2. Select Modules.
3. Select RCM.
2. Select RCM.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 5 s more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC DISPLAY.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC TABLE
DTCs are common for present and past malfunction diagnosis.
NOTE:
When DTCs not shown in the DTC table are displayed, replace the SAS control module.
If the air bag system warning light does not illuminate or remains illuminated when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, inspect and repair the air bag system warning
light circuit, and then confirm that the air bag system warning light is operational.
The air bag system warning light flashes the DTC pattern for five cycles, and then remains
illuminated until the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
DTC
Air bag system warning light
M-MDS
display
Flashing pattern
System malfunction
location
Priority
ranking
Seat weight sensor
calibration error
(See DTC
B1013.)
Deployment prohibited
because configuration is
not set
(See DTC
B1017.)
SAS control module

activation (deployment)
control freeze
(See DTC
B1231.)
SAS control module (DTC (See DTC

12 detection circuit
B1342.)
malfunction)
B1013 16
17
B1017 14
B1231 13
B1342
Continuously illuminated
Page
Air bag system warning

light circuit open
Does not illuminate
Air bag system warning (See DTC

light circuit short to body B1869,
ground
B1870.)
Air bag system warning

light circuit short to power
supply
B1869
B1870
B1877
Driver-side pre-tensioner
seat belt circuit resistance
high
B1878 33
(See DTC
Driver-side pre-tensioner B1877,
seat belt circuit short to B1878,
power supply
B1879,
B1885.)
12
B1879
Driver-side pre-tensioner
seat belt circuit short to
body ground
B1881
Passenger-side pretensioner seat belt circuit

resistance high
B1882 34
(See DTC
B1881,
Passenger-side pretensioner seat belt circuit B1882,
short to power supply
B1883,
B1886.)
11
B1883
Passenger-side pretensioner seat belt circuit

short to body ground
B1884 18
20
Passenger air bag

(See DTC
deactivation (PAD)
B1884,
indicator open or short to
B1890.)
body ground
12
(See DTC
Driver-side pre-tensioner B1877,
seat belt circuit resistance B1878,
low
B1879,
B1885.)
B1885 33
B1886 34
B1890 18
19
11
(See DTC
B1881,
Passenger-side pretensioner seat belt circuit B1882,
resistance low
B1883,
B1886.)
20
Passenger air bag

deactivation (PAD)
indicator circuit short to
power supply
10
(See DTC
Driver-side air bag module B1913,
(inflator No.1) circuit short B1916,
to body ground
B1932,
B1934.)
(See DTC
B1884,
B1890.)
B1913
21
B1916 19
B1925 21
B1932 19
B1933 21
10
10
Passenger-side air bag

module (inflator No.1)
circuit short to body
ground
(See DTC
B1913,
B1925,
B1933,
B1935.)
(See DTC
to power supply
B1932,
B1934.)
circuit short to power
supply
(See DTC
B1913,
B1925,
B1933,
B1935.)
(See DTC
(inflator No.1) circuit
B1916,
resistance high
B1932,
B1934.)

circuit resistance high
(See DTC
B1913,
B1925,
B1933,
B1935.)
(See DTC
B1934 19
B1935 21
10

resistance low

circuit resistance low
B1992
Driver-side side air bag

module circuit short to
power supply
B1993

body ground
22
14
B1994

module circuit resistance
low
B1996
Passenger-side side air

bag module circuit short
to power supply
B1997

to body ground
13
B1998

bag module circuit
resistance high
B1999

bag module circuit
resistance low
B2228 19
10
(See DTC
B1913,
B1925,
B1933,
B1935.)
(See DTC
B1992,
B1993,
B1994,
module circuit resistance B1995.)
high
B1995
23
B1916,
B1932,
B1934.)
(See DTC
B1996,
B1997,
B1998,
B1999.)
(See DTC
to body ground
B2232,
B2234.)
B2229 21
B2230 19
B2231 21
B2232 19
B2233 21
10
10

ground
(See DTC
B2229,
B2231,
B2233,
B2235.)
(See DTC
to power supply
B2232,
B2234.)
circuit short to power
supply
(See DTC
B2229,
B2231,
B2233,
B2235.)
(See DTC
B2230,
resistance high
B2232,
B2234.)

circuit resistance high
(See DTC
B2229,
B2231,
B2233,
B2235.)
10
(See DTC
B2230,
resistance low
B2232,
B2234.)
B2235 21
17

circuit resistance low
B2290 16
17
Passenger sensing system (See DTC

malfunction
B2290.)
B2234 19
(See DTC
B2229,
B2231,
B2233,
B2235.)
B2296 42
Crash zone sensor

(See DTC
(communication error,
B2296.)
internal circuit abnormal)
Driver-side front buckle
switch circuit short to
ground
B2434
51
18
switch circuit resistance
not within specification
B2435
B2438
52
19
B2439
(See DTC
B2434,
B2435,
B2691.)
Passenger-side front
buckle switch circuit short
to ground
(See DTC
B2438,
B2439,
B2692.)
buckle switch circuit
resistance not within
specification
B2444 43

sensor (internal circuit
abnormal)
(See DTC
B2444,
U2017.)
B2445 44

bag sensor (internal
circuit abnormal)
(See DTC
B2445,
U2018.)
B2477 54
Configuration error
(See DTC
B2477.)
18

switch circuit open or
short to power supply
(See DTC
B2434,
B2435,
B2691.)
19
(See DTC
B2438,
buckle switch circuit open
or short to power supply B2439,
B2692.)
B2691 51
B2692 52
B2773
Driver-side curtain air bag

module circuit resistance
low
B2774
24
16
B2775

module circuit resistance (See DTC
high
B2773,
B2774,
B2775,
B2776.)
body ground
B2776

power supply
B2777
Passenger-side curtain air

bag module circuit
resistance low
B2778
25
15
B2779
to body ground

to power supply
B2780
B2867 31

bag module circuit
(See DTC
resistance high
B2777,
B2778,
Passenger-side curtain air B2779,
bag module circuit short B2780.)
Poor connection of any

SAS control module
connectors
(See DTC
B2867.)
C1947
Seat track position sensor

ground
C1948 49
(See DTC
Seat track position sensor C1947,
circuit resistance not
C1948,
within specification
C1981.)
21
Seat track position sensor

circuit open or short to
power supply
C1981
U2017 43

sensor (communication
(See DTC
B2444,
U2018 44
error)
U2017.)

bag sensor
(communication error)
(See DTC
B2445,
U2018.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR DISPLAY
2. Select Modules.
3. Select RCM.
2. Select RCM.
NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value. Therefore, if the
monitored value of the output parts is not within the specification, inspection of the
monitored value of input parts corresponding to applicable output part control is necessary.
In addition, because the system does not display output part malfunction as abnormality in
the monitored value, it is necessary to inspect the output part individually.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
PID name (definition)

CCNT_RCM
CRSH_ST_D1
(Driver-side side air bag sensor
communication state)
CRSH_ST_D2
(Driver-side side air bag sensor
circuit state)
CRSH_ST_F1
(Crash zone sensor communication
state)
CRSH_ST_F2
(Crash zone sensor circuit state)
CRSH_ST_P1
(Passenger-side side air bag sensor
CRSH_ST_P2
circuit state)
Unit/Condition
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
Operation Condition (Reference)

DTCs detected: 1255
No DTCs detected: 0
Terminal
Sensor normal: OK
Sensor communication
error: FAULT
2Z, 2AA
Sensor normal: OK
Sensor internal circuit
error: FAULT
2Z, 2AA
Sensor normal: OK
error: FAULT
1B, 1C
Sensor normal: OK
error: FAULT
1B, 1C
Sensor normal: OK
error: FAULT
2B, 2C
Sensor normal: OK
error: FAULT
2B, 2C
D_ABAGR2
(Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.2) resistance)
Ohm
Under any condition: 1.53.7 ohms
1G, 1J
Ohm
1S, 1V
DABAGR

short to power supply:
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
D_PTENSFLT
(Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt
circuit status)
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
2P, 2S
Pre-tensioner seat belt

circuit resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
DR_BUKL
(Driver-side buckle switch status)
Buckled/
Unbuckled
Driver-side buckle switch

on: Buckled
Driver-side buckle switch
off: Unbuckled
2T
DR_CURTN
(Driver-side curtain air bag module
resistance)
Ohm
2V, 2Y
Ohm
2P, 2S
Ohm
2M, 2O
DR_PTENS
resistance)
DS_AB
(Driver-side side air bag module
resistance)

SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
DS_AB_ST
circuit status)
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
2M, 2O
Air bag module circuit

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
DS_CURT_ST
circuit status)
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
2V, 2Y

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
DS1_STAT
(inflator No.1) circuit status)
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
1S, 1V
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
DS2_STAT
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
1G, 1J

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
DSB_P_ST
circuit status)
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
2P, 2S

SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
Started/
DTC_CLR_ST *1
(Seat weight sensor DTC cleared
status)
Normal End/
In Process/
Fault information cleared at seat weight

sensor
1I
Ignition switch to ON position: B+
1W
OCS Fault
IGN_V_2
(IG1 voltage)
Seat weight sensor

calibration start-up:
Starting
Seat weight sensor
calibration completed
normally: Normal End
Starting/
Normal End/
Commanding/
OCS_CAL_ST*2
(Seat weight sensor calibration
status)
NG (Voltage)/
NG (Weight)/
In Process
Timeout/
OCS Fault
Seat weight sensor

calibration command being
sent: Commanding
Voltage malfunction during
seat weight sensor
calibration: NG (Voltage)
Weight error during seat
weight sensor calibration:
NG (Weight)
1I
Seat weight sensor

calibration time limit
passed: Timeout
Seat weight sensor
calibration being processed:
In Process
Seat weight sensor or Seat
weight sensor control
module malfunction: OCS
Fault
Empty/
OCS_SYS_ST*1
(Seat weight sensor status)
SMALL/
LARGE/
Occupant classification status determined by

seat weight sensor
1I
Indeterminate/
Invalid
OCSFLT_CAL
(Passenger sensing system
calibration status)
OCSFLT_COM
(Passenger sensing system
communication status)
OCSFLT_L
(Passenger sensing system (LH)
malfunction status)
OCSFLT_MDL
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
Sensor normal: OK
Seat weight sensor
calibration error: FAULT
1I
Sensor normal: OK
Seat weight sensor control
module communication
error: FAULT
1I
Sensor normal: OK
Seat weight sensor (LH)
malfunction: FAULT
Sensor normal: OK
1I
(Passenger sensing system control

module malfunction status)
OCSFLT_R
(Passenger sensing system (RH)
malfunction status)
OD_CRST_D1
(On demand driver-side side air
bag sensor communication state)
OD_CRST_D2
(On demand driver-side side air
bag sensor circuit state)
OD_CRST_F1
(On demand crash zone sensor
OD_CRST_F2
(On demand crash zone sensor
circuit state)
OD_CRST_P1
(On demand passenger-side side
air bag sensor communication
state)
OD_CRST_P2
(On demand passenger-side side
air bag sensor circuit state)
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
OK/
FAULT
Seat weight sensor control

module malfunction: FAULT
1I
Sensor normal: OK
Seat weight sensor (RH)
malfunction: FAULT
1I
Sensor normal: OK
error: FAULT
2Z, 2AA
Sensor normal: OK
error: FAULT
2Z, 2AA
Sensor normal: OK
error: FAULT
1B, 1C
Sensor normal: OK
error: FAULT
1B. 1C
Sensor normal: OK
error: FAULT
2B, 2C
Sensor normal: OK
error: FAULT
2B, 2C

SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
OD_D_CURT
circuit status)
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
2V, 2Y
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
OD_DAB1_ST
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
1S, 1V

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
OD_DAB2_ST
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
1G, 1J

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
OD_DSAB_ST
circuit status)
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
2M, 2O
Normal

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
OD_P_CURT
(Passenger-side curtain air bag
module circuit status)
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
2A, 2D

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
OD_PAB1_ST
(Passenger-side air bag module
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
1M, 1P

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
OD_PAB2_ST
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
1A, 1D
Normal
resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
OD_PSAB_ST
(Passenger-side side air bag
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
2I, 2L

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
P_ABAGR2
Ohm
1A, 1D

SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
P_PTENSFLT
(Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat
belt circuit status)
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
2G, 2J

SQ_LOWRES
normal: NORMAL
PABAGR
PS_AB
Ohm
1M, 1P
(Passenger-side side air bag

module resistance)
Ohm
2I, 2L

SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
PS_AB_ST
circuit status)
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
2I, 2L

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
PS_BUKL
(Passenger-side buckle switch
status)
Buckled/
Unbuckled
Passenger-side buckle
switch on: Buckled
Passenger-side buckle
switch off: Unbuckled
2H
PS_CURTN
module resistance)
Ohm
2A, 2D

SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
PS_CURT_ST
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
PS_PTENS
2A, 2D

belt resistance)
Ohm
PS_WEIGHT
(Seat weight sensor measured
weight of passenger)
kg
Display of load (body weight) on passengerside seat
2G, 2J
1I

SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
PS1_STAT
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
1M, 1P

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
PS2_STAT
SHRT_GND/
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
circuit open: OPEN
1A, 1D

resistance low:
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
PSAB_DepSt
deployment status)
Active/
Inactive

module operation
(deployment) enabled
status: Active
module non-operation
(non-deployment) status:
Inactive
1I

SHRT_B+
SHRT_B+/
SHRT_GND/
PSB_P_ST
belt circuit status)
OPEN/
SQ_LOWRES/
Normal

short to ground:
SHRT_GND
2G, 2J

circuit open: OPEN
SQ_LOWRES
normal: Normal
TRAK_SW
(Seat track position sensor state)
Forward/Rearward
Front seat front position:

Forward
2W, 2X
Front seat rear position:

Rearward
*1
Used during seat weight sensor calibration setting. Not necessary for diagnostic.
*2
When the calibration error is displayed, the error can be cleared by turning the ignition
switch to the LOCK position.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1013
DTC B1013 Seat weight sensor calibration error

WARNING:
Detection conditions are for understanding the DTC outline before
performing an inspection. Performing an inspection according to only the
detection conditions may cause injury due to an operating error, or damage
the system. When performing an inspection, always follow the inspection
procedure.
DETECTION
CONDITION
Calibration set value not within valid range.

Seat weight sensor deformed or malfunction
Load to or deformation of the seat belt rail
Deformed passenger-side seat under-bracket or frame
Weight acting on passenger-side seat during calibration
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Improperly installed passenger-side seat part at time of calibration

Deformed floor where attached to passenger-side seat
Seat weight sensor control module malfunction
SAS control module malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Properly install the
passenger-side seat.
Inspect the seat weight
sensor. (See SEAT WEIGHT
ACTION
YesReplace the SAS control module.
(See SAS CONTROL MODULE
SENSOR CALIBRATION.)
Is the seat weight sensor

normal?
2
INSPECT SEAT BELT RAIL

Is the seat belt rail properly
installed?
Is there any external load to
the seat belt rail?
YesReplace the seat belt rail.

(See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Is the seat belt rail

deformed?
Is the seat belt rail normal?
3
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE SEAT

the LOCK position.
Disconnect the negative
battery cable and wait for 1
min or more.
Remove the passenger-side
seat and visually inspect for
the following:
Seat underbracket
deformation
YesReplace any deformed parts or remove any foreign

objects.
After replacement, perform seat
weight sensor calibration and
reperform the DTC inspection. If the
DTC is displayed, go the next step.
(See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
CALIBRATION.)
Seat frame
deformation
Seat weight
sensor
deformation
Foreign
objects
stuck in
seat
Are any of the parts
deformed or are any foreign
objects stuck in the seat?
4
INSPECT FLOOR
Visually inspect the
installation parts of the
passenger-side seat for the
following:

No Repair floor deformation.
After repair, perform seat weight
Abnormal
floor
deformation
Installation
hole of
passengerside seat is
improperly
positioned
sensor calibration and reperform

the DTC inspection. If the DTC is
displayed even though the floor has
been repaired, go the next step.
CALIBRATION.)
Is the floor normal?

INSPECT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
5 CONTROL MODULE
Replace the seat weight
sensor.
After replacement, perform
seat weight sensor
calibration. (See SEAT
WEIGHT SENSOR
CALIBRATION.)
Reperform the DTC
inspection.
Is DTC B1013 displayed?
YesReplace the seat weight sensor control module.

(See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
After replacement, perform seat
weight sensor calibration and
reperform the DTC inspection. If the
DTC is displayed even though the
seat weight sensor control module
has been replaced, replace the SAS
control module. (See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1231
DTC B1231 SAS control module activation (deployment) control freeze

WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

performing an inspection. Performing an inspection with only detection
conditions may cause injury due to an operating error, or damage the
system. When performing an inspection, always follow the inspection
procedure.
SAS control module determined collision
ACTION
Replace the SAS control module.
(See SAS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1342
DTC B1342 SAS control module (DTC 12 detection circuit malfunction)

WARNING:
procedure.
DETECTION
CONDITION
SAS control module configuration has not been performed.

Malfunction in the SAS control module internal circuit
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
No SAS control module configuration
Step
Inspection
PERFORM SAS CONTROL MODULE

1 INSPECTION
Perform the configuration for the
SAS control module using the MMDS.
CONFIGURATION.)
Clear DTCs using the M-MDS.
(See CLEARING DTC.)
Inspect the SAS control module
DTCs.
Action
YesPerform the SAS control module configuration
again, then go to the next step.
CONFIGURATION.)
(See DTC DISPLAY.)

Are DTCs B1342 displayed?
PERFORM SAS CONTROL MODULE DTC
2 INSPECTION
Inspect the SAS control module
DTCs.
(See DTC DISPLAY.)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1869, B1870
B1869
DTC
B1870
Air bag system warning light circuit open (the air bag system warning light is
continuously illuminated.)
Air bag system warning light circuit short to body ground (the air bag system
warning light is never illuminated.)
Air bag system warning light system circuit short to power supply (the air bag system warning
light is continuously illuminated.)
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Detection conditions are for understanding the DTC outline before performing an
inspection. Performing an inspection according to only the detection conditions
may cause injury due to an operating error, or damage the system. When
performing an inspection, always follow the inspection procedure.
Malfunction in the air bag system warning light circuit
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the battery and the
instrument cluster
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the instrument cluster and
SAS control module
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN BATTERY FUSE AND

1 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Measure the voltage at instrument cluster connector
terminal 2K.
NOTE:
Measure the voltage while shaking the
wiring harness between the battery and
instrument cluster.
Is the voltage 9 V or more?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
ACTION
No Repair the related wiring
harness.
2 AND SAS CONTROL MODULE

WARNING:
Handling the air bag system components improperly can
accidentally deploy the air bag modules and pre-tensioner
seat belts, which may seriously injure you. Read the
service warnings and cautions before handling the air bag
system components.
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min
or more.
Remove the column cover.
(See COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the glove compartment.
(See GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Disconnect the passenger-side air bag module connector.
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side curtain air bag
module connectors.
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side side air bag
module connectors.
Remove the rear door lower trim.
(See REAR DOOR LOWER TRIM
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side pre-tensioner
seat belt connectors.
Partially peel back the floor covering.
Disconnect the SAS control module connector.
Disconnect the instrument cluster connector.
Inspect the wiring harness between SAS control module
terminal 1T and instrument cluster terminal 2K for the
following:
NOTE:
Measure the voltage while shaking the wiring harness
between the SAS control module and instrument cluster.

No Replace the air bag wiring
harness.
Is the wiring harness normal?

INSPECT THE WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN THE SAS CONTROL
3 MODULE AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FOR A SHORT CIRCUIT TO
THE POWER SUPPLY
Connect the negative battery cable.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position with SAS
control module connector and instrument cluster connector
disconnected.
YesReplace the wiring harness

between the SAS control
module and the
Instrument cluster.
Measure the voltage of SAS control module connector

terminals 2T of SAS control module harness side
connector.
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and instrument cluster.
Is the voltage measured?
4

or more.
Connect the instrument cluster connector.
Ground instrument cluster connector terminal 2K using a
jumper wire.

No Replace the instrument
cluster.
(See INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Does the seat belt warning light illuminate?
5
INSPECT DTCs
or more.
Clear DTCs using the M-MDS.(See CLEARING DTC.)
Perform the DTC inspection for the SAS control module
using the M-MDS. (See DTC DISPLAY.)
Is DTC B1869 and/or B1870 displayed again?
YesReplace the SAS control

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1877, B1878, B1879, B1885
B1877 Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit resistance high

B1878 Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit short to power supply
DTC
B1879 Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit short to ground
B1885 Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit resistance low
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Detection conditions are for understanding the DTC outline before performing
an inspection. Performing an inspection according to only the detection
conditions may cause injury due to an operating error, or damage the system.
When performing an inspection, always follow the inspection procedure.
Abnormal resistance (other than 1.53.1 ohms) detected in the driver-side
pre-tensioner seat belt circuit
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the driver-side pre-tensioner seat
belt and SAS control module
Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the driver-side pretensioner seat belt and SAS control module
Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt malfunction
Step
Inspection
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT

1 CONNECTOR
WARNING:
Handling the component parts improperly can
accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag module,
which may seriously injure you. Read the service
warnings/cautions and the workshop manual before
handling the air bag system components.
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1
min or more.
Remove the driver-side rear door lower trim.
Disconnect the driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connector.
Action
YesReplace the driver-side
pre-tensioner seat belt
wiring harness.
Inspect the driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt

connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins)
Is there any malfunction of the driver-side pretensioner seat belt connector?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN SAS CONTROL MODULE
2 AND DRIVER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
(See GLOVE COMPARTMENT
Disconnect the passenger-side air bag module
connector.
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side curtain air
bag module connectors.
module connectors.
Disconnect the passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connector.
Inspect the wiring harnesses between SAS control
module connector terminal 2S and driver-side pretensioner seat belt connector terminal A, and SAS
control module connector terminal 2P and driver-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connector terminal B for the
following:
Short to body ground
Open circuit
Short circuit between terminals
NOTE:
Inspect for continuity while shaking the wiring harness
No Replace the wiring harness

module and the driver-side
pre-tensioner seat belt.
between the SAS control module and driver-side pretensioner seat belt.
3 MODULE AND DRIVER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT FOR A YesReplace the wiring harness
SHORT CIRCUIT TO THE POWER SUPPLY
control module connector and driver-side pre-tensioner
seat belt connector disconnected.

terminals 2S and 2P of SAS control module harness
side connector.
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and driver-side pretensioner seat belt.
4
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT

min or more.
Connect the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) or
apply 2 ohms resistance to the driver-side pretensioner seat belt connector terminals A and B.

No Replace the driver-side
(See FRONT SEAT BELT
Set the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) to 2

ohms.
Except for the driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connector, reconnect all disconnected connectors.
Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See CLEARING DTC.)
Are DTCs B1877, B1878, B1879 and/or B1885
displayed?
5
INSPECT DTCs
module.
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for

1min or more.
(See SAS CONTROL

MODULE
Disconnect the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker)

or the 2 ohms resistance.
Connect the driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connector.
completed.

Is DTC B1877, B1878, B1879 and/or B1885 displayed
again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1881, B1882, B1883, B1886
B1881 Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit resistance high

B1882 Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit short to power supply
DTC
B1883 Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit short to body ground
B1886 Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit resistance low
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Abnormal resistance (other than 1.53.1 ohms) detected in the passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt circuit
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the passenger-side pre-tensioner seat
belt and SAS control module
Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the passenger-side pretensioner seat belt and SAS control module
Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt malfunction
Step
Inspection
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT

1 CONNECTOR
WARNING:
Handling the component parts improperly can accidentally
operate (deploy) the air bag module, which may seriously
injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions and the
workshop manual before handling the air bag system
components.
or more.
Remove the passenger-side rear door lower trim. (See
REAR DOOR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Disconnect the passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connector.
Inspect the passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connector. (Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins)
Action
YesReplace the passengerside pre-tensioner seat
belt wiring harness.
Is there any malfunction of the passenger-side pretensioner seat belt connector?

2 AND PASSENGER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT

module and the passengerside pre-tensioner seat
belt.

module connectors.
module connectors.
(See REAR DOOR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Disconnect the driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connectors.
Inspect the wiring harnesses between SAS control module
connector terminal 2J and passenger-side pre-tensioner
seat belt connector terminal A, and SAS control module
connector terminal 2G and passenger-side pre-tensioner
seat belt connector terminal B for the following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and passenger-side pretensioner seat belt.
3 MODULE AND PASSENGER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT FOR A YesReplace the wiring harness
module and the passengerside pre-tensioner seat
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position with SAS control

module connector and passenger-side pre-tensioner seat
belt connector disconnected.
belt.

terminals 2J and 2G of SAS control module harness side
connector.
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and passenger-side pretensioner seat belt.
4
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT

or more.
Connect the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) or apply
2 ohms resistance to the passenger-side pre-tensioner
seat belt connector terminals A and B.

No Replace the passengerside pre-tensioner seat
belt.
(See FRONT SEAT BELT
Set the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) to 2 ohms.

Except for the passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt
Are DTCs B1881, B1882, B1883 and/or B1886 displayed?
5
INSPECT DTCs
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1min or
more.
Disconnect the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) or the
2 ohms resistance.
Connect the passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connector.

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
completed.

again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1884, B1890
B1884 Passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator circuit open or short to body ground
DTC
B1890 Passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator circuit short to power supply
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

procedure.
Malfunction in PAD indicator circuit
Battery malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between battery and information display

Open or short circuit in wiring harness between information display and SAS
control module
information display malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT OPERATION OF PAD INDICATOR
Does the PAD indicator illuminate?
INSPECT FUSE
Remove the ENGINE 15 A fuse.
Is the fuse normal?
INSPECT BATTERY
Measure the battery positive voltage.
Is the voltage 9 V16 V?
ACTION
No Go to Step 5.
YesInstall the fuse, then go to
the next step.
No Replace the fuse.
No Battery is malfunctioning
Inspect the
charge/discharge system.
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY AND PAD

4 INDICATOR

Measure the information display connector terminal E
voltage.
No Repair the wiring harness

between the battery and
NOTE:
Measure the voltage while shaking
the wiring harness between the
battery and PAD indicator.
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN PAD INDICATOR AND
5 SAS CONTROL MODULE
WARNING:
Handling the air bag system components improperly
can accidentally deploy the air bag modules and pretensioner front buckles, which may seriously injure
you. Read the service warnings before handling the air
bag system components.
min or more.
Remove the column cover. (See COLUMN COVER
Remove the glove compartment. (See GLOVE
COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
connector.
module connectors.
bag module connector.
Remove the rear door lower trim. (See REAR DOOR
LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side pretensioner seat belt connectors.

No Replace the air bag wiring
harness.

Inspect the wiring harness between information
display connector terminal I and SAS control module
connector terminal 1U for the following:
Short to ground
Open circuit
NOTE:
between the information display and SAS control
module.
6 MODULE AND PAD INDICATOR FOR A SHORT CIRCUIT TO THE YesReplace the air bag wiring
harness.
POWER SUPPLY
control module connector and information display
connector disconnected.
terminal 1U.
No Replace the information

display, then go to the
next step.
(See INFORMATION
DISPLAY
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and information
display.
7
INSPECT DTCs
1min or more.
Perform the DTC inspection for the SAS control
module using the M-MDS. (See DTC DISPLAY.)

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
completed.
Are DTCs B1884 and/or B1890 displayed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1913, B1916, B1932, B1934
B1913 Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) circuit short to body ground
B1916 Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) circuit short to power supply
DTC
B1932 Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) circuit resistance high
B1934 Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) circuit resistance low
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Detection conditions are for understanding the DTC outline before performing an inspection.
Performing an inspection according to only the detection conditions may cause injury due to an
operating error, or damage the system. When performing an inspection, always follow the
inspection procedure.
Abnormal resistance (other than 1.53.7 ohms) detected in the driver-side air bag module
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) and SAS
control module
Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) connector malfunction
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the clock spring and SAS control module
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) malfunction
Step
1
Inspection
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR NO.1) CONNECTOR
WARNING:
Handling the component parts improperly can accidentally operate (deploy)
the air bag module, which may seriously injure you. Read the service
warnings/cautions and the workshop manual before handling the air bag
system components.
Action
YesReplace the driver-side air
bag wiring harness.

Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1min or more.
Disconnect the driver-side air bag module.
Inspect the driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) connector. (Corrosion,
damage, and disconnected pins)
Is there any malfunction of the driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1)
connector?
2

Remove the steering wheel.

No Replace the clock spring.
(See CLOCK SPRING
Remove the clock spring.

(See CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inspect for continuity between clock spring connector terminals 1CB and
1DA.
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN SAS CONTROL MODULE AND CLOCK
3 SPRING

module and the clock
spring.
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side curtain air bag module connectors.
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side side air bag module connectors.
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt connectors.
Inspect the wiring harness between SAS control module connector terminal
1V and clock spring connector terminal 1C, and SAS control module
connector terminal 1S and clock spring connector terminal 1D for the
following:
Short to ground
Open circuit
NOTE:
Inspect for continuity while shaking the wiring harness between the SAS
control module and clock spring.
INSPECT THE WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN THE SAS CONTROL MODULE AND
4 CLOCK SPRING FOR A SHORT CIRCUIT TO THE POWER SUPPLY
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position with SAS control module
connector and clock spring connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage of SAS control module connector terminals 1V and 1S.

spring.
NOTE:
Measure the voltage while shaking the wiring harness between the SAS
5
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR NO.1)

Connect the leads of the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) or apply 2
ohms resistance to clock spring connector terminals 3A and 3B.
Set the resistance of the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) to the 2
ohms position.
No Replace the driver-side air

bag module.
(See DRIVER-SIDE AIR
BAG MODULE
Except for the clock spring connector, reconnect all disconnected connectors.
Perform the DTC inspection for the SAS control module using the M-MDS.
(See DTC DISPLAY.)
6
INSPECT DTCs
Disconnect the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) or the 2 ohms
resistance.
Connect the clock spring connector.

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
completed.

(See DTC DISPLAY.)
Is DTC B1913, B1916, B1932 and/or B1934 displayed again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1913, B1925, B1933, B1935
B1913 Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) circuit short to body ground
B1925 Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) circuit short to power supply
DTC
B1933 Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) circuit resistance high
B1935 Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) circuit resistance low
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

procedure.
Abnormal resistance (other than 1.42.9 ohms) detected in the
passenger-side driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) circuit
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.1) and SAS control module
Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the passenger-side air
bag module (inflator No.1) and SAS control module
Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) malfunction
Step
Inspection
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR

1 NO.1) CONNECTOR
WARNING:
min or more.
connector. (See PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Inspect the passenger-side air bag module (inflator
Action
YesReplace the passengerside air bag module wiring
harness.
No.1) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and

disconnected pins)
Is there any malfunction of the passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.1) connector?
2 AND PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR NO.1)

module and the passengerside air bag module
(inflator No.1).

module connectors.
module connector terminal 1P and passenger-side air
bag module connector (inflator No.1) terminal 1C, and
SAS control module connector terminal 1M and
passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1)
connector terminal 1D for the following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and passenger-side
air bag module.
3 MODULE AND PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR YesReplace the wiring harness
NO.1) FOR A SHORT CIRCUIT TO THE POWER SUPPLY
module and the passenger-

control module connector and passenger-side air bag
module connector disconnected.
side air bag module

(inflator No.1).

terminals 1P and 1M of SAS control module harness
side connector.
NOTE:
air bag module (inflator No.1).
4 NO.1)
min or more.
apply 2 ohms resistance to the passenger-side air bag
module connector terminals 1C and 1D.

No Replace the passengerside air bag module. (See
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE
Set the SST (fuel and thermometer checker) to 2

ohms.
Except for the passenger-side air bag module
displayed?
5
INSPECT DTCs
1min or more.

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
Connect the passenger-side air bag module connector.
completed.

again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1992, B1993, B1994, B1995
B1992 Driverside side air bag module circuit short to power supply
B1993 Driverside side air bag module circuit short to body ground
DTC
B1994 Driverside side air bag module circuit resistance high
B1995 Driverside side air bag module circuit resistance low
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

procedure.
side air bag module circuit
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the driver-side side air bag
module and SAS control module
Driver-side side air bag module connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the driver-side side air
bag module and SAS control module
Driver-side side air bag module malfunction
Step
1
Inspection
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE CONNECTOR
WARNING:
min or more.
Disconnect the driver-side side air bag module
connector installed to the lower side of the seat
cushion of the front seat.
Is there any malfunction of the driver-side side air bag
module connector?
Action
side air bag module wiring
harness.
2 AND DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE


side air bag module.

connector.
Disconnect the passenger-side side air bag module
connectors.
module connector terminal 2M and driver-side side air
bag module connector terminal A, and SAS control
module connector terminal 2O and driver-side side air
bag module connector terminal B for the following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and driver-side side
air bag module.
3 MODULE AND DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FOR A

control module connector and driver-side side air bag


terminals 2M and 2O of SAS control module harness
side connector.
NOTE:
air bag module.
4
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE

min or more.
apply 2 ohms resistance to the driver-side side air
bag module connector terminals A and B.

(See SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE

ohms.
Except for the driver-side side air bag module
displayed?
5
INSPECT DTCs
1min or more.
Connect the driver-side side air bag module connector.

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
completed.

again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1996, B1997, B1998, B1999
B1996 Passengerside side air bag module circuit short to power supply
B1997 Passengerside side air bag module circuit short to body ground
DTC
B1998 Passengerside side air bag module circuit resistance high
B1999 Passengerside side air bag module circuit resistance low
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Abnormal resistance (other than 1.43.2 ohms) detected in the passengerside side air bag module circuit
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the passenger-side side air bag
Passenger-side side air bag module connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the passenger-side side air
bag module and SAS control module
Passenger-side side air bag module malfunction
Step
1
Inspection
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE CONNECTOR
WARNING:
accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag module, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service
Action
YesReplace the passengerside side air bag module
wiring harness.

min or more.
connector installed to the lower side of the seat cushion
of the front seat.
Is there any malfunction of the passenger-side side air
bag module connector?
2 AND PASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE


module and the passengerside side air bag module.

connector.
module connectors.
Disconnect the driver-side side air bag module
connectors.
module connector terminal 2L and passenger-side side
air bag module connector terminal A, and SAS control
module connector terminal 2I and passenger-side side
air bag module connector terminal B for the following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
3 MODULE AND PASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FOR A

module and the passengerside side air bag module.
control module connector and passenger-side side air

bag module connector disconnected..

terminals 2L and 2I of SAS control module harness side
connector.
NOTE:
4
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE

min or more.
apply 2 ohms resistance to the passenger-side side air

No Replace the passengerside side air bag module.
(See SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE

ohms.
Except for the passenger-side side air bag module
5
INSPECT DTCs
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1min
or more.
Disconnect the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) or
the 2 ohms resistance.
Connect the passenger-side side air bag module
connector.

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
completed.

again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2228, B2230, B2232, B2234
B2228 Driverside air bag module (inflator No.2) circuit short to body ground
B2230 Driverside air bag module (inflator No.2) circuit short to power supply
DTC
B2232 Driverside air bag module (inflator No.2) circuit resistance high
B2234 Driverside air bag module (inflator No.2) circuit resistance low
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Abnormal resistance (other than 1.53.7 ohms) detected in the driver-side air bag module
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2) and SAS
control module
Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2) connector malfunction
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the clock spring and SAS control module
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2) malfunction
Step
1
Inspection
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR NO.2) CONNECTOR
WARNING:
Handling the component parts improperly can accidentally operate (deploy)
the air bag module, which may seriously injure you. Read the service
warnings/cautions and the workshop manual before handling the air bag
system components.
Action
YesReplace the driver-side air
bag wiring harness.

Disconnect the driver-side air bag module.
Inspect the driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2) connector. (Corrosion,
Is there any malfunction of the driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2)
connector?
2

Remove the steering wheel.

No Replace the clock spring.
(See CLOCK SPRING
Remove the clock spring.

Inspect for continuity between clock spring connector terminals 1AB and
1BC.
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN SAS CONTROL MODULE AND CLOCK
3 SPRING

spring.
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side curtain air bag module connectors.
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side side air bag module connectors.
Disconnect the driver and passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connectors.
Inspect the wiring harness between SAS control module connector terminal
1J and clock spring connector terminal 1A, and SAS control module
connector terminal 1G and clock spring connector terminal 1B for the
following:
Short to ground
Open circuit
NOTE:
Inspect for continuity while shaking the wiring harness between the SAS
INSPECT THE WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN THE SAS CONTROL MODULE AND
4 CLOCK SPRING FOR A SHORT CIRCUIT TO THE POWER SUPPLY
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position with SAS control module
connector and clock spring connector disconnected.
Measure the voltage of SAS control module connector terminals 1J and 1G.

spring.
NOTE:
Measure the voltage while shaking the wiring harness between the SAS
5
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR NO.2)

Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min or more.
Connect the leads of the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) or apply 2
ohms resistance to clock spring connector terminals 3C and 3D.
Set the resistance of the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) to the 2
ohms position.
No Replace the driver-side air

bag module (inflator No.2).
(See DRIVER-SIDE AIR
BAG MODULE
Except for the clock spring connector, reconnect all disconnected

connectors.
(See DTC DISPLAY.)
6
INSPECT DTCs
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min or more.
Disconnect the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) or the 2 ohms
resistance.

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
completed.

(See DTC DISPLAY.)
Is DTC B2228, B2230, B2232 and/or B2234 displayed again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2229, B2231, B2233, B2235
B2229 Passengerside air bag module (inflator No.2) circuit short to body ground
B2231 Passengerside air bag module (inflator No.2) circuit short to power supply
DTC
B2233 Passengerside air bag module (inflator No.2) circuit resistance high
B2235 Passengerside air bag module (inflator No.2) circuit resistance low
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

procedure.
Abnormal resistance (other than 1.42.9 ohms) detected in the
passenger-side side side air bag module circuit
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.2) and SAS control module
Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.2) connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the passenger-side air
bag module (inflator No.2) and SAS control module
Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.2) malfunction
Step
Inspection

1 NO.2) CONNECTOR
WARNING:
min or more.
Disconnect the passenger-side air bag module (inflator
No.2) connector. (See PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inspect the passenger-side air bag module (inflator
Action
YesReplace the passengerside air bag module wiring
harness.
No.2) connector. (Corrosion, damage, and

disconnected pins)
Is there any malfunction of the passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.2) connector?
2 AND PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR NO.2)

module and the passengerside air bag module
(inflator No.2).

module connectors.
module connector terminal 1D and passenger-side air
bag module (inflator No.2) connector terminal 1C, and
SAS control module connector terminal 1A and
passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.2)
connector terminal 1D for the following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
3 MODULE AND PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR YesReplace the wiring harness
NO.2) FOR A SHORT CIRCUIT TO THE POWER SUPPLY

control module connector and passenger-side air bag
side air bag module

(inflator No.2).

terminals 1A and 1D of SAS control module harness
side connector.
NOTE:
4 NO.2)
min or more.
apply 2 ohms resistance to the passenger-side air bag
module connector terminals 1C and 1D.

No Replace the passengerside air bag module
(inflator No.2).
(See PASSENGER-SIDE AIR
BAG MODULE
Set the SST (fuel and thermometer checker) to 2

ohm.
Except for the passenger-side air bag module
displayed?
5
INSPECT DTCs
1min or more.

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
Connect the passenger-side air bag module connector.
completed.

again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2290
DTC B2290 Passenger sensing system malfunction

WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Passenger sensing system circuit malfunction
Seat weight sensor control module connector malfunction
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the SAS control module and seat weight
sensor
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the battery and the seat weight sensor
control module
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the seat weight sensor control module and
body ground
Seat weight sensor calibration not properly set
Communication error between SAS control module and seat weight sensor control module
Seat weight sensor control module internal malfunction
LH or RH seat weight sensor malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CONTROL

1 MODULE CONNECTOR
WARNING:
Handling the air bag system
components improperly can
accidentally operate (deploy) the air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read the service warnings and
cautions before handling the air bag
system components.
(See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS.)
CAUTIONS.)
position.
Disconnect the negative battery cable
and wait for 1 min or more.
Disconnect the seat weight sensor
Is there any malfunction of the seat
ACTION
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness.
After replacement, reperform the DTC inspection and verify
that no DTCs are displayed.
weight sensor control module

connector?
2 MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
position.
Measure voltage at terminal 3A of seat
weight sensor control module
connector.

No If there is any malfunction in the wiring harnesses, repair or
replace the applicable wiring harness.
NOTE:
Measure the voltage while shaking the
wiring harness between the relay and
main fuse block and seat weight
sensor control module.
Is voltage more than B+?
3
INSPECTION WIRING HARNESS

Disconnect the SAS control module
connector. (See SAS CONTROL
Verify continuity in the following wiring
harnesses:
Between SAS control
module terminal 1I
and seat weight
sensor control module
terminal 3D

No If there is any malfunction in the wiring harnesses, repair or
replace the applicable wiring harness.
Between seat weight

sensor control module
terminal 3B and body
ground
NOTE:
Inspect for continuity while shaking
the wiring harness between the SAS
control module and seat weight sensor
control module.
Is the continuity normal?
4
INSPECT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM

Connect the seat weight sensor
Connect the SAS control module.
Verify the following PIDs using the MMDS.
(See PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE.)
OCSFLT_CAL

No Perform the following procedures according to the M-MDS
screen indication:
If FAULT is displayed for OCSFLT_CAL:
Perform the seat weight
sensor calibration. (See
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
CALIBRATION.)
If FAULT is displayed for OCSFLT_COM or
OCSFLT_MDL:
OCSFLT_COM
Replace the seat weight

sensor control module.
(See SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR CONTROL
MODULE
OCSFLT_L
OCSFLT_MDL
OCSFLT_R
Do all PIDs display OK?
If FAULT is displayed for OCSFLT_L or

OCSFLT_R:

5 MODULE
position.
Disconnect the seat weight sensor
connector from the seat weight sensor
control module.
position.
following terminals:
CAUTION:
When measuring the
voltage at a terminal
of the seat weight
sensor control
module, measure it
being careful not to
bend or damage the
terminal.
YesReplace the seat weight sensor control module, then go to

the next step.
(See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
No
Replace the slide adjuster.

(See FRONT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTER
Perform the DTC inspection again.
If the same DTC is
displayed, replace the seat
weight sensor control
module, then go to the
next step.
(See SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR CONTROL
MODULE
Seat weight sensor

control module
terminal 1A (module
side) and body
ground
Seat weight sensor
control module
terminal 2A (module
side) and body
ground
6
INSPECT SAS CONTROL MODULE

Reperform the DTC inspection.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2296
DTC B2296 Crash zone sensor (communication error, internal circuit abnormal)
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

procedure.
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the crash zone sensor and SAS
control module
Malfunction in the crash zone sensor circuit
Crash zone sensor connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the crash zone sensor
and SAS control module
Crash zone sensor malfunction
Step
1
Inspection
INSPECT CRASH ZONE SENSOR CONNECTOR
WARNING:
min or more.
Disconnect the crash zone sensor connector. (See
CRASH ZONE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inspect the crash zone sensor connector. (Corrosion,
Is there any malfunction of the crash zone sensor
Action
YesReplace the crash zone
sensor wiring harness.
connector?
2 AND CRASH ZONE SENSOR
connector.
module connectors.
module connector terminal 1B and crash zone sensor
connector terminal A, and SAS control module terminal
1C and crash zone sensor connector terminal B for the
following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and crash zone
sensor.

module and the crash zone
sensor.
3 MODULE AND CRASH ZONE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR A

control module connector and crash zone sensor
connector disconnected.
terminals 1B and 1C of SAS control module harness
side connector.

module and the crash zone
sensor.
No Replace the crash zone
sensor, then go to the next
step.
(See CRASH ZONE SENSOR
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and crash zone
sensor.
4
PERFORM DTC INSPECTION


module.

min or more.
(See SAS CONTROL

MODULE
Reconnect all disconnected connectors

completed.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2434, B2435, B2691
B2434 Driverside front buckle switch circuit short to body ground

DTC B2435 Driver-side front buckle switch circuit resistance not within specification
B2691 Driverside front buckle switch circuit open or short to power supply
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

procedure.
Malfunction in the driver-side front buckle switch circuit
Driver-side front buckle switch connector malfunction
Driver-side front buckle switch malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the driver-side front
buckle switch and body ground
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the driver-side front
buckle switch and SAS control module
Step
1
Inspection
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE FRONT BUCKLE SWITCH CONNECTOR
WARNING:
min or more.
Disconnect the driver-side front buckle switch
connector. (See FRONT BUCKLE
Is there any malfunction of the driver-side front buckle
switch connector?
Action
front buckle switch wiring
harness.
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE FRONT BUCKLE SWITCH

Inspect the driver-side front buckle switch.
(See FRONT BUCKLE SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Is the driver-side front buckle switch normal?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN DRIVER-SIDE BUCKLE

3 SWITCH AND GROUND
Inspect the wiring harness between driver-side front
buckle switch terminal F and ground for the following:
Open circuit

front buckle.
(See FRONT BUCKLE
No Replace the wiring
harness.
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and driver-side front
buckle switch.
4 AND DRIVER-SIDE BUCKLE SWITCH
connector.
module connectors.

front buckle switch.

module connector terminal 2T and driver-side front
buckle switch connector terminal E, for the following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
buckle switch.
5 MODULE AND DRIVER-SIDE BUCKLE SWITCH FOR A SHORT
CIRCUIT TO THE POWER SUPPLY
control module connector and driver-side front buckle
switch connector disconnected.

terminals 2T of SAS control module harness side
connector.
NOTE:
buckle switch.
6
INSPECT DTCs
min or more.

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
completed.

Is DTC B2434, B2435 and/or B2691 displayed again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2438, B2439, B2692
B2438 Passengerside front buckle switch circuit short to body ground

DTC B2439 Passenger-side front buckle switch circuit resistance not within specification
B2692 Passengerside front buckle switch circuit open or short to power supply
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Malfunction in the passenger-side front buckle switch circuit
Passenger-side front buckle switch connector malfunction
Passenger-side front buckle switch malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the passenger-side front
buckle switch and body ground
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the passenger-side front
buckle switch and SAS control module
Step
Inspection
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE FRONT BUCKLE SWITCH

1 CONNECTOR
WARNING:
min or more.
Disconnect the passenger-side front buckle switch
connector. (See FRONT BUCKLE
Is there any malfunction of the passenger-side front
buckle switch connector?
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE FRONT BUCKLE SWITCH
Action
YesReplace the passenger-side
front buckle switch wiring
harness.
Inspect the passenger-side front buckle switch.

Is the passenger-side front buckle switch normal?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN PASSENGER-SIDE

3 BUCKLE SWITCH AND GROUND
Inspect the wiring harness between passenger-side front
buckle switch terminal F and ground for the following:

No Replace the passenger-side
(See FRONT BUCKLE
No Replace the wiring harness.
Open circuit
NOTE:
4 AND PASSENGER-SIDE BUCKLE SWITCH
connector.
module connectors.
module connectors.

module and the passengerside front buckle switch.

module connector terminal 2H and passenger-side front
buckle switch connector terminal E, for the following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
5 MODULE AND PASSENGER-SIDE BUCKLE SWITCH FOR A SHORT YesReplace the wiring harness
module and the passengerside front buckle switch.
control module connector and passenger-side front
buckle switch connector disconnected.

terminals 2H of SAS control module harness side
connector.
NOTE:
6
INSPECT DTCs
min or more.
Is DTC B2438, B2439 and/or B2692 displayed again?

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2444, U2017
B2444 Driverside side air bag sensor (internal circuit abnormal)

DTC
U2017 Driverside side air bag sensor (communication error)
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

procedure.
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the driver-side side air bag sensor
and SAS control module
Malfunction in the driver-side side air bag sensor circuit
Driver-side side air bag sensor connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the driver-side side air
bag sensor and SAS control module
Driver-side side air bag sensor malfunction
Step
1
Inspection
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR CONNECTOR
WARNING:
min or more.
Disconnect the driver-side side air bag sensor
connector. (See SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Inspect the driver-side side air bag sensor connector.
(Corrosion, damage, and disconnected pins)
Action
side air bag sensor wiring
harness.
Is there any malfunction of the driver-side side air bag

sensor connector?
2 AND DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR
connector.
connectors.
module connector terminal 2Z and driver-side side air
bag connector terminal A, and SAS control module
terminal 2AA and driver-side side air bag sensor
connector terminal B for the following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
air bag sensor.

side air bag sensor.

3 MODULE AND DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR FOR A
side air bag sensor.
control module connector and driver-side side air bag
sensor connector disconnected.
terminals 2Z and 2AA of SAS control module harness
side connector.

side air bag sensor, then
(See SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE
NOTE:
air bag sensor.
4


module.

min or more.
(See SAS CONTROL

MODULE

completed.

Are DTCs B2444 and/or U2017 displayed?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2445, U2018
B2445 Passengerside side air bag sensor (internal circuit abnormal)

DTC
U2018 Passengerside side air bag sensor (communication error)
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the passenger-side side air bag
sensor and SAS control module
Malfunction in the passenger-side side air bag sensor circuit
Passenger-side side air bag sensor connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the passenger-side side air
bag sensor and SAS control module
Passenger-side side air bag sensor malfunction
Step
1
Inspection
INSPECT RASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR CONNECTOR
WARNING:
or more.
Disconnect the passenger-side side air bag sensor
connector. (See SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR
Inspect the passenger-side side air bag sensor connector.
Is there any malfunction of the passenger-side side air
Action
YesReplace the passengerside side air bag sensor
wiring harness.
bag sensor connector?

2 AND RASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR

module and the passengerside side air bag sensor.

module connectors.
module connectors.
module connector terminal 2B and passenger-side side
air bag connector terminal A, and SAS control module
terminal 2C and passenger-side side air bag sensor
Open circuit
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and passenger-side side
air bag sensor.
3 MODULE AND RASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR FOR A


control module connector and passenger-side side air bag
terminals 2B and 2C of SAS control module harness side
connector.
side side air bag sensor.

No Replace the passengerside side air bag sensor,
(See SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and passenger-side side
air bag sensor.
4


module.

or more.
(See SAS CONTROL

MODULE

completed.

Are DTCs B2445 and/or U2018 displayed?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2773, B2774, B2775, B2776
B2773 Driverside curtain air bag module circuit resistance low

B2774 Driverside curtain air bag module circuit resistance high
DTC
B2775 Driverside curtain air bag module circuit short to body ground
B2776 Driverside curtain air bag module circuit short to power supply
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

procedure.
curtain air bag module circuit
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the driver-side curtain air bag
Driver-side curtain air bag module connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the driver-side curtain
air bag module and SAS control module
Driver-side curtain air bag module malfunction
Step
Inspection
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE

1 CONNECTOR
WARNING:
min or more.
Remove the headliner.
(See HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Disconnect the driver-side curtain air bag module
connector. (See CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Action
curtain air bag module
wiring harness.
Is there any malfunction of the driver-side curtain air

2 AND DRIVER-SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
connector.
Disconnect the passenger-side curtain air bag module
connectors.
module connectors.
module connector terminal 2Y and driver-side curtain
air bag module connector terminal A, and SAS control
module terminal 2V and driver-side curtain air bag
module connector terminal B for the following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and driver-side
curtain air bag module.


3 MODULE AND DRIVER-SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE FOR YesReplace the wiring harness
A SHORT CIRCUIT TO THE POWER SUPPLY
control mudule connector and driver-side curtain air
bag module connector disconnected.

terminals 2Y and 2V of SAS control module harness
side connector.
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and driver-side
4
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE

min or more.
apply 2 ohms resistance to the driver-side curtain air

(See CURTAIN AIR BAG
MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.))

ohms.
Except for the driver-side curtain air bag module
displayed?
5
INSPECT DTCs
1min or more.

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE

Connect the driver-side curtain air bag module
connector.
completed.

again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2777, B2778, B2779, B2780
B2777 Passengerside curtain air bag module circuit resistance low

B2778 Passengerside curtain air bag module circuit resistance high
DTC
B2779 Passengerside curtain air bag module circuit short to body ground
B2780 Passengerside curtain air bag module circuit short to power supply
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Abnormal resistance (other than 1.43.2 ohms) detected in the passengerside curtain air bag module circuit
Malfunction in the wiring harness between the passenger-side curtain air bag
Passenger-side curtain air bag module connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the passenger-side curtain
air bag module and SAS control module
Passenger-side curtain air bag module malfunction
Step
Inspection
INSPECT PASSENGERSIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE

1 CONNECTOR
WARNING:
Handling the component parts improperly can accidentally
operate (deploy) the air bag module, which may seriously
injure you. Read the service warnings/cautions and the
workshop manual before handling the air bag system
components.
or more.
Remove the headliner.
Disconnect the passenger-side curtain air bag module
connector. (See CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Is there any malfunction of the passenger-side curtain air
Action
YesReplace the passenger-side
curtain air bag module
wiring harness.

2 AND PASSENGERSIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE

module and the passengerside curtain air bag
module.

Disconnect the driver-side curtain air bag module
connectors.
module connectors.
Inspect the wiring harnesses between SAS control module
connector terminal 2D and passenger-side curtain air bag
module connector terminal A, and SAS control module
terminal 2A and passenger-side curtain air bag module
Open circuit
NOTE:
3 MODULE AND PASSENGERSIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE FOR YesReplace the wiring harness
A SHORT CIRCUIT TO THE POWER SUPPLY

control module connevtor and passenger-side curtain air
bag module connector disconnected.
side curtain air bag

module.

terminals 2D and 2A of SAS control module harness side
connector.
NOTE:
4
INSPECTPASSENGERSIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE

or more.
apply 2 ohms resistance to the passenger-side curtain air

No Replace the passenger-side
(See CURTAIN AIR BAG
MODULE
Set the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) to 2 ohms.

Except for the passenger-side curtain air bag module
5
INSPECT DTCs
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1min
or more.
Disconnect the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) or
the 2 ohms resistance.
Connect the passenger-side curtain air bag module
connector.

module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
completed.

again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2867
DTC B2867 Poor connection of any SAS control module connectors

WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

procedure.
There is no continuity between the poor connection detector bar terminals of
the SAS control module.
Malfunction of any SAS control module connectors
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Poor connection of any SAS control module connectors

STEP
INSPECTION
VERIFY THAT ALL SAS CONTROL MODULE

1 CONNECTORS ARE CONNECTED WITH SAS
CONTROL MODULE
WARNING:
ACTION
No Reconnect the connector properly.
Handling the air bag system

components improperly can
accidentally deploy the air bag
modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read the service warnings and
cautions before handling the air bag
system components.
WARNINGS.)
CAUTIONS.)
position.
Are all SAS control module connectors
securely connected?
INSPECT ALL SAS CONTROL MODULE
2 CONNECTORS
Disconnect the clock spring
connector.
Disconnect the passenger-side air
bag module connector.
Disconnect the driver and passengerside side air bag module connectors.
Disconnect the driver and passengerside curtain air bag module
connectors.
Yes
[Present malfunction
diagnosis]
Replace the SAS control
module.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE
[Past malfunction
diagnosis]
DTC troubleshooting
completed.
No Replace the air bag wiring harness.
Disconnect the driver and passengerside pre-tensioner seat belt

connectors.
Disconnect the SAS control module
connector.
Are the poor connection detector bars
of SAS control module connectors
normal?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC C1947, C1948, C1981
C1947 Seat track position sensor circuit short to body ground

DTC C1948 Seat track position sensor circuit resistance not within specification
C1981 Seat track position sensor circuit open or short to power supply
WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Malfunction in seat track position sensor circuit.
Seat track position sensor connector malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between seat track position sensor and
SAS control module.
Seat track position sensor malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR
WARNING:
can accidentally deploy the air bag modules and pretensioner seat belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read the service warnings and cautions before
min or more.
Disconnect the seat track position sensor connector.
Inspect the seat track position sensor connection.
Is there any malfunction of the seat track position
sensor connector?
ACTION
YesReplace the seat track
position sensor wiring
harness.
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN SEAT TRACK POSITION

2 SENSOR AND SAS CONTROL MODULE

module and the seat track
position sensor.

connector.
module connectors.
module connector terminal 2W and seat track position
sensor connector terminal A, and SAS control module
terminal 2X and seat track position sensor connector
terminal B for the following:
Open circuit
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and seat track
position sensor.
3 MODULE AND SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR FOR A SHORT YesReplace the wiring harness
module and the seat track

position sensor.

control module connector and seat track position
terminals 2W and 2X of SAS control module harness
side connector.
No Replace the seat track

position sensor, then go to
the next step.
NOTE:
between the SAS control module and seat track
position sensor.
4


module.

min or more.
(See SAS CONTROL

MODULE

completed.

Are DTCs C1947, C1948 and/or C1981 displayed?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2477
DTC B2477 Configuration error

WARNING:
procedure.
DETECTION
CONDITION
SAS control module configuration has not been performed correctly.

SAS control module configuration setting not implemented
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
SAS control module configuration error

STEP
1
INSPECTION
Using the M-MDS, perform SAS control module
configuration. (See SAS CONTROL MODULE
CONFIGURATION.)
ACTION
module.
completed.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1017
DTC B1017 Deployment prohibited because configuration is not set

WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION

performing an inspection. Performing an inspection with only detection
conditions may cause injury due to an operating error, or damage the
system. When performing an inspection, always follow the inspection
procedure.
SAS control module configuration has not been set
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
SAS control module configuration has not been set

INSPECTION
CONFIGRATION
Using the MMDS, perform SAS control
module configuration.
ACTION
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
Air bag system warning light does not illuminate
DESCRIPTION Air bag system warning light does not illuminate while the air bag system is performing
initialization.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Instrument cluster (circuit board) malfunction

Short to ground circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and
SAS control module
points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If there is a problem, verify that
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT OTHER WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS CIRCUIT

1 IN INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
YesTurn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, then
Switch the ignition to on.
Do other warning and indicator lights illuminate?
No Inspect instrument cluster

power supply system and
ground system the, then
go to Step 4.
WARNING:
module, then go to Step

4.
(See SAS CONTROL
MODULE

Switch the ignition to off.
min or more.
Disconnect the passengerside air bag module
connector.
Disconnect the driver and passengerside side air bag
module connectors.
Disconnect the driver and passengerside curtain air
Remove the rear door lower trim. (See REAR DOOR
Disconnect the driver and passengerside pre
tensioner seat belt connectors.
Disconnect all SAS control module connectors.
Does the air bag system warning light illuminate?
YesReplace the wiring
*3 AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FOR SHORT TO GROUND
harness, then go to the
next step.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.

cluster, then go to the
next step.
Is there continuity between terminal 2K of the

instrument cluster connector and ground?
CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS DO NOT RECUR

4 AFTER REPAIR
min or more.
Connect all disconnected SAS system connectors
during diagnosis.
(See INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
YesComplete troubleshooting,
then explain repairs to
customer.
No Recheck malfunction
symptoms, then repeat
from Step 1 if malfunction
recurs.

Does the air bag system warning light operate
properly?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX
Use the chart below verify the symptoms of the trouble in order to diagnose the
appropriate area.
No.
Troubleshooting item
Description
Page
1 Air bag system warning

light does not illuminate
Air bag system warning light does

not illuminate while the air bag
system is performing initialization.
(See NO.1 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING

LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE.)
2 Air bag system warning

light is illuminated
constantly
Air bag system warning light is

illuminated constantly and remains
illuminated after 6 s have elapsed.
(See NO.2 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING

LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED
CONSTANTLY.)
3 Passenger air bag

deactivation (PAD)
indicator light illuminates
incorrectly
PAD indicator light

illuminates except
child seated (Empty
or adult is seated).
(See NO.3 PASSENGER AIR BAG

DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR
LIGHT ILLUMINATES INCORRECTLY.)
PAD indicator light

does not illuminate
while child is seated.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AIR BAG SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM (SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED CONSTANTLY
Air bag system warning light is illuminated constantly
DESCRIPTION Air bag system warning light is illuminated constantly and remains illuminated after 6 s
have elapsed.
Weak battery
No connection in SAS control module connector
Open or short to power supply circuit in wiring harness between
instrument cluster and SAS control module
Instrument cluster (circuit board) malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Poor contact in instrument cluster connector (24-pin)

Poor contact at terminals 1T, 1X and/or 1W of SAS control module
connector
Poor contact in wiring harness between battery and terminal 1W of SAS
control module
Poor contact in wiring harness between terminal 1X of SAS control module
connector and ground
points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If there is a problem, verify that
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT BATTERY
Measure the voltage of battery.
ACTION
No Battery is weak.
Inspect charge/discharge
system, then go to Step 9.
(See BATTERY
INSPECTION [13B-MSP])
VERIFY THAT SAS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR IS

2 CONNECTED
WARNING:

No Reconnect the connector
properly, then go to Step
9.

min or more.
Turn up the floor covering.
Are all SAS control module connectors securely
connected?
* 3 AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FOR CONTINUITY
Disconnect the passengerside air bag module
connector.
Disconnect the driver and passengerside side air bag
module connectors.
Disconnect the driver and passengerside curtain air

harness, then go to Step
9.
Remove the rear door lower trims. (See REAR DOOR

Disconnect the driver and passengerside pre
tensioner seat belt connectors.
Disconnect all SAS control module connectors.
Is there continuity between SAS control module
connector terminal 1T and instrument cluster
connector terminal 2K?
* 4 AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY YesReplace the wiring
harness, then go to Step
9.
terminal 2K.

CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN AIR BAG
5 SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT IN INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Connect instrument cluster connector terminal 2K to
ground, then reconnect the connector
Does the air bag system warning light illuminate with
ignition switch ON?
YesReplace the instrument

cluster, then go to Step 9.
(See INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OF SAS CONTROL MODULE

6 (TERMINAL 1W)
min or more.
during diagnosis.
Connect the driver and passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connectors.
Connect the driver and passengerside curtain air bag
module connectors.
Connect the driver and passengerside side air bag

module connectors.
Connect the passengerside air bag module connector.
Inspect the voltage for PID/DATA monitor IGN_V_2
item using M-MDS.
Is the voltage of at least one terminal 9 V or more?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY AND FUSE
7 BLOCK
terminal 1G.

No Repair the wiring
harnesses, then go to
Step 9.

VERIFY THAT SAS CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR TERMINAL
8 1X IS GROUND
module, then go to the
next step.
Inspect the wiring harness between SAS control
module connector terminal 1X and ground for the
(See SAS CONTROL
following:
MODULE
Short to power supply
Open circuit
CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS DO NOT RECUR
9 AFTER REPAIR
min or more.
during diagnosis.
Connect the driver and passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connectors.
Connect the driver and passengerside curtain air bag
module connectors.
Connect the driver and passengerside side air bag
module connectors.

harnesses, then go to the
next step.
YesComplete troubleshooting,
then explain repairs to
customer.
No Recheck malfunction
symptoms, then repeat
from Step 1 if malfunction
recurs.
Connect the passengerside air bag module connector.

Connect the instrument cluster connector.
Does the air bag system warning light operate
properly?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR LIGHT
ILLUMINATES INCORRECTLY
Passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator light illuminates incorrectly
DESCRIPTION
PAD indicator light illuminates except child is seated (Empty or adult is

seated).
PAD indicator light does not illuminate while child is seated.
Seat weight sensor calibration procedure does not complete
Seat weight sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PAD indicator or related circuit malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
PERFORM SAS CONTROL MODULE SALF-TEST
ACTION
YesGo to the applicable DTC troubleshooting

procedure.
Perform the SAS control module selftest procedure. (See DTC TABLE.)
Are there following DTCs displayed?

B1013, B1884,
B1890, B2438,
B2439
VERIFY SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION
2 PROCEDURE COMPLETED
Access OCS_CAL_ST PID for SAS
control module using the M-MDS.

No Perform the seat weight sensor calibration
Does the OCS_CAL_ST PID indicate

Normal End?
VERIFY RECONIZED SEAT WEIGHT BY SAS
3 CONTROL MODULE
Access OCS_SYS_ST PID for SAS
control module using the M-MDS.
Does the OCS_SYS_ST PID indicate
correctly for passenger seat
condition?
4
VERIFY PASSENGER SEAT BELT BUCKLE SIGNAL

Access PS_BUKL PID for SAS control
module using the M-MDS.
Does the PS_BUKL PID indicate
passenger seat belt buckle condition
correctly?
INSPECT PAD INDICATOR LIGHT

Ground information display connector
terminal I using a jumper wire.
Dose the PAD indicator light
illuminate?
procedure, then go to Step.

CALIBRATION.)
No Inspection seat weight sensor, then go to
Step.
(See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION.)

No Inspect the passenger seat belt buckle
switch, then go to Step.
YesReplace the SAS control module, then go to

the next step.
No Replace the information display, then go to
the next step.
(See INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYSPMTOMS DO

YesComplete troubleshooting, then explain
6 NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
repairs customer.
Connect all disconnected connectors.
Recheck the PAD indicator light
condition.
Does the PAD indicator operate
normally?

repeat form Step 1 if malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LOCATION INDEX
1 Driver-side air bag module

(See AIR BAG MODULE AND PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES.)
2 Passenger-side air bag module
(See PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

3 Side air bag module
(See SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4 Curtain air bag module
(See CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5 Pre-tensioner seat belt
6 SAS control module
7 Crash zone sensor
(See CRASH ZONE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8 Side air bag sensor
(See SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9 Clock spring
(See CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION.)
(See CLOCK SPRING ADJUSTMENT.)
10Seat weight sensor cotrol module
(See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11Seat weight sensor
(See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION.)
(See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CRASH ZONE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Handling the crash zone sensor improperly can accidentally deploy the air bags and pretensioner seat belts, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings and
cautions before handling the crash zone sensor. (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS.) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS.)
4. Remove the air cleaner box. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
5. Remove the air cleaner box tray. (See INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
1Nut
2Crash zone sensor
3Connector

9. Verify that the air bag system warning light illuminates for approx. 6 s and goes out.
If the air bag system warning light does not operate normally, refer to the onboard diagnostic system (air bag system) and perform inspection of the system.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Handling the air bag module improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag
module, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings and cautions before
handling the air bag module. (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.) (See AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS.)
If the side air bag module is installed with debris in the seat back, the foreign material
may be scattered when the side air bag module operates (deploys), causing injury. Verify
that there is no foreign material in the seat back before installing the side air bag module.
3. Remove the front seat back trim. (See FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the front seat cushion. (See FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the clip as shown in the figure.
6. Remove the nuts.
7. Remove the side air bag module.

Band Installation Note

1. Install the band with the end pointed to the front.
2. Cut off the end of the band at the position shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Handling the air bag module improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag module, which
may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings and cautions before handling the air
bag module. (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
CAUTIONS.)
a. A-pillar trim (See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Tire house trim (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Rear pillar trim (See REAR PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Headliner (See HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Head inpact pad (See HEAD IMPACT PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Connector
2Bolt
3Curtain air bag module

6. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position verify that the air bag system warning
light illuminates for approx. 6 s and goes out.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INSPECTION OF SST (DEPLOYMENT TOOL)
1. Before using the SST (49 H066 002), inspect its operation.
Inspection Procedure
1. Follow the steps below to inspect the SST (49 H066 002).
If not as indicated in the table, replace the SST (49 H066 002) because it has a
malfunction.
WARNING:
Do not use a malfunctioning SST (49 H066 002), otherwise it could cause the
air bag module or pre-tensioner seat belt to accidentally operate (deploy).
CAUTION:
Because the permissible voltage for the SST (49 H066 002) is 12 V, do not
connect a 24 V power source because it will damage the SST. Always connect
only a 12 V power source.
Step
Light
condition
Green Red
1 Connect the power supply red clip to the positive battery terminal, and the black
clip to the negative battery terminal.
On Off
2 Connect connectors A and B.
Off
3 Press the activation switch.
On Off
< Previous Next >
On
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AIR BAG MODULE AND PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES
WARNING:
A live (undeployed) air bag module or pre-tensioner seat belt may accidentally operate (deploy) when
it is disposed of and cause serious injury. Do not dispose of a live (undeployed) air bag module and
pre-tensioner seat belt. If the SSTs (Deployment tool and Adapter harness) are not available, consult
the nearest Mazda representative for assistance.
CAUTION:
Deploying the air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belts inside the vehicle may cause damage to
the vehicle interior. When the vehicle is not to be scrapped, always deploy the air bag modules and
pre-tensioner seat belts outside the vehicle.
If the vehicle is to be scrapped, or when disposing of any air bag modules or pre-tensioner seat belts,
operate (deploy) them inside the vehicle by following the deployment procedure below and using the
SST (Deployment tool).
When disposing of a operated (deployed) air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt, refer to AIR
BAG MODULE AND PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT DISPOSAL PROCEDURES.
Deployment Procedure for Inside of Vehicle

1. Inspect the SST (Deployment tool). (See INSPECTION OF SST (DEPLOYMENT TOOL).)
2. Move the vehicle to an open space, away from strong winds, and close all of the vehicle doors and
windows.
5. Follow the procedure below for operating (deploying) the applicable air bag module or pre-tensioner seat
belt.
Driver-side air bag module

WARNING:
The driver-side air bag module is a dual inflator type. If one inflator is forced to operate (deploy), the
other may operate (deploy) accidentally. To prevent injury while disposing of the air bag module,
make sure to operate (deploy) both driver-side air bag module inflators simultaneously, following the
procedure below.
NOTE:
The SSTs, two types of adapter harnesses (for inflators No.1 and No.2) and two deployment tools are
to be used to operate (deploy) the driver-side air bag module.
1. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Connect the SSTs (Adapter harness) to the driver-side air bag module as shown in the figure.
3. Install the driver-side air bag module. (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Connect the SSTs (Deployment tool) to the SSTs (Adapter harness).
5. Connect both SSTs (Deployment tool) to the battery. Connect the power supply red clip to the positive
battery terminal, and the black clip to the negative battery terminal.
6. Verify that the red lamp on both SSTs (Deployment tool) is illuminated.
7. Verify that all persons are standing at least 6 m {20 ft} away from the vehicle.
8. Press the activation switch on the SST (Deployment tool) connected with 49 L066 002 (a yellow
connector) of the SST (Adapter harness), and after 3 s, press the activation switch on the other SST
(Deployment tool) to operate (deploy) the air bag module (both inflators).
WARNING:
Verify that air bag module operation (explosive) sound occurs twice. If no operation
(explosive) sound was heard or a single operation (explosive) sound was heard, both
inflators would not have operated (deployed) properly. This may cause serious injury
because the air bag module may operate (deploy) accidentally. If the two operation
(explosive) sounds are not heard, perform Step 8 again. In case that the two operation
(explosive) sounds in total are not verified even though Step 8 is performed again, leave
the air bag module alone for 30 min or more before getting near it again.
The air bag module is very hot immediately after it is operated (deployed). You can get
burned. Do not touch the air bag module for at least 15 min after deployment.
9. Disconnect the SSTs (Deployment tool) from the SSTs (Adapter harness).
Passenger-side air bag module

WARNING:
The passenger-side air bag module is a dual inflator type. If one inflator is forced to operate (deploy),
the other may operate (deploy) accidentally. To prevent injury while disposing of the air bag module,
make sure to operate (deploy) both passenger-side air bag module inflators simultaneously, following
the procedure below.
NOTE:
The SSTs, two types of adapter harnesses (for inflators No.1 and No.2) and two deployment tools are
to be used to operate (deploy) the passenger-side air bag module.
2. Disconnect the passenger-side air bag module connector.
3. Connect the SSTs (Adapter harness) to the passenger-side air bag module as shown in the figure.
WARNING:
The air bag module is very hot immediately after it is operated (deployed). You can be
Side air bag module

1. Disconnect the side air bag module connector.
2. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the side air bag module as shown in the figure.
3. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST (Adapter harness).
4. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the battery. Connect the power supply red clip to the positive
5. Verify that the red lamp on the SST (Deployment tool) is illuminated.
7. Press the activation switch on the SST (Deployment tool) to operate (deploy) the side air bag module.
Curtain air bag module

1. Remove the tire house trim. (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the curtain air bag module connector.
3. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the curtain air bag module as shown in the figure.
8. Press the activation switch on the SST (Deployment tool) to operate (deploy) the curtain air bag module.
1. Remove the rear door lower trim. (See REAR DOOR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the pre-tensioner seat belt and connect the SST (Adapter harness) as shown in the figure. (See
FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Install the pre-tensioner seat belt.

8. Press the activation switch on the SST (Deployment tool) to operate (deploy) the pre-tensioner seat belt.
Deployment Procedure for Outside of Vehicle

1. Inspect the SST (Deployment tool). (See INSPECTION OF SST (DEPLOYMENT TOOL).)
4. Follow the procedure below for operating (deploying) the applicable air bag module or pre-tensioner seat
belt.
Driver-side air bag module

WARNING:
The driver-side air bag module is a dual inflator type. If one inflator is forced to operate (deploy), the
other may operate (deploy) accidentally. To prevent injury while disposing of the air bag module,
make sure to operate (deploy) both driver-side air bag module inflators simultaneously, following the
procedure below.
1. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Connect the SSTs (Adapter harness) to the driver-side air bag module as shown in the figure.
3. Place the driver-side air bag module on the center of the tire wheel with the padded surface facing up.
To secure the air bag module to the tire wheel, wrap a wire (cross section 1.25 mm2 {0.002 in 2 } or
more) through the wheel and the bolt installation holes of the air bag module at least 4 times.
WARNING:
If the air bag module is not properly installed to the tire wheel, serious injury may occur
when the module is operated (deployed). When installing the air bag module to the tire
wheel, make sure the padded surface is facing up.
4. Stack three tires without wheels on top of the tire with the driver-side air bag module, and then stack
another tire with a wheel on the very top.
5. Secure the tires with wire.
WARNING:
Passenger-side air bag module

WARNING:
The passenger-side air bag module is a dual inflator type. If one inflator is forced to operate (deploy),
the other may operate (deploy) accidentally. To prevent injury while disposing of the air bag module,
make sure to operate (deploy) both passenger-side air bag module inflators simultaneously, following
the procedure below.
1. Remove the passenger-side air bag module. (See PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
2. Install the bolts to the passenger-side air bag module.
3. Connect the SSTs (Adapter harness) to the passenger-side air bag module as shown in the figure.
4. Place the padded surface of the passenger-side air bag module facing the center of the tire as shown in
the figure. To secure the air bag module to the tire wheel, wrap a wire (cross section 1.25 mm2 {0.002
in 2 } or more) through the tire and around the bolts at least 4 times.
WARNING:
If the air bag module is not properly installed to the tire, serious injury may occur when
the module is operated (deployed). When installing the air bag module to the tire, make
sure the padded surface is facing the center of the tire.
5. Stack the tire with the passenger-side air bag module on top of two tires without wheels. Stack a tire
without a wheel on top of the tire with the passenger-side air bag module, and then stack another tire with
a wheel on the very top.
WARNING:
Side air bag module

1. Remove the side air bag module. (See SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Install the nuts to the side air bag module as shown in the figure, and connect the SST (Adapter
harness).
3. Place the padded surface of the side air bag module facing the center of the tire as shown in the figure.
To secure the air bag module to the tire wheel, wrap a wire (cross section 1.25 mm2 {0.002 in 2 } or
more) through the tire and around the brackets at least 4 times.
WARNING:
the module is operated (deployed). When installing the air bag module to the tire, make
sure the padded surface is facing the center of the tire.
4. Stack the tire with the side air bag module on top of two tires without wheels. Stack a tire without a
wheel on top of the tire with the side air bag module, and then stack another tire with a wheel on the very
top.
10. Press the activation switch on the SST (Deployment tool) to operate (deploy) the side air bag module.
Curtain air bag module

1. Remove the curtain air bag module. (See CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Secure the curtain air bag module in a vise, and cut off the deployment section, as shown in the figure.
WARNING:
Be sure not to crush the pipe on the side where it is cut. If it is crushed completely, the
interior pressure of the pipe will build up and can cause it to explode during air bag module
operation (deployment).
3. Secure the curtain air bag module to the tire, by wrapping a wire (cross section 1.25 mm2 {0.002
in 2 } or more) through the tire and the bolt installation holes at least 4 times as shown in the figure.
WARNING:
the module is operated (deployed). Make sure to install the air bag module securely.
4. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the curtain air bag module as shown in the figure.
5. Stack the tire with the curtain air bag module on top of two tires without wheels. Stack a tire without a
wheel on top of the tire with the curtain air bag module, and then stack another tire with a wheel on the
very top.
11. Press the activation switch on the SST (Deployment tool) to operate (deploy) the curtain air bag
module.

1. Remove the pre-tensioner seat belt. (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
WARNING:
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not properly installed to the tire, serious injury may occur
when the pre-tensioner part is operated (deployed). When installing the pre-tensioner seat
belt to the tire, make sure the pre-tensioner part is inside the tire.
2. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the pre-tensioner seat belt as shown in the figure.
3. Put the pre-tensioner seat belt inside the tire and secure it to the tire by wrapping a wire (cross section
1.25 mm2 {0.002 in 2 } or more) through the tire and the bolt installation holes at least 4 times.
4. Stack the tire with the pre-tensioner seat belt on top of two tires without wheels. Stack a tire without a
wheel on top of the tire with the pre-tensioner seat belt, and then stack another tire with a wheel on the
very top.
10. Press the activation switch on the SST (Deployment tool) to operate (deploy) the pre-tensioner seat
belt.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AIR BAG MODULE AND PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
WARNING:
A live (undeployed) air bag module or pre-tensioner seat belt may accidentally operate
(deploy) when it is disposed of and cause serious injury. Always refer to the AIR BAG
MODULE AND PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES and dispose of air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belts in a deployed condition.
The air bag modules and the pre-tensioner seat belts are very hot immediately after they
are deployed. You can be burned. Do not touch an air bag module and pre-tensioner seat
belt for at least 15 min after deployment.
Pouring water on the deployed air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt is dangerous.
The water will mix with the residual gases to form a gas that can make breathing difficult.
Do not pour water on the deployed air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt.
The deployed air bag module or pre-tensioner seat belt may contain deposits of sodium
hydroxide, a caustic byproduct of the gas-generated combustion. If this substance gets
into your eyes or on your hands, it can cause irritation and itching. When handling the
deployed air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt, wear gloves and safety glasses.
Due to the adoption of 2-step deployment control in both the driver and passenger-side air
bag modules, depending on the impact force, it is possible that inflator No.2 might not
operate (deploy). Before disposing of the air bag module, always follow the inflator
deployment procedures and verify the complete operation (deployment) of inflators No.1
and 2.
1. Remove the deployed air bag module or pre-tensioner seat belt.
2. Put the air bag module or pre-tensioner seat belt in a plastic bag, seal the bag, and then
dispose of it.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
CAUTIONS.)
3. Remove the bolts.
4. Using a flathead screwdriver, lift the locking device carefully, however do not remove it.
5. Disconnect the air bag module connector.

6. Disconnect the horn switch connector.
7. Remove the driver-side air bag module.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SAS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Handling the SAS control module improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag modules
and pre-tensioner seat belt, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings
and cautions before handling the air bag module. (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS.) (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS.)
CAUTION:
Handling the SAS control module improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag modules
and pre-tensioner seat belt, which may seriously injure you. If configuration is not
completed before removing the SAS control module, DTC B1342 will be displayed.
1. Perform SAS control module configuration when replacing it. (See SAS CONTROL MODULE
CONFIGURATION.)
b. Glove compartment (See GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Side panel (See SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Lower panel (See LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Column cover (See COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Steering shaft (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. A-pillar trim (See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Dashboard (See DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Connector
2Bolt
3SAS control module

If the SAS control module is replaced, turn the ignition switch to the ON
position for 20 s or more after completing the configuration.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SAS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION
Select Module Programming.
Select Programming.
Select Programmable Module Installation.
Select RCM.
If a DTC(s) is detected, perform the applicable DTC inspection. (See DTC
TABLE.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When the seat weight sensor control module is replaced with a new one, perform the seat
weight sensor calibration using the M-MDS. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION.)
4. Remove the front passengers seat (See FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Connector
2Nut
3Seat weight sensor control module
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION
CAUTION:
If any of the following work is performed, perform the seat weight sensor calibration using
the M-MDS.
Replacement with a new seat weight sensor
Replacement with a new seat weight sensor control module
Replacement with new passenger-side seat parts
Disassembly of the passenger-side seat
If any of the following work is performed, perform the seat weight sensor inspection using
the M-MDS. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION.)
Removal of the passenger-side seat
Loosening and retightening of passengers seat fixing bolts
Or, the vehicle is involved in a collision
1. Have two 20 kg {44 lb} weights ready to use.
2. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2 connector.
Select Body.
Select Restraints.
Select All Tests and Calibrations.
4. Then, select item from the screen menu in the following order.
Select Passenger Seat Weight Sensor ReZero.
5. Perform calibration following the procedures on the M-MDS screen.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION
CAUTION:
the M-MDS.
Loosening and retightening of passengers seat fixing bolts
Or, the vehicle is involved in a collision
the M-MDS. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION.)
Replacement with new passenger-side seat parts
1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2 (16-pin).
1. Select Body.
2. Select Restraints.
1. Select All Tests and Calibrations.
3. Then, select item from the screen menu in the following order.
1. Select Passenger Seat Weight Sensor ReZero.
4. Perform inspection following the procedures on the M-MDS screen.
CAUTION:
Because the seat belt rail is installed to the seat weight sensor bracket, do not apply a
load to the seat belt rail during the inspection.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
CAUTIONS.)
Due to the adoption of 2-step deployment control in the passenger-side air bag module,
depending on the impact force, it is possible that inflator No.2 might not deploy. In such
cases, before disposing of the air bag module, make sure to follow the inflator deployment
procedures and verify complete deployment of inflators No.1 and 2.
1Bolt
2Connector
3Passenger-side air bag module

If the air bag system warning light does not operate, refer to the on-board
diagnostic system (air bag system) and perform inspection of the system.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
For vehicles with DSC: If the disc on the combination switch is deformed or has foreign
material adhering to it, performance of the steering angle sensor may be reduced, causing
abnormal operation. When handling the clock spring, be careful not to deform the disc and
make sure there is no foreign material on it.
3. Remove the steering wheel.
4. Remove the column cover. (See COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Screw
2Connector
3Clock spring.
(See Clock Spring Installation Note.)

Clock Spring Installation Note

CAUTION:
If the clock spring is not adjusted, the spring wire in the clock spring could over-wind and
break when the steering wheel is turned. Always adjust the clock spring after installing it.
1. Adjust the clock spring after installing it. (See CLOCK SPRING ADJUSTMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLOCK SPRING ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:
The adjustment procedure is also specified on the caution label of the clock spring.
1. Set the front tires straight-ahead.
CAUTION:
The clock spring will break if over-wound. Do not forcibly turn the clock spring.
2. Turn the clock spring clockwise until it stops.
3. From the stopped position, turn the clock spring counterclockwise 2 3/4 turns.
4. Align the marks.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION
2. Remove the steering wheel.
3. Remove the clock spring. (See CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
If not as indicated in the table, replace the clock spring.
NOTE:
When the vehicle-side connector for the clock spring is disconnected, terminals 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D are shorted to prevent
unexpected operation (deployment) of the air bag module.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS
Air Bag System Component Disassembly

Disassembling the air bag system components could cause it to not operate
(deploy) normally. Never disassemble any air bag system components.
Air Bag Module, Pre-tensioner Seat Belt Handling

Oil, grease, or water on the air bag modules may cause the air bags and pretensioner seat belts to fail to operate (deploy) in an accident. Never allow oil,
grease, or water to get on the air bag modules or pre-tensioner seat belts.
Inserting a screwdriver or similar object into the connector of an air bag
module or a pre-tensioner seat belt may damage the connector and cause the
air bag module or the pre-tensioner seat belt to operate (deploy) improperly,
which may cause serious injury. Never insert any foreign objects into the air
bag module or seat belt connectors.
Seat Weight Sensor Handling

The seat weight sensor has a built-in strain gauge which may operate
improperly if the sensor is dropped by itself or when installed to the seat. If it
is dropped, replace the seat weight sensor with a new one.
Oil, grease, or water on the seat weight sensor may cause the system to
operate (deploy) improperly. Never allow oil, grease, or water to get on the
seat weight sensor.
Foreign material in the seat weight sensor components may cause the system
to operate (deploy) improperly. Always make sure that no foreign material can
get into the seat weight sensor.
Disassembling the seat weight sensor, or tightening any of the nuts and bolts
installed to the sensor body may cause it to operate (deploy) improperly. Never
disassemble the seat weight sensor or tighten any of the nuts or bolts installed
to the body of the sensor.
Air Bag Module, Pre-tensioner Seat Belt Reuse

Even if an air bag module or a pre-tensioner seat belt does not operate (deploy)
in a collision and does not have any external signs of damage, it may have been
damaged internally, which may cause improper operation. Before reusing a live
(undeployed) air bag module and the pre-tensioner seat belts, always use the
on-board diagnostic to diagnose the air bag module and the pre-tensioner seat
belts to verify that they have no malfunction.
Air Bag Wiring Harness Repair

Incorrectly repairing an air bag wiring harness can accidentally operate
(deploy) the air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belts. If a problem is found
in the air bag wiring harness, always replace the wiring harness with a new
one.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS
Air Bag Module Inspection

Inspecting an air bag module using a tester can operate (deploy) the air bag
module, which may cause serious injury. Do not use a tester to inspect an air
bag module. Always use the on-board diagnostic function to diagnose the air
bag module for malfunctions.
Air Bag Module Handling

Before removing the air bag module or disconnecting the air bag module
connector, always turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, disconnect the
negative battery cable, and then wait for 1 min or more to allow the backup
power supply of the SAS control module to deplete its stored power.
Handling a live (undeployed) air bag module that is pointed toward your body
could result in serious injury if the air bag module were to accidentally operate
(deploy). When carrying a live (undeployed) air bag module, point the
deployment surface away from your body to lessen the chance of injury in case
it operates (deploys).
A live (undeployed) air bag module placed with its deployment surface to
ground is dangerous. If the air bag module were to accidentallyrate (deploy), it
could cause serious injury. Always place a live (undeployed) air bag module
with its deployment surface up.
Side Air Bag Module Handling

When a side air bag module operates (deploys) due to a collision, the interior of
the seat back (pad, frame, trim) may become damaged. If a side air bag does
not operate (deploy) normally from a seat back that has been reused, a serious
accident may result. After a side air bag has operated (deployed), always
replace both the side air bag module and the seat back (pad, frame, trim) with
new parts. After servicing, verify that the seat operates normally and that the
wiring harness is not caught.
Seat Weight Sensor Handling

The passenger-side seat and the seat weight sensor may become deformed or
otherwise damaged due to operation (deployment) of the front or side air bag
in an accident. This may cause the passenger sensing function to operate
improperly and result in a serious accident. Always replace the passenger seat
and seat weight sensor with new ones after the front or side air bags have
operated (deployed). After servicing, verify that the seat operates normally and
that the wiring harness is not caught. If the collision is not hard enough to
cause the front or side air bags to operate (deploy), inspect the seat weight
sensor and replace it if there is any malfunction.
SAS Control Module Handling

Removing the SAS control module or disconnecting the SAS control module
connector with the ignition switch at the ON position can activate the sensor in
the SAS control module and operate (deploy) the air bags and pre-tensioner
seat belts, which may cause serious injury. Before removing the SAS control
module or disconnecting the SAS control module connector, always turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable, and
then wait for 1 min or more to allow the backup power supply of the SAS
control module to deplete its stored power.
Connecting the SAS control module connector with the SAS control module not
securely fixed to the vehicle is dangerous. The sensor in the SAS control
module could send an electrical signal to the air bag modules and pre-tensioner
seat belts. This will operate (deploy) the air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts,
which may result in serious injury. Therefore, before connecting the connector,
securely fix the SAS control module to the vehicle.
Because a sensor is built into the SAS control module, once the air bags and
pre-tensioner seat belts have operated (deployed) due to a collision or other
causes, the SAS control module must be replaced with a new one even if the
used one does not have any visible external damage or deformation. The used
SAS control module may have been damaged internally which may cause
improper operation. If the SAS control module is reused, the air bags and pretensioner seat belts may not operate (deploy) normally, which could result in a
serious accident. Always replace the SAS control module with a new one. The
SAS control module cannot be bench-checked or self-checked.
Crash Zone Sensor Handling

Removing the crash zone sensor or disconnecting the crash zone sensor
connector with the ignition switch at the ON position can activate the crash
zone sensor and operate (deploy) the air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts,
which may cause serious injury. Before removing the crash zone sensor or
disconnecting the crash zone sensor connector, always turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable, and then wait for 1
min or more to allow the backup power supply of the SAS control module to
deplete its stored power.
If the crash zone sensor is subjected to shock or the sensor is disassembled,
the air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts may accidentally operate (deploy) and
cause injury, or the system may fail to operate normally and cause a serious
accident. Do not subject the crash zone sensor to shock or disassemble the
sensor.
Because a sensor is built into the crash zone sensor, once the air bags and pretensioner seat belts have operated (deployed) due to a collision or other
causes, the crash zone sensor must be replaced with a new one even if the
used one does not have any visible external damage or deformation. If the
crash zone sensor is reused, the air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts may not
operate (deploy) normally, which could result in a serious accident. Always
replace the crash zone sensor with a new one. The crash zone sensor cannot be
bench-checked or self-checked.
Side Air Bag Sensor Handling

Removing the side air bag sensor or disconnecting the side air bag sensor
connector with the ignition switch at the ON position can activate the side air
bag sensor and operate (deploy) the side air bag, which may cause serious
injury. Before removing the side air bag sensor or disconnecting the side air
bag sensor connector, always turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
disconnect the negative battery cable, and then wait for 1 min or more to allow
the backup power supply of the SAS control module to deplete its stored power.
If the side air bag sensor is subjected to shock or the sensor is disassembled,
the side air bag may accidentally operate (deploy) and cause injury, or the
system may fail to operate normally and cause a serious accident. Do not
subject the side air bag sensor to shock or disassemble the sensor.
Because a sensor is built into the side air bag sensor, once the air bag has
operated (deployed) due to a collision or other causes, the side air bag sensor
must be replaced with a new one even if the used one does not have any visible
external damage or deformation. If the side air bag sensor is reused, the side
air bag may not operate (deploy) normally, which could result in a serious
accident. Always replace the side air bag sensor with a new one. The side air
bag sensor cannot be bench-checked or self-checked.
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt Inspection

Inspecting a pre-tensioner seat belt using a tester can operate (deploy) the
pre-tensioner seat belt, which may cause serious injury. Do not use a tester to
inspect a pre-tensioner seat belt. Always use the on-board diagnostic function
to diagnose the pre-tensioner seat belt for malfunctions.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Handling the side air bag sensor improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag
module, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings and cautions before
handling the side air bag sensor. (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.) (See AIR
BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS.)
3. Remove the inner scuff plate. (See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the seat belt rail for the front seat. (See FRONT SEAT BELT
5. Partially peel back the floor covering.
1Bolt A
2Cover
3Nut
4Bolt B
5Side air bag sensor
6Connector

8. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and hold for 5 s or more.
CAUTION:
When replacing the side air bag sensor, performing the following operations
while turning the ignition switch to the ON position will cancel the sensor code
over-write, which could cause the air bags to fail to operate (deploy).
The ignition switch is not held in the LOCK position for 5 s or
more.
If the above operations are performed and the sensor code over-write is
canceled, it will be necessary to replace the sensor again.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Cover
2Bolt
3Child restraint seat anchor
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LOCATION INDEX
1Front seat belt

(See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See LOCK RELEASE SOLENOID INSPECTION.)
(See SEAT BELT INSPECTION.)
2Rear seat belt
(See REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See SEAT BELT INSPECTION.)
3Front buckle
(See FRONT BUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4Rear buckle
(See REAR BUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5Child restraint seat anchor
(See CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SEAT BELT INSPECTION
Belt
1. Verify that the belt is installed properly with no twisting or kinks.
2. Verify that there is no damage to the seat belt and no deformation of the metal fittings.
If there is any malfunction, replace the seat belt.
ELR
1. Verify that the belt can be pulled out smoothly, and that it retracts smoothly.

2. Verify that the retractor locks when the belt is pulled quickly.
3. Remove the retractor.
4. While pulling the seat belt out, make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the retractor
is tilted slowly up to 15 from the mounted position and locks when the retractor is tilted 40
or more.
ALR
1. Pull the belt out fully to change the lock mode from ELR to ALR.
2. Verify that retractor makes a clicking sound as the belt slowly retracts. If no sound is heard,
the lock mode has not changed to ALR. If necessary, repeat Step 1.
3. Verify that the retractor locks when pulled.
4. Verify that the lock mode changes to ELR when the belt is fully pulled out.
Load Limiter Retractor

WARNING:
When the load limiter operates, the belt and anchor rub against each other strongly
leaving wear tracks. If the seat belt is used in this state, the seat belt will not function as
its full capability and there is the possibility of serious injury to passengers. Be sure to
replace the seat belt once the load limiter operates.
1. If the vehicle has been subjected to a shock in an accident, pull the belt from the retractor
and confirm that there are no wear tracks (the load limiter has not operated) by visually
inspecting and feeling the belt.
Seat Bert Lock Release

1. With the front seat belts unbuckled, close all the doors (door switch off).
2. Open either one of the front doors, then press the door switch by hand (door switch off).
3. When releasing the door switch (door switch on), confirm on both sides that the operation
sound of the lock release solenoids is heard.
If there is any malfunction, inspect the following parts:
Lock release solenoid (See LOCK RELEASE SOLENOID
INSPECTION.)
Door switch (See DOOR SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Keyless control module (without advanced keyless entry and
start system) (See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION
[WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM
].)
Door lock control module (with advanced keyless entry and
start system) (See DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE
INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM].)
4. With the front seat belts unbuckled, open all the doors (door switch on).
5. When either one of driver-side or passenger-side seat belts is buckled (front buckle switch
on), confirm that the operation sound of the lock release solenoid is heard for the buckled seat
belt (lock release solenoid off).
If there is any malfunction, inspect the following parts:
Lock release solenoid (See LOCK RELEASE SOLENOID
INSPECTION.)
Front buckle switch (See FRONT BUCKLE SWITCH

INSPECTION.)
Keyless control module (without advanced keyless entry and
start system) (See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION
[WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM
].)
Door lock control module (with advanced keyless entry and
start system) (See DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE
INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT BUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front seat. (See FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Connector
2Bolt
3Front buckle
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Handling the front seat belt (pre-tensioner seat belt) improperly can accidentally deploy
the pre-tensioner, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings and cautions
before handling the front seat belt. (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.) (See AIR
BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS.)
WARNING:
The side air bag sensor is attached below the seat belt rail. When working around the seat
belt rail, disconnect the negative battery cable or work carefully, avoiding excessive impact
to the area below the seat belt rail.
CAUTION:
The ELR (emergency locking retractor) has a spring that will unwind if the retractor cover
is removed. The spring cannot be rewound by hand. If this occurs, the ELR will not work
properly. Therefore, do not disassemble the retractor.
4. Remove the rear door upper trim. (See REAR DOOR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Lock release solenoid connector

2Cover A
3Bolt A
4Bolt B
5Front seat belt
6Pre-tensioner seat belt connector
(See Pre-tensioner Seat Belt Connector Removal Note.)
7Cover B
8Bolt C
9Seat belt rail

8. Verify that the air bag system warning light illuminates for approx. 6 s and then goes out
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
If the air bag system warning light does not operate, refer to the on-board
diagnostic system and perform inspection of the system.
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt Connector Removal Note

1. Using a flathead screwdriver, lift the locking device carefully, however do not remove it.
2. Disconnect the pre-tensioner seat belt connector.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR BUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Bolt
2Rear buckle
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
The ELR (emergency locking retractor) has a spring that will unwind if the retractor cover
is removed. The spring cannot be rewound by hand. If this occurs, the ELR will not work
properly. Therefore, do not disassemble the retractor.
2. Remove the front console. (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the rear package trim. (See REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Bolt
2Rear seat belt
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT BUCKLE SWITCH INSPECTION
Driver-Side
2. Disconnect the buckle switch connector.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the front buckle.
Passenger-Side
2. Disconnect the buckle switch connector.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the front buckle.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LOCK RELEASE SOLENOID INSPECTION
3. Disconnect the lock release solenoid connector.
4. Measure the resistance of the lock release solenoid individually.
If not within the specification, replace the front seat belt.
Standard
5466 ohms
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous

RESTRAINTS SST
49 H066
002
Deployment
tool
49 G066
003
Adapter
harness
49 D066 002
Adapter
harness
49
L066
002
Adapter
harness
49 N088 0A0
Fuel and
Thermometer
checker
< Previous
Back to Top
Workshop Manual - Body and Accessories

2011 - RX-8
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
DTC B1093 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
DTC B112A [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
DTC B1317/B1318 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
DTC U0214 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
FOREWORD [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
DTC INSPECTION (IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM) [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
DTC TABLE (IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM) [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC B1681/P1260 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]

SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC U2510/P1260, U1147/P1260 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
DTC B1342 (KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE) [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
DETERMINING OPEN CIRCUIT LOCATION (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
DETERMINING OPEN CIRCUIT LOCATION (MS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
M-MDS AND VEHICLE NOT COMMUNICATING [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
DTC U0073, U1900, U2516 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
DTC U2516, 16:Er12, DEVICE CODE:16 ERROR CODE:12, 26:Er81, DEVICE CODE:26 ERROR CODE:81
[MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
DTC B1342 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
DTC U2023 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [AUDIO]
SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE [AUDIO]
CLEARING DTC [AUDIO]
DTC TABLE [AUDIO]
DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO]
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
CLEARING DTC [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
DTC TABLE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSTIC MODE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSTIC CHECK [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NAVIGATION CHECK [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM]
CLEARING DTC [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
DTC TABLE [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
DTC INSPECTION [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE]
CLEARING DTC [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE]
DTC TABLE [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE]
DTC B1014 [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE]
DTC U2030 [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE]
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
FOREWORD [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
INTERMITTENT CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
BASIC POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INSPECTION [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR
No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT MOVE UP AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
(WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT REVERSE, EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING A FOREIGN OBJECT IN IT IS
PATH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
No.3 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT
WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR
No.4 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE EVEN THOUGH VARIOUS OPERATIONS ARE PERFORMED
[EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE KEYLESS TRANSMITTER [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION]
No.3 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE REQUEST SWITCH [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION]
No.4 SOME DOOR GLASS DO NOT OPERATE [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
No.5 DOOR GLASS STOPS BEFORE FULLY OPENING/CLOSING [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES BEFORE IT FULLY OPENS [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
No.7 ALL DOOR GLASS OPERATE ACCIDENTALLY [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
No.8 PART OF DOOR GLASS OPERATES ACCIDENTALLY [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]

No.1 AUTO LEVELING WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHEN THE IGNITION SWITCH TURNED TO ON
POSITION [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
No.2 AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM DOES NOT ADJUST OPTICAL AXIS OF THE HEADLIGHTS FOR VEHICLE
POSTURE [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
FOREWORD [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
NO.1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
NO.2 ALL ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
NO.3 TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
NO. 1 FUEL GAUGE NEEDLE POSITION INCORRECT [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
NO. 2 ALL METERS AND GAUGES DO NOT OPERATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
NO. 3 ABS WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
NO. 4 MIL ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
NO. 5 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
NO. 6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
NO. 8 TACHOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
NO. 9 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
FOREWORD [AUDIO]
CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO PANEL SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO]
CONFIRMATION STEP 2: AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO]
NO.1 AF NOISE OR POP NOISE AT ALL SOURCES (RADIO, CD) [AUDIO]
NO.2 NO POWER ON THE ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM [AUDIO]
NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [AUDIO]
NO.4 NO SOUND FROM SOME SPEAKERS [AUDIO]
NO.5 BROKEN SOUND OR POOR SOUND QUALITY [AUDIO]
NO.6 SOUND BECOMES LOUDLY OR WEAKLY WHILE DRIVING THE VEHICLE [AUDIO]
NO.7 ALC FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE [AUDIO]
NO.8 AudioPilot2 FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE [AUDIO]
NO.9 AUDIO SYSTEM ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE AT ALL [AUDIO]
NO.10 LCD DOES NOT DISPLAY AT ALL [AUDIO]
FOREWORD [RADIO]
CONFIRMATION STEP 1: RECEPTION CONDITION SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO]
CONFIRMATION STEP 2: ANTENNA SYSTEM SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO]
CONFIRMATION STEP 3: ANTENNA SYSTEM SIMPLE INSPECTION [RADIO]
NO.1 NO RADIO RECEPTION (AM/FM)/NO OR LOW VOLUME [RADIO]
NO.2 NO RADIO RECEPTION (SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO) [RADIO]
NO.3 NOISE FROM RADIO (AM ONLY) [RADIO]

NO.4 NOISE FROM RADIO (FM ONLY) [RADIO]
NO.5 NOISE FROM RADIO (SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ONLY) [RADIO]
NO.6 CANNOT TUNE (SEEK DOES NOT STOP) [RADIO]
NO.7 CANNOT PRESET (PRESET FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE) [RADIO]
NO.8 RECEPTION FREQUENCY OF RADIO SLIPS [RADIO]
REFERENCE [RADIO]
FOREWORD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.1 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS THE CD IMMEDIATELY [CD
PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.2 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT EJECT THE CD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.4 SOUND JUMPS [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.5 CD PLAYER/CHANGER SCRATCHES ON THE CD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.6 DISC CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.7 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE MP3-FORMATTED FILE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.8 MP3-FORMATTED FILE FOLDER SELECTION IS INOPERATIVE/TRACK SEARCH IS INOPERATIVE [CD
PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.9 CD PLAYER DOES NOT INDICATE THE MP3 TITLE TEXT [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.10 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE AUDIO DATA (CDDA) [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
NO.11 TRACK CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
AUDIO CD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
FOREWORD [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NO.1 CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT START OPERATION (DISPLAY CHANGES TO BACK.) [CARNAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NO.2 SYSTEM DOES NOT CONTROL AUDIO BY AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH. [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NO.3 SYSTEM DOES NOT LOAD MAP DISC. [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NO.4 NO SOUND FROM AUDIO SYSTEM [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NO.5 VEHICLE POSITION DEVIATES FROM THE ROUTE MAP [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NO.6 NO VOICE NAVIGATION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NO.7 DISPLAY SCREEN DOES NOT CHANGE TO THE NIGHT MODE (FRONT AND REAR COMBINATION
LIGHTS OPERATE NORMALLY.) [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NO.8 SPEECH RECOGNITION DOES NOT START [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
REFERENCE INFORMATION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
NO.1 SECURITY LIGHT DISPLAY IS NOT NORMAL [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
No.1 HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE SYSTEM DOES NOT RECEIVE/TRANSMIT CALLS, DOES NOT CONNECT
[HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
No.2 CALLER'S VOICE VOLUME TOO LOW, OR NOISE INTERRUPTS CALL [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
No.3 ADDRESSEE'S VOICE VOLUME TOO LOW, OR NOISE INTERRUPTS CALL [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
FOREWORD [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
NO.1 DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY TRANSMITTER (CARD KEY) [ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
NO.2 BLINK KEYLESS INDICATOR LIGHT [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
NO.3 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
NO.4 ADVANCED KEYLESS START FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
Body Panels
BODY PANELS LOCATION INDEX
TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT
STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL
FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT
HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HOOD ADJUSTMENT
FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Doors and Liftgate

DOORS LOCATION INDEX
REAR DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DOOR ADJUSTMENT
REAR DOOR ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY
FRONT DOOR UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Glass/Windows/Mirrors
GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS LOCATION INDEX
FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION
POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION
POWER WINDOW INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
TWO-STEP DOWN FUNCTION OPERATIVE/NON-OPERATIVE SWITCHING PROCEDURE
DOOR GLASS POSITION CHANGE PROCEDURE

WINDSHIELD REMOVAL
WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION
REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL
REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION
FILAMENT INSPECTION
FILAMENT REPAIR
POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION
POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
POWER OUTER MIRROR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
POWER OUTER MIRROR INSPECTION
REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR INSPECTION
BASE REMOVAL
BASE INSTALLATION
Seats
SEATS LOCATION INDEX
FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT [VEHICLES WITHOUT POWER SEAT SYSTEM] REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
FRONT TILT MOTOR INSPECTION
REAR TILT MOTOR INSPECTION
SLIDE MOTOR INSPECTION
RECLINER MOTOR INSPECTION
LUMBAR SUPPORT MOTOR INSPECTION
POWER SEAT SWITCH INSPECTION
WALK-IN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WALK-IN SWITCH INSPECTION
POSITION MEMORY CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
POSITION MEMORY SWITCH INSPECTION
SEAT WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SEAT WARMER SWITCH INSPECTION
SEAT WARMER UNIT INSPECTION
Security and Locks

SECURITY AND LOCKS LOCATION INDEX
FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DOOR LOCK SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DOOR LOCK SWITCH INSPECTION
HOOD LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HOOD STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HOOD LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION
FRONT DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

REAR DOOR LOWER LATCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR DOOR UPPER LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION
REAR DOOR UPPER LATCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR DOOR RELEASE HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRUNK LID LATCH AND OPENER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRUNK LID STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRUNK LID OPENER INSPECTION
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRUNK KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION
TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM ]
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION
KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
CARD KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
CLEARING CARD KEY [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
CARD KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Sunroof
SUNROOF LOCATION INDEX
GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT
SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SUNROOF UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
FRONT DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL
FRONT DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION
REAR DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL
REAR DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION
SUNROOF MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SUNROOF MOTOR INSPECTION
SUNROOF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SUNROOF SWITCH INSPECTION
Exterior Trim
EXTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX
COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL
SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION
EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL
ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION
FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR SPOILER REMOVAL
REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION
AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FLOOR UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR DEFLECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL
DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION
Interior Trim
INTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX
DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SPEAKER GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
KNEE BOLSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DASHBOARD GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CONSOLE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
OUTER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ROOF SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR DOOR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR DOOR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HEAD IMPACT PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRUNK MAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Lighting Systems
LIGHTING SYSTEMS LOCATION INDEX
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HEADLIGHT AIMING
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SYSTEM INSPECTION
HEADLIGHT LEVELING ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING
FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR INSPECTION
REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR INSPECTION
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
COMBINATION SWITCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION
FLASHER CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION
FLASHER CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DRL AND AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION
AUTO LIGHT ILLUMINATION LEVEL SETTING
MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
MAP LIGHT INSPECTION
INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
INTERIOR LIGHT INSPECTION
TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
COURTESY LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
VANITY MIRROR ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION
DOOR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DOOR SWITCH INSPECTION
Wiper/Washer System
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION
WINDSHIELD WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT
WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE CLEANING
WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION
HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR INSPECTION
HEADLIGHT CLEANER ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE REMOVAL
HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE INSTALLATION
HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HEADLIGHT CLEANER RELAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HEADLIGHT CLEANER RELAY INSPECTION
RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
RAIN SENSOR INITIALIZATION SETTING
Entertainment System
ENTERTAINMENT LOCATION INDEX
CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION
CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CENTER SPEAKER INSPECTION
REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION
FRONT TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT TWEETER INSPECTION
REAR TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR TWEETER INSPECTION
NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NOISE FILTER INSPECTION
AUDIOPILOT MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA INSPECTION
GLASS ANTENNA INSPECTION
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION

AM/FM ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 INSTALLATION
AM/FM ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 INSPECTION
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA FEEDER INSTALLATION
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA FEEDER INSPECTION
GPS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION
MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ACCESSORY SOCKET INSPECTION
AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
AUXILIARY JACK INSPECTION
CIGARETTE LIGHTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CIGARETTE LIGHTER INSPECTION
Power Systems
POWER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
FUSE SERVICE CAUTIONS
MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
KEY REMINDER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
RELAY LOCATION
RELAY INSPECTION
Instrumentation/Driver Info.
INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. LOCATION INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE
INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING PROCEDURE
FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION
HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
OIL LEVEL SWITCH INSPECTION
COOLANT LEVEL SWITCH INSPECTION
INFORMATION DISPLAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
INFORMATION DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE
Technical Data
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
BODY AND ACCESSORIES SST
Next >
2011 - RX-8 - Body and Accessories

SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
2. Select Modules.
3. Select RKE.
2. Select RKE.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the keyless control module. (See
CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
PID/data monitor table
Data contents
Unit/Operation
Terminal
DTC_CNT
Number of continuous DTCs
RPM
Engine speed
RPM
3W, 3X
VSS
Vehicle speed
KPH
3W, 3X
VPWR
Supply voltage
2A
NUMCARD
Number of programmed card keys
NUMKEY *
Number of programmed key ID numbers
DRSW_D
Door switch (drivers door)
CLOSE/OPEN
3Q
DRSW_ALL
Door switch (except drivers door)
CLOSE/OPEN
3Q
REQ_SW_D
Request switch (drivers door)
On/Off
3I
REQ_SW_P
Request switch (passengers door)
On/Off
3K
REQ_SW_BK
Request switch (trunk lid)
On/Off
3M
LOCK_SW_D
Door lock-link switch (drivers side)
On/Off
3N
IMMOBI
Immobilizer system equipped or not
On * /Off
TR/LG_SW
Trunk compartment light switch
IG_KEY_IN
Key reminder switch
IG_SW_ST
Ignition switch (Push switch)
BUZZER
CLOSE/OPEN
Key-In/Key-Out
3F
Pushed/Not Pushed
3E
Keyless beeper
On/Off
2K
SECURITY
Security light
On/Off
2G
PWR_IG1
Power supply (IG1)
On/Off
2C
PWR_ACC
Power supply (ACC)
On/Off
2E
Vehicles with immobilizer system
ACTIVE COMMAND MODE TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS SYSTEM]

Command name
Output part name
Unit/OperationTerminal
BZR_OUT
Keyless beeper
On/Off
2K
BZR_INN
Interior buzzer (Instrument cluster)
On/Off
3W, 3X
LNP_RED
Keyless warning light (red)
On/Off
3W, 3X
LNP_GREEN
Keyless indicator light (green)
On/Off
3W, 3X
DR_LOCK
All doors lock
Off/Lock
3Q
DR_UNLOCK
All doors unlock
Off/Unlock
3Q
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
DTC
No.
Description
Page
B1093 Steering lock unit communication error
(See DTC B1093 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START

SYSTEM])
B1126 Steering lock unit internal malfunction

SYSTEM])
B1127 Keyless antenna (Interior, trunk)

SYSTEM])
B1128 Keyless antenna (Interior, rear)

SYSTEM])
B1129 Keyless antenna (Interior, middle)

SYSTEM])
B112A Keyless antenna (Interior, front)
(See DTC B112A [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND

START SYSTEM])
B1131 Keyless antenna (exterior, rear)

SYSTEM])
B1132 Keyless antenna (exterior, LF)

SYSTEM])
B1133 Keyless antenna (exterior, RF)

SYSTEM])
B1134 Unprogrammed card key

SYSTEM])
B1317 Keyless control module power supply

voltage increases
B1318 Keyless control module power supply
voltage decreases
(See DTC B1317/B1318 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND

START SYSTEM])
B1342 Keyless control module internal

malfunction

SYSTEM])
B2170 Push switch (Steering lock unit)

SYSTEM])
B2477 Configuration error

SYSTEM])
U0073Control module communication error

U0100Communication error to PCM

SYSTEM].)
(See DTC U0214 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND

START SYSTEM])
U0214Keyless receiver
U0323Communication error to instrument cluster (See FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION

SYSTEM].)
U0236Steering lock unit communication system (See DTC U0236 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
U2023Abnormal message from PCM
(See DTC U2023 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND

START SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
2. Select Modules.
3. Select RKE.
2. Select RKE.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
2. Select Modules.
3. Select RKE.
2. Select RKE.
NOTE:

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U2023
DETECTION CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Abnormal message from PCM

Correct data cannot be received from PCM
PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT FOR PCM MALFUNCTION
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
position.
inspection for the PCM.
ACTION
YesGo to applicable DTC inspection.

[13B-MSP].)
Are any DTCs detected?
2

(See CLEARING CARD KEY [WITH
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM].)

PCM, then go to the next step.
[13B-MSP].)


(See DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B112A [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
DTC B112A
Keyless antenna (interior, front)
DETECTION
CONDITION
Keyless antenna dose not operated.

Open or short circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module
and keyless antenna (interior, front)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Keyless antenna (interior, front) malfunction

Keyless control module malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR

1 CONTINUITY
Disconnect keyless control module
connector and keyless antenna
(interior, front) connector.
ACTION
Yes
Replace keyless antenna

(interior, front).
(See KEYLESS ANTENNA
Inspect the wiring harness between

keyless antenna (interior, front)
terminal A and keyless control module
terminal 1O, and keyless antenna
(interior, front) terminal B and keyless
control module terminal 1P for the
following:
[WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
Go to next step.
Repair the wiring harness

between the keyless
antenna (interior, front)
and keyless control
module.
Open circuit
Go to next step.
Short to ground
No
2
INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

position.
M-MDS: B112A
YesReplace the keyless control module and

perform the resetting procedure for the
advanced keyless system when replacing
the keyless control module.
(See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
(See CARD KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
(See STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE
REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)
(See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH ADVANCED
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1342
Keyless control module internal malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Malfunction in the keyless control module internal circuit
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL

1 MODULE
Turn the ignition
switch to the ON
position.
MMDS:
B1342
ACTION
YesReplace the keyless control module and perform the
resetting procedure for the advanced keyless system when
replacing the keyless control module.
(See CARD KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM])
(See STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM])
(See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION)
(See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS
PROGRAMMING [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1134
Unprogrammed card key

Unprogrammed card key.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY NUMBER OF
REGISTERED CARD
KEYS
Using the M-MDS, perform
the PID/data monitor
inspection and confirm the
number of registered keys.
TABLE [ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM].)
ACTION
No
Using the M-MDS, register a card

key if necessary.
(See CARD KEY ID CODE
KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM])
Is card key registered?

2

the ON position.
M-MDS:
B1134
YesReplace the keyless control module and perform the

resetting procedure for the advanced keyless system
when replacing the keyless control module.
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START

SYSTEM])
PROGRAMMING [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND START SYSTEM])
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2477
Configuration error
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Keyless control module configuration has not been performed

correctly.
STEP
INSPECTION
PERFORM INSTRUMENT
1 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
CONFIGURATION
Perform keyless
control module
configuration.
Is B2477
displayed?
ACTION
YesReplace the keyless control module and perform the resetting
procedure for the advanced keyless system when replacing the
keyless control module.
(See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CARD KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED
(See STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH
(See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING
2 OF DTC B2477 COMPLETED
Clear the DTC
from the memory.

Is any DTC
displayed?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1317/B1318 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
B1317
Keyless control module power supply voltage increases (16.1 V or more)
B1318
Keyless control module power supply voltage decreases (less than 9 V)
DTC
DETECTION
CONDITION
When the keyless control module power supply voltage is not

within 916 V.
ROOM 15 A fuse malfunction
Battery malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between battery and keyless

control module
Step
1
Inspection
INSPECT FUSE
Remove the ROOM 15 A fuse.
Action
Is the fuse normal?

2
INSPECT BATTERY
Measure the battery positive
voltage.
Is the voltage 9 V16 V?

3 BATTERY AND KEYLESS CONTROL
MODULE
Inspect the wiring harnesses
between the battery and
connector terminal 2A for the
following:
Short to
ground
Short to
power supply
Open circuit

No The battery has a malfunction.
Inspect the charge/discharge system.
YesReplace the keyless control module and perform
the resetting procedure for the advanced keyless
system when replacing the keyless control module.
SYSTEM])
REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND START SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)
PROGRAMMING [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
No Repair the wiring harness between the battery and
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2170
Push switch
DETECTION
CONDITION
Detect the push switch OFF signal when ignition switch is ON

position.
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between keyless control
module and steering lock unit
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Steering lock unit malfunction

STEP
INSPECTION

1 CONTINUITY
connector and steering lock unit
ACTION
YesReplace the steering lock unit and perform the
resetting procedure for the steering lock unit.
(See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
connector.

between the keyless control
module connector terminal 3E and
steering lock unit terminal A for
the following:

Short to ground
No Repair the wiring harness between the steering

lock unit and keyless control module.
Short to power
supply
Open circuit
2

position.
M-MDS: B2170

advanced keyless system when replacing the
START SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1126
Steering lock unit internal malfunction
DETECTION CONDITION
Detect the steering lock unit malfunction signal.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT
Turn the ignition
switch to the ON
position.
MMDS:
B1126
ACTION
YesReplace the steering lock unit and perform the resetting
procedure for the steering lock unit.
(See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U0236
Steering lock unit communication system
DETECTION
CONDITION
Steering lock unit communication error

POSSIBLE CAUSE

STEP
INSPECTION

Yes
1 CONTINUITY
Disconnect keyless control
module connector and steering
ACTION
Replace the steering lock unit
and perform the resetting
procedure for the steering lock
unit.
lock unit connector.
(See STEERING WHEEL AND

COLUMN

between steering lock unit
terminal G and keyless control
module terminal 3H for the
following:
(See STEERING LOCK UNIT ID

CODE REGISTRATION [WITH
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND START SYSTEM])
Short to
ground
Short to power
supply
Open circuit

ON position.
M-MDS: U0236

No

between the steering lock unit
and keyless control module.
Go to next step.

the resetting procedure for the advanced keyless
system when replacing the keyless control
module.
SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1093
Steering lock unit communication error
DETECTION
CONDITION
Unprogrammed steering lock unit.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

STEP
INSPECTION

1 CONTINUITY
connector and steering lock unit
ACTION
Yes
Perform the resetting

procedure for the steering
lock unit.
(See STEERING LOCK UNIT

ID CODE REGISTRATION
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM])
connector.
keyless control module connector
terminal 3H and steering lock unit
connector terminal G for the
following:?
Short to body
ground

No
Short to power
supply

between the steering lock
unit and keyless control
module.
Open circuit
Go to next step.

2
INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT

position.
M-MDS: B1093
Yes
Replace the steering lock unit

and perform the resetting
procedure for the steering
lock unit.
(See STEERING WHEEL AND
COLUMN
(See STEERING LOCK UNIT
ID CODE REGISTRATION
ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM])

3

position.
M-MDS: B1093

advanced keyless system when replacing the
START SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U0214
Keyless receiver
DETECTION
CONDITION
When the keyless receiver power supply voltage is less than 7.5 V.
Keyless receiver malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE

module and keyless receiver
STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN KEYLESS

1 RECEIVER AND GROUND
Disconnect keyless receiver connector.
ACTION
YesGo to next step.
No
Repair the wiring
Is there continuity between keyless

receiver terminal E and ground?
harness between the

keyless receiver and
ground.
Go to next step.

2 CONTINUITY
connector.
keyless receiver terminal A and keyless
control module terminal 3A, and keyless
receiver terminal C and keyless control
module terminal 3C for the following:
YesGo to next step.

No
Repair the wiring

harness between the
keyless receiver and
keyless control
module.
Go to next step.
Short to ground
Open circuit
INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY
3 CIRCUIT
Measure voltage at terminal 3A of keyless
Is voltage more than 7.5 V?
YesReplace keyless receiver.

(See KEYLESS RECEIVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
No Replace the keyless control module and
advanced keyless system when
replacing the keyless control module.
(See CARD KEY ID CODE
CONFIGURATION)
PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH
START SYSTEM])
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1133
Keyless antenna (exterior, RF)
DETECTION
CONDITION

and keyless antenna (exterior, RF)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Keyless antenna (exterior, RF) malfunction

STEP
INSPECTION

1 CONTINUITY
(exterior, RF) connector.
ACTION
Yes

(exterior, RF).

keyless antenna (exterior, RF) terminal
A and keyless control module terminal
1A, and keyless antenna (exterior, RF)
terminal B and keyless control module
terminal 1B for the following:
Short to ground
Open circuit
2

position.
M-MDS: B1133
[WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
Go to next step.
No

between the keyless
antenna (exterior, RF)
and keyless control
module.
Go to next step.

START SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1132
Keyless antenna (exterior, LF)
DETECTION
CONDITION

and keyless antenna (exterior, LF)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Keyless antenna (exterior, LF) malfunction

STEP
INSPECTION

1 CONTINUITY
(exterior, LF) connector.
ACTION
Yes

(exterior, LF).

keyless antenna (exterior, LF) terminal
A and keyless control module terminal
1C, and keyless antenna (exterior, LF)
terminal B and keyless control module
terminal 1D for the following:
Short to ground
Open circuit
2

position.
M-MDS: B1132
[WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
Go to next step.
No

between the keyless
antenna (exterior, LF)
and keyless control
module.
Go to next step.

START SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1127
DETECTION
CONDITION
Keyless antenna (Interior, trunk)

and keyless antenna (Interior, trunk)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Keyless antenna (Interior, trunk) malfunction

STEP
INSPECTION

1 CONTINUITY
(interior, trunk) connector.
ACTION
Yes

(interior, trunk).

keyless antenna (interior, trunk)
terminal 1I, and keyless antenna
(interior, trunk) terminal B and keyless
control module terminal 1J for the
following:
[WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
Go to next step.

between the keyless
antenna (interior, trunk)
and keyless control
module.
Open circuit
Go to next step.
No
2

position.
M-MDS: B1127

START SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1128
Keyless antenna (interior, rear)
DETECTION
CONDITION

and keyless antenna (interior, rear)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Keyless antenna (interior, rear) malfunction

STEP
INSPECTION

1 CONTINUITY
(interior, rear) connector.
ACTION
Yes

(interior, rear).

terminal 1K, and keyless antenna
control module terminal 1L for the
following:
[WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
Go to next step.

between the keyless
antenna (interior, rear)
and keyless control
module.
Open circuit
Go to next step.
Short to ground
No
2

position.
M-MDS: B1128

START SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1131
Keyless antenna (exterior, rear)
DETECTION
CONDITION

and keyless antenna (exterior, rear)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) malfunction

STEP
INSPECTION

1 CONTINUITY
(exterior, rear) connector.
ACTION
Yes

(exterior, rear).

keyless antenna (exterior, rear)
terminal 1E, and keyless antenna
(exterior, rear) terminal B and keyless
control module terminal 1F for the
following:
[WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
Go to next step.

between the keyless
antenna (exterior, rear)
and keyless control
module.
Open circuit
Go to next step.
Short to ground
No
2

position.
M-MDS: B1131

START SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1129
DETECTION
CONDITION
Keyless antenna (interior, middle)

and keyless antenna (interior, middle)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Keyless antenna (interior, middle) malfunction

STEP
INSPECTION

1 CONTINUITY
(interior, middle) connector.
ACTION
Yes

(interior, front).

terminal 1M, and keyless antenna
control module terminal 1N for the
following:
[WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
Go to next step.

between the keyless
antenna (interior, middle)
and keyless control
module.
Open circuit
Go to next step.
Short to ground
No
2

position.
M-MDS: B1129

START SYSTEM])
CONFIGURATION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
2. Select Modules.
3. Select RKE.
2. Select RKE.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for 5 s more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION (IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM) [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
Select DataLogger.
Select Modules.
Select RKE.
Select RKE.
Select DataLogger.
NOTE:
The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value. Therefore, if the
monitored value of the output parts is not within the specification, inspection of the
monitored value of input parts corresponding to applicable output part control is necessary.
In addition, because the system does not display output part malfunction as abnormality in
the monitored value, it is necessary to inspect the output part individually.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
Malfunction diagnosis of the immobilizer system occurs automatically when the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK (ACC) to the ON (START) position.
Results of the malfunction diagnosis can be verified from the DTCs. There are two methods of DTC verification: By the flashing pattern of the security light and
by using the M-MDS.
First, verify that the fuses are normal.
The PID/data monitor function can be used to verify the number of key ID numbers registered for a single vehicle.
CAUTION:
Always use the M-MDS to verify DTCs even if the security light displays a DTC. If the security light itself has a malfunction, it is possible that a DTC may not
be properly displayed. There are certain DTCs which can only be verified using the M-MDS, not the security light.
DTCs for the immobilizer system that are stored in the keyless control module and PCM are cleared when the ignition switch is turned from the ON to the
LOCK (ACC) position.
If DTCs are not displayed even though the engine does not start or stalls, perform the following symptom troubleshooting:
DTCs may not be displayed due to a security light malfunction. Perform the following symptom troubleshooting:
The following conditions may cause poor signal communication between the key and vehicle, resulting in the engine not starting or a key registration error. Do
not perform any work under the following conditions:
If any of the following items are touching or near the key head.
Spare keys
Keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system
Any metallic object
Any electronic device, or any credit or other cards with magnetic strips
NOTE:
If two or more abnormalities are detected as a result of malfunction diagnosis, only the DTC with the lowest number of those detected will be displayed by the
security light. However, multiple DTCs are stored at the same time.
If two or more immobilizer system DTCs are verified, first repair the part indicated by the security light displayed DTC. After completely repairing one location,
turn the ignition switch from the LOCK to the ON position and perform immobilizer system malfunction diagnosis.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
Detection condition
DTCs are detected: 1
255
CCNT_DD
NUMKEYS
(Number of key ID numbers registered in the keyless control
module)
No DTCs are detected: 0
Number of key ID numbers registered: 0

8
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC INSPECTION (IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM) [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
Security Light
2. Verify the security light state.
If there is any malfunction:
After any malfunction is detected, the security light will
function as follows for approx. 1 min.
DTC 16 and lower: Flashes
DTC 21 and higher: Illuminated
If there is no malfunction:
The security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and goes out.
3. When any malfunction has been detected, read DTCs via flashing patterns displayed after the
security light flashes or is illuminated for approx. 1 min.
Perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection.
NOTE:
A verified DTC is flashed 10 times repeatedly by the security light.
If multiple DTCs are verified, the security light displays only the smallest DTC.
M-MDS
Select Self Test.
Select Modules.
Select RKE.
Select RKE.
Select Self Test.
4. Disconnect the M-MDS.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC TABLE (IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM) [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
DTC
M-MDS
display*
Security light flashing pattern
Detection condition
Page
Keyless
control PCM
module
11
SECURITY LIGHT: 11,

No
detected
communication
B1681 P1260
DTC B1681/P1260
with the coil antenna
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
12
B2103 P1260coil antenna malfunction
SECURITY LIGHT: 12,

DTC B2103/P1260
The key ID number data

B1600 P1260 cannot be read.
SECURITY LIGHT: 13,

DTC B1600/P1260
Key ID number registration

B2431 P1260 error
SECURITY LIGHT: 13,

DTC B2431/P1260
13
14
The keyless control module SECURITY LIGHT: 14,

B1602 P1260 cannot read key ID number DTC B1602/P1260
data normally.
15
The keyless control module

B1601 P1260 has detected unregistered
key ID number.
SECURITY LIGHT: 15,

DTC B1601/P1260
16
Communication error
U2510 P1260 between the keyless control
module and the PCM (no
SECURITY LIGHT: 16,
response)
DTC U2510/P1260,
U1147/P1260
Communication error
between
the
keyless
control
U1147 P1260
module and the PCM
(mismatched conditions)
21
B1213 P1260 Only one key ID number is

registered.
22
Communication error
SECURITY LIGHT: 22,
B2141 P1260 between the keyless control DTC B2141/P1260
module and the PCM (data
transfer error)
23
ID number data in the PCM

B2139 P1260 and the keyless control
module do not match.
Not illuminated
B1342
Keyless control module

malfunction
SECURITY LIGHT: 21,

DTC B1213/P1260
SECURITY LIGHT: 23,

DTC B2139/P1260
DTC B1342 (KEYLESS
CONTROL MODULE)
The letters at the beginning of each DTC are only displayed when using the M-MDS, and
refer to the following: B= Body system, P= Powertrain system, U= Network
communication system.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY LIGHT: 11
No detected communication with the coil antenna
DTC: B1681/P1260
DETECTION CONDITION
No detected communication with the coil antenna

The coil antenna is pulled out
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Related wiring harnesses malfunction

Coil antenna malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
1 VERIFY COIL ANTENNA CORRECTLY INSTALLED

Verify the installation condition of the coil
antenna.
Is the coil antenna correctly installed? (Is
the connector pulled out?)
2 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA POWER SUPPLY
Disconnect the coil antenna connector.
ACTION
No Install the coil antenna correctly, then go to the
next step.
(See COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .)
Step 8.

Measure the voltage at coil antenna
connector terminal B.
Is the voltage 8 V or
more?
3 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN COIL
ANTENNA AND GROUND
position.

Step 8.

Measure the continuity of the wiring harness
between coil antenna connector terminal C
and ground.
4 INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (INPUT) FOR
CONTINUITY
Disconnect the keyless control module
connector
between coil antenna connector terminal B
and keyless control module connector
terminal 3E.

No Repair or replace the wiring harness between the
coil antenna and the keyless control module, then
go to Step 8.
5 INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (OUTPUT) FOR
CONTINUITY
between coil antenna connector terminal A
and keyless control module connector
terminal 3F.

No Repair or replace the wiring harness between the
coil antenna and the keyless control module, then
go to Step 8.
6 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Connect the coil antenna connector.
Measure the voltage at coil antenna
connector terminal B.

No Replacing the coil antenna.
Go to Step 8
Is the voltage 8 V or
more?
7 INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT (OUTPUT) FOR
CONTINUITY
between coil antenna connector terminal A
and ground.
No
Replacing the coil antenna.

(See COIL ANTENNA
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .)
Go to the next step
8 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR
Yes

position.
Reconnect the disconnected connectors.
Replace the keyless control module

and program the immobilizer
system-related parts.
(See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND START SYSTEM].)
(See CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM].)

[WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
Verify DTCs using the M-MDS.
(See DTC INSPECTION (IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM) [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM].)
Are DTCs output again?

Keyless control module:
B1681
PCM: P1260
9 VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT
Verify if other DTCs are displayed.
YesPerform the corresponding DTC inspection.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY LIGHT: 12
Coil malfunction
DTC: B2103/P1260
DETECTION CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Coil malfunction
Poor connection of the coil connector
Coil malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
1 INSPECT CONNECTOR CONNECTION

Are the coil connector and the keyless control
module connector securely connected?
ACTION
YesReplace the coil.
(See COIL ANTENNA
No Connect the connector
securely.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY
LIGHT: 13
The key ID number data cannot be read
DTC:
B1600/P1260
DETECTION
CONDITION
The key ID number data cannot be read.

Any of the following items are touching or near the key head.
Spare keys
Any metallic object
Any electronic device, or any credit or other cards with magnetic
strips
No transponder in the key
Transponder malfunction (Key ID number is not output)
Coil malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
STEP
INSPECTION
1 VERIFY DTC USING M-MDS

Is B1600/P1260 displayed?

ACTION
YesGo to Step 3.
YesSECURITY LIGHT: 13, M-MDS: B2431/P1260.
(See SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC B2431/P1260
3 VERIFY WHETHER KEY IS VALID OR NOT

Are there any keys with which the
engine can be started, other than
the key that is a cause of the
displayed DTC?
4 VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN KEY
OR COIL
Using the M-MDS, register an
YesGo to Step 5.
YesReplace the coil, then go to Step 6.

additional key.
No
Dispose of the malfunctioning key.

Register a new key if necessary.

AND START SYSTEM].)

ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
Using the registered key, turn the

ignition switch to the ON position.
Verify the DTC using the M-MDS.
Is B1600/P1260
displayed again?
5 VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN KEY
OR COIL
Using another valid key, turn the
Is B1600/P1260
displayed again?
YesReplace the coil, then go to the next step.

No
Dispose of the malfunctioning key.

Register a new key if necessary.
6 INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

Is B1600/P1260
displayed again?

procedures for when replacing the keyless control
module only.
PROGRAMMING [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY
LIGHT: 13
Key ID number registration error
DTC:
B2431/P1260
DETECTION
CONDITION
Key ID number registration error

Errors during key ID number registration procedure
Spare keys
Any metallic object
strips
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
STEP
INSPECTION


ACTION
YesGo to Step 3.
YesSECURITY LIGHT: 13, M-MDS: B1600/P1260.
(See SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC B1600/P1260

Using the M-MDS, clear the key ID
number and re-register it.
PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM].)

perform procedures for when replacing the
keyless control module only.
PROGRAMMING [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM].)
START SYSTEM].)
NOTE:
Two or more keys
must be registered to
start the engine.


Is B2431/P1260
displayed again?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY
LIGHT: 14
The keyless control module cannot read key ID number data normally
DTC:
B1602/P1260
DETECTION
CONDITION
The keyless control module cannot read key ID number data normally.
Spare keys
Any metallic object
strips
Transponder (key) malfunction
Coil malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
STEP
INSPECTION
1 VERIFY WHETHER KEY IS VALID OR NOT
ACTION
YesReplace the coil, then go to the next step.
Using another registered key, turn the

If there is not another registered key,
register an additional key using the MMDS and turn the ignition key to the ON
position using the registered key.
ENTRY SYSTEM].)
SYSTEM].)
Is the DTC displayed again?
SECURITY LIGHT: 14
(See COIL ANTENNA

No
Dispose of the malfunctioning

key.
Register a new key if
necessary.
(See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMRELATED PARTS
PROGRAMMING [WITH
PROGRAMMING [WITH
AND START SYSTEM].)
M-MDS: B1602/P1260
Using another registered key, turn the

SECURITY LIGHT: 14
M-MDS: B1602/P1260

SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY LIGHT: 15
The keyless control module has detected unregistered key ID number.
DTC: B1601/P1260
DETECTION
CONDITION
The keyless control module has detected unregistered key ID

number.
Attempt made to register a ninth key
Unregistered key used
POSSIBLE CAUSE

No keys have been registered after replacing the keyless control
module.
STEP
INSPECTION
1 VERIFY NUMBER OF REGISTERED KEYS

Using the M-MDS, perform the
PID/data monitor inspection and
confirm the number of registered
keys.
(See PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
Are one or more keys registered?
ACTION
No Go to Step 3.
2 VERIFY NUMBER OF REGISTERED KEYS

Using the M-MDS, perform the
PID/data monitor inspection and
confirm the number of registered
keys.
YesUsing the M-MDS, clear the key ID numbers

as necessary, then go to the next step.
(See PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE

Are eight keys registered?
Using the M-MDS, register the key
ID number.
AND START SYSTEM].)
NOTE:
Two or more keys
must be registered
to start the engine.

ENTRY SYSTEM].)

SECURITY LIGHT:
15
M-MDS:
B1601/P1260
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC U2510/P1260, U1147/P1260 [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM]
SECURITY
LIGHT: 16
DTC:
Communication error between the keyless control module and the PCM (no
U2510/P1260 response)
DTC:
Communication error between the keyless control module and the PCM
U1147/P1260 (mismatched conditions)
Keyless control module DTC: U2510
DETECTION CONDITION
Communication error between the keyless control module

and the PCM (no response)
Keyless control module DTC: U1147
Communication error between the keyless control module
and the PCM (mismatched conditions)
Malfunction in the wiring harness (CAN line) between the
keyless control module and the PCM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

Are either U1900 or U0073, or
both, displayed, by either the
ACTION
keyless control module or the

PCM, or both?
No Replace the keyless control module and perform

procedures for when replacing the keyless
control module only.
SYSTEM].)
2 VERIFY DTC
Using the registered key, turn
the ignition switch to the ON
position.
SECURITY
LIGHT: 16
M-MDS: U2510
or U1147/P1260
YesReplace the PCM and perform procedures for

when replacing the PCM only.
SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY LIGHT: 21
Only one key ID number is registered.
DTC: B1213/P1260
DETECTION CONDITION
Only one key is registered.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Only one registered key
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1 VERIFY NUMBER OF REGISTERED KEYS YesReplace the keyless control module and perform
Using the M-MDS, perform
module only.
the PID/data monitor
inspection and confirm the
number of registered keys.
TABLE [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM].)

Are two or more keys

registered?
No
Using the M-MDS, clear the key ID

number and register a new key if
necessary.
(See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-
RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING

2 VERIFY DTC
position.
SECURITY
LIGHT: 21
M-MDS:
B1213/P1260

module only.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY LIGHT:
22
DTC:
B2141/P1260
Communication error between the keyless control module and the PCM (data transfer
error)
DETECTION
CONDITION
Communication error between the keyless control module and the

PCM (data transfer error)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Malfunction in the wiring harness (CAN line) between the keyless

control module and the PCM
PCM malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

Are either U1900 or U0073,
or both displayed, by either
the keyless control module or
the PCM, or both?
2 VERIFY DTC
ACTION
Yes
Perform procedures for when

replacing the PCM only.
(See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-
position.
RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING


SECURITY
LIGHT: 22
M-MDS:
B2141/P1260

3 EXAMINE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

AND PCM
Yes
Replace the keyless control

module and perform procedures
for when replacing the keyless
control module only.
SECURITY
LIGHT: 22

M-MDS:
B2141/P1260

4 EXAMINE PCM
SECURITY
LIGHT: 22
M-MDS:
B2141/P1260
YesReplace the PCM and perform procedures for when

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY LIGHT:
23
ID number data in the PCM and the keyless control module do not match
DTC: B2139/P1260
DETECTION
CONDITION
ID number data in the keyless control module and the PCM are
different.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
PCM malfunction
Necessary procedures were not performed using the M-MDS after
replacing the PCM.
STEP
INSPECTION

Are either U1900 or U0073, or
both, displayed, by either the
keyless control module or the
PCM, or both.
2
Perform procedures for when

ACTION
Yes
Replace the keyless control

module and perform
procedures for when replacing
the keyless control module
only.
[WITH KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM].)
ignition switch to the ON
position.
SECURITY
LIGHT: 23
M-MDS:
B2139/P1260
Are any or all of the following

DTCs displayed again?
(See KEYLESS CONTROL

MODULE
PROGRAMMING [WITH
PROGRAMMING [WITH
AND START SYSTEM].)
YesReplace the PCM and perform procedures for
when replacing the PCM only.
SECURITY
LIGHT: 23
M-MDS:
B2139/P1260

SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1342 (KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE) [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
DTC: B1342 (KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE)Keyless control module malfunction

DETECTION CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
DETECTION CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
STEP
INSPECTION
1 EXAMINE KEYLESS CONTROL

MODULE
MMDS:
B1342
ACTION
procedures for when replacing the keyless control module
only.

PROGRAMMING [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CAUTION:
Perform the following on-board diagnosis according to FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM] troubleshooting
procedure.
Detection Condition
Possible causes of communication errors between the M-MDS and vehicle include communication circuit interruption due to an
open circuit in the CAN communication wiring harness, or poor contact of connector terminals, or a BUS OFF condition due to a
short circuit in the CAN communication wiring harness.
Possible Causes
Open circuit in wiring harness between PCM and data link connector-2
Improper insertion of PCM, connector C-07 or C-09 damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection of connector terminals
Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN system-related module CAN_L and CAN_H lines
Short circuit to power supply in wiring harness between CAN system-related module
Short circuit to ground in wiring harness between CAN system-related module
Short circuit to power supply in CAN-system related module internal CAN lines
Short circuit to ground in CAN system-related module internal CAN lines
Damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection of data link connector-2
PCM power supply is not normal
PCM ground is not normal
PCM internal resistance is not normal
CAN-system related module malfunction
Wiring Diagram
CAUTION:
When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no looseness, damage, deformation, corrosion, or poor connection of
the connector terminals.
Step
1
Inspection
VERIFICATION BEFORE SERVICING
Is there communication between the M-MDS and
vehicle?
Action
No Go back to FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM.
VERIFY THAT M-MDS AND DLC-2 ARE CONNECTED

Verify the connection condition between the M-MDS
and DLC-2.
Are the connector terminals normal without damage,
deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?
VERIFY PCM POWER SUPPLY CONDITION

Refer to the PCM terminal voltage table and inspect
the terminal voltage and fuse condition.
Is the power supply condition normal?
VERIFY PCM BODY GROUND CONDITION

No Correct the connection condition, then go to Step 12.

No Repair or replace the fuse or wiring harness, then go to Step 12.
Inspect the PCM body ground wiring harness and

ground point.
Are the ground and ground point normal?
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR TERMINAL


No Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to Step 12.

No Repair the connector terminal if necessary, then go to Step 12.
Are the PCM connector terminal normal without

damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection?
6
INSPECT PCM
Measure the resistance between the following PCM
connector terminals:
Between terminal 1AM and terminal
1AI (part side)

No Replace the PCM, then go to the next step.
(See PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP])
Is the resistance 118-130 ohm?

VERIFY THAT THERE IS NO OPEN CIRCUIT IN CAN
7 COMMUNICATION WIRING HARNESS
CAUTION:
When inspecting the DLC-2, touch it with a paper
clip or similar thin pin without directly inserting a
tester into the terminals.

No There is an open circuit in the CAN communication wiring
harness. Repair or replace it, then go to Step 12.
Verify the continuity between the following terminals:

Between DLC-2 terminal F and PCM
terminal 1AM
Between DLC-2 terminal F and PCM
terminal 1AI
VERIFY THAT THERE IS NO SHORT CIRCUIT IN CAN
CAUTION:
YesThere is an open circuit in the CAN communication wiring

harness. Repair or replace it, then go to Step 12.
Measure the resistance between the terminals.

Between DLC-2 terminal F and DLC2 terminal E
Is the resistance 60 ohm or less?
VERIFY NO SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND IN CAN
CAUTION:
Between DLC-2 terminal F and
ground
Between DLC-2 terminal E and
YesThere is a short circuit to ground in the CAN communication

wiring harness. Repair or replace it, then go to Step 12.
ground
Between PCM terminal 1AM and
ground
Between PCM terminal 1AI and
ground
VERIFY NO SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM IN
10 CAN COMMUNICATION WIRING HARNESS
CAUTION:
YesThere is a short circuit to the power supply system in the CAN

communication wiring harness. Repair or replace it, then go to
Step 12.

Between DLC-2 terminal F and DLC2 terminal O
Between DLC-2 terminal A and DLC2 terminal O
Between PCM terminal 1AM and
PCM terminal 1AW
Between PCM terminal 1AI and PCM
terminal 1AW
11
INSPECT CAN-RELATED MODULES OTHER THAN PCM

Remove only one of the CAN-related modules other
than those related to the PCM.
YesReplace the removed module.

No Inspect all of the CAN-related modules other than those related
to the PCM using the same procedure.
After inspecting all of the modules, go to the next step.
Does the M-MDS recognize the vehicle?

12
PERFORM VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Does the M-MDS recognize the vehicle?
YesDTC troubleshooting completed.

No Replace the PCM.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U2516, 16:Er12, DEVICE CODE:16 ERROR CODE:12, 26:Er81, DEVICE CODE:26 ERROR
CODE:81 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
U2516
16:Er12
Information display
Audio unit
Device code:16
Car-navigation unit
DTC error code:12
CAN system communication error
Device code:26 Hands-free telephone unit (with Car-navigation system)

error code:81
26:Er81
Hands-free telephone unit (without Car-navigation system)

WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Perform the following on-board diagnosis according to FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM] troubleshooting procedure.
CAN system related harness malfunction
CAN system-related module malfunction
Malfunction of connectors between information display, car-navigation unit or audio unit,
SIRIUS satellite radio unit, hands-free telephone unit and climate control unit
Information display malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Climate control unit malfunction

Car-navigation unit or audio unit malfunction
SIRIUS satellite radio unit malfunction
Hands-free telephone unit malfunction
CAUTION:
When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no looseness, damage, deformation, corrosion, or poor
connection of the connector terminals.
Step
Inspection
1 VERIFICATION BEFORE SERVICING

Are any DTCs, except the
following, displayed?
U2516
16:Er12
Device code:16
error code:12
26:Er81
Device code:26
error code:81
Action
YesDetermine the open circuit location referring to DETERMINING OPEN
CIRCUIT LOCATION (MS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM].
2 INSPECTION OF CONTROL MODULE

CONNECTOR OUTPUTTING DTCs
Inspect the terminal condition
of the control module connector
outputting DTCs and the midconnector.

No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.
Are the connector terminals

normal without damage,
deformation, corrosion, or
disconnection?
3 INSPECTION OF POWER SUPPLY OF CONTROL
MODULE OUTPUTTING DTCs
Refer to the terminal voltage
table of the control module
outputting DTCs to inspect the
terminal voltage and fuse
condition.

Is the power supply voltage

normal?
4 INSPECTION OF BODY GROUND CONDITION OF YesGo to the next step.
CONTROL MODULE OUTPUTTING DTCs
Inspect the body ground wires
and ground point of the control
module outputting DTCs.
Are the ground and ground

point normal?
5 CAN SYSTEM RELATED WIRING HARNESS
INSPECTION
CAN system related wiring
harness inspection:

Short to
ground
Short to power
supply
Short between
twisted pair
wiring harness
Open circuit
6 INSPECT INFORMATION DISPLAY
Disconnect the information
display connector.
the following information
display connector terminals:

No Replace the information display, then go to Step 9.
(See INFORMATION DISPLAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Between
terminal J and
terminal L (part
side)
Is the resistance 118130
ohm?
7 INSPECT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

Disconnect the climate control
unit connector.
the following climate control
unit connector terminals:
No Replace the climate control unit, then go to Step 9.

(See CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER].)
Between
terminal J and
terminal L (part
side)
Is the resistance 118130
ohm?
8 CAN RELATED MODULE VERIFICATION
Remove only one of the CANrelated modules.
Inspect the DTCs of all
modules.
YesReinstall the removed module, remove another module and perform

the same inspection. Inspect all of the CAN-related modules using the
same procedure. After inspecting all of the modules, go to the next
step.
No Replace the removed module.
Are DTCs U2516, 16:Er12,

Device code:16 error code:12,
26:Er81, Device code:26 error
code:81 displayed?
9 AFTER REPAIR VERIFICATION
Connect all of the modules.
Clear DTCs.
Inspect the DTCs.
YesPerform the CAN system on-board diagnosis again according to the

troubleshooting procedure
Are DTCs displayed?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CAUTION:
If the malfunctioning part is detected in the communication line, before disconnecting the related connector for
inspection, press the connector in the connection direction to verify that there is no looseness or disconnection.
When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no damage, deformation, or corrosion of the connector
terminals.
1. Verify DTCs of the modules related to the CAN system.
2. Apply the following items to the DTC output pattern and the malfunctioning location, and then verify the reference to the
malfunctioning location.
Communication error DTCs
Display status of the air conditioner/audio control on the information display when the climate control unit,
or either the audio unit or the car-navigation unit is operated.
The operation condition of the SIRIUS satellite radio system and the hands-free telephone system.
NOTE:
A hyphen (-) in the DTC output pattern cell indicates that the DTC may or may not be displayed depending
on the malfunction detection conditions. If it is not displayed, the malfunctioning location can be determined
by checking the crosses () and asterisks (*).
3. Inspect the possible cause and inspection item of the applicable malfunctioning part.
4. Perform the DTC inspection after the repair procedure.
If any DTC is displayed, return to FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM].
DTC Output Pattern and Malfunctioning Location

Cross (): Communication error DTCHyphen (-): Communication error DTC (may or may not be displayed)Asterisk (*): No display or no
operation
DTC display
DTC output module
DTC output pattern and malfunctioning location

DTC
U0164 EATC
U0184 ACU
Information display
Audio unit
Car-navigation unit
11:Er01
Device code 11/
Error code 01
Information display display
Display pattern on information display
None ACU*1
None EATC*2
Audio control display
Air conditioning control display
System operation
System operation pattern

*
Hands-free telephone system
*2
SIRIUS satellite radio system
*1
*
*
If None ACU is displayed on the information display, no DTC is displayed.

If None EATC is displayed on the information display, no DTC is displayed.
Possible cause
Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion

Open circuit in wiring harness between information display and branch A
System wiring diagram
Inspection item
Information display connector

Wiring harness between information display terminal J and branch A
Wiring harness between information display terminal L and branch A
Information display
Possible cause

Open circuit in wiring harness between audio unit/car-navigation unit and branch A
Audio unit/car-navigation unit malfunction
Inspection item
Audio unit/car-navigation unit connector

Wiring harness between audio unit/car-navigation unit terminal 1O and branch A
Wiring harness between audio unit/car-navigation unit terminal 1Q and branch A
Audio unit/car-navigation unit
With SIRIUS satellite radio system
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between branch B and SIRIUS satellite radio unit
Inspection item
SIRIUS satellite radio unit connector
Wiring harness between branch B and SIRIUS satellite radio unit terminal 2L
Wiring harness between branch B and SIRIUS satellite radio unit terminal 2K
SIRIUS satellite radio unit
With SIRIUS satellite radio system and hands-free telephone system
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between branch B and SIRIUS satellite unit
Inspection item
SIRIUS satellite radio unit connector
Wiring harness between branch B and SIRIUS satellite radio unit terminal 2L
Wiring harness between branch B and SIRIUS satellite radio unit terminal 2K
D
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between branch A and connector C-10
Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-10 and branch B
Connector C-10 malfunction
Inspection item
Connector C-10
Wiring harness between branch A and connector C-10
Wiring harness between connector C-10 and branch B
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between branch B and branch C
Inspection item
Wiring harness between branch B and branch C
Without SIRIUS satellite radio system
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between branch A and connector C-9
Inspection item
Connector C-9
Wiring harness between branch A and connector C-9
Without SIRIUS satellite radio system and hands-free telephone system
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between climate control unit and branch A
Inspection item
Climate control unit connector
Wiring harness between branch A and climate control unit terminal J
Wiring harness between branch A and climate control unit terminal L
With SIRIUS satellite radio system
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between branch B and connector C-10
Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-10 and climate control unit
Inspection item
Wiring harness between connector C-10 and climate control unit terminal J
Wiring harness between connector C-10 and climate control unit terminal L
With hands-free telephone system
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between climate control unit and connector C-9
Inspection item
Wiring harness between branch B and connector C-9
Wiring harness between climate control unit terminal J and connector C-9
Wiring harness between climate control unit terminal L and connector C-9
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between branch C and connector C-9
Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-9 and climate control unit
Inspection item
Wiring harness between branch C and connector C-9
Wiring harness between climate control unit terminal J and connector C-9
Wiring harness between climate control unit terminal L and connector C-9
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DETERMINING OPEN CIRCUIT LOCATION (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
CAUTION:
If the malfunctioning part is detected in the communication line, before disconnecting the related connector for inspection,
press the connector in the connection direction to verify that there is no looseness or disconnection.
When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no damage, deformation, or corrosion of the connector terminals.
1. Verify the CAN system-related module DTCs and the failed module on the M-MDS screen.
2. Refer to DTC Output Pattern and Malfunctioning Part and find the area linked from the malfunctioning part.
NOTE:
A hyphen (-) in the DTC output pattern cell indicates that the DTC may be displayed depending on the malfunction
detection conditions. If it is not displayed, the malfunctioning part can be determined by checking only the crosses
().
If any of the following DTCs is displayed alone, perform the applicable DTC inspection. (See DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX
Instrument cluster: U1900
EPS control module: U1900
DSC HU/CM: U1900
Keyless control module: U1147, U2510
Steering angle sensor: U1900
3. Inspect the possible cause and inspection item of the applicable malfunctioning part.
4. Perform the DTC inspection after the repair procedure.
If any DTC is displayed, return to FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM].
DTC Output Pattern and Malfunctioning Part

Cross (): Communication error-related DTC and malfunctioning moduleHyphen (-): Error signal-related DTC may be displayed
M-MDS display
DTC output module
IC
(Instrument cluster)
DTC output pattern and malfunctioning part

DTC
B C D
U1900
U2023
U0101
PCM
(PCM)
U0121
U0155
U0167
U01900
EPS
(EPS control module)
U2023
TCM *3
U0100
(TCM)
U0121
U0100
U0101
ABS
U0155
(DSC HU/CM)*2
U1900
U2023
U1147
RKE
(Keyless control module (without advanced keyless entry and start system))
U2510
U0100
U0323
RKE
(Keyless control module (with advanced keyless entry and start system))
U2023
U2510
SASM*2
TPM *2
U0100
(TPMS)
U2023
M-MDS display module
U1900
(Steering angle sensor)
"Fail" display pattern
IC
PCM
EPS
TCM *3
ABS*1, *2
RKE
SASM*2
TPM
*1
*2
*3
Vehicles with ABS

Vehicles with DSC
AT
Possible cause

Open circuit in wiring harness between PCM and branch A
PCM malfunction
Inspection item
PCM connector
Wiring harness between PCM terminal 1AM and branch A
Wiring harness between PCM terminal 1AI and branch A
PCM
Possible cause

Open circuit in wiring harness between EPS control module and branch A
Inspection item
EPS control module connector

Wiring harness between EPS control module terminal 2M and branch A
Wiring harness between EPS control module terminal 2K and branch A
EPS control module
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between branch A and branch B
Inspection item
Wiring harness between branch A and branch B
Possible cause

Open circuit in wiring harness between TCM and branch B
TCM malfunction
Inspection item
TCM connector
Wiring harness between TCM terminal 1G and branch B
Wiring harness between TCM terminal 1C and branch B
TCM
Possible cause

Open circuit in wiring harness between ABS HU/CM and branch B
Inspection item
ABS HU/CM connector

Wiring harness between ABS HU/CM terminal O and branch B
Wiring harness between ABS HU/CM terminal R and branch B
ABS HU/CM
Possible cause

Open circuit in wiring harness DSC HU/CM and branch B
Inspection item
DSC HU/CM connector

Wiring harness between DSC HU/CM terminal X and branch B
Wiring harness between DSC HU/CM terminal W and branch B
DSC HU/CM
Possible cause

Open circuit in wiring harness between branch B and connector C-07
Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-07 and branch C
Inspection item
Connector C-07
Wiring harness between branch B and connector C-07
Wiring harness between connector C-07 and branch C
Possible cause

Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module and branch C
Inspection item
With advanced keyless entry and start system

Keyless control module connector
Wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 3X and branch C
Wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 3W and branch C
Without advanced keyless entry and start system
Keyless control module connector
Wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 3A and branch C
Wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 3B and branch C
Possible cause
Open circuit in wiring harness between branch C and connector C-09

Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-09 and branch D
Inspection item
Connector C-09
Wiring harness between branch C and connector C-09
Wiring harness between connector C-09 and branch D
Possible cause

Open circuit in wiring harness between steering angle sensor and branch D
Inspection item
Steering angle sensor connector

Wiring harness between steering angle sensor terminal E and branch D
Wiring harness between steering angle sensor terminal F and branch D
Possible cause

Open circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and branch D
Inspection item
Instrument cluster connector

Wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 1J and branch D
Wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 1L and branch D
Instrument cluster
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
When the CAN system is thought to be malfunctioning based on the repair order form and the
malfunctioning symptom, perform the CAN system on-board diagnosis.
DTCs are also output due to a control module or sensor malfunction, or incorrect power supply. Verify
the output DTCs and first inspect the DTCs not shown in DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM].
If there is an open circuit in the communication lines, it is possible that signal error DTCs may be
output in addition to communication error DTCs. Perform DETERMINING OPEN CIRCUIT LOCATION
(HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM], DETERMINING OPEN CIRCUIT LOCATION (MSCAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM] if the communication error and signal error DTCs are
output simultaneously.
*1
*2

*3
*4
*5
DTC U2516, 16:Er12, DEVICE CODE:16 ERROR CODE:12, 26:Er81, DEVICE CODE:26 ERROR CODE:81
[MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
DETERMINING OPEN CIRCUIT LOCATION (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM] /
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HS-CAN
DTC Output Unit
DTC
Malfunction location
U1900 *1 CAN system communication error

Instrument cluster
U2023 Abnormal message from other module

U2516 *1 CAN system communication error (HS-CAN)
U0073 *1 Module communication error (CAN bus)
TPMS (Instrument cluster)
U0100 Communication error to PCM

U2023 Abnormal message from other module
U0101 Communication error to TCM
PCM
U0121 ABS HU/CM (with ABS) or DSC HU/CM (with DSC)

communication error
U0155 Communication error to instrument cluster
U0167 Communication error to keyless control module
U1900 CAN system communication error
ABS HU/CM (with ABS)

U2516 *1 CAN system wiring harness open or short circuit

U0101 Communication error to TCM
DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
U2023 Abnormal message from PCM
EPS control module

TCM

U0121 ABS HU/CM (with ABS) or DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
communication error

(without advanced keyless entry and
start system)

(with advanced keyless entry and start

system)


U2516 *1 CAN system communication error (HS-CAN)
*1
If only the target DTCs are displayed, perform the corresponding DTC inspection without
determining the open circuit location.
MS-CAN
DTC Output Unit
DTC
Malfunction location
U0164 EATC Communication error to climate control unit

Information display
U0184 ACU Communication error to audio unit

U2516 *1
11:Er01
Communication error to SIRIUS satellite radio

unit
Audio unit
16:Er12 *1
Device code
Communication error to SIRIUS satellite radio
11/
unit
Error code 01
Car-navigation unit
Device code
16/
Error code
12 *1
Hands-free telephone unit (with audio unit)
26:Er81 *1
Hands-free telephone unit (with car-navigation

unit)
*1
Device code
26/
Error code
81 *1
If only the target DTCs are displayed, perform the corresponding DTC inspection without
determining the open circuit location.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
2. Select Modules.
3. Select IC.
2. Select IC.
NOTE:
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
Condition
Specification
PID
monitor
module
ABS
HU/CM: O,
R
Present Circuit in the ABS (DSC)

HU/CM is normal.
ABS_MSG
(Missing message from the
ABS (DSC) HU/CM)
EPS_MSG
EPS control module)
PCM_MSG
PCM)
RKE_MSG*1
keyless control module)
Terminal
DSC
HU/CM: X,
W
Not Circuit in the ABS (DSC)

Present HU/CM is disable.
Instrument
cluster: 1J,
1L
Present Circuit in the EPS control

module is normal
EPS control
module: M,
K
Not Circuit in the EPS control

Present module is disable
Instrument
cluster: 1J,
1L
Present Circuit in the PCM is

normal.
PCM: 1AM,
1AI
Not Circuit in the PCM is

Present disable.
Instrument
cluster
Instrument
cluster: 1J,
1L
Present Circuit in the keyless

control module is normal.
Keyless
control
module:
3X, 3W
Not Circuit in the keyless

Present control module is disable.
Instrument
cluster: 1J,
1L
TCM_MSG*2
TCM)
TPM_MSG *3
instrument cluster)
*1
*2
*3
Present Circuit in the TCM is

normal.
TCM: 1G,
1C
Not Circuit in the TCM is

Present disable.
Instrument
cluster: 1J,
1L
Present Circuit in the instrument

cluster is normal
Not Circuit in the instrument
Present cluster is disable
Instrument
cluster: 1J,
1L
With advanced keyless entry and start system

AT
With TPMS
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC
U0073
U1900
U2516
CAN system wiring harness open or short circuit

WARNING:
DETECTION
CONDITION
Perform the following on-board diagnosis according to FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION

SYSTEM] troubleshooting procedure.
CAN system related harness malfunction
CAN system-related module malfunction
Malfunction of connectors between PCM, TCM, ABS HU/CM, DSC HU/CM, EPS control module, keyless
control module and instrument cluster
PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE

TCM malfunction
CAUTION:
When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no looseness, damage, deformation, corrosion, or poor connection of the
Step
Inspection
1 VERIFICATION BEFORE SERVICING

Are any DTCs, except the following, displayed?
U0073
U1900
Action
YesDetermine the open circuit location referring to DETERMINING OPEN
CIRCUIT LOCATION (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM].
U2516
2 INSPECTION OF CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR
OUTPUTTING DTCs
Inspect the terminal condition of the control
module connector outputting DTCs and the
mid-connector.

Are the connector terminals normal without

damage, deformation, corrosion, or
disconnection?
3 INSPECTION OF POWER SUPPLY OF CONTROL MODULE
OUTPUTTING DTCs
Refer to the terminal voltage table of the
control module outputting DTCs or use the
PID/data monitoring function to inspect the
terminal voltage and fuse condition.
Is the power supply voltage normal?

4 INSPECTION OF BODY GROUND CONDITION OF CONTROL
MODULE OUTPUTTING DTCs
Inspect the body ground wires and ground
point of the control module outputting DTCs.

Are the ground and ground point normal?

5 CAN SYSTEM RELATED WIRING HARNESS INSPECTION
CAN system related wiring harness inspection:
Short to ground


Short between twisted pair
wiring harness
Open circuit
6 INSPECT PCM

Measure the resistance between the following
PCM connector terminals:
No Replace the PCM, then go to Step 9.

Between terminal 1AM and

terminal 1AI (part side)
Is the resistance 118130 ohm?
7 INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Measure the resistance between the following
instrument cluster connector terminals:

No Replace the instrument cluster, then go to Step 9.
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Between terminal 1J and

terminal 1L (part side)
Is the resistance 118130 ohm?
8 CAN RELATED MODULE VERIFICATION
Remove only one of the CAN-related modules.
Inspect the DTCs of all modules using the MMDS.
YesReinstall the removed module, remove another module and perform the
same inspection. Inspect all of the CAN-related modules using the same
procedure. After inspecting all of the modules, go to the next step.
No Replace the removed module.
Are DTCs U0073, U1900, U2516 displayed?

9 AFTER REPAIR VERIFICATION
Connect all of the modules.
YesPerform the CAN system on-board diagnosis again according to the

troubleshooting procedure

Inspect the DTCs using the M-MDS.
Are DTCs displayed?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
Monitor item
CCNT_HE
Input-output signal/part name

Number of continuous DTCs
Unit/State
Terminal
ECT_GAUGE Water temperature gauge
ODO COUNT Odometer
SPDOMETER Speedometer
KPH
TACH
RPM
Tachometer
IC_FFD1_MLG Travel distance (Freeze frame data 1)
IC_FFD2_MLG Travel distance (Freeze frame data 2)
EPS_MSG
EPS control moduleCAN transmission condition
Not_Present /
Present
ABS_MSG
ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CMCAN transmission condition
Not_Present /
Present
PCM_MSG
PCMCAN transmission condition
Not_Present /
Present
TCM_MSG*1 TCMCAN transmission condition
Not_Present /
Present
TPMS control module (Instrument cluster)CAN transmission

TPM_MSG *2 condition
Not_Present /
Present
1J, 1L
RKE_MSG*3
*1
*2
*3
Keyless control moduleCAN transmission condition
Not_Present /
Present
AT
With TPMS
With advanced keyless and start system
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
2. Select Modules.
3. Select IC.
2. Select IC.
5. Switch the ignition to off.
6. Switch the ignition to ON and wait for 5 s more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
2. Select Modules.
3. Select IC.
2. Select IC.
NOTE:
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U2023
Correct data cannot be received from other module
DETECTION CONDITION
Correct data cannot be received from PCM

Correct data cannot be received from keyless control module
PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE

STEP
INSPECTION
INSPECT FOR PCM AND KEYLESS CONTROL

1 MODULE MALFUNCTION
position.
inspection for the PCM and keyless
control module.
TEST [13B-MSP].)
ACTION
(See DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND START SYSTEM].)
(See DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED

SYSTEM].)
Are any DTCs detected?
VERIFY THAT THE SAME DTC IS NOT
2 PRESENT

If the malfunction recurs, replace the PCM or
(See CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER].)
keyless control module, then go to the next

step.


(See DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
Select Self Test.
Select Modules.
Select IC.
Select IC.
Select Self Test.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the instrument cluster.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
DTC
Description
Page
B1342 Instrument cluster malfunction
B2477 Configuration error
U1900Communication error

SYSTEM].)
U2023 Correct data cannot be received from other

module
(See DTC U2023 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
U2064 Warning light illumination request signal from

other modules
(See DTC U2064 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
U2516CAN system communication error (HS-CAN)

SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1342
DETECTION CONDITION
Malfunction in the Instrument cluster internal circuit
POSSIBLE CAUSE
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Clear DTC from
memory.
to the LOCK position.
ACTION
YesReplace the instrument cluster. (See INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

to the ON position.
Is B1342 displayed?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B2477
Configuration error
Configuration error
DETECTION CONDITION
Malfunction in the instrument cluster internal circuit
POSSIBLE CAUSE
STEP
INSPECTION
PERFORM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1 CONFIGURATION
Perform instrument
cluster configuration.
Is B2477 displayed?
ACTION
YesReplace the instrument cluster. (See INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

2 B2477 COMPLETED
Clear DTC from memory.
Is B2477 displayed?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U2064
Warning light illumination request signal from other modules
DETECTION CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Receive warning light illumination request signal

CAN-related module malfunction
CAUTION:
DTC U2064 is registered to the instrument cluster by a request from other modules and
does not indicate a malfunction in the instrument cluster itself.
DTC U2064 may not be cleared during engine starting even if DTC clearing is done using
the M-MDS. When clearing DTC U2064, execute with the ignition switch in the ON position
(Engine off).
1. Verify the freeze frame data according to the following procedure:
a. Connect the M-MDS to DLC-2.
NOTE:
Freeze frame data of the instrument cluster can be displayed by the
IDS (laptop PC)
b. After the vehicle is identified, select the following items from the initial screen of
the M-MDS.
Select Electrical.
Select IC Service Functions.
2. Determine which unit is thought to be malfunctioning based on the freeze frame data.
NOTE:
If several warning light illumination requests are received, they will be recorded
in one freeze frame data.
Warning light illumination request unit

Freeze frame data
PCMTCM
ABS
DSC
EPS control Keyless control
HU/CM HU/CM
module
module
Generator warning
light
MIL
Oil level warning

light
Coolant level
warning light
Illuminated warning
light
ABS warning light
Meter, gauge
control status
Brake system
warning light
AT warning light
EPS warning light
Keyless warning
light
Speedometer
Tachometer
Water temperature
gauge
3. Inspect the malfunctioning part.

4. Clear the DTC from the memory.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position then ON position.
6. Verify that the DTC U2064 is displayed using the M-MDS.
If DTC U2064 is displayed, go back to Step 1.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [AUDIO]
NOTE:
All DTCs displayed in the on-board diagnostic test mode should be entered in the Audio
Repair Order Form.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position.
2. Turn the audio unit power to OFF.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the FM/AM switch and the
MEDIA switch for 2 s or more.
NOTE:
If several DTCs are in the memory, they can be displayed using the SEEK
switch.
4. To stop the on-board diagnostic test mode, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE [AUDIO]
NOTE:
The supplier can vary with the module. When asking the supplier (service center) for repair
or replacement, identify the supplier and fill in the Audio Repair Order Form with the
following procedures.
Identification Using the Label or Inscribed Lettering

a. Shift lever knob (MT) (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
b. Shift knob (AT) (See SELECTOR LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Upper panel (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Ashtray panel (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Knee bolster (See KNEE BOLSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the supplier by referring to the label attached to each unit.
Verify Using the Diagnostic Assist Function

2. Turn the audio unit power ON.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the Preset switch 5 for
approx. 3 s or more.
4. Identify the supplier code by referring to the information display.
Supplier code Supplier name

01
SANYO Automedia
02
Panasonic
03
Clarion
04
Pioneer
NOTE:
The supplier code can also be identified from the DTC displays screen.
5. Cancel the diagnostic assist function by either turning OFF the audio unit power or by ignition
to the switched OFF
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO]
Switch Inspection
1. With the audio power ON, press the POWER/VOLUME switch and simultaneously press the
MEDIA switch for approx. 1 s.
2. Inspect according to the following table:

INSPECTION
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
ACTION
Launch the switch

inspection mode.
YesThe switch is normal.
Operate all of the

switches (press).
No Remove the audio unit.
Does the buzzer

sound?
(See CENTER PANEL UNIT

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
3. Turn the audio OFF or the ignition switch to the LOCK position to stop the diagnostic assist
function.
Speaker Inspection
AUTO-M switch for approx. 1 s.

INSPECTION
Launch the speaker
inspection mode.
Does each speaker
output sound in the
following order?:
Without
Bose
1. Front
door
speaker
and
front
tweeter
(LH)
2. Front
door
speaker
and
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
ACTION
The speakers and the wiring
Yes harness between the audio unit
and speakers are normal.
If no sound is
produced from all
of the speakers.
(See NO.3 NO
SOUND FROM ALL
SPEAKERS
[AUDIO].)
If no sound is
produced from
some of the
speakers.
(See NO.4 NO
SOUND FROM
SOME SPEAKERS
front
tweeter
(RH)
[AUDIO].)
3. Rear
speaker
(RH)
4. Rear
speaker
(LH)
With
Bose
No
1. Front
door
speaker
and
front
tweeter
(LH)
2. Center
speaker
3. Front
door
speaker
and
front
tweeter
(RH)
4. Rear
speaker
and rear
tweeter
(RH)
5. Rear
speaker
and rear
tweeter
(LH)
function.
Radio Reception Condition Inspection

1. Turn the audio unit power to ON.
2. Tune in the radio.

3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the RDM/PRESET switch 2
for approx. 1 s.

CAUTION:
Even if the system is normal, radio reception may be difficult depending on
where the system is inspected (indoors/outdoors, or conditions at the location).
Before inspecting the system, verify that radio reception is adequate.
When inspecting, select a frequency band (radio station) with the best
reception.
INSPECTION
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
ACTION
LEV-9 LEV5 Antenna, glass antenna, antenna feeder and audio unit
are normal.
LEV-4 LEV3 Change frequencies and re-perform the inspection.
Inspect the antenna, glass antenna and
antenna feeder.
Start the radio reception

condition inspection
mode.
LEV-2 LEV0
If either the antenna

or the antenna feeder
is not normal, replace
the malfunctioning
part.
If the antenna and

antenna feeder are
normal, replace the
audio unit.
function.
Audio Amplifier Specification Inspection

SEEK/TRACK switch (down) for approx. 1 s.

INSPECTION
Launch audio amplifier
specification inspection
mode.
Verify the audio
amplifier specification.
Dose the audio
amplifier specification
correspond.
INFORMATION DISPLAY
Without
Bose
N
With
Bose
L
ACTION
YesSystem is okay.
No Replace the audio unit.
function.
Audio Amplifier (With Bose) Identify Inspection

RPT/PRESET switch 1 and AUTO-M switch for approx. 3 s.

INSPECTION
Launch audio amplifier

(With Bose ) identify
inspection mode.
With
normal
seat
Dose the audio

correspond.
The rear
speaker
sounds.
With
leather
seat
ACTION
YesAudio amplifier is okay.
No Replace the audio
amplifier.
(See AUDIO AMPLIFIER
The
front
door
speaker
sounds.
function.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Software Version Verification

2. Tune in the SIRIUS satellite radio.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the PRESET switch 1 and
the PRESET switch 3 for 3 s or more.
4. Verify the SIRIUS satellite radio software version.
function.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC TABLE [AUDIO]
Screen display
DTC
Detection condition
Possible cause/inspection
(When starting onboard diagnostic test

function)
03: Er01
CD player cannot implement insert and CD player malfunction

eject commands.
03: Er02
Cannot change tracks.

CD reading error.
03: Er07
CD player malfunction
Defective CD (scratches or
dirt)
CD player does not operate.

03: Er10
Malfunction of connectors
between audio unit and
CD player
06: Er01
CD changer (upper module) cannot

implement insert, eject, and disc change
commands.
Defective CD (curved,
broken or foreign material
stuck/attached, etc.)
CD changer (upper
module) malfunction

06: Er02
CD changer (upper
module) malfunction
CD reading error.
06: Er07
CD changer malfunction
CD changer does not operate.

06: Er10
CD changer
CD changer malfunction
09: Er20
Audio system does not operate.

Broken sound/No sound
09: Er21
Voltage at audio unit is low.

Audio unit internal
malfunction or audio unit
protection function
operates
Speaker or speaker circuit
malfunction
09: Er22
No radio reception
SSI bus communication error
Inspect the radio operation according to

vehicle condition.
Poor connection of the
connectors
SIRIUS satellite radio
antenna feeder
malfunction
11: Er01

antenna malfunction
malfunction
Audio unit malfunction
Poor connection of antenna
11: Er03
Poor connection of the

connectors
antenna feeder
malfunction
antenna malfunction

malfunction
16: Er12
21: Er19
22: Er01
Audio system communication error

MP3 applicable CD changer cannot
implement insert, eject, and disc change
commands.
CAN system communication error (See

FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
Center panel malfunction
MP3 applicable CD
changer malfunction

22: Er02
MP3 applicable CD
changer malfunction
CD reading error.
22: Er07
MP3 applicable CD
changer malfunction
MP3 applicable CD changer does not

operate.
22: Er10
MP3 applicable CD
changer
MP3 applicable CD
changer malfunction
no Err
No DTCs stored
No DTCs stored
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLEARING DTC [AUDIO]
CAUTION:
Before clearing the memory, be sure to enter all of the DTCs displayed in the on-board
diagnostic test mode in the Audio Repair Order Form.
1. Start the on-board diagnostic test mode.
(See STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [AUDIO].)
2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the AUDIO CONT switch for
2 s or more.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [CARNAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NOTE:
Repair Order Form.
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position.
2. Turn the audio power to OFF.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the TUNE/AUDIO switch
and the DISP switch for 1 s or more.
NOTE:
If several DTCs are in the memory, they can be displayed using the UP/DOWN
switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
NOTE:
The supplier can vary with the module. When asking the supplier (service center) for repair
or replacement, identify the supplier and fill in the Audio Repair Order Form with the
following procedures.
Identification Using the Label or Inscribed Lettering

3. Verify the supplier by referring to the label attached to each unit.
Verify Using the Diagnostic Assist Function

1. Launch the diagnostic assist function. (See DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [CARNAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
2. Press the Diagnostic assist code input switch, and input the diagnostic assist code 06.
3. Select ENTER.
4. Identify the supplier code by referring to the display.
Supplier code Supplier name

1
SANYO Automedia
Panasonic
Clarion
Pioneer
VISTEON
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch to return to the diagnostic assist code input screen.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch to release the diagnostic assist function.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Starting Procedure
2. Turn the audio power to ON.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the TUNE/AUDIO switch for 1
s or more.
4. Press the Diagnostic assist code input switch, and input the diagnostic assist code.
5. Select ENTER.
Diagnostic assist code input screen
No.
Name
Content/function
1 Diagnostic assist code
Display the diagnostic assist code.
2 Diagnostic assist code input switch Input the diagnostic assist code.
3 DEL
Clear the diagnostic assist code.
4 Diagnostic content
Display the diagnostic content.
5 ENTER
Go to the diagnostic assist function.
Diagnostic assist code table
No.
Content/function
01 Diagnostic assist code 01 display inspection

02 Diagnostic assist code 02 switch inspection
03 Diagnostic assist code 03 speaker inspection

04 Diagnostic assist code 04 radio reception condition inspection
05 Diagnostic assist code 05 antenna control output condition inspection
06 Diagnostic assist code 06 supplier identification
07 Diagnostic assist code 07 audio amplifier specification inspection
08 Diagnostic assist code 08 display open/close inspection
09 Diagnostic assist code 09 radio SEEK inspection
10 Diagnostic assist code 10 software version verification
11 Diagnostic assist code 11 DVD/CD drive inspection
Diagnostic assist code 01 display inspection

2. Select ENTER.
Inspection
Launch
the
display
inspection
mode.
Verify the
display.
Display
Action
The display is normal.
The
display
displays
normally.
RedGreenBlueWhiteBlackColor
Replace the car-navigation
The
barGrey barPosition adjustment
display unit.
screen
does not
display (See CENTER PANEL UNIT
normally. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Diagnostic assist code 02 switch inspection

2. Select ENTER.
Inspection
Display
Launch the switch

inspection mode.
Operate all of the switches
(press).
Action
YesThe switch is normal.
Replace the car-navigation unit.
Does the buzzer sound?

No REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Diagnostic assist code 03 speaker inspection

2. Select ENTER.
Inspection
Launch the speaker
inspection mode.
Does each speaker
output sound in the
following order?:
1. Front
door
speaker
and
front
tweeter
(LH)
Display
Action
The speakers and the wiring harness between
Yes the car-navigation unit and speakers are
normal.
If no sound is produced from
all of the speakers.
(See NO.3 NO SOUND FROM
ALL SPEAKERS [AUDIO].)
If no sound is produced from
some of the speakers.
(See NO.4 NO SOUND FROM

SOME SPEAKERS [AUDIO].)
2. Center
speaker
3. Front
door
speaker
and
front
tweeter
(RH)
No
4. Rear
speaker
and
rear
tweeter
(RH)
5. Rear
speaker
and
rear
tweeter
(LH)
Diagnostic assist code 04 radio reception condition inspection

1. Launch the diagnostic assist function with the radio power on and the radio receiving
broadcasts. (See Starting Procedure.)
3. Select ENTER.
CAUTION:
Even if the system is normal, radio reception may be difficult depending on where
the system is inspected (indoors/outdoors, or conditions at the location). Before
inspecting the system, verify that radio reception is adequate.
When performing the inspection, select the best area for receiving radio
frequencies.
Display (AM
Inspection
522 kHz
reception)
Action
LEV-10 522 Glass antenna, antenna feeder and car-navigation unit are
LEV 5 522 normal.
LEV-4 522
Change frequencies and re-perform the inspection.
LEV 3 522
Inspect the glass antenna, antenna feeder.
If either the glass antenna
or the antenna feeder is
not normal, replace the
Start the radio

reception condition
inspection mode.
LEV-2 522
LEV 0 522
If the glass antenna,

antenna feeder are normal,
replace the car-navigation
unit.
Diagnostic assist code 05 antenna control output condition inspection

3. Select ENTER.
CAUTION:
Even if the system is normal, radio reception may be difficult depending on where
the system is inspected (indoors/outdoors, or conditions at the location). Before
inspecting the system, verify that radio reception is adequate.
When performing the inspection, select the best area for receiving radio
frequencies.
Inspection
Display
ANTON
Start antenna control condition
inspection mode.
Action
Sound
quality
good.
Sound
quality
poor.
System is okay.
(See NO.1 NO RADIO RECEPTION (AM/FM)/NO

OR LOW VOLUME [RADIO].)

ANTOFF (See CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
Diagnostic assist code 06 supplier identification

1. Refer to the supplier identification procedure. (See SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
Diagnostic assist code 07 audio amplifier specification inspection

2. Select ENTER.
Inspection
Launch the audio
inspection mode.
Verify the audio
amplifier specification.
Does the audio amplifier
specification
correspond?
Display
Without
Bose
N
With
Bose
L
Action
YesSystem is okay.
unit.
CENTER PANEL UNIT
No (See
Diagnostic assist code 08 display open/close inspection

2. Select ENTER.
Inspection
Display
Launch the audio display open/close

inspection mode.
Does the display open/close in the
following order?
Action
YesSystem is okay.
1. closeopenclose

No REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Diagnostic assist code 09 radio SEEK inspection

3. Select ENTER.
Inspection
Launch
the radio
SEEK
inspection
mode.
Display
Action
YesSystem is okay.
Inspect the glass antenna, antenna feeder.
If either the glass antenna
Verify the
SEEK
inspection
to the
directions
on the
screen.
ch
RECEIVED
or the antenna feeder is

not normal, replace the
If the glass antenna,
antenna feeder are normal,
replace the car-navigation
unit.
No

Is the
inspection
result
normal?

Diagnostic assist code 10 software version verification

2. Select ENTER.
3. Verify the software version.
Inspection
Display
Launch the software version verification mode.

Verify the software version.
Action
Display the software version.
Diagnostic assist code 11 DVD/CD drive inspection

2. Select ENTER.
Inspection
Display
Action
Launch the DVD/CD

drive inspection mode.
Insert the DVD or CD.
Is the inspection result
normal?
USER DISC
DEFECT
YesSystem is okay.

CD-DRIVE
No
MALFUNCTION
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC TABLE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Screen
display
Malfunction description
Inferred cause/verified content
Reference
Device Error
code code
Car-navigation does not

20 function
Battery voltage malfunction
Verify the
symptoms
described by
the customer
(such as
occurrence
frequency and
mode).
21 Audio unclear or no audio
from radio and CD
(See NO.1 CAR-NAVIGATION

SYSTEM DOES NOT START
OPERATION (DISPLAY CHANGES
TO BACK.) [CAR-NAVIGATION
SYSTEM].)
(See NO.5 BROKEN SOUND OR
POOR SOUND QUALITY
[AUDIO].)
Short to
ground in the
wiring harness
between the
car-navigation
unit and
speakers
Car-navigation
unit
malfunction
Verify the
sometimes
described by
the customer
(such as time
(See NO.1 NO RADIO RECEPTION

(AM/FM)/NO OR LOW VOLUME
[RADIO].)
09
22 Radio not receiving signal
and place of
occurrence,
and radio
frequency).
Car-navigation
unit
malfunction
Car-navigation unit does not Car-navigation unit voltage

23 operate.
malfunction
Verify the
symptoms
described by
the customer
(such as
occurrence
frequency and
mode).
24 Audio unclear or no audio
from radio and CD
(See NO.1 CAR-NAVIGATION

SYSTEM DOES NOT START
OPERATION (DISPLAY CHANGES
TO BACK.) [CAR-NAVIGATION
SYSTEM].)
(See NO.5 BROKEN SOUND OR
POOR SOUND QUALITY
[AUDIO].)
Short to
ground in the
wiring harness
between the
car-navigation
unit and
speakers
Car-navigation
unit
malfunction
Poor
connection of
the connectors
01 SSI bus communication error

11

(SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO)
[RADIO].)
SIRIUS
satellite radio
unit
malfunction
Car-navigation
unit
malfunction
03 Poor connection of antenna
Poor connection of antenna

connector

(SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO)
[RADIO].)
ALC function
does not
operate.
(without
Bose )
16
12
AUDIOPILOT
function
does not
operate.
(with
Bose )

CAN system communication

error
Inspect the
switch.
21
Panel switch does not

19 operate.
Panel switch
malfunction
Car-navigation
unit
malfunction
(See
DIAGNOSTIC
ASSIST
FUNCTION
[CARNAVIGATION
SYSTEM].)
Car-navigation
unit malfunction
MP3 applicable CD changer

01 cannot implement insert,
eject, and disc change
commands.
Defective CD
(curved,
broken or
foreign
material
stuck/attached,
etc.)
(See NO.1 CD PLAYER/CHANGER

DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR
EJECTS THE CD IMMEDIATELY
[CD PLAYER/CHANGER].)
Car-navigation
unit
malfunction
02 Cannot change tracks or disc.
22
Defective CD
(curved,
broken or
foreign
material
stuck/attached,
etc.)
(See NO.6 DISC CHANGE IS

INOPERATIVE [CD
PLAYER/CHANGER].)
(See NO.11 TRACK CHANGE IS
INOPERATIVE [CD
PLAYER/CHANGER].)
Car-navigation
unit
malfunction
CD
incompatible
(See NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER

DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO
CD cannot playback (cannot

07 operate)
MP3 applicable CD changer

10 (Car-navigation unit) does
not operate.
(CD used by
customer)
SOUND [CD PLAYER/CHANGER].)
Recurs no
matter the
type of CD (no
non-compatible
CD)
Malfunction of
connectors
between carnavigation unit
and MP3
applicable CD
changer drive.
(See NO.2 NO POWER ON THE

ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM
[AUDIO].)
Car-navigation
unit
malfunction
Inspect the
switch.
25
32 Switch does not operate.
Communication error between

car navigation function and
audio function
(See
DIAGNOSTIC
ASSIST
FUNCTION
[CARNAVIGATION
SYSTEM].)
Car-navigation
unit malfunction
No Error
DTC is not recorded.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLEARING DTC [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
CAUTION:
1. Launch the on-board diagnostic test mode. (See STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the DISP switch for 1 s or
more.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NAVIGATION CHECK [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Inspection item list
No.
Name
Content/function
1 GPS Information Display the GPS information.

2 Vehicle Sensors
Display the vehicle sensors.
3 History
Display the history.
4 Microphone Check Verify the microphone condition.

5 Menu
Return to the Diagnosis Menu.
GPS Information
2. Launch the diagnostic mode. (See STARTING PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSTIC MODE [CARNAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
3. Select Navigation Check.
4. Select GPS Information.
5. Verify the GPS information.
NOTE:
The GPS reception signal is updated every 1 s.
No.
Name
Content/function
1 Satellite information Display No (satellite number), elevation angle, azimuth, signal level for the
satellite.
2 Positioning condition Display any one of the following:
[2D]: During two-dimensional positioning
[3D]: During three-dimensional positioning
[NG]: When positioning data is unavailable
[error]: During reception error occurrence
[]: Other than the above
3 Position
Display the latitude and longitude of the current position.
4 GPS reception
condition
Display any one of the following:
[P]: If the applicable satellite is being used in the vehicles

current position.
[T]: If receiving but not being used in the vehicles current
position
[]: If reception is not possible from applicable satellite
5 Navi Menu
Return to the Navigation Check Menu.
6 Day and time
Display the day/time information
6. To stop the on-board diagnostic mode, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
Vehicle Sensors
4. Select Vehicle Sensors.
5. Verify the sensor output condition of the sensor being input to the car navigation unit.
NOTE:
The vehicle signal is updated every 1s.
No.
Name
Content/function
1 Navi Menu
2 Gyro Voltage
Display the gyro sensor voltage
3 Relative bearingDisplay the gyro sensor relative bearing

4 Reset
Reset the following display items, and the display content to 0.

Gyro sensor voltage
Gyro sensor relative bearing
History
4. Select History.
5. Verify the displayed content.
No.
Name
1 Use Start Date
Content/function
Display the date for the start of use.
2 Use Accumulation TimeDisplay the accumulated use time.

3 Accumulation Mileage Display the accumulated travel distance.
4 Navi Menu
Microphone Check
4. Select Microphone Check.
5. Verify the microphone input condition.
No.
Name
1 Navi Menu
Content/function
2 Voice recognition/hands-free switch status Display the voice recognition/hands-free switch condition.
3 Microphone inspection results indicator
Display the microphone inspection results
4 Microphone input level gauge
Display the volume at 8 levels.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STARTING PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSTIC MODE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
2. Press the MENU switch (panel switch).
3. Select Navigation Setup.
4. Select Calibration.
5. Select Map Version.
6. Press the A portion of the MAP VERSION screen two times.
7. Press the B portion of the MAP VERSION screen two times.

8. Select Menu.
9. Select the items to be inspected from the diagnosis menu. (See DIAGNOSTIC CHECK [CARNAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DIAGNOSTIC CHECK [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Inspection item list
No.
Name
1 Vehicle Signal
Check
Content/function
Perform the vehicle signal check.
2 Navigation Check Go to the Navigation Check Menu. (See NAVIGATION CHECK [CAR-NAVIGATION
SYSTEM].)
3 Switch Check
Perform the remote control switch inspection.
4 Products Version
Verify the products version.
5 Error Code
CAUTION:
This item does not operate because it is a manufacturer exclusive
item.
6 All Def.
CAUTION:
This item does not operate because it is a manufacturer exclusive

item.
Vehicle Signal Check

3. Select Vehicle Signal Check.
4. Verify the condition of the vehicle signal input to the display.
No.
Name
Content/function
1 PKB
Display the PKB signal condition.
2 REV
Display the REV signal condition.
3 Microphone
Verify the microphone condition.
4 SPEED
Display the vehicle speed.
5 Menu
6 TNS
Display the TNS signal condition.
7 GPS Antenna Display the GPS Antenna condition.

8 Traffic System Display the Traffic System condition.
Switch Check
3. Select Switch Check.
4. Operate the panel switches and verify that they operate correctly.
No.
Name
1 Menu
Content/function
2 Name of press-type switch The name of the operated press-type switch is displayed.
3 Turn direction of switch
The operation condition (Left/Right) is displayed.
4 Name of dial-type switch The name of the operated dial-type switch is displayed.
Products Version
3. Select Products Version.
4. Verify each version.
No.
Name
Content/function
1 Country CodeDisplay the country code.

2 Hardware ID Display the hardware ID.
3 Software Ver Display the software version.
4 Leader Ver
Display the leader version.
5 Map Ver
Display the map version.
6 Menu
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [HANDSFREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
NOTE:
Repair Order Form
With Audio Unit

3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the RPT/PRESET switch 1
and the PRESET switch 6 for 3 s or more.
NOTE:
If several DTCs are in the memory, they can be displayed using the SEEK
switch.
Current malfunction
With Car-navigation Unit

more.
4. Press the Detail switch.
5. To stop the on-board diagnostic test mode, switch the ignition to the LOCK position.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC TABLE [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
Screen display
Carnavigation
unit
Audio
unit
Malfunction
description
Inferred cause/verified content
Reference
Device Error
code code
26: HF/TEL function
81 Er81 does not
operate.

Short to power supply in wiring harness

Sound from
82 26: microphone not between microphone (Input signal) and
Er82 heard
HF/TEL unit
(See SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING [HANDSFREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM].)
(See SYMPTOM
Sound from
Short
to
GND/power
supply
in
microphone
26:
TROUBLESHOOTING [HANDSmicrophone not
83
power supply circuit
Er83 heard
FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM].)
Any of the following is detected:
26
Call
transmission
26:
84
Er84 and receiving is
impossible
The microphone power

supply circuit is not
connected.
Open circuit in the
microphone input circuit
Microphone input circuit
short to body ground
Poor contact in the
(See SYMPTOM
SYSTEM].)
Call
26: transmission
85 Er85 and receiving is
impossible
hands-free telephone
switch or hands-free
telephone unit (HF/TEL
unit) connector
Voice recognition/handsfree switch malfunction
HF/TEL function
HF/TEL unit malfunction
86 26: does not
Er86 operate.
No Error
no
Err
(See SYMPTOM
SYSTEM].)
Replace the HF/TEL unit.

(See HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE
(HF/TEL) UNIT
DTC is not recorded.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLEARING DTC [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
CAUTION:
With Audio Unit

NOTE:
Because the audio unit only displays the currently occurring DTC, it is not necessary to
clear DTCs.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM].)
more.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
With Audio Unit
Starting procedure
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM].)
Content/function
Software version verification
Connection condition verification
Password Reset
Software version verification

the SEEK switch (down) for 3 s or more.
4. Verify the software version.
5. To stop the on-board diagnostic test mode, to the LOCK position.
Connection condition verification

4. Verify the connected unit
Password Reset

4. Verify that PASSWD CLEAR is displayed in the information display.
Starting procedure

2. Turn the audio power to ON.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the TUNE/AUDIO switch for
1 s or more.
4. Press the Diagnostic assist code input switch, and input the diagnostic assist code.
5. Select ENTER.
Diagnostic assist code input screen
No.
Name
1 Diagnostic assist code
Content/function
Display the diagnostic assist code.
2 Diagnostic assist code input switch Input the diagnostic assist code.
3 DEL
Diagnostic assist code clear
4 Diagnostic content
Display the diagnostic content.
5 ENTER
Go to the diagnostic assist function.
No.
Content/function
37 Diagnostic assist code 37 Connection condition verification

38 Diagnostic assist code 38 Software version verification
39 Diagnostic assist code 39 Password reset
Diagnostic assist code 37 Connection condition verification
2. Select ENTER.
Inspection
Launch the
connection
condition
verification
mode.
Verify the
connection
condition.
Display
Measures
AVN The HF/TEL unit connection condition is normal.

CONNECT
Verify the HF/TEL unit connection condition. (See
HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) UNIT
AVN CON
ERR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Diagnostic assist code 38 Software version verification
2. Select ENTER.
Inspection
Launch the software version verification
mode.
Software version verification.
Display
Measures
Display the software

version.
Diagnostic assist code 39 Password reset
2. Select ENTER.
Inspection
Launch the password reset mode.
Display
Measures
PASSWD CLEAR
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLEARING DTC [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE]
2. Select Modules.
3. Select LCM.
2. Select LCM.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See DTC INSPECTION [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1014
Rain sensor error
DETECTION CONDITION Rain sensor internal malfunction

Rain sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Auto light/wiper control module malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
(See CLEARING DTC [AUTO
LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE].)
Perform the auto light/wiper control
module DTC inspection using the MMDS.
ACTION
YesReplace the rain sensor, then go to the
next step.
(See RAIN SENSOR
(See DTC INSPECTION [AUTO

2
VERIFY DTC
YesReplace the auto light/wiper control

module, then go to the next step.
(See AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL

3
VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE PRESENT

Are there other DTCs output?
YesPerform the corresponding DTC

inspection.
(See DTC TABLE [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER
CONTROL MODULE].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1317
Battery voltage high
DETECTION CONDITION Input voltage from the battery is excessively high

Battery malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT PCM
Inspect the PCM DTCs using the MMDS.
[13B-MSP].)
VERIFY DTC
ACTION
After completing a separate DTC
inspection, go to the next step.

3


inspection.
CONTROL MODULE].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1318
Battery voltage low
DETECTION
CONDITION
Input voltage from the battery is excessively low
Battery malfunction
METER 10 A fuse
Auto light/wiper control module connector malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Short to GND in wiring harness between auto light/wiper control module terminal 2C
and battery
Open circuit in wiring harness between auto light/wiper control module terminal 2C
and battery
STEP
1
INSPECTION
BATTERY INSPECTION
Disconnect the battery cables.
Refer to the battery inspection and inspect the battery.
Is the battery normal?
ACTION
No Replace or charge the battery.
[13B-MSP].)
Go to the Step 6.
FUSE INSPECTION
Remove the METER 10 A fuse.
Is the fuse normal?

After replacement, go to Step 6.
INSPECT AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR

Disconnect the auto light/wiper control module connector.
Inspect the auto light/wiper control module connector
terminals for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out
pins, and corrosion).
YesRepair or replace the terminal, then go to

Step 6.

INSPECT AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY
4 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GND
possible short to GND, then go to the
Step 6.
Inspect for continuity between auto light/wiper control
module terminal 2C (wiring harness-side) and body GND.
INSPECT AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY

Install the METER 10 A fuse.
Inspect for continuity between following terminals:
Auto light/wiper control module terminal
2C and ignition switch terminal C.
No Repair/replace the wiring harness.

After repair procedure, go to the next
step.
Ignition switch terminal F and battery

positive terminal.
6
VERIFY DTC
Reconnect the disconnected connectors and the negative
battery cable.
(See CLEARING DTC [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL
MODULE].)

Perform the auto light/wiper control module DTC inspection

using the M-MDS.
(See DTC INSPECTION [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL
MODULE].)
7


inspection.
CONTROL MODULE].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC U2030 [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE]
DTC U2030
Rain sensor communication fault
DETECTION
CONDITION
Communication error to rain sensor
Rain sensor connector malfunction

Auto light/wiper control module connector malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between auto light/wiper control module
terminal 2E and rain sensor terminal C
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Short to GND in wiring harness between auto light/wiper control module

terminal 2E and rain sensor terminal C
Short to power supply in wiring harness between auto light/wiper
control module terminal 2E and rain sensor terminal C
Rain sensor malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT RAIN SENSOR CONNECTOR
Disconnect the rain sensor connector.
ACTION
YesRepair or replace the terminal, then
go to Step 6.
Inspect the rain sensor connector terminals

for poor connection (such as
INSPECT AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE
2 CONNECTOR
Disconnect the auto light/wiper control
module connector.
Inspect the auto light/wiper control module
connector terminal for poor connection (such
YesRepair or replace the terminal, then

go to Step 6.
as damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion).

3
INSPECT RAIN SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Inspect for continuity between auto
light/wiper control module terminal 2E (wiring
harness-side) and rain sensor terminal C

No Repair or replace the wiring harness
for a possible open circuit, then go
to Step 6.
INSPECT RAIN SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT

4 TO GND
YesRepair or replace the wiring harness
for a possible short to GND, then
go to Step 6.
Inspect for continuity between auto
light/wiper control module terminal 2E (wiring
harness-side) and body GND.
INSPECT RAIN SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
5 TO POWER SUPPLY
for a possible short to power
supply, then go to the next step.
(Engine off).
Measure the voltage at auto light/wiper
control module terminal 2E (wiring harnessside).
No Replace the Rain sensor, then go to

the next step.
(See RAIN SENSOR
Can the voltage be measured?

6
VERIFY DTC
Reconnect the disconnected connectors.
(See CLEARING DTC [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER
CONTROL MODULE].)
Perform the auto light/wiper control module
DTC inspection using the M-MDS.
(See DTC INSPECTION [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER
CONTROL MODULE].)
Is DTC U2030 displayed?

MODULE


inspection.
(See DTC TABLE [AUTO
LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL
MODULE].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC INSPECTION [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE]
2. Select Modules.
3. Select LCM.
2. Select LCM.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the auto light/wiper control module. (See
CLEARING DTC [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC TABLE [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE]
DTC
No.
Description
Detection condition
Page
Rain sensor internal malfunction
(See DTC B1014 [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER

CONTROL MODULE].)
B1317 Battery voltage high Input voltage from the battery is

excessively high

CONTROL MODULE].)
B1318 Battery voltage low
Input voltage from the battery is

excessively low

CONTROL MODULE].)
B1342 ECU is faulted

microcomputer malfunction

CONTROL MODULE].)
B1014 Rain sensor error
U2030 Rain sensor

Communication error to rain sensor
communication fault
(See DTC U2030 [AUTO LIGHT/WIPER

CONTROL MODULE].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DTC B1342
ECU is faulted
DETECTION CONDITION Auto light/wiper control module microcomputer malfunction

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Auto light/wiper control module microcomputer malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION

2


inspection.
CONTROL MODULE].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTERMITTENT CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Vibration Method
engine is vibrating, perform following the steps:
NOTE:
There are several reasons why vehicle or engine vibration could cause an
electrical malfunction. Some of the things to inspect for:
An improperly routed, improperly clamped, or loose wiring harness can
cause wiring to become pinched between parts.
The connector joints, points of vibration, and places where wiring
harnesses pass through the firewall, body panels are the major areas to
be inspected.
Inspect for DTCs or malfunctions by slightly shaking wiring harnesses and
connectors that are suspected of causing the malfunction.
Connector Terminal Check Method

2. Insert the male terminal into the female terminal to inspect for looseness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
Always perform basic power window system inspection before troubleshooting.

Troubleshooting procedures provide information unique to malfunctions of the automatic window
return function.
CAUTION:
If any of the following conditions continues indefinitely, the power window motor will heat up
causing the protection circuit (integrated in power window motor) to operate. If this occurs, the
operation of the power window motor protection circuit temporarily disables the power windows.
Continuous up and down operation of the power window.
Continuously pulling up the power window switch while the window glass is
fully closed.
Continuously pressing the power window switch while the window glass fully
opened.
A malfunction in the power window system will be determined and the system will shift to
malfunction mode if the power windows are operated up or down using the power window
switch while the power window protection circuit is operating.
While the power window system is in malfunction mode, but they do not operate using the auto
open/close function.
The power window system reverts to normal operation after performing the Power Window
Initialization Procedure.
NOTE:
Initial setting must be performed for the switch of each seat.
If the following operations have been performed, initial setting is reset, and auto up/down and
two-step down operation are disabled. Therefore, performing initial setting is necessary.
Negative battery cable disconnected or power window system power supply
fuse removed. (perform initial setting for each door glasses.)
Power window switch connector disconnected. (perform initial setting for the
switch connected with the connector)
Power Window Initialization Procedure

2. Press the power window switch and fully open the suspect door glass.
3. Pull up the power window main switch/sub switch to the manual-up position to fully close the
suspect door glass, and keep holding the switch up at the position for approx.2 s.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH
EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
PAGE
1 Door glass does not move (See No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT MOVE UP AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC
up and down in automatic MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
mode
FUNCTION)].)
2 Door glass does not
reverse, even when
encountering a foreign
object in its path.
(See No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT REVERSE, EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING
A FOREIGN OBJECT IN IT IS PATH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH
EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)].)
3 Door glass does not

reverse, even when
encountering a foreign
object in its path.
(See No.3 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT
ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC
MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)].)
4 Abnormal noise during the (See No.4 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR
power window operation CLOSING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT MOVE UP AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC MODE
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
NOTE:
Perform the following inspection for the power window system component parts of
windows where the door glass cannot be operated automatically.
Door glass does not move up and down in automatic mode

Power window system in fail-safe function (Power window motor heat
protection circuit is operating)
No power supply to power window main switch
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Power window main switch malfunction (power window control unit

malfunction, auto switch malfunction)
Power window motor malfunction (Sensor inside motor malfunction)
Malfunction in wiring harness between power window motor (sensor) and
power window main switch
STEP
INSPECTION

LOCK position for 3 min.
Turn the ignition switch to ON
position.
Initialize the power window
system.
ACTION
YesSystem is normal.
The power window system auto open/close
function dose not operate temporarily for any of
the following reasons:
Operate the auto open/close

function.
The power window switch is

operated while the power
window motor protection circuit
(integrated in power window
motor) is operating.
Dose the power window
The power window main switch
operate properly?
power supply is cut off by

disconnection of the negative
battery cable or removing the
fuse.

position.
Inspect the two-step down
operation.
(See BASIC POWER WINDOW
SYSTEM INSPECTION [POWER
WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH
EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)].)
YesReplace the power window main switch.

(See POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Does the two-step down

function operate properly?
3
Does the sensor built into the

power window motor send
pulse signals while the power
window motor is operating?
Inspect the voltage at the
following power window motor
terminals:

No Replace the power window motor.
(See POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION.)
B (sensor 1
signal)
A (sensor 2
signal)
Is the voltage approx.12 V?
4
Does the sensor built into the

power window motor send
pulse signals while the power
window motor is operating?
Inspect the voltage at the
following power window main
switch terminals:
O (sensor 1
signal)
P (sensor 2
signal)
YesReplace the power main switch.

No Inspect for an open or short circuit in wiring
between the power window motor (sensor) and
the power window main switch.
Inspect the connection of the power window
motor and power window main switch
connectors.
(damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion)
Is the voltage approx.12 V?
Repair of replace necessary.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT REVERSE, EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING A
FOREIGN OBJECT IN IT IS PATH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR
NOTE:
Perform the following inspection for the power window system component parts of the
windows where the door glass does not reverse, even when encountering a foreign object
in its path.
Door glass does not reverse, even when encountering a foreign object in its
path.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Automatic window return range did not reset after battery

disconnection: Step 2
STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY CUSTOMER COMPLAINT
Did the customer
complain that the
door glass did not
reverse when near
complete closed
position?
ACTION
Yes
The system is normal.

Explain to the customer that automatic
window return power window system does
not operate when near complete closed
position.

RESET REVERSE AREA STORED
2 IN DOOR GLASS MOTOR
Perform the power
window system initial
setting procedure.
Did malfunction
disappear?
Yes
Troubleshooting completed.
Explain to the customer that
misadjustment of automatic window return
range was the problem.
No Replace the power window switch.
Verify auto-up/down operation and if the

automatic function does not operate, go to
Step 1 of NO. 1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT
MOVE UP AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC
MODE.
If the automatic function operates, replace
the power window switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BASIC POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INSPECTION [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Manual Mode Function Inspection
STEP
INSPECTION

the ON position.
Turn the power-cut switch

to UNLOCK.
No
Does each door glass move

up and down in manual
mode using the power
window subswitch?
ACTION

Power window
main switch
(power-cut switch
system
malfunction)
Power window
subswitch power
supply fuses
Power window
subswitch ground
wiring harness
Power window
switch power
supply wiring
harnesses
Wiring harness
between power
window subswitch
and power window
motor
Power window
subswitch
Power window
motor
Repair or replace the malfunctioning
part, then go to the next step.
2
Does the driver-side door

glass move up and down in
manual mode using the
power window main switch?

No

Power window
main switch power
supply fuses
Power window
main switch
ground wiring
harness
Power window
main switch power
supply wiring
harnesses
Wiring harness
between power
window main
switch and power
window motor
Power window
main switch
Does each other door glass

other than the driver-side
door glass move up and
down in manual mode using
the power window main
switch?

No
Perform the power window

initialization procedure for any door
glass that does not move up and
down, and reinspect. (See POWER
WINDOW INITIALIZATION
PROCEDURE.)
If it does not move up and down
upon reinspection, inspect the
following:
Wiring harness
between power
window main
switch and
subswitch

4
Turn the power-cut switch

to LOCK.
Push/pull the power window
main switch (switches for all
windows in manual mode).
Does only driver-side front
door glass move up and
down?
Yes
Manual mode function is normal.

Go to the automatic mode function
inspection.
No Replace the power window main switch, then go to

the automatic mode function inspection (power-cut
switch system malfunction).
Automatic Mode Function Inspection

NOTE:
Perform the following inspection for the power window main switch and the power window
subswitches for each window.
STEP
INSPECTION
Turn the ignition

switch to the ON
position.
Operate the power
window switch in
automatic mode.
Does the door
glass move up
and down in
automatic mode?
ACTION
No
Door glass does not move up and down in

automatic mode:
Go to Step 1 of NO. 1 DOOR
GLASS DOES NOT MOVE UP
AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC
MODE.
Door glass moves up and down in automatic
mode, but door glass reverses:
Go to Step 1 of NO. 3 DOOR
GLASS REVERSES EVEN
THOUGH THE GLASS DOES
NOT ENCOUNTER A
FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT
IS MOVING UP IN
AUTOMATIC MODE.
Gently pull the

power window
switch while the
door glass is
moving down in
automatic mode.
No Replace the power window switch, then go to the automatic

door glass return function inspection.
Does the glass

stop?
3
Gently press the

power window
switch while the
door glass is
moving up in
automatic mode.
Does the glass
stop?
Yes
Automatic mode function is normal.

Go to the automatic door glass return function
inspection.
No Replace the power window switch, then go to the automatic

door glass return function inspection.
Automatic Door Glass Return Function Inspection

NOTE:
With the switch held at auto-up, the door glass does not automatically reverse even when
a foreign object is encountered.
STEP
INSPECTION

position.
Lower the door glass completely.
Use the power window switch to
close the door glass in automatic
mode.
ACTION
YesGo to Step 1 of NO. 3 DOOR GLASS REVERSES
EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT
ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS
MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE.
Does the door glass automatically

reverse even though the glass
does not encounter a foreign
object while it is moving up in
automatic mode?
2
Lower the door glass completely.

Take a hammer and hold it
against the inside of the top of the
Yes
Automatic door glass return

function inspection is normal.
Go to the IG OFF timer
window frame so that the door

glass will hit its handle when it is
closed.
Raise the door glass using
automatic mode.
function inspection.
No Go to Step 1 of NO. 2 DOOR GLASS DOES
NOT REVERSE, EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING
A FOREIGN OBJECT IN ITS PATH.
When the door glass hits the

hammer handle, does it
immediately reverse and move
down to approx.200 mm {7.87
in} from the completely closed
position?
IG OFF Timer Function Inspection
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
Close all doors.

position.
No
In automatic mode, push down the

power window main switch for the
driver-side front door glass. The door
glass should move down within
approx. 43 s after ignition switch
off.
In manual mode (finger continuously
depressing the power window main
switch), the door glass should move
down within approx. 43 s after
ignition switch off.
Does the driver-side front door glass
move down?
Perform the driver-side

power window initialization
procedure, and
reinspect.(See POWER
PROCEDURE.)
If it does not move up and
down upon reinspection,
inspect the following:
Wiring
harness
for the
door
open/close
signal
system
Latch
switch
malfunctioning part, and
reinspect.
If
operation
is not
normal,
replace
the power
window
main
switch,
and then
go to the
next step.
2

position.
Yes
In automatic mode, pull up the

power window main switch for the
driver-side front door glass. The door
glass does not move up within
off.

procedure, and
PROCEDURE.)
If
operation
is not
normal,
replace
the power
window
main
switch,
then go to
the next
step.
Verify that driver-side front door

glass does not operate.
Does the driver-side front door glass
move up?

3

position.
Lower the driver-side front door glass

completely.
No
Take a hammer and hold it against

the inside of the top of the door glass
frame so that the door glass will hit
its handle when it is closing.
Raise the door glass using manual
mode.
When the door glass hits the
hammer handle, does it immediately
reverse and move down to approx.
200 mm {7.87 in} from the
completely closed position?

procedure, and
PROCEDURE.)
If
operation
is not
normal,
replace
the power
window
main
switch,
then go to
the next
step.
Open any door.
Yes

position.
If above parts are normal,

replace the power window
main switch, then go to
the next step.
Push/pull the power window main

switch for the door glass within
off.
If the above parts have

any malfunction, repair or
replace the malfunction
part, then go to the next
step.
Verify that the door glass does not

move up or down.
Does the door glass move up or
down?
Close all doors.
Inspect the door switch

and related wiring harness.

Yes

position.
Push/pull the power window main
switch for door glass after approx.
60 s after ignition switch off.

procedure, and
PROCEDURE.)
If
operation
is not
normal,
replace
the power
window
main
switch,
then go to
the twostep down
function
inspection.
Verify that the door glass does not

move up or down.
Does the door glass move up or
down?
No
The IG OFF timer function

is normal.
Go to the two-step down
function inspection.
Two-step Down Function Inspection

Before inspecting the two-step down function, make sure that the two-step down function
is turned on (if the two-step down function is turned off, the power window close not stop
once.).
The distance the door glass opens can be changed using the two-step down function
(approx. 20100 mm {0.793.93 in} ).
The two-step down function can be made inoperative. (The function is operative at the
initial setting.)
The two-step down function does not function during IG OFF timer.
NOTE:
STEP
INSPECTION

position.
ACTION
Yes
Turn on the two-step down function,

if it is turned off.
Raise door glass completely.
When the door glass is lowered using
manual mode, does it move down to
approx. 30 mm {1.2 in} from the
completely closed position and stop
for 1 s? (This inspection cannot be
performed during IG OFF timer
function operation.)
Two-step down function is

normal.
Reinspect malfunction
symptoms.
No
Perform the power window

initial setting procedure
and verify auto-up/down
operation.(See POWER
PROCEDURE.)
If the
automatic
function
does not
operate,
go to
Automatic
Door Glass
Return
Function
Inspection.
If the
automatic
function
operates
but the
two-step
down
function
does not,
replace the
power
window
switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR
Power Window Main Switch
Power Window Subswitch
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.3 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT
WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR
NOTE:
Perform the following inspection for the power window system component parts of windows where the door glass reverses
even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in automatic mode.
Door glass reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in automatic
mode.
Extreme change in the sliding resistance of the glass while the door glass is closing.
Improper installation of the acrylic door visor.
Power window motor malfunction
Object caught between the glass run channel and the door glass.
Insufficient tightening of the door glass to the carrier plate.
Glass run channel malfunction.
Glass guide related malfunction.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
NOTE:
The auto-reverse pinch protection function is a mechanism that automatically reverses (opens) the door glass
while it is closing when the power window main switch detects the signal from the power window motor
indicating that an object is obstructing the door glass movement.
The auto-reverse pinch protection function may operate if the sliding resistance of the door glass increases
causing the closing speed to decrease.
If the door glass closing speed has changed, concentrate the inspection on the following locations: (Slip
occurrence)
If the door glass is slipping forward, inspect the front side of the glass guide or glass run
channel.
If the door glass is slipping rearward, inspect the rear side of the glass guide or glass run
channel.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
INSPECT MALFUNCTION
SYMPTOM
ACTION
YesThe system is normal
(Explain to the customer that this does not indicate a malfunction because the
system is designed to reverse the door glass while it is closing if it receives
vibration when the vehicle is crossing railroad tracks, driving on a bumpy road,
or when the door is opened/closed.)
Does the malfunction symptom

occur only under the following
special conditions?:
Driving over
railroad tracks
Driving on
bumpy roads.
Opening/closing
the door.
2
INSPECT ACRYLIC DOOR

VISOR INSTALLATION
CONDITION
Is the acrylic door visor normal?

No Install the side visor properly, then go to the next step.
INSPECT DOOR GLASS

CLOSING SPEED
YesMark the point where the door glass closing speed changed, then go to Step 5.
Affix tape to the rear edge of

the door glass as shown in the
figure for placing marks (to
facilitate seeing the door glass
movement)
Start the engine and idle it (to

ensure a stabilized operational
voltage).
Does the door glass hesitate
only once while its closing?
4
REINSPECT DOOR GLASS

CLOSING SPEED
YesReplace the power window motor, then go to Step 8 (See POWER WINDOW
MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Does the door glass hesitate

periodically (5-6 times) while it
is closing?
No Go to Step 8.
INSPECT GLASS RUN

CHANNEL AND DOOR GLASS
SLIDING SURFACE
Is there an object caught
between the glass run channel
and the door glass, or is there
roughness on the sliding surface
(rubber surface)?
Yes
Object is caught between glass run channel and door

glass:
Remove the object.
Roughness on the sliding surface (rubber surface):
Replace the glass run channel.
After performing one of the above actions, reinspect.
If the malfunction is not corrected, go to Step 3.

6
INSPECT TIGHTENING OF
DOOR GLASS TO CARRIER

PLATE
Is it normal?
INSPECT CONDITION OF
GLASS RUN CHANNEL AND
DOOR GLASS
Is it normal?
No After tightening correctly, reinspect.

No Assemble the glass run channel and door glass securely, and reinspect.
INSPECT DOOR GLASS

CLOSING SPEED
Does the door glass hesitate at

any location?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.4 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEM (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Abnormal noise while the door glass is opening or closing

Installation screw is loose between the door glass and carrier plate.
Deformity in the power window regulator plastic part due to use.
Scratching, wear marks to the power window regulator
resin part due to twisting of the cable.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Gear deformity in the power window motor.

NOTE:
Identify the location of the noise using a stethoscope or similar device.
Noise type Time of
occurrence
Possible cause
Location of noise
Securely tighten the

Between door
glass lower edge installation screw.
and carrier plate.
Clanking
noise
Door glass Insufficiently tightened installation

begins to screw between the door glass and
carrier plate.
move
Groaning
noise
While door Vibration caused by wear on the resin Power window

part from cable twisting due to use of regulator
glass is
operating the power window regulator.
(Sound
increases
due to
use)
NOTE:
Noise does not occur if
a roller is equipped to
power window
regulator resin part.
Action
Replace the power window

regulator
(See POWER WINDOW
REGULATOR
Whining
noise
Gear inside power window motor is

deformed due to use.
Gear in power
window motor
Replace the power window

motor
(See POWER WINDOW
MOTOR
Clicking
noise
(Periodic
noise)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
No.
1 No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE EVEN THOUGH VARIOUS OPERATIONS ARE PERFORMED
2 No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE KEYLESS TRANSMITTER [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION]
3 No.3 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE REQUEST SWITCH [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION]
4 No.4 SOME DOOR GLASS DO NOT OPERATE [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
5 No.5 DOOR GLASS STOPS BEFORE FULLY OPENING/CLOSING [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
6 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES BEFORE IT FULLY OPENS [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
7 No.7 ALL DOOR GLASS OPERATE ACCIDENTALLY [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
8 No.8 PART OF DOOR GLASS OPERATES ACCIDENTALLY [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
NOTE:
The exterior open/close function does not operate when the following conditions are met.
Any door or trunk lid is open.
The key is inserted in the steering lock.
The start knob is not in the LOCK position.

The auto-open/close function (the exterior open/close function) does not operate if the power window initialization procedure
has been reset.
Depending on the temperature and battery conditions, the window may reverse on rare occasions.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE KEYLESS TRANSMITTER
DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE KEYLESS TRANSMITTER

Door lock control module malfunction (Advanced keyless entry system)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Keyless control module malfunction (keyless entry system)

Any door or trunk lid is open
Key is inserted in steering lock
Step
Inspection
Inspect the door lock/unlock

operation using the
transmitter.
Does it operate normally?
Action
YesInspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
(Advanced keyless system)
Door lock control module
(See DOOR LOCK CONTROL
MODULE INSPECTION [WITH
START SYSTEM].)
(keyless entry system)
INSPECTION [WITHOUT
START SYSTEM ].)
Inspect the open/close

condition of the doors and the
trunk lid.
YesSystem is normal (Does not operate when a door

or the trunk lid is open).
Is the reason why they do not

lock because a door or the
trunk lid is open?
Verify whether the key is in

the steering lock.
YesSystem is normal (Does not operate when the key

is inserted in the steering wheel lock)

lock/unlock because the key is
inserted in the steering lock?
When the lock/unlock

operation does not operate for
reasons other than the above
Steps 2 and 3.
YesInspect the following parts, and repair or replace.

START SYSTEM].)
(SeeKEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
INSPECTION [WITHOUT
START SYSTEM ].)
No Reinspect for malfunction recurrence.If the
malfunction is not corrected, repeat the procedure
from Step 1.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.3 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE REQUEST SWITCH
Door glass does not operate using the request switch

Door lock control module malfunction
Open circuit in wiring harness between request switch and keyless
control module.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Any door or trunk lid is open.

Key is inserted in steering lock.
Start knob is in a position other than LOCK position.
Step
1
Inspection
Verify the door lock/unlock
operation by operating the request
switch.
Action
YesInspect the following parts, and repair or
replace.
AND START SYSTEM].)
(Keyless control system)
MODULE INSPECTION
[WITHOUT ADVANCED
SYSTEM ].)
2
Verify the open/close condition of

the doors and the trunk lid.
YesThe system is normal (When any door or the

trunk lid is open, the system does not operate).

lock/unlock because a door or the
trunk lid is open?
Verify the start knob position, or if

the key is in the steering lock.
Is the reason why the door
lock/unlock does not operate
because the start knob is in a
position other than LOCK, or the
key is inserted?
The door lock/unlock does not

operate for reasons other than
Steps 2 and 3 above.
YesThe system is normal (When the start knob is

in a position other than LOCK, or the key is
inserted in the steering lock, the system does
not operate).

replace.
AND START SYSTEM].)
(Keyless control system)
MODULE INSPECTION
[WITHOUT ADVANCED
SYSTEM ].)
Wiring harness between the
request switch and the keyless
control module.
Wiring harness between the
keyless control module and
door lock control module.
malfunction is not corrected, repeat the
procedure from Step 1.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.4 SOME DOOR GLASS DO NOT OPERATE [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION]
Some door glass do not operate

Power window subswitch malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Battery malfunction (low voltage)

Open circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and
power window subswitch
Power window initialization procedure error
Step
1
Inspection
Inspect the door glass
operation by operating the
power window subswitch.
Action
No Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
Power window subswitch
(See POWER WINDOW
SUBSWITCH INSPECTION.)
Power window motor (See POWER
WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION.)
Battery (Low voltage)
Inspect the door glass

operation by operating the
power window subswitch.
YesInspect the wiring harness between the power

window main switch and the power window
subswitch.
Does it operate in auto?
If there is any malfunction, repair or replace the

applicable part.
No Perform the power window initialization procedure.
(See POWER WINDOW INITIALIZATION
PROCEDURE.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.5 DOOR GLASS STOPS BEFORE FULLY OPENING/CLOSING [EXTERIOR
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
DOOR GLASS STOPS BEFORE FULLY OPENING/CLOSING

Power window main switch malfunction
Battery malfunction (Low voltage)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Door glass improper installation

Door lock control module malfunctio (Advanced keyless entry system)
Keyless control module malfunction (Keyless entry system)
Keyless entry system signal reception error (outside operation area, radio
signal interference)
Step
1
Inspection
Operate the door glass in
auto/manual by operating the
power window main
switch/power window subswitch.
Does the door glass stop before
fully opening/closing using either
operation?
Action
replace.
Power window main switch
(See POWER WINDOW MAIN
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
(See POWER WINDOW
SUBSWITCH INSPECTION.)
Power window motor (See

POWER WINDOW MOTOR
INSPECTION.)
Door glass (Installation
condition)
2
Inspect the operation of the door

glass by repeating Step 1 above.
fully opening/closing while in
auto operation?
YesPerform the power window initialization

procedure.
(See POWER WINDOW INITIALIZATION
PROCEDURE.)
Open the door glass by operating

the transmitter.
fully opening?

replace.
AND START SYSTEM].)
(Keyless entry system)
MODULE INSPECTION
[WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND START SYSTEM ].)
Close the door glass by operating

the transmitter.
fully closing?

replace.
(Vehicle with advanced keyless
system)

AND START SYSTEM].)
(Keyless entry system)
MODULE INSPECTION
[WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND START SYSTEM ].)
Keyless entry system signal
reception error (outside
operation area, radio signal
interference)
malfunction is not corrected, repeat the
procedure from Step 1.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES BEFORE IT FULLY OPENS [EXTERIOR
Door glass reverses before it fully opens

Malfunction in power window motor
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Malfunction in battery
Improper installation of door glass
Step
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
By operating a power window

main switch / power window
subswitch, operate the door
glass.
YesInspect the power window motor and repair or

replace it. (See POWER WINDOW MOTOR
INSPECTION.)
Does the door glass mis-reverse?
No Inspect the following parts and repair or replace

them.
Power window motor (See
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
INSPECTION.)
Battery (brownout)
Door glass (improper
installation)
NOTE:
Depending on the temperature,
battery, and voltage condition,
the door glass may mis-reverse.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.7 ALL DOOR GLASS OPERATE ACCIDENTALLY [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION]
All door glasses operate accidentally

Transmitter malfunction
Request switch malfunction
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between request switch (each door)
and keyless control module.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch
and power window subswitch
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Inspect if malfunction is
in operating by
transmitter
ACTION
YesInspect the transmitter.
No

Go to Step 3.
in operating by request
switch
YesInspect the following parts and repair or replace.

Request switch
(See REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION

START SYSTEM].)
Wiring harness between request switch
and keyless control module
Wiring harness between keyless control
module and door lock control module
3
in operating power
window main switch
YesInspect power window main switch

(See POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION.)
in without operating
Step1to 3
YesInspect the following parts and repair or replace

(See POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Request switchkeyless control module
(with advanced keyless system)door
lock control module
Wiring harness between power window
subswitch and power window main
switch
No Reinspect for malfunction recurrence.If the malfunction is
not corrected, repeat the procedure from Step 1.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.8 PART OF DOOR GLASS OPERATES ACCIDENTALLY [EXTERIOR
Part of door glass operates accidentally
POSSIBLE CAUSE
ACTION
Inspect the power window subswitch of the door glass and repair or replace
(See POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE EVEN THOUGH VARIOUS OPERATIONS
ARE PERFORMED [EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION]
Door glass does not operate even though various operations are performed
Battery malfunction (low voltage)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and door
lock control module (Advanced keyless entry system)
Open circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and
keyless control module (keyless entry system)
Step
1
Inspection
Inspect the operation of
the door glass by operating
switch.
Is the manual operation
normal?
Action
No Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
Power window main switch
INSPECTION.)
Power window motor (See POWER
WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION.)
Inspect the operation of
the door glass by operating

switch.
No Perform the power window initialization procedure.

(See POWER WINDOW INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
Does the door glass

operate in auto?
3
Does the door lock/unlock

normally?
Yes

the power window main switch and
the door lock control module .
If there is any malfunction, repair or
replace the applicable part.
the power window main switch and
No

Replace the door lock control module
(See DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE
INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED
SYSTEM].)
Replace the keyless control module
INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM
].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
No.
SYMPTOM
1 Auto leveling warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch turned to ON position
DESCRIPTION
2 Auto leveling does not adjust optical axis of the Auto leveling does not adjust optical axis of the
headlights for vehicle posture
headlights for cargo and passenger weight conditions
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.2 AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM DOES NOT ADJUST OPTICAL AXIS OF THE
HEADLIGHTS FOR VEHICLE POSTURE [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
Auto leveling does not adjust optical axis of the headlights for vehicle posture
Headlight leveling actuator malfunction
Auto leveling control module malfunction
Auto leveling sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Improper installation of auto leveling sensor

Open or short to GND circuit in wiring harness between auto leveling control
module terminal R and ABS HU/CM terminal V (with ABS)
Open or short to GND circuit in wiring harness between auto leveling control
module terminal R and DSC HU/CM terminal T (with DSC)
STEP
1
INSPECTION
VERIFY AUTO LEVELING
WARNING LIGHT
ILLUMINATEION
position.
Verify that the auto leveling warning
light condition.
ACTION
YesPerform the symptom No.1 Auto leveling
warning light illuminates when the ignition
switch turned to ON position
troubleshooting procedure.
Does the auto leveling warning light

illuminate from turning the ignition
switch to ON 3 seconds after?
2
INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN
AUTO LEVELING SENSOR OR
YesGo to Step 5.
ELSEWHERE
Is the malfunction appears both side?
3
WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL
MODULE AND HEADLIGHT
LEVELING ACTUATOR
Inspect for open or short circuit in
wiring harness at auto leveling
function does not operate.
Right-side:
Auto leveling control
module terminal J
right-side headlight
leveling actuator
terminal F
module terminal I
leveling actuator
terminal H
module terminal I
leveling actuator
terminal G
Left-side:
module terminal J
left-side headlight
leveling actuator
terminal F
module terminal I
left-side headlight
leveling actuator
terminal H
module terminal K
left-side headlight
leveling actuator
terminal G
Is open or short circuit detected?
YesRepair or replace for open or short circuit.

HEADLIGHT LEVELING ACTUATOR
OR ELSEWHERE
Replace the suspected side head light
module.
(See HEADLIGHT LEVELING
ACTUATOR
(Malfunction is in headlight leveling
actuator.)
No Replace the auto leveling control module.
(See AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
Does the auto leveling adjust optical

axis of the headlights for vehicle
posture?
5
WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL
MODULE AND HEADLIGHT
LEVELING ACTUATOR
Inspect for open or short circuit in
wiring harness at auto leveling
function does not operate.
Right-side:
module terminal J
leveling actuator
terminal F
module terminal I
leveling actuator
terminal H
Left-side:
module terminal J
left-side headlight
leveling actuator
terminal F
module terminal I
left-side headlight
leveling actuator
terminal H
Is open or short circuit detected?
YesRepair or replace for open or short circuit.

INSPECT FRONT AND REAR AUTO

LEVELING SENSOR
INSTALLATION
Inspect front and rear auto leveling
sensor installation (bend or damaged
of bracket, or dislocated link).

No Repair or replace malfunctioning part, or
install properly.
Are front and rear auto leveling sensor

installed properly?
7
INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING

SENSOR
Inspect the front auto leveling sensor.
No Replace the front auto leveling sensor.
(See FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR

INSPECTION.)

Is the front auto leveling sensor

normal?
8
INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING

SENSOR
Inspect the rear auto leveling sensor.
No Replace the rear auto leveling sensor.
(See REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR

INSPECTION.)

Is the rear auto leveling sensor

normal?
9
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL LINE OR
ELSEWHERE
Turn the ignition to OFF.
Disconnect the instrument cluster and
auto leveling control module
connectors.
Verify that the continuity for following:
module terminal R
GND (normal
condition: not
continuity)
module terminal R
ABS HU/CM terminal
V (normal
YesReplace the auto leveling control module.

(See AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
No Repair or replace for open or short circuit.
condition:
continuity) (with
ABS)
module terminal R
DSC HU/CM terminal
T (normal
condition:
continuity) (with
DSC)
Are there continuity normal?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.1 AUTO LEVELING WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHEN THE IGNITION
SWITCH TURNED TO ON POSITION [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
Auto leveling warning light illuminates when the ignition switch turned to ON
position
Headlight auto leveling function related electrical part malfunction
Auto leveling sensor related part malfunction
Auto leveling control module power supply
voltage excessive low
Auto leveling sensor signal voltage excessive
high or low
Front auto leveling sensor malfunction
Rear auto leveling sensor malfunction
Malfunction in headlight levering actuator (left or right)
integrated in front combination light.
Malfunction in wiring harness between auto
levering control unit and headlight levering
actuator.
Headlight actuator (left or right) malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Auto leveling control module malfunction

Auto leveling control module power supply voltage is
excessive high
Vehicle speed signal malfunction.
ABS HU/CM malfunction (with ABS)
Open circuit between ABS HU/CM terminal V
and auto leveling control module terminal R
(with ABS)
DSC HU/CM malfunction (with DSC)
Open circuit between DSC HU/CM terminal T

and auto leveling control module terminal R
(with DSC)
Auto leveling warning light control circuit malfunction
Short to GND between instrument cluster terminal 2J and
auto leveling control module terminal V
STEP
INSPECTION
1 VERIFY THAT THE FRONT AND REAR AUTO

LEVELING SENSOR INSTALLATION
Verify that the front and rear auto leveling
sensor installation.
ACTION
YesRepair or replace malfunctioning part.
Is there any bend, damage or dislocated

link at the bracket?
2 INSPECT AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between auto
leveling control module terminals H and
GND.

No Repair or replace for open circuit
between the auto leveling control
module terminal H and the ignition
switch.
Is the voltage B+?

3 INSPECT AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE GND
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
Disconnect the auto leveling control
module connector.
YesConnect the auto leveling control

module connector, then go to Step 5.
Verify that continuity between auto

leveling control module terminal F and
GND.
4 INSPECT GND POINT
Verify that the GND point for auto leveling
YesRetighten the GND point.
control module.
Is there loose or poor connection at GND
point?
5 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN FRONT AUTO
LEVELING SENSOR OR ELSEWHERE
No Repair or replace for open circuit

between auto leveling control module
terminal F and GND.

No Go to Step 9.
Turn the headlight to ON.

Measure voltage between front auto
leveling control module terminal G and
GND.
6 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN REAR AUTO
LEVELING SENSOR OR ELSEWHERE
YesGo to Step 11.


Measure voltage between rear auto
leveling control module terminal E and
GND.
7 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR SIGNAL
CIRCUIT
Inspect the wiring harness between auto
leveling control module terminal I and rear
auto leveling sensor terminal C.
YesRepair or replace for open or short

circuit.
Is there open or short circuit detected?

8 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
Inspect the rear auto leveling sensor.
INSPECTION.)
Is the rear auto leveling sensor normal?
YesRepair or replace for open circuit at

following.
Between auto leveling
control module
terminal M and rear
auto leveling sensor
terminal A
control module
terminal D and rear
terminal D
No Replace the rear auto leveling sensor.

9 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN REAR AUTO
LEVELING SENSOR POWER OR GND CIRCUIT OR
ELSEWHERE
Measure voltage between auto leveling
control module terminal E and GND.

No Repair or replace for open circuit at
following.
control module
terminal M and front
terminal A
control module
terminal M and rear
terminal A
control module
terminal D and front
terminal C
control module
terminal D and rear
terminal D
10 INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR SIGNAL

CIRCUIT
Inspect the wiring harness between auto
leveling control module terminal G and
front auto leveling sensor terminal B.
Is there open or short circuit detected?
YesRepair or replace for open or short

circuit.
No Inspect the front auto leveling sensor.
INSPECTION.)
If not normal, replace the front auto
leveling sensor.
11 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN AUTO LEVELING

WARNING LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT OR
ELSEWHERE
YesRepair or replace for short to GND.
Disconnect the auto leveling control

module and instrument cluster connectors.
Verify continuity between auto leveling
control module terminal V and GND.
12 INSPECT IF THE MALFUNCTION IS IN INSTRUMENT YesGo to the next step.
CLUSTER
Connect the instrument cluster connector
(with auto leveling control module
connector disconnected).
No Replace the instrument cluster.

Short to GND at auto leveling control

module terminal V using the jumper wire.
Does the auto leveling warning light
illuminate?
13 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN AUTO
LEVELING CONTROL MODULE AND HEADLIGHT
LEVELING ACTUATOR
Verify if there is an open or short circuit in the following
wiring harnesses and connectors.
Right side
auto leveling control module terminal J
and headlight leveling actuator (right)
terminal F
auto leveling control module terminal L
terminal H
auto leveling control module terminal I
terminal G
Left side
auto leveling control module terminal J
and headlight leveling actuator (left)
terminal F
auto leveling control module terminal L
YesRepair the open or short circuit or


terminal H
auto leveling control module terminal K
terminal G
Is there any open or short circuit in the
wiring harness?
14 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS
HEADLIGHT LEVELING ACTUATOR
Prepare and install a front combination
light (left or right) which has a headlight
leveling actuator that operates normally.
YesReplace the front combination light on

the side which the auto leveling
warning light turned off.
After installing the left or right front

combination light, does the auto leveling
warning light turn off?
15 VERIFY THE WIRING HARNESS FOR CONTINUITY
BETWEEN THE ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM AND
THE AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
Verify that continuity between ABS HU/CM
terminal V and auto leveling control
module terminal R. (with ABS)
Verify that continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal T and auto leveling control
module terminal R. (with DSC)
YesReplace the auto leveling control

module.
(See AUTO LEVELING CONTROL
No Repair or replace for short to power
supply.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM]
Perform the following preliminary inspection before troubleshooting.
STEP
INSPECTION
Is an aftermarket system installed?
ACTION
YesPerform troubleshooting according to
aftermarket keyless entry system
manual.
Did the customer activate the keyless

entry system with the key inserted into
the steering lock?

No
Explain to the customer

that the system does not
work with the key
inserted into the steering
lock.
The transmitter operation indicator

light (LED) illuminates when any
operation using the transmitter is
performed.
YesGo to Step 8.
Visually inspect the transmitter battery

for the following:
Yes
(See TRANSMITTER BATTERY

REPLACEMENT [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM].)
Battery direction
(polarity)

Battery insertion
direction, battery type
problem:
Properly install the
battery or replace the
battery with a specified
one (CR1620), then go to
the next step.
Battery type (CR1620)

Corrosion, soiling,
deformation of
battery terminals
(plus/minus terminals)
Contact malfunction
between the battery
terminal and battery
when battery is
inserted
Battery terminal
malfunction:
Clean corrosion and
soiling or repair the
terminal, then go to the
next step.
No Go to Step 8.

5
Does the keyless entry system operate

properly?
YesGo to Step 9.
6 NOTE:

Use a new monitor battery (normal
battery) or one from another vehicle
which operates normally.
Replace the battery in all the
transmitters with a monitor-use
battery (normal battery).
No If the operation indicator light (LED) does

not illuminate, replace the transmitter,
then go to Step 11.

SYSTEM].)
For each transmitter, verify that the
transmitter operation indicator light
(LED) illuminates when a button is
operated.
Does operation indicator light (LED)
for each transmitter operate?
7 NOTE:
YesReplace the battery, then go to Step 11.

Inspect for all transmitters.
Inspect while the batteries for all of
the transmitters are replaced with
monitor-use batteries (normal battery).
Verify the operation of keyless entry
system using all of the transmitters.
normally?

SYSTEM].)
Did the customer activate the

transmitter within operative area
(Within 2.5 m {8.2 ft} from area
around vehicle)?
No The system is normal.

Explain to the customer that the system
does not work without the system
operative area.
Did the customer use the keyless entry

system in particular area, such as
being near TV towers, power plants,
power lines, or factories?
YesAttempt to lock/unlock the doors with the

transmitter in a noninterference area.
If system operates:
Area of operation is
suspect. Explain effect of
outside interference on
the transmitter to the
customer.
If system does not
operate:
10
Are any of the following aftermarket

electrical parts on the vehicle?
Cellular phone
Radiowave
equipment
Remote engine starter
TV, etc.
YesDisconnect the aftermarket electrical part

connectors and attempt to lock/unlock the
doors with the transmitter.
If system operates:
The aftermarket
electrical parts are
interfering with the
keyless entry system.
If system does not
operate:

11
Perform the onboard diagnostic

function.
(See KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ONBOARD DIAGNOSIS [KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM].)
No
Does the onboard diagnostic function

work?
12
Go to Step 1 of NO. 1
ONE OR MORE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
FUNCTIONS
INOPERATIVE.
Go to Step 1 of NO. 2
ALL ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS
INOPERATIVE.
Attempt to reprogram the transmitter

ID code.
YesThe system is normal.
Can the transmitter ID code be

reprogrammed?
No Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting NO. 3

TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT BE
REPROGRAMMED.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
NOTE:
When the trunk lid opener cancel switch is at the ON position, the trunk lid does not unlock even when the trunk lid button
is pressed. Verify that the trunk lid opener cancel switch is at the OFF position when performing the on-board diagnostic
test.
The trunk lid opener cancel switch is located in the glove compartment.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
No.
Description
1 One or more on-board

diagnostic functions
inoperative
Malfunction in trunk lid opener system, hazard warning light

system, or door lock linkage system
2 All on-board diagnostic

functions inoperative
Malfunction in keyless control module power supply circuit,

door switch circuit, trunk lid compartment light circuit, or
keyless control module ground circuit
3 Transmitter ID code
cannot be
reprogrammed
Malfunction in keyless control module circuit
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
One or more on-board diagnostic functions inoperative
DESCRIPTION
Malfunction in trunk lid opener system, hazard warning light system, or

door lock linkage system
Malfunction in trunk lid opener system
Trunk lid opener relay circuit malfunction
Malfunction in hazard warning light system
Hazard warning light circuit
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Malfunction in wiring harness between keyless control
module and hazard warning lights
module and flasher control module
Malfunction in door lock linkage
Malfunction in keyless control module door lock/unlock signal circuit
STEP
INSPECTION
1 INSPECT HAZARD WARNING LIGHT AND

TRUNK LID OPENER OPERATION DURING
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Do all of the following items
work during on-board diagnostic
function operation?
ACTION
YesGo to Step 8.
Hazard warning
lights flash.
Trunk lid opens.
2 INSPECT HAZARD WARNING LIGHT
OPERATION DURING ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS
Do the hazard warning lights
flash during on-board diagnostic
function operation?
3 INSPECT HAZARD WARNING LIGHT
CIRCUIT
Do the hazard warning lights
flash when hazard warning
switch is on?
YesGo to Step 5.

No Inspect the hazard warning light circuit.
*4 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING YesReinspect the malfunction symptoms, then

HARNESS (BETWEEN KEYLESS CONTROL
repeat from Step 1 if malfunction recurs.
MODULE AND FLASHER CONTROL MODULE)
OR KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
No
Measure the voltage at keyless
module and flasher control
module.
terminal 2I during on-board
diagnostic function operation.
If the wiring
harness is
When hazard
normal,
warning lights
replace the
flashed:
keyless control
Alternates
module and
between B+
reprogram the
and below 1.0
transmitter ID
V
code, then go
Is the voltage as above?
to Step 11.
If the wiring
harness is
malfunctioning,
repair the
wiring harness,
then go to
Step 11.
5 CHECK TRUNK LID OPERATION DURING
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Does the trunk lid open during
on-board diagnostic function
operation?
6 INSPECT TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM
Does the trunk lid open by the
trunk lid opener switch?
*7 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN TRUNK
LID OPENER RELAY CIRCUIT OR KEYLESS
CONTROL MODULE
Disconnect the keyless control
module connector.
YesGo to Step 8.

No Inspect the trunk lid opener system.
YesReplace the keyless control module and the
reprogram transmitter ID code, then go to Step
11.
No Inspect the trunk lid opener relay circuit.

terminal 2E.
8 VERIFY THAT ALL DOORS LOCK AND
UNLOCK DURING ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Do all doors unlock and lock
during on-board diagnostic
function operation?
9 INSPECT DOOR LOCK LINKAGE
Operate the door lock knob and
verify the door locks and unlocks
manually.
YesReinspect the malfunction symptoms, then

repeat from Step 1 if the malfunction recurs.

No Inspect the door lock linkage.
Does every door lock system

work?
*10 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN DOOR
YesReinspect the malfunction symptoms, then
LOCK ACTUATOR, KEYLESS CONTROL
repeat from Step 1 if the malfunction recurs.
MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT OR ELSEWHERE

terminals 1C, 1D and 1F.
All doors
locked: Cycles
1.0 V or less
B+1.0 V
or less
(terminal 1D)
No
Inspect the keyless control

module the connector.
module and door lock actuator.
If the above
parts are
normal, go to
the next step.
All doors
unlocked:
Cycles
B+1.0 V or
lessB+
(terminal 1C)
If any of
above parts
are
malfunctioning,
repair the
malfunctioning
part.
All doors super

locked:1.0 V or
lessB+1.0
V or less
(terminal 1F)
11 REINSPECT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
AFTER REPAIR
Does the keyless entry system
operate properly?
No Reinspect the malfunction symptoms, then
repeat from Step 1 if malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 ALL ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM]
The door switches include the rear door upper latch switches and rear door lower latch
switches.
DESCRIPTION
All on-board diagnostic functions inoperative

Malfunction in keyless control module power supply circuit, door switch
circuit, trunk lid compartment light circuit, keyless control module ground
circuit.
Malfunction in IG1 or B+ signal circuit of keyless control module
Keyless control module power supply fuse malfunction
module power supply fuses and keyless control module
Malfunction in door open/closed signal circuit of keyless control module
Door switch system malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

module and door switch
Malfunction in trunk lid open signal circuit of keyless control module
Trunk lid compartment light switch system malfunction
module and trunk lid compartment light switch
Malfunction in keyless control module GND signal circuit

module and ground
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1 INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY YesGo to the next step.
FUSES
Are the keyless control module power supply
fuses normal?
No Inspect for a short to ground in

circuit of blown fuse. Repair or
replace if necessary.
Install an appropriate amperage
fuse.
2 INSPECT DOOR SWITCH INSTALLATION

Are the door switches installed securely?
*3 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING HARNESS

(NO CONTINUITY BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK AND
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE) OR ELSEWHERE
Measure the voltage at the following keyless
control module terminals:

No Install the door switches securely,
then go back to Step 5 of KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM PRELIMINARY
INSPECTION.
No Repair the wiring harness between
the fuse block and keyless control
module, then go to Step 8.
IG1 signal (terminal 2B)

B+ signal (terminal 2A)
Is the voltage B+?
*4 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING HARNESS YesRepair the malfunctioning wiring
(SHORT TO B+ BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK AND KEYLESS
CONTROL MODULE, OR BETWEEN KEYLESS CONTROL
MODULE AND GROUND) OR ELSEWHERE
Disconnect the keyless control module
connector.
control module connector terminal:

Is the voltage B+?
*5 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING HARNESS
(NO CONTINUITY BETWEEN KEYLESS CONTROL
Is there continuity between keyless control
module connector terminal 2W and ground?
6 INSPECT FOR CHECK CODE 04 IN INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
Inspect the door switch using the instrument
cluster input/output check mode.
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/OUTPUT
CHECK MODE.)

the keyless control module and
ground, then go to Step 8.
No Repair the door switch system using
the DTC 04 inspection procedure,
then go to Step 8.
Is DTC 04 displayed?
7 INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE OR WIRING
HARNESS (BETWEEN KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
AND DOOR SWITCHES, TRUNK LID COMPARTMENT
LIGHT SWITCH FOR CONTINUITY)
Open the driver-side door.
module connector terminal 2K, 2G and
ground?
YesReplace the keyless control module

and reprogram the keyless control
module ID code, then go to the
next step.
the keyless control module, door
switches, and trunk lid compartment
light switch, then go to the next
step.
8 REINSPECT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM AFTER REPAIR YesTroubleshooting completed.

properly?
Explain repairs to the customer.

No Reinspect the malfunction
symptoms, then repeat from Step 1
if the malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED [KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM]
Transmitter ID code cannot be reprogrammed
DESCRIPTION
Malfunction in keyless control module circuit

Malfunction in keyless control module related part
Keyless control module power supply fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

module and ground
module power supply fuses and keyless control module
STEP
INSPECTION
1 INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY

FUSES
Are the keyless control module power supply
fuses normal?
ACTION
No Inspect for a short to ground in
circuit of blown fuse. Repair or
replace if necessary. Install an
appropriate amperage fuse.
2 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING HARNESS (NO YesGo to the next step.

CONTINUITY BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK AND KEYLESS
CONTROL MODULE) OR ELSEWHERE
between the fuse block and
keyless control module, then go
to Step 5.
control module terminals:

B+ signal (terminal 2A)
Is the voltage B+?
3 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING HARNESS
(SHORT TO B+ BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK AND KEYLESS
CONTROL MODULE, OR BETWEEN KEYLESS CONTROL
YesRepair the malfunctioning wiring

Disconnect the keyless control module connector.

control module connector terminal:
Is the voltage B+?
4 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING HARNESS (NO YesReplace the keyless control
CONTINUITY BETWEEN KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE AND
module, then go to the next
GROUND) OR ELSEWHERE
step.
module connector terminal 2W and ground?
5 REINSPECT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM AFTER REPAIR

Does the keyless entry system operate properly?

module and ground, then go to
the next step.
Explain repairs to the customer.
No Reinspect the malfunction
symptoms, then repeat from
Step 1 if the malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
The keyless entry system is controlled by the keyless control module.
All locks includes the trunk lid.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
No.
Page
1 Fuel gauge needle position

incorrect
NO. 1 FUEL GAUGE NEEDLE POSITION INCORRECT [INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER]
2 All meters and gauges do not

operate
NO. 2 ALL METERS AND GAUGES DO NOT OPERATE [INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER]
3 ABS warning light illuminates
4 MIL illuminates
5 Brake system warning light

illuminates
NO. 5 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES

[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
6 Instrument cluster illumination

does not illuminate
NO. 6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ILLUMINATION DOES NOT

ILLUMINATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
7 Speedometer indication is defective NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER]
8 Tachometer indication is defective NO. 8 TACHOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER]
9 Water temperature gauge
indication is defective
NO. 9 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO. 1 FUEL GAUGE NEEDLE POSITION INCORRECT [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
Fuel gauge needle position incorrect

Connector or pin malfunction
Fuel gauge sender unit malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Fuel gauge sender unit is improperly installed

Open or short circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and
GND
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and
fuel gauge sender unit
STEP
INSPECTION

Verify that the fuel gauge needle does not
move after ignition switch is turned off, or
the display does not indicate F even though
fuel tank is full.
ACTION
Is the fuel gauge normal?

2
Start the instrument cluster input/output

check mode.
Select the check code 22.
No Go to Step 4.
Display value is 7370 ?

3
Perform the check code 23 inspection.
YesReplace the instrument cluster.
Perform the check code 22 inspection.


No Go to Step 6.
Inspect the instrument cluster connector

terminals for poor connection (such as
No Repair or replace the terminal.
Are the terminals normal?

6

Remove the instrument cluster.

between the instrument cluster and
GND.

wiring harnesses.
2R terminalGND
2P terminalGND
Inspect the fuel gauge sender unit connector


8
Inspect for continuity following the wiring

harness between instrument cluster and fuel
gauge sender unit.
2R terminalfuel gauge
sender unit (main) B
terminal
No Repair or replace the wiring harness

between the instrument cluster and
the fuel gauge sender unit.
2T terminalfuel gauge
sender unit (main) A
terminal/(sub) B terminal
2P terminalfuel gauge
sender unit (sub) A terminal
9
YesInspect the fuel gauge sender unit.
Is the fuel gauge sender unit installed

properly?
No Reinstall the fuel gauge sender unit.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO. 2 ALL METERS AND GAUGES DO NOT OPERATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
All meters and gauges do not operate

Fuse malfunction
Open or short circuit in power supply (IG1) wiring harness
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Open or short circuit in GND wiring harness

STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

position.
Does the
odometer/tripmeter
illuminate?
Does the fuel
gauge operate?
Does the MIL turn
on?
2
Inspect the METER fuse.

Is the fuse normal?

If the fuse is melted, inspect
the wiring harness for a
short to ground. Repair or

replace the wiring harness,
then replace the fuse.
3

position.
Remove the instrument cluster.

Disconnect the instrument cluster
connector.
Inspect the voltage between
instrument cluster wiring harnessside connector terminal 1G and
terminal 1E.
position.
Is the voltage B+?
No Inspect the suspect wiring harness, then
repair or replace.

connector terminals for poor
connection (such as
corrosion).

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ABS warning light illuminates

Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and GND
ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
DTC is stored in ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM

Open circuit in CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H)
CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) short each other
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Start the engine.
Does the ABS warning light turn off?
Are there a number of warning lights illuminated?
ACTION
YesGo to Step 5.
Measure the resistance between the DLC-2

terminals F and E.
No Go to Step 6.
Is the resistance below 60 ohms?
Inspect DLC-2 terminals F and E for followings:

F and E
Short to GND
YesInspect the wiring harness and

CAN system-related module.

5

Retrieve the on-demand and continuous memory
DTC from ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM.
Is there any DTC displayed?
YesPerform the appropriate DTC

[ABS].)
[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)


7

Measure the resistance between the instrument
cluster connector terminals 1J and 1L.
Is the resistance 114126 ohms?

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MIL illuminates
PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
DTC is stored in PCM.

STEP
1
INSPECTION
Start the engine.
Does the MIL turn off?
ACTION
YesGo to Step 6.
Start the instrument cluster input/output check

mode.
YesInspect the PCM.
Does the MIL turn off with a check code other than
26?

cluster.
Measure the resistance between the DLC-2 terminals

F and E.
No Go to Step 7.

5

Short circuit between terminals F
and E
Short to GND

Perform KOEO and KOER self-test and retrieve
continuous memory DTC for PCM.
YesInspect the wiring harness

and CAN system-related
module.
cluster.
Inspect the instrument cluster connector terminals

for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled-out
pins, and corrosion).

terminal.

8

YesInspect the wiring harness

and CAN system-related
module.
cluster.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO. 5 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
Brake system warning light illuminates

Brake fluid level sensor malfunction
Parking brake switch malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Improper brake switch signal input to PCM (PCM stores DTC P0571
and/or P0703.)
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Start the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Does the brake system warning light turn off?
Retrieve the PCM DTC using the M-MDS.

Is the DTC P0571 and/or P0703 present?
ACTION
YesGo to applicable DTC

inspection.

3
YesGo to Step 6.
Does the brake fluid need replenishment?
YesAdd brake fluid.


terminals F and E.
No Go to Step 7.

6

F and E
Short to GND


7

Retrieve the on-demand and continuous memory
DTC from ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM.

[ABS].)
[DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
No Go to the next step



< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO. 6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
Instrument cluster illumination does not illuminate

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Fuse malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

ON position.
Does the instrument cluster

illumination turn on?
Does the non-illumination

include the entire instrument
cluster?
Inspect the ROOM and METER

fuse.
Are the fuses normal?
ACTION
If the fuse is melted, inspect the

wiring harness for short to
ground. Repair or replace the
wiring harness, then replace the
fuse.

connector terminals for poor
connection (such as
corrosion).

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
Speedometer indication is defective

POSSIBLE CAUSE

PCM malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Start the engine, and drive the vehicle.
Does the speedometer move
smoothly?
ACTION
Does the speedometer indicate

correct speed?
2
Does the tachometer, the water temperature

gauge, operate normally?

No Go to Step 5.

mode.
Inspect the speedometer using the check code
12.
Is the speedometer normal?
4

Access VSS PID of PCM.
Monitor the VSS PID while driving.
Does the VSS PID indicate appropriate value?
YesInspect the CAN system wiring

harness and connectors for
followings.
PCM terminal
1AM and
instrument
cluster
terminal 1J
PCM terminal
1AI and
instrument
cluster
terminal 1L
No Inspect the ABS HU/CM, DSC
HU/CM or connectors.
Start the engine.

YesInspect the PCM or connectors.


terminals F and E.
No Go to Step 8.

7

and E
Short to GND


8


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO. 8 TACHOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
Tachometer indication is defective

PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE

STEP
1
INSPECTION
Start the engine.
Does the tachometer needle
move smoothly?
ACTION
Does the tachometer needle

indicate correct engine speed?
2
Does the speedometer, the water temperature

gauge, operate normally?

No Go to Step 5.

mode.
Inspect the tachometer using the check code 13.
Is the tachometer normal?
Connect the M-MDS DLC-2.

Access RPM PID of PCM.
Monitor the RPM PID while driving.
Does the RPM PID indicate appropriate value?

harness and connectors for
followings.
PCM terminal
1AM and
instrument
cluster
terminal 1J
PCM terminal
1AI and
instrument
cluster
terminal 1L
No Inspect the eccentric shaft
position sensor or connectors.
Start the engine.



terminals F and E.
No Go to Step 8.

7

and E
Short to GND


8



< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO. 9 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER]
Water temperature gauge indication is defective

PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE

STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
Start the engine.
Does the water temperature gauge needle move

to medium range gradually and stay there?
Does the speedometer, the tachometer, operate

normally?

No Go to Step 5.

mode.
Inspect the water temperature gauge using the

check code 25.
Is the water temperature gauge normal?

Access ECT PID of PCM.
Monitor the ECT PID while driving.
Does the ECT PID indicate appropriate value?

harness and connectors
followings.
PCM terminal
1AM and
instrument
cluster
terminal 1J
PCM terminal
1AI and
instrument
cluster
terminal 1L
No Inspect the ECT sensor or
connectors.
Start the engine.



terminals F and E.
No Go to Step 8.

7

and E
Short to GND


8


9


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO PANEL SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO]
Make sure the customer complain and identify either the center panel malfunction or audio
unit malfunction.
How to activate audio center switch confirmation mode

2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the MEDIA switch for
approx.1s.
3. The center panel switch confirmation mode is now activated.
STEP
INSPECTION
Press each switch on the

center panel.
YesMake sure the customer complain and then go to the

appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure.
Does buzzer sound when

pressing each switch?
Disassemble and
reassemble the center
panel and audio unit.
Activate the center panel
switch confirmation mode.
Does the buzzer sound
when pressing each
switch?
Does the audio system

operate properly?
ACTION

No Replace the center panel.
(See CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

No Make sure the customer complain and then go to the
appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONFIRMATION STEP 2: AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH CONFIRMATION [AUDIO]
Make sure the customer complain and identify either the audio control switch malfunction
or audio unit malfunction.
STEP
INSPECTION
Is the symptom related to either the

audio control switch or the audio
panel operation?
ACTION
YesMake sure the customer complain and then
go to the appropriate symptom
No
The symptom is related

to the audio panel
operation:
Follow the Confirmation
Step 1.
The symptom is related
to the audio control
switch operation:
Disconnect the audio unit connector

(24-pin).
Inspect both the audio unit and

wiring harness-side connectors for
poor connection. (such as
No
If the audio unit side

connector is wrong:
Replace the audio unit.
Terminal 1N (audio
control switch1)

Terminal 1P (audio
control switch2)

Are all the pins normal?
If the wiring harnessside connector is

wrong:
Repair or replace the pins

and/or the connector.
3
Inspect the continuity between the

audio unit wiring harness-side
connector terminal 1N and 1P while
operating the audio control switch.
YesMake sure the customer complain and then

go to the appropriate symptom
Does the resistance change?

position.
YesReplace the audio control switch.
Remove the audio control switch.

connector (24-pin) terminal and the
audio control switch wiring harnessside connector (8-pin) terminal.

No Repair or replace the wiring harness.
Terminal 1N (24-pin)
Terminal G (8pin)
Terminal 1P (24-pin)
Terminal H (8pin)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 NO POWER ON THE ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM [AUDIO]
No power on the entire audio system
Possible DTC 09:Er20

Burnt fuse (B+)
Burnt fuse (ACC)
Open or short circuit in power supply (B+) wiring harness
Open or short circuit in power supply (ACC) wiring harness
Possible DTC
Poor connection of audio unit connector, terminal damage

Poor connection of car-navigation unit connector, terminal damage
Car-navigation unit malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION

position.
Inspect the following fuses:
No Replace with the appropriate standard fuse.
ROOM 15 A
ACC 7.5 A
Remove the audio unit.
ACTION
If the fuse is melted,

inspect the wiring harness
for short to ground. Repair
or replace the wiring
harness, then replace the
fuse.
Inspect the connection of the audio

unit/car-navigation unit connector
(24-pin).
Disconnect the audio unit/carnavigation unit connector and inspect
both the audio unit/car-navigation
unit and wiring harness-side
connectors for poor connection. (such
corrosion).
Terminal 1B (B+)
Terminal 1R (ACC)
Terminal 1W (GND)
No
If poor connection of
audio unit connector:
Securely connect the audio
unit connector.
connector is wrong:
Replace the audio unit/carnavigation unit.
wrong:
Connect the audio unit connector.

Inspect the voltage for the power
supply line (B+, ACC).
Specification:
Ignition switch ON: 11.5 V or
more

No Inspect and repair or replace the suspect
wiring harness.
Charge the battery, if necessary.
Idle: 12.5 V or more

4

position.
Remove the audio unit connector (24pin).
connector terminal 1W and the
ground.
YesReplace the audio unit/car-navigation unit.

No Repair or replace the wiring harness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [AUDIO]
Vehicles Without Bose
No sound from all speakers
Possible DTC
03:Er07, 03:Er10, 06:Er07, 06:Er10, 09:Er20, 09:Er21, 22:Er07, 22:Er10

Short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and speaker
Short circuit in wiring harness between car-navigation unit and speaker
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Short circuit inside speaker

Speaker malfunction (e.g., any foreign material, broken)
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Press AUDIO CONT
switch more than 2
seconds.
Play the CD or Radio.
ACTION
Adjust the volume

between 10 and 15.
Is there any sound?
2

YesRepair or replace the suspect wiring harnesses or

speaker unit.

Disconnect the audio
connector (24-pin).
Inspect the continuity
between the audio unit
wiring harness-side
connector terminal and
ground:
For
front
speaker
Terminal
1A
(LH+)
GND
Terminal
1C (LH-)
GND
Terminal
1D
(RH+)
GND
Terminal
1F (RH-)
GND
For
rear
speaker
Terminal
1S
(LH+)
GND
Terminal
1U (LH-)
GND
Terminal
1V
(RH+)
GND
Terminal
1X (RH-)
GND
NOTE:
If there is a short circuit between the
speaker harness or speaker lead wire
and ground, the protector circuit inside
the audio unit operates to cut the
sound.
Remove the speaker.
YesReplace the speaker.
Disconnect the speaker

connector (2-pin).
(See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER


between the speaker
wiring harness-side
connector (2-pin)
terminal and ground:
(See REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

For
each
speaker

Terminal
A
GND
Terminal
B
GND
Is there the continuity?
Vehicles With Bose
3
Possible DTC
No sound from all speakers

06:Er07, 06:Er10, 09:Er20, 09:Er21, 10:Er07,10:Er10, 22:Er07, 22:Er10
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and
speaker
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Audio amplifier malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
Press AUDIO CONT switch more

than 2 seconds.
ACTION
Play the CD or radio.
Adjust the volume between 10

and 15.
Is there the sound?
2
Measure the voltage at the audio

amplifier terminal A. (vehicle
harness-side)
Is the voltage B+?
YesGo to Step 4.
No Repair or replace wiring harness between the
audio amplifier and fuse.
Is there any sound?


position.
Disconnect the audio amplifier

connector (8-pin, 16-pin).
No Repair or replace the related wiring

harnesses.
Inspect continuity between the

following terminals of the audio
amplifier connector and speaker
connector.
For front
speaker (LH)
Terminal 2B (16pin)Terminal A
Terminal 2D (16pin)Terminal B
For front
tweeter (LH)
Terminal 2K (16pin)Terminal A
Terminal 2I (16pin)Terminal B
For front
speaker (RH)
Terminal 2O (16pin)Terminal A
Terminal 2M (16pin)Terminal B
For front
tweeter (RH)
Terminal 2G (16pin)Terminal A
Terminal 2E (16pin)Terminal B
For rear
speaker/tweeter
(LH)
Terminal 1C (8pin)Terminal A
(speaker)/terminal
A (tweeter)
(speaker)/terminal
B (tweeter)
For rear
speaker/tweeter
(RH)
Terminal 1E (8pin)Terminal A
(speaker)/terminal
A (tweeter)
Terminal 1F (8pin)Terminal B
(speaker)/terminal
B (tweeter)
For center
speaker
Terminal 1H (8pin)Terminal B
5

position
YesRepair or replace the related wiring harnesses

or speaker unit.
NOTE:

audio amplifier connector and
ground:
For front
speaker
Terminal 2D (16pin, LH OUT+)
GND
Terminal 2B (16pin, LH OUT-)
GND
Terminal 2M (16pin, RH OUT+)
GND
Terminal 2O (16pin, RH OUT-)
GND
For front
tweeter
Terminal 2I (16pin, LH OUT+)
GND
Terminal 2K (16pin, LH OUT-)
GND
Terminal 2E (16pin, RH OUT+)
GND
Terminal 2G (16pin, RH OUT-)
GND
For rear
speaker/tweeter
GND
Terminal 1C (8pin, LH OUT-)
GND
Terminal 1F (8pin, RH OUT+)
GND
If there is a short circuit

between the speaker
harnesses or speaker lead
wire and ground, the
protector circuit inside the
audio unit or car-navigation
unit operates to cut the
sound.
Terminal 1E (8pin, RH OUT-)

GND
For center
speaker
Terminal 1H (8pin, CENTER
OUT+)GND
Terminal 1G (8pin, CENTER OUT)GND
6

position.
connector (24-pin) and audio unit
or car-navigation unit connector
(24-pin).
audio amplifier terminal IL (24-pin,
vehicle harness-side) and audio
unit or car-navigation unit terminal
J (24-pin, vehicle harness-side).
YesReplace the audio amplifier.

No Repair or replace the wiring harness between
the audio amplifier and audio unit.
7
Is there any sound?

No Replace the audio amplifier.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.5 BROKEN SOUND OR POOR SOUND QUALITY [AUDIO]
Broken sound or poor sound quality
Possible DTC
09:Er21
Audio amplifier malfunction (Bose )
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Improper speaker installation

Vibration of door trim and/or package trim
Speaker malfunction (e.g., any foreign material, damage)
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Are there a broken
sound or poor sound
quality from all
speakers?
Inspect the sound

while adjusting the
sound volume.
Is there a broken
sound or poor sound
quality between 15
and 20?
3
ACTION
Inspect the
No Go to Step 5.
BASS/TREB.
Is there a poor
sound quality at -3
+3 of
BASS/TREB?
No If there is a broken sound at +6 -6 of BASS/TREB with

the maximum volume, the system is normal.
NOTE:
When press the
AUDIO CONT switch
for a few seconds,
BASS/TREB is set at
0.
4
Attempt to duplicate
the symptom on the
other vehicle.
Is the sound better
than the customers
vehicle?
Yes
Without BOSE:
With BOSE:
If noise occurs from the speaker of a
specific channel, or the volume is minimized
and the noise occurs:
Replace the audio
amplifier.
If the noise occurs from the speaker of two
or more channels or the volume is
minimized and the noise does not occurs.

5
Identify the speaker

with a broken sound
by adjusting
BAL/FADE.

No Install the speaker properly.
Is the speaker
installed properly?
6
Remove the speaker.
YesRepair or replace the suspect speaker.
Is there any foreign

material or damage
on the speaker?
Inspect the sound

again.
Is there broken
sound?
No Inspect the vibration from the door trim and/or package

trim. Repair or replace the suspect trim as necessary.
Replace with a
speaker known to be
good. (e.g., swap
right and left
speakers)
Yes
Does the broken

sound appear at the
same location?
Without BOSE:
With BOSE:
Replace the audio
amplifier.
minimized and the noise does not occurs.
No Replace the speaker.

(See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.7 ALC FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE [AUDIO]
7
Possible DTC
ALC function is inoperative
Open or short circuit in vehicle speed signal wiring harness (e. g.,
instrument cluster)
CAN signal wiring harness malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

NOTE:
Inspect the ALC function while driving the vehicle playing the CD, etc.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Turn the ALC function to ON.
Inspect the ALC function operation when driving the
vehicle at ALC level 3.
ACTION
Explains the ALC function
to the customer.
Does the ALC system operate properly?
Inspect the connection of the audio unit connector (24pin, vehicle speed signal).

inspection.
Inspect both the audio unit and wiring harness-side

connector terminal I (24-pin) for poor connection (such

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [AUDIO]
NOTE:
Record all radio programs set by the customer prior to the repairs. Set all radio programs and adjust the time after the repairs.
Troubleshooting Index
No.
Symptom
Possible DTC
1 AF noise or POP noise at all sources (Radio, CD)
09:Er20, 09:Er21
2 No power on the entire audio system
09:Er20
3 No sound from all speakers
03:Er07, 03:Er10, 06:Er07, 06:Er10, 09:Er20, 09:Er21, 22:Er07, 22:Er10
4 No sound from some speakers

5 Broken sound or poor sound quality
09:Er21
6 Sound becomes loudly or weakly while driving the vehicle
7 ALC function is inoperative
8 AudioPilot 2 function is inoperative
9 Audio system illumination does not illuminate at all.

10 LCD does not display at all.
Quick Diagnostic Chart (Entire Audio System)
09:Er20, 21:Er19
09:Er20, 21:Er19
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 AF NOISE OR POP NOISE AT ALL SOURCES (RADIO, CD) [AUDIO]
AF noise or POP noise at all sources (Radio, CD)
Possible 09:Er20, 09:Er21

DTC
Low vehicle battery voltage.
Jammed radio signals from after market equipment.
Improper speaker installation
Poor connection of audio amplifier connector, terminal damage
Antenna malfunction (e.g., poor ground)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Audio amplifier malfunction (with Bose )

NOTE:
So-called AF noise is a snapping type noise that generally occurs during ON/OFF
switching operations of electrical equipment other than the audio unit/carnavigation unit, or a continual rasping noise that occurs when electrical
equipment is operated. This is caused by noise interference in the power supply
wiring, signal wiring, speaker cable or audio unit/car-navigation unit. Therefore
noise can be heard regardless of radio wave conditions or the audio volume
position. The noise will start after one click from the minimum position of the
volume button but normally does not change even when volume is turned to a
higher position.
So-called POP noise is snapping or popping type noise that occurs during ON/OFF
switching operation of the audio unit/car-navigation unit, or when switching from
radio to CD. Even a normal audio unit/car-navigation unit sometimes emits a little
noise depending on the conditions.

STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
Inspect the vehicle

battery voltage.
Is the vehicle battery

voltage normal?
No Charge the battery, then go to the next step.
Specification:
Ignition switch ON:
11.5 V or more
2
Turn the audio unit/carnavigation unit power to

ON.
Is there any noise?
Is any of the following

after-market equipment
installed? (Inspect
especially near the
antenna.)

No The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
vehicle battery voltage was low.
No Go to Step 5.
Radar
Remote
engine
starter
Antitheft
device
Other
4
Remove the aftermarket equipment.
Turn the audio unit

power to ON.
No The system is normal. The after-market electrical devices

might make a noise.
Is there any noise?

5
Is there the noise from
YesGo to Step 7.
all the speakers?

6
Inspect the suspect

speaker.
Is the speaker normal?
No
If there is any foreign material to the

speaker:
Remove the foreign material from the
speaker.
If the speaker is malfunctioning:
Replace the speaker.
If the speaker is not installed
properly:
Install the speaker properly.
Attempt to duplicate the

symptom on the other
vehicle.
Is the noise better than
the customers vehicle?

No The system is normal. Explain the noise generation
mechanism to the customer.
NOTE:
The noise may be heard depends on the
operating speed of the audio power and/or
mode switch.

Remove the audio

unit/car-navigation unit.
No If poor connection of audio unit connector:
Inspect the connection

of the audio unit
connector (24-pin) (for
sound signal line).
Is the connector
connected securely?
Security connect the audio connector.

If the audio unit side connector is wrong:
Replace the audio unit/car-navigation unit.
If the wiling harness-side connector is wrong:
Repair or replace the pins and/or the
connector.
After treating either the above-mentioned, then go to the
next step.
Is there any noise?

10
11
Inspect the ground

condition of the
antenna.
YesReplace the audio unit/car-navigation unit. Go to the next

step.
Is the ground condition

normal?
No Repair or replace the ground. Go to the next step.
Is there any noise?
Yes
Without BOSE:
With BOSE::
Replace the audio
amplifier.
minimized and the noise does not occurs:
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.4 NO SOUND FROM SOME SPEAKERS [AUDIO]
Vehicles Without Bose
No sound from some speaker
Possible DTC
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and speaker
POSSIBLE CAUSE

STEP
INSPECTION
Turn the audio unit power to

ON.
ACTION
Yes
If no sound from some

speaker:
Press AUDIO CONT switch

more than one second
(BAL/FAD cancel mode).
Press the POWER/VOLUME

switch and simultaneously
press down the AUTO-M
switch for approx. 2
seconds.
Go to the troubleshooting of No.3

No sound from all speakers.
NOTE:
The sound
speaker now
If no sound at all:
No The troubleshooting is completed.
changes in
the order of
left front
speaker, right
front
speaker, right
rear
speaker and
left rear
speaker.
Is there any speaker with no
sound?
2

LOCK position.
Disconnect the audio unit
connector (24-pin).
YesRepair or replace the suspect wiring harness or

speaker unit.
NOTE:
If there is a short circuit between
the speaker harness or speaker
lead wire and ground, the
protector circuit inside the audio
unit operates to cut the sound.

between the audio unit wiring
harness-side connector (24pin) terminal and ground.
Is there the continuity?

LOCK position.
Disconnect the audio unit
connector (24-pin).
between the audio unit wiring
harness-side connector
terminal and ground:
For front
speaker
Terminal 1A
(LH+)GND
Terminal 1C
(LH-)GND
Terminal 1D
(RH+)GND
Terminal 1F
(RH-)GND

YesRepair or replace the suspect wiring harness or
speaker unit.
No Go to the next Step.
NOTE:
If there is a short circuit between
the speaker harness or speaker
lead wire and ground, the
protector circuit inside the audio
unit or car-navigation unit
operates to cut the sound.
For rear
speaker
Terminal 1S
(LH+)GND
Terminal 1U
(LH-)GND
Terminal 1V
(RH+)GND
Terminal 1X
(RH-)GND
4
Disconnect the speaker

connector (2-pin) and inspect
the resistance of speaker.
between the audio unit unit
wiring harness-side connector
terminal and speaker wiring
harness-side connector:
Audio unit
front
speaker
Terminal 1A
(LH+)
terminal B
Terminal 1C
(LH-)
terminal A
Terminal 1D
(RH+)
terminal B
Terminal 1F
(RH-)
terminal A
Audio unit
rear
speaker
Terminal 1S
(LH+)
terminal B
Terminal 1U
(LH-)

No Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness or
speaker unit.
terminal A
Terminal 1V
(RH+)
terminal B
Terminal 1X
(RH-)
terminal A
5
Inspect the suspect speaker.

Is the speaker normal?
NOTE:
YesReplace the audio unit.

If the speaker lead wire

contacts either ground or
vehicle frame, replace the
speaker.

Vehicles With Bose
4
Possible DTC
No sound from certain speaker

Poor connection of audio amplifier connector
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and audio
unit
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and carnavigation unit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and
speaker
Speaker malfunction (e.g., foreign material, broken)
STEP
INSPECTION
Turn the audio unit on.
ACTION
If no sound from some
speakers:
Yes
Press AUDIO CONT switch 1

second (BAL/FED cancel mode).

If not sound at all:
Press the POWER/VOLUME switch

and simultaneously press down the
AUTO-M switch for approx. 2
seconds.
Go to the troubleshooting of
No.3 No sound from all
speakers.
NOTE:
The speaker from which the sound
is not emitted is specified using by
that the speaker voice changes.
No The troubleshooting completed. (The system

is normal.)
Is there any speaker with no

sound?
2
Does the same speaker have no

sound if changing the sound
source? (Radio, CD)

NOTE:
If a different speaker has no
sound now, the audio unit is
malfunctioning.

position.

unit or car-navigation unit connector
(24-pin). (for sound signal line)
No Connect the audio unit or car-navigation unit

connector (24-pin) securely.
Is the connector connected

securely?
4

position.
No Go to Step 6.

(24-pin).
audio unit or car-navigation unit
wiring harness-side connector and
ground.
For front
speaker
Terminal 1A (LH+)
GND
Terminal 1C (LH-)
GND
Terminal 1D (RH+)
GND
Terminal 1F (RH-)
GND
For rear speaker
Terminal 1S (LH+)
GND
Terminal 1U (LH-)
GND
Terminal 1V (RH+)
GND
Terminal 1X (RH-)
GND
5

amplifier wiring harness-side
connector (24-pin) and the audio
unit wiring harness-side connector
(24-pin).
For front
speaker (audio
amplifier - audio
unit or carnavigation unit)
Terminal A (LH+)
Terminal 1D

No Repair or replace the related wiring
harnesses between the audio amplifier and
the audio unit or car-navigation unit.
Terminal C (LH-)
Terminal 1C
Terminal D (RH+)
Terminal 1F
Terminal F (RH-)
Terminal 1E
For rear speaker
(audio amplifier
- audio unit or
car-navigation
unit)
Terminal S (LH+)
Terminal 1H
Terminal U (LH-)
Terminal 1G
Terminal V (RH+)
Terminal 1J
Terminal X (RH-)
Terminal 1I
6

amplifier connector (24-pin, 8-pin).
Is the connector connected

securely?
No Connect the audio amplifier (24-pin, 8-pin)

securely.

position.

No Repair or replace the repair related wiring

harnesses.
Inspect continuity between the

amplifier connector and speaker
connector.
For front
speaker (LH)
Terminal 2B (16pin)Terminal A
For front tweeter

(LH)
Terminal 2K (16pin)Terminal A
Terminal 2I (16pin)Terminal B
For front
speaker (RH)
Terminal 2O (16pin)Terminal A
Terminal 2M (16pin)Terminal B
For front tweeter
(RH)
Terminal 2E (16pin)Terminal B
For rear
speaker/tweeter
(LH)
Terminal 1C (8-pin)
Terminal A
(speaker)/terminal
A (tweeter)
(speaker)/terminal
B (tweeter)
For rear
speaker/tweeter
(RH)
Terminal 1E (8-pin)
Terminal A
(speaker)/terminal
A (tweeter)
Terminal 1F (8-pin)
Terminal B
(speaker)/terminal
B (tweeter)
For center
speaker
Terminal 1H (8pin)Terminal B
8

position
YesRepair or replace the related wiring harness

or speaker unit.



audio amplifier connector and
ground:
(See REAR SPEAKER

For front
speaker
GND
Terminal 2B (16pin, LH OUT-)
GND
Terminal 2M (16pin, RH OUT+)
GND
Terminal 2O (16pin, RH OUT-)
GND
For front tweeter
Terminal 2I (16pin, LH OUT+)
GND
Terminal 2K (16pin, LH OUT-)
GND
Terminal 2E (16pin, RH OUT+)
GND
Terminal 2G (16pin, RH OUT-)
GND
For rear
speaker/tweeter
(See CENTER SPEAKER

NOTE:
If there is a short circuit
between the speaker
harness or speaker lead wire
and ground, the protector
circuit inside the audio unit
operates to cut the sound.
Terminal 1D (8-pin,
LH OUT+)GND
Terminal 1C (8-pin,
LH OUT-)GND
Terminal 1F (8-pin,
RH OUT+)GND
Terminal 1E (8-pin,
RH OUT-)GND
For center
speaker
Terminal 1H (8-pin,
CENTER OUT+)
GND
Terminal 1G (8-pin,
CENTER OUT-)
GND
9
Inspect the suspect speaker.

Is the resistance normal?
NOTE:
If the speaker lead wire contacts to
either ground or vehicle frame,
replace the speaker.
YesReplace the audio amplifier.

(See REAR SPEAKER
(See CENTER SPEAKER
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.9 AUDIO SYSTEM ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE AT ALL [AUDIO]
Audio system illumination does not illuminate at all
Possible DTC
09:Er20, 21:Er19
Burnt fuse (TNS signal)
Open or short circuit in TNS signal wiring harness
POSSIBLE CAUSE

STEP
INSPECTION
Are all illumination on the audio unit

turned OFF?
ACTION
No Replace the center panel.

position.
YesGo to Step 4.
Inspect the fuse (ILLUMI).
Is the fuse normal?

3

position.
(24-pin) and inspect the continuity
between the audio unit/car-
YesRepair or replace the short circuit in the

suspect wiring harness. After repair the
harness, replace with the appropriate
standard fuse.
navigation unit wiring harness-side

connector terminal E (TNS) and the
ground.
4

(24-pin).
Inspect both the audio unit and
terminal E for poor connection (such
corrosion).

No
If poor connection of
audio unit/carnavigation unit
connector:
Securely connect the audio
unit connector.
connector is wrong:
wrong:
Connect the audio unit connector

(24-pin).
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position.
Inspect the voltage at the audio
terminal E (TNS).
Is the voltage B+ when the light
switch is turned to the TNS position?
YesReplace the audio unit/car-navigation unit.

No Repair or replace the suspect wiring
harness (TNS signal).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.10 LCD DOES NOT DISPLAY AT ALL [AUDIO]
10
LCD does not display at all
Possible DTC
09:Er20, 16:Er12
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Center panel unit malfunction

STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
Inspect the information display.
(See INFORMATION DISPLAY

No Replace the information display.
Does the LCD display properly?

2
Press either CLC or SET/INFO

switch on the information display.
Does the beep sound?
Yes

No Replace both audio unit and information

display.
(CAN communication malfunction)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.6 SOUND BECOMES LOUDLY OR WEAKLY WHILE DRIVING THE VEHICLE
[AUDIO]
Sound becomes loudly or weakly while driving the vehicle
Possible
DTC
Audio unit malfunction (without Bose )
POSSIBLE
CAUSE NOTE:
Audio amplifier malfunction (with Bose )
Inspect the ALC function (without Bose ) or AudioPilot 2 function (with

Bose ) while driving the vehicle with playing the CD, etc.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Does the ALC (without
Bose )/AudioPilot 2 function
(with Bose ) turn on?
ACTION
No
Without Bose:
With Bose:
Replace the audio amplifier.

2
Turn off the ALC (without

Bose )/AudioPilot 2 function
(with Bose ).
Does the sound change while
driving the vehicle?
Yes
Without Bose:
With Bose:

Explains the ALC (without
Bose)/AudioPilot 2 function (with Bose ) to
the customer.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.8 AudioPilot2 FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE [AUDIO]
8
Possible DTC
AudioPilot 2 function is inoperative
Open or short circuit in AudioPilot 2 signal wiring harness

Open or short circuit in AudioPilot 2 microphone signal wiring harness
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in vehicle speed signal harness

NOTE:
Inspect the AudioPilot 2 function while driving the vehicle and playing
a CD
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Turn the AudioPilot 2 function on.
Inspect the AudioPilot 2 function operation while
driving the vehicle.
Does the AudioPilot 2 system operation properly?
ACTION
Explain the AudioPilot 2
function to the customer.
Inspect the connection of the audio unit connector

(16-pin, AudioPilot 2 signal).
YesRepair or replace the pins

Inspect both the audio unit and wiring harness-side

connector terminal 2B(16-pin) for a poor connection
(such as damaged/pulled-out pins corrosion).

3
Inspect the connection of the AudioPilot 2

microphone connector (2-pin).
Inspect the AudioPilot 2 microphone wiring harnessside connector terminal A and B (2-pin) for poor
connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,
corrosion).

Are all pins normal?

4
Inspect continuity between the following terminals of

the audio amplifier connector and body ground
Terminal 1O (AudioPilot 2
microphone+)
YesRepair or replace short to

ground.
Terminal 1P (AudioPilot 2
microphone-)
Terminal 1B (vehicle speed signal)
5
Inspect continuity between the following terminals of

the audio amplifier connector and AudioPilot 2
microphone / instrument cluster connector.
1OAudioPilot 2
Terminal
microphone Terminal B (AudioPilot 2
microphone+)

No Repair or replace for open
circuit.
Terminal 1PAudioPilot 2
microphone Terminal A (AudioPilot 2
microphone-)
Terminal 1BDSC Terminal T / ABS
Terminal V (vehicle speed signal)
6
Inspect the connection of the audio amplifier

connector (16-pin, AudioPilot 2 microphone signal).

Inspect both the audio amplifier and wiring harnessside connector terminals 1O and 1P (16-pin) for poor
connection (such as damaged/pulled-out pins,
corrosion).
No Replace the audio

amplifier.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [RADIO]
NOTE:
In case location, time, and broadcasting station etc. can be specified through interview to customer, possibility that
signal environment causes problem is high.
Perform confirmation of symptom and evaluation under conditions that customer reported (location, time, broadcasting
station etc.). If not possible, perform it under equivalent conditions.
Before inspection or repair, record the broadcasting stations that customer preset and reset them accordingly after the
inspection or repair. Adjust the clock too.
No.
Symptom
Possible DTC
1 No radio reception (AM/FM)/No or low volume
09:Er20, 09:Er22
2 No radio reception (SIRIUS satellite radio)
11:Er01, 11:Er03
3 Noise from radio (AM only)
09:Er22
4 Noise from radio (FM only)
09:Er22
5 Noise from radio (SIRIUS satellite radio only)
11:Er01, 11:Er03
6 Cannot tune (SEEK does not stop)
09:Er20, 09:Er22
7 Cannot preset (preset function does not operate) 21:Er19

8 Reception frequency of radio slips
Quick Diagnostic Chart (Radio)
09:Er22
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONFIRMATION STEP 1: RECEPTION CONDITION SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE)
[RADIO]
Symptom
Only a buzzing sound
from the speakers
Antenna signal condition

There is no broadcasting wave.
Signals from antenna to audio
unit/car-navigation unit are not
transmitted.
Source
Electric noise
caused by the
operation of
internal circuit
from audio
unit/carnavigation unit
itself
Atmosphere noise
A buzzing or crunching
sound and normal
sound produced at the
same time from the
speakers
Though signals are transmitted

from antenna to audio
unit/car-navigation unit,
electric noise from other
sources is larger.
Electrical noise
caused by
operation of
electrical
component on
vehicle
Electrical noise
from high tension
wire, transformer
substation
(factory),
electrical feeder
line (street car),
or motorcycle.
A thumping sound and

normal sound produced
at the same time from
the speakers (FM only)
Noise occurs due to radio

wave environment at specific
places (e.g. in valleys between
buildings). Noise varies when
own vehicle or surrounding
vehicles moves. (FM only)
Interference
between direct
and reflected
waves of FM
signals causes
noise (Multipass
noise).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONFIRMATION STEP 2: ANTENNA SYSTEM SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO]
Possible cause
Antenna feeder
axis, open
circuit
AM reception
condition
FM reception condition
NG: No reception YES: Reception possible.
SIRIUS satellite
radio reception
NG: No reception
(Sensitivity decreases, but reception

is possible under strong electric
field.)
Antenna feeder
plug not
attached
Antenna feeder
axis (+) to
ground (-),
open circuit
NG: No reception NG: No reception
NG: No reception
Antenna feeder
and antenna,
poor ground
YES: Reception
possible
YES: Reception
possible
Antenna feeder,
jack and plug
poor connection
NG: No reception YES: Reception possible
NG: No reception
(Depending on
connection
conditions)
(Depending on
connection
conditions)
YES: Reception possible
(Sensitivity decreases, but reception

(Noise may occur) is possible under strong electric
(Noise may occur)
field.)
(Depending on connection
conditions)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONFIRMATION STEP 3: ANTENNA SYSTEM SIMPLE INSPECTION [RADIO]
Because the antenna system is equipped with a capacitor, the continuity cannot be
checked. Therefore proceed the following simple inspection.
Turn the AM radio on.
Tune to the frequency that there is no broadcast and you will hear a
buzzing sound.
Turn a work light on and shake it around the antenna rod (around 1020
mm)
NOTE:
Use a fluorescent light type for the inspection. Accurate
diagnostic cannot be done with a different type of light.
If a whirring sound from the speaker synchronized to the work light

movement is confirmed, the antenna system is normal.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 NO RADIO RECEPTION (AM/FM)/NO OR LOW VOLUME [RADIO]
No radio reception (AM/FM)/no or low volume/Possible DTC: 09:Er20, 09:Er22

Low vehicle battery voltage
Electronic jamming from outside, or inferior condition of broadcasting
station radio wave
Jamming from aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way radio, navigation
system, mobile phone, etc.)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Antenna plug poor connection

Antenna feeder malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
Turn the audio unit/car-navigation unit

power to ON.
YesGo to Step 3.
Is the LCD indicated correctly?
Measure voltage at B+ and ACC terminals.
Is voltage okay?
Specification
No Follow diagnostic procedure for

symptom No. 2 (AUDIO).
With ignition switch ON: 11.5 V or

more
At idling: 12.5 V or more
3
Set volume to 10 to 15.
Is buzzing sound or voice confirmed?
No Follow diagnostic procedure for

symptom No. 3 (AUDIO) or No. 4
(AUDIO).
Tune to local broadcasting station and

check reception condition.
Is reception okay?
No Go to Step 6.
Push PRESET switches and check preset

conditions.
Has preset been stored?
No Preset broadcasting stations.
Is aftermarket electronic equipment (twoway radio, navigation system, mobile

phone, etc.) installed?
NOTE:
No Go to Step 8.
TV antenna located closely to audio

antenna can be cause of noise. Relocate TV
antenna.
7
Remove aftermarket electronic equipment.

Turn audio unit/car-navigation unit ON and
Is reception improved?

(Explain to customers that
aftermarket electronic equipment is
cause of noise)
Refer to confirmation step 3, and inspect

antenna system.
Is a whirring sound present?
YesReplace audio unit/car-navigation

unit.
Inspect antenna plug connection condition.

Is connection okay?

No Insert antenna plug securely.
10
YesReplace antenna feeder.
Measure continuity between antenna feeder

axis and ground.
Is there any continuity?

11
Compare reception with other audio

unit/car-navigation unit on same model
(model/unit) under same problem
conditions.
Is reception equivalent between customers
unit and compared unit?
NOTE:
Due to following differences, you may feel
difference in reception efficiency.
(Vehicle side factor)
Antenna installation
location, height, feeder
wiring routing, optional
electrical equipment

(It is caused by electronic jamming
from outside, or inferior broadcasting
station signal condition.)
No Replace audio unit/car-navigation
unit.
(Audio unit/carnavigation unit factor)

Volume concern type: It
decreases change of
volume when signals
become weak. (Noise is
easy to be conspicuous)
Noise decrease type: It
decreases volume when
signals become weak, so
that noise is not
conspicuous.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REFERENCE [RADIO]
1. Multipath Noise
Signals from an FM transmitter are a high frequency and similar to beams of light because
they do not bend around corners, but they do reflect. Since FM signals can be reflected by
obstructions, it is possible to receive both the direct signal and the reflected signal at the
same time. This causes a slight delay in reception and may be heard as a broken sound or
a distortion.
2. Flutter/Skip Noise
Signals become weak in valleys between mountains, tall building, and other obstacles.
When the vehicle passes through such an area, the reception conditions may change
suddenly, resulting in annoying noise.
3. Stereo and Monaural Receptions

As signals become weak, noise may appear more in stereo reception. Comparing to stereo
reception, noise in monaural receptions is relatively less striking.
Measures in Audio System
Separation control
Utilizing the characteristic of monaural reception that noise is relatively less striking than
stereo reception, the audio system automatically changes the reception from stereo to
monaural and lessens annoying noise when signals become weak or a multipath
phenomenon occurs.
High tone control
When signals become weak or a multipath phenomenon occurs, the audio system restrains
volume level in high frequency band and lessens annoying noise.
Effect Setting of Separation Control and High Tone Control

The separation and high tone controls influence sound quality, Therefore they are
specifically tuned for individual model. (Comparison of characteristic must be done on the
same models)
Remarks
Signals tend to reach longer distances at night. It is conspicuous in AM signals, several

audio functions may stop due to foreign broadcasting station or noise. Though the audio
system restrains sensitivity of SEEK and SCAN functions at night, the audio system may
select other than desired broadcasting station when signals are considerably strong. This
function is linked to the parking light. When the parking light or headlight is turned on,
SEEK and SCAN may not function for weak signals.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 NO RADIO RECEPTION (SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO) [RADIO]
No radio reception (SIRIUS satellite radio) /Possible DTC: 11:Er01, 11:Er03

Low battery voltage
station radio wave
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Open or short circuit in wiring harness between SIRIUS satellite radio unit
and audio unit/car-navigation unit
Communication error between SIRIUS satellite radio unit and audio unit/carnavigation unit
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
Verify that the AM radio and FM radio

reception conditions.
Are AM radio and FM radio reception

normally?
No Perform symptom No.1 no radio

reception (AM/FM)/no or low volume
Is aftermarket electronic equipment (twoway radio, navigation system, mobile

No Go to Step 4.
NOTE:
TV antenna located closely
to audio antenna can be
cause of noise. Relocate
TV antenna.
3


cause of noise)
Inspect SIRIUS satellite radio antenna plug

connection condition.
Is connection okay?
YesReplace the SIRIUS satellite radio

antenna feeder.
Measure continuity between SIRIUS

satellite radio antenna feeder axis and
ground.

6
Inspect the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna

feeder.
(See SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA

FEEDER INSPECTION.)
No Replace the SIRIUS satellite radio

antenna feeder.
Is the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna feeder

normal?
7
Inspect the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna.

FEEDER INSPECTION.)
Is the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna
normal?
Inspect the following wiring harness for

open or short circuit.
Without car-navigation
(See SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO

ANTENNA FEEDER INSTALLATION.)
antenna.
ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
YesRepair or replace malfunctioning part.
system:
Between SIRIUS satellite
radio unit harness side
connector terminal 2L and
audio unit terminal 1O
connector terminal 2K and
audio unit terminal 1Q
connector terminal 2O and
audio unit terminal 2O
connector terminal 2P and
audio unit terminal 2P
connector terminal 2C and
audio unit terminal 2C
connector terminal 2E and
audio unit terminal 2E
connector terminal 2G and
audio unit terminal 2G
connector terminal 2A and
audio unit terminal 2A
With car-navigation
system:
connector terminal 2L and
car-navigation unit
terminal 1O
connector terminal 2K and
car-navigation unit
terminal 1Q

connector terminal 2O and
car-navigation unit
terminal 2O
connector terminal 2P and
car-navigation unit
terminal 2P
connector terminal 2C and
car-navigation unit
terminal 2C
connector terminal 2E and
car-navigation unit
terminal 2E
connector terminal 2G and
car-navigation unit
terminal 2G
connector terminal 2A and
car-navigation unit
terminal 2A
Is there any open or short circuit detected?
9
Install all removed parts.

unit/car-navigation unit on same model
(model/unit) under same problem
conditions.
NOTE:
Due to following
differences, you may feel
difference in reception
efficiency.
(Vehicle side factor)

from outside, or inferior broadcasting
station signal condition.)
No Replace audio unit/car-navigation
unit.
Antenna installation
location, height, feeder
wiring routing, optional
electrical equipment
(Audio unit/carnavigation unit factor)
decreases change of
volume when signals
decreases change of
volume when signals
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 NOISE FROM RADIO (AM ONLY) [RADIO]
Noise from radio (AM only)/Possible DTC: 09:Er22

Antenna rod not installed
Battery malfunction
Noise from electrical system on vehicle (e.g. fuel pump)
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

station radio wave
Antenna installation loosened
Audio unit /car-navigation unit malfunction
STEP
INSPECTION
Tune to local broadcasting

station and check reception
condition.
Is reception okay?
Is aftermarket electronic
equipment (two-way radio,
navigation system, mobile
ACTION
YesTune to correct frequency of broadcasting station.
If not preset, preset it.
No Go to Step 4.
NOTE:
TV antenna located closely to
audio antenna can be cause
of noise. Relocate TV
antenna.
3
Remove aftermarket
electronic equipment.
YesThe system is normal. (Explain to customers that

aftermarket electronic equipment is cause of noise)
Turn audio unit/carnavigation unit ON and check

reception condition.
4
Measure battery voltage.

Is battery voltage okay?
Specification:

No Charge battery. Inspect charging system, and repair
or replace if necessary.
With ignition switch ON:

11.5 V or more
NOTE:
Inspect that battery cables
are connected to terminals
securely.
5
Is noise occurring only when

vehicle electrical system (e.g.
fuel pump) operates?
NOTE:

No Go to Step 7.
Identify subject electrical

component by disconnecting
fuse, turning switch ON &
OFF, or disconnecting &
connecting connector.
It will be easy when
simulation function on MMDS is used.
6
Inspect power supply,

ground condition, and noise
prevention capacitor for
electrical component.
Is noise present after
inspection?
NOTE:
Inspect following:
Power
supply to
electrical
component
for voltage
drop
(compare
with battery
voltage)
NOTE:
The audio unit/car-navigation unit
supplies 12 V battery power to the
antenna amplifier for the AM radio
reception in the radio mode. The
audio unit/car-navigation unit
cannot receive the AM signals
without the 12 V battery power to
the antenna amplifier. If the AM
signals become strong, the
audio/unit car-navigation unit may
receive the signal with noises.
Resistance
between
ground of
electrical
component
and body.
(Should be
close to 0
ohm)
Installation
condition of
noise
prevention
capacitor for
fuel pump
etc.
7
Inspect antenna plug

Is connection okay?

position.
Measure continuity between

antenna feeder axis and
ground.

9 Compare reception with other audio unit/car- YesThe system is normal (It is caused by electronic
jamming from outside, or inferior broadcasting
navigation unit on same model (model/unit)
station signal condition).
under same problem conditions.
Is reception equivalent
between customers unit and
compared unit?
NOTE:
Due to following differences,
you may feel difference in
reception efficiency.
(Vehicle
side
factor)
Antenna
installation
location,
height,
feeder
wiring
routing,
optional
electrical
equipment
(Audio
unit/carnavigation
unit factor)
Volume
concern
type: It
decreases
change of
volume
when signals
become
weak. (Noise
is easy to be
conspicuous)
Noise
decrease
type: It
decreases
volume
when signals
become
weak, so
that noise is
not
conspicuous.
10
Retighten ground fixation for

antenna installation part and
YesReplace audio unit/car-navigation unit.
antenna amplifier.
Is noise present, after
retightening?

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.4 NOISE FROM RADIO (FM ONLY) [RADIO]
Noise from radio (FM only)/Possible DTC: 09:Er22

Antenna rod not installed
Battery malfunction
Electronic jamming from outside, or inferior condition of broadcasting station
radio wave
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

NOTE:
FM broadcast has feature sound quality is good and resistant to noise, but
FM broadcast has particular noises. Though audio unit/car-navigation unit is
designed to reduce noise, there are times noise occurs due to conditions.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Tune to local broadcasting station and
Is reception okay?
ACTION
YesTune to correct frequency of broadcasting
station.
If not preset, preset it.

2
Is aftermarket electronic equipment

(two-way radio, navigation system,
mobile phone, etc.) installed?
Remove aftermarket electronic

equipment.
YesThe system is normal. (Explain to

customers that aftermarket electronic
equipment is cause of noise)
Turn audio unit/car-navigation unit

ON and check reception condition.
4
Measure battery voltage.

Is battery voltage okay?
Specification:
No Go to Step 4.

No Charge battery. Inspect charging system,
and repair or replace if necessary.
With ignition switch ON: 11.5 V

or more
NOTE:
Inspect that battery cables are
connected to terminals securely.
5
Is noise occurring only when vehicle

electrical system (e.g. fuel pump)
operates?
NOTE:

No Go to Step 7.
Identify subject electrical component

by disconnecting fuse, turning switch
ON & OFF, or disconnecting &
It will be easy when simulation
function on M-MDS is used.
6
Inspect power supply, ground

condition, and noise prevention
capacitor for electrical component.
Is noise present after inspection?
NOTE:

Inspect following:
Power supply to
electrical component
for voltage drop
(compare with
battery voltage)
Resistance between
ground of electrical
component and
body. (Should be
close to 0 ohm)
Installation condition
of noise prevention
capacitor for fuel
pump etc.
7
Inspect antenna plug connection

condition.
Is connection okay?
Measure continuity between antenna

feeder axis and ground.

9
10

unit/car-navigation unit on same
model (model/unit) under same
problem conditions.
YesThe system is normal (It is caused by

electronic jamming from outside, or inferior
broadcasting station signal condition).
Is reception equivalent between

customers unit and compared unit?
Retighten ground fixation for antenna

installation part and antenna
amplifier.
Is noise present, after retightening?

NOTE:
When antenna is not grounded
perfectly, FM particular noise is likely
to be conspicuous.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.5 NOISE FROM RADIO (SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ONLY) [RADIO]
Noise from radio (SIRIUS satellite audio only)/Possible DTC:11:Er01, 11:Er03

Battery malfunction
station radio wave
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

STEP
1
INSPECTION
Is aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way
radio, navigation system, mobile phone, etc.)
installed?
NOTE:
TV antenna located closely to
audio antenna can be cause
of noise. Relocate TV
antenna.
ACTION
No Go to Step 3.


cause of noise)
Measure the voltage at battery.

Is the battery voltage okay?
Specification:
Ignition switch ON: 11.5 V or more

No Charge battery.
Inspect charging system, and
repair or replace if necessary.

NOTE:
Inspect that battery cables
are connected to terminals
securely.
4
Is noise occurring only when vehicle electrical

system (e.g. fuel pump) operates?
NOTE:
No Go to Step 6.
Identify subject electrical
component by disconnecting
fuse, turning switch ON &
OFF, or disconnecting &
It will be easy when
simulation function on MMDS is used.
Inspect power supply, ground condition, and

noise prevention capacitor for electrical
component.
Is noise present after inspection?
NOTE:
Inspect following:
Power
supply to
electrical
component

NOTE:
The SIRIUS
satellite radio is
supplied 12 V
battery power for
the AM radio
reception in the
radio mode. The
for voltage
drop
(compare
with battery
voltage)
Resistance
between
ground of
electrical
component
and body.
(Should be
close to 0
ohm)
audio unit/carnavigation unit

cannot receive the
AM signals without
the 12 V battery
power to the
antenna amplifier.
If the SIRIUS
satellite radio
signals become
strong, the audio
unit/car-navigation
unit may receive
the signal with
noises.
Installation
condition of
noise
prevention
capacitor for
fuel pump
etc.
6
Inspect SIRIUS satellite radio antenna plug

Is connection okay?
Inspect the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna.

INSPECTION.)
Is the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna normal

Measure continuity between SIRIUS satellite
radio antenna feeder axis and ground.

antenna.
ANTENNA
antenna feeder.
ANTENNA FEEDER
INSTALLATION.)
Inspect the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna

feeder.
10
FEEDER INSPECTION.)
antenna feeder.
Is the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna feeder

normal?

ANTENNA FEEDER
INSTALLATION.)
Compare reception with other audio unit/carnavigation unit on same model (model/unit)
under same problem conditions.
NOTE:
Due to following differences,
you may feel difference in
reception efficiency.
(Vehicle
side
factor)
Antenna
installation
location,
height,
feeder
wiring
routing,
optional
electrical
equipment
(Audio
unit/carnavigation
unit factor)
Volume
concern
type: It
decreases
change of
volume
when signals
become
weak. (Noise
is easy to be
conspicuous)
Volume
concern
type: It
decreases
change of

from outside, or inferior
broadcasting station signal
condition.)
volume
when signals
become
weak. (Noise
is easy to be
conspicuous)
11
Retighten ground fixation for antenna

installation part and antenna feeder.
Is noise present, after retightening?

unit.
UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.6 CANNOT TUNE (SEEK DOES NOT STOP) [RADIO]
Cannot tune (seek does not stop)/Possible DTC: 09:Er20, 09:Er22

Center panel malfunction (without car-navigation system)
station radio wave
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

STEP
1
INSPECTION
Inspect if
feel of SEEK
switch is
normal
when switch
is pushed
and
released.
ACTION
No Perform confirmation step 1: audio panel switch confirmation.
Replace center panel (without car-navigation system) or carnavigation unit if necessary.
Is it okay?
2
Inspect
indication of
LCD.
Is frequency
indication
increased or
decreased
when SEEK

No Perform confirmation step 1: audio panel switch confirmation.
Replace center panel (without car-navigation system) or carnavigation unit if necessary.
switch is
pushed?
3
Manually
tune to local
broadcasting
station and
check
reception
condition.
YesGo to Step 6.
Is reception
okay?
4
Inspect
antenna
plug
connection
condition.

Is
connection
okay?
5
Turn ignition
switch to
LOCK
position.

Measure
continuity
between
antenna
feeder axis
and ground.
Is there any
continuity?
6
Check if
number of
broadcasting
stations
changes
depending
on time and
place.
Does it
change?
YesThe system is normal. (Explain to customer that SEEK sometimes

does not stop depending on signal reception condition.)
NOTE:
Signals tend to reach longer distances in the night.
It is conspicuous in AM signals, several audio
functions may stop due to foreign broadcasting
station or noise. Though the audio system restrains
sensitivity of SEEK and SCAN functions in the night,
the audio system may select other than desired
broadcasting station when signals are considerably
strong. This function is linked to the parking light.
When the parking light or headlight is turned on,
SEEK and SCAN may not function for weak signals.

No Replace audio unit/car-navigation unit.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.7 CANNOT PRESET (PRESET FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE) [RADIO]
Cannot preset (preset function does not operate)/Possible DTC: 21:Er19
POSSIBLE CAUSE

Center panel (without car-navigation system) malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Tune to desired station and push
channel preset button 1 for about 2
seconds to store it.
Repeat above for other stations using
PRESET switch 2 to 5.
Push channel preset switch 1 to 6 one
by one.
Are stored stations present?
Turn ignition switch to LOCK and then

to ACC.
Check if preset stations are stored by
pushing preset switches.
Are stations stored?
ACTION
No Go to Step 3. (without car-navigation
system)
Replace the car-navigation unit. (with
car-navigation system)
YesThe system is normal. (Explain preset
procedure to customer using Owners
Manual)
No Replace audio unit/car-navigation unit.
Remove center panel from audio unit,

and reinstall center panel to audio unit.
Turn the audio unit power to ON.

Press the POWER/VOLUME switch and
simultaneously press the MEDIA switch
for approx. 1 S.
Push all switches and check if buzzer
sounds.
Is all switches okay?

No Replace center panel (without carnavigation system).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.8 RECEPTION FREQUENCY OF RADIO SLIPS [RADIO]
Reception frequency of radio slip/Possible DTC: 09:Er22

station radio wave
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
STEP
INSPECTION
Push SEEK switch and check if desired broadcasting

station is tuned.
YesGo to Step 3.
Is it okay?
Check if other broadcasting station is received at

certain place when indication of reception frequency
stays.
Is other station received?

NOTE:
When you receive weak signal from one broadcasting
station and come close to broadcasting antenna which
emits strong signal, broadcasting with strong signal is
sometimes received.
3
ACTION
No Replace audio unit/carnavigation unit.

Compare reception with other audio unit/carnavigation unit on same model (model/unit) under
same problem conditions.
YesTroubleshooting completed
(Audio unit is normal).
Is reception equivalent between customers unit and

compared unit?
No Replace audio unit.


< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
No.
1
Items
Symptom
Possible DTC
CD
CD player/changer does not load the CD or ejects the CD immediately 03:Er01, 03:Er10, 06:Er01, 06:Er10, 22:Er01,
player/changer
22:Er10
Device code 25/error code 32
CD player/changer does not eject the CD
03:Er01, 06:Er01, 22:Er01
CD player/changer does not play the CD/No sound
03:Er07, 03:Er10, 06:Er07, 22:Er07

Sound jumps
03:Er02, 06:Er02, 22:Er02
CD player/changer scratches on the CD
03:Er02, 06:Er02, 22:Er02
Disc changer is inoperative
06:Er01, 06:Er10, 22:Er01, 22:Er10
6
7
8
9
10
11
CD changer
MP3 applicable CD player does not play the MP3-formatted file

CD player
22:Er07
MP3-formatted file folder selection is inoperative/Track search is

inoperative
22:Er02
CD player does not indicate the MP3 title text
22:Er02
CD player does not play the audio data (CDDA)
22:Er02
CD
Track change is inoperative
player/changer
03:Er02, 06:Er02, 22:Er02

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD
PLAYER/CHANGER]
CD player/changer does not play the CD/No sound

Possible DTC:03:Er07, 03:Er10, 06:Er07, 22:Er07,device code 25/error code 32
Troubleshooting hints
CD is inserted upside down
Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD, condensation)
Non-conventional discs (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) CD, 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter, heart-shaped disc,
octagonal disc)
Audio units is malfunctioning
STEP
INSPECTION
Turn the radio ON and inspect

that there is a sound.
Is there a sound?
No Go to the symptom troubleshooting No.3 (Audio

system).
NOTE:
ACTION
Check for the volume dial

position.
2
Was CD inserted properly, labelside up?

No Explain to the customer that CD should be
inserted into the slot, label-side up.
Replace the CD known to be

good.
Does the CD player/changer load

the CD?

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY).
Visually inspect the CD.

Is there any
dirt, scratch or
deformation on
the CD?
YesExplain to the customer that the defective CD or

non-conventional disc cannot be use.
Is the CD a
nonconventional
disc?
Is there a CD in
MP3 recording?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.4 SOUND JUMPS [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
Sound jumps
Possible DTC:03:Er02, 06:Er02, 10:Er02, 22:Er02
Improper audio unit installation (e.g., rattle, loose)
Inadequate tire pressure
NOTE:
The CD may be malfunctioning if the sound jumps on the certain CD only. Inspect the CD
player/changer operation using the CD known to be good.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Does the sound jump when the
vehicle is stopped?
ACTION
YesGo to Step 6.
Drive the vehicle.
Does the sound jump when

driving over uneven surfaces?
No Go to Step 6.
Is the audio unit installed

securely?

No Install the audio unit securely.
Inspect the tire pressure.

Is the tire pressure normal?

Adjust the tire pressure within

specification.

No Audio system is normal. Explain repairs to the
customers.
Replace the CD known to be

good.

No Audio system is normal. Explain to the customer
that the CD is malfunctioning.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.5 CD PLAYER/CHANGER SCRATCHES ON THE CD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
CD player/changer scratches on the CD

Possible DTC:03:Er02, 06:Er02, 22:Er02
Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc)
Multiple CDs are inserted into the CD player at the same time
Audio unit is malfunctioning
STEP
INSPECTION
Were the multiple CDs inserted into

the CD player at the same time?
ACTION
YesExplain to the customer to insert a CD one
by one.
Visually inspect the CD.

Is the CD a deformed disc (e.g., out
of specification (thickness), bent
disc)?
YesAudio system is normal. Explain to the

customer that the CD is malfunctioning.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.6 DISC CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
Disc change is inoperative

Possible DTC:06:Er01, 06:Er10, 22:Er01, 22:Er10
Improper center panel installation
Center panel is malfunctioning
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Inspect the CD changer
operation.
Does the CD changer operate

properly?
No Go to the symptom troubleshooting No.3 CD

player/changer does not play the CD/No
sound.
Inspect the followings:
Is the display
shown properly
when operating
the disc change
button?
Does the radio
band selection
operate
properly?
3
ACTION
Inspect the center panel

YesInstall the center panel securely and properly.
installation.
Does the CD changer change the
disc properly after re-installing
the center panel?
No Go to the No.1 Audio panel switch inspection

in this section. Replace the center panel as
necessary.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.7 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE MP3-FORMATTED FILE [CD
PLAYER/CHANGER]
CD player does not play the MP3-formatted file

CD-R/RW written format is out of specification
MP3 and other format data are in the CD-R/RW
File extension for MP3-formatted file is incorrect (Correct. .mp3, incorrect: e.g., RIFF)
Defective CD-R/RW (e.g. dirty CD, scratch)
MP3 applicable CD player malfunction
NOTE:
The free-software for the MP3-formatted file in the field may cause the deterioration of
sound quality, noise, or defective play, so that the CD player wont play the customer
made MP-3-formatted file.
The CD player may not play the CD-R/RW properly due to the disc condition.
If there are MP-3-formatted file and other file in the same disc, the CD player may not
play the disc.
If there are MP-3-formatted file and audio data in the same disc, the CD player loads and
plays the first session of the data only.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Inspect the written
format of the
recorded data on the
ACTION
CD-R/RW.
No Write the CD-R/RW with the correct specification.
Is the written format

correct?
2
Inspect the recorded

data in the CDR/RW.
Is there MP3 and
other format data in
the CD-R/RW.
YesReplace with the CD-R/RW known to be good (MP3formatted file data only), then inspect the CD player
operation.
If the CD player plays the MP3formatted file:
Audio system is normal. Explain to the
customer that the CD player does not
operate properly if the MP3 and other
format data are in the CD-R/RW.
If the CD player does not play the
MP3-formatted file:
Inspect the CDR/RW written

format.
Is the written format
within the
specification (.mp3
is the correct file
extension)?
YesReplace with the CD-R/RW using the .mp3 file extension,

then inspect the CD player operation.
If the CD player plays the MP3formatted file:
Audio system is normal. Explain to the
customer that the CD player does not
operate properly if the correct file extension
is not used.
If the CD player does not play the
MP3-formatted file:
Visually inspect the

CD-R/RW.
YesClean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW known to be

good.
Is there any dirt or

scratch on the CDR/RW?

(See CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
(See CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.8 MP3-FORMATTED FILE FOLDER SELECTION IS INOPERATIVE/TRACK
SEARCH IS INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
MP3-formatted file folder selection is inoperative/Track search is inoperative

Possible DTC: 22:Er02
Conflict of ID tag version for CD-R/RW
Improper folder and/or music title in CD-R/RW
The number of characters of folder/audio file name in CD-R/RW exceeds the maximum
number of characters
Improper encode in CD-R/RW
NOTE:
ID3 is a tagging format for MP3-formatted file. ID3 allows metadata (e.g., title, artist, track
number, etc.) to be added to the MP3-formatted file.
There are two versions in the ID tag.
ID3v1: This is the most widespread standard tag formats and most
software is compatible with this version. There is a limitation on the
maximum number of characters for the text data.
ID3v2: There are a variety of version in V2, but there is no
interchangeability among the versions.
Limitation on the maximum number of characters for the text data (ID3v1)
Item
Maximum number of characters
Description
Title
30
Music title
Artist
30
Artist name
Album
30
Album title
Year
Album produced year/CD wholesale year
Genre
Music category selection
Comment
30
Free comment
Track
Track number
STEP
INSPECTION
Visually inspect the CD-R/RW.
Is there any dirt or scratch on the

CD/R/RW?
Inspect the ID tag version.

Is ID tag correct?
Inspect folder and audio file name.

Are all file name input correctly?
Inspect the encode for the folder

and audio file name in the CDR/RW.
Is the encode correct?
NOTE:
Unreadable characters may be
displayed if incorrect encode is
ACTION
YesClean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW
known to be good.
No Write the CD-R/RW with the correct ID tag
version.
No Use the CD-R/RW that a folder and audio file
name is input correctly.
No Use the correct encode.
used.
5
Inspect the number of characters

for the folder and audio file name.
Is the number of characters within
the maximum number of
characters?

No Input the folder and audio file name within
the maximum number of characters.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.9 CD PLAYER DOES NOT INDICATE THE MP3 TITLE TEXT [CD
PLAYER/CHANGER]
CD player does not indicate the MP3 title text

Conflict of ID tag version for CD-R/RW
The number of characters of folder/audio file name in CD-R/RW exceeds the maximum
number of characters
Improper encode in CD-R/RW
No title input in CD-R/RW
Input title text by 2-bytes characters
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Visually inspect the CD-R/RW.
Is there any dirt or scratch on the
CD/R/RW?
Inspect the display the LCD.

Is the CD (other than MP3
compatible) displayed on the LCD?
ACTION
YesClean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW
known to be good.
No Go to the symptom troubleshooting No.9
(Entire audio system).
Inspect the ID tag version.

Is the ID tag correct?
Is the title text input into the CDR/RW?

No Write the CD-R/RW with the correct ID tag
version.
No Input the title text.
NOTE:
Do not input the title text by
two-bytes character.
Inspect the encode for the folder

and audio file name in the CDR/RW.
Is the encode correct?
Inspect the number of characters

for the folder and audio file name.
Is the number of characters within
the maximum number of
characters?

No Use the correct encode.

No Input the folder and audio file name within
the maximum number of characters.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.10 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE AUDIO DATA (CDDA) [CD
PLAYER/CHANGER]
10
CD player does not play the audio data (CDDA)

Possible DTC: 22:Er02
CD-R/RW written format is out of specification
Defective CD-R/RW (e.g., dirty CD, scratch)
Data other than the audio data is in CD-R/RW
NOTE:
The CD player may not play the CD-R/RW properly due to the disc condition.
If there are MP-3-formatted file and audio data in the same disc, the CD player loads and
plays the first session of the data only.
STEP
INSPECTION
Replace with
the audio-CD
known to be
good.
ACTION
Does the CD
player play the
audio-CD
properly?
2
Inspect the
written format
of the recorded
data on the
CD-R/RW.
No Write the CD-R/RW with the correct specification.
Is the written
format correct?
3
Inspect the
recorded data
in the CDR/RW.
Is any data
other than the
audio data
recorded in the
CD-R/RW?
YesReplace with the CD-R/RW known to be good (record audio data

only), then inspect the CD player operation.
If the CD-R/RW plays:
Audio system is normal. Explain to the customer
that the CD player does not operate properly if
the audio data and other data are recorded in
the CD-R/RW.
If the CD-R/RW does not play:
Visually inspect
the CD-R/RW.
YesClean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW known to be good.
Is there any
dirt or scratch
on the CDR/RW?

(See CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.11 TRACK CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
11
Track change is inoperative

Possible DTC:03:Er02, 06:Er02, 22:Er02,device code 25/error code 32
octagonal disc)
Center panel is malfunctioning
STEP
INSPECTION
Replace the CD known to be good.

Does the CD player change the track?
ACTION
YesExplain to the customer that the defective
CD or non-conventional disc cannot be
used.
Inspect the center panel installation.

Does the CD player change the track
number on the display when pressing
the track up or down button?

No Go to the No.1 Audio panel switch
inspection in this section. Replace the

center panel as necessary.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUDIO CD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
The CD player/changer has been designed to play CDs bearing the identification logo,
COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO, as shown. No other discs can be played on the CD
player/changer other than MP3 applicable one.
The CD player/changer may not play the following CD:

Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD
condensation)
8 cm (3 in) CDs accessories (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter, sticker, label)
Nonstandard CD (e.g., Diameter/thickness is out of specification)
Specification: 119.7120.3 mm (4.6684.692 in) of
diameter, 1.2+0.3 or -0.1 mm (0.047+0.012 or 0.004 in)
of thickness
Do not use non-conventional discs. The CD player/changer could be damaged.
Examples:
Although the same physical size as the compact disc, SACD uses a different kind of digital
audio signal, Direct Stream Digital.
The CD player/changer may not play the CD-R/RW properly due to the disc condition
(excluding the MP3).
MP3-Formatted File
Outline of CD-R and CD-RW
Definition
CD-R: The CD-R is a non-rewritable version. Once a section of a CD-R is
written, it cannot be erased or rewritten.
CD-RW: The CD-RW is a re-writable version of CD-ROM and can be
written the data an unlimited number of times.
Since a reflected laser beam amount of the CD-R/RW is less than the
reflected laser beam amount of the conventional CD media, the CD
player/changer may not play the CD-R/RW or have the sound jumped.
Since the recording quality of the CD-R/RW vary widely, some CD-R/RW
may not be played.
Recording method
There are two methods for recording.
Classification by recorder
Record the audio data in the audio-CD by audio recorder
The price of the audio recorder and original audio-CD
includes the copyright fee.
Recorded the audio data in the conventional data-CD by the personal
computer
The data-CD is cheaper than the audio-CD. But, there is
a CD with the low quality.
Classification by audio data uncompression/compression
Uncompressed audio data
The CD-R/RW player can play the uncompressed audio
data.
Compressed audio data
It is possible to record the large quantity of music in a
disc. The sound quality varies depends on the audio data
compression format. The compressed audio data can be
played on the applicable player only.
Type of compression format:
MP3: MPEG Audio Layer 3 Mazda genie MP3 applicable
CD player is available.
WMA: Windows Media Audio
ATRAG: Adaptive TRansform Acoustic Coding

MP3
The following condition should be met in order to record the MP3-formatted data on the
MP3 applicable CD player:
Media
Logical format
Applicable to the CD-R/RW

ISO 9660 level 1&2 / Joliet / Romeo
Number of directly 8 directly

Number of files
Maximum 255 as a total number of file and folder

Maximum 155 for folder
ID3 TAG
Applicable to Ver1.1, 2.3 and 2.4
File extension
MP3
Packet writing
Not applicable
Bit rate
8 kbps320 kbps/VBR
Sampling rate
11.025 kHz48 kHz
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS THE CD
IMMEDIATELY [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
CD player/changer does not load the CD or ejects the CD immediately

Possible DTC: 03:Er01, 03:Er10, 06:Er01, 06:Er10, 22:Er01, 22:Er10,device code 25/error code 32
CD is inserted upside down
octagonal disc)
Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc)
Poor connection of audio unit connector or terminal (e.g., damaged, bent, pulled-out pin,
corrosion)
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Is CD inserted properly, label-side
up?
ACTION
No Explain to the customer that CD should be
inserted into the slot, label-side up.
Replace with a CD known to be good.
Does the CD player/changer load the

CD?

3 Visually inspect the CD.
Is there any dirt, scratch or
deformation on the CD?
Is the CD a non-conventional disc?
4
YesExplain to the customer that the defective

CD or non-conventional disc cannot be use.

position.

unit connector (24-pin).
No
Inspect both audio unit connector

and wiring harness-side connector for
damaged/bent/pulled-out pins,
corrosion)
All the pins and connector normal?
If the audio unit

connector/pin is
wrong:
If the wiring harnessside connector/pin is
wrong:
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT EJECT THE CD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
CD player/changer does not eject the CD

Possible DTC:03:Er01, 06:Er01, 22:Er01,device code 25/error code 32
Defective CD. (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD, condensation)
octagonal disc)
Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc).
Multiple CDs are inserted into the CD player at the same time
Poor connection of audio unit connector or terminal (e.g., damaged, bent, pulled-out pin,
corrosion)
Improper CD cover installation
Improper center panel installation
NOTE:
The CD may be malfunctioning if the CD player/changer does not eject the certain CD
only. Inspect the CD player/changer operation using the CD known to be good.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Inspect the operation of the audio
system other than CD player/changer
(e.g. Radio).
Does other audio system operate?
ACTION
YesGo to Step 3.

position.

unit connector (24-pin).
No
Inspect both audio unit connector

damaged/bent/pulled-out pins,
corrosion)
All the pins and connector normal?
If the audio unit

connector/pin is
wrong:
If the wiring harnessside connector/pin is
wrong:
Eject the CD.

Is the CD ejected from the CD
player/changer?
Insert the CD into the CD

player/changer.
Does the CD insert into the CD
player/changer smoothly?

No Inspect the center panel and CD cover
installation. Securely install the center panel
and/or CD cover as necessary.
No Install the center panel and/or CD cover
properly, then go to the next step.
Is the CD ejected from the CD

player/changer?
Explain repairs to the customers.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.5 VEHICLE POSITION DEVIATES FROM THE ROUTE MAP [CAR-NAVIGATION
SYSTEM]
Vehicle position deviates from the route map.

Jammed radio signals from after market equipment (radar, remote engine
starter, anti-theft device etc.)
Poor connection of GPS antenna connector, terminal damage
GPS antenna malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in feeder line between GPS antenna feeder and carnavigation unit.
Open or short circuit in harness (vehicle speed signal related).
STEP
INSPECTION
Is any of the following after-market

equipment installed? (Inspect
especially near the GPS antenna.)
Radar
ACTION
No Go to Step 3.
Remote engine
starter
Anti-theft device
Other
2
Remove the after-market equipment.

CAUTION:
YesSystem is normal.
The after-market electrical device might be
The procedure
requires an
assistant.
interrupting to GPS reception.

Drive the vehicle without any

obstacles.
Does the vehicle indicator follow the
steering wheel direction?
3
Position the vehicle without any

obstacles and receive GPS for 5 min.
at idle.
Does GPS show up on interruption
of the left-side of the display screen
4 CAUTION:
The procedure requires an
assistant.

No Go to Step 8.

No Go to Step 5.
Start diagnostic function and indicate

Vehicle Signal check screen.
(See DIAGNOSTIC CHECK [CARNAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
Drive the vehicle.
Check the SPEED on the diagnosis
screen.
Does the SPEED change according
to the vehicle speed?
NOTE:
If the engine started after diagnostic
function activated, the diagnostic
function is reset.
5 CAUTION:
The procedure requires an
assistant.
Drive the vehicle and turn the
steering wheel to the left or right.
Does the vehicle indicator follow the
steering direction?

NOTE:
The vehicle indicator might
be out of position in the
following areas:
Parallel
road,
high-level
road, loop
road,
tower
type
parking,
high-rise
building s
lot.
No Replace the car-navigation unit.
6

position.
Inspect the connection of carnavigation unit connector (24-pin).
No Securely connect the car-navigation unit

connector.
Is the connector securely connected?

7
Disconnect the car-navigation unit

connector (24-pin).
Inspect both car-navigation unit
connector and wiring harness-side
connector terminal I for poor
connection (such as damaged/pulled
out pins, corrosion).
Is the pin normal?
YesInspect for vehicle speed signal circuit

(between instrument cluster and carnavigation unit)
No
If the car-navigation
unit connector is
wrong:
unit.
wrong:

YesGo to Step 5.
Drive the vehicle.

Check the GPS Antenna on the
diagnosis screen.
Is the OK indicated?
NOTE:
If the engine started after diagnostic
function activated, the diagnostic
function is reset.
9

position.
Inspect the connection of the carnavigation unit connector (3-pin) and

GPS antenna connector.
No Securely connect the suspect connector.

10
Disconnect the GPS antenna and carnavigation unit connector for poor
connection (such as damaged/pulled
out pins, corrosion).

No
unit connector is
wrong:
unit.
If the GPS antenna
connector is wrong:
Replace the GPS antenna.
(See GPS ANTENNA
wrong:
11
Replace the GPS antenna.

Does the vehicle position deviate
from route map continuously?
YesReplace the car-navigation unit.

(GPS antenna malfunction)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REFERENCE INFORMATION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Starting Procedure For Diagnostic Function

1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position.
2. Press the MENU switch.
3. Select Navigation Set Up.
4. Select Calibration.
5. Select Map Version.
6. Press upper left of screen 2 times, then press lower left of it 2 times.
7. Press Menu button of Diagnosis Check screen.
8. Perform following procedures according to the purpose of the check item.
If inspect vehicle condition signals:
Select Vehicle Signal.
No. Display item
Description
PKB
1
Indicate parking brake signal.

ON: Parking brake applied.
OFF: Parking brake released.
REV
2
Indicate Reverse signal state.

ON: Reverse
OFF: Others
Microphone* Indicate the connection state of a microphone.

3
OK: Connect
NCON: Disconnect
4 SPEED*
TNS*
5
Indicate the present vehicle speed by kph/mph (a maximum of 3 digits)

Indicate TNS signal state.
ON: Turn TNS ON
OFF: Turn TNS OFF
GPS Antenna* Indicate the connection state of a GPS antenna.

6
OK: Connect
NCON: Disconnect
Traffic System Indicate the RDS-TMC system availability on the vehicle.
TMC: Equip
NONE: Not equip
It is used for symptom troubleshooting. (Troubleshooting index No.4, No.5, No.7 and
No.8)
If inspect microphone related signals:

1. Select Navigation Check Menu.
2. Select Microphone Check.
No.
Display item
PPT switch status
Description
indicate the state of a VOICE button.
<OK>: Press the button (Keep the state of until the screen is changed.)
<Please Push switch>: Other than above condition.
Microphone input level judging* Indicate the test result.

2
Green indicator: The sound is inputted from the microphone property.

Gray indicator: The sound is inputted from the microphone improperly.
3 Microphone level
Indicate the input level of microphone by bar graph.
It is used for symptom troubleshooting. (Troubleshooting index No.8)
If inspect gyro sensor signals:

1. Select Navigation Check Menu.
2. Select Vehicle Sensors.
No. Display item

GYRO
Description
Indicate following gyro sensor signal.
Gyro sensor signal voltage

Relative bearing value
It is used for symptom troubleshooting. (Troubleshooting index No.5)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 SYSTEM DOES NOT LOAD MAP DISC. [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
System does not load map disc.

Moisture inside of car-navigation unit
Non-designate disc is installed
Map disc malfunction
NOTE:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
If dewdrops are formed inside of the car-navigation unit, the display screen
shows the The disc installed is not map DVD message. Remove the map disc,
ventilate or remove moisture from the passenger compartment, and then leave
it for approx. 1h. The dewdrops will be removed and the car-navigation unit
will operate normally.
In case of a dirty/damaged map disc or car-navigation unit malfunction, the
display screen will show the Please insert a map DVD message after the
ignition switch to turned to the ACC position.
If a non-designated disc inserted, the display screen shows the The disc
installed is not a map DVD message.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Eject the map disc.
Is the map okay?
Eject the map disc then insert the

map disc again.
ACTION
No Insert a designated disc, then go to the next
step.
Does the system load the map

disc?
Eject the map disc and clean the

surface of map disc with a soft
cloth.
Insert the map disc again.

Does the MAP DVD-Read Error.
error message show up on the
screen?
No Replace the car-navigation unit and map disc

at the same time. (consult distributor)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.8 SPEECH RECOGNITION DOES NOT START [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Speech recognition does not start.

Microphone malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between microphone and carnavigation unit.
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

position.
Start the car-navigation.
No Go to Step 4.
Display the map screen.

Press the voice recognition/handsfree switch (at audio control switch).
Is the speech recognition icon
displayed on the screen upper left?
2

Microphone Check screen.
Speak greatly toward a microphone.
Inspect the Microphone input level
judging.

CAUTION:
Sound may not be
recognized by the
influence of the
following.
Speakers
utterance
method
Is a judging OK (green display)?
Road
noise
Other
noises
No Replace the microphone, then go to the
next step.
3
Does the fault phenomenon

improve?

No Go to Step 6.
Inspect the display of Microphone

in vehicle signal screen.
Is it display OK?
5
Turn on the audio function (RADIO

or CD).
Press the voice recognition/handsfree switch (at audio control switch).
Does it mute?

No Audio control switch related part
malfunction.
Go to the audio system troubleshooting.

position.
Remove the microphone.
No Securely connect the microphone connector.
Inspect the connection of the

microphone connector (6-pin).
7
Disconnect the microphone connector

(6-pin).
Inspect both microphone connector

and wiring harness-side connector
for poor connection (such as
damaged/pulled out pins, corrosion).
No
If the microphone
connector is wrong:
unit.
(See MICROPHONE
wrong:
Remove the car-navigation unit.


connector.
Inspect the connection of the carnavigation unit connector (6-pin).

9

connector (6-pin).

connector for poor connection (such
as damaged/pulled out pins,
corrosion).
No
unit connector is
wrong:
unit.
wrong:
10
Inspect the following wiring harness

between the microphone and HF/TEL
unit.
Terminal A (6-pin,
MIC+) Terminal B
(24-pin, MIC IN+)
YesRepair or replace suspected wiring harness.

Terminal B (6-pin,
MIC-) Terminal D
(24-pin, MIC IN-)
Terminal C (6-pin,
MIC +B) Terminal
U (24-pin, MIC +B)
Terminal D (6-pin,
GND) Terminal F
(24-pin,
MIC_SHIELD)
Terminal E (6-pin,
MIC SENSE)
Terminal J (24-pin,
MIC SENSE)
Is there open or short circuit?
11

between the HF/TEL unit and carnavigation unit.
Terminal A (24-pin,
MIC OUT+)
Terminal 3A (6-pin,
MIC+)
Terminal C (24-pin,
MIC OUT-)
Terminal 3B (6-pin,
MIC-)
Terminal U (24-pin,
MIC +B) Terminal
3C (6-pin, MIC +B)
Terminal E (24-pin,
MIC OUT SHIELD)
Terminal 3D (6pin, GND)

(See MICROPHONE
Terminal J (24-pin,
MIC SENSE)
Terminal 3E (6-pin,
MIC SENSE)
12
Does the fault phenomenon

improve?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
No.
1
Malfunction symptom
(See NO.1 CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT START OPERATION (DISPLAY CHANGES TO BACK.) [CAR-NAVIGATION
SYSTEM].)
2 (See NO.2 SYSTEM DOES NOT CONTROL AUDIO BY AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH. [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
3 (See NO.3 SYSTEM DOES NOT LOAD MAP DISC. [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
4 (See NO.4 NO SOUND FROM AUDIO SYSTEM [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
5 (See NO.5 VEHICLE POSITION DEVIATES FROM THE ROUTE MAP [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
6 (See NO.6 NO VOICE NAVIGATION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
NO.7 DISPLAY SCREEN DOES NOT CHANGE TO THE NIGHT MODE (FRONT AND REAR COMBINATION LIGHTS
7 (See
OPERATE NORMALLY.) [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
8 (See NO.8 SPEECH RECOGNITION DOES NOT START [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
Quick diagnostic chart
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.7 DISPLAY SCREEN DOES NOT CHANGE TO THE NIGHT MODE (FRONT AND
REAR COMBINATION LIGHTS OPERATE NORMALLY.) [CAR-NAVIGATION
SYSTEM]
Display screen does not change to the night mode. (Front and rear combination lights
operate normally.)
Improper setting of car-navigation map indication
Poor connection of the car-navigation unit connector, terminal damage
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in TNS signal wiring harness (TNS signal related)
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION

position.
Does the display screen change to

the night mode when the light switch
is turned to the TNS position, and the
dimmer cancel switch is turned to
OFF?
Press the MENU switch.
Select Navigation Set Up.

Select User Setting.
Inspect MAP Mode.
Is the MAP mode set to Auto?
No System is normal.
Set the MAP Mode to Auto.



Turn the light switch to TNS position.

Inspect the TNS on the diagnosis
check screen.
Dose the TNS indicate ON?

4

position.

connector (24-pin).
No
Inspect both the car-navigation unit

terminal 1E for poor connection (such
corrosion).
unit connector is
wrong:
unit.
wrong:
Car-navigation unit connector (24pin) disconnected.

Measure the voltage of car-navigation
unit harness-side connector (24-pin)
terminal 1E (TNS signal).
Is voltage B+ when the light switch
is turned to the TNS position?
YesReplace the car-navigation unit, then go to

the next step.
No Inspect the TNS signal circuit.
Does system work properly?

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT START OPERATION (DISPLAY
CHANGES TO BACK.) [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Car-navigation system does not start operation. (Display screen changes to

black.)
Melt or damaged power supply (B+, ACC) related fuse.
Open or short circuit in car-navigation unit (power supply (B+)) wiring
harness
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in car-navigation unit (power supply (ACC)) wiring

harness
Open or short circuit in car-navigation unit (GND) wiring harness
STEP
INSPECTION

to the ACC position.
YesGo to Step 6.
Does the car-navigation

system start and display
map on screen?
Inspect following fuses.

ROOM
15 A
ACC 7.5
ACTION
No If the fuse is melted, inspect the wiring harness for

short to ground. Repair or replace the wiring harness,
then replace the fuse.
Replace with the appropriate standard fuse.
A
Are fuses normal?
3
Inspect the connection of

the car-navigation unit
connectors (24-pin).
Are the car-navigation
unit connectors
connected securely?
Disconnect the carnavigation unit

connectors (24-pin).
Map screen is displayed.

No Securely connect the car-navigation unit.

No
If the car-navigation unit

connector is wrong:
If the wiring harness-side
connector is wrong:
Repair or replace the pins and/or the
connector.

to the ACC position.
Measure the following

car-navigation unit
connector (24-pin)
terminals.
No Repair or replace malfunctioning wiring harness.
Terminal
1B
(+B):
B+
Terminal
1R
(ACC):
B+
Terminal
1W
(GND):
below
1.0V
Are voltages normally?

6

to the ON position.
Does the car-navigation

system start and display
map on screen?

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 SYSTEM DOES NOT CONTROL AUDIO BY AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH. [CARNAVIGATION SYSTEM]
System does not control Audio by Audio control switch.

Open or short circuit in wiring harness between and car-navigation
unit.
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Audio control switch malfunction.

STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION

position.
Start audio system using the audio

control switch.
Control the audio using the audio

control switch.
Is the audio system controlled
normally?
2
Inspect the connection of the carnavigation unit connectors (24-pin).
Is the car-navigation unit connector

connected securely?

connector.

connector (24-pin).

connector terminals 1N and 1P for
poor connection (such as
No
unit connector is
wrong:
unit.

wrong:
Car-navigation unit connector (24pin) disconnected.

terminal 1N and 1P at car-navigation
unit harness-side connector (24-pin)
while the audio control switch (Voice
recognition/hands-free switch, Mode
switch, Volume adjustment switch or
mute switch, Automatic band selector
switch) is selected.
No
Inspect and repair the

following:
Audio control switch.
(See AUDIO CONTROL
SWITCH INSPECTION).
Wiring harness between
car-navigation unit and
audio control switch for
open or short circuit).
Is the resistance within the specified?

Specification
50 ohms 5 kiloohms (Resistance
is changing
according to audio
switch pressed
position.)
5
Verify that the continuity between

terminal 1N and 1P (24-pin) at carnavigation unit harness-side
connector while the audio control
switch (HF/TEL) is pressed.
YesTroubleshooting completed. (The system is

normal.)
No
Inspect and repair the following:

audio control switch
(See AUDIO CONTROL
SWITCH INSPECTION).
Wiring harness between
car-navigation unit and
audio control switch for

open or short circuit).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.4 NO SOUND FROM AUDIO SYSTEM [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
No sound from audio system

Open circuit in wiring harness between car-navigation unit and audio
amplifier
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and each

speaker/tweeter
Speaker or tweeter malfunction
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
Turn the Ignition switch to ACC

position.
Start audio system using the audio

control switch
Adjust volume 30 using the audio

control switch.
Is there sound from all
speaker/tweeter?

position.
Inspect the connection of audio

amplifier connector.
No Securely connect the audio amplifier.

3

connector.
Inspect both audio amplifier

corrosion).
No
If the audio amplifier

connector is wrong:
Replace the audio
amplifier.

wrong:
4
No Securely connect the car-navigation unit.

connector (24-pin).

corrosion).
No
unit connector is
wrong:
unit.
wrong:
Car-navigation unit and audio

amplifier connectors disconnected.

between the car-navigation unit (24pin) and audio amplifier.
Terminal 1A (24-pin)
audio amplifier
terminal 3D (FL+)
Terminal 1C (24-pin)
audio amplifier
terminal 3C (FL-)
Terminal 1D (24-pin)
audio amplifier
terminal 3F (FR+)
Terminal 1F (24-pin)
audio amplifier
terminal 3E (FR-)
Terminal 1S (24-pin)
audio amplifier
terminal 3H (RL+)
Terminal 1U (24-pin)
audio amplifier
terminal 3G (RL-)
Terminal 1V (24-pin)
audio amplifier
terminal 3J (RR+)
Terminal 1X (24-pin)
audio amplifier
terminal 3I (RR+)
7
Disconnect the all speaker and

tweeter connectors.
Inspect both each speaker/tweeter

damaged/pulled out pins, corrosion.)
No
If the speaker or
tweeter connector is
wrong:
Replace the suspect part.
(See FRONT DOOR
SPEAKER
(See REAR SPEAKER

wrong:
8
Audio amplifier and all speaker and

tweeter connectors disconnected.

between the audio amplifier and each
speaker/tweeter.
Terminal 2D front
door speaker (leftside) terminal B (2pin) (FL+)
Terminal 2B front
door speaker (leftside) terminal A (2pin) (FL-)
Terminal 2I front
door tweeter (leftside) terminal B (2pin) (FL+)
Terminal 2K front
door tweeter (leftside) terminal A (2pin) (FL-)
Terminal 2M front
door speaker (rightside) terminal B (2pin) (FR+)
Terminal 2O front
door speaker (right side) terminal A (2pin) (FR-)
Terminal 2E front
door tweeter (right side) terminal B (2pin) (FR+)
Terminal 2G front
door tweeter (right side) terminal A (2pin) (FR-)
Terminal 3D rear
speaker/tweeter
(left-side) terminal B
(2-pin) (RL+)
Terminal 3L rear
speaker/tweeter
(left-side) terminal A
(2-pin) (RL-)
Terminal 3F rear
speaker/tweeter
(right-side) terminal
B (2-pin) (RR+)
Terminal 3E rear
speaker/tweeter
(right-side) terminal
A (2-pin) (RR-)
Terminal 3H
center speaker
terminal B (2-pin)
(IP CENTER+)
Terminal 3G
center speaker
terminal A (2-pin)
(IP CENTER-)
9
Inspect each speaker/tweeter.

INSPECTION.)
(See REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION).
Are all speakers normal?

No Replace the malfunctioning
speaker/tweeter.
(See REAR SPEAKER
10

Does the sound from audio system?
(Audio amplifier malfunction.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.6 NO VOICE NAVIGATION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
No voice navigation.
Improper adjustment of the navigation voice volume
Poor connection of front door speaker connector, terminal damage
Front door speaker malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between car-navigation unit and front
door speaker through audio amplifier.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
Is the voice navigation mute?
ACTION
YesTurn on the voice navigation.
Turn the audio power switch (CD,

radio) to ON.
YesGo to Step 6.
Does front door speaker work?

position.
Remove the front door speaker.
No Securely connect the front door speaker
connector.

4
Disconnect the front door speaker

connector (2-pin).
Inspect both the front door speaker

No
If the front door

speaker connector is
wrong:
Replace the front door
speaker.
(See FRONT DOOR

SPEAKER
wrong:
5
Inspect the front door speakers.

INSPECTION.)
No Replace the front door speaker.
Are they normal?


connector.

connector (24-pin).
Yes
Bose system
equipped model:
Inspect both the car-navigation unit

terminal for poor connection (such as
Go to Step 9.
Bose system not

equipped model:
No
unit connector is
wrong:

unit.
wrong:
8
Inspect the connection of audio

amplifier connector.
No Securely connect the audio amplifier

connector.

connector.
Inspect both the audio amplifier and

terminal 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, 3C, 3D, 3E,
and 3F for poor connection (such as
No
If the audio amplifier

connector is wrong:
Replace the audio
amplifier.
wrong:
10
Inspect there continuity between

following car-navigation unit and
audio amplifier at harness-side
connector.
Car-navigation unit
terminal 1A (24-pin,
Fr SP LH+) and
audio amplifier
terminal 3D (FL IN
+)
Car-navigation unit
terminal 1C (24-pin,
YesInspect for short circuit in wiring harness.

If there is a short circuit,
suspect wiring harness.
If the wiring harness is
okay, go to Step 12.
No Repair or replace wiring harness.
Fr SP LH-) and audio

amplifier terminal 3C
(FL IN -)
Car-navigation unit
terminal 1D (24-pin,
Fr SP RH+) and
audio amplifier
terminal 3F (FR IN
+)
Car-navigation unit
terminal 1F (24-pin,
Fr SP RH-) and
audio amplifier
terminal 3E (FR IN -)
11
Inspect there continuity between

following audio amplifier and front
door speaker at harness-side
connector.
Audio amplifier
terminal 2D (FRONT
DOOR L SP +) and
left-side front door
speaker terminal B
(+)

If there is a short circuit,
suspect wiring harness.
If the wiring harness is
okay, go to the next step.
No Repair or replace wiring harness.
Audio amplifier
terminal 2B (FRONT
DOOR L SP -) and
left-side front door
speaker terminal A ()
Audio amplifier
terminal 2O (FRONT
DOOR R SP +) and
right-side front door
speaker terminal B
(+)
Audio amplifier
terminal 2M (FRONT
DOOR R SP -) and
right-side front door
speaker terminal A ()
12

Does the voice navigation operation
properly?

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
No. TROUBLESHOOTING
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
1 The security light

display is not normal.
The security light does not flash or the flashing interval is

abnormal while the ignition switch is at the LOCK position.
The security light remains illuminated while the ignition switch
is at the LOCK position.
The security light does not illuminate when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position.
The security light remains illuminated 2 min or more after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

The security light display is not normal.

The security light does not flash or the flashing interval is abnormal while
the ignition switch is at the LOCK position.
The security light remains illuminated while the ignition switch is at the
LOCK position.
DESCRIPTION
The security light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
The security light remains illuminated 2 min or more after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position
Keyless control module malfunction (with advanced keyless control
system)
Keyless control module malfunction (without advanced keyless control
system)
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the instrument cluster
and keyless control module (without advanced keyless control
system)/keyless control module (with advanced keyless control system)
NOTE:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
If the security light remains illuminated for approx. 1 min after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position and then displays a DTC,
perform immobilizer system malfunction diagnosis according to that DTC.
(See DTC TABLE (IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM) [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM].)
While performing immobilizer system security access using the M-MDS, the
security light does not illuminate even if the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position. Verify the illumination condition of the security light by
disconnecting the DLC-2 to release security access.
NOTE:
Normal operation of the security light is as follows. The light starts flashing every 2 s when
the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC position and the immobilizer system is armed.
The light stops flashing when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the
correct ignition key. At this time, the immobilizer system is disarmed and the security light
illuminates for about 3 s and then goes out.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION

position.
Do other warning lights in the

instrument cluster illuminate
normally?

position.

connector (24-pin).


Does the security light illuminate?
3
Ground instrument cluster terminal 2F

using a jumper wire.



connector.
Connect the keyless control module
(without advanced keyless control
system)/keyless control module (with
advanced keyless control system)
connector.
YesReplace the keyless control module

(without advanced keyless control
system)/keyless control module (with
advanced keyless control system).

position.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
No.
Items
Possible DTC
1 Hands free telephone system does not receive/transmit calls, 26:Er81, 26:Er82, 26:Er83, 26:Er84,
does not connect
26:Er85, 26:Er86
Device code 26/error code 81, 82, 83, 84,
85, 86
2 Callers voice volume too low, or noise interrupts call
26:Er81
3 Addressees voice volume too low, or noise interrupts call
26:Er81
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.1 HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE SYSTEM DOES NOT RECEIVE/TRANSMIT CALLS, DOES NOT
CONNECT [HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
Hands-free telephone system does not receive/transmit calls, does not connect
Possible 26:Er81, 26:Er82, 26:Er83, 26:Er84, 26:Er85, 26:Er86,

DTC
Device code 26/error code 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86
Problem in cellular phone
Cellular phone does not set up to HF/TEL system
Cellular phone does not operate (low battery voltage, power off)
Cellular phone is outside of the signal transmission area
Bluetooth does not operate
A cellular phone other than a Hands-free telephone system-enabled models is
used.
Malfunction in HF/TEL switch related parts
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the HF/TEL switch and audio
unit (without car-navigation system)
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the HF/TEL switch and carnavigation unit (with car-navigation system)
CAN communication error between the audio unit and HF/TEL unit (without carnavigation system)
CAN communication error between the car-navigation unit and HF/TEL unit (with
car-navigation system)
HF/TEL switch malfunction
Possible
cause
Poor connection in the connector

Malfunction in microphone related parts
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the microphone and HF/TEL
unit
Malfunction in audio system
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the HF/TEL unit and the
speaker through the audio unit/car-navigation unit

HF/TEL unit does not respond
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the HF/TEL unit and the audio
unit (without car-navigation system)
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the HF/TEL unit and the carnavigation unit (with car-navigation system)
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness of the HF/TEL unit power supply or
ground circuit
When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, slightly shake the wiring harness and
connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any
intermittent malfunction. If there is a problem, verify that the connectors, terminals and wiring harness are
connected correctly and undamaged.
STEP
INSPECTION
Verify if the customers cellular phone is a Hands-free telephone systemenabled model by referring to following URL.
http://www.mazdausa.com/MusaWeb/displayPage.action?
pageParameter=bluetoothHandsFreeSystem
ACTION
Is the customers cellular phone a Hands-free telephone system-enabled

model?
No Explain to the customer

that the customers cellular
phone is not a Hands-free
telephone system-enabled
model.
Verify that the cellular phone is communicating with the HF/TEL unit.
Does the cellular phone connect to the HF/TEL unit via Bluetooth when
the Hands-free telephone system is activated?
No Go to step 5.
Inspect the cellular phone condition while the hands free phone does not
operate.
Can the following conditions be verified?
Low battery voltage
Power is off
YesEnter a cellular phone

signal transmission area
and reinspect the HF/TEL
system operation.
Out of signal transmission area

4
Does the cellular phone set up to the HF/TEL unit?
YesSet up the cellular phone

to the HF/TEL unit.

5
Is the audio system sound output normal?

No Perform the audio system
Perform the audio system on-board diagnostic.

Are the following DTC displayed?
26:Er82

No Go to Step 6.
26:Er83
26:Er84
7*
Inspect for open or short circuits in the following wiring harnesses and
connectors, and inspect the connector connections.
Between microphone terminal A and HF/TEL unit terminal
B
Between microphone terminal B and HF/TEL unit terminal
D
YesReplace the microphone.

(See MICROPHONE
No Repair or replace
Between microphone terminal C and HF/TEL unit terminal

U
Between microphone terminal E and HF/TEL unit terminal
J
Are the harnesses and connector connections normal?
8

Is 26:Er81 displayed?
YesInspect and repair the

audio system CAN
communication.
Inspect the HF/TEL switch.

Is the HF/TEL switch normal?
(See AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION.)

No Replace the audio control
switch.
(See AUDIO CONTROL
SWITCH
10*
Between audio control switch terminal G and audio unit
(24-pin) terminal 1N (without car-navigation system)
Between audio control switch terminal G and carnavigation unit (24-pin) terminal 1N (with car-navigation
system)


11
Call the hands free cell phone using another cellular phone.
Do the same symptoms appear?
YesReplace the HF/TEL unit.

(See HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
UNIT
No The cellular phone
Bluetooth system is
malfunctioning.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.2 CALLER'S VOICE VOLUME TOO LOW, OR NOISE INTERRUPTS CALL [HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
Callers voice volume too low, or noise interrupts call

Problem in the cellular phone
Vehicle is in a place where signal transmission is weak
A cellular phone other than a Hands-free telephone system-enabled models is
used.
Malfunction in the microphone related parts
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the microphone and the
HF/TEL unit
Malfunction in the mute switch (without car-navigation system)
Mute switch malfunction
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the mute switch and the
audio unit
Possible
cause

Malfunction in the voice switch (with car-navigation system)
Voice switch malfunction
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the voice switch and the
audio unit
HF/TEL unit does not receive the vehicle speed signal
CAN communication error
Malfunction in the audio system
Audio steering switch (+) and/or related circuit malfunction
Influence due to vehicle driving conditions

Noise while driving is loud (engine, tire noise, blower fan noise)
Windows and/or sunroof are open
When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, slightly shake the wiring harness and
connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any
intermittent malfunction. If there is a problem, verify that the connectors, terminals and wiring harness are
connected correctly and undamaged.
STEP
INSPECTION
2*
ACTION

model?
No Explain to the customer

that the customers cellular
phone is not a Hands-free
telephone system-enabled
model.
Can the audio volume be controlled using audio control switch?

No Inspect and repair the
audio control switch and
Does the symptom appear under following conditions?

Windows and/or sunroof are open
Noise while driving is loud (engine, tire noise, blower fan
noise)


(Influence due to vehicle
driving conditions)
YesInspect and repair the
audio system CAN
communication.
5*
Between microphone terminal A and HF/TEL unit terminal
B
Between microphone terminal B and HF/TEL unit terminal
D

Between microphone terminal C and HF/TEL unit terminal

U
Between microphone terminal D and HF/TEL unit
terminal F (shield wire)
Between microphone terminal E and HF/TEL unit terminal
J
6
Inspect the following switches.

VOICE switch (with car-navigation system)
MUTE switch (without car-navigation system)
Are the switches normal?
7*
Between audio control switch terminal G and audio unit
(24-pin) terminal 1N (without car-navigation system)

No Replace the audio control
switch.
(See AUDIO CONTROL
SWITCH
Between audio control switch terminal G and carnavigation unit (24-pin) terminal 1N (with car-navigation
system)
8
Make a call with the cellular phone without using HF/TEL system.
Does the same symptom appear?
YesCellular phone related

problem.
Call the hands-free cell phone using another cellular phone.

10
Replace the microphone.

(See MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

No The cellular phone
Bluetooth system is
malfunctioning.
(See HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
UNIT
No Troubleshooting is
completed.
(The microphone is
malfunctioning.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

No.3 ADDRESSEE'S VOICE VOLUME TOO LOW, OR NOISE INTERRUPTS CALL [HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM]
Addressees voice volume too low, or noise interrupts call
Possible 26:Er81
DTC
Problem in the cellular phone
Vehicle is in a place where signal transmission is weak
A cellular phone other than a Hands-free telephone system-enabled models is used.
Malfunction in the audio system
Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the HF/TEL unit and the speaker
through the audio unit/car-navigation unit
Possible
cause
Audio control switch (+) and/or related circuit malfunction

HF/TEL unit does not receive the vehicle speed signal
CAN communication error
When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, slightly shake the wiring harness and connectors
while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any intermittent
malfunction. If there is a problem, verify that the connectors, terminals and wiring harness are connected
correctly and undamaged.
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
No Explain to the customer that
the customers cellular phone
is not a Hands-free telephone

system-enabled model.

model?
2
Verify the volume setting of the Hands-free telephone system.

Is the volume set at a low level or zero?
Yes
Verify if the
malfunction
symptom is
eliminated
after the
volume is set
to a higher
level.
If the
malfunction
is not
resolved, go
to the next
step.
If the
malfunction
is resolved,
explain to
the customer
that the
malfunction
occurred due
to an
inappropriate
volume
setting.

3
Is the audio system sound output normal?

No Perform the audio system
Can the audio volume be controlled using audio control switch?

No Inspect and repair the audio
control switch and related
wiring harness.

YesInspect and repair the audio

system CAN communication.
6*
Between HF/TEL unit (24-pin) terminal G and audio unit
(16-pin) terminal 2B
Between HF/TEL unit (16-pin) terminal H and audio unit
(24-pin) terminal 2J

Between HF/TEL unit (16-pin) terminal L and shield wire

7
Make a call with the cellular phone without using HF/TEL system.
YesCellular phone related

problem.
Call the hands-free cell phone using another cellular phone.


(See HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) UNIT
No The cellular phone Bluetooth
system is malfunctioning.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
No.
Page
See NO.1 DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY TRANSMITTER

1 Door cannot be
locked/unlocked by transmitter (CARD KEY) [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
(card key)
2 Blink keyless indicator light
See NO.2 BLINK KEYLESS INDICATOR LIGHT [ADVANCED KEYLESS

3 Advanced keyless entry

function inoperative
See NO.3 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION INOPERATIVE

[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
4 Advanced keyless start

function inoperative
See NO.4 ADVANCED KEYLESS START FUNCTION INOPERATIVE

[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.1 DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY TRANSMITTER (CARD KEY) [ADVANCED KEYLESS
Door cannot be locked/unlocked by transmitter (card key)

Malfunction in transmitter (card key) battery or transmitter (card key)
Malfunction in keyless control module
Malfunction in keyless receiver
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Wrong usage
The after-market electrical parts are interfering with the keyless entry system
Malfunction in door lock timer unit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module and door lock timer unit
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
Attempt to lock/unlock the door with the

transmitter (card key).
Does the operation indicator light (LED)

illuminate?
No Go to Step 7.
Did the customer activate the transmitter

(card key) within operative area (Within
2.5 m {8.2 ft} from area around
vehicle)?
No The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the system

does not work without the system operative area.
Did the customer use the keyless entry

system in particular area, such as being
near TV towers, power plants, power lines,
or factories?

Area of operation is subject.
Explain effect of outside interference on the transmitter (card key)
to the customer.
Did the customer activate the keyless

entry system with the key inserted into the
steering lock?
YesThe system is normal. Explain to the customer that the system

does not work with the key inserted into the steering lock.
Are any of the following after-market

electrical parts on the vehicle?
Cellular phone

No Go to Step 7.
Radio-wave equipment
Remote engine starter
TV
Other
6
Disconnect the after-market electrical

parts connectors and attempt to
lock/unlock the doors with the transmitter
(card key).
Does the keyless entry system work?
Is there repair record of the customer's

keyless entry system?
YesThe system is normal. The after-market electrical parts are

interfering with the keyless entry system.

No Go to Step 10.
Does the malfunction occur after the

repair?
No Go to Step 10.
9
Is the malfunction corrected when the ID

numbers for all the customer's transmitters
(card key) are updated?
START SYSTEM].)
10
Visually inspect the transmitter (card key)

battery for the following:
(See CARD KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
START SYSTEM].)
Battery insertion direction
(correct polarity)
Battery type (CR2025)
Corrosion, soiling,
deformation of battery
terminals (plus/minus
terminals)
YesSystem is normal. (Explain to the customer that the malfunction

occurred because all the transmitter (card key) ID numbers were
not updated even though the body control module or a
transmitter (card key) was replaced in the previous servicing.)
Yes
Battery insertion direction, battery type

problem:
Properly install the battery or replace the battery
with a specified one (CR2025), then go to the
next step.
Malfunction with the battery terminals:
Clean corrosion and soiling or repair the terminal,
No Go to the step 12.
Contact malfunction
between the battery
terminal and battery
when battery is inserted
11

properly?
12 NOTE:

Use a new monitor battery (normal
battery) or one from another vehicle which
operates normally.
No If the operation indicator light (LED) does not illuminate, replace

the transmitter, then go to the Step 27.
Replace the battery in all the transmitters

(card key) with a monitor-use battery
(normal battery).
(See CARD KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
START SYSTEM].)
For each transmitter (card key), verify that
the transmitter (card key) operation
indicator light (LED) illuminates when a
button is operated.
Does operation indicator light (LED) for
each transmitter (card key) operate?
13 NOTE:
Inspect for all transmitters (card key).
Inspect while the batteries for all of the
transmitters (card key) are replaced with
YesReplace the transmitter (card key) battery, and then go to Step

27.
(See CARD KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [WITH ADVANCED
monitor-use batteries (normal battery).

Verify the operation of keyless entry
system using all of the transmitters (card
key).

properly?
14
15
16
Inspect for the keyless receiver

installation.
Is the bracket securely installed on the

keyless receiver?
No Install the bracket securely, and then go to the next step.
Inspect the ground wire on the keyless

receiver bracket.
Is the ground wire tighten on the bracket?
No Tighten the ground wire, then go to the next step.

position.
Measure the voltage at keyless receiver

terminal A?
No
Is the voltage B+?
17
Inspect and repair the wiring harness between

the keyless control module and the keyless
receiver as necessary.
Then go to Step 27.
Measure the voltage at keyless receiver

terminal E?
Is the voltage 0 V?
No

the ground wire and the keyless receiver as
necessary.
Re-tighten the ground wire as necessary.
Then go to Step 27.
18
Disconnect the keyless receiver connector

(6-pin) and keyless control module
connector (52-pin).
Is there continuity between the following
terminals?

No

the keyless control module and the keyless
receiver, then go to Step 27.
Keyless receiver
connector terminal 3A
Keyless receiver
connector terminal 3C
Keyless receiver
connector terminal E
GND
19
Measure the signal wave pattern of

keyless control module terminal 3C using
an oscilloscope while the transmitter (card
key) is operated with the auxiliary key
removed from the ignition key cylinder.

No Replace the keyless receiver, and then go to Step 27.
Does the wave pattern change when the

transmitter (card key) is operated?
NOTE:
Perform the oscilloscope setting using 0.5
V/DIV (Y), 100 ms/DIV (X), DC range.
20
Measure the voltage at the keyless control

module terminals 2A, 2C and 2E.
Terminal 2C: IG1
voltage

No
Inspect for fuse.

the keyless control module and the fuse block as
necessary.
Terminal 2A: B+
Terminal 2E: ACC
voltage
Then go to Step 27.

21
Measure the voltage at keyless control

module terminal 2B?
Is the voltage 0 V?
No

the ground wire and the keyless control module
as necessary.
Then go to Step 27.
22

module terminals 3F.
Turn the keyless switch
ON: B+
Turn the keyless switch
OFF: 1.0 V or less
23
Disconnect keyless control module and

door lock timer unit.
module terminal 3Q and door lock timer
unit terminal 2P?

Inspect for key reminder switch.
the steering lock unit (key reminder switch) and
Then go to step 27.
If there is a short circuit, repair or replace suspected wiring
harness.
If the wiring harness is okay, go to the next step.
No Repair or replace wiring harness for open circuit, then go to Step
27.
24
Measure voltage at the door lock timer

unit terminal 1A, 2A and 2B.
Terminal 1A, 2A: B+
Terminal 2B: IG1
voltage
25
Measure the voltage at door lock timer

unit terminal 1E and 2W.

No Inspect for fuse.
Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the fuse block and
door lock timer unit as necessary.
Then go to Step 27.
Is the voltage 0 V?
No Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the ground wire
and the door lock timer unit as necessary.
Then go to Step 27.
26
Measure the voltage at the door lock timer

unit terminals 1C, 1D and 1F while
operating the transmitter.
Terminal 1D: 1.0 V or
lessB+1.0 V or less
(Normal lock)
Terminal 1C: 1.0 V or
lessB+1.0 V or less
(Normal unlock)
Terminal 1F: 1.0 V or
lessB+1.0 V or less
(2 stage unlock)
YesReplace the door lock timer unit, then go to the next step.
No
Inspect the door lock timer unit connector.

the door lock timer unit and door lock actuator.
If the harness is normal, go to
the next step.
If the harness is malfunctioning,
repair the wiring harness.

27

properly?
YesTroubleshooting completed. Explain repairs to the customers

No Re-inspect the malfunction symptoms, then repeat form Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.2 BLINK KEYLESS INDICATOR LIGHT [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
Blink keyless indicator light
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Low transmitter (card key) battery voltage.
STEP
INSPECTION
Close all doors.
Turn the ignition switch from ON to off.

Does the keyless indicator light flash
(green)?
ACTION
Yes Replace wit new transmitter (card key)
battery.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.3 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
Advanced keyless entry function inoperative

Malfunction in the transmitter (card key).
Malfunction in the keyless control module.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Malfunction in the keyless receiver.

Malfunction in the keyless antenna.
Wrong usage.
STEP
1
INSPECTION
ACTION
Retrieve the advanced keyless system DTC using

the M-MDS.
YesPerform the applicable DTC diagnostic procedures.
Did the customer attempt to operate each front

doors and trunk lid using the request switch?

No Inspect the advanced keyless system operations using the
request switch. If the advanced keyless system is
inoperative, then go to the next step.
Prepare the followings:

Make sure that there is no
transmitter (card key) inside the
passenger compartment.
YesThe system is normal. Explain the advanced keyless

system operation.
Close all doors including trunk

lid.
Remove the key from the
steering lock.
Make sure that start knob is to
the LOCK position. (Do not
Press the knob)
Make sure that the transmitter
(card key) is within the
advanced keyless system
operative area (within 80 cm
{2.6 ft} from front door)
Does the advanced keyless system operate
properly?
4
Does the operation indicator light (LED) on the

transmitter (card key) illuminate when any
operation using the transmitter (card key) is
performed?

No Perform the procedure for symptom troubleshooting NO.1
[DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY
TRANSMITTER (CARD KEY) [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
START SYSTEM]
(See NO.1 DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY
TRANSMITTER (CARD KEY) [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND START SYSTEM].)

module terminals 3I, 3K and 3M while operating
the request switch.
Operate drivers side front door
request switch (3I): 5.0 V1.0
V or less

No Inspect and repair the applicable wiring harness as
necessary, then go to Step 9.
Operate passengers side front

door request switch (3K): 5.0
V1.0 V or less
Operate trunk lid request switch
(3M): 5.0 V1.0 V or less
6

Disconnect the keyless receiver connector and
keyless control module connector.
Inspect the wiring harness between the following
terminals for an open or short circuit.
Keyless receiver connector
terminal Akeyless control
module connector terminal 3A
terminal Ckeyless control
module connector terminal 3C
terminal EGND

No Repair or replace the wiring harness between the keyless
receiver connector and keyless control module connector,

7
Measure the signal wave pattern for keyless

control module terminal 3C using an oscilloscope
when any of the request switches and the trunk
lid opener switch are operated.

No Replace the keyless receiver, and then go to next step.
Does the wave pattern change when the request

switch is operated?
NOTE:
Perform the oscilloscope setting
using 0.5 V/DIV (Y), 100
ms/DIV (X), DC range.
8

control module terminal 3Q using an oscilloscope
when any of the request switches are operated.
Does the wave pattern change when the request
switch is operated?
NOTE:
Perform the oscilloscope setting
using 0.5 V/DIV (Y), 100
ms/DIV (X), DC range.
Does the keyless entry system operate properly?
YesInspect and repair the wiring harness between the door

lock timer unit and the keyless control module, then go to
the next step.
No Inspect the keyless control module. If the keyless control
module is malfunctioning, replace the module.
YesTroubleshooting completed. Explain repairs to the

customers
No Re-inspect the malfunction symptoms, then repeat form
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NO.4 ADVANCED KEYLESS START FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
Advanced keyless start function inoperative

Malfunction in the transmitter (card key).
Malfunction in the keyless control module.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Malfunction in the keyless receiver.

Malfunction in the keyless antenna.
Malfunction in the PCM.
STEP
INSPECTION
Retrieve the advanced keyless system DTC

using the M-MDS.
YesPerform the applicable DTC diagnostic procedures.
Attempt to start the engine using the key.
Does engine start?
ACTION
No Go to symptom troubleshooting flow No.3 in 01-03 section.
Bring the transmitter (card key) inside the

passenger compartment.

module terminal 3E (push switch) while
pushing the start knob.
No
Is the voltage B+?
Inspect the wiring harness between the

steering lock unit and keyless control.
If the harness is normal,
replace the steering lock unit.
If the harness is
malfunctioning, repair the
wiring harness.
Then go to Step 9.
4
Does the operation indicator light (LED) on

the transmitter (card key) illuminate when
any operation using the transmitter (card
key) is performed?

No Perform the procedure for symptom troubleshooting NO.1
DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY TRANSMITTER
(CARD KEY) [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
(See NO.1 DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY
TRANSMITTER (CARD KEY) [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM].)

position.
No Repair or replace the wiring harness between the keyless

receiver connector and keyless control module connector, then
Disconnect the keyless receiver connector

and keyless control module connector.
following terminals for an open or short
circuit.
terminal Akeyless control
module connector terminal
3A
terminal Ckeyless control
module connector terminal
3C
terminal EGND
6

control module terminal 3C when the start
knob is pressed.
Does the signal wave pattern change when
the start knob is pressed?

No Replace the keyless receiver, and then go to next step.
NOTE:
Perform the oscilloscope
setting using 0.5 V/DIV (Y),
100 ms/DIV (X), DC range.
7
Does the keyless indicator light turn ON

when pressing the start knob?
YesGo to Step 9.

control module terminal 3H when the start
knob is pressed.

No
Does the signal wave pattern change when

the start knob is pressed?
steering lock unit and the keyless control

module.
NOTE:
If the harness is normal,

replace the keyless control
module.
Perform the oscilloscope

setting using 0.5 V/DIV (Y),
100 ms/DIV (X), DC range.
If the harness is
malfunctioning, repair the
wiring harness.
Start the engine using start knob.

Does advanced engine start function
operate properly?
YesTroubleshooting completed. Explain repairs to the customers

No Re-inspect the malfunction symptoms, then repeat form Step 1
if malfunction recurs.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FOREWORD [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
The advanced keyless system is controlled by the keyless control module.
All locks includes the trunk lid.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the fuel-filler lid.

4. Adjust the fuel-filler lid. (See FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the gap and height difference between the fuel-filler lid and the body.
2. Loosen the fuel-filler lid installation bolts, and adjust the fuel-filler lid.
Standard clearance
a: 1.73.7 mm {0.070.14 in}
b: 0.51.5 mm {0.010.05 in}
c: 1.01.0 mm {0.030.03 in}
d: 1.83.8 mm {0.080.14 in}
e: 1.73.7 mm {0.070.14 in}
f: 0.81.2 mm {0.030.04 in}
3. Tighten the bolts. (See FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Fastener A
2Seal plate
3Screw A
4Screw B
5Fastener B
6Fastener C
7Bolt
8Front bumper
(SeeFront Bumper Removal Note.)
(SeeFront Bumper Installation Note.)
3. Disconnect the front fog light connector. (Vehicles with the front fog light) (See FRONT FOG
LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the headlight cleaner hose (Vehicles with the headlight cleaner) (See HEADLIGHT
CLEANER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Adjust the front fog light aiming for vehicles with the front fog lights. (See FRONT FOG LIGHT
AIMING.)
Front Bumper Removal Note

1. Pull the front bumper ends (wheel arch) outward to detach from the bumper slider.
CAUTION:
When detaching the front bumper from the bumper slider, the front bumper
could fall and be damaged. Secure the front bumper so that it does not fall.
2. Remove the front bumper from the body.
Front Bumper Installation Note

1. Spread the front bumper ends apart.
2. Attach the front bumper to the body.
3. Press the front bumper connecting area into the body to engage with the bumper slider.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Small Type
1. To disassemble the front bumper, remove the following parts:
a. Front fog lights (Vehicles with the front fog lights) (See FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Headlight cleaner hose (Vehicles with the headlight cleaner) (See HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Headlight cleaner nozzles (Vehicles with the headlight cleaner) (See HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE REMOVAL.)
(SeeHEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE INSTALLATION.)
d. Headlight cleaner actuator (Vehicles with the headlight cleaner) (See HEADLIGHT CLEANER ACTUATOR
1 Screw A
2 Front fog light hole cover (Vehicles without front fog lights)
3 Front fog light cover (Vehicles with front fog lights)
4 Screw B
6 Screw C
7 Front fog light (Vehicles with front fog lights)
8 Screw D
9 Front fog light hole cover
10Connector cover (Vehicles without front fog lights)
11Screw E
12Front fog light hole cover (Vehicles without oil cooler)
13Fastener
14Bolt A
15Set plate (RH)
16Set plate (LH)
17Front bumper retainer
18Screw F
19Bolt B
21Screw G
22Screw H
23Clip nut A
24Airdam skirt
25Clip nut B
26Front bumper mesh
27Bolt C
28Screw I
29License plate holder
30Nut
31Mascot
32Front bumper fascia
Large Type
1. To disassemble the front bumper, remove the following parts:
a. Front fog lights (Vehicles with the front fog lights) (See FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Headlight cleaner hose (Vehicles with the headlight cleaner) (See HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Headlight cleaner nozzles (Vehicles with the headlight cleaner) (See HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE REMOVAL.)
(SeeHEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE INSTALLATION.)
d. Headlight cleaner actuator (Vehicles with the headlight cleaner) (See HEADLIGHT CLEANER ACTUATOR
1 Screw A
2 Front fog light hole cover (Vehicles without front fog lights)
4 Screw B
6 Screw C
7 Front fog light (Vehicles with front fog lights)
8 Screw D
9 Front fog light hole cover
10Connector cover (Vehicles without front fog lights)
11Fastener
12Bolt A
13Set plate (RH)
14Set plate (LH)
16Screw E
17Bolt B
19Rivet A
21Bolt C
22Rivet B
23Airdam skirt
24Screw F
25Screw G
26Clip nut A
27Airdam skirt
28Clip nut B
29Front bumper mesh
30Bolt D
31Screw H
32License plate holder
33Nut
34Mascot
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove fasteners A, then remove the energy-absorbing foam.
3. Remove fasteners B, then remove front bumper retainer No.2.

4. Remove the bolts, then remove the front bumper reinforcement.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4. Remove the rear combination lights. (See REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
5. Remove the rear splash shield. (See SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Screw A
2Screw B
3Screw C
4Fastener A
5Fastener B
6Screw D
7License plate light
(See LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8Request switch connector (Vehicles with the advanced keyless system) (See REQUEST SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM] .)
9Rear bumper
(SeeRear Bumper Removal Note.)
(SeeRear bumper Installation Note.)
7. Pull the rear bumper guard outward, detach tabs A, B,C,and then remove the rear bumper
guard.
Rear Bumper Removal Note

1. Pull the rear bumper ends (wheel arch) outward to detach from the bumper slider.
CAUTION:
When detaching the rear bumper from the bumper slider, the rear bumper
could fall and be damaged. Secure the rear bumper so that it does not fall.
Rear bumper Installation Note

1. Spread the rear bumper ends (wheel arches) apart.
2. Attach the rear bumper to the body.
3. Press the rear bumper connecting area into the body to engage with the bumper slider.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1 Rear bumper guard (See REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

2 Screw A
3 Screw B
4 Screw C
5 Screw D
6 Rear bumper step
7 Rear bumper bracket
8 Towing hook cover
9 Screw E
10Rear bumper stay
11Rear reflector
(SeeReflector Removal Note.)
12License plate light
13Request switch (Vehicles with the advanced keyless system)
(See REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
14Rear bumper fascia
Reflector Removal Note

1. Pull off the reflector from the rear bumper in the direction shown by the arrow.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
a. Trunk end trim (See TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Trunk side trim (See TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Rear combination lights (See REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
d. Rear splash shield (See SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Rear bumper (See REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the fasteners, then remove the energy-absorbing foam.
3. Remove the nuts, then remove the rear bumper reinforcement.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the front side turn light. (See FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the front combination lights. (See FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
5. Remove the side step molding. (See SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL.) (See SIDE STEP
MOLDING INSTALLATION.)
6. Set the front mudguard out of way. (See FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Fastener
2Bolt A
3Bolt B
4Bolt C
5Bolt D
6Front fender panel
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Removing the hood without proper support can be dangerous. The hood may fall and
injure you. Always perform the following procedure with at least another person.
2. To remove the hood hinge, remove the following parts:
a. Front side marker lights (See FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT
b. Front bumper (See FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Front combination lights (See FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
d. Side step molding (See SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL.) (See SIDE STEP
e. Front fender panel (See FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Hood insulator
2Shroud seal weatherstrip
3Hood
4Hood hinge
5Hood stay

5. Adjust the front combination light aiming. (See HEADLIGHT AIMING.)
6. Adjust the front fog light aiming. (See FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)
7. Adjust the hood. (See HOOD ADJUSTMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HOOD ADJUSTMENT
Gap Adjustment
a. Front bumper (See FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Front combination lights (See FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
c. Side step molding (See SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL.) (See SIDE STEP
d. Front fender panel (See FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Loosen the hood hinge installation bolts and adjust the hood.
4. Tighten the bolts. (see HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

5. Verify that the gap between the hood and the body is within the specification.
Standard clearance
a: 3.56.5 mm {0.140.25 in}
b: 3.06.0 mm {0.120.23 in}
c: 2.54.5 mm {0.100.17 in}
Height Difference Adjustment

1. Turn the stop rubber to adjust the height of the hood.
2. Verify that the height difference between the hood and the body is within the specification.
Standard clearance
a: 1.81.2 mm {0.070.04 in}
b: 1.01.0 mm {0.030.03 in}
c: 1.51.5 mm {0.050.05 in}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Removing the stay damper without supporting the trunk lid can be dangerous. The trunk
lid may fall and injure you. Be sure to open the trunk lid completely and support it securely
before removing the stay damper.
2. Disconnect the trunk lid wiring harness connector, then take the trunk lid harness out from
the vehicle.
3. Remove the clips that secure the trunk lid wiring harness.
4. Pry off the stay damper band using a flathead screwdriver.
5. Pry out the connecting part of the stay damper and the hinge with a flathead screwdriver to
disconnect them, then remove the stay damper.
6. Remove nuts A, then remove the trunk lid.
7. Remove nuts B, then remove the trunk lid hinge.

9. Adjust the trunk lid. (See TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the gap and height difference between the trunk lid and the body.
2. Loosen the trunk lid hinge installation nuts or the trunk lid lock striker installation screws, and
adjust the trunk lid.
Standard clearance
a: 2.54.5 mm {0.100.17 in}

b: 1.01.0 mm {0.030.03 in}
c: 3.56.5 mm {0.140.25 in}
d: 4.28.2 mm {0.170.32 in}
e: 4.08.0 mm {0.160.31 in}
3. Tighten the nuts or screws. (see TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL
NOTE:
The gas in the stay damper is colorless, odorless, and non-toxic.
1. Wear protective eye wear.
2. Lay the stay damper flat.
3. Saw 23 mm {0.080.11 in} into the stay damper using a hacksaw, and allow the gas to
escape from the stay damper.
4. Verify that the gas has escaped from the stay damper.
5. Discard the stay damper.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BODY PANELS LOCATION INDEX
Hood
1(See HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See HOOD ADJUSTMENT.)
Front bumper reinforcement

(See FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Front bumper
3 (See FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
Front fender panel

(See FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Fuel-filler lid
5 (See FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT.)
Trunk lid
6 (See TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT.)
Rear bumper reinforcement

(See REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Rear bumper
(See REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. To remove the checker, remove the following parts:
a. Inner garnish (See INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Front door trim (See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Front door speaker (See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. To remove the front door hinge, remove the following parts:
a. Front bumper (See FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Front fender panel (See FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Connector
(See Connector Removal Note.)
2Bolt A
3Bolt B
4Front door
5Nut
6Checker
7Bolt C
8Front door hinge

6. Adjust the front door. (See DOOR ADJUSTMENT.)
Connector Removal Note

1. Pull the rubber boot outward.
2. Pull down the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow and disconnect the connector.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the seat belt rail. (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. To remove the checker, remove the following parts:
a. Rear door lower trim (See REAR DOOR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. To remove the rear door hinge, remove the following parts:
a. Rear seat cushion (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Tire house trim (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Connector
2Bolt A
3Bolt B
4Rear door
5Bolt C
6Checker
7Nut
8Rear door hinge

8. Adjust the rear door. (See DOOR ADJUSTMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOOR ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the gap and height difference between the front or rear door and the body.
2. Loosen the door hinge installation bolts or the door lock striker installation screws, and adjust
the door.
Standard clearance
a: 3.05.0 mm {0.120.20 in}
b: -1.01.0 mm {-0.030.04 in}
3. Tighten the bolts or screws.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DOOR UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
c. Front door glass (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Front door speaker (See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector.
4. Remove the front door wiring harness from the front door unit.
5. Remove screw A.
6. Remove screws B and the fastener.

7. Remove the front door unit.
Front power window motor

Front power window regulator
Front door speaker amplifier
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOORS LOCATION INDEX
1Front door
(See FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See DOOR ADJUSTMENT.)
2Rear door
(See REAR DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR DOOR ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY.)
(See DOOR ADJUSTMENT.)
3Front door unit
(See FRONT DOOR UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DOOR ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY
1Rear door release handle

2Rear door upper latch
3Front seat belt retractor
4Rear door lower latch
5Rear door glass
6Bracket
7Catch pin
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS LOCATION INDEX
1 Power outer mirror

(SeePOWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(SeePOWER OUTER MIRROR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
(SeePOWER OUTER MIRROR INSPECTION.)
2 Windshield
(SeeWINDSHIELD REMOVAL.)
(SeeWINDSHIELD INSTALLATION.)
3 Rearview mirror
(SeeREARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4 Base
(SeeBASE REMOVAL.)
(SeeBASE INSTALLATION.)
5 Power window regulator
(SeePOWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6 Power window motor
(SeePOWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(SeePOWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION.)
7 Power outer mirror switch
(SeePOWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(SeePOWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION.)
8 Power window main switch
(SeePOWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(SeePOWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION.)
9 Front door glass
(SeeFRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
10Rear door glass
(SeeREAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11Power window subswitch
(SeePOWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(SeePOWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION.)
12Rear window glass
(SeeREAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL.)
(SeeREAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION.)
(SeeFILAMENT INSPECTION.)
(SeeFILAMENT REPAIR)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Position the front door glass so that the distance between the top of the front door glass and
top of the front beltline molding is 140 mm {5.51 in}.

3. Remove the inner garnish. (See INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the front door trim. (See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the front door speaker. (See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the hole cover.
CAUTION:
If you remove the bolt without supporting the front door glass, the front door
glass may fall off and get damaged. Be sure to hold the front door glass by
inserting your hand into the mounting hole for the front door speaker when
removing the bolt.
8. Lift the front door glass up, then remove it while tilting it in the direction of the arrow.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Pull up the rear door weatherstrip and remove the screw.

5. Remove the rear door glass.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION
Driver Side
1. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to power window motor terminals E
and F, and then inspect the power window motor operation.
If the power window motor does not operate an indicated in the table, replace
it.
Terminal
Operation
F
Open
Ground
B+
Close
B+
Ground
2. Connect the battery positive voltage to power window motor terminal D and connect terminal
C to ground.
3. Operate the power window motor and measure the voltage at terminals A and B.
If there is any malfunction, replace the power window motor.

Voltage
Pulse: max. 5 V/min. 0 V
Passenger Side
1. Apply battery positive voltage to the power window motor terminals, and inspect the power
window motor operation.
If the power window motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace
it.
Terminal
Operation
F
Open
Ground
B+
Close
B+
Ground
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FILAMENT INSPECTION
2. Turn the rear window defroster switch on.
CAUTION:
Directly touching the rear window defroster filament with the lead of the
voltmeter could damage it. Wrap aluminum foil around the end of the lead and
test the filament by touching it with the foil.
3. Connect the positive lead of the tester to the positive side of each filament and the negative
lead to ground.
4. Gradually slide the positive lead from the positive side to the negative side and verify that the
voltage decreases accordingly.
If the voltage changes rapidly, the filament has a malfunction. Repair the
filament.
Measured part Voltage (Reference)

(1) to (2)
Approx. 12 V to 0 V
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FILAMENT REPAIR
1. Clean the filament using isopropyl alcohol.
2. Attach tape to both sides of the filament.
3. Using a small brush or marking pen, apply silver paint.

4. After 23 min , carefully remove the tape without damaging the applied area.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the rear window defroster until the paint is completely dry. It
may be cause other malfunctions if it is used before paint is dry.
5. Dry the repaired part using the following procedure.
When the room temperature is 25 C {77 F}, leave as it is for 24 h.
When a hot air blower is used, dry with the temperature of 150 C {302 F}
for 30 min.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD REMOVAL
a. Windshield wiper arm and blade (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
b. Cowl grille (See COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Rearview mirror (See REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. A-pillar trim (See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Sunvisor (See SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Map light (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Set the headliner out of the way.
3. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body.
4. Apply protective tape to the dashboard to protect it from damage.
5. Cut the windshield molding lip using a razor.
WARNING:
Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using
a razor.
NOTE:
The windshield molding is a replacement part.
Not Reusing Windshield

NOTE:
For the areas of the sealant that are difficult to cut, use the piano wire and follow the
procedure under Reusing Windshield.
1. Remove the base. (See BASE REMOVAL.)
2. Cut out the sealant all around the glass using a sealant remover.
3. Remove the sealant by pulling it off.

4. Remove the windshield.
Reusing Windshield
NOTE:
Before removing the windshield from the body, mark the position of the windshield by
affixing tape to the windshield and body panel.
1. Make a hole through the sealant from the inside of the vehicle using an awl, avoiding the
pins.
2. Pass the piano wire, cut to sufficient length, through the hole.
WARNING:
Using the piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves
when using the piano wire.
3. Wind each end of the piano wire around a bar.
NOTE:
Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of the piano
wire to prevent it from breaking due to localized heating.
4. Fix one end of the piano wire, and while pulling the other end, cut the sealant around the
windshield.
NOTE:
As the upper part of the pin adheres to the sealant, cut it using the piano wire.
5. Cut the pins out.
6. Remove the windshield.

7. Mark the seating positions of the pins and remove the pins from the windshield.
8. Remove the windshield molding from the windshield.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor.
CAUTION:
Proper installation of the windshield may be difficult if sealant is cracked or the glass is pushed out by air pressure when a door is
opened/closed with all the window glass closed.Leave all the windows open until the windshield is installed completely.
1. Cut away the old sealant using a razor so that a 12 mm {0.040.07 in} thickness of sealant remains along the perimeter of the
frame.
2. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer after degreasing, and allow it to dry for approx. 30
min.Then apply a 2 mm {0.08 in} thickness of sealant.
3. Clean and degrease an approx. 50 mm {2.0 in} wide strip along the perimeter of the windshield and the bonding area on the
body.
4. If installing a reused windshield, perform the following procedure:
a. Attach the pins to the seating positions where marked during removal.
b. Install the windshield molding.
5. Use only glass primer on the glass, and body primer on the body and the molding, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
CAUTION:
Keep the area free of dirt, water and grease, and do not touch the surface. Otherwise, the primer may not properly
bond to the surface of the glass and body, causing leaks to occur.
6. Apply sealant to the glass surface as shown in the figure.
7. Insert the positioning pins to the body, then install the windshield.
8. Press the windshield pins to engage the tabs to the body.
9. Press completely along the perimeter of the glass so that the measurement of the molding lip gap is within specification.
10. Install the following parts:

a. Map light (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Sunvisor (See SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. A-pillar trim (See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Rearview mirror (See REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Cowl grille (See COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Windshield wiper arm and blade (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11. Allow the sealant to harden completely. Sealant hardening time: 24 h
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL
a. Rear seat (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Inner scuff plate (See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Rear package trim (See REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the nut.
3. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna and the filament connectors.

4. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body.
5. Cut the rear window molding lip using a razor.
Not Reusing Rear Window Glass

NOTE:
For the areas of the sealant that are difficult to cut, use the piano wire and follow the
procedure under Reusing Rear Window Glass.
1. Cut out the sealant all around the glass using a sealant remover.
2. Remove the sealant by pulling it off.

3. Remove the rear window glass.
Reusing Rear Window Glass

NOTE:
Before removing the rear window glass from the body, mark the position of the glass by
affixing tape to the glass and body panel.
1. Make a hole through the sealant from the inside of the vehicle using an awl, avoiding the
pins.
2. Pass the piano wire, cut to sufficient length, through the hole.
WARNING:
3. Wind each end of the piano wire around a bar.
NOTE:
wire to prevent it from breaking due to localized heating.
4. Fix one end of the piano wire, and while pulling the other end, cut the sealant around the
rear window glass.
NOTE:
As the upper part of the pin adheres to the sealant, cut it using the piano wire.
5. Cut the pins out.
6. Remove the rear window glass.

7. Mark the seating positions of the pins and remove the pins from the rear window glass.
8. Remove the rear window molding from the rear window glass.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Opening and closing a door with all the windows fully closed changes the air pressure inside the vehicle, which might cause cracks
in the sealant and prevent the normal installation of rear window glasses. Be sure to keep the door windows open until the
installation work of rear window glasses is over.
1. Cut away the old sealant using a razor so that a 12 mm {0.040.07 in} thickness of sealant remains along the perimeter of the
frame.
WARNING:
2. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer after degreasing, and allow it to dry for approx. 30
min.Then apply a 2 mm {0.08 in} thickness of sealant.
3. Clean and degrease the perimeter approx. 50 mm {2.0 in} from the glass end and and the bonding area on the body.
4. If installing a reused rear window glass, perform the following procedure:
a. Clean and degrease the rear window molding installation area of the rear window glass.
b. Apply the glass primer to the rear window molding installation area of the rear window glass.
c. Remove the remaining double-sided adhesive tape from the rear window molding, and install the rear window molding
(upper) to the rear window glass while aligning the molding with the center of the marking on the glass.
NOTE:
Double-sided adhesive tape has been affixed to the new rear window molding.
d. Install the rear window molding (lower).
e. Apply the glass primer to the inside of the rear window molding at the joint between the upper and lower parts.
f. Affix the tape to the inside of the rear window molding at the joint.
g. Install the dam by aligning its end with the center of the marking on the glass as shown in the figure.
h. Attach the pins to the seating positions where marked during removal.
5. Place a mark at the point on the rear window glass indicated in the figure.
6. Use only glass primer on the rear window glass, and body primer on the rear window molding as shown in the figure. Allow it to dry
for approx. 30 min.
CAUTION:
Keep the area free of dirt, water and grease, and do not touch the surface. Otherwise, the primer may not properly
bond to the surface of the glass and body, causing leaks to occur.
7. Apply sealant to the glass surface as shown in the figure.
8. Position the marking on the rear window glass and the curved line of the body (roof molding) left and right so that they are aligned.
9. Insert the pin into the body (1), and lower the rear part (2).
NOTE:
If the rear window glass is tilted while inserting the pin into the body, the sealant will rub against the body flange,
causing damage to the sealant.Do not tilt the rear window glass to the left or right while working.
10. Press the pins and engage the tabs to the body.
11. Press the rear window glass at (a) shown in the figure from the rear of the vehicle so that the measurement of the rear window
molding lip gap is within specification.
CAUTION:
If any sealant adheres to the AM/FM antenna and/or filament, be sure to wipe it off.
12. Install the nut.
13. Connect the AM/FM antenna and the filament connectors.

a. Rear package trim (See REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Rear pillar trim (See REAR PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Rear seat (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
15. Allow the sealant to harden completely. Sealant hardening time: 24 h
16. Apply soapy water to the rear window molding side and blow air from the interior, then verify that there are no bubbles or air
leakage.
If there are any bubbles or air leakage, repair the damaged part of the sealant and verify it again.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Using a flathead screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, pry up the rear of the switch
panel and detach the clip .
3. Remove the switch panel from the front door trim keeping the tab from catching.
4. Disconnect the power window main switch connector and the power mirror switch connector.
5. Remove the screws, then remove the power window main switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION
Driver's side
1. Measure the voltage at each terminal (except terminals K and M).
If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts
under Inspection item (s) and related wiring harnesses.
3. Inspect the power window main switch connector for continuity at terminals K and M.
4. If the system does not work normally even though the inspection items or related wiring
harnesses do not have any malfunction,replace the power window main switch.
Terminal Signal Connected

name
to
Power
Close
window
output
Measured condition
While door glass is opening
Voltage
(V)/Continuity
Inspection item (s)
1.0 or less
Power window motor
motor
While door glass is closing

Ignition switch at
ON
Power
Power window
cut
subswitch
Power cut switch at

off
B+
0.25
Ignition switch at ACC or LOCK
1.0 or lass
Power cut switch at on
1.0 or less
Power Power
supply window
motor
Power P/W 30 A Under any condition

supply fuse
Related
wiring
harness
Power
window
subswitch
B+
Power window motor
B+
P/W 30 A fuse
Because this terminal is for

communication, good/no good
judgment by terminal voltage is not
possible.
H
Power
Serial window
1
sub switch

power window main switch terminal H
and power window subswitch
terminal B for the following:
Short to ground
Open circuit
K
GND Body
ground
Under any condition:Inspect for

continuity to ground
Continuity
detected
GND
Power
GND window
motor
Under any condition:Inspect for

continuity to ground
Continuity
detected
Power window motor
Ignition
relay
IG2
Pulse Power
window
B+
Ignition relay
1.0 or less
Door glass moving
Approx. 6
Power window motor
motor
Pulse Power
window
2
motor
Open Power
output window
motor
Door glass stopped
0 or B+
Door glass moving
Approx. 6
Power window motor
Door glass stopped
1.0 or less
B+
Power window motor

1.0 or less

judgment by terminal voltage is not
possible.
Vehicles without advanced
keyless system
power window main switch terminal R
and keyless control module terminal
2T for the following:
R
Keyless
Perial control
2
module
Short to ground
Open circuit
Vehicles with advanced keyless
system
power window main switch terminal R
and keyless control module terminal
2P for the following:
Short to ground
Open circuit
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON position, and verify the LED illuminates.
If there is any malfunction, replace the power window main switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
panel and detach the clip.
4. Disconnect the power window subswitch connector.
5. Remove the screws, then remove the power window subswitch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION
1. Measure the voltage at each terminal is as indicated in the Terminal Voltage Tables.
If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under
Inspection item (s).
If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related
wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the power
window sub switch.
Terminal Voltage Table(Reference)
Terminal Signal Connected

name
to
Power
Open
output window
motor
GND Body
ground
Measured condition
Voltage
(V)/Continuity
Inspection item (s)
1.0 or less
Power window motor

Under any condition:Inspect for continuity
to ground
B+
Continuity
detected

good/no good judgment by terminal voltage
is not possible.
GND
Power
window
Serial main
switch
Inspect the wiring harness between power

window subswitch terminal C and power
window main switch terminal H for the
following:
Power window main

switch
Short to ground
Open circuit
Power
GND window
motor
Power
Pulse
window
1
motor
Pulse Power
window
2
motor
Power Power
supply window
motor
Under any condition:Inspect for continuity

to ground
Continuity
detected
Door glass moving
Approx. 6
Power window motor
Door glass stopped
0 or B+
Door glass moving
Approx. 6
Power window motor
Door glass stopped
Power
Close
output window
motor
Power P/W 30 A
supply fuse
0 or B+
Power
Power window
main
cut
switch
Power window motor
Power cut switch at off
B+
0.25
1.0 or less
Power cut switch at on
1.0 or less
Door glass moving
Approx. 6
Power window motor
Related
wiring
harness
Power
window
subswitch
Power window motor

Door glass stopped
1.0 or les
Under any condition
B+
P/W 30 A fuse
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON position, and verify the LED illuminates.
If not as specified, replace the power window subswitch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Disengage clips using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver.
4. Disconnect the power window main switch connector and power outer mirror switch
connector.
5. Remove the screws and the power outer mirror switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Inspect for continuity between the power outer mirror switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
If not as specified, replace the power outer mirror switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4. Disconnect the power outer mirror connector.
5. Remove the screws.

6. Push the power outer mirror against the vehicle and detach the tab while lifting the mirror up
to remove.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER OUTER MIRROR INSPECTION
1. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the corresponding power outer
mirror terminals, and then inspect the operation of the power outer mirror.
If not as specified, replace the power outer mirror.
Terminal
Operation
B+ GND
Up
Down
Left
Right
2. Inspect for continuity between the power outer mirror heater terminals.
If not as specified, replace the power outer mirror.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Auto-dimming Mirror
2. Remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the auto-dimming mirror connector.

4. Remove the screw.
5. Remove the rearview mirror.
Normal Type
1. Pull the rearview mirror in the direction indicated by the arrow.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BASE REMOVAL
1. Remove the rearview mirror.
2. Wind each end of a wire around a bar.
WARNING:
NOTE:
wire to prevent it from breaking.
3. Saw through the sealant to remove the base.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BASE INSTALLATION
1. Cut away all of the original sealant using a razor.
2. Clean and degrease the ceramic coating on the glass and the base.
3. Apply primer to the bonding area of the glass and the base.
CAUTION:
Keep the area free of dirt and grease, and do not touch the surface. Otherwise,
the primer may not properly bond to the surface of the glass.
4. Apply a 3.0 mm {0.12 in} layer of sealant to the base.
NOTE:
Use only glass primer on the glass, and body primer on the base. Allow the
primer to dry for approx. 30 min.
5. Center the base in the ceramic coating and press it onto the glass.
6. Use isopropyl alcohol to remove any excess repair sealant. Hardening time of sealant
Temperature Surface hardening timeTime required until vehicle can be put into service
5 C {41 F}
Approx. 1.5 h
Approx. 12 h
20 C {68 F}
Approx. 1 h
Approx. 4 h
35 C {95 F}
Approx. 10 min.
Approx. 2 h
7. Install the rearview mirror.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TWO-STEP DOWN FUNCTION OPERATIVE/NON-OPERATIVE SWITCHING
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
By following the procedure below, the two-step down function is switched to non-operative
when it is operative, and to operative when it is non-operative.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOOR GLASS POSITION CHANGE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After performing the following procedure, verify that the two-step down function operates normally
and the door glass position has changed. If the two-step down function does not operate or the
door glass position has not changed, the procedure was not performed properly. Repeat the
procedure from the beginning.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5. Remove the power window motor from the power window regulator drum.
6. Disconnect the power window motor connector.
NOTE:
When installing the power window motor to the power window regulator drum,
the drum housing tab may come off the door unit.If this happens, remove the
door speaker, insert your hand in the speaker installation hole, connect the
drum housing tabs, and while supporting the drum housing, install the power
window motor to the drum.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER OUTER MIRROR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1Outer mirror glass

(See Outer Mirror Glass Disassembly Note)
(See Outer Mirror Glass Assembly Note)
2Connector (vehicles with heated outer mirrors)
Outer Mirror Glass Disassembly Note

1. Press area A of the mirror glass so that area B moves outward.
2. Detach pin A while lifting up the inside of the mirror glass holder.
3. Pull out the mirror glass holder and detach pins B.

4. Remove the mirror glass holder and the mirror glass as a single unit.
Outer Mirror Glass Assembly Note

1. Press area A of the mirror glass into the base to attach pin A.
2. Press areas B of the mirror glass into the base to attach pins B.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER WINDOW INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Initial setting must be performed for the switch of each window drive-side and passengerside.
If the following operations have been performed, initial setting is reset, and auto up/down
and two-step down operation are disabled. Therefore, performing initial setting is
necessary.
Negative battery cable disconnected or power window system power
supply fuse removed. (perform initial setting for the switches of all seats.)
Power window switch connector disconnected. (Perform initial setting for
the switch connected with the connector.)
Prolonged open/close operation of the power window main or sub
switches causes the circuit breaker to activate and automatic operation is
disabled.
2. Press the switch of each window and fully open the door glass.
3. Pull the switch of each window to the manual-up position to fully close the door glass, and
keep holding the switch up at the position for approx. 2 s.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
c. Front door speaker (See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Front door glass (See FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Power window motor (See POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the nuts.
4. Insert hand through the front speaker installation hole, rotate the drum housing in the
direction shown in the figure and remove the drum housing from the door unit connection tabs.
5. Remove the power window regulator from the speaker installation hole.

CAUTION:
Make sure the cable does not unspool from the drum housing when installing.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR INSPECTION
1. Measure the voltage at each terminal (other than terminal F).
If the voltage is not as specified in the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference),
inspect the parts under Inspection item(s) and related wiring harnesses.
3. Inspect the auto-dimming mirror connector for continuity at terminal F.
4. If the system does not work properly even though the inspection items or related wiring
harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the auto-dimming mirror.
Terminal Signal
name
Connected to
Power
supply Ignition switch
Measured condition
Voltage
(V)/Continuity
B+
R range
B+
Inspection item(s)
Related
wiring
harnesses
Back-up
light
R range Back-up light

signal switch/TR switch
GND
Body ground
switch/TR
switch
Other than R range
1.0 or less
Under any condition: Inspect

for continuity to ground.
Continuity
detected
Power
supply ROOM 15 A fuse Under any condition
Related
wiring
harnesses
GND
ROOM 15
A fuse
B+
< Previous Next >
Related
wiring
harnesses
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SEATS LOCATION INDEX
Front seat
(See FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2 Lumbar support motor

(See LUMBAR SUPPORT MOTOR INSPECTION.)
3 Seat warmer unit
(See SEAT WARMER UNIT INSPECTION.)
4 Slide motor
(See SLIDE MOTOR INSPECTION.)
5 Rear tilt motor
(See REAR TILT MOTOR INSPECTION.)
6 Front tilt motor
(See FRONT TILT MOTOR INSPECTION.)
7 Front seat cushion trim
(See FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8 Walk-in switch
(See WALK-IN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See WALK-IN SWITCH INSPECTION.)
9 Recliner motor
(See RECLINER MOTOR INSPECTION.)
10Front seat side cover
(See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11Power seat switch
(See POWER SEAT SWITCH INSPECTION.)
12Position memory control module
(See POSITION MEMORY CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
13Rear seat back
(See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
14Rear seat cushion
(See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag) improperly can accidentally operate
(deploy) the air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before
handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag). (See AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS.)
CAUTION:
After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever. If the slider lever is operated,
the left and right slide positions will deviate, and the slide adjuster may be damaged after
the front seat is installed.
Verify that there are no malfunctions in the sliding mechanism after installing a front seat.
When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the
procedure on a clean rag so as not to damage or soil the seat.
NOTE:
Reclining the front seat rest forward makes it easier to get the front seat in and out of the
vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more.
3. Using a fastener remover, widen the cover in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to
release the tabs, then raise the cover in the direction of arrow (2).
4. Using a fastener remover, widen the cover in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure to
release the tabs, then pull the cover in the direction of arrow (4).
5. Pull the cover in the direction of arrow (5), widen the cover in the direction of arrow (6)
shown in the figure to release the tabs.
6. Disconnect the connector.
7. Remove the bolts, then remove the front seat.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the hooks in the A area and lift up the rear seat cushion.
2. Pull out the rear seat cushion from the rear seat back.
3. Remove the rear seat belt.
5. Lift up the rear seat back to remove the hooks in the B area from the grommet.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1Rings C
2Seat cushion trim
3Seat cushion pad
4Seat cushion frame
5Screw
6Belt guide
7Seat back trim
8Seat back pad
9Seat back frame
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT TILT MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Connect battery positive voltage to front tilt motor terminal B or D, then verify that the front
tilt motor operate as shown in the table.
If the front tilt motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace the
front tilt motor.
Connection
Motor operation
B+ GND
Up
Down
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR TILT MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Connect battery positive voltage to rear tilt motor terminal B or D, then verify that the rear
tilt motor operate as shown in the table.
If the rear tilt motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace the rear
tilt motor.
Connection
Motor operation
B+ GND
Up
Down
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SLIDE MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Connect battery positive voltage to slide motor terminal B or D, then verify that the slide
motor operate as shown in the table.
If the slide motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace the slide
motor.
Connection
Motor operation
B+ GND
Forward
Backward
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

RECLINER MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Connect battery positive voltage to recliner motor terminal A or E, then verify that the recliner
motor operate as shown in the table.
If the recliner motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace the
recliner motor.
Connection
Motor operation
B+ GND
Forward
Backward
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER SEAT SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the power seat switch connector.
2. Verify that the continuity between the power seat switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the power seat switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SEAT WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the shift lever knob (MT). (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
4. Remove the upper panel. (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Squeeze the tabs of seat warmer switch and pull it outward to remove it.
6. Remove the seat warmer switch.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SEAT WARMER SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Verify that the continuity between the seat warmer switch terminals is as indicated in the
table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the seat warmer switch.
2. Connect the battery terminal to the G terminal of the seat heater switch and connect the
ground (earth terminal) to the A terminal. Then make sure the indicators illuminate normally.
If malfunction, replace the seat warmer switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SEAT WARMER UNIT INSPECTION
Seat Cushion
2. Remove the front seat side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the seat cushion trim. (See FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the continuity between the seat warmer unit connector terminals on the wiring harness and seat back is as indicated in
the table while warming the thermostat for the seat warmer unit on the upper part of the seat cushion using a hot air blower.
5. Measure the temperature of the thermostat by using a thermometer.
Replace the seat heater unit if conduction cannot be confirmed as indicated by the diagram. (See FRONT SEAT
CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Seat Back
2. Remove the seat back trim. (See FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the continuity between terminals A and B is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the seat back pad.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LUMBAR SUPPORT MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Connect battery positive voltage to lumbar support motor terminal A or B, then verify that the
lumbar support motor operate as shown in the table.
If the lumbar support motor does not operate as indicated in the table, replace
the lumbar support motor.
Connection
Motor operation
B+ GND
Forward
Backward
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POSITION MEMORY CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Operate the power seat switch and move the seat cushion forward and upward.
4. Remove the driver-side front seat. (See FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the connector.

7. Remove the position memory control module.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POSITION MEMORY SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the position memory switch connector.
2. Inspect for continuity between the position memory switch connector terminals.
If not as specified, replace the position memory switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4. Remove the side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Detach hook A by sliding it in the order of (1), (2), and (3) as shown in the figure.
6. Detach hook B and C in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
7. Remove the seat cushion trim and the seat cushion pad from the seat frame as a single unit.
8. Remove rings C in the order of (4), (5), (6), (7) and (8) as shown in the figure, then remove
the seat cushion trim from the seat cushion pad in the direction of the arrow shown in the
figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Handling a front seat improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may
seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before handling a front seat. (See AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)
CAUTION:
Removal
4. Remove the walk-in switch. (Vehicles with power seat) (See WALK-IN SWITCH
5. Pull the bezel in the order of (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure to remove the hooks A.
6. Remove the bezel.

7. Slide hook B in the order of (4), (5), (6) shown in the figure to detach it from hook C.
8. Open the fastener.
9. Remove the nut D.

10. Press in the holder bracket E to the seat back pad being careful not to catch the frame
spring.
11. Pull out part A shown in the figure to the front.
12. Remove the seat back trim and the seat back pad as a single unit from the seat frame by
pulling them in the direction of the arrow.
14. Partially peal back the seat back trim from the seat back pad, remove rings C in the order of
(7), (8), (9) shown in the figure, then remove the seat back trim.
Installation
1. Install the seat back trim to the front seat back pad, install the rings C in the order of (1), (2),
(3) shown in the figure, then install the seat back trim.
2. Install the cover.
3. Install the seat back trim and the seat back pad as a single unit from the seat frame by
pushing them in the direction of the arrow.
4. Pass holder bracket E through slit F of the seat back pad.
CAUTION:
Set the holder bracket E with the sleeve not caught in the seat frame spring.
5. Push the part B shown in the figure to the rear.
6. Pass holder bracket G through slit H of the seat back pad.
CAUTION:
Install it without twisting the sleeve.
7. Assemble the holder bracket E, G to the frame in the order of (4), (5) shown in the figure.
8. Install the nut I.

9. Shut the fastener.
10. Slide hook B in the order of (6), (7), (8) shown in the figure to install it to hook C
11. Push the bezel and install the hooks A.
12. Install the bezel.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Vehicles With Power Seat System

2. Pull the power seat switch knobs in the direction of arrow, while remove the hook.
3. Pull the side cover in the order of (1), (2), (3), (4), (5) shown in the figure to disengage the hook and tab.
4. Remove the screw F.

5. Pull the side cover in the order of (6), (7), (8) shown in the figure to disengage the hook G, tab H and I.
6. Remove the front seat side cover.

Vehicles Without Power Seat System

1. Operate the outer lift lever in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure. (Driver's seat)
2. Insert a fastener remover from the position of arrow (2) shown in the figure, and remove the outer lift lever cover by
disengaging the tab. (Driver's seat)
3. Open the tab in the directions of the arrows (3) and (4) to pull out the inner rift lever cover in the direction of the arrow
(5) as shown in the diagram.
4. Perform removal operation following the procedure below.

Standard Type
After operating the recliner knob in the upward direction (6), cut the area indicated in the figure, then
remove the recliner knob in the direction of arrow (7).
CAUTION:
The seat back folds forward when the recliner knob is operated. Be careful when
operating the recliner knob.
Remove the screw A.
Pull the side cover in the order of (8), (9), (10), (11) shown in the figure to disengage the hook B, tab C
and D.
Remove the screw E.

Pull the side cover in the order of (12), (13) shown in the figure to disengage the tab F and hook G.
Sports Type
Uninstall the recliner dial in the direction of the arrow (1).
Pull the side cover in the order of (2), (3), (4) shown in the figure to disengage the hook B and tab C.
Remove the screw D.

Pull the side cover in the order of (5), (6) shown in the figure to disengage the tab E and hook F.
5. Remove the front seat side cover.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT [VEHICLES WITHOUT POWER SEAT SYSTEM]
WARNING:
WARNINGS.)
CAUTION:
Removal
4. Remove the front seat side cover. (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Cut the band A securing the harness.
6. Remove the clip B.

7. Slide hook C in the order of (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure to detach it from hook D.
8. Cut the band E securing the side air bag wiring harness.
9. Cut the band F securing the side air bag wiring harness.
10. Remove the bolts G, then remove the front seat back component.
Installation
1. Install the bolts G, then install the front seat back component.
2. Install the band F, while tighten the side air bag wiring harness.
NOTE:
Install the band with the end pointed to the Bottom.
3. Install the band E, while tighten the side air bag wiring harness.
NOTE:
Install the band with the end pointed to the Bottom.
4. Cut off the end of the band at the position shown in the figure.
5. Slide hook C in the order of (4), (5), (6) shown in the figure to install it to hook D.
6. Install the clip B.
7. Install the band A, while tighten the harness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
WARNINGS)
CAUTION:
the M-MDS. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR CALIBRATION)
Replacement with new passenger-side seat par
the M-MDS. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INSPECTION)
Loosening and retightening of passenger-side seat fixing bolts
b. Front seat side cover (See FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Position memory control module (Vehicles with power seat system) (See POSITION
MEMORY CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Front seat back component (See FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT [VEHICLES
WITHOUT POWER SEAT SYSTEM] REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .)
5. Remove the front seat slide adjuster.

7. Perform the weight sensor initialization procedure. (See SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
CALIBRATION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WALK-IN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the front seat back trim. (See FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

6. Remove the walk-in switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WALK-IN SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Connect battery positive voltage to recliner motor terminal A or B, then verify that the walk-in
switch operate as shown in the table.
If the walk in switch does not operate as indicated in the table, replace the
recliner motor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
e. Front door unit (See FRONT DOOR UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the cover, then remove the bolt.
3. Pull out the protector tab from the latch and remove the protector.
4. Detach the front door key cylinder rod.

5. Remove the front outer handle. (See FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Turn the front door key cylinder so that the tab is aligned with the notch.
7. Remove the front door key cylinder by pulling it out from the front door.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Disconnect the coil antenna connector.
4. Detach the steering lock tab from hole on the coil antenna.
5. Detach the coil antenna tab from the steering lock and remove the coil antenna.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM]
Foreword
When replacing immobilizer system-related parts or programming an additional key, program the
immobilizer system-related parts so that the system operates normally. For immobilizer systemrelated parts programming, select the programming procedures according to the service. (See
Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming.)
CAUTION:
If any metallic or magnetic object is near the key, communication between the key and the
vehicle may be obstructed, resulting in a failure to program the immobilizer system-related parts.
Remove any metallic or magnetic objects, such as key holders, from the key when programming
immobilizer system-related parts.
If any of the following devices are inside the vehicle, programming of immobilizer system-related
parts may fail. Do not bring any of the following devices or similar products inside the vehicle
when programming immobilizer system-related parts.
M-MDS
Personal computer
Devices that can send/receive radio waves
If the engine is started during immobilizer system-related parts programming, the programming
mode cancels. Therefore, do not start the engine unless indicated in the procedure. Repeat the
procedure from the beginning if the engine is started during the immobilizer system-related parts
programming.
NOTE:
The Valid key referred to in this manual indicates the key that can start the engine.
Two or more key ID numbers must be programmed for the engine to start.
A maximum of eight key ID numbers can be programmed for one vehicle.
The number of programmed key ID numbers can be verified using the M-MDS.
Do not select any screen menu other than the ones indicated in the procedure during M-MDS
operation.
Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming
1. Verify that the room fuse is equipped.

2. Select the applicable programming procedure from the service content of the immobilizer systemrelated parts.
Immobilizer System-Related Parts Service and Programming Procedure Table
No.
Service
1
Additional key
programming
2
Additional key
3 programming
procedure setting
Programming procedure
Have two or more (See No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid
valid keys
Keys).)
Have one valid
key or none
(See No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the MMDS).)
Disable
programming
using valid keys
(See No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing.)
Enable
programming
using valid keys
4 Programming due to PCM replacement
(See No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement.)
5 Programming due to keyless control

module replacement
(See No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Keyless Control Module

Replacement.)
Programming due to simultaneous

replacement of immobilizer systemrelated parts
PCM
(See No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement

of Immobilizer System-related Parts (PCM and Keyless Control
Module).)

7 Programming due to coil antenna
replacement
Programming of immobilizer system-related parts is not necessary
M-MDS Connecting Procedure

NOTE:
Do not place the M-MDS in the vehicle while programming the immobilizer system.
1. Fully lower the door glass.
3. Place the M-MDS outside the vehicle.

CAUTION:
Cover the vehicle body with a clean rag so as not to damage the vehicle body with the
cable.
No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys)

Conditions
Have two or more valid keys.
NOTE:
If a key ID number cannot be programmed and DTC 15 is displayed, the maximum number of
programmed keys may have been reached. Verify the number of programmed keys using the MMDS.
If eight keys have already been programmed and it is necessary to program other keys, the
previously programmed key ID numbers must first be cleared.
If Customer spare key programming disable is selected, perform additional key programming
using the M-MDS. (See No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS).)
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
Action after
procedure
LAUNCH PROGRAMMING MODE

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using key 1.
After verifying that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and turns off,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position within approx. 4 s using key 1.
Remove key 1.
Go to the
next step.
After verifying that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and turns off,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position within approx. 4 s using key 2.
Remove key 2.
2
PERFORM ADDITIONAL KEY PROGRAMMING

Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off.
Remove key 3.
Are there other keys to be programmed?
Go back
Yes to Step
1.
Go to the
No next
step.
VERIFY KEY PROGRAMMING IS CORRECT

Verify that the engine can start and run for approx. 5 s or more using all the
programmed keys.
NOTE:
Procedure is
completed
When verifying that the engine starts, wait at least approx. 5 s or more
before starting the engine using the next key.
No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS)

Conditions
There is only one valid key, or none.
NOTE:
If a key ID number cannot be programmed and DTC 15 is displayed, the maximum number of
programmed keys may have been reached. Verify the number of programmed keys using the MMDS.
If eight keys have already been programmed and it is necessary to program other keys, the
previously programmed key ID numbers must first be cleared.
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
Action after procedure
Change the key and repeat Step 1.
NOTE:
(See M-MDS Connecting Procedure)

using key 1.
Yes
Additional key
programming can be
performed using the
NOTE:
Although the security light
starts flashing and DTC 15 is
displayed after approx. 1
min, this does not indicate an
improper procedure. Continue
to perform the procedure as
indicated.
procedure in No.1
Additional Key
Programming Procedure
(Using Two Valid Keys).
After vehicle identification, select the following

from the M-MDS initial screen.
Using an IDS (laptop PC)
Select the
Body
Select the
Security
Select the
PATS
function
Select the
Program
Additional
Ignition Key
Using a PDS (Pocket PC):
Select the
All Tests
and
Calibrations
Select the
PATS
Functions
Select the
Program
Additional
Ignition Key
Perform the security access according to the
NOTE:
After executing the above
menu, This operation is
successful is displayed. This
indicates that the
programming of the key
currently in the ignition switch
ON position has been
completed.
After verifying that the PATS function menu is

displayed again on the M-MDS screen, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position.
Remove key 1.
2
CLOSE THE M-MDS

After verifying that the PATS function menu is
displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select
Finish (this menu).

3
VERIFY KEY PROGRAMMING IS CORRECT

Verify that the engine can be started with the programmed
key.
NOTE:
Procedure is completed
When verifying that the engine starts, wait at
least approx. 5 s or more before starting the
engine using the next key.
No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing

NOTE:
This procedure is performed for disabling the No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using
Two Valid Keys).
The setting is Customer spare key programming enable when the vehicle is new or the keyless
control module is replaced with a new one.
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
CHANGE CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
(See M-MDS Connecting Procedure.)
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using a key (The key can be either the
valid key or an unprogrammed key).
Action
after
procedure
NOTE:
If an unprogrammed key is used, the security light starts flashing
and DTC 15 is displayed after approx. 1 min. However, this
does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform the
procedure as indicated.
After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS initial screen.
Select the Body
Select the Security
Select the PATS function
Select the All Tests and Calibrations
Select the PATS Functions
Select either of the following from the M-MDS menu to change the additional key
programming procedure.
When Customer Spare Key Programming Enable is selected: The
additional key programming procedure using valid keys is
enabled.
When Customer Spare Key Programming Disable is selected:
The additional key programming procedure using valid keys is
disabled.
Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.
After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS
screen, select Finish (this menu).
No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement

Conditions
Procedure
Procedure
is
completed
Step
1
Procedure
REPLACE PCM
Refer to PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform PCM replacement.

2
PERFORM PARAMETER RESET

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using a valid
key.
NOTE:
Although the security light remains
illuminated and DTC 23 is displayed after
approx. 1 min, continue to perform the
Verify that the keyless warning light illuminates for
approx. 3 s, and then turns off.
After vehicle identification, select the following from the MMDS initial screen.
Using an IDS (laptop PC):
Select the Body
Select the Security
Select the PATS
function
Select the Parameter
Reset
Using a PDS (pocket PC):
Select the All Tests and
Calibrations
Select the PATS
Functions
Reset
Perform the security access according to the directions on
the M-MDS screen.
Select the replaced parts PCM according to the directions
on the M-MDS screen.
CAUTION:
At this time, do not select the other parts
from the M-MDS menu.
After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed
again on the M-MDS screen, select Finish (this menu).
Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s,
and then turns off.
3
VERIFY PROGRAMMING IS PERFORMED CORRECTLY

Verify that the engine can be started with all the keys.
Can the engine be started?
YesProcedure is completed
Perform the corresponding
No DTC inspection to repair the
No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Keyless Control Module Replacement

NOTE:
Since two or more keys need to be programmed to start the engine, program two or more keys
after the replacement.
Conditions
Have two or more keys to be programmed after the replacement.
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
REPLACE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

Refer to KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform
keyless control module replacement.

key.
NOTE:
Select the Body
Select the Security
Select the PATS
function
Reset
Calibrations
Select the PATS
Functions
Reset
the M-MDS screen.
Select the replaced parts RKE according to the directions
on the M-MDS screen.
CAUTION:
At this time, do not select the other parts
Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on
the M-MDS screen.
3
CLEAR IGNITION KEY ID NUMBERS

Select Ignition Key Code Erase and Program from the MMDS screen menu.
Clear the ignition key ID number according to the

directions on the M-MDS.
4
PERFORM IGNITION KEY ID NUMBER PROGRAMMING

Program two keys according to the directions on the MMDS.

and then turns off.
Disconnect the M-MDS from the DLC-2.
5

No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer System-related
Parts (PCM and Keyless Control Module)

NOTE:
Since two or more keys need to be programmed to start the engine, program two or more keys
after the replacement.
Conditions
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
REPLACE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE.

Refer to KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform
keyless control module replacement.
REPLACE PCM
Refer to PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform PCM replacement.

key.
NOTE:

Select the Body
Select the Security
Select the PATS
function
Reset

Calibrations
Select the PATS
Functions
Reset
the M-MDS screen.
Select the replaced parts according to the directions on the
M-MDS screen.
If the keyless control module is replaced:
Select RKE.
If the PCM is replaced: Select PCM.
CAUTION:
At this time, do not
select the other parts
Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on
the M-MDS screen.
4

Select Ignition Key Code Erase and Program from the MMDS screen menu.
Clear the ignition key ID number according to the
directions on the M-MDS.

Program two keys according to the directions on the MMDS.


and then turns off.
6

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
Foreword
When replacing immobilizer system-related parts or programming an additional key, program the immobilizer system-related
parts so that the system operates normally. For immobilizer system-related parts programming, select the programming
procedures according to the service. (See Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming.)
CAUTION:
The engine cannot be started if any step or procedure for each service operation is skipped. Perform all procedures in the order
of the steps.
If any metallic or magnetic object is near the key, communication between the key and the vehicle may be obstructed, resulting
in a failure to program the immobilizer system-related parts. Remove any metallic or magnetic objects, such as key holders, from
the key when programming immobilizer system-related parts.
If any of the following devices are inside the vehicle, programming of immobilizer system-related parts may fail. Do not bring
any of the following devices or similar products inside the vehicle when programming immobilizer system-related parts.
card key
M-MDS
Personal computer
If the engine is started during immobilizer system-related parts programming, the programming mode cancels. Therefore, do not
start the engine unless indicated in the procedure. Repeat the procedure from the beginning if the engine is started during the
immobilizer system-related parts programming.
If an card key is near the vehicle during immobilizer system-related parts programming, it may be programmed mistakenly. Keep
card keys 1 m away from the vehicle unless indicated in the procedure.
NOTE:
The Valid key or Valid card key referred to in this manual indicates the key that can start the engine.
Two or more key ID numbers must be programmed for the engine to start.
A maximum of eight key ID numbers can be programmed for one vehicle.
The number of programmed key ID numbers can be verified using the M-MDS.
Do not select any screen menu other than the ones indicated in the procedure during M-MDS operation.
Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming

1. Verify that the room fuse is equipped.
2. Select the applicable programming procedure from the service content of the immobilizer system-related parts.
Immobilizer System-Related Parts Service and Programming Procedure Table
No.
Service
1
Additional key
Have two or more

valid keys
Programming procedure
(See No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys).)
programming
2
Additional key
3 programming procedure
setting
Have one valid key

or valid card key
(See No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS).)
Disable programming
using valid keys
(See No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing.)
Enable programming
using valid keys
4 Programming due to PCM replacement
(See No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement.)
5 Programming due to steering lock unit

replacement
(See No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Steering Lock Unit Replacement.)
6 Programming due to keyless control module

replacement
(See No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Keyless Control Module Replacement.)
Programming due to simultaneous replacement

of immobilizer system-related parts
PCM
(See No.7 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer Systemrelated Parts (PCM, Keyless Control Module, and Steering Lock Unit) .)
Steering lock unit

8 Programming due to coil antenna replacement Programming of immobilizer system-related parts is not necessary
9 Programming after keyless receiver replacement Programming of immobilizer system-related parts is not necessary
M-MDS Connecting Procedure

NOTE:
Do not place the M-MDS in the vehicle while programming the immobilizer system.
1. Fully lower the door glass.
3. Place the M-MDS outside the vehicle.

CAUTION:
Cover the vehicle body with a clean rag so as not to damage the vehicle body with the cable.
No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys)
CAUTION:
The engine cannot be started if any step or procedure is skipped. Perform all procedures in the order of the steps.
Conditions
NOTE:
If a key ID number cannot be programmed and DTC 15 is displayed, the maximum number of programmed keys may have been
reached. Verify the number of programmed keys using the M-MDS.
If eight keys have already been programmed and it is necessary to program other keys, the previously programmed key ID
numbers must first be cleared.
If Customer spare key programming disable is selected, perform additional key programming using the M-MDS. (See No. 2
Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS).)
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
Action after
procedure
START ENGINE
Start the engine using key 1.
Go to the next
step.

2
LAUNCH PROGRAMMING MODE

After verifying that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and turns off, turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position within approx. 4 s using key 1.
Remove key 1.
After verifying that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and turns off, turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position within approx. 4 s using key 2.
Remove key 2.
Go to the next
step.
Yes Go back to
Step 2.

No Go to the
next step.
Remove key 3.
4
VERIFY KEY PROGRAMMED CORRECTLY

Verify that the engine can start and run for approx. 5 s or more using all the programmed keys.
Procedure is
completed
NOTE:
When verifying that the engine starts, wait at least approx. 5 s or more before starting the engine using
the next key.
No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS)

CAUTION:
Conditions
There is only one valid key. Or, there is an card key which can start the engine.
NOTE:
If a key ID number cannot be programmed and DTC 15 is displayed, the maximum number of programmed keys may have been
reached. Verify the number of programmed keys using the M-MDS.
If eight keys have already been programmed and it is necessary to program other keys, the previously programmed key ID
numbers must first be cleared.
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
START ENGINE
Start the engine using the key 1 or the card key.
CAUTION:
When starting the engine with key 1, key

programming may not be performed correctly if
the card key is inside the vehicle. Do not place
the card key in the vehicle when starting the
engine with key 1.
When starting the engine with the card key,

remove the card key from the vehicle after the
engine is started.
Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then
turns off.
2
Change the key and repeat Step 2.

NOTE:
NOTE:
Yes
Additional key programming can be

performed using the procedure in
No.1 Additional Key Programming
Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys).
Although the security light starts flashing and DTC

15 is displayed after approx. 1 min, this does
not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to
perform the procedure as indicated.
After vehicle identification, select the following from the M-MDS
initial screen.
Select the Body
Select the Security
Select the Program Additional
Ignition Key
Calibrations

Select the Program Additional
Ignition Key
Perform the security access according to the directions on the MMDS screen.
NOTE:
After executing the above menu, The operation
is successful is displayed. This indicates that the
programming of the key currently in the ignition
switch ON position has been completed.
After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on
the M-MDS screen, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
Remove key 2.
3
CLOSE THE M-MDS

After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on
the M-MDS screen, select Finish (this menu).
VERIFY KEY PROGRAMMED CORRECTLY

Verify that the engine can be started with the programmed key.
NOTE:
When verifying that the engine starts, wait at least approx. 5 s
or more before starting the engine using the next key.
No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing

NOTE:
This procedure is performed for disabling the No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys).
The setting is Customer spare key programming enable when the vehicle is new or the keyless control module is replaced with
a new one.
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
Action after
procedure
CHANGE CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using a key (The key can be either the valid key or an
unprogrammed key).
NOTE:
If an unprogrammed key is used, the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed
after approx. 1 min. However, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to
perform the procedure as indicated.
Select the Body
Select the Security
Select either of the following from the M-MDS menu to change the additional key programming procedure.
When Customer Spare Key Programming Enable is selected: The additional key programming
procedure using valid keys is enabled.
When Customer Spare Key Programming Disable is selected: The additional key programming
procedure using valid keys is disabled.
After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select Finish (this
menu).
Procedure
is
completed
No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement

CAUTION:
Conditions
Prepare a valid key or an card key that can start the engine.
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
REPLACE THE PCM

Refer to PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform PCM replacement and configuration.

2

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using the valid key or the valid card
key.
NOTE:
Although the security light remains illuminated and DTC 23 is
displayed after approx. 1 min, continue to perform the
Verify that the keyless warning light illuminates for approx 3 s, and then turns
off.
Select the Body
Select the Security
Select the Parameter Reset

Select the replaced parts (PCM) according to the directions on the M-MDS
screen.
CAUTION:
At this time, do not select the other parts from the M-MDS
menu.
After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS
screen, select Finish (this menu).
3

Perform the corresponding DTC
No inspection to repair the malfunctioning
part.
No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Steering Lock Unit Replacement

CAUTION:
NOTE:
Since two or more keys need to be programmed to start the engine, program two or more keys after the replacement.
Conditions
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
REPLACE STEERING LOCK UNIT

Replace the steering lock unit.

NOTE:
Although the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed after approx.
1 min, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform the
Select the Body
Select the Security

Ignition Key Code Erase and Program
Ignition Key Code Erase and Program
3

Program two keys according to the directions on the M-MDS.
Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen.
4
PERFORM Steering Lock Unit Programming

Select Steering Lock Unit Programming from the M-MDS screen menu.
Complete the Steering Lock Unit Programming according to the directions on the M-MDS.
(See STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM].)
After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select Finish
(this menu).

Remove the programmed card key from the vehicle.
5
VERIFY KEY 1 PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY

Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following figure.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove key 1.

Repeat Step 6 using

Yes each programmed
key.
VERIFY CARD KEY PROGRAMMING PERFORMED CORRECTLY

Bring the programmed card key into the vehicle.
Close all doors.
Remove the key from the key cylinder and place it on the front passenger's seat.
Start the engine using the card key.
After verifying that the keyless warning light turns off, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Keyless Control Module Replacement

CAUTION:
NOTE:
Before beginning the procedure, verify that the customer has turned in all of the card keys and keys for the vehicle.
The engine cannot be started unless an card key and two or more keys are programmed after the replacement.
Conditions
Have one or more card keys to be programmed after the replacement.
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
REPLACE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

Replace the keyless control module. (See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2

NOTE:
Although the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed after approx.
1 min, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform the
Select the Body
Select the Security

Select the replaced part RKE according to the directions on the M-MDS.
CAUTION:
At this time, do not select the other parts from the M-MDS menu.
3

Select Ignition Key Code Erase and Program from the M-MDS screen menu.
Clear the ignition key ID number according to the directions on the M-MDS.
4

5
PERFORM CARD KEY PROGRAMMING

Select Program Additional card key from the M-MDS screen menu.
Program the card key according to the directions on the M-MDS.
6
PERFORM STEERING LOCK UNIT PRogramming

(See STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM].)
After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select Finish
(this menu).

7


Repeat Step 8 using

Yes each programmed
key.

Close all doors.
No.7 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer System-related Parts (PCM, Keyless Control
Module, and Steering Lock Unit)
CAUTION:
The menu and execution sequence of the M-MDS vary depending on the type of replaced unit and parts. Perform the procedures
referring to the following table.
M-MDS menu
(1): Parameter Reset
(2): Ignition Key Code Erase and Program
(3): Program Additional card key
(4): Steering Lock Unit Programming
Replacement part
M-MDS execution
menu/sequence
Conditions
Keyless control module and PCM

Keyless control module and steering lock
unit *1
(1)(2)(3)(4)
Keyless control module, PCM, and steering

lock unit *1
PCM and steering lock unit *1
(1)(2)(4)
Have two or more keys to be programmed after the

replacement.
Have one or more card keys to be programmed after
the replacement.
*1
Because the steering lock unit is integrated with the ignition key cylinder, the key must also be replaced when replacing
the steering lock unit.
Procedure
Step
1
Procedure
REPLACE UNITS OR PARTS

Replace the unit or parts.

NOTE:
Although the security light flashes or illuminates and DTC 15 or 23 is
displayed after approx. 1 min, continue to perform the procedure.
Select the Body
Select the Security
Select the replaced parts according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.
If the PCM is replaced: Select PCM.

If the keyless control module is replaced: Select RKE.
CAUTION:
At this time, do not select the other parts from the M-MDS
menu.
3

Select Ignition Key Code Erase and Program from the M-MDS screen menu.
Clear the ignition key ID number according to the directions on the M-MDS.
4

5
PERFORM CARD KEY PROGRAMMING

Select Program Additional card key from the M-MDS screen menu.
Program the card key according to the directions on the M-MDS.
6
PERFORM STEERING LOCK UNIT PROGRAMMING

After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the M-MDS screen, select
Finish (this menu).

7

Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following
figure.

Yes Repeat Step 8 using each

programmed key.
figure.

Close all doors.
figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SECURITY AND LOCKS LOCATION INDEX
Locks and Openers
1 Hood latch
(See HOOD LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See HOOD LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.)
2 Hood striker
(See HOOD STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3 Hood release lever
4 Fuel-filler lid opener cable
(See FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5 Door lock switch
(See DOOR LOCK SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See DOOR LOCK SWITCH INSPECTION.)
6 Front inner handle
(See FRONT INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7 Hood release lever
8 Trunk lid opener switch
(See TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION.)
9 Trunk lid opener relay

10Rear door lock striker (upper)
(See REAR DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11Rear door upper latch
(See REAR DOOR UPPER LATCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR DOOR UPPER LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.)
12Rear door release handle
(See REAR DOOR RELEASE HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
13Front door key cylinder
(See FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
14Front outer handle
(See FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
15Front door latch and lock actuator
(See FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
16Front door lock striker
(See FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
17Rear door lower latch
(See REAR DOOR LOWER LATCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
18Rear door lock striker (lower)
(See REAR DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
19Trunk key cylinder
(See TRUNK KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION.)
20Trunk lid latch and opener
(See TRUNK LID LATCH AND OPENER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See TRUNK LID OPENER INSPECTION.)
21Trunk lid striker
(See TRUNK LID STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Keyless Entry System and Immobilizer System [Advanced Keyless Entry And Start System]
1Coil antenna
2Keyless receiver
(See KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
(See KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
3Keyless antenna
(See KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
4Keyless control module
(See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
(See CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
(See STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
(See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
5Door lock control module
(See DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
(See DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
6Request switch
(See REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
(See REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
7Card key
(See CARD KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
(See CLEARING CARD KEY [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
(See CARD KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
8Keyless beeper
(See KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
Keyless Entry System and Immobilizer System [Keyless entry System]
1Coil antenna
2Transmitter
(See TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
(See TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
3Keyless receiver
(See KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
(See KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
4Keyless control module
(See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM ].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Detach the cables from the inner handle and the door lock knob.
3. Detach the rods from the key cylinder and the front outer handle.
4. Remove the screws, then remove the front door latch and lock actuator.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Door Lock Actuator

1. Disconnect the front door lock actuator connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the corresponding front door lock
actuator terminals and inspect the front door lock actuator operation.
If not as specified, replace the front door lock actuator.
Connection
Actuator operation
B+ GND
Lock
Unlock
(F)
(E)
(E)
(F)
()
RH
Door Lock-link Switch

2. Inspect for continuity between the door lock-link switch terminals.
Door Key Cylinder Switch

2. Inspect for continuity between the door lock-link switch terminals.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOOR LOCK SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
LH
1. Remove the power window main switch. (See POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
NOTE:
The power door lock switch and the power window main switch are integrated.
RH
panel and detach the clip.
4. Disconnect the power door lock switch connector and the power window subswitch connector.
5. Remove the screws, then remove the power door lock switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOOR LOCK SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Inspect for continuity between the door lock switch terminals.
If not as specified, replace the door lock switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Detach the rod from the outer handle.

5. Secure the rear part of the front outer handle and, with the front outer handle lever pulled
outward (1), remove the rear part of the front outer handle from the front door.
6. Pull out the front part of the front outer handle from the front door.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. To remove the fuel-filler lid opener, remove the trunk side trim (LH). (See TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. When removing the fuel-filler lid opener lever, perform the following procedure:
a. Remove the inner scuff plate (drivers side). (See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Remove the front side trim (drivers side). (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Remove the fasteners and the wiring harness clips, and then partially peel back the floor covering so that the fuelfiller lid opener lever can be removed.
3. When removing the fuel-filler lid opener cable, perform the following procedure:
a. Partially peel back the trunk mat.
b. Remove the rear seat (drivers side). (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
c. Remove the tire house trim (drivers side). (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Partially peel back the floor covering so that the fuel-filler lid opener cable can be removed.
1Stopper bracket
2Fuel-filler lid opener
3Fuel-filler lid opener lever
4Fuel-filler lid opener cable

6. Adjust the fuel-filler lid. (See FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HOOD LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. To remove the hood latch, remove the seal plate. (See FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Connector
2Hood latch
3Hood release lever
(See Hood release lever.)
4Hood release cable

4. Adjust the hood. (See HOOD ADJUSTMENT.)
Hood release lever
1. Pull the hood release lever.
2. While maintaining the condition in procedure 1, insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver as shown in the figure, press
the ends of the tabs with the screwdriver in the direction of the arrows (1), pull the hood release lever in the direction of
arrow (2), and then disconnect the lower panel.
CAUTION:
Remove the hood release lever while being careful not to damage the hood release cable with the flathead
screwdriver.
3. Pull the latch release lever outward, remove it from the lower panel, and then disconnect the hood release cable.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HOOD LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Open the hood.
3. Disconnect the hood latch switch connector.
4. Inspect for continuity between the hood latch switch terminals A and B.
If there is no continuity, replace the hood latch switch.

5. Lock the hood latch using a flathead screwdriver or equivalent as shown.
6. Inspect for continuity between the hood latch switch terminals A and B
If there is continuity, replace the hood latch.
CAUTION:
After the inspection, unlock the hood latch. If closing the hood with the hood latch locked,
the hood latch and/or hood striker may be broken.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
Retractable Key Type

1. Insert a small screwdriver into the slot and push the tab to remove the key from the
transmitter.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter.
3. Remove the battery.
4. Put in the new battery (CR1620) with the positive pole (+) facing down.
5. Align the front and back covers and snap the transmitter shut.
Battery specification
Lithium CR1620 1
NOTE:
The batteries will last about 2 years when used 10 times a day.
6. Install the key to the transmitter.
NOTE:
When attaching the key to the transmitter, squeeze them together until a click
sound is heard.
If the key is not securely attached it will separate from the transmitter.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
NOTE:
When programming the ID code into a keyless control module, verify that other transmitters are not being operated in the
vicinity.
After ID code programming, remove the key from the steering lock and verify that all doors lock/unlock normally using the
transmitter.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CARD KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
Card Key Type

1. Pull out the auxiliary key.
2. Replace the cap using a flathead screwdriver, then rotate and remove the cap.
CAUTION:
Do not turn the cap excessively. The cap may be damaged.
3. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the crack and press the battery out.
4. Insert the new battery (CR2025) with the positive pole (+) facing the (+) mark on the cap.
Battery specification
Lithium CR2025 1
NOTE:
The batteries will last about 1 years when used 10 times a day.
5. Rotate and close the cap.
6. Reinsert the auxiliary key.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. When replacing the keyless control module, perform the following procedure:
Keyless Control Module Configuration
(See KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION.)
Immobilizer System-related Parts Programming[with advanced keyless system]
(See .IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH
Immobilizer system-related parts programming[with keyless entry system]
(See IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [WITH KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM].)
3. Remove the front side trim. (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the nut and screw.
5. Remove the connector clip installed to the bracket by shifting the keyless control module
downward.
6. Disconnect the keyless control module connector.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
1. Measure the voltage or inspect for continuity according to the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference).
If the voltage is not as specified in the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference), inspect the parts under
Inspection item(s) and related wiring harnesses.
2. If the system does not work properly even though the inspection items or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, perform symptom troubleshooting [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].
Terminal
Signal name
Connected to
Measured condition
Voltage
(V)/Continuity
Inspection item(s)
1A
Keyless antenna
(exterior, RF) (+)
Keyless antenna
(exterior, RF)
Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal

voltage inspection not possible.
1B
Keyless antenna
(exterior, RF) (-)
Keyless antenna
(exterior, RF)

1C
Keyless antenna
(exterior, LF)(+)
Keyless antenna
(exterior, LF)

1D
Keyless antenna
(exterior, LF)(-)
Keyless antenna
(exterior, LF)

1E
Keyless antenna
(exterior, rear)(+)
Keyless antenna
(exterior, rear)

1F
Keyless antenna
(exterior, rear)(-)
Keyless antenna
(exterior, rear)

Under any condition: Inspect for
1G
GND
Body ground
1H
GND
Body ground
1I
Keyless antenna
(trunk lid)(+)
Keyless antenna (trunk Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal
lid)
1J
Keyless antenna
(trunk lid)(-)
Keyless antenna (trunk Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal
lid)
1K
Keyless antenna
(interior, rear)(+)
Keyless antenna
(interior, rear)

1L
Keyless antenna
(interior, rear)(-)
Keyless antenna
(interior, rear)

1M
Keyless antenna
Keyless antenna
(interior, middle)(+) (interior, middle)

1N
Keyless antenna
Keyless antenna
(interior, middle)(-) (interior, middle)

1O
Keyless antenna
Keyless antenna
(interior, front)(+) (interior, front)

1P
Keyless antenna
(interior, front)(-)

2A
Power supply
Keyless antenna
(interior, front)
ROOM 15 A fuse
continuity to ground.
Under any condition
1.0 or less
GND
1.0 or less
GND
ROOM
15 A
fuse
B+
Battery
2B
2C
2E
GND
IG1
ACC
Body ground
ENGINE 10 A fuse

1.0 or less
Ignition switch is at ON position
B+
1.0 or less
Ignition switch is at ACC position
B+
METER 10 A fuse
METER 10 A fuse
Ignition switch off (security light off)

Security light
ENGINE 10 A fuse
Ignition switch is at LOCK or ACC

position
Ignition switch is at LOCK or ON position
2G
GND
1.0 or less
1.0 or less
B+ 1.0 or
less
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Within approx. 3 s after ignition switch is
turned to ON position (security light
5.5 or less
illuminates)
2K
Keyless beeper
output
Keyless beeper operated
B+
Keyless beeper
Keyless beeper
Other
1.0 or less
2L
Communication
Instrument cluster
(instrument cluster)

3A
Power supply
(keyless receiver)
Keyless receiver
Under any condition
3C
Communication
(keyless receiver)
Keyless receiver

3E
Start knob (push

switch)
3F
Key reminder
switch
Start knob is Pushed
Key reminder switch is ON
3M
3N
Lock signal input
B+
Steering lock unit
Other
3I
Request switch
input (trunk lid)
1.0 or less
Steering lock unit
Request switch
input (passengerside)
Request switch
input (driver-side)
Steering lock unit

Other
Communication
Steering lock unit
(steering lock unit)
Request switch
(passenger-side)
Request switch (driverside)
Request switch (trunk

lid)
1.0 or less

Passenger-side request switch is ON:
Inspect for continuity to ground.
5.0
Passenger-side request switch is OFF:

1.0 or less
Driver-side request switch is ON: Inspect

Driver-side request switch is OFF:
Request switch
(passenger-side)
5.0
Request switch (driverside)
1.0 or less
Trunk lid request switch is ON: Inspect

5.0
Trunk lid request switch is OFF: Inspect

1.0 or less
Driver-side door is locked: Inspect for

1.0 or less
Request switch (trunk

lid)
Door lock-link switch
Trunk
lid
Keyless receiver
B+
Steering lock unit
3H
3K
B+
Door lock-link switch

Driver-side door is unlocked: Inspect for
5.0
Trunk lid opener switch is ON: Inspect

5.0
Trunk
lid
3P
3Q
opener
switch
Trunk lid opener

signal input
Communication
(door lock control
module)
Trunk
lid
opener
cancel
switch
Door lock control
module
Trunk lid opener switch is OFF: Inspect

1.0 or less
Tx-SKE
Coil antenna

position
3V
Rx-SKE
Coil antenna
Trunk
lid
opener
cancel
switch

3U
opener
switch

position
B+
Coil antenna
1.0 or less
5.0
Coil antenna
1.0 or less
3W
HS-CAN+
PCM

3X
HS-CAN-
PCM

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND START SYSTEM ]
1. Measure the voltage or inspect for continuity according to the Terminal Voltage Table
(Reference).
inspect the parts under Inspection item(s).
2. If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not
have any malfunction, perform symptom troubleshooting.
Connected to
Measurement
Voltage
condition
(V)/Continuity
Inspection item(s)
D.LOCK 30 A
fuse
1A
Power supply D.LOCK 30 A fuse
Under any
condition
Within 5 min
B+
Battery
Inspect
related
harness.
ROOM 15 A
Map
light
1B
Interior light
control
Interior
light
Courtesy
light
1C
Unlock output Driver-side door lock

actuator
after any door is 1.0 or less

opened.
fuse
5 min or more
after any door is
opened.
Interior light
1E
1F
Lock output
GND
Door lock actuator
Body ground
All doors are

closed.
B+
While driverside door lock

actuator is
unlocking.
1.0 or less
B+ 1.0 or
less
While lock
actuator is
locking.
Rear door
upper latch
Inspect
related
harness.
Driver-side
door lock
actuator
D.LOCK 15 A
fuse
1.0 or less
1.0 or less
B+ 1.0 or
less
Front door
lock actuator
D.LOCK 15 A
fuse
1.0 or less
Under any
condition:
Inspect for
continuity to
ground.
1.0 or less GND
While
passenger-side
lock actuator is 1.0 or less
unlocking.
B+ 1.0 or
(Transmitter
Passenger-side
door
lock
less
Unlock output
UNLOCK button
actuator
is pressed twice
within 5 s.)
Power supply ROOM 15 A fuse
Courtesy
light
Other
Other
2A
B+
Door switch
Other
1D
Map light
Under any
condition
Passengerside door
lock actuator
D.LOCK 15 A
fuse
1.0 or less
B+
ROOM 15 A fuse
Ignition switch
at ON
2B
IG1
METER 10 A fuse
Ignition switch
at LOCK or ACC
Other
2C
2D
Horn on/off
Hood
open/closed
B+
Horn relay
1.0 or less
B+
Transmitter
LOCK button is
pressed twice
within 5 s.
B+ 1.2 or
less B+
Hood is open.
Hood is closed.
1.0 or less
Hood latch switch
Transmitter
B+ 1.2 or
trunk lid button less B+
is pressed.
2E
Trunk lid
unlock
Trunk lid opener relay

Other
2F
2G
Key reminder Key reminder switch

switch
Key is in
steering lock.
(key reminder
switch on)
B+
B+
Other
1.0 or less
Trunk lid is
open.
1.0 or less
Trunk
compartment Trunk compartment light
light switch switch
on/off
Trunk lid is
closed.
B+
METER 10 A
fuse
Inspect
related
harness.
Horn relay
Inspect
related
harness.
Hood latch
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
Trunk lid
opener relay
Trunk lid
opener
cancel
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
Key
reminder
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
Trunk
compartment
light switch
Trunk
compartment
light
Inspect
related
harness.
2L
Passenger-door
Unlock input
is locked.
(Passenger- Passenger-door locklink
door locklink switch
Passenger-door
switch)
is unlocked.
Transmitter
LOCK button is
pressed.
2I
2J
Hazard
Flasher control module
Security light Instrument cluster
Door
open/closed
1.0 or less
B+ 1.0 or
less B+
Theftdeterrent
system alarm:
Active
1.0 or less
Security light off
B+
Within approx.
3 s after
ignition switch is
5.5 or less
turned to ON
position
(security light
illuminates)
(Door switch
on)
2.0 or less
All doors are

closed.
Driver-side door
Lock input
is locked.
(Driver-side Driver-side door lock-link
door lock-link switch
Driver-side door
switch)
Flasher
control
module
Inspect
related
harness.
Instrument
cluster
Inspect
related
harness.
Instrument
cluster
Door switch
Rear door
upper latch
Door switch
(Door switch
off)
2Q
Passenger-door locklink
switch
B+ 1.0 or
Transmitter
less B+
UNLOCK button
1.0
or less
is pressed.
B+
Any door is
open.
2K
B+
Inspect
related
harness.
1.0 or less
Driver-side door lock-link
switch
5
is unlocked.
2R
2S
Driver-side door
Unlock input
is locked.
(Driver-side Driver-side door lock-link
door lock-link switch
Driver-side door
switch)
is unlocked.
Lock/unlock
input (Driver- Driver-side door key
side door key cylinder switch
cylinder
switch)
5
switch
1.0 or less
Driver-side door
key cylinder is
Approx. 2.5
locked.
Driver-side door
key cylinder is
unlocked.
Other
1.0 or less
Driver-door
key cylinder
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
5
Instrument
cluster
Door switch
2U
Lock release Buckle switch

power supply
Within 60 min
after any door is
opened
B+
Rear door
upper latch
Front buckle
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
2W
GND
Body ground
Under any
condition:
Inspect for
continuity to
ground.
1.0 or less GND
Door lock switch Approx. 2.5

is locked.
2V
Lock/unlock
input (Door
lock switch)
Door lock switch
Door lock switch 1.0 or less

is unlocked.
Other
Door lock
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
3A
HS-CAN+
PCM
Terminal used for communication therefore determination

based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.
3B
HS-CAN-
PCM
Terminal used for communication therefore determination

based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.
Ignition switch
at ON
3E
3F
Tx
Rx
8 or more
Coil antenna
Ignition switch
at LOCK or ACC
1.0 or less
Inspect
related
harness.
Ignition switch
at ON
8 or more
Coil antenna
1.0 or less
Inspect
related
harness.
Coil antenna
Coil antenna
Ignition switch
at LOCK or ACC
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION
1. Select Programming.
2. Select RKE.
If a DTC (s) is detected, perform the applicable DTC inspection. (See DTC
TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
4. Remove the connector clip installed to the bracket by shifting the door lock control module
downward.
5. Disconnect the keyless unit connector.
6. Remove the nut, then remove the keyless receiver form the door lock control module.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
1. Measure the voltage or inspect for continuity according to the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference).
If the voltage is not as specified in the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference), inspect the parts
under Inspection item(s).
2. If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, perform symptom troubleshooting.
Terminal
Signal name
Connected to
Voltage
(V)/Continuity
Inspection item(s)
D.LOCK 30 A
fuse
1A
Power supply
D.LOCK 30 A fuse
Under any condition
B+
Battery
Inspect
related
harness.
Within 5 min after any

door is opened.
Map
light
5 min or more after

any door is opened.
1.0 or less
ROOM 15 A
fuse
Map light
B+
Interior light
Courtesy
1B
Interior light
control
Interior
light
Courtesy
light
light
Door switch
All doors are closed.
Rear door
upper latch
B+
Inspect
related
harness.
1C
Unlock output
Driver-side door lock

actuator
While driver-side door

lock actuator is
unlocking.
Other
1D
1E
1F
Lock output
GND
Unlock output
Door lock actuator
Body ground
While lock actuator is

locking.
2B
Power supply
IG1
Ignition relay
Horn on/off
Horn relay
1.0 or less
B+ 1.0 or
less
Front door
lock actuator
D.LOCK 15 A
fuse
Under any condition:

Inspect for continuity to
ground.
Continuity
detected GND
1.0 or less
B+ 1.0 or
less
1.0 or less
B+
B+
Ignition switch at LOCK

or ACC
Passengerside door
lock actuator
D.LOCK 15 A
fuse
Under any condition
Other
2C
D.LOCK 15 A
fuse
1.0 or less
1.0 or less
While passenger-side
lock actuator is
unlocking. (Transmitter
UNLOCK button is
Passenger-side door lock
pressed twice within 5
actuator
s.)
ROOM 15 A fuse
Driver-side
door lock
actuator
Other
Other
2A
1.0 or less
B+ 1.0 or
less
ROOM 15 A fuse
Ignition
relay
D.LOCK 15 A
fuse
1.0 or less
B+
Transmitter LOCK button B+ 1.2 or

is pressed twice within
less B+
5 s.
Inspect
related
harness.
Horn relay
Inspect
related
harness.
2D
Hood is open.
Hood is closed.
1.0 or less
Hood open/closed Hood latch switch
Transmitter trunk lid

button is pressed.
2E
2F
2G
Trunk lid unlock
Key reminder
switch
B+ 1.2 or
less B+

Other
B+
Key is in steering lock.

(key reminder switch on)
B+
Key reminder switch

Other
1.0 or less
Trunk lid is open.
1.0 or less
Trunk
Trunk compartment light
compartment light switch
switch on/off
Trunk lid is closed.
B+
Hood latch
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
Trunk lid
opener relay
Trunk lid
opener
cancel
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
Key
reminder
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
Trunk
compartment
light switch
Trunk
compartment
light
Inspect
related
harness.
Transmitter LOCK button B+ 1.0 or

is pressed.
less B+
2I
Hazard
Transmitter UNLOCK
button is pressed.
Theftdeterrent system
alarm: Active
Security light off
2J
Security light
Instrument cluster
Within approx. 3 s after

ignition switch is turned
to ON position (security
light illuminates)
B+ 1.0 or
less B+
1.0 or less
B+
Flasher
control
module
Inspect
related
harness.
1.0 or less
B+
5.5 or less
Instrument
cluster
Inspect
related
harness.
Any door is open.

(Door switch on)
2K
(Door switch off)
Unlock input
(Passenger-door
locklink switch)
Passenger-door is locked.
switch
Passenger-door is
unlocked.
Driver-side door is open.
(Door switch on)
2N
Door open/closed Door switch (driver-side)
Rear door
upper latch
B+
2Q
Communication
(keyless control
module)
1.0 or less
2.0 or less
Driver-side door is
closed.
2S
Instrument
cluster
B+
Inspect
related
harness.

Keyless control module.
Continuity
detected Keyless control module
Driver-side door is
locked.
1.0 or less
Lock input (Driver- Driver-side door lock-link

side door lock-link switch
switch)
Driver-side door is
unlocked.
Unlock input
(Driver-side door switch
lock-link switch)
Driver-side door is
unlocked.
Lock/unlock input
(Driver-side door Driver-side door key
cylinder switch
key cylinder
switch)
switch)
Door switch
Driver-side door is
locked.
2R
Inspect
related
harness.
(Door switch off)
2P
Instrument
cluster
Door switch
Door open/closed Door switch

All doors are closed.
2L
2.0 or less

switch
5
5
switch
1.0 or less
Driver-side door key

cylinder is locked.
Approx. 2.5
Driver-side door key

cylinder is unlocked.
1.0 or less
Other
Driver-door
key cylinder
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
Instrument
cluster
Door switch
2U
Lock release
power supply
Buckle switch
Within 60 min after

any door is opened
B+
Rear door
upper latch
Front buckle
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
2W
2V
GND
Body ground
Lock/unlock input
(Door lock switch) Door lock switch

ground.
Continuity
detected GND
Door lock switch is

locked.
Approx. 2.5
Door lock switch is

unlocked.
1.0 or less
Other
Door lock
switch
Inspect
related
harness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CARD KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
CAUTION:
Do not place the following devices in the vehicle while programming, otherwise
programming cannot be performed.
M-MDS
Personal computer
Device that can send/receive radio waves
Verify that the other transmitter is not being operated around the servicing area during
card key programming.
NOTE:
Use the M-MDS and start programming if the condition corresponds to the following:
One or No Programmed Card Keys
Keyless control module is replaced
If six card keys are already programmed, the programming mode does not activate. If
programming is needed, use the M-MDS to erase the unnecessary card key programming.
Using M-MDS
1. Fully lower the driver-side door glass.
2. Connect the M-MDS to DLC-2.
3. Set the M-MDS outside the vehicle with its cable passing through the door glass opening.
CAUTION:
Cover the vehicle body with a clean rag so as not to damage the vehicle body
with the cable.
Select "Body".
Select "Security".
Select "PATS Functions".
Select "All Tests and Calibrations".
5. Then, select an item from the screen menu.
Select the "Program Additional card key"
6. Perform the security access according to the directions on the M-MDS screen.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CLEARING CARD KEY [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
3. Pull out the M-MDS cable from the door glass opening and set the M-MDS outside the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Protect the cable and body contact area with a clean rag, otherwise they could
be damaged.
Select "Body".
Select "Security".
Select "All Tests and Calibrations".
Card Key Code Erase and Program
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
CAUTION:
Do not place the following devices in the vehicle while programming, otherwise
programming cannot be performed:
M-MDS
Personal computer
NOTE:
The steering lock unit and steering lock component are a single unit. Therefore, replace the
steering lock component when replacing steering lock unit. (See STEERING WHEEL AND
COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
For this procedure, a programmed card key is necessary. If there is no programmed card
key, perform the steering lock unit programming after the card key programming.
1. Bring the programmed advanced key into the vehicle.
4. Pull out the M-MDS cable from the door glass opening and set the M-MDS outside the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Cover the vehicle body with a clean rag so as not to damage the vehicle body
with the cable.
Select Body
Select "Security"
Select "PATS Functions"
Select "All Tests and Calibrations"
Select "PATS Functions"
Select Steering Lock Unit Programming
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
1. Connect the M-MDS to DLC-2.
Select "Module Programming".
Select "Programming".
Select "Module Programming".
Select "Programmable Parameters".
Select "RKE".
4. Select an item name, and then select option.
Items
"Answer Back Buzzer"
"Automatic Locks"
"Card Key Battery Low Warning"
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
a. Speaker grille (See SPEAKER GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Center speaker (See CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Center panel unit (See CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Center panel (See CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the nuts.
4. Disconnect the keyless receiver connector.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
1. (See DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [WITH KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
inspect the parts under "Inspection item (s)".
2. If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not
have any malfunction, perform symptom troubleshooting.
Terminal Signal
name
Power
supply
Connected to
ROOM
15 A
fuse
Keyless
Measured condition
Under any condition
Any
transmitter
button is
operated
without
key in
steering
lock (key
reminder
Voltage
(V)/Continuity
B+
51.0 or
less
Inspection item(s)
ROOM 15
A fuse
Transmitter
Keyless
control
IG1
control
module
Key is in
steering
lock (key
reminder
switch
on).
Data
Keyless
control
module
Any
transmitter
button is
operated
without
key in
steering
lock (key
reminder
switch
off).
Key is in
steering
lock (key
reminder
switch
on).
GND Body ground
module
switch
off).

ground.
Inspect
related
harness
5
1.0 or less
changes
positively
Transmitter
Keyless
control
module
Inspect
related
harness
1.0 or less
1.0 or less GND
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
1. Measure the voltage or inspect for continuity according to the Terminal Voltage Table
(Reference).
inspect the parts under Inspection item(s) and related wiring harnesses.
2. If the system does not work properly even though the inspection items or related wiring
harnesses do not have any malfunction, perform symptom troubleshooting [KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM].
Terminal Signal
name
Power
supply
Connected to
Keyless
control
module
Keyless
Measured condition
Under any condition
Voltage
(V)/Continuity
B+
Inspection item(s)
Keyless
control
module
Related
wiring
harnesses
Terminal used for communication therefore
Data
GND
control
module
Body ground
determination based on terminal voltage

inspection not possible.
ground.
1.0 or less GND
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
Driver-side/passenger-side Door
2. Remove the door trim. (See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the connector, then remove the keyless antenna.
Exterior, Rear
2. Remove the rear bumper. (See REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the nuts.
Interior, Front
3. Disconnect the connector, then remove the screws.
4. Remove the keyless antenna.
Interior, Middle
3. Remove the clips.

Interior, Rear
3. Remove the fastener.
Interior, trunk

3. Remove the nuts.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND START SYSTEM]
3. Remove the nuts.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
Driver-side/passenger-side
3. Remove the front outer handle. (See FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the screws A, then remove the handle seat and plate.
5. Remove screw B, then remove the request switch.
Trunk Lid

3. Detach the request switch from the rear bumper.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM]
1. Inspect for continuity between request switch terminals A and B.
If not as specified, replace the request switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the screws, then remove the front inner handle.
4. Detach the cables from the front inner handle and door lock knob.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK LID LATCH AND OPENER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Detach the rod.
4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener connector and the trunk compartment light connector.
5. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid latch and opener.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK LID OPENER INSPECTION
1. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to the corresponding the trunk lid
opener terminals, and inspect the trunk lid opener operation.
If the trunk lid opener does not operate as indicated in the table, replace the
trunk lid latch and opener.
Terminal
Operation
A
Unlocks B+ Ground
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Using a small flathead screwdriver, detach the tabs of the trunk lid opener switch from the
dashboard.
3. Push the trunk lid opener switch into the dashboard and remove.
4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener switch connector.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Detach the rod.
4. Remove the nuts, then remove the trunk key cylinder.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the trunk key cylinder switch.
2. Inspect for continuity between the trunk key cylinder switch terminals.
If not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the trunk lid open switch.
2. Inspect for continuity between the trunk lid open switch terminals.
If not as specified, replace the trunk lid open switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK LID STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid striker.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DOOR RELEASE HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the rear door release handle.
4. Detach the rear door upper and lower latch cables.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DOOR UPPER LATCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove clips A and B, and disconnect the rear door upper latch switch connector.
4. Remove the rear door upper latch cable from the release handle.
5. Remove the bolts, then remove the rear door upper latch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DOOR UPPER LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION
If not as indicated in the table, replace the rear door upper latch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DOOR LOWER LATCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the front seat belt retractor. (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the rear door release handle. (See REAR DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
5. Remove bolt A.
6. Remove bolts B, then remove the rear door lower latch.

8. Adjust the door. (See DOOR ADJUSTMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the screws, and then remove the front door lock striker.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Upper
a. A-pillar trim (SeeA-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Sunvisor (See SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Assist handle (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Roof side trim (See ROOF SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Inner scuff plate (See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Rear seat (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Rear pillar trim (See REAR PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Interior light (See INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. Map light (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Headliner (See HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the bolts A from the curtain air bag module.
3. Remove the bolt, then remove the bracket.
4. Remove the bolts, then remove the rear door lock striker (upper).

Lower
1. Remove the outer scuff plate. (See OUTER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the screws, then remove the rear door lock striker (lower).

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HOOD STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the bolt, then remove the hood striker.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUNROOF LOCATION INDEX
Sunroof switch
1 (See SUNROOF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See SUNROOF SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Sunroof unit
2 (See SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See SUNROOF UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
Glass panel
3 (See GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT.)
Rear drain hose
4(See REAR DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL.)

(See REAR DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION.)
Sunroof motor
5 (See SUNROOF MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See SUNROOF MOTOR INSPECTION.)
Front drain hose
6 (See FRONT DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL.)
(See FRONT DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUNROOF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NOTE:
The sunroof switch and the map light are a single unit.
2. Remove the map light from the headliner. (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUNROOF SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Verify that the continuity between the sunroof switch is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the sunroof switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Fully close the glass panel.
2. Fully open the sunshade.
3. Remove the screws, then remove the glass panel.
4. Remove the weatherstrip from the glass panel.

6. Adjust the glass panel. (See GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT
1. Fully close the glass panel.
2. Measure the gap and height difference between the glass panel and the body.
3. Loosen the glass panel installation screws and move the glass panel to adjust.
Standard clearance
a: 0.22.2 mm {0.0080.086 in}
b: 0.22.2 mm {0.0080.086 in}
c: 0.252.25 mm {0.010.09 in}
d: 0 mm {0 in}
4. Tighten the screws.
5. Insert any available thin plastic card between the weatherstrip and the body, and verify that
they are sealed. (There is resistance when the plastic card is moved.)
If they are not sealed, perform Steps 34 and adjust again.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
a. Roof side trim (See ROOF SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. A-pillar trim (See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Rear seat (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Inner scuff plate (See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Tire house trim (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Rear pillar trim (See REAR PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Map light (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Interior light (See INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Sunvisor (See SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. Assist handle (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
l. Head impact pad (See HEAD IMPACT PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
m. Glass panel (See GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the front and rear drain hoses from the sunroof frame.
4. Remove the bolts from curtain air bag module points A.
6. Remove the rear door striker (upper).
7. Remove the rear set bracket.

8. Remove the nuts and screws, then remove the sunroof unit.

10. Adjust the glass panel. (See GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUNROOF UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Remove the glass panel. (See GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Drip rail
2 Drip guide
3 Rear stopper
4 Sunshade
Sunroof motor
(See Sunroof Motor Assembly Note.)
6 Set plate
7 Guide
8 Decoration link
9 Drive unit
10Frame
Sunroof Motor Assembly Note

NOTE:
If the guide is removed, initial position setting of the sunroof motor will be required. After installing the sunroof unit, perform initial
position setting using the following procedure.
1. Press the CLOSE switch to fully close the glass panel.
2. When the glass panel reaches the fully closed position, temporarily release the CLOSE switch and press it again for approx. 13 s
continuously. Continue pressing the switch until the glass panel automatically stops at the fully closed position after reaching the
mechanical lock position.
3. When the glass panel stops at the fully closed position, temporarily release the CLOSE switch, then press it again within 5 s and hold.
NOTE:
Press the CLOSE switch continuously until the glass panel opens to the fully open position, returns to the fully closed
position and then stops.
4. Release the CLOSE switch when the glass panel stops at the fully closed position.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUNROOF MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Measure the voltage at each terminal (other than terminal G).
If not as specified, inspect the parts listed under Inspection item and the
3. Verify that continuity at terminal G is as indicated in the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference).
4. If the parts and wiring harnesses are okay but the system still does not work properly,
replace the sunroof relay.
Terminal voltage list (Reference)
Terminal
Signal
Slide open
Slide close
/tilt down
Connected to
Sunroof
switch
Sunroof
switch
Test condition
Sunroof is fully opening.
Other
Voltage
(V)/Continuity
B+
0
Sunroof switch
(See SUNROOF SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Sunroof switch
Sunroof is closing/tilting down.

B+
Other
Sunroof is tilting up.
Inspection item
B+
(See SUNROOF SWITCH

INSPECTION.)
Sunroof switch
Tilt up
Sunroof
switch
Other
IG1
A/C 7.5 A
fuse

ON position.
GND
GND
Under any condition: Check for

Power
supply
DOOR LOCK Under any condition

30 A fuse
0
B+
(See SUNROOF SWITCH

INSPECTION.)
A/C 7.5 A fuse
Continuity GND
B+
< Previous Next >
DOOR LOCK 30 A fuse
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the front drain hose from the sunroof frame.
3. Remove the front drain hose from the clips.
4. Pull the front drain hose into the vehicle interior and remove the front drain hose.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
If the front drain hose is pinched or bent at any point, the water in the hose may not drain
and could leak inside the vehicle.During and after installation of the trims and headliner,
always make sure there is no interference with the front drain hose.Correct any
abnormality if found.
1. Apply soapy water to the part of the sunroof frame where the front drain hose is inserted.
2. Insert the front drain hose end into the sunroof frame.
3. Install the front drain hose to the clips parallel to the pillar and free of looseness.
4. Insert the front drain hose grommet into the hole of the inner hinge pillar.
a. Headliner (See HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Assist handle (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Sunvisor (See SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Interior light (See INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Map light (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Inner scuff plate (See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Rear seat (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Roof side trim (See ROOF SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL
l. Trunk end trim (See TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
m. Trunk side trim (See TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the sunroof frame from the rear drain hose.
3. Remove the rear drain hose from the clips.
4. Pull the rear drain hose into the vehicle interior and remove the rear drain hose.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
If the rear drain hose is pinched or bent at any point, the water in the hose may not drain
and could leak inside the vehicle.During and after installation of the trims and headliner,
always make sure there is no interference with the rear drain hose.Correct any abnormality
if found.
1. Apply soapy water to the part of the sunroof frame where the rear drain hose is inserted.
2. Insert the rear drain hose end into the sunroof frame.
3. Install the rear drain hose to the clips parallel to the pillar and free of looseness.
4. Insert the rear drain hose grommet into the hole of the inner rear pillar.
a. Trunk side trim (See TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Trunk end trim (See TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Headliner (See HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Assist handle (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Sunvisor (See SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Interior light (See INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Tire house trim (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. Inner scuff plate (See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Rear seat (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
l. A-pillar trim (See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
m. Roof side trim (See ROOF SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUNROOF MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Disconnect the sunroof motor connector.
4. Remove the screws, then remove the sunroof motor.

NOTE:
If the glass panel or the sunroof motor is moved with the sunroof motor removed, initial
position setting of the sunroof motor will be required.Perform initial position setting
referring to the Sunroof Motor Assembly Note. (See SUNROOF UNIT
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EXTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX
Front beltline molding
(See FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Roof molding
2 (See ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL.)

(See ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION.)
Cowl grille
(See COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Rear deflector
(See REAR DEFLECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Door sash film
5 (See DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL.)

(See DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION.)
Rear spoiler
6 (See REAR SPOILER REMOVAL.)
(See REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION.)
Extractor chamber
(See EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Splash shield
(See SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Side step molding
9 (See SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL.)

(See SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION.)
Aerodynamic under cover

(See AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Floor under cover No.2
(See FLOOR UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL
1. Remove the roof molding from the T-stud in the A area by using a flat blade screwdriver as
shown in the diagram.
2. Pull up the roof molding to disconnect from the clip in the B area as shown in the diagram.
3. Remove the roof molding from the T-stud at section C.
4. Remove the roof molding.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION
1. Attach the roof molding to the T-stud at section A.
2. Hook the roof molding to clips B and press it in to attach.

3. Attach the roof molding to the T-stud at the rear portion of section A.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
2. Disconnect the windshield washer hose. (See WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE
4. Remove the weatherstrip.

5. Remove the cowl grille.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
c. Rear combination light (See REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
d. Rear splash shield (See SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Rear bumper (See REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Detach clips A by squeezing them from inside the vehicle, and remove the extractor chamber
from the body.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SPOILER REMOVAL
Small Type
1. While cutting the double-sided adhesive tape using a flathead screwdriver or a razor,
separate the rear spoiler from the trunk lid.
WARNING:
Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using
a razor.
CAUTION:
Do not scratches or damage the body paint when cut the double-sided adhesive
tape with a razor.
Affix protective tape to the trunk lid to prevent scratches or damage.
2. Detach the clips and remove the rear spoiler.
Large Type
2. Remove the rear spoiler.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION
Small Type
NOTE:
Double-sided adhesive tape has already been attached to the new rear spoiler.
WARNING:
1. When installing a new rear spoiler, follow the procedure below:
a. Remove the adhesive remaining on the body using razor.
b. Remove any grease or dirt from the adhesion surface of the body.
2. When reusing the rear spoiler, follow the procedure below:
a. Remove the adhesive remaining on the rear spoiler and the body using a razor.
b. Remove any grease or dirt from the adhesion surface of the rear spoiler and the
body.
c. Apply primer to the bonding area of the rear spoiler.
d. Attach double-sided adhesive tape to the rear spoiler as shown.
3. Peel off the backing of the double-sided adhesive tape.

4. Attach the clips and install the rear spoiler to the trunk lid.
Large Type
NOTE:
Clean the attaching surface of the trunk lid and remove grease.
1. Install the fastener to the trunk lid.
2. Install the gromet to the trunk lid.
3. Insert the fastener and the grommet into the pin.
4. Install the bolts.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION
1. Attach new clip B,C and D to the side step molding
2. Install the side step molding by pinning down the clip B,C and D.
3. Install the rivet A.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL
1. Remove the rivets A.
2. Remove the clip B in the direction of the arrow with using a fastener remover.
NOTE:
Keep the removed clip B half-placed for the later process.
3. Remove the clip B in the direction of the arrow with using a fastener remover.
NOTE:
Keep the removed clip B half-placed for the later process.
4. Slide the side step molding in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the clip B,C and D.
5. After removing the side step molding, remove the clip B,C and D from the body with using a
fastener remover.
6. Remove the side step molding.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Loosen the power outer mirror installation screws and move the mirror to access the front
end of the front beltline molding. (See POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. While partially peeling back the front beltline molding, detach tabs A along the direction (1)
4. Remove clip B and front beltline molding.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION
1. Remove any grease or dirt from the affixing surface of the door.
2. Cut away the unused portion along the dotted lines.
3. Peel off the backing paper and attach the door sash film onto the door as shown in the figure.
Standard clearance
a: 01.0 mm {00.03 in}
b: 3.05.0 mm {0.120.19 in}
c: 3.0 mm {0.19 in} or less
4. Peel off the transparent protective film on the door sash film.
5. Install the front beltline molding. (See FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL
1. Partially peel back the glass run channel.
2. Remove the front beltline molding. (See FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING
3. Warm up the door sash film using a hot air blower.
4. Peel off the door sash film by pulling outward from one end.
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the door sash film slowly, because it can easily tear.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Pull out the splash shield to uninstall it.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the screws A and fasteners B.
2. Remove fasteners C.
3. Remove fasteners D, F, G and screw E.
4. Remove the fasteners H to uninstall the front mud guard in the direction of the arrow.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FLOOR UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the bolts and fasteners.
2. Remove the floor under covers of each.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the floor under cover during removal.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front mudguard. (See FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the bolts A, B and fasteners.
3. Uninstall the aerodynamic under cover with keeping it from coming in contact with the front mudguard.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the aerodynamic under cover during removal.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DEFLECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the rivets.
2. Remove the fasteners A.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NOTE:
For vehicles with the audio unit, refer to the CENTER PANEL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. (See CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Remove the speaker grille. (See SPEAKER GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the shift lever knob. (MT) (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
4. Remove the console panel. (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8. Disconnect the hazard warning switch connector.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX
Side panel
(See SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Ventilator grille
(See VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Speaker grille
(See SPEAKER GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Center panel
(See CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Dashboard
5 (See DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
A-pillar trim
(See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Assist handle
(See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Glove compartment
Front side trim
(See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Console
10 (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See CONSOLE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
11
12
13
14
Column cover
Lower panel
(See LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Dashboard garnish
(See DASHBOARD GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Outer scuff plate
(See OUTER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Inner scuff plate
15
16
(See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Front door trim
(See FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Rear package trim

(See REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Rear pillar trim
(See REAR PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Tire house trim
(See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Rear door lower trim
10
Head impact pad

(See HEAD IMPACT PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Roof side trim
(See ROOF SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Rear door upper trim
(See REAR DOOR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Headliner
Sunvisor
(See SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Floor covering
(See FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Trunk lid trim

(See TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Trunk mat
(See TRUNK MAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Trunk end trim
(See TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Trunk side trim
(See TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait the one minute.
d. Front side trim (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Side panels (See SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Hood release lever (See HOOD LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Lower panel (See LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Knee bolster (See KNEE BOLSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Column cover (See COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. Center panel unit (See CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Steering shaft installation nuts (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
m. TCM (AT) (See TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [SJ6A-EL].)
n. A/C amplifier (See A/C AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) (See A/C
AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
o. Auto light/wiper control module (See AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
p. Door lock timer unit (See DOOR LOCK CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED
3. Remove the nuts.
1Nut
2Bolt A
3Bracket
4Bolt B
5Cap
6Bolt C
7Bolt D (See Dashboard Removal Note.)
WARNING:
Removing the dashboard without supporting it can be dangerous. The dashboard may fall and injure
you. Always perform the following procedure with at least another person.
5. Remove the dashboard.
6. Take the dashboard off from the front driver-side door opening.
Dashboard Removal Note

1. Loosen the front door hinge installation bolts. (See FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CAUTION:
Do not pull out the bolt completely. Otherwise, the front door may fall off and the lower hinge may get deformed
and damaged.
2. Half-open the door and pull out the bolt at both ends of the dashboard so that the bolt will not interfere with the
door.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
a. Instrument cluster (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Passenger-side air bag module (See PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Blower unit (See BLOWER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Speaker grill (See SPEAKER GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Center speaker (See CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. GPS antenna (Vehicles with car-navigation system) (See GPS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Dashboard garnish (See DASHBOARD GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Driver-side demister grille. (See VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Passenger-side demister grille. (See VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. Center panel (See CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Center ventilator grille (See VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
l. Information display (See INFORMATION DISPLAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Dashboard wiring harness

2Dashboard member
3Panel
4Dashboard
5Glove compartment damper
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the front side trim. (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Detach clips A and B, using a flathead screwdriver wrapped with protective tape.
4. Pull the side panel outward and detach tab C from the dashboard, then remove the side
panel.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Pull the stay damper in the direction shown in the figure, and detach the connecting part
between the glove compartment and the stay damper.
2. Press the stopper in and remove it.
3. Lower the glove compartment.

4. Detach the clips from the dashboard and remove the glove compartment.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the upper column cover.
3. Remove the ignition key illumination. (Vehicles with keyless entry system) (See IGNITION KEY
ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the lower column cover.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Pull the inner garnish outward and detach clip A.
3. Detach the tab.

4. Disconnect the front tweeter connector. (vehicles with Bose )
5. Remove the inner garnish.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Pull the upper part of the lower panel, and detach clips A.
2. Detach clips B from the dashboard and remove the lower panel.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the rear package trim. (See REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Detach clips A and remove the upper panel.
1 Screw A
2 Ashtray panel(SeeAshtray Panel Removal Note)
3 Cigarette lighter connector
4 Ashtray illumination(See ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
5 Storage compartment
6 Hole cover
7 Screw B
8 Rear console
9 Screw C
10Front console
11Screw D
12Under cover
Ashtray Panel Removal Note

1. Remove the ashtray panel using a flathead screwdriver wrapped with protective tape.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CONSOLE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Front Console
1Front console
2Side wall
Rear Console
1Rear console
2Glove compartment lid
3Console panel
4Front console box
5Rear console box
6Console cover
7Outer console lid
8Bracket
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
a. Weatherstrip (See GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Roof side trim (See ROOF SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Tire house trim (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Rear pillar trim (See REAR PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Map light (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. Sunvisor (See SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Assist handle (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the roof wiring harness connector and remove the roof wiring harness connector clip from the body.
3. Remove the fasteners.
4. Detach the tab from the roof panel and remove the headliner.
5. Take the headliner out from the opened passenger-side door.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Disconnect the vanity mirror illumination connector.

4. Remove the sunvisor.
5. Press the center adapter tabs in the directions of the arrows using two tape-wrapped flathead
screwdrivers and remove it.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the assist handle notch and remove the assist handle cover.
2. Pull the assist handle outward and remove it.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Partially peel back the seaming welt.
2. Pull the A-pillar trim shown in the figure in the direction of the arrow, raise clip B from its
grommet together with the A-pillar trim, and remove clips A at the same time.
3. Slide the A-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove the A-pillar
trim from clip B.
4. Rotate and pull clip B in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure until it is no longer
loose, and feels tight.
5. Pull clip B and remove it from the grommet.

6. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver between the body and the grommet.
7. Press the tabs and remove the grommet.

8. Install the new grommet to the body.
9. Install the new clip B to the A-pillar trim.
10. Install the A-pillar trim.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Detach the tab C.
4. Pull the front side trim in the direction of the arrow and detach clips A and locator pin B.
5. Detach the tab D, then remove the front side trim.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
If the pad installed to the inside of the front door trim is damaged it could cause looseness
resulting in the occurrence of abnormal noise. Be careful when handling the front door trim
so that it does not receive an impact by being hit or dropped.

2. Using a small flathead screwdriver, open the cap and remove the screw, then remove the
inner handle cover.

4. Using a flathead screwdriver, pry up the rear part of the switch panel and detach the clip.
6. Disconnect the power window main switch connector, the power mirror switch connector, and
the power window subswitch connector.
8. Detach clips A from the front door using a fastener remover.
9. Pull the front door trim upward, then detach tabs B from the front door.
10. Disconnect the courtesy light connector.
11. Remove the front door trim.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4. Pull the tire house trim outward and detach clips A and locator pins B.
5. Detach tabs C and remove the tire house trim.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the rear package side trim fasteners.
3. Pull the rear package side trim upward and detach clips A from the body.
4. Detach tabs B and pin C from the rear package center trim.
5. Detach tabs D from the body and remove the rear package side trim.
6. Pull the rear package center trim upward and detach clips A, tabs E, and locator pin F from
the body.
7. Detach tabs D from the body and remove the rear package center trim.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
b. Rear seat cushion (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Rear seat back (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Ashtray illumination bulb (See ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION BULB
f. Console (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Front side trim (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Tire house trim (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Seat belt rail (See FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove fasteners A, B, and C.
4. Detach clip D and remove the floor covering.
5. Take the floor covering out from the opened door.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the fasteners, then remove the trunk side trim.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the fasteners.
2. Pull the trunk end trim upward, then detach clips A, locator pins B, and tabs C.
3. Remove the trunk end trim.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. While supporting at point A, pull the handle in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
2. Remove the fasteners, then remove the trunk lid trim.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KNEE BOLSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the knee bolster.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drivers Side
3. Remove the instrument cluster. (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the dashboard garnish. (See DASHBOARD GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Pull the driver-side demister grille upward and detach clip A.
6. Pull the driver-side demister grille outward and remove it.

Passengers Side
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. and wait the one minute.
3. Remove the passenger-side air bag module. (See PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
4. Pull the passenger-side demister grille upward and detach clip A.
5. Pull the passenger-side demister grille outward and remove it.

Center
1. Remove the center panel. (See CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DASHBOARD GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the instrument cluster. (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Pull the dashboard garnish outward, and detach clips A.

6. Remove the dashboard garnish.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEAD IMPACT PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
a. Weatherstrip (See GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Tire house trim (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Rear pillar trim (See REAR PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Map light (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. Sunvisor (See SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Assist handle (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
l. Headliner (See HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the fastener.(Rear)
3. Pull the head impact pad outward and detach clips A and B.(Front)
4. Pull the head impact pad outward and detach clips B.(Rear)
5. Remove the head impact pad.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK MAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the fasteners A and bolts, then remove the tool box.
4. Remove the fasteners B, then remove the trunk mat.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DOOR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the grip cover, then remove screws A.
2. Using a small flathead screwdriver, open the cap and remove screw B.
3. Remove the cover while rotating it to the front.
4. Detach clips A, B, locator pins C, and tabs D from the rear door using a fastener remover.
5. Remove the rear door lower trim.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR DOOR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the upper anchor of the front seat belt. (See FRONT SEAT BELT
3. Pull the rear door upper trim outward and detach clips A, B and locator pins C from the body.
4. Remove the rear door upper trim.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the tire house trim. (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the cap using a fastener remover.(Vehicles with curtain air bags)
5. Remove the bolt. (Vehicles with curtain air bags)

6. Remove the fastener.
7. Detach clips A and locator pin B, using a fastener remover, and remove the rear pillar trim.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ROOF SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Pull the roof side trim outward, detach clips A, and then remove the roof side trim.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Pull the inner scuff plate upward, detach clips A from the body, and then remove the inner
scuff plate.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OUTER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Pull the outer scuff plate upward, detach clips A, B, and locator pin C from the body, and
then remove the outer scuff plate.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SPEAKER GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the clips A on the speaker grille. (SeeSpeaker Grille Removal Note.)
2. Pull out the speaker grille with the tab B at the core.
Speaker Grille Removal Note

1. Push the part (1), starting point, as shown in the figure.
2. Lift it up in the direction of the arrow (2), (3) and pull it out as shown in the figure.
3. Uninstall the speaker grill by lifting it up in the direction of (4).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LIGHTING SYSTEMS LOCATION INDEX
Ignition key illumination

(See IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Trunk compartment light
(See TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
High-mount brake light
(See HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
License plate light
4 (See LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Rear combination light

(See REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Rear auto leveling sensor
(See REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Courtesy light
(See COURTESY LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Door switch
8 (See DOOR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See DOOR SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Front auto leveling sensor

(See FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Back-up light switch
10 (See BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Auto light sensor

11 (See RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See RAIN SENSOR INITIALIZATION SETTING.)
12
Discharge headlight control module

(See DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SYSTEM INSPECTION.)
Front fog light
13
(See FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)
(See FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Front combination light
(See FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
14
(See HEADLIGHT AIMING.)

(See HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS.)
15
Front side turn light

(See FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Interior light
16 (See INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See INTERIOR LIGHT INSPECTION.)
Map light
17 (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See MAP LIGHT INSPECTION.)
18
Vanity mirror illumination

(See VANITY MIRROR ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
19
20
Glove compartment light

(See GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Auto leveling control module
(See AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
21
(See AUTO LIGHT ILLUMINATION LEVEL SETTING.)

(See AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.)
22
Ashtray illumination
(See ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Light switch
23
(See LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.)
(See FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Hazard warning switch
24 (See HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See HAZARD WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Combination switch
25 (See COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See COMBINATION SWITCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
26 (See FLASHER CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See FLASHER CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.)
Panel light control switch
27 (See PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the transmission. (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
1Back-up light switch connector

2Back-up light switch
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the back-up light switch connector.
2. Verify that the continuity between the back-up light switch terminals is as indicated in the
table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the back-up light switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT AIMING
1. Point the headlight beams to a wall and verify that the headlight beams are as shown in the figure.
2. Make a headlight adjustment screen as shown in the figure using double-weight, white paper.
3. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification.

4. Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat, level surface.
5. Seat one person in the drivers seat.
6. Line up the front fog lights with the white screen at a distance of 3 m {9.8 ft} apart.
7. Measure the height of the center of the headlight.
NOTE:
Since the height of the vehicle varies depending on the vehicle situation, measure the height of the center of
the headlight using the actual vehicle.
8. Adjust the center of the adjustment screen to the point 655 mm {25.8 in} from the center of the vehicle and the
measured height in the direction the headlight points, then affix the screen to the wall.
9. Start the engine and charge the battery.

10. Turn on the headlight low beams.
11. Block the light of the headlight which is not adjusted.
12. Verify that the elbow point of the headlight is at the position indicated by the adjustment screen.
If the elbow point of the head light is not positioned as indicated in the adjustment screen, align the elbow
point so that it is positioned as shown in the adjustment screen by turning the adjustment screw.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Low-beam
Halogen type

2. Remove the fasteners, then slightly bend back the front mudguard.
CAUTION:
A halogen bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated. If the
surface of the bulb is soiled, excessive heat will build up and the life of the bulb
will be shortened. When replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange, not the
glass.
5. Remove the socket, then remove the headlight bulb.
Discharge type
WARNING:
Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before
servicing the discharge headlights, always refer to the discharge headlight service
warnings. (See DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS.)
CAUTION:
The discharge headlight generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated. If
the surface of the discharge headlight is soiled, excessive heat will build up and
the life of the discharge headlight will be shortened. When replacing the
discharge headlight, hold the metal flange, not the glass.
5. Remove the discharge headlight.
High-beam
CAUTION:
A halogen bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated. If the
surface of the bulb is soiled, excessive heat will build up and the life of the bulb
will be shortened. When replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange, not the
glass.
4. Remove the headlight bulb.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before
servicing the discharge headlights, always refer to the discharge headlight service
warnings. (See DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS.)
2. Remove the front bumper. (SeeFRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Bolt A
2Bolt B
3Bolt C
4Cover
5Fastener
6Connector
7Front combination light

5. Adjust the headlight aiming. (SeeHEADLIGHT AIMING)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Push the front side turn light in the direction of the arrow (1) and pull it out.
3. Turn the front side turn light in the direction of the arrow (2).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Nut
2Connector
3Rear combination light
4Socket
5Rear turn light bulb

6Back-up light bulb
7Rear side marker light bulb
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
c. Rear combination light (SeeREAR COMBINATION LIGHT
d. Request switch (Vehicles with the advanced keyless system) (See REQUEST
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM].)
e. Detach the license plate light from the rear bumper.
f. Rear bumper (See REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the license plate light connector and remove the license plate light.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the map light. (See Map Light Removal Note.)

5. Remove the socket, then remove the map light bulb.
Map Light Removal Note

1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap between the headliner and the map
light.
2. Press the tab, and remove the map light.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MAP LIGHT INSPECTION
1. Remove the map light. (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Verify that the continuity between the map light terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the map light.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the lens. (See Lens Removal Note.)
3. Remove the interior light bulb.
4. Remove the interior light. (See Interior Light Removal Note.)

Interior Light Removal Note

1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap between the headliner and the
interior light.
2. Press the tab, and remove the interior light.
Lens Removal Note

1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole and pry with the screwdriver
in the direction shown by the arrow to remove the lens.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INTERIOR LIGHT INSPECTION
1. Remove the interior light. (See INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Verify that the continuity between the interior light terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the interior light.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the socket, then remove the glove compartment light bulb.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Connector
2Socket
3High-mount brake light bulb
4Nut
5High-mount brake light
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the front fog light cover.
4. Hold the back surface of the front fog light and lift it up as shown in the left diagram. Then
arc the front fog light as pull it out from the vehicle body with care not to contact the oil cooler.

7. Adjust the front fog light aiming. (See FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING
1. Point the front fog lights to a wall and verify that the front fog lights are as shown in the figure.
2. Make a front fog light adjustment screen as shown in the figure using double-weight, white paper.

4. Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat, level surface.
5. Seat one person in the drivers seat.
6. Line up the front fog lights with the white screen at a distance of 3 m {9.8 ft} apart.
7. Measure the height of the center of the fog light (the center of the fog light bulb).
NOTE:
Since the height of the vehicle varies depending on the vehicle situation, measure the height of the center of
the front fog light using the actual vehicle.
8. Adjust the center of the adjustment screen to the point 681.7 mm {26.84 in} from the center of the vehicle and the
measured height in the direction the headlight points, then affix the screen to the wall.
9. Start the engine so that the battery remains charged.

10. Turn the front fog lights on.
11. Place a partition screen in front of the fog light not being adjusted to block its light beam.
12. Verify that the brightness border line of the front fog light is at the position indicated on the adjustment screen.
If the brightness border line is not at the position indicated on the adjustment screen, perform the following
adjustment.
Turn up the mudguard.
Loosen the adjusting bolt and the screw.

Move the front fog light in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to adjust the
brightness border line to the position indicated on the adjustment screen.
Install the adjusting bolt and tighten the screw.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the front fog light. (See FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the front fog light bulb by turning it in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:
A halogen bulb generates extremely high heat when it is illuminated. If the surface of the
bulb is soiled, excessive heat will build up and the life of the bulb will be shortened. When
handling the bulb, hold the flange, not the glass.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Vehicles With Keyless Entry System

3. Remove the ignition key illumination bulb.
Vehicles With Advanced Keyless System

4. Remove the lens.
5. Remove the ignition key illumination bulb.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:
1. For vehicles with DSC, if the negative battery cable or the steering angle sensor connector
is disconnected, the stored initial position of the steering angle sensor will be cleared and
the DSC will not operate properly, making the vehicle unsafe to drive. Perform the steering
angle sensor initialization procedure after connecting the negative battery cable.
a. Driver-side air bag module (See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
b. Steering wheel (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Column cover (See COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Ignition key illumination (Vehicles with keyless entry system) (See IGNITION KEY
e. Clock spring (See CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the steering angle sensor connector. (Vehicles with DSC)

5. Remove the screws and then remove the combination switch.
7. Perform the steering angle sensor initialization procedure. (Vehicles with DSC) (See STEERING
ANGLE SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COMBINATION SWITCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
For vehicles with DSC: If the disc on the combination switch is deformed or has foreign
material adhering to it, performance of the steering angle sensor may be reduced, causing
abnormal operation. When handling the combination switch, be careful not to deform the
disc and make sure there is no foreign material on it.
1. Remove the combination switch. (See COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Screw
2Wiper and washer switch
3Light switch
4Body
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5. Remove the screws and then remove the light switch.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
Vehicle Without Auto Light System

2. Remove the ignition key illumination. (See IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION BULB
3. Remove the light switch. (See LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the continuity between the light switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
Headlight switch
If not as indicated in the table, replace the light switch.
Turn switch
Vehicle With Auto Light System

Headlight switch
Turn switch
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
The hazard switch is not reuseable since it is broken when disconnected from the hazard
switch knob. Do not remove the hazard swith except when replacing it.
c. Console panel (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Speaker grille (See SPEAKER GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Center panel (See CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the hazard switch knob.
5. Remove the hazard switch.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION
CAUTION:
The hazard switch is not reuseable since it is broken when disconnected from the hazard
switch knob. Do not remove the hazard swith except when replacing it.
h. Speaker grille (See SPEAKER GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Center panel (See CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Verify that the continuity between the hazard switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the center panel.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTO LIGHT ILLUMINATION LEVEL SETTING
1. Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2 connector.
Select Programming.
Select Programmable Parameters.
Select Exterior Lighting.
4. Select Low (Other) or Standard (Other) on the M-MDS to set the illumination level.
NOTE:
When the M-MDS is set to Low (Other), the auto-light sensor sensitivity
decreases, and the TNS and headlight illumination timing is slower.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOOR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Disconnect the connector and remove the door switch.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DOOR SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the door switch. (See DOOR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Verify that the continuity between door switch terminal and the body ground is as indicated in
the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the door switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS
Discharge Headlight Bulb Service Warnings

To prevent electrical shock when replacing the discharge headlight bulb, dry
hands thoroughly, and carry out work in an area out of rain.
When the light switch is on, approx. 25,000 V of high voltage passes through
the discharge headlight bulb socket. Because of the danger of electrical shock,
do not insert fingers or a tester.
When the headlights are on, high voltage flows around the socket and bulb.
When turning on the discharge headlights while working, always leave the
headlights in the vehicle-installed condition to prevent electrical shock.
Discharge Headlight Control Module Service Warnings

Because of the danger of electrical shock, when inspecting with a tester, do not
inspect the discharge headlight control module as a single unit or disassemble
it.
Discharge Headlight Control Module Reuse

If the discharge headlight control module is dented or damaged in any way,
replace the module with a new one to prevent electrical shock and improper
operation.
Although the control module may temporarily operate normally even though it
has received an impact, it is possible that the interior may have been damaged.
When reusing the control module, inspect the following items regarding
discharge headlight illumination to verify that there are no malfunctions.
Verify that the discharge headlights illuminate normally by
testing them several times under cold illumination (headlights
off for approx. 10 min or more and then turned on) and hot
illumination (headlights on for approx. 15 min or more, turned
off for approx. 1 min, and then turned on again) conditions.
Inspect the headlight illumination in the period from directly
after cold illumination until they are uniformly illuminated
(approx. 5 min) and verify that there is no flickering or
inconsistent brightness.
Turn on the headlights for approx. 30 min with normal condition
bulbs and verify that there is no brightness difference between
the right and left, and that illumination is consistent.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4. Remove the socket, then remove the front turn light bulb.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SYSTEM INSPECTION
Discharge headlight inoperative

WARNING:
Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before servicing the discharge
headlights, always refer to the discharge headlight service warnings. (See DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE
WARNINGS.)
Terminal layout
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OF DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT

YesGo to Step 6.
1 CONTROL MODULE
Disconnect the discharge headlight control module
connector.
Turn the headlight switch to the HEADLIGHT (LO)
position.
Measure the voltage at discharge headlight control
module connector (harness-side) terminal C.
INSPECT FUSE
Turn the headlight switch to the OFF position.
Remove the HEAD LOW R 15 A fuse (RH) or HEAD LOW
L 15 A fuse (LH).

Inspect the fuses.

3
INSPECT HEADLIGHT RELAY

Remove the headlight relay. (See RELAY LOCATION.)
Inspect the headlight relay. (See RELAY INSPECTION.)
Is the headlight relay normal?
INSPECT LIGHT SWITCH

Inspect the light switch. (See LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Is the light switch normal?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY AND

5 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL MODULE
Inspect for continuity between the following terminals:

No Replace the headlight relay. (See RELAY
LOCATION.)

No Replace the light switch. (See LIGHT SWITCH
No Replace the related wiring harness.
Battery (positive terminal) and

headlight relay (main fuse block
terminal A)
Headlight relay terminal 3A and HEAD
LOW R 15 A fuse (RH) terminal G
Headlight relay terminal 3A and HEAD
LOW L 15 A fuse (LH) terminal G
HEAD LOW R 15 A fuse (RH) terminal
H and discharge headlight control
module terminal C
HEAD LOW L 15 A fuse (LH) terminal F
and discharge headlight control module
terminal C
Are the wiring harnesses normal?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT
6 CONTROL MODULE AND GROUND
Inspect wiring harness between discharge headlight
control module terminal D and ground for following:
No Replace the related wiring harness.

Open circuit
Inspect the headlight relay. (See RELAY INSPECTION.)
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN DISCHARGE
7 HEADLIGHT BULB OR DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL
MODULE
Install any other discharge headlight bulb (low-beam).
YesSystem inspection completed.

No Replace the front combination light. (See FRONT
(See HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Connect the discharge headlight control module

connector.
Turn the headlight switch to the HEADLIGHT (LO)
position.
Does the headlight (low-beam) illuminate?
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the screw and then remove the auto leveling control module.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the lens, then remove the trunk compartment light bulb.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the ashtray panel. (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the socket, then remove the ashtray illumination bulb.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Connect the panel light control switch connector.
4. Disconnect the panel light control switch connector.
If the system does not work properly even though the parts or
related wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace
the panel light control switch.
Terminal
Signal
name
Connected to
Instrument
cluster
A
Illumination
F
Each
illumination
Measured
condition
Measured
Voltage
condition (V)/Continuity
Inspect using an
oscilloscope. (See
Terminals A and F
Inspection.)
Inspection item(s)
Instrument
cluster
Each
illumination
Related wiring
harnesses
Turn the light switch to
the TNS or ON position.
B
TNS
B+
(See RELAY
INSPECTION.)
TNS relay
Turn the light switch to
the OFF position.
TNS relay
1.0 or less
ILLUMI 10 A
fuse
Related wiring
harnesses
GND
GND
IG1
Body ground Under any condition
Ignition
switch
1.0 or less

to the ON position.
B+

to the ACC or LOCK
position.
1.0 or less
Related wiring
harnesses
Ignition switch
(See IGNITION
SWITCH
INSPECTION
[WITHOUT
ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND START
SYSTEM].)
Related wiring
harnesses
Dimmer
cancel
Turn the light

Instrument switch to the
cluster/center TNS or ON
panel module position.
Dimmer
cancel
switch is
on.
B+
Dimmer
cancel
switch is
off.
1.0 or less
Instrument
cluster
Center panel
module
Related wiring
harnesses
Terminals A and F Inspection

1. Measure the wave pattern of panel light control switch terminals A and F using an
oscilloscope.
Oscilloscope setting :
5 V/DIV (Y) , 5 ms/div (X) , DC range
2. Turn the light switch to the TNS or ON position.

3. Turn the panel light control switch to the brightest setting.
4. Verify that the wave pattern is as shown in the figure.
5. Turn the panel light control switch to the darkest position and verify that the wave pattern is
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the panel light control switch. (See Panel Light Control Switch Removal Note.)
Panel Light Control Switch Removal Note

1. Reach into the dashboard through the underside of the lower panel and, while pushing on the
tabs of the panel light control switch, pull it outward.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Connect three 1.5 V dry cell batteries in a series.
2. Connect the positive pole of the battery to auto leveling sensor terminal A, and the negative
pole to terminal D, then apply voltage of 4.5 V between terminals A and D.
3. Connect the tester as shown in the figure.
4. Verify that the voltage fluctuates linearly in the 0.5 to 4.1 V range while the links are moved
up and down slowly.
If not indicated in the graph, replace the rear auto leveling sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Jack up the vehicle and remove the wheel and tire.
4. Remove the bolts and nut, then remove the rear auto leveling sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

DRL AND AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
Vehicles With DRL
Vehicles Without DRL
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COURTESY LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the lens, then remove the courtesy light bulb.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

VANITY MIRROR ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the service hole and pry with the screwdriver
in the direction shown by the arrow to remove the lens.
3. Remove the vanity mirror illumination bulb.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Screw
2Connector
3Auto light/wiper control module
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION
1. Measure the voltage at the auto light/wiper control module terminals as indicated below.
Terminal Voltage List (Reference)
Terminal
1A*
Signal
RH
headlight
operation
(highbeam)
Connection
RH
headlight
(highbeam)
Test condition
Light switch at
HEAD position
DRL mode
Dimmer switch at
the high-beam
position
Voltage
(V)
Action
B+
Dimmer switch at 1.0 or

the low-beam
less
position
Approx
6.0
RH headlight
Related wiring
harnesses
1B*
LH
headlight
operation
(highbeam)
LH
headlight
(highbeam)
Light switch at
HEAD position
Dimmer switch at
the high-beam
position

the low-beam
less
position
Windshield wiper
switch at LO
position
Autostop
switch
signal
Autostop
switch
Ignition switch
at ON
1D
Windshield
wiper and Ignition switch
at ON
washer
switch
IG2
WIPER 30
A fuse
Ignition switch at LOCK or ACC

Windshield wiper
switch at HI
position
1F
Windshield
wiper
switch
signal (HI)
Windshield
at ON
washer
switch
B+
Windshield wiper 1.0 or

switch at OFF
less
position
1E
B+
Windshield wiper
1.0 or
switch at OFF
less
position
Windshield wiper
switch at LO
position
Windshield
wiper
switch
signal
(OFF)
LH headlight
Related wiring
harnesses
Approx
6.0
DRL mode
1C
B+
B+
1.0 or
less
B+

switch at OFF
less
Autostop
switch
(Windshield
wiper motor)
(See
WINDSHIELD
WIPER MOTOR
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
Windshield
wiper and
washer switch
(See
WINDSHIELD
WIPER AND
WASHER
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
WIPER 30 A
fuse
Related wiring
harnesses
Windshield
wiper and
washer switch
(See
WINDSHIELD
WIPER AND
WASHER
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
position
1G*
GND
GND
Under any condition

Windshield wiper
switch at AUTO
position
1H
1I*
Windshield
wiper
switch
signal
(AUTO)
Power
supply
Windshield
at ON
washer
switch
DRL 15 A
fuse
1J
1.0 or
less
B+

switch at OFF
less
position
Related wiring
harnesses
Windshield
wiper and
washer switch
(See
WINDSHIELD
WIPER AND
WASHER
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
DRL 15 A fuse
Constant
B+
Washer switch at
ON position
Washer
switch
signal
Related wiring
harnesses
Windshield
at ON
washer
switch
B+
Washer switch at 1.0 or

OFF position
less
Related wiring
harnesses
Windshield
wiper and
washer switch
(See
WINDSHIELD
WIPER AND
WASHER
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
1K*
1L*
LH
headlight
operation
(highbeam)
LH
headlight
(highbeam)
Ignition switch at
ON position
Light switch at
the OFF position
High-beam
Ignition switch
Light switch at ON
on/off
Ignition switch
LOCK or ACC
position
B+
1.0 or
less

high-beam
less
position
LH headlight
Related wiring
harnesses
Light switch
(See LIGHT
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Dimmer switch at
low-beam
position
2A
2B

DSC HU/CM
Vehicle
or ABS
speed
judgment by terminal voltage is
signal input HU/CM
not possible.
Windshield
Sensitivity wiper and Ignition switch
adjustment washer
at ON
volume
switch
Sensitivity
adjustment
volume turned
from + position
to - position
B+
Related wiring
harnesses
DSC HU/CM
ABS HU/CM
Related wiring
harnesses
0
0.8
1.5
1.9
2.2
Windshield
wiper and
washer switch
(See
WINDSHIELD
WIPER AND
WASHER
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
2C
IG1
METER 10
A fuse
Ignition switch at LOCK or ACC
B+
1.0 or
less
2D
Power
supply
ROOM 15 A Constant
fuse
2E
Wiper or
headlight
operation
request
Auto light
(Rain)
sensor

not possible.
2F
DLC-2
power
supply
DLC-2
Under any condition
B+
2G
TNS relay
operation
B+
Light switch at low-beam or high- Below

beam position
1.5
TNS relay
METER 10 A
fuse
Related wiring
harnesses
ROOM 15 A
fuse
Related wiring
harnesses
Auto light
(Rain) sensor
Related wiring
harnesses
Related wiring
harnesses
TNS relay (See
RELAY
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
Light switch at OFF
2H
2I
2J
2K
2L
2M
Auto light
(Rain)
sensor
operation
request
Auto light
(Rain)
sensor

not possible.
Light switch at
Front fog Front fog the headlight
light relay light relay position and
dimmer switch
on/off
at LO
Light switch at
Front fog Front fog the headlight
light switch light switch position and
dimmer switch
on/off
at LO
HEADLIGHT
HEADLIGHT
relay
operation relay
AUTO
switch
signal
B+
Front fog light

switch at ON
position
2.0 or
less
Front fog light

switch at OFF
position
B+
Front fog light

switch at ON
position
1.0 or
less
Front fog light

switch at OFF
position
B+
Light switch at high-beam position Below

1.5
Light switch at OFF or low-beam
position
Light switch at
AUTO position
TNS switch
Ignition switch
Light switch at ON
on/off
Auto light
(Rain) sensor
Related wiring
harnesses
FRONT FOG
LIGHT relay
(See RELAY
INSPECTION
Related wiring
harnesses
Light switch
(See LIGHT
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
HEADLIGHT
relay (See
RELAY
INSPECTION.)
B+
Related wiring
harnesses
1.0 or
less
Light switch
(See LIGHT
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
B+
Related wiring
harnesses
Light switch Ignition switch

at ON
Other
harnesses
Light switch at
low-beam or
high-beam
position
1.0 or
less
Light switch at
OFF position
B+
Light switch
(See LIGHT
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
2N
Headlight
switch
on/off
2O
GND
2P*
Parking
brake
switch
on/off
Ignition switch
Light switch at ON
GND
Parking
brake
switch
Light switch at
low-beam or
high-beam
position
1.0 or
less
Light switch at
OFF position
B+
Related wiring
harnesses
1.0 or
less
Related wiring
harnesses
Under any condition
Ignition switch
at ON
Parking brake
switch on
1.0 or
less
Parking brake
switch OFF
B+
Light switch
(See LIGHT
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Parking brake
switch
Related wiring
harnesses
For vehicles with DRL only.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT LEVELING ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Connector
2Cover
3Headlight leveling actuator
(SeeHeadlight Leveling Actuator Removal Note)

5. Adjust the headlight aiming. (See HEADLIGHT AIMING.)
Headlight Leveling Actuator Removal Note
1. Loosen the adjusting bolt until the headlight leveling actuator can be rotated.
2. Rotate the headlight leveling actuator to the position shown in the figure.
3. Loosen the adjusting bolt further and remove the headlight leveling actuator.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Jack up the vehicle and remove the wheel and tire.
4. Remove the bolts and then remove the front auto leveling sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Connect three 1.5 V dry cell batteries in a series.
2. Connect the positive pole of the battery to auto leveling sensor terminal A, and the negative
pole to terminal C, then apply voltage of 4.5 V between terminals A and C.
3. Connect the tester as shown in the figure.
4. Verify that the voltage fluctuates linearly in the 0.5 to 4.1 V range while the links are moved
up and down slowly.
If not indicated in the graph, replace the front auto leveling sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
NOTE:
The trunk compartment light switch is built into the trunk lock.
1. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the trunk compartment light switch connector.
3. Verify that the continuity between the trunk compartment light switch terminals is as indicated
in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the trunk lock.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FLASHER CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the screw and then remove the flasher control module.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FLASHER CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION
1. Remove the flasher control module with the connector still connected.
TerminalSignal name Connected

to
Measured condition
Voltage
(V)/Continuity
Power
supply
HAZARD Under any condition

15 A fuse
Flasher
control
module
output
Turn light switch

(LH) is on.
Alternates
Turn light
between 1.0 or
(LH)
Turn light
less and B+
flashes.
Hazard warning
(LH)
switch is on.
Except above
B+
1.0 or less
Inspection item(s)
HAZARD 15 A
fuse
Related wiring
harnesses
Turn light
(LH)
Related wiring
harnesses

ground.
Continuity
detected
GND
Body
ground
Flasher
control
module
output
Turn light switch

(RH) is on.
Alternates
Turn light
between 1.0 or
(RH)
less and B+
Turn light
flashes.
Hazard warning
(RH)
switch is on.
Hazard
Hazard
warning
warning
switch input switch
Except above
1.0 or less
Hazard warning switch is

on.
1.0 or less
Hazard warning switch is

off.
B+
GND
Turn light
(RH)
Related wiring
harnesses
Hazard
warning
switch
(See HAZARD
WARNING
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
Turn switch Turn

(RH) input switch
Turn
Turn the ignition
switch
switch to the ON
(RH) is
position.
on.
Except above
Turn switch Turn

(LH) input switch
Turn
Turn the ignition
switch
switch to the ON
(LH) is
position.
on.
Except above
Turn switch
B+
1.0 or less
(See LIGHT
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
Turn switch
B+
1.0 or less
< Previous Next >
(See LIGHT
SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the lens, then remove the license plate light bulb.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
1 Windshield washer hose

(See WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2 Rain sensor
(See RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See RAIN SENSOR INITIALIZATION SETTING.)
3 Windshield wiper motor
(See WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
(See WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION.)
4 Windshield wiper arm and blade
(See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT.)
5 Auto light/wiper control module
(See AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See AUTO LIGHT/WIPER CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.)
6 Windshield wiper and washer switch
(See WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION.)
7 Windshield washer nozzle
(See WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT.)
(See WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE CLEANING.)
8 Headlight cleaner nozzle
(See HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE REMOVAL.)
(See HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE INSTALLATION.)

9 Headlight cleaner actuator
(See HEADLIGHT CLEANER ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
10Headlight cleaner hose
(See HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11Headlight cleaner motor
(See HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR INSPECTION.)
12Windshield washer tank
(See WINDSHIELD WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
13Windshield washer motor
(See WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION.)
14Washer fluid-level sensor
(See WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION.)
15Headlight cleaner relay
(See HEADLIGHT CLEANER RELAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See HEADLIGHT CLEANER RELAY INSPECTION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION
3. Remove the windshield wiper and washer switch. (See WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the continuity between the windshield wiper and washer switch is as indicated in
the table.
Vehicles without auto wiper system
If not as indicated in the table, replace the windshield wiper and washer switch.
Vehicles with auto wiper system

If not as indicated in the table, replace the windshield wiper and washer switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
The reflection rate at the moment the ignition switch is first turned on after replacing the rain sensor with a new one is
stored as the condition indicating zero precipitation on the windshield. Therefore, before turning on the ignition switch,
remove water and dirt from the windshield.
In addition, rain sensor initialization is performed for the following cases: (See RAIN SENSOR INITIALIZATION SETTING.)
The windshield is replaced and the rain sensor is reused.
The auto wiper system operates incorrectly.
2. Insert the fastener remover wrapped with protective tape into the notch of the rain sensor cover. Then disconnect the tab A
by turning the fastener remover in the direction of the arrow.
3. Remove the rain sensor cover in the direction of the arrow A.
4. Disconnect the rain sensor connector.
5. Slide the tab B in the direction of the arrow and disconnect it while supporting the rain sensor with your hand.
6. Uninstall the rain sensor in the direction of the arrow.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Cap
2Nut
3Windshield wiper arm
(See Windshield Wiper Arm Installation Note.)
4Windshield wiper blade
5Rubber brush

3. Adjust the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
ADJUSTMENT.)
Windshield Wiper Arm Installation Note

1. Clean the windshield wiper arm connector shafts using a wire brush before installing the
windshield wiper arms.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT
1. Operate the windshield wipers, and turn off the windshield wiper motor to set the wipers in
the park position.
2. Adjust the windshield wiper arm connector shafts to set the arm heights as shown.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the cowl grille. (See COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the bolts. Move the windshield wiper motor in the direction of the arrow, remove the
securing dowel from the bracket, then remove the windshield wiper motor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
5. Detach the connecting part between the windshield wiper motor and the windshield wiper
link.
6. Remove the screws, then remove the windshield wiper motor.

8. Adjust the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
ADJUSTMENT.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor connector.
2. Connect battery positive voltage to windshield wiper motor terminal A or B, and ground to
terminal D, then verify that the windshield wipers operate as shown in the table.
If the windshield wipers do not operate as indicated in the table, replace the
windshield wiper motor.
3. Operate the wipers, disconnect battery positive voltage from terminal B, and then verify that
the wipers stop.
4. Connect windshield wiper motor terminals E and A, and apply battery positive voltage to
terminal C.
5. Operate the wipers at low speed, and verify that they stop in the park position.
If there is any malfunction, replace the windshield wiper motor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the washer tank. (See WINDSHIELD WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the washer fluid-level sensor.

5. Remove the grommet.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION
2. Inspect for continuity between the washer fluid-level sensor terminals using an ohmmeter.
If not as specified, replace the washer fluid-level sensor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the windshield washer hose from the windshield washer nozzle. (See WINDSHIELD
WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Squeeze the tabs of the windshield washer nozzle.
4. Pull the windshield washer nozzle out to remove it.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Disconnect joint pipe A, then remove windshield washer hose A from clip A.

4. Remove clips B.
5. Disconnect joint pipe B, then remove windshield washer hose A.
6. Disconnect windshield washer hose B from the washer nozzle, then remove windshield washer
hose B.
7. Disconnect joint pipe C, then remove windshield washer hose C.
8. Remove windshield washer hose D from clips C.
9. Disconnect windshield washer hose D from the washer nozzle, then remove windshield washer
hose D.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the windshield washer tank. (See WINDSHIELD WASHER TANK
3. Remove the windshield washer motor, then remove the grommet.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION
3. Connect battery positive voltage to windshield washer motor terminal A and terminal B to
ground.
4. Verify that the windshield washer motor operates normally.

If there is any malfunction, replace the windshield washer motor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT CLEANER ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the headlight cleaner nozzle. (See HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE REMOVAL.) (See
HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE INSTALLATION.)
4. Squeeze the clip tabs and slide the clip in the direction of the arrow.
5. Disconnect headlight cleaner hose from the headlight cleaner actuator.
6. Remove the screw, then remove the headlight cleaner actuator.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Disconnect joint pipe.
4. Disconnect headlight cleaner hose from the headlight cleaner actuator.

5. Remove the headlight cleaner hose from the front bumper.
Headlight Cleaner Hose Installation Note

1. Attach the center mark area of the head light cleaner hose to the center clip of the mesh grill.
2. Install the headlight cleaner hose as shown in the figure.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR INSPECTION
3. Connect battery positive voltage to headlight cleaner motor terminal A and terminal B to
ground.
4. Verify that the headlight cleaner motor operates normally.

If there is any malfunction, replace the headlight cleaner motor.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4. Remove the headlight cleaner motor, then remove the grommet.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE INSTALLATION
1. Install the headlight cleaner nozzle by pushing it in until a click is heard.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE REMOVAL
1. Pull out the headlight cleaner nozzle.
2. While pushing the tab with a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, remove the headlight
cleaner nozzle.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE CLEANING
CAUTION:
When cleaning the washer nozzle, use a thinner rod than the nozzle hole to prevent
internal damage. If the inside of the washer nozzle is deformed or damaged, the washer
fluid may not spray normally.
1. Clean the washer nozzle by inserting and moving a needle or an equivalent tool back and
forth.
If the nozzle becomes clogged again after cleaning, remove the hose from
washer nozzle. Make sure there is enough washer fluid. Then turn the washer
switch on and flush the inside of the hose.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Vehicles With The Headlight Cleaner

2. Disconnect the windshield washer motor connector.
3. Disconnect the headlight cleaner motor connector.

4. Disconnect the headlight cleaner relay connector.
5. Disconnect the windshield washer hose from joint pipe A.
6. Disconnect the headlight cleaner hose from joint pipe B.
7. Remove the bolts, then remove the windshield washer tank.
Vehicles Without The Headlight Cleaner

2. Disconnect the windshield washer motor connector.
3. Disconnect the windshield washer hose from joint pipe A.

4. Remove the bolts, then remove the windshield washer tank.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION:
If the nozzle is adjusted by inserting a needle or similar thin tool into the washer nozzle, it
could deform or damage the injection nozzle and the washer fluid may not spray normally.
1. Press the washer nozzle projection in the direction of the arrow and adjust the area where the
washer fluid is sprayed to within the specification.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4. Disconnect the windshield wiper and washer switch connector.
5. Remove the screws, then remove the windshield wiper and washer switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT CLEANER RELAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the nuts, then remove the headlight cleaner relay.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HEADLIGHT CLEANER RELAY INSPECTION
1. Remove the headlight cleaner relay with the connector still connected.
2. Measure the voltage at each terminal (other than terminal F).
4. Verify that continuity at terminal F is as indicated in the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference).
the headlight cleaner relay.
Terminal
Signal
name
Connected
to
Measured condition
Voltage
(V)/Continuity
Alternates
Headlight cleaner activated
between 1.0
(auto-operation or manual
or less and
operation activated)
B+
Inspection item(s)
Headlight relay
(See RELAY
INSPECTION.)
Windshield wiper
and washer switch
(See WINDSHIELD
WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Headlight Headlight
cleaner
cleaner
motor
motor
output
Except above
B+
Headlight cleaner
motor (See
HEADLIGHT
CLEANER MOTOR
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
Turn the
washer
switch to the
OFF position.
D
Windshield Windshield Turn the

wiper and ignition
washer
switch to the
washer
motor
ON position. Turn the
switch
output
washer
switch to the
ON position.
Light switch at ON
position.
E
Headlight relay
1.0 or less
B+
GND
Windshield wiper
and washer switch
(See WINDSHIELD
WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Related wiring
harnesses
B+
Headlight relay
(See RELAY
INSPECTION.)
Headlight
Headlight relay
Body
ground
(See RELAY
INSPECTION.)
Except above
1.0 or less

ground.
Continuity
detected
< Previous Next >
Related wiring
harnesses
GND
Related wiring
harnesses
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

RAIN SENSOR INITIALIZATION SETTING
CAUTION:
Rain sensor initialization is performed when it is newly replaced and when its previously
programmed setting is modified due to the reflection rate change caused by the
replacement of the windshield.
NOTE:
The reflection rate at the moment the ignition switch is first turned on after replacing the
rain sensor with a new one is stored as the condition indicating zero precipitation on the
windshield. Therefore, before turning on the ignition switch, remove water and dirt from
the windshield.
Reinitialize the rain sensor in the following cases.
When the front window glasses are replaced while the rain sensor is
reused.
When the auto wiper system malfunction occurs.
1. Remove water and dirt from the windshield surface.
3. Turn the windshield wiper switch to the AUTO position.
4. Perform the windshield wiper switch operation (AUTOOFFAUTO) five times within 10 s
after turning the ignition switch to the ON position.The windshield wiper will operate once at low
speed when the reinitialization setting is performed correctly.
CAUTION:
If the operation is too fast, the windshield wiper switch position cannot be
detected and the reinitialization may not be performed. Operate the windshield
wiper switch one cycle every 1 s.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ENTERTAINMENT LOCATION INDEX
Audio System
1 AM/FM antenna feeder No.1

(See ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION.)
(See AM/FM ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 INSTALLATION.)
(See AM/FM ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 INSPECTION.)
2 AM/FM antenna feeder No.2

(See AM/FM ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 INSTALLATION.)
(See AM/FM ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 INSPECTION.)
3 Glass antenna
(See GLASS ANTENNA INSPECTION.)
4 SIRIUS satellite radio antenna
(See SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA INSPECTION.)
5 SIRIUS satellite radio antenna feeder
(See SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA FEEDER INSTALLATION.)
(See SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA FEEDER INSPECTION.)
6 SIRIUS satellite radio unit
(See SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7 Rear speaker
(See REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION.)
8 Rear tweeter (with Bose )
(See REAR TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See REAR TWEETER INSPECTION.)
9 Condenser
10Audio control switch
(See AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11Front tweeter
(See FRONT TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See FRONT TWEETER INSPECTION.)

12 AUDIOPILOT microphone (with Bose )
(See AUDIOPILOT MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
13Brake light noise filter
(See NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See NOISE FILTER INSPECTION.)
14Center panel unit
15 Center speaker (with Bose )
(See CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CENTER SPEAKER INSPECTION.)
16Cigarette lighter
(See CIGARETTE LIGHTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See CIGARETTE LIGHTER INSPECTION.)
17Front door speaker
(See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION.)
18Accessory socket
(See ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See ACCESSORY SOCKET INSPECTION.)
19Auxiliary jack
(See AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See AUXILIARY JACK INSPECTION.)
20HF/TEL unit (with hands-free telephone (HF/TEL) system)
(See HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
21Rear defroster noise filter
(See NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

(See NOISE FILTER INSPECTION.)
22 Audio amplifier (with Bose )
(See AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Car-navigation System
1Center panel unit

2Microphone
(See MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3GPS antenna
(See GPS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NOTE:
For vehicles with the cruise control system, the audio control switch harness and the cruise control switch
harness are united, therefore they cannot be separated.
2. Remove the driver-side air bag module.(See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the steering wheel.(See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Screw (with steering shift switch)

2Bracket (with steering shift switch)
3Steering shift switch
4Screw
5Cover
6Screw
7Audio control switch

8Audio control switch (with steering shift switch)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION
2. Remove the driver-side air bag module.(See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the steering wheel.(See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify the resistance and continuity between the audio control switch terminals.
If the resistance and continuity are not as indicated in the tables, replace the audio control
switch.
5. Apply battery positive voltage to audio control switch terminal E, and connect terminal D to ground.
6. Verify that the LED illuminates.

If the LED does not illuminate, replace the audio control switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the hole cover. (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Accessory socket
(See Accessory Socket Removal Note.)
2Cap
(See Cap Removal Note.)
Accessory Socket Removal Note

1. Remove the accessory socket in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while
opening the caps in the direction of the arrow (1) using a tape-wrapped fastener remover.
Cap Removal Note

1. Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the cap
tabs in the direction of the arrow (1).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ACCESSORY SOCKET INSPECTION
3. Connect a tester as shown in the figure and verify that there is continuity.
If the continuity cannot be verified, replace the accessory socket.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CENTER PANEL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When installing the center panel unit, make sure that the wiring harness and antenna feeder are not
caught between the unit and dashboard. If the wiring harness or the antenna feeder is caught between the
unit and dashboard, it may cause malfunctions.
With audio unit
With car-navigation unit
1Bolt
2Screw
3Center panel unit
(See Center Panel Unit Removal Note.)
4Connector
5Antenna feeder
Center Panel Unit Removal Note

1. Detach the clips from the dashboard while pulling the center panel unit outward, and then remove the center
panel unit.
With audio unit
With car-navigation unit
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CENTER PANEL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
When disassembling the center panel unit, it could get scratched if it is placed directly on the ground.
When disassembling the center panel unit, spread a soft cloth underneath to perform the work.
With Audio Unit

1Screw
2Bracket
3Screw
5Screw
6Audio unit
7Knob
8Center panel

1Screw
2Bracket
3Screw
5Car-navigation unit
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
e. Rear package side trim (See REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Rear package center trim (See REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Bolt
2Audio amplifier
3Connector
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Screw
2Microphone
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GPS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
e. Side panel (See SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Lower panel (See LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Knee bolster (See KNEE BOLSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Column cover (See COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Steering shaft installation nut (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Dashboard (See DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Screw
2Clip A
3Clip B
4GPS antenna
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION
NOTE:
The antenna feeder is integrated with the vehicle wiring harness.
When installing a new antenna feeder, secure it to the vehicle wiring harness along the installation route of the old
antenna feeder.
1AM/FM antenna feeder No.1

2AM/FM antenna feeder No.2
3SIRIUS satellite radio antenna feeder
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Without Bose
1Screw
2Front door speaker
(See Front door speaker installation note.)
3Connector
Front door speaker installation note
1. Installation the speaker with the wiring harness passing through the groove of the front door
unit.
CAUTION:
If the speaker is installed with the wiring harness out of the groove, an open
circuit in the wiring harness could occur.
With Bose
1Screw
2Front door speaker

3Connector
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION
3. Remove the front door speaker. (See FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify the resistance between front door speaker terminals.
Without Bose
With Bose
If the resistance is not within the specification, replace the front door speaker.
Resistance
Without Bose : 4 ohms
With Bose : 2 ohms
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Screw
2Rear speaker
3Connector
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION
g. Rear speaker (See REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the resistance between rear speaker terminals.
If the resistance is not within the specification, replace the rear speaker.
Resistance
Without Bose : 4 ohms
With Bose : 1.8 ohms
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4. Remove the front tweeter.

< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FRONT TWEETER INSPECTION
3. Remove the front tweeter. (See FRONT TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify the resistance between front tweeter terminals.
If the continuity is as indicated in the table, replace the front tweeter.

Resistance
3.8 ohms
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR TWEETER INSPECTION
f. Rear tweeter (See REAR TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the resistance between rear tweeter terminals.
If the continuity is as indicated in the table, replace the rear tweeter.

Resistance
3.8 ohms
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

REAR TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Screw
2Rear tweeter
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

1Bolt
2Connector
3Condenser
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CIGARETTE LIGHTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Cigarette lighter plug

2Socket
(See Socket Removal Note.)
3Ring
(See Ring Removal Note.)
Socket Removal Note

1. Remove the socket in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while opening the
rings in the direction of the arrow (1) using a tape-wrapped fastener remover.
Ring Removal Note

1. Remove the ring in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the ring
tabs in the direction of the arrow (1).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CIGARETTE LIGHTER INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position.
2. Press the cigarette lighter into the socket and verify that it returns to its original position in
1020 s .
If the cigarette lighter does not operate normally, replace the cigarette lighter
and the socket.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Screw
2Center speaker
3Connector
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CENTER SPEAKER INSPECTION
3. Remove the center speaker. (See CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify the resistance between center speaker terminals.
If the resistance is not within the specification, replace the center speaker.
Resistance
3.6 ohms
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

GLASS ANTENNA INSPECTION
AM/FM
1. Inspect the glass antenna for damage.
2. Verify the continuity between the glass antenna terminals.
If there is any malfunction, repair the glass antenna.(See FILAMENT REPAIR.)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUDIOPILOT MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NOTE:
AUDIOPILOT is a registered trademark of Bose Corporation.
3. Remove the Knee bolster. (See KNEE BOLSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Connector
2Screw
3AUDIOPILOT microphone
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Brake Light Noise Filter

NOTE:
The brake light noise filter is integrated with the vehicle wiring harness.
Rear Defroster Noise Filter

3. Remove the bolt.

5. Remove the rear defroster noise filter.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

NOISE FILTER INSPECTION
Brake Light Noise Filter

3. Verify the resistance and continuity between the brake light noise filter terminals.
If the resistance is not as indicated in the table, replace the vehicle wiring
harness.
Rear Defroster Noise Filter


g. Rear defroster noise filter (See NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the resistance and continuity between the rear window defroster noise filter terminals.
If the resistance is not as indicated in the table, replace the rear window
defroster noise filter.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Nut
2Clip
3HF/TEL unit
4Connector
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

h. Inner scuff plate (LH) (See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Front side trim (LH) (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
If not as indicated in the table, replace the AM/FM antenna feeder No.1.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

a. Inner scuff plate (LH) (See INNER SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Front side trim (LH) (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
c. Rear seat (LH) (See REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Tire house trim (LH) (See TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
e. Rear pillar trim (LH) (See REAR PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the fasteners, then slightly bend back the headliner.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the AM/FM antenna feeder No.2.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the auxiliary jack in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing
the auxiliary jack tabs in the direction of the arrow (1).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

AUXILIARY JACK INSPECTION
3. Remove the auxiliary jack. (See AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Connect a commercially-available nonresistant plug to the auxiliary jack.
5. Verify that the continuity between the auxiliary jack terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the auxiliary jack.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CAUTION:
If the antenna feeder is installed with tension on the cable and wiring harness it could result in loosening of the
connection areas and poor contact. When installing and connecting the antenna feeder, always make sure there is
slack on the cable and wiring harness.
NOTE:
When installing a new antenna feeder, secure it to the vehicle wiring harness along the installation route of the old
antenna feeder.
c. Console (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
d. Glove compartment (See GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Front side trim (See FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
g. Side panel (See SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
h. Lower panel (See LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Knee bolster (See KNEE BOLSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. Column cover (See COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Steering shaft installation nut (See STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
m. Dashboard (See DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Align and secure the new AM/FM antenna feeder No.1 to the vehicle wiring harness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA FEEDER INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
If the antenna feeder is installed with tension on the cable and wiring harness it could
result in loosening of the connection areas and poor contact. When installing and
connecting the antenna feeder, always make sure there is slack on the cable and wiring
harness.
NOTE:
When installing a new antenna feeder, secure it to the vehicle wiring harness along the
installation route of the old antenna feeder.
a. Sunroof seaming welt (with sunroof)
e. A-pillar trim (See A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
i. Map light (See MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
j. Interior light (See INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
k. Sunvisor (See SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
l. Assist handle (See ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
m. Headliner (See HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
n. Trunk end trim (See TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
o. Trunk side trim (RH) (See TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

3. Align and secure the new SIRIUS satellite radio antenna feeder to the vehicle wiring harness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the trunk side trim. (RH) (See TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Screw
2Bolt
3Connector
4SIRIUS satellite radio unit
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

CAUTION:
If the antenna feeder is installed with tension on the cable and wiring harness it could
result in loosening of the connection areas and poor contact. When installing and
connecting the antenna feeder, always make sure there is slack on the cable and wiring
harness.
NOTE:
When installing a new antenna feeder, secure it to the vehicle wiring harness along the
installation route of the old antenna feeder.
3. Align and secure the new AM/FM antenna feeder No.2 to the vehicle wiring harness.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA FEEDER INSPECTION
e. Trunk end trim (See TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Trunk side trim (RH) (See TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the fasteners, then slightly bend back the headliner.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna
feeder.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1Connector
2Nut
3SIRIUS satellite radio antenna
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA INSPECTION
n. SIRIUS satellite radio antenna (See SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
3. Verify that there is no continuity between the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna terminals A and
C using an ohmmeter.
4. Inspect for continuity between the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna terminals using an
ohmmeter.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the SIRIUS satellite radio antenna.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
1. Verify that the continuity between the ignition switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the ignition switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS
1Connector
2Screw
3Ignition switch
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

RELAY INSPECTION
Relay type
Terminal type
Part name
Main relay
TNS relay
ACC relay
Front fog light relay
Drive-by-wire relay
Type A

A/C relay
4 terminals
Blower relay
Fuel pump relay
Horn relay
Ignition relay
Starter relay
Type B
Headlight relay
Air pump relay
5 terminalsType CCooling fan relay No.2
Type A
1. Verify the continuity between the relay terminals.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay.
Type B
Type C
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUSE SERVICE CAUTIONS
CAUTION:
Determine and correct the cause of the burnt fuse before replacing it with the specified
type. If the fuse is replaced before doing this, it may burn again.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table (Reference),
the steering lock unit.
Terminal
Signal name
Push switch
signal
Connected to
Keyless control
module
Measured condition
Voltage
(V)
Start knob pressed
B+
Start knob released
1.0 or
less
Inspection item(s)
Keyless
control
module
Related
wiring
harnesses
Fuse
B
Power supply
Key reminder
switch signal
Fuse
Keyless control
module
Under any condition
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
Key inserted
B+
Keyless
control
module
Key removed
1.0 or
less
Related
wiring
harnesses
Fuse
Power supply
Fuse
Under any condition
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
Fuse
Power supply
Fuse
Under any condition
Ignition switch off and

driver-side door opened.
F
Ignition key
Ignition key
illumination signal illumination bulb
30 s or more after driverside door closed.
B+
1.0 or
less
B+
Related
wiring
harnesses
Ignition
key
illumination
bulb
Related
wiring
harnesses
Serial
communication
Keyless control
module
Because this terminal is for communication good/no good

GND
Body ground
Under any condition
1.0 or Related wiring harnesses

less
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

RELAY LOCATION
1 Trunk lid opener relay
2 Cooling fan relay No.5

3 Cooling fan relay No.4
4 Air pump relay
5 ACC relay
6 Horn relay
7 Front fog light relay
8 Drive-by-wire relay
9 Main relay
10Headlight relay
11Starter relay
12Ignition relay
13TNS relay
14Cooling fan relay No.2
15A/C relay
16Rear window defroster relay
18Seat warmer relay
19Fuel pump relay
21Blower relay
22Fuel pump speed control relay
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

POWER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
1Main fuse block

(See MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See RELAY LOCATION)
(See RELAY INSPECTION)
2Ignition switch
(See IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM])
(See IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM])
3Key reminder switch
(See KEY REMINDER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM])
(See KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START
SYSTEM])
4Steering lock unit

(See STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM])
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEY REMINDER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM]
3. Disconnect the key reminder switch connector.
4. Remove the key reminder switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND START SYSTEM]
1. Verify that the continuity between the key reminder switch terminals is as indicated in the
table.
If not as indicated in the table, replace the key reminder switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the main fuse block cover.
1Connector
2Nut
3Bolt
(See Bolt Removal Note.)
4Main fuse
Bolt Removal Note
1. Press the tabs in the direction indicated by the arrows, lift the main fuse block, and then
remove the bolt.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION
NOTE:
If the instrument cluster is replaced with a new one, the odometer data (total traveled
distance) from the previous instrument cluster cannot be copied.
Select the Programming.
2. Select IC.
If a DTC (s) is detected, perform the applicable DTC inspection. (See DTC
TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION
Speedometer
Using the input/output check mode
1. Inspect the speedometer by setting it to check code 12 of the input/output check mode. (See
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE.)
Using a speedometer tester

2. Using a speedometer tester, verify that the tester reading is as indicated in the table below.
Speedometer tester indication (km/h)Allowable range (km/h)
20
1921
40
3941
60
5961
80
7981
100
99101
120
119121
140
139141
Speedometer tester indication (mph)Allowable range (mph)

10
911
20
1921
30
2931
40
3941
50
4951
70
6971
80
7882
3. Verify that the speedometer reading is within the range indicated in the table.
If the speedometer does not move or the indication is not within the allowable
range, inspect the PCM, ABS HU/CM (vehicles with ABS), DSC HU/CM (vehicles
with DSC) and related wiring harnesses.
If the ABS HU/CM (vehicles with ABS), DSC HU/CM (vehicles
with DSC) and related wiring harnesses are normal, replace the
instrument cluster.
Tachometer
1. Inspect the tachometer by setting it to check code 13 of the input/output check mode. (See
Using M-MDS
CAUTION:
If the engine speed exceeds the allowable range, the engine could be damaged.Therefore,
when inspecting the tachometer, do not allow the engine speed to exceed the allowable
range indication on the tachometer.
2. Compare the data monitor item (RPM) with the tachometer indication.
If the tachometer does not operate properly, inspect the PCM and related wiring
harnesses.
If the PCM and related harnesses do not have any malfunction,
replace the instrument cluster.
Variable red zone
2. Measure the engine coolant temperature using the PCM data monitor item ECT.
3. Verify that the variable red zone is displayed according to the table.
Range of variable red zone

6AT
6MT
5,000 rpm
5,000 rpm
40 C {104 F} or more and less than 70 C {158 F} 6,500 rpm
7,000 rpm
70 C {158 F} or more
9,000 rpm
Less than 40 C {104 F}
7,500 rpm
If the variable red zone is not displayed normally, verify if the PCM and
instrument cluster DTCs are output using the M-MDS.
If any DTCs are output, perform the corresponding DTC
inspection.
If any DTC is not output, replace the instrument cluster.
Fuel gauge
1. Inspect the fuel gauge by setting it to check code 23 of the input/output check mode. (See
Using M-MDS
2. Measure the fuel amount in the fuel tank using the PCM data monitor item FLI.
3. Verify that the Fuel gauge is displayed according to the table.

M-MDS display
Fuel gauge display position
100%
Fuel gauge needle is at F position
50%
Fuel gauge needle is at middle position
0%
Fuel gauge needle is at E position
If the fuel gauge does not operate or the indication is not within the allowable
range, inspect the fuel gauge sender unit and its related wiring harnesses.
If the fuel gauge sender unit and the related wiring harnesses
do not have any malfunction, replace the instrument cluster.
Water temperature gauge
1. Inspect the water temperature gauge by setting it to check code 25 of the input/output check
mode. (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE.)
Using M-MDS
2. Measure the engine coolant temperature using the PCM data monitor item ECT.
3. Verify that the Water temperature gauge is displayed according to the table.
Water temperature gauge needle display position
Less than 50 C {122 F} Water temperature gauge needle is a C position

70110 C
{158230 F}
Water temperature gauge needle is at center position
If the water temperature gauge does not operate or the indication is not within
the allowable range, inspect the PCM, engine coolant temperature sensor, and
If the PCM, engine coolant temperature sensor and related
wiring harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the
instrument cluster.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When replacing the instrument cluster, the configuration procedure must be performed
before removing the instrument cluster.Replacing the instrument cluster without performing
the configuration procedure will result in system malfunction.
1. Perform the instrument cluster configuration when replacing it. (See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CONFIGURATION.)
5. Pull the instrument cluster outward and remove it.

CAUTION:
The removed instrument cluster should be placed with the display side up to
prevent grease from leaking from the meters.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Slightly bend back the mudguard.
1Connector
2Bolt
3Horn
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. LOCATION INDEX
1Information display
(See INFORMATION DISPLAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See INFORMATION DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE)
2Instrument cluster
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION)
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION)
(See INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE)
(See INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING PROCEDURE)
3Horn
(See HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
4Coolant level switch
(See COOLANT LEVEL SWITCH INSPECTION)
5Oil pressure switch
(See OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION)
6Oil level switch
(See OIL LEVEL SWITCH INSPECTION)
7Fuel gauge sender unit
(See FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION)
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Verify that the oil pressure warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is at the ON
position.
2. Verify that the oil pressure warning light goes off when the engine is started.
If the oil pressure warning light does not illuminate or remains illuminated,
inspect the related wiring harness.
If the related wiring harness are normal, inspect the oil
pressure. (See OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION [13B-MSP].)
If the oil pressure is normal, replace the oil
pressure switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INFORMATION DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE
NOTE:
In this mode, it is possible to verify the items in the following chart.
Check Code Table
Check
code
01
Check item
Information display
Related items
CAN system
DTC U2516: CAN system communication error
CAN system
02
Audio unit
DTC U0184: Communication error to audio unit
DTC U0164: Communication error to climate control

unit
04
Light switch
06
Ignition switch
07
Dimmer cancel switch (Instrument

cluster)
LCD
TNS relay
Light switch
Ignition switch
Instrument cluster
LCD
NOTE:
The check codes are displayed in numerical order. (While performing the inspection, if you want to
inspect a check code with a number smaller than the code number you are currently inspecting,
terminate the check mode then repeat the inspection from the beginning.)
Check Code Inspection
Check code 01
Check code 01
CAN system
DISPLAY
ACTION
CAN system of information display is normal.
CAN system communication error. (DTC U2516) (See FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM].)
Check code 02
Communication status to audio unit
Check code 02
Communication status to climate control unit
INSPECTION CONDITION
DISPLAY
If there is a malfunction, the diagnostic results are

displayed once each in the order of audio unit and
climate control unit.
ACTION
All communications are normal.
Communication to audio unit is

normal.
Audio
unit
Communication error to audio

unit.
(DTC U0184) (See FOREWORD
[MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM].)
Vehicle without audio unit.
Communication to climate control

unit is normal.
Climate
control
unit
Communication error to climate

control unit. (DTC U0164) (See
FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
Check code 04
Check code 04
STEP
1 Turn the light switch to the ON

position.
TNS ON/OFF signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
Verify that the voltage of information display terminal C is B+.

If the voltage is as specified, replace the information
display.
If the voltage is not as specified, inspect the following
parts:
Light switch
TNS relay
Wiring harness (Light switchTNS
relayinformation display)
2 Turn the light switch off.
Verify that the voltage of the information display terminal C is 1.0 V or

less.
display.
If the voltage is not as specified, inspect the following
parts:
Light switch
TNS relay
Wiring harness (Light switchTNS
relayinformation display)
Input signal to the information display is normal.
Check code 06
Check code 06
Ignition switch ON/OFF signal
STEP
DISPLAY

ON position.
ACTION
Verify that the voltage of information display terminal E is B+.

display.
If the voltage is not as specified, inspect the
following parts:
Ignition switch
Wiring harness (Batteryignition
switchinformation display)
ACC position.
Verify that the voltage of the information display terminal E is 1.0 V

or less.
display.
following parts:
Ignition switch
Wiring harness (Batteryignition
switchinformation display)
Check code 07
Check code 07
STEP
1 Panel light control switch turned to

dimmer cancel ON
Dimmer cancel ON/OFF signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
Verify that the voltage of information display terminal F is B+.

If the voltage is as specified, replace the

following parts:
Instrument cluster
Wiring harness (Information
displayinstrument cluster)
2 Panel light control switch turned to
dimmer cancel OFF
Verify that the voltage of the information display terminal F is

1.0 V or less.
following parts:
Instrument cluster
Wiring harness (Information
displayinstrument cluster)
LCD
Check code
LCD
DISPLAY
ACTION
All segments and dots LCD is normal.
illuminated.
Except above
< Previous Next >
Replace the
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INFORMATION DISPLAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the following parts (with audio unit):
3. Remove the following parts (without audio unit):
a. Speaker grille (See SPEAKER GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
b. Shift lever knob (MT) (See TRANSMISSION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [P66M-D].)
d. Ashtray (See CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
f. Center panel (See CENTER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1Screws
2Connector
3Information display
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not drop the instrument cluster or damage the printed board. This will lead to a system
malfunction.
1Instrument cluster unit

2Lens
3Panel
4Clip
5Cover
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE
NOTE:
In this mode, it is possible to verify the items in the following chart.
Check Code Table
Check code
01
Check item
Buckle switch (Driver side)
Related items
Buckle switch (Driver side)
Lights-on reminder warning alarm
04
Door switch
Key reminder warning alarm

Ignition key illumination system
08
TNS relay
Lights-on reminder warning alarm
12
Speedometer (LCD)
Speedometer
13
Tachometer
Tachometer
14
Buzzer
Buzzer
16
Fuel-level warning light
Fuel-level warning light
18
Ignition key illumination system
22
Fuel gauge sender unit
Fuel gauge
23
Fuel gauge
Fuel gauge
25
26
Odometer/tripmeter (LCD)
Odometer/tripmeter (LCD)
Warning and indicator light
Warning and indicator light
31
Key reminder switch
Key reminder warning alarm
55
Dimmer cancel switch
Dimmer cancel switch
58
Buckle switch (Passenger side)
Buckle switch (Passenger side)
NOTE:
Check codes which are not listed may be indicated, but they cannot be inspected.
The check codes are displayed in numerical order. (While performing the inspection, if you want to inspect a check code
with a number smaller than the code number you are currently inspecting, terminate the check mode then repeat the
inspection from the beginning.)
If a speed signal is input to the instrument cluster (the wheels are rotated) while a code other than check code 50 or 51 is
displayed, the input/output check mode will be cancelled.
The check codes can be fast-forwarded by pushing and holding the odometer/tripmeter switch for 1 s or more.
Checking Order
NOTE:
When inspecting more than two check codes, begin with the code with the highest ranking.
Priority order of inspectionIgnition switch position

1
Check code
22
ON
2
01, 04, 08, 12, 13, 14, 16, 18, 23, 25, 26, 55, 58
LOCK
31
Check Code Inspection
Check code 01
Check code 01
STEP
1 Unfasten driver side seat belt. (Buckle

switch on.)
Buckle switch ON/OFF signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
Go to next step.
Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2A.
Is voltage 0 V?
If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
If not as specified, inspect following parts.
Buckle switch
SAS control module
Wiring harness (Buckle switchSAS control
moduleinstrument cluster)
2 Fasten driver side seat belt. (Buckle
switch off.)
Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2A.

Is voltage 5V?
If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
If not as specified, inspect following parts.
Buckle switch
SAS control module
Wiring harness (Buckle switchSAS control
moduleinstrument cluster)
Input signal to instrument cluster is okay.
Check code 04
Check code 04
STEP
1 Open the front driver side door. (The door

switch is on.)
Door switch ON/OFF signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
Close the front driver side door, then go to the next step.
Verify that the voltage of the instrument cluster terminal 2E is 1.0 V
or less.
If the voltage is as specified, replace the instrument
cluster.
following parts:
Door switch
Wiring harness (Instrument cluster
door switch)
2 Close all doors.(Door switches are off.)
Verify that the voltage of the instrument cluster terminal 2E is B+.

cluster.
following parts:
Door switch
Wiring harness (Instrument cluster
door switch)
Input signal to the instrument cluster is normal.
Check code 08
Check code 08
STEP
TNS relay ON/OFF signal
1 Turn the headlight switch to the TNS

position.(TNS relay ON)
DISPLAY
ACTION
Verify that the voltage of instrument cluster terminal 1B is B+.
cluster.
following parts:
TNS relay
Wiring harness (BatteryTNS relay
instrument cluster)
2 Turn the headlight switch off.(TNS relay OFF)
Verify that the voltage of the instrument cluster terminal 1B is 1.0 V

or less.
cluster.
following parts:
TNS relay
Wiring harness (BatteryTNS relay
instrument cluster)
Check code 12
Check code 12
Select check code 12.
Speedometer display signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
All segments in the speedometer illuminate.The speedometer is normal.
Except above
Check code 13
Check code 13
Tachometer operation signal

DISPLAY
After selecting check code 13, wait for

approx. 2 s.
ACTION
The tachometer needle moves full scale then returns to
approx. 3,000 rpm.
The tachometer is
normal.
Except above
Replace the instrument

cluster.
Check code 14
Check code 14
Buzzer operation signal
DISPLAY
After selecting check code 14, wait approx. 2 s.
ACTION
The buzzer sounds.
The buzzer is normal.
The buzzer does not sound. Replace the instrument cluster.
Check code 16
Check code 16
After selecting check code 16, wait approx. 2
s.
Check code 18
Fuel-level warning light flashing signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
Fuel-level warning light flashes three
times.
The fuel-level warning light is

normal.
Except above
Check code 18
After selecting check code 18,
wait approx. 2 s.
Ignition key illumination on/off signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
flashes three times.
The ignition key illumination is normal.
Except above
Verify that the voltage of the instrument cluster terminal 1K is

B+.
instrument cluster.
If the voltage is not as specified, replace the
following parts:
Wiring harness (Battery
ignition key illumination
instrument cluster)
Check code 22
CAUTION:
While inspecting with check code 22, the measured value is displayed in both odometer and tripmeter segments of the
odometer/tripmeter. Verify both readings.
Check code 22
STEP
1 Select check code 22 with the fuel gauge sender unit connector disconnected.
Fuel level signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
Except above Replace the

instrument cluster.
2 Connect terminals 2T and 2R, 2T and 2P of the instrument cluster.

instrument cluster.
3 Using the SST (Fuel and thermometer checker) or resistor, input 80 ohms between instrument
cluster terminals 2T and 2R, and 2T and 2P.

instrument cluster.

instrument cluster.
Inspect the fuel

gauge sender unit.

instrument cluster.
Check code 23
Check code 23
After selecting check code 23, wait
approx. 2 s.
Fuel gauge operation signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
The fuel gauge indicates status in the following order
approx. every 2 s.
The fuel gauge is

normal.
F 1/2 E F (fixed)
Except above

cluster.
Check code 25
Check code 25
After selecting check code 25, wait
approx. 2 s.
Water temperature gauge operation signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
The water temperature gauge indicates status in the
following order approx. every 2 s.
The water temperature

gauge is normal.
H Center C H (fixed)
Except above

cluster.
Check code 26
Check code 26 Odometer/tripmeter display signal

INSPECTION
CONDITION
Select check code
26.
DISPLAY
ACTION
Display is normal.
Warning and indicator light (Controlled by CAN
system-related module) illuminated.
AT warning light
DSC indicator light
DSC OFF light
ABS warning light
Cruise control main indicator light
Cruise control set indicator light
Selector indicator light
MIL
Oil level warning light
The
odometer/tripmeter
is normal.
Warning and
indicator is normal.
Coolant level warning light

EPS warning light
Keyless indicator light (green)
Keyless warning light (red)
Seat belt warning light
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warning light
Except above
Check code 31
Check code 31
STEP
1 Turn the headlight switch to the TNS position.

Remove the key from the steering lock, then reinsert the key into the
steering lock after selecting check code 31. (The key reminder switch is
on.)
Key reminder switch ON/OFF signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
Verify that the voltage of instrument cluster
terminal 2W is B+.
If the voltage is as
specified, replace the
instrument cluster.
If the voltage is not as
specified, inspect the
following parts:
Key
reminder
switch
Wiring
harness
(Battery
key
reminder
switch
instrument
cluster)
2 Remove the key from the steering lock. (The key reminder switch is off.)
Verify that the voltage of the instrument

cluster terminal 2W is 1.0V or less.
If the voltage is as
specified, replace the
instrument cluster.
If the voltage is not as
specified, inspect the
following parts:
Key
reminder
switch
Wiring
harness
(Key
reminder
switch
instrument
cluster)
Input signal to the instrument cluster is
normal.
Check code 55
Check code 55
STEP
1 After selecting the check code 55, turn the panel light control
switch toward bright until a click is heard. (Dimmer switch on)
Dimmer switch ON/OFF signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
Verify that the voltage of the instrument cluster
terminal 2U is 5V.
If the voltage is as specified,
If the voltage is not as specified,
inspect the following parts:
Panel light
control switch
Wiring harness
(Batterypanel
light control
switch
instrument
cluster)
2 Turn the panel light control switch toward dark until a click is heard.
(Dimmer switch off)
Verify that the voltage of the instrument cluster

terminal 2U is 1.0V or less.
If the voltage is as specified,
If the voltage is not as specified,
inspect the following parts:
Panel light
control switch
Wiring harness
(Batterypanel
light control
switch
instrument
cluster)
Check code 58
Check code 58
STEP
1 Unfasten the seat belt after sitting in the front passenger seat for
10 s or more. (Buckle switch on.)
Buckle switch ON/OFF signal

DISPLAY
ACTION
Go to next step.
Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2Q.
Is voltage 0 V?
If as specified, replace instrument
cluster.
If not as specified, inspect
following parts.
Buckle switch
(Passenger side)
Seat weight
sensor
SAS control
module
Wiring harness
(Buckle switch
instrument cluster)
2 Fasten passenger side seat belt. (Buckle switch off.)
Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2Q.

Is voltage B+?
If as specified, replace instrument
cluster.
If not as specified, inspect
following parts.
Buckle switch
(Passenger side)
Seat weight
sensor
SAS control
module
Wiring harness
(Buckle switch
instrument cluster)
Input signal to instrument cluster is okay.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION
Fuel Gauge Sender Unit (Main)

1. Move the float to the topmost and bottommost positions, and verify that the resistance
between terminals A and B of the fuel gauge sender unit (main) and the position of the float are
If they are not as shown in the figure, replace the fuel gauge sender unit
(main).
Fuel Gauge Sender Unit (Sub)

1. Move the float to the topmost and bottommost positions, and verify that the resistance
between terminals A and B of the fuel gauge sender unit (sub) and the position of the float are
If they are not as shown in the figure, replace the fuel gauge sender unit (sub).
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Fuel Gauge Sender Unit (Main)

2. Drain the fuel from the fuel tank. (See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13BMSP].)
4. Remove the fuel pump unit. (See FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [13B-MSP].)
1Fuel gauge sender unit stay

(See Fuel gauge sender unit stay removal note.)
2Fuel gauge sender unit (main)
Fuel gauge sender unit stay removal note
CAUTION:
A deformed fuel gauge sender unit arm could cause the fuel level to be indicated
incorrectly.When holding the fuel gauge sender unit stay, grasp any part other than the
arm portion.
1. Rotate the fuel gauge sender unit stay counter-clockwise to remove it.
Fuel Gauge Sender Unit (Sub)

WARNING:
Fuel is very flammable liquid. If fuel spills or leaks from the pressurized fuel system, it will
cause serious injury or death and facility breakage.Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes.To
BEFORE SERVICE PRECAUTIONS.
CAUTION:
When the fuel gauge indicates 3/4 or more, the fuel level is higher than the installation
surface of the fuel pump and the fuel suction pipe bracket. Due to this condition, fuel may
spill or leak out when performing this procedure. Before performing this procedure, always
drain out fuel so that the fuel tank is half full or less (according to the fuel gauge needle).
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
3. Disconnect the quick release connector from the fuel pump unit. (See QUICK RELEASE
4. Connect the hose to the fuel pump unit and drain the fuel into a container used for collecting
gasoline.
5. Drain the fuel from the fuel tank using the following procedure.
Using M-MDS
Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2
CAUTION:
Shorting the wrong terminal of the check connector may cause malfunctions.
Make sure to short only the specified terminal.
Without using M-MDS
CAUTION:
The fuel pump may malfunction if it is operated without any
fuel in the fuel tank (fuel pump idling). Constantly monitor the
amount of fuel being discharged and immediately stop
operation of the pump when essentially no fuel is being
discharged.
NOTE:
When operating the fuel pump with a full fuel tank, fuel
discharge will become erratic after approx. 10 min but will
continue for approx. 10 min more and then essentially no
fuel will be discharged. At this time the fuel gauge needle will
be at the halfway position.
Using M-MDS
Without using M-MDS
8. Remove the service hole cover.
1Connector
2Cap
3Fuel suction pipe bracket

4Fuel gauge sender unit (sub)
5Retainer
CAUTION:
A deformed fuel gauge sender unit arm could cause the fuel level to be indicated
incorrectly.When holding the fuel gauge sender unit stay, grasp any part other than the
arm portion.
10. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit (sub) from the fuel gauge sender unit stay.

12. Complete the AFTER SERVICE PRECAUTION.
Cap Removal Note
CAUTION:
The cap could be damaged if the SST is used with any play between the cap and the SST.
Securely attach the SST so that there is no gap between the SST tabs and the side of the
cap.
1. Remove the cap using the SST.
Cap Installation Note
1. Align the convex of the set plate with the notch of the retainer as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Remove the residue of gasoline on gasket or cap completely. Any residue of
gasoline can make the set plate turn round and prevent it from fixing.
2. Adjust the start mark of the fuel tank with the center one out of three rib lines of the cap,
then turn it around 360 degrees by hand as shown in the figure.
If the retainer and cap cannot be tighten by hand, remove the cap, verify that
there is no damage or misalignment on the retainer and cap, and then tighten
again.
CAUTION:
The cap could be damaged if the SST is used with any play between the cap
and the SST. Securely attach the SST so that there is no gap between the SST
tabs and the side of the cap.
3. While keeping the alignment mark and the retainer notch aligned, tighten the cap to the
rotation angle and specified torque using the SST.
If the specified torque cannot be obtained even when the cap is rotated to the
specified rotation angle, replace with a new cap and retainer and repeat Step 2.
580620
80180 Nm {8.218 kgfm, 60132 ftlbf}
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

OIL LEVEL SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the oil level switch connector.
2. Verify the continuity between the oil level switch terminals.
1. If the continuity is not as indicated in the tables, replace the oil level switch.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

COOLANT LEVEL SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the coolant level switch.
2. Verify the continuity between the coolant level switch terminals.
1. If the continuity is not as indicated in the tables, replace the coolant reserve
tank.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Although there is an item in the instrument cluster customize function for changing the fuel
gauge response setting, it cannot be used. If the fuel gauge response setting is changed,
a difference occurs between the instrument cluster indication and the actual fuel level
which could lead to an unexpected fuel shortage.
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous Next >

BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Item
Specifications (W) number
Headlight bulb (high-beam)
65 2
Discharge headlight bulb
35 2
Halogen headlight bulb
55 2
Headlight bulb (low-beam)
Front fog light bulb
51 2
Front turn light bulb
21 2
Front turn/parking light bulb

Exterior light bulb capacity Front side turn light bulb
Brake/tail light (LED)
27/8 2
52
2.3/0.2 2
Rear turn light bulb
21 2
Backup light bulb
16 2
Rear side marker light bulb
52
License plate light bulb
51
Highmount brake light bulb
21 1
Map light bulb
52
Interior light bulb
10 1
Courtesy light bulb
52
Trunk compartment light bulb
51
Glove compartment light bulb
1.7 1
Ignition key illumination bulb
1.4 1
Ashtray illumination bulb
1.4 1
Vanity mirror illumination bulb
1.8 2
Interior light bulb capacity
< Previous Next >
Back to Top
< Previous

BODY AND ACCESSORIES SST
49 N088 0A0
49 F042 001
Fuel And Thermometer Checker
Wrench
< Previous
Back to Top

Mazda RX-8 Series II Workshop Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Mazda RX-8 Series II Workshop Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Workshop Manual - General Information

< Previous Next >

2011 - RX-8 - General Information

Electric resistance ohm

rpm (revolutions per minute)

kgfm (kilogram force meter)

kgfcm (kilogram force centimeter)

Conversion to SI Units (Systme International d'Units)

Upper and Lower Limits

< Previous Next >

2010 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.

2011 - RX-8 - General Information

2010 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.

< Previous Next >

2011 - RX-8 - General Information

< Previous Next >

2010 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.

< Previous Next >

2011 - RX-8 - General Information

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Accelerator Pedal Position

Manifold Absolute Pressure

A/F sensor Air Fuel Ratio Sensor

MAF sensor Mass Air Flow Sensor

Multiport Fuel Injection

Onboard Diagnostic System

Battery Positive Voltage

Oxidation Catalytic Converter

CMP sensor Camshaft Position Sensor

Charge Air Cooler

Closed Loop System

Power Steering Pressure

Closed Throttle Position

Powertrain Control Module

Clutch Pedal Position

Pulsed Secondary Air

Secondary Air Injection

Injection with air

CKP sensor Crankshaft Position

Data Link Connector

Diagnostic Test Mode

Diagnostic Test Code(s)

Secondary Air Pulse Valve

Sequential Multiport Fuel

Three Way Catalytic

Exhaust Gas Recirculation

TP sensor Throttle Position Sensor

Torque Converter Clutch

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Heated Oxygen Sensor

Idle Air Control

Intake Air Temperature

VAF sensor Volume Air Flow Sensor

Warm Up Three Way

Wide Open Throttle

#1: Diagnostic trouble codes depend on the diagnostic test mode.

< Previous Next >

2010 Mazda North American Operations, U.S.A.

< Previous Next >

2011 - RX-8 - General Information

use of these materials during service.

New appropriate engine oil or gear oil

Apply brake fluid

New appropriate brake fluid